Full text of "Botanical abstracts"

See other formats

ill

•Ml VIM" MM/'/'!'!1" VM' ' . (

SI III1!

■ 1

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense.

VOLUME V
AUGUST-SEPTEMBER, 1920

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing man}' societies

interested in plants.

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

1920

Williams & WilkinB Company

Baltimore, U. S. A.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

{The Executive Committee for 19Z0 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.

*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experi-
mental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor,
Long Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.

B. M. Davis, University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Michigan.

*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.

B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

W. J. V. Osterhout, Harvard Univer-
sity, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic
Section.

J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical
Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.

A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.

J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.

Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
*Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.

C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.

*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the
Board), Cornell University, Ithaca,
New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.

J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum

of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rudd, Medical College,
Richmond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.

No elections.

At large.

W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

111

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920
AND ASSISTANT EDITORS

Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of
Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editor, Mary R. Burr, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D. C.

Bibliography, Biography, and History.
Lincoln W. Riddle, Harvard Univer-
sity, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager,
Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn,
New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred
Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University
of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.—
Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni-
versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C.
Cowles, The University of Chicago.
Chicago, Illin ois. — Assistant Editor, Geo.
D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael
Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Washington,
D. C— Ass stant Editor, J. V. Hofmann,
U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi-
ment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton
University, Princeton, New Jersey. —
Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl-
vania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, New Hamp-
shire Agricultural College, Durham, New
Hampshire.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications.
Burton E. Livingston, The Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary-
land.

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of
Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con-
necticut Agricultural College, Storrs,
Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N.
Transeau, Ohio State University,
Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes.
Alexander W. Evans, Yale University,
New Haven, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi,
Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes.
H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History.
Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins
University, Baltimore, Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri-
cultural College, East Lansing, Michi-
gan.— Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett,
Michigan Agricultural College, East
Lansing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy.
Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia
College of Pharmacy and Science, Phila-
delphia, Pennsylvania. — Assistant Edi-
tor, E. N. Gathercoal, University of
Illinois, 701 South Wood St., Chica o, 111.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri
Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge,
Brown University, Providence, Rhode
Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau
of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,

D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M.
Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor,

E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Gar-
den, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

H. O. Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A. J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand

Pi Hosmf.r

CONTENTS

The Societies Represented and the Board of Control for 1920 Page iii

Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for Volume V Page iv

Section:

Agronomy Entries 1-71, 1086-1233

Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 72-90, 1234 1259

Botanical Education Entries 97-115, 1260-1264

Cytology Entries 116-127, 1265-1269

Forest Botany and Forestry Entries 128-252, 1270-1418

Genetics Entries 253-505, 1419-1702

Horticulture:

Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 506-515, 1703-1789

Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture Entries 516-535, 1790-1844

Vegetable Culture Entries 536-539, 1845-1861

Horticulture Products Entries 540-542, 1862-1877

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants. . . . Entries 543-590, 1878-1914

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae Entries 591-613

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 614-629, 1915-1924

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes. Entries
630-705, 1925-1977

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 706-724, 1978-2000

Pathology Entries 725-774, 2001-2111

Sugar-Cane Diseases Entries 2112-2122

Pharmacognosy and Pharmaceutical Botany Entires 775-841, 2123-2135

Physiology:

General Entries 842-845, 2136

Protoplasm, Motility Entry 846

Diffusion, Permeability Entries 847-852, 2137-2144

Water Relations Entries 853-856, 2145-2148

Mineral Nutrients Entries 857-S64, 2149-2155

Photosynthesis Entries S65, 2156

Metabolism (General) Entries 866-894, 2157-21S5

Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 895-938, 2186-2192

Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 909-928, 2193-2209

Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 929-932, 2210-2213

Organism as a Whole Entries 933-939, 2214-2219

Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 940-946, 2220-2225

Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 947, 2226-2227

Germination, Renewal of Activity „ Entries 948-953, 2228 -

Radiant Energy Relations Entries 954-956, 2235-223S

Temperature Relations Entries 957-959, 2231-223 1

Toxic Agents Entries 960-967, 2239-2244

Electricity and Mechanical Agents Entry 96S

Physiology of Diseases Entries 969-971

Miscellaneous Entries 972-979, 2245-2256

Soil Science:

General Entries 9S0-994

Influence of Biological Agents Entries 995-99S, 2277 -2287

Fertilization Entries 999-1002. 2267-2276

Methods Entries 1003-1007, 2322-2326

Acidity and Liming Entries 2257-2206

VI CONTENTS

Soil Science — Continued.

Fertilizer Resources Entries 2288-2292

Soil Analysis Entries 2293-2294

Soil Classification Entries 2295-2319

Moisture Relations Entries 2320-2321

Miscellaneous Entries 2327-2335

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants:

General Entries 2336-2360

Pteridophytes Entries 2361-2368

Spermatophytes Entries 1008-1065, 2369-2402

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications Entries 1066-1085, 2403-2426

Index to Authors' Names appearing in Volume V Page 317

Vol. V

AUGUST, 1920

No. 1

ENTRIES 1 1085

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadesl Benee

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many soci< ■'

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

■

(The Executive Committee for 1020 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement

of Science, Section G.
*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.

B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, Michigan.

*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
B. M. Dtjggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhout, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.
J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
*Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton.U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Moobrs, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. O. Montgomery, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCtje, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick {Chairman of the Board),
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rtjdd, Medical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

FETTER LANE, LONDON, E. C

Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

f 86.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba
Price, net postpaid for two volumes: < S6.25 Canada

I S6.50 Other countries

1019 Volumes: I and II
1920 Volumes: III, IV, V and VI

CONTENTS

Entry nos.

Agronomj' 1-71

Bibliography, Biography and History 72-96

Botanical Education 97-115

Cytology 116-127

Forest Botany and Forestry 128-252

Genetics 253-505

Horticulture 506-542

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 543-590

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae 591-613

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 614-629

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi 630-705

Paleobotany 706-724

Pathology 725-774

Pharmacognosy and Pharmaceutical Botany 775-841

Physiology 842-979

Soil Science 9S0-1007

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 1008-1065

Miscellaneous and Unclassified Publications 1066-10S5

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant. Indus-
try, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D.C.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin.— Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmanx, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, NewJerscy.— Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. II. Godrlet, New Hampshire Agri-
cultural College, Durham, New Hampshire.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W. Binnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Transeau
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander
W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut.

Morpholcgy and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick,' Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,

Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis
souri Botanical Garden, St. - Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

II. O Buckman L. Knudson

W. II. Chandler E. G.Montgomery

A.J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

II. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand

It. HOSMER

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO SUBSCRIB-
ERS FOR BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

FOUR VOLUMES FOR 1920

Since the systematic collection of citations and abstracts for Botanic m.
Abstracts (by the Bibliography Committee, the collaborators and the
Abstractors) has now been perfected to such an extent that almost all of
the world literature in this field is now being currently cared for, it is pos-
sible to revise the original preliminary plans for the journal at this time.
The text pages for volumes I and II were published for 1919, but these
two volumes do not include the total of GOO pages called for. Much of the
material really belonging in volumes I and II has appeared, or is about to
appear, in 1920, and it is now clear that a total of six volumes (averaging
300 text pages each) will be required to publish the entries from the beginning
through December, 1920.

The deficit in text pages for volumes I and II has been made up by the
text of volume III. It is now planned to publish the material as rapidly
as it is collected, in monthly installments, and to make no attempt to fur-
nish any stated number of volumes per year, each volume containing at least
300 pages. The number of volumes to appear in any year will be deter-
mined simply by the amount of literature to be cared for.

The issue for July, 1920, constitutes the text for the whole of volume IV and
with it subscribers receive the preliminary and author-index pages for vol-
ume II. The text of volume IV contains more entries and more pages than
do the whole six issues of volume I.

The August and September issues, 1920, which are now in press, icill con-
stitute volume V, and it seems probable that volume 1 ' 1 wiU contain thn e issues,
for October, November and December, 1920.

These new plans will secure for subscribers the prompt receipt of ab-
stracts, which is highly desirable. About ninety per cent of all journals
containing articles on plant life are now being abstracted, and the work
of collecting and editing the abstracts is moving forward in a very satisfac-
tory manner. It is hoped that the number of subscribers to Botanii al
Abstracts will soon be sufficientl}- increased so that the original pric< s may
be continued, in spite of the very high cost of printing ami papt r. It is inter-
esting to note that Botanical Abstracts is now supplied to subscribers at

a cost of less than one cent per page, since more than 300 pages are furnished
per volume. The average number of entries per page is now 6.76.

Statements to cover volumes V and VI will be rendered on the basis of
$6.00 for the United States and dependencies; $6.25 for Canada; and $6.50
for other countries.

AUTHOR INDEXES

The author index for volume II was sent out with the July (1920) issue.
Author indexes for volumes III and IV are in preparation, and they will be
sent to subscribers as rapidly as possible. It is planned to improve the
author index, for volume III and thereafter, by inserting abbreviated and
distinctive titles, so that these indexes together with the tables of contents for
the several volumes, may partially take the place of annual subject indexes.

SUBJECT INDEXES

The important problem of subject-indexing botanical and other scientific
literature is receiving much serious attention in many quarters and it is
hoped that a satisfactory and feasible system for this indexing may be
worked out in the near future. While it has been disappointing not to be
able to publish a subject index for volumes I and II together, as was origi-
nally planned, various difficulties and bibliographic considerations have ren-
dered the decision necessary not to issue any subject index until after six
volumes have appeared. When issued, the subject index will be sold by
subscription. The first subject index will be announced in due time.

PLANS FOR 1921

Beginning with January, 1921, subscribers will be rendered statements
to cover Volumes VII and Mil (averaging 300 text pages each). It is
now hoped that 650 pages will be sufficient to carry the 1921 material.
The subscribers, however, should be prepared for a larger or smaller
number of pages, as this matter of pages to be published will be deter-
mined by the amount of literature to be cared for.

THE PUBLISHERS.

LIRVAK*

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense.

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. V AUGUST, 1920 No.

ENTRIES 1-1085

AGRONOMY

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

1. Anonymous. Electricity in agriculture. Sci. Arner. Supplem. 88:269. 1919.

2. Anonymous. The value of lupins in the cultivation of poor, light land. Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 88: 265. 1919. [Abstract of paper read by A. W. Oldershaw before Agricultural
Section, British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Reprinted, Ibid. 88: 321. 1919.

3. Anonymous. Rispentypen des Hafers. [Types of oat panicles.] Illustrierte Landw.
Zeitg. 39: 87. Fig. 68-72. 1919.— This article is taken from the book entitled "Der Hafer"
by Adolph Zade: Jena, 1918. Five different types of panicles are described and illustrated:
1. Stiff or vertical panicle. 2. Loose or hanging panicle. 3. Bushy panicle. 4. Spreading
or open panicle. 5. Flag-shaped panicle. — John W. Roberts.

4. Anonymous. Kartoffelanbauversuche in der Schweiz. [Potato culture experiments in
Switzerland.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 97-98. 1919.— Two portions of a field were
planted to potatoes. In one portion the cut surface of the tubers was placed downward, in
the other it was placed upward. Each portion of the field was divided into four plats accord-
ing to the portion of the tuber used in planting: 1. "Kopfe." 2. Tubers cut into halves
longitudinally. 3. Entire tubers. 4. Eyes cut out from tubers. For each plat, the weight
of the seed potato, the total crop, and the proportion of weight of seed potato to weight of
yield are given. The position of the cut surface made no difference in the yield. There was
little difference in the yields from plats 1, 2. and 3; a good yield was had from all three. In
proportion to the weight of the material planted, the yield of plat 4 was the highest of all,
but the yield was not sufficient to make proper use of the ground. Experiments to determine
proper plant spacing are also given. — John W. Roberts.

5. Anonymous. Seed importation act defined. Seed World. 612:20. 1919.

6. Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. Germination of barley pollen. Jour.
Agric. Res. 18: 525-536. PL 60-61. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 919.

7. Barber, C. A. The effect of salinity on the growth of sugar cane. International
Sugar Jour. 22: 17-18. 1920.— From experiments carried on at the cane breeding station at
Coimbatore it was found that common salt in the soil seriously affects the sprouting of sugar
canes; the color of the leaves is rarely good; and the growth is stunted. — E. Koch.

1
O

£—\ BOTANICAL ABSTBACT8, VOL. V, NO. 1

2 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

8. Becker, Josef. Versuche zur Unterscheidung landwirtschaftl. Samerelen und
Futtermittel mit Hilfe der Serumreaktion. [Serum reaction an aid in the determination of
agricultural seeds and feeds.] Fiihl. Landw. Zeit. 67 : 114-120. 1918. — An antiserum, produced
by inoculating into animals (rabbits) a certain albumen, possesses the power of causing pre-
cipitation of the substance used for inoculation. By means of such a serum reaction it is
possible to clearly distinguish between various agricultural seeds and feeds and easily detect
adulterations. In preparing the material for inoculation the seeds are ground into a fine
powder, extracted with a 10 per cent sodium chlorid solution, the extract filtered and the
protein precipitated with ammonium sulphate. The precipitate is filtered, washed and dried.
Before being used the dried powder is dissolved in a physiological salt solution — 5 grams of
the powder in 100 cc. of solution. Of course, it must also be borne in mind that the serum
is in man}^ cases specific only when used in the proper dilution. — Ernst Artschwager.

9. Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fischer. Philippine forest products as sources of paper
pulp. Forest. Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 16. 13 p. PI. 1. (1918) 1919.— See Bot. Absts.
6, Entry 161.

10. Bussy, P. Etude agricole des terres de la Cochinchine. [An agricultural study of
the soils of Cochinchina.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 1-11. 1920.

11. Chalmers, D. F. Report on the operations of the Department of Agriculture, Burma,
1919. 15 p. 1919. — The annual report of the Director of Agriculture for Burma, giving the
results of development and testing of improved varieties of crop plants, commonly cultivated
in Burma. Pebyugale, a variety of Phaseolus lunatus, condemned for export purposes on
account of its hydrocyanide content, is found to contain a negligible amount of the poison. —
V/infield Dudgeon.

12. Chevalier, A. Culture et valeur alimentaire des principales legumeneuses tropi-
cales. [Culture and food value of the principal tropical legumes.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon
1: 330-340. 1919. — A general discussion of the commonly cultivated species of the genera
Soja, Arathis, Mucuna, Phaseolus, Vigna, etc. — E. D. Merrill.

13. Chittenden, E. J. The effect of "place" on yield of crops. Jour. Roy. Hortic.
Soc. 44: 72-74. Fig. 20, 21. 1919. — This is a report of a comparison of yields of outside and
inside rows of potatoes planted in plots in which the yields averaged 100 for the former to 72
for the latter. — J. K. Shaw.

14. Christianson, C. General consideration of peat problems. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc.
13: 7-9. 1920. — Peat and peat lands are valuable for both agricultural and industrial pur-
poses. Working out the details of the utilization of peat lands for agricultural and fuel
purposes, constitutes the peat problem. — G. B. Rigg.

15. Clouston, D. The selection of rice on the Raipur Experimental Farm. Agric. and
Co-op. Gaz. [India] IS1.: 5-9. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 543.

16. Collens, A. E., and others. Sugar-cane experiments in the Leeward Islands.
Report on experiments conducted in Antigua and St. Kitts-Nevis in the season 1916-17 and 1917-
18, Part 1. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. — In Antigua the experi-
ments were carried on at nine different stations of varying soil conditions. The varieties
which have given the best results as plant canes over a long period of experimentation are
B. 4596, Sealy Seedling, B. 6308, B. 1528 and B. 3922. B. 3412 tops the list in the experiments
with ratoons over a period of 16 years. In the Colony of St. Kitts-Nevis, B. 6308 heads the
list of plant canes for 1916-17. In 1917-18, Ba. 6032 is first, followed very closely by B. 6308
and B. H. 10(12). As ratoons, A. 2 and B. 1528 head the lists respectively.—/. S. Dash.

No. 1, August, 1920] AGRONOMY 3

17. Connor, S. D. Agricultural value of Indiana peat and necessary fertilizers. Jour.
Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 13-17. 1920. — Indiana contains several hundred thousand acres of peat
and muck soils, mostly neutral, but some acid. If properly drained and fcrt ilized t hese soils
are capable of producing large and profitable crops. Ordinary crops on neutral peat soils
respond to potash fertilization; on acid ones to lime and phosphate. — G. B. Rigg.

18. Dunbar, B. A., and E. R. Bin nic wins. Proso millet investigations— analysis of
the oil— a characteristic alcohol. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 658-666. 1920.

19. Elayda, I. A preliminary report on the acclimatization of alfalfa. Philippine Agric.
8: 70-76. 1 pi. 1919.

20. Ellis, J. H. The stage of maturity of cutting wheat when affected with black stem
rust. Agric. Gaz. Canada 6: 971. 1919. — Experiments conducted at the Manitoba Agricul-
tural College show that, contrary to popular notion, wheat attacked by rust should not be
cut on the green side. Two fields of badly rusted Marquis wheat were divided into seven plots
each. Seven stages of maturity starting with the late milk stage were examined in relation
to weight and quality of grain yield. Premature cutting resulted in a brighter color of the
grain but decreased yield. Cutting when the grain was firm showed the greatest weight per
bushel and greatest yields. Grain cut in the "late" milk stage gave 56 pounds per bushel
and that cut in the "firm" stage 59 pounds per bushel. — O. W. Dynes.

21. Francis, T. C. Tobacco-growing in Cuba. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 304-305. 6
fig. 1919.

22. Garner, W. W., and H. A. Allard. Effect of the relative length of day and night
and other factors of the environment on growth and reproduction in plants. Jour. Agric. Res.
18: 553-605. PI. 64~79, 35 fig. 1920. — The duration of the daily period of illumination was
found to be a factor of the first importance in the growth and development of plants, par-
ticularly with respect to sexual reproduction. At Washington, D. C, during the summer
months a number of species and varieties were subjected to continuous daily periods of solar
illumination of 5, 7 and 12 hours' duration, by placing the different series of test plants in a
dark chamber at 3, 4 and 6 o'clock, p.m., respectively, and returning them to the open at
10, 9 and 6 a.m., respectively, on the following morning. In certain cases the daily exposure
consisted of two periods, daylight at 10 a.m. and 2 p.m. to dark, 4 hours of darkness at mid-
day thus intervening. The control plants were fully exposed throughout the entire day.
Soja max, Nicotiana tabacum, Aster linariifolius, Mikania scandens, Phaseolus vulgaris,
Ambrosia artemisiifolia, Raphanus sativus, Daucus carota, Lactuca saliva, Brassica oleracea,
Hibiscus moscheutos, Viola fimbriaiula, Solidago juncea, were used. In all species tested
the rate of growth was proportional to the duration of the daily exposure to light. The length
of the vegetative period (germination to flowering stage) was shortened, lengthened or not
affected, depending on the species and variety. The time required for ripening of fruit was
markedly reduced. Under the artificially shortened daily illumination the duration of the
vegetative period of early, medium, late, and very late maturing varieties of soy beans was
only 21 to 28 days while the respective periods of the controls were 26, 62, 73, 110 days. All
varieties thus behaved as early maturing ones. Similarly, the vegetative period of Aster
linariifolius was reduced from 122 to 36 days and that of Maryland Mammoth tobacco was
reduced from 155 to 60 days while Connecticut Broadleaf tobacco was not materially affected.
A variety of Phaseolus vulgaris from the tropics attained the flowering stage in 28 days under
the shortened exposures as against 109 days required by the controls, and the corresponding
periods for Ambrosia artemisiifolia were 27 and 85 days. Mikania scandens, Raphanus sati-
vus and Hibiscus moscheutos, on the other hand, were unable to flower under the reduced light
exposures. Two daily exposures with 4 hours' darkness intervening had little effect on time
of flowering. By suitably controlling the duration of the daily illumination soy beans, aster
and ragweed were induced to complete two vegetative and reproductive cycles in one season.
The relation of the seasonal length of day to the natural distribution of plants and to practical

4 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

crop production are discussed. The above results showing the significance of the length of
day in sexual reproduction were confirmed by the use of incandescent electric lights to lengthen
the normal daily illumination period during the winter months. Under suitable exposures
Fagopyrum vulgar e, Spinacea oleracea and other plants assumed the ever-blooming type of
development. Although the plants of buckwheat showed general similarity in behavior under
the normal illumination of the short winter days, the individuals growing under the influence
of the lengthened illumination period manifested striking differences among themselves in
time of flowering and in size attained. Under controlled conditions differences in water sup-
ply and light intensity were without effect on the time of flowering of soy beans. It is tenta-
tively concluded that: Sexual reproduction can be attained by the plant only when it is ex-
posed to a specifically favorable length of day (the requirements in this particular varying
widely with the species and variety), and exposure to a length of day unfavorable to reproduc-
tion but favorable to growth tends to produce gigantism or indefinite continuation of vege-
tative development, while exposure to a length of day favorable alike to sexual reproduction
and to vegetative development extends the period of sexual reproduction and tends to induce
the "ever-bearing" type of fruiting. The term photoperiodism is suggested to designate the
phenomena disclosed. A bibliography is appended. — W. W. Garner.

23. Hawtrey, S. H. C. Notes on a few useful plants and home industries of Paraguay.
South African Jour. Indust. 3: 35-41. 1920.

24. Helyar, J. P. Report of the Department of Seed Analysis. New Jersey Agric.
Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 1918: 93-97. 1919. — Gives a summarization of the tests for field crop
seeds, vegetable seeds and corn. — Mel. T. Cook.

25. Hendry, G. W. Mariout barley with a brief discussion of barley culture in Cali-
fornia. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 312: 57-109. Fig. 19. 1919.— A brief history of
Mariout barley is given, including an account of its introduction into the United States. The
bulletin is devoted mainly to a discussion of the practical aspects of barley culture in Cali-
fornia. The moisture and soil requirements, methods of preparing the soil and seeding, meth-
ods of harvesting the crop and comparative yields in different states are discussed. — W. P.
Kelley.

26. Hepner, Frank E. Wyoming forage plants and their chemical composition. Wyo-
ming Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 28 (1917-18): 117-128. 1918.— This paper consists of two
parts. Part I deals with the relation of the soil to the nitrogen content of high altitude
plants. In earlier work done at this station (Wyoming Agric. Exp. Sta. Bulls. 65, 70, 76, and
87) it was discovered that the native plants were richer in nitrogen than those of the same
species grown in the more humid climates of lower altitudes, and later investigations devel-
oped the fact that there was a tendency for the nitrogen content to increase with the altitude.
In an attempt to find out whether the cause of this increase might not be found in the higher
nitrogen content of the soil at higher altitudes, 54 samples of 33 different species of grasses,
sedges and rushes were collected at different altitudes and at the same time the soils on which
they grew were sampled. These were analyzed and the results are given in tabular form.
These results appear to show that the increase of nitrogen in the plants at higher elevation
is not so marked as the earlier work would indicate, although the statements made in the ear-
lier bulletins were generally true. Regarding the question as to whether the soils of high alti-
tudes are richer in nitrogen than those of lower elevations, the conclusion is that although
nitrogen in the soil is practically the sole source of the nitrogen in the plant, and that the quan-
tity present doubtless exerts a considerable influence on the amount taken up by the plant,
still the abundance of nitrogen found in high altitude grasses is not due entirely, if at all, to
the greater amount of nitrogen, either total or nitrate, in the soils, nor is it due to excessive
quantities of any other soil constituent. Part 2 gives the complete proximate analyses of
some of the forage plants including those dealt with in the previous paper. They are all
Grasses, Sedges, and Rushes, including Agropyron occidenlale Scribn. ; Agropyron pseudo-

No. 1, August, 1920] AGRONOMY

repens Scribn. & Smith; Agropyron tenerum Vasey; Agrostis alba L; Bcckmannia erucaeformie
(L) Host; Boutcloua oligostaehya (Nutt.) Torr. ; Bromus inermis Leyss; Bromus porteri (Coult.)
Nash; Carex arislata R. Br.; C 'ar ex J 'estiva cbenea (Rydb.) A. Nels.; Carcx nebrascen.si.s Dew;
Carex scopulorum Holm; Carex siccata Dew; Carex ulriculala Boott.; Carex variabilis Bailey;
Deschampsia caespilosa (L.) Beauv. ; Elcocharis palustris L. ; Elymus macounii Vasey; Gly-
cerin grandis Wats. ; Hordeum jubatum L; Juncus ballicus L; Juncus longistylis Torr. ; J uncus
nodosus L; Juncus mcrtensianus Bong; Juncus richardsonianus R. & S. ; Phleum alpinum L;
Phleum pratense L; Poa reflexa Vasey it Scribn.; Poa nevadensis Vasey; Puccinellia airoides
(Nutt.) Wats & Coult.; Scirpus americanus Pers.; Sporobolus airoides Torr.; Sporobolus
brevifolius (Nutt.) Scribn.; Trisetum subspicatum Beauv. — James P. Poole.

27. Hillman, F. H., and Helen M. Henry. Identification of seed of Italian alfalfa
and red clover. Seed World 73: 15. 1920. — Studies made in the Federal Seed Laboratory of
the United States Department of Agriculture indicated that it is possible for the expert seed
analyst to identify with reasonable certainty alfalfa and red clover seed grown in Italy,
when the seed is represented by samples of sufficient size. The six kinds of incidental seeds
peculiar to the Italian strains constitute the basis of identification, namely: Heelysarum
coronariwn, Galega sp., probably G. officinalis, Trifolium supinum, Cephalaria transylvanica
of the Dipsacaceae, a species of Phalaris closely allied to Phalaris canariensis, and an un-
determined species of Valerianella very similar to V. dentata. — M. T. Munn.

28. Hiltner, Lorenz. Vermehrte Futtergewinnung aus der heimischen Pflanzenwelt.
1. Teil. Die Gewinnung von Futter auf dem akerland. II. Teil. Wald, Heide und Moor als
Futterquellen. Die Verwertung der Wasser- und Sumpfpflanzen. Futtergewinnung aus Ge-
miise— Obst-, Wein- und Hopfengarten. [Increased forage production from the native flora.
Pt. 1. Obtaining of cattle feed from the farm. Pt. 2. Forest, meadow and moor as sources of
cattle feed. The use of aquatic and swamp plants as cattle feed, etc.] Stuttgart, 1917-1918. —
The first part of Hiltner's book was written in the spring of 1917 and is perhaps best described
to American agronomists by saying that it is comparable in subject-matter and manner of
treatment to a high-grade station or Department bulletin on forage and fodder crops, with
special reference to war conditions. The 84 pages of this publication are devoted to a discus-
sion of forage products grown on the fields, both cultivated plants and weeds. Under each
of the more important crops the author gives the composition in terms of the percentage of
protein, fat, and nitrogen-free extract, discusses methods of culture, fertilizers, and the best
methods of utilizing the feed, whether green, ensiled, or as dried feed. In the second part,
written in the spring of 1918, the author discusses fodder that may be secured from woodland,
moorland, or other waste lands, water and swamp plants, feeds from the waste of gardens,
orchards, vineyards, and hop fields. And finally, in an appendix the author discusses the
methods of treating straw to make it a desirable feed. — In 1913 Germany imported a total
of one million tons (of 1000 kg. each) of food stuffs for farm animals. This had a value of 43.3
marks per head of large live stock (Hauptgrossvieh), while the value of food imported
for human consumption was valued at 26.66 marks per capita. A large part of the
imports too consisted of protein and fat-rich foods. The object of Hiltner, therefore, is to
point out how German farmers may increase their output of forage by producing more per
acre or by utilizing weeds and other plants not commonly used, and waste products. Much
of the advice given the German farmer would be inapplicable to American conditions because
of the considerable amount of hand labor involved. The saving of waste products by labor-
ious processes may be necessary under certain conditions, but would certainly not appeal
to American farmers. — The author frankly points out that while many plants not commonly
used may be fed, these will in most cases serve only as roughage, and have not the protein or
fat content to make them valuable as substitutes for imported concentrates. — The discussion
in part I falls under five heads: 1. Legumes and clovers. 2. Potatoes. 3. Sugar beets,
mangels, swedes, carrots. 4. Miscellaneous forage plants. 5. Weeds. — The cultivation of
legumes is urged but nothing new is brought out. Most emphasis is placed on potatoes and
sugar beets. Before the war 12 per cent of the arable land in Germany was devoted to pota-

6 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

toes and 40 per cent of the crop was fed to animals. Besides the tubers the herbage, cut just
as the tubers ripen can be used as hay or ensilage. Miscellaneous information is given on
various minor forage plants and weeds with a view to the more general utilization of every-
thing edible. — In part II food stuffs to be secured from trees, shrubs, water and swamp plants
and from various water products are discussed. — The use of forest tree foliage and twigs is
especially urged and there is an alphabetical list of species under which are given the essential
items of information for each species. — Wood, chemically treated, was being used in 1918 but
apparently not as yet very largely or successfully. The author refers hopefully however to
many plans underway. In an appendix the treatment of straw with caustic soda is dis-
cussed.— A. J. Pieters.

29. Himber, F. C. Flour and mill feed prices. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Special
Bull. 15: 360-368. 1919. — A questionnaire sent to flour mills in North Dakota secured whole-
sale flour prices at a date when federal supervision of milling was in force and thereafter.
Comparative profits on flour and mill feeds are discussed. — L. R. Waldron.

30. Holmes Smith, E. Flax cultivation. South African Jour. Indust. 2: 1153-1159.
1919.

31. Jabs, Asmus. Einiges iiber unsere Torfmoore. [Notes on our peat bogs.] Natur-
wissenschaften 7: 491-495. 1919. — The agricultural use of peat lands in Germany as well as
the industrial uses of peat are discussed in the light of post-war conditions. — Orion L. Clark.

32. Jones, James W. Beet top silage and other by-products of the sugar beet. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Farmers Bull. 1095. 84 p. Fig. 1-12. 1919.

33. Kaiser, Paul. Der Stachelginster. [Prickly broom. (Ulex europaeus.)] Illus-
trierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 38. 1919.

34. Kidd, Franklin. Laboratory experiments on the sprouting of potatoes in various
gas mixtures. [Nitrogen, oxygen, and carbon dioxide.] New Phytol. 18: 248-252. 1919. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 960.

35. Kling, Max. Die Kriegsfuttermittel. [War live-stock food.] Stuttgart, 1918. —
This is essentially a handy compendium of information regarding the various feeds on the
German market in 1918 or which might be produced by the farmer. In general it covers the
same ground as Hiltner but without the cultural directions and with the data on the compo-
sition of the various substances more conveniently arranged. In many cases only the trade
name and chemical composition of the substance is given. References to sources of chemical
data are given, and as a rule there are one or two, rarely three analyses. — Besides prepared
feeds there are data on all sorts of major and minor forage crops, trees and shrubs, weeds,
swamp plants, vegetable and animal wastes. Preparations from chemically treated wood and
straw are discussed and some directions given. — A. J. Pieters.

36. Kondo, M. Ueber Nachreife und Keimung verschieden reifer Reiskorner (Oryza
sativa). [After-ripening and germination of rice seeds in various stages of maturity.] Ber.
Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1: 361-387. 1918. — Grains in the "milk stage" are capable of
germination, though the percentage germinating is small. However, if they are kept 15
days in dry storage, or 30 days in moist storage, they will germinate well. The "yellow-
ripe" grains germinate sparingly, but if kept for 3 months they will germinate as well as fully
ripe grains. The "fully-ripe" grains germinate at once, but germinate better if kept for a
month after harvesting. The "dead-ripe" grains germinate immediately after harvesting
and need no after ripening. — The after-ripening process is rapidly accomplished, if the rice
seeds are kept in a dry condition, but is delayed under moist conditions. Seeds ripened
under moist conditions germinate better, however, than those ripened under dry conditions.
It is unnecessary to keep the seeds in the panicles. — The germination of freshly harvested,

No. 1, August, 1920] AGRONOMY 7

unripe seeds is hastened after drying in the sun. — The riper the seeds and the further t he after-
ripening has progressed, the more quickly they germinate and the higher the percentage of
germination and the better the seedlings they produce. — Abnormal seedlings often app<
"Milk-ripe" grains often produce radicles but no plumules. Fully ripe grains often produce
plumules but no radicles. — 11. B. Reed.

37. Kondo, M. Ueber die in der Landwirtschaft Japans gebrauchten Samen. [Seeds
used in Japanese agriculture.] Ber. Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1:261-32-1. 17 fig. 1918. —
An account of the morphological characters of certain seeds and their seedlings. Discusses
such features as the external appearance of the seed, color, size, weight, anatomical structure
of the seed coat, embryo, and seedling. — Seeds of the following plants are so described:
Raphanus salivus, Solanum Melongena, Cucurbila moschata var. Toonas Makino, Lagenaria
vxdgaris, Benincasa cerifera, Citrullus vulgaris, Luffa cylindrica, Momordica charantia, Cucu-
mis melo, Cucumis sativus. — Literature cited. — H. S. Reed.

38. Kulkarxi, M. L. Further experiments and improvements in the method of planting
sugar cane and further study of the position of seed in the ground while planting. Agric. Jour.
India 14 : 791-796. PI. 29-32. 1919.— Sugar cane cuttings with one bud, planted wit h the bud
pointing upward, sprouted 82 per cent and averaged 5.1 pounds per cane as compared with
50 per cent sprouting and 4.3 pounds per cane where cuttings with three buds were planted
with the buds pointed sideways. The yield of crude sugar was about 25 per cent greater from
the single bud plantings. Results from placing maize, cotton and jack beans with the seeds
pointing upwards, sideways and downwards are given. In all cases seeds pointed upwards
gave the poorest results. The author attributes poor stands and sickly plants to indiscrim-
inate placing of seeds, or of buds where cuttings are used in planting. — J. J. Skinner.

39. Maceda, F. N. Selection in soy beans. Philippine Agric. 8: 92-98. 1919.

40. Menual, Paul, and C. T. Dowell. Cyanogenesis in sudan grass: A modification
of the Francis-Connell method of determining hydrocyanic acid. — Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 447-
450. 1920. — Sudan grass [Andropogon sorghum Sudanensis] is found to contain about one-
third as much hydrocyanic acid as is found in grain sorghums. The quantity is greatest in
the young plant and decreases rapidly as the plant matures. There is more acid in the plant
in the morning than in the afternoon. — D. Reddick.

41. Mievelle, R. Essais des culture du ble au Tran-ninh. [Experiments in cultivating
wheat in Tran-ninh.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 364-369. 1919.

42. Molegode, W. Transplanting of paddy. Tropic. Agriculturist 52: 199-200. 1919.
— Results of many experiments on the effect of transplanting rice are given which show an
increase of 33^ to 220 per cent in yield. Figures are also given to show that in all recorded
tests the increased yield and the seed saved by transplanting more than equalled the extra
cost incurred by the operation. — R. G. Wiggans.

43. Mooers, C. A. Planting rates and spacing for corn under southern conditions.
Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 1-22. 1920. — In general the small and short seasoned varieties
require thicker planting than the large long-seasoned varieties. Experimental results indi-
cate a close relationship between the best rate of planting for grain production and a definite
yield of grain per plant. To approximate the proper stand of corn a simple equation may be

56Y

used as follows: N = ■ In this equation N stands for the number of stalks per acre, Y

for the expectancy or approximate production in bushels per acre of the field in question under

average seasonal conditions and F is the standard varietal factor or the average weight of

grain per plant in pounds at the best rate of planting as determined experimentally for the

variety in question. In the spacing experiments it was concluded that the best results in

practice will probably be attained with a width of row which permits the satisfactory use of

tillage implements but allows the determined number of stalks to be as widely spaced as

possible. — F. M. Schertz.

8 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts.. Vol. V .

44. Moulton, R. H. Kudzu, the latest forage plant. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 364-365.
5 fig. 1919. — Descriptive of a rapid-growing perennial plant, rich in protein, starch and sugar,
which it is asserted gives promise of becoming one of the leading sources of wealth in certain
sections of the U. S., especially in some of the southern states. — Cltas. II. Otis.

45. Mundy, H. G., and J. A. T. Walters. Rotation experiments. 1913:1919. Rho-
desia Agric. Jour. 16: 513-520. 1919.

46. Nagel, . Kartoffellagerungsversuche. [Potato storage experiments.] Illus-

trierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 6. 1919. — Contrary to the results of Noffe, who found that potatoes
lost the least starch when stored in a cool, dry, but well lighted place, the author's experiments
resulted in the least loss of both starch and sugar in potatoes stored in a cool, dry, but dark
place. Tables showing the percentages of loss under different conditions are given. — John
If". Roberts.

47. Oldershaw, A. W. The value of lupins in the cultivation of poor, light land. Jour.
Ministry Agric. Great Britain 26: 982-991. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The value of the cultivation of
lupins (Blue and yellow, Lwpinus luteus) as a means of improving and reclaiming poor light
land is not sufficiently appreciated. Lupins grow with surprising luxuriance upon poor,
blowing sand, which will grow practically nothing else but rye. The effect of a crop of lupins
upon the succeeding crop is really astonishing. Information is given on the sowing, harvest-
ing and utilization of lupins and on the removal of the possible poisonous properties from
lupins.— M. B. McKay.

48. Parnell, F. R. Experimental error in variety tests with rice. Agric. Jour. India
14: 747-757. 1919. — Experimental errors in field work under Indian conditions are given and
data presented. The probable error of long, narrow field plots (20 X 250 Iks.) is much less than
square plots. — J. J. Skinner.

49. Perez, P. F., Manuel A. Suarez, Manuel F. Grau, and Antonio GarcIa Villa.
Experiencias en el cultivo del tabaco. [Experiments in the cultivation of tobacco. 1 Revist.
Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 484-488. 1919. — This is the report of a commission appointed by the
Secretary of Agriculture to report on the results of experiments with tobacco obtained by
Francisco B. Cruz. The experiments involve the comparison of tobacco grown without shade,
shaded by palm leaves and shaded with cheese cloth. Tobacco produced under shade was
declared most desirable for the American market. The yield produced under cheese cloth
was largest. — F. M. Blodgelt.

50. Pescott, E. E. Excursion to Nobelius's nursery, Emerald. Victorian Nat. 36:
9, 124, 125. Jan. 8, 1920. — Paper read before the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, Australia.
The paper is a popular account of an excursion taken to the tree-nursery of Messrs. C. A. Nobel-
ius and Sons at Emerald. Uncultivated plants which attracted especial attention were noted
including Erica arborea; Ranunculus re-pens the English buttercup, which has become natural-
ized; and Chiloglottis the Green Bird Orchid, a clump of which was found in the top of a tree
fern. The feature of the nursery, however, was the establishment of the flax industry, many
acres of land being devoted to the culture of the New Zealand Flax, Phormium tenax. A
flax mill has been installed. The flax plants are ready to cut at three years old, and subse-
quently every three years for an indefinite period. The leaves are graded by throwing a
bundle of them upright in a sunken cask. The different lengths are withdrawn and assembled
in three grades. They are then scutched, the freed fiber washed, dried and bleached and the
fiber is ready for baling and despatch to the rope mills. A ton of fiber is obtained from seven
tons of leaves, whereas in New Zealand eight to ten tons of leaves are required to produce
one ton of fiber. In New Zealand the flax grows best in swamps, while all of Mr. Nobelius'
was hill grown. The local fiber is of superior quality — and graded "special" at the rope
mills. — F. Detmcrs.

No. 1, August, 1920J AGRONOMY 9

51. Pltmen, F. J. Nitrate of soda as a manure for cotton. Agric. and Co-op. r,;i/.
[India] 157: 10-11. 1919. — Nitrate of soda is strongly recommended as a fertilizer for cotton.
Methods for application and instructions for storage arc given. — Winfield Dudg

52. Poxsdomexech, J. Elementos quimicos necesarios a un terreno para cana. [Fer-
tilizer necessary for sugar cane.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 489 493. 1919.

53. Powers, W. L. The improvement of wild meadow and tule land. Jour. Amer.
Peat Soc. 13: 1S-25. 1920. Oregon has about 500,000 acres of such land. There are two soil
types — peat and silt loam. Its crop production can be greatly increased by regulating the
water supply by drainage and irrigation. — G. B. Rigg.

54. Richey, Frederick D. Formaldehyde treatment of seed corn. Jour. Amer. S
Agron. 12: 39-43. 1920. — Seed corn was treated with solutions of 5, 15 and 25 cc. of formalde-
hyde per liter. The weakest solution did not materially affect the vitality of the seed while
the 15-cc. solution was injurious, as evidenced by the germination and development in sand.
The treatment with 5 cc. per liter was markedly injurious. Fungus development was best
checked by soaking the seed in a solution (5 cc. HCHO in 9.95 cc. of water) and "fuming"
the seed for 2-24 hours. This treatmsnt did not interfere with the normal development
of corn seedlings in water culture. — F. M. Schertz.

55. Rixdl, M. Vegetable fats and oils. I. South African Jour. Indust. 3 : 14-23. 1920.

56. Robsox, W. Cotton experiments. Report on the Agricultural Department, Mont-
serrat, 1917-18: 3-12. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados, 1919. — Full account
is given of the breeding and selection work with this crop done by the Agricultural Depart-
ment.— J. S. Dash.

57. Roemer, Tii. Die technik der Sortenpriifung. [The technique of variety testing.]
Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 35-36. 1919. — As a result of experiments to determine the best
experimental technique in variety tests, the author considers the following as important
factors: (1) weather (2) kind of fruit (3) size of plats (4) shape of plats (5) number of replicate
plats (6) number of plats for comparison (7) situation of the plats with regard to one another
(8) treatment at harvest time. The field for the experiments should be carefully selected.
There should be at least six replicates of each plat. Care should be taken to give each plat
proper cultivation. The author also discusses the things to be considered in determining
the quality of the yield. Among these are size of grain, susceptibility to fungous attack, and
ability of the seeds to germinate. — John W. Roberts.

58. Rosexfeld, A. H. Kavangire: Porto Rico's Mosaic Disease-Resisting Cane. In-
ternal Sugar Jour. 22: 26-33. 1920. — An account of the history and behaviour of Kavangire
in the Argentine is presented. — From investigations carried on for the purpose of combating
the mosaic or mottling disease of sugar cane in Porto Rico, it was found that of 20 imported
varieties there was one Japanese variety (Kavangire) which proved to be immune. This
cane was obtained from the National Agricultural School in Tucuman, which in turn obtained
the variety from the Experiment Station in Campinas, Brazil. When tried out at the Tucu-
man Sugar Experiment Station, it showed on first germination remarkable vigor, dark color,
high agricultural production, fair juice if left for late cropping, and extreme resistance to
fungous disease and attacks of boring insects. — It is a typically thin Japanese bamboo t}-pe
of cane, identical with the Uba variety of Natal and bears no relation to the Cavangerie which
is a large soft red cane with faint black stripes. Experiments were continued with the variety
under the name of Kavangire and a consignment of this variety was sent to the Federal Ex-
periment Station at Mayaguez, Porto Rico. — Being resistant to root disease, borer and stem
rot, and to frost, it requires less replanting than other varieties which reduces cost of pro-
duction. Experiments at Tucuman with Kavangire in comparison with native striped and
purple canes (Cheribon) show that the yield of cane per hectare as second, third, and fourth

10 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

year stubble of Kavangire is in each case much greater than that of the local cane. One
crop of plant and four of stubble gives an average yield of cane and sugar per hectare for
Kavangire of three times that of the local striped cane. — The objections to this type of cane
can be controlled and if the Kavangire turns out to be the only variety in Porto Rico immune
to the mottling disease, it will be adopted as the staple cane of the Island. — E. Koch.

59. Russell, E. J. Report on the proposed electrolytic treatment of seeds (Wolfryn
Process) before sowing. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 26: 971-981. 1920. — Tests made
chiefly with wheat, oats, and barley to determine the value of the electrolytic treatment of
seeds before sowing gave uncertain results, with occasionally an increase, sometimes no
influence, and at other times a reduction in yield. At present the treatment should be looked
upon as an adventure which may or may not prove profitable. — M. B. McKay.

60. Schander, R. Beobachtungen und Versuche iiber Kartoffeln und Kartoffelkrank-
heiten im Sommer 1917. [Observations and investigations of potatoes and potato diseases in
1917.] Fuhl. Landw. Zeit. 67: 204-226. / fig. 1918. — In general, uncut tubers are to be pre-
ferred to cut tubers for seed. The practice of permitting the cut surfaces of seed potatoes to
dry before planting seems to be inferior to direct planting; at least the yields are higher in
the latter case. Spacing the plants 30 to 40 cm. apart in the row with the rows 50 to 60 cm.
wide gives the highest net yields. In light soils the distance may be decreased while in heavy
soils it may safely be increased. Varieties with red skin, notably variety Wohltman, pro-
duced a number of tubers which were of a light color and contained red stripes. No explana-
tion for this phenomenon has been given. The extreme dryness of the summer of 1917 delayed,
and, in the early varieties, prevented the occurrence of late blight. On examination of the
tubers, however, it was found that many were covered with mycelium of Phytophthura infes-
tans. After all, is the fungus carried on the tubers and does it from them enter the stems and
foliage? The stems and foliage seem to be least resistant to the fungus between the time of
flowering and maturity. The best way to combat the fungus is to grow varieties which, at
the time of the appearance of the fungus, are but little affected. — Ernst Artschwager.

61. Shepherd, F. R. Cotton experiments. Report on the Agricultural Department,
St. Kitts-Nevis, 1917-18: 7-14. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. —
Details given relating to selection work with cotton in the Colony ; boiling and flowering curves
are included. — J. S. Dash.

62. Stokes, Fred. The food value of vegetables. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 21-30.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1857.

63. Stormer, . Kelmungshemmungen bei blauen Lupinen. [A case of arrested

germination in blue lupines.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 12. 1919. — The seeds of the 1918
crop of blue lupines gave a germination percentage of only 24. However, a high percentage
of germination (89 to 92 per cent) was obtained after treatment with concentrated sulphuric
acid for 15 minutes, followed by a thorough washing with water and then drying. — John W.
Roberts.

64. Stormer, . Die Anwending von schwefelsauren Ammoniak und Kalkstickstoff

als Kopfdiigung zu Winterroggen. [The use of ammonium sulphate and calcium nitrate as the
principal fertilizers for winter rye.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 73-74, 83-84. 1919.

65. Taylor, H. W. Tobacco culture. Harvesting [and curing. Rhodesia Agric. Jour.
16:521-530. 6 fig. 1919.

66. Trueman, J. M. Fourteenth Annual Report of the Nova Scotia Agricultural College
and Farm. Part 2— Report of J. M. Trueman, Professor of Agriculture and Farm Superin-
tendent. Prov. of Nova Scotia Ann. Rept. Secretary Agric. 1918: 26-50. 1919.

No. 1, August, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 1 1

67. Vendrell, Ernesto. Estudio sobre los abonos verdes en rotacion con las demas
plantas cultivadas en Cuba. [Green manures in the rotation.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab.
2 : 553-556. 1919.

68. Vieillard, P. Notes sur le fonctionnement de quelques services de recherches
agricoles de Java. [Notes on the functions of certain services of agricultural research in Java.]
Bull. Agric. Inst, Sci. Saigon 1: 353-358. 1919.

69. Waldron, L. R., and John C. Thtsell. Report of the Dickinson Sub-station for
the years 1914 to 1918 inclusive. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 131. 8/t p. 19 jig.
1919. — Authors not jointly responsible. Yields are given for wheat, oats, barley, emmer,
flax, maize, potatoes, and certain forage crops for the years indicated and for earlier years for
certain crops. Also tables are presented showing the effect of the previous crop treatment
and cultural treatment upon the succeeding crop, especially upon the wheat crop. Weather
data are presented. — L. R. Waldron.

70. Westover, H. I., and Samuel Garver. A cheap and convenient experimental
silo. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 69-72. 1920. — Experiments conducted at Redfield, S. Dak-
kota, showed that nearly all of the common plants can be preserved as silage which is readily
eaten by cattle. Motor oil barrels were used as experimental silos. — F. M. Scher'z.

71. Wilson, J., and F. J. Chittenden. Some further experiments with potatoes.
Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 83-88. 1919. — I. Effect of spacing on yield. In 1917 nine different
spacings were used. In 1918 more spacings, namely sixteen, were used ranging from 9 to 18
inches between plants in the row. For spacings used in 1918 they reiterate their conclusions
drawn in 1917 as follows: "(1) The greater the space given to the individual plant the greater
the yield of that individual is likely to be. (2) The greater the number of plants on a given
area the greater the yield from that area will be." In spacing the other important factors
besides yield that must be given due consideration are "relative quantity of seed required,"
"convenience in cultivating among and earthing up the plants and the need of circulation
of air as a preventative of disease." — II. Effect of different origin on yield of potatoes. The
author is of the opinion that locality alone is not a guarantee of seed potatoes of high pro-
ducing value. Other factors besides immaturity of seed potatoes at time of planting may be
important. Emphasis is laid upon the importance of uniform condition of temperature and
moisture in the soil during the growing and maturation periods. — H. A. Jones.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Lincoln W. Riddle, Editor

72. Anonymous. Ethel Sargant. (1863-1918.) New Phytol. 18: 120-128. 2 fig. 1919.
— This is an obituary account of Miss Sargant, with a critical appreciation of her botanical
work. A bibliography of her papers is appended. — /. F. Lewis.

73. Anonymous. Introduction of the sugar-cane into the West Indies. Agric. News
[Barbados] 18: 242. 1919. — Information given is based principally on what is known of the
life and voyages of Christopher Columbus, and it appears that sugar-cane was not indigenous
to the West Indies but that it was introduced by Columbus on his second voyage about 1493.
— J . S. Dash.

74. Barber, C. A. Reminiscences of sugar cane work in India. International Sugar
Jour. 21 : 390-395. 1919. — An historical account of the difficulty of cane growing in India due
to faulty methods of cultivation and an attack of Colletolrickum falcatum is presented. Bar-
ber worked out a system for cultivation and discovered resistant varieties which when intro-
duced to the cultivators made cane growing successful. — E. Koch.

12 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY[ Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

75. Bonnier, G. Notice sur Viviand-Morel. Rev. Gen. Bot. 31: 5-9. 1919.— A brief
sketch of M. Viviand-Morel (1843-1915), a French taxonomist whose researches dealt chiefly
with the problem of elementary species. — L. W. Sharp.

76. Chodat, R. Casimir De Candolle, 1836-1918. [Avec tin portrait.] Arch. Sci.
Phys. Nat. Geneve v: 1: 5-28. 1919.— Anne Casimir De Candolle was born in Geneva, Feb.
20, 1836, the son of Alph. De Candolle. He received a thorough training in physics, mathe-
matics and chemistry in Paris under the direction of Berthelot. He then visited London
where he remained for some time with the mycologist Berkeley. England became to him a
second home; there he married the daughter of a fellow countryman and there his four chil-
dren were born. De Candolle's botanical contributions were varied, including collaboration
with his distinguished father on the Prodromus; but his love for the physical sciences led
him mainly into the newer physiological fields of his day, and it was in these fields that he
did his best work. De Candolle's strong human sympathies and great versatility won many
close friends, and his death is widely lamented. One son, M. Augustin, continues the botan-
ical labors of the family De Candolle, a race of outstanding botanists. — J. H. Faull.

77. Farlow, W. G., Roland Thaxter, and L. H. Bailey. George Francis Atkinson.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 6: 301-302. 1919. — A sketch of the life and work of Professor Atkinson. —
E. W. Sinnolt.

78. Fitzpatrick, Harry M. George Francis Atkinson. Science 49: 371-372. 1919. —
An appreciation of Professor Atkinson as a teacher, investigator and friend, together with
a brief resume of his life and work. — A. H. Chivers.

79. Fitzpatrick, Harry M. Publications of George Francis Atkinson. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 6: 303-308. 1919. — A compilation of 178 titles of Professor Atkinson's papers, arranged
in chronological order. — E. W. Sinnott.

80. Friedel, J. Notice sur Charles-Louis Gatin. Rev. Gen. Bot. 31: 65-74. Por-
trait . 1919. — An account of the work of Charles-Louis Gatin (1877-1916), a French botanist
who fell at Douaumont. In Algiers and at the Sorbonne he carried out a number of im-
portant researches on the anatomy and physiology of germination in palms and certain other
monocotyledonous families. A list of his 51 papers is given. — L. W. Sharp.

81. Hamilton, A. G. List of papers and books on, or containing references to, the pol-
lination of Australian plants. Australian Nat. 4: 81-86. 1919.

82. Janvrin, C. E. The scientific writings of Thomas J. Burrill. Trans. Illinois Hoi-
tic. Soc. 51: 195-201. 1918. — A complete bibliography of the scientific publications of this
pioneer botanist is given. The first paper was in 1869 and the last in 1917. Most of the
papers dealt with some phase of plant pathology. — H. W. Anderson.

83. Krok, Th. O. B. En sallsynt botanisk skrift. [A rare botanical publication.]
Bot. Notiser 1919: 165-166. 1919. — In the Royal Library at Stockholm, there is found a little
publication of 31 unnumbered pages in small 8vo, entitled: "Catalogus plantarum Tain in
excultis quam incultis locis prope Aboam superiori aestate masci abservatarum. In gratiam
Philo-Botanicorum concinnatus. Ab Elia Til-Landz. Maij 1673, Aboae-Excusus a Petro
llansonio." This is the only copy now known in existence. It contains the enumeration
of 496 plants, wild and cultivated. A second edition was published in Abo 1683, enumerating
536 plants. Til-Landz was born in 1640. His original name was Tillander, but after having
been saved from a shipwreck, he changed it to Til-Landz, which means "on land." Linnaeus
named Tillandsia of the Family Bromeliaceae after him. — P. A. Rydberg.

84. Mangin,L. Paul Hariot (1854-1917). Notice necrologique. [Obituary notice.] Bull.
Soc. Path. Veg. France 5: 65-70. [With portrait.] 1918. [Issued April 1919.]— The subject
of this notice was the son of a pharmacist and was trained in the. same profession. His

No. 1, August, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 13

first botanical work was in connection with an expedition to Cape Horn. Upon hie return
to Paris, he became associated with Van TlEGHEM in the Natural History Museum. Be
chiefly interested in the algae and fungi. Later he gave special attention to the rusts, and
became one of the founders of the Plant Pathological Society of France. At the time of his
death, he was curator of the Crypt ogam ic Herbarium at the Jardin des Plantes. [See also
next following Entry, 85.] — C. L. Shear.

85. Mangin, L. Paul Hariot (1854-1917). Notice necrologique. [Obituary notice.)
Bull. Trimest. Soc. Mycol. France 35: 4-11. 1919. — See also next preceding Entry, 84.

86. Mitra, Sarat Chandra. On the use of the swallow-worts in the ritual, sorcery,
and leechcraft of the Hindus and the Pre-Islamitic Arabs. Jour. Bihar and Orissa Research
Society [Patna] 4:191-213,351-356. 1918. — Treats of religious beliefs and ritualistic practices
with reference to Calolropis gigantca and C. procera. — B. Lavfer.

87. [Nordstedt, C T. O.] [Swedish rev. of: Gertz, O. Christopher Rostii Her-
barium Vivum i Lund.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 214. 1918. — A notice of a Pre-Linnean herbarium
found in the University Library at Lund, Sweden. It has the title: "Herbarium vivum de
anno 1610," and contains 372 plants. It became the property of the University in 1687. —
P. A. Rydberg.

88. Ostenfeld, C. H. Botanikeren Johan Lange. [John Lange, the botanist.] Bot.
Tidsskr. 36: 175-181. 1918.— Address on the occasion of the commemoration of the birth of
John Lange, author of the handbook of the Danish flora. This took place on March 20, 191S.
— A. L. Bakke.

89. Pamjviel, L. H. Recent literature on fungous diseases of plants. Rept. Iowa State
Hortic. Soc. 53 : 185-225. 1918. — Contains abstracts of recent literature on fungous diseases
of plants under the following heads, diseases of apple, pear or quince; diseases of the potato;
tomato diseases; root crops and vegetable diseases; diseases of forest trees; miscellaneous dis-
eases of fruits ; miscellaneous fungicides ; diseases of cereal and forage crops ; systematic papers,
biographical and historical. Under the last topics are given a review of Whetzel's History of
Phytopathology, and notices of R. H. Pearson, H. S. Coe, Geo. F. Atkinson, V. M.
Spalding, Byron D. Halsted and P. H. Mell. — L. H. Pammcl.

90. Roberts, H. F. The founders of the art of breeding. I. Jour. Heredity 10: 99-106.
4 fig. 1919. — An historical discussion of the investigations and writings of the founders of the
art of breeding. It is shown that sex was recognized in the date palm by the Babylonians
and Assyrians but was forgotten. The Greek writers, Aristotle, Pliny and Theophrastus,
commented upon the supposed nature of sex in plants, but it remained for Camerer, professor
of Natural Philosophy in the University of Tubingen in 1694, to discover by actual experiment
that pollination is indispensable to seed production. The article closes with a bibliography
of the early publications. [See also next following Entry, 91.] — .1/. ./. Dorse y.

91. Roberts, H. F. The founders of the art of breeding. II. Jour. Heredity 10: 147-
152. 1 jig. 1919. — The second article describing the work of the early hybridists. Koelreuter
published a series of articles from 1761 to 1766 in which he records the results of 136 experi-
ments in crossing plants. To Koelreuter belongs the credit of having produced in 1760 the
first plant hybrid — a cross between Nicoliana paniculata and N. rustica. He also experi-
mented with other plants. The author points out, however, that Thomas Fairchild, an Eng-
lishman, crossed two kinds of pinks 41 years previous to the experiments of Koelreuter, and
that Richard Bradley, who wrote of the experiments of Fairchild, had, two years before
this (1717), removed the anthers from twelve tulips in a remote corner of the garden and found
that they produced no seeds, while some four hundred others in another section of the garden
produced seeds freely. Still others experimented with sex in plants before the work of Koel-
reuter. In 1739 James Logan, governor of Pennsylvania, found that when isolated corn plants

14 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

were detasseled, or the ears covered before pollination, no seeds developed. He showed the
direct relation of the tassels to seed production by cutting the tassels off of a portion of the
ear before pollination, in which case he found that that portion from which the tassels were
cut bore no grains. Philip Miller repeated the experiments of Bradley in 1741. In 1750
Gleditsch published a learned account of his experiments in the palm. A pistillate palm
some eighty years old had never fruited but when pollinated with "male" pollen bore fruit,
the seeds of which germinated in 1751. Thus between the time of Camerarius and Koelreu-
ter a number of experimenters were investigating sex in plants, but these experiments ap-
peared to have had but little influence upon the scientific thought of their day. Following
these experiments Sprengel (1750-1816) first showed the extent of insect pollination. In the
early 19th century the work of Andrew Knight and William Herbert in England and
Gartner in Germany is outstanding. The author shows that there were many breaks in
the trend of thought regarding sex in plants up to the time of the publication of Mendel's
papers in 1866. [See also next preceding Entry, 90.] — M. J. Dorsey.

92. Romell, L. Svamplitteratur, sarskilt for studium av hymenomyceter (hattsvampar) .
[Mycological literature, especially for the study of the hymenomycetes (cap fungi).] Svensk.
Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 110-112. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 680.

93. Rosen vinge, L. Kolderup. Jacob Severin Deichmann Branth. Bot. Tidsskr. 36:
213-218. 1918. — A biographical sketch of Branth, the well known student of the lichens
of Denmark. — A. L. Bakke.

94. Shear, C. L., and Neil E. Stevens. The mycological work of Moses Ashley
Curtis. Mycologia 11: 181-201. 1919. — The life and work of Curtis as revealed mainly
through his correspondence is presented in a thorough manner. He was not only a mycolo-
gist but also a student of flowering plants and lichens. He collected lichens at the sugges-
tion of Tuckerman (1845) , and then turned his attention to the fungi (1846) . In 1848 appeared
his first mycological paper, in which he acknowledges indebtedness to Berkeley for assistance
in its preparation. From 1846 to 1872 he corresponded with Berkeley, exchanging notes and
specimens of fungi and thus making possible the important mycological contributions which
appeared under their joint authorship. Curtis's original herbarium now forms part of the
Farlow Herbarium of Harvard University. Among other institutions which are known to
have collections of Curtis's fungi are the Royal Botanical Garden, Kew, England; the U. S.
Department of Agriculture, the New York State Museum, and the University of Nebraska.
— //. R. Rosen.

95. Stevens, N. E. Two southern botanists and the Civil War. Sci. Monthly 9: 157-
166. 1919. — Rev. M. A. Curtis and H. W. Ravenel were distinguished for their contribu-
tions to botany, especially in the field of mycology. The letters of these two botanists to
each other and to others are quoted and commented upon. In those days as well as in the
world war just ending, the botanist placed his knowledge at the disposal of his country. —
L. Pace.

96. Whetzel, H. H. George Francis Atkinson. Bot. 'Gaz. 67: 366-368. Fig. 1919.—
A biographical sketch.

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gager, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

97. A[damson], R. S. The quadrat method. [Rev. of: Weaver, J. E. The quadrat
method in teaching ecology. Plant World 21: 267-283. 7 fig. 1918.] Jour. Ecol. 7: 216.
1919.

98. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O. Botany of the living plant. Macmillan and
Co.: New York, 1919.] New Phytol. 18: 259-261. 1919.

No. 1, August, 1920] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 15

99. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Cork, M. T. Applied economic botany. £61 p., 1',: fig.
J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919.] Amer. Bot. 25: 110-117. Aug., 1919.— "One of the first
books to indicate an approaching change in the subject matter of plant studies." — Reviewer.

100. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany, viii + 248 p. 67 fig. 2
maps. Hodder & Stoughton. "One of the new teaching series of practical text-books."]
Jour. Botany 58: 93-94. 1920.

101. Bancroft, Wilder T. [Rev. of: Buisson, Ferdinand, and Frederick E. Far-
rington. French educational ideals of today. 21 X 14 cm., xii + 326 p. Yonkers-on-Hudson:
World Book Company, 1919. $2.25.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 24: 80. 1920.— "It is a good book
and an interesting one" but the title is misleading for "it does not help the university teacher
with his problems and never was intended to." — H. E. Pulling.

102. Boulger, G. S. [Rev. of: Martin, John N. Botany for agricultural students.
x 4- 585 p.] Jour. Botany 58: 29-30. 1920.

103. Buckman, H. C. The teaching of elementary soils. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:
55-57. 1920. — The paper discusses the placing of soil science on a sound theoretical pedagogi-
cal basis. — F. M. Schertz.

104. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings. Amer. Bot. 25: 122-129.
1919. — The derivation of scientific and vernacular names of the Ranunculaceae discussed. —
W. N. Clute.

105. Davis, Bradley M. Introductory courses in botany. School Sci. Math. 20: 52-
56. Jan., 1920. — Outline No. 7. Structure and function, breeding, economic plants, plant
communities. Activities and structure showing adaptation emphasized. Outline No. 8.
Parts of seed plants, the cell, functions, life histories, plant families, evolution. Emphasis
on philosophical aspects. Outline No. 9. History of botany, soil, root, transpiration, photo-
synthesis, respiration, growth, reproduction. Classification. Emphasis on functions. Out-
line No. 10. Structure and function of tissues 3 weeks, reproduction 3 weeks, survey of plants:
thallophytes 4 weeks, higher plants 3 weeks. [See also next following Entry, 106.] —
A. Gundersen.

10G. Davis, Bradley M. Introductory courses in botany IV. School Sci. Math. 20:
352-360. April, 1920.— Outline No. 11. Water relations of plants, nutrition, growth, seeds.
Dependent plants. Principal groups of independent plants, industries, plant geography.—
No. 12. Seed plant, composite flowers, herbarium of autumn flowers, weeds, pollination, seeds,
trees, fall gardens. Algae, bacteria, etc.— No. 13. Plant as a whole. Seeds, fruits, bacteria,
yeast, algae and main groups. Last forestry, gardening, orcharding.— No. 14. Nasturtium
or Bouncing Bet and composite. Weeds, fruits, bulbs, bacteria, algae, etc., ending with
leaves and flowers.— No. 15. Morphology of common plants, physiology, commercial products.
Trees, soils, wild flowers, weeds. Decorative planting, plant breeding, seeds, ecology, the
cell, algae, fungi, field trips.— No. 16. Algae, bacteria, fungi, gymnosperms, plant physiol-
ogy, water relations, soils, monocotyledons and dicotyledons, roots, fertilization, budding,
fertilizers, weeds, visits to farms. [See also next preceding Entry, 105.]— A. Gundersen.

107. Giles, J. K. Corn club lessons. Georgia State Coll. Agric. Bull. 193. 20 p., 3
fig. 1920.— Contains ten lessons for the Corn Club boys, as follows: No. 1, History of corn
{Zea Mays); No. 2, Fall preparation; No. 3, Preparation of the seed bed; No. 4, Seed corn;
No. 5, Planting; No. 6, Cultivation; No. 7, Selection of seed corn; No. 8, Grow legumes in your
corn; No. 9, Selecting exhibits— score card; No. 10, Diseases and insect pests.— T. II.
McHatton.

16 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

108. Prain, David, and others. Report of the Committee on the Royal Botanic Society.
Royal Bot. Soc. London Quarterly Summary and Meteorological Readings 2: 4-8. Oct., 1919.
— The committee was appointed by Lord Ernie to inquire and report what steps should be
taken to render the work of the Royal Botanical Society of London as useful as possible from
the scientific and educational point of view. The committee recommends the establishment
of 1. A school of economic botany; 2. A research institute with special reference to plant
physiology; 3. A center for teaching horticulture; 4. Courses in school gardening especially
for teachers. The report continues with suggestions for buildings and equipment to cost
about £5,500 and the organization of a staff involving an annual budget of £3,000- £3,500
(= pre-war, say £2 ,000- £2,250). It is also suggested that the new institute should cooperate
with local colleges and botany schools by supplying material for teaching and research. [See
also abst. from London Times, in Science 51 : 58. 1920.] — C. S. Gager.

109. Randall, J. L. Gardening as a part of city education. Xat. Study Rev. 16:95-97.
1920. — There is an imperative demand for a new education. The school directed home garden
is the most economic form of gardening for small cities and the suburbs of larger cities. In
congested parts of large cities school or vacant lot gardens must be substituted. Teachers
may receive information from United States School Garden Army, Bureau of Education,
Washington, D. C. — A. Gundersen.

110. Shaw, Ellen Eddy. Efficiency aids to garden work. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 89-94.
1920. — Suggestions to garden teachers in children's work on ways of preparing children for
their outdoor work, and on methods of planning and planting a garden, where children have
individual plots. The use of the older boys and girls as junior assistant teachers is recom-
mended. Hints for registration of children and keeping of garden crop records. — A. G under-
sell.

111. Smith, Arthur. A lesson on soil formation and its bacteria. Gard. Chron. Amer.
24:109-410. 1920.

112. Smith, R. S. Introductory courses in soils. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 5S-60.
1920. — The paper states in broad terms a tentative outline of the general purpose to be at-
tained by an introductory soils course. — F. M. Schertz.

113. Stevens, F. L. Practical botany. [Rev. of: (1) Cook, M. T. Applied economic
botany. 261 p., 142 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 491);
(2) Martin, J. N. Botany for agricultural students. SS5 p., 488 fig. John Wiley and Sons:
New York, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2165).] Bot. Gaz. 63: 307-308. 1919.— Cook's work
is "written in attractive style, and the material is well-selected, and is a commendable effort
to differentiate secondary-school botany from university botany. The numerous half-tones
are of unusually good quality." In Martin's work "the presentation is botanical rather than
agricultural. The line drawings are not as well done or as accurate as they should be, and the
illustrations in general are in contrast with the excellent presswork and the easy and pleasing
style of presentation." — //. C. Cowles.

114. Trelease, Sam F. Laboratory exercises in agricultural botany. College Cooper-
ative Co., Inc.: College of Agriculture, Los Bafios, P. I. April, 1919. — Contains 109 pages
covering directions for laboratory study for agricultural students as follows: Part I. Physio-
logical Plant Anatomy, including general characteristics of the plant, seed, plant cell, root,
stem, leaf, flower, fruit; Part II. Systematic Botany, including I. Primitive organisms
(Bacteria, Cyanophyceae, Flagellaia, Myxomycetes, Diatomeae), II. Plants (Algae, Fungi,
Dryophyla, Spermatophyta) . The guide has been prepared for use with Copeland's "The
first year of Botany," a multigraphed text in use at the College of Agriculture, Los Banos. —
C. S. Gager.

No. 1, August, 1920] CYTOLOGY 17

115. Waller, A. E. Xenia. School Sci. Math. 19: 150-157. Feb., 1919.— Historical
and popular account of xenia, from both a genetic and cytological standpoint. Several il-
lustrations of xenia given, and simple demonstration experiments with maize characters, of
instructional value, suggested. [Sec also Bot. Ahsts. 5. Entry 496.] — Orland E. White.

CYTOLOGY

Gilbert M. Smith, Editor
George S. Bryan, Assistant Editor

116. Bobilioff, W. De inwendige bouw der schorselementen ven Hevea brasiliensis.
(The structure of cell elements in the bark of Hevea brasiliensis.] Arch. Rubbercult. Neder-
landsch-Indie' 3 : 222-231. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 546.

117. Carter, Nellie. The cytology of the Cladophoraceae. Ann. Botany 33: 467^78.
/ pi., 2 fig. 1919. — The chloroplast in Cladophora, Chaetomorpha and Rhizoclonium consists
of a parietal film lining the cell wall and often more or less reticulated. Pyrenoids are very
numerous and scattered in both the peripheral and internal parts of the chloroplast. The
nuclei are confined almost invariably to the chloroplast, not being found as a general rule in
the colorless cytoplasm. During mitosis the nucleus of Rhizoclonium and Cladophora is char-
acterized by the formation of a long thin spireme, which gives rise to very numerous chromo-
somes. After the migration of the chromosomes to the opposite poles of the spindle the daugh-
ter nuclei are separated by constriction of the spindle in the region of the equator. — G. S.
Bryan.

118. Carter, Nellie. On the cytology of two species of Characiopsis. New Phytol.
18: 177-186. 3 fig. 1919. — Characiopsis saccata n. sp. and Ch. Naegclii (A. Br.) Lemm. are
treated. The cytological features of the vegetative cells were found to differ in important
respects in the two species. Zoogonidangia were not found. The cytology of Char actum
angustum is also described, in which the regular successive cleavage of the protoplast con-
trasts strongly with the progressive cleavage found in Ch. Sieboldii by Smith. — /. F. Lewis.

119. Chambers, Robert. Changes in protoplasmic consistency and their relation to cell
division. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 49-68. 1919. — The author has continued his microdissection
studies with dividing eggs of Arbacia and Asterias. Periodic changes in the consistency of
the egg cytoplasm after fertilization and during cleavage are described. It is shown that
the development of the amphiaster is associated with the formation of two semisolid masses
within the more fluid egg substance. After the cleavage furrow has completed the separa-
tion of the two blastomeres, the semisolid masses revert to a more fluid state. By various
treatments the formation of a cleavage furrow may be prevented following which the egg
reverts to a single, spherical, semifluid mass with two nuclei. An egg mutilated in its semi-
solid state may revert to a more fluid state in which case the furrow becomes obliterated, the
nuclei tend to more to positions which may assure symmetry in aster formation and a new
cleavage furrow is developed, or the cleavage furrow may persist until cleavage is completed,
cutting off non-nucleated segments. — O. F. Curtis.

120. Coulter, M. C. A new conception of sex. [Rev. of: Jones, W. N. On the nature
of fertilization and sex. New Phytol. 17: 167-188. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 637.)]
Bot. Gaz. 68:68-69. 1919.

121. Gatenbt, J. Bronte. Identification of intracellular structures. Jour. Roy. Mi-
crosc. Soc. London 2 : 93-119. 14 fig. 1919. — The author tries to show certain results in prac-
tical histo-chemistry from the cytologist's point of view. Every animal cell is composed of
the following fairly sharply marked bodies; nucleus, cytoplasm and centrosome. The cyto-
plasm is composed of (1) protoplasmic or living inclusions such as mitrochondria, Golgi appar-
atus and possibly other less numerous enigmatic protoplasmic granules; (2) deutoplasmic

BOTANICAL, ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. t

18 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

inclusions (dead) containing yolk, fat or oil, glycogen or starch, and pigment when not united
with mitochondria; (3) ground protoplasm or cytoplasm (living). This classification is par-
ticularly true of embryonic or indifferent cells and other cells containing many secondary
formations derived from various sources in the differentiation of the cell. He also gives the
nomenclature of cell division, saying that every cell undergoes the process of karyokinesis
which involves the division of the chromatin; dictyokinesis which involves the division of
the Golgi apparatus; chondrokinesis, the division of the mitochondria. All three processes
are preceded by the division of the centrosome, which is possibly stimulated to divide by the
nucleus and is therefore called "centrokinesis." He describes at length the various inclusions
of the cells emphasizing their morphological distinctions, their chemical constitution, and
also tabulates the chemical and staining tests for these cytoplasmic and deutoplasmic inclu-
sions. Formal metallic methods for detecting cell inclusions have a future before them.
The chromeosmium tetroxide fixatives at present give the best results, but great improvement
in the manufacture of microscopic lenses is necessary. — Julia Moesel Haber.

122. Levine, Michael. Life history and sexuality of Basidiornycetes. [Rev. of: Ben-
satjde, Mathilde. Recherches sur le cycle evolutif et la sexualite chez les Basidiornycetes.
156 p., 13 pi., 30 fig. Nemours, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 347.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 67-68.
1919.

123. Mirande, Marcel. Sur la formation cytologique de i'amidon et de l'huile dans
l'oogone des Chara. [Formation of starch and oil in the egg of Chara.] Compt. rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 168: 528-529. 1919. — The cytoplasm of the young egg of Chara is crowded with
mitochondria. Numerous clear vesicles appear, which enlarge greatly, forcing the mito-
chondria into dark staining lines around the clear areas. Starch grains appear in the vesicles
and the result in the mature egg is a ''mitochondrial pseudo-parenchyma" in which the starch
grains are embedded. The mitochondria are the primordia of amyloplasts. — Oil appears
in the young egg as minute droplets, which increase in size as the egg matures. In the older
stages the drops occur in the meshes of the "mitochondrial pseudo-parenchyma." They are
not the products of special mitochondria, and may be secreted by the amylogenes themselves.
— F. B. Wann.

124. Molisch, Hans. Das Plasmamosaik in den Raphidenzellen der Orchideen Hae-
maria und Anoectochilus. [Plasma mosaic in raphid cells of the orchids Haemaria and Anoecto-
chilus.] Sitzungsber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien (Math.-Nat. Kl.) 126: 231-242. PI. 1. 1917.

125. Putterill, Victor Armsby. Notes on the morphology and life history of Uromyces
Aloes Cke. South African Jour. Sci. 15:656-662. PL 22-23, fig. 1-6. 1919— See Bot, Absts.
4, Entry 1153.

126. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. Miscellaneous
topics. New Phytol. 18: 129-176. Fig. 64-78. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 720.

127. Stalfelt, M. G. Uber die Schwankungen in der Zellteilungsfrequens bei den Wur-
zeln von Pisum sativum. [Variations in the frequency of cell division in the roots of Pisum
sativum.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholml 13 ■ 61-70. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 945.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor

128. Agan, Joseph E. Brazilian fibers. Bull. Pan-American Union 50: 394-404. 4 pi-
1920. — Seven fibers of importance are discussed briefly. These are "Piassava," from the
bark of the palms Attalca funifera Mart, and Leopoldina piassaba Wall. This fiber is now
used in the United States for the manufacture of snow sweepers for street cars. "Piteira

No. 1, August, 1920] FORESTRY 19

is obtained from the leaves of Fourcroya gigantea Vent. "Aramine" '>r "Guaxima Etoxa,"
from the trunk of Urcna lobata L., is use! in making bags. II < L. furnishes

another fiber of value for manufacturing bags. Sid a rhombifolia L. and S. cordifolia L. fur-
nish good fiber, but the wild plants are small with crooked branches. '<' a" (Ana
aagenaria Schult.) and "Gravata de Gaucho" (Bromelia karat as L.) are also common. The
possibilities of growing and of using these fiber plants arc discussed.— 0. II. B\ \by.

129. Andrf.ws, Eliza F. Oddities in tree stems. Amer. Forest. 25: 1476-1478. 7 fig.
1919.

130. Anonymous. ''Black bean" or "Moreton Bay chestnut." Australian Forest. Jour.
2: 14, 19. 1919. — A brief account of the silvical characteristics of Castanospermum australe
A. Cunn. — C. F. Korstian.

131. Anonymous. Blackboy and its commercial uses. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 178.
1919. — A brief note on Xanthorrhoe preissii of Western Australia. This species yields a res-
inous powder which, when heated, forms lumps known locally as "blackboy gum," from which
glucose, treacle, scents, alcohol, picric acid and certain tar products, and from these latter
again two dyes have been obtained. — C. F. Korstian.

132. Anonymous. A complete wood preserving plant mounted on cars. Sci. Amer. Sup-
plem. 88: 332-333. 4 fig. 1919. [From the Railway Age.]

133. Anonymous. Gathering chicle gum for American gum chewers. Sci. Amer. Sup-
plem. 88: 172. 3 fig. 1919. — Describes the process of obtaining chicle gum from the nase-
berry (Achras sapola), a tree of Central and tropical South America. — Chas. H. Otis.

134. Anonymous. Grass tree fibre. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 175. 1919. — A brief
note on the kingia grass tree which at present is used mainly in manufacturing coarse brooms
and brushes, but which is believed to possess qualities making it suitable for insulating mater-
ial for freezing works. — C. F. Korstian.

135. Anonymous. Hints on storing timber to prevent decay. Sci. Amer. 120: 359-360.
1919.

136. Anonymous. Kiln drying oak for vehicles. Sci. Amer. 120: 343. 1919.

137. Anonymous. Laboratory tests in built-up wood. Sci. Amer. 121: 606. 1919.

138. Anonymous. "Napoleon willow" dying. Amer. Forest. 24: 1414. 1 fig. 1919.

139. Anonymous. New uses for balsa wood. Sci. Amer. 121: 559. 1919.

140. Anonymous. Preparing cork for shipment. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 200-201. S
fig. 1919.

141. Anonymous. Steaming of vehicle stock during kiln drying. Sci. Amer. 120: 360.
1919.

142. Anonymous. Valuable wandoo. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 213. 1919.— A brief
note on characteristics of Eucalyptus redunca. — C. F. Korstian.

143. Anonymous. Western Australian tuart. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 174— 175. 1919.
— A note on the characteristics of Eucalyptus gomphocophala. C. F. Korstian.

144. Anonymous. What are naval stores? Sci. Amer. 121: 328. 1919.

20 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V ,

145. Anonymous. Holztrocknung durch kalte Luft. [The drying of wood by means of
cold air.] Naturwissenschaften 7: 353. 1919. — A review of an article appearing in the Quar-
terly Journal of Forestry. — Orion L. Clark.

146. Anonymous. Un bon exemple a suivre. [A good example to follow.] Bull. Trimest.
Soc. Forest. Franche-Comt6 et Belfort 13 : 55-56. 1919. — The city council of Epinal on May 3,
1919, adopted a resolution urging that the fines for forest trespass provided by Article 192
of the Code forestier be increased and that the penalty of imprisonment be restored, at least
to the extent of making it optional in the case of habitual offenders. The example set by Epi-
nal should be widely followed and every effort made to secure legislation which will more ade-
quately protect the forests, particularly in the vicinity of cities. — S. T. Dana.

147. Anonymous. Ce que valent les chenes sur pied. [Oak stumpage values.] Bull.
Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comt6 et Belfort 13: 53-55. 1919. — Stumpage prices of oak
timber in eastern France have approximately doubled since 1916, while the prices of many
other commodities are three or even four times what they were before the war. Taking into
account the decreased purchasing power of money, oak stumpage, in spite of the apparent
increase in price, is worth relatively less than it was a few years ago. Owners of timber of
good quality would therefore do well to hold it for the further increase in price which is sure
to take place. — S.T. Dana.

148. Anonymous. La foret de Haguenau (etude d'un forestier francaise. [A study of
the forest of Haguenau.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte" et Belfort 13: 117-146.
1919. — The historic forest of Haguenau, owned jointly by the State and the city of Haguenau,
comprises an almost unbroken expanse of 13,699 hectares in northern Alsace between the
Rhine and the Vosges. It is situated on a practically level plain with a heavy, impermeable
clay subsoil, generally overlain with a mixture of sand and clay in varying proportions. The
area as a whole is cold, poorly drained, and in spots marshy. The continuity of the forest,
which has decreased comparatively little in size since the middle ages, is doubtless due to the
fact that the soil is in general unsuitable for cultivation. Injuries from frost, snow-break,
and windfall are not uncommon and are at times severe. There is also more or less damage
from animals (chiefly deer), insects (chiefly May beetles), various fungi, and, rarely, fire.
Scotch pine forms 50 per cent of the stand, oak 30 per cent, hornbeam 8 per cent, and beech
6 per cent. Scotch pine grows rapidly up to 70 or 80 years of age, and ordinarily reaches ma-
turity at about 120 years, with a height of from 28 to 30 metres and a diameter of 60 centi-
meters. It accommodates itself to all except the most marshy sites; is ordinarily rather poorly
formed, but produces wood of excellent quality; and forms rather open stands which at matur-
ity seldom have more than 200 trees per hectare. Seed years occur annually after 50 years
of age with particuarly heavy crops every 3 or 4 years. Oak, which formerly occupied a much
more important place in the forest, thrives best in the alluvial soils along stream bottoms
and produces a fine-grained wood which is much sought after, particularly for ship-building.
Although it often attains a much greater age, it ordinarily matures at from 150 to 180 years
with a height of from 25 to 30 meters and a diameter of 70 centimeters to 1 meter. Seed crops,
which are much less frequent than formerly, occur at intervals of approximately 7 years, with
full crops not oftener than once in 50 years. Hornbeam is of little value except as a filler
and is often more or less of a weed tree. Beech was formerly much more abundant than at
present, but has been increasing in importance again since 1870 because of its frequent use
by the Germans for underplanting with pine and oak. Herbaceous vegetation is generally
abundant, some times to the extent of interfering with reproduction, and local residents de-
rive a considerable revenue from the abundant crops of whortleberry. The forest is more
or less burdened with rights of use, most of which date back to time immemorial, and consid-
erable damage has been done to the soil by the constant removal of the hardwood leaf litter.
Transportation facilities and markets are good. — Prior to the seventeenth century, the forest
of Haguenau appears to have been regarded as chiefly valuable for pasturage. The first real
attempts at forest regulation were made in 1695, and it was not until 1845 that a complete

No. 1, August, 1920] FORESTRY 21

and systematic plan of forest management was put into effect. This plan was followed until
after the Franco-Prussian war, when, in 1874, it was revised by the German foresters. The
latter completely reorganized the division of the forest into blocks, compartments, and sub-
compartments; determined on the management of the entire area as high forest (nearly 7
per cent had been handled by the French as coppice under standards); fixed the rotation for
Scotch pine at 70 to 120 years, and for oak at 1G0 years; and arranged the cutting series so
as to progress against the direction of the prevailing winds. Natural reproduction by the
shelterwood system, which was almost uniformly used by the French, was at first employed
by the Germans as well, but was gradually abandoned in favor of artificial reproduction. Dur-
ing the last years of German management Scotch pine was reproduced almost entirely by di-
rect seeding in strips, supplemented when necessary by planting; while oak was reproduced
chiefly by the planting of 3-year-old transplants, and occasionally by direct seeding in strips.
Thinnings were practised every 7 to 10 years, frequent and moderate thinnings being preferred
to less frequent and heavier ones. In the judgment of the French foresters the Germans
tended to favor too dense a stocking, both at the establishment of the stands and later.
Underplanting of beech, chiefly to improve soil conditions, was common, wild seedlings gen-
erally being used for the purpose. A few of the best trees (from 15 to 25 per hectare) were
nearly always reserved at the final cutting for the production of large-sized material. The
practice of selling stumpage, which had been followed by the French, was superseded under
German management by logging by the forest administration. The net revenue from the
forest increased from 44 francs per hectare in the period from 1889 to 1900 to 57 francs in
1912-1914 and to 120 francs in 1915-1918. The recent war led to the turpentining by the Ger-
mans of the Scotch pine. The total cut remained about the same but the proportion of pine
increased while that of oak decreased. Thinnings were neglected, stock accumulated in the
nurseries, and the regeneration of cut-over areas did not keep pace with the cuttings. Od
the whole, however, the war did not seriously interfere with the management of the fores*
which is still in good condition. — S. T. Dana.

149. Anonymous. Historique d'une coupe. [History of a cutting area.] Bull. Trimest.
Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 51-53. 1919. — In 1844 steps were taken to convert a
cutting area of 7.23 hectares, chiefly oak with a little beech, in the communal forest of Corra-
villers on the borders of the Vosges, into coppice under standards. Since 1S44 there have
been three cuttings of standards at regular intervals of 25 years. The records show that the
yields in fuel and bark secured from these successive cuttings have remained approximately
constant. The transformation of the stand from pure coppice into coppice under standards
has therefore been accomplished without loss in current yield, and the timber contained in
the boles of the standards represents clear gain. As a result of the transformation the money
value of the yield has increased from 460 to 680 francs per hectare. Still better results would
have been obtained in a more moderate climate and a more fertile soil than that of the Vosges.
— S. T. Dana.

150. Anonymous. Notre domaine forestier et la guerre. (Extrait du Bulletin d'infor-
mations du G. Q. G.) [Our forest domain and the war.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-
Comte" et Belfort 13: 43-46. 1919.— The forest area of 600,000 hectares included in that part
of France lying in the war zone suffered severely both as a result of battle and of its extensive
exploitation by the French themselves and more particuarly by the Germans. The latter
not only used wood lavishly in the zone of operations but shipped considerable quantities
back to Germany in order to save their own resources and to cripple France, which in 1913
imported 177,000,000 francs' worth of wood, for the post-war competition. Direct damages
to the forests in the war zone are estimated roughly to amount to 1,400,000,000 francs, and
indirect damages to 260,000,000 francs; while the forests in other parts of France also suffered
serious damage because of the tremendous consumption necessitated by the war and by lack of
tonnage. While the forests are recovering, France should meet its needs for wood, which
are still great, by utilizing part of the enormous reserves offered by its colonies. The
German possessions in the Kamerun, one of the most richly forested countries in Africa, will
offer partial compensation for the devastation of the French forests caused by the war. —
S. T. Dana.

22 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

151. Anonymous. Wattle and wattle growing. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 45-46. 1920.
— A note on the growing of various species of acacia and the products of the destructive dis-
tillation of black wattle wood. — C. F. Korstian.

152. Arias, Bernardo. Un sustituto del corcho. [A substitute for cork.] Revist.
Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 493-497. 3 fig. 1919. — In this article attention is called to the tree
Ochroma lagopus Sw. as a native tree valuable for planting because of the lightness of its
wood, its rapid growth, medicinal properties and the wool or fiber in its fruits. — F. M. Blodgett.

153. Badotjx, H. Die Waldreservationen in der Schweiz. [Forest reserves in Switzer-
land.] Schweiz. Zeitsch. Forstwesen 71: 2-4. 1920. — The policy for acquiring national for-
ests was approved in 1906, and in 1910 three forest reserves were approved involving a total
area of about 50 hectares. These areas were in effect leased by the government for periods
of 25 and 60 years. The policy of the continuation of the forests was left to be determined
when the period of lease expires. Some areas were paid up for the entire term, and others are
paid by annual installments. — J. V. Hofmann.

154. Bailey, W. A. Artificial regeneration in sal forests. Indian Forester 45: 519-521.
1919. — Coppice overtops planted stock after cuttings in sal forests. To prevent this planting
is now made about five years in advance of the opening of the stand giving the planted stock
an opportunity to develop and become dominant at the start. — E. N. Munns.

155. Barbey, A. Les forests Suisse pendant la guerre. [The Sv/iss forests during the
war.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 46-51. 1919. — Administra-
tion of the 982,000 hectares of forest lands in Switzerland, one-fourth of the total area of the
country, is decentralized. Cantonal forests comprise 4 per cent of the forest area, communal
forests 67 per cent, and private forests 29 per cent. There are no national forests, and the
national forest service employs only 17 professional foresters. It contributes, however, to
the salaries of the cantonal forest officers; supervises the use made of subsidies granted to the
cantons; administers the federal forest law; provides technical instruction at the forest school
at Zurich; and directs the forest experiment station. — At the outbreak of the war construction
was automatically arrested and cutting materially decreased. After ten or twelve months,
however, the foreign demand for timber and the native demand for wood fuel (due to the
scarcity of coal), resulted in a steadily increasing cut. In 1916 wood exports, which before the
war had been from 40,000,000 to 50,000,000 francs a year less than wood imports, exceeded the
latter by 68,000,000 francs. The increased cut was accompanied by increased prices, fuel
doubling and timber trebling in value in three years or less. Little or no overcutting took
place in the public forests, but was more or less marked in the private forests, where advant-
age was taken of the extraordinary demand to improve the stands by the removal of many
old reserves which before the war could not be marketed profitably. Strict supervision was
exercised over all cuttings, a federal decree in 1917 requiring a permit for all cuttings of 20
cubic meters or more and fixing a fine of from 10 to 40 francs per cubic meter for all cuttings
made without a permit. Moreover, measures were taken to maintain and if possible to in-
crease the future productivity of the forest. For instance, in the Canton of Vaud, the number
of inspectors was increased so that the average area under the supervision of each was reduced
from 7,300 to 4,000 hectares. This example should be followed by other cantons as a means
of increasing production and of rendering Switzerland independent of foreign supplies. An
increase of only 1.1 cubic meters per hectare in the annual growth of the 600,000 hectares of
communal forests would be sufficient to wipe out the present deficit of 700,000 cubic meters,
but this can hardly be expected as long as the average area under the supervision of a technical
forester remains as high as 8,570 hectares. — S. T. Dana.

156. Beeson, C. F. C. Food plants of Indian forest insects. Part IV. Indian Forester
45: 488-495. 1919. — A continuation of previous work. Forty-four species of three families
are listed with the plants attacked by each. — E. N. Munns.

No. 1. August, 1920] FORESTRY 23

157. Berry, James B. Wood famine imminent. Georgia State Coll. Agric. Bull. 187.
4 P-, 4 fig- 1920. — This bulletin notes thai the ucme of wood production was reached in Geor-
gia in 1909, with the cutting of a billion board feet. Since then 1 here has been a gradual full-
ing off in production. — T. II. McHatton.

158. Biolley, H. Betrachtungen iiber die Wirtschafts-Einrichtung der Waldungen in
der Schweiz. (Bemerkungen zu den Studien des Herrn. Dr. Ph. Flury.) [Observations con-
cerning improvement of forest management in Switzerland. Remarks on Dr. Ph. Flury's
studies translated from' the Journal of Forestry of Perret, Couvet.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forst-
wesen 71: 37—19. 1920. — Forestry is divided into two groups, one based on practical experi-
ence and the other on biologienl principles. Emphasis is placed on the fundamental biologi-
cal studies to be used as a basis for all forest practice. The practical concerns itself too much
witli the present production, and one pan of a forest may be left unproductive due to over
maturity while another is exploited during its growing period. Among the first essentials
for improvement are definite forest boundaries, compartments; definite volume and growth
tables and cutting cycles based on accurate local growth figures. The relation of density of
stand and increment must be correlated with cutting periods in order to secure continuous
production. The principal points recommended for the improvement of the forest are:
every acre must reach its maximum production; production as influenced by stand, site, spe-
cies, etc., must be determined locally; species to be used and care required; improvement for
regulation only should be reduced to a minimum. All changes in forest management should
be based on thorough scientific research. — J. V. Hofmann.

159. Bontrager, W. E. What shade and ornamental trees shall we plant? Monthly
Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 35-41. 5 pi. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1798.

160. Bouvet, Schaeffer, and others. Congres de 1919. [Congress of 1919.] Bull.
Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 72-109. 1919.— The first meeting of the
Society since the outbreak of the war was held at Strassburg, August 3 to 6, 1919. In connec-
tion with the rejoicing over the recovery of the "lost provinces," attention was called to the
flattering comments regarding French methods of forest management in Alsace-Lorraine which
were made by German foresters after the war of 1870. Field trips were made to the forests
of Haguenau, Hoh-Koenigsburg, Sainte-Odile, Hohwold, Haslach and Nideck, brief descrip-
tions of the character and management of which are given. — S. T. Dana.

161. Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fjscher. Philippine forest products as sources of paper
pulp. Forest. Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 16: IS p. PI. 1. 1918. (1919). — A general considera-
tion of the bamboos, coarse grasses such as Imperata exaltala and Saccharum spontaneum,
various fiber plants, and some trees as potential sources of paper pulp. — E. D. Merrill.

162. Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fischer. Philippine mangrove swamps. Forest. Bur.
Philippine Islands Bull. 17: 1-132. tf pi. 1918. — A general consideration of the mangrove
swamps, their constituent species, and economic products. Keys and descriptions are given
to all species, as well as local names, etc. The illustrations, chiefly photographic, are
excellent. In addition to general mangrove scenes each individual species is illustrated. The
economic discussion includes data on stand, cultivation, firewood, tanbark and dyes, with a
discussion of the nipa palm and its uses. — E. D. Merrill.

163. Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fischer. Philippine bamboos. Forest. Bur. Philippine
Islands Bull. 15. 32 p. PL 1-33. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1015.

164. Brunnhofer, A. Berufsfragen. [Questions of professional forestry.] Schweiz.
Zeitschr. Forstwesen 71 : 4-6. 1920. — A discussion of the relation of technical and commer-
cial forestry. A separation of the two phases is condemned on the basis that the technical
forester must be familiar with the commercial phases in order to practice his profession in-
telligently, and the commercial man must take technical forestry into consideration in utili-

24 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

zation and harvesting, otherwise the scientific phase, which aims at continuous production,
will be defeated. For these reasons a forester in either field must have a good knowledge of
the other field, and the best interests of forestry will be served by keeping the two phases
combined and making up the deficiency of men by reducing the areas under each forester
and furnishing him with an assistant. — J. V. Hofmann.

165. Burkill, I. H. The composition of a piece of well-drained Singapore secondary
jungle thirty years old. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2: 145-157. 1919. — See Bot.
Absts. 4, Entry 2S0.

166. Burrow, Gordon. Reproduction of cypress pine. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 91-
92. 1919. — A note on the factors governing the reproduction of this species. The author
is convinced that a good seeding season and a good growing season are co-essentials. A good
seed crop is dependent upon sufficient precipitation to set and nourish the young cones and
bring them to maturity. Drought, rabbits, and fire are serious enemies of young reproduc-
tion.— C. F. Korstian.

167. Champion, H. G. Observations on some effects of fires in the chir (Pinus longifolia)
forests of the West Almora Division. Indian Forester 45: 353-364. 1 pi. 1919. — Examina-
tions of burned areas after a fire show damage cannot be estimated until several months
later. Insects for some unknown reason did not appear in large numbers after fire in mature
stands though death continues afterward, which may be due to a destructive fungus. Damage
by fire may be as much due to heat-killing as flame itself. In young trees damage bears an
inverse ratio to height, the smaller the tree the greater the loss. On reproduction, fire ap-
pears to have a beneficial effect, probably due to reduced competition, food or soil water.
Fire in mixed stands operates to thin out the chir and increase oaks and other trees. — E. N.
Munns.

168. Chapman, H. H. A program for private forestry. Amer. Forest. 25: 1405-1406.
1919.

169. Claudy, C. H. Economic tree murder. How we are denuding our 'orests to supply
Europe while she is conserving her own timber. Sci. Amer. 121: 132. 145. 1919.

170. Cook, O. F. Olneya beans. Jour. Heredity 10: 321-331. Fig. 18-17. 1919.— See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 549.

171. Cremata, Merlino. Algo sobre nuestros bosques. [Forest preservation.1 Revist.
Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 610-611. 1919. An article of forest conditions in Cuba and on forest
preservation. — F. M. Blodgett.

172. Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Plantes et produits filamenteux et textiles de lTn-
dochine. [Fiber- and textile-producing plants of Indo-China.] Bull. Econ. Indochine 22:
813-837. PL 2. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1122.

173. Dana, S. T. National forests and the water supply. Amer. Forest. 25: 1507-1522.
S3 fig. 1919.

174. Danielsson, Uno. Naturskydd i Sodra Kalmar Ian [Protection of natural beauty
in southern Kalmar (Sweden).] Skogen 6: 17-22. 5 fig. 1919.

175. Darnell-Smith, G. P. Dry rot in timber. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 314-316.
1919. — A brief discussion of the characters of some dry rot fungi and measures for their con-
trol. Creosote and tar are effective, but their odor and color restrict their use. Boric acid
and magnesium fluosilicate are strongly recommended. Wood-preserving oil, prepared from
kerosene shale, is effective if the ventilation is good. — C. F. Korstian.

No. 1, August, 1920]

FORESTRY

170. Dakvey, Mason. Forest tree planting in Nelson District. New Zealand Jour.
Agric. 19: 297-299. 1919. — It is believed that Pinus m ignis and several species of Euca-
lyptus may be planted on land costing about $50 an acre as a very profitable long term
investment. — N. J. Giddings.

177. Dawkins, C. G. E. Yemane (Gmelina arborea) in Upper Burma. Indian Forester
45:505-519. 1919. — The results of trials to introduce the yemane' into the forests of Burma are
given. Three methods have been tried ; broadcast sowing, dibbling and field planting. Notes
on the growth of plantations made are given. — E. N. Munns.

178. De Jong, A. W. K. Tapproeven bij Hevea brasillensis. [Tapping experiments on
Hevea brasiliensis.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 277-278. 1919. — Tapping a
quarter, a third or half the circumference of the tree with one left hand cut gave the follow-
ing results:

For the first area tapped . . .
For the second area tapped
For the third area tapped .
For the three areas tapped.

PROPORTION OF THE RCBBER YIELDS FOR

i of the C.

J of the C.

100

117

140

100

116

135.5

100

109.5

100

114

122

— W

. E. Cake.

179. Demorlaine, J. La necesitate d'un service forestier d'armee sous l'ancien regime.
[The need for an army forest service.] Rev. Eaux et Fordts 57: 229-230. 1919.— Dtjhamel du
Montceau, in 1764, in his "Exploitation des Bois," pointed out the need of attaching forest
officers to the engineers crops of the army in order to prevent the serious damage done to the
forests when the timber and other forest products needed by the army were secured by ordi-
nary soldiers without technical supervision. The need of an army forest service of this sort
has been strikingly demonstrated by the great war. Such a service should be autonomous,
with the same standing as the Engineer or Quartermaster Corps, and should direct the forma-
tion, management, instruction, and organization of companies of mobilized foresters. — S. T.
Dana.

180. Descombes, Paul. Installation d'experiences prolongees sur le ruissellement.
[Protracted experiments upon stream-flow.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2:
17-35. 2 fig. 1918 —The author gives a brief r6sum6 of methods adopted by L'Association
Centrale pour l'Amenagement des Montagnes in studying the relations between precipitation
and stream-flow in the drainage basin of the Arises. An apparatus for automatically gauging
and recording changes in stream level is described. Data are presented to indicate a corre-
lation between changes in the flow of the Ariege (1896-1910) and the sylvo-pastoral conditions
in its drainage basin. — I. W. Bailey.

181. Descombes, Paul. Le reboisement et le developpement economique de la France.
; Reforestation and the economic development of France. M6m. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bor-
deaux VII, 2: 103-217. 2 fig. 1918.— Deforestation and over-grazing in the uplands of France
prevent an extensive substitution of waterpower for coal and are considered to be responsible
for the depopulation and degradation of these regions. Reforestation and other remedial
projects for improving the range have been combated by the mountaineers, who fear curtail-
ment of their herds and flocks. L'Association Centrale pour 1 Amenagement des Montagnes
has conducted a series of extensive experiments to prove that it is possible to prevent over-
grazing and to reforest the mountains without reducing the live stock of the mountaineers.
This is done by excluding from the alpine pastures migratory herds and flocks from the low-
lands. In considering measures for reforestation of both uplands and lowlands the author

26 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V.

devotes considerable attention to a discussion of the status of French forests and the reforest-
ation movement during the nineteenth century, and quotes various legislative enactments
at length. .The paper contains much statistical information. — J. W. Bailey.

182. De Vries. O. Over de bruikbaarheid van instrumenten als metrolac en latexometer
voor het bepalen van het rubbergehalte van de latex. [On the use of hydrometers (metrolac
and latexometer) to determine the rubber content of latex.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-
Indie 3: 207-221. 1919. — Very large differences may occur between the real rubber content of
Hevea latex as determined by actual coagulation and the figures obtained from the hydro-
metric specific gravity readings. The metrolac and latexometer are constructed for a special
case, perhaps an original latex of 37| per cent rubber content and 0.9775 specific gravity or
some other combination near there, when the specific gravity of the original serum varies
from 1.022. When such a latex is diluted with water the reading of the instrument is correct,
but for latices of other composition the rubber content cannot be determined by these instru-
ments. In general on the estates in Java the results obtained by hydrometric readings are
too low, usually giving values between 70 and 80 per cent of the real content. — W. E. Cake.

183. De Vries, O. Verband tusschen het soortelijk gewicht van latex en serum en het
tubbergehalte van de latex. [The relation between the specific gravity of latex and serum and
the rubber content of latex.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 183-206. 1919.— The
relation between the specific gravity of Hevea latex and its rubber content was determined
in the following five cases: (1) continued tapping after a period of rest, (2) light or heavy
tapping systems, (3) pollarding, which also acts as a "heavier stress," (4) periods of rest ami
shallow tapping, and (5) individual trees. In all cases the results are the same, showing that
the specific gravity is inversely proportional to the rubber content. The actual specific
gravity of the latex is determined by the proportion o the rubber and serum (i.e., the rubber
content of the latex) and only to a small extent by the specific gravity of the serum which re-
mains nearly constant. — W. E. Cake.

184. De Vries, O., and W. Spoon. Variabiliieit van p'antage-rubber. [Variability in
plantation-rubber.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 246-276. 1919. — Data from the
Central rubber station comparing the tensile strength, slope, rate of cure, and viscosity of

moked sheet and crepe rubber for the years 1917 and 1918. The principal causes for devia-
tion and variability in properties are pointed out. — W. E. Cake.

185. Essig, E. O. New hosts of oak-root fungus in Humboldt County. Monthly Bull.
Comm. Hortic. California 8: 79-80. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 4, Entry 1170.

186. F[oster], J. H. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. Howard. Manual of tree diseases. 398 p.
Macmillan Co.: New York, 1918.] Jour. Forest. 17: 321. 1919.

187. Geete, Erik. Ur timmersaxens historia. [From the history of the timber "grab
hook."] Skogen 6: 23-25. 3 fig. 1919.

1S8. Gellatly, F. M. Investigatory work needed: relation of commonwealth to states.
Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 137-139. 1919 — The more important benefits to be derived from
a forest products laboratory are discussed. Urgent need is voiced for research along the
following lines: (1) tests of pulping and paper-making qualities of indigenous woods and
materials, (2) distillation tests to determine the tar oil, gas, acid and other properties of
commercial value in indigenous woods, (3) investigation of the chemical and commercial
properties of gums, kinos, resins, and saps. — C. F. Korstian.

189. Grinndal, Th. Tidig eller sen skogssadd? [Early or late forest sowing?] Skogen
6: 124-127. 1919.

190. Gupta, B. L. New Indian species of forest importance. Indian Forester 45: 388-
392. 1919. — A continuation of previous work (Ibid. 43: 132. 1917). The present list includes
48 species recently described from India, bringing the total forest species up to 393. — E. N.
Munns.

No. 1, August, 1920] FORESTRY 27

191. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. Indian Forester 45: :;7."> 388. PI 17
20, fig. 1-7. 1919.

192. Hall, Cuthbert. On a new species or form of Eucalyptus. Proc. Linnean Soc
New South Wales 43: 747-749. Pl.75. 1918.

193. Heck, G. E. Splintering of airplane woods. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 83: 68 69 L fig
1919.

194. Heim, A. L. Airplane propeller manufacture. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 162. 1919.
— Considers problems of manufacture which have been or need to be studied. — Chas. II . <

195. Hoffman. 1st die Vergesellschaftung im Forstbetriebe moglich? [Is socialization
of forest industry practicable?) Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 210-226. 1919.— Most socialists
agree that forest industries of Germany should be socialized, in order to avoid danger of mon-
opoly, to insure continuity of employment and of supplies of forest products, and to insure
maximum sustained production at lowest cost. Methods suggested are State ownership,
either by purchase or confiscation, syndicalization, or division of large holdings. State owner-
ship is unnecessary because the State already owns a sufficient proportion of the forests to
prevent monopoly, and undesirable because of the probable decrease in efficiency due to bu-
reaucratic inertia and political influences. Moreover, it is financially impossible. Syndicali-
zation is not desirable because the nature of the business is not adapted to this form of manage-
ment. Division of holdings is contrary to the requirements of efficient forest production, and
unnecessary anyway because there are few very large holdings. The best way for a demo-
cratic state to control forest production is by use of its powers of taxation. The forest law
should require that all forest tracts of more than 100 hectares be managed according to a
working plan, under technical supervision. Beyond this, the owner should have entire
freedom of action. Owners of smaller tracts should form cooperative bodies or looser asso-
ciations, in order to be able to take steps toward more efficient management. The State
should supervise the activities of these associations. — W. N. Sparhawk.

196. Horne, W. T. Oak-fungous, oak-root fungus disease, fungus root-rot, toadstool
root-rot or mushroom root-rot. Monthly Bull. Comm. Hortic. California 8: 64-63. Fig. 36-
89. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1176.

197. Hubualt, E. L'apres guerrs dans les iles britanniques : projets de reconstitution
forestiere. [Forest reconstruction in Great Britain.] [Rev. of: Final Report of Forestry Sub-
committee, Reconstruction Committee, Ministry of Reconstruction. 105 p. 1918.] Rev.
Eaux et For£ts 57 : 213-228. 1 fig. 1919. — The critical situation in which Great Britain found
itself during the war as a result of totally inadequate native wood supplies has led to the for-
mulation by a specially appointed committee of a comprehensive forestation program, in-
tended to decrease materially Great Britain's present dependence on other countries and to
provide a reserve capable, in case of war, of meeting for three years all its needs for wood at
a rate of cutting five times as great as the normal annual consumption. The program contem-
plates the establishment in 80 years of 717,000 hectares of coniferous plantations, chiefly
Scotch pine, European larch, Douglas fir, Sitka Spruce, Norway Spruce, and western red
cedar. Two-thirds of this area, or 478,000 hectares, will be forested during the first 40 years,
and 101,000 hectares during the first ten years. Of this latter area, the state will itself acquire,
either by purchase or lease, and plant 60,000 hectares; it will associate itself with communi-
ties and individuals in the cooperative planting and management of 10,000 hectares; and
through the granting of subsidies of one kind or another it will encourage the forestation of
10,000 hectares by communities and individuals. The remaining 21,000 hectares are to be
secured through the voluntary or forced reforestation by their owners of areas cut clear during
the war. In addition the reforestation during this period of 4,000 hectares of hardwoods
(and eventually of 8,000 hectares) is contemplated. The committee proposes certain reduc-
tions in forest taxes and in freight rates for forest products, the systematic training of both

28 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

higher and lower forest officers, and the establishment of adequately equipped forest experi-
ment stations. The carrying out of this program, the cost of which during the first 10 years
is estimated at 84,162,000 francs, is to be entrusted to an independent forest commission con-
sisting of three salaried and three non-salaried members, and having attached to it three sub-
commissioners, ten or eleven divisional officers, and fifty or fifty-five forest officers. From
the French point of view the most characteristic feature of the program is the fact that par-
ticular care is taken to prevent the state, in spite of the important part played by it, from
encroaching on the rights of private owners, and to encourage, rather than to force, coopera-
tion on the part of the latter. — S. T. Dana.

198. Illick, J. S. When trees grow. Canadian Forest. Jour. 15: 351-354. 1919. — A
series of studies carried out for several years involving daily measurements on 200 trees dur-
ing the growing season lead to conclusions that: (a) Trees grow almost twice as fast during the
night as during the day; (b) The growing season for white pine and Norway spruce, in Penn-
sylvania at least, is ended by July 1st; (c) Such knowledge is of high utility in choosing season
for planting trees. — H. C. Belyea.

199. Iwaki, Takanori. Microscopical distinctions of some Japanese coniferous woods.
[Article in Japanese.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 32: 187-198, 219-237. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 1299.

200. Jauffrat, Aime. La determination des bois de deux Dalbergia de Madagascar,
d'apres les caracteres de leurs matieres colorantes. [Identification of wood of Dalbergia by
staining reactions.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 693-694. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 565.

201. Jolly, N. W. The importance of the wood pulp industry to Australian forests.
Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 9. 1919. — The possibility of Australia manufacturing wood pulp
from its own forests is discussed. The author advocates the utilization of hardwood and
Pinus insignis saplings and poles for wood pulp as a means of utilizing waste or of rendering
thinnings profitable. — C. F. Korstian.

202. Jones, J. Shea butter tree. Imperial Department of Agriculture for the West
Indies. Report on the Agricultural Department, Dominica, 1918-19: 3. 1919. — Nuts from
Dominica examined at the Imperial Institute, London, were found to contain 44 per cent, of
fat, a somewhat lower percentage than that contained in West African nuts. — J. S. Dash.

203. Khan, A. Hafiz. Red wood of Himalayan spruce (Picea morinda). Indian Forester
45: 496-498. 1 pi. 1919. — The water absorptive capacity of the red wood which occurs in
the heart of Picea morinda is less than that of the white wood, while it is at the same time
heavier, volume for volume, than white wood. Both colored woods are lighter than water.
— E. N. Munns.

204. Koehler, A. Selecting wood for airplanes. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 148-149.
5 fig. 1919.

205. Lantes, Adelaide. El alamo. [The pipal tree.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2:
612-613. 3 fig. 1919.

200. La Totjche, T. H. D. The submerged forest at Bombay. Rec. Geol. Surv. India
49: 214-219. PI. 17-19. 1919.— During excavations in Bombay harbor in 1878 a submerged
forest with many stumps in situ was found over an area of 30 acres. The trees were embedded
in stiff blue clay 6 to 20 feet thick, resting on decomposed basaltic rock, and covered with
4 to 5 feet of harbor silt. The deepest stumps were rooted 33 feet below the present mean
high tide. Most of the wood was identified as Acacia catechu, but two apparently drift logs
were teak {Tectona grandis). In 1910 excavations on an adjacent area disclosed more stumps,

No. 1, August, 1920] FORESTRY 29

some rooted 40 feet below high tide. The conclusion is that there has been gradual depn s-
sion of a forested roeky coastal plain, forming quiet lagoons in which f lie trees became embed-
ded in the clay; then a tilting movement brought in the open sea, and Teredo bored the trunk*,
causing them to break off at the clay surface. — Winfield Dudgeon.

207. Lindbeiig, Ferd. Da skogen snoar in. [When the forest is snowed in.] Skogen
6:128-132. 4 fig. 1919.

208. Maas, J. G. J. A. Gewijzigde methode voor veldproeven met Hevea. [Other meth-
ods for field experimentation with Hevea.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 233-237.
1919. — In this article the author sets forth a plan for the elimination of error due to the per-
sonal factor of the tapper in field experiments with Hevea. His plan is to have the tapping
rows and collecting rows perpendicular to each other, so that each tapper taps a part of the
trees of each collecting task. — W. E. Cake.

209. Maas, J. G. J. A. Nog eenige kiemproeven met Hevea-zaden. [Some more ger-
mination trials with Hevea seed.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie' 3 : 237-243. 1919. —
In preserving Hevea seed the packing material must be moist and not air tight. When Hevea
seeds are to be preserved for longer than one month the packing material should be moistened
every 3 or 4 weeks. At a temperature of 4 to 8°C. the seeds will stand a drier and more air-
tight package better than at ordinary temperatures. Air-tight packages however cause
them to lose their germinating power quickly. Merely ensilaging Hevea seed in the ground
seems to be good for preserving the seeds on an estate for a short period like a month. Treat-
ment with water at about 50°C. resulted in increased germination energy, and a slightly im-
proved germination. Sprinkling with warm water at 45°C. increased the rapidity of germina-
tion a little but had practically no effect on the germination per cent. — W. E. Cake.

210. Mackay, H. Conifers in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 265-267. 1919.—
Summary of a paper on "Coniferous plantations in Southeastern Australia," read before the
first Inter-State Conference on Forestry, embodying the experience of that State in the es-
tablishment of exotic conifers over a period of 34 years. Thirteen conifers indigenous to North
America are found in the list. — C. F. Korstian.

211. Mackay, H. Treatment of indigenous hardwoods. Australian Forest. Jour. 2:
19-20. 1919.— Extract from a paper read before the first Interstate Conference on Forestry
at Sydney, November, 1911, in which the silvicultural management of eucalyptus forests is
briefly discussed. Wherever the standing crop is fairly uniform in age and size, a clear cut-
ting in sections, leaving, in addition to seed trees, only trees fit for piles and girders, is advo-
cated.— C. F. Korstian.

212. Madelin, J. Les cedres du Liban. [The cedars of Lebanon.] Rev. Eaux et Forets
57 : 275-276. 1919.— The cedars of Lebanon, formerly regarded by the natives as divine beings
in tree form, flourish only at El-Herze' at an altitude of over 2200 meters. Some of them are
over a hundred feet high and the largest is 3 feet in diameter. The few trees which still sur-
vive have suffered severely at the hands of tourists and should be protected from further
damage. — S. T. Dana.

213. Main, J. M. Eden and its timber resources. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 48-49.
1920.— A note on the forest resources adjacent to the town of Eden on the South Coast of
Australia with a list of the principal timber species of eucalyptus and their uses. — C. / .
Korstian.

214. Martin, Percy F. Great forests of South America. Canadian Forest. Jour. 15:
264-266. 1919.— Four types of timber are recognized : small scrubby forests of dry temperate
or sub-tropical regions; good forests of Antarctic beech and a few conifers of temperate re-
gions in the Andes; the fresh and salt-water swamps of mangroves and species with soft
woods; the tropical rain forest of a great variety of hardwoods. — E. N. Munns.

30 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

215. Massias, J. Les forets de Grece. [The forests of Greece.] Rev. Eaux et Forets
57: 237-247. 1919. — Prior to 1913 the forest area of Greece, excluding areas once forested but
now devastated, amounted to some 800,000 hectares, or about 12 per cent of the total area
of the country. Including the new provinces added by the war, the total forest area is about
13 per cent. Approximately 50 per cent belongs to the State, 20 per cent to convents and com-
munes, and 30 per cent to private owners. Aleppo pine constitutes 35 per cent of the stands,
Cephalonian fir 25 per cent, and various oaks 20 per cent. The value of the forest products
harvested annually, including timber, fuel, charcoal, resin, forage, and other minor products,
amounts to about 3,300,000 francs, of which nearly one-half is fuel. — All forests, both public
and private, are theoretically subject to a forest regime in the department of Agriculture,
but lack of personnel makes this control ineffective. Even in the State forests there are no
real plans of management. These, as well as certain private forests, are heavily burdened
with various rights of use which have resulted in serious damage, particularly through the un-
restricted grazing of sheep and goats. The forests themselves are not subject to a land tax,
but forest products (with certain exceptions, the most important of which is fuel harvested
by the peasants for their own use) are taxed at varying rates according to the nature of the
product and the character of the ownership. Recent laws aim to secure better fire protection,
the reforestation of denuded lands, the codification and revision of existing rights of user, and
improved management of all forest lands, both public and private. There are two schools
for the training of guards and rangers and one (at Athens) for the training of higher forest
officers. — S. T. Dana.

216. Mattoon, Wilbur R. Making woodlands profitable in the Southern States. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Farmers Bull. 1071. 88 p. 55 fig. 1920.

217. Mattoon, Wilbur R. Treating fence posts on farm. Louisiana State Univ. Div.
Agric. Exp. Circ. 37. 20 p. 11 fig. 1920. — Fence posts treated with creosote and set in the
ground at Calhoun, Louisiana, in 1908 were examined after 10 years. Of the black gum
posts, 97 per cent were sound; cypress, 96 per cent; tupelo gum, S8 per cent; sweet gum, 87
per cent ; sap pine, 73 per cent ; baj% 68 per cent. Methods of treating posts are also discussed.
— C. W. Edgerton.

218. Miller, Robert B. The wood of Machaerium Whitfordii. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club
47: 73-79. 8 fig. 1920. — A study is made of the wood of Machaerium Whitfordii Macbride,
which came from Colombia. Color, density and other gross characters are given; it is related
to the true rosewoods and is of commercial importance. It is diffuse porous, usually has uni-
seriate rays, storied arrangement of elements, small half-bordered pits between vessels and
ray cells, and sieve-like perforations of pit membrane. Wood parenchyma is diffuse, para-
tracheal, and on the face of the summer wood. — P. A. Mum.

219. Morrison, W. G. Natural afforestation in a New Zealand mountain area. Austral-
inn Forest. Jour. 2: 380-384. 1919. — The first installment of a discussion treating the merits
of natural regeneration by seed with particular reference to the indigenous forests of the
Hanmer area. It is contended that natural regeneration ought to be accomplished at less
than one-tenth the cost of relativelv cheap planting methods. [See also next following Entry,
220.]— C. F. Korstian.

220. Morrison, W. G. Natural afforestation in a New Zealand mountain area. Austral-
ian Forest. Jour. 3: 23-25. 55-58. 1920. — A continuation and final installment of an article,
the first part of which has been abstracted. The spontaneous reproduction of exotic shelter
plantations on the Hanmer Plains is described. Pinus radiata, P. pinaster, Betula alba,
Quercus pedunculata and Larix europea were found reproducing themselves from seed at
rates varying from several hundred to tens of thousands per acre depending on the species,
the distance from seed trees and site conditions. The mean annual rainfall for the years 1905
to 1918 is approximately 48 inches, which is well above the safety limit for successful planta-

No. 1, August, 1920] FORESTRY 31

tions. The author cites evidence to show thai natural afforestation of the high countt
feasible but suggests that on the more accessible waste areas it be augmented by artificial
afforestation as now practiced. [See also next preceding Entry, 219.] — C. F. Km

221. Nordstedt, C. T. O. [Swedish rev. of: Hbkibeet-Nimson, N. Experimented
Studien uber Variabilitat, Spaltung, Artbildung und Evolution in der Gattung Salix. [Experi-
mental studies on variability, segregation, speciation and evolution in the genus Salix. ] Lunda
Universitets Arsskr. N. F. (Avd. 2.) 14'->s: 1-145. 65 fig. 1918.] Bot. Notiser 1919: 31
1919.

222. Pearson, R. S. Note on the mechanical strength and seasoning properties of Shorea
robusta timber. Indian For. Rec. 7: 120-145. 1919.— The results of tests on sal for trans-
verse strain, compression, shearing and hardness are given in detail on timber felled at differ-
ent times of the year, from different localities, and from trees of different origin. Data is
also presented on the rate of seasoning of woods obtained under the same conditions as those
described above. — E. N. Munns.

223. Pf.tch, T. The effect of time intervals in rubber tapping. Dept. Agric. Ceylon
Bull. 42. 8 p. 1919.

224. Pierre, L. Note sur l'lsonandra Krantziana (arbre a Gutta-Percha de la Cochin-
chine et du Cambodge). [Note on Isonandra Krantziana, a gutta percha tree of Cochinchinaand
Cambodia.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 33-40. 1920. — A report on the economic possi-
bilities of the above species, this one probably being the form described by Pierre as Dichopsis
Krantziana. — E. D. Merrill.

225. Raux, Marcel. Une devise de politique forestiere. [A motto of forest policy.]
Rev. Eaux et Forets 57: 248-254. 261-274. 1919.— A comprehensive forest policy should in-
clude both a far-sighted administrative program and legislation necessary to make this pro-
gram effective. The essence of such a policy can be expressed by the simple motto, "To
create and to conserve." The State should take the lead in creating, not by the purchase of
private lands already forested, but by the acquisition and reforestation, chiefly with native
conifers, of lands now uncultivated or abandoned. These plantations, scattered throughout
the country, would not only prove profitable financially, but would prove more effective in
stimulating similar work on the part of other owners than any amount of literary propaganda.
Reforestation by communities should be further encouraged by State loans, and the resulting
plantations should be subject to the forest regime. Private owners and forestry societies
should be given free advice and other assistance by the State, and plantations established by
them should be granted liberal exemptions from taxation until they reach a certain height. —
The conservation of privately owned forests, which constitute more than two-thirds of the
forest area of France, is a matter of very real public concern and should therefore be under-
taken by the State. Supervision of cuttings in such forests should be exercised by the State,
without charge to the owner; while clear cuttings in protection forests should be prohibited,
and in other forests should be followed by reforestation. As to clearings, legislation should be
enacted providing that the forest area of France must not be diminished ; prohibiting the clear-
ing of all stands in the zone of protection forests; and requiring a permit from the Minister
of Agriculture for the clearing of all stands outside of this zone. These measures would re-
quire an increased forest personnel, which could be secured in part by relieving forest officers
of their duties as fish wardens. Supervision of private cuttings should also be facilitated by
commissioning private forest guards as forest officers. Finally, conservation should be pro-
moted by giving forest owners, both public and private, more adequate protection against
trespass by increased penalties. — S. T. Dana.

226. Reynard, J. Les arbres de la paix. [Trees of peace.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest
Franche-Comte et Belfort 13 : 111-112. 1919.— Trees should be widely planted as the simplest
and most practical means of commemorating the peace treaty of Versailles. Better than
anything else they serve to bind father to son, dead to living, generation to generation. —
S. T. Dana.

32 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

227. Romell, Lars-Gunnar. Sammanvaxning och naturympning. [Growing together
and natural grafting.] Skogen 6: 133-141. 4 fig. 1919.

228. Rumbold, Caroline. The injection of chemicals into chestnut trees. Amer.
Jour. Bot. 7: 1-20. 7 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 964.

229. Scheidter, Franz. Das Tannensterben im Frankenwalde. [Death of firs in the
Frankenwald.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 17: 69-90. 1919.— The dying of firs in
the State-owned Frankenwald, and also to a lesser extent in other middle-European forests,
which has become gradually and only in recent years of alarming extent, is described in great
detail. After dissertating upon various theories which have been advanced by other investi-
gators, especially Neger, the writer states it as his own opinion that insects and fungi (the
Hallimasch most commonly), are only secondary causes, and that the fundamental difficulty
arises from the improper silvicultural system followed in the State forests. In these the effort
seems always to have been to grow fir, and spruce-fir mixtures, in even-aged stands, whereas
privately-owned forests, under similar conditions, are usually handled as all-aged or selection
forests, a plan which is better adapted to fir. The opinion is advanced, and is backed by much
evidence, that the rapid loss of fir in the Frankenwald is due primarily to crowding when the
even-aged stands attain a certain age or density, being particularly marked where fir must
compete with the broader-crowned spruce. In any event, in such stands, the lower limbs are
lost very rapidly, and in the opinion of the writer, the small crown remaining at the top of the
tree is then unable to draw to itself sufficient moisture for existence. The older needles die,
then the growing tip succumbs, and death of the entire tree soon follows. Often, before death
occurs, there is a vigorous production of "water-sprouts" on the lower portion of the stem.
The evil is augmented by drought years, and by snow-damage and windfall which, by opening
the canopy, apparently encourage the production of these "water-sprouts" and also cause
drying of the soil, the growth of grass, etc. A horde of insects, and some of the most de-
structive fungi, attack the weakened trees, and of course hasten death and contribute to the
aggregate losses. The suggested remedy is a system of management which will give the fir
more ample space for its late development and maturing. This the selection system would
appear to do. — C. G. Bates.

230. Schotte, Gunnar. Meddelanden fran Svenska Skogsvardsforeningen. — Protokollj
fort vid Svenska Skogsvardsforeningens arsmote i Stockholm den 14 mars, 1919. [Proceedings
at the annual meeting of the Swedish forestry association, Stockholm, March 14, 1919.] Skogen
6:217-224. 1919.

231. Secrest, Edmund. Salient features of a forestry policy for Ohio. Monthly Bull.
Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 15-19. 1920. — The depletion of forests cannot be permitted longer
to escape public attention. Private ownership has failed to provide for renewal of forests
after cutting. The effect of such a policy is very marked in small communities where certain
phases of the lumbering industry have been the chief source of income. A state forestry policy
is proposed whereby non-agricultural or idle lands may be purchased for reforestation pur-
poses. Ohio has 500,000 acres of such land which should come under public ownership, or
state or municipal custody. To encourage private owners to reforest waste lands the state
should establish nurseries where planting stock could be obtained at the cost of production.
— R. C. Thomas.

232. Show, S. B. Climate and forest fires in northern California. Jour. Forestry 17:
965-979. 1919. — Relationships existing between fire and climate have long been recognized
by foresters but not before studied intensively. The moisture content of the forest litter is
a prime consideration as to both ignition and rate of spread of fire. Litter dries out exceed-
ingly fast under summer conditions and when it contains 8 per cent or less moisture, burns
readily. Over this amount fire will not spread. Litter moisture is affected by climatic con-
ditions, being driest on south slopes and the most moist on north slopes and at high elevations.
Litter behaves like soil as regards hydroscopic moisture, taking up as much as 6 per cent of

No. 1, August. 1920] FORESTRY '.\.\

its own weight. — The rate of spread of iir ist measured by perimeter rather < ban by area

or distance, and is governed largely by wind velocity. This speed varies as i be square <>f I he
wind velocity. — E. N. Munns.

233. Skull, C. A. Curing timber. |Rev. of: Stone, Herbert. The ascent of the sap
and the drying of timber. Quart. Jour. Forest. 12 : 261-266. 191S.] Bot. Gaz. 68: 310. 1919.

The author's suggestion may be sound on the practical side, but his "assumptions as to the
movement of sap in trees will not meet with favor among plant physiologists. It is hard to
imagine a conception more at variance with experimental results of physiological Btudii

234. Sim, T. R. South African rubber. I. South African Jour. Indust. 2: 1127-1137.
5 pi. 1919.

235. Sim, T. R. South African rubber. II. South African Jour. Indust. 3: 24-34. 1920.

236. Society of American Foresters, Committee for the Application of Forestry.
Forest devastation: a national danger and a plan to meet it. Jour. Forest. 17:911-945. 1919.—
A detailed and comprehensive program of action is outlined. Blame is placed on the lumber
industry and economic development for the state of affairs at present. To correct the evils
which now exist, plans for constructive legislation are offered including the purchase and con-
trol of forest lands and production, the establishment of forest insurance agencies and forest
loan banks, and state cooperation in securing tax and fire-prevention reforms. A minority
report of the committee is also presented. — E. N. Munns.

237. Startk, H. W. Reservation of standards in strips and checks in exploitation. In-
dian Forester 45: 414-416. 1 fig. 1919.— A system of parallel strips in cutting in coppice with
standards has been worked out to prevent the tendency towards overcutting, and frauds by
operators. — E. N. Munns.

238. Stevens, J. L. Blackboy and its commercial uses. Australian Forest Jour. 2:
201-202. 1919. — The outside portions of the blackboy or grass tree are reported to yield very
fine drying oils and turpentine substitutes suitable for the manufacture of paints and var-
nishes. The acidic liquors obtained in the distillation process contain large quantities of
acetic acid, methyl alcohol and tannin extract, while the gas is of high calorific value and
purity, being free from sulphur and nitrogen compounds. — C. F. Korstian.

239. Taylor, A. A. California's redwood park. Amer. Forestrv 25: 1446-1450. h fig.
1919.

240. Tiemann, H. D. Kiln-drying specifications for airplane lumber. Sci. Amer. Sup-
plem. 88:104. S fig. 1919.

241. Tragardh, Ivar. Nagra allmanna men bittills foga uppmarksammade barkborrar
och deras gangsystem. [Some common but hitherto little known bark beetles and their galler-
ies.] Skogen 6: 237-246. PL 1-7. 1919.

242. Vernet, G. Precautions a prendre dans l'enfumage du caoutchouc (Incendies-
stickage). [Precautions to be taken in smoking rubber.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. ^::igon 1:
362-36 1 . 1919.

243. von Faxkhauser, F. Zur Kenntnis der Larche. [A larch study.] Schweiz. Zeit-
schr. Forstwesen 70: 188-191. .9 fig. 1919. — The natural range of the species is taken as the
area over which natural reproduction occurs, although good growth may be secured in other
regions by artificial reproduction. Soil moisture is emphasized as the principal factor that
limits the distribution of larch. Other writers have attributed depth and character of soil
as important limiting factors, but the occurrence of larch on all types of soil and its distrib-
tion, limited only bjr elevation and exposure, are taken as conclusive evidence that soil texture

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

34 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

and depth are important only in so far as these qualities affect soil moisture. Variations of
the root systems and the development of deep tap roots are influenced more by depth of water
table than by character of soil. Transpiration is also an important factor. Dr. F. von
Honel's experiments, which he conducted in 1S79 with 21 species, showed that the amount of
water transpired to produce 100 grams dry weight of leaves in various species was as follows:
Larch, 115 L., Ash, 98 L., Beech, 86 L., Birch, 85 L., Spruce, 21 L., Pine, 10 L. The service-
berry was the only species that transpired more than the larch. Kirchner describes the
anatomy of the larch needle as being especially adapted for aeration by the arrangement of
the cells length-wise in the needles, and the cell walls joined only at the corners. Air spaces
about the size of the cells occur between each two layers of cells. The thin cuticle of the
needle is also a factor. Excessive transpiration indicates the necessity of an abundant sup-
ply of water. The shedding of leaves in the winter is a habit necessitated by the excessive
transpiration. In periods of severe drought the needles turn yellow, and part of them may
fall to conserve moisture. The tree, however, recovers readily and new leaves develop,
whereas other conifers die. Specific cases were noted during the severe drought of 1911.
The dense parabolic crowns formed on good moist soil and the open neiloid crowns formed on
drier sites are so different that a division of species based on this character has been advo-
cated. Competition of larch with other species is largely controlled by the supply of avail-
able water. The fir and the spruce spread their lateral roots near the surface and, to a large
extent, prevent surface water from reaching the deeper soil in which the larch roots usually
occur. Where the larch successfully competes with other species it is due to sub-irrigation
of the area with water from other areas. — J. V. Hojmann.

244. von Kunz, I. Zwanzigjahrige forstliche Betatigung eines Laien. [Twenty years'
forestry experience of a layman.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstwesen 70: 195-200. 1919. — The
author is a chemist whose interest in forestry prompted him to purchase a forest meadow of
two hectares and plant it to tree seedlings. Spruce, fir, pine, larch, beech, oak, hornbeam
and elm were used. The plantation was very successful, and at the age of twenty years the
conifers formed a complete ground cover where they were spaced 1.25 m. by 1.25 m. The pines
had begun to clear, but the spruce branches were still all green. — J. V. Hojmann.

245. von Seelen, D. Der Wald als Bruder des Feldes. [The interdependence of forest
and farm.] Zeitschr. Forst- u. Jagdw. 51: 308-315. 1919. — A plea for more thorough use of
German forest resources. A policy is outlined to accomplish this end. The war, and its
results, has made, it necessary for Germany to adopt a broader policy of forest management.
The former rather restrictive policy resulted in much waste of such natural resources as for-
age and nut crops within the forests, owing to the fact that grazing animals were apt to cause
damage to reproduction. The author argues, however, that through proper regulation such
damage can be minimized. Free use and administrative use policies are also outlined. Ar-
ticle, on whole, is an answer to an opponent to this broader concept of a forest policy. —
Hermann Krauch.

246. Wahloren, A. Skogen och manniskan i forhistorisk tid. [The forest and man in
prehistoric times.] Skogen 6: 1-8, 65-68, 229-236. 1919.

247. Walker, R. S. The Paulownia tomentosa tree. Amer. Forest. 25: 1485-1486. S
fig. 1919.

248. Watt, A. S. On the causes of failure of natural regeneration in British oakwoods.
Jour. Ecol. 7: 173-203. 1919.

249. Weir, James E., and Ernest E. Hubert. The influence of thinning on western
hemlock and grand fir infected with Echinodontium tinctorium. Jour. Forest. 17: 21-35.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 574.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 35

250. Welo, L. A. Emergency seasoning of Sitka spruce. Sci. Amor. Supplem. 87: -10 1-
405. 2 fig. 1919.

251. Wood, B. R. Note on proposed system for regeneration of sal forests. Indian For-
ester 45: 403-413. 1919. — Changes in the management of sal forests are not believed essential
and strip cutting is not feasible. Suggestions are made to study the growth and the relation
of forest and fire to the regeneration of sal. — E. N. Munns.

252. Zimmer, Walter J. Regeneration of forests. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 75-76.
1919. — A brief discussion of the suitability of the coppice method of regeneration to the
eucalyptus forests of Australia, which sucker very freely. — C. F. Korstian.

GENETICS

George H. Shull, Editor
James P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

253. Abiding J. Pferdezucht und Pferderassen im osmanischen Reich. [Horse breed-
ing and horse breeds in the Osmanian country.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. Ziichtungsk. 1918:
31. 47 fig. 1918.

254. Akerman, A. Vaxternas kolddod och frosthardighet. Fdredrag vid Sveriges Ut-
sadesforenings extra mote under Landtbruksveckan 1919. [Winter killing and frost-resistance
of plants. A paper read at a special meeting of the Swedish Seed-Grain Association during the
"Farmers Week," 1919.] Sveriges Utsadesforenings Tidskrift 29: 61-85. 4 fig. 1919.— De-
tailed exposition of different theories to explain killing of plants by cooling. According to
experiments of Lidfors and others on the importance of sugar in protecting plants against cold,
it is supposable that hereditary differences in frost-resistance in different kinds of plants might
possibly depend on hereditary differences in sugar content. Author also has been able to
show that for wheat a parallelism seems to exist between sugar content and hardiness against
cold, in such way that plants which are more resistant to frost contain more sugar than plants
less resistant to frost. — In the following table four kinds of wheat are arranged in order of
their resistance against cold, beginning with the least resistant:

VARIETY

DRY SUBSTANCE IN PER
CENT OF FRESH WEIGHT

SUGAR IN PER CENT OF
FRESH WEIGHT

Smaavete II

23.2
23.8
24.7
26.0

13.3

Solvete

14.8

Thulevete

17.1

Lantvete

19.6

The quantity of sugar varies much during different periods; but the sugar-curves are
rather nearly parallel for the different sorts of wheat. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgrcn.

255. Allexdorf and Ehrenberg. Die Aufgaben des Sonderausschusses fur Zucker-
riibenbau. [Special problems of sugar-beet breeding.] Mitt. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 1919:
531-534. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 259.

256. Amend F. Uhtersuchungen iiber flamischen Roggen unter besonderer Beriick-
sichtigung des veredelten flamischen Landroggens und seiner Zuchtung. [Investigations on
Flemish rye with special reference to improved varieties and their breeding.] Landw. Jahrbuch.
52 : 614-669. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 260.

36 GENETICS [Bot. Absts.. Vol. V,

257. Anonymous. The improvement of agricultural crops by selection and hybridization.
Scot. Jour. Agric. 2: 10-20. 1919. — Substance of address delivered to Glasgow and West Scot-
land Agricultural Discussion Society by T. Anderson, Director of the Board's Seed Testing
Station. Mass selection, pure line selection, hybridization, and Mendelism in relation to
crop improvement are discussed. Emphasis is placed on value of pure seed stocks to the
farmer. — R. J. Garbcr.

258. Anonymous. Report of the work of the plant breeding division for 1919. Jour. Dept.
Agric. Ireland 20: 102-107. 1920.

259. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Allendorf and Ehrenberq. Die Aufgaben des
Sonderausschusses fur Zuckerriibenbau. (Special problems of sugar-beet breeding.) Mitt.
Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 1919: 531-534. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 112. Dec, 1919.

260. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Amend, F. Untersuchungen iiber flamischen Rog-
gen unter besonderer Beriicksichtigung des veredelten flamischen Landroggens und seiner
Ziichtung. (Investigations on Flemish rye with special reference to improved varieties and
their breeding.) Landw. Jahrbuch. 52: 614-669. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 112.
Dec, 1919.

261. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Barker, E. Heredity studies in the morning-
glory (Ipomoea purpurea). New York Cornell Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 392. 39 p., 3 pi. 1917.
(See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1164.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 113. Dec, 1919.

262. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Baur, Erwtn. Uber Selbststerilitat und iiber
Kreuzungsversuche einer selbslfertilen und einer selbststerilen Art in der Gattung Antirrhinum.
(On self-sterility and crossing experiments with a self-fertile and self -sterile species in the genus
Antirrhinum.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 48-52. May, 1919. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2082.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 114. Dec, 1919.

263. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Becking, L. G. M. Baas. Over Limietverhoudin-
gen in Mendelsche populaties. (Limiting proportions in Mendelian populations.) Genetica 1:
443-456. 4 fig. Sept. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2086.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:
113. Dec, 1919.

264. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Emerson, R. A. A fifth pair of factors, Aa, for aleu-
rone color in maize, and its relation to the Cc and Rr pairs. Cornell Un iv. Agric. Exp.
Sta. Mem. 16: 231-289. Fig. 71. Nov., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 877.)] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 7: 115. Dec, 1919.

265. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fraser, Allan Cameron. The inheritance of the
weak awn in certain Avena crosses and its relation to other characters of the oat grain. Cornell
Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. Mem. 23: 635-676. June, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 116-117.
Dec, 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 292.

266. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Freeman, G. F. Linked quantitative characters
in wheat crosses. Amer. Nat. 51: 683-689. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 116. Dec,
1919.

267. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Frolich, G. Die Umzuchtung von Wintergetreide
in Sommergetreide. (The breeding of winter cereals into spring cereals.) Friedrichswerther
Monatsber. 9: 27-30. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 118. Dec, 1919.— See also Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 284.

268. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Frolich, G. Die Beeinflussung der Kornschwere
durch Auslese bei der Ziichtung der Ackerbohne. (The influencing of grain-weight by selec-
tion in the breeding of field beans.) Friedrichswerther Monatsber. 9: 7-8, 17-20. 1919.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 117-118. Dec, 1919.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 37

269. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Frt/wirth, C. Die gegenwartige Organisation der
Pflanzenziichtung in Deutschland und in Osterreich-Ungarn. (The present organization of
plant breeding in Germany and Austria.) Nachricht. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. Osterreich. 1919:
35-39. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 118. Dec, 1919.

270. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fruwirth, C, Dr. Tn. Roemeb, Dr. E. vox
Tschbrmak. Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichon Pflanzenziichtung. 4. Die Ziichtung der
vier Hauptgetreidearten und der Zuckerriibe. (Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. 4.
Breeding of the four chief cereals and the sugar beet). 8vo.} xv+504 p., b& fig. Paul Parey:
Berlin, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht, 7: 145. Dec, 1919.

271. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Gassner, S. Beitrage zur physiologischen Charak-
teristik sommer- und winteranueller Gewachse, insbesondere der Getreidepflanzen. (Contri-
bution to the physiological characteristics of summer and winter annuals with special reference
to the cereals.) Zeitschr. Bot. 10: 417-480. 7 pi., 2 fig. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:
118-120. Dec, 1919.

272. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Hansen, W. Einiges iiber Riibenzucht. (Some-
thing about beet-breeding.) Landw. Zeitung 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 120. Dec,
1919.

273. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Jones, D. F. Natural cross -pollination in the
tomato. Science 43 : 509-510. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 120. Dec, 1919.

274. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Jones, D. F. Linkage in Lycopersicum. Amer.
Nat. 51 : 608-621. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht, 7: 120-121. Dec, 1919.

275. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Jones, D. F. Dominance of linked factors as a
means of accounting for heterosis. Genetics 2: 466-479. 1 fig. 1917. See Bot. Absts. 1, En-
try 1245.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 121. Dec, 1919.

276. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Jones, D. F. The effect of inbreeding and cross-
breeding upon development. Connecticut Agric Exp. Sta. Bull. 207. 100 p., 12 pi. New
Haven, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 34; 3, Entry 988.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 122.
Dec, 1919.

277. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Jones, Donald F. Bearing of heterosis upon double
fertilization. Bot, Gaz. 65:324-333. April, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 228.)] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 7: 121-122. Dec, 1919.

278. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kajanus, Birger. Genetische Papaver-Notizen.
(Genetical notes on Papaver.) Bot. Notiser 1919: 99-102. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
2145.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 123. Dec, 1919.

279. Anonymous. [Gorman rev. of: Kajanus, B. Genetische Studien iiber die Bliiten
von Papaver somniferum L. (Genetical studies on the flowers of Papaver somniferum L.)
Arkiv Bot. K. Svensk. Vetenskapsakad. 15: 1-87. 3 pi. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
2147.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 123-125. Dec, 1919.

280. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kajanus, Birger. Uber eine konstant gelbbunte
Pisum-Rasse. (On a constantly yellow-variegated variety of Pisum.) Bot, Notiser 1918:
83-84. 1918. (See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 2146.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 125. Dec, 1919.

281. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kajanus, B., and S. O. Berc;. Pisum -Kreuz-
ungen. (Pea-crosses.) Arkiv Bot. K. Svensk. Vetenskapsakad. 15:1-18. 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 3, Entry 2148.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 125-126. Dec, 1919.

38 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

282. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kalt, B., and A. Schulz. Uber Riickschlags
individuen mit Spelzweizeneigenschaften bei Nacktweizen der Emmerreihe des Weizens.
(Concerning reversionary individuals with characters of the Spelt type in the naked wheat of
the Emmer series.) Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36: 669-671. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 624.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 126. Dec., 1919.

283. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kiessling, L. Die Leistung der Wintergerste und
deren ziichterische Beeinfliissung. (The performance of winter barley and its modification by
breeding.) Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 1919: 310-311. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 126.
Dec, 1919.

284. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Killer, J. Uber die Umziichtung reiner Linien
von Winterweizen in Sommerweizen. (Concerning the changing over of pure lines of winter
wheat into spring wheat.) Jour. Landw. 67: 59-62. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 126.
Dec, 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 267.

285. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kuster, E. Uber Mosaikpanaschierung und ver-
gleichbare Erscheinungen. (Mosaic variegation and comparable phenomena.) Ber. Deutsch.
Bot. Ges. 36: 54-61. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 265.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 126.
Dec, 1919.

286. Anonymous. Origin of maize. [Rev, of : Kuwada, Y. Die Chromosomenzahl von
Zea Mays L. Ein Beitrag zur Hypothese der Individualitat der Chromosomen und zur Frage
uber die Herkunft von Zea Mays L. (The chromosome number of Zea Mays L. A contribution
to the hypothesis of the individuality of chromosomes and to the problem of the origin of Zea
Mays L.) Jour. Coll. Sci. Imperial Univ. Tokyo 39: 1-148. 2 pi., 4 fig. Aug., 1919. (See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 643.)] Gard. Chron. 67: 114. Mar. 6, 1920.

287. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Lehmann, Ernst. Uber die Selbststerilitat von
Veronica syriaca. (On the self-sterility of Veronica syriaca.) Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 21: 1-47. 1 fig. May, 1919.] (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2159.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
zucht. 7: 127. Dec, 1919.

288. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Lindstrom, E. Linkage in maize: aleurone and
chlorophyll factors. Amer. Nat. 51 : 225-237. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 127. Dec,
1919.

289. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Lindstrom, E. W. Chlorophyll inheritance in
maize. Cornell Univ. Agric Exp. Sta. Mem. 13: 1-68. 5 colored pi. Aug., 1918. (See Bot.
Absts. 1, Entry 484.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 127-129. Dec, 1919.

290. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and W. T. Craig. Methods used
and results obtained in cereal investigations at the Cornell Station. Jour. Amer. Soc Agron.
10: 145-157. 1 pi., 1 fig. April, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2163.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
zucht. 7: 129-130. Dec, 1919.

291. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and W. T. Craig. The relation be-
tween color and other characters in certain Avena crosses. Amer. Nat. 52: 369-383. Aug.-
Sept., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 914.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 130-131. Dec, 1919.

292. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and A. C. Fraser. The inheritance
of the weak awn in certain Avena crosses. Amer. Nat. 51 : 481^93. 2 fig. 1917. (See Bot.
Absts. 1, Entry 1263.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 129. Dec, 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 265.

293. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and G. P. McRostie. The inherit-
ance of hulllessness in oat hybrids. Amer. Nat. 53: 5-32. 7 fig. Jan. -Feb., 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 1, Entry 1264; 2, Entry 420.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 131-132. Dec, 1919.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS ,'i

294. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Meunissier, A. Experiences genetiques faites a
Verrieres. (Genetical experiments made at Verriere.) Bull. Soc Nation. Acclimat. France
1918:1-31. 1918. (See Bot. Absts.4, Entry 677.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 132-134. Dec,
1919.

295. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Nilsson-Ehle, II. Untersuchungen uber Spelt-
oidmutationen beim Weizen. (Experiments on speltoid mutations in wheat.) Bot. Notiser
1917:305-329. 1 fig. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 131. Dec, 1919.

296. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Oiikustein, O. Uber das Vorkommen echter Knos-
penvariationen bei pommerschen und anderen Kartoffelsorten. (Occurrence of true bud varia-
tion in Pommeranian and other varieties of potato. Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 560-061.
1 pi. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 135. Dec, 1919.

297. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Rasmuson, Hans. Zur Genetik der Blutenfarben
von Tropaeolum majus. (On the genetics of the flower colors of Tropaeolum majus.) Bot.
Notiser 1918: 253-259. Nov.,191S. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2180.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht.
7: 135. Dec, 1919.

29S. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Rasmuson, Hans. Uber eine Petunia-Kreuzung.
(On a Petunia cross.) Bot. Notiser 1918: 287-294. 1918. (See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 2181.)]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 135-136. Dec, 1919.

299. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Roemer, Th. Uber Lupinenziichtung. (On lupine
breeding.) Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 174-175. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht, 7: 136.
Dec, 1919.

300. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Schmidt, J. Investigations on hops. X. On the
aroma in plants raised by crossing. Compt, Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 11: 330-332. 1917.
(See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1290.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 136. Dec, 1919.

301. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Schmidt, J. Investigations on hops (Humulus
lupulus). XI. Can different clones be characterized by the number of marginal teeth in the
leaves? Compt. Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 14: 1-23. 8 fig. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, En-
try 2192.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 136-137. Dec, 1919.

302. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Schmidt, Johs. La valeur de l'individu a titre de
generateur appreciee suivant la methode du croisement diallele. (Individual potency appraised
by the method of diallel crossing.) Compt, Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 14: 1-33. 1919.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 136. Dec, 1919.

303. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Schmidt, Johannes. Der Zeugungswert des In-
dividuums beurteilt nach dem Verfahren kreuzweiser Paarung. (Individual potency, based
on experiences in cross-matings.) 8vo., Jfi p. Gustav Fischer: Jena. 1919. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2190.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 145-146. Dec, 1919.

304. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Siegel, W. Das Recht des Gemuseziichters. (The
right of the vegetable breeder.) 8vo. Frick: Wien, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 146.
Dec, 1919.

305. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Sirks, M. J. Sterilite, auto-inconceptibilite et
differentiation sexuelle physiologique. (Sterility, self-incompatibility and physiological differ-
entiation of the sexes.) Arch. Neerland. (Sci. Ser.) Ill, 1917: 205-234. 1917.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 7: 137. Dec, 1919.

306. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Snell, K. Farbenanderung der Kartoffelblute und
Saatenanerkennung. (Color changes of the potato blossom and the recognition of varieties.)
Der Kartoffelbau 1919: 1-3. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 137. Dec. 1919.

40 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

307. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Sommer, K. Uber Kartoffelziichtung und vergleich-
ende anbauversuche mit Neuziichtungen auf der Domane Eilischau. (Potato breeding and
comparative cultural tests of new varieties on the Eilischau estate.) Nachr. Deutsch. Landw.
Ges. Osterr. 1919: 190-193. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 138. Dec, 1919.

308. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Stahel, G. Eerste verslag over de werkzamheden
ten behoeve van de selectie van koffie en cacao. (First report on the effectiveness of selection
in coffee and cacao.) Dept. Landbouw in Suriname (Paramaribo) Bull. 36. 23 p. 1919.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 13S-139. Dec, 1919.

309. Anonymous [R.]. [German rev. of: (1) Stout, A. B. Self- and cross-pollinations in
Cichorium intybus with reference to sterility. Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 6: 333-454. 1916.
(2) Idem. Fertility in Cichorium intybus : The sporadic occurrence of self-fertile plants among
the progeny of self -sterile plants. Amer. Jour. Bot. 4: 375-395. 2 fig. 1917. (3) Idem. Fer-
tility in Cichorium intybus : Self-compatibility and self-incompatibility among the offspring of
self-fertile lines of descent. Jour. Genetics 7: 71-103. Feb., 191S. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry
243.)] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 139-140. Dec, 1919.

310. Anonymous. [German rev. of :Tammes, T. Die Flachsblute. (The flower of flax.)
Recueil Trav. Bot. Nfierland. 15: 185-227. 22 fig. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 140.
Dec, 1919. •

311. Anonymous. [German rev. of:TjEBBES, K., and H. N. Kooiman. Erfelijkheids-
onderzoekingen bij boonen. (Genetical experiments with beans.) Genetica 1: 323-346. 1
colored pi. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1041.)] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 140-141.
Dec. 1919.

312. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Hochpolarisierende Rube und ihre
Nachkommenschaft. (High-polarizing beets and their progeny.) Zeitschr. Zuckerindustr.
Bhmen 42: 387-391. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 141-142. Dec, 1919.

313. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Volkart, A. 40. und 41. Jahresbericht. Schweiz-
erische Samenuntersuchungs- und Versuchsanstalt in Oerlikon-Ziirich. (40th and 41st Ann.
Rept. Swiss seed control and experiment station in Oerlikon-Ziirich.) Land. Jahrb. Schweiz.
1919:1-40. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzticht. 7: 142. Dec, 1919.

314. Anonymous. [German rev. of : von Caron-Eldingen. Physiologische Spaltungen
ohne Mendelismus. (Physiological segregation without Mendelism.) Deutsch. Landw. Presse
1919:515-516. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 114-115. Dec, 1919.

315. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Ubisch, G. Gerstenkreuzungen. (Barley
crosses.) Landw. Jahrb. S3: 191-244. 3 pi., 23 fig. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziieht. 7: 141.
Dec, 1919.

316. Anonymous. Flugblatt der Ungarischen Gesellschaft fur Rassenhygiene und Be-
volkerungspolitik. [Circular of the Hungarian Society for race hygiene and colonization policy.]
Mi'inehener Med. Wochenschr. 66: 76-77. 1919.

317. Anstead, R. D. Improvement of coffee by seed selection and hybridization. Agric
Jour. India 14: 639-644. 1919. — An address at the Coffee Planters' Conference at Mysore,
India. July 1918. It is urged that the growers select high-yielding coffee trees for propagation
in the belief that the present practice of raising nursery stock from "plantation run" seed is
resulting in the deterioration of the varieties. It is suggested that facilities be provided to
economic botanists for developing new varieties by hybridization. Author also reports that
a Mr. Jackson has obtained a vigorous and disease-resistant hybrid which comes true from
seed. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 893.] — J. H. Kemplon.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 1 1

318. AitTHUR, J. M. [Rev. of: FoLSOM, Donald. The influence of certain environmental
conditions, especially water supply, upon form and structure in Ranunculus. Physiol. Res. 2:
209-276. 24 fig. Dec. 1918. (See Hot, Absts. 1, Entry lis*,; ■_>, Entry307.)] Bot.Gaz.69:
271. Mar., 1920.

■319. Bach, Siegfried. Noch ein Bastardierungsversuch Pisum X Faba. [Another hy-
bridization experiment, Pisum X Faba.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 73-74. June 1019. —
Of ten emasculated flowers of Victoria peas, seven were pollinated with Vicia faba pollen,
while three were left unpollinated. All ten were bagged. After 48 hours, 3 of the pollinated
flowers were fixed in Flemming's solution and imbedded in paraffin. Later sections stained
with Heidenhain's haematoxylin showed only a few very short pollen-tubes and these in no
case were observed penetrating the stigmatic surface. After 8 days, the remaining seven
bagged flowers, both pollinated and unpollinated, were found to have developed to the same
degree, small pods 1-2 cm. long 0.4 to 0.6 cm. wide with shriveled seed-"anlagen," and within
another 10 days, these dried up and fell off. Results confirm Gartner and von Tschermak.
Seedless pods are parthenocarpic and formed without pollination. Inability of Vicia faba and
Pisum to hybridize lies in lack of chemical stimuli to promote pollen-tube growth. — Orland
E. White.

320. Bach, Siegfried. Zur naheren Kenntnis der Faktoren der Anthozyanbildung bei
Pisum. (To a more exact knowledge of the factors for the formation of anthocyan in Pisum.)
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 64-65. June 1919. — Red Fi heterozygote Pisum flowers from red-
flowered X white-flowered (ABaB) and pink-flowered X white-flowered (AbaB) crosses are
indistinguishable to the eye from those of the red-flowered homozygote (ABAB). Investi-
gations of the concentration and other characteristics of anthocyan, demonstrated that an-
thocyan development, both qualitatively and quantitatively, is the same in all these genetic
types. Comparisons of pink-flowered homozygous types (AbAb) with the above red-flowered
types shows an anthocyan concentration difference of 2:1 in favor of the latter. Milton Brad-
ley color scale showed color extracts from red-flowered types to be similar to "Violet red,"
and pink-flowered extracts to be "Violet red tint no. 1." Concludes that red-flower coloring
matter differs from that of pink in having greater anthocyan concentration and in being a
distinct kind of anthocyan. Factor A is more important in furnishing a basis for anthocyan
formation than factor B, the latter acting as a modifying agent which changes the anthocyan
of pink-flowers to that of a new type (red) with more violet in it. Names of pea varieties
used are cited and methods of procedure are given in detail. — Orland E. White.

321. Batkson, W. Dr. Kammerer's testimony to the inheritance of acquired characters.
Nature 103 : 344-345. July 3, 1919.— Reply to Prof. MacBride (Nature, May 22), describing
personal experiences which cast serious doubt upon veracity of Kammerer's claims of inherit-
ance of acquired characters in salamanders. — Merle C. Coulter.

232. Baudouin, M. Decouverte d'un procede sur pour reconnaitre le sexe des axis
humains a tout age. [Discovery of a process for the recognition of sex in the human axis at all
ages.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 167: 652-663. 1918.

323. Baumann, E. Zur Frage der Individual- und der Immunitatszuchtung bei der
Kartoffel. [On individual selection and breeding for immunity in potatoes.] Fuhlings Landw.
Zeitg. 1918:246. 1918.

324. Baumann, E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Rapspflanze und zur Ziichtung des Rapses.
[Contribution to a knowledge of the rape plant, and to the breeding of the rape.] Zeitschr. Pflan-
zenziicht. 6: 139. 2 fig. 1918.

325. Becker, J. Vererbung gewisser Blutenmerkmale bei Papaver Rhoeas. [Inherit-
ance of certain floral characters in Papaver Rhoeas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 215-221.
S fig. 1918.

42 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

326. Becker, J. Beitrage zur Ziichtung der Kohlgewachse. [Contribution to the breed-
ing of the Brassicas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 91-99. Dec, 1919.

327. Bergh, Ebbe. Studier over ddvstumheten i Malmohus Ian. [Studies on deaf-
dumbness in the district of Malmohus, Sweden.] 185 X 250 mm., 199 p. Stockholm, 1919. —
Among deaf-and-dumbs there are a greater number of individuals with brown or black hair
and brown eyes than among normal persons in Sweden. The author considers that this fact
is caused by descent from immigrant darker types. He points out that there is scarcely any
chance to restrain the consanguineal deaf-dumbness by legal directions. — K. V. Ossian
Dahlgren.

328. Biggar, H. H. The relation of certain ear characters to yield in corn. Jour. Amer.
Soc. Agron. 1 1 : 230-234. 1919. — Relationship of four ear characters to yield has been measured
for five varieties of maize. The ear characters chosen were weight, length, numbers of rows
and shelling percentage. Data were obtained for a period of several years. It was found
that ear length was the most consistent index of subsequent yield though the highest correla-
tion coefficient found in the series was between weight and yield. The author concludes that
these four ear characters are not closely enough associated with yield to be of value as a basis
for selection. — J. H. Kempton.

329. Bixby, W. G. The butternut and the Japan walnut. Amer. Nut Jour. 10: 76-79.
82, 83, 11 fig. 1919. — Occurrence of rough-shelled walnuts on American-grown trees of the
two Japanese species, Juglans cordiformis and J. Sieboldiana, is discussed, illustrated and
convincingly explained as due to natural hybridization between the above species and the
closely related native American species J. cinerea. Reference is also made to the possibility
of producing new superior hybrid varieties between these oriental and American species which
can be grown throughout a greater range of latitude than these walnuts at present occupy.
— E. B. Babcock.

330. Blakeslee, Albert F. Sexuality in mucors. Science 51 : 375-382, 403-409. 4 fid-
April 16 and 23, 1920.— Mucors are divided into two groups as regards sexual reproduction:
(1) homothallic or hermaphroditic forms, and (2) heterothallic or dioecious forms. The
latter are by far the most abundant in nature. — Sexes of different dioecious species show an
imperfect sexual reaction and produce gametes which, however, never fuse. By this "imper-
fect hybridization" reaction the sex of unmated dioecious races may be determined. In
dioecious species there are two types of zygospore germination. In one case the spores in a
germsporangium are all of same sex, but in the other the spores are of both sexes. Environ-
mental factors have a direct influence on zygospore formation. Many "neutral" races have
been found which give no sexual reaction inter se or with testers of other species. The appar-
ent neutrality of such races may be due to lack of the peculiar environmental conditions neces-
sary for expression of the sex which is actually present. All dioecious species investigated
are sexually dimorphic. Author discusses gamete differentiation in mucors and its possible
significance in relation to sex differentiation in higher forms. — W. H. Eyster.

331. Bliss, A. J. Hybrid bearded Irises. Gard. Chron. 67: 76, 88. Feb. 14, 21, 1920 —
Older varieties of June-flowering bearded Irises may be referred to two main species, pallida
and variegata, or combinations of the two. Amoena is a color variety of variegata, due to in-
hibiting factor for yellow or absence of factors for yellow present in variegata. Neglecla is
squalens minus yellow. Several hundred crossings of plicata color type do not yield conclu-
sive evidence of origin. Characteristic beard is carried through generations of transition
seedlings in which it has disappeared along with plicata color characters, reappearing unaltered
in succeeding individuals of plicata color type. Plicata crossed with pallida or squalens-
pallida forms give plicata only. Crossed with pallida or variegata the plicata type disappears
but when crossed with certain neglectas or sguaZens-carrying plicata the Mendelian ratio of
one-half plicatas is obtained, suggesting that the plicata type has arisen as a mutation from

No. 1, August, 1920] GENERICS 43

pallida by the dropping of a single factor or set of linked factors. Standards and fulls of an
7ns appear to be controlled, both in form and in color, by independent sets of linked factors.
— J. Marion Shull.

332. Bornmuller, J. Notizen zur Flora Unterfrankens nebst einigen Bemerkungen
uber Bastarde und eine neue Form von Polystichum lonchitis (L) Roth im Alpengebiet. [Ob-
servations on the flora of Unterfranken, with several remarks on hybrids and a new form of Poly-
stichum lonchitis (L) Roth in the alpine region. Beih. Biol. Centralbl. 36: 183-199. 1 pi.
1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1704.

333. Boulenger, G. A. Un cas interessant de dimorphisme sexuel chez un serpent
africain (Bothrolychus ater Giinther). [An interesting case of sexual dimorphism in an African
snake.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 6G6-069. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, 1 !ntry 1463.

334. Brandl, J. Die direkte Anpassung und Vererbung der Pflanzen. [Direct adapta-
tion and heredity in plants.] Wiener Landw. Zeit. 68: 790. 1918.

335. Brehm, V. Uber geschlechtsbegrenzte Speziesmerkmale der Siisswasserorganismen
und deren eventuelle experimentelle Aufklarung durch das Mendelsche Spaltungsgesetz. [On
the sex-limited species-characters of freshwater organisms and their experimental explanation
through the Mendelian law of segregation.] Naturw. Wochenschr. 18:4-8. 1919.

336. Bridges, C. B., and T. H. Morgan. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila
melanogaster. II. The second chromosome group of mutant characters. Carnegie Inst. Wash-
ington Publ. 278. P. 123-204, 7 pi., 17 fig. Washington, D. C. 1919.— 39 mutant races with
genes in "second chromosome" are described, paralleling treatment of sex-linked characters
in Carnegie Publ. 237; more than 35 others, discovered since 1916, remain to be described.
Most important genes, with loci, are:

affects mainly eye-facets
affects mainly thorax pattern
affects mainly venation and legs
affects mainly body color
(pr) affects mainly eye color
65.0 Vestigial (vg) affects mainly wings and halteres
73.5 Curved (c) affects mainly wing curvature
96.2 Plexus (px) affects mainly wing venation
105.1 Speck (sp) affects mainly axil of wing

Mutants are treated in chronological order of discovery; special attention is given to genetic
methods employed, and tracing their development. Each mutant is fully described as to
origin, stock, determination of chromosome and locus, reoccurrences, allelomorphs, modi-
fiers, literature, and value as a genetic tool. General topics, discussed under mutants to which
they apply, include: modifying factors, autosomal and balanced lethals, variations in cross-
ing-over due to age, temperature, and specific genes, causes of inviability and methods of
"balancing" inviability in experiments, coincidence and its bearing on map-distance, linkage
method of analysis for multiple-gene cases, etc. — Most of the mutants are recessive, i.e., the
heterozygote can not be distinguished from normal. Only five are dominant; at least four
of these are lethal when homozygous, like most dominant mutations in Drosophila. Some
(e.g., black, blistered, etc.) are partially dominant; i.e., the heterozygote is intermediate be-
tween homozygote and normal, but usually more like normal. Two of the genes (lethal T
and lethal Ila) show their presence only by disturbance of expected ratios, since they have
no visible effect when heterozygous, and kill all flies homozygous for them. Certain genes
are "specific modifiers," i.e., they produce no effect except in the presence of certain other,
"main" genes; thus cream II, cream b, and pinkish, all dilute eosin (sex-linked) eye color,
but produce no visible effect on non-eosin flies; again, one or more second-chromosome genes
reduce bristle number in dichaete (third chromosome), but not in non-dichaete, flies. Pur-

0.0 Star

(£)

15.4 Streak

(fc)

29.0 Dachs

(d)

46.5 Black

(b)

52.7 Purple

(pr

44 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

pie is a "disproportionate modifier" of vermilion, i.e., it modifies vermilion (sex-linked)
more than it does normal eye color. — One series of multiple (quintuple) allelomorphs is de-
scribed; vestigial, strap, antlered, nick, all affecting wings. — The method of construction of
map of second chromosome is described in detail. The "second chromosome" was originally
defined arbitrarily as "that chromosome which carries the gene for black and such other genes
as may be found to be linked to black." Loci lying on the same side of black as does curved
were considered "to the right" or in plus direction from black; those on the opposite side "to
the left" or in minus direction. First distance mapped, black-purple, based on 4S.931 flies,
is 6.2 units (6.2 per cent crossing over), a distance small enough to exclude double crossing
over. Other loci located by combining data from different crosses, corrected, where neces-
sary, for double crossing-over, and weighted according to numbers and probable accuracy.
Thus vestigial was located 18.5 units to right of black, curved 27.0. These four loci form cen-
tral framework of chromosome. Dachs was next located at —17.5 (with reference to black)
streak at —31.1, star at —46.5. Most important locus at right end is speck, at +58.6 from
black. All other loci are located with reference to one or more of the foregoing. As star is
of known loci, farthest to left, it is taken as zero point, and other loci renumbered accordingly.
Present map of second chromosome, made in this way, with location of all genes treated, is
given in text; also constructional map, showing method of construction. — Working map,
subject to continuous changes, shows also value of each mutant. Value depends on constancy
of character, separability from normal, viability, fertility, accuracy of mapping, and location
at convenient distance from other important loci. — C. R. Plunkett.

337. Burt, B. C, and N. Haider. Cawnpore-American cotton: An account of experi-
ments in its improvement by pure-line selection and of field trials, 1913-1917. Agric. Res. Inst.
Pusa Bull. 88. 32 p., 10 pi., 1 fig. 1919.

338. Carle E. Selection pedigree appliquee a la variete local de riz Phung-tien. [Pedi-
gree selection applied to the local rice variety known as Phung-tien.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci.
Saigon 2 : 26-32. 1920.

339. Cohen-Stuart, C. P. Erfelijkheidsleer in dienst der bestrijding van dierlijke
vijanden. [Genetics and the production of animal foods.] Te3rsmannia 1918: 37-48. 191S.

340. Coppola, Alfredo. L'acrocefalosindattilia. Contributo alio studio delle disendo-
crinie congenite. [Acrocephalosyndactylism. A contribution to the study of congenital dis-
endocriny.] Revista di Patol. Nerv. e. Ment. 24: 283-339. 19 fig. Dec. 1919.

341. Correns, C. Fortsetzung der Versuche zur experimentellen Verschiebung des Ge-
schlechtsverhaltnisses. [Continuation of the attempt to experimentally shift the sex ratio.]
Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1918: 1175-1200. 3 fig. 1918.

342. Crozier, W. J. Sex-correlated coloration in Chiton tuberculatus. Amer. Nat. 54:
84-S8. Jan. -Feb. , 1920. — Foot, ctenidia and other soft parts of male are pale buff color. Cor-
responding parts in female are salmon-pink to orange-red, depending principally on state of
maturity of ovary. Pigment belongs to carotin-like "lipochromes." Evidence shows that
color difference cannot possibly help in sex recognition and must therefore be looked upon
as a "metabolic accident." — H. L. Ibsen.

343. Dahlgren, K. V. Ossian. Heterostylie innerhalb der Gattung Plumbago. [On the
occurrence of heterostyly in the genus Plumbago.] Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 12: 362-372. 8 fig.
1918. — Plumbago capaiisis Thunb., P. rosea L. and P. europaea L. are heterostylous plants.
The anthers in long-styled flowers are not placed so deeply in the tube as the stigma in brevi-
stylous ones. Stigmas of the two types are very different both in size and form. The differ-
ence between the pollens of the two sorts of plants is however relatively slight. Among forty
investigated herbarium specimens of Plumbago europaea 18 were short-styled and 22 long-
styled, which indicates that the two types may exist in about equal numbers. Heterostyly
seems to exist also in the genera Ceratostigma and Vogelia. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 45

344. Danforth, C. II. An hereditary complex in the domestic fowl. Genetics 4:
596. 5 fig. Nov., 1919. — Brachydactyly, syndactyly, and ptilopody (booting) are believed
by the author to be the somatic expression of a single gene and data in support of this view
are presented. — //. D. Goodale.

345. Davenport, C. B. Influence of the male in the production of human twins. Aj
Nat. 54: 122-129. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — Both the fathers and the mothers of twins are found
to come from fraternities in which twins are about four times as frequent as in the population
at large. If only the data involving uniovular twins be considered, the frequency of twins
in the parental generation is twelve times that of the population at large, and is as high on
the father's side as on the mother's. Uniovular twinning is directly hereditary through eit her
parent as in the armadillo. It is tentatively suggested that biovular twinning is indicative
of marked reproductive vigor and relative absence of lethal factors on both sides. Since data
from comparative sources show that only a fraction of the eggs ovulated become fertilized
and reach late embryonic stages, and since there is good evidence that a high percentage of
originally twin pregnancies result in only a single viable foetus, the assumption seems justi-
fied that two-egg ovulations are relatively common in man, but that only a small part of such
ovulations actually result in twins that are born and recorded as such. — C. II. Danforlh.

346. Dawson, Andrew Ignatius. Bacterial variations induced by changes in the com-
position of culture media. Jour. Bact. 4: 133-148. Mar., 1919. — As test organism author used
a long-cultivated strain of Bacterium colt. Preliminary test showed that maximum growth
of this organism on meat extract agar was attained in 9 to 11 days. In order to determine
effect on this organism of change in environment, so far as regards media, chemical analysis
was made of 9-days growth collected from 8 different media. These media consisted of 2
per cent agar to which was added various combinations of peptone, meat extract, edestin,
flour proteins, butter soap, glucose and glycerol. Varying proportions of these substances
were used, and in most cases no more than two appeared in each medium in addition to the
agar. One medium consisted of potato juice alone. Considerable variability occurred in
the proportions of nearly all bacterial constituents as the result of growth on these different
media. — Production of acid and gas in various carbohydrates was tested in litmus-carbohy-
drate-serum water after about 200 generations growth on each of the S different media.
Marked variability occurred; on one medium the organism behaved precisely as a B. coli-
communior, while on two others it possessed almost the type characteristics of a B. coli-com-
munis. — Agglutinability of organisms grown on all 8 media were tested with sera obtained by
injection into rabbits of bacteria grown on 4 of the media. Differences in agglutinability were
observed easily as great as those frequently utilized to demonstrate the existence of different
"strains" of the same basic organism. — Morphological changes accompanying growth on dif-
ferent media appeared to be relatively unimportant. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1237.]—
M. A. Barber.

347. Dawson, J. A. An experimental study of an amicronucleate Oxytricha. I. Study
of the normal animal, with an account of cannibalism. Jour. Exp. Zool. 29: 473-513. 2 pi.,
3 fig. Nov. 20, 1919. — Pedigreed cultures of Oxytricha hymenostoina carried 289 generations,
then from November 17, 1917, to April 30, 1918, in small petri-dish mass cultures, revealed the
absence of micronucleus during all phases of life-history of cultures. This amicronucleate
race apparently can live indefinitely under favorable environmental conditions without con-
jugation, autogamy, endomixis. In state resembling syngamy (a) animals fused in pairs die
or separate and reproduce with no signs of depression. (/>) cannibalism occurs causing in-
creased fission rate among progeny of cannibal for short time. [See also next following Entry,
348.]— Austin R. Middlcton.

348. Dawson, J. A. An experimental study of an amicronucleate Oxytricha. II. The
formation of double animals or 'twins.' Jour. Exp. Zool. 30: 129-157. 1 pi., 13 fig. Jan 5,
1920. — Under conditions similar to those in which syngamy usually occurs is strong tendency
for formation of double animals, "twins," by plastogamic dorsal fusion. Twins have all

46 GENETICS [Bot. Absts.. Vol. V,

morphological structures of two single animals, reproduce by transverse fission. Favorable
environmental conditions necessary for continued existence of twins, i.e., do not survive in
competition with single animals. Selection produced striking increase in percentage of twins
in pedigreed culture from single twin animal. Division rate of twins similar to that of normal
animals. Miscible condition of twin cytoplasm handed on to twin progeny but is quickly
lost in single animals derived from twins, kept under identical environmental conditions.
Under favorable environmental conditions twin strains breed indefinitely. Pairing, canni-
balism, twin formation, occur among animals in similar physiological condition, these phenom-
ena therefore interpreted as abortive attempts to undergo syngamy, failure due to amicro-
nucleate condition. Inability to undergo syngamy has no effect on viability of race. [See
also next preceding Entry, 347.] — Austin R. Middleton.

349. De Vries, H. Phylogenetische und gruppenweise Artbildung. [Phylogenetic and
group-wise species-formation.] Flora 11-12 (Festschr. E. Stahl) : 208-226. 1918.— Under the
term "gruppenweise Artbildung" de Vries understands the formation of a species within a
genus. There are also frequent transitions such as the reappearance of the same mutation
within a species. For example, the occasional appearance of a peloric form of Linaria
vulgaris. For the study of "group-wise" species formation the genus Oenothera offers excel-
lent material. The mutations observed in this genus can be divided into general and special.
The general mutations can be considered as parallel and taxonomic from the standpoint of
the systematist, and as progressive and retrogressive from the standpoint of the geneticist.
The parallel mutations appear in different species, as for example, the dwarfs which are pro-
duced every year by Oe. biennis and Oe. Lamarckiana, and the sulfurea form of Oe. biennis
and Oe. suaveolens. Parallelism is not limited to species of one genus but goes beyond these
limitations. For example, the cruciate form of sepals of Epilobium hirsutum cruciatum, and
very rare mutations of Oe. biennis cruciata. As an example of taxonomic mutation de Vries
cites the complete lack of petals in the mutant Oe. suaveolens. — The absence of petals is a
species character of Fuchsia macrantha and F. procumbens. Examples of progressive muta-
tions are those in which a double number of chromosomes occurs, — gigas forms. Among retro-
gressive mutations are Oe. nanella, Oe. brcvistylis and Oe. rubrinervis. The half-mutants are
those which are produced by the fusion of a recessive mutated gamete with a normal gamete,
as the mutant gigas. In this form we have annually 2 to 3 per cent mutants of the dwarf form.
The half-mutants, which can be isolated here, give 25 per cent plants of the gigas form, 50
per cent half-mutants and 25 per cent dwarfs. The first and third forms are constant. The
half-mutants lead us to the group of special mutations. The first example cited by author is
Oe. grandiflora. Two-thirds of the plants grown from seed are green and like the parent,
and one-third consists of yellow-green weak forms which die if left in the open. About one-
fourth of the seed are sterile. This phenomenon author explains in the following manner:
Oe. grandiflora is a half-mutant which segregates into 25 per cent ochracea forms, 50 per cent
half-mutant forms, and 25 per cent homozygous forms, the latter of which cannot be formed
because the factor for grandiflora is united with a lethal factor. Parallel with this is also the
appearance of Oe. Lamarckiana mut. rubrinervis, which segregates in Oe. deserens and Oe. rubri-
nervis. About half of the seeds of Oe. Lamarckiana are empty. This is explained by au'hor
in that Oe. Lamarckiana produces two kinds of gametes, the typical or laeta, and the velutina.
Each gamete has a lethal factor which is closely linked with the character factor. Heterozy-
gous combinations of these factors give good seeds which produce plants and homozygotic
combinations give the sterile seeds. If one of the two lethal factors becomes "vital" the
laeta or the velutina mutation appears. Finally he considers heterogamy, i.e., the phenomenon
in which the direct and the reciprocal crosses are not the same. He assumes that the species
which are crossed are half-mutations but that part of the pollen is lethal. — M. Demerec.

350. De Wilde, P. A. Verwantschap en Erfelijkheid bij doofstomheid en retinitis pig-
mentosa. [Relationship and heredity in deaf-and-dumbness and retinitis pigmentosa.] Dis-
sertation, Amsterdam. 1919. — See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 520.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 47

351. Db Winiwarter. H. Les mitoses de 1 epithelium seminal du chat. [Mitoses of
the seminal epithelium of the cat.] Arch. Biol. 30: 1 87. / doublt pi. withSAfig. 1919. —
Thirty-six chromosomes occur in odgonial cells, thirty-five in spermatogonia!, the difference
depending on the hcterochromosomes. The thirty-four autosomes unite to form seventeen
bivalents in the primary spermatocyte, the heterochromosome constituting an eighteenth
element. Secondary spermatocytes have eighteen and seventeen chromosomes respectively,
and these numbers are maintained in the spermatids and consequently in the spermatozoa,
since the last division is an equation-division. The heterochromosome is not detectable in
the spermatogonia but appears gradually in the telophase of the last spermatogonial division.
It finally becomes visible as an elongated body, often curved or even sharply bent. It never
appears double as does its homologue in the oocyte. It is readily distinguished from the nu-
cleolus, which is spherical and visible in spermatogonia as well as in the spermatocytes. —
Author believes that his earlier counts in oogenesis, in which he and Saintmont recorded
twelve chromosomes on the first maturation spindle and estimated twenty-four as the somatic
number, were incorrect. He now thinks that the division figures were abnormal or that in
fixation the chromosomes agglutinated. — Various authors have described a "monosome" in
the germ-cells of the female cat but author is convinced that what they have regarded as a
single body is the two heterochromosomes in juxtaposition. — The observational part of the
paper is followed by twenty-six pages of discussion of the literature and of general aspects
of the work. — M. F. Guyer.

352. Doblas, Jose Herrera. Seleccion de semillas. [Seed selection.] Bol. Assoc.
Agric. Espafia 11 : 90-95. 1919.

353. Dodge, Raynal. Aspidium cristatum X marginale and A. simulatum. Amer.
Fern Jour. 9: 73-SO. 1919.— Extracts from letter written to C. H. Knowlton by Dodge in
1907 containing a detailed account of his discovery of the Massachusetts fern and the hy-
brid between the crested and marginal ferns. — F. C. Anderson.

354. Dresel, Kurt. Inweiferngelten dieMendelschenVererbungsgesetze in der mensch-
lichen Pathologie? [To what extent do Mendelian laws of heredity hold in human pathology?]
Virchow's Arch. 224: 256-303. 1917.— In general, the so-called laws of heredity (e.g., the "law
of filial regression") are not such in the strictest sense, but the Mendelian law does present a
conception which is fundamental to the study of human heredity. Hereditary disease may
be due to single dominant or recessive factors or to combinations of factors. Occasional de-
partures from expected results seeming to show incomplete dominance are due to the chance
absence from the germplasm of a second factor which is usually present in homozygous form
and which is essential to the actual manifestation of the condition. Sex-linked inheritance
is wholly in accord with Mendel's law arid is the expression of a certain degree of affinity be-
tween the sex factor ("gamete") and the disease-favoring factor. Since the proportion of
affected individuals and female carriers is believed frequently to be high in sex-linked inherit-
ance, the occasional presence of two equally potent but independent factors is suggested.
The essay, which received the "Schulze Preis," is illustrated by forty-seven graphic diagrams
and several tables classifying human diseases on the basis of their behavior in heredity. There
is a rather extensive bibilography. — C. H. Danforth.

355. Dreyer, Th. F. A suggested mechanism for the inheritance of acquired characters.
South African Jour. Sci. 14: 272-277. 1918.

356. Drude, O. Erfahrungen bei Kreuzungsversuchen mit Cucurbita Pepo. [Experi-
ences in crossing experiments with Cucurbita Pepo.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 35: 26-57.
1 pi. 1918.

357. Dunn, L. C. The sable varieties of mice. Amer. Nat, 54: 247-261. S fig. May-
June, 1920. — Sable is a form of yellow mouse showing considerable dark pigment on dorsal
and lateral aspects. Black and tan is an extreme type of this variety. Darkness of sables

48 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V.

and black and tans appears due to genetic causes transferable to non-yellow varieties. Cross-
between agouti (light) and black and tan (dark) gives' Fi sables and agoutis both intermediate.
Further hybrid generations showed many light segregates both yellow and non-yellow, and
fewer dark segregates. No extreme dark segregates found in yellow (black and tan) types,
and few extreme dark non-yellow segregates. These latter proved not homozygous for dark-
ening factors. Results indicate presence of genetic factors similar to those producing dif-
ferences in size of rabbits. This similarity indicates unsuitableness of material for production
of clear and analyzable results, rather than insoluble nature of problem. Correct interpreta-
tion of such differences must await combination of optimum of material and method. — C. C.
Little.

358. Eaton, S. V. [Rev. of: Dorsey, M. J. Relation of weather to fruitfulness in the
plum. Jour. Agric. Res. 17: 103-126. PI. 13-15, 1 jig. June 16, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3,
Entry 1478.)] Bot. Gaz. 69: 269. Mar., 1920.

359. Ebstein, A. Zur Frage des Vorkommens von Kretinen und Albinos in Lehrbach im
Karz. [On the occurrence of cretins and albinoes in Lehrbach in the Harz.] Die Naturwissen-
schaften 6: 561-565. 1918.

360. Eisenberg, P. Untersuchungen iiber die Variabilitat der Bakterien. VII. Uber
die Variabilitat des Schleimbildungsvermogens und der Gramfestigkeit. [Investigations on
the variability of bacteria. VII. On the variability of the slime-building capacity and in Gram-
reaction.] Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk. 82: 401. 1918.

361. Everitt, P. F. Quadrature coefficients for Sheppard's formula (c). Biom. Vol. 1:
p. 276. Biometrika 12: 283. Nov., 1919. — This table gives constants necessary for rapid cal-
culation of the area of a curve, from equally spaced ordinates. — John W. Gowen.

362. Findlay, Wm. M. The size of seed. North Scotland Coll. Agric. Bull. 23. IS p.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1361.

363. Fischer, E. Die Beziehungen zwischen Sexualitat und Reproduktion im Pfianzen-
reich. [Relation between sexuality and reproduction in the vegetable kingdom.] Mitteil
Naturf. Ges. Bern. 1918: 1-4. 1918.

364. Fries, Rob. E. Strodda iakttagelser over Bergianska Tradgardens gymnospei-mer.
[Miscellaneous observations on gymnosperms in the Bergian garden.] Acta Horti Bergiani
[Stockholm] 6: 1-19. 1 pi., 1 fig. 19 — . — The original specimen of Larix americana Michx. f.
glauca Beissn. is characterized by chlorocarpy. Color of needles is certainly in large part
blue-green (glauca). Shoots with typical light-green color are to be seen here and there,
however, which is also shown in a colored plate. The cause of this fact, suggesting chimera-
phenomena, is not as yet explained. Of Picea Engelmannii (Parr) Engelm., author describes
a virgala and a prostrala form, both belonging to the glauca type. Teratological formations
in the strobiles of Larix decidua are described. — Report is given on the winter-resistance of
different kinds of needle-trees. Different observations concerning the process of flowering
are given and discussed. Pinus cembra, Picea nigra and Abies arizonica seem during the in-
dividual life to have a 9 stage preceding the androgynous stage. In Pinus ponder osa var.
scopuloi'um, Picea omorica and Abies concolor, on the contrary, a o" stage seems to precede the
stage with both sexes. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

365. Fritsch, K. Floristische Notizen. Uber Rumex Heimerlii Beck uud einige andere
angebliche Tripelbastarde aus der Gattung Rumex. [Floristic notes on Rumex Heimerlii Beck
and several other supposed triple hybrids in the genus Rumex.] Osterr. Bot. Zeitg. 67: 249-252.
1918.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 49

:>>(). Frolich, G Abstammungs- und Inzuchtsforschungen. Dargestellt an der wicht-
Igsten Blutlinie des weissen deutschen Edelschweines, Ammerlander Zucht. [Pedigree and
inbreeding investigations. Represented in the most important bloodlines of improved white
German swine, Ammerland breed.] Kuhn-Archiv 7: 52-129. 6 pi. 191^.

367. Frolich, G. Wichtigste Blutlinie des weissen deutschen Edelschweines, Ammer-
lander Zucht. [Most important blood-lines of improved white German swine, Ammerland
breed.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse. 46: 24. 12 fig. 1919.

3bS. Frolich, G. Die Beeinfiussung der Kornschwere durch Auslese bei der Ziichtung
der Ackerbohne. [The influencing of grain-weight by selection in the breeding of field beans.]
Friedrichswerther Monatsber. 9: 7-8, 17-20. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 268.

369. Frolich, G. Die Umziichtung von Wintergetreide in Sommergetreide. [The
breeding of winter cereals into spring cereals.] Friedrichswerther Monatsber. 9: 27-30.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 267.

370. Frost, H. B. Mutation in Matthiola. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 2: Sl-190.
1919. — Occurrence, characteristics and heredity of certain aberrant types of Matthiola annua
Sweet are described. These aberrant forms resemble some of the "mutant" types produced
by Oenothera Lamarckiana. It is highly probable that they are originally produced by mu-
tation but it is uncertain whether aberrant individuals arise by immediate mutation or by
segregation. Although the species is typically Mendelian with respect to various characters,
yet individuals of the mutant types give erratic hereditary ratios suggestive of Oenothera.
Six out of eight types studied have shown their heritability in progeny tests. Some of the
types have been produced by many parents and in several pure lines isolated from the original
commercial variety, "Snowflake." — Mutant types are in general inferior to Snowflake in vigor,
fertility and various form and size characters. The early type is practically a smaller and
earlier Snowflake and is probably due to a single dominant mutant factor. In five other
types no true-breeding individuals have yet been found although it is known that in three of
the types the mutant factor (or factors) is carried by both eggs and sperms; hence it appears
that these mutant factors are imperfectly recessive for a lethal effect. Evidence is reported
for linkage of three mutant factors with the factor pair for singleness and doubleness of flowers
but selfing ratios suggest duplication of a chromosome (non-disjunction) as in Oenothera
lata. Further study may help to explain the remarkable genetic behavior of Oenothera and
Citrus. — E. B. Babcock.

371. Fruwirth, C. Zum Verhalten der Bastardierung spontaner Variationen mit der
Ausgangsform. [The hybridization of a spontaneous variation with the original form.] Zeit-
schr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 66-73. 2 fig. June, 1919. — Author observed a spontaneous variation
in color of seed coats of a spotted strain of narrow-leaved lupine {Lupinus angustifolius) .
This variation was a dilution of the color. It has bred true since 1911. Reciprocal hybrids
were made between this dilute-colored form and the parent strain. In Fi dilute color was
dominant when maternal parent was dilute and recessive when the paternal parent was
dilute. Segregation occurred in both hybrids in second and subsequent generations but
behavior was very irregular. — J. H. Kemplon.

372. Fruwirth, C. [German rev. of: Fruwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaft-
lichen Pflanzenzuchtung. II. Die Ziichtung von Mais, Futterriiben und anderen Ruben, Oel-
pflanzen und Grasern. (Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. II. The breeding of maize,
fodder beets and other root-crops, oil plants and grasses.) 3rd. cd., 262 p., 50 fig. Paul Parey:
Berlin, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 144-145. Dec, 1919.

373. Fruwirth, C. Die gegenwartige Organisation der Pflanzenzuchtung in Deutsch-
land und in Osterreich-Ungarn. [The present organization of plant breeding in Germany and
Austro-Hungary.] Nachricht. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. Osterreich 1919: 35-39. 1919.— See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 269.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

50 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

374. Fruwirth, C, Dr. Th. Roemer, and Dr. E. von Tschermak. Handbuch der land-
wirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichtung. 4. Die Ziichtung der vier Hauptgetreidearten trad der
Zuckerriibe. [Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. 4. Breeding of the four chief cereals
and the sugar beet.] 3rd. ed., 8vo., xv + 504 V-, 42 fig- Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 270.

375. Gassner, S. Beitrage zur physiologischen Charakteristik sornmer- und wlnter-
annueller Gewachse, insbesondere der Getreidepflanzen. [Contribution to the physiological
characteristics of summer and winter annuals with special reference to the cereals.] Zeitschr.
Bot. 10: 417-4S0. 7 pi., 2 fig. 1918— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 271.]

376. Gassul, R. Wachtrag zu meiner Mittellung iiber "Eine durch Generationen pra-
valierende symmetrische Fingerkontraktur." [Supplement to my contribution on a symmetrical
contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.] Deutsch. Mediz. Wochenschr. 44:
1196-1197. 1918.— See Also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 578, and next following Entry, 378.

377. Gassxjl, R. Eine durch Generationen pravallerende symmetrische Fingurkontrak-
tur. [A symmetrical contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.] Deutsch.
Mediz. Wochenschr. 44: 1197-119S. 2 fig. 1918. — In. a family from Mecklenburg-Schwerin
three successive generations have produced individuals with permanent bilateral hyper-
extension of the basal phalanges of the fourth and fifth fingers. [See also next preceding
Entry, 377.]— C. H. Danforth.

378. Gatenby, J. Bronte. The cytoplasmic inclusions of the germ-cells. VI. On the
origin and probable constitution of the germ-cell determinant of Apanteles glomeratus, with a
note on the secondary nuclei. Quart. Jour. Microsc. Sci. 64: 133-153. 1 pi., 10 fig. Jan.,
1920. — Author describes his attempts to determine the composition and origin of the germ-
cell determinant in the oocytes of the parasitic hymenopteran, Apanteles glomeratus. He
finds that it arises as a concentrated area at the posterior pole of the young oocytes; that it
is probably formed of albuminous material rather than of chromatin, fat, yolk, or glycogen;
and that the secondary nuclei have no connection with it. — R. W. Hegncr.

379. Gatenby, J. Bronte. [Rev. of: Thomson, J. Arthur. Heredity. 3rd. ed., ix +
627 p., 47 fig. John Murray: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. 14: 517. Jan., 1920.

380. Geisenheyner, L. Uber einigen Panaschierungen. [On some variegations.] Verhandl.
Bot. Ver. Prov. Brandenburg 59: 51-61. 3 fig. 1918.

381. Goebel, K. Zur Kenntnis der Zwergfarne. [To a knowledge of the dwarf ferns.]
Flora 11-12 (Festschr. Stahl) : 268-281. 6 fig. 1918.— Describes dwarf mutants (?) from two
spp. of Aspidium, one sp. of Drynaria (tropical), and two spp. of Platycerium. Mutation has
not yet been directly observed in culture. Dwarfs are characterized by smaller and fewer
cells, smaller or fewer bundles (or both), fewer sori, sporangia, and spores. Describes parallel
investigation of dwarf mutant from Salvia protensis. — Merle C. Coulter.

382. Goldsmith, William M. A comparative study of the chromosomes of tiger beetles
(Cicindelidae). Jour. Morph. 32: 437-487. PL 1-10. 1919.— Five species of Cicindela were
studied, all of which conform to one type in regard to chromosome number and spermatogene-
sis. The male has a "double odd chromosome," the female two, making the formulae 20 -f-
Xx=22o", 20+Xx+Xx = 249 . In other Coleoptera two additional types are known, (1)
20+X+Y=22d", 20+2X=229 ; and (2) 18-r-X = 19d\ 18+2X=209 . In Cicindela spermato-
gonia are in syncytial cysts; the spermatocyte growth period includes, in sequence, the usual
diffuse, leptotene, synaptic (synizesis) and diplotene stages, giving rise to prophase bivalents.
The Xx complex is a single compound body in first division, going undivided to one pole, giv-
ing two types of second spermatocytes. X separates from x in anaphase and both divide in
second division. Spermatogonia each have one nucleolus, oogonia have two, corresponding
to sex-chromosome relations. Early stages of oocyte growth period correspond in general
to those of spermatocyte. — Chas. W. Metz.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 51

483. Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Smith. Studies on cytolysins. I. Some prenatal effects
of lens antibodies. Jour. Exp. Zool. 26: 65 82. 1918. — The lenses of freshly-killed rabbits
were reduced to a pulp and diluted wit h normal salt solution, then injected into the peritoneal
cavity of fowls. Serum obtained from such fowls, when injected into the blood-vascular sys-
tem of pregnant rabbits, attacked the lenses of some of the uterine young, though without ef-
fect on the lenses of the mothers. The affected lenses were rendered opaque or liquid. Sim-
ilar results were obtained in mice. The experiments demonstrate that specific si nut oral
modifications can be engendered in the young in utero by means of specifically sensitized sera.
— Bertram G. Smith.

384. Haecker, V. Vererbungsgeschichtliche Einzelfragen IV. Uber die Vererbung ex-
tremer Eigenschaftsstufen. [Historical genetical problems IV. On the inheritance of extreme
character-gradations.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 145-157. 2 fig. Sept., 1919.
— Various cases already in the literature are brought together in support of the following gen-
eralization: The extreme grades of a varying character will show agreement with the law of
segregation, but the intermediate grades will not show such phenomena among themselves.
The cases cited as evidence include height of peas, Mendel's short and tall vs. Bateson's dwarf
and semi-dwarf; the relations of Oenothera gigas and nanella vs. those of 0. muricata and nan-
ella; stature in man (an original pedigree is given of one family involving a size cross) ; crosses
between the blue and white varieties of flax, and between two species of somewhat different
blues; much the same situation in Veronica; leaf color in Shull's Lychnis; spotting in mice
and rats; and finally various examples from butterfly crosses. In attempting to provide some
theoretical explanation to cover the situation in general, the multiple factor theory is found
impossible without far-reaching supporting hypotheses. A special factor influencing the
extreme plus and minus grades is not accepted because this phenomenon is so far-reaching in
plants and animals, involving color as well as form, that there must be a common final cause
behind all cases. Neither can the popular theory of linkage be called in to help without the
special assumption that linkage is effective when strong concentrations of duplicate factors
are present, and also when these factors are in greatly reduced numbers, but in the inter-
mediate conditions the factors exhibit their independence. But this explanation is not satis-
factory, and in the present state of the science the best one can do is to say that, "In con-
tinuously varying characters the extremes show a greater inclination to inheritable indepen-
dence than do the intermediate grades." In other words, the germplasm determining the
extreme grades is much more stable and independently heritable than that determining the
intermediate grades. The article is concluded with a cursory discussion of the antagonistic
relation between white and black with special reference to mosaic arrangements and to onto-
genetic reversals; it is suggested that one condition of the germplasm may completely turn
over into the other condition with proportional ease. — E. C. MacDowell.

385. Haecker, V. Die Annahme einer erblichen U ^rtragung kdrperlicher Kriegs-
schaden. [The supposition of a hereditary transmission of physical war injuries.] Arch.
Frauenk. u. Eugenik. 4: 1. 1919.

386. Haecker, V. Uber Regelmassigkeiten im Auftreten erblicher Normaleigenschaf-
ten, Anomalien und Krankheiten beim Menschen. [On regularity in the occurrence of heredi-
tary normal characteristics, anomalies and diseases in man.] Mediz. Klinik. 14: 177. 1918.

387. Hammerlund, H. C. Foradling av gronsaksvaxter vid Weibullsholms Vaxtforad-
lingsanstalt. [Improvement of green vegetables at the station for plant improvement of Wei-
bullsholm.] 18 p., 7 fig. W. Weibulls Illustrerade Arsbok (Landskrona) 15 (1920). 1919. —
Gives an account of the results obtained and methods practised. Self-fertility has been found
to be very unequal for different sorts of cabbage, and seems also to vary for other kinds of
green vegetables. In parsnips self-fertility seems however in general to be very effective. —
K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

388. Hansen, W. EinigesuberRubenzucht. [Something about beet-breeding.] Landw.
Zeitung 39: 154-156. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 272.

52 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

389. H[arland], S. C. A note on a peculiar type of rogue in Sea-Island cotton. Agric.
News [Barbados] 19: 29. 1920. — A distinct type characterized by great reduction in size of all
the organs and nearly complete sterility, constitutes about 0.05 per cent of plants in fields of
Sea Island cotton in St. Vincent. No viable pollen is produced and seeds are very rarely de-
veloped. Plants grown from two seeds borne on a "rogue" plant, representing therefore Fi of
cross with Sea Island, had all characters of latter. A self-fertilized strain of Sea Island, which
had produced hitherto only normal plants, gave rise in fourth selfed generation to rogue plants
in 4 out of 62 progenies, the average percentage of rogues having been 1.6. — T. H. Kearney.

390. Heribert-Nilsson, H. N. Ett forsok med urval inom pedigreesorter av havre.
[An experiment with selection among pedigree-varieties of oats.] 4 V- W. Weibulls Illustrer-
ade Arsbok (Landskrona) 15 (1920). 1919.— Of the Danish "Tystofte Gulhvid," by pedigree
selection, a new and more productive variety "Weibull's Fortunahavre" was obtained. Here
is of special interest that selection within the pedigree variety "Tystofte Gulhvid" has given
such a surprisingly good result. This shows that the mother variety "Tystofte Gulhvid,"
must either not have been homogeneous, although secured by pedigree selection, or the ori-
ginal plant of "Fortuna" oats must represent a mutation. Under high humidity combined
with high temperature author has observed that the oat flowers are able to open and, contrary
to the usual rule, disperse their pollen. Cross-fertilization thus is not excluded in oats, which
as a rule however is an autogamous plant. The author also considers as most probable that
the individual used as mother plant had its genotype changed by a new combination. — K. V.
Ossian Dahlgren.

391. Hoffmann, Hermann. Geschlechtsbegrenzte Vererbung und manisch-depressives
Irresein. [Sex-linked inheritance and manic-depressive insanity.] Zeitschr. ges. Neurol.
Psych. 49: 336-356. 1919. — Author reviews suggestion of Lenz that certain diseases repre-
sent dominant sex-linked characters and develops the theoretical expectations for this form
of heredity. One of the critical requirements in these cases is that a father characterized
by a dominant sex-linked trait should produce only normal sons and affected daughters. Lenz
mentioned manic-depressive insanity as possible example of this type. Author finds that in
general the heredity of the diathesis does conform approximately to theoretical expectations
based on Lenz's hypothesis, but there are numerous exceptions. Twelve such exceptional
family histories are presented in some detail. In these families where affected men have
married presumably normal women there have been produced instead of all normal sons
twenty-four affected and two normal, from which it is concluded that manic depressive in-
sanity does not present an. entirely satisfactory example of dominant sex-linked heredity. —
C. H. Danforth.

392. Hopkins, L. S. A crested form of the lady fern. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: S6-8S.
PI. 4- 1919.

393. Jehle, R. A., and others. I. Control of cotton wilt. II. Control of cotton anthrac-
nose and improvement of cotton. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 41l: Supplem. 5-28. Fig.
1-6 and 1-5. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 747.

394. Jelinek, Dr. Nachste Aufgaben der Pflanzenzuchtung und der Sortenpriifung.
[The next problems of plant breeding and variety testing.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 83-90.
Dec, 1919.

395. Kajanus, H. B. (1) Weibullsholms Ambrosia-kokart. 1 p. (2) Weibulls Koli-
bri-fodervicker. 2 p., 2 fig. (3) Weibulls Tardus-Hundaxing. 2 p., 2 fig. W. Weibulls Illus-
trerade Arsbok (Landskrona) 15 (1920). 1919. — New and productive sorts of Pisum sativum,
of Vicia saliva, and of Dactylis glomerata are described: the last flowers about two weeks
later than the common sorts. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 53

396. Kammkkkr. Geschlechtsbestimmung und Geschlectsverwandlung. Zwei geniein-
verstandliche Vortrage. [Sex determination and sex modification. Two popular lectures. 00
p., 16 fig. Perles:Wien, 1918.

397. Kammerer, K. Mischling. [Hybrids.] Ornil.Ii. Monatshefte. 43: 31-32. 1918.

398. Kammerer, Paul. Das Gesetz der Serie. Eine Lehre von den Wiederholungen im
Lebens- und im Weltgeschehen. [The law of series. A doctrine of the repetition in life- and
world-phenomena. 17 X 24-5 cm., 486 p., 8 pi., 26 fig. Deutsche Verlang-Anstalt: Stuttgart,
Berlin, 1919.

399. Kiessling, L. Die Leistuug der Wintergerste und deren zuchterische Beeinflus-
sung. [The performance of winter barley and its modification by breeding.] Illustr. Landw.
Zeitung 1919: 310-311. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 283.

400. Klatt, B. Vergleichende metrische und morphologische Grosshirnstudien an Wild-
und Haushunden. [Comparative metrical and morphological studies on the cerebrum of wild
and domesticated dogs.] Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf. Frcunde. 1918: 35-55. 1918.

401. Klatt, B. Experimen telle Untersuchungen iiber die Beeinflussbarkeit der Erban-
lagen durch den KOrper. [Experimental investigations on the modifiability of the hereditary
factors through the soma.] Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf. Freunde. 1919: 39-45. 1919.

402. Knibbs, G. H. The problems of population, food supply and migration. Scientia26:
485^495. 1919. — Popular mathematical paper showing that the present world's population
increase is too rapid when compared with possibilities of increasing the food supply. — E. M.
East.

403. Kottur, G. L. An improved type of cotton for the southern Maratha country (Bom-
bay Presidency, India). Agric. Jour. India 14: 165-167. 1 pi. 1919.

404. Kraus, and L. Kiessling. Die Landsortenziichtung in Bayern. [Breeding of
local varieties in Bavaria.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1918: 247. 1918.

405. Kroemer, K. Das staatliche Rebenveredelungswesen in Preussen. [State grape-
improvement project in Prussia.] Landw. Jahrb. 51: 1-292. 8 pi., 43 fig. 1918.

406. Kronacher, C. Die deutscher Schweinezucht und Haltung nach dem Kriege.
[German swine breeding and maintenance after the war.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. Zuchtsk.
1918:47. 191S.

407. Kronacher, C. Beitrag zur "Erbfehler" Forschung in der Tierzuchtmit besonderer
Beriicksichtigung des Rorens beim Pferde. [Contribution to investigation of hereditary defects
in animal breeding, with special reference to "Rorens" in horses.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges.
Ziichtungsk. 1918: 1-32. 1918.

408. Kronacher, C. Allgemeine Tierzucht. Ein Lehr- u. Handbuch fur Studierende
u. Ziichter. 4. Abteilung (Abschnitt VI des Gesamtwerkes) : Die Ziichtung. [General animal
breeding. A text and handbook for students and breeders. 4th part (Section VI of the com-
plete work) : Breeding. 8vo, 357 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919.]

409. Lenz, Fritz. Uber dominant-geschlechtsbegrenzte Vererbung und die Erblickkeit
der Basedowdiathese. [Dominant sex-linked heredity and the inheritance of the Basedow dia-
thesis.] Arch. Rassen u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13: 1-9. 5 fig. 1918. — The fact that certain sex-
linked traits are recessive carries with it the corollary that allelomorphic traits are sex-linked
dominants. Biologically there is no essential difference between normal and disease-favoring
determiners, and consequently dominant sex-linked diseases might be expected. Such dis-
eases, instead of being very rare in the female, should be twice as frequent as in the male.

54 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

Affected females mated to normal males should produce in equal numbers both normal and
affected sons and daughters while affected males mated to normal females should produce
only normal sons and affected daughters. The incidence of several diseases of man, including
Basedow's, approximate the expectations for dominant sex-linked traits. That they are such
can not be stated with assurance till further data shall have been accumulated. It is the
purpose of this paper to point out the possibility of dominant sex-linked traits and to indicate
their expected mode of inheritance. — C. H. Danforth.

410. Lillie, Frank Rattray. Problems of fertilization. 13X 19 cm.,xii-\-27S p., 19 fig.
Univ. Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919. — Author distinguishes two phases of fertilization, re-
juvenescence, and combination of inheritance from two parents. Latter is only feature com-
mon to all cases of fertilization. Morphology of fertilization is described. Chromosome equiv-
alence of egg and sperm is emphasized. Origin of centrosome in fertilized egg is regarded as
physiological rather than morphological. There is no evidence that mitochrondria of sperm
have any function in heredity. Pathological polyspermy strongly supports nuclear theory
of heredity. — Behavior of sperm under various circumstances is described, especially in
response to chemical stimuli, including those originating in egg. Agglutination of sperm is
due to substance in sperm, which is specific in its action. Approach of sperm to egg is not
due solely to random activity, nor to chemotactic orientation alone, but to combination of
different types of behavior. Gametes must both be in definite condition before fertilization
may occur, and that condition lasts variable time in different species. Sperm owes its power
of fertilization to a substance, not to its motility, and this substance may also be responsible
for agglutination. Egg also owes fertilization capacity to hypothetical substance (fertilizin).
Fertilization is accompanied by increase in rate of oxidation, changes in permeability, changes
in colloidal condition, and chemical alterations. Fertilization involves long series of events,
some cortical, some internal, and process may be arrested in middle, making fertilization
partial. Such incomplete activation of egg results sooner or later in arrest of develop-
ment.— Tissue specificity in fertilization is demonstrated when spermatozoa fail to enter
accessible cells other than ova. Species specificity is shown by hybrid fertilization in echino-
derms, teleosts, and Amphibia, and by self-fertilization in various animals. Such hybridiza-
tion experiments demonstrate some non-specific and some specific factors. Latter are found
in cortical reactions of egg. If cortical barrier is passed by foreign sperm, fertilization pro-
ceeds normally. In plants, sterility is due to inhibition of growth of pollen tube, not to
incompatibility of gametes, and in some cases sterility factors are known to be inherited. Spec-
ificity is doubtless due to chemical phenomenon, problem related to agglutination of sperms.
Analogy with immunity reaction is pointed out, but with warning that these phenomena may
be fundamentally unlike. — Activation involves two phases, cortical and internal. Agglutina-
tion of sperm to egg is first step in cortical phase, and is due to agglutinating substance (fer-
tilizin). This substance is combined on entrance of one sperm, and egg does not react to other
sperms. Author criticises Loeb's view that activation of egg is due to cortical cytolysis;
discusses increase of oxidation, also gelation and liquefaction of cortical protoplasm, and elec-
trical polarization. Internal phase of activation mainly relates to preparation for karyo-
kinesis. — A. Franklin Shull.

411. Ltjndborg, H. Befolkningsstudier i Norrbotten och nordliga Lappland sarskildt
inagra f jallbyar av Tome sjo. [The structure of population in Norrbotten and in the northeast
part of Lappland, specially in some mountain villages near Lake Torne.] Ord och Bild [Stock-
holm] 28: 641-648. 11 fig. 1919. — Author describes how the Lapponians are going over to
settle in houses and the social and race biological consequences of this change. Crossings
between Swedes, Finlanders and Lapponians are not uncommon. The lowest and poorest
part of the population includes as a rule Lapponians and half-blood Lapponians; the middle
part are Finlanders; the upper portion consists of Swedes or Swede Finlanders. The younger
a village is and the more westward up to the mountain it is situated, the more the Lapponians
or Lapponian Finlandian elements dominate. The reason for this difference in the structure
of population depends undoubtedly upon the race inequalities or differences in cultural quali-
fication of the tribes in question. — K. V . Ossian Dahlgren.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 55

412. Lundborg, H. Olika folk och kulturer, sedda i rasbiologiskt ljus. — Internationell
Politik. [Different peoples and cultures in race-biological light.) 125X200 mm., 8 p. Stock-
holm, 1919. — Author treats the consequences of (1) intcr-marriages, (2) extreme mixing of
races, (3) marriages within the same tribe (inter-marriages in its wide sense) and (4) race-
mixings between related peoples. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgrcn.

413. Lundborg, H. Om modern arftlighetsforskning med sarskild hansyn till mannis-
kan. [On modern inquiry into heredity with special consideration to mankind.] Ord och Bild
[Stockholm] 28: 18G-19G. 4 jig. 1919. — Popular treatise. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

414. Lundborg, H. En svensk bondeslakts historia sedd i rasbiologisk belysning. —
Svenska Sallskapets for Rashygien skriftserie II. [The history of a Swedish peasant family
in eugenical light. No. II. of the papers of the Swedish Eugenical Association. 13S X 215 n

40 p., S fig. P. A. Norstedt & Soners Forlag: Stockholm, 1920. — Author first discusses genea-
logical investigation as a cultural subject. Especially in Sweden it might be possible to prac-
tise genealogical inquiries on a greater scale, because the registration of the inhabitants of
Sweden since centuries ago is more complete than in any other country. The "husf: rhors-
bocker" are especially important, because in these books on the same page are noted whole
families. After a small chapter on "genealogical principles"" the author proceeds to a popular
description of his investigation on the Lister family. This family was extensively discussed
in author's great work "Medizinisch-biologische Familieforschungen innerhalb eines 2232-
kopfigen Bauergeschlechtes in Schweden," Jena 1913. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

415. Lynch, Clara J. An analysis of certain cases of intra-specific sterility. Genetics
4: 501-533. 2 fig. Nov., 1919. — Analysis of sterility in certain mutant races of Drosophila
melanogastcr. Fused is sex-linked recessive. Males are fertile with normal or heterozygous
females; fused females produce no offspring when mated to fused males, only a few (and these
all daughters) when mated to normal males. XXY fused females, mated to normal males,
produce a few sons, but these are all non-disjunctional exceptions. Hence fused gene acts
to prevent eggs from developing, but this action may be inhibited by its normal allelomorph,
either before maturation (in heterozygous female) or after fertilization (in not-fused offspring
of fused female). Rudimentary, another sex-linked recessive, acts in same way as fused, but
not so completely, as rudimentary females produce a few rudimentary offspring. Morula,
reduced bristle, dwarf (autosomal recessives) have sterile females and fertile males. Dibro
(autosomal recessive) apparently sterile in both sexes. Cleft (sex-linked recessive) has
sterile males, and females have never been obtained. In none of the cases studied was it
possible to isolate a sterility gene independent of the mutant gene itself. Sterility is prob-
ably one of the effects of these mutant genes. — A. H. Sturtevant.

416. Macoun, W. T. Blight resistant potatoes. Canadian Hortic. 42: 129-156. 1919 —
See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1644.

417. MacBride, E. W. The inheritance of acquired characters. Nature 103: 222. May
22, 1919. — Refers to recent work of Kammerer published in Archiv fur Entwicklungsmechanik,
1919, extending earlier experiments with Alycetes, the "mid-wife" toad. These normally
pair on land, the horny patch on the hand of the male, characteristic of water-breeding Anura,
being absent. Kammerer had previously found that Alycetes subjected to a higher tempera-
ture, paired in water, and that the Fi and F2 generations developed the horny patch, even
when returned to a terrestrial environment. It is now found that the patch persists in the
F« generation. — McBride deprecates certain criticisms of the work of Kammerer and is in-
clined to support the results as evidence toward the inheritance of acquired characters. He
notes that arrangements for a repetition of the experiment in the Zoological Gardens, are
being made, although a minimum of six years will be required. — Although author is inclined
to challenge Mendelians in connection with the results achieved by Kammerer, experiments
with Drosophila, particularly where abnormal abdomen develops, are suggestive that a com-
mon explanation may underlie both phenomena. — L. B. Walton.

56 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

418. Meader, Percy D. Variation in the diphtheria group. Jour. Infect. Diseases 24:
145-157. 1919. — Author's material consisted of 25 different strains of the diphtheria bacillus,
isolated, for the most part, from throats of persons infected with diphtheria during epidemic
of the disease. Pure cultures were made of each strain by repeated plating on agar. From
each pure culture a series of subcultures were made by plating dilutions so prepared that as
far as possible each colony represented the progeny of a single organism. Repeated subcul-
tures were made from selected colonies of each strain. Progeny of the various colonies were
examined in 20 hour slant cultures on Loeffler's serum stained with LoefHer's methylene blue.
The frequency of the various Wesbrook types of morphology were tabulated for the original
type of each strain and for the progeny of each type. Employing as a criterion of variability
in type the fact that the predominating types of morphology present in subcultures were dif-
ferent from those present in the original culture, the author found that of his 25 strains 8
showed morphologic variation, 4 may have varied only slightly, if at all, and 13 showed no
reasonable indication of variation. — -To determine fermentative variability, each of the 25
strains were compared with their descendants after the 5th and 10th platings as regards their
power to produce acid in dextrose, lactose, maltose, dextrin, and saccharose. More than half
of the cultures investigated varied after successive platings as regards their power to produce
acid in carbohydrates. — Variability of virulence of the 25 strains was tested by means of the
inoculation into guinea pigs of each original type and of its progeny after the 5th and 10th plat-
ings. Some strains gained virulence, some lost it and some remained constant in the course
of successive platings. Variations in virulence were only in part correlated with morphologic
types. Cultures containing granular forms were frequently non-virulent, while those which
consisted of solid-staining forms for the greater part of their cultivation were consistently
non-virulent. — From a biometric study of the fermentative reactions of members of the diph-
theria group it appears that they constitute a genetically related group of organisms. In
subcultures derived from one parent strain variations in morphology, in fermentative reac-
tions and in virulence, occur, but the virulence of a strain is not correlated with its fermenta-
tive reactions nor closely correlated with its morphology. — M. A. Barber.

419. Metjnissier, A. De quelques idees sur la selection des legumes. [Some ideas on
the selection of vegetables.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 300-303. June, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 1855.

420. Meves, G. Eine neue Stiitze fur die Plastosomen theorie der Vererbung. [A new
support for the plastosome theory of heredity.] Anat. Anzeig. 50: 1918.

421. Molz, C. Natiirliche und kiinstliche Auslese zur Erzielung widerstandsfahiger
Sorten. [Natural and artificial selection for the achievement of resistant varieties.] Deutsch.
Landw. Presse 1918: 19. 1918.

422. Morgan, Thomas Hunt. The physical basis of heredity. 14x21 cm., 300 p., 117
fig. J. B. Lippincott Co. : Philadelphia, 1919. — A presentation of the modern factorial theory
of heredity, comprising the phenomena of segregation, independent assortment, linkage and
crossing over, the linear arrangement of the genes, interference, and the limitation of the
linkage groups. Both the genetic evidence and the cytological are presented, and it is shown
how the genetic phenomena are explained by the chromosome mechanism. On the basis of
these principles an analysis is given of sex and sex-linked inheritance, non-disjunction, par-
thenogenesis and pure lines, cytoplasmic and maternal inheritance. There is a discussion of
variation in linkage caused by hereditary factors and by environmental conditions. The
chapter on "Variation in the number of the chromosomes and its relation to the totality of the
genes" deals with triploidy and tetraploidy, and recent work indicating deficiency, dupli-
cation of factors in a chromosome, and transposition of factors from one chromosome to an-
other. The chapter on mutation includes the explanation of pseudo-mutations by balanced
lethals. In "The particulate theory of heredity and the nature of the gene" the author dis-
cusses the relation of the genetic factor or gene to somatic characters and to ontogeny. —
Alexander Wcinslci/i.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 57

[_';;. MORGAN, T. II. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila melanogaster. IV.
A demonstration of genes modifying the character "notch." Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ.
27s. P. 343-88S. 1 pi. ,15 Jig. Washington, D. C. 1919.- Notch is a dominant sex-linked gene

affecting wings, lethal when homozygous; consequently all notch flies are female and heterozy-
gous. Mass selection in the direction of slight notching, carried out through 24 generations
of Drosophila melanogaster, resulted in marked change in direction of selection. Extreme
selected females, out-crossed to wild-type flies, gave ordinary notch in first generation, show-
ing notch gene unmodified. Linkage relations demonstrated results of selection due to re-
cessive modifying factor in second chromosome. Second experiment (19 generations) gave
similar results; crosses showed effect due to same modifier in both cases. — A modification in
opposite direction, called "short notch," appeared several times; outcrosses to wild flies
gave ordinary notch. Linkage relations showed this modification due to recessive modifier
in first chromosome. — Notch gene is always necessarily heterozygous, but all results show no
"contamination" by its normal allelomorph. Other mutations, modifying wings in somewhat
similar or different ways, were all located in other chromosomes or different loci in X chromo-
some, thus showing them independent of notch. — High sex-ratios (76:1 and 119:10), given by
two notch females, were undoubtedly due to lethal mutation in not-notch X chromosome,
as shown in other cases. Only those few sons having crossover X survive. — C. R. Plunkett.

424. Morgan, T. H., and C. B. Bridges. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila
melanogaster. I. The origin of gynandromorphs. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 278. 122
p., 4 7^., 10 fig. Washington, D. C. 1919. — The genetic situation in Drosophila melanogaster
made possible experimental demonstration of causes of production of mosaics and gynandro-
morphs (sex-mosaics). Principal recent theories are: delayed fertilization of one cleavage
nucleus (Boveri 18S8) ; development from a supernumerary sperm (Morgan 1905) ; and chromo-
somal elimination, i.e., elimination of one X chromosome from one of daughter cells at an early
embryonic division (Morgan 1914). Critical evidence is obtained when gynandromorphs
are hybrids of known sex-linked characters, and also contain known autosomal characters.
A number of such cases, all described in detail, all show male and female parts differ by sex-
chromosome only. The elimination theory is only possible one in these cases, and covers
all but very few gynandromorphs in Drosophila. — Gynandromorphs start as females; a strik-
ing preponderance of female parts is found, as expected on elimination theory. Starting as
a male is theoretically possible, but not indicated in any known cases. Starting as XX
female, the male parts will be XO, therefore sterile (as shown in primary non-disjunction);
except in case of XXY (non-disjunctional) individuals, where male parts will be XY, fertile.
All evidence from gynandromorphs with male abdomen and testes supports these predictions.
— Earlier theories of gynandromorphs are critically considered. The only one besides elimi-
nation found necessary to employ, in a few cases, is the theory of bi-nucleated eggs. Don-
caster has found such eggs in Abraxas. — Both gonads of same individual are always alike;
which is expected if germ plasm of Drosophila arises from single cell, as in Miastor, Chiro-
nomus, Calliphora, and other flies. — Only one certain case was found of a somatic mosaic,
i.e., one not involving sex-chromosome; may be accounted for by autosomal elimination or
bi-nucleated egg. Rarity may be due to failure of autosomal elimination or to inviability of
such flies. — Ten somatic mutations described are all males, of which nine look like known sex-
linked characters. This is in accord with expectation, if mutation occurs in only one chromo-
some of a pair, as is highly probable; since visible sex-linked mutations are four times as fre-
quent as all dominants. Mosaics in plants are discussed; somatic mutation or chromosome
elimination the most probable explanations in most cases. — All known gynandromorphs of
Drosophila are thoroughly treated as to parentage, description, and explanation, with figures
and diagrams of chromosomes. The great majority are adequately explained by simple X
elimination, including a number from XXY mothers. Many are approximately bilateral,
others largely antero-posterior, some mainly female, a few mainly male, and a few very
irregular. In all, the male and female parts and their characters are strictly self-determining.
No region, however small, is interfered with by neighboring parts or action of the gonad.
The few cases not explicable by simple elimination are most simply explained as binucleated

58 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

eggs; but on this view there should be as many autosomal mosaics as gynandromorphs of this
type, which is not the case. An alternative explanation is non-disjunction, followed by either
"somatic reduction" or double elimination in a cleavage division; no critical evidence to de-
cide between these views. — Gynandromorphs in other animals are discussed at length. In
bees, both Etjgster and von Engelhardt gynandromorphs can be accounted for by chromoso-
mal elimination, so far as the evidence goes. In moths, those cases where sex-linked factors
furnish critical evidence can be explained by chromosome elimination ; here the gynandromorphs
start as males (ZZ). This explanation applies to two mosaics in Abraxas. Toyama's gynan-
dromorphs in silk-worms can be explained as bi-nucleated eggs. Goldschmidt's mosaics in
the gypsy moth can not be explained because there are no sex-linked factors involved. — In
Crustacea, molluscs, and some worms (e.g., Bonellia) external conditions and age seem, in
some cases, to be factors in determining sex; there may be genetic factors that determine sex
under ordinary, or other, circumstances. — In birds, a few bilateral gynandromorphs are known.
Internal secretions of the ovary are known to suppress male secondary sexual characters in
most cases. Apparently particular differences, in some species, are not influenced. — In man
and other mammals, cases of gynandromorphs are known. Mechanism of sex determination
is the same as in Drosophila. Modification by hormones also possible. Freemartin caused
by male sex-hormone, through common circulation, suppressing normal development of ovary
(Lillie). Possibility is suggested that cancer may be conditioned by inherited gene or genes
liable to frequent somatic mutation or chromosome aberrations. — C. R. Plunkett.

425. MossfiRi, V. M. Egyptian cottons: Their deterioration and means of remedying it.
Bull. Union Agric. Egypte 16: 53-79. 1918. — Supposed greater resistance to "pink boll worm"
(Pcclinophora gossypiclla) of certain varieties of cotton in Egypt said to be due merely to
greater precocity. In India, supposed home of this insect, however, native cottons appear
really more resistant than introduced Egyptian cotton. Deterioration of varieties grown in
Egypt believed to be caused by mixing of seed and by natural Ivybridization, rather than by
any process of spontaneous degeneration. Three methods of procedure are suggested for im-
provement of Egyptian cotton crop: (1) "Mendelian synthesis" as practiced by Balls; (2)
selection and roguing to increase uniformity of existing varieties; (3) isolation of desirable
mutants which originate new varieties. — T. H. Kearney.

426. Myerson, Abraham. Mental disease in families. Mental Hygiene 3: 230-239.
Apr., 1919. — Author used records of Taunton State Hospital from 1854 to 1916 covering 16,000
persons, of whom 1547 were related. He compared the marriage rate of four groups — alco-
holic insanities, general paresis, dementia praecox and senile dementia. In the first three
groups the percentage of married males was found to be less than for females, in the seniles
the reverse was true. The dementia praecox group showed the lowest fertility as compared
with the total population. He concludes that marriage acts as barrier to propagation of en-
dogenous diseases, such as dementia praecox, but not against exogenous, such as syphilis. —
The preponderance of insane women recorded may be accounted for on the theory that women
transmit their mental peculiarities to their female children more than to their male, but there
is a more obvious explanation. Since men migrate to other districts more than women, female
descendants are more likely to appear in a given asylum. The data at this particular institu-
tion show the mother-daughter group to be the largest and sisters decidedly outnumber
brothers. — Notwithstanding the numerous factors tending to discount the actual meaning
of the figures, author considers it probable that descendants of insane who themselves become
insane do so at an earlier age than their ancestors and are tending to reproduce themselves in
smaller proportion. — With regard to the character of transmission his findings lead him to
believe that (1) The paranoid type of psychosis gives either paranoid or dementia praecox.
(2) Dementia praecox gives dementia praecox or feeblemindedness. (3) Manic depression
gives manic depression or dementia praecox. (4) Involution psychosis gives dementia prae-
cox. (5) Senile psychosis gives any form of psychosis, imbecility or epilepsy. — Thus all
roads seem to lead to dementia praecox and thence to feeble-mindedness. — His results further
indicate that insanity among siblings tends to be similar, and that it is more often associated

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 59

with low-grade mentality than superior. This is at variance with the popular notion of the
close relationship between genius and insanity. — The high incidence of tuberculosis with
insanity often leads to mistaken inferences. — The extreme frequency of tuberculosis in the
total population must be remembered as well as the fact that the insane, by reason of their
deterioration, tend to live in conditions predisposing to the disease. — Two other students,
Koller and Diem, discovered thai insane aunts and uncles occur as frequent ly in families of
sane as of insane and that, therefore, collateral insanity is relatively unimportant unless asso-
ciated with parental insanity. — These studies demonstrate that our knowledge is inadequate
to warrant theories of neuropathic heredity and how imperative such research is. — Miriam
C. Gould.

427. Nachtsheim, H. Der Mechanismus der Vererbung. [The mechanism of heredity. |
Naturw. Wochenschr. 18: 105-114. 1919.

428. Nachtsheim, H. Berichtigung. [A correction.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 20:295. 1919.

429. Nakahara, Waro. A study on the chromosomes in the spermatogenesis of the stone-
fly, Perla immarginata Say, with special reference to the question of synapsis. Jour. Morphol.
32:509-529. PI. 1-3. 1919. — Ten chromosomes appear in the spermatogonia division. The
chromosome group consists of two pairs of V's, a pair of rods, two spherules (m-chromosomes),
and two unpaired rods, one of which is much longer than the other. These last are interpreted
as the X- and Y-chromosomes, respectively. Preparatory to the first spermatocytic division
a double spireme forms out of the resting nucleus, and this process the author interprets as
a precocious split for the second spermatocytic division, which follows the first without a
resting stage. Homologous chromosomes are connected to each other telosynaptically in
the spireme; later, the members of each pair bend toward each other at the synaptic point and
become reunited parasynaptically before the metaphase, thus forming rings and tetrads. —
Bertram G. Smith.

430. Nelson*, J. C. Monomorphism in Equisetum Telmateia Ehrh. Amer. Fern Jour.
9: 93-94. 1919.-

431. Nicolas, G. Variations de l'androcee du Stellaria media L. en Algerie. [Variations
of the androecium of Stellaria media L. in Algeria.] Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Afr. Nord. 9: 135-137.
1918.

432. [Norstedt, C. T. O.] [Rev. of: Harms, U. Uber die Geschlectsvertheilung bei
Drya octopetala L. nach Beobachtungen in Kgl. Botanischen Garten Berlin-Dahlem. (Con-
cerning sex ratios in Drya octopetala in the Kgl. Botanical Garden Berlin-Dahlem.) Ber.
Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36:292-300. Fig. 5-10. 1918.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 247. 1918.

433. Northrop, J. II. Concerning the hereditary adaptation of organisms to higher
temperature. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 313-31S. 1920.— The experiments described were per-
formed with races of Drosophila raised on sterile yeast cultures and handled with bacterio-
logical care to prevent the entrance of bacteria into the breeding flasks. The incubators em-
ployed to maintain the higher temperatures were controlled within 0.2° to 0.3°G. of the desired
temperatures by means of an original device regulating the flow of water through the jackets.
Drosophila will develop at 32.5°C. ; the rate of development increases from 10° up to 27.5°,
but from 27.5° the rate falls. If the higher temperature in which a fly is raised occasions a
lasting adaptation, it would be expected that eggs from such a fly would show increased re-
sistance to high temperature. It was found that flies raised at 20°C. produce eggs that are
capable of full development when raised in temperatures 29° and 32°C., but when raised in a
temperature of 33° they will not go beyond the pupal stage. Flies raised in incubators at 32°
produce eggs that will develop into adults when raised at 29°, but at 32° and 33° they will not
even form larvae. The difference in these two sets of results is not due to deleterious effects

60 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

of increased temperature upon the eggs before they are laid, because the flies raised at 20c
did not tend to produce eggs any less resistant after they had been laying in the high tempera-
ture for a week or 10 days. Cultures of flies could not be held at 30° for successive generations ;
but if the adults of each generation were removed from high temperature for 24 hours or more
within a week after they hatched, the culture could be continued for the rest of the time at
this temperature. One culture was continued in 30° by means of this intermittent cooling
for ten generations and another culture was raised for 15 generations uninterruptedly at 28°;
in neither case did there appear any sign of adaptation. The flies were still unable to produce
more than one generation at a continuous temperature of 29° or over. "There is no evidence
of any hereditary adaptation to higher temperature." — E. C. MacDowell.

434. Oberstein, O. Uber das Vorkommen echter Knospenvariationen bei pommerschen
und anderen Kartoffelsorten. [Occurrence of true bud variation in Pommeranian and other
varieties of potato.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 560-561. 1 pi. 1919. — See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 296.

435. Ohly. Ziichterische Beobachtungen in einer Merinofleischschafherde. [Breeding
observations in a Merino sheep herd.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 1918: 235. 1918.

336. Pascher, A. Oedogonium, ein geeignetes Objekt fur Kreuzungsversuche an ein-
kernigen haploiden Organismen. [Oedogonium, a suitable object for the study of crossing in
uninucleate haploid organisms.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36: 168-172. 1918. — Importance of
study of results of crossing haploid organisms is emphasized, as illustrated by the work of
Burgeff with Phycomyces and of Pascher with Chlamydomonas . Author reports successful
crosses between two species of Chara and between two species of Spirogyra. After a discus-
sion of the advantages, disadvantages, and difficulties offered by various groups of algae for
work of this nature, it is reported that species of Oedogonium have shown themselves very
favorable for hybridization experiments. Most species of this genus are easily cultivated;
the isolation of single filaments and the bringing them together in desired combinations
within a confined space, such as a small tube, offer no difficulties; the filaments with maturing
oospores can be transferred to agar, where they readily complete their development; the zoo-
spores of different species are marked by characteristic differences in such respects as the shape
of the cell as a whole and the form of the anterior end; and the oospore, on germinating, gives
rise to four zoospores, whose nuclei result from the reduction divisions, and which resemble,
except in size, the zoospores produced by vegetative cells of the same species. In making a
cross, the female at least must belong to a dioecious species. Probably dioecious forms with
dwarf males are especially suitable. In cultures containing several species, the author has
found forms which, especially in the characters of the oospores, betrayed a hybrid nature.
It is probable that some forms which have been described as species were really hybrids.
A list of species of Oedogonium is given which are recommended for experiments in hybrid-
ization.— C. E. Allen.

437. Pearl, Raymond. [Rev. of : East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. Inbreed-
ing and outbreeding: their genetic and sociological significance. 14x21 cm., 285 p., Jfi fig.
J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919.] Science 51: 415-417. April 23, 1920.— See Bot. Absts.
4, Entry 571.

438. [Pearson, Karl.] Quadrature coefficients. Biometrika 12: 000. Nov., 1919. —
Formulae from Biometrika I, p. 276, are reprinted as preface to a table by P. F. Everitt to
facilitate the calculation of areas within a curve. — John W. Gowen.

439. Petren, A., and others. Angaende skrivelse till Konungen med begaran om
utredning och forslag i fraga om upprattandet av ett svenskt rasbiologiskt institut. — Motion n:o
7 i Forsta Kammaren. [Concerning a writing to the Swedish government proposing an extrica-
tion of and a project to establish a Swedish eugenical institute. Motion n :o 7. in the first Cham-
ber of the parliament. Bihang till riksdagens protokoll 1920. 190 x 225 mm., 27 p. Stock-

No. 1, August, 1920 GENETICS rjl

holm, 1920. — Mentions reasons for and importance of establishing a race-biological institute.
Parliament is asked to demand a special proposal for the organization of such an institute. —
K. V. Ossian Daldgrcn.

440. Piltz, J. Uber homologe Hereditat bei Zwangsvorstellungen. [On homologous he-
redity in hallucination.] Zeitschr. ges. Neur. u. Psych. 43. 1918.

441. Plunkett, C. R. Genetics and evolution in Leptinotarsa. Amer. Nat. 53:561-566.
Nov.-Dec, 1919. — Tower's work is almost entirely in agreement with the modern Mendelian
theory of heredity. Where there is apparent disagreement, critical evidence is lacking
because of Tower's failure to subject the individuals he worked with to a rigorous genetic
analysis. — Alexander Weinstein.

442. RagioniIsri, Attilio. Un bel problema per i biologi: Sulla comparsa dell' odore nei
fiore delle "roselline di Firenze" (Ranunculus asiaticus var.). [A good problem for biologists:
On the appearance of odor in the flowers of the "Florentine roselline" (Ranunculus asiaticus).]
Bull. R. Soc. Toscana Orticult. 44: 87-94. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1832.

443. Rasmuson, Hans. Genetische Untersuchungen in der Gattung Godetia. [Geneti-
cal investigation within the genus Godetia.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 37: 399-403. 1919 —
A very condensed preliminary note about author's experiments with Godetia Whitneyi and G.
amoena. Branching habit, leaf-characters, color, size, form and doubleness of the flowers,
are analyzed. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

444. Raum, J. Ein weiterer Versuch iiber die Vererbung die Samenfarbe bei Rotklee.
[A further study on the inheritance of seed color in red clover.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:
148-155. Dec, 1919.

445. Rebel, H. Ein neuer Tagfalterhybrid. [A new butterfly hybrid.] Verhandl. K. u.
K. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien 68: 273-276. 1918.

446. Richet, C., and H. Cardot. Mutations brusques dans la formation d'une nouvelle
race microbienne. [Sudden mutations in the formation of a new race of microbes.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 657-663. 1919.

447. Roberts, Herbert F. A practical method for demonstrating the error of mean
square. School Sci. Math. 19: 677-692. Nov., 1919.— This paper treats of the mean, the
standard deviation and coefficient of variation with especial reference to practical methods
of illustrating the error of the mean square to students of little training in mathematics. —
John W. Gowen.

448. Roemer, Th. tiber Lupinenziichtung. [On Lupine breeding.] Deutsch. Landw.
Presse 1919: 174-175. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 299.

449. Rother, W. Phyllokakteen Kreuzungen. [Phyllocactus crosses.] Monatsschr.
Kakteenkunde 29: 32-33. 1919.— Reciprocal crosses of P. Wrayi and P. Vogclii are described
and differentiated. — A. S. Hitchcock.

450. RrjzicKA, Vladislav. Restitution und Vererbung. Experimenteller, kritischer
und synthetischer Beitrag zur Frage des Determinationsproblems. [Restitution and heredity.
Experimental critical and synthetic contribution to the problem of determination.] Julius
Springer: Berlin, 1920.

451. St. John, Harold. Two color forms of Lobelia cardinalis L. Rhodora 21: 217-21S.
1919. — Describes variation in color of flowers of Lobelia cardinalis. A form with rose-colored
flowers, found in New Hampshire, is named/, rosea. One with white flowers was named alba
by A. Eaton in 1836.— T. D. A. Cockerell.

62 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

452. Scuindler, F. Bedeutung der Landrassen unserer Kulturpflanzen. [Significance
of local varieties of our cultivated plants.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1918: 155. 1918.

453. Schmidt, Johs. La valeur de l'individu a titre de generateur, appreciee suivant la
methode du croisement dialleie. [Individual potency appraised by the method of diallel cross-
ing.] Compt. Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 14: 1-33. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 302.

454. Schroeder. Entstehung und Vererbung von Missbildungen an der Hand eines
Hypodaktylie-Stamrnbaumes. [Origin and inheritance of deformities in a hypodactylous pedi-
gree.] Mohatsschr. Geburtshilfe Gynakologie 48: 210-222. 3 pi. 7 fig. 1918.

455. Shamel, A. D. Performance records of avocados based on citrus experiments.
California Citrograph 5: 68, 86-88. 1 fig. Jan., 1920. — Description of methods recommended
for obtaining records of yield and quality of fruit, hardiness, and other horticulturally import-
ant characteristics of avocado trees, as basis for selection of desirable types for propagation.
Organization suggested similar to the "bud selection department" of the California Fruit Grow-
ers' Exchange, which last season sold 230,000 citrus buds taken from superior trees. — H. B.
Frost.

456. Sieqel, W. Das Recht des Gemiiseziichters. [The right of the vegetable breeder.]
8vo. Frick: Wien. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 304.

457. Siemens, H. W. Erbliche und nichterbliche Disposition. [Hereditary and non-
hereditary disposition.] Berlin. Klin. Wochenschr. 56: 313-316. 1919.

458. Siemens, H. W. Uber die Grundbegriffe der modernen Vererbungslehre. [On the
fundamental concepts of modern genetics.] Munchener Med. Wochenschr. 65: 1402-1405.
1918.

459. Siemens, H. W. Was ist Rassenhygiene? [What is race hygiene?] Deutschlands
Erneuerung 2 : 280-282. 1918.

460. Smith, L. H. The life history and biology of the pink and green aphid (Macrosiphum
solanifolii Ashmead). Virginia Truck Sta. Bull. 27: 27-79. 12 fig. 1919.— Much variation
among individuals is found with respect to size of parts, color and reticulation within well-
known pink and green varieties. No inheritance of size variations has been noted. Strains
that differ from one another have been obtained. Sexual forms are not usually produced in
Virginia. Spring migrants are chiefly of green variety. Nineteen first-born and eight last-
born generations were reared from May to November, and 34 first-born generations in a twelve-
month period. Four molts occur. Average age at beginning of reproduction is eleven days,
average number of young produced by viviparous female is 45 during lifetime averaging 31
days. — A. Franklin Skull.

461. Snell, K. Farbenanderung der Kartoffelblute und Saatenanerkennung. [Color
changes of the potato blossom and the recognition of varieties.] Der Kartoffelbau 1919: 1-3.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 306.

462. Sommer, K. tiber Kartoffelziichtung und vergleichende anbauversuche mit Neu-
ziichtungen auf der Domane Ellischau. [Potato breeding and comparative cultural tests of
new varieties on the Ellischau estate.] Nachr. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. Osterr. 1919: 190-193.
1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 307.

463. Stahel, G. Eerste verslag over de werkzaamheden ten behoeve van de selectie van
KofBe en Cacao. [First report on the eifectiveness of selection in coffee and cacao.] Dept.
Landbouw in Suriname (Paramaribo) Bull. 36. 23 p. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 308.

No. 1, August, 19201 GENETICS '':>

464. Stibvb, H. Uber experimentell, durch veranderte aussere Bedingungen bervor-
gerufene Riickbildungsvorgange am Eierstock des Haushuhnes (Gallus domesticus). [On de-
generative processes in tbe ovary of domestic fowl produced experimentally by changed external
conditions.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ. 44: 530-588. Wfuj. L918.- Layingfowls
were removed from their normal quarters and placed in close confinement. Aft( ious
intervals the birds were killed and the ovaries examined.. In all cases egg production ceased.
If the birds were well fed, production was not resumed. The large ova were not resorbed for
several months, though degenerative changes took place in the nucleus, which extended to
smaller and smaller ova, the longer the birds were kept. If, however, the birds were starved
or kept on limited diet for a time, and then fed suitably, the large ova were quickly resorbed,
the degenerative changes did not extend to the small ova, and production was resumed after
a comparatively brief interval. — //. D. Goodalc.

465. Stout, A. B. Further experimental studies on self-incompatibility in hermaphrodite
plants. Jour. Genetics 9: 85-129. PI. 3-4. Jan., 1920. — Two self-sterile plants of Verbascum
phoeniceum were crossed. In F1( 58 plants were self-sterile, 9 bore some seeds, and 2 were
highly self-fertile. From a highly self-fertile plant of this species there were raised (in addi-
tion to 27 plants with contabescent anthers) 5 self-sterile plants, 2 plants with some seeds,
and 5 highly self-fertile plants. — Sowings made from open-fertilized or commercial seeds of
Eschschollzia californica, Nicotiana Forgetiana, Brassica pekinensis, and Raphanus sativus,
showed a majority of self-sterile, and a minority bearing few or many seeds. The descendants
of each of two self-fertile plants of Nicotiana Forgetiana showed a majority of more or less
self-fertile plants. — In Cichorium intybus, 10 plants were uniform as to self-fertility or self-
sterility throughout the blooming period. Of the descendants of 3 self-fertile plants, 244 were
self-sterile, and 107 bore some seeds. . In the next selfed generation, 205 plants were self-
sterile, and 266 self-fertile in various degrees. — It is concluded that self-sterility in some spe-
cies is highly variable. — John Belling.

466. Sto-rtevant, A. H. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila rnelanogaster. III.
Inherited linkage variations in the second chromosome. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 278:
305-341. Washington, D. C. 1919.— The data presented demonstrate two genes in second
chromosome of Drosophila rnelanogaster, each of which, in females heterozygous for it, greatly
decreases crossing-over in region in which it lies. Both genes were found in same female, in
stock from Nova Scotia. Cui, located to left of black, makes star black=0, and black purple
very small. CUr, located between purple and plexus, greatly reduces purple speck region.
Homozygous Cu shows no effect on crossing-over; homozygous C'ni not tested. No crossing-
over in males, as always. — Cm, located in right end of third chromosome, greatly decreases
cro3sing-over between spineless and rough when heterozygous, but increases it when homozy-
gous. Cni.ii, in third chromosome, when heterozygous decreases crossing-over in third chro-
mosome, but increases purple curved region of second. — Mechanism of these effects is still unr
known. Qther linkage variations are caused by sex, age, temperature, and genetic factors.
In all cases, linear order of genes is unchanged, and flies of same constitution, under like
conditions, give consistent results. The methods and results are striking confirmation of
chromosome view of heredity. — C. R. Plunkett.

467. Sturtevant, A. H. A new species closely resembling Drosophila rnelanogaster.
Psyche 26: 153-155. 1 fig. Dec, 1919.— Describes Drosophila simulans, new species that has
hitherto been confused with D. rnelanogaster. New form is common and widely distributed.
Specimens can be separated easily only by means of male genitalia. Female rnelanogaster X
male simulans produces only daughters, unless the mother carries a Y-chromosome. The
hybrids are all sterile. — A. H. Sturtevant.

468. Sturtivant, Grace. Registration of new varieties. Gard. Chron. 67: 73. Feb.
14, 1920.— Plant patents seem impossible in the United States; but the registration of new
varieties is important. It is suggested that higher awards should be given for plants in gar-

64 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

dens than for those at exhibitions. The custom of bracketing the breeder's name after the
name of the variety is spreading among Iris specialists. Parentage should be put on record. —
John Belling.

469. Sumner, F. B. Continuous and discontinuous variations and their inheritance in
Peromyscus. Amer. Nat. 52: 177-208. 12 fig. April-May, 1918. — Discusses in this first paper
structural and pigmental differences in the western deer mouse, Peromyscus maniculatus
(Wagner) based on collections from four climatically different localities in California, —
Eureka, Berkeley, LaJolla, and Victorville. Humidity and rainfall are in a descending, and
mean annual temperature in an ascending, order for localities as given. Considers hair color
including microscopical structure, skin color, length of body, tail, foot, and ear, and number
of tail vertebrae, illustrating by histograms and ordinary graphs. — Finds for pigmentation,
intensive and extensive, series is Eureka>Berkeley>LaJolla> Victorville. For tail length
Eureka>LaJolla>Berkeley and Victorville. For number of caudal vertebrae, Eureka>
LaJolla>Victorville. For foot length, Eureka>LaJolla, Berkeley and Victorville. Ear
length LaJolla>Eureka and Victorville>Berkeley. General conclusions reserved for final
paper. — L. B. Walton.

470. Tammes, T. Die Flachsbliite. [The flower of flax.] Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland.
15: 185-227. 2ft fig. 1918— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 310.

471. Taylor, H. V. The popularity and deterioration of potatoes. Card. Chron. 67: 108.
Feb. 28, 1920. — New potato varieties are usually lower in quality than old standard varieties
but at the same time are more resistant to diseases and adverse conditions. With cultivation
and propagation the qualities improve, but vigor and disease resistance decreases. These
simultaneous changes are held responsible for the appearance of six varieties which have
attained popularity and each after ten to fifteen years have been succeeded in turn by another
new variety. — J. L. Collins.

472. Thelltjng, A. Neure Wege and Ziele der botanischen Systematik erlautert am Bei-
spiele unserer Getreidearten. [New methods and purposes of botanical taxonomy illustrated
by examples of our cereal species.] Naturw. Wochenschr. 17: 449^458. 465-474. S fig. 191S.

473. Thellung, A. tiber geschlechtsbegrenzte Speziesmerkmale (zu dem Aufsatz von
Brehm). [On sex-limited species characters (in response to von Brehm).] Naturw. Wochen-
schr. 18: 144. 1919.

474. Thomas, Roger. The improvement of "Tinnevellies" cotton. Agric. Jour. India
14: 315-330. 1919.

475. Turesson, G6te. The cause of plagiotropy in maritime shore plants. Contributions
from the plant ecology station, Hallands Vadero, No. 1. Lunds TJniversitets Arsskrift. N. F.
162: 1-33. 15 tables, 4 fig-, # pi- 1919. — The prostrate form of some shore plants is demon-
strated to depend upon geotropism induced by brilliant sunlight ("photocliny")- In obscure
light the geonegative reaction becomes predominant. — From one hereditary point of view
it is interesting to find that the prostrate vegetation can be made up of two genetically
different elements, viz., modificatory prostrate forms, and hereditary prostrate variations.
Both forms are sometimes found within the same systematic species. Alriplex latifolium,
A. rat idum and Chenopodium album have each a forma "prostratum," which is constantly
plagiotropic; the main species are only plagiotropic in intense light and erect in ordinary light.
When growing together on exposed beach it may be difficult to separate the two types, and
cultivating of them becomes necessary. By self-fertilization the prostratum form of both the
A triplex-species is found to breed true to plagiotropy. — "The hereditary prostrate variations
differ physiologically from the prostrate modifications in being more sensitive to light; they
respond to conditions of illumination which leave the latter unaffected and in a vertical posi-
tion." Author supposes that the prostrate races have come into existence by dropping out
of "heighf-determining factors. — A". V. Ossian Dahlgren.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 65

470. Urban, J. Hochpolarisierende Rube und ihre Nachkommenschaft. [High-po'ar-
izing beets and their progeny.) Zeitschr. Zucker Endustr. BShmen 42: 387 391. 1919. Bee
Bot. Abats. 5, Entry 312.

477. Vaerting, M. Die verschiedene Intensitat der pathologischen Erblichkeit in ihrer
Bedeutung fiir die Kriegsdegeneration. [Different intensity of pathological inheritance and its
significance for war degenerations.] Der Fraucnarzt. 191N.

ITS. v.\x der Wolk, P. C. [German rev. of: van deb Wolk, P. C. Onderzoekingen
over blyvende modificaties en hun betrekking tot mutaties. (Researches on permanent modifi-
cations and their relations to mutations.) Cultura 31: 82-105. 1 pi. 1019. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 296.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 142-144. Dec, 1919.

479. Vernet, G. Biometrie et homogeneite. [Biometry and homogeneity.] Bull. Agric.
Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 15-26. 1920.

480. Vieillard, P. Note sur la selection des riz par la constitution de lignees pures et
sur les hybridations des riz. [Note on the selection of rice by establishment of pure lines and
on the hybridization of rice.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 11-15. 1920.

481. Vogt, A. Vererbung in der Augenheilkunde. [Heredity in ophthalmology.] Miinche-
ner Med. Wochenschr. 66:1-5. 1919.

482. Volkart, A. 40. und 41. Jahresbericht. Schweizerische Samenuntersuchungs-
und Versuchsanstalt in Oelikon-Ztirich. [40th and 41st annual report. Swiss seed-control
and experiment station in Oerlikon-Zurich.j Landw. Jahrb. Schweiz. 1919: 1-40. 1919.— St <
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 313.]

483. von Bubnoff, Serge. Uber einige grundlegende Prinzipien der palaontologischen
Systematik. [Some fundamental principles of paleontological taxonomy.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 158-168. Sept., 1919.— Wedekind was followed in his application of
the statistical rules of variation to paleontological material. Two very common Triassic
ammonites from one locality were studied in hundreds of specimens. A form had been separ-
ated from each and named as a species on account of a single and doubtful difference. When
the variates were seriated, the supposed separate forms gave in each case a single typical varia-
tion curve along with the species. This shows that the difference in question was not suffi-
cient to distinguish species, or even varieties; and races, or "elementary species," cannot be
dealt with in paleontology. — A correlation between two or more characteristics was obtained
by comparing different stages of growth, or by comparing closely allied species. Character-
istics which are correlated in this fashion should vary together if the variation is genetic.
They did not vary together in a trial of individuals of the same species. Hence this correla-
tion is a test of specific difference. — John Belling.

484. von Caron-Eldingen. Physiologische Spaltungen ohne Mendelismus. [Physio-
logical segregation without Mendelism.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 515-516. 1919.— Sec
Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 314.1

485. von Caron-Eldingen. Mutationen und Doppelkdrner. [Mutations and double
grains.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 45: 618. S Jig. 191S.

486. von Caron-Eldingen. Physiologische Spaltungen oder vegetative Mutation (Mein-
ungsaustausch). [Physiological splitting or vegetative mutations.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse
46:56. 1919.

487. von Graevenitz, Luise. Ein merkwurdiges Resultat bei Inzuchtsversuchen. [A
remarkable result in an inbreeding experiment.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21:
169-173. Sept., 1919.— Effects of four different types of pollination compared on the off-

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. T, NO. 1

66 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

spring of three plants, Petunia, Digitalis and Oenothera. Flowers of individual plants treated
with pollen from following sources: (1) from the same flower, (2) from other flowers on
the same plant, (3) from a sister plant, (4) from a plant of a different strain. In all but
the first the flowers were castrated. For (1) and (2) the same lot of pollen was used and ap-
plied at the same time. Fifty-two plants of Petunia were pollinated in this way and the pro-
genies of each, numbering at least 50 individuals in each class, were weighed. The results
show that in 37 cases the (2)-pollinated plants were heavier than (1) while in 15 cases the re-
verse holds. The other two types of pollination resulted in still heavier plants on the average
according to the dissimilarity of the parents. Four plants of Digitalis treated in like manner
show the same result, the cross-pollination between different flowers of the same plant give
heavier offspring than self-pollination within the individual flower. Oenothera gave no dif-
ferences. Antirrhinum, although not fully investigated, shows a difference between the pol-
linations. Author is unable to find any circumstances which might account for these effects
and considers them to be biologically not understandable. — D. F. Jones.

488. von Oettingen. Die Vererbung erworbener Eigenschaften (aus dem Werke der
Pferdenzucht von Oberlandstallmeister von Oettingen). [The inheritance of acquired charac-
ters (from the work in horse-breeding by von Oettingen).] Deutsch. Landw. Tierzucht. 23:7.
1919.

489. von Ryx, G. Ein neues Eeispiel einer Knospenmutation bei den Kartoffeln. [A
new example of bud mutation in potatoes.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 2. 1 fig. 1918.

490. von Tschermak, A. Der gegenwartige Stand des Mendelismus und die Lehre von
der Schwachung der Erbanlagen durch Bastardierung. [The present status of Mendelism and
the doctrine of the weakening of hereditary units through hybridization.] Naturw. Wochen-
schr. 17:509-611. 1918.

491. von Tschermak, Erich. Uber Ziichtung landwirtschaftlich und gartnerisch wicht-
iger Hulsenfriichter. [Breeding of agriculturally and horticulturally important legumes.] Arb.
Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 1919: 80-106. 1919.

492. von Tschermak, Erich. Bastardierungsversuche mit der griinsamigen Chevrier-
Bohne. [Hybridization studies with the green-seeded Chevrier bean.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
zucht. 7: 57-61. June, 1919.

493. von Tschermak, E. Beobachtungen bei Bastardierung zv/ischen Kulturhafer und
Wildhafer. [Observations on hybridizations between cultivated oats and wild oats.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 6: 207-209. 1918.

494. von Tschermak, E. Beobachtungen uber anscheinende vegetative Spaltungen an
Bastarden und iiber anscheinende Spatspaltungen von Bastardnachkommen speziell Auftreten von
Pigmentierungen an sonst pigmentlosen Deszendenten. [Observations on apparent vegetative
splitting in hybrid offspring, especially the occurrence of pigmentation on otherwise pigmentless
descendants.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 216-232. 1 fig. Nov., 1920.

495. von Ubisch, G. Gerstenkreuzungen. [Barley crosses.] Landw. Jahrb. 53:191-244.
S pi, 28 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 315.

496. Waller, A. E. Xenia. School Sci. Math. 19: 150-157. Feb., 1919.— Popular ac-
count of xenia to which nothing new is added. — See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 115. — J. H.
Kemplon.

497. Walter, F. K. tJber "familiare Idictie." [On familial idiocy.] Zeitschr. ges.
Neur. u. Psych. 40. 1918.

No. 1, August, 1920] GENETICS 67

498. Webber, Herbert John. Selection of stocks in citrus propagation. California
Agric. Exp. Sta. [Berkeley] Bull. 317: 2G7-301. /, tables, 14 fig. Jan., 1920.— The individual
trees in citrus orchards are always markedly variable in yield, doubtless partly because of
variation in the stocks used in budding. Sweet orange and sour orange are principal citrus
stocks in California. Seeds of each species have usually been collected indiscriminately;
seedlings are always highly variable, yet few are usually discarded in nursery. — Tests at Citrus
Experiment Station showed that large, intermediate and small nursery trees of three standard
Citrus varieties retained their original size rank after two years in orchard, though selected
in nursery budded from "performance-record" trees, where many of smaller stocks had been
discarded at transplanting and some also at budding. Sweet-orange and sour-orange seed-
lings selected in nursery rows for variation in leaf form, habit, etc., and budded on sour-orange
stocks in duplicate, indicate presence of numerous genetic types, some undesirable, among
ordinary nursery stocks. Measurements in nursery of sour-orange stocks sorted at trans-
planting showed great variation, with much greater average size from the seedlings originally
larger. — Possible factors in stock variation discussed. Probably seedlings small because of
small embryos in polyembryonic seeds, crowding in seed bed, etc., as well as those genetically
weak, are undesirable as stocks. Recommendations include: (1) planting of seeds from
trees budded to selected good stock varieties, (2) rigorous elimination of small seedlings at
transplanting and budding, and of small budded trees when ready for orchard planting. —
IF. B. Frost.

499. Weibull, C. G. Weibullsholm 1870-1920, en aterblick. [Weibullsholm 1870-1920,
a retrospective review.] 18 p., 11 fig. W. Weibulls Illustrerade Arsbok (Landskrona) 15
(1920). 1919. — Account of the evolution and working methods of Weibull's station for plant
improvement. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

500. Weingart, W. Kunstliche Befruchtung von Kakteen. [Artificial fertilization of
cacti.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 106-107. 1919. — The author gives the results of self
and cross pollination of several cactuses, mostly species of Cereus. — A. S. Hitchcock.

501. Wolff, Friedrich. Ein Fall dominanter Vererbung von Syndaktylie. [A case of
dominant inheritance of syndactyly.] Arch. Rassen u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13: 74-75. 191S. —
One man in a family of five was syndactyl. Both of his parents, his sister and his three
brothers were normal, and there seems to have been no previous history of syndactyly in this
family. Married to a normal woman, he had seven children, all syndactyl. Each of these
has married a normal individual and the combined number of grandchildren is now eighteen,
of whom eight are syndactyl. In this family the syndactyly is somewhat more marked in
males. — C. H. Danforth.

502. Yampolsky, Cecil. The occurrence and inheritance of sex intergradation in plants.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 21-38. Jan., 1920. — A general discussion of sex intergrades based on the
author's studies of Mercurialis annua, on various other studies of sex-intergrades and sex
polymorphism in plants and in animals, and on a survey of data on sex forms in orders of seed
plants as given in Engler and Gilg's "Syllabus der Pflanzenfamilien." — In the monocots, 10
out of 11 orders representing 22 families have hermaphroditic, monoecious, dioecious and
polygamous individuals, and in dicots 31 of the 40 orders including 90 families have certain
representatives with two or more of the various types of sex. This distribution, shown in
tables for orders and families (not for species) reveals that "practically every order has fam-
ilies which contain forms that show more than one kind of distribution of sex elements." The
various terms used in describing sex conditions in plants are defined and species illustrating
them are cited. It is pointed out that the obvious facts of sex distribution in plants, together
with the results of experimental studies of heredity in polygamous or intersexual forms sup-
port the doctrine of varying sex potencies in germ cells rather than a sex-determination based
on segregation of fixed unit factors. — A. B. Stout.

68 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

503. Ylppo. Uber das familiare Vorkommen von Icterus neonatorum gravis. [On fam-
ilial occurrence of Icterus neonatorum gravis.] Miinchener Med. Wochenschr. 65: 9S. 1918.

504. Zander, L. Der Einfluss der Bastardierung auf die Honigbildung. [The influence
of hybridization on honey formation.] Zeitschr. Angew. Entomol. 5: 88-93. 1918.

505. Ziegler, H. E. Zuchtwahlversuche an Ratten. [Selection experiments on rats.]
Festschr. 100-jahr. Best. Kgl. Wurtt. Landw. Hochschule Hohenheim 1919: 385-399. 1919.

HORTICULTURE

J. H. Gotjrley, Editor

FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

506. Condit, I. J. The Kaki or oriental persimmon. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
316: 231-266. 20 fig. 1919. — A discussion is given of the history of the persimmon, Dio-
spyros, Spp., its introduction into the United States and the botany of the reproductive
parts. Different varieties of the Oriental species of persimmon, Diospyros kaki, are discussed
at length from the standpoint of their morphology, astringency, soil requirements, methods
of propagation and care of the trees, and methods of harvesting, processing and marketing
the fruit. A table of analysis of different varieties of persimmons is given and a brief discus-
sion of the insect enemies and diseases. — W. P. Kelley.

507. Detjen, L. R. The limits in hybridization of Vitis rotundifolia with related species
and genera. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 17. 25 p. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 562.

508. Gardner, V. R. Pruning the apple. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 90. 20 p.
It fig. 1920.

509. Hendrickson, A. H. Plum pollination. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 310.
28 p. 5 fig. 1919. — A considerable number of varieties of two different species of plums are
grown commercially in California, namely, the Japanese, Primus triflora, and the European,
P. domestica. Of the seventeen varieties studied all except four are self-sterile. No evidence
of inter-sterility between different varieties was noted, but certain varieties are more effec-
tive pollinators than others. Comparative study of different orchards indicated that the
common honey bee is an effective agent in promoting cross-fertilization between the different
varieties of plums. — W. P. Kelley.

510. Shaw, P. J. Fourteenth Annual Report of the Nova Scotia Agricultural College and
Farm. Part 5. — Report of the Professor of Horticulture. Prov. of Nova Scotia Ann. Rept.
Sec. for Agric. 1918: 75-100. 1919.

511. Sheward, T. Fruit trees in pots for winter forcing. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 360.
1 fig. 1919.

512. Smith, Arthur. A lesson on fall preparation of the ground for spring planting.
Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 341-343. 1919.

513. Truelle, A. La situation des terrains a-t-elle de 1'influence sur la richesse sac-
charine des pommes a cidre? [Has the location of the soil an influence on the sugar content of
cider apples?] Ann. Sci. Agron. Francaise et Etrangere 36: 107-116. 1919. — Pomologists have
always held that the soil and exposure are among the most important factors affecting the
chemical composition of cider fruits. Some data are published in which are given the density
at 15° and 1 of n 1 sugar expressed as grams of fermentable glucose. Twelve varieties of apples
were studied but only the most commercially important six are reported on. The data are

No. 1, August, 1920] HORTICULTURE 69

grouped and considered under the headings of fit those for trees grown i md pla-

teaus and (2) those for trees grown in valleys, a comparison being made for each variety g"
in the two situations. The results show considerable variation in Mir sugar content, (here
being greater variation among those grown in the valleys. According t<> the author the fol-
lowing points are indicated by the results at hand: (1) The topographic position exercises
an influence upon the production of sugar in certain varieties of cider apples. (2) The effect
of l he loeat ion on the sugar content is not uniform, in some varicl ies it is greater when grown
on the higher elevations and with others it is greater when they are grown in valleys. f3)
The differences in the weights of sugar in the juice from the apples grown on the uplands and
in the valleys vary from 1 to 10. ss grams per liter. (4) The effect of topography on the sugar
content of cider apples is generally feeble. The effect of topography is less than that of va-
riety, which depends mainly on the composition of the soil. — A. B. Beaumont.

514. Tufts, Wauhen P. Pollination of the Bartlett pear. California Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 307: 369-390. 8 fig. 1919. — The majority of the varieties of pears grown in California
bloom for comparatively brief periods only, but all of them produce an abundance of pollen.
Artificial pollination experiments showed that Bartlett pears are partially self-sterile when
grown in certain localities and wholly so in others. All the other commercial varieties are
capable of cross fertilizing the Bartlett variety. It was noted that the fruit resulting from
cross-fertilization with pollen from a different variety tended to drop less freely in June than
was the case with self-fertilized fruits. It is recommended that other varieties of pears be
planted intermittently throughout an orchard of Bartlett pears as a means of promoting cross-
fertilization. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 798.]— IF. P. Kelley.

515. Tufts, Warren P. Almond pollination. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 306:
:I37-36G. 15 fig. 1919. — It is shown that all the common varieties of almonds grown in Cal-
ifornia are self-sterile to a large extent and certain of them are inter-sterile. The different
varieties may be roughly divided into two classes on the basis of the time of blooming, and
considerable differences were noted in the amounts of pollen produced by the different vari-
eties. Experiments demonstrated that cross-pollination can be effected between certain
varieties very readily whereas other varieties are inter-sterile. It is shown that mixed plant-
ing of inter-fertile varieties in the same orchard results in increased yields of fruit. The inter-
pollinating relationships of the different varieties are shown tabularly. The effects of meteor-
ological conditions and insects on pollination are briefly discussed. The common honey bee
is though to be the best pollinating agent. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 797.]— IP. P. Kelley.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

516. Acosta, Celsa. Sobre el cayeput. [The cajuput.] Revist. Agric. Com. jy Trab.
2: 535-537. 3 fig. 1919. — Description of cajuput tree (Melaleuca leucadendron Linn.) and its
uses. — F. M. Blodgell.

517. Arango, Rodolfo. La palma real, su belleza ornamental y utilidad practica. [The
royal palm as an ornamental and useful plant.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 557-559. 2 fig.
1919.

518. Baxter, Samuel Newman. How nurserymen may best compete for the Christmas
tree market. Florists' Exchange 49: 133. 1920. — Ordinary nursery ground is too valuable
for growing large Christmas trees; but small trees are gaining in favor with dwellers in
small apartments and can be profitably grown. Nursery-grown, bushy stock is more attrac-
tive than the wild, the supply of which may soon become exhausted or unavailable. The 1- to
2-foot size could be offered in 6- or 8-inch pots, and the 2- to 4-foot size in larger pots or tubs,
both at reasonable prices. Frequent transplanting is unnecessary; thinning of plants in the
nursery row and shearing will assist in making bushy specimens. Figures are given of ex-
pected yield per acre over a ten-year period. — L. A. Minns.

70 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

519. Esler, John G. A rhododendron king. Florists' Exchange 49: 169. 1920. — Mr.
W. K. Labar for the past fifteen years has collected native rhododendrons all over the Blue
Ridge from Pennsylvania to North Carolina, selling them, as well as azaleas, kalmias and
leucothoes, to parks, cemeteries and nurserymen. He has secured about 100 acres of wooded
hillside with northern exposure, and will specialize in the above mentioned plants and others
of similar nature. He is planting some of these by the thousand, using small collected plants
and seedlings. — L. A. Minns.

520. Gibson, Addison H. The poinsettia. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 366. 1919.

521. Gibson, H. Hardy shrubs that can be forced. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 335, 336.
1919.

522. Gibson, Henry. Forcing herbaceous plants and bulbs for winter flowers. Gard.
Chron. Amer. 23: 359. 1919.

523. Griffiths, David. Producing domestic Easter lilies. Florists' Exchange 49: 134.
1920. — Notes on growing Easter lilies up to the present are added to Griffith's article in Flor-
ists' Exchange 48: 775. 1919. Nine batches of bulbs now in the greenhouses of the Bureau of
Plant Industry, Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C, are mentioned, all of which
promise interesting data in this investigational work. It is suggested that each grower of
Easter lilies might advantageously do a little experimental work for himself. — L. A. Minns.

524. Hammond, Bertha B. Forcing hyacinths for winter bloom. Gard. Chron. Amer.
23:337,338. Fig. 1-6. 1919.

525. Holzhausen, Axel. Laeliocattleya suecica nov. hybr. Svensk. Bot. Tidskr.
[Stockholm] 13 : 97-99. 1919.

526. Matthews, Edwin. Transplanting a mammoth yew tree in winter. Florists' Ex-
change 49 : 83. 1 fig. 1920. — -An English yew, 25 feet in height, 30 feet in circumference, about
80 years old, and weighing, with the ball of soil attached, approximately 5 tons was moved
about one-half mile at Beverly, New Jersey, in January, 1918, and reset on the grounds of the
owner. It was raised out of its former situation by means of rollers and windlass, raised
onto a strong dray wagon by means of jack-screws, and drawn to its destination by six horses.
Adverse conditions made the task formidable, but subsequent good care makes the removal
appear to be successful up to the present. — L. A. Minns.

527. Moore, Henry I. Descriptive list of hardy and semi-hardy primulas. Gard. Chron.
Amer. 24: 401, 402. 1920.

528. Moore, Henry I. The city rose garden. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 361. 1919.

529. Pleas, Sarah A. A plea for seedling peonies. Flower Grower 6: 123, 124. 1 fig.
1919.

530. Rothe, Richard. Landscape possibilities with brook and natural stream. Gard.
Chron. Amer. 23: 393, 394. 4 fig. 1920.

531. Sakamoto, Kiyoshi. The Japanese garden and how to construct it. Florists' Ex-
change 49: 61, 63, 138. 9 fig. 1920. — A Japanese garden must be made to appear as if it were
a piece of natural scenery. The noblest sentiment evoked comes from the correct placing of
each object — cottage, tree, herb or stone. Only large gardens can be successfully arranged
to present different aspects according to season. An ordinary garden may better be made to
appear much the same the year round. Evergreens are the foundation planting, set off by
deciduous trees. The main types of garden are described : (1) the plain-garden, reproducing
a plain, usually of considerable extent, good examples of which are the Tokiwa Garden and

No. 1, August, 1920) HORTICULTURE 71

the gardens of the Imperial Shrines of Ise; (2) the cypress garden, which may he email,
only a section cut apart from a larger garden and representing a forest scene in miniature;
and (3) the thicket garden, small, seeming to lead one to a dense wood beyond. — L.A.Mii

532. Saunders, A. P. American Iris Society. Florists' Exchange 49: 285. 1920.— The
meeting for the formation of the American Iris Society was held at the Museum Building of
the New York Botanical Garden, Bronx Park, New York, on January 29, 1920. Sixty persons
were present, among whom were many of the trade, and amateur Iris specialists. Dr. N. L.
Britton, Director of the New York Botanical Garden, delivered the opening address. He
told of the Iris garden begun in the New York Botanical Garden, and invited members of the
newly-formed Iris Society to make free use of the library of the Botanical Garden. — The
work of the Iris Society has been carefully planned. There will be test and exhibition gar-
dens established, Iris shows with suitable prizes, and investigations made in history, classi-
fication of garden varieties, culture and pests of the Iris. A constitution was approved and
officers elected of whom John C. Wister of Philadelphia is president, and R. S. Sturte-
vant of Wellesley, Massachusetts, is secretary. — L. A. Minns.

533. Smith, Arthur. The care and culture of house plants. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23:
372-375. 1919.

534. Smith, Arthur. Putting the garden to bed for the winter. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23:
368-371. 1919.

535. White, E. A. Hubbard Gold Medal awarded to rose "Columbia." Florists' Ex-
change 49: 171. 1920. — The Executive Committee of the American Rose Society has recently
voted to award to the hybrid tea rose Columbia, registered in 1917 by E. G. Hill, of Richmond,
Indiana, the Gertrude M. Hubbard Gold Medal for the best rose of American origin introduced
during the last five years. This medal, the highest honor the American Rose Society can con-
fer on a hybridizer, has been bestowed but once; in 1914 it was given to M. H. Walsh of
Woods Hole, Massachusetts, for the introduction of the climbing rose "Excelsa." — L. A.
Minns.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

536. Olmstead, W. H. Availability of carbohydrate in certain vegetables. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 41 : 45-58. 1920. — The amount of carbohydrate available to the body from certain
vegetables, usually used in low carbohydrate diets for diabetic patients, was determined
(1) by the use of diastase and copper reduction, (2) by feeding to phloridinized dogs. The
results by these two methods were — cabbage (1) 4.4 per cent, (2) 5.0 per cent, cauli-
flower (1) 2.8 per cent, (2) 3.4 per cent, spinach (2) 1.2 per cent, lettuce (1) 1.0
per cent. The amount in cabbage was reduced about 90 per cent by thrice cooking. — G. B.
Rigg.

537. Tracy, W. W. Growing tomato seed. Seed World 78: 18-19. 1920.

538. Work, P. Vegetable gardening on eastern muck soil. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13:
27-36. 1920. — Muck soils have proved to be preeminently adapted for the production of on-
ions, celery and summer lettuce and they are well suited for several other crops. — G. B. Rigg.

539. Zimmerman, H. E. Tomato grafted on potato. Amer. Bot. 25: 144. 1 fig. 1919 .

HORTICULTURE PRODUCTS

540. Baughman, Walter F., and George S. Jamieson. The composition of Hubbard
squash seed oil. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 152-157. 1920.

541. Haynes, Dorothy, and Hilda Mary Judd. The effect of methods of extraction
on the composition of expressed apple juice, and a determination of the sampling error of such

72 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

juices. Biochem. Jour. 13: 272-277. 1919. — The following points were taken up: (1) does
rapid freezing by liquid air produce any alteration in character of the sample, (2) does freez-
ing render tissues freely permeable to all those constituents of the cell sap present in expressed
juice, (3) the probable error due to individual variability in apples used. Comparisons were
made of Ph values, freezing points, time and fall of viscometer, conductivity, acidity, and
determination of sugars. No real difference was found between liquid air and freezing mix-
ture method. Tissues were freely permeable to acids and sugars but colloids were held back
as indicated by changing viscosity. Samples varied greatly resulting in a large probable
error. Authors conclude that neglect of sampling errors in previous work of this nature viti-
ates much data. — A. R. Davis.

542. Jamiesom, George S., and Walter F. Baughman. Okra ssad oil. Jour. Amer.
Chem. Soc. 42: 166-170. 1920.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

543. Baccarini, P. Notule teratologiche. [Teratological notes.] Nuovo Gior. Bot.
Ital. 25: 225-247. 1918. — Abnormalities in flower development and morphology were noticed
among members of diverse plant groups: Delphinium Ajacis, Brassica Rapa, Isatis tinctoria,
Viburnum Sandankwa, Dahlia variabilis, Cypripedium sp., Carlina vulgaris and Anchusa
italica. The abnormalities consist in depression, entire disappearance or malformation of
floral parts, notably the essential parts of the flower. In some cases, for example in Del-
phinium Ajacis, the reduction in the number of carpels suggests the reappearance of char-
acters found at present in the Staphysagria group. — Ernst Arlschwager.

544. Bassler, Harvey. A sporangiophoric lepidophyte from the Carboniferous. Bot.
Gaz. 68: 73-108. Aug., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1597.

545. Bexon, Dorothy. Observations on the anatomy of teratological seedlings. II. On
the anatomy of some polycotylous seedlings of Centranthus ruber. Ann. Botany 34: 81-94.
9 fig. 1920. — The vascular anatomy of seedlings of Centranthus ruber showing all degrees of
polycotyly from very incomplete tricotyly to complete tetracotyly is described. The hemi-
tricotylous material is divisible into three groups: (a) Two bundles, one from each half of
the incompletely split cotyledon, approach and fuse at various levels to form one pole of the
diarch root, the other pole being formed by the bundle from the other cotyledon, (b) The
two bundles remain distinct for a distance in the hypocotyl forming with the bundle from the
other cotyledon a triarch condition, which eventually becomes reduced to diarchy by the fusion
of the two bundles from the same cotyledon, (c) One bundle from the split cotyledon fails
to rotate, retains its collateral structure and finally disappears. In the tricotyls a triarch con-
dition is usually established, and becomes reduced to the diarch condition either by the dis-
appearance of one arm or by the fusion of the two. The hemitetracotyls and tetracotyls
for the most part show conditions like those described under (a) and (b) above with the modi-
fications resulting from the splitting of both original cotyledons instead of one. One hemi-
iotracotyl showed double structure throughout and evidently represented a twinned condi-
1 ion. It is suggested that the twinning may be due either to the fusion of distinct embryos
or to the partial separation of the daughter cells resulting from the division of the embryo
initial. — W. P. Thompson.

546. Bobilioff, W. De inwendige bouw der schorselementen ven Hevea Brasiliensis.
[The structure of cell elements in the bark of Hevea Brasiliensis. 1 Arch. Rubbercult. Neder-
landsch-Indie 3 : 222-231. 1919. — Paper deals principally with the structure of the laticiferous
vessels of Hevea and their cytology in connection with the physiological significance of latex.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 73

•

The author points out thai protoplasm ami nuclei occur in the Laticiferous vessels, bul that
the nuclei arc larger than those of other cm-lex cells. Both nuclei and vacuoles occur in the
protoplasm where they can be seen after the caoutchouc has been dissolved out. Therefore
the latex of ll,uea is probably cell-sap, which generally occurs in the vacuoles of the laticifer-
ous vessels. Sometimes many of the nuclei of laticiferous • ' unite in one place, l.cnce
it seems thai the nuclei have the faculty of moving. Author also observes that the nuclei
pass from one vessel into another through the wall openings. — W. E. Cake.

547. BuRQERSTElN, A. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte der Scoglien und Kleineren Inseln
Siiddalmatiens. 8. Anatomische Beschreibung des Holzes einiger Straucher und Halb-
straucher. [The natural history of the smaller islands of southern Dalmatia. 8. Anatomical
description of the wood of some shrubs and undershrubs.] Denkschr. K. Akad. Wiss. W'ien.

ith.-Nat. Kl.) 92: 329-331. 191G.

~>i<. Chirtoiu, Marie. Remarques sur le Symplocos Klotzschii et les affinites des Sym-
plocacees. [Remarks on Symplocos Klotzschii and the affinities of the Symplocaceae.] Bull.
Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 350-361. 5 fig. 1918.

549. Chirtoiu, Marie. Observations sur les Lacisteme et la situation systematique de
ce senre. [Observations on the species of Lacistema and the systematic position of this genus.]
Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 317-349. 18 fig. 1918.

550. Clute, Willard N. Peloria. Amer. Bot. 25: 148. 1919.

551. Coulter, J. M. Perennating fruit of Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Johnson*, Duncan* S.
The fruit of Opuntia fulgida. A study of perennation and proliferation in the fruits of certain
Cactaceae. Carnegie Inst, Publ. 269. 62 p., 12 pi. 1918.] Bot. Gaz. 68: 151. 1919.

552. Coulter, J. M. Root-nodules. [Rev. of: Spratt, Ethel R. A comparative ac-
count of the root-nodules of the Leguminosae. Ann. Botany 33 : 189-199. 5 fig. 1919. (See
Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1139.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 311. 1919.

553. Coulter, J. M. Suspensor of trapa. [Rev. of: Tison, A. Sur le suspenseur du
Trapa natans L. Rev. Gen. Bot. 31 : 219-228. 5 fig. 1919. (See Bot. xVbsts. 3, Entry 2451.)]
Bot. Gaz. 68:312. 1919.

554. Cremata, Merlino. Un fenomeno curioso. [A curiosity.] Revist. Agric. Com. y
Trab. 2 : 509. 2 jig. 1919. — Several cases are cited where the royal palm has become branched.
— F. M. Blodgett.

555. Dixon, Henry H. Mahogany and the recognition of some of the different kinds by
their microscopic characters. Sci. Proc. Roy. Soc. London 15: 431-4S6. 22 pi. 1918.

556. Eberstaller, Robert. Beitrage zur Vergleichenden Anatomie der Narcisseae.
[Comparative anatomy of Narcissus.] Denkschr. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien. (Math. -Nat. Kl.)
92:87-105. S pi. 1916.

557. Esmarch. Uber den Wundverschluss bei geschnittenen Saatkartoffeln. [Wound
healing in cut seed potatoes.] Fiihl. Landw. Zeit. 67: 253-256. 1918. — True periderm forma-
tion on the exposed surfaces of cut seed potatoes takes place only, and most rapidly, when
the tubers are kept in a fairly moist place. The practice of leaving the cut tubers to dry in
the air results only in the drying in of the upper cell layers which may be accompanied by a
suberization of the walls. It is questionable whether a crust formed in such a way affords
real protection against parasitic bacteria and fungi. — Emsl Artschwager.

74 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

558. Gertz, Otto. Proliferation av Honhange hos Alnus glutinosa (L.) I. Gaertn. [Pro-
liferation of the female catkins of Alnus glutinosa.] (Resume and legends of illustrations in
German.) Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 71-74. 1919. — Author describes and illus-
trates a case of proliferated female catkins in Alnus glutinosa not heretofore reported in lit-
erature.— W. W. Gilbert.

559 Grier, N. M. Note on proliferative power of Pinus sp. Ohio Jour. Sci. 20: 21-23.
1919.

560. Groves, James. Sex-terms for plants. Jour. Botany 58: 55-56. 1920. — A brief
note continuing the discussion of the terminology of plants begun in Jour. Botany 57. The
codification of botanical terminology is very necessary. Authors are now constantly in-
venting new terms and piling up a mass of terminology which cannot but retard and embar-
rass future workers. This problem should be dealt with in future meetings of the Inter-
national Botanical Congress. — K. M. Wiegand.

561. Hawtrey, S. H. C. Notes on a few useful plants and home industries of Paraguay.
South African Jour. Indust. 3: 35-41. 1920.

562. Hill, J. Ben. Anatomy of Lycopodium reflexum. Bot. Gaz. 68: 226-231. 6 fig.
1919. — The chief points of interest are the presence of typical cortical roots and the various
"types" of stele in the stem. The development and differentiation of the tissues in the
steles of the cortical roots parallel those in the stele of the stem. The xylem arrangement
may be radial, parallel-banded, or radial so modified as to consist of an inner cylinder of xy-
lem inclosing a small strand of phloem, the last being most frequent. The author's previous
suggestion that in Lijcopodium all xylem arrangements may occur in the same stem is con-
firmed.— H. C. Cowles.

563. Hirscht, Karl. Verschlossenblutige Pflanzen im Zimmergarten. [Cleistogamous
flowers in a window garden.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 103-104. 1919. — The cleistoga-
mous flowers of Anacampseros filamentosa Sims, are described. — A. S. Hitchcock.

564. Jauch, Berthe. Quelques points de l'anatomie et de la biologie des Polygalacees.
[Certain details of the anatomy and biology of Polygalaceae.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 47-
84. 15 fig. 1918.

565. Jatjffret, Aime. La determination des bois de deux Dalbergia de Madagascar,
d'apres les caracteres de leurs matieres colorantes. [Identification of wood of Dalbergia by
staining reactions.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 693-694. 1919. — The wood of two
species of Dalbergia from Madagascar showed very characteristic specific reactions when
treated with alcohol, sulphuric acid, caustic soda, ammonia, iron perchloride, bisulphite of
soda, ether, chloroform, and benzene. The alcoholic solution of the powdered wood of each
species also gave a characteristic spectrum. Such characters offer a basis for the identifi-
cation of species in the absence of other parts of the plant. — F. B. Wann.

566. Johansson, K. Fyllomorfi och diafys hos Geranium pyrenaicum L. [Phyllomorphy
and diaphysis of Geranium pyrenaicum L.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 99. 1919.
— A brief description of cases of phyllomorphy and diaphysis in Geranium pyrenaicum is
given and references made to cases of teratology in other species of Geranium. — W. W. Gilbert.

567. Kondo, M. Ueber die in der Landwirtschaft Japans gebrauchten Samen. [Seeds
used in Japanese agriculture.] Ber. Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1: 261-324. 17 fig. 1918. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 37.

568. McMurray, Nell. The day flower. Amer. Bot. 25: 150. 1919.— The flower of

Commelina communis is described. — W. N. Clule.

No. 1 , August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 75

569. Miller, E. C. Development of the pistillate spikelet and fertilization in Zea mays L.
Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 255-265. PI. 19-32. 1919. — Study made on three varieties of maize:
Pride of Saline, Freed White Dent, and Shorrod White Dent. The development of the pis-
tillate spikelet is briefly described. — In the development of the embryo sac there is no de-
generation of megaspores; the megasporocyte nucleus by three divisions gives rise to the eight
nuclei of the sac, as in Lilium. The antipodals multiply and form a tissue of from 24 to 36
cells in the base of the sac. — The silk is receptive to pollen not only at the stigmatic surface,
but also along the greater portion of its length. The pollen tube may penetrate the silk at once
or grow along the surface for some distance and penetrate later. Around the two vascular
bundles of the silk are sheaths of cells with rich contents; it is between these cells that the tube
grows. The tube penetrates into the embryo sac and .liberates the two male nuclei, which
are formed before the shedding of the pollen grain. One of them fuses with the egg nucleus,
while the other unites with the two polar nuclei, which do not fuse until this time. About
26 to 28 hours elapse between pollination and fertilization. — The endosperm develops rapidly,
filling the sac with tissue in 36 hours; the embryo by this time has 14 to 16 cells. [See Bot.
Absts. 4, Entry 679.]— L. W. Sharp.

570. Miller, Ward L. Polyxylic stem of Cycas media. Bot. Gaz. 68: 208-221. 11 fig.
1919. — The normal cylinder begins its differentiation as high up as the meristem, the others
beginning theirs successively lower, and each one in the cortex outside the next inner cylinder.
Protoxylem and protophloem are developed during the early activities of the normal cylinder,
the protoxylem elements usually being scalariform, as in the primary xylem. The secondary
xylem is characteristically pitted. In the first cortical cylinder most of the xylem elements
are pitted, neither protoxylem nor protophloem being observed. In both cylinders there is
a relatively large number of suberized bast fibers. All cortical cylinders are similar in origin
and development, and probably are related in appearance to alternating periods of rest and
activity. — H. C. Cowles.

571. Morvillez, F. L'appareil conducteur foliaire des Legumineuses : Papilionacees et
Mimosees. [Leaf traces in the Leguminosae: Papilionatae and Mimosoideae.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 787-790. 9 fig. 1919. — -Ten types of vascular supply in the petioles of
members of the sub-families Papilionatae and Mimosoideae are described and figured. In a
previous paper (Compt. Rend. 167: 205. 1918) the leaf traces in the Caesalpinioideae were
described. — The three sub-families of the Leguminosae present types of leaf traces with med-
ullary strands similar to those of the Chrysobalanoideae of the Rosaceae; this character is
encountered even in such widely separated genera as Swarlzia, Affonsea and Bocoa. The
most highly specialized forms possess the simpler trace. — Subdivisions of the Papilionatae
agree in leaf trace anatomy with the exception of the Astragaleae, in which are encountered
the various types characteristic of the other tribes. This may represent a stock from which
the others have been derived. Moreover, the Astragaleae, through the Sophoreae, seem to
be related to types possessing medullary strands, thus constituting an assemblage of closely
related forms, to which are attached the different sub-families of the Leguminosae. — F. B.
Wann.

572. Nelson, J. C. Monomorphism in Equisetum Telmateia Ehrh. Amer. Fern Jour.
9:93-94. 1919.

573. Nelson, J. C. Another "freak" Equisetum. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 103-106. PI. 6.
1919. — Linn County, Oregon, is a new locality for Equisetum fluviatile L. Among the speci-
mens collected was one, E. fluviatile var. polystachyum, which had 31 branches of the two
upper whorls bearing strobiles at the tip. — F. C. Anderson.

574. Sahni, B. On certain archaic features in the seed of Taxus baccata, with remarks
on the antiquity of the Taxineae. Ann. Botany 34: 117-134. 7 fig. 1920.— It is suggested that
the Palaeozoic seeds Cardiocarpus, Cycadinocarpus , Mitrospermum, and Taxospermum, all

76 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

of which probably belonged to the Cord ait ales, form a series illustrating a general tendency,
a continuation of which has resulted in the production of the type of seed found in Taxus, as
well as in Torn an and Cephalotaxus. This tendency may be summarized as follows: The
point of origin of the "outer" system of vascular strands shifts nearer and nearer the subnu-
cellar pad of tracheids which gives rise to the "inner" system. During this process the bun-
dles of the outer system cut through the "stone." The canals through the stone then move
forward toward the micropyle so that for an increasing distance the bundles come to lie in-
side the stone. At the culmination of the process when they lie entirely within the stone the
condition found in Taxus is reached. In this genus the "inner" system of bundles has dis-
appeared. The seeds of Torreya and Cephalotaxus are derived from the same source by a
modification of the same tendency. On the basis of this theory these three genera are the
nearest existing relatives — apart from Ginkgo— of the Cordaitales and like Ginkgo have been
derived directly from the Cordaitales. It is proposed to place them in a separate group
the Taxales, distinct from Coniferales and nearer Ginkgo. — W. P. Thompson.

575. St. John, Harold. The genus Elodea in New England. Rhodora 22 : 17-29. 1920.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 451.

576. Salisbury, E. J. Variation in Anemone apennina, L., and Clematis vitalba, L., with
special reference to trimery and abortion. Ann. Botany 34: 107-116. 9 fig. 1920. — This
paper furnishes additional data supporting the author's previously published views concern-
ing the essential trimery of the Ranunculaceous flower and the causes of variation in the
numbers of the constituent parts. Curves are given showing the variation in the number of
stamens, carpels, and perianth parts in a large number of flowers of the species studied. The
curves show marked periodicity, the crests occurring at multiples of three. In more than
half the flowers of Anemone apennina the stamens and carpels are in multiples of three. Evi-
dence is given to show that congenital fission is the chief cause of variation in number, though
transformation of stamens into perianth parts was also observed. — W. P. Thompson.

577. Schaffner, John H. Dieciousness in Thalictrum dasycarpum. Ohio Jour. Sci.
20: 25-34. 1919. — Intermediate forms between extremes of staminateness and carpellateness
are described. Great diversity of sexual expression is found on different branches of the same
inflorescence. It is concluded that maleness or femaleness is determined by the physiological
state at the inception of the sporophylls; or that if sex has been determined earlier, it is later
reversed. A general survey of the origin and nature of dieciousness in sporophytes is given,
showing evolutionary gradations from the bisporangiate to the monosporangiate condition
in various groups. — H. D. Hooker, Jr.

578. Seward, A. C. [Rev. of: Chamberlain, C. J. The living cycads. Univ. Chicago
Science Ser. 172 p. 91 fig. Univ. Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919.] New Phytol. 18: 262.
1919.

579. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. Miscellaneous
topics. New Phytol. 18: 129-176. Fig. 64-78. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 720.

5S0. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. General conclu-
sions. New Phytol. 18: 201-231. Fig. 79. 1919.

581. Soueurs, R. Embryogenie des Polygonacees. Developpement de l'embryon chez
le Polygonum Persicaria L. [Development of the embryo of Polygonum persicaria L.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 791-793. 8 fig. 1919. — The two-celled proembryo of Polygonum
persicaria L. gives rise, by a series of transverse divisions, to six layers of cells, the upper two
being derived from the apical cell and the lower four from the basal cell. The two layers pro-
duced from the apical cell give rise respectively to the cotyledons, as in the Ranunculaceae
and Cruciferae, and to the upper portion of the hypocotyl. In the Ranunculaceae and Cru-
ciferae the corresponding layer gives rise to the complete hypocotyl. The four layers derived
from the basal cell of the two-celled proembryo give rise respectively to (1) the lower portion
of the hypocotyl; (2) the root cap; and (3) and (4) a rudimentary suspensor. — F. B. Wann.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 77

582. Spratt, Amy Vera. Some anomalies in monocotyledonous roots. Ann. Botany 34:
99-105. 77. 3, 1 fig. 1920. -Members of several monocotyledonous natural orders show an
anomalous root condition consisting in the filling in of a large pith with scattered vascular
strands. These may be formed by secondary growth {Dracaena) or differentiated at the
growing point (Pandanus, Yucca) and at later stages may form a solid stele in some cases.
The secondary thickening in hracaena may occur in the pericycle or in cortical layers. —

W. P. Thompson.

583. SpRBCHBR, A. Etude sur la semence et la germination du Garcinia mangostana L.
[A study of the seed and germination in Garcinia mangostana L.] Rev. Gen. liot. 31: 513-531,
609-G34. PI. o 7,34jig- 1919. — In the East Indian "mangosteen," a member of the (oil tiferae,
the ovule is anatropous and has two integuments. During the development of the embryo
the nucellar cells are absorbed, the sac coming to life directly against the inner integument.
The cells of the latter bud into the sac and form an embryo, which becomes del ached from the
integument and is completely surrounded for a time by the endosperm cytoplasm with its
free nuclei; these soon disappear. When fully developed the embryo has the form of a swollen
tubercle which represents the hypocotyl; there is no trace of root, stem, or cotyledons. Two
or three such embryos are occasionally developed in one embryo sac, forming a compound
tubercle. The central cylinder which differentiates in the tubercle usually lies along the lon-
gitudinal axis of the latter, but in many cases it develops in an oblique or transverse position.
Normal fertilization and embryogeny also occur. — The course of the vascular bundles in the
flower and fruit is followed, and it is shown that the white pulp in which the seed lies (usually
only- one seed matures) represents the endocarp; this separates at an early stage from the red
mesocarp, becomes divided into sections, and grows fast to the integument. The histological
changes occurring during the development of the fruit are described. — At germination a root
and a stem grow out from the embryonal tubercle and develop very- slowly. If the stem nnd
a portion of the tubercle be removed a new stem is regenerated. In polyembryonic seeds
more plantlets develop from the tubercle. The primaiy root has no root haire, but the walls
of certain epidermal and hypodermal cells remain thin; water enters at these points. — The
arrangement of vascular bundles in the seedling and the histology^ of its various parts are
briefly described. In root, stem, leaf and fruit there is a system of secretory canals which
arise schizogenously. — L. W. Sharp.

584. Stout, A. B. Intersexes in Plantago lanceolata. Bot. Gaz. 68: 109-133. 2 pi.
Aug., 1919— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1518.

585. Styger, Jos. Beitrage zur Anatomie des Umbelliferen-fruchte. [Contribution on
the Anatomy of Umbelliferous Fruits.] Schweiz. Apotheker Zeitg. 57: 199-205, 22S-235. 7
fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 831.

586. Turrill, W. B. Observations on the perianth in Ranunculus auricomus and Anem-
one coronaria. New Phytol. 18:253-256. 3 fig. 1919. — The author describes transition stages
between stamens and petals, petals and sepals, and sepals and bracts- in Ranunculus; and m

a sepal occurring in the whorl of bracts in Anemone. — I. F. Lewis.

587. Weatherwax, Paul. Paraffin solvents in histological work. Bot. Gaz. 68: 305-
306. Oct., 1919. — The sinking of paraffin in the replacement of xylol may be avoided by run-
ning a current of cold air through the melted paraffin, thus causing it to harden as a frothy-
mass of lessened specific gravity. Before allowing it to harden, the mass is kneaded to secure
finer grain and a more even distribution of the air bubbles. The author, however, does not
find' any special disadvantages in the old method, and sees no valid reason for the rather gen-
eral abandonment of the use of chloroform as a medium for the introduction of paraffin. —
H. C. Coivles.

588. Weingart, Wixh. Vom Reif des Cereus trigonus Haw. var. guatemalensis Eichl.
[The bloom on Cereus trigonus var. guatemalensis.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 80-84.
1919.— The author shows that the bloom contains resin as well as wax. — .4. S. Hitchcock.

78 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

589. Weingart, Wilh. Spharite im Hypoderm von Cereen. [Sphere crystals in the
hypoderm of Cereus.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 45^18. 1919. — An account is given
of the sphere crystals in Cereus Hirschtianus and C. Lauterbachii, and of the effect upon them
of various reagents. The spherites contain no proteids and are allied to inulin. They con-
stitute reserve material. — A. S. Hitchcock.

590. Woodward, R. W. Further notes on Philotria. Rhodora 21: 218-219. 1919 —
In a recent issue (Rhodora 21: 114. 1919.), writer reported what appeared to be Philotria
angustifolia growing in brackish water at Old Lyme, Connecticut. On revisiting the station
in August 1919 both flowers and fruit were examined while fresh, and from this examination
detailed descriptions of the staminate and pistillate flowers and the fruit are given. Writer
has not had an opportunity to verify his identification by comparison with authentic material
but believes that it is P. angustifolia or some species closely related to it. — James P. Poole.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE

E. N. Transeau, Editor

591. B0rgesen, F. The marine algae of the Danish West Indies. Vol. 3. Rhodo-
phyceae. Dansk Bot. Ark. 3: 145-240. Fig. 149-230. 1917.— This part completes the family
Squamariaceae, from p. 144, 1915, of the same volume. (This family contributed by Mme.
A. Weber-van Bosse), and includes the families Hildenbrandiaceae, Corallinaceae (the sub-
family Melobesieae by Mme. Paul Lemoine, text in French) and part of the Ceramiaceae.
New are Amphiroa rigida Lamour. var. antillana B0rgesen; Mesothamnion caribaeum, nov.
gen. & sp. B0rgesen; Antithamnion antillarum B0rgesen; Spyridia aculeata var. disticha,
and its forma inermis B0rgesen. New combinations: Lithophyllum accretum (Fosl. & Howe)
Lemoine; Lithophyllum (?) propinquum (Fosl.) Lemoine; Melobesia (Lithoporella) allantica
(Fosl.) Lemoine; Melobesia (Litholepis) affinis (Fosl.) Lemoine; Porolithon mamillare (Harv.)
var. occidentale (Fosl.) Lemoine; Porolithon Boergesenii (Fosl.) Lemoine. Mme. Lemoine's
treatment of the Melobesieae has a key to the 20 species, and list of the other species known
from the Antilles as a whole; also a comparison with the species of other regions, showing a
strong resemblance to those of the Mediterranean, and a somewhat less marked though still
distinct resemblance to those of the Indo-Pacific. 19 of the 20 species are figured, either in
section or in habit or both; most of them for the first time. Two species are recorded for the
first time in America: Jania adhaerens Lamour., of the Red Sea, Indian Ocean and Japan;
and J. decussato-dichotoma Yendo, of Japan. Jania sp., Grifithsia sp., Callithamnion sp.,
Antithamnion sp., are described and the last two figured; probably new, but sterile. — Frank
S. Collins.

592. B0rgesen, F. The marine algae of the Danish West Indies. Vol. 3. Rhodo-
phyceae. Dansk Bot. Ark. 3 : 241-304. Fig. 281-307. 1918.— Completes the family Cerami-
aceae and begins the family Rhodomelaceae. New are Laurencia chondrioides B0rgesen;
Polysiphonia sphaerocarpa B0rgesen. — Frank S. Collins.

593. B0rgesen, F. The marine algae of the Danish West Indies. Vol. 3. Rhodo-
phyceae. Dansk. Bot. Ark. 3 : 305-368. Fig. 308-360. 1919.— Completes the family Rhodo-
melaceae and covers the families Delesseriaceae, Bonnemaisoniaceae, Gigartinaceae, and
Rhodophyllidaceae. New are Dasya caraibica B0rgesen; Cottoniella arcuata B0rgesen, nov.
gen. et sp. Dasya sp. is described and figured, probably new species but sterile. For Lopho-
cladia trichoclados are described and figured the cystocarps and antheridia, hitherto unknown.
As in previous parts of this paper, full descriptions are given of all species, and many details
are described and figured for the first time. — Frank S. Collins.

594. Boyer, Charles S. Rare species of North American Diatomaceae. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 67-72. PI. 2. 1920. — The following new species of diatoms are described: Au-
liscus floridanus , A. hyalinus, Dimerogramma intermedium, Glyphodcsmis tumida, G. campechi-

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE 79

one, Synedra anguinea, S. incisa, Eunotia Stevemonii, Pinnularia Hagelsteinii, Nilzchia
scmicostata, and Surirella Palmeri. Navicula Attwooddii M. Perag. and an abnormal form of
Aulodiscus oregonus Harv. & Bail, are discussed. — P. A. Munz.

595. Bristol, B. Muriel. On the alga-flora of some desiccated English soils : an impor-
tant factor in soil biology. Ann. Botany 34: 35-80. PI. 11. 12 fig. 1920.— By means of water
cultures it is show that there is a widely distributed plant assorial ion in cultivated soils con-
sisting of moss protonema and algae. Sixty-four species and varieties of algae were identi-
fied. All these algae can withstand from four to twenty-six weeks desiccation. Descriptions
of the algae including six new species are given. — E. N. Transeau.

596. Bullock-Webster, G. R. A new nitella. Irish Nat. 28: 1-3. PL 1. 1919 —
Nilella spanioclema, a new species collected at Lough Shannach, County Donegal, Ireland. —
W. E. Praeger.

597. Carter, Nellie. On the cytology of two species of Characiopsis. New Phytol. 18:
177-186. 8 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 118.

598. Church, A. H. Historical Review of the Florideae II. Jour. Botany 57: 329-334.
1919 (continued from Ibid. 57: 304). — The Florideae represent an independent line of evolu-
tion in the sea from the ancestral stage of encysted plankton-flagellates, attaining somatic
and reproductive specialization along their own lines. Nuclear migrations and haustorial
connections of the carpospore are but an extension of secondary pit-connections and migration
in the somatic organization. Cenocytic decadence of the trophocyte is paralleled by the sec-
ondary coenocytic organization in the vegetative soma of distinct generic types. — Progressive
differentiation of the sex mechanism leads through inevitable stages to oogamy and fertiliza-
tion in situ, following the failure of the oospore to be discharged, thus giving rise to many
separate phyla of algae. Though efficient in economy of materials, this method leaves
dispersal unprovided for. — Most important in the Floridae, however, is not the fertilization
in situ with a parasite zygote and a sporophyte generation producing spores, but the presence
of three successive generations as follows: (I.) Gametophyte, (II.) Carposporophyte (dip-
loid) and (III.) Tetrasporophyte (haploid). In (I.) there is the most complete economy
in the sexual process. The gametes are expressed as mere nuclei, a condition otherwise at-
tained only in the Angiosperms. There is also post-sexual nutrition. This is made possible
by the mechanism of the pit-connections left open at the base of the young carpogonium.
In (II.) the generation is asexual. Whether it be haploid or diploid does not matter, but
there has been no inducement to a haploid condition. It is a very much reduced stage. In
(III.) the spores are immediately dispersed and take the small chance of immediate germina-
tion. They grow to a free autotropic soma, but there is a reduction to the haploid condition
at the formation of tetraspores. — The haploid spores on germination give a haploid soma which
is normally free and autotropic, and which may be sexual and repeat the sequence, though
it may as well be asexual. Of special interest are cases where the tetraspore formation is
wanting and reduction is otherwise provided for, but the locus of the process is wholly sub-
sidiary and secondary. The condition in Scinaia and Nemalion in this respect is discussed.
— The clue to the peculiar behavior of the zygote and young carposporophyte in its relation
to the auxiliary cells is seen in its practically holoparasitic habit. The passage of food mater-
ial quickly is rendered possible by the mechanism of secondary pit-connections dependent on
the soft penetrable wall-membrane. — The clearest view of the Florideae is that they consist
of a multitude of distinct phyla as the survivors of a specialized and circumscribed ancient
race of Marine Algae. All of the living representatives are on a closely comparable physio-
logical plane, but the phyla diverge as to somatic construction and organization and as to
internal economy, becoming more specialized in relation to the parasitic carposporophyte. —
The phases of haustorial connection, progressively more intricate and devastating in relation
to the parental thallus they drain, constitute but one aspect of the question. The produc-
tion of the cystocarpic wall after fertilization passing to the initiation of these structures be-
fore fertilisation represents a specializal ion of great significance. A true phytogenetic classi-

80 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

fication should thus combine: (1) the auxiliary cell standpoint of Schmitz, with (2) the
special feature of thallus-organization, and (3) adult cystocarpic-differentiation, more
clearly recognized as significant by the older algologists (Harvey). [See also Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 1014.]— K. M. Wicgand.

599. Coulter, J. M. Alaria. [Rev. of: Yendo, Kichisaburo. A monograph of the
genus Alaria. Jour. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, 431: US p. 19 pi. 1919. (See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 612.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 151-152, 1919.

600. Dtjcellier, F. Contribution a l'Etude de la flore desmidiologique de la Suisse. [A
contribution to the study of the Desmid flora of Switzerland.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 85-
154. 8 pi., 134 fig. 1918. — The many species of Desmids found at five different stations are
enumerated with detailed notes and figures. Many of the species are new to Switzerland. —
W. H. Emig.

601. Ducellier, F. Etude critique sur Euastrum ansatum Ralfs et queiques-unes de ses
varietes Helvetiques. [A critical study of Euastrum anasatum Ralfs and some of the Swiss
varieties.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 35-46. 29 fig. 1918. — Euastrum ansatum Ralfs var.
simplex n. var., also the new varieties commune, didcltiforme, robustum, and rhomboidale, are
figured and described in detail. — W. II. Emig.

602. Ducellier, F. Trois Cosmarium nouveaux. [Three new forms of Cosmarium.]
Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 12-16. 3 fig. 1918. —The three new forms of Cosmarium described
and figured include: (1) C. obliquum Nordst. form minutissima n. form., the smallest known
form of this species; C. crassangulatum Borge, var. Champesianum n. var. differs from the
species in size and the papillose nature of the cell wall; and C. Hornavanense (Schmidle)
Gutwinski form Helvetica n. form. — W. H. Emig.

603. Ghose, S. L. A new species of Uronema from India. Ann. Botany 34: 95-98. 15
fig. 1920. — Uronema indicum from Lahore, India, is described, bringing the number of species
in this genus up to four.— E. N. Transeau.

604. Groves, James. Sex-terms for plants. Jour. Botany 58: 55-56. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 560.

605. Hodgetts, William J. Roya anglica G. S. West. A new Desmid; with an emended
description of the genus Roya. Jour. Botany 58: 65-69. 1920. — The author has compiled the
account of this new species from descriptions, notes and drawings by G. S. West. The form
of the vegetative cell is cylindrical or subcylindrical, unconstricted and very slightly tapering
toward each end where it is subtruncate. The zygospore is globose with a hyaline smooth
wall. The chief distinctions on which Roya can be retained as a genus are: (1) the simple
structureless nature of the wall; and (2) the delay in the division of the chloroplast until
the cell has reached maturity. — K. M. Wicgand.

606. Howe, Marshall A. Observations on monosporangial discs in the genus Liagora.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club. 47: 1-S. PI. 1, fig. 25-29. 1920.— The genus Liagora of the marine
red algae of the family Nemalionaceae is made up of species mostly dioecious, some being
monoecious. Some species often have small flat orbicular discs of a deep red color and bear-
ing on their distal surface a few sporangia the contents of which remain undivided. The lack
of any obvious genetic connection between these and the Liagora makes them appear to be
independent of it. They probably arise from gonidia, gemmae, or aplanospores which come
from terminal or subtcrminal cells of the assimilatory filaments of the Liagora. — P. A. Mum.

607. Lucas, A. H. S. Notes on Australian Marine Algae, II. Description of four new
species. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 44: 174-179. PL 6. 1919.— Laurencia infes-
tans is described and figured and Falkenbcrgia olcns, Polysiphonia zostericola and Tricho-
desmium scoboideurn are discussed in detail. — Eloise Gerry.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE 81

60S. Meister, Kit. Zur Pflanzengeographie der schweizeriscben Bacillariaceen. [On the
plant geography of the Swiss Bacillariaceae.) Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft): 125 L59. 8 fig. L919.
— Brun in 1880 described 32 genera and 182 species from Switzerland; Meister in 1912 listed
45 genera and 376 species, or including varieties 621 forms. The greater proporl ion of I be Swiss
diatoms occurred also in the Tertiary. About one-half of the Tertiary diatomaceous flora
has persisted down to the present: thus when compared with the Phanerogams the conserva-
tive nature of the diatoms is apparent. The number that have appeared since Tertiary times
is less than those that have perished so that the diatoms seem to be a waning group. Tertiary
species common to central France and Hungary must have arisen in pretertiary times, there-
fore in the Cretaceous or Jurassic. The oldest known genera of fresh water Bacillariaceae are
Epithemia, Rhopalodia, and Melosira. The Swiss diatom flora shows a much closer relation
to the west European than to the east European tertiary flora. Several old tertiary forms
are now found living only in Switzerland. The oldest forms from the Oligocene or those of
the Miocene of west or east Europe now inhabit the bottoms of the Swiss lakes. There are
many diatoms in the Alps and in the colder lakes of the lowlands that occur elsewhere only
in the far north or in central Asia. Meister believes that Diatoms have migrated from cen-
tral Asia to the Alps and the Arctic region rather than the reverse. Why are there so many
endemic species in Switzerland when diatoms are generally so ubiquitous? There is no good
explanation at present, but the author assumes as a working hypothesis that the relics have
descended from preglacial times and that conditions during or before the glacial period were
different from what is generally believed. Meister shows that many diatoms inhabit both
highland and lowland lakes and are therefore not sensitive to variations in warmth; more
than three-fourths were found to be indifferent. Extensive lists are given in various portions
of the paper. Navicula acuta n. sp. is described. — K. M. Wicgand.

609. Pilger, R. Ueber Corallinaceae von Annobon. [On the Corallinaceae of Annobon.]
Bot. Jahrb. 55: 401-435. 55 fig. 1919. — This paper is the first report on the algae collected
in 1911 by Dr. J. Mildbraed on Annobon, the smallest of the Guinea Islands, where the black
calcareous rocks support a rich flora of marine algae. These lime-loving algae inhabit a zone
between low and high tides which is wider on the west coast where the waves are high, and
narrowest on the north where there is simply the swell of the ocean. The Corallinaceae are
often very delicately colored. The decalcified material was imbedded in paraffin, sectioned
and stained with Ruthenian red, Bismark brown, chlor-iodide of zinc, or haematoxylin. A
brief account of the genus Goniolithon Foslie is given together with Foslie's diagnosis of the
genus, and Harvey's description of G. mamillare (Harvey) Fosl., the only species found by
Mildbraed. This species ranges from Brazil and Terra del Fuego to Cape Verde and Algoa
Bay. Foslie suggests that G. mamillare may be a juvenile form of G. brassica-florida. Pilger
gives extended descriptions of his material under four headings: (1) female material, (2)
tetraspore material, (3) inner structure of the conceptacle projections and the branches, and
(4) structure of the cortex. The female material formed thin crusts on the rocks with a
smooth or uneven surface, the crusts sometimes being proliferous. The tetrasporic material
produced crusts on stones or mussels. The cell structure, cell division, plasma membrane, and
chromatophores are described, and illustrated. The reaction of the different cells to chlor-
iodide of zinc is discussed. Elongation of the cell-rows takes place always by the division
of the uppermost cell of the row, and the cells are connected in the direction of growth by pe-
culiar double-faced pits. Heterocysts are formed in Goniolithon in 2's or 3's on the surf t n e
of the "Vorsprung." The whole floor of the tetrasporic conceptacle is covered with 4-par i 1
tetrasporangia. The female conceptacles are in most cases empty or contain merely
remains of carpospores. The cortex is differentiated into a hypothallus and a perithallus.
The cells of the perithallus are rich in starch. Ldthophyllum africannm Foslie occurs on Anno-
bon. This species forms cornice-like projections from the rock 15 cm. or even 30 cm. broad.
The little fan-shaped ends of the inconspicuous branches are arranged story-like on the sur-
face of the mass. L. Kolschyanum linger is next described. This species is often attar
to the larger species, L. africanum. It has a thin crust with a different type of branching.
The crust does not show a real hypothallus with cells running at an angle to those of the peri-

BOT\NICAL ABSTRACTS. VOI . V, NO. 1

82 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

thallus, and there are no pit connections between the cells in the lower layers of the crust.
Litltophyllum leptothalloidcum and L. Mildbracdii are described as new. These are thin crus-
taceous species, the former growing on L. africanum, the latter on stones and rocks. The anat-
omy and reproductive bodies of each are described. Amphiroa annobonensis also is described
as new. Extended observations are made on the cellwall and tetrad cohesion of the cells in
the Corallinaceae. The author finds that a middle lamella is present and therefore the whole
gelatinous mass seeming to lie between the cells is really cell wall, and the calcium carbonate
is actually deposited in the wall. The contributions of Yendo and Mme. Lemoine are cited.
The author differentiates between pores due to the breaking down of the wall and true pits;
and considers this to be of systematic value. — K. M. Wiegand.

610. Reverdin, L. Le Stephanodiscus minor nov. spec, et revision du genre Stephano-
discus. [Stephanodiscus minor n. sp. and a revision of the genus Stephanodiscus.] Bull.
Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 17-20. 22 fig. 1918. — A new species of Stephanodiscus (Diatom) with
three to six silicious appendages is described and compared with the other two species of the
same genus. — W. H. Emig.

Gil. Smith, Catharine, W. Variation in the number of ribs in Costaria costata. Publ.
Puget Sound Biol. Sta. 2: 207-312. 1919. — While the number of ribs reported in literature
is 3-5, the author finds that the number may be as high as 11. The number is not necessarily
constant throughout the length of the same frond. — T. C. Frye.

612. Yendo, K. A monograph on the Genus Alaria. Jour. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo
43 : 1 . 1919. — Deals mainly with the taxonomy of this genus but considers briefly various mor-
phological details, the economic uses, and the distribution of these large marine algae. A
considerable bibliography is included. — G. J. Peirce.

613. Zimmermann, Ch. Quelques diatomees nouvelles ou curieuses. [Some new or
peculiar diatoms.] Broteria Ser. Bot. 17: 97-100. PI. 3 (5 fig.). 1919.— Eight of the nine
forms mentioned are proposed as new, viz. : Navicula cardinaliculus var. margaritacea,
N. Jeqaitinhonhae, A7. Torrendii with var. capitata and forms typica and nana, N. mutica
var. rhombica, Achnanthcs lanceolata var. brasilie?isis , Fragilaria undulata var. brasiliensis.
All forms mentioned are figured, and all are from Brazil. — Edward B. Chamberlain.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

614. Amann, Jules. Additions a la flore des mousses de la Suisse. [Additions to the
moss flora of Switzerland.] Bull, de la Murithienne 1916-18: 42-66. 1919.— The author first
gives a large number of localities extending the range of species listed in the Flore des mousses
de la Suisse [see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1032], and mentions a number of forms now first re-
ported for the region, usually accompanying these reports with short descriptive notes. He
proposes the following species as new: Amblystegium ursorum, Bryum perlimbatum, Ceratodon
mollis, Desmatodon spelaeus , Didymodon riparius (notKindb.), Lesquereuxia glacialis , Mnium
adnivense, Pseudoleskeclla ambigua, Ptychodium abbreviatum, P.-albidum, and P. pallescens.
Under the genus Ptychodium he gives a key to the Swiss species and states that between Les-
quereuxia saxicnla and Ptychodium plicatum a long series of transitional forms occurs, so that
sterile material can not be definitely determined. At the conclusion of the paper he lists,
as an example of the general trend of moss associations in the high-alpine region, twenty-one
mosses and one hepatic found growing on the mica-schist of the Combin de Corbassiere (Pen-
nine Alps) at an altitude of 3600-3700 m. — Edward B. Chamberlain.

615. Bristol, B. Murtel. On the gemmae of Tortula mutica, Lindb. Ann. Botany 34:
137-138. 5 fig. 1920. — This is a note recording the discovery of a specimen of Tortula mutica
which bore numerous gemmae scattered over the surface of the leaf. The gemmae are borne
on one-celled stalks and generally consist of two or four cells. — W. P. Thompson.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES 83

616. Britton, E. G. Mosses of Bermuda. Bryologist 22: 87. 1919.— Tins list of
twenty-two species is an enumeration without comment of the forme mentioned in the
recently issued Flora of Bermuda by Bkitton and others. — Edward />'. Chamberlain.

617. Brotiierus, V. F., and W. W. Watts. The mosses of North Queensland. I 'roc.
Linnaean Soc. New South Wales 43: fill .V>7. 191S.- In a foreword the second author gives
a brief description of the region where most of his collections were made and refers to the
important work on the mosses of Queensland done by F. M. Bailey. He calls attention to
the fact that the species of North Queensland are Malasian rather than Australian in their
affinities. He notes further that, as a result of his explorations, one new genus and fourteen
new species have been brought to light, that 17 other genera and 30 other species have been
added to the flora of Australia, and that numerous species, heretofore known only from other
parts of Australia, can now be definitely recorded from Queensland. In the main body of
the work a list of species is given, with localities and occasional notes on distribution, and
the new genus and new species are described. The new genus, Pterobryidium Broth. & Watts.,
is related to Pterobyropsis Fleisch. and is based on a single species. The new species are the
following, Brotherus and Watts being the authorities except where otherwise noted: Brachy-
menium Wattsii Broth., Bryum kurandae, Campylopus Wattsii Broth., Chaetomitrium ento-
donloides, Dicranoloma Wattsii Broth., Eclropothecium serriofolium, Floribundaria robustella,
Fissidens cairnensis, F. kurandae, Pterobryidium australe, Pterobryopsis filigera, Syrrhopodon
cairnensis, Taxithelium Wattsii Broth, and Trichosteleum elegantulum. To these should be
added Mniodendron comatulum Geheeb, a manuscript species here described for the first time.
— A. W. Evans.

618. Chamberlain, Edward B. [Rev. of: Amann, J., and C. Meylan. Flore des
mousses de la Suisse. [Flora of the mosses of Switzerland.] Geneve, 1918. (See also Bot.
Absts. 4, Entry 1032.)] Bryologist 22: 41-43. 1919.— The reviewer criticises the method
employed by the authors in the citation of authorities for binomials. In all cases the original
authority for the species is given, but when this name appears in parentheses the authority
for the combination is not indicated in any way; the reader, therefore, unless thoroughly
conversant with the literature, is in doubt as to "whether the combination be 'new' or not."
In other respects the reviewer speaks in high terms of the work. — A. W. Evans.

619. Corbiere, L. Deux mousses africaines egalement francaises. [Two African mosses
occurring likewise in France.] Rev. Bryologique 41: 84-85. 1914. [Issued in 1919.1— In this
paper (which is to be continued) the discovery of Grimmia Pitardi Corb. in the department
of Var in southern France is announced. The species was described in 1909 from specimens
collected in Tunis and has since been recorded from Tripoli. A full description is included.
— A. W. Evans.

620. Dixon, H. N. Rhaphidostegium caespitosum (Sw.) and its affinities. Jour. Botany
58: 81-89. 1920. — The author's first impression of Rhaphidostegium sphaerotheca (C. M.)
Jaeg., obtained from material collected on Table Mountain, Cape Colony, led him to believe
that it was a well-marked species. Further study, however, showed that this was not the
case but that the Table Mountain specimens, which were exceptionally large and fine, belonged
to an extensive "Formenkreis," the usual material of which was small and commonplace.
In this "Formenkreis" the author was able to include a number of specimens from South and
Central Africa and from the Mascarene Islands, some of which had been referred to other
species or even to other genera. Previous experience suggested that when a plastic species
had a wide African distribution it was well to look further and see if it might not be identical
with some South American or Australian species. Acting on this hypothesis the author was
able to demonstrate that R. sphaerotheca was really a synonym of the American 7?. caespi-
tosum (Sw.) Jaeg., a species originally described by Swart z from West Indian material under
the name Hypnum caespitosum. He was able to show further, by the study of numerous type-
specimens, that R. caespitosum had many synonyms and that it had a cosmopolitan range in
the tropical and subtemperate portions of the Southern Hemisphere, even extending into

84 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

the temperate zone. The best specific characters for this polymorphic species are derived
from the perichaetial leaves and capsules, and it seems to be impossible to divide it into definite
groups, since the variations run in different directions and are little correlated. Some of the
species referred in this paper to R. caespitosum, as synonyms, are the following: Hypnum
lithophilum Hornsch., Hypnum loxense Hook., Leucomium Robillardii (Duby) Jaeg., Pterogoni-
ella Stuhlmanni Broth., R. agnatum (Hampe) Jaeg., R. caespitans Schimp., R. Catillum (C.
M.) Jaeg., R. cucullatifolium (Hampe) Jaeg., R. Dicnemonclla (C. M.) Broth., R. Duisaboanum
(Mont.) Jaeg., R. fluminale (C. M.) Broth., R. inconspicuum (Hornsch.) Jaeg., R. Kcgelianum
(C. M.) Jaeg., R. perlaxum (C. M.) Par., R. Sauloma (C. M.) Broth., R. sphaerotheca (C. M.)
Jaeg., R. subsphaericarpum (Hampe & C. M.) Jaeg., Sematophyllum subnervatum Mitt., and
Stereodon tristiculus Mitt. In all 58 synonyms are given. — K. M. Wiegand.

621. Dotjin, Ch., and L. Trabtjt. Deux hepatiques peu connues. [Two little known
hepatics.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 31: 321-328. PI. 9, 1 fig. 1919.— Two liverworts from Algeria,
Corbierella algeriensis Douin & Trabut and Riccinia perennis (Steph.) Trabut, are described.
The first is probably the same as Exormotheca Holstii Steph. but, on account of certain pecu-
liar characters, is made the type of the new genus Corbierella Douin & Trabut. The second
species, which was originally described by Stephani under the name Riccia (Ricciella) perennis,
is the only member of the genus Riccinia Trabut, proposed in 1916. The writers regard it
as intermediate between the Ricciaceae, with which it is classed, and the Marchantiaceae. —
L. W. Sharp.

622. Evans, Alexander W. Notes on New England Hepaticae. — XV. Rhodora 21:
149-169. PL 126, 14 fig. 1919. — Under the name Nardia obscura the writer describes and
discusses a new species, closely related to N. hyalina (Lyell) Carringt. and N. obovata (Nees)
Lindb. It has been observed in several mountainous localities, especially in the White Moun-
tains, and seems to retain its distinctive features even while exhibiting a considerable range
of variability. For the sake of comparison the features of N. hyalina and N. obovata are like-
wise discussed. Another species, Cephalozia Loitlesbergeri Schiffn., is reported for the first
time from New England, the first American record having been based on material from Nova
Scotia. Additions to local state floras include the following: Jungermannia sphaerocarpa,
Calypogeia sphagnicola and Notothylas orbicularis from Maine; Riccardia pinguis, Pellia
Neesiana, and Lophocolea alata from Massachusetts. According to the census given at the
close of the paper 191 Hepaticae are now known from New England, including 142 from Maine,
151 from New Hampshire, 129 from Vermont, 79 from Rhode Island, 145 from Connecticut,
and 62 from all six states. — James P. Poole.

623. Harris, G. T. On Schistostega osmundacea Mohr. Jour. Quekett Microsc. Club
II, 13: 361-374. 2 pi., 2 fig. 1917. — This moss thrives in crevices, caves, burrows, etc., facing
north to northeast, where it is moist but not wet. The capsules are deciduous. Gemmae
are formed on the protonema and are disseminated by animals. The flask-shaped cells found
on protonema are separation-cells, remaining after the liberation of gemmae. The protonema
is made up largely of obconic light-cells, whose structure is discussed, and is almost com-
pletely used up in mature plants. — L. B. Walker.

624. Kashyap, S. R. The androecium in Plagiochasma appendiculatum L. et L. and P.
articulatum Kashyap. New Phytol. 18: 235-238. 2 fig. 1919.— At the end of the paper the
author summarizes his conclusions as follows: "Three different considerations, therefore,
show that the androecium of P. appendiculatum and P. articulatum is really homologous with
that of the higher Marchantiales in being a branch-system (1). The arrange-
ment of the scales at the tip of the lobes which is very similar to that at the tip of the vege-
tative lobe. (2). The repeated branching of the receptacle, two or three times in some speci-
mens. (3). The invariably acropetal succession of the antheridia in all lobes exactly as in
Marchantia, the highest genus of the Marchantiales." — I. F. Lervis.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 85

625. Luisier, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria Ser. Bot.
17: 112-142. 1919. — This article is the sixth of a scries covering a complete discussion of
Madeiran mosses and includes the genera Bryum (in part) to Thamnium. No mw forms are
described, but short notes, references, and reprints of original descriptions are appended to
many of the species mentioned. More extended and critical discussions occur for liryum
serrulatum Card., Pogonatum subaloides (C. M.) Jaeg., Neckera intermedia Brid., and the
species of Lcucodon and of Echinodium. — Edward B. Chamberlain.

626. Melin, Elias. Sphagnum angermanicum n. sp. Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm]
13: 21-25. S fig. 1919. — Under the above name the author describes and illustrates a new
species of Sphagnum which he found in Angermanland, .Sweden, in 1915, 1916 and 1917. It
is related to S. molle Sulliv.— IT. W. Gilbert.

627. Paul, H. Einige fur den Bayerischen Wald neue Pflanzen. [Plants new to the
Bavarian Forest.] Mitteil. Bayer. Bot. Ges. Erforsch. Heim. Flora 3: 467-168. 1918.— The
author lists the following four plants as additions to the known flora of the Bavarian Forest:
Scutellaria minor L., Sphagnum subbicolor Hpe., Bryum cyclophyllum Br. Eur., and Cathar-
inaea Hausknechlii Broth. He describes the exact localities where these plants were found
and ^numerates various other species, both spermatophytes and bryophytes, which grew in
association with them. — A. W. Evans.

628. Potier de la Varde, R. Observations sur quelques especes du genre Fissidens.
[Observations on certain species of the genus Fissidens.] Rev. Bryologique 41: 85-92. PI. 1.
1914. [Issued in 1919.] — In the first part of this paper (which is to be continued) the value of
apparent dioecism as a specific character in the genus Fissidens is discussed. This condition
is brought about when the same protonema gives rise to distinct male and female shoots. It
thus represents a special form of monoecism, and the student of mosses is cautioned against
attributing positive dioecism to a species until the protonemal relations have been estab-
lished. In the second part of the paper the status of F. tamarindifolius Wils. is considered,
and the conclusion is reached that it represents a form of F. inconsians Schimp. This con-
clusion is based on the study of a long series of European specimens ranging from England to
Italy and the Tirol. The figures were drawn from material collected in the department of
the Manche in France. — A. W. Evans.

629. Seymour, M. E. Mosses of the Cascade Mountains, Washington, collected by J. A.
Allen. Bryologist 22: S5-86. 1919. — This is a list, without comment, of the specimens
issued in the somewhat uncommon set of exsiccati mentioned in the title. — Edward B.
Chamberlain.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA

AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatrick, Editor

630. Adams, J. F. The alternate stage of Pucciniastrum Hydrangeae. Mycologia 12:
33-35. 1920. — Along a path about which hydrangeas and hemlocks were numerous, Hydrangea
arborescens was found to be heavily infected with Pucciniastrum Hydrangeae while the hem-
locks were infected with a Peridermium stage resembling P. Peckii. Inoculation with accio-
spores on Hydrangea arborescens grandiflora proved successful, mature uredinia appearing
in about 12 days. Three other species of cultivated hydrangeas and a species of Vaccinium
failed to show infections. Because of differences in hosts and in morphology, the Perider-
mium is considered distinct from P. Peckii and is technically described, the name P.
Hydrangeae (Berk. & Curt.) comb. nov. being proposed. — H. R. Rosen.

86 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

G31. Arxaud, G. Les Asterinees. [The "Asterinees."] Ann. Ecole Nation. Agric.
Montpellier 16: 1-288. PI. 1-53, 22 fig., maps 1-3. July 1917-August, 1918.— The name
Asterinees is given to a group of black, saprophytic fungi which, although taxonomically hetero-
geneous, are homogenous from the standpoint of biology and climatology. Nearly all Pyreno-
mycetes belong to this group. The work is divided into three parts: (1) Comparative
morphology. (2) Special taxonomy and morphology. The two groups of Pyrenomycetes,
viz., Microthyriales and Dothideales are studied and described in detail. (3) Climatology
and geographical distribution. A bibliographical index of the most important publications
pertaining to these fungi is given. — F . F. Halma.

632. Arthur, J. C. Errors in double nomenclature. Bot. Gaz. 68: 147-148. Aug.,
1919. — Attention is called to the difficulties which confront taxonomists working with para-
sitic fungi, because of the necessity of having accurate taxonomic knowledge of hosts as
well as of parasites. Occasion is taken to correct an error in a previous paper by the author
(Bot. Gaz. 65: 470-471. 1918. See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 385). Two species there described
as new, Puccinia Nicotianae and P. Acnisti, growing respectively on Nicotiana tomentosa
and Acnislus arborescens, turn out to be one species, and the host of the two also is identical.
The common host now appearing to be A. aggregalus, the correct name of the parasite is Puc-
cinia Acnisti. — H. C. Cowles.

633. Bachmann, E. Neue Flechtengebilde. [New lichen structures.] Ber. Deutsch.
Bot. Ges. 36: 150-156. PI. 3. 1918. — Studies of microtome sections of the thalli of limestone-
inhabiting lichens containing Chroolepvs or Scytonema as gonidia show three new points:
(1) Spheroidal cell-clusters made up of groups of pseudoparenchymatous cells and storing
oils; (2) "Hyphal knots," similar in structure, but without the oil and believed to serve
for water-storage; and (3) Wandering gonidia, which are free from connection with the
hyphae, occur more deeply situated than the usual gonidia, and are yellow-red instead of
green. — L. W. Riddle.

634. Bokura, U. A bacterial disease of lily. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan l2: 36-90.
PL 1-2. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1243.

635. Breed, R. S., and H.J. Conn. The nomenclature of the Actinomycetaceae. Jour.
Bact. 4: 583-602. 1919. — A review of the literature relative to the proper generic names to
be used in the family Actinomycetaceae is given, followed by a discussion in which the con-
clusion is reached that the generic name Actinomyces Harz should be used rather than Strep-
tothrix Corda, Streptothrix Cohn, Discomyces Rivolta, or Actinocladothrix Afanasiev and
Schultz. Nocardia Trevisan may be used as a subdivision of the genus Actinomyces. A.
bovis Harz may be considered as the type species.— Chester A. Darling.

636. Burger, Owen F. Sexuality in Cunninghamella. Bot. Gaz. 68: 134-146. Aug.,
1919— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2096.

637. Chou, Chung Ling. Notes on fungous diseases in China. [Text in Chinese.]
Khu Shou [Science-Publication of the Chinese Science Society] 4: 1223-1229. Fig. 1-16,
1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 732.

638. Clark, Paul F., and W. H. Ruehl. Morpholgical changes during the growth of
bacteria. Jour. Bact. 4: 615-625. 1919. — Seventy strains of bacteria representing 37 species,
many of which were pathogenic forms, were studied as to the variation in size, shape, char-
acteristic groupings, and staining when grown for different periods of time on ordinary cul-
ture media. The conclusions were that in all strains examined excepting those of the diph-
theria group and possibly B. mallei the organisms found in cultures four to nine hours old
are much larger than in older cultures. The period when the largest organisms are found
corresponds closely to the period when the cells are dividing rapidly. In the diphtheria group
the organisms in cultures of from 4 to 9 hours old are definitely smaller and more solid stain-
ing than in older cultures. — Chester A. Darling.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 87

639. Colosi, G. Contribute alia conoscenza dei Licheni della Sardegna. [Some Lichens
of Sardinia.) Malpighia 28: 458 171. L919. — Lists L15 species and varieties, two of the
varieties being new. — L. W. Riddle.

640. Dittrich, ('<. Uber Vergiftungen durch Pilze der Gattungen Inocybe und Tricbo-
loma. (Poisoning caused by species of Inocybe and Tricholoma.] Ber. Deutsch Bot. C,cs.
36:456-459. 1918. — Inocybe sambucina is reported to have cause] seven' poisoning. !!■
ever, since the species has not been identified with certainty and no specimens could be
obtained the following season, it is doubtful whether the fungus in question or some other
organism was responsible. Tricholoma ' and related species are considered harm'
by some and poisonous by others. — Ernst Arlschwager.

641. [Dodge, B. O.] Anonymous. Index to American mycological literature,
logia 12: 55-58. 1920.

642. Doidgh, E. M . An interesting group of leaf fungi. South African Jour. N
Hist 1: 164-171. 4 fig. 1919. — An account of the Peris poriaceae and Microihyriaceae, is given
in a non-technical style, including methods of collecting, preserving and making microscopic
preparations. — E. HI. Doidge.

643. Dufrexoy, Jean. Sur les maladies parasitaires des Chenilles processionaires des
Pins d'Arachon. [Concerning parasitic maladies of caterpillars.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 168: 1345-1346. 1919. — Brief descriptions of various bacteria and higher fungi found
growing as parasites on certain larvae. Those mentioned are: Bacterium pityocampae,
Streptococcus sp., Beauveria globulifera (J. Beauverie) and Penicillivm sp. — V. II. Young.

644. Emile-Weil, P., and L. Gaudix. Contribution a. l'etude des onychomycoses —
Onychomycoses a Penicillium, a Scopulariopsis, a\ Sterigmatocystis, a Spicaria. [Contribut on
to the study of onychomycoses due to Penicillium, etc.] Arch. Med. Exp. ot Anat. Path. Paris
28: 452hJ67. PL 12, 4 fig- 1919. — Mycoses of the nails are not uncommon, but have been
given little study. They are mostly confined to the toe-nails, particularly those of the big
toes. The pathological aspects are discussed briefly. Reports are given of Penicillium
brevicaule var. hominis ( = Scopulariopsis Koningi Vuill.), Scopulariopsis cinerea n. sp., Spi-
caria unguis n. sp., Sterigmatocystis unguis n. sp. The cultural characteristics of these fungi
are described, as well as their morphology. Their mode of infection is probably through lesions.
They frequently follow frost injury. — E. A. Bessey.

645. Eriksson, Jakor. Sur l'heteroecie et la specialisation du Puccinia caricis, Reb.
[On heteroecism and specialization in Puccinia caricis Reb.] Rev. C6n. Bot. 32: 15-1S. 1920.
— After a large number of collections and inoculation experiments author divides Puccinia
caricis into 3 species: P. Caricis diffusa, with aecidia on Urtica and Ribes; P. caricis- Urticae
(P. Urticiae-caricis , Kleb.), with aecidia on Urtica; and P. caricis-Ribis (P. Ribesii, Cari-
cis, Kleb.), with aecidia on Ribes. Under the last named are 3 sub-species: P. Caricis-
Ribis, diffusa; P. caricis-Grossulariae ; and P. caricis-Ribis-nigri. — L. W. Sharp.

646. Fragoso, Romualdo Gonzalez. Notes and communications at the session of Oct.
1, 1919. Bol. R. Soc. Espafiola Hist, Nat. 19: 429-430. Oct., 1919.— The President of the
Society commented on certain species distributed as new in the last fascicle of Maire's "Myco-
theca Boreali-Africana," particularly with reference to their relation to the mycological flora
of Spain. Puccinia Scirpi-littoralis (Pat.) Maire, II, III. The species encountered on Scirpus
in regions where there is no IAmnanthemum nymphoides may be this new species; P. Laguri-
Chamaemoly Maire, O, I— II, III, probably occurs in southern Spain where Allium Chamae-
moly occurs; P. madritensis Maire, O, I— II, III, is probably the species reported as an aecid-
dium on Clematis cirrhosa from the Balaeric islands and referred to P. Agropyri Ell. & Ev. ;
Uromyces Cuenodii Maire, II, III; Entyloma Eryngii-tricuspidati Maire, probably occurs in
southern Spain; Physoderma Ornithogali Maire attacks Ornithogalum narbonnense which
occurs in all parts of Spain. — O. E. Jennings.

88 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

647. Fries, Thore C. E. Onygena equina (Willd.) Pers. funnen i Haliand. [Onygena
equina (Willd.) Pers. found in Holland.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 107. Fig. 1.
1919.

648. Gunn, W. F. Some Irish Mycetozoa. Irish Nat. 28: 45-48. 1919.— The number
of Irish Mycetozoa should approximate those recorded from Great Britain and further explora-
tion is desired. A list of thirty-eight species and varieties from new localities and one,
Hemitrichia vesparium, new to Ireland is given. — W. E. Praeger.

649. Hadden, N. G. The Uredineae of West Somerset. Jour. Botany 58: 37-39. 1920.
— This paper is a list of the rusts found within a few miles of Porlock in Somerset, England.
The list is said to contain an unusually large number of species, a number of which are rare
and interesting. The nomenclature is that of Ramsbottom's list of British Uredinales. —
K. M. Wiegand.

650. Harris, J. E. G. Contributions to the biochemistry of pathogenic anaerobes. VIII.
The biochemical comparison of microorganisms by quantitative methods. Jour. Path, and
Bact. 23: 30-49. Fig. 1-2. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 936.

651. Herre, A. W. C. T. A list of lichens from southeastern Alaska. Publ. Puget Sound
Biol. Sta. 2: 279-285. 1919. — A taxonomic report on the lichens collected by the members of
the U. S. Bureau of Soils Kelp Exploration Expedition to Southeastern Alaska in 1913. 86
species and varieties were collected, of which 19 were not previously known from Alaska.
The range of others is extended. — T. C. Frye.

652. Herrmann, E. Behandlung und Untersuchung der Trockenpilze. [Treatment and
examination of mushrooms for drying purposes.] Pharm. Zentralhalle Deutschland 60: 5-7,
21-25. PI. 1, fig. 16. 1919. — A description of edible fungi and tests for distinguishing these
from poisonous fungi. — H. Engelhardt.

653. Hollands, A. Ch. Formes levures pathogenes observees dans le sang d'Acridium
(Caloptenus italicus L.). [Pathogenic yeast forms observed in the blood of Acridium.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1341-1344. 1 fig. 1919. — Marchal has reported yeast forms in
the blood of the caterpillars of Cochylis. It is probable that these are parasitic. Author in
1918 discovered a form of yeast in the blood of crickets (Caloptenus italicus). The normal
limpid blood of the insect assumes a milky appearance when the insect is affected and death
ensues. Disease was produced by injection of blood of diseased individuals into normal ones.
It was possible to produce the disease in Psophus stridulus L. but in other forms experimented
upon the yeast cells were rapidly destroyed by the leucocytes. Organism is described and
figured. The organism was obtained in pure culture on various media and in certain cases
filamentous forms have appeared. Author suggests two possibilities, viz., that a yeast and
another fungus are present and secondly that the yeast form is merely one stage in the life
cycle of a filamentous form. It is proposed to inoculate insects with both forms to settle
this point. — V. H. Young.

654. Keissler, K. v. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte der Scoglien und Kleineren Inseln
Suddalmatiens. 4. Fungi. [The natural history of the smaller islands of southern Dalmatia.
4. Fungi.] Denkschr. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien. (Math.Nat. Kl.) 92:299-300 1916.— Only six
species are listed. These are Diplodina Sandstedei, Didymosphaeria sp., Hysterium angus-
tatum, Stictis radiata, Scutula Aspiciliae, and Leciographa centrifuga. — H. M. Fitzpalrick.

655. Kempton, F. E. Origin and development of the pycnidium. Bot. Gaz. 68: 233-261.
6 pi. Oct., 1919. — Pycnidia originate and develop by two main methods, meristogenous and
symphyogenous, the meristogenous method resolving itself into two modes, simple and com-
pound. Variations of the meristogenous method are found in Coniothyrium pyriana and
Sphaeronaemella fragariae. The symphyogenous method is less often found and is variable.
Acervuli arise as do pycnidia, simple acervuli by the simple meristogenous mode, and complex
ones usually by the compound meristogenous or symphyogenous method. Complex subicles

No. 1. August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC.

usually arise symphyogenously, although they may arise by the compound mcrisiogenous
mode. Simple sporodochia usually originate by I lie simple meristogenoua met hod. ( 'omplex
sporodochia, with a large base or subicle, usually arise either by the compound meristogenoua
mode or symphyogenously. The pseudo-acervulus of i he species of P< talozzia b1 udied arises
and develops as a pyenidium which breaks open and appears like an acervulus. The Bimple
meristogenous development is the one more often found in the Sphaeropsidales, while the
compound meristogenous and aymphybgenous modes are the more usual in the Melanconiales
and Tuberculariaceae. — F. E. Kempton.

656. Lagerbhrg, ToRSTEN. Onygena equina (Willd.) Pers. fran Dalarna. [Onygena
equina (Willd.) Pers. found in Dalarna.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 108. Fig. 1.
1019.

057. Lendner, A. Les mucorinees geophiles recoltees a Bourg-Saint-Pierre. [The soil
mucors collected at the village of St. Peter, Switzerland.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 362-376.
S fig. 1918. — Six cultures of Mucor which were obtained from the soil near St. Peter contained
two new varieties and two new species. Mucor Ramannianus Mocllcr was frequently found
in coniferous forests, sometimes on Sphagnum of peat bogs. M. plumbens Bonorden was com-
mon in the air and soil. M. hiemalis Wehmer ( — ) var. albus n. var produced occasional zygo-
spores with the -f- strain of the species. M. hiemalis (+) var. loundrae n. var. differs from
the species in its habit of growth in cultures. M. Jauchae n. sp. was isolated from the soil
of a fir forest. M. vallesiocus n. sp. was obtained from the soil, of a meadow. — W. H. Emig.

658. Lettau, G. Schweizer Flechten. [Some lichens of Switzerland.] Part I. Hed-
wigia 60: 84-128. Part II. Hedwigia 60: 267-312. 1918.— An enumeration of the lichens and
of some fungus-parasites of lichens, arranged by localities with critical notes. No new spe-
cies are described. — L. W. Riddle.

659. Li cent, Eug. La forme ascophore du Clasterosporium fungorum (Fr.) Sacc. (Am-
phisphaeria fungorum n. sp. Eug. Licent.) [The ascogenous form of C. fungorum (Fr.) Sacc]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 60-62. 1 fig. 1920.— C. fungorum is transferred
from the Mucedineae to the genus Amphisphaeria of the Ascomycetes. The author
has discovered and describes the asci-containing perithecia which appear in November be-
neath the dark-colored conidiferous filaments of this fungus when growing upon the white
fructifications of Corticium calceum Persoon or C. lacteum Fries as a host. These perithecia
develop until they project almost entirely free from the conidial layer, attaining a diameter
of 0.2 to 0.5 mm.— C. H. and W. K. Farr.

660. Magnusson, A. H. Material till VSstkustens Lavflora. [Material for the Lichen
Flora of the West Coast.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 75-92. 1919.— The author
gives a list of several hundred species of lichens found by him on the west coast and adjacent
islands of Sweden together with brief notes on their habitat and abundance. — W. W. Gilbert.

661. Malme, Gust. O. A. Lichenes suecici novi. [New Swedish lichens.] Svensk.
Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 26-31. 1919.— Author gives Latin descriptions of six new spe-
cies of lichens of the genera Lccidea, Catillaria, and Rhizocarpon. — W. W. Gilbert.

662. McCulloch, Lucia. Basal glume rot of wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 543-551. PI.
6H-63. 1920.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 749.

663. Merewschkowsky, C. Note sur une nouvelle forme de Parmelia vivant a l'etat
libre. [A new form of Parmelia living in an unattached condition.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve
10: 26-34. 1 fig. 1918. — Parmelia conspersa (Ehrh.) Ach. forma raga n. form occurs in abun-
dance on a certain plateau with all the vegetative characteristics of a steppe. On the steppe,
conditions for growth are unfavorable to the production of new lichen plants by the devel
ment of fungous spores and algal cells. As a consequence of the arid conditions this lichen
does not have fruiting bodies but multiplies by the fragmentation of the thallus. — W. H. Emig.

90 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

664. Mtjrrill, William A. Corrections and additions to the polypores of temperate North
America. Mycologia 12: 6-24. 1920. — Since the publication of the polypores in the North
American Flora much additional information has been obtained on this group involving clearer
identity of some of the forms previously described and adding a number of species not pre-
viously listed. Various changes are accordingly made or suggested involving the reclassi-
fication of numerous forms. — H. R. Rosen.

665. Mtjrrill, W. A. Fungi from Hedgcock. Mycologia 12: 41-42. 1920.— Twelve
species of polypores collected by Hedgcock and others are listed. — H. R. Rosen.

666. Mtjrrill, W. A. Collecting fungi at Yama farms. Mycologia 12: 42-43. 1920 —
Describes an interesting collecting tour in a large tract of virgin land near Poughkeepsie,
New York. Nearly 100 species of fungi were collected and several of the more interesting
polypores and agarics are mentioned.—//. R. Rosen.

667. Mtjrrill, W. A. Trametes serpens. Mycologia 12:46-47. 1920. — American speci-
mens referred to Trametes serpens Fr. are found to have smaller pores and are "otherwise
distinct" from those of Europe. The distribution of the American plant is given and it is
compared with a Philippine specimen, Elmeriana setulosa, which it seems to match. — H.
R. Rosen.

668. Mtjrrill, W. A. The genus Poria. Mycologia 12: 47-51. 1920.— Historical sketch
of the genus Poria as used by mycologists before the time of Persoon together with Persoon's
interpretation of thegenus is presented. P . medullapanis (Jacq.) Pers., one of the species upon
which Persoon based the genus, is thoroughly described, its variations noted and a large num-
ber of American collections of this species which were examined by the writer are listed. —
H. R. Rosen.

669. Murrill, W. A. Collecting fungi near Washington. Mycologia 12 : 51-52. 1920.—
Brief notes of mycologists and of a few fleshy fungi seen during a collecting trip around
Washington, D. C.—H. R. Rosen.

670. Northrtjp, J. H., Lauren H. Ashe, and R. R. Morgan. A fermentation process
for the production of acetone and ethyl alcohol. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 11: 723-727. 2 fig.
1919. — The general characteristics of a new organism, Bacillus acetoethylicum, are givien ac-
cording to the descriptive chart of the Society of American Bacteriologists, but a formal diag-
nosis is postponed for a later paper. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1515.] — B. M. Duggar.

671. Olivier, H. Les lichens pyrenocarpes de la flore d'Europe. [The pyrenocarpic
lichens of Europe.] Bull. Geog. Bot, 28: 146-152, 168-183. 1918.— First two installments
of a compilation of all the described genera, species, and varieties, of pyrenocarpic lichens
of Europe, with keys and diagnoses. The two parts cited include the genera Normandina,
and Endocarpon (taken in a broad sense), and the key to Polyblastia.—L. W. Riddl .

672. Paine, Sydney G., and W. F. Bewley. Studies in bacteriosis. IV.— "Stripe"
disease of tomato. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6 : 183-202. PL 8-9, 5 fig. 1919.— See Bot Absts. 5, Entry
756.

673. Paine, Sydney G., and H. Stansfield. Studies in bacteriosis. III. — A bacterial
leaf-spot disease of Protea cynaroides, exhibiting a host reaction of possibly bacteriolytic nature.]
Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 27-29. PL 2, fig. 3-6. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 757.

674. Pethybridge, G. H., and H. A. Lafferty. A disease of tomato and other plants
caused by a new species of Phytophthora. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 487-503. 3 pi.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1335.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. '.'I

ii7.">. Pfeiler, \\., and 1'. Engelhahdt. Zeigt der Ferkeltyphus-Eacillus <Eac. Vol-
dagsen Daramann und Stedefeder) ein Labiles biochemisches und agglutinaiorisches Ver-
halten? [Does the Ferkel typhus bacillus (Bac. Voldagsen Dammann und Stedefeder) show a
labile biochemical and agglutination relation?] Zeitschr. [nimunit&tsforsch. u. exp. Thera]
28:434 145. L919. — The authors show 11 mi Bac. Voldagsen Damm. & Stedef. is distinct from
the other members of the paratyphosus group and thai H does not approach the characl
of the group on long continued cultivation on artificial media -C. 11'. Dodg .

676. Plitt, Charles C. A short history of lichenology. Bryologisl 22: 77 85. L919.

677. Puyhaubert, A., and R. Jolly. Note sur un cas de mycetome a grains noirs pro-
voque par un champignon du genre Madurella. [Notes on a case of mycetoma with black gran-
ules, caused by a fungus of the genus Madurella.] Arch. Med. Exp. et Ana. Path Paris 28:
441— 145. 5 fig. 1919. — A skin disease of a native of the Ivory Coast was shown to be due to
infection with a fungus probably identical with Madurella mycetomi (Laveran) Brumpt.
The fungus grown in pure culture on carrot gave abundant mycelium with numerous small
black sclerotia, but no spores. — E. A. Bessey.

678. Rick, J. Contributio II ad monographiam agaricinorum brasiliensium. [Second
contribution to a monograph of Brazilian agarics.] Broteria Ser. Bot. 17: 101-111. 1919. —
The article is asequel to one published in Broteria for 1905. After briefly outlining difficulties
of study, the author lists 92 species or varieties mostly collected in the vicinity of Parecy
Novo. Notes upon spore measurements, color, appearance, and habitat, based upon fresh
material, accompany some of the species. Tricholoma sulphur ellem, Clilocybe nauseosa,
Cillybia sericea, Mycena sulphur eo-conspersa, Leptonia rosea, L. straminea, L. albo-serrulato,
L. olivacea, L. fuligineo-straminea, Pholiota pusilla, P. rosea, Inocybe megalospora, Psalli
haemorrhoidaria var. straminea, and Schizophyllum album are proposed as new. Note is made
that Lactarius Russula as previosly reported by the author is probably L. trivialis. — Edwar<l
B. Chamberlain.

679. Robertson, W. F. A starch-splitting bacterium found in cases of diabetes mel-
litus. Jour. Path, and Bact. 23: 122-123. 1919.

680. Romell, L. Svamplitteratur, sarskilt for studium av hymenomyceter [hattsvampar).
[Mycological literature, especially for the study of the hymenomycetes (hat fungi).] Sven^k.
Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 110-112. 1919. — A list of European literature on the hymeno-
mycetes and related fungi is given comprising thirty titles. — W. W. Gilbert.

681. Rosen, H. R. Ergot on Paspalum. Mycologia 12: 40-41. 1920. — Paspalum flor-
idanum is recorded as a new host for Claviceps spp. It is noted that attacked spikelets fall
with pedicels attached to them in contrast to the fall of normal spikelets in which the pedicels
remain attached to the rachis. — H. R. Rosen.

682. Seaver, Fred J. Photographs and descriptions of cup-fungi — VIII. Elvela infula
and Gyromitra esculenta. Mycologia 12: 1-5. PL 1. 1920. — Comparison between descrip-
tions and illustrations of Elvela (Helvetia) infula and Gyromitra esculenta leads the writer to
believe that these names are referable to the same fungus. Differences noted by various
authors are explainable as variations. The name Elvela infula Schaeff. is adopted because
of its priority; 11 synonyms are listed and the plant is redescribed and illustrated. — //. R.
Rosen.

683. Sernander, R. Subfossile Flechten. Flora 112: 703-724. 7 fig. 1918.

684. Speare, A. T. Further studies of Sorosporella uvella, a fungous parasite of noctuid
larvae. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 399-439. PI. 51-56. 1920.— Sorosporella uvella is recorded for
America. It is found to be related to the verticillaceous hyphomycetes rather than to the
Entomophthorales. It produces chlamydospores and thin-walled conidia. Yeast -like v

92 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Abstb., Vol. V,

tative cells, occurring in the blood of infected insects, are ontogenetically related to other
phases in the development of the organism. Fruiting structures of the Isaria type have been
observed in culture and in moist chamber. An ascigerous stage has not been observed. An
emended description is presented. — -The organism produces a disease of noctuid larvae (cut
worms) and in infection experiments a mortality of from 60 to 90 per cent was obtained. —
Ingestion of vegetative cells by phagocytes was observed, the process being followed appar-
ently by the destruction of the phagocytes. Phagocytosis is discussed at some length, also
certain phases of insect control by means of fungous parasites. — A bibliography of 24 titles is
appended. — D. Reddick.

685. Stevens, F. L. Three new fungi from Porto Rico. Mycologia 12: 52-53. 1920.—
The following fungi collected by the writer and briefly described by Mr. Lamkey are presented:
Microstoma ingaicola Lamkey sp. nov. producing witches' brooms on Inga laurina, M. pithe-
colobii Lamkey sp. nov. producing spots on Pithecolobium saman, and Perenoplasmopara
portoricensis Lamkey sp. nov. producing spots on Melia azedarach. — //. R. Rosen.

686. Stevens, F. L., and Nora Dalbey. A parasite of the tree fern (Cyathea). Bot.
Gaz. 68:222-225. 2 pi. Sept., 1919. — A fungus collected on Cyathea arborea in Porto Rico has
characters suggesting relationship with Microthyriaceae, Perisporiaceae, Dothidiaceae, and
Phacidiaceae; the authors incline to place it in the last-named group, proposing for it a new
generic name, Griggsia. The type species is described as Griggsia cyathea. — H. C. Cowles.

687. Strasser, P. Pius. Siebenter Nachtrag zur Pilzflora des Sonntagberges (N.-6.)
1917. [7th addition to the fungus flora of Sonntagberg.] Verhandl. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien.
68: 97-123. 1918. — A list of species is given accompanied by the data of collection and criti-
cal notes. The material was in most cases examined by von Hohnel and a considerable number
of species and a few genera are listed as new and are attributed to him. Some of these have
been published elsewhere by von Hohnel but others are designated here as unpublished, the
binomial being followed by the citation "v. H. nov. spec, in litt." These fall in many groups
of the fungi but since technical descriptions of these will be given elsewhere by von Hohnel
they need not be listed here. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

688. Takahashi, R. On the fungous flora of the soil. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan
l2: 17-22. 1919. — The author isolated several fungi from the soil of the test garden of the
Tokyo Imperial Agricultural College by using soil extract gelatin-agar (+60, Fuller's scale).
The isolation is made at two different periods, the one in September, 1915, and the other in
February, 1916. The result of the experiments is listed as follows: In 1915 (a) In the soil
obtained from 2 cm. below the surface: Mucor racemosus, Aspergillus oryzae, A. fumigatus,
Penicillium roseum, P. candidum, P. sp. No. 1., Chaetomium crispatum, Stemphylium verru-
culosum, and Penicillium sp. No. 2.; (b) 5 cm. below the surface: Aspergillus fumigatus, A.
niger, Penicillium humicola, P. candidum, Allescheriella nigra, Acrostalagmus sp., and Hel-
minthosporium subulatum; (c) 8 cm. below the surface: Aspergillus fumigatus and Trichoderma
Koningi; (d) 12 cm. below the surface: Penicillium Duclauxi, Penicillium sp. No. 2, Chaeto-
mium alivaceum and Alternaria tenuis. In 1916 (f) 2 cm. below the surface: Rhizopus nigri-
cans, Aspergillus oryzae, A. niger, A. glaucus and A. nidulans; (g) S cm. below the surface:
Mucor adventitus, M. circinelloides, Zygorhynchus Molleri, Rhizopus ?vigricans and Botrylis
cinerea. — T. Matsumoto.

689. Tanaka, Ty6zabur6. New Japanese fungi-notes and translations — VIII. Myco-
logia 12: 25-32. 1920. — The following fungi are described: Phytophthora Carica (Hora)
Hori causing a fruit rot of Ficus Carica, Capnodium Tanakae Shirai and Hora sp. nov. sapro-
phytic on fruits of Citrus grandis, Gloeosporium foliicolum Nishidasp. nov. causing a spotting
of fruits and leaves and a blighting of twigs of Citrus spp., Dactylaria Panici-paludosi Sawada
sp. nov. on living leaves of Panicum paludosnm, Dactylaria Leersiae Sawada sp. nov. on
living leaves of Leersia hexandra and Dactylaria Cosli Sawada sp. nov. on living leaves of
Costus speciosus. — //. R. Rosen.

No. 1, August, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF PI NGI, ETC. 93

090. Tsuji, R. On the morphology and the systematic position of Cercosporella persica
Sacc. and Clasterosporium degenerans Syd. (Japanese.) Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan l2:
23-35. Fig. 1-2. 1919. — A fungus found on the leaves of a peach tree in Japan proved to be
identical with Cercosporella persica Sacc. collected on a similar host and determined by W. I r,
Farlow in the United States. This fungus is closely related to Clasterosporium degt torn*,
Syd. on the leaves of Primus Mumc and Armeniaca, in that its conidiophores arc produced
on creeping hyphae emerging from stomatal openings, and also in color, shape, and mode of
septation of their conidia, etc. He comes to the conclusion that these two species should
be included under the same genus, and the name Clasterosporium persicum (Sacc.) Tsuji is
proposed for the first-named species. — T. Matsumoto.

691. Vuillemin, Paul. Remarques sur les mycetomes. Hommage a la memoire de R.
Jolly. [Remarks on mycetomas. Tribute to the memory of R. Jolly.] Arch. M6d. Exp.
Anat. Path. Paris 28: 446-451. 1919. — Gives a discussion of the different types of mycetomes
and of the fungi producing them, in particular Madurella mycetomi (Laveran) Brumpt. — E. A .
Bessey

'&.

692. Waksman, Selman A. Cultural studies of species of Actinomyces. Soil Sci. 8:
71-215. PI. 1-4. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 998.

693. Watson, W. The bryophytes and lichens of calcareous soil. Jour. Ecol. 6: 189-19S.
1918. — Gives lists of calciphile and calcifuge species, arranged by habitats as they occur in
England; also a list of "indifferent" species. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 309.] — L. W. Riddle.

694. Weimer, J. L. Variations in Pleurage curvicolla (Wint.) Kuntze. Amer. Jour. Bot.
6: 406-409. 1919. — Variation in this species was studied to determine the taxonomic value
of certain characters. The number of spores in the ascus is apparently 128, 256, or 512. The
spore size in the strain studied is approximately the same as that recorded for other strains
of the species, but the size of the perithecia is somewhat more variable. Secondary spore
appendages, supposed to be a constant taxonomic character for the species, were not demon-
strated.— E. W. Sinnott.

695. Weimer, J. L. Some observations on the spore discharge of Pleurage curvicolla
(Wint.) Kuntze. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 75-77. 1920. — Author reports that this species is able to
discharge its spores to a height of 45 cm. above the fruiting surface of the culture, probably higher
than can any other Ascomycete yet studied. This is due in part to the fact that the spore mass
discharged is rather large and heavy, comprising some 500 spores and a quantity of gelatinous
substance. Experiments show that the spore discharge is strongly and positively heliotropic,
but that reflected light seems to exert a stronger stimulus than does direct light. — E. W.
Sinnott.

696. Weston, William H. Repeated zoospore emergence in Dictyuchus. Bot. Gaz.
68: 287-296. 1 pi., 1 fig. Oct., 1919. — The non-sexual reproduction of the fungus studied
shows it to be a species of Dictyuchus, but exact determination was impossible, because sexual
reproduction was not observed. Dictyuchxis differs from all other Saprolegniaceae, save per-
haps Aplanes, in that during spore formation the walls of adjacent spores unite with one
another and with the enveloping sporangium membrane to form a polygonally chambered
indehiscent structure. The zoospores which emerge from the sporangiospores come to rest
and encyst as usual, but from these encysted spores ("cystospores") in turn laterally biciliate
zoospores may emerge. This repeated emergence of laterally biciliate zoospores has not pre-
viously been reported in any of the Saprolegniaceae. — H. C. Couies.

697. Wheldon, J. A. Llanberis lichens. Jour. Botany 58: 11-15. 1920. — A list of
lichens compiled in the district around Llanberis in August, 1919. Many lichens known to
occur in this district were not seen, while some rare species were observed. Few corticole
species were collected as most of the time was spent above tree line. The arrangement is

94 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

that of A. Lorrain Smith's British Lichens. The list contains the names of about 125 species
and a number of varieties. One species, Bilimbia cambrica, is described as new. — A'. M.
Wiegand.

698. Wilsox, G. H. A method for the simultaneous demonstration of gram-positive and
gram-negative organisms in sections. Jour. Path, and Bact. 23: 123-124. 1919.

699. Winslow, C. E. A., I. J. Kligler, axd W. Rothberg. Studies on the classifica-
tion of the colon-typhoid group of bacteria with special reference to their fermentative reactions.
Jour. Bact. 4: 429-503. 1919. — The authors review rather completely the literature of the
colon-typhoid group and arrange the whole series into six groups based mainly upon their
fermentation of various carbohydrates. Several cultures are studied and classified. Seven-
teen species are included in the entire six groups and characteristics of each species given.
The commonly called B. paratyphosus A is designated as B. paratyphosus and B. paratyphosus
B. as B. sckottmulleri, a new name; the name B. morgani is given to the formerly-called Morgan
bacillus. — Chester A. Darling.

700. Yasuda, A. Kinrui-Zakki 87. [Notes on fungi, 87.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 112-114.
1919. — Three species of Hymenomyccles found in Japan Stereum boninense, Hydnum violascens,
and Tomentella fusca, are reported. The first-named species was first described by the author
under the name Hymenochaete boninensis Yasuda. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1196.] —
T. Matsumoto.

701. Yasuda, A. Kinrui-Zakki S3. [Notes on fungi, 88.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 140-141.
1919. — Three species of Hymenornycct.es found in Japan, Polyporus Greenii, Stereum rimosum,
and Clavaria amethystina, are reported, of which the first-named species is new to science, its
morphological characters being as follows: Pileus stipitate, corky, brown, covered with fine
hairs, circular in outline 4 to 5 cm., slightly convex, triangular in section, azonate, context
brown, thick, mouths grayish brown, angular, 1 to 2 mm.; spores light brown, ellipsoid,
smooth, 8-9X5-5. 5/x; stipe 2 to 3.5 cm. high, 1.1 to 1.5 cm. in diameter, slightly narrowed at
the base, concolorous with the pileus, covered with fine hairs. Growing on the ground,
Settsu, Japan. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1197.]— T. Matsumoto.

702. Yasuda, A. Kinrui-Zakki 89. [Notes on fungi, 89.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 167-169.
1919. — Three species of Hymcnomycetes found in Japan, Polystictus scopulosus, Coniophora
arida, and Hypocrca citrina, are reported. The first-named species is new to science; mor-
phological characters as follows: Sporophore stipitate, coriaceous, 6.5 to 9 cm. high; pileus
thin, fan-shaped, 4.5-6 cm. in length, 5 cm. in width, margin irregularly waved, chestnut
brown, covered with depressed scales, context whitish; stipe short, lateral, smooth, yellowish;
mouths grayish, tubes short, angular, 0.2 to 0.3 mm. ; spores ellipsoid, smooth, light brown,
7 by 5 fi. Growing on the stem of Alnus sp. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1198.] — T. Matsumoto.

703. Yasuda, A. Kinrui-Zakki 90. [Notes on fungi, 90.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 189-
191. 1919. — Three species, namely Stereum japonicum, Chactosphaeria tristis, and Lycoperdon
spadiceum , are reported. The first-named species is new to science; morphological charac-
ters as follows: Fructification ruspinate, coriaceous, 8 to 15 cm., hymenial layer light brown,
velvety, upper part of context concolorous with the hymenium, lower part grayish brown,
cystidia club-shaped, light brown, encrusted with crystals of calcium oxalate; spores spherical,
hyaline, smooth, 4 n. Growing on stems. — T. Matsumoto.

704. Zahlbruckxer, A. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte der Scoglien und Kleineren In-
seln Siiddalmatiens. 5. Lichenes. [The natural history of the smaller islands of southern
Dalmatia. 5. Lichens.] Denkschr. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien. (Math.-Nat. Kl.) 92: 301-322.
1916. — New species are described and various nomenclatorial changes are made in the genera,
Vcrrucaria, Dermatocarpon, Arthonia, Artholhdium, Roccclla, Lecanactis, Lecidea, Gyalecla,
/'■ rtusaria, Lecanora, Ramalina, Protoblastcnia, Caloplaca, Xanthora, Bucllia, Rinodina.
One hundred and twenty-six species are listed. — •//. M . Fitzpatrick.

No. 1. August, 1920] paleobotany 95

705. Zschacke, II. Die mitteleuropaeischen Verrucariaceen. (The Verrucariaceae of
central Europe.] Bedwigia60: 1-9. 1918. — Two earlier papers with the same title have i ei a
published. The presenl paper is based on collections made in Switzerland, while the author
was interned. An enumeration of species is given with cital ions of localil ies and some cril ical
notes. Staurothele geoica is described as :i new species. — L. W. Riddle.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

706. Barett, A. Contribution to the study of the "Siphoneae verticillatae" of the Calcare
di Villanova-Mondovi. [The verticillate Siphoneae of the Villanova-Mondovi limestone.] Atti
Soc. Etal. Sci. Nat. eMus. civ. St. Nat. Milano 58:216-230. 1919— The "Calcare di Mondovi"
typically exposed — as the name indicates — in the region of Mondovi 'Piedmont) and in par-
ticular in the massif of Villanova a few kilometers from the town, is rich in diminutive triassic
algae, which, about 1865, Prof. Bruno recognized for the first time there. Different specimens
of like fossils were studied by Gumbel and by Zittel who referred them to the Muschelkalk
and the Wettersteinkalk horizons. For this work Barett examined some specimens of the
Calcare di Villanova at the Museo Geologico di Torina, sent by Prof. Bruno, and especially
the abundant material of his own collecting not only from Villanova, but also from other locali-
ties of the surrounding calcareous zone: M. Calvario, Gravagna, P.loline and Torre, Pever-
agno. Material of different appearance according to the source or origin, but always crystal-
line, so that the fossils, although superficially seemingly well preserved are profoundly
metamorphosed in the interior, rendering their preparation and study most difficult. Barett
recognized the presence of the following Diploporidi in the Calcare di Mondovi: Kanlia debilis
Gumbel, K. philosophi Pia, K. dolomitica Pia, Tentlosporclla gigantea Pia, T. hercules Sapp.,
T. vicctina Tornquist, and in addition the following, which he proposes as new: Kantia
philosophi var. gracilis n. var., K. monregalensis sp. n., and K. (?) Brunnoi sp. n. He describes
and figures them all. — Despite the great number of specimens examined, their different orifiin<
or sources, and the extraordinary abundance of the individuals contained in them, this study,
because of the above-mentioned difficulty, has not yielded as great results as might have
been hoped; nevertheless from this it stands proved that in the Calcare di Mondovi there
are also encountered the Kanlia philosophi and dolomitica typical of the Muschalkalk, and
the Teutlosporella gigantea and T. vicentina, hitherto not noted; and there results then the
confirmation that the horizon is to be referred to the lower Neotriassic— R. Pampanini.

707. Benson, M. Cantheliophorus, Bassler: New records of Sigillariostrobus (Mazo-
carpon). Ann. Botany 34: 135-137. 1920.— Evidence is given to show that specimens
described by Bassler as proving the existence of a sporangiophoric lepidophyte and referred
to a new genus Cantheliophorus, as well as similar specimens previously described by Nath-
orst, are really examples of Sigillarian microsporophylls. — '.'-'. P. Thompson.

708. Berry, E. V,t. The evolution of flowering plants and warmblooded animals. Amer-
Jour. Sci. 49:207-211. Mar., 1920.— Discusses the correlation between the two and the depend-
ence of the latter on the former— E. W. Berry.

709. Bertraxd, Paul. Les zones vegetales du terrain houiller du Nord de la France.
[Plant zones of the coal regions of Northern France.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168:
780-7S2. 1919.— A table of the location and vertical extent of the plant zones in the coal
deposits of Northern France. — F. B. Wann.

710. Cockerell, T. D. A. Carpolithes macrophyllus a Philadelphus. Torreya 19: 244.
19X9. — Carpolithes macrophyllus Ckll., described in Torreya 11: 235, is transferred to Phila-
dclphus, but very likely belongs to P. palaeophilus Ckll. (1908).— .7. C. Nelson.

96 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V.

711. Conklin, E. G. The mechanism of evolution. [1] Sci. Monthly 10: 170-181.
1920. — This is a discussion of Mendelism in which the author concludes that the law, especially
as regards the segregation of inheritance factors, is of universal occurrence — that there is
no other type of inheritance. Alternative inheritance with dominant and recessive char-
acters, purity of germ cells, monohybrids, dihybrids, etc., factorial theory of heredity, blend-
ing inheritance, species hybrids, and unequal reciprocal hybrids are discussed in relation to
the above conclusion. [See also next following Entry, 712.] — L. Pace.

712. Conklin, E. G. The mechanism of evolution. [2] Sci. Monthly 10: 269-291.
Fig. 11-21. 1920. — This paper takes up the cellular basis of ontogeny and phylogeny. There
is no fundamental difference between germ cells and somatic cells. Nucleus and cytoplasm
are fundamentally different chemically, morphologically and physiologically. — Mitosis fur-
nishes the necessary mechanism for the accurate division of the cell, and the persistent iden-
tity of the chromosome is accepted. The suggestion is made that chromomeres are probably
much more constant than chromosomes. — The mechanism of heredity is to be found in the
germ cells. Genetics and cytology must cooperate in correlating features of the germ cell
with the phenomena of heredity. The similarity of chromosomes of the spermatozoon and
of the egg, the reduction division, the doubling of chromosomes in fertilization, the sex-
chromosomes, sex-linked characters, linkage of characters, chromosomal localization and
cross-overs are all presented as favoring the localization of the genes in the chromosomes.
[See also next preceding Entry, 711.] — L. Pace.

713. Coulter, J. M. Cones of Williamsonia. [Rev. of: Arber, E. A. Newell. Re-
marks on the organization of the cones of Williamsonia gigas. Ann. Botany 33: 173-179. 5 fig.
1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1143).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 152. 1919.

714. Grandori, Ltjigia. Su di un seme mesozoico di pteridosperma e sulle sue affinita
con forme paleozoiche e forme viventi. [On a Mesozoic pteridosperm seed and its affinities
with Paleozoic and recent forms.] Atti d'Accad. Veneto-Trentino-Istriana. 8:107-116. 8 fig.,
1 pi. 1915.

715. Grandori, Ltjiqia. Sulle affinita delle Pteropsida fossili, studio critico. [On the
affinities of the fossil Pteropsida.] Atti d'Acad. Veneto-Trentino-Istriana 8: 163-195. 7 fig.
1915.

716. Knowlton, F. H. A dicotyledonous flora in the type section of the Morrison forma-
tion. Amer. Jour. Sci. 49: 189-194. Mar., 1920. — Records the presence of an Upper Creta-
ceous flora similar to that of the Dakota sandstone from the type locality of the Morrison for-
mation near Golden, Colorado. The Morrison formation has yielded a varied dinosaur fauna
and there has been much controversy as to whether it was of Jurassic or Lower Cretaceous
age. — E. W. Berry.

717. Principi, Paolo. Le Dicotiledoni fossili del giacemento oligocenico di Santa
Giustina e Sassello in Liguria. [The fossil dicotyledons of the Oligocene of Santa Giustina
and Sassello in Liguria.] Mem. Desc. Carta Geol. d'ltalia 6: 1-294. PL 1-85. 1916 (1919).
— Liguria is one of the classic regions of Tertiary geology. The Oligocene of Sta. Giustina
and Sassello record the transition from continental to delta and then lagoonal or estuary to
littoral conditions of deposition followed by a recurrence of lagoonal conditions at the base
of the middle Oligocene and littoral again at the top of the middle Oligocene. The fossil
plants which are the subject of the memoir come from the basal beds or Sannoisian stage.
Previous accounts of this flora have been published by Sismonda in 1859 and 1865, and Squin-
abol in the period from 1889 to 1892 described the Cryptogams, Gymnosperms and Monocoty-
ledons.— The dicotyledons recorded number 339 forms, the most varied genera being Quercus
Juglans, Myrica, Ficus, Laurus, Cinnamomum, and Rhamnus. Eighty-six new species are
described in the following genera: Castanea, Dryophyllum, Quercus, Juglans, Juglandophyl-
lum, Myrica, Comptonia, Populus, Protoficus, Ficus, Artocarpidium, Artocarpus, Cocculites,

No. 1, August, 1920] PALEOBOTANY 97

Cocculus, Laurus, Persea, Cinnamomum, Magnolia, Anona, Sterculia, Dombeyopsis, Ptero-
spermites, Bombax, Sapindus, Malpighiastrum, Celastrus, Rhamnus, Aralia, Dcwalquea,
Cornus, Terminalia, Lomatia, Amelancbier, Prunus, Machaerium, Aristolochia, Chrysophyl-
lum, Diospyros, Apocynoi)hyllum, Alstonia, Viburnum and Carpites. — The flora shows a
curious mingling of temperate and tropical types and contains very many more of the former
than does the known North American floras of corresponding age. — E. W. Berry.

718. Sahni, B. On certain archaic features in the seed of Taxus baccata, with remarks
on the antiquity of the Taxineae. Ann. Botany 34: 117-134. 7 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 574.

719. Schlagintweit, O. Weichselia Mantelli im nordostlichen Venezuela. [Weichselia
Mantelli in northeast Venezuela.] Centralb. Min. Geol. Palaont. 1919: 315-319. 1919 —
Records this ubiquitous Mesozoic fern from Santa Maria, Venezuela, in a shale thought to be
Neocomian in age. — E. W. Berry.

720. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. Miscellaneous
topics. New Phytol. 18: 129-176. Fig. 64-78. 1919.— This is chapter 12, in which miscel-
laneous topics are presented. A table of known fossil remains of Compositae and their locali-
ties is accompanied by critical notes and comments. The composites are believed to have
arisen in late Cretaceous or early Eocene. From the point of origin in the northern Andean
region of South America, migration occurred chiefly along mountain ranges. By the end of
the Eocene the differentiation of types and wide dispersal was accomplished. — A summary of
cytology, with original figures based on Senecio, follows. Spermatogenesis, oogenesis, and
the history of the embryo sac are discussed, with a special account of the antipodals. The
chromosomes are treated from the standpoint of phylogeny. A table is given of the number
in all composites so far as known. — The nature and distribution of the latex system in the
tribes are discussed. — Last are brief accounts of seedling structure, pericarp, anatomy, phyto-
chemistry, and pappus in the Compositae. — The bibliography contains 173 titles. — I. F.
Leivis.

721. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. General conclu-
sions. New Phytol. 18: 201-234. Fig. 79. 1919.

722. Stopes, Marie C. New Bennettitean cones from the British Cretaceous. Phil.
Trans. Roy. Soc. London B, 208: 389-440. 5 -pi. 1918. — Bennettites albianus, sp. nov., is
described from a cone found in the Gault (or Albian) of Folkestone Warren. The fruit is an
ovulate cone, not less than 70 mm. in diameter and probably much more. The innumerable
seeds, 600 or more revealed in a single transverse section, are five-ribbed, much elongated,
torpedo-shaped, 5-6 mm. long and about 1.2 mm. in greatest diameter. The seed with its
many layered integument is inclosed in a cupule-like extension of tubular cells of the stalk.
The micropyles are blocked by plugs of nucellar tissue. Around the apex of the seed, inter-
seminal scales are completely mutually fused not only with each other but with the seed tissues.
The embryos contain two cotyledons and both the radicle and the hypocotyl are relatively
massive. The scales are externally covered by a well marked "plastid layer" which runs
around the collar of the micropyle. — The complete fusion of the stony scales must have meant
that there was great stability and strength in the hard, uniform shell which surrounded the
fruit. This solid shell firmly enclosed the ripe seeds, which did not rattle about in it loose,
for the ribbed apices of the seeds were wedged into the solid mass. It is not impossible that
the hard fruit had considerable drought to withstand. It certainly seems fitted to do so. —
The extraordinarily great size of Bennettites albianus raises a point of general interest. In
many families of animals giant forms appear shortly before the extinction of the group. This
new Bennettites possesses the largest cone of the family and was taken from the highest and
latest geological horizon in which the group is known. May it then be considered in the same
light as the animal giants — namely a burst of glory before extinction? Any conclusion on
this point, no matter how tempting, must not be accepted too readily. A giant fruit in many

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

;98 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol V

of the cycadales may be borne on small plants. The giantism of the animals approaching
extinction was not in their reproductive organs but in their general bodies. The comparison
with animals is, therefore, insecure and rests on too many assumptions. Paleobotanical evi-
dence is made up of too few isolated cases to point a general law of evolution. — Bennettites
maximus Carruthers is also figured and described in detail for the first time. The only speci-
men of this is from the lower Greensand in the Isle of Wight. This specimen consists of a large
trunk containing a number of cones. Sections made of this trunk show a number of cones.
These are bisporangiate. The male organs were developing at the time the plant was petri-
fied. The female receptacle was at that time undifferentiated, meristematic tissue. Sec-
tions have been made, however, of one cone showing the ovule rudiment and the surrounding
tissue. — A. E. Waller.

723. Stopes, Marie C. On the four visible ingredients in banded bituminous coal:
Studies in the composition of coal, No. 1. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 90: 470-487. PI. 11-12.
1.919* — Proposes names fusain, durain, clarain, and vitrain for four recognizably distinct
ingredients of banded bituminous coal. These types are distinctive (a) in effect on sensitive
plates (b) chemical and physical behaviour (c) in microscopic details. — Paul B. Sears.

724. Wilson, W. J. Notes on some fossil plants from New Brunswick. Geol. Surv.
Canada, Summary Rept. 1917 F: 15-17. 1918. — Publication of identifications and notes on speci-
mens and photographs submitted to Robert Kidston. The material came from the Carbon-
iferous of Rothwell, New Brunswick. — E. W. Berry.

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

725. Anonymous. Celery leaf-spot disease or blight. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20:
86-89. 3 fig. 1920.

726. Anonymous. A new disease of pears, new to the continent of America. Agric. Gaz.
Canada 6: 951-952. 4 fig- Oct., 1919. — Specimens of pears received by the Division of Botany,
Dominion Department of Agriculture, from Kentville, Nova Scotia, showed an unusual rot.
Nearly full grown pears showed one or more large, circular, dark-brown spots which were
quite firm in texture. Phylophlhora cactorum was obtained in culture from the spots. Only
the fruit upon the low hanging branches showed the disease, which suggests that the infection
may originate from surrounding infected vegetation. Control measures, chiefly prophylactic
are suggested. — 0. W. Dynes.

727. Appel, Otto, and Johanna Westerdijk. Die Gruppierung der durch Pilze
hervorgerufenen Pflanzenkrankheiten. [The classification of plant diseases due to fungi.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 29: 176-186. 1919. — The authors point out the advantages of a
classification based upon symptomology, particularly to students of phytopathology. They
suggest five main groups, viz. : rots, spots, fungus coverings, increase of tissues, and vascular
diseases. Each main group is divided into auxiliary groups, thus: "Rots," for instance, is
subdivided into rot of seeds, of seedlings, of roots, of tubers, of bulbs, of rhizomes; basal stem
rots; general stem rots; rots of buds and flowers, of fruits, of wood, of bark; and dry rots.
The group "Increase of tissues" covers witches' brooms, galls, and flower and fruit transfor-
mations (ergot, smuts, etc.). Each group is discussed, reviewing examples. — H. T. Gilssow.

728. Baker, C. F. A contribution to Philippine and Malayan technical bibliography.
Work fundamental to plant pathology and economic entomology. Philippine Agric. 8: 32-37.
1919. See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 123S.

No. 1, August, 1920] PATHOLOGY

729. Barrb, H. W. Report of the division of botany. South Carolina Wi.-. 3ta.
Ann. Rent. 32: 20-31. 1919. — A summary of the work on tin- following projects is given:

Cotton anthracnose, angular loaf spot of cotton, bacterial content of milk, planl 'li i
survey, cooperative research. — G. H. Coon*.

730. Blin, H. La pourriture des griffes d'asperges. [Asparagus root-rot.] Rev. Hortic.
91: 325-326. 1 fig. Aug., 1919. — This disease is due to Rhizoctonia violacea which atti
many other types of plants. All portions of asparagus plants which are attacked should be
carefully dug up and burned. The soil should then be disinfected with carbon-bisulfide

(about 250 grams per square meter) or preferably formaldehyde (about 60 grams per squ
meter). Either of these should be forced into the soil at several places with a syringe. Sulfo-
carbonate of potassium (300 grams in 100 liters of water) has also been used successfully.
The soil is first removed from the hills which have been attacked and these are then Bprayed
lightly with the mixture. The following year, before hilling-up a second treatment is given.
Before replanting infected areas they should be thoroughly disinfected during the winter
and the clumps dipped in the disinfecting solution. Following any of these treatments the
soil should be well fertilized, since the disinfection destroys the soil organisms present. Care
should be taken to avoid such disinfectants as may leave harmful residues in the soil treated.
As a matter of precaution, it is better not to replant infected areas for 2 or 3 years. — E. ./.
Kraus.

731. Boas, Friediucti. Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Kartoffelabbaues. [Contribution to
the knowledge of deterioration in potatoes.] Zeitschr. Fflanzenkrankh. 29: 171-176. 1919. —
The author states that minute differences in the hydrogen-ion concentrations may have marked
effects upon metabolic processes. — This caused him to inquire whether, in plant diseases,
especially in leaf roll or curly disease of potatoes, there could be determined any differences
in the hydrogen-ion concentrations existing in sound and diseased plants. — He ascertained
from his experiments (describing technique employed) that, without exception, the cell sap
of sound plants showed appreciably more acidity than that of diseased plants. The acid
metabolism of diseased plants is plainly disturbed. In determining the albumen metabolism
that might be expected under the circumstances, author determines that the diseased potato
stems are flooded with amino acids, while the sound tissues are free, or only show traces of
these acids. Examining then into the catalase contents of diseased and sound plants, he
finds obvious differences in his experimental varieties, inasmuch as the diseased portions show
an increase in catalase contents over the sound ones; but not all experiments gave identical
results. (Bibliography.) — H. T. Giissow.

732. Chou, Chung Ling. Notes on fungous diseases in China. (Text in Chinese.)
Khu Shou [Science-Publication of The Chinese Science Society] 4: 1223-1229. J,6 fig. 1919.
— The author gives a detailed description of symptoms and morphology of fifteen fungous
diseases found in the locality of Nanking: Peronospora parasitica on Brassica juncca, Perono-
spora effusa on spinach, P. vicae on peas, P. schleidcniana on onion leaves, Altcrnaria brassicae
on Brassica pekinensis, Cercospora crucnta on beans, Ustilago crameri on wheat, U. avenae
on oats, Urycyslis tritici on wheat, Ustilago shiriana on bamboo, Erysiphe gramijiis on barley,
Pleospora gramineum on barley, Exoascus deformans on peach leaves, Aecidium mori on mul-
berry stems, and Sclerotinia cinerea on cherries. — Chunjen C. Chen.

733. Cook, Mel. T. Philippine plant diseases. [Rev. of : Reinkixg, Otto A. Philippine
economic-plant diseases. Philippine Jour. Sci. A, 13: 165-274. 43 fig., 22 pi, 1918. (See Bot.
Absts. 2, Entry 1308.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 310-311. 1919.

734. Cook, Melville T. Report of the department of plant pathology. Ann. Rept.
New Jersey Agric. Exp. Sta. 1918: 299-302. 1919.

735. Cook, Mel. T. Potato diseases in New Jersey. New Jersey Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ.
105. 38 p. 1919. — Along with descriptions and illustrations of the common potato diseases

100 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

the results of the spraying tests for a period of six years and the rules governing seed certifi-
cation in several States are given. — Mel. T. Cook.

736. Cook, Mel. T. Seed and soil treatment for vegetable diseases. New Jersey Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 106. 4 p. 1919.

737. Cook, Mel. T., and J. P. Helyar. Diseases of grain and forage crops. New Jersey
Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 102. 16 p. 1918.

738. Chain, C. C. Warm bath for wheat. Sci. Amer. 121 : 579. 1 fig. 1919.— Popular
account is given of treatment for smut. — Chas. H. Otis.

739. Darnell-Smith, G. P. Dry rot in timber. Australian Forest. Jour. 2: 314-316.
1919— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 175.

740. Edson, H. A., and M. Shapovalov. Temperature relations of certain potato-rot
and wilt-producing fungi. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 511-524. 9 fig. 1920. — Single strains of
Fusarium coeruleum, F. discolor var. sulphureum, F. eumartii, F. radicicola, F. tricothecioides ,
and a northern and a southern strain of Verticillium albo-atrum were grown on 2 per cent potato
agar without sugar at temperatures ranging from 1° to 40°. Minimum temperature for all
forms is around 5°; maximum for F. coeruleum, F. tricothecioides and V. albo-atrum, ("north-
ern") 30° or slightly less, for F. oxysporum, about 37°, for F. radicicola about 39°, and for the
remaining, slightly under 35°; optimum for F. oxysporum and F. radicicola about 30°; for the
remaining about 25°. — A certain degree of correlation exists between the temperature relations
of these organisms in pure cultures and their geographical distribution and seasonal occur-
rence. This is particularly striking in the case of the 2 wilt-producing fungi, F. oxysporum
and V. albo-atrum. — A temperature of about 4° should hold Fusarium tuber rots in check dur-
ing storage. The susceptibility of V. albo-atrum to high temperatures suggests the possi-
bility of a heat treatment for seed tubers harboring the fungus. — Temperature tests in certain
cases may serve as a useful supplementary method for the identification of fungi exhibiting
contrasting thermal relationships.— D. Reddick.

741. Ellis, J. H. The stage of maturity of cutting wheat when affected with black stem
rust. Agric. Gaz. Canada 6: 971. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 20.

742. Fragoso, Romualdo Gonzalez. Notes and communications at the session of Oct.
1, 1919. Bol. R. Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19: 429-430. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 646.

743. Fragoso, R. G. Enfermedades del almendro. [Diseases of the almond.] Bol. R.
Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19: 458. Oct., 1919. [Review of an article by A. Ballester, pub-
lished as a leaflet by Dir. Gen. Agric. Spain, in April, 1919.] The reviewer presents critical
discussion of the publication and takes issue with several statements. Clasterosporium
carpophilum is reported as a serious parasite, especially in its conidial stage (Corynewn
beijerinckii) . The following disease producing species omitted by Fragoso are cited : Puccinia
pruni and P. cerasi, Gloeosporium amygdalinum, Fusicoccum amygdali, and Ccrcospora circum-
scissa. — 0. E. Jennings.

744. Gauba, Th. Das Hopfenmissjahr 1918. [An off-year for hops.] Der Bierbrauer
46: 161-162. 1918. — Very grave losses (30 to 50 per cent) in Austria, Hungary and Germany
occasioned by early attack of hop aphis followed bjr sooty mold and mildew. [Through abstr.
of Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 193. 1919.] — D. Reddick.

745. Geschwind, A. Die der Omorikafichte (Picea omarica Pane.) schadlichen Tiere
und parasitischen Pilze. [Insect enemies and diseases affecting P. o.] Naturw. Zeitschr.
Forst.- und Landw. 16: 387-395. 1918. — Diseases mentioned are caused by Herpotrichia
nigra, Lophodermium macrosporum and Trametes pini.

No. 1, August, 1920] PATHOLOCY 101

746. Hecke, Ludwig. Die Frage der Bekampfung des Getreiderostes. [The problem of
controlling cereal rusts.] Nachrichten Deutsch. Landw. Gesell. Osterreich. n. s. 2: 140-142.
1918. — In wheal regions of Austria the rusts cause damage to cereals in the following order:
to wheat, yellow rust, brown rust (P. dispersa, I', triticina), black rust ( /'. graminix); to rye
the same; to oats, black, crown rust (P. coronift ra) ; to barley, dwarf rust (P. simplex), black
rust, yellow rust. The yellow is the most destructive in rust years; brown rust attacks late.
Black rust is injurious chiefly in hilly sections. In southern pan, /'. maydia is general and
injurious. [Through abstr. by Matouschkck in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 210. 1919.]—
/). Reddick.

747. Jehle, R. A., and others. I. Control of cotton wilt. II. Control of cotton anthrac-
nose and improvement of cotton. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 411 (Supplem.) 5-28.
Pig. 1-6, and 1-5. 1920.— The first part of this report contains the results of field demonstra-
tions in several counties of the Coastal Plain section of North Carolina, in the control of
cotton wilt. Dixie Wilt Resistant cotton was successfully grown on infested lands in this
section. The report, furthermore, includes data on the known distribution of wilt in North
Carolina and factors favoring its prevalence and spread. — The second part deals with demon-
strations of the value in cotton anthracnose control, of the selection of disease free seed
and improvement through breeding of these selected strains. Cleveland Big Boll and Dixie
Wilt Resistant cotton were employed. — R. A. Jehle.

748. Krout, Webster S. Common diseases of celery. New Jersey Agric. Exp. Sta.
Circ. 112. 12 p. 1919.

749. McCulloch, Lucia. Basal glumerot of wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 543-551.
PI. 62-68. 1920. — This disease is widespread in U. S. A. and occurs on leaf, head and grain
of wheat (Triticum) . A dull, brownish black area appears at the base of the glumes, involving
usually only the lower third but at times extends over nearly the whole surface. Sometimes
the discoloration is on the inner surface of the glume. Dissection of affected spikelets shows
more evidence of disease on the inner surfaces than on the outer. The grains inclosed in dis-
eased glumes vary from nearly perfect to ones in which the germ end varies in color from a
slight brown to charcoal black. — The disease is caused by Bacterium atrofaciens n. sp., for
which a technical description is presented. The parasite is a white, polar-flagellated rod
producing green fluorescence in ordinary culture media. Group number, 221.2322123. —
Artificial infections were secured on leaf and head, the incubation period being about four
days. — D. Reddick.

750. Merino, G. Bud-rot. Philippine Agric. Rev. 123: 92-96. 4 pi. 1919.— A brief
compilation of data on the budrot of the coconut palm. — E. D. Merrill.

751. Moore, J. C. Experiments with parasitic fungus on the cacao thrips. Report on
the Agricultural Department, Grenada, 1917-18. Imperial Department of Agriculture,
Barbados. 1918. — Spraying experiments on thrips infesting cacao trees with cultures of the
fungus Sporotrichum globuliferum, parasitic on Heliothrips rubrocinclus, Giard., are here
noted. Although carried out under difficulties, the following points have been demonstrated:
(1) The fungus was readily distributed amongst thrips in the field; (2) Under favourable
conditions of atmospheric humidity the fungus caused death of large numbers of both young
and adult thrips on the inoculated trees; (3) The fungus spread by natural agencies to trees
outside the inoculated area. Several considerations of practical importance remain to be
determined. — J. S. Dash.

752. Morgenthaler, Otto. Uber die Mikroflora des normalen und muffigen Getreides.
[Microflora of normal and of musty grain.] Landw. Jahrb. Schweiz. 32: 551-571. 191S. —
Healthy grain sown in plates shows chiefly bacteria, especially Bad. herbicola, and no fungi.
Musty grain yields many fungous thalli and few bacteria. Penicillin are abundant but are
not responsible for the odor. What organism does impart the characteristic odor was not

102 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

determined. — Musty grain intended for human consumption should be washed thoroughly
and the light grains skinned off. [Through abst. by Matous check in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr.
29:203-204. 1919.]— D. Reddick.

753. Muller, K. Die Bekampfung der Rebenperonospora nach der Inkubations-Kalen-
dermethode. [Control of grape downy mildew by the incubation-period method.] Jahresber.
Vereinig. Angew. Bot. 16 : 21-28. 1918. — Based on the investigations of Istvanffi and coworkers
regarding the relation between incubation period and outbreaks of Plasmopara, and telluric
conditions. Experimental trials made in Baden show that dates of outbreaks can be forecast
with sufficient certainty to give growers warning in time to make protective treatments.
[Through abst, by Seeliger in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 205. 1919.]— D. Reddick.

754. Nowell, W. Bracket fungi of lime trees and the critical period in the development
of young lime trees. Report on the Agricultural Department, Dominica, 1917-18. 11-14.
Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. — The author, as Mycologist to the
Imperial Department of Agriculture, reports on the prevalence of smaller fungi, of which Nec-
tria and Stilbum spp. are the most noticeable, on the dead branches of lime trees. While
functioning mostly as saprophytes, these fungi may, in certain types of cases, become weak
parasites affecting principally the wood. Interesting suggestions are given on the treatment
of lime trees during the critical period of their development, — J. S. Dash.

755. Paine, S. G., and W. F. Bewley. "Stripe" disease of tomatoes. Jour. Ministry
Agric. Great Britain 26: 998-1000. 1920. — A brief popular account is given of "stripe" disease
of tomatoes occurring chiefly in greenhouses, caused by a bacillus closely related to, if not
identical with, Bacillus lathyri. The disease affects the tissues of the stems, leaves, and
fruits which become stained a dark brown color. Suggested preventive and remedial measures
consist in avoiding seed from fruit grown in an infected area, in disinfection of the soil where
an attack has occurred, in using a balanced fertilizer, in using care in pruning the plants, and
in altering the temperature and humidity to favor a more hardy development of the plants. —
M. B. McKay.

756. Paine, Sydney G., and W. F. Bewley. Studies in bacteriosis. IV. — "Stripe"
disease of tomato. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 183-202. PL 8-9, 5 fig. 1919. — The symptoms appear
as brown to black sunken areas or stripes on the stem, as yellow to brown blotches on the
leaves, as brown sunken patches on the fruit, and as brown discoloration of the root cortex.
Infection appears usually to take place underground, but the disease may be spread from
plant to plant above ground. A soft rapid growth of the plants renders them more suscep-
tible to attack.— Macros porium solani may occur as a saprophyte on the lesions. — Lesions
occur also in the pith and cortex. The disease is assigned to a bacterial growth which advances
from the root up the stem in the pith, and works outward, causing swelling and browning
of the cell walls as it passes to the exterior, then spreads upward in the outer cortical layers
and epidermis. — Bacteriolysis apparently may occur in the plant tissue, since some diseased
spots seemed to be sterile. — The organism is described, and appears to be identical with
Bacillus lathyri, differing only in a slightly higher resistance to heat and apparently greater
ability to reduce nitrates. — An organism apparently identical with Aplanobactcr michiganense
was also isolated from affected plants, but did not reproduce the disease. [See also next fol-
lowing Entry, 757.]— G. R. Bisby.

757. Paine, Sydney G., and H. Stansfield. Studies in Bacteriosis III. — A bacterial
leaf-spot disease of Protea cynaroides, exhibiting a host reaction of possibly bacteriolytic nature.
Ann. Appl. Biol. 6:27-29. PI. 2, fig. 8-6. 1919. — The disease is characterized by dome-shaped
reddish-brown blisters or by sunken spots on the leaves. — The host cells are thought to be able
to kill and perhaps dissolve the bacteria. There is production of a resin-like substance in
which the bacteria become imbedded. The host cells become disorganized. A red pigment
allied to phloro-tannin red was produced in the spots. — The parasite was isolated from but

No. 1, AtrcusT, 1920] PATHOLOGY 103

few of the spots. Infection experiments proved the pathogenicity <>f the organism isolal
— Pseudomelia* proteamaculans n. sp. is given as the cause <>f the di Group numl ei

221.1313023.) [See also next preced in ,756.] G. R. Bisby.

758. Pbtch, T. Rubber diseases. Tropic. Agriculturist 52: 27 34. 1919. The
root disease (Porta hypobrunnea) occurs in Ceylon and Java, in limited areas. The i
cation of the disease is somewhat difficult but is unmistakable in young trees, where the top
root bears external mycelium which forms stout, red strands which sometimes unite in'
continuous red sheet. Internally the strands are white. The mycelium turns bro
finally black with age. The diseased wood of young trees is somewhat soft and friable and ;
meated with red sheets which often follow the annual rings. In older trees the entire m;
lium may be black. — The disease spreads largely from decaying stumps and logs of tree- killed
by the fungus. It is held somewhat in check by the careful removal of all felled tiers and
old stumps including all diseased lateral roots. — White stem blight and top canker are
described briefly. — R. G. Wiggans.

759. Ramsbottom, J. K. Experiments on the control of narcissus eelworm in the field.
Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 6S-72. Fig. 18, 19. 1919. — Three series of experiments for the
control of Tylenchus devastatrix are reported. Applications of sulphate of potash alone and
in combination with sulphate of ammonia, superphosphate and bone meal did not decrease
the attacks. The same was true when various chemicals were applied to the soil. Follow ing
an affected crop of narcissus, rye, oats, clover, lucerne peas, broad beans, r3re grass, onions,
wheat, chives, buckwheat, and potatoes were planted, of which only onions became infested.
— J. K. Shaw.

760. Reinking, O. A. Host index of diseases of economic plants in the Philippines.
Philippine Agric. 8: 38-54. 1919. — A host index is presented, showing diseases of about one
hundred economic plants in the Philippines. The hosts are arranged alphabetically, and
under each host are given the organisms (fungi and bacteria) associated with it and the names
of the diseases. In addition to known parasitic forms, saprophytic organisms are included.
—S. F. Trclease.

761. Robson, R. Root-knot disease of tomatoes. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 31 I 7.
Fig. 1 4.-17. 1919. — Root-knot of tomatoes (Heterodera radicicola) was controlled by apply-
ing 1,000 pounds cyanide of sodium (or of potassium) per acre to the subsoil. The application
of 300 pounds of mercuric chloride also controlled the nematode. The cost of treatment in
any of the above methods was approximately £50 per acre. No deleterious effect upon the
growing crops was noted as a result of applying the above compounds at the rates per acre
given. Mercuric chloride applied at the rate of 775 pounds per acre had a decided stunting
effect. — H. A. Jones.

762. Rosexbaum, J., and Charles E. Sando. Correlation between size of the fruit ?.nd
the resistance of the tomato skin to puncture and its relation to infection with Macrosporium
tomato Cooke. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 78-82. 1920. — As tomatoes grow larger, their resistance
to infection by Macrosporium tomato greatly increases. This difference in immunity is appar-
ently not due to chemical differences between young and old fruit. Infection may be obtained
with fruits of all degrees of maturity when the skin is injured or removed previous to infec-
tion. Stomata or other natural openings in the skin are absent. As the fruit develops, the
cuticle increases markedly in thickness. Authors show that coincident ly with this, the skin
of the fruit becomes more resistant to mechanical puncture with a needle. They suggest
that ability to resist infection may be due to the ability of the skin to resist puncture by the
fungous filament. — E. W. Sinnott.

763. Rumbold, Caroline. The injection of chemicals into chestnut trees. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7: 1-20. 7 fig. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 964.

104 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

764. Rumbold, Caroline. Effect on chestnuts of substances injected into their trunks.
Amcr. Jour. Bot. 7: 45-56. 2 pi. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 965.

765. Schander, and Fritz Krause. Die Krankheiten und Schadlinge der Erbse.
[Diseases and insect pests of peas.] Flugbl. Abt. Pflanzenkr. Kaiser Wilhelms-Inst. Landw.
Bromberg 29-30.— July, 1918.

766. Schroder, P. Ein flacher Hexenbesen. [A flat witches' broom.] Mitt. Deutsch.
Dendrol. Gesell. 1918:290. / pi. 1918. — On a spruce tree, 35 years old, growing at Hohen-
Luckow (Mecklenburg) there is a broom 1.45 m. across and flat in form. [Through absts. by
Matotjs check in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 200. 1919.]— D. Reddick.

767. Speare, A. T. Further studies of Sorosporeila uvella, a fungous parasite of noctuid
larvae. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 399-439. PI. 51-56. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 684.

768. Spieckermann. Schadigung der Kulturpflanzen durch zu hohen Sauregehalt des
Bodens. [Injury to cultivated plants through too high acidity of soil.] Landw. Zeitg. Westfalen
u. Lippe 1918: 255-256. 1918. — Superphosphate and sulfate of ammonia had to be used for
fertilizer instead of the customary Thomas slag and nitrate of soda. Rye, oats and potatoes
showed injury. The soil was found high in acidity and the lime content greatly reduced.
[Through abstr. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 198. 1919.] — D. Reddick.

769. Stevens, H. E. Citrus scab. Florida Grower 21l: 9. 1920. — Description and
etiology of the disease with recommendations for control by spraying. — H. R. Fulton.

770. Uzel, H. Rotfaule der Zuckerriibe. [Red rot of sugar beet.] Zeitschr. Zuckerind.
Bohmen 43: 138-139. 1918.— Red rot (Rhizoctonia violacea) occurs mostly in wet fields. Dis-
eased plants should be removed and destroyed. Land should be drained and quick lime
worked in. It should not be planted to sugar beet, fodder beet, alfalfa, red clover, serradella,
potato, asparagus, or fennochio as these plants are attacked by the fungus. Mycelium from
rotten beets passes with wash water to compost and back to land. Mycelium also may winter
in the wash tanks. Rotten beets can not be used for feeding as the fungus persists in manure.
[Through abstr. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 213. 1919.]— D. Reddick.

771. Vincens, F. Maladies de l'Hevea dues au Diplodia. [Diseases of Hevea due to
Diplodia.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 321-329. 1919. — A general discussion of diseases
of Hevea caused by Diplodia, with preventive treatment and remedies. — E. D. Merrill.

772. Winston, J. R., and W. W. Yothers. Bordeaux-oil emulsion. Florida Grower
233: 9. Jan. 18, 1920. — Directions are given for combining Bordeaux mixture and oil emul-
sions. Experimental results are reported of the successful use of this combination spray
against certain insects and fungous diseases of citrus. — H. R. Fulton.

773. Wormald, H. A phytophthora rot of pears and apples. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 89-100.
PI. 3, 2 fig. 1919. — Phytophthora cactorum was obtained from pears and apples in England.
The fruit often fell prematurely. Inoculation experiments demonstrated the pathogenicity
of the fungus. In one case after inoculation the hyphae were found to invade the seeds of
pear. One experiment suggested that zoospores might cause infection through the uninjured
skin of the pear. — The sporangia germinated either by germ tubes directly, by zoospores
which escaped rapidly with the hyaline plug of the sporangium forming a vesicle around them
at first, or by production of germ tubes by the zoospores within the sporangium. — The zoo-
spores appeared to utilize the anterior cilium as the organ of locomotion. — Oospores were
found. Measurements are given of the various spores and sporangia. — The fungus obtained
from either apple or pear would rot both fruits. — Sanitation and spraying are suggested as
control measures. — G. R. Bisby.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY L05

771. Zweigelt, Fritz. Biologische Studien an Blattlausen und ihren Wirtspflanzen.
[Biological studies of aphides and their host plants. | Verhandl. Zool.-Bot. GeselL Wien 68:
124-142. 4 fin. 1918. -Pari I. Mechanics of sap extinction by aphides. Pari 2. Anatomy
and etiology of aphis galls and the r61e of the plant in formation of roll galls. Pari 3. Role
of the insect information of galls. [Through abstr. byMATOUSCHBK in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr.
29:217-219. 1919.]— D. Roddick.

PHARMACOGNOSY AND PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY

Heber W. Youngkkx, Editor

775. Albertus, Halvar. Bidrag till kannedom om hesperidinliknande kropparsfore-
komst inom familjen Labiatae. [Contribution to the knowledge of the occurrence of Hesperidin-
like bodes in the family Labiatae.] Svensk. Farm. Tidskr. 23: G09. 1919. — A microscopic
study was made of the stems, leaves, and in some cases the flowers of over 100 members of the
family Labiatae for the presence of hesperidin-like bodies. When found, their solubility in
caustic soda solution, concentrated sulphuric acid, concentrated ammonia and chloral hydrate
was determined. — A. M. Hjort.

776. Anonymous. Production of Pyrethrum flowers in Japan. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88 :
305. 1919. [From Commerce Reports.] — A short article on the growing of Chrysanthemum
parthenium, with cost and production statistics. — Chas. H. Otis.

777. Anonymous. Why the castor-oil plant is called Palma Christi. Sci. Amer. Supplem.
88:376. 1919.

778. Babe, E., and Teodoro Cabrera. Clitorina, nuevo reactivo indicador de acidos
y alcalis. [Clitorina, a new chemical indicator.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 537-539.
1 fig. 1919. — The name "Clitorina" is given to an indicator made by extracting with 95 per
cent alcohol the coloring matter from the flowers of a double blue variety of butterfly pea,
Clitoria tematea L. This was found to be superior to phenolphthalein for detecting minute
adulterations of milk with potash solutions. It was also found to be superior to phenol-
phthalein and tincture of cochineal as an indicator in some other reactions. — F. M. Blodgctt.

779. Ballard, C. W. The identification of gums by the phenylhydrazine reaction. Jour.
Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 31-38. Fig. 1-15. 1920. — Author has made a study of the character
of the ozazones prepared from different drugs as althaea, peach kernels, sassafras pith, brown
mustard, yellow mustard, elm bark, apricot kernels, tragacanth, acacia, quince seed, linseed,
Indian gum, and bitter almond kernels. Method of application of test is given with sketches
and description of the ozazones from the various drugs. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

/80. Beal, George D., and Thomas S. Hamilton. The "Shaking-out" method for the
quantitative estimation of alkaloids. II. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 9-15. 1920. — Lead
acetate when used as a clarifier for alkaloidal extracts has no harmful effect upon the extrac-
tion of the alkaloid by immiscible solvents, and that the addition of sodium chloride after
clarification increases the quantity of alkaloid removed at a single extraction. Employing
the use of amyl alcohol for morphine determinations a residue of anhydrous morphine could
be obtained. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

781. Beath, O. A. The chemical examination of three species of larkspur. Wyoming
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 120: 55-88. PI. 1-11, 4 fig. 1919.— A bulletin in four parts, dealing with
the poisonous properties of the three species, Delphinium barbeyi, D. glatice&cens, and D.
geyeri. Part 1 is general in its scope, dealing with the distribution, a review of the literature,
losses to stock, toxicity as effected by age, acidity, seasonal variat ions of the poisons, charac-
teristic symptoms. Part 2 deals with the experimental methods employed including the
determination of the crude alkaloids, preparation and properties of water extracts, and the

106 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

extractive value of the solvents. Part 3 deals with the chemical analysis of the three species
at different growth stages and of the principal organs of the plant at each stage. Part 4
deals with the method of treatment for Larkspur poisoning. A bibliography of the works
cited is given at the end of the article. — James P. Poole.

782. Beythiex, A. Gewurze und Gewiirz-Ersatz im Kriege. [Spices and spice substi-
tutes in war.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittei 3S: 24-33. 1919. — Current
prices of spices and substitutes and composition of latter which include cauliflower-, cabbage-,
celery- and mushroom-extracts, cinnamon, lemon, almond, and caraway oils, and synthetic
benzaldehyde and vanilla. Many substitutes found fraudulent.—//. G. Barbour.

7S3. Buc, H. E. Delicate test for strychnine. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3:
193. 1919.— Method of making the test is given.— F. M. Schcrtz.

784. Burqtje, L'ABBeF.-X. LTdentite du Poglus. [The identity of Poglus.] Le Natur-
aliste Canadien 46: 145-148. Jan., 1920. — The author criticizes the determination of the spe-
cies by Frere Marie-Victorin in the previous monthly issue. He closes an interesting dis-
cussion by the presentation of evidence that the Indians of the region (the Hurons of Lorette)
have actually been calling no less than three species of the Umbelliferae by the same name,
"Poglus," — namely, Archangelica atropurpurea, IAgusticum sp.? and Heracleum sp.? He
thinks that Archangelica is most likely the beneficial species for influenza. [See also Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 811.]— A. H. MacKay.

7S5. Chalmers, D. F. Report on the operations of the Department of Agriculture.
Burma. 1919: 1-15. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 11.

786. Clair, H. W. Scottish Chamomiles. Chem. and Druggist 91: 1512. 1919.— A
comparison between the dried flowers of the "single-flowered" variety of Anihemis nobilis,
known as Scottish chamomile, and the "double-flowered" variety of the same plant, known
as English chamomile. The Scottish Chamomile, formerly cultivated to a considerable extent
in the Deeside district of Scotland is more bitter and aromatic than the "double-flowered"
variety and of greater value as an internal tonic medicine. The "double-flowered" variety
was not obtained by ordinary cultivation from the "single-flowered" type, but by collecting
seed from "sport" plants, and by a careful process of selection from these deviating forms
a strain which retained the habit of producing "double flowers" was obtained. The Scottish
chamomile is used but slightly outside of Scotland. — E. N. Galhcrcoal.

787. Clevenger, Joseph F., axd Clare Olix Ewing. Partial analyses of 330 American
crude drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. S: 1010-1029. 1919. — The examinations of these
330 crude drugs include scientific and trade names, part employed, color of powTder, total
and acid-insoluble ash; total, and volatile ether extracts (with colors and odors) ; and general
remarks as to cleanliness of sample. [See also next following Entry, 788.] — Anton Hogslad, Jr.

788. Clevenger, Joseph F., axd Clare Olix Ewaxo. Partial analyses of 330 American
crude drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 15-30. 1920. — Conclusion of article from Ibid.
8: 1029. 1919. [See also next preceding Entry, 787.] — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

789. Cushxy, Arthur R. The properties of optical isomers from* the biological side.
Pharm. Jour. 103: 4S3. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 879.

790. Dussel, G. B. Kort overzicht over den Landbouw op Curacao. [A short survey of
the agriculture on Curacao.] Pharm. Weckblad 56: 1512-1514. 1919.— Most of the Curacao
Aloes comes from the Island of Aruba, but large areas are cultivated on Curacao and Bonaire.
The cultivation and propagation is very easy and inexpensive. The cuttings of old plants
are set in rows about 0.5 m. apart, when in due time a short stem and rosettes of leaves will
be produced, and, after the rains, a flowering stem, which divides into two or more branches,

No. 1, August, 1920] PHARMACOGNOM ] 07

develops. In the dry season the leaves are cut off and placed in a \ -shaped container -I ml
on one side in order to allow the juice to drain. This i.~ i ollected in empty coal-oil . •
the contents of the cans is then transferred to large copper kettl in which the j . con-

centrated to the desired consistence; it is then run into lined petroleum boxes or into

gourds. The plant, which prefers a dry, chalky soil, yields aloes for about 12 ;
this time it lias to be dug up and the soil is properly manured and replanted. — H. Eng

791. Escobar, Romulo. La Cicuta. [Cicuta.] icultor Mexicano 36: 6-8. I
Description of the plant of water hemlock (Cicuta sp.), Bymptoms of the poisoning indu
in sheep, and methods of eradicating the plant. — John A. St

792. Ewe, George E. Chinese cantharides. [Mylabris Cichorii.J A worthy candidate
for admission to the U. S. P. Jour. Anier. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 27)7 -263. 1920. — Upon experimen-
tation, employing a series of physiological 1 es1 s on horses, it was found that Mylabr > orii
has a vesicating and rubefacient power equal to the U. S. P. varieties. The cantharidin
content on the average was found to be 50 per cent greater than the U. S. P. variet
Author also states that the material is cheaper and more available at the present time. — .1 1
Hogstad, Jr.

793. Ewe, George E. The assay of calabar beans and its preparations. Jour. Amcr.
Pharm. Assoc. 8: 1006-1009. 1919. — Author was unable to obtain satisfactory results with
the present U. S. P. method for the assay of calabar beans and its preparations. He believes
the loss to be due partly to incomplete extraction and partly to decomposition of alkaloids
by numerous manipulations and vigorous heating treatments and by long exposure to light
required in carrying out the process. Methods of the writer are given for the assay of the
drug and its preparations. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

794. Ewixg, C. O. White pine bark adulterated with elm bark. Jour. Amer. Pharm.
Assoc. 9: 253. 1920. — Upon examination a shipment of white pine bark collected in Michigan
was found to contain elm bark. The outer part of the bale, to the depth of about 1 foot, con-
sisted almost entirely of the rossed outer bark of Ulmusfulva. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

795. Ewing, Clare Olix, and Arxo Viehoever. Acid-insoluble ash standards for
crude drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 725-730. 1919. — Upon reviewing the analyses
of a considerable number of domestic and imported crude drugs with regard to their content
of ash and acid-insoluble ash, authors noted in a number of instances where a striking dis-
crepancy occurred between the general run of analyses and the U. S. P. and N. F. standards.
The authors suggest, as an expression of their personal opinion that an extension of ash
standards including limits for acid-insoluble ash would be very much preferable to present
standards and that it should not only be included in the U. S. P. but should be extended.
The authors then discuss the question of ash contents of several drugs, namely asafoetida,
hydrastis, hyoscyamus, mustard, rhubarb and sassafras, emphasizing the need of acid-
insoluble ash standards. Simple method of writers included for determining acid-insoluble
ash content. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

796. Farwell, Oliver A. Cramp bark, highbush cranberry. The Druggist 2: 13.
1920. — It has been known since 1913 that the commercial Cramp Bark is the product of Acer
spicatum Lam. and not the true Viburnum Opulus var. americanum, Mill, as required in the
National Formulary and as stated in the text books. Farwell now produces evidence to show
that as long ago as 1S70 the Acer bark had displaced the true Viburnum bark. — Wm. B. Day.

797. Fishlock, W. C. Bay leaves (Pimenta acris). Report on the Agricultural Depart-
ment, Tortola, 1917-18, 6. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. — A ref-
erence is made here to the existence of "false" or bad varieties of the bay tree whose leaves
yield an oil of inferior quality for making bay rum. — J. S. Dash.

108 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

798. French, Harry B. Review of the drug market. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8:
843-844. 1919. — A general discussion of the effect of the signing of the Armistice on the drug
market. Writer states that the general tendency of American crude drugs has been to greatly-
advance in price since the signing of the Armistice and that this tendency will continue for
the next several months. Chemicals have a tendency to decline and European crude drugs
will be obtainable at lower prices as soon as they can finance shipments and transportation
can be arranged. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

799. Fuller, H. C. Report on alkaloids. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 188-193.
1919.— It is recommended that in conducting assays for strychnine, reliance be placed on a
gravimetric determination and not on a determination obtained by volumetric means. —
F. M. Schertz.

800. Gather coal, E. N. The permanency and deterioration of some vegetable drugs
twenty-five years of age. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 711-716. 1919. — Examination of some
144 crude drugs which were prepared some twenty-five years ago and which had been kept in
glass-stoppered bottles, showed that most of the drugs were very well preserved and which com-
pared with the present U. S. P. and N. F. requirements. Among the drugs much depreciated
were Orange and Lemon peels, Labiatae herbs and a number of leaf drugs (Buchu, Boneset,
Coltsfoot, Witchhazel, Matico, Gaultheria, and probably Pilocarpus). — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

801. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part I. Proc.
Linnean Soc. New South Wales 44: 72-92. Fig. 1. 1919. — Eucalyptus oil as listed in Materia
Medica is from E. globulus. Many oils of other origin are sold under this name. The Baker
and Smith classification of oils is followed in these tests to determine the toxic effect of 40
to 50 specimens of crude and refined oils. E. polybractea (Blue Mallee), E. cinerea (Argyle
apple), E. australiana (Narrow-leaf peppermint), and E. dives (Broad-leaf peppermint) are
at present the chief sources of commercial oils in New South Wales. The test-organisms
employed to determine the toxicity of the oils were Micrococcus aureus and Bac. coli communis
from serum suspensions. The activity and quality of the oil was found to vary strikingly
even within the same tree and also with different specimens of a species. It was affected by
altitude and growth conditions in general. On the whole these oils had lower toxicity than
phenol. The results of the tests are given in nine tables. The main constituents seemed
relatively insignificant with reference to toxic action. Bactericidal power was proportional
to the acidity of the oil and assisted by although not caused by it alone. The iodide reaction
was no criterion as to the germicidal value of the oils. The vapors of the oils had decided
bacterial action. — Eloise Gerry.

802. Griebel, C, and A. S chafer. Thymus Serpyllum L. als Majoranpulververfal-
schung. [Wild thyme as imitation marjoram powder.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u.
Genussmittel 38: 141-145. 1919. — The chief morphological characteristics of marjoram and
of wild and common thyme are compared. — H. G. Barbour.

803. Grimme, C. Altes and Neues ueber Capsella Bursa pastoris. Mittheilung aus dem
Institut fuer angeswandte Botanik. [Old and new facts about capsella bursa pastoris. Com-
munication from the institute for applied botany.] Pharm. Zentralhalle Deutschland 60:
2:!7-242, 248-251. 1919. — Shepherd's purse has been used since times immemorial as a home
remedy, as diuretic and antipyretic. Recent investigations have shown that the drug pos-
sesses strongly hemostyptic properties and can be used as a substitute for the high-priced
and in Germany unobtainable golden seal. The chemistry of the drug is still to be investi-
gated but the medicinal value seems to be partly due to mustard oil which is present in all
parts of the plant, but especially in the seeds. — H. Engelhardt.

804. Gu£rin, P. [Rev. of :Etienne, P. Etude anatomique de la famille des Epacridees.
(Anatomic study of the family Epacrideae.) Th6se Doct. Univ. Pharm. Toulouse. 222 p. 116
fig. 1919.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 26: 533. 1919.— The author describes the anatomic structure of

No. 1, August, 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY 109

the branches and leaves of 26 members <>f tin' family Epacridt ae. The Epcn i id* cu appear to

take in Oceania (lie place which the k'ricufiac, to which they are nearly related, take in
South Africa. — //. Engelhardt.

505. Guerin, P. [Rev. of: Bbbqbb, Mabie-Gaston. Etude organographique, anatom-
ique et pharmacologique de la famille des Turneracees. (Organographic, anatomic and pharma-
cologic study of the family Turneraceae.) 270 p., 53 pi. Bigot Freres: l'aris, L919.] Hull.
Sci. Pharm. 26: 533. 1919. — The six genera of the family Turneraceae can easily be distin-
guished from each other by their anatomic structure. The author believes thai the Turner-
aceae must be considered as a special family, but if taken away from the Bixaceae, they should
be counted to the family Passiflorae. The author further deals with the medicinal use of tl e
members of this family, and especially of that of damiana (Turnera aphrodisiaca) and with
the various substitutes offered for this drug. — //. Engelhardt.

506. Hart, Fanchon. A microscopical method for the quantitative determination of
vegetable adulterants. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 1032-1034. 1919. — The areas of the va-
rious tissues present are totalled by the aid of an ocular micrometer used in conjunction with
a stage micrometer and from these figures the author calculates the percentage of impurities.
The author gives method of examination for black pepper adulterated with pepper shells and
checks results obtained by measuring the shells and powdered kernel portions in a 10 minim
graduate. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

807. Hatcher, Robert A. Standardization of digitalis. A preliminary report. Jour.
Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 913-914. 1919.— The author reports the results obtained by separ-
ating the principles of Digitalis into two groups, namely, the chloroform-soluble fraction and
the water-soluble fraction. The chloroform-soluble fraction was found to be more readily
absorbed and more lasting in its effects while the water-soluble fraction being more actively
emetic. Author believes that Digitalis should be assayed in reference to the chloroform-
soluble fraction and that this fraction may be made available for intravenous use, since it
mixes perfectly with water. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

808. Jones, J. Bay oil. Report on the Agricultural Department. Dominica, 1918-19: 5.
Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919.— Two samples of oil from varieties
of Pimenta acris, namely Bois dTnde and Bois d'lnde Citronelle, grown in Dominica, are
reported on. The latter variety contains a smaller percentage of Phenols, and has a strong
odour of citral, and the suggestion is made that it may have some commercial value in the
manufacture of toilet preparations. — J. S. Dash.

S09. Jones, J. Camphor. Report on the Agricultural Department, Dominica, 1918-19:
5-7. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919.— Results of distillations of
leaves, twigs and prunings from three plots showed that two of them were of true camphor
trees, yielding both camphor and oil, while the other was not, the material from it producing
oil only. — J. S. Dash.

810. Keenan, G. L. The microscopical identification of mowrah meal (Bassia) in insecti-
cides. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 144-147. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— In the examination of prod-
ucts designated as ant and worm eradicators, author detected the presence of mowrah meal,
which he states resembles cocoa powder in general appearance. The powder consists largely
of the powdered cotyledons and occasional fragments of seed coat. Chloral hydrate reveals
the presence of yellowish-brown masses occurring separately as isolated fragments and also
in characteristic group arrangement. The uses of mowrah meal and a morphological
description of Bassia latifolia are also included. With bibliography.— A nton Hogstad. Jr.

811. M arie-Victorin, Fr. des E. C. L'identite du Poglus (Heracleum lantatum, Michx\
[The identity of Poglus of the Hurons of Lorette.] Le Naturaliste Canadien 46: 121-124. Dec
1919— The Indians (Hurons) of Lorette, Province of Quebec, have been using the root of

110 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

Poglus with wonderful success against epidemic influenza. M. l'Abbe F.-X. Burque. (Ibid.
45: 67-70. 1918) had identified it with Angelica atropurpurea L. (Archangelica atropurpurea
(L.) HofTm.). — The author accompanied by M. Edouard Laurin visited Bastien, the local
Indian chief, who pointed out a young specimen of Poglus which had not yet its radical
leaves. The abundant pubescence showed it could not be Angelica. Further examination
convinced him it was Hcracleum lanatum Michx. (la Berce laineuse). Chief Bastien insisted
on the powerful febrifuge properties of the plant, and cited extraordinary cases of cures. It
was believed to be the cause of the protection of the tribe from the epidemic. The Hurons
collect the root in autumn, and use the infusion. — The author then quotes authorities on
the properties of Heracleum, notes its distribution, and describes its appearance and habitat.
[See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 784.]— A. H. MacKay.

512. Merrill, E. C. Preliminary study of some of the physical and chemical constants
of balsam Peru. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 194-197. 1919. —The method for the
determination of the iodine value of cinnamein by Hanus, as at present employed, is unsatis-
factory and furthermore may be entirely inadequate as an index of the character of pure Peru
balsam. The employment of such physical constants as viscosity, surface tension, optical
rotation and refractometer observation may prove of value in the final interpretation of the
character of Peru balsam. — F. M. Schertz.

513. Nelson, E. K. The constitution of capsaicin, the pungent priciple of capsicum. II.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 597-599. 1920.

814. O'Brien, J. F., and J. P. Snyder. Deterioration of high-test American grown
Digitalis. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 914-919. 1919. — Assays of the tincture and fluid-
extract of Digitalis made from American-grown Digitalis from the state of Washington,
after being kept for a period of two and one half years, under conditions which closely paral-
leled those of the average drug store, showed that these preparations did deteriorate and that
the deterioration was practically the same in both preparations. By the guinea pig method
the loss in activity was from 330 to 175 per cent, a loss of 47 per cent ; the one hour frog method
the loss in activity was from 264 to 120 per cent, a loss of 55 per cent; by the cat method the
loss in activity was from 250 to 175 per cent, a loss of 30 per cent. However, all the prepara-
tions after standing this length of time still retained sufficient activity for them both to be
considered standard preparations. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

815. Passerini, N. Sul potere insetticida del Pyrethrum cinerariaefolium Trev. coltivato
a Firenze in confronto con quello di alcune altre Asteracee. [A comparison of the insecticidal
value of Pyrethrum cinerariaefolium Trev. grown at Florence with other members of the Aster-
aceae.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Italiano 26: 30-45. 1919. — Both as regards rapidity of action and
effectiveness Pyrethrum cinerariaefolium Trev. is superior as an insecticide to other members
of the Asteraceae. If ground into a fine powder, the heads, foliage, stems and roots of the
plant are equally effective; however, the most rapid action is obtained from the heads of the
plant. — Ernst Artschicager.

816. Petrie, J. M. The occurrence of methyl laevo-inositol in an Australian poisonous
plant. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43: 850-867. 2 fig. 1918.— Heterodendron
olsaefolium Desf. (Sapindaceae) a large, drought-resistant shrub, endemic to Australia,
which has been described as a valuable forage plant was suspected of causing fatalities to
cattle and horses. It was found to be strongly cyanogenetic. It contains the methyl ester
of laevo-rotary inositol and the method of extraction and characteristics and properties of
the compound are given in detail. The amount isolated was equivalent to 0.65 per cent of
the dried (at 100°C.) leaves. It is not optically isomeric with pinite of Maquenne, which is
the methyl dextro-inositol, possessing a different melting point and optical rotation. It is
apparently identical with Tanret's quebrachite and has been previously recorded for three
plants only — Aspidosperma querbracho (Apocyanceae), Hevea brasiliensis (Euphorbiaceae)

\" 1 A.X gust, L920] PHAB1 .■ iGNOSl 1 1 1

and Gr 'ill i robusta (Proteaceae). The occurrence of this compound e, in

contrast to the inactive inositol which e e in most plants. //<

■Iron also contains a cyanogenetic glucoside. Eloist Gerry.

S17. Pittenger, Pattl S. Preliminary note on a new pharmaco-dynamic assay method.
Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: X1.):; '.):)(). 1019.— Writer states 'I i1 the goldfish method is un-
questionably the simplest so far proposed and can be easily carried oul by tho iecially
skilled in the pharmacodynamic art. A tincture of Digitalis should have a minimum lethal
dose of 2.85 when assayed by this method. Results of the authors experiments are recorded
as well as details of methods employed including a list of apparatus necessary for the experi-
ments.— Anion Hogstad, Jr.

818. Pittenger, Paul S., and George E. Ewe. The standardization of Piscidia Ery-
thrina (Jamaica dogwood). Amer. Pharm. Jour. 91 : 575-583. Fig. 1-8. 1919. — The similarity
between the action of Jamaica dogwood and that of Cannabis, suggested the possibility of
employing similar methods of standardization. The following tentative standard
adopted: Fluidextract of Jamaica dogwood should be of such strength that it will produce
incoordination in dogs in doses of 0.55 mils per kilo weight of animal and should not produce
incoordination in doses less than 0.5 mils per kilo, the drug being administered by capsule
after fasting the animal for 12 hours. A series of experiments were conducted to assay Jamaica
dogwood preparations according to the piscidin content, but on account of the contamination
with resinous matter it was difficult to obtain the piscidin in a pure state, therefore as the
authors state we are without a reliable chemical means of accurate standardizing Jamaica
dogwood preparations, but that they can be accurately standardized by the physiological
assay method. — Anion Hogstad, Jr.

819. Reens, Emma. The Coca de Java. [Javanese coca.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 26: 497-505.
1919. — A detailed study of the cultivation and propagation of the coca tree is given together
with data on collecting the leaves, the extraction and purification of the alkaloid. The author
states that while in South America the leaves of E. bolivianum and E. peruvianum are alto-
gether used, in the East Indies and especially in Java E. spruccanum or E. novogranatense is
cultivated. — II. Engelhardt.

820. Robson, W. Bay trees (Pimenta acris). Report on the Agricultural Department,
Montserrat, 1917-18: 17. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. — A record
is given of the yield of Bay leaves and oil from a plot for seven consecutive years. The result s
of 41 distillations during 1917 are given. From these it was found that the average Phenol
content was 55 per cent, being 5 per cent higher than the average for 1914-16. — J. S. Dash.

821. Robson, W. Ajowan Plant (Carum copticum). Report on the Agricultural Depart-
ment, Montserrat, 1917:18: 19-22. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados. 1919. —
Interesting cultural and distillation trials are recorded with this plant. The percentage of
oil in the seed was found to be 3, while the per cent Thymol in the oil is given as 40 to 45. —
J. S. Dash.

822. Robson, W. American horsemint (Monarda punctata). Report on the Agricultural
Department, Montserrat, 1917-18: 22-23. Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados.
1919. — Small trials with this plant gave satisfactory results, the oil obtained from distillation
containing about 44 per cent by weight of Thymol. — J. S. Dash.

823. Rowe, L. W. Maintaining frogs for test purposes. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8:
928-930. 1 fig. 1919.— A description with sketch of a tank for maintaining frogs for test
purposes. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

824. Rowe, L. W. Digitalis standardization. A consideration of certain methods of
biological assay. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8 : 900-912. 1919. — Experiments were performed ,
first to determine whether any relationship exists between the results of assays by the cat

112 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

and frog methods; second, to determine the accuracy of the cat method and third to suggest
certain modifications of the method, in order to make it more practical for commercial assay
work. Sufficient data was not obtained with cats to absolutely prove that they are as unsatis-
factory as dogs but from data reported indicates that there is no real consistency between
the results obtained when using the cat and those obtained with the frog. Author states that
it seems most logical to conclude that no relationship exists between the minimum lethal
doses of heart tonic preparations to cats, dogs, and frogs, but that the frog method is the
most accurate of the three. With bibliography. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

825. Sayre, L. E., and G. N. Watson. Final report on the alkaloids of Gelsemium.
Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 708-711. 1919. — Investigations by the authors seem to show
that there does not exist in the drug any such alkaloid as Gelseminine, but that this constit-
uent (so-called) is a compound body consisting of several alkaloids having different properties.
Methods are given for the separation of these various substances including Sempervirene,
Gelsemic acid, Gelsemine and another substance named by the authors "Gelsemidine" —
not "Gelseminine" — since gelseminine, the name formerly given to the amorphous alkaloids
of gelsemium, has been proved conclusively to be not a single alkaloid but a mixture of three
alkaloids. Another substance was also obtained which was strongly alkaloidal in appearance
and behavior and very much like Lloyd's Emetoidine, which the authors state might be called
"Gelsemoidine." Physical descriptions of these substances follow. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

826. Sprinkmeyer, H., and O. Gruenert. ttber Vanillinerzeugnisse. [Vanilla prod-
ucts.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 38: 153-155. 1919. — Deterioration of
vanilla and related substances in mixtures. — H. G. Barbour.

827. Stanford, Ernest E., and Clare Olin Ewtng. The resin of man-root (Ipomoea
pandurata (L.) Meyer) with notes on two other Convolvulaceous resins. Jour. Amer. Pharm.
Assoc. 8: 789-795. Fig. 1. 1919. — Alcoholic extracts of three Convolvulaceous roots gave
the following results: Ipomoea pandurata (Man-root) 4.65 per cent of resin; I. batata (Sweet
potato) 0.56 per cent of resin; I. discoidesperma Donn. Sm. (Yellow morning glory) 6.5 per
cent of resin. The resin of man-root possessed mild cathartic properties, that of the sweet
potato failed to demonstrate any cathartic action. The material on hand of the yellow morn-
ing glory was insufficient for adequate tests. Examination of the extracts of man-root and
sweet potato with various organic solvents showed them like other Convolvulaceous resins
to be of complex composition and partly of glucosidal nature. No chemical examination was
made of the resin of yellow morning glory. Descriptions of the roots are included. With
bibliography. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

828. Steel, I. Plantago in medicine. Australian Nat. 4: 105-107. 1919. — Its uses as a
native home remedy. Some references to its properties in English literature. — T. C. Frye.

829. Stockberger, W. W. Commercial drug growing in the United States in 1918.
Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 807-811. 1919. — A report on the progress of the cultivation of
a number of drugs as Belladonna, Cannabis, Digitalis, Calendula, Sage and Henbane. Sum-
marizing the total production the author states that in the case of Belladonna approximately
83 tons of herb (including leaves and stems), and 11 tons of root; 60 tons of Cannabis; 9000
to 10,000 pounds of Sage have been produced in the United States during 1918. No figures
were given for the production of Calendula. Very little success has been attained in the
commercial cultivation of Henbane. Digitalis has not been placed on an established commer-
cial basis as yet. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

830. Stroup, Freeman P. A chemical test to distinguish between caffeine and theobro-
mine. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 91: 598-599. 1919. — Employing the use of potassium bichromate
and sulphuric acid, the author states that it is a simple matter to distinguish between caffein
and theobromin, according to the colors produced. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

No. 1, August 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY 113

831. Styoer, Jos. Beitrage zur Anatomie des Umbelliferenfruchte. [Contribution on the
anatomy of umbelliferous fruits.] Schweiz. Apothcker Zeitg. 57: L99 206, 228 235. 7 fig.

1919. — A description of the macroscopic and microscopic characteristics of tin' fruits of An
ica Archangelica, F. Narthex, F. galbaniflua, F. angulata, Pastinaca $ativa, HeraeU van Sjx -
dylium, Laserpitium Siler, L. marginatum, Opopanax chironeum, and haunts Carota. Angel-
ica Archangelica is winged and its mesocarp is composed for the most part of loosely arranged,
porous and reticulately thickened parenchyma with large intercellular-air-spaces; its vittae
are distributed above the inner epidermis and in the ribs. Ferula Narthex shows B band of
thick-walled, punctated cells in the inner mesocarp and giant vittae in the mesocarp. /•'.
galbaniflua is distinguished from F. Narthex by having vittae in the ribs as well as the meso-
carp. F. angulata possesses vittae in mesocarp and ribs, its outer epidermis and the cell
layers lying directly beneath are strongly thickened but not woody, and hesperidin crystals
exist in all the epidermal cell glands. Pastinaca sativa shows vittae alongside vascular bun-
dles, a sclerenchyma band in the inner mesocarp and finely punctated parenchyma in its
winged ribs. Herecleum S pondylium has a sclerenchyma band in the inner m'esocarp and finely
punctated thick-walled parenchyma in the wings outside of the bundles. Laserpitium mar-
ginatum has elliptical vittae while those of L. Siler are triangular, as viewed in cross section.
Opopanax chironeum shows cells of epidermis, wings and within vascular bundles with ellip-
tical punctations; Daucus Carota has delicate spines growing from secondary ribs, and bristle-
hairs only on primary ribs. [See also next following Entry, 832.] — 11. W. Youngken.

832. Styger, Jos. Beitrage zur Anatomie des Umbelliferenfruchte. [Contribution on
the anatomy of Umbelliferous fruits.] Schweiz. Apotheker Zeitg. 57: 243-250. 1919. — An
analytical key, based upon a pharmacognic system, to the 50 Umbelliferous fruits described
by the author in preceding pages of this serial. These are placed in 3 main groups, viz. :
I. Without oil containing elements. II. With secretion sacs. III. With oil reservoirs (vit-
tae). The first two of these captions have but one representative each, viz.: Conium macu-
latum and Hydrocotyle vulgaris respectively. The third group includes two subdivisions:
1. With commissurral vittae only. 2. With dorsal and commissural vittae. Further group-
ing of these subdivisions is based upon presence of one or more vittae in mesocarp, scleren-
chyma plates, hairs, strongly thickened and lignified parenchyma elements in mesocarp, sec-
ondary vittae, and distribution of the vittae in inter-rib and rib regions. [See also next
preceding Entry, 831.] — H. W. Youngken.

833. Suttox, Richard L. Ragweed dermatitis. Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc. 73: 1433-
1435. 1919. — The important part played by anaphylaxis in the causation of various eruptions
has long been recognized. Anaphylaxis has been defined as "a state of hypersusceptibility
of the organism to foreign substances, which is brought about by the introduction of certain
foreign substances and their cleavage products." C. Walker has pointed out that certain
proteins, including those of ragweed pollen may cause dermatitis in predisposed persons.
The author describes four cases of ragweed dermatitis. In two of them the common ragweed.
Ambrosia elatior, was the chief offender. The giant ragweed, A. trifolia, the mupwort, A.
psilostachya, and the bur marsh-elder, Iva xanthifolia, probably occupy lesser roles. All
have been shown to cause hay fever. Pollen vaccine treatment gave beneficial results. —
Wm. B. Day.

834. Thurston, Azor. Oil of sandalwood and its adulteration. Jour. Amer. Phnrm.
Assoc. 9: 36-37. 1920. — A compilation of the refractive indices and optical rotations of s

42 samples of commercial sandalwood oils with a few additional notes. With bibliogra:
— Anton Hogstad, Jr.

835. Viehoever, Arxo. The pharmacognosy laboratory, its activities and aims. Jour.
Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 8: 717-725. 1919.— A detailed account of the activities and aims of the
Pharmacognosy Laboratory, Bureau of Chemistry, U. S. Department of Agriculture, prepared
in the hope that other workers engaged in pharmaceutical and related research, may be induced

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

114 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

to prepare similar statements, sufficiently detailed to indicate the nature of their studies,
though the work may still be in progress. — Part I is devoted to a discussion of Crude Drug
Control in which the author discusses various phases of the work, as domestic trade; import
trade; elimination of inert and objectionable material in crude drugs and spices; extension of
standardization of purity for drugs; value of volume weight determinations; pharmacopoeial
work; prevention of waste and utilization of waste crude drug products. — Part II is devoted
to the investigations of the pharmacognosy laboratory which cover a wide range of pharma-
ceutical and chemical research. Author also discusses the cooperative work of the laboratory
with various institutions, laboratories, etc. With bibliography. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

S36. Vierhout, P. Het Winnen van Curacao-Aloe. [The production of Curacao aloes.]
Pharm. Weekblad. 56: 1510-1512. PI. 1, jig. 3. 1919.— A description of methods of collecting
aloes in Curacao. — Abstractor.

837. Wirth, E. H. A study of Chenopodium ambrosioides var. anthelminticum and its
volatile oil. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 127-141. 22 fig. 1920. — The author has made a
study of the oil of Chenopodium which falls under the heading of the "western oils" in order
to compare same with the Maryland variety, the latter according to general opinion has been
claimed to be superior to the former. — A detailed discussion as to the composition of the oil
is given, the western oil agreeing with the Maryland oils, save in the amount of ascaridol
which is present in the latter from 60 to 80 per cent and in the former the average was 42 to 45
per cent. Specific gravity of western oil 0.934 compared to a specific gravity of 0.955-0.980 as
stated in the U. S. P. Upon subjecting an oil with a specific gravity of 0.934 to steam distil-
lation, one fraction, 70 to 75 per cent had a specific gravity of 0.900 and 25 to 30 per cent had a
specific gravity of 1.000, thereby showing that the western oil might be fractionated on a
commercial basis. Experiments found this to be impracticable owing to the waste involved.
— An exhaustive pharmacognostic study of Chenopodium ambrosioides anthelminticum is
given, in which the author, by microchemical tests, employing 5 per cent KOH in 95 per cent
alcohol, shows that the oil is not contained in the seeds but occurs only in the glandular hairs
and here only in the large thin-walled terminal hairs. The hairs upon the leaves were found
to contain oil but no glandular hairs were noted on the stems, which thus eliminates using
stem portions for the production of the oil. Flowers also contain oil, which sets forth the
value of subjecting the plant to distillation at the time of flowering. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

S38. Wong, Ying C. Opium in China. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 91: 776-784. 1919.— An
interesting account of this gigantic evil which has cost China billions of dollars and, more
important than that, has led millions and millions of her strong citizens into wreck and misery.
Author discusses in detail the history and cultivation of the poppy; interesting synonyms
and their application to the different grades of opium; opium smoking; suppression of the
poison. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

839. Wunschendorff, M. E. La racine d'Atractylis gummifera. [The root of Atractylis
gummifera.] Jour. Pharm. et Chim. 20: 318-321. 1919. — The writer gives an account of
the earlier investigations of the root by Lefranc. He succeeded in isolating about 4 per cent
of a petroleum-ether soluble resin, which was insoluble in water and alcohol, but gave pseudo-
solutions with chloroform, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, carbon disulphide, etc. It had
all the characteristics of caoutchouc and could easily be vulcanized. He further isolated
tannic acid, several sugars and a substance which probably was identical with Lefranc's
potassium atractylate. The ash, 14.8 per cent, was rich in silica and iron. — H. Engelhardt.

810. Yamamoto, R. On the insecticidal principle of Chrysanthemum cinerariifolium.
Ber. Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1 : 389-398. 1918. — Pyrethron, the insecticidal principle, is
a yellow, transparent, neutral syrup, having a saponification value of 216 and iodine value of
116. It is easily saponified with alcoholic potash and loses its insecticidal power after saponi-
fication. The power of this pyrethron is reduced either by heating or exposure to the air
for a long time. Pyrethron has germicidal as well as insecticidal powers. — H. S. Reed.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 1 1 5

841. Youngken, Heber W. Observations on Digitalis Sibirica. Jour. Amer. I'harm.
Assoc. 8: 923-928. 14 fig. 1919.— A botanical investigation of Dtgitalu Sibirica Lindley,
including a description of the plant, histology of leaf, stem and root. Author found that a
tincture prepared from the dried leaves according to the U. 8. P. method for tincture of
digitalis and when assayed by the one-hour frog method, showed the tincture to I"- ihree
quarters over the strength required for the U. S. P. tincture of digitalis.— Anion Hog tad, Jr.

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. Duggar, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

842. Bechhold, H. Colloids in biology and medicine. [Translated from the second
German edition, with notes and emendations by Jesse G. M. Bullowa.] XV + 404 P-, 54 fig.
Van Nostrand Co. : New York, 1919. — Proof sheets of the original were received in 1915 and
1916, but the translation has been brought practically up to date by numerous insertions and
notes. The work is divided into four parts as follows: I. Introduction to the study of col-
loids, 127 p. II. Biocolloids, S3 p. III. The organism as a colloid system, 144 p. IV. Toxi-
cology and pharmacology, microscopical technic, 77 p. — The strictly biological (physiological)
aspects deal in a larger measure with animal structures and behavior, due largely to the greater
specialization in such organisms, but the plant material is in nowise neglected. — B. M.
Duggar.

843. Haldane, J. S. The new physiology and other addresses. VII + 156 p. Charles
Griffin & Co., Ltd.: London, 1919. — This small volume embodies six addresses under the
following titles: (1) the relation of physiology to physics and chemistry; (2) the place of
biology in human knowledge and endeavour; (3) the new physiology; (4) the relation of
physiology to medicine; (5) the theory of development by natural selection; and (6) are
physical, biological, and psychological categories irreducible? Each topic includes some dis-
cussion more or less directly relating to the field, problems, or development of physiology and
physiological concepts. Special emphasis is placed upon arguments designed to strengthen
the claims of biology as an independent science, and with these the distinctive field of
physiology as a fundamental branch of this science. Despite the accumulation of facts re-
lating to the "physical and chemical sources and the ultimate destiny of the material and
energy passing through the body" there is "an equally rapidly accumulating knowledge of
an apparent teleological ordering of this material and energy." The old "vital force" could
never become a working hypothesis; on the other hand, physico-chemical explanations of the
mechanism of such processes as respiration are difficult and disappointing, while such assump-
tions applied to heredity "make the physico-chemical theory of life unthinkable." Never-
theless "we need not sit down in despair, for we can look for other working conceptions." —
B. M. Duggar.

844. McLean, F. T. Opportunities for research in plant physiology in the Philippines.
Philippine Agric. 8: 27-31. 1919.— A short article pointing out some of the advantages of
the Philippine Islands as a place for research in plant physiology. — S. F. Trelease.

845. Willows, R. S., and E. Hatschek. Surface tension and surface energy and their
influence on chemical phenomena. 2nd ed. VIII + 115 p., 21 fig. Toxt-books of chemical
research and engineering. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1919. — The new edition
does not depart from the first in presenting for both biologist and chemist a concise discussion
of the fundamental laws of surface tension and surface energy without necessarily applying
these to specific phenomena. An additional chapter deals with complex phenomena including
such topics as stable emulsions, the theory of dyeing, also tanning. — B. M. Duggar.

116 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY

846. Chambers, Robert. Changes in protoplasmic consistency and their relation to cell
division. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 49-68. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 119.

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

847. De Vries, O. Verband tusschen het soortelijk gewicht van latex en serum en het
rubbergehalt van de latex. [The relation between the specific gravity of latex and serum and
the rubber content of latex.] Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 183-206. 1919. — See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 183.

848. Dixon, H. H., and W. R. G. Atkins. Osmotic pressures in plants. VI. On the
composition of the sap in the conducting tracts of trees at different levels and at different seasons
of the year. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 51-62. 1918.— The aim of this paper is the study
of sap composition at different levels in the same tree and the examination of similar trees
during the various seasons of the year. Three trees of Acer macrophyllum, two each of lle.c
aquifolium and Cotoneaster friyida, and one each of Arbutus unedo and Ulmus campestris were
employed. — The sap was centrifuged from the fresh conducting wood of the trees. It was
found to vary greatly in color and in content of both sugars and salts. During the late autumn
and winter while the trees are dormant the osmotic pressure is small and approximately con-
stant throughout the wood sap. The upper portions of the stem and the roots have slightly
greater pressure than the central portions. In the early spring large quantities of sugars
from the storage cells of the wood parenchyma and the medullary rays are added to the sap.
This is followed by a marked increase in osmotic pressure from root to crown, the greater in-
crease occurring in the upper part of the tree. During late spring the concentration of salts
is very much greater than in early spring. At this time the concentration of sugars is still
high, being about half the maximum concentration. — In Acer macrophyllum, sucrose is present
in quantity. In the root this amounts to 0.6 per cent in October and 1 per cent in February.
In the stem at 10 m. level, where the highest concentrations are recorded, 0.5 per cent sucrose
is found in October and 5.5 per cent in February. The reducing sugars are not found at all
or only in minute traces. In the other trees both reducing sugars and sucrose were found,
the latter usually predominating. In the spring the reducing sugars consisted of the hexoses
and maltose, at other times the latter is absent. — In the evergreens, Arbutus unedo and Ilex
aquifolium, and in the sub-evergreen, Cotoneaster frigida, neither great seasonal changes nor
gradients from roots to crown were observed. At certain seasons the roots may have slightly
higher concentrations than the stems. — A. E. Waller.

849. Loeb, Jacques. Electrification of water and osmotic pressure. Jour. Gen. Physiol.
2: S7-106. 1919. — Experimenting with the amphoteric electrolytes Al(OH)3 and gelatin
the author finds that water diffuses through collodion membranes into solutions of metal
gelatinates or aluminates as if the water were positively charged, and into their acid salts
as if it were negatively charged. The turning point for the sign of electrification of water
seems to be near, or to coincide with, the isoelectric points, which is a hydrogen ion concen-
tration about 2 times 10-B N for gelatin and about 10~7 N for Al(OH)3. When diffusing into
solutions of metal gelatinates the rate is determined by the charge of the cation, the rate
being approximately 2 to 3 times as great into solutions containing the monovalent cations of
Li, Na, K, NH4 as into those of the divalent cations of Ca or Ba at the same concentrations
of gelatin and hydrogen ions. When diffusing into acid salts of gelatin, water — apparently
negatively charged — diffuses less rapidly into a solution of gelatin sulfate than into a solution
of gelatin chloride or nitrate of the same gelatin and hydrogen ion concentrations. "If we
define osmotic pressure as that additional pressure upon the solution required to cause as
many molecules of water to diffuse from solution to the pure water as diffuses simultane-
ously in the opposite direction through the membrane, it follows that the osmotic pressure
cannot depend only on the concentration of the solute but must depend also on the electro-

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 117

static effects of the ions present and that tin* influence of ions on the osmotic pressure m
be the same as that on the initial velocity of diffusion. This assumption was pul to a test
in experiments with gelatin salts for which a collodion membrane is strictly semipermeable

;m<l the tests confirmed the expectation." — 0. /•'. Curtis.

850. Shull, C. A. Permeability. [Rev. of: William.-, M aid. The influence of immer-
sion in certain electrolytic solutions upon permeability of plant cells. Ann. Botany 32 : 591 690.
1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 304.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 232. 1919.

S51. Stiles, Walter, and Franklin Kidd. The comparative rate of absorption of var-
ious salts by plant tissue. Proc. Roy Soc. London 90 B: 487-504. Tables 1-10, fig. 1-7. 1919.
— Rate of absorption of various chlorides, sulphates, nitrates, and potassium salts from solu-
tions 0.02N was measured by the electrical conductivity method, using discs of carrot and
potato. — Initial absorption was rapid, possibly in proportion to ionic mobility. This is
followed by a long period of almost logarithmic approach to equilibrium. The final quantity
absorbed is independent of the initial rate in the case of any given salt. — Initial adsorption
rates are in the following order: Rations, K (Ca, Na), Li (Mg, Zn), Al; anions, SO\», N03
CI. — The final absorption order is, kations, K, Na, Li (Ca, Mg) ; anions N03, CI, SO*. Mon-
ovalent ions are at equilibrium in much greater quantity than divalent ions in the cases stud-
ied. The rate and extent of intake of one ion of a salt may be affected by the nature of the
other ion. From aluminium sulphate aluminium is rapidly absorbed, and the sulphate ion
slowly. — It is pointed out that there is essential agreement with other workers. — Paul B.
Sears.

852. Thoday, D. The "osmotic hypothesis:" a rejoinder. New Phytol. 18: 257-259.
1919. — This is an answer to certain criticisms brought forward by Stiles and J0rgensen. —

1. F. Lewis.

WATER RELATIONS

853. Cribbs, James E. Ecology of Tilia americana. I. Comparative studies of the foliar
transpiring power. Bot. Gaz. 68: 262-286. 13 fig. 1919.

854. Dosdall, Louise. Water requirement and adaptation in Equisetum. Plant World
22 : 1-13, 29-34. 5 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 217.

855. Flood, Margaret G. Exudation of water by Colocasia antiquorum. Sci. Proc.
Roy. Dublin Soc. 15 : 505-512. 2 pi. 1919. — An inquiry into the question of whether the water
exuded from the leaf-tips of Colocasia was conduction water, or whether it was secreted
from a special gland led to the following considerations: 1. It had been related to transpira-
tion and called a nocturnal "liquid transpiration" supplanting the diurnal vaporous one.

2. The drops were sometimes seen to be ejected for short distances, coming through small
pores. 3. It had been stated that the water was secreted by a hydathode and that the secre-
tion was simple filtration. 4. Modern observations had shown that the freezing point of the
exudate differed little from distilled water, and that its electrical conductivity was less than
that of tap-water. — A colloid (India ink mixed with gelatine) was successfully passed through
the end pore and up into the canals, after some preliminary experimentation. When the leaf-
tip was attached to a water reservoir, after severance from the leaf, drops of water continued
to be exuded. This amounted to 6 cc. in 20 hours. These experiments (and the last-men-
tioned repeated, substituting a0.3 per cent starch solution) prove that there was no continuous
membrane between the depression and the water channels. Anaesthetizing the tip did not
slow up the rate of dropping, showing that the water must be urged forward from below in
the plant and not exuded by the action of the tip alone. Cutting the leaf-blade anywhere
results in copious exudation from the veins at every cut. The same occurs when the petioles
are cut. The conclusions from these observations and experiments, made when the soil about
the plant was damp and the air saturated, is that no gland or epithem functioning in secretion
is present in the leaf-tip. The phenomenon must depend upon the normal transfer of water
through the plant. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1406.]— A. E. Waller.

118 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

856. Shtjll, C. A. Curing timber. [Rev. of: Stone, Herbert. The ascent of the sap
and the drying of timber. Quart. Jour. Forest. 12:261-266. 1918.] Bot. Gaz. 68:310. 1919.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 233.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

857. Espino, Raf. B. Methods in nutrition experiments. [Rev. of: Schreiner, Oswald,
and J. J. Skinner. The triangle system for fertilizer experiments. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron.
10:225-246. 1918.] Plant World 22: 53-54. 1919.

858. Girard, Pierre. Scheme physique pour servir a l'etude de la nutrition minerale
de la cellule. [Physical scheme to serve for a study of the mineral nutrition of the cell. | Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1335-1338. 1919. — The object of this work is to demonstrate in
vitro the principles which bear on the differential permeability of the plasma membrane.
By the use of barium chloride combined with various other chemicals, using a gold beater's
skin, the author finds that differential permeability can be demonstrated. The phenomenon
is explained on an electrical basis and is attributed to the ionization of the substances in
solution. — V. H. Young.

859. Hoagland, D. R. Relation of nutrient solution to composition and reaction of cell
sap of barley. Bot. Gaz. 68: 297-304. 1919.— The osmotic pressures in the sand and water
cultures of barley are reflected in the cell sap of the tops and roots. The electrical conduc-
tivity of the nutrient solution has a marked influence on the conductivity of the sap, both in
tops and in roots; the conductivity of the sap is from 4 to 50 times greater than that of the
nutrient solution. The sap from the tops of plants in all cultures had almost the same PH
value, approximately 6.0. Plants were grown in 6 different soils and in every case the sap
concentration was much greater than that of the soil solution. Emphasis is placed on the
dynamic nature of the relation between the soil solution and the plant. — H. C. Cowles.

860. Le Clerc, J. A., and J. F. Breazeale. Effect of lime upon the sodium-chlorid
tolerance of wheat seedlings. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 347-356. PI. 88-47. 1920.— The work was
done with reference to "alkali" soils. Soil, sand, and solution cultures were used, since inert
material might affect the toxic limits of dissolved salts. It is found that plants in soil and
sand show higher tolerance to alkali salts than solution cultures. This is not due entirely
to the physical effect of the presence of solid particles of different degrees of fineness, but also
to certain soluble substances which are present in very small quantities. — Very small amounts
of calcium oxide and calcium sulfate overcome the toxic effects of sodium chlorid and sodium
sulfate. Magnesium sulfate and barium chlorid are slightly antagonistic to sodium chlorid,
while potassium chlorid, sodium nitrate, sodium phosphate, ferric chlorid, and alum had
no effect on its toxicity. — The presence of lime did not prevent the entrance of sodium chlorid
or sodium sulfate into the plant. The antagonistic effect of lime seems to be due to some other
cause than its effect on permeability. — D. Reddick.

861. Livingston, B. E. [Under Notes and Comment, no special title.] Plant World
22: 26-27. 1919. — A discussion of work by F. W. Gericke on a preliminary test of the influ-
ence of temperature upon the physiological balance of the nutrient solution as related to
germination in wheat. Stress is laid on the need of quantitative definition of all effective
conditions in experimental work. — Chas. A. Shull.

862. Shive, JohnW. Relation of moisture in solid substrata to physiological salt balance
for plants and to the relative plant-producing value of various salt proportions. Jour. Agric.
Res. 18: 357-378. 1920. — Three different degrees of moisture were maintained in sand cul-
tures, 40, 60 and 80 per cent of the water-retaining capacity of the sand. Tests were made
with 36 different sets of salt proportions of the three salts, monopotassium phosphate, calcium
nitrate, and magnesium sulfate in solutions with each of the moisture percentages noted.
The solutions, all having an initial total osmotic concentration of 1.75 atmospheres, were

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 1 [9

supplied to the sand cultures in such quantities as to produce the differ adardsof mi

ture. Culture solutions were renewed every third day. Daily water loss was restored
daily. Wheat was grown for 28 days.— The physiological balance of the uutrienl Bolutiom

producing the best yields of tops and roots was oo1 altered by variations in the mo con-

tent of the sand. A slight shifting of the balance, as affecting growth, is indicate, I for the
growth of 9 high-yielding cultures, as a whole, out of the series of 36, with each increase D
the moisture content of the cultures, from a position in the series characterized by lower par-
tial concentration of potassium phosphate to one of higher partial concentration of this salt,
and correspondingly lower ones of calcium nitrate and magnesium sulfate.— Good physio-
logical balance and optimum total concentration of a nutrient solution for plants i- qoI done
sufficient to produce the best growth of which the solution is capable when it is diffused as a
film on the particles of a solid substratum. An optimum degree of moisture is essential to
impart to the soil (sand) solution its maximum physiological value. The plant -producing
value of any fertilizer treatment is thus determined largely by the moisture conditions of the
substratum. — The lowest percentage of moisture employed corresponds with low yields of
tops and roots, lowest transpiration rates, and with lowest water requirement ratios. The
highest moisture content is associated with low yield of tops and roots, with high t ranspiral ion
rates, and with the highest water requirement ratios. The medium degree of moisture is
correlated with the highest yields of tops and of roots, high transpiration rates, and medium
water requirement ratios. — D. Reddick.

S63. Steinkoenig, L. A. Relation of fluorine in soils, plants and animals. Jour. Indust.
Eng. Chem. 11: 463-465. 1919. — After reviewing the literature the author reports fluorine
determinations of 9 soils, using Merwin's determination with modifications, which is given
in detail. Fluorine occurs in amounts averaging 0.03 per cent. Three soils contained but
0.01 per cent, and in one case it was not found. Soils carrying stones made up of mica schist
contain relatively higher amounts, — Hagerstown loam 0.11-0.15 per cent, York silt loam 0.05
per cent. Fluorine is in the soil in such minerals as biotite, tourmaline, muscovite, apatite,
fluorite and phlogopite. Plants absorb fluorine and thus it is available for animals, which
latter may also obtain it from spring water. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1636.] — C. R. Hursh.

864. Stiles, Walter, and Franklin Kidd. The influence of external concentration
on the position of the equilibrium attained in the intake of salts by plant cells. Proc. Roy. Soc.
London 90 B: 448-470. Tables 1-13, 6 fig. 1919.— Salt intake by discs of carrot and potato
tissue was measured by changes in electrical conductivity of the external solution. The initial
concentrations used varied from N/10 to N/5000. Carrot is considered more suitable than
potato because of less exosmosis into distilled water. Toxic salts, e. g., copper sulfate, pro-
duce greater exosmosis in both distilled water and in solutions. — The ratio between final
internal and final external concentration is called the absorption ratio. The initial rate of
absorption is roughly proportional to the concentration of the external solution; but the final
absorption ratio, at equilibrium, diminishes as concentration of the external solution increases.
The equation of the absorption ratio is given as p KCm, where y is the final interval and C
the final external concentration. This happens to be the adsorption equation, but no basis
was found for postulating the mechanism of salt intake. — Paul B. Sears.

PHOTOSYNTHESIS

865. Pulling, H. E. Physiological problems of photosynthesis. [Rev. of: Henrioi,
Marguerite. Chlorophyllgehalt und Kohlensaure-Assimilation bei Alpen- und Ebenen-
pflanzen. Verhandl. Naturforsch. Ges. Basel 30: 43-136. 1918.] Plant ^Yorld 22: 123-126.
1919.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

866. Armstrong, E. Frankland. The simple carbohydrates and the glucosides. 3rd
ed. IX+239p. Monographs on Biochemistry. Longmans, Green & Co.: London, 1919. —
No new chapters have been added since the second edition of this work, but much new material

120 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

has been incorporated. Important among the special advances necessitating the revision
are (1) the discovery of a third isomeric form of glucose differing from the pentaphane ring
forms in structure serving to throw new light on the constitution of sucrose, and (2) definite
data for the characterization of carbohydrates as regards the relationship of optical rotatory
power to structure. — B. M. Duggar.

867. Ayers, S. Henry, and Philip Rupp. Simultaneous acid and alkaline bacterial
fermentations from dextrose and the salts of organic acids respectively. Jour. Infect. Diseases
23: 188-216. 1918. — The quantitative fermentation of dextrose by Bacillus colt and B. aer-
ogenes into formic, acetic, lactic, and succinic acids is shown, with the accompanying changes
in H-ion concentration. The reversion of reaction is explained as the formation of carbonates
or bicarbonates from the formic acid salts, as the changes in PH agree quite closely with the
disappearance of the formic acid. Simultaneous fermentations of acid from dextrose and of
alkali from citrate are shown with the alkali-forming group of bacteria. — W. II. Chambers.

868. Behrend, Robert, and George Heyer. Uber die Oxydation der Muconsaure.
Synthese der Schleimsaure. [Concerning the oxidation of muconic acid. Synthesis of mucic
acid.] Ann. Chem. 418 : 294-316. 1919. — As an average of 12 tests under controlled conditions
the action of potassium permanganate upon muconic acid yielded, per 100 molecules of the
acid, 21 molecules of oxalic acid, 11 molecules of tartaric acid, a trace of mucic acid, and un-
identified products. Oxidation by sodium chlorate and osmic acid yielded, per 100 molecules,
32 molecules of mucic acid and small amounts of other products. — W. E. Tollingham.

869. Besson, A., A. Ranque, and C. Senez. Action biochimique des microbes sur les
sucres et les alcools. [Biochemical action of bacteria on sugars and alcohols.] Compt. Rend.
Soc. Biol.. 81 : 930-933. 1918. — Fermentation of the common sugars and alcohols by bacteria
of the colon-typhoid-dysentery group and other organisms is tabulated, with emphasis on
the constancy of the property of gas production. — W. H. Chambers.

870. Besson, A., A. Ranque, and C. Senez. Sur la vie du coli-bacille en milieu liquide
glucose. [On the life of B. coli in liquid glucose-containing media.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol.
82: 76^78. 1919. — The time relation between growth and fermentation is shown. Gas and
acid production commenced when multiplication ceased. More than one-half of the acid
was produced in the first hour. — W. H. Chambers.

871. Besson, A., A. Ranque, and C. Senez. Sur la vie des microbes dans les milieux
liquides sucres. [On the life of bacteria in liquid sugar-containing media.] Compt. Rend.
Soc. Biol. 82 : 107-109. 1919. — The action of different bacteria on glucose is shown to be similar
to that of Bacillus coli, the cultures becoming sterile in 6 days. The acid and gas production
of B. coli from different sugars and alcohols is reported. — W. H. Chambers.

872. Besson, A., A. Ranque, and C. Senez. Sur la vie du coli-bacille en milieu liquide
glucose. Importance des doses de glucose. [On the life of Bacillus coli in liquid glucose-
containing media. Importance of amounts of glucose.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: 164-166.
1919. — The relation of amounts of glucose to titratable acid, death of the culture, disappear-
ance of the sugar, and time of gas fermentation is reported. They found reversion of reaction
with 0.2 per cent or less of glucose, and death of the culture in 6 days with 0.4 per cent or more.
— W. H. Chambers.

873. Bourquelot, E., and Bridel. Application de la methode biochemlque a l'etude
de plusieurs d'Orchidees indigenes. Decouverte d'un glucoside nouveau, la "loroglossine."
[Discovery of a new glucoside, "loroglossine," in one of the indigenous orchids.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 701-703. 1919. — Preparation and properties of the glucoside "loroglos-
sine" from Loroglossum hircinum Rich, are described. — F. B. Warm.

No. 1, August, 19*20) PHYSIOLOGY 1 2 1

874. Bunker, J. W. M. The determination of hydrogen ion concentration. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 41: 11-14. 1920. -An electrode and a vessel .tie described which have been in use a
long time, meeting the requirements of quick, accurate determinations in large numbers. —
G. B. Rigg.

875. Church, A. H. The ionic phase of the sea. New Phytol. 18: 239-217. 19J9.—
This is a discussion of sea water as the "primary source of 'life' "from the standpoint of the
modern physico-chemist. The ionization of the salt content of sea water is discussed, par-
ticularly in relation to the ions of carbonic acid. Far-reaching analogies are pointed out
between living substance and sea water; the latter is even considered to be "the primordial
material of which protoplasmic units are but individualized particles or segregated centres
of actions, still more complex, but of the same category." — /. F. Lewis.

S76. Clevenger, Clinton B. Hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. I. The
accurate determination of the hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices by means of the hydro-
gen electrode. Soil Sci. 8: 217-226. 1919. — The apparatus is essentially that described by
Clark and Lubs with modifications to prevent foaming of the plant juice and to simplify both
the shaking apparatus and the temperature. To prevent contact between the electrodes
and plant juice during saturation with hydrogen the juice is placed in dropping funnels at-
tached to the electrode vessels. To reduce contact potential, contact between the plant
juice and the saturated potassium chloride solution is made by means of a scratch around the
cock connecting the two. Duplicate measurements agree within 0.1 millivolt. — William J.
Robbins.

877. Clevenger, Clinton B. Hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. II. Factors
affecting the acidity or hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. Soil Sci. 8: 227-242. 1919.
— Determinations of acidity should be made as quickly as possible after cutting the plant
and extracting the juice, as the acidity of plant juice may decrease or increase on standing.
The roots of cow pea are generally more acid than the leaves and the leaves more acid than the
stems. The acidity in the roots of cow pea during a 24 hour period is rather constant, being
higher during the day. In the leaves and stems the acidity drops during the afternoon,
rising during the night and reaching a maximum in the morning. The acidity of the roots
of plants appears to be correlated with the reaction of the soil, but the acidity of the tops
of the plants studied was greater on limed than on unlimed soil. — William J. Robbins.

878. Colin, H. Utilization du glucose et du levulose par les plantes superieures. [Utili-
zation of glucose and levulose by higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 697-699.
1919. — The proportion of glucose to levulose in green leaves of beet is often less than 1, but
increases down the midrib and in the petiole. Etiolated leaves of beet, artichoke, and chicory
showed a larger proportion of dextrose than of levulose, whereas in the storage organs of these
plants the reverse is true. It is assumed that these two sugars must either be transported
at unequal rates or that they are utilized in unequal amounts. The author concludes that it
is more probable that the glucose is oxidized in the cell in preference to levulose, the latter
playing an essential role in tissue formation. Thus respiration is less intense in the petiole
than in the blade, and less in etiolated leaves than in green leaves. — F. B. Wann.

879. Cushny, Arthur R. The properties of optical isomers from the biological side.
Pharm. Jour. 103: 483. 1919. — The living plant discriminates between laevo and dextro-
rotatory bodies because it is itself optically active, but no optically active substances have as
yet been synthetically produced by man. Because of this phenomenon of discrimination by
the living plant and the fact that an optically active alkaloid, such as cinchonine, can be used
to separate a mixture of laevo and dextro tartrates, and the further fact that vegetable and
animal organisms that act upon asymmetric bodies generally destroy the substance that occurs
in nature but will not destroy the non-natural isomer", the author declares that "until life
appeared no optically active body existed, and without life and its products there would be
none today." Further, this optical activity is the most persistent evidence of life, since an

122 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

optically active alkaloid or acid, centuries after the plant that produced it is destroyed, will
still retain its activity, and the occurrence of any optically active substance, such as petro-
leum, proves that it must have been derived from living tissues. — Experiments with hyos-
cyamine, a laevorotatory substance and its isomer atropine, optically inactive, consisting
of equal parts of laevo and dextro hyoscyamine, demonstrated that Z-hyoscyamine had the
same physiological effect on peripheral nerve-endings as twice the quantity of dZ-hyoscyamine
(atropine) . Again, a comparison, by the effect on blood pressure, indicates that natural adren-
aline (Z-adrenaline) was twice as powerful as synthetic adrenaline (dZ-adrenaline) and that
d-adrenaline (obtained from dZ-adrenaline) was without activity. — E. N. Gathercoal.

880. Haas, A. R. C. The electrometric titration of plant juices. Soil Sci. 7: 487-491.
1 fig. 1919. — An electrometric apparatus is described for determining the buffer action,
acid and alkali reserve, and the total and actual acidities of plant juices. Rhubarb juice has
a greater actual acidity and greater buffer action than that of soy bean tops. — William J.
Robbins.

881. Haynes, Dorothy, and Hilda Mary Judd. The effect of methods of extraction
on the composition of expressed apple juice, and a determination of the sampling error of such
juices. Biochem. Jour. 13 : 272-277. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 541.

882. Jones, Harry. Some factors influencing the final hydrogen-ion concentration in
bacterial cultures with special references to streptococci. Jour. Infect. Diseases 26: 160-164.
1920. — The composition of the medium, the initial reaction and any other conditions which
favor or hinder abundant growth of a given organism should be considered in order to obtain
accurate information regarding its final hydrogen ion concentration. — Sclman A. Waksman.

883. Knudson, L., and E. W. Lindstrom. Influence of sugars on the growth of albino
plants. Amer. Jour. Bot. 6: 401-405. 1919.— Albino corn seedlings grown both on agar and
in water culture were supplied with sugar (sucrose and glucose). On agar, they all lost weight,
but those supplied with sugar lost considerably less than controls which had no sugar. Re-
sults with plants grown in the dark were essentially the same as with those grown in the light.
In water culture the albino seedlings made an appreciable gain when provided with sugar,
and lived much longer than the controls, but ultimately died. The better growth in water
culture is explained as probably due to higher concentration of sugar and higher temperatures
at which the plants were grown. Roots of plants supplied with sugar often continued to
live for some time after the shoots died. The substitution of asparagin for nitrates in the
culture solutions caused practically no difference in growth. The authors explain the failure
of albino plants to thrive when sugar is supplied as due to the inability of the plant to absorb
sugar rapidly, and to the relatively slow rate of its conduction. — E. W. Sinnott.

884. Kremers, R. E., and J. A. Hall. On the identification of citric acid in the tomato.
Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : 15-17. 1920. — The presence of citric acid in the tomato has been shown
by means of its triphenacyl ester. — G. B. Rigg.

885. Meinicke, E. Die Lipoidbindungsreaktion. [The lipoid-fixation reaction.] Zeit-
schr. Immunitatsforsch. u. Exp. Therapie 27: 350-363. 1918; 28: 2S0-326. 1919.— Antibodies
are probably globulins, or at least inseparable from them by any known method. In the reac-
tion between serum and the extract, the colloids of the latter force the NaCl equivalent of
the serum globulins from solution, probably by removing NaCl. This reaction is stronger
in positive sera. An immunized organism reacts more quickly and more intensively follow-
ing a recent addition of antigen than the control. The possibility of a specific, more intensive
reaction resides not only in the cell but also in the serum itself. The intensity of the reaction
seems due to the fact that the NaCl equivalent of the most labile substance in the system is
forced out of solution by the most stable substance present. The various forms of immunity
reactions are only the expression of the different reagents acting in various combinations in
such a system, hence it is possible to combine various forms of reactions. In the so-called

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 123

inactivation of sera the reaction possibilities of the serum globulins are changed in two ways:
it is separated from the NaCl equivalent with more difficulty; and the salt removal acts on
the protein molecule itself, as is seen in the closer binding of the salt on warming the sera. —
C. W. Dodge.

886. Morishima, Kanichiro. Phenol red-china blue as indicator in fermentation tests
of bacterial cultures. Jour. Infect. Diseases 26: 43-44. 1920. — An indicator is proposed con-
sisting of phenol red and decolorized china blue for fermentation tests of bacterial cultures.
The production of acid causes first a bright green color changing to a deep blue, when too
much acid is formed. The production of alkali is indicated by a pink color. — Selman A.
Waksman.

887. Posternak, M. S. Sur la constitution du principe phospho-organique de reserve
des plantes vertes. [On the constitution of the phospho-organic principle in the reserve of green
plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 37^12. 1919. — An attempt is made to determine
whether or not the phospho-organic reserve of plants is or is not a hexa-phosphate of inosite.
The author plans experiments on the synthesis of this compound to determine whether or not
3 molecules of water are held as water of crystallization or are an essential constituent of the
molecule. — V. II. Young.

888. Sherman, H. C. Protein requirement of maintenance in man and the nutritive
efficiency of bread protein. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41: 97-109. 1920. — The proteins of wheat,
corn, and oats appear to be about equally efficient in human nutrition, and need only be sup-
plemented by small amounts of milk in order to be fully as efficient as the proteins of ordinary
mixed diets. — G. B. Rigg.

889. Steenbock, H., and P. W. Boutwell. Fat-soluble vitamine. III. The compara-
tive value of white and yellow maizes. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : 81-96. pi. 2. 1920. — The occur-
rence of yellow pigment and the growth-promoting property attributed to the presence of
the fat-soluble vitamine seem to be intimately associated in the maize kernel. — G. B. Rigg.

890. Willaman, J. J. The function of vitamines in the metabolism of Sclerotinia cinerea.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 549-585. 1920. — The basal medium for these tests was Ctjrrie's
mineral solution plus asparagin (as a source of nitrogen), plus sucrose. Growth was com-
pleted in 10 days; sporulation began the third or fourth day. "The amount of vegetation is
not proportional to the concentration of the juice, the fungus being unable to utilize the
greater amounts of nutrients in the same degree that it does the lesser." "Reproduction is
more abundant on the peach juice than on the others," i.e., prune juice and apricot juice.
"The higher concentrations are not necessarily the optimum for reproduction." The fungus
can make excellent growth on either asparagine or glycine, providing the growth-promoting
material of the 2 cc. of prune juice is also present. It was also shown that diammonium
hydrogen phosphate alone would not produce growth; that wort alone will support growth
fairly well; and the two together make an excellent medium for growth. The vitamine prep-
aration served to make the ammonia nitrogen more useful to the fungus. Vitamine B was
obtained by means of Lloyd's alkaloidal reagent. It adsorbs the vitamine from an acid solu-
tion and releases it in an alkaline one Pectin interferes with the adsorption of the vitamine.
65 per cent alcohol, to which a few drops of 1 per cent H2SO4 was added, was used for the prep-
aration of the vitamine. When pectin has been removed, the vitamine will pass through a
colloidin sac. — The author presents evidence that two vitamines are concerned in the life
cycle of Sclerotinia cinerea. One enables vegetative growth to take place and is more readily
adsorbed by Fuller's earth on an alcohol medium; the other enables the fungus to sporulate
wTell and is more readily adsorbed in an aqueous medium. Evidence given shows that the
shuffling of the nitrogen and sugar constituents of the medium will not of itself determine
the occurrence or non-occurrence of reproduction in Sclerotinia. Both vitamines must be
present if reproduction is to occur. Other evidence presented would indicate the presence
of but one vitamine. — ./. M. Brennan.

124 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

891. Willamak, J. J. Colorimeter and indicator method. [Rev. of: Duggar, B. M.,
and C. W. Dodge. The use of the colorimeter in the indicator method of H-ion determination
with biological fluids. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 6: 61-70. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry
1449.)] Bot. Gaz. 68:232. 1919.

892. Zellner, Julius. Zur Chemie der hoheren Pilze. XIII. Uber Scleroderma vul-
gare Fr. und Polysaccum crassipes DC. [Chemistry of the higher fungi.] Akad. Wiss. Wien
(Monatshefte fur Chemie) 39: 603-615. 1918. — Following the general plan of his earlier studies
the author reports the presence of mannit, cholin, and viscosin among the substances investi-
gated in Scleroderma. In Polysaccum it is noteworthy that no mannit occurs. With this
species special attention was devoted to a tannoid pigment. In neither fungus could the
author demonstrate either invertase, maltase, or diastase. — B. M. Duggar.

S93. Zoller, H. F. Quantitative estimation of indole in biological media. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 41 : 25-36. 1920. — Indole is an important product of the metabolism of certain micro-
organisms. A simple, rapid, reliable method for its determination has been evolved, requir-
ing only the reagents and apparatus common to most laboratories. — G. B. Rigg.

894. Zoller, H. F. Influence of hydrogen ion concentration upon the volatility of indole
from aqueous solution. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41: 37-44. 1920. — The range of most rapid vola-
tilization of indole from the aqueous solutions studied is from PH 8.0 to 10.5. Results suggest
that the practice of steam distillation can be supplanted by direct distillation when the reac-
tion of the solution is taken into account. — G. B. Rigg.

METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS)

S95. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Lakon, Georg. Der Eiweissgehalt panachierter Blatter,
gepriift mittels des makroskopischen Verfahrens von Molisch. (The protein content of mottled
leaves tested by the macroscopical method of Molisch.) Biochem. Zeitschr. 78: 145-154. 1917.]
Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47: 251. 1918. — White-variegated leaves of many
species of plants, especially, Acer ncgundo, furnish suitable material for the macroscopical
demonstration of the protein reaction according to Molisch. The protein-rich green places
in the leaves give a very strong color while the protein-poor albescent places are only slightly
colored. Protein-rich and protein-poor places are directly related to the presence and absence
of chromatophores, in the leaf. In the case of yellow 'panachierten,' chromatophores are
found in the leaf tissues and so one finds them rich in protein. The investigation supports
the views of Molisch in that the principal masses of proteins of the leaves occur in the chro-
matophores. When submitted to the xanthoproteic reaction leaves which contain anthocya-
nin first take on a red color when placed in nitric acid solution, because, in spite of the decolor-
ization, they contain anthocyanin in the colorless isomeric form. — F. M. Schertz.

896. Berman, N., and L. F. Rettger. Bacterial nutrition: further studies on the utili-
zation of protein and non-protein nitrogen. Jour. Bact. 3 : 367-388. 1918. — The utilization of
different brands of commercial peptones by proteolytic and non-proteolytic bacteria is prob-
ably related to the simpler nitrogen-containing substances. The liquefaction of gelatin was
not a necessary indication of the proteolytic property of an organism. The availability of
casein for bacterial use is shown before and after digestion with trypsin. — W. H. Chambers.

897. Bonazzi, Augusto. On nitrification. III. The isolation and description of the
nitrite ferment. Bot. Gaz. 68: 194-207. pi. 14- 1919. — This paper presents the results of
the study of an organism, capable of forming nitrates from ammonia, isolated in a pure state
from Wooster [Ohio] soil after many unsuccessful attempts. A review is given of the per-
tinent literature, and the methods are described by which the organism was isolated and its
cultural characteristics determined. The cultural solution used throughout was the one rec-
ommended by Omelianski, of the following composition: H2O, 1000 cc. ; FeSO*, 0.4 gram;
MgSO«, 0.5 gram; K2HP04, 1 gram; NaCl, 2 grams; and (NrL^SO*, 2 grams. Solid media

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 125

used were gypsum block, magnesium carbonate block, magnesium carbonate and ammonium-
magnesium-phosphate block, ammonium sulphate washed agar, and silicic acid jelly. The
best results were obtained with Winogradsky's silicic acid jelly. Incubation of all cultures
was made at 28 to 30°C. At this temperature cultures were obtained which nitrified as much
as 8.04 mgm. of ammoniacal nitrogen in 26 days of incubation. The organism is not motile.
Its thermal death point was found to lie between 50° and 55°C, when the vitality of the organ-
ism, after heating 5.5 minutes at the required temperature, was tested at rest in Omeliansky's
solution containing basic magnesium carbonate. The organism occurs in a large form ^=1.25 ft
in diameter and in a small coccus form which the author names (3. He concludes that the meg-
alococcus isolated by these methods is very similar to that described by Winogradsky from
South American soils and should be classed as a species of the genus Nitrosococcus. — D. H.
Rose.

898. Brackett, R. N., and H. F. Haskins. Report on nitrogen. Jour. Assoc. Official
Agric. Chem. 3: 207-217. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1003.

899. Conn, H. J., and J. W. Bright. Ammonification of manure in soil. Jour. Agric.
Res. 16: 313-350. 1919. — A foreword by Conn refers largely to previous studies of spore-form-
ers and non-spore-formers. Under the title "What soil organisms take part in ammonifi-
cation of manure?" Bright shows the predominance of Pseudomonas fluorescens and
Pseudomonas caudatus in manured soil and gives the results of an investigation of their func-
tion in Dunkirk silt clay loam. — Fresh horse or cow manure was added to the soil in the ratio
of 1 : 20. In addition to plate counts direct microscopic examinations were made. Not only
was the unsterilized material used but also the sterilized to which was added the pure cultures.
The latter was used both separately and in combination. — In unsterilized soil which was
kept in pots the data show a rapid increase in non-spore-formers. After 7 days they were
never less than 92.5 per cent, while in certain cases they were as high as 97 per cent. The
results from experiments conducted in flasks are not so striking, yet the same relation holds.
Isolations showed only 2.8 per cent which form spores. — The growth of Ps. fluorescens and
Ps. caudatus in sterilized manured soil compared with that of a spore-former, Bacillus cereus,
shows that the spore-former had increased in 7 days only 8.3 times while the two former organ-
isms had increased respectively 110 and 132 times over the original inoculation. When these
three organisms were in association Ps. fluorescens and Ps. caudatus rapidly gained the ascen-
dancy over B. cereus, the latter soon sporulating and remaining in this condition. — A test of
the ammonia production and cell count in soil of the above three organisms in pure culture
shows B. cereus to be the most powerful ammonifier. The two non-spore-forming organisms
gave many times more cells per gram of manured soil. However, when the three organisms
were grown in association there was no increase in total ammonia formed and in cell counts
the two non-spore-formers had gained the ascendancy. B. cereus was not found although 2.3
million per gram were present at the beginning.— The taxonomic study by Conn includes a
description of Ps. fluorescens, Ps. aeruginosa, Bacterium termo and Ps. putida with a brief
summary of characters of typical Ps. fluorescens and Ps. caudatus. — J. K. Wilson.

900. Dakin, H. D. On amino acids. Biochem. Jour. 12: 290-317. 1918.— Some new
methods are presented for the extraction of amino acids by partially miscible solvents. A
new amino acid, hydroxyglutanic acid, and a new peptide from caseinogen, isoleucylvaline,
have been isolated and studied. — W. H. Chambers.

901. Frear, William, Walter Thomas, and H. D. Edmiston. Notes on the use of
potassium permanganate in determining nitrogen by the Kjeldahl method. Jour. Assoc. Official
Agric. Chem. 3 : 220-224. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1005.

902. Hendrick, Ellwood. Micro-organisms in plant chemistry and nitrogen fixation.
An account of the development and application of micro-organisms useful to plant growth — fix-
ation of nitrogen in the soil. Chem. and Mettallurg. Eng. 19: 574-576. 6 fig. 1918.— This is

126 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

a popular account of the utilization of a muck swamp, and among the products described is
that designated "inoculant" — a material in which 28 strains of legume bacteria and 5 strains
of Azotobacter are grown. — G. M. Armstrong.

903. Hirsch, Paul. Die Einwirkung von Mikroorganismen auf die Eiweisskorper. [The
action of micro-organisms on proteins.] IX+255 p., 7 fig. Die Biochemie in Einzeldarstel-
lungen IV [Edited by A. Kanitz]. Gebriider Borntraeger: Berlin, 1918. — This number in
the above biochemical series is essentially an amino acid reference book and follows naturally
No. Ill, by M. Siegfried, on partial protein hydrolysis ("Uber partielle Eiweisshydrolyze").
This monograph takes up the secondary cleavages of the proteins, the decomposition of the
amino acids. The first part discusses the chemistry of the amino acids and of their proteol-
ysis by bacteria and fungi, with one section on ergot. Part 2 gives chemical and biological
methods for isolating and determining the amino acid cleavage products. Part 3 gives the
physical and chemical properties of the products and their derivatives, and part 4, the syn-
thesis of some of them. — W. H. Chambers.

904. Holm, George E. A modification of the apparatus for the determination of arginine
nitrogen by Van Slyke's method. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 611-612. 1920.

905. Levene, P. A. The structure of yeast nucleic acid. V. Ammonia hydrolysis.
Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : 19-23. 1920. — On mild hydrolysis with 5-per cent ammonia at a tempera-
ture of 100°C. yeast nucleic acid is broken up into four nucleotides. Three have already been
reported. A fourth, crystalline cytidinphosphoric acid, has now been isolated. — G. B. Rigg.

906. Long, Esmond R. A study in fundamentals of the nutrition of the tubercle bacillus :
the utilization of some amino acids and ammonium salts. Amer. Rev. of Tuberculosis 3 : 86-
108. 2 fig. 1919. — The experiments performed are concerned primarily with the growth of
human tubercle bacilli on media of known chemical composition. The hydrolysis of prote-
oses and peptones, as also the deaminization of some of the constituent amino acids, is
reported. Good growth was afforded by glycerol media with urethane, glycocoll, and alanine
as sources of nitrogen; likewise ammonia, methyl amine, and ethyl amine, as also the acid
amids, were utilized. Ammonium salts of the dibasic acids oxalic, malonic, succinic, malic,
and tartaric afforded excellent growth, but the ammonium salts of fatty, ketonic, and hy-
droxy acids did not permit growth. Between PH 6.4 and PH 7.8 the reaction of a glycerol
peptone culture medium is unimportant in the growth of this organism. Regarding the course
of catabolism, it is suggested that "the amino acids (that is, those studied — glycocoll and
alanine) break up into ammonia and alcohols, perhaps with amines as intermediate stages,
that hydroxy malonic acid (tartaric acid) is formed in the medium through the oxidation of
glycerol, and that ammonium malonate and malonic ester, or closely allied compounds, are
of great importance in the synthesis of the bacillus's organic substance." — B. M. Duggar.

907. Phelps, I. K., and H. W. Datjdt. Investigations of the Kjeldahl method for the
determination of nitrogen. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 218-220. 1919. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 1006.

908. Trowbridge, P. F. Symposium on the determination of nitrogen in fertilizers.
Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 217-218. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1007.

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

909. Anonymous. Glycerin manufacture by the fermentation of sugar. Sci. Amer. Sup-
plem. 88: 315. 1919. — [From Engineering, Sept. 5, 1919.] — A method employing yeasts. —
Chas. H. Otis.

910. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Biedermann, W. Fermentstudien. 1. Mitteilung. Das
Speichelferment. (Salivary ferments.) Fermentforschung 1 : 385-436. 1916.] Biedermann 's
Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47: 279-280. 1918. — The reviewer credits the author with finding

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 127

that the time required for 1 he hydrolysis of starch to dextrine under the action of salivary
ferments is conversely proportional to the quantity of ferment. Saccharification is in no way
parallel to dextrin formation but remains behind if the quantity of ferment is decreased. It
is believed that the diastase enzyme consists of two components; an amylase which splits
the starch molecule to dextrine, and a dextrinasc which can attack only the dextrin group. —
F. M. Schertz.

911. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Bijsdermann, W. Fermentstudien. II. Mitteilung. Die
Autolyse der Starke. (The autolysis of starch.) Wochenschr. Braucrci 34: 1S3-1S0. 1917.]
Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47: 280-2X1. 1918. — The reviewer indicates that
previous work of Biedermann shows the rapid hydrolysis of boiled starch solution by saliva
ash, which effect is due to a ferment liberated from the starch. It is now shown, according
to the reviewer, that a similar hydrolysis occurs without adding any ash, if the starch solution
is made at 70-90°C Boiled solutions are hydrolyzed after a longer period, while extracts
prepared by grinding starch in water hydrolyze rapidly. The diastatic power of the latter
extract is similar to that of a very dilute solution of saliva, and completely transforms starch
into sugar. Of the salivary salts calcium chloride promotes maximum diastatic action.
The action of salivary ash in promoting the decomposition of starch solutions which have
been subjected to boiling suggests that this mixture of salts promotes the formation of amylase
from starch. — F. M. Schertz.

912. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Jacoby, Martin. Uber Fermentbildung. (Formation of
enzymes.) Biochem. Zeitschr. 79: 35-50. 1917.] Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem.
47: 281-282. 1918. — -Traces of grape sugar were found to greatly increase the activity of en-
zymes on urea. Search was then made to see what building stones the enzymes used. Ac-
cording to the reviewer there were then tested a number of materials in relation to their action
on the decomposition of urea. The formation of urease was greatly stimulated by d-glucose,
d-galactose, glycerol, dl-glyceric aldehyde, dihydroxy acetone, pyroracemic acid, and lactic
acid. A stimulatory action of less intensity was shown by d-fructose, d- and 1-arabinose.
Maltose, ethylene glycol, and propylene glycol produced little action, while d-mannose,
d-sorbose, rhamnose, heptose, the polysaccharides, glucosides, and sugar alcohols had no
action.— F. M. Schertz.

913. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Lombbroso, Ugo. Uber die Reversibilitat der Enzym-
wirkungen. 1. Mitteilung. Spaltung und Synthesis der Fette durch eine Lipase. (Cleavage
and synthesis of fats by the action of one and the same lipase.) Arch. Pharmacol. Sperim. 14:
429-459. 1912.] Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47: 287. 1918.— According to the
reviewer it is shown that fat hydrolysis begins immediately at 37°C. and can proceed to SO
per cent of completion. Synthesis does not begin till after 30-40 hours and then does not
proceed to a very great extent. The presence of bile neither increases nor retards the syn-
thesis of fat but increases the hydrolysis. Warming at 40°C. for several hours destroys the
lipolytic properties but the synthetic activities are not affected. The presence of glycerin
lessens the harmful action of heat while oleic acid has no influence. The synthetic power of
pancreatic juice is not increased if either glycerin or oleic acid remains in contact with it for
a long time. Pancreatic juice which possesses synthetic properties has only small lipolytic
capacities. Addition of fat slows down the synthetic activities but does not inhibit them.
No synthesis could be demonstrated with the secretion of the small intestine in spite of a
well developed lipolytic property. — F. M. Schertz.

914. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Schweizer, Karl. Zur Kenntnis der Desaminierung.
(Deamination.) Biochem. Zeitschr. 78: 37-45. 1917.] Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agri-
kulturchem. 47: 282. 1918. — The setting free of ammonia (deamination) in the final stages
of protein decomposition has been ascribed to the action of deaminases which, however, have
not been isolated. A hydrolytic action was ascribed to the deaminase. Chodat and Schweizer
in 1913 showed that tyrosinase possessed deaminizing properties and that deamination may

128 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

be due to the oxidizing function of this enzyme. The author isolated tyrosinase from the
potato and studied its action upon the amino acids. He detected formaldehyde, ammonia,
and small quantities of carbon dioxide as decomposition products. He found that the pres-
ence of chlorophyll favored the action of tyrosinase. No deamination occurred when the
oxygen was displaced by hydrogen or carbon dioxide. The author shows that the oxidizing
ferment tyrosinase has the ascribed properties of the deaminase and so makes the existence
of a deaminate doubtful. — F. M. Schertz.

915. Barton, Arthur Willis. The lipolytic activity of the castor and soy bean. Jour.
Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 620-632. 1920. — The author finds that the lipase from the castor bean
splits the esters of fatty acids to a greater degree than does the soy bean lipase. Both seeds
contain the same lipases. When lard or olive oil is used as substrate, ether and alcohol must
be added before titration. Lipases from both sources act in the same ranges of acidity. —
J. M. Brannon.

916. Carnot, P., and P. Gerard. Mecanisme de Faction toxique de l'urease. [Mechan-
ism of the toxic action of urease.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 88-90. 1919. — There
are reported experiments in vitro and in vivo using the urease of soy beans, and an explanation
is given of the toxic action of soy beans on the basis of the action of the urease contained in
them. — V. H. Young.

917. Colin, H., and A. Chaudun. Sur la loi d'action de la sucrase. Influence de la
viscosite sur la vitesse d'hydrolyse. [On the law of action of sucrase: influence of viscosity
on the rate of hydrolysis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168 : 1274-1276. 1919. — If saccharose
is in excess with relation to the enzyme sucrase, the rate of hydrolysis is proportional to the
viscosity of the solution. — V. H. Young.

918. H£rissey, M. H. Sur la conservation du ferment oxydant des champignons. [The
preservation of the oxidizing ferment (oxydase) of fungi.] Jour, de Pharm. et Chim. 20: 241-
245. 1919. — The oxydases of fungi, especially of Russula delica, can easily be preserved in
macerations with glycerin (1 part of the sliced fungus and 2 parts of glycerin). They may also
be obtained by adding ether to the sliced fungus, allowing the mixture to stand for some time
and then drawing off the lower aqueous liquid and keeping this together with an equal volume
of ether, water, or glycerin in sealed tubes. The oxydases thus remain intact for more than
20 years and form a very important reagent for biologic tests. — H. Engelhardt.

919. Jacoby, M. Uber den vermeintlichen Abbau der Starke durch Formaldehyde.
[The supposed decomposition of starch by formaldehyde.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 52B: 558-
562. 1919.- — Formaldehyde action on starch has no relation to diastatic action; that is,
formaldehyde is not a "diastase-model." The author disagrees with Woker and agrees with
von Kauffman and Sallinger on this point. — G. M. Armstrong.

920. Kopeloff, Nicholas, and S. By all. Invertase activity of mold spores as affected
by concentration and amount of inoculum. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 537-542. 1920. — Spores of
Aspergillus Sydowi, A. niger, and Penicillium expansum exhibit invertase activity in sugar
solutions of concentrations varying from 10 to 70 per cent. Maximum activity occurs in
concentrations between 50 and 60 per cent. An increase in the number of spores results in
an increased invertase activity in a saturated sugar solution. About 5000 spores of A. Sydowi
per cubic centimeter of saturated sugar solution cause inversion; but from 50,000 to 110,000
spores per cc. of the other two organisms are required. — D. Reddick.

921. McHargtje, J. S. The significance of the peroxidase reaction with reference to the
viability of seeds. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 612-615. 1920.— The author thinks that the
peroxidase reaction can be made use of in seed-testing laboratories for detecting non-viable
seeds and for distinguishing between seed of high, medium, and low viability. Lettuce,
alfalfa, and soy-bean seeds contain both oxidases and peroxidases. The peroxidase can be
used to determine the rate at which seeds lose their viability. — J. M. Brannon.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 129

922. Myers, R. C, and L. C. Scott. Salivary amylase. I. A preliminary experimental
study of its stability in saliva. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 40: 1713 ITKi. 1918. Salivary amyl-
ase, sterilized by being passed through a Berkefeld filter, is relatively stable for one year with
or without such preservatives as toluene, thymol, and chloroform; nevertheless, the preserva-
tives mentioned are in a measure destructive, and in the order mentioned, beginning with
the least destructive. — The causes which lower the stability of salivary amylase are not solely
organisms and preservatives. The inherent chemical weakness of the enzyme molecule must
be taken into account. Temperatures from 18 to 30°, light, and certain compounds in the
saliva increase this weakness. — C. R. Hursh.

923. Northrup, John H. Combination of enzyme and substrate. I. A method for the
quantitative determination of pepsin. II. The effect of the hydrogen ion concentration. Jour.
Gen. Physiol. 2: 113-123. Jig. 1-3. 1919. — The method described for the determination of
pepsin depends on the change in conductivity of a digesting egg albumin solution. The author
finds that the amount of pepsin removed from the solution by the substrate does not depend
on the size of the particles of the substrate. The optimum H-ion concentration for the com-
bination of enzyme and substrate corresponds to the optimum for digestion. The author
suggests that the enzyme combines with the ionized protein. — J. M. Brannon.

924. Sabatier, Paul. Ferments and catalyzers. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88:274-275, 278-
279. 1919. [Translated from La Revue Scientifique (Paris).]

925. Sallinger, Hermann. Uber die angeblichen diastatischen Eigenschaften des
Formaldehyds. [The alleged diastatic properties of formaldehyde.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges.
52B: 651-656. 1919. —The author thinks he has added proof to the view that starch is indif-
ferent to the action of formaldehyde as an "enzyme."— G. M. Armstrong.

926. Shull, C. A. Physiology of dormancy. [Rev. of: (1) Crocker, William, and
G. T. Harrington. Catalase and oxidase content of seeds in relation to their dormancy, age,
vitality, and respiration. Jour. Agric. Res. 15: 137-174. 3 fig. 1918 (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry
173); (2) Harrington, G. T., and William Crocker. Resistance of seeds to desiccation.
Jour. Agric. Res. 14: 525-532. 1918 (See Bot Absts. 1, Entry 1394).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 308-310.
1919. — A review of the data in these papers is introduced by the statement that this study
"materially increases our knowledge of the physiology of dormancy and germination of seeds,
throws much light on the problems of vitality and respiration, and is a general contribution
of much significance to seed physiology. — H. C. Conies.

927. Waksman, Selman A. A method of testing the amylolytic action of the diastase of
Aspergillus oryzae. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 293-299. 1920. — The method used for ob-
taining pure starch was that developed by Sherman and associates. The author made a 2 per
cent starch paste. This was divided into 10 cc. portions and brought to a temperature of
40°C. The proper amount of enzyme was added after this temperature had been reached.
When the starch had all been hydrolyzed, the solution lost its opaque color and became clear.
In order to increase the accuracy of determining when hydrolysis was complete the dry starch
was allowed to absorb a 0.5 per cent solution of neutral red. This evidently aided in determin-
ing when the solution passed from a colloidal to a clear state. The diastase from Aspergillus
oryzae produces a good deal of glucose. It differs from malt and pancreatic diastase, as these
produce chiefly maltose and but little glucose. The author finds that the Lintner method for
measuring saccharogenic action of different enzymes upon starch should not be used for com-
parative studies of different enzymes, since the end-products arc not the same in the case of
the different enzymes. — J. M. Brannon.

928. Wood, Joseph T. Note on trypsin and a new method of purifying enzymes. Jour.
Soc. Chem. Ind. 37: 313T-315T. 1918. — The author prepared a very pure enzyme solution
by soaking Swedish filter paper in the impure trypsin solution, then drying quickly in a cur-
rent of hot air. When such paper is soaked in water for 15 to 20 minutes, the enzyme is dis-

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

130 PHYSIOLOGY IBot. Absts., Vol. V,

solved, but proteins are left behind. The pure solution gives no precipitate with safranin,
contrary to the usual result with impure preparations. A polariscopic examination of the
relatively pure solution shows no rotation. The solution thus obtained is 2\ times as strong
as Griibler's trypsin. There is removed by the purification method mentioned about 35 per
cent of extraneous matter. — G. M. Armstrong.

METABOLISM (RESPIRATION)

929. Bertrand, Gabriel. Sur le mecanisme de la conservation des fruits dans l'eau
froide. [The mechanism of the preservation of fruits in cold water.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 168: 1285-1288. 1919.— The author has previously described (Compt. Rend. 168: 1162)
a method for preserving fruits for comparatively long periods in cold water. Later studies
show that a considerable pressure is generated in sealed flasks containing fruit. It has been
shown by Regnard that pressure may result in the death of minute animal forms. However,
it has been shown that yeasts, etc., resisted greater pressures than were generated in the
experiments performed. Cherries were preserved for eleven months under conditions where
no pressure developed. It was found that the fruits absorb water and that salts, acids, sugars,
and enzymes diffuse outward. Acidity incompatible with the growth of most bacteria was
developed and numerous enzymatic changes resulted in the softening and transformation of
the fruit. The author considers the most important factor in preservation is the exclusion
of oxygen and the maintenance of a rigorous anaerobic condition such that even yeasts are
unable to develop. Tests with guaiacum revealed an action similar to that of laccase. From
the observations made, the author concludes that the chances of preserving fruit by this
method depend1. 1st, on the number and vitality of the organisms brought with the fruit;
and 2nd, on the development of acidity and the initiation of biochemical processes resulting
in the disappearance of O2. Cut fruits were found to have poor keeping qualities due to their
inability to resist the entrance of organisms. — V. H. Young.

930. Brooks, Matilda M. Comparative studies on respiration. 8. The respiration of
Bacillus subtilis in relation to antagonism. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2 : 5-15. 1919. — Suspensions of
Bacillus subtilis in 0.75 per cent dextrose were subjected to various salt solutions and the rate
of respiration, as indicated by the evolution of CO2, was determined. NaCl and KC1, at
concentrations of 0.15 M and 0.2 M respectively, increase the rate of respiration. At higher
concentrations the rate is decreased, CaCl2 increases the rate of respiration at a concentration
of 0.05 M and decreases the rate at somewhat higher concentrations. A marked antagonism
was observed between NaCl and CaCl2 and between KC1 and CaCl2 in their effects on respi-
ration. Antagonism between NaCl and KC1 is slight and the antagonism curve shows two
maxima. — Otis F. Curtis.

931. Gustafson, F. G. Comparative studies on respiration. 9. The effects of antago-
nistic salts on the respiration of Aspergillus niger. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 17-24. 1919. — Low
concentrations of NaCl (0.125, 0.25, 0.5) and CaCl2 (0.5 M) caused an increase in respiration
of Aspergillus niger in the presence of 0.05 per cent dextrose as measured by the evolution
of C02. Stronger concentrations of these salts (2 M NaCl and 1.25 M CaCl2) decreased the
respiration, probably through their osmotic effect in decreasing the water content of the
mycelium. A mixture of 19 cc. of NaCl and 1 cc. of CaCl2 (both 0.5 M) showed an antagonism,
in that the respiration was normal, whereas each salt alone caused an increase. The effect
of a substance on growth may differ from its effect on respiration, for, in the presence of 0.05
per cent dextrose, 0.5 M NaCl inhibited spore germination of Aspergillus niger, while 0.5 M
CaCl2 and various mixtures of the two salts did not inhibit spore germination.— Otis F. Curtis.

932. Osterhout, W. J. V. Comparative studies on respiration. 7. Respiration and
antagonism. Introductory note. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 1-3. 1919.— The author briefly re-
views the literature dealing with the effect of antagonistic salts on respiration and states that
he has found pronounced antagonism between NaCl and CaCl2 in their effects on this process.
— Otis F. Curtis.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 131

ORGANISM AS A WHOLE

933. Child, C. M. A study of susceptibility in some Puget Sound algae. Publ. Puget
Sound Biol. Sta. 2: 249-267. 1919. — About 19 algae were used in the experimental work.
These were tested from the standpoint of axial susceptibility, in respect to a few toxic agents.
In all these the most actively growing regions were the most susceptibile to the poisons used.
While differences in the permeability of the outer portions of cells may account for differences
in susceptibility to certain poisons, they cannot account for all, since neutral red and certain
other vital dyes probably kill from within the cell. — In Ptilota pectinata the differences in
susceptibility of the different apical regions and axes enable one to picture the relative
physiological conditions in the different parts, and make it possible to interpret to some
extent the growth form in physiological terms. Apparently the inhibiting influence of a more
actively growing tip is effective through a greater distance in the plant, than that of a less
active tip. This is shown by the presence of alternate branching in the more active tips, and
opposite branching in the less active ones. Thus activity and branch arrangement are corre-
lated.— Experiments with a species of filamentous diatom, whose filaments are composed of
bundle of gelatinous tubes in which are growing a Navicula type of diatom, show that this a
pseudothallus is also most susceptible at the tips. Therefore either physiological correlation
must exist between the tips and the other parts as in ordinary plants; or else growth and divi-
sion are gradually inhibited by the gelatinous envelope, so that the individual diatoms at
the tips of the pseudothallus are most active because they are in the most favorable situations.
The pseudothallus reacts like a plant rather than like a colony. — T. C. Frye.

934. Gail, Floyd W. Hydrogen ion concentration and other factors affecting the distri-
bution of Fucus. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta. 2 : 287-306. 1919. — The hydrogen ion concen-
tration of the sea water is an important factor in distribution. The most favorable PH is
8.0-8.2. At PH 8.8 all growth ceases except the germination of oospores. Likewise in sea-
water of PH 6.6 (and lower exponents) growth is insignificant or wanting, except in young
plants, especially in temperatures above 17°C. Temperature is therefore another determin-
ing factor. Of the ranges tried, the lowest, 10.5° to 13°C. was the most favorable. When
the temperature was permitted to rise to 30°C. for a part of the time, the growth was almost
or wholly stopped. In the presence of much Ulva the PH of the surrounding water is raised
too high for Fucus. In tide pools the extremes of both temperature and PH are too great.
Both desiccation and light are also important factors. — T. C. Frye.

935. Garner, W. W., and H. A. Allard. Effect of the relative length of day and night
and other factors of the environment on growth and reproduction in plants. Jour. Agric. Res.
18:553-605. PL 64-79. 35 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 22.

936. Harris, J. E. G. Contributions to the biochemistry of pathogenic anaerobes. VIII.
The biochemical comparison of micro-organisms by quantitative methods. Jour. Path, and
Bact. 23: 30-49. Fig. 1-2. 1919. — A comparison was made from strictly quantitative data,
(1) of the proteolytic and sugar-splitting properties of two anaerobes, Bacillus sporogenes
and the Reading bacillus, and (2) the oxygen concentrations which permit or inhibit growth
of these organisms. The two organisms are morphologically, and in cultural reactions, closely
related. — Experimental methods are described for carrying out a comparison of the reactions of
these organisms. Details are given of the apparatus used for fermentation experiments and
of the methods for obtaining values for gas production, ammonia and amino-acid formation,
production of volatile acids, and changes in hydrogen ion concentration and sugar content. —
A simple method is described for determining the degree of oxygen toleration of organisms
for routine purposes. It is suggested that results should be expressed in the form of the "aero-
bic index," which is defined. — The results are given in terms of fermentations of 5 different
media and of determinations of the aerobic indices both of spores and young organisms on
liquid and solid media. — From the results it is concluded that these two organisms are of the
same race, but show small differences possibly acquired, In their biochemical behaviour

132 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

towards the five media used they are remarkably similar, but they show a somewhat striking
difference in their powers of growing in the presence of oxygen. — The use of methods, such as
those described, for investigations of the biochemical properties of bacteria in general is
discussed, and a means is suggested for using these methods with aerobic organisms. — W. W.
Bonus.

937. Hawkins, Lon A., and Rodney B. Haevey. Physiological study of the parasitism
of Pythium debaryanum Hesse on the potato tuber. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 275-297. PL 85-S7.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1298.

938. Rosenheim, O. Biochemical changes due to environment. Biochem. Jour. 12:
283-289. 1918. — Only one-fourth the amount of chromogenic substance, probably flavone,
was produced in the inflorescence of "Edelweiss" in London as in the native Alps. The differ-
ence is attributed to biochemical adaptation, possibly placing the flavones in a protective role
against ultraviolet light. — W. H. Chambers.

939. Tevis, May. Symbiotes or benevolent microbes and vitamines. Sci. Amer. Sup-
plem. 88: 282-283. 1919. — This paper is in the main a review of the theories and experiments
of M. Paul Portier. According to these views, there are no simple organisms except bacteria,
all higher organisms being in reality twofold — the organism itself and the microorganisms
distributed throughout its tissues. The mitochondria, a definite number of which exist in
each cell, are believed to be symbiotes, that is, polymorphic forms of bacteria. The cell
apparently limits the number of symbiotes. — It is held that certain wasting diseases, such as
scurvy, beri-beri, etc., are not due to the lack of vitamines, but are caused rather by a defici-
ency of symbiotes. — Chas. H. Otis.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION

940. Anonymous. Vertikales Wachstum der Baume. [Rev. of: Cambage, R. H. The
vertical growth of trees. Jour, and Proc. Roy. Soc. New South Wales 52 : 377-384. 1919. See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 943.)] Naturwissenschaften 7: 354. 1919.

941. Buchanan, R. E. Life phases in a bacterial culture. Jour. Infect. Diseases 23:
109-125. 1918. — The growth of a culture of bacteria from initiation until death is divided
into 7 phases, and mathematical formulae are presented to express the relation of the growth
curve to time for each phase. — W. H. Chambers.

942. Budington, R. A. Influence of certain ductless gland substances on the growth of
plant tissues. Biol. Bull. [Woods Hole] 37: 188-193. Fig. 1. 1919.— The growth of root-tips
of Allium is retarded by the presence in their fluid nutrient environment of thyroid gland
material, retradation being approximately proportional to the amount of thyroid substance
present. The growth of the early leaves is not modified. Iodine, used as KI, in amounts
equivalent to that in thyroid substances provoking marked modifications of growth, had no
appreciable effect on growing root-tips. Pituitary substances up to two grains of the desic-
cated gland, and supra-renal substances up to one grain of the desiccated gland, in 120 cc. of
nutritive solution had no effect on the growing root-tips. The experiments, which were lim-
ited to a single form, indicate that thyroid constituents may influence the role of protoplasmic
action in cells other than those of animal tissues. — J. E. Weaver.

943. Cambage, R. H. The vertical growth of trees. Jour, and Proc. Roy. Soc. New
South Wales 52: 377-384. 1919. — Vertical growth in the trees studied is practically limited to
the terminal shoot, and it is very probable that when once definite branches are developed
the portion of the axis below these increases in diameter but not in length. — B. M. Duggar.

944. Hibbard, R. P. The condition of fruitfulness. [Rev. of: Kraus, E. J., and H. R.
Kraybill. Vegetation and reproduction with special reference to the tomato. Oregon Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 149. 90 p., 22 fig. 1918.] Plant World 22: 23-24. 1919.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 133

945. Stalfelt, M. G. Uber die Schwankungen in der Zellteilungsfrequens bei den
Wurzeln von Pisum sativum. [Variations in the frequency of cell division in the roots of Pisum
sativum.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm] 13: 61-70. 1919. — In experiments on the action
of weak electric currents on roots of Pisum sativum the author observed a periodicity in cell
divisions. The number of dividing cells was counted in 10 sections from each root. Since
nuclear division is sensitive to external conditions these experiments were carried out in dark-
ness at a constant temperature. The frequency of cell division in each root is periodic. The
intensity of division shows distinct maxima and minima. The rhythm is independent of daily
periodicity and therefore not synchronous in different roots. Periods of active division are
succeeded by rest periods. The duration time of the phases of cell division is estimated in
percentages of the total time required for division as follows: prophase, 32.78 per cent, meta-
phase, 36.96 per cent, anaphase 19.39 per cent, telophase, 10.95 per cent. — Pea roots of the
same age and length were placed in a spiral of fine silver wire which carried 3 milliamperes at
low potential. Roots were left in spirals 1 to 10 hours and examined for frequency of cell
division. Roots so treated showed the maximum number of dividing cells. The maximum
rate of division continues for several hours after stimulation. The author believes that the
passage of the current acts as a stimulus which breaks the autonomous period of cell division.
— R. B. Harvey.

946. Stout, A. B. Intersexes in Plantago lanceolata. Bot. Gaz. 68: 109-133. 2 pi.
1919— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1517.

MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES

947. Cocks, E. Making a plant tie itself into a knot. Sci. Amer. 121:579. 1 fig. 1919.
— A geotropic response. — Chas. H. Otis.

GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY

948. Andronescu, Demetrius Ion. Germination and further development of the embryo
of Zea Mays separated from the endosperm. Amer. Jour. Bot. 6: 443^52. 1 pi. 1919. —
Embryos of corn (with their scutella) were separated from their endosperms and germinated
in water and in various culture media, of which 1 and 2 per cent sucrose solutions produced
the best results. The young plants thus obtained were considerably smaller than those pro-
duced by whole kernels, but were otherwise identical with them. When the scutellum as
well as the endosperm was removed, growth was very much reduced and the seedlings were
unable to develop far.— Seedlings grown from embryos only and those grown from whole
kernels were transplanted into soil and the plants obtained were essentially similar, except
that the former were somewhat smaller than the latter. The author concludes that in germi-
nation and development the presence of endosperm is not essential, but is beneficial. — E. W.
Sinnott.

949. Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. Germination of barley pollen. Jour.
Agric. Res. 18: 525-536. PI. 60-61. 1920.— The pollen of barley (Hordeum) germinates readily
within a period of 5 minutes when proper moisture and temperature conditions are afforded.
The moisture relation is extremely critical. In the experiments, moisture was supplied from
a fragment of green leaf tissue placed in a dry mount of pollen in a Van Tieghem cell. Slight
drying of pollen causes collapse of the cell wall and free moisture causes rapid swelling and
bursting. — In field experiments the receptivity of the stigma was found to extend over several
days. Pollen used in 8 successive stages of development (from immature to that obtained 2
days after dehiscence of the anther) gave satisfactory percentages of fertilization only when
taken from anthers that were dehiscing or had only very recently opened. — No satisfactory
means was found of storing barley pollen. A "study of the conditions governing fertilization
in nature shows that conditions unfavorable to fertilizations are also unfavorable to progress
in the development of pollen and vice versa. In this way natural fertilization is secured." — ■
D. Reddick.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 1

134 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

950. Kondo, M. Ueber Nachreife und Keimung verschieden reifer Reiskorner (Oryza
sativa). [After-ripening and germination of rice seeds in various stages of maturity.] Ber.
Ohara Inst. Landwirtsch. Forsch. 1 : 361-387. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2805; 5, Entry
36.

951. Russell, E. J. Report on the proposed electrolytic treatment of seeds (Wolfryn
process) before sowing. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 26: 971-981. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 59.

952. SkArman, J. A. O. Ett bidrag till fragan om temperaturens betydelse for fronas
groning hos Geranium bohemicum L. [A report on the question of the importance of tempera-
ture for the growth of seed of Geranium bohemicum.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. [Stockholm) 13:
93-97. 1919. — The author has observed that seeds of Geranium bohemicum are capable of
withstanding very high temperatures and of remaining viable for many years. They also
seem to require special conditions including exposure to considerable heat to bring about
germination, as shown by their occurrence only on burned over land. — W. W. Gilbert.

953. Stormer. Keimungshemmungen bei blauen Lupinen. [A case of arrested germina-
tion in blue lupines.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 12. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 63.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

954. Daniel, Lucien. Recherches sur le developpement compare de la laitue au soleil
et a l'ombre. [Development of lettuce in sun and shade.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
168: 694-696. 1919. — The author reports the effect of shade on the development of lettuce
plants and discusses in a general way the relation of illumination to the duration of species,
giantism, and dimorphism. — F. B. Wann.

955. Schanz, F. Effect of light on living organism. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 179. 1919.
[Translated from Meteorolog. Zeitschr. (Braunschweig).]

956. Tsuji, T. The action of ultra-violet rays on sugar-cane, pineapple and banana in
Hawaii. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 87: 327. 1919. [From Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manu-
facturer.]— Investigations on the connection between the action of ultra-violet rays and the
formation of carbohydrates, acids, and other compounds. — Chas. H. Otis.

TEMPERATURE RELATIONS

957. Edson, H. A., and M. Shapovalov. Temperature relations of certain potato-rot
and wilt-producing fungi. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 511-524. 9 fig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 740.

958. Potter, George F. An apparatus for automatically changing the temperature of a
chamber. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 39-43. 3 pi. 1920. — In order to obtain a uniform and known
rate of temperature fall for experiments dealing with the injury of plant tissues by low tem-
peratures, the author has devised a cooling chamber in which the rate of temperature change
is automatically controlled by clockwork. This apparatus is described in detail. — E. W.
Sinnott.

959. Siireve, Edith Bellamy. A thermo-electrical method for the determination of
leaf temperature. Plant World 22 : 100-104. 2 fig. 1919. — A method of determining leaf tem-
peratures without wounding the tissues is described. The apparatus consists of a pair of
thermocouples and a portable galvanometer sensitive to 0.1°C., with damping key, arranged
compactly on a board supported on a camera tripod. A reading can be made in a fraction of
a second. — Charles A. Shull.

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 135

TOXIC AGENTS

960. Kidd, Franklin. Laboratory experiments on the sprouting of potatoes in various
gas mixtures. (Nitrogen, oxygen and carbon dioxide.) New Phytol. 18: 248-252. 1919. — The
following conclusions are reached: "1. Oxygen is harmful to the potato tuber in concentra-
tions above 5-10 per cent. Oxygen 80 per cent kills in 4 to 5 weeks. Oxygen 5-10 per cent is
the optimal concentration for sprouting. 2. The harmful action of oxygen is increased in
the presence of carbon dioxide. 3. Carbon dioxide inhibits sprouting in a concentration of
20 per cent. This concentration is at the same time to some extent harmful. 4. Higher
concentrations of carbon dioxide cause marked injury and death." — I. F. Lewis.

961. Kryz, Ferdinand. Ueber den Einfluss von Ultramarin auf Pflanzen. [On the
effect of ultramarine on plants.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 29: 161-166. 1919. — Referring to
his earlier experiments with soils containing graphite, the author recapitulates his results
as follows. Seeds planted in soil containing a considerable amount of graphite are retarded
in germination. Plant growth was retarded and arrested, while transpiration in sunflowers
grown in graphite was increased. Since graphite is a chemically indifferent substance, the
author raises the question as to whether the action of other indifferent substances would be
similar in effect. He chooses ultramarine, describing it as a substance nearly indifferent
chemically; stable in air, light, and alkalies; insoluble in water; and only slowly decomposed
by acids and acid salts. — His observations are: germination of seeds does not occur very
readily in soil containing ultramarine ; growth is retarded ; but there is no disturbance of trans-
piration; and neither a "poisonous" nor fatal effect is exerted by this substance. Intense
spraying of leaves with ultramarine in water suspensions causes wilting and drying. — //. T.
Gussow.

962. Richter. [Rev. of: Fallada, O. Zur Riibensamenbeizung mit Schwefelsaure.
(Germination of beet seed after corrosion with sulphuric acid.) Osterreich.-Ungar. Zeitschr.
Zuckerindust. und Landw. 46: 22-34. 1917.] Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47:
324-325. 1918. — A table is given showing the results of treatment of 100 beet seeds with sul-
phuric acid. Unsoaked seeds were treated as follows: with concentrated sulphuric acid;
with sulphuric acid of 53°Be\ and for comparison some which were not treated with acid.
Soaked (6 hours) seed were also treated as those above. The poorest germination was shown
by the unsoaked seed treated with concentrated acid, and the best germination was shown
by seed soaked for 6 hours and then treated with acid of 53°B6. The seed and acid were heated
for 20 to 25 minutes with steam and then the acid was allowed to act for two and one half
hours. The number of seed germinated after 2, 3, 4, 6, and 14 days was recorded. — F. M.
Schertz.

963. Richter. [Rev. of: Greisenegger, Ignaz K. Versuch mit Samenriiben unter
Verwendung von Mangansulfat als katalytischen Diinger. (Experiments on seed beets using
manganese sulfate as a catalytical manure.] Osterreich.-Ungar. Zeitschr. Zuckerindust. und
Landw. 46: 13-21. 1917.] Biedermann's Zentralbl. Agrikulturchem. 47: 320-323. 1918. —
Pot experiments in sand and peat were conducted using Knop's nutrient solution for watering.
Fifteen pots were used, placed in 3 groups. Group 1 had no manganese, group 2 had a small
quantity of manganese (0.1773 grams or 25 kilograms per hectare), and group 3 had 4 times as
much manganese as group 2. The yield of seed per pot was as follows : group 1 , 56.3 grams ; 2,
57.2 grams; 3, 69.8 grams. The stem yield was greatest in group 1 and least in group 2. In
regard to the capacity for germination, 100 seed balls of group 1 produced 149 seedlings; 100
of group 2 produced 139 seedlings, and group 3 produced 131 seedlings. The seed of the above
3 groups were then planted in plots and fertilized (manganese lacking). The seed from the
above group 1 produced 10S.7 grams of sugar per beet; from group 2 the yield was 112.2 grams
per beet; and from group 3, 94 grams. The yield per plot respectively was 4.54, 4.55 and 4.03
kgm. The average weight of each beet was respectively 578, 599, and 512 grams. Other
data were worked out for the respective groups. — F. M. Schertz.

136 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

964. Rumbold, Caroline. The injection of chemicals into chestnut trees. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7 : 1-20. 7 fig. 1920. — Injection experiments were carried on in 1913 with 156 young Para-
gon chestnut trees grafted on native stock. Water, twenty-five inorganic substances (in-
cluding three colloidal metals), twenty-five organic substances (including extracts of normal
and of diseased bark), and five stains were injected. Various concentrations were used, and
the amount entering the tree was measured in each case. In general, solutions were absorbed
more readily than water, organic compounds more readily than inorganic ones and true solu-
tions more readily than colloidal ones. The more concentrated the solution, the more
rapidly it was absorbed. The rate of injection was most rapid in June and next in July, May,
August, September, October, and April, respectively. The rate was more variable in the
spring than in the summer or autumn, and was dependent to a considerable extent upon the
rate of transpiration. — Previous literature on plant injection is reviewed at some length. —
E. W. Sinnott.

965. Rumbold, Caroline. Effect on chestnuts of substances injected into their trunks.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7 : 45-56. 2 pi. 1920. — The author has injected a large number of substances
into Paragon chestnut trees, as reported previously (see entry next preceding). The present
paper describes the course of injected solutions in the tree, their effect on the tissues, and their
influence on the parasitic fungus Endothia parasitica. Solutions travel usually in last annual
ring of wood and were found to pass downward into the roots and upward into the leaves,
and in one case even into the fruit. They are confined to a path but little wider than the diam-
eter of the injection hole. The effect on the tree varied with the dilution of the solution and
with the season at which injection was made. Certain substances, notably water, the alkali
metals, colloidal metals, most organic compounds, certain dyes, and the water extract of
normal bark, were without noticeable effect on the tree. A few, particularly weaker dilutions
of alkali metals, apparently acted as slight stimulants. A third group, including the heavy
metals, water extract of blight canker, and some others, were detrimental, causing the death
of part or all of the tree. Particular solutions were often specific in their detrimental effects.
Results as to the effect of injected solutions upon the blight fungus were very inconclusive.
A little evidence is brought forward, however, which indicates that dilute solutions of lithium
salts injected in the spring months may check somewhat the growth of the fungus canker. —
E. W. Sinnott.

966. Stoklasa, J., in collaboration with J. Sebor, W. ZdobnickT, F. Tymich, O. Horak,
A. Nemec, and J. Cwach. Influence of aluminum ions on seed germination. Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 87: 318-320. 1919. [Translated from Biochem. Zeitschr. 91: 137-223. fig. 1-15.
1918.]

967. Wyeth, J. F. S. The effect of acids on the growth of Bacillus coli. Biochem. Jour.
12: 382-401. 1918. — Initial and final H-ion concentrations of Bacillus coli under varying con-
ditions are determined, and it is found that the final reaction of the culture solutions depends
on the initial H-ion concentration of the media, the buffer effect of the media, and the nature
of the acid. There is a critical point in the H-ion concentration beyond which growth is com-
pletely inhibited. — W. H. Chambers.

ELECTRICITY AND MECHANICAL AGENTS

968. Baines, A. E. Electrical conditions of the earth and atmosphere. Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 88: 290-291. 1919. — This article deals in part with plant life. The author believes
that everything growing in the soil is charged or electrified by the earth, — the roots, stems,
and veins being negative terminals, while the parts of the leaves between the veins act as
aerolae, taking their charge from the positive air. An ordinary electrical current passes
from air to earth and back again to air through the plant. If the soil is not moist to the root-
depth, or if it does not contain electrolytes other than water, the plant is deprived of its sup-
ply of current and must suffer injury. It is claimed that if about 1 per cent of ferro sulphate

No. 1, August, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 137

or other suitable electrolyte is mixed with the soil, or the ground is well watered with the min-
eral in solution, much of the water ordinarily required by plant life may be dispensed with.
Potted plants so treated were kept alive in a warm greenhouse, exposed to the sun's rays, for
three months without water. When vegetable life is said to be "resting" during the late
autumn and winter months, it is probably due to lowered electrification. — Chas. II. Olis.

PHYSIOLOGY OF DISEASES

969. Anonymous. Disease resistance in plants. Gard. Chron. 65: 192. 1919. — This
editorial is a popular consideration of the phenomenon of resistance in varieties of plants,
suggesting briefly an explanation based on the presence and absence of certain chemical
factors. The author suggests that the present status of the mechanism of immunity in ani-
mals may be a source of encouragement to plant pathologists. — C. R. Hursh.

970. Paine, Sydney G., and H. Stansfield. Studies in Bacteriosis. III. — A bacterial
leaf-spot disease of Pro tea cynaroides, exhibiting a host reaction of possibly bacteriolytic nature.
Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 27-29. PI. 2, fig. 3-6. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 757.

971. Rose, D. H. Infection as related to humidity and temperature. [Rev. of: Laurit-
zen, J. T. The relation of temperature and humidity to infection by certain fungi. Phyto-
path. 9: 1-35. 1919.] Bot. Gaz. 68: 66-67. 1919.

MISCELLANEOUS

972. Anders, J. N. Growing plants as health-giving agents. Sci. Monthly 10: 63-69.
1920. — This is a popular presentation of the subject. — L. Pace.

973. Bobilioff, W. De inwendige bouw der schorselementen ven Hevea brasiliensis.
[The structure of cell elements in the bark of Hevea brasiliensis.] Arch. Rubbercult. Neder-
landsch-Indie 3 : 222-231. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 546.

974. Gagnespain, F. Vegetable "plethora." Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 220, 232. 1 fig.
1919. [Translated from La Rousse Mensuel (Paris), April, 1919.] — Results of "over-feeding"
of plants and differences in habitat between individuals of the same species. — Chas. H. Otis.

975. Glover, G. H., T. E. Newson, and W. W. Robbins. A new poisonous plant, the
whorled milkweed Asclepias verticillata. Colorado Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 246. 16 p. IS fig.
1918. — Serious losses of stock particularly sheep, are reported from southwestern Colorado
due to Asclepias verticillata. The plant appears to be poisonous at all stages of growth and
when dry. The symptoms of the affected animals are described. Death may result within
S hours. The poisonous compound was not identified. — C. R. Hursh.

976. Harvey, R. B. A thermo regulator with the characteristics of the Beckman ther-
mometer. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : 9-10. PI. 1. 1920.

977. Hibbard, R. P. Preparation of seed potatoes. [Rev. of : Appleman, C. O. Physio-
logical basis for the preparation of potatoes for seed. Maryland Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 212:
79-102. Fig. 1-11. 1918.] Plant World 22 : 91-92. 1919.

978. Nagel. Kartoffellagerungsversuche. [Potato storage experiments.] Illustrierte
Landw. Zeitg. 39: 6. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 46.

979. Weimer, J. L. Some observations on the spore discharge of Pleurage curvicolla
(Wint) Kuntze. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 75-77. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 695.

138 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. Skinner, Editor
F. M. Schertz, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

9S0. Anonymous. The value of lupins in the cultivation of poor, light land. Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 88:265. 1919. [Abstract of paper read before Agricultural Section, British Assoc.
Adv. Sci., by A. W. Oldershaw. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 47.)] Reprinted in Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 88: 321. 1919.

981. Bear, Firman E., and J. R. Royston. Nitrogen losses in urine. Jour. Amer.
Soc. Agron. 2 : 319-326. 1919. — The paper gives the results of losses of nitrogen from urine
which has been stored under various conditions. Urine exposed to the air lost over 92 per
cent of its nitrogen during 8 weeks when the average temperature was 38°C. When urine was
not exposed to the air practically no losses took place. Litter allowed to dry out and remain
dry lost 20 per cent of its nitrogen content while litter which was kept moist by daily additions
of water lost over 97 per cent of its nitrogen. Samples protected with kerosene lost approxi-
mately 6 per cent of their nitrogen in 8 weeks. — F. M. Schertz.

982. Clevenger, Clinton B. Hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. I. The ac-
curate determination of the hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices by means of the hydrogen
electrode. Soil Sci. 8: 217-226. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 876.

983. Clevenger, Clinton B. Hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. II. Factors
affecting the acidity of hydrogen-ion concentration of plant juices. Soil Sci. 8: 227-242. 1919.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 877.

984. Conner, S. D. The effect of zinc in soil tests with zinc and galvanized iron pots.
Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12 : 61-64. 1920. — The author found that acid soils when placed in
zinc or galvanized pots, unless limed sufficiently, acted upon the zinc of the pots which were
insufficiently protected by the granulated paraffine coating. The water-soluble Zn salts
which were found in the soil caused the crops to fail the second season. The action of acid
soils on Zn is evidence that soils contain true acids. No good protective coating for the pots
was found. — F. M. Schertz.

985. Frear, William, and C. L. Goodling. I. Cost of burning lime in the stack or
heap. II. Supplementary report upon the limestone resources of Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 157. 23 p., 4 fig. April, 1919.

986. Hepner, Frank E. Wyoming forage plants and their chemical composition. Wyo-
ming Agric. Exp. Sta. Rept. 28: 117-128. 1917-18— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 26.

987. Hoagland, D. R. Relation of nutrient solution to composition and reaction of cell
sap of barley. Bot. Gaz. 68: 297-304. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 859.

988. Kelley, W. P., and E. E. Thomas. The effects of alkali on citrus trees. Cali-
fornia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 318: 305-337. 1920.

989. Martin, J. C, and A. W. Christie. Effect of variation in moisture content on the
water-extractable matter of soils. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 139-143. 1919. — The water-soluble
constituents of two soils of very different types have been studied at four moisture contents.
The moisture contents approaching the air dry condition show a decided tendency to depress
the nitrates and potash in both soils and the sulfates in the silty clay loam only. These de-
pressions are reflected in the total dissolved material. The excess water in the sandy loam

No. 1, August, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 130

soil causes a disappearance of nitrates and also decidedly depresses the potassium, calcium
and magnesium, these losses also being reflected in the total solids extracted. Considerable
variations in moisture contents of soils, provided the saturation point is not reached, do not
appreciably modify the results obtained by the water-extraction method. — F . M. Schertz.

990. Russell, E. J. Soil making. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 1-12. 1919.— This is
a popular discussion of soils, soil changes and soil management, based largely on experiments
at Rothamsted. — J. K. Shaw.

991. Shedd, O. M. Effect of oxidation of sulphur in soils on the solubility of rock phos-
phate and on nitrification. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 329-345. 1919. — Compost experiments of
rock phosphate, sulfur, soil and manure show after 24 months time, that about 17 and 84
per cent of the total phosphorus had been converted into a water-soluble and ammonium-
citrate-soluble form, respectively. Sulphofication did not proceed as rapidly as when an
inoculation was made with the sulphofying organism, and when this was done the time of
the sulphofication may be considered to be reduced nearly one third. Composting under the
same conditions but omitting the sulfur also showed favorable results in rendering the soil
phosphate or that added in rock sulphate soluble, but not to the same extent as when sulphur
was present. Nitrification was found to proceed to a certain extent regardless of the acid
formed by the sulphur oxidation. The amounts of nitrogen found to be nitrified amounted
to approximately 20 per cent of the total originally present. Sulphofication was found to
take place in all of the soils examined but varied somewhat according to the type. When 25
and 50 mgm. of sulphur were added to 100 grams of soil, about the same percentage of the total
was oxidized in a given time. Inoculation of mixtures of rock phosphate and sulphur was
not sufficient to promote rapid sulphofication. It required in addition, soil or soil water.
That the production of soluble phosphate was caused by the presence of sulphuric acid gen-
erated by the oxidation of the sulphur is demonstrated by the parallel rise in acidity and sul-
phate. The best conditions to promote the reaction are initial inoculation, high temperature,
thorough aeration, and a fair moisture content. Other contributing factors are the propor-
tions of the different ingredients and probably their mass. The acid phosphate made by this
procedure has just as good a physical condition as the commercial product and would be
cheaper if the time and labor involved in its manufacture are disregarded. — F. M. Schertz.

992. Shull, C. A. Soil fertility. [Rev. of: Van Alstine, E. The movement of plant
food within the soil. Soil Sci. 6: 281-308. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 1341.)] Bot. Gaz.
68:312. 1919.

993. Takahashi, R. On the fungous flora of the soil. Ann. Phytopath Soc. Japan 1!;
17-22. 1919. See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 688.

994. Watts, Francis. The liming of soils. West Indian Bull. 16: 332-341. 1918.—
Compiled information. — C. V. Piper.

INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

995. Barthel, Chr., and N. Bengtsson. The influence of lime on the nitrification of
barn-yard manure — nitrogen in arable soil. Soil Sci. 8 : 243-258. 1919. Manure or ammonium
sulfate was added to limed and unlimed neutral and acid soils. Weekly determinations of
the ammonia and nitrates were made. Lime stimulated the nitrification of the ammonium
sulfate but exerted no favorable action on the nitrification of stable manure or in cases where
the supply of lime was large impeded the nitrification. — William J. Robbins.

996. Hills, T. J. Influence of nitrates on nitrogen assimilating bacteria. Tropic. Agri-
culturist 52 : 44-45. 1919. — Two lines of investigation, one on the influence of nitrate on azoto-
bacter and the other on the influence of nitrate on B. radicicola in the soil, were briefly sum-
marized without details of procedure. Full report given in Bull. Internat. Inst, of Agric,
Sept., 1918.— R. G. Wiggans.

140 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

997. Jones, D. H., and F. G. Murdock. Quantitative and qualitative bacterial analysis
of soil samples taken in fall of 1918. Soil Sci. 8: 259-267. 1919. — A surface and sub-surface
sample of 46 soils representing 17 soil types in eastern Ontario were examined for total bac-
terial and mold counts on Brown's albumen agar, liquefier counts on a nutrient gelatine and
Azotobacter, Ps. radicicola and Nocardia counts on a modified Ashby's agar. Only 3 samples
had a very low total count. Azotobacter were found in 9 out of the 17 soil types and were
absent in the light sandy soils and peat muck and shale types. Every soil type except yellow
sand had fairly high numbers of Ps. radicicola and the sub-surface samples had a higher
content than the surface samples. Molds were fairly uniform in numbers in all soils except
a sandy clay loam and sand}' clay shale in which they were absent. Nocardia were least
numerous in sand but much alike in numbers in loams, peat mucks and shales. — William J.
Robbins.

998. Waksman, Selman A. Cultural studies of species of Actinomyces. Soil Sci. 8:
71-215. 4 pl- 1919. — The morphology, cultural characteristics and biochemical features of
41 species of Actinomyces are described and compared. A note is given on the habitat of
each species. The cultural characteristics for each species include those on 13 or 14 different
solid and liquid media. The utilization of different carbon or nitrogen compounds is also
included in some cases. The biochemical features include nitrite formation, proteolytic
action, change of reaction, inversion of sugar, diastatic action and growth on cellulose.
Nearly all the Actinomyces studied reduce nitrates to nitrites and show diastatic and proteo-
lytic activities. Most of the species studied grow on cellulose and half of them invert sugar.
A key for the identification of the species based chiefly on biochemical characteristics is
presented. — William J. Robbins.

FERTILIZATION

999. Calvino, M. La fertilidad de la tierra y los abonos. III. El estiercol y los otros
abonos organicos. [Manure and other organic fertilizers.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2:
540-543. 1 fig. 1919. — Largely a translation of an article by Gino Beccabi of the University
of Pisa.— F. M. Blodgett.

1000. Calvino, Mario. La fertilidad de la tierra y los abonos. [The fertility of the soil
and fertilizers.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 501-503. 1919.

1001. Jones, Joseph. Manurial experiments with cacao in Dominica. West Indian Bull.
16:342-353. 1918. — Reports results of plot experiments with various fertilizers. — C. V. Piper.

1002. Sampson, H. C. Some factors which influence yield of paddy in comparative manur-
ial experiments at the Manganallur Agricultural Station. Agric. Jour. India 14: 739-746.
1919. — Experimental errors in field experiments are discussed, and the advantages and dis-
advantages of 1 year and long time fertilizer experiments given. No experimental data is
given. — /. /. Skinner.

METHODS

1003. Bbackett, R. N., and H. F. Haskins. Report on nitrogen. Jour. Assoc. Official
Agric. Chem. 3 : 207-217. 1919. — In the zinc-ferrous sulf ate-soda method for nitrates the re-
sults of the different workers are too variable. The chief difficulty in the method lies in the
distillation with the use of glass wool in the neck of the flask. Further work was recommended
in the case of water-insoluble organic nitrogen. The Jones and Street method has been shown
to be useful for distinguishing between good and bad organic ammoniates. Some difficulties
in the method however are yet to be overcome. Results obtained with the Kjeldahl-Gunning-
Arnold method using copper sulfate in lieu of oxide of mercury and with oxide of mercury
alone, were very satisfactory, there being a good agreement and practically no difference in
the averages. The oxide of mercury seems to be a little more effective and rapid in its cata-

No. 1, August, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 141

lytic action than copper sulfate and perhaps the digestion in the case of copper should be more
prolonged than with mercury. The use of sodium sulfate in the place of potassium sulfate
in the Gunning method and its modifications is to be studied. — F. M. Scherlz.

1004. Fippin, Elmer O. The truefast test for sour soil. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:
65-68. 1920. — The paper describes the chemical principles employed by the truefast test
and points out the special features of the outfit. The manner of using the outfit is given. —
F. M. Schertz.

1005. Frear, Willham, Walter Thomas, and II. D. Edmiston'. Notes on the use of
potassium permanganate in determining nitrogen by the Kjeldahl method. Jour. Assoc. Official
Chem. 3: 220-224. 1919.— Results of the authors show that for the fertilizer mixtures repre-
sented the addition of permanganate caused a distinct loss of nitrogen. The loss depended
somewhat upon the amount of permanganate but chiefly upon the time of the addition. If
the addition was delayed for two minutes after removal from the flame no loss in nitrogen
was observed. — F. M. Schertz.

1006. Phelps, I. K., and H. W. Daudt. Investigations of the Kjeldahl method for the
determination of nitrogen. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3 : 218-220. 1919. — The hydrol-
ysis of certain organic compounds of various constitutions was studied. In the presence of
0.7 gram of mercuric oxide, 10 grams of K2SO< and 25 cc. of H2S04, weights of the compound
varying from 0.2 to 0.4 gram were hydrolyzed completely by 2.5 hours of boiling. — F. M .
Schertz.

1007. Trowbridge, P. F. Symposium on the determination of nitrogen in fertilizers.
Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 217-218. 1919. — The paper gives the answers of 3S sta-
tion chemists and 17 commercial chemists, to a questionnaire on methods of determining nitro-
gen in fertdizers. Twenty-one chemists use a gram sample. Either mercury oxide or mercury
is used by 41. Thirty-two do not use potassium permanganate at the close of the digestion.
Sulphuric acid as standard is used by 31 chemists and 2S use sodium hydroxide to titrate the
excess of acid. Cochineal is used as indicator by 42 chemists. Others use methyl red, methyl
orange, congo red, sodium alizarin sulphonate, alizarin red and lacmoid. NH4OH was com-
pared with NaOH for titrating and out of 203 samples of fertilizer analyzed at different times
105 samples gave 0.01 per cent higher results with NaOH. — F. M. Schertz.

TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS

J. M. Greenman, Editor
E. B. Payson, Assistant Editor

SPERMATOPHYTES

1008. Aellen, Paul. Neue Bastardkombinationen im Genus Chenopodium. (New
Hybrid-combinations in the genus Chenopodium.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 177-179. 1918. [Rep.
Eu. & Med. 1: 257-259.] — The following new hybrid-combinations and new varieties are
published: X Chenopodium leptophylliforme (C. album X leptophyllum) , X C. leptophylliforme
Aellen var. glabrum,X C. pseudoleptophyllum (C. hircinum X leptophyllum) and X C. Bin-
zianumv&r. obtusum, X C. basileense[(C. hircinum X striatum) X album=C. HaywardiaeX
album]. — E. B. Payson.

1009. Arthur, J. C. New names for species of Phanerogams. Torreya 19: 48-49. 1919.
— In listing the hosts of Uredinales for the North American Flora, the author makes the
following new combinations: Seniles Harlwegi (Zeugites Hartwegi Fourn.), Sanguinale pru-
riens Trin. {Panicum pruriens Trin.), [Corrected (Torreya 19: S3. 1919) to read Syntherisma

142 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

pruriens (Trin.) Arthur, nom. nov.], Nymphoides Grayanum (Limnanthemum Grayanum
Griseb.), Aureolaria virginica (Rhinanthus virginicus L.) , Dasystephana spathacea (Gentiana
spathacea HBK.) , and D. Menzesii (Gentiana Menzesii Griseb.). — J. C. Nelson.

1010. Balfour, Bayley. Some late-flowering gentians. Trans. Proc. Bot. Soc. Edin-
burgh 27: 246-272. 1918. — The author discusses several species of Asiatic gentians belonging
to the section Frigida Kusnezow. Detailed descriptions of the species with synonymy are
given and exsiccatae cited. The species treated are: Gentiana Farreri Balf. f., G. Lawrencei
Burkill, G. sino-ornata Balf. f., G. Veitchiorum Hemsl., G. oraata Wall., and G. prolata Balf. f.
— J. M, Greenman.

1011. Balfour, Bayley. The genus Nomocharis. Trans. Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh 27:
273-300. 1918. — This article presents a consideration of the liliaceous genus Nomocharis
of China and the Himalayas. The genus now embraces some 13 species of which the following
are new: Nomocharis Forrestii, N. saluenensis, N. tricolor, and N. Wardii. — J. M. Greenman.

1012. Bitter, Georg. Solanaceae quattuor austro-americanae adhuc generibus falsis
adscriptae. [Four South American Solanaceae hitherto ascribed to the wrong genera.] Rep.
Sp. Nov. 15: 149-155. 1918. — Solanocharis is described as a new genus and to it assigned S.
albescens (Poecilochroma albescens Britt.). The following new combinations are also made:
Jochroma Lehmannii (Poecilochroma Lehmanni Damm.) , Vassobia dichotoma (Cyphomandra
dichotoma Rusby) and Solanum Laulerbachii (Cyphomandra Lauterbachii Hub. Winkl.). — E.
B. Payson.

1013. Black, J. M. Additions to the flora of South Australia. Nos. 13, 14. Trans. Proc.
Roy. Soc. South Australia 42: 38-61, pi. 5-8, 168-184, pi. 15-18. Dec. 24, 1918.— Important
data are recorded concerning the flora of South Australia and the following plants are de-
scribed as new: Melaleuca quadrifaria F. v. M., Spyridium eriocephalum Fenzl. var. adpres-
sum, Limnanthemum stygium, and Dicrastylis verticillata, Stipa scabra Lindl. var. auriculata,
Muehlenbeckia coccoloboides , Atriplex crassipes, A. campanulatum Benth. var. adnatum, Acacia
rivalis, Frankenia foliosa, F. muscosa, F. cordata, F. serpyllifolia Lindl. var. eremophila, and
Minuria rigida. — /. M. Greenman.

1014. Bois, D. Nothopanax Davadii. Revue Horticole [Paris] 91 : 212-213. Fig. 67-68.
Jan., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1526.

1015. Brown, William H., and Arthur F. Fischer. Philippine bamboos Bur. For-
estry, Dept. Agr. & Nat. Resources. [Manila.] Bull. 15. 32 p. PI. 1-23. 1918.— This
paper deals primarily with the bamboos as a minor forest product of the Philippine Islands;
nevertheless it is of interest to the taxonomist, since the authors include keys to the genera
and recognize 30 or more species several of which are described and illustrated. — J. M.
Greenman.

1016. Cardot, J. Le cognassier de Delavay. [The quince of Delavay.] Revue Horticole
[Paris] 90: 131-133, fig. 45~47. 1918. — Pirus Delavayi Franchet (Docynia Delavayi Schneider)
is transferred to the genus Cydonia as C. Delavayi Card. — Adele Lewis Grant.

1017. Challinor, R. W., Edwin Cheel, and A. R. Penfold. On a new species of Lepto-
spermum and its essential oil. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. New South Wales 52 : 175-180. Sept. 18,
1918. — ■ Leptospermum flavescens var. citratum Bailey & White is raised to specific rank. Speci-
mens on which this species is based were first collected at Copmanhurst, New South Wales,
in 1911. — J. M. Greenman.

1018. Correvon, H. Les Cyclamens sauvages. [The wild cyclamens.] Revue Horticole
[Paris] 90: 180-183, 196-198. 1918. — The author gives the results of several years of experience
in growing various wild species of Cyclamen. A key by M. R. Buser to the cultivated species
of this genus is included in which 24 species are listed. — Adele Lewis Grant.

No. 1, August, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 143

1019. Dammer, U. Zwei neue Solanaceen, Iochroma (Euiochroma) Weberbaueri und
Cacabus multiflorus aus Peru. [Two new solanaceous plants, Iochroma (Euiochroma) Weber-
baueri and Cacabus multiflorus from Peru.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 266-267. 1918. — The following
species are described as new to science: Iochroma Weberbaueri and Cacabus multiflorus. —
E. B. Payson.

1020. Dammer, U. Eine neue Liliacee, Triocyrtis parviflora, aus Japan. [A new Liliaceous
plant, Tricyrtis parviflora, from Japan.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 2G7-268. 1918. — Tricyrtis parvi-
flora is described as a species new to science. — E. B. Payson.

1021. Dammer, U. Neue Arten von Lachemilla aus Mittel- und Siidamerika. [New
species of Lachemilla from Central and South America.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 362-365. 1918. —
The following species from Mexico, Costa Rica and Colombia are described as new to science:
Lachemilla Tonduzii, L. costaricensis , L. Purpusii, L. laxa, L. Uhdeana, L. Moritziana, and
L. columbiana. — E. B. Payson.

1022. Dinter, K. Index der aus Deutsch-Sudwestafrika bis zum Jahre 1917 bekannt
gewordenen Pflanzenarten. II. [Index to the species of plants known from German Southwest
Africa to the year 1917. II.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 340-355. 1918.— This alphabetical list,
chiefly of flowering plants, includes a limited citation of synonyms and exsiccatae. The fol-
lowing new specific and varietal names or combinations are included: Arctotis karasmontana ,
Asclepias filiformis Behth. & Hook. var. Buchenaviana, Alriplex sarcocarpus, Barbacenia
minuta (Vellozia minuta Baker), Caralluma ausana Dtr. & Brgr., Cassia obovata Collad.var.
pallidiflora. — E. B. Payson.

1023. Engler, A. Hieronymusia Engl., eine neue Gattung der Saxifragaceen. [Hierony-
musia, a new genus of the Saxifragaceae.] Notizblatt Konigl. Bot. Gart. Mus. Berlin 7:
265-267. Oct. 1, 1918. — Hieronymusia is described and illustrated as a new genus of the
Saxifragaceae. The genus is monotypic and is based on Saxifraga alchemilloides Griseb.
(Suksdorfia alchemilloides (Griseb.) Engl.) a native of South America. — /. M. Greenman.

1024. Erikson, Johan. Platanthera bifolia X montana i Blekinge (one of the southern
provinces of Sweden). (In Swedish.) Bot. Notiser 1918: 59-62. 1918.— P. A. Rydberg.

1025. Fraser, James. A new grass, Koeleria advena Stapf. Trans. Proc. Bot. Soc. Edin-
burgh 27: 302-303. 1918. — Koeleria advena Stapf is described as a new species of grass from
specimens collected in the neighborhood of Edinburgh. The new grass appears to have been
introduced into Scotland from eastern Spain or northwest Africa. — J. M. Greenman.

1026. Gamble, J. S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. Part III. Leguminosae-Caes-
alpinioideae to Caprifoliaceae. \2\ X 18| cm. P. 391-577. Adlard & Son & West Newman:
London, 1919. — The present part begins with the subfamily Caesalpinioideae and continues
through the Caprifoliaceae to the Rubiaceae in substantial accord with the Bentham and
Hooker arrangement of families. The following new names and new combinations are in-
cluded: Delonix elata {Poinciana elala L.), Mimosa Prainiana, Rubus Wightii (R. rugosus
Wt., not Sm.), Photinia Lindleyana W. & A. var. tomentosa, Jambosa Mundagam {Eugenia
Mundagam Bourd.), J. Rama-Varma {Eugenia Rama-Varma Bourd.), J. occidentalis {Eugenia
occidentalis Bourd.), J. Beddomei {Eugenia Beddomci Duthie), Syzygium Myhendrae {Eugenia
Myhendrae Bedd.), S. Benthamianum {Eugenia Benthamiana Wt.), S. microphyllum {Eugenia
microphylla Bedd.), S. montanum {Eugenia montana Wt.), S. Chavaran {Eugenia Chavaran
Bourd.), S. malabaricum {Eugenia malabarica Bedd.), S. operculatum {Eugenia operculata
Roxb.), S. Stocksii {Eugenia Stocksii Duthie), S. Jambolanu?n DC. var. axillare, Sonerila
versicolor Wt. var. axillaris {S. axillaris Wt.), Trianthema triquetra Rottl. var. oblongifolia,
Heracleum rigens Wall. var. mulliradiatum, II. rigens Wall. var. elongatum, H. courtallense
{H. rigens Wall. var. Candolleana C. B. Clarke, in part), H. Candolleanum {H. rigens Wall,
var. Candolleana C. B. Clarke, in part), Schefflera micrantha {Heptapleurum rostratum var.

144 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

micrantha C. B. Clarke), S. Roxburghii (Aralia digitata Roxb.), S. venulosa Harms var. obli-
quinervia, and Alangium salvifolium var. hexapetalum Wang. (A. hexapetalum Lamk.). —
J. M. Greenman.

1027. Harms, H. Araliaceae andinae. Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 245-254. 1918.— From the
Andes of South America are described the following species as new to science or hitherto
unpublished with a diagnosis: Schefflera lasiogyne, S. Sodiroi, Oreopanax gnaphalocephalus ,
0. pariahuancae , 0. Ruizii Decne., 0. Sodiroi, 0. brachystachyus Decne, 0. brunneus Decne.,
0. ischnolobus, 0. stenodactylus, 0. Moritzii, O. mucronulatus , 0. malacotrichus, 0. palamo-
phyllus, 0. Trianae Decne., Aralia? Weberbaueri. — E. B. Payson.

1028. Hassler, E. Solanacea paraguariensia critica vel minus cognlta. Rep. Sp. Nov.
15: 113-121. 1918. — The first of two articles on solanaceous plants occurring in Paraguay
gives critical notes on eight species of Solanum together with extensive citation of synonyms
and exsiccatae. The following varieties new to science and new varietal combinations occur:
Solanum nudum HBK. var. pseudo-indigoferum, S. nudum HBK. var. micranthum (S. micran-
thum W.), S. verbascijolium L. var. typicum, S. Ipomoea Sendt. var. ipomoeoide (S. ipomoe-
oides Chod. & Hassler), S. Ipomoea Sendt. var. macrostachyum, S. malacoxylon Sendt. var.
genuinum, S. malacoxylon Sendt. var. subvirescens. Several new forms and subforms are
also included. — E. B. Payson.

1029. Hassler, E. Solanacea paraguariensia critica vel minus cognita. II. Rep. Sp.
Xov. 15: 217-245. 1918. — Critical notes, synonyms and citations of exsiccatae are given of
38 species, principally of the genus Solanum. The following new names and combinations in
groups of specific and varietal rank as well as varieties new to science are published : Solanum
hirtellum (Atropa hirtella Spreng.), S. hirtellum (Spreng.) Hassler var. diminutum Bitt., S.
verruculosum (Cyphomandra verrucuolsa Hassler), S. citrifoliumW. var. typicum, S. citrifolium
W. var. ochandrum (S. ochandrum Dun.), S. citrifoliumW. var. leucodendron (S. leucocendron
Sendt.), S. violifolium Schott. var. asarijolium (S. asarifolium Kth. & Bouche), S. pseudo-
capsicum L. var. typicum^ S. pseudocapsicum L. var. Sendtnerianum, S. pseudocapsicum L.
var. hygrophilum (S. hygrophilum Schlechtd.), S. pseudocapsicum L. var. ambiguum, S. torvum
Sw. var. genuinum, S. torvum Sw. var. lanuginosum (forma lanuginosum Sendt.), £. bonariense
L. var. paraguariense (S. paraguariense Chod.), *S. lycocarpum St. Hil. var. genuinum, S.
lycocarpum St. Hil. var. paraguariense, S. lycocarpum St. Hil. var. macrocarpum (S. grandi-
florum var. macrocarpum Hassler), S. Balansae (S. Brownii Chod.), S. Balansae Hassler var.
typicum, S. Balansae Hassler var. lyratifidum, S. Balansae Hassler var. ambiguum, S. Bal-
ansae Hassler var. genuinum, S. Balansae Hassler var. aureomicans, S. Balansae Hassler
var. subinerme, S. robustum Wendl. var. laxepilosum, S. robustum Wendl. var. concepcionis,
S. viridipes Dun. var. intermedium, Lycium chilense Bert. var. normale, L. chilense Bert. var.
heterophyllum, L. Morongii Britt. var. typicum, L. Morongii Britt. var. indutum, Capsicum
microcarpum DC. var. glabrescens. Many new subspecies, forms and subforms are included
or new combinations in these subspecific groups occur. — E. B. Payson.

1030. Herter, W. Itinera Heteriana I. Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 373-381. 1918.— [Rep. Eu. &
Med. 1: 309-317.] — I. Cruciferae mediterraneae. The author presents an alphabetical list of
Cruciferae collected by himself in regions adjacent to the Mediterranean Sea with complete
data for each collection. II. Umbelliflorae mediterraneae. A list, similar to the above, in-
cludes certain members of the families Araliaceae, Umbelliferae and Cornaceae. — E. B. Payson.

1031. Javorka, S. Kisebb megjegyzesek es ujabb adatok. VI. [Minor observations and
new data. VI.] Bot. Kozlemenyek. 17: 52-60. 1918. — Notes are recorded concerning sev-
eral flowering plants of Hungary and one new form is characterized, namely Draba Simon-
kaiana Jav. f. retyezdtensis. — J. M. Greenman.

No. 1, August, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 145

1032. J0rgensen, E. Ajuga pyramidalis X reptans. Bergens Museum Aarbok 1917-1918.
Naturvidenskabelig raekke 5: 1^. 1918. — A hybrid between Ajuga pyramidalis and A.
reptans L. is recorded and its important characters contrasted with those of the parent
species. — J. M. Grecnman.

1033. Knuth, R. Geraniaceae Novae. I. Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 135-138. 1918.— The
following species native to South Africa are published as new to science: Pelargonium union-
dalensc, P. grandicalcaratum, P. rungvense, P. Palersonii, Monsonia stricta, M. alexandra-
ensis, and M. Rudatisii. — E. B. Payson.

1034. Koorders, S. H., and Th. Valeton. Atlas der Baumarten von Java. [Atlas of the
species of trees of Java.] Roy. 8vo. 1: PI. 1-200. 1913; 2: PI. 201-400. 1914; 3: PI. 401-600.
1915; 4: PI. 601-800. 1918. P. W. M. Trap. Leiden.— This work in four volumes of four
numbers each, illustrates nearly 800 species of Javanese trees in detail. Many habit sketches
and a few reproductions of photographs showing the general appearance of the trees are given.
Ormosia incerta Krds. is described as new to science. Aside from this, descriptions are not
given, but references are made to works in which descriptions do occur. The present atlas,
although a complete work in itself, is intended to supplement previous publications of the
same authors, especially the "Bijdragen tot de Kennis der Boomsoorten van Java" [Con-
tributions to the knowledge of the tree species of Java]. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1735].
— E. B. Payson.

1035. L6veill£, H., and A. Thellung. Oenothera argentinae spec. nov. Rep. Sp. Nov.
15: 133-134. 1918. — This species published previously with an insufficient diagnosis is here
completely characterized. Its place of origin is perhaps the Argentine. — E. B. Payson.

1036. Maiden, J. H. The tropical acacias of Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland
30: 18-51. PI. 1-7. 1918. — The author gives an annotated list of 60 recognized species of
Acacia from Queensland, including the following which are described as new to science:
Acacia Bancrofti, A. curniveria, A. Whitei, A. argentea, and A. Armitii (A. deliberata F. v.
M., not A. Cunn.). — J. M. Grecnman.

1037. Mez, Carl. Sacciolepis, Mesosetum, Thrasya, Ichnanthus genera speciebus novis
aucta. Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 122-133. 1918. — The following species are described as new to sci-
ence: Sacciolepis longissima, S. micrococcus, S. delicatula, S. Karsteniana, Mesosetum peni-
cillatum, M agropyroides, Thrasya trinitensis, Ichnanthus lancifolius, I. Weberbaueri, I.
lasiochlamys, I. verticillatus , I. montanus (Panicum inconstans var. montanum Trim), I. peru-
vianus, I. trinitensis, I. polycladus , I. drepanophyllus , I. longiglumis, I. venezuelanus and I.
Gardneri. — E. B. Payson.

1038. Mottet,S. NoveauxTrollius. [NewTrollius.] Revue Horticole [Paris] 90: 102-103.
1 pi. 1918. — Two plants of this genus are described and illustrated. The first, Trollius
Ledebourii Rchb. comes from Siberia while the second, T. pumilus var. yunnanensis Hort.
is described as new and was grown from seed sent from Yunnan, China. — Adele Lewis Grant.

1039. Mottet, S. Un Nouveau Columnea Hybride. [A new Columnea hybrid.] Revue
Horticole [Paris] 90: 168-170. 1 pi. and 1 text fig. 1918. — The author describes and illustrates
a new hybrid, C. vedrariensis Hort., resulting from a cross between C. Schiedeana Schlecht.
and C. magnifica Oersted. — Adele Lewis Grant.

1040. Mottet, S. Neillia, Physocarpus et Stephanandra. Revue Horticole [Paris] 91 :
236-23S. Fig. 77. Feb., 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 1544.

1041. Mottet, S. Nouveaux Viburnum de la Chine. [New Viburnum of China.] Revue
Horticole [Paris] 91: 262-264. 1 pi. {colored). Apr., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1548.

146 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1042. Porto, P. Campos. O Cambuci (Paivaea Landsdorffii Berg.]. 21 X 27| cm. 14 p.
9 fig. Estabelecimento Graphico de Steele & C. Rio de Janeiro, 1920. — This pamphlet, pub-
lished by the Botanical Garden in Rio de Janeiro, illustrates and gives a detailed account of
Paivaea Langsdorffii Berg, with particular reference to its edible fruit. — J. M. Greenman.

1043. Pritzel, E. Basedowia, eine neue Gattung der Compositen aus Zentral-Australien.
[Basedowia, a new genus of the Compositae from central Australia.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges-
ellsch. 36: 332-337. PI. 12. Oct. 18, 1918. — Basedowia helichrysoides is described and illus-
trated as a new genus and species of the Compositae. It is placed under the Helichryseae
and is related to Cassinia and to Helichrysum. — J. M. Greenman.

1044. Pritzel, E. Species novae ex Australia centrali. Rep. Sp. Nov. IS: 356-361. 1918.
— 'The following species and varieties new to science are characterized: Triodia Basedowii,
Crotalaria Strehlowii, Indigofera Basedowii, I. leucotricha, Swainsona phacoides Benth. var.
erecta, Petalostyles spinescens, Heterodendron floribundum, Eremophila castelli Arminii, E.
Leonhardiana, E. Strehlowii, Canthium lineare, Olearia arida, Rutidosis panniculata. — E. B.
Pay son.

1045. Rogers, R. S. Notes on Australian orchids, together with a description of some
new species. Trans. & Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 42: 24-37. PI. 2-4 . Dec. 24, 1918.—
The author presents a synopsis with critical notes of several genera of orchids. The follow-
ing species are new to science: Calochilus cupreus, Pterostylis pusilla, and Prasophyllum
regium. — J. M. Greenman.

1046. Rubner, K. Ein neues Epilobium (E. Graebneri) aus Westrussland. [A new Epi-
lobium (E. Graebneri) from western Russia.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 179-180. 1918. [Rep. Eu.
& Med. 1 : 259-260.] — Epilobium Graebneri is characterized as a species new to science. — E. B.
Payson.

1047. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Aganisia Ldl. und ihre Verwandten. [The genus
Aganisia Ldl. and its relatives.] Orchis 12 : 24-42. PL 2-5. 1918. — The present article, which
is continued from a previous number of this magazine (12: 6-16, pi. 1. 1917), includes a syn-
optical revision of Koellensteinia Rchb. f., Paradisianthiis Rchb. f., Warreella Schltr., and
Otostylis Schltr. n. gen. The following new species and new names are recorded: Koellen-
steinia peruviana from Peru, K. eburnea (Cyrtopodium eburneum Barb. Rodr. from Brazil,
K. Roraimae from Guiana, K. boliviensis from Bolivia, Paradisianthus neglectus from Brazil,
P. micranthus (Zygopetalum micranthum Barb. Rodr.) from Brazil, Otostylis lepida (Aganisia
nisia lepida Lind. & Rchb. f.), 0. brachystalix (Zygopetalum brachystalix Rchb. f.), and O.
venusta (Zygopetalum venustum Ridl.). — J. M. Greenman.

1048. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Restrepia H. B. u. Kth. [The genus Restrepia
HBK.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 255-270. 1918. — Barbosella, a new genus, is proposed for a number
of Central and South American orchids formerly included under Restrepia. The following
combinations result: Barbosella australis (Restrepia australis Cogn.), B. Cogniauxiana (Re-
strepia Cogniauxiana Speg. & Kranzl.), B. crassifolia (Restrepia crassifolia Edwall), B.
cucullala (Restrepia cucullata Ldl.), B. Dusenii (Restrepia Dusenii Sampaio), B. Gardneri
(Pleurothallus Gardneri Ldl.), B. Kegelii (Restrepia Kegelii Rchb. f.), B. Lofgrenii (Restrepia
Lofgrenii Cogn.), B. microphylla (Restrepia microphylla Rodr.), B. Miersii (Pleurothallus
Miersii Ldl.), B. Porschii (Restrepia Porschii Kranzl.), B. prorepens (Restrepia prorepens
Rchb. f.), B. rhyncantha (Restrepia rhyncantha Rchb. f. & Warsc), B. varicosa (Restrepia
varicosa Ldl.). The author also gives a synopsis of the genus Restrepia with critical notes
on each of the 21 recognized species. Three new sectional names are given as follows:
Pleurothallopsis, Eurestrepia and Achaetochilus. The new name Pleurothallus Edwallii
Dusen & Schltr. (Restrepia pleurothalloides Cogn.) is proposed. — E. B. Payson.

No. 1, August, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 147

1049. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Sigraatostalix Rchb. f. [The Genus Sigmatostalix
Rchb. f.] Rep. Sp. Nov. 15: 139-148. 1918. — The species previously assigned to the genus
Sigmatostalix are found to be very diverse structurally and from them have been segregated
the new genera Petalocentrum and Roezliella. The three genera are compared critically and
under each is given a key to the species properly assigned to them. Besides the new generic
diagnoses the following species new to science and new combinations are included: Petalo-
centrum pusillum (Sigmatostalix pusilla Schltr.), P angusti folium, Roezliella dilalala (Sig-
matostalix dilatata Richb. f.), R. Wallisii (Sigmatostalix Wallisii Rchb. f.), R. reversa (Sigmato-
stalix reversa Rchb. f.), R. malleifera (Sigmatostalix malleifera Rchb. f.), R. Lehmanniana
(Sigmatostalix Lehmanniana Kranzl.), Capanemia brachycion (Sigmatostalix brachycion
Griseb.), C. Jucrgensiana (Rodriguezia Juergensiana Kranzl.) and C. pygmaea (Rodriguezia
pygmaea Kranzl. ). — E. B. Payson.

1050. Schlechter, R. Mitteilungenuber einige europaische und mediterrane Orchideen.
I. [Contributions concerning some European and Mediterranean Orchids. I.] Rep. Sp.
Nov. 15: 273-302. 1918. [Rep. Eu. & Med. 1: 274-302.]— I. The genera Aceras, Himanto-
glossum and Anacamptis are discussed in the light of their taxonomic history and present
interpretation. Under each genus are listed the species and varieties belonging to it and
critical notes are given. II. Orchis persica, a species new to science, is characterized. III.
Steveniella, a new genus, is described and to it is referred 1 species, S. satyrioides (Orchis
salyrioides Stev.). IV. Gennaria Parlat. is confirmed as worthy of generic rank. Specimens
are cited for its single species, G. diphylla (Lk.) Parlat. V. Plalanthera parvula is described
as new to science. — E. B. Payson.

1051. Schlechter, R. Odontioda X Fiirstenbergiana Schltr., ein neuer bigenerischer
Orchideenbastard. [Odontioda X Fiirstenbergiana Schltr., a new bigeneric orchid-hybrid.]
Orchis 12: 19, 20. 1918. — This new bigeneric hybrid is the result obtained from crossing
Cochlioda vulcanica Benth. with Odontoglossum Eduardi Rchb. f. — J. M. Greenman.

1052. Schlechter, R. Orchidaceae novae et criticae. Decas LI-LIU. Rep. Sp. Nov.
15: 193-209. 1918. — The following Guatemalan plants, chiefly from the collections of Ber-
noulli and Cario, are described as new to science: Plalanthera guatemalensis , Habenaria
dipleura, H. latipetala, H. quinquefila, H. spithamaea, Pogonia debilis, Ponlhieva pulchella,
Pelexia guatemalensis, Spiranthes pulchra, Physurus humidicola, P. luniferus, P. trilobulatus ,
Microstylis acianthoides , M. lepanthi flora, Masdevallia guatemalensis, Stelis Bernoulii, S.
Carioi, S. cleistogama, S. oxypetala, S. tenuissima, Pleurothallis Bernoullii, P. Carioi,
P. lamprophylla, Epidendrum aberrans, E. lucidum, E. piestocaulos , E. verrucipes, Notylia
guatemalensis, Leochilus major, Ornilhocephalus tripterxis. Decas LIV. ibid. 210-217. —
Caloglossum, a new genus of Madagascar orchids is described and to it are assigned the
following new and transferred species: C. flabellatum (Limodorum flabellatum Thou.), C.
Humblotii (Cymbidium Humblotii Rolfe), C. magnificum, C. rhodochilum (Cymbidium rhodo-
chilum Rolfe). Additional new combinations in other genera are proposed as follows: Pla-
tanthera Komarovii, Chloraea reticulata, Stelis ovatilabia, Dendrobium Casuarinae, Otostylis
paludosa (Zygopetalum paludosxim Cogn.), Oncidium Spegazzinianum (Leochilus Spegazzini-
anus Kranzl.), O. Waluewa (Waluewa pulchella Regel), Solenidium mattogrossense (Leochilus
?natlogrossensis Cogn.), Erycina diaphana (Oncidium diaphanum Rchb. f.), Pachyphyllum
muscoides (Orchidotypus muscvides Kranzl.), P. cyrtophyllum (P. falcifolium Schltr.). — E.
B. Payson.

1053. Schlechter, R. Orchidaceae novae et criticae. Decas LV-LVII. Rep. Sp. Nov.
15: 324-340. 1918. — The following new species and varieties of Madagascan orchids are de-
scribed: Benthamia elata, Habenaria Ferkoana, Cynosorchis diplorhyncha, C. Laggiarae, C.
Laggiarae var. ecalcarala, Dispersis Afzelii, Goodyeara Afzelii, Plalylepis margaritifera,
Bulbophyllum Afzelii, B. brachyphyton, B. Ferkoanum, B. Laggiarae, B. melanopogon, B.
mirificum, B. sarcorhachis, B. xanthobulbum, Lissochilus Laggiarae, Gussonea auranliaca,

148 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

Aerangis crassipes, A. pumilio, A. venusla, Jumellea cyrtoceras, J. Ferkoana, Angraecum
conchoglossum, A. Ferkoanum, A. dasycarpum, A. Laggiarae, A. melanostictum , A. mirabile,
A. sarcodanthum, A. tenuispica. — E. B. Payson.

1054. Schlechter, R. Orchidaceae novae, in caldariis Horti Dahlemensis cultae. [New-
orchids cultivated in the Garden at Dahlem.] Notizblatt Konigl. Bot. Gart. Mus. Berlin 7:
268-280. Oct. 1, 1918. — The following new species of orchids are described: Masdevallia
paranaensis, Stelis diaphana, S. fragrans, S. Porschiana, S. robusta, S. thermophila, Pleuro-
thallis lamproglossa, P. margaritifera, P. microblephara, P. mirabilis, P. paranaensis, P.
Petersiana, P. rhabdosepala, Octomeria rhodoglossa, Encyclia laxa native of Brazil, Dendro-
bium dahlemense from Sumatra, Polystachya fulvilabia from Kamerun, Maxillaria phaeo-
glossa and M. xanthorhoda native country unknown, and Vanda Petersiana from Burma. —
J. M. Greenman.

1055. Schlechter, R. Ueber einige neue Cymbidien. [On some new Cymbidiums.]
Orchis 12: 45-48. 1918. — The following new species and new hybrids are described: Cymbid-
ium Hennisianum from India, Cymbidium X Fiirstenbergianum (C. Traccyanum X erythro-
styluyri), and Cymbidium X magnificum (C. erythrostylum X Lowianum). — J. M. Greenman.

1056. Schlechter, R. Vanda X Herziana Schltr. n. hybr. Orchis 12: 88, 89. 1918 —
Vanda X Herziana is described as a new hybrid between Vanda coerulea and V. suavis Ldl.
— J. M. Greenman.

1057. Schlechter, R. Zwei neue Hybriden (Brassocattleya X Paulae Schltr. und Lae-
liocattleya X pulchella). [Two new hybrids.] Orchis 12:87. 1918. — Brassocattleya X Paulae
was obtained by crossing Catlleya aurea with Brassavola Perrinii Rchb. f. and Laeliocatlleya
X pulchella was obtained by crossing the natural hybrid Laelio X Craivshayana with Cattlcya
velutina Rchb. f. — J. M. Greenman.

1058. Schneider, Camillo. Weitere Beitrage zur Kenntnis der chinesischen Arten der
Gattung Berberis (Euberberis). [Further contributions to the knowledge of the Chinese species
of the genus Berberis (Euberberis).] Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 66:313-326. 1916. Ibid. 67: 15-32,
135-146, 213-228, 2S4-300. 1918. — In this series of articles the author presents a revision of
the Chinese species of Berberis recognizing 85 species and several varieties grouped in 10 sec-
tions. The following new species and new combinations are included: Berberis phanera,
B. Grodtmannia, B. Collettii, B. Willeana, B. Fabcri, B. microtricha, B. Franchetiana, B.
kansuensis, B. oritrepha, B. Wilsonae Hensl. var. subcaulialata (B. subcaulialata Schn.), and
B. Wilsonae Hemsl. var. Stapfiana (B. vulgaris var. Stapfiana Voss). — J. M. Greenman.

1059. Schulz, O. E. Sisymbrium septulatum DC, eine bisher nicht geniigend bekannte
Art. [Sisymbrium septulatum DC, a species previously insufficiently known.] Rep. Sp. Nov.
15: 369-372. 1918. [Rep. Eu. & Med. 1: 306-308.]— This species, described from incomplete
material and confused by synonymy has been variously misinterpreted. A complete specific
description is given and specimens are cited. The following new varieties are characterized:
*S. septulatum DC. var. trichocarpum, S. septulatum DC. var. dasycarpum, S. septulatum DC.
var. lasiocarpum. — E. B. Payson.

1060. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. 8vo. xi + 834 V->
6 pi., 79 text-fig. William Wesley & Son: London, 1919. [Reprinted from the New Phytolo-
gist, Vols, xvi-xviii. 1917-1919.]— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1142.

1061. Vierhapper, F. Was ist Trifolium Pilczii Adamovic? [What is Trifolium Pilczii
Adamovi6?] Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 67: 252-264, 328-337. PI. S. 1918.— The author presents
the results of a critical study of Trifolium Pilczii Adamovic, and discusses its relationship
to T. eximium Steph. and T. allaicum Vierh. — ./. M. Greenman.

No. 1, AuausT, 1920] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 149

1062. Viguier, R. Les Araliacees cultivees. [Cultivated Araliaceae.] Revue Horticole
[Paris] 91 : 228-229. Feb., 1919.

1063. Viguier, R. Les Araliacees cultivees. [Cultivated Araliaceae.] Revue Horticole
[Paris] 91: 250-252. Mar., 1919.

1064. Von Wettstein, R. Moltkea Dorfleri Wettstein und die Abgrenzung der Gattung
Moltkea. [Moltkea DSrfleri Wettstein and the demarcation of the genus Moltkea.] Oesterr.
Bot. Zeitschr. 67 : 361-368. PI. 3, 22 fig. 1918.— The author describes in detail and illustrates
Mvltkea Dorfleri Wettst., discusses the relationship of the genus Moltkea to allied genera, and
enumerates with the bibliography and synonymy eight species recognized under the above
generic name. — J. M. Green-man.

1065. Wagner, Rudolf. Erlauterungen zu Plunders Abbildung der Anechites lappulacea
(Lam.) Miers. [Explanations to Plumier's illustration of Anechites lappulacea (Lam.) Miers.]
Oesterr. Bot, Zeitschr. 67: 337-345. 3 fig. 1918.

MISCELLANEOUS UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

Burton E. Livingston, Editor

1066. Anonymous. Palatability for sheep of certain New Zealand forest plants. New
Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 293-294. 1919.

1067. Anonymous. Lac cultivation in India. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88:280. 1919. [From
Jour. Roy. Soc. of Arts.]

106S. Anonymous. Utilization of marine plants. Sci. Amer. 121 : 557. 1919.

1069. Anonymous. Peat fuel for locomotives. Sci. Amer. 121: 566. 1919.

1070. Baldwin, J. F. Germination of grains. Sci. Amer. 121: 626. 1919. — Reports of
germination of grains of cereals found wrapped up with ancient Egyptian mummies are claimed
to be fictitious. — Chas. H. Otis.

1071. Bussy, P. Le latanier du Sud-Annam et sa fibre. [The Bourbon palm of southern
annam and its fiber.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 377-380. 1919. — A discussion of the
fibers produced by the palm Corypha lecomtei Becc. — E. D. Merrill.

1072. Caballero, A. La Chara foetida A. Br., y las larvas de Stegomyia, Culex y Anoph-
eles. [Chara foetida A. Br. and the larvae of Stegomyia, Culex and Anopheles.] Bol. R. Soc.
Espanola Hist. Nat. 19: 449-455. Oct., 1919. — In the botanical laboratory of the University
of Barcelona it was noticed that an aquarium containing Chara foetida appeared not to breed
mosquitoes as did other aquaria containing other aquatics (Polamogelon fluitans , P. pectinatus,
Elodea canadensis, and Apium nodiflorum). Experiments were undertaken which indicated
that a sufficient quantity of Chara foetida, probably not much more than one-eighth of the
total volume of the container, caused the death of mosquito larvae by asphyxiation. The
larvae of Stegomyia appeared somewhat more resistant than those of the other genera. The
cultivation of Chara foetida is stated to be easy and economical and its use in tanks, ponds,
etc., is recommended for preventing the development therein of mosquito larvae. — O. E.
Jennings.

1073. Clarkson, Edward Hale. The irresistible charm of the ferns. Amer. Fern
Jour. 9: 109-115. PI. 7-8. 1919.

1074. Freund, Hans. Ueber Kork-Ersatz. [Substitutes for Cork.] Pharm. Zentralhalle
Deutschland 60: 183-187. 1919. — The scarcity of cork in Germany necessitated the use of
substitutes for this commodity. The author describes the various barks, piths, etc., used
for this purpose. — H. Engelhardt.

150 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1075. Fuehner, H. Goldregen Tabak. [Cytisus laburnum tobacco.] Pharm. Zentral-
halle Deutschland 60: 336-337. 1919. — The leaves of Cytisus laburnum, when subjected to a
proper fermentation, furnish a product which can be used as a substitute for tobacco. The
smoke does not smell disagreeable, does not irritate the mucous membranes and acts on the
central nervous system in exactly the same way as tobacco. — H. Engelhardt.

1076. Griebel, C. Beitrage zum mikroskopischen Nachweis von pflanzlichen Streckungs-
mitteln und Ersatzstoffen bei der Untersuchung der Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel. [Microscopic
demonstration of vegetable substitutes in food investigation.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-
u. Genussmittel 38: 129-141. 1919. — Histological description of substitutes for bread and
meal, preserves, spices, and coffee. — H. G. Barbour.

1077. Haberlandt, G. Food value of alfalfa used as a table vegetable. Sci. Amer.
Supplem. 88: 298, 312. 1919. [From Die Nahirurissenschaften (Berlin).]

1078. Herter, W. Zur quantitativen Mikroanalyse der Nahrungs- und Futtermittel.
[Quantitative micro-analysis of food.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 38:
65-82. 1919. — Thorough theoretical discussion with numerous examples. — H. G. Barbour.

1079. Howe, H. E. Research and cotton. Sci. Amer. 121 : 606. 1919.— A brief resume" of
what investigation has done in the past for this branch of the textile industries. — Chas. H.
Otis.

1080. Howe, H. E. Using vegetable seeds. Sci. Amer. 121: 554. 1919.

1081. Krafft, K. Ergebnisse der Untersuchung von Ersatzmitteln im Jahre 1918 und
Januar bis April 1919. [Investigation of food substitutes.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u.
Genussmittel 38: 213-221. 1919. — Substitutes for baking-powder and accessories, eggs, spices,
extracts, flavorings, honey, preserves, fulminating powder, tea and coffee, tobacco, fruit
juices, beer, and sausages. — H. G. Barbour.

1082. Smith, E. Philip. Pollinosis ("Hay-Fever"). Jour. Botany 58: 40-44. 1920.—
A condensed account is given of the symptoms of hay fever. It is noted that the problem of
treatment has heretofore been approached from the standpoint of the immunologist. The
earliest work was that of Dunbar and Pratjsnitz, and their experiments were elaborate. A
list is given of the plants found by these authors to cause hay fever. The present author adds
various conifers to the list. He thinks the toxalbumen theory of Dunbar is scarcely tenable
because the contents of the pollen grain are separated from the nasal membrane by the wall
of the grain. Mechanical irritation or the production of substances on the surface of the
pollen are the only alternatives left. The author finds mechanical irritation insufficient to
account for the symptoms. On the other hand the grains are coated with tapetal debris
often in the form of an oily substance. The oil was extracted by ether from the pollen of
Hibiscus and was found to produce a blister when applied to the unbroken skin of the fore-
aim. Very similar results were obtained with the pollen of Plantago. The cases of Primula
obconica and sinensis are cited to show that such irritating oils are produced by plants. If
this theory of the cause of hay fever is correct it will throw a new light on the whole problem
and bring it into line with well-known cases of plant-dermatitis which cover quite a wide
range of plant organisms. — K. M. Wiegand.

1083. Stuart, G. A. D., and E. J. Butler. Report of the Director. Sci. Rept. Agric.
Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 1-10. 1919. — A summary of the more important scientific work for the
year at the Pusa Institute (India). — Winfield Dudgeon.

1084. Vernet, G. Sur les causes de la coagulation naturelle du latex d'Hevea brasiliensis.
[On the causes of natural coagulation of the latex of Hevea brasiliensis.] Bull. Agric. Inst.
Sci. Saigon 1 : 342-347. 1919.

1085. Wall, A. The pronunciation of scientific terms in New Zealand, with special refer-
ence to the terms of botany. Trans, and Pror. New Zealand Inst. 51: 409-414. 1919

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical
abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as
possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations
with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919.
As an adequate index of progress, Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower,
field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international
scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili-
ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those
having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to
every one interested in plants.

The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants,
throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan-
ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par-
ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all
students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical
exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar-
ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication,
yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than
the United States and Canada. Many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries,
but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it
seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without
reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary
that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest
largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are
available to all.

The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of
five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving
matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first
cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is Donald Reddick, Cornell University.
Ithaca, New York.

The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors
for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the
Board of Control. Assistant Editors are appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections,
with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their
respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators
and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature.
They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index
entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor-
in-Chief, with the help of the Associate Editor-in-Chief and with the approval of the Board of
Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the
author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for
Sections.

The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown
on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of
Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the
prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the
Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of
serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record,
through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract-
ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct
delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of
assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab-
stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly
requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi-
cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of
the Committee for 1920 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all
parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations
and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography
Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis
of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain
that all serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is
published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable
reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi-
tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited.

Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them-
selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every
abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepared it, but entries by citation alone are not
signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub-
lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary
contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators.

The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers,
according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All
other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning
subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be
referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com-
mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief.

Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any
errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor-
in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with
each volume. These notes should be on sheets about 22 X 28 cm. (8^ X 11 inches).

Botanical Abstracts is published monthly, two, three, or four volumes being issued
each year at present. Each volume contains about 300 pages. The current (1920) volumes
are III, IV, V and VI. Subscriptions are accepted for Vols. Ill and IV, (January-July,
inch), and V and VI, (August-December, inch). Volumes I and II can no longer be fur-
nished by the publishers. The price for two volumes is $6.00, for the United States and its
dependencies, Mexico and Cuba; $6.25, for Canada; $6.50, for other countries. Prices are net
postpaid. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received
within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of
issue.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento S15, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press,
C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make
checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London Address.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland : Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

Vol. V

SEPTEMBER, 1920

No. 2

I'.NTKIES 1086-242G

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.
A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 1920 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement

of Science, Section G.
*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.

B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, Michigan.

*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology

Section.
B. M. Dugoar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhout, Harvard University,

Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, • New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.

J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
*Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. O. Montgomery, Cornell University,,
Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,.

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the Board),
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rudd, Medical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

FETTER LANE, LONDON, E. C.

Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

nited States, Mexico, Cuba
an ad a
Other countries

Price, net postpaid for two volumes:

1919 Volumes: I and II
1920 Volumes': III, IV, V and VI

CONTENTS

Entry nos.

Agronomy 1086-1233

Bibliography, Biography and History 1234-1259

Botanical Education 1260-1264

Cytology 1265-1269

Forest Botany and Forestry 1270-1418

Genetics 1419-1702

Horticulture 1703-1877

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1878-1914

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1915-1924

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 1925-1977

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1978-2000

Pathology 2001-2122

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy ■. . 2123-2135

Physiology 2136-2256

Soil Science 2257-2335

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 2336-2402

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 2403-2426

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,

n c.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor,' Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowlf.s, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, New Hampshire Agri-
cultural College, Durham, New Hampshire.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut. %

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N.Transeau,
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb
W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut.

Morpholcgy and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science .Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.— Assistant Ed itor,.

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M.Schertz, U. S.Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 19-0

J. R. Schramm, Cliairman. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

H. O Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A. J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand
R. Hosmer

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishinp; abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense.

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. V SEPTEMBER, 1920 No. 2

ENTRIES 1086-2426

AGRONOMY Library

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assista?it Editor

1086. Alway, F. J. A phosphate-hungry peat soil. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 108-143.
1920. — Some Minnesota bogs are found to have a sufficient supply of lime and available nitro-
gen for the production of all crops suitable to the region. Phosphates, however, are very
scant.— G. B. Rigg.

1087. Anonymous. Elephant-grass in elevated localities. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 84. 1920. — Treats of Pennisetum purpureum. — L. R. Waldron.

1088. Anonymous. The department and elephant-grass. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 143. 1920. — Treats of Pennisetum purpureum. — L. R. Waldron.

1089. Anonymous. Coffee in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 133.
1920. — This crop (Coffea spp.) would be unsuited to New South Wales. — L. R. Waldron.

1090. Anonymous. Liming, cultivation and manurial experiments at Margam, Australia.
Australian Sugar Jour. 11: 679-681. 1920.

1091. Anonymous. Further reports on elephant grass. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:244. 1920.

1092. Anonymous. Rice culture in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
232. 1920. — Results so far not encouraging but further trials are advised. — L. R. Waldron.

1093. Anonymous. Weed seeds. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1:316. 1920. — Popular. — Chas.
H. Otis.

1094. Anonymous. Paper from bagasse. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 283. 1920. [Review of
a paper in The Technical Engineering News. Feb., 1920.] — Describes the process for com-
mercially making a special paper from bagasse, which is sugar cane from which the juice
has been extracted. — Chas. H. Otis.

1095. Anonymous. Home-made syrup from sugar beets. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 285-286.
1920. — This appears to be a brief of a paper by Ort and Withrow in the Journal of Industrial
and Engineering Chemistry. Feb., 1920. — Chas. H. Otis.

151

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

152 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1096. Anonymous. El zaca ton como material prima para papel. [Zacaton as a paper-making
material.] Revista Agric. [Mexico] 4: 107-111. 1 fig. 1919.— A popular account based on:
U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 309. 1919.— John A. Stevenson.

1097. Anonymous. Origen, cultivo e industria del cacahuate. [Origin, cultivation and
commercial aspects of the peanut.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico] 2: 81-86. 1920. — Copied from El
Boletin de la Camara Agric. de Leon [Mexico]. — John A. Stevenson.

1098. Atkinson, Esmond. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
19 : 232-234. 1 fig. 1919. — This is a continuation of a series of articles interrupted by the war
in 1916. Plants known as "winter annuals" are under discussion. Spurrey (Spergula arven-
sis) is described in detail at various stages of growth. It is reported as a useful plant in
some countries, but it can be considered only as a noxious weed in New Zealand. Its posi-
tion as a weed, and possible control measures are discussed. — N. J. Giddings.

1099. Aumuller, F. Nutation und Feinheitsgrad der Spelzen bei zweizeiliger Gerste.
[Nutation and the degree of fineness of the glumes in two-rowed barley.] Illustrierte Landw.
Zeitg. 39 : 430-431. Fig. 332- 333. 1919. — The heads of varieties having fine glumes are shown
by measurements to stand more nearly upright than those having coarser glumes. The
former varieties are of higher quality but the latter are more productive. — John W. Roberts.

1100. Bancroft, Wilder T. [Rev. of: Peters, Charles A. The preparation of sub-
stances important in agriculture. 3rd. ed. 19 x 14 cm., vii + 81 p. John Wiley and Sons,
Inc.: New York, 1919. $0.80.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 444. 1919.

1101. Ban6, Jose de. Dos cosechas de avena por una. [Two crops of oats for one.] Rev.
Agric. [Mexico] 4: 154-156. 2 fig. 1919. — A ratoon crop secured under favorable weather
conditions at small labor cost. — John A. Stevenson.

1102. Barber, C. A. The growth of sugar cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 198-203. 1920.
— The fifth article of a series on the growth of sugar cane deals with the rate of maturing of the
cane plant as a whole, the rate of early development, the average length and thickness of
the mature joints, and the richness of the juice in branches of different ages. [See next
following Entry, 1103.]— #. Koch.

1103. Barber, C. A. The growth of sugar cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22 : 76-80. 1920.
— The fourth article of a series on the growth of sugar cane deals with the formula for the
branching of the cane plant. [See next preceding Entry, 1102.] — E. Koch.

1104. Barber, C. A. Progress of the sugarcane industry in India during the years 1916
and 1917. Agric. Res. Inst. Pusa Bull. 83. 46 p. 1919. — The cane varieties in general use
are poor, and the cultural practices and methods of handling the product primitive. The
Department is endeavoring to introduce improvements along these lines, and the reports
cover some of this work as carried out in the various provinces. Reports are given for Madras,
Travancere, Mysore, Bombay, Central Provinces, Bengal, Bihar and Orissa, United Prov-
inces, Punjab, North-west Frontier Province, Assam, and Burma. — -N. J. Giddings.

1105. Besson, M. A., and Adrian Doane. Darso. Oklahoma Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
127. 20 p. Fig. 1-6. 1919. — Darso is a new grain sorghum of unknown origin, possessing
superior drouth resisting qualities. It is a dwarf variety of very uniform size, early maturing,
leafy, red-seeded. The forage has a higher total sugar content than kafir or feterita. The
feeding value of the seed is less than that of black-hulled white kafir. It is recommended as a
grain sorghum in the drier regions of Oklahoma, Texas, and Kansas, but not in the more
humid regions where other grain sorghums and corn make satisfactory yields. — John A,
Elliott.

1106. Beverley, J. Maize notes. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 242-243. 1919.

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 153

1107. Bollky, II. L. Official field crop inspection. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts
1919: 22-31. 1919. — -Author believes "that the first step in cereal crop improvement rests in
further extension of our state seed and weed laws and in the activity of the forces represented
by them, to include proper control of seed crop production and of seed and grain distribu-
tion." Seed inspection laws alone have failed to insure seed and crop improvement since
they inspect in the bin or bag after the goods has left the farm. Proposes for "every cereal
producing state a law authorizing seed, field crop inspection, seed certification, seed stand-
ardization and seed sales lists" under the supervision of a competent officer, also providing
for educational emphasis together with means for demonstrations and field work with seed
plots. — -V. T. Munn.

110S. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 :
2 1 -28. Fig. 1-3. 1920. — -Habits of growth and seed production, palatability, behavior under
irrigation and commercial possibilities are given for the genus Danthonia as found in New
South Wales. Danthonia longifolia, D. bi partita and D. pallida, are figured. The Danthonias
constitute 90 per cent of the grass herbage on the tablelands and slopes in New South Wales,
and are common in western districts. Seed habits are fairly good. The Danthonias will be
valuable in pastures in the future. — L. R. Waldron.

1109. Breakwell, E. A remarkable fodder plant. Shearman's clover. (Trifolium fra-
giferum var.) Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 245-250. 4 fig- 1920. — This report is given
by the agrostologist. This clover was propagated vegetatively from an individual plant
found growing alone several years previously. A taxonomic study indicates it to be unique,
but closely allied to strawberry clover, T. fragiferum. The author suggests that it may have
resulted from a cross between T. fragiferum and T. repens or T. medium or even between the
t wo latter. Although under observation for over 20 years it has not been observed to produce
viable seed. Compared with T. fragiferum, it is said to spread three times as quickly and to
produce six times the amount of feed. Its palatability and nutritive quality are stated to be
of the highest order. It thrives on marshy and slightly saline soils. It is not killed by
frost. Chemical analyses are given. — L. R. Waldron.

1110. Breakwell, E. Trials of Wimmers rye-grass. (Lolium subulatum.) Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 107-110. 2 fig. 1920. — Conclusions as given are unfavorable to
the grass both as to cultural results and palatability. — L. R. Waldron.

1111. Breakwell, E. Bokhara Clover on the southern table-lands. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31: 67. 1920.— Treats of Melilotus alba.—L. R. Waldron.

1112. Breasola, M. La devitalizzazione dei semi di Cuscuta. [The killing of Cuscuta
seeds.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 193-207. 1919. — This is a continuation of work which was
reported upon in 1913. The purpose of the investigation was without screening to find a
method of killing the seeds of Cuscuta in a lot of leguminous seeds. It was found that
due to the different sizes of the seeds of C. arvensis and C. Trifolii screening would not
separate the former from seeds of Trifolium. The method devised wras that of heating
the lot; incidentally it was found that the seeds of Mcdicago saliva, Trifolium pratense, Tri-
folium repens and Lotus corniculatus did not lose their vitality when exposed to the temper-
atures of experiment, i.e., 65°C. for one and two hours, 70°C. for one hour and 75PC. for one
hour. In fact it was found that the number of seeds of these leguminosae germinating was in
some cases greater after the treatment. The striking advantage was also found that the
seeds of Cuscuta most easily screened out of seeds of the legume was the one that seemed
to resist heat a little better (C. Trifolii) while the other (0. arvensis) was most easily killed.
When tried in soil, the germinability of the two was found to decrease from 43.6 per cent to
ll.S per cent in C. Trifolii and from 55.6 per cent to 0.2 per cent for C. arvensis Avhen heated
for one hour at 75 °C. — A. Bonazzi.

154 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. V,

1113. Brown, Edgar. Voluntary labeling by seedsmen. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Ana-
lysts 1919: 41^12. 1919. — Following a suggestion made by the Department of Agriculture,
many large seed houses and firms pledged their support to the proposal that seedsmen label
all farm seeds sold, giving on each lot of 10 pounds or more, purity, germination, and date
when tested, and if imported, the country of origin. A series of purchases of seeds from seed
dealers throughout the country showed that 78 per cent of the samples were not labeled,
however, "a larger percentage of the seedsmen who specifically agreed to label their seeds
were found to comply with the agreement than was the case with seedsmen who did not so
express themselves." — M. T. Munn.

1114. Brown, W. H. Philippine fiber plants. Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 19.
115 p., 28 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1304.

1115. Brunol, Gil Morice. Algunos pastos naturales de Mexico. [Natural pastures in
Mexico.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 4 : 58-62. 1 fig. 1919. — Outlines the different types of pasture
grasses in Mexico. — John A. Stevens.

1116. Burgess, J. L. Relation of varying degrees of heat to the viability of seeds. Proc.
Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919: 48-51. 1919. — The author conducted experiments with
corn, wheat, oats, rye, cowpeas, soy beans, and garden beans — seeds most liable to injury
by insect pests, with a view of ascertaining the critical temperature above which the viability
of each species is affected. The results of the experiments are given in tabular form. —
M. T. Munn.

1117. Call, L. E. Director's report. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917-18. 63 p. 1918.—
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entries 1466, 2024.

1118. Chambliss, Charles E. Prairie rice culture in the United States. U. S. Dept.
Agric. Farmers Bull. 1092. 26 p., 13 fig. 1920.

1119. Clayton, W. F. The tea industry in South Africa. I. South African Jour.
Indust. 3: 112-120. PI. 1-2. 1920.— Brief history of the tea industry in Natal, and of the
cultural methods employed. — E. M. Doidge.

1120. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the Montane tussock grassland of New
Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 343-346. 2 fig. 1919.— This is the fourth of a series
of articles dealing with the Montane tussock grassland. The California thistle, C'nicus
arvensis, is reported as becoming firmly established in some areas which were bare from over-
grazing. It seems to be palatable to some animals, and may help to establish other useful
plants, in which case it should not be considered a weed. — N. J. Giddings.

1121. Cowgill, H. B. Cross pollination of sugar cane. Jour. Dept. Agric. and Labor
Porto Rico 3 : 1-5. 1919.— See Bot .Absts. 5, Entry 1478.

1122. Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Plantes etproduits filamenteuxet textiles del'Indo-
chine. [Fiber- and textile-producing plants of Indo-China.] Bull. Econ. Indochine 22: 813-
837. PI. 2. 1919. — A continuation of the general paper on this subject, covering the
families Asdepiadaceae, Ulmaceae, Urtricaceae, Scitamineae, Bromeliaceae, Amaryllidaceae,
Liliaceae, and Pontederiaceae. — E. D. Merrill.

1123. Crocker, William. Optimum temperatures for the after-ripening of seeds. Proc.
Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919 : 46-48. 1919. — The author made a study of freshly harvested
seeds of species of Crataegus, American linden, sugar maple, peach, and two species of
Ambrosia. These seeds are typical of those having dormant embryos. The changes that go
on and lead up to their normal germination are spoken of as after-ripening of the embryos.
The embryos of these seeds must go through certain fundamental physiological changes
before they sprout normally, since the embryos will not grow at all or only abnormally when

No. 2, September. 1920) AGRONOMY 155

they are naked and given all ordinary conditions favorable to germination. The optimum
temperature for the process of after-ripening lies in the region of 4 to 5°C, and a constant
temperature in these limits is very much more favorable than alternations between it and
higher or lower temperatures. At freezing temperatures, after-ripening of these embryos
progresses very slowly if at all, while temperature periods above 10°C. are especially detri-
mental to the process. The facts disclosed by the invest igation raise the question whether
nurserymen who layer their seeds to produce after-ripening would not do better to put the
seeds in cold storage houses at optimum temperatures of 4 to 5°C., which would lead to a
much more rapid and complete after-ripening than is attained in layering under fluctuating
temperatures. It is the belief of the author that such methods should give returns in a
greater percentage of seeds producing plants and in the general high vigor of the plants
resulting from completed after-ripened embryos. — M . T. Munn.

1124. Cross, W. E. The Kavangire cane. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer
63 : 397-399. 1 Jig. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2113.

1125. Day, James W. The relation of size, shape and number of replications of plats to
probable error in field experimentation. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12 : 100-105. 1920. — Varia-
tion is reduced by increasing the size of the plat to one-twentieth of an acre or over. Most
accurate results are obtained from plats that are long and narrow and extend in the direction
of greatest variation of the soil. An increase in the number of replications of a plat of given
size increases the accuracy of the results. — F. M. Scherlz.

1126. Deem, J. W. Pasture top-dressing test in Waipukuraw county. New Zealand Jour.
Agric. 19: 295-296. 1919. — Sheep were used in these experiments and the results for two
seasons indicate that it is well worth while to top-dress. — N. J. Giddings.

1127. Descombes, Paul. Le reboisement et le developpement economique de la France.
[Reforestation and the economic development of France.] M6m. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux
VII, 2: 103-217. 2 fig. 1918.

1128. Descombes, Paul. Installation d'exp6riencesprolongeessurleruissellement. {Pro-
tracted experiments upon stream-flow.] Mdm. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2: 17-35.
2 fig. 1918.

1129. Doblas, Jose Herrera. El trigo tremesino. [Three-months wheat.] Bol. Assoc.
Agric. [Espafia] 12 : 47-52. 1919. — Discusses a variety of wheat known as "Tremesino" (three-
months) secured by selection from the common fall type planted in Spain. Yields were much
less than with the fall variety and it is not recommended for planting except where planting
at the usual time has been impossible. The variety yielded in four experiments an average
of 10.75 hectoliters per hectarea. — John A. Stevenson.

1130. Doblas, Jose Herrera. Estudio sobre el cultivo de la almorta. [Studies in the
cultivation of the grass pea (Lathyrus sativus).] Bol. Assoc. Agric. [Espafia] 11: 665-674.
1919. — Botanical classification, uses, varieties, cultivation and yields of Lathyrus satimif
(grass pea). — John A. Stevenson.

1131. Duncan, J. Noxious weeds. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 366-368. 1919. — It is
urged that more attention be given to the destruction of noxious weeds. Weeds should be
destroyed before seeding and the assistance of the public should be enlisted to destroy weeds
as soon as they are observed. Methods of weed dissemination are discussed and means of
prevention are indicated. It is suggested that in sowing to pasture the best of seed and
plenty of it should be used in order to obtain a good close sod. This tends to choke out and
prevent growth and spread of weeds. Farmers should not admit thrashing machines to their
farm9 until the machines have been thoroughly cleaned. — N. J. Giddings.

156 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1132. Duysen, F. Ueber die Keimkraftdauer einiger landwirthschaftliche Wichtiger
Samen. [Concerning the vitality of certain agriculturally important seeds. ] Illustrierte Landw.
Zeitg. 39: 282-283. 1919. — As the result of germination experiments it was found that the
seeds of wheat, rye, barley and oats possess greater vitality than is generally supposed.
Seeds of wheat 8 years old were 80 per cent viable and those of 14 years old 10 per cent viable.
Nearly 100 per cent of wheat seeds from 1 to 7 years old germinated. Similar results were
obtained with seeds of rye, barley and oats. — John W. Roberts.

1133. Earle, F. S. Varieties of sugar cane in Porto Rico. Jour. Dept. Agric. and Labor,
Porto Rico 3: 15-55. 1919. — One of the principal objects of this paper is to show that sugar
cane varieties may be described, classified, keyed out and determined by ordinary methods of
descriptive botany or taxonomy. Heretofore, remarkably few descriptions of the cane
varieties have been published that would enable one to identify a variety. The cultural
value and characteristics of the numerous varieties grown in Porto Rico are described in detail.
A key for identification and a taxonomic description of a number of varieties is also contained
in the article. — Anthony Berg.

1134. Evans, L. A. Annual report of the acting-director of agriculture. Tasmania Agric.
and Stock Dept. Rept. 1918-19: 1-6. 1919. — -Report giving statistics on production of prin-
cipal crops. District reports are included. — D. Reddick.

1135. Fawcett, G. L. The identity of canes grown in Argentina. Internat. Sugar Jour.
22 : 135-136. 1920. — -The botanist of the Agricultural Experiment Station at Tucuman states
that Java 36 is the true P. O. J. 36 as it is grown in Java today. The probable source of this
incorrect designation is the description by Noel Deerr in his "Cane Sugar." Another inac-
curacy is calling the variety J 228 (P. O. J. 228) by two names — its own and J 139, when in
reality Java 228 is meant. Correspondence with the Java station and shipments of cane show
that the Argentina canes of Javanese origin are identical with the varieties of corresponding
names as grown in Java. — E. Koch.

1136. French, G. T. Organization, development and activities of the Association of
Official Seed Analysts of North America. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919: 15-20.
1919.

1137. Fruwirth, C. Die Anspriiche der zur Kornergewinnung gebauten Lupinearten an
Boden und Klima . [The soil and climate requirements of lupine species grown for yield of seed. ]
Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 199-200. 1919. — The soil and climate requirements of the
following species are discussed: Lwpinus luteus, L. angustifolius , L. dibits, L. cruikshanksii,
L. mutabilis, L. hirsuhis. — John W. Roberts.

1138. Fruwirth, C. Zur Frage des Verpflanzens der Luzerne. [Concerning the question
of transplanting alfalfa.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39:226. 1919. — Results obtained through
three years of experimentation indicate that greater yields of forage and seed may be expected
from a field in which the seed has been drilled in than from one in which a stand has been
obtained by transplantation. The advantages and disadvantages of both methods are dis-
cussed.— John W. Roberts.

1139. Gajon, Carlos. Cultivo del chicharo de vaca. [Cultivation of the cowpea.] Rev.
Agric. [Mexico] 5 : 26-34. 5 fig. 1919. — Explains the value of a green manure crop, the manner
of fixation of nitrogen by legumes and outlines the culture of cowpeas, a green manure crop
well adapted to Mexican conditions. — John A. Stevenson.

1140. Gammie, G. A. Report of the imperial cotton specialist. Sci. Rept. Agric. Res.
Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 115-124. 1919. — The report summarizes the qualities of some of the var-
ious varieties of cotton grown in India, and outlines experiments either in progress or contem-
plated to improve the cotton yield.— W infield Dudgeon.

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 157

1141. Gardner, II. A. Research in the paint industry. Sci. Ainer. 122: 89. 1920. —
Observations on the growing of soya beans and manufacturing of soya oil used in mixing
paints. — Chas. II. Otis.

1142. Gillette, L. S., A. C. McCandlish, and II. H. Kildek. Soiling crops for milk
production. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 187: 33-59. 1919.— This build in 1 rents of the utili-
zation of soiling crops for milk cows, discussing in this connection alfalfa, red clover, alsike,
sweet clover, field peas, cowpeas, soy beans, maize, oats, rye, foxtail millet, sweet sorghum,
Sudan grass, and the following mixtures: oats and peas, oats and vetch, barley and peas, rye
and hairy vetch, cowpeas and corn, cowpeas and sorghum, clover and timothy. A resume^
of work by other investigators is added. — C. V. Piper.

1143. Goss, W. L. Greenhouse and germination-chamber tests of crimson clover seed
compared. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919: 04. 1919. — The results of 104 compara-
tive and simultaneous germination tests of crimson clover seed, made between folds of blotting
paper and in the greenhouse in soil gave results as follows : ' 'The average of these 104 samples
in the germinator was 50 per cent. The average germination of these same samples tested
in soil in the greenhouse was 42 per cent." — M. T. Munn.

1144. Griffiths, David. Prickly pear as stock food. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers' Bull.
1072. U p. 8 fig. 1920.

1145. Guthrie, F. B., and G. W. Norris. Note on the classification of wheat varieties.
Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 243-244. 1920. — Classification based on milling values. —
L. R. Waldron.

1140. Hadlington, James. Poultry Notes. February. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31 : 137-141. 1920. — Notes on growing alfalfa, Medicago sativa. — L. R. Waldron.

1147. Hansen, W. Degeneration und Saatgutwechsel. [Degeneration and seed variation.]
Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 558-500. 1919. — The writer discusses the degeneration in the
yield and quality of various field crops and strongly advises seed selection as a remedy there-
for.— John W. Roberts.

1148. Harrington, Geo. T. Comparative chemical analyses of Johnson grass seeds and
Sudan grass seeds. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919: 58-04. 1919. — A brief account
of the results of comparative microchemical and permeability studies, also, gross chemical
analyses of the seeds of these two closely related grass plants are given. These studies were
made to determine whether there are any differences in their chemical nature, which might
serve as a basis for explaining their marked difference in dormancy, germinating and after-
ripening. — M. T. Munn.

1149. Harrison, W. H. Report of the Imperial Agricultural Chemist. Sci. Rept. Agric.
Res. Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 35-45. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2271.

1150. Haywood, A. H. Elephant, Para, and Guinea grasses at Wollongbar. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 0. 1920. — Growth results given for Pennisctum purpureum, Panicum
muticum and P. maximum, respectively. Elephant grass gave largest bulk of feed, was
drought resistant and stimulated milk yields. Para grass covered the ground forming suc-
culent, feed, which remained green throughout the winter. — L. R. Waldron.

1151. Heiduschka, A., and S. Felser. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Fettsauren des Erd-
nussoles. [Fatty acids of peanut oil.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs.- u. Genussmittel 38:
241-205. 1919. — The composition of the fatty acids of the peanut oil examined was: Ara-
chidic 2.3 per cent, Lignoceric 1.9 per cent, Stearic 4.5 per cent, Palmitic 4.0 per cent, Oleic
79.9 per cent, Linoleic 7.4 per cent. — H. G. Barbour.

158 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1152. Helweg, L. Sale of Danish root seed with guarantee for genuineness. Seed World
73: 24-26. 1920. — This article deals with the Danish methods of growing seeds of carrots,
mangels, rutabagas, and turnips and the guaranteeing of the genuineness of the varieties and
strains, a method now adopted by nine of the important seed dealers. — M. T. Munn.

1153. Hilgendorf, F. W. Methods of plant breeding. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19:
354-358. 1919. — The work of several investigators is briefly reviewed and the conclusion
drawn that simple selection for the improvement of self fertilized plants, such as wheat, is
not considered as very hopeful. — N. J. Giddings.

1154. Hillman, F. H. Rhode Island bent seed and its substitutes in the trade. Proc.
Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919:64-68. 1919. — In this paper the author reports recent
investigations which show that there are certain seed characteristics peculiar to each of the
species, by means of which the kinds of seed may be distinguished and to a certain extent their
true proportions in a mixture determined. The source of the seed, shown or indicated by the
kinds of weed seeds and extraneous crop seeds present, is also an aid in determining the kind
of seed and liability of mixture due to condition of growth and trade practice. Attention iB
directed by the author to detailed and illustrative descriptions of the seeds of bent grasses
found in Bulletin 692, Professional Series, U. S. Department of Agriculture. — M. T. Munn.

1155. Hite, Bertha C. Forcing the germination of bluegrass. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed
Analysts 1919: 53-58. 1919. — Experiments designed to ascertain the effect of light, tempera-
ture, and nutrient solutions on the germination of Kentucky bluegrass and Canada bluegrass
are discussed. The experiments lead to the conclusions that: A complete viability test of
Kentucky blue grass can be obtained in the dark with an exact 20°-30°C. alternation, lender
constant temperature conditions this grass gives a higher germination in the light. — An alter-
nation of 20°-30°C. in a dark chamber does not give a complete viability test of Canada blue-
grass. — Direct sunlight or diffuse light a few hours each day with approximately a20°-30°C.
alternation gives a complete viability test of both Canada blue grass and Kentucky bluegrass.
— Nutrient solutions with 20°-30°C. alternation in the dark give a complete viability test of
both Kentucky bluegrass and Canada bluegrass. — So far we have not been able to find an alter-
nation of temperature alone that would give a complete viability test of all samples of Canada
bluegrass. — M. T. Munn.

1156. Hodson, Edgar A. Upland long staple cotton in Arkansas. Arkansas Agric. Exp.
Sta. Circ. 49: 1-4. 1920. — The conditions under which upland long staple cotton varieties
may be expected to produce a profitable crop are given together with a map showing the
regions suited to the culture of long staple, intermediate, and short staple cottons. — John A .
Elliott.

1157. Hodson, Edgar A. Cotton Club manual. Arkansas Agric. Exp. Circ. 84: 1-26.
// fig. 1920. — A popular manual covering the history, physiology, histology, culture, and!
use of the cotton plant. — John A. Elliott.

1158. Hodson, Edgar A. Lint frequency in cotton with a method for determination.
Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 168: 1-12. 1920. — Lint frequency was determined for 100
seed samples from 10 plants each of 25 varieties of cotton under test. The length of lint was
determined, also the percentage of lint by weight. The seed was delinted with sulphuric aciil
and the volume determined by displacement in alcohol. The weight of lint of a uniform length
of 25 mm. was calculated to give an accurate comparison of weight of lint produced per squaio
centimeter of seed surface. The lint index for a plant represents the average amount of lint
produced on one seed. Six tables are given showing the lint index, lint percentage, lint length,
and lint frequency of the varieties studied. — "High lint frequency is closely correlated with
short lint, therefore, it is necessary in making selections for high lint frequency to consider
length and per cent of lint." — John A. Elliott.

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 159

1159. Howard, A., avd G. L. C. Report of the Imperial Economic Botanist. Sci. Rept.
Agric. Res. Inst. Push 1918-19 : 46-67. PI. 5-6. 1919. — The report includes a summary of the
progress of investigations during the year under report, a program for 1919-20, and a list of
literature published. Improved wheats (Trilicum vulgarc) "Pusa 4" and "Pusa 12" have
produced yields of 3350 pounds and 3000 pounds respectively per acre, under good cultivation,
in contrast with the very low yields of ordinary Indian wheats under Indian methods of culti-
vation. These improved wheats are being sent to other countries for trial. Other work in-
cludes methods of culture and improvement of indigo (Indigo/era tinctoria); sun-drying of
vegetables; methods of packing fruit for shipment; pollination of Indian crop plants; and soil
drainage. Poor drainage in the Gangetic Plains during the monsoon interferes with proper
root development and promotes excessive denitrification. Actual crop production under
improved methods of cultivation indicate that with small expenditure of organic fertilizer
the fertility of alluvial soils may be maintained or improved. — Winfield Dudgeon.

1160. Howe, II. E. The future of the cotton industry. What organized research promises
to do for grower and manufacturer. Sci. Amer. 122 : 300. 1920.

1161. Hutchinson, C. M. Report of the Imperial Agricultural Bacteriologist. Sci. Rept.
Agric. Res. Inst, Pusa 1918-19: 106-114. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2282.

1162. Hyde, W. C. Orchard cover-crop experiments on the Mountere Hills. New Zea-
land Jour. Agric. 19: 364-365. 1 fig. 1919. — This is the final report of a 4-year series of ex-
periments. Oats made a good growth and oats with partridge peas were particularly good.
Blue lupine was the best of the legumes and it made much the strongest growth on limed
area. — N. J . Giddings.

1163. Jones, Earl. Northern grown seed wins in Massachusetts. Potato Mag. 29: 24,
29. 1920.

1164. Jordan, W. H., and G. W. Churchill. An experience in crop production. New
York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 465. 20 p. 1919. — An account of an experiment in which
a 4-year rotation of crops (corn, oats, wheat, and hay) was carried through four rotations
on plats fertilized in different ways — with farm manure, a complete chemical fertilizer, a par-
tial chemical fertilizer, and no fertilizer. On some plats the hay crop was red clover; on
others, timothy. The total amount of dry matter produced wTas somewhat greater on plats
treated with farm manure than on plats receiving a complete chemical fertilizer; and about
56 per cent greater than on unfertilized plats. Especially noteworthy is the fact that crop
production was maintained as efficiently on the timothy plats as on clover plats. The results
of a series of soil analyses made in connection with the experiment show the unreliability of
soil analysis as a means of measuring soil fertility. — F. C. Stewart.

1165. Jo vino, S. Osservazioni sull'aridocoltura italiana. [Observations upon dry farm-
ing in Italy.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 69-121, 125-192. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2328.

1166. Kellogg, James W. Seed report, 1918. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. 23: 1-29.
5 pi. 1919. — The bulletin includes a table giving standards of purity for various seeds; re-
sults of tests on special samples; average purity of official samples; results of inspection and
analyses in tabular form; and illustrations of the noxious weed seeds found in farm seeds. —
C. R. Orion.

1167. Kellogg, James W. Seed report, 1920. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. 34: 1-28.
1920. — Standards of purity established by the Seed Law for 20 kinds of seeds are given; also
the results of special samples tesfed for purity; the average purity of official samples and the
results of inspection are discussed and the data arranged in tabular form. — C. R. Orton.

1168. Kerle, W. D., and R. N. Makin. Farmers' experiment plots. Winter fodder
trials, 1919. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 77-83. 1920.— In the Upper North Coast dis-

160 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

trict, trials of cereals and legumes with and without fertilizers were carried out by a number
of farmers. Results showed the practice to be successful. In the South Coast district cereals
were tried without manures, with success. — L. R. Waldron.

1169. Killer, J. Uber die Bewertung der Centaurea solstitialis als Charakterbegleitsame
bei der Herkunftsbestimmung von Kleesaaten. [Concerning the value of Centaurea solstitialis
as an indicator of the origin of clover seed.l Jour. Landw. 67: 109-110. 1919. — Centaurea
solstitialis has long been recognized as indicating a southern European origin of clover seed.
As this plant in recent years has been growing in Alsace in increasing abundance its seed may
also be found in clover seed from there. — C. E. Leighty.

1170. Koerner, W. F. Auf welche Krankheitsformen ist beim "Burchsehen" und "Aus-
hauen" der zur Saatgewinnung bestimmten Kartoffelfelder besonders zu achten. [What dis-
eases are to be considered especially in going through and thinning out potato fields from which
seed potatoes are to be selected.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 323-324. Fig. 252-259. 1919.

1171. Lansdell, K. A. Some common adulterants found in agricultural seeds. I. Jour.
Dept. Agric. Union South Africa 1 : 26-31. Plates II-IV. 1920.

1172. Lewis, A. C, and C. A. McLendon. Cotton variety tests. Georgia State Bd.
Entomol. Circ. 29. 20 p. 1920.- — Outlines tests with twenty-eight varieties of cotton (Gos-
sypium) for 1919 conducted in the following Georgia counties: Sumter, Stewart, Dooley,
Burke, Wilks, Douglas and Habersham. In each test, from ten to twenty varieties were
used. Summaries of the various tests and recommendations of the varieties for different
sections and under different conditions are given. Lists are appended of cooperative cotton
growers and of parties from whom cotton seed may be purchased. — T. H. Mc Hat ton.

1173. Macpherson, A. Lucerne growing for seed. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 369-
371. 1919. — -This article discusses the preparation of the seed bed, general cultural methods,
weather conditions, harvesting the seed crop, etc. Conclusions are drawn that good crops
of lucerne seed may be produced on well drained soil of average fertility. Very rich land and
soil supplied with an abundance of moisture produce herbage rather than seed. Thick stands
of lucerne are not favorable for good seed production. During the period devoted to the seed
crop, two crops of hay may be taken from thick stands, which will be found of more profit.
Old stands that are thinning out will often produce good crops of seed. The best practice for
seed production is to establish a special wide-spaced stand by sowing the seed in rows 28 inches
or more apart and cultivating two or three times. — N. J. Giddings.

1174. Macpherson, A. Lucerne-culture tests at Ashburton Experimental Farm. New
Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 288-293. 1919. — Experiments were conducted to indicate the proper
amount of seed ; the best method of sowing, and the effects of lime and fertilizers. As a result
of these tests it is recommended: Seed should be sown in drills from 14 to 21 inches apart,
to admit of cultivation ; that not less than 15 pounds of seed per acre should be used ; and that
lime should be used, but not fertilizers. — -N. J . Giddings.

1175. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 1. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 117-120. 1920. — A brief historical survey of Opuntia spp. as an Australian pest is pre-
sented.— L. R. Waldron.

1176. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 2. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 195-199. 1920. — Remarks on possible minor uses of Opuntia spp. — L. R. Waldron.

1177. McDiarmid, R. W., andG. C. Sparks. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experi-
ments, 1918-19. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 37-42. 1920.— Yields are given for different
varieties in the New England district and the southwestern slopes at different points, with dif-
ferent manures and for different cultural methods. Artificial manures proved to be
valuable. — L. R. Waldron.

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 161

1178. McDiarmid, R. W. Grain sorghums in northern districts. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31: 17-18. 1920. — Satisfactory results were obtained at Pallamallawa and Ten-
terfield with 5 varieties of Andropogou sorghum, used both as green feed and for grain pro-
duction. The maximum yield of grain was 28 bushels per acre from Kaoliang, which was also
the earliest variety. — L. R. Waldron.

1179. McKay, J. W. Assam Experiment Station. Rept. Karimganj Agric. Exp. Sta.
1918-19: 1-16. 1919. — Annual report of Director of the Assam Experiment Station, recording
progress in methods of cultivation and selection of promising varieties of commonly culti-
vated field crops. — Winfield Dudgeon.

1180. Menges, Fra.vklin. Report on soils and crops. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric.
I1: 111-114. 1918. — Some brief considerations of the conditions favoring the conservation of
food materials in the soil and what may be expected by a proper supplementation of them. —
C. R. Orton.

1181. Miege, E. Le deslnfection du sol. [The disinfection of the soil.] Prog. Agric. et
Vitic. 74: 133-140. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2284.

1182. Mieville, R. Note sur le theier sauvage du Phou-Sang Region du Tranninh (Haut-
Laos). [Note on the wild tea of Phou-Sang.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 87-99. 1920.

1183. Mitscherlich, Eilh. Alfred. Zum Gehalt der Haferpfianze an Phosphorsiiure
und seinen Beziehungen zu der durch eine Nahrstoffzufuhr bedingten Ertragserhohung. [On
the phosphoric acid content of the oat plant and its relation to the increased yield resulting from
addition of nutrients.] Jour. Landw. 67: 171-176. 1 fig. 1919. — The law which Pfeiffer and
others believe they have established is not confirmed by these investigations. — C. E. Leighty.

11S4. Munter, Dr. Pflanzenanalyse und Diingerbedurfnis des Bodens. [Plant analysis
and fertilizer requirement of the soil.] Jour. Landw. 67: 229-266. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 2275.

1185. Myers, C. H. The use of a selection coefficient. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:
106-112. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1590.

1186. Nelson, Martin, and L. W. Osborn. Report of oats experiments 1908-1919.
Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 165. 32 p., 2 pi. 1920. — Thirteen tables are given showing
yields of 45 varieties of fall seeded and spring seeded oats under different dates of sowing and
different rates of seeding. Tests were carried on in different sections of the state upon various
types of soil. Recommendations are made of varieties adapted to different sections of the
state and as to the cultural methods to be followed. — John A. Elliott.

1187. Nelson, Martin, and Edgar A. Hodson. Varieties of cotton, 1919. Arkansas
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 166. 8 p. 1920. — Five tables are given showing the rank in seed cot-
ton, lint production, seed production, and value of lint per acre of from 8 to 25 varieties, tested
in various parts of the state, on different types of soil. — John A. Elliott.

118S. Olivares, Daniel. Cultivo del lupulo. [Cultivation of hops.] Revista Agric.
[Mexico] 3 : 374-378. Ibid. 4 : 12-16, 62-64. 2 fig. 1919.— An account of the importance and
possibilities of hops as a crop in Mexico giving details, botanical description, varieties, culti-
vation, fertilizers, manner of harvesting and yields. — John A. Stevenson.

1189. Ortiz, Ruben. Rotacion y alternacion de los cultivos. [Rotation and alternation
of crops.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico] 2: 61-64. 1920. — Popular r£sum6 of reasons for crop rota-
tions. A series of rotations suitable for Mexican conditions is given. — John A. Stevenson.

1190. Oswald, W. L. Cooperation between the seed analysts and the seed trade. Proc.
Assoc. Official Seed Analysts 1919: 38-41. 1919.

162 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1191. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. An annual white sweet clover. Proc. Iowa Acad.
Sci. 25: 249-251. PI. 4-6. 1920. — Origin and history of an annual strain of Melilotus alba
found at Ames, Iowa. — H. S. Conard.

1192. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. Test your clover and timothy seed. Iowa Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 59. 2 p. 1919.

1193. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. Johnson grass as a weed in southwestern Iowa.
Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 55. 4 P-> 3 fig. 1919. — Johnson grass has become established in
southern Iowa, and promises to become a menace to the farmers. A brief discussion is given,
including a botanical description of the grass and seed, together with methods of extermi-
nation.— Florence Willey.

1194. Pavoni, P. A. El cultivo de la higuerilla. [Cultivation of the castor bean.] Jalisco
Rural [Mexico] 2 : 41-45. 1919. — A compiled account of the cultivation of the castor bean. —
John A. Stevenson.

1195. Pieper, H. Beschreibung einer Methode zur raschen Erkennung von Futterruben-
samen im Zuckerriibensamen. [The description of a method for rapid differentiation between
stock beet seed and sugar beet seed.] Zeitschr. Vereins Deutsch. Zucker-Indust. 766: 409-
418. 1919.

1196. Pitt, J. M. Farmers' experiment plots. Winter green fodder exepriments, 1919.
Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 7-12. 8 fig. 1920. — Soiling crops are recommended for
winter and spring in the Central Coast district, as dry weather invariably occurs. Cultural
details and yield results are given for 10 localities (or less) for 8 varieties of wheat, 5 of oats
and vetches and peas in combination with wheat or oats. The maximum yield of over 21 tons
was secured from Thew wheat and peas. — L. R. Waldron.

1197. Pitt, J. M., and R. W. McDiarmid. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experi-
ments, 1918-19. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 99-105. 1920.— Different varieties, with
and without phosphatic manures, were grown at various localities in the Central Coastal dis-
trict. The use of manures generally showed profits. The Improved Yellow Dent gave a
maximum yield of 125 bushels per acre. Light yields were secured in the Northern districts.
— L. R. Waldron.

m WVMtBWKV

1198. Powers, W. L., and W. W. Johnston. The improvement and irrigation require-
ment of wild meadow and tule land. Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 167. 44 P-,25 fig. 1920. —
There are more than 515,000 acres of wild meadow and tule land in eastern Oregon, the former
comprising more than one-third of the irrigated area of the state. The chief vegetation
in the peat swamps consists of tules and flags, mingled with wire grass and sugar grass,
while the chief meadow grasses are redtop, blue-joint, meadow grass and wild clover. In
the Chewaucan Basin alsike clover and timothy have yielded 3{- tons an acre as compared to
1 ton of native grass on adjoining land. Alfalfa in the Harney Basin has produced about 2
tons an acre, while native wild hay has averaged but $ ton an acre. In the Fort Klamath
region alsike clover and timothy have yielded more than double the amount of forage pro-
duced by native grasses. Results from 5 years experiments have shown that an average depth
of 18 inches of water on the field could produce the maximum yield now obtained, while an
average of 12 inches has given the largest yield per acre per inch of water used. The average
cost for the production of wild hay has been nearly double that required for alsike clover and
timothy. Marked increases in yield of alfalfa have been secured from an application of sul-
fur to swamp border soils. — E. J. Kraus.

1199. Ramsay, J. T. Is change of seed necessary in the cultivation of potatoes? Jour.
Dept. Agric. Victoria 17: 651-657. 1919. — The selection of home grown seed potatoes has
given as good results as imported seed potatoes. — J. J. Skinner.

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 163

1200. Ravaz, L. Le nitrate d'ammoniaque. [Ammonium nitrate.] Prog. Agric. et Vitic.
74:33-34. 1 fig. 1920.

1201. Rindl, M. Vegetablefatsandoils.il. Drying oils. South African Jour. Induct.
3:121-127. 1920.

1202. Robbins, \V. W. The organization of the Colorado seed laboratory. Proc. Assoc.
Official Seed Analysts 1919: 35-38. 1919.

1203. Robbins, W. W. Research and seed testing. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts
1919:20-22. 1919.

1204. Robin, J. Les differentes varietes de riz cultivees a la station de Cantho. [The
different varieties of rice cultivated at the Cantho station.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2:
40-45. 1920. — Brief notes on the characters of 22 varieties of rice. — E. D. Merrill.

1205. Salmon, S. C. Establishing Kanred wheat in Kansas. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta.
Circ. 74. 16 p. Aug., 1919. — Kanred wheat is a hard, red, winter wheat, resembling closely
Turkey and Kharkof . It is resistant to winter killing, ripens early, yields more than any other
commercial variety in Kansas and is very resistant to leaf rust and some forms of stem rust.
It will probably be of commercial value in other states growing winter wheat. — L. E Melchcrs.

1206. Sanderson, T. Value of Red Durum or D 5 wheat. North Dakota Agric. Exp.
Sta. Special Bull. 5 : 507-517. 1920. — Deals with milling and baking values. There are pre-
sented coefficients of flour absorption, and also those for volume, color and texture of loaf.
When these coefficients are applied to the data presented the D 5 wheat was found to be
worth 23 cents per bushel less than No. 1 Amber Durum, and 38 cents less than No. 1 Hard
Red Spring, for the years 1915-1919. The D 5 showed itself inferior in all loaf characters. —
L. R. Waldron.

1207. Sayer, Wynne. Report of the Imperial Agriculturist. Sci. Rept. Agric. Res. Inst.
Pusa 1918-19: 11-34. 4 pi. 1919. — The report describes the results of experiments in crop
rotation at the Agricultural Research Institute, Pusa, India, to determine the best methods
of working the land of the Pusa farm, and field tests of new and improved varieties of com-
monly cultivated plants. A new variety of wheat (Triticum vulgare), "Hard Federation,"
stands up well in wind and rain, and yields up to 3300 pounds per acre. — W infield Dudgeon.

1208. [Schule, N., and H. L. Maxwell.] The oil in peanuts. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1:
213. 1920. [Reprinted from Chemical News (London).]

1209. Scott, John M. Bahia grass. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 112-113. 1920.— A
report of the promise of Bahia grass (Paspalum notalum), which has been introduced into
the United States from South America and Mexico. Experiments in Florida have given very
satisfactory results. — F. M. Schertz.

1210. Sparks, G. C. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments, 1918-1919. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 251-254. 1920. — Different varieties were tried in several localities,
with and without fertilizers. Fertilizers had a marked positive effect upon yield. — L. R.

Waldron.

1211. Sparks, G. C., B. C. Meek, and R. W. McDiarmid. Farmers' experiment plots.
Wheat and oats experiments, 1919. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 153-164. 1920.— Trials
with wheat, also oats and barley, were carried out in three districts with a number of coopera-
tors. The experiments dealt with the effect of fertilizing, early and late sowing, crop-harrow-
ing, fallowing, rate of seeding and the effect of using graded and ungraded and acclimatized
and unacclimatized seed. Yields and bushel weights of grain are given. Working the land
after the rain gave growth and returns superior to that worked only prior to the rain and

164 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

while the land was dry. The value of the properly compacted seed bed was demonstrated in
the long and short fallowing plots and the May preparation with the spring-toothed cultivator
only. The use of superphosphate with a quick maturing variety on the long and short f allowed
land is unnecessary. Good jaelds on the long fallow plainly demonstrated the value of that
system. — L. R. Waldron.

1212. Stuckey, H. P. Further studies in fertilizing and storing sweet potatoes. Georgia
Exp. Sta. Bull. 134: 77-87. 1920.— Bulletin 107 of the Georgia Experiment Station reports
work on fertilizing sweet potatDes (Ipo7noca batatas) which was begun in 1908, the first report
being published in 1913. This Bulletin reports on the same work from 1914-1919 inclusive.
The area utilized for the plats is Cecil clay loam, and the same kinds and amounts of ferti-
lizer have been applied to the same plats from 1908 to 1919 inclusive. Plat No. 1, fertilized at
the rate of 24 tons of stable manure per acre; plat No. 2, 2100 pounds 16-per-cent acid phos-
phate per acre; plat No. 3, 900 pounds sulphate of potash per acre; plat No. 4, 1500 pounds
nitrate of soda per acre; plat No. 5, 1800 pounds of complete fertilizer. Results show that
acid phosphate and sulphate of potash have increased the acidity of the soil. The complete
fertilizer gave the largest total yield throughout the period of the test, stable manure coming
second. Heavy nitrogenous fertilization seemed to give potatoes a lighter color and some-
what poorer flavor. The variety of sweet potatoes used since 1913 has been Myers Early.
The best quality potatoes were produced on the acid phosphate plat and the check. The pot-
ash seemed to have little influence in either color, flavor, or texture of the flesh. Potatoes
from the experimental plats were tested in storage. Those from the check plat kept better
through the winter than the others, but the data obtained were variable and a conclusion
can hardly be drawn. In testing the influence of soil types on the keeping of sweet potatoes,
potatoes grown on Cecil clay loam or red soil and on a gray phase of the Cecil clay loam were
compared; it is concluded that under local conditions, potatoes grown on gray soil keep
better than those grown on red soil. Potatoes from various plats were put in storage and loss
of weight determined. The average loss of weight was 16.6 per cent. The loss of moisture
from November 5th to March 1st was 3.73 per cent. The average total loss of weight was
16.6 per cent, and it is concluded that the percentage in loss of weight over the percentage
of loss in moisture is doubtless due to the breaking down of carbohydrates and the giving off
of carbon dioxide. In conclusion the author outlines a cooperative test on fertilizing sweet
potatoes that is being carried on by several southern stations. It states results for one year.
— T. H. McHatton.

1213. Syme, J. E. Wheat plots at Narromine, 1919. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
233-234. 1920.

1214. Syme, J. E. Farmers' experiment plots. Wheat and oats experiments, 1919. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 235-240. 1920. — Trials with wheat and oats were carried out with
several cooperators with different varieties, under various cultural methods, with the use of
manures, and with the use of home-grown and introduced seed. Yields of grain and wheat
hay are given and rainfall data presented.— L. R. Waldron.

1215. Tabor, Paul. Permanent pastures for Georgia. Georgia State Coll. Agric. Bull.
197. 36 p., 16 fig. 1920. — Discusses the following pasture plats in Georgia: Japan clover
{Lespedeza stricta), Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon), carpet grass (Axonopus compressus) ,
Dallis grass (Paspalum dilatatum), white clover (Trifolium repens), Rhodes grass (Chloris
gayana), Kudzu (Pueraria thunbergiana) , bur clover (Medicago arabica), black medic (A/.
lupulina), red top or herds grass (Agrostis alba), orchard grass (Daelylis glomerata) , tall oat
(Arrthenalherum elatius), rescue grass (Bromus unioloides) , arctic grass (Bromus secalinus),
rye grass (Lolium sps.), Kentucky blue grass (Poa pratensis), The Paspalums (Paspalum
sps.), giant carpet grass (Axonopus furcatus), broomsedge (Andropogon sps.), Indian oats
(Chrysopogon nutans), wild rye (Elymus sps.), wire grass (Aristida stricta), lightwood-knot
grass (Sporobolus curtissii), crab grass (Syntherisma sps.) , crow foot (Dactyloctenium aegyp-
tium), cane brake (Arundinaria tecta, A. macrosperma) , maiden cane (Panicum hemitomum),

No. 2, September, 1920] AGRONOMY 165

smut grass (Sporobolus berteroanus) , marsh bermuda ($]><>rt>h<>lu8 virgatus), Carolina clover
(Trifolium Carolinianum), hop clover (T. procumbeus] T. dubium). — Directions for soil prep-
aral ion and seeding are present ed by t he author and also mixtures of grass seeds suitable for
various soils of the state. — T. II. McHatton.

1216. Taylor, 11. W. Tobacco culture, grading on the farm. Rhodesia Agric. Jour.
17:20-27. 1920.

1217. Tran-van-Huu. Note sur la variete de riz dite "Hueky." [Variety of rice known
as "Hueky."] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2 : 75-78. 1920.

1218. Tran-van-Huu. Note sur la culture du riz flottant en Cochinchine. [Cultiva-
vation of floating rice in Cochinchina.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 46-52. 1920. — Notes
on ten varieties and a description of the methods used in growing these forms of the rice
plant which are peculiarly adapted to inundation. — E. D. Merrill.

1219. Vageler, H. Beziehung zwischen Parzellengrosse und Fehler der Einzelbeobach-
tung bei Feldversuchen. [Relation between size of plot and error of the single observation in
field experimentation.] Jour. Landw. 67:97-108. Ifig. 1919. — Rye, oats, potatoes, and kohl-
rabi fields were each divided into 128 small rectangular plots, of which the yields were separ-
ately determined. The probable errors of the average yields of these plots considered singly
and in different combinations were calculated. Different results were obtained according to
the method and procedure followed, but when using the method considered least objectionable
the probable error is not greatly reduced by enlarging the plots above about 50 square meters.
— C. E. Leighty.

1220. Vernet, G., and X. Salomon. Notes sur le Fourcroya gigantea Vent. [Notes on
Fourcroya gigantea Vent.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 80-87. PI. 2. 1920.

1221. Waldron, L. R. First generation crosses between two alfalfa species. Jour. Amer.
Soc. Agron. 12: 133-143. 1920.

1222. Walster, H. L. Marquis versus durum wheats. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta.
Ext. Div. Circ. 34. 8 p. 1920.— Summary of North Dakota yields.— L. R. Waldron.

1223. Weeks, Charles R. Growing alfalfa in western Kansas. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta.
Circ. 73. 10 p. July, 1919. — Information is given on soil requirements, seed bed preparation,
date, rate and method of seeding, nurse crops, cultivation, time of cutting, seed crops, vari-
eties and insects injurious to alfalfa in Kansas. — L. E. Melchers.

1224. Welton, F. A. Experiments with oats. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5:
79-83. 7 tables. 1920. — The article comprises tests of time, rate, manner, quality and vari-
eties of seed. — R. C. Thomas.

1225. Wenholz, H. Field peas as fodder. A substitute for wheat and oats. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 167-170. 1920.

1226. Wenholz, H. Soil improvement for maize. I. Manures and fertilizers. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 29-35, 111-116, 117-183. 1920.

1227. Wenholz, H. Fertilizers for green winter fodders. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:241-242. 1920.

1228. Westbrook, E. C. Tobacco culture. Bright leaf or flue-cured tobacco. Georgia
State Coll. Agric. Bull. 199. 86 p., 13 fig. 1920.— Discusses a development in history of the
bright tobacco (Nicotiana tabacum) industry in Georgia and considers advisability of increas-
ing the crop. Discusses tobacco soils, crop rotation and general principles of tobacco culture,

166 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

beginning with the preparation of the plant bed, and including transplanting, cultivating,
insect enemies and diseases. Outlines directions for harvesting and curing, as well as for
storage. Gives plans and suggestions for storage barns and curing sheds. — T. H. McHatton.

1229. Willey, Florence. The vegetative organs of some perennial grasses. Proc. Iowa
Acad. Sci. 25: 341-367. Fig. 121-144. 1920.

1230. Williams, C. G. Clipping tests of oats and wheat. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp.
Sta. 5:20-23. 4 tables. 1920.

1231. Winters, S. R. Paper from cottonseed waste. Sci. Amer. 122: 299. 2 fig. 1920.

1232. Wright, I. A. Thehistoryof the cane sugar industry in the West Indies. Louisiana
Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 62 : 414-415. Ibid. 63 : 14-15, 108-109, 222-223, 237-239, 414-
415. 1919.

1233. Young, J. P. Report of Committee on the Cereal Crops. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept.
Agric. I1: 11-13. 1918. — A report of the acreage, average yield per acre, estimated total pro-
duction, average price per bushel, and estimated total value of the wheat, corn, rye, oats,
buckwheat, potatoes, tobacco and hay crops in Pennsylvania for the year 1917. A compara-
tive table with the yields per acre in 1916 is also given. — C. R. Orton.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Lincoln W. Riddle, Editor

1234. Anonymous. Brief account of the life and works of Reginald Philip Gregory. Jour.
Botany 57: 47. 1919.

1235. Anonymous. C.S.Harrison. Florists' Exchange 47: 413. 1 fig. 1919.

1236. Anonymous. William J. Stewart. Florists' Exchange 47:413. 1 fig. 1919.

1237. Anonymous. Lewis S. Ware 1851-1918. Internat. Sugar Jour. 21: 113. / pi.
1919. — Lewis S. Ware, the distinguished sugar engineer, publisher, and author, of Philadel-
phia and Paris, made a special study of sugar beet industry and attempted unsuccessfully to
establish it in the United States in 1873. In 1879 he established at Philadelphia a monthly
publication, The Sugar Beet, which continued for 32 years. He also published pamphlets and
books, his principal work being "Beet Sugar Manufacture and Refining," which is one of the
standard works on this subject. Dr. Ware collected a sugar library of 12,000 volumes, which
he has bequeathed to the Franklin Institute of Philadelphia. — C. Rumbold.

1238. Baker, C. F. A contribution to Philippine and Malayan technical bibliography.
Work fundamental to plant pathology and economic entomology. Philippine Agric. 8: 32-37.
1919. — This bibliography gives mycological and entomological publications, each of which
is based wholly or in part on the field results of the compiler, in the Philippines and Malaysia,
during the period from 1913 to 1918, inclusive. The object of the index is to aid the investi-
gator in obtaining the literature on these subjects, and to illustrate the great value of coopera-
tion between scientists. — S. F. Trelease.

1239. Biggar, H. Howard. The old and the new in corn culture. U. S. Dept. Agric.
Yearbook 1918: 123-137. 4 pi., 10 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 28.

1240. Britten, James. Bibliographical notes. LXXVI.— Henry W. Burgess's "Eido-
dendron." Jour. Botany 57: 223-224. 1919. — A review of this work published in London in
1827 and bearing the full title "Eidodendrox: Views of the general character and appearance
of Trees, foreign and indigenous, connected with Picturesque Scenery." The work is of

No. 2, September, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 107

little or no botanical interest. Its only interest to the botanist is in connection w it h an essay
headed "Botanical Diversions 1" followed by a large title "Amoenitates Querneae." Here
is included a comprehensive account of the oak in literature, history, poetry and commerce.
The author of this essay was probably a more competent man than Burgess. Gilbert
Burnett is often cited as the probable author. [See also next following Entry, 1241.] — K.
M. Wiegand.

1241. Britten, James. Bibliographical notes, LXXVII. John Ellis's directions for col-
lectors. Jour. Botany 57 : 521 . 1919. — This is an analysis of a damaged copy of this work pub-
lished in 1771, which has lately been presented to the Department of Botany of the British
Museum. It is entitled "Directions for bringing over Seeds and Plants from the East-Indies
and other distant Countries in a State of Vegetation" and is anonymous. It proves to be a
reissue of the first portion of the pamphlet published in 1770 by John Ellis, with some addi-
tional matter included. [See also next preceding Entry, 1240.] — K. M. Wiegand.

1242. Cockayne, L. Presidential address. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Technol. 2: 241-
251. July, 1919. — Address delivered before the New Zealand Institute Science Congress,
at Christchurch, 1919. Traces briefly the history of the New Zealand Institute, its activities,
publications, equipment, influence, and aims. Urges the public support, financial and other-
wise, of research in "pure" science, whether or not the given investigation has "an evident
practical bearing." Notes the need of research in New Zealand in plant physiology and plant
diseases. — C. S. Gager.

1213. Farr, Bertrand H. The peony and its people — from amateur to professional.
Flower Grower 6: 102. 1919. — References to the modern varieties of the peony and personal
glimpses of those who produced them. — W. N. Clute.

1214. Gagnepain, F. Edouard Bureau. Sa vie et son oeuvre. [Life and work of Edouard
Bureau.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 31 : 209-218. Portrait. 1919.— Edouard Bureau (1830-1918), ento-
mologist, geologist and botanist, had a part in founding La Societe Botanique de France. In
1874 A. de Jussieu's chair of .plant classification at the Paris Museum was reestablished, and
Bureau was selected to occupy it. In this position he worked for more than 30 years in aug-
menting the great herbarium, developing the colonial floras, establishing a permanent ex-
hibition of vegetable products, studying the palaeobotanical collections of Brongniart, and
presenting courses in the Museum. A list of Bureau's 158 botanical contributions is ap-
pended.— L. W. Sharp.

1245. Guinet, A. Auguste Schmidely. Sa biographie. [The biography of August Schmid-
ely.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 377-379. 1918.— Schmidely is known for his study of the
genera Rosa and Rubus. The results of his study from plants collected in the Swiss Alps are
published mostly in the bulletin cited. He was born Jan. 26, 1838, and died Oct. 28, 1918.—
W. H. Emig.

1246. Holm, Theo. The history of the popular name "Flower De Luce" or "Fleur De Lis"
of the Iris. Rhodora 21 : 180-1S1. 1919. — A short discussion of the derivation of this name.
It appears to have been first applied to the yellow iris growing on the shores of the river Lys
in Flanders. The derivation dates back to the year 468 when the Franks left Flanders to
invade and conquer Gaul, establishing the kingdom of France. In commemoration of their
birthplace they selected this flower for their emblem. The name "Fleur deLys" is therefore
an abbreviation of "Fleur de la Lys." — James P. Poole.

1247. Lee, A. Atherton. Plant pathology in Japan. Phytopath. 9: 17S-179. 1919. —
The development of plant pathology in Japan commenced with Dr. Shirai's lectures at the
Agricultural College, Tokyo, in 1886. Eighty pathologists now have a thriving society w hich
publishes a journal with articles in English, German and Japanese. The latter are abstracted
in English. — R. E. Vaughan.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

168 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1248. Meyer, Rud. Heinrich Poselger. Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 97-100. 1919.
— There is given an account of the life of Poselger, his travels in Mexico in 1849-51, and his
death in 1883.— A. S. Hitchcock.

1249. Nelson, J. C. A little known botanist. Amer. Botany 25 : 129-133. 1919.— Juan
Loureiro born in Lisbon, 1715. At the age of 20, visited Cochin China and later collected
extensively there and in China proper, Cambodia, Bengal, and Malabar. He published Flora
Cochinchinensis in 1790, and various shorter works in Portuguese. — W. N. Clute.

1250. Nicholson, Wm. Edw. A reminiscence of the late Dr. Emil Levier. Bryologist
21 : 85-86. 1918. — The author gives an account of an evening spent with Dr. and Mme. Levier,
and tells about the methods used by Dr. Levier in mounting specimens. — Edward B. Cham-
berlain.

1251. Peacock, Josiah C. Franklin Muhlenberg Apple, Ph. G., Phar. D. Memoir. Amer.
Jour. Pharm. 91 : 546-550. 1919.

1252. Petch, T. Garcia da Orta's mongoose plants. Ceylon Antiquary and Literary
Register 43: 143-149. 1919. — Discussion of the three plants of Ceylon, alleged to have been
used as an antidote of snake poison, and described by the Portuguese physician Garcia
da Orta, who lived at Goa from 1534 to about 1570. The first of these plants, which the
ichneumon of fable seeks in order to protect itself against the bite of the cobra, is Rauvolfia
serpentina. The second of Orta's species, the wood of which was formerly sent to Europe as
Lignum colubrinum, was identified by Linne with Strychnos nux-vomica. In the author's
opinion it is S. trichocalyx. The third species, hitherto unidentified, is determined as Hemi-
desmus indicus (Singhalese iramusu). None of these plants appears to be in use as a remedy
for snake bite at the present day, nor are they enumerated in the recipes for snake-bite reme-
dies, twenty in number, which Hoatson collected in Uva in 1822. — B. Laufer.

1253. Prain, (Sir) David. "John" Roxburgh. Jour. Botany 57: 28-34. 1919.— A dis-
cussion of the identity of "Roxburgh, junior," alluded to in Dr. William Roxburgh's Flora
Indica. — K. M. Wiegand.

1254. Sewell, M. C. Tillage: a review of the literature. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 2:
269-290. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1883.

1255. Stringer, H. B. George Arnold. Florists' Exchange 48: 521. 1 fig. 1919.

1256. Vaupel, F. Aus der alten Kakteenliteratur. [On old cactus literature.] Monats-
schr. Kakteenkunde 29: 25-31, 49-54, 61-66, 115-120. 5 fig. 1919.— The author translates
chapters from an old Spanish work published in 1547, Coronica de las Indias, by Goncalez
Hernandez de Oaiedo y Valdes. Chapter 23 describes the Pitahaya fruit; chapter 24
describes a columnar cactus called torches ; chapter 25 concerns tunas and their fruits ; chapter
1 of book 10 deals with tree cactuses. — A. S. Hitchcock.

1257. Whelpley, Henry M. James Michenor Good. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 91: 447-452.
PI. 1. 1919. — A review and appreciation of the life and work of the late James Michenor
Good, one of the landmarks in American Pharmacy. — Anton Hogslad, Jr.

1258. Williams, Emile F. George Golding Kennedy. Rhodora 21: 25-35. 1 pi. 1919.
— Biographical sketch of the late George Golding Kennedy. — James P. Poole.

1259. Winslow, E. J. Early days of the American Fern Society. Amer. Fern. Jour 9:
33-38. 1919.

No. 2, September, 1920] CYTOLOGY 169

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gager, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

1260. Brown, Nelson Courtlandt. The royal Italian forestry college. Jour. Forestry
17: 807-812. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1303.

1261. Clute, WillardN. Plant names and their meanings. — II. Ranunculaceae. Amer.
Bot. 26: 2-10. 1920. — The common names used for species of Ranunculaceae traced to their
sources when possible. — W. N. Clute.

1262. Conard, H. S. The general classification of higher plants. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci.
25:237-240. 1920.

1263. Pammel, L. A. State parks in Iowa. Sci. Monthly 10: 516-521. 1920.— The plan
proposes the preservation of some of the forests for the pleasure and education of all the
people. — The parks are of different kinds. Lake parks which include enough of all lake shores
to conserve animal and plant life; along streams where these have cut through ridges as the
Devil's Backbone, and the forests associated with these; ledges on which most of the ferns
of the state are found; mounds, palisades and similar areas suggest the plans. — It is far-
sighted wisdom on the part of the state to establish these parks to preserve to future
generations the natural history and geology and historic features of Iowa. — L. Pace.

1264. S., E.J. [Rev. of : Church, A. H. Elementary notes on structural botany. Oxford
Botanical Memoirs No. 4. 27 p. Oxford University Press, 1919.] Jour. Botany 58:27. 1920.

CYTOLOGY

Gilbert M. Smith, Editor
George S. Bryan, Assistant Editor

1265. Balls, W. Lawrence. The existence of daily growth-rings in the cell wall of cotton
hairs. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B 90: 542-555. PI. 14-16. 1919.— Cellulose wall of Egyptian
cotton swelled to five or ten times normal size by treatment with NaOH and CS2 showed con-
centric layering. Correlated with Egyptian field crop conditions where growth is arrested
each afternoon. Only one thin primary layer formed while cell is growing in length. When
thickening sets in it proceeds to a maximum of 25 layers. — Paul B. Sears.

1266. Beer, Rudolph, and Agnes Arber. On the occurrence of multinucleate cells in
vegetative tissues. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B 91 : 1-17. PI. 1 . 1919. — Lists species in which
multinucleate cells have been recorded in vegetative tissues, together with region of plant
involved. List includes 177 species in 60 families of vascular plants. Theory of previous
workers regarding amitotic origin of such multinucleate phases is questioned. No clear ex-
ample of amitosis observed but numerous cases of mitosis normal up to cell plate stage ob-
served. Instead of normal cell walls formation after mitosis Kinoplasm forms a hollow
sphere around nucleus — "phragmosphere.'' This gradually enlarges until coextensive with
cell cytoplasm. Suggested that numerous nuclei render available for use of cytoplasm valu-
able material (a) by increased nucleus surface (b) in certain cases by nuclear disintegration
and resorption. — Paul B. Scars.

1267. Buscalioni, L. Nuove osservazione sulle cellule artificiali. [Further observations
on artificial cells.] Malpighia 28: 403^434. PI. 11-12. 1919.— This is a description and dis-
cussion of experiments with colloidal films. The plates are from photomicrographs of the
results of experiments and show not only simulation of cell-walls, but also simulation of
nuclei with chromatin-reticulum. — L. W. Riddle.

170 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1268. Legrand, L. Une conception biologique nouvelle de la cellule. [A new biological
conception of the cell.] Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appliquees30: 13. 1919. — Nothing essentially
new, but a good review of the present situation. — G. J. Pcirce.

1269. Mangenot, M. G. Sur revolution du chondriome et des plastes chez les Fucacees.
[The evolution of the chondriosome and of the plastids in the Fucaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 170: 63-65. / fig. 1920. — In the apical cells of F. vesiculosus and F. platycarpus
mitochondria are to be found at some of the protoplasmic anastomoses in the cytoplasm,
while at other anastomoses small phaeoplasts appear and elsewhere in these cells there are
grains of fucosane. The adjacent peripheral cells also contain mitochondria, grains of fuco-
sane and phaeoplasts, the last named being larger, having more pigment and reacting in a
different fashion to the fixing solutions than those of the apical cell. Small phaeoplasts occur
not only in the apical cells, but also in the cells of the central axis cut off from the apical
cell on its proximal face and in the initial cells of adventitious shoots. The cells containing
small phaeoplasts are considered to be embryonal in character. — C. H. and W . K. Farr.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor

1270. Adler, Friedrick v. d. Aus dem Kubani Urwald. [The Kubani virgin forest.]
Oesterreich. Forst.- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 23. 1920. — A short popular description of an 80 hectar
area of virgin timberland in Bohemia. Trees 1 meter to 1.9 meters in diameter are found in
contrast to the small sizes generally found in cut over forests in the same region. — F. S. Baker.

1271. Aguilar, R. H., The lumbang-oil industry in the Philippine Islands. Philippine
Jour. Sci. 14: 275-285. 1919. — Two kinds of lumbang nuts occur in the Philippines, lumbang
bato (Aleurites moluccana) and lumbang banucalag (Aleurites trisperma), but when the
word lumbang is employed it is taken to mean lumbang bato. The Bureau of Forestry is
encouraging planting of the trees so that a sufficient supply of raw material may be assured.
The nuts may be stored for a year or more without depreciable change. The oil is used in
the calking of vessels, manufacture of soft soap, and in the manufacture of paints. The ker-
nels may be separated from the shells and the oil expressed, or the whole nut ground up and
the oil separated. The former is slower and more laborious but furnishes a larger percentage
of oil and a cake of higher fertilizing value. The oil may be kept satisfactorily in copper
containers. — Albert R. Sweetser.

1272. Ammon, W. Ueber die Pflicht zum Unterholt subventionierter Aufforstungs und
Verbauungs-Projekte. [The obligation to maintain subsidized forestation and construction
projects.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 105-114. 1920.— One of the difficulties in maintain-
ing a subsidized project is the change of ownership. When a change of title occurs the new
owner accepts the subsidy as an obligation and fulfills it in so far as it is compulsory. Under
the laws of Berne the acquisition of land carries with it the obligation to protect and continue
any subsidized project although other cantons do not adequately provide for change of title.
— A subsidy may consist of either a fixed sum or a per cent of the project undertaken. The
State or Canton must have preference in the arrangement because in the event of non-fulfill-
ment the project must be continued by the State or Canton. — Non-utilization of a tract for
timber production or grazing constitutes a non-fulfillment of a subsidy agreement and leaves
the present incumbent subject to a fine. — The regulations are still somewhat confused and it
is recommended that the obligations of the State and land owner be more specifically defined
and incorporated in the laws. — J. V. Hofmann.

1273. Anderson, J. Ecuador contributes a wood that is lighter than cork. Sci. Amer.
122: 281. 2 fig. 1920. — Concerns Ochroma lagopus, balsa wood. — Chas. H. Otis.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 171

127-1. Anonymous. Annual return of statistics relating to forest administration for the
year 1917-18, British India. 25 p., 1 diagram. Simla, 1919. — The report contains summarized
tabulated data on forest areas, improvement, protection, fires, grazing, planting, exports,
expenditures, revenues, and other subjects for all the provinces. The present forest area
under control of the Forest Department is 251,512 square miles or 23.3 per cent of the total
area of all the provinces; 60,724 square miles, or 24 per cent of the forest area, are under
approved working plans. 46.3 per cent of the entire forest area was under fire protection and
47,249 square miles, or 18.8 per cent, was entirely closed to grazing during the year. The
financial statement shows a total revenue of 40,969,257 lis, expenditure 21,157,063 Rs, leaving
a surplus (cumulative) of 19,812,194 Rs. A final table gives the state of the finances by
periods and years from 1S69 to 191S, and the appended diagram shows graphically the relation
of revenue, expenditure and surplus for the past ten years. — E. R. Hodson.

1275. Anonymous. Automatic regulation of humidity in factories. Sci. Amer. Monthly
1 : 24-28. 6 fig. 1920. — An article of interest to manufacturers of articles made from wood. —
Chan. H. Otis.

1276. Anonymous. Effect of decay on wood pulp. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 247. 1920.

1277. Anonymous. Fliegertatigkeit im Dienste des Forstschutzes. [The use of air planes
In forest protection.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 82-83. 2 pi. 1920. — Photographs taken
from airplanes may be used for classification of areas in suitable regions for grazing, etc., also
for topographic features and boundary locations of permanent forest areas. Photographs
taken on a scale 1:25,000 bring out a great deal of detail. Often aerial patrol may bring out
features that would be lost otherwise, such as snowslides and landslides in the initial stages.
Taken in time, these may be prevented. — J. V. Hofmann.

1278. Anonymous. Forests in Japan. Amer. Forestry 26: 95. 1920.

1279. Anonymous. Fra Dansk Skovforening. Handel og Priser i 1918-19. [Business
and prices, 1918-19.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 453-489. 1919.

1280. Anonymous. Fuel value of wood. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 425. 1920.

12S1. Anonymous. Holz als Ersatz der Kohle bei der Gaserzeugung. [Wood as a substi-
tute for coal ingas production.] Oesterreich. Forst.- u. Jagdzeitg. 38:23. 1920. — Owing to the
scarcity of coal in Zurich (Switzerland) wood was used in some of the retorts to eke out the
coal supply. Mixtures of green cherry, oak, beech, alder, ash, willow, chestnut, hazel, birch
were \ised. A yield of 27.5 per cent of gas was obtained of good quality running 29.2 per cent
of hydrogen, 10.3 per cent methane and 2.9 per cent heavy hydrocarbons. — F. S. Baker.

1282. Anonymous. Jaegersborg Dyrehave. [The game reserve at Jaegersborg.] Dansk
Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 4-8. 1919.

1283. Anonymous. Kiln drying of green hardwoods. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 247. 1920.

1284. Anonymous. Lead pencils. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 286. 1920.

1285. Anonymous. Lumber salvage in France. Sci. Amer. 122: 105. 1920.

1286. Anonymous. Made of wood. Sci. Amer. 122: 55. 1920. Some of the strange uses
of wood and its by-products, as displayed in an exhibit prepared by the New York State
College of Forestry. — Chas. II. Otis.

1287. Anonymous. Paper famine if forests are wasted. Amer. Forestry 26:94-95. 1920.

1288. Anonymous. Sodium fluoride as a wood preservative. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 258.
1920.

172 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1289. Anonymous. The Southern Forest Conference. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1:286. 1920.
— Notes on the meetings held in New Orleans, beginning Jan. 28, 1920. — Chas. H. Otis.

1290. Anonymous. Die Sozialisierung des Forstwesens. [The socialization of forestry.]
Oesterreich. Forst.- u. Jagdzeitg. 37: 269-271. 1920. — During the war heavy cutting took
place in Austrian forests and conditions are at present unsettled, the peasantry expecting a
division and distribution of state forests and large estates. The future of sustained wood
production and the very existence of many communities in the mountainous regions depends
upon unification of management rather than further subdivision. The public value of the
forests demands this. Formation of local voluntary associations of timber land owners,
loggers, lumbermen and dealers is recommended, these associations to be united into a greater
State association with large powers to govern forest management, lumber prices, export trade,
and forest labor. — F. S. Baker.

1291. Anonymous. Wohlfahrtseinrichtungen fur Waldarbeiter. [Housing conditions for
forest laborers.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 114-116. 1920. — Oberforster Schadelin
advocated furnishing quarters in 1908 and Dr. Flury later pointed out that living conditions
among the industries were better and more attractive than those of the forest laborers. This
resulted in young men seeking other industries rather than the Forest Service. — The author
describes the use of portable shelters built for 6 to 12 men that have proved successful in the
Canton of Schaffhausen. The contentions in favor of a shelter equipped with a stove are
that the men are more contented and willing to work in wet weather because they are able
to dry their clothes when they return from work. Also the men do not use so much liquor
in order to keep warm. — J. V. Hofmann.

1292. Ashe, W. W. Notes on trees and shrubs in the vicinity of Washington. Bull.
Torrey Bot. Club. 46: 221-226. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2963.

1293. Baker, Hugh P. , and Edward F. M cCarthy. Fundamental silvicultural measures
necessary to insure forest lands remaining reasonably productive after logging. Jour. Forestry
18: 13-22. 1920. — Silvicultural practice in the Adirondacks has not yet been fully settled
and further work is needed in determining the limits of forest types, proper methods of slash
disposal, and the requirements of the various species for establishment. A survey of forest
lands and forests is needed. — E. N. Munns.

1294. Bang, J. P. F. Lidt om Bjergfyrskovens Behandling. [Notes on management of
mountain fir.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 189-196. 1919.

1295. Bates, C. G. A new evaporimeter for use in forest studies. Monthly Weather
Rev. 47:283-294. 6 fig. 1919.

1296. Bentley, J. B., Jr. Municipal forestry in New York. Amer. Forestry 26: 160-162.
4 fig. 929. — Describes plantings made in Chenango County, N. Y. — Chas. H. Otis.

1297. Biilmann, H. H. Nogle Tilvaekstoversigter fra Meilgaard Skovdistrikt. [Some
observations on growth in Meilgaard district.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5 : 30-36. 1920.

1298. Blanford, H. R. Financial possibilities of even-aged crops in Burma. Indian For-
ester 46: 53-61. 1920. — Figures are presented which show possible returns from stands of
teak and two other less important woods using 3 and 4.5 per cent as the interest rate. A rota-
tion of around 75 years is forecasted. — E. N. Munns.

1299. Boas, J. E. V. Det Nye Jagtlovsforslag og det Danske Skovbrug. [The new game
laws and Danish forestry.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 50-55. 1920.

1300. Bohn-Jesperson, J. F. W. Sitkagranen i Klitten. [Sitka spruce in Klitten.]
Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 101-109. PL 8. 1919.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 173

1301. Bowles, J. Hoopek. The California gray squirrel an enemy to the Douglas fir.
Amer. Forestry 26: 26. 1920. — A loss amounting to hundreds of thousands of dollars, caused
by girdling of the trees by the squirrel. — Olias. //. Otis.

1302. Bridel, M. Marc. Application de la methode biochemique aux rameaux et aux
ecores de diverses especes du genre Populus. [Application of the biochemical method to the
branches and barks of various species of the genus Populus.] Jour. Pharm. et Chim. 19:
429-434. Also Ibid. 20: 14-23. 1919.— Sec Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2841.

1303. Brown, Nelson Courtlandt. The royal Italian forestry college. Jour. Forestry
17: 807-812. 1919. — A brief history of forest education in Italy is given with a description of
the school at Vallombrosa. The school has a high scholastic requirement and courses and
hours of work do not differ greatly from American practice. — E. N. Munns.

1304. Brown, W. H. Philippine fiber plants. Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull.
19: 1-115. 28 pi. 1919. — A general consideration of Philippine fiber producing plants with
descriptions, occurrence, local names, methods of extracting fibers, and the uses to which
the fibers are put. About 150 species are considered. — E. D. Merrill.

1305. Bruce, Donald. Alinement charts in forest mensuration. Jour. Forestry 17:
773-801. 15 fig. 1919. — Alinement charts are adapted for formulae involving three variables.
The development and principles underlying these devices with their application in problems
of mensuration in determining the volume of trees is given in detail with illustrations as to
their practical use. Advantages of much quicker computation and ease of construction are
claimed over the use of slide rules and sets of curves employed in the past. — E. N. Munns.

1306. Butler, Ovid M. Relation of research in forest products to forest administration.
Jour. Forestry 18: 275-283. 1920. — Silviculture cannot overlook the technical quality of the
wood in its forest practice as the latter is influenced by silvicultural practices. Growth influ-
ences the technical properties of the wood greatly in seasoning, in strength and in use. Me-
chanical and physical qualities have already shown a close relation to rate and character of
growth, and chemical uses may do likewise. — E. N. Munns.

1307. Cabrera, Teodoro. La utilidad de los guayabos. [Uses of the guava trees.]
Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 628. 1919.

130S. Carter, H. Report on forest administration in Burma, for year ended June 30,
1918. 114 P-, 1 pl- Rangoon, British India, 1919. — At the close of the year the aggregate area
of the reserved forests was 29,116 square miles, about one-fifth of the total forest area of the
province, and in addition there are large tracts proposed for reservation. The area under
approved working plans is 10,832 square miles, or 37 per cent of the total reserved area. A
system of cultivation called taungya (shifting cultivation, i.e., an area cleared and burned
in hilly country for shifting cultivation) is practiced on areas aggregating 1,230 square miles
of reserved forests by the wild hill tribes, comparatively low in the scale of civilization. When
uncontrolled this system causes greater and more permanent damage than a fire. These wild
tribes will not undertake permanent cultivation and are averse to settling in the plains. The
problem is difficult but it is expected to regulate the taungyas by rotation in connection with
the control of forest villages and also obviate local shortages of forest labor. By this plan
the jungle tribes could be provided with all the virgin soil they require and the abandoned
taungyas be stocked with a valuable forest crop. In a search for sites suitable for the exten-
sion of cinchona the following is reported of the damage by the taungya system:"Land with
the necessary soil conditions has been very much to seek. Areas, some of which half a century
or more ago would probably have afforded the requisite conditions, have been ruined by
the practice of the jungle tribes of the pernicious system of shifting cultivation known in South
India as kumri, in Burma as taungya and in Assam as jhum, by which enormous stretches
of magnificent forest have been destroyed and the surface soil exhausted and more or less

174 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

washed away by the unimpeded rush of rain water." And of an area west of the Upper Chin-
dwin: 'As regards cinchona prospects, the journey was disappointing. There was no need to
go inland from the river for all along the outer ranges the ravages of shifting cultivation were
only too evident. The evergreen forests are being rapidly destroyed." During the year
1,814 acres of taungya plantation were newly formed. Detailed tabulated data (72 pp.) is
appended. In rev iewing the year's work it is stated that the future before the Forest Depart-
ment is one of the greatest activity ; for not only has the better exploitation of the commercial
forests to be undertaken, but the proper conservation of all that unclassed forest on which the
agricultural demand is now concentrated can not be left in its present neglected condition.
Such vast areas as the unclassed forests of Burma (74,707,834 acres) can not long be subjected
to such profligate destruction as is now going on in many places for want of control and of
staff to exercise it. The conservation of these forests is not a matter of mere revenue, but in the
best interests of the whole population and most especially to the advantage of the agricultural
classes. — E. R. Hodson.

1309. Cary, A. Ticks and timber. Amer. Forestry 26: 92-94. 5 fig. 1920.— Concerns
forest conditions in the Gulf states, U. S. A.—Chas. H. Otis.

1310. Chandler, B. A. Financial loss to the community due to forest lands becoming
wastes. Jour. Forestry 18: 31-33. 1920.— Destructive lumbering is responsible not alone for
the economic and financial loss due to the wasteful cutting and burning, but also for the
degeneration of the people through loss of the vigorous stock, poor crops, whiskey and mal-
nutrition. Such people need assistance from the outside and larger communities, as they are
not self sustaining. In such regions, a peculiar type of degeneracy is developing. — E. N.
Munns.

1311. Churchill, Howard L. Approximate cost of private forestry measures in the
Adirondacks. Jour. Forestry 18: 26-30. 1920. — Costof a forester and proper forest work in a
lumber company was found to amount to an annual charge of 36 cents per thousand feet,
while the charges due to conservative lumbering amount to 65 cents per thousand. — A com-
ment by W. N. Sparhawk is to the effect that a number of items are not properly forestry but
lumbering, thereby reducing the cost considerably. — E. N. Munns.

1312. Curtiss, C. F. Forest parks and their relation to the rural community. Rept.
Iowa State Hortic. Soc. 53 : 363-364. 191S— See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 3038.

1313. D'Aboville, P. Determination du diametre au milieu du tronc de l'arbre sur pied.
{Determination of the middle diameter of a standing tree.] Translated by S. T. Dana. Jour.
Forestry 17: 802-806. 1 fig. 1919. — -By means of similar triangles based on known distances
from the tree and the relation between the diameter of the tree at breast height and the
intercepted diameter on a scale held at arms length, the diameter at half the height can be
obtained. A formula is given for the practical application of this principle to field use. —
E. N. Munns.

1314. Dalgas, J. M. D0ende Egeskov i Westfalen. [The dying oak forest: Westfalen.]
Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 64-72. 1919.

131". Dalgas, J. M. Gavntraeproduktionens Samfunds0konomiske Betydning. [The
economic importance of production of lumber.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 446-453.
1919.

1316. Dalgas, J. M. Nogle Oplysninger om Skove og Skovforhold i Nordslesvig. [Forest
conditions in North Schleswig.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 160-189. 1 fig. 1919.

1317. Davis, R. N. The winter aspect of trees. Amer. Forestry 26:87-91. 10 fig. 1920.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 175

1318. Dickie, F. Discovery of sugar on Douglas fir. Amor. Forestry 26: / fig.

1920. — The Indians of British Columbia knew of the existence of sugar on the Douglas fir
long before the first white man came to North America. Only now the facts have been ascer-
tained. Reporting upon the findings of Prof. Davidson and Mr. Tejt, the writer states that
"fir sugar" is occasionally formed during summer droughts or in dry-belt regions, sugar-bear-
ing trees being most abundant between the 50th and 51st parallels and between 121°-122°
longitude. The "manna" is a natural exudation from the tips of the needles, occurring as
white masses ranging from | inch to 2 inches in diameter on leaves and branches. A slight rain
may quickly dissolve the sugar and it may be found recrystallized in patches at the base of
the tree. At other times it remains in a semifluid condition. The sugar contains nearly 50
per cent of the rare trisaccharide, melezitose. Sugar-producing firs are chiefly those standing
on gentle slopes facing east and north in compar.it ively open areas. In these situations, the
leaves being exposed to the sun, an abundance of carbohydrates more than normal are formed
during the day, which are not stored or carried to the growing tissues, as is the case with Doug-
las fir in heavily forested areas. The ground and atmosphere being dry, an increased root
pressure and cessation of transpiration cause the leaves to become water-gorged. This water
contains a sugar created by the reconversion of starch into sugar. By evaporation, the sugar
is deposited on the leaf tips. By reason of the necessity for a succession of sunshiny days to
produce the sugar, the Douglas fir does not yield a harvest that can annually be depended
upon. — Chas. H. Otis.

1319. Dickie, F. Sugar from the Douglas fir. Sci. Amer. 122: 165, 174-175. 1 fig. 1920.
— The sugar-yielding firs are confined to the dry belt of British Columbia, and are chiefly
found in the hottest parts of the interior of the province between parallels 50° and 51° and 121°-
122° longitude. Trees standing on gentle slopes facing north and east and which are fairly
wide spaced produce sugar in greatest abundance. The sugar occurs in white masses scattered
over the foliage and branchlets, the accumulation of drops; drops of small size may appear
upon the leaves at the tips and sometimes two or three tips will become imbedded in a very
large drop. Analysis shows that the sugar yields about 50 per cent of the rare trisaccharide,
known as melezitose. The Indians of the region have known of this occurrence of sugar on
the Douglas fir for a long time and gathered it whenever available; but it is an uncertain
crop, owing to reasons of climate. — Chas. H. Otis.

1320. Drolet, George. Turpentine orcharding effect on longleaf timber. Jour. Forestry
17 : 832-834. 1919. — Turpentining with only slight damage to virgin longleaf timber has been
successful in Alabama under a system where the crops are worked for only 2 years and then
logged. Only healthy trees over 12 inches are tapped and not more than two cups are placed
on a tree. Results of 4 years' work are given which show that there is a loss from turpentine
operations which may be kept small, and that this loss increases with the length of the opera-
tion.— E. N. Munns.

1321. Dunbar, John. Forty-two distinct forms of hickories. [Rev. of: Sargent, C. S.
Notes on North American trees— II. Carya. Bot. Gaz. 66: 229-258. 1918.] Amer. Nut. Jour.
10:20-21. 1 fig. 1919.

1322. Eldredge, I. F. Management of hardwood forests in the southern Appalachians.
Jour. Forestry 18: 284-291. 1920. — An outline is given of a management plan for use in the
hardwoods. The problem presented is one of area regulation with 6 age-classes to be consid-
ered in arriving at the volume of cut in any period in the working circle. — E. N. Murms.

1323. Eysselt, Joh. "Weidwald." [Pasturewood.] Oesterreich. Foist.- u. Jagdzeitg.
38: 1-2. 1920. — The present high value of grazing lands is leading to a demand for the ex-
tension of "pasture-woods" particularly in the alpine forests. This is considered contrary
to public policy, however, as it would entail injury to exceedingly valuable protection forests,
and lead to the extension of mountain torrents, avalanches and landslides, while experience
as shown that the removal of the timber has also led to a deterioration of the pasturage

176 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

as well. The segregation of all pasture-woods that have protection value is urged, to be
managed on a strictly protective basis. Artificial extension should be practiced at least to
the formation of clumps of trees, such as are naturally found in alpine meadow situations. —
F. S. Baker.

1324. Fabricitjs, O. R0dgran paa Fyn. [Red spruce at Fyn.] Dansk. Skovforenings
Tidsskr. 4: 317-372. 1919.

1325. Fernow, B. E. [Rev. of: Recknagel, A. B., and John Bently, Jr. Forest man-
agement.] Jour. Forestry 17: 850-853. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1373.

1326. Fetjcht, Otto. Zur Entstehung des Harfenwuchses der Nadelholzer. [On the for-
mation of "harp-growth" on conifers.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 17:137-139. 1 fig.
1919. — S. Klein, and other authors, agree that the secondary stems, producing the so-called
"harp" formation, are developed from the existing primary branches. The author, in the
summer of 1917, discovered a white pine in the community of Wurzbach (Wurtt, Black Forest) ,
which exhibited a new sort of origin. On this tree, not a single branch has attempted to form
a secondary stem, but some twenty young stems have arisen on the back of the tree below the
upper third, evidently from dormant buds, either from the old whorls or between them. —
J. Roeser.

1327. Flint, Howard R. A suggested departure in national forest stumpage appraisals.
Jour. Forestry 17:823-831. 1919. — Present methods of stumpage appraisals on the national
forests are deemed unsatisfactory and the proposal is made to change these by basing the
price to be paid on the total receipts at stated intervals from lumber sales and costs of oper-
ation expressed in work hours of men, horses or machines. — E. N. Munns.

1328. Girard, James W., and U. S. Swartz. A volume table for hewed railroad ties.
Jour. Forestry 17: 839-842. 1 fig. 1919. — To overcome the recent change from two classes
to five for railroad ties a volume table was prepared for Douglas fir and larch based on the
diameter and number of ties per tree. The difference in form factors between the two species
is not sufficient to affect the grades or number of ties. — E. N. Munns.

1329. Graves, H. S. The extension of forestry practice. Amer. Forestry 26: 50,51. 1920.

1330. Graves, Henry S. A policy of forestry for the nation. Jour. Forestry 17: 901-910.
1919. — Present handling of forests in U. S. A. is not satisfactory and public interest re-
quires public ownership of extensive areas and public participation in protection and manage-
ment. A national policy demands action by the government, the states and by private owners
of forest lands. National forest land should be increased, states should acquire and extend
their holdings to assist in their economic and industrial life, and municipalities should have
forest land to protect the water supply and to serve as a source of revenue.— On private lands,
state and national aid should be given to prevent fires and legislation to this end should be
undertaken by the states. Similar action by the states is necessary to require the forest owner
to prevent lands becoming waste after lumbering and to assist the forest owner to secure the
maximum production. In this, the states should be aided by the National government.
Uniform taxation and a forest loan act are necessary, and a federal law is required to provide
the government with authority to extend its influence and assistance to the states. — E. N .
Munns.

1331. Greeley, W. B. The forest policy of France. The control of sand dunes and
mountain torrents. Amer. Forestry 26 : 3-9. 7 fig. 1920. — Material for this article has been
* :iken largely from "Cours de Droit Forestier," by Charles Gugot, and from data prepared
by G. Garbe, Engineer des Ponts et Chausses. Bremontier is credited with having de
veloped the methods which were successful in halting the destructive course of the Gascon
dunes. These embraced the construction of a rampart along the coast, planting hardy herbs
on the dunes within the rampart and planting seeds or seedlings of maritime pine. A

No. 2, September, 1920J FORESTRY 177

national policy was adopted in 1810, and by 1864 the forestation of the 250,000 acres of dunes
bordering the Landes was practically completed. Since that date the work has consisted
largely in the care of the plantations established, the construction of new ramparts along
the coast where dangerous dunes were forming, the extension of the successive zones of vege-
tation up to the limits of security thus established and the administration of the maritime
pine forests which have been created. The successful reforestation of the dunes gave great
impetus to the planting of maritime pine throughout the entire Landes. Today the Landes
are a vast pinery, interspersed with little meadows and neat farms and traversed by a network
of surfaced highways. — In the control of torrential erosion in the Alps and Pyrenees, France
has been confronted with a far more difficult problem, which is, essentially, one in social
economies. Following terrible floods in 1859, a reforestation law was passed in 1860, and by
1882 reforestation projects in the mountains had reached a total of some 350,000 acres. New
laws passed at this time provided for more reduced areas for planting and other intensive meth-
ods, being limited to the immediate channels or slopes where erosion was taking place, and the
establishment of large protection belts in the mountains, surrounding the limited water
courses in which serious erosion was actually taking place. Further, the grazing of certain
communal pasture lands was placed under public control. Human obstacles have prevented
the perfect working of these measures. In controlling erosion, the line of attack is to reduce
the trickling action of water on slopes, prevent the starting of gullies and hold loose soil or
rock in place. This is accomplished by tree planting and by the employment of dams. — Chas.
H. Otis.

1332. Greeley, W. B. Private forestry in France. Amer. Forestry 26: 139-143. 2 fig.
1920.

1333. Greeley, W. B. Self-government in forestry. Jour. Forestry 18: 103-105. 1920.—
Comment on national forest policy. — E. N. Munns.

1334. Griffin, Gertrude J. Bordered pits in Douglas fir: a study of the position of the
torus in mountain and lowland specimens in relation to creosote penetration. Jour. Forestry
17: 813-822. / fig. 1919. — Examination of the pits in Douglas fir showed a tendency in the
torus of the mountain wood to aspirate (close) the pit while the opposite was true of the low-
land woods, oven drying increasing the aspirated tori in both mountain and lowland varieties.
In both sapwood and heartwood of the mountain variety, a large proportion of aspirated tori
were found in air-dried wood, while only in the spring wood of the heartwood were the tori
aspirated. Penetration of creosote was found to coincide directly with the number of aspi-
rated tori. Subsequent treatments of air-dried material failed to open the tori when once
aspirated, though soaking in alcohol before drying prevented their closing. — E. N. Munns.

1335. Gujer, A. Zu unserer Titulaturfrage. [The question of titles.] Schweiz. Zeitschr.
Forstw. 71: 78-81. 1920. — The present titles are objectionable because they do not express
the grade of the position and do not differentiate between the practical and technical posi-
tions.— It is proposed to replace "Forster" and "Oberforster" by "Forster" and "Forst-
meister." "Forster" should apply to practical positions and "Forstmeister" to technical
positions. The title could be .used to cover all positions such as Kreis-, Bezirks-, Stadt-,
Gemeinde- or Korporationsforstmeister. Such titles would eliminate the general usage of
"Forster" for all employees in the profession of forestry. — J. V. Hofmann.

1336. Guthrie, John D. Women as forest guards. Jour. Forestry 18: 151-153. 1920.

1337. Hall, S. J. Trees that are older than history. Sci. Amer. 122: 303. 2 fig. 1920.—
Concerns the Sequoia. — Chas. II. Otis.

1338. Harvey, LeRoy H. A coniferous sand dune in Cape Breton Island [Nova Scotia .
Bot. Gaz. 51 : 417-426. 8 fig. May, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 288.

178 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1339. Haugh, L. A. Klimaets Indflydelse Paa Udviklingen af Bogens Sommerskud. [The
influence of climate on the development of summer growth of beech.] Dansk Skovforenings
Tidsskr. 4:13-28. Fig. 4- 1919.

1340. Hawes, A. F. Raw material for the paper industry. Amer. Forestry 26: 134-138. 5
fig. 1920. The present paper shortage, U.S.A., isprobably the result of the unusual amount of
advertising carried by the newspapers, rather than of any scarcity of wood. The better grades
of paper are still made from rags. While paper can be made from various plant fibers, straws
and certain other materials, the collection of these materials in bulk is so costly that none of
them can compete with wood. Spruce, hemlock and fir are the three main woods used in
paper making. 95 per cent of the pulp and paper mills in the United States are located in the
East, and the present supplies of these woods cannot be expected to last more than 25 years.
Up to 1909 the country was self-supporting in respect to pulpwood, but since that date the
consumption has exceeded the home product. Importations from Canada are constantly
increasing. There are ample supplies of pulpwood for a great many years in Alaska and the
Northwest. These may for several reasons become available. — Chas. H. Otis.

1341. Hawley, R. C. Forestry in southern New England. Amer. Forestry 26: 10-15.
7 fig. 1920. — The territory embraced is roughly the states of Connecticut and Rhode Island.
The region is primarily a manufacturing district. The forest area is now about 46 per cent
of the total land surface. This forested area may be considered better suited for growing
trees than for the production of agricultural crops. The forest is primarily hardwood in
character. An upland hardwood type comprises over 80 per cent of the forest area, a swamp
hardwood type less than 7 per cent, a pine (usually white) type about 2 per cent, an old field
type (pine) 9 per cent and a hemlock type forms about 2 per cent of the area. As a whole the
forests of southern New England are of second growth. — Chas. II. Otis.

1342. Hay, R. Dalrymple. Third annual report of the forestry commission, New South
Wales, financial year ended June 30, 1919. 38 p., 1 diagram, 8 pi. Sydney, 1920. — The Forestry
Act, passed by Parliament, November, 1916, created the Commission with powers to place
the management of the forests on a business footing. Included in this plan is the systematic
working of the forests with a view to regeneration and growth of future crops, and the disposal
of timber and other forest produce to the best advantage. The Commission is exercising its
powers with discretion and judgment in getting the new regime gradually under way, but is
meeting with considerable opposition from the adherents of the old system of forest working,
which was largely at the will of the operator. The forest area of New South Wales is esti-
mated to be 11,000,000 acres, of which 5,043,800 acres have been proclaimed State forests and
566,730.5 acres are under working plans. It is stated that the available area of timber-bearing
land of commercial value in the entire Commonwealth, previously estimated at 97,400,000
acres, can be reduced (on the basis of the past year's data) with certainty to about 24,500,000
acres. Of this area only about 18,000,000 acres had so far been protected from alienation in
the interest of forestry. The estimated proportions in each State of the foregoing total
(24,500,000 acres) are: New South Wales, 8,000,000 acres; Victoria, 5,500,000 acres; Queens-
land, 6,000,000 acres; Western Australia, 3,000,000 acres; Tasmania, 1,500,000 acres; and
South Australia, 500,000 acres. At the instance of the Premier of New South Wales, the
importance of ultimately appropriating a National forest area of about 30,000,000 acres for
the whole Commonwealth, is being urged for the Commonwealth and the States' considera-
tion. This area should comprise about 25,000,000 acres of indigenous forest country, and
about 5,000,000 acres of coniferous plantation. During the year 98,372 acres of State forest
area were released for settlement, 407| acres were planted to conifers, chiefly Pinus insignis
and P. pinaster, and 23,707.5 acres were treated for natural regeneration and silvicultural
improvement. A number of trees and fiber plants were tested for pulping material ; the tree6
were mountain gum (Eucalyptus goniocalyx) , coral tree (Erythrina), and mountain ash (Euca-
lyptus sieberiana). The algaroba bean (Prosopis juli flora) is being tested in a number of
localities for fodder purposes. The outer sheathing of the gray ironbark (E. paniculata) has

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 179

proven an excellent substitute for cork and cork waste, which is used largely in I be manufacture
of insulating material. Experiments undertaken to ascertain whether this sheathing could
be removed without injury to the growing tree have resulted successfully. Mountain ash (E.
gigantea) is being tested for veneer material. Many other investigations on a variety of sub-
jects are also under way. Mistletoe is doing serious damage to the forests of the western
districts. The following species are infested : Acacia ancura, Eremophillalongifolia, E. en \,<i .
E. dcalbata, E. rostrala, and C. luehmanni. An area of 37,500 acres of Crown land in the
vicinity of Buckenboura, on the South Coast was recently temporarily withdrawn from settle-
ment for the growing of wattle trees for tanbark production. The principal species of wattle
of tannic value (Acacia decurrens) is widely distributed on the area and appears well adapted
to local climatic and soil conditions. It is expected therefore to set aside the better por-
tions of the area as a National permanent reserve for the growth and preservation of wattle.
Reference is made to an article by A. Shallard published in the October, 1918, issue of the
Australian Forestry Journal which states that probably 20,000 people in Australia keep bees, and
that the yield last season was between 5000 and 6000 tons of honey, the bulk of which came
from the gum (eucalypt) trees, and among the principal varieties of honey value, the iron-
barks, the stringybarks, the boxes, flooded gum, white mahogany, tallow wood, spotted gum,
gray gum, and bloodwood, are given first place. In order to widen the use and productiveness
of the state forests in this direction, the Commission has now made arrangements for the issu-
ance of bee-farming permits, which convey to the holders certain privileges of occupation and
use, and enable liberal areas of the state forests to be taken up as bee ranges. — E. R. Hodson.

1343. Helms, Johs. Weymouthsfyrren paa Silkeborg Skovdistrikt. [Pinus monticola at
Silkeborg District.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 402-408. PI. 2. 1919.

1344. Henkel, J. S. Afforestation in Zululand. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:50-52. 1920. —
Judging by the indigenous vegetation and the bad effects of strong winds, conditions at Em-
pangeni appeared far from favorable for the growing of exotic timber trees. Quite a large
number, however, have adapted themselves to the conditions, the outstanding successes being
secured with eucalypts. — E. M. Doidge.

1345. Hesselman, Henrik. Iakttagelser over Skogstradspollens Spridningsformaga.
[Dissemination of pollen from forest trees.] Meddel. Statens Skogsforsoksanst. 16: 27-60.
S fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 232.

1346. Hodal. Fransk bergfuru (Pinus montanagallica). [French mountain pine.] Tids-
skr. Skogbruk 28: 1-12. PI. 2. 1920.

1347. Hole, R. S. A new species of Ixora. Indian Forester 45: 15-16. 1919. — See Bot.
Absts. 3, Entry 2983.

1348. Holten, Just. Gamle Ege i Christianssaedes Skove. [Old oaks on Christian
Manor.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 379-395. 1919.

1349. Hosmer, Ralph S. One aspect of the national program of forestry: cost. Jour.
Forestry 18:9-12. 1920. — The cost item has been left out of consideration in the discussion
of a national forest policy. This is important because the antagonism of private owners is
apt to result if the burden falls too heavily on them, and if the burden on the population is
too heavy, there is apt to be trouble from the other side. In any case, the public pays the
bills in the end. — E. N. Munns.

1350. Hosmer, R. S. [Rev. of: Judd, C. S. Report of the Division of Forestry, Territory
of Hawaii, for biennial period ended Dec. 31, 1918.] Jour. Forestry 17: 853-855. 1919.

1351. Htjbaxjlt, E. Efter krigen paa de britiske 0er. [The British Islands after the war.]
[From Rev. Eaux et For&s. Oct., 1919.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 27: 276-291. 1919.

180 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1352. Jessen, P. P. En Ny Dansk Impraegneringsmetode. [A new Danish staining
method called Teakin.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 427-445. PI. 2. 1919. — The process
consists in pressing different kinds of liquids which contain coloring matter into the wood.
These are either inorganic salts or aniline dyes. The color is taken up by the cells of the
wood. — J. A. Larsen.

1353. Judd, C. S. An historical mesquite tree. Sci. Amer. 122: 165, 175. 1 fig. 1920.—
Descriptive of the algaroba (Prosopis juliflora), its occurrence in Hawaii, characteristics,
uses and propagation. — Chas. H. Otis.

1354. Kellogg, R. S. The news print paper situation. Amer. Forestry 26: 147. 1920.

1355. King, H. E. Tree planting in community, a suggested scheme. South African Jour.
Indust. 3: 161-163. 1920.

1356. Kinzel, Wilhelm. Ueber eine neue Methode des Durchfrierens und die damlt
erzielten Erfolge bei zahlreichen bisher nicht oder kaum zur Keimung gebrachten Samen.
[Concerning a new method of freezing and the results derived with numerous unfertile seed or
seed with very low germinative power.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 17 : 139-142. 1919.
— The author discusses the varying results obtained in the artificial treatment of seed either
in light at 20° or in the dark under frost conditions. He cites a considerable number of ex-
amples. However, it is evident, that some species show little response to the methods hitherto
employed. Treatment of seed by frost in conjunction with light has in the past been avoided,
because where used, harmful results were obtained. This method, though, is very successful
in many cases, and will yet become important in the case of many tree seeds. It cannot be
used with seeds rich in chlorophyl, such as Acer and Fraxinus, or with frost sensitive seed,
such as beech, hazel-nut, yew and others. — J. Roeser.

1357. Kirkland, Burt P. Co-operation between national forests and adjacent private
lands. Jour. Forestry 18: 120-130. 1920. — To insure continuous forest production and the
permanence of wood using industries, the owners of lands in units totaling more than 25,000
acres should consider the area as a whole. This would permit of better equipment and per-
sonnel, a permanent town-site and the development of practical forestry. Protection is to
be paid for on an ownership basis, and the area to be restocked as cut by nature or planting.
Careful cutting and trained supervision to follow the entire operation. — E. N. Munns.

1358. Kirkland, Burt P. Economics of private forestry. Jour. Forestry 18: 214-217.
1920. — The misconceptions of those who believe forestry uneconomic are due to misbeliefs
in the rights of private property, interest returns and capitalization and taxation. — E. N.
Munns.

1359. Kitchin, P. C. Preliminary report on chemical weed control in coniferous nurseries.
Jour. Forestry 18: 157-159. 1920. — Applications of copper sulphate, zinc chloride, and sul-
phuric acid to seed beds gave greatly reduced numbers of weeds, especially good were the re-
sults from the first two salts. Further work is in progress. — E. N. Munns.

1360. Knuchel, Hermann von. Zur Praktikantenfrage. [The probation question.]
Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 69-78. 1920. — A plea for better conditions for the probationer
and more democratic relations between academic and applied forestry. The probationer
should receive pay and should be allowed to serve under practical foresters on applied forest
problems rather than the general system of working as a subordinate, without pay, under an
instructor. — The state should encourage students to attend forest schools, but should not
subsidize them. Enrollment at the forest schools should be limited to the number of men
needed by the state. Foresters must receive better pay and be placed on social equality with
other professions such as medicine, etc. — J. V. Hofmann.

1361. Koehler, Arthur. Identification of mahogany. [Review of several papers.]
Jour. Forestry 18: 154-156. 1920.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 181

1362. Kornerup A., and H. Mundt. Aske-Gavnetra. [Ash for lumber.) Dansk Skov-
forenings Tidsskr. 5 : 1-29. tS fig. 1920.

1363. KttHL. Traeets Kemiske Leknologi. [The chemical composition of wood.] Dansk
Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 28-64, 110-146. 45 fig. 1919.

1364. Lee, Laurence. Notes on the Parana pine of southern Brazil. Jour. Forestry 18:
57-61. 1920. — The Parana pine has a stand of about 650 billion board-feet in Brazil. The
wood is said to be superior to Swedish pine and even the southern longleaf pine of North
America. There are no resin ducts and resin accumulates only at the base of knots. At the
present time the lack of shipping facilities and the unfair taxes are keeping this timber from
the market. — E. N. Munns.

1365. Leopold, Aldo. Determining the kill factor for blacktail deer in the southwest.
Jour. Forestry 18: 131-134. 1920. — A method similar to that used in estimating cattle is pro-
posed for obtaining data on the blacktail deer. — E. N. Munns.

1366. Maddox, R. S. Reclamation work a vital forestry problem. Amer. Forestry 26:
74-76. 5 fig. 1920. — Relates particularly to conditions in Tennessee. — Chas. H. Otis.

1367. Maiden, J. H. A critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus. Vol. IV, Part 8. P.
201-237, 4 pl William Applegate Gullick: Sydney, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2995.

1368. Maxwell, Hu. The uses of wood. Wood in agricultural implements. Amer.
Forestry 26: 148-155. 14 fig. 1920.

1369. McLean, R. C. Studies in the ecology of tropical-rain forest: with special reference
to the forests of South Brazil. I. Humidity. Jour. Ecology 7: 5-54. 1 pl., 21 fig. 1919.

1370. Mell, C. D. The mangroves of tropical America. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 388-389.
5 fig. 1919. — The red mangrove (Rhizophora mangle) produces the bulk of the commercial
bark used for tanning purposes. The bark is from three-fourths to one inch thick, of a dull
reddish color, somewhat fibrous and covered with a grayish cork-like cuticle, and contains
tannin superior to that of many other barks used for that purpose. The percentage of tannin
is from 25 to 36. The gathering of the bark is a difficult task. — Chas. H. Otis.

1371. Metcalf, C. D. Logging with belt tread tractors. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 42-44.
5 fig. 1920. [Reprinted from the West Coast Lumberman.]

1372. Minchin, A. F. Annual rings in sal. Indian Forester 46: 38-45. 2 fig. 1920 —
Annual rings in sal may be distinguished on a tangential cut when not possible on a radius.
Fresh cut stumps only can be used and a clean smooth surface is essential. Stump counts and
measurements of trees of known age show a very close relationship though based on a very
small number of trees. — E. N. Munns.

1373. Moore, Barrington. [Rev. of: Recknagel, A. B., and J. Bentley, Jr. Forest
management, xiii + 269 p. , 26 figs. John Wiley & Sons : New York, 1919. Net $2.50. ] Tor-
reya 20 : 34-35. 1920. — The book is written for owners of forest-lands who are not professional
foresters. Four branches of forest management are treated: (1) mensuration; (2) regulation
of cut; (3) finance; (4) administration. Both the forest-owner and professional forester will
find the book valuable. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1325.] — J. C. Nelson.

1374. Mulloy, G. A., and W. M. Robertson. An analysis of logging costs in Ontario.
Jour. Forestry 17: 835-838. 1919. — Data on logging costs compiled from a large number of
reports on operations in Ontario through several years is given for 11 divisions of cost covering
82 detailed items. — E. N. Munns.

182 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1375. Mtjnns, E. N. Effect of fertilization on the seed of Jeffrey pine. Plant World 22:
138-144. 1919. — Various crosses between thrifty, mistletoe-infested, insect-infested, and
suppressed specimens of Pinus jeffreyi were made, with the result that thrifty trees produce
larger and heavier seeds, with a higher germination percentage, higher rate of germination,
higher real value per pound, and ability to produce stronger seedlings. Seeds borne on
suppressed, malformed, and diseased trees are of inferior quality for planting. The author
suggests forest management in which diseased and suppressed trees are removed, and only
thrifty seed trees left for seed purposes. In collecting seed for forest tree nurseries, thrifty
trees should be chosen as parents. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1589.] — Chas. A. Shull.

1376. Nellemann, L. P. NogleUnders0gelser Over Arbejdstidog Arbejdsydelse. [Some
investigations on working hours and working men's aid.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4:
408^27. 1919.

1377. [Nordstedt, C. T. O.] [Swedish rev. of : Ostenfeld, C. H. Bemerkninger om dan-
ske Traeer og Buskes Systematik og Udbredelse I. Vore Aelme-Arter. (Remarks on the sys-
tematics and distribution of Danish trees and shrubs. I. Our species of Elms.) Dansk
Skovforenings Tidsskr. 1918: 421-442. 1918.] Bot. Notiser 1919: 102. 1919.

1378. Oppermann, A. Et Lovbuds Udviklingshistorie. [History of the development of a
law.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 146-160. 1919.

1379. Oppermann, A. Vort Skovbrug Omkring Aar 1900. [Our forestry in 1900.] Dansk
Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 259-316. 1919.

1380. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. The germination of some trees and shrubs and
their juvenile forms. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25 : 292-340. Fig. 45-120. 1920.— One lot of seeds
was placed in good greenhouse soil in the fall (1917) and stratified in a cold frame, from which
they were removed to the greenhouse in March 1918. The second lot was planted in an open
place covered with two inches of soil and leaves. Air temperature records were kept through-
out the season; soil temperature records were kept in the fall until the ground was frozen,
and again during the opening of the growing season of 1918. Tables of temperature and pre-
cipitation are given. Photographs or outline drawings of the leaves, and frequently outlines
of trichomes, are given, with descriptive text, for the following species: Juglans cinerea,
J. nigra, Carya ovata, C. laciniosa, C. alba, C. glabra, C. cordiformis, Corylus americana,
Ostrya virginiana, Betula lutea, B. alba papyrifera, Quercus coccinea, Q. ellipsoidalis , Q. fal-
cata, Q. nigra, Q. imbricaria, Ulmus americana, U. fulva, U. purnila, Celtis occidentalis , Cra-
taegus mollis, C. Crus-galli, Prunus padus, P. serotina, Gleditsia iriacanthos, Gymnocladus
dioica, Ptelea trifoliata, Acer saccharinum, A. saccharum, A. saccharum nigrum, A. negundo,
Aesculus glabra arguta, Vitis vulpina, Tilia americana, Cornus alternifolia, Fraxinus penn-
sylvanica lanceolata, Catalpa speciosa. A table gives number of seeds planted and total num-
ber germinated. — H. S. Conard.

1381. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. A variation in the black walnut. Proc. Iowa
Acad. Sci. 25: 241-248. PI. 3, fig. 48-44. 1920.

13S2. Parnell, Ralph. Progress report on forest administration in the North-West
Province for the year 1918-19. 41 p., 1 map. Peshawar, British India, 1919. — Incorporated
with the annual report is a similar one covering the five-year period from 1914-15 to 1918-19.
Since 1917 a beginning has been made in the departmental exploitation of timber. So far wal-
nut, chil, and coniferous timber in one locality have been handled in this way. It is stated
that the loss of revenue incurred by the government by leases for even relatively short periods
in at all abnormal times, the difficulty of arranging for leases for long periods on a sliding
scale of royalties on account of the vested interests involved and the friction inevitable in
using the sliding scale, the importance of the Government's retaining its timber in its own
hands for as long as possible in case of emergent needs and the public advantage obtained by

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 183

the government's being in a position to use the profits of the timber trade for the benefit of
the country as a whole instead of these profits going into the pockets of a few long-headed
private firms, are believed to justify the abandonment of the system of sales of standing trees
and the adoption of the system of departmental exploitation. During the year the depart-
ment removed by this system 171,000 cubic feet of timber, or 14 per cent of the total timber
outturn against 1 per cent the preceding year. Since the walnut supply is becoming exhausted
and natural reproduction scarce, it is necessary to plant. A nursery has been established at
Nagan and about \ acre sown with 21,000 walnuts. It appears the best method of restocking
is to sow direct on the areas and fill in the gaps with trees raised in the nursery. Tests of
bhan (Rhus cotinus) and garunda (Carrissa spinarum) leaves have shown a fairly satisfactory
tannin content. However, the production from this source would only be sufficient to supple-
ment the small local requirements of the province. Appended are numerous forms summar-
izing detailed tabulated data and a map of the Hazara Division. — E. R. Hodson.

1383. Pakst, August. Die Kienolgewinnung im Wald von Bialowies. [The production
of pine-oils in the forest of Bialowies.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 17: 105-137. 6
pi., 2 fig. 1919. — The author briefly reviews the best known volatile oils obtained from coni-
fers, under four headings: (1) those obtained from the bark and wood above ground, (2)
through the distillation of needles and buds, etc., (3) through the distillation of cones and
fruit, and (4) from the underground woody portion through extraction or dry distillation.
The production of pine-oil, a variety of turpentine oil, is an important industry of that sec-
tion of Europe lying between the Carpathians and the Baltic Sea, including the countries of
Poland, Courland and Lithuania. The establishment founded by the writer in 1916 in the
Forest of Nowi Most, after it was occupied by the Germans, is then described inconsiderable
detail under the headings: (1) the raw material used in the process of distillation; (2) con-
struction of the establishment including the retort, the heating chamber, the arrangement
for carrying off the distillate, the cooling mechanism and the receiver of the pine-oil estab-
lishment; and the equipment of the tar and charcoal establishment; (3) the process of dis-
tillation; (4) the products resulting from the distillation, chiefly pine- oil, tar and charcoal;
(5) cost accounting and profitableness; and (6) conditions necessary to establish the pine-
oil industry in Germany. Numerous tables are included to illustrate topics (3), (4), and (5).
The author believes that the industry can be successfully introduced, especially in North
Germany, both on a small scale and on a large scale if a large supply of woody material can
be obtained close at hand, and concludes, that since the Russian producer has made a success
of it under very poor economic conditions, there is no ground for believing that success will
not crown the efforts of the native contractor surrounded b}^ an economic system organized
and developed to the fullest extent. German forest culture is presented with a new prospect
for increasing its forest revenue, and at the same time helping to break the economic bands
now holding the country. — ./. Roeser.

1384. Paschal, G. W. A bigger tree. Sci. Amer. 122: 61. 1920. — A letter concerning a
poplar tree with a butt circumference of 39-40 feet. — Chas. H. Otis.

1385. Passler, Johannes. Das Entrinden von Holzern unabhangig von der Jahreszeit
nach dem Giitschowschen Verfahren. [Bark-peeling independent of the season according to
the Giitschow process.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 116-118. 1920. — It is well known that
oaks and other trees do not peel easily except during the spring time when the sap is flowing
freely, also the quantity or quality of tannin varies very little during the year. This makes
it possible to peel only during a short season although it would be profitable to peel during the
entire year. Methods of loosening the bark have been in use for a long time among which
the Maitre method in use for the past fifty years is the most commonly used. By this method
the wood is steamed at 100°C. before peeling. — A new method devised by Gitchow consists
of steaming the wood for several hours at 30 to 40°C. This has the advantage of leaving the
wood cooler and easier to handle. It may also be applied in the field by use of a wagon that
Gi'tchow has constructed in which the steaming can be done and the bark dried. — His method
applies to the pines also and is the most feasible for field conditions where the cutting is done
during the winter season and the wood delivered to the industries later.—/. V. Hofmann.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

184 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1386. Perkins, G. W. Forestry and recreation in the Palisades Interstate Park. Amer.
Forestry 26: 20-26. 8 fig. 1920.

1387. Perree, W. F. Progress report of the Forest Research Institute for the year 1918-
19. 22 p. Calcutta, British India. 1919. — The work of the Institute is organized in five
branches: Silviculture, forest botany, forest economy, forest zoology, and forest chemistry.
A silvicultural experiment in Thano forest indicates that two regeneration fellings are un-
necessary where natural reproduction is already present in sufficient quantity. Sufficient
overhead cover to protect from frost is also sufficient to suppress young Sal (Shorea robusta).
Side protection is of greater value than overhead protection. In this forest the frost risk is
slight and therefore it is believed that a clear felling in one operation followed by cleaning and
cutting back will prove successful in regeneration. To test this point an experimental area
of five acres has been marked for clear felling. Two other plots were laid out in this forest
to determine the effect of severe thinning (1) at an early age, and (2) at maturity. The
following is indicated in afforestation work at Zaberkhet Tappar: Dalbergia sissoo (less dam-
aged by deer) and Melia azedarach are the most promising species ; rooted cuttings of Dalbergia
sissoo, Bombax malabaricum, Eugenia jambolana, and Grewia vestita have been successful,
while Terrainalia tomentosa, Ougenia dalbcrgioides , and Mallotus philippinensis have given
fair results, and that Chir (Pinus longijolia) can be better raised from direct sowings than by
transplanting. (July is best season for transplanting this species.) In the study of tan-
yielding trees and shrubs Anogeisus latifolia is being tested to determine the best season for
pollarding, Cassia auriculala for stimulation of germination and for methods of transplanting.
Phyllanthus emblica was found frost hardy, and both direct sowings and transplants from
nursery have proved successful; germination ranged from 70 to 90 per cent. Elaeodendron
glaucum, also frost hardy, showed 70 per cent germination and both direct sowings and trans-
planting proved successful. In the branch of Forest Botany the problem of regenerating the
Sal is believed solved by a series of recent investigations. The factors injurious to the estab-
lishment of the seedling, due to the interaction of a soil-covering of dead leaves, drought, and
bad soil aeration, are eliminated more effectively by a complete removal of the overhead can-
opy than by either burning the soil covering, or by removal of undergrowth, with or without
partial thinning of the overhead cover. Owing to the uncertainty of good seed years and for
other reasons, the restocking of the area by artificial sowings is preferable to reliance on nat-
ural regeneration. It has further been proved that much better results are obtained from
broadcast sowings in cleared patches and narrow strips with full overhead light than from
sowings under the shade of a partial canopy. Therefore the system proposed for handling
Sal is a combination of the group and strip methods, in which the size of the unit regeneration
areas is determined by the average height of the forest at maturity, and their sequence and
orientation by local requirements for shade. A number of woods have been investigated for
industrial use. The branch of Forest Chemistry obtained from the leaves of Cinnamomitm
glandulijerum 0.20 per cent of camphor and 0.44 per cent of camphor oil. From the leaves
of Eucalyptus tereticornis and E. crebra collected at Kaunli, Dehra Dun, were obtained oils
which resembled those of similar species grown in Australia. The former contained a small
percentage of eucalyptol but the oil from neither of these two species of eucalypts complies
with the standard of the British Pharmacopoeia. Artemisia marilima was examined for san-
tonin with negative results. The phenolic portion of the light Chir (Pinus longijolia) tar oil,
a by-product in distilling this species for Stockholm tar, showed 8 per cent of guaiacol and 42
per cent of creosole. Kelp (Saragosum species) from the Bombay Coast contained 0.02 per cent
of iodine and 1.14 per cent of potassium. The Institute library has increased its books and
periodicals to 14,014. Appended is a list of the current year's publications and also a cumu-
lative list from the beginning of the Institute. In general it is expected to develop the
Research Institute, to serve not only the scientific and economic interests of the Forest
Department, but also to function as the central bureau of information for the entire Indian
scientific and commercial community. — E. R. Hodson.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 185

138S. Pettis, C. R. Legislative machinery for enforcement of private forestry measures.
Jour. Forestry 18:6-8. 1920. — An attempt should be made to make lumbering operations and
cut over lands more safe from fire. This may be done in New York by leaving strips and
bands of uncut timber along roadways and creeks to create fire breaks, by the construction of
6re lines, by burning the slash. Demons! raf ion forests and foresters are needed to show what
can be accomplished. — E. N. Mun

1389. Pinchot, Gifford. National or state control of forest devastation. Jour. Forestry
18: 106-109. 1920. — State control does not offer the surest and strongest control of forest
devastation; national control does and has proved its point in the past. — E. N. Munns.

1390. Pool, Raymond J. The fuel situation in Nebraska and the need for greater wood
production. Publ. Nebraska Acad. Sci. 10: 17-28. 1920. — The author discusses the need of
wood, the shortage of wood, and the value of woodlots in Nebraska. He urges thinning of
groves and wind-breaks, and cutting off when the crop is mature. — //. S. Conard.

1391. Potts, II. W. The honey locust tree. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 85-90.
7 fig. 1920. Gives chemical analysis of seeds. — L. R. Waldron.

1392. [Pratt, Geo. D.] New York's forestry program. Amer. Forestry 26: 51-52. 1920.

1393. Rafn, Johannes. Skovfr0analyser i Saesonen 1917-18. [Analysis of forest seed
1917-18.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4:8-12. 1919.

1394. Rafn, Johannes. Skovfr0analyser i Saesonen 1918-19, samt lidt om Egern. [Tests
of forest seed, 1918-19, with notes on the oak.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 55-64. 1920.

1395. Rao, B. Inamati Sham. Brief note on the artificial raising of sandal in the Akola
Division of the Berar Circle, Central Provinces. Indian Forester 46: 1-10. PI. 1-2. 1920. —
Sandal seed was dibbled in the brush of Akola and in good years an excellent stand resulted.
As the sandal coppices and spreads by root suckers, the future stands are well assured. — E.
N. Munns.

1396. Recknagel, A. B. Inspection, supervision and control of private forestry measures :
methods and costs. Jour. Forestry 18: 23-25. 1920. — There are nearly 300 timber land own-
ers in New York with more than 500 acres in their holdings. To administer these properly
would require technical supervision. Working plans for each tract should be prepared by a
forester and filed with the Conservation Commission, failure to do so to be punished and
violations of the plan carry fines. An office for handling these operations on 2,182,000 acres
is needed with a mobile field force. — E. N. Munns.

1397. Record, S. J. Possum wood. Sci. Amer. 122: 569. 1920. — Descriptive of the tree
and its wood, known by many common names, and botanically as Hura crepitans. This is
one of the most recent introductions to the American timber market that seems certain to
find a place. — Chas. H. Otis.

1398. [Ridsdale, P. S.] A decade of progress in the Forest Service. Amer. Forestry 26:
131-132. 1920. — An editorial, occasioned by the retirement of Henry S. Graves as head of
the U. S. Forest Service, in which is reviewed the progress made during the ten years in
which he has directed the forestry activities of the national government. — Chas. H. Otis.

1399. [Ridsdale, P. S.] Increase in forest research necessary. Amer. Forestry 26:
69-70. 1920.

1400. [Ridsdale, P. S.] Light burning is a mistake. Amer. Forestry 26: 68-69. 1920. —
Light burning means nothing more nor less than the continuance of the frequent surface fire,
which steadily and irresistibly destroys the western pine forests. At its best, the practice is

186 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

simply a measure for the protection of old timber. An area cleaned by light burning has
no advance young growth to replace the virgin timber after cutting. Light burning has no
place in a system of forestry which seeks to perpetuate our western pine forests and make them
continuously productive. — Chas. H. Otis.

1401. [Ridsdale, P. S.] A national forest policy. Amer. Forestry 26: 67-68. 1920.

1402. Skerrett, R. G. Multiple production — a new slogan. Sci. Amer. 122: 58-59,72.
3 fig. 1920. — Touches, among other things, on the waste of lumbering and some of the ways
in which this waste may be lessened. — Chas. H. Otis.

1403. Skoien, Olap. Landsskogtakseringen. [Taxation of the forests.] Tidsskr. Skog-
bruk 28: 12-15. 1 fig. 1920.

1404. Smith, Annie Lorrain. Hyphomycetes and the rotting of timber. Trans. British
Mycol. Soc. 6: 54-55. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2763.

1405. Smith, F. H. Significant trends in lumber production in the United States. Amer.
Forestry 26: 143-147. 1 map, 2 tables. 1920.

1406. Smith, F. H. What our forests support. Amer. Forestry 26: 16-17. 1920.— A
consideration of the great value of forests and their economic importance to the wealth,
independence and prosperity of U. S. A. — Chas. H. Otis.

1407. Sparhawk, William N., Donald Bruce, and Burt P. Kirkland. Report of
subcommittee on forest leasing, forest loans, and forest insurance. Jour. Forestry 18:260-
274. 1920. — The details of a leasing plan are given whereby the government can lease forest
land instead of buying it outright, the financial burden being distributed over a long period.
Financial credit to forest users is at high interest rate because of the small units and a system
of Federal Forest Loan Boards is described. To handle forest insurance properly an insur-
ance organization is necessary and as a public necessity is at stake and a resource in danger,
this work can best be accomplished by a national organization. To these ends, legislation
by the states and by the government is essential. — E. N. Munns.

1408. Stevens, Carl M. Rating scale for foresters. Jour. Forestry 18: 143-150. 1920.

1409. Terry, E. I. Further comment on a formula method of estimating timber. Jour.
Forestry 18: 160-161. 1920.

1410. Vestby, P. Spredte traek fra en skogbefaring i Chili. [Sketches from a trip to
Chilean forests. 1 Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 17-27. PI. 2. 1920.

1411. Vikhammer, P. Om granen som fremtidig skogtre nordenfor polarcirklen. [Nor-
way spruce as a future tree north of the Polar Circle.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 27: 253-276. Fig. 4-
1919.

1412. West, Erdman. An undescribed timber decay of hemlock. Mycologia 11 : 262-266.
1919.

1413. Williams, I. C. Report of forestry. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. 11: 119-122.
1918. — Remarks upon the loss of services of state foresters who entered war service and its
effect upon forest protection. Brief statistics are. given of plantings within the state forests
and of the available seeds and seedlings for future planting. The number of forest fires re-
corded in 1917 was 2066 and the average area burned over 153.45 acres. The railroads within
the state paid damages on 168 fires, the expense of extinguishing the same being $1674.80.
Individuals made settlement for 81 fires, the expense of which amounted to 31016.73. During
1917 the state forests were increased by 5593 acres, bringing the total area to 1,017,773 acres.

No. 2, September, 1920] FORESTRY 1 87

At the present time there are 52 state forests. It is pointed out that the State Department
of Forestry has to 1918 paid from its resources $148,052.33 to the State School Fund of Penn-
sylvania.— C. R. Orton.

1414. Wilson, Ellwood. Use of seaplanes in forest mapping. Jour. Forestry 18: 1-5.
1920. — Seaplanes in eastern Canada were found well adapted for forest use, the abundance of
lakes and the absence of landing grounds making such a type of plane feasible. Hardwoods
and softwoods can readily be distinguished and photographs with an aerial camera gave ex-
cellent results in mapping, 200 square miles a day being possible with a machine as againsi
50 square miles per month by a party of ten on foot. — E. N. Munns.

1415. Woodruff, George W. Constitutionality of national laws to restrict forest devas-
tation. Jour. Forestry 18: 100-102. 1920. — The Supreme Court, U. S. A., has upheld previous
legislation dealing with the control of forest lands because of the benefit to the public and
liberty of posterity. The present scheme for control of devastation fits in with the pasl
favorable decisions. — E. N. Munns.

1416. Woolsey, Theodore S., Jr. Early Arizona problems. Jour. Forestry 18: 13.5-142.
1920.

1417. Woolsey, T. S. Natural regeneration of French forests. Amer. Forestry 26: 77-
81. 10 fig. 1920. — In the Landes and the Gironde maritime pine matures in 70-80 years, at
which time the trees are clear cut. The branches and unmerchantable tops are left on the
ground; the sun opens the cones and the sand is quickly covered with a stand so dense as to
require thinning. In the sapling stage the excess trees are tapped to death to produce resin
and mine props and to favor the development of the crowns of the final stand. The sessile
oak in the Adour, where there is an annual acorn crop, can be clear cut. Sessile and peduncu-
late oak stands (often mixed with beech in central France) must be regenerated by progressive
cuttings. Oak matures in 180-240 years and the seedlings are intolerant, while the beech
requires for a time a protective cover of older trees. Under these conditions there are 3 suc-
cessive fellings; the seed felling aims at starting the seedlings, the development of the crowns
of the seed trees and the partial removal of the merchantable crop ; a secondary felling aims
to gradually remove the seed trees and to gradually free the existing seedlings without causing
too much damage; the final felling is made when the ground is seeded and the first seedlings
have developed into saplings, and in this the seed trees that are left are removed at one stroke.
In fir stands, where advance growth almost always exists, the seed felling is really a light sec-
ondary felling, designed to allow this advance growth to develop. Subsequent secondary
fellings are also light; but the final felling should be complete. In the high mountains the
treatment is different, since the objective is not solely the production of lumber, but the
slopes must above all be protected to avoid damage by erosion. Group selection is the method
practised. Soil preparation is often necessary, especially with spruce, since natural regen-
eration is hampered by (1) a dense vegetable cover which prevents the seed coming in contact
with the mineral soil, (2) an excessive cover of undecomposed dead needles or (3) too com-
pact surface of the soil. — Chas. II. Otis.

1418. Yates, Harry S. The growth of Hevea brasiliensis in the Philippine Islands.
Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 501-523. 1 fig. 1919. — This paper has to do with the possibilities of
cultivating Hevea in the Philippines on a commercial scale. The necessary conditions of
climate, temperature, soil, and elevation are described. A comparison of these conditions
with those of regions where Hevea is successfully cultivated indicates the suitability of the
Islands for its cultivation, and the yield of rubber is satisfactory. — Albert R. Sweetser.

188 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

GENETICS

G. H. Shull, Editor
J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

1419. A., D. The doubling of the stock. Gard. Chron. 66: 157. Sept. 20, 1919.— Author
cites references contradicting Mr. Taylor, who states that Lothian growers succeed in
obtaining double flowers from single-flowered plants without selection. It seems that seed
selection must be made from plants showing tendency to doubling. — A. C. Hildreth.

1420. Abl [Zuchtinspektor, Halle, Sachsen]. Unfruchtbare Zwillinge beim Rind. [Ster-
ile twins in cattle.] Deutsch. Landw. Tierzucht. 22: 34-35. 1918. — Author reviews briefly
the theory of Keller and Tandler in regard to the sterility and malformation of the free-
martin heifer and describes two extreme examples. — Sewall Wright.

1421. Allen, Ezra. Studies on cell division in the albino rat (Mus norvegicus, var. alb.).
III. Spermatogenesis : the origin of the first spermatocytes and the organization of the chromo-
somes, including the accessory. Jour. Morph. 31: 133-185. 58 fig. June, 1918. — A technique
which prevents clumping of the chromosomes is described. In the albino rat, the spermato-
gonia! number of chromosomes is 37; the accessory divides in the second maturation division.
Shapes of the chromosomes in spermatogonia are all curved rods ; in first spermatocytes occur
simple and compound rings, crosses, and one rod, the accessory; in the second spermatocytes,
curved rods. The constitution of the first spermatocyte chromosomes is typically tetrad,
with the four parts so organized that each may retain its individuality. The first spermato-
cyte chromosomes pass through clearly marked leptotene, pachytene, and diplotene stages
without synizesis. — Bertram G. Smith.

1422. Alverdes, F. [German rev. of: Boas, J. Zur Beurteilung der Polydaktylie des
Pferdes. (Polydactyly in the horse.) Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 4: 49-104. 1917.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 287-288. May, 1920.

1423. Alverdes, F. [German rev. of: Lebedinsky, N. G. Darwins geschlechtliche
Zuchtwahl und ihre arterhaltende Bedeutung. (Darwin's sexual selection and its significance
for the maintenance of species.) Habilitationsvortrag. 31 p. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 282-283. May, 1920.

1424. Alverdes, F. [German rev. of: (1) Naef, A. Die individuelle Entwickelung organ-
ischer Formen als Urkunde ihrer Stammesgeschichte. (Kritische Betrachtungen iiber das soge-
nannte "biogenetische Grundgesetz.") (The individual development of organic forms as evi-
dence of their evolutionary history. — Critical consideration of the so-called "biogenetic law.")
77 p. ,4 fig. Jena, 1917. (2) Idem. Idealistiche Morphologie und Phylogenetik. (Zur Meth-
odik der systematischen Morphologie.) (Idealistic morphology and phylogeny. — On the method
of systematic morphology.) 77 p., 4 fig. Jena, 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
22:279-282. May, 1920.

1425. Alverdes, F. [German rev. of: Plate, L. Verbungsstudien an Mausen. (In-
heritance studies on mice.) Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ 44: 291-336. 5 fig. 1918. (See
Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 658.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 284-285. May, 1920.

1426. Alverdes, F. [German rev. of: (1) Schaxel, Julius. Grundziige der Theorien-
bildung in der Biologic (Principles of theory formation in biology.) G. Fischer: Jena, 1919.
(2) Schaxel, Julius. Uber die Darstellung allgemeiner Biologic (On the presentation of gen-
eral biology.) Abhandl. Theoret. Biol. 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:276-
279. May, 1920.

No. 2, September, 1920]

GENETICS

189

1427. Anonymous. Report of the work of the plant breeding division for 1919. Jour.
Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 102-107. 1920. — This report contains a brief summary of the work
on wheat, barley, oats, flax and rye grass. It is stated that several new forms of spring wheat
have been developed from a cross between Red Fife and April Red. It is planned to Bilbfil i-
tute one of these new forms for Red fife. — Hybrid barleys are compared with their parents and
indicate slight increases in yield in some cases with deviations in others. Single plant selec-
tions were made in a crop sown with commercial Riga flax seed. The progeny of each of these
selected plants was found to be remarkably uniform, not only in botanical characters but also
in physiological characters such as resistance to frost, period of growth and vigor. The two
progenies were found to be superior to the others and the propagation of them was con-
tinued. Twenty acres were sown from the two superior progenies and the plants showed great
uniformity of growth. — In addition to these two selections, further selections were made from
Riga flax and of these last selections two appear superior to the best two of the first selection.
— Selections were also made of white-flowered and Kostroma flax. The results of these selec-
tions are not reported. — Single plant selections are being made in Perennial and Italian rye
grass but no report of the success of this work is given. — J. H. Kempton.

1428. Anonymous. Daffodil breeding. Florists' Exchange 49: 1082. May 8, 1920.—
Notes on daffodil breeding in America and England. Finest English daffodils are raised by
S. Goodell of Seattle, Washington, from crossing English varieties. Some flowers measure
11 cm. and display exquisite coloring. Author describes choice collection of seedlings (red
cups and red eyes) shown at Royal Horticultural Society's Daffodil show in London on April
13, raised by Mrs. R. O. Backhouse. Prices for best new seedlings range from $250 per bulb
to $100 or less. — Orland E. White.

1429. Anonymous.
Jan., 1920.

1430. Anonymous.
11:6. Jan., 1920.

1431. Anonymous.
Jan., 1920.

1432. Anonymous.

1433. Anonymous.

A new dahlia of interest to plant breeders. Jour. Heredity 11: 48.
The heredity and environment of a great botanist. Jour. Heredity

University wants photographs of twin calves. Jour. Heredity 11: 15.

A genetic association in Italy. Jour. Heredity 11: 45. Jan., 1920.
New eugenics society in Hungary. Jour. Heredity 11: 41. Jan.,

1020.

1434. Anonymous. The birth rate in mixed marriages. Jour. Heredity 11: 96. Feb.,

1920.

1435. Anonymous.

1436. Anonymous.

1437. Anonymous.

1438. Anonymous.
10:275. June, 1919.

1439. Anonymous.
1919.

Eugenics in Germany. Jour. Heredity 11: 110. Mar., 1920.
Eugenics in Scandinavia. Jour. Heredity. 11: 128. Mar., 1920.
Eugenics and other sciences. Jour. Heredity 11: 77-78. Feb., 1920.
A common misconception concerning human heredity. Jour. Heredity

A factor influencing the sex-ratio. Jour. Heredity 10: 256. June,

1410. Anonymous. Measuring intelligence. Jour. Heredity 11: 86-87. 1 fig. Feb.,

1920.

1441. Anonymous.
number of brain cells.

Deficiency in intellect found to be correlated with deficiency in the
Jour. Heredity 10: 369. Nov., 1919.

190 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1442. Anonymous. A supposed sheep-goat hybrid. Jour. Heredity 10: 357-359. 2 fig.
Nov., 1919.

1443. Anonymous. Carriers of the germ plasm. Jour. Heredity 10: 422. Fig. 21. Dec,
1919.

1444. Anonymous. To increase the birth rate. Jour. Heredity 11: 64. Feb., 1920.

1445. Anonymous. An award of honor to Walter Van Fleet. Jour. Heredity 11: 95-96.
1 fig. Feb., 1920.

1446. Anonymous. The death of Richard Semon. Jour. Heredity 11: 78-79. Feb., 1920.

1447. Anonymous. Systematic breeding. Florists' Exchange 49: 986. April 24, 1920. —
Popular discussion of breeding, with remarks on the importance of the F2 generation in
crossing work. Breeding problems of the carnation, rose, cyclamen and sweet pea are
discussed. — Orland E. White.

144S. Anonymous. Historia de los metodos de seleccion. [History of the methods of
selection.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico] 2: 7-8. 1919.— Popular.

1449. Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. Germination of barley pollen. Jour.
Agric. lies. 18: 525-536. 2 pi., 2 fig. Feb. 16, 1920.— Experiments with barley pollen were
carried on: (1) with solutions, (2) with moist chambers, (3) fertilization in the field, (4)
retention of viability in the laboratory, (a) when pollen is left in free air; (b) when pollen
is kept over sulphuric acid; and (c) when pollen is kept in vacuo. No germinations were
secured either with water or solutions of sugar, agar, or nutritive substances of various osmotic
concentrations. Germination was finally obtained as follows: A slide containing pollen was
placed inside a Van Tieghem cell; a piece of mesophyll from a leaf of garden pea was placed
in the cell to supply water; the cell was covered with cover glass and placed outside on window
ledge. Germination was thus obtained in five minutes. In field experiments receptivity of
stigma and duration of viability of pollen were studied and results compared with those of
laboratory experiments. Extreme delicacy of water adjustment is the most noticeable
response of the pollen to treatment given in the experiments. Literature is reviewed. [See
also Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 949.]— W. E. Bryan.

1450. Babcock, E. B. Crepis — a promising genus for genetic investigations. Amer. Nat,
54: 270-276. May-June, 1920. — It is desirable to find a genus with several crossable species,
whose chromosome numbers are low and different; linkage groups corresponding to the
chromosomes of each species should be understood. Crepis has 200 widely scattered and
diversified species. Of these one is already known to have 3 chromosome pairs, 6 or 7 have 4,
4 have 5, one has 8, one has 9, and one has 20. Cytologically these are unusually favorable
objects of study. Crepis is prolific, usually self-fertile, gives 2 or 3 generations a year, and
probably its species are crossable. Disadvantage is smallness'of flowers, making hybridiza-
tion tedious though not impossible. Author has already commenced work on two species
virens and tectorum, and urges other investigators to join in the attack, since an enormous
mass of data will be necessary before the desired goal is reached.— Merle C. Coulter.

1451. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Jaeger, F. M. Lectures on the principles of
symmetry. 16x27 cm. xii + 333 p. Elsevier Publ. Co.: Amsterdam, 1917.] Jour. Phys.
Chem. 23 : 516. 1919. — The book deals with the principles of symmetry in chemical substances,
animals and plants. "While not easy reading, the book is an instructive one and contains
a great deal that is of interest" to all morphologists, especially those in botany who are also
interested in evolution. — H. E. Pulling.

1452. Banta, Arthur M. Sex and sex intergrades in Cladocera. Proc. Nation. Acad.
Sci. [U. S. A.] 4: 373-379. Dec, 1918. — Certain species of Cladocera, as Daphnia pulex, Simo-

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 191

cephalit-x scmdtiius and throe species of Minna, showed no Lntergradation of the secondary sex
characters. In other species, however, as Simocephalus vetulus, sex-intergrades appeared very
infrequently and in Daphnia longispina they were not very unusual. Frequently, in Simo-
cephalus vetulus, there were many male intergrades produced with the female intergrades,
but in Daphnia longispina, the intergrades were nearly all females. Sex intergrades appeared
in certain cultures of Simocephalus Vi tulus in t he 131st generation, in 1915, and have cord inued
to appear throughout the 57 subsequent generations in the following three years. The females
that showed only slightly developed intergrading sex characters reproduced with normal
vigor but those with fully developed male characters were sterile. — D. D. Whitney.

1453. Barnils, Perk. Les elements hereditaires dans le langage. [The hereditary ele-
ments in language.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: 828-829. 1919.

1454. Bartlett, J. T. A plant-breeder's opportunity. Sci. Amer. 121: 372. 1919. —
Desirable varieties of fresh vegetables and fruits are already available, but breeder now has
notable opportunity in developing varieties adapted to such by-product industries as canning
and evaporating. Special demands made, such as low water content, strawberries which
husk easily, etc. Emphasizes that canners and evaporators use first-quality produce, not
produce unsuitable for shipment in fresh condition. — Merle C. Coulter.

1455. Batjin, P. Sur la dimegalie des spermies dans certaines doubles spermatogenese.
Sa signification. [On dimegaly of sperms in certain cases of double spermatogenesis. Its sig-
nificance.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. [Paris] 83: 432^134. Mar., 1920.

1456. Baumann, E. Zur Frage der Individual- und der Immunitatszuchtung bei der Kar-
tofiel. [On the question of individual selection in potatoes and the breeding for immunity.]
Fuhlings landwirtsch. Zeitg. 67: 246-253. 1918. — Author points out the necessity of studying
commercial potato varieties by means of clones. Data based on a number of individual
selections vegetatively propagated from two varieties are presented. High yields are asso-
ciated with an increase in number of tubers but a decrease in size. The percentage of starch
in the tubers is lower in high yielders although the absolute amount of starch is greater. —
Data on the influence of various leaf diseases in reducing yield is discussed. Author believes
that the chief causes of "running out" in potatoes are leaf diseases. — R. J. Garber.

1457. Bishop, O. F., J. Grantham, and M. J. Knapp. Probable error in field experiments
with Hevea. Agric. Bull. Federated Malay States 6: 596. 1918.

14.58. Blaringhem, L. Polymorphisme et fecondite du Lin d'Autriche. [Polymorphism
and fecundity in Austrian flax.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. [Paris] 82: 756-758. 1919.

1459. Blaringhem, L. Vigueur vegetative compensatrice de la sterilite, chez les hybrides
d'especes de Digitales (D. purpurea et D. lutea). [Vegetative vigor compensating for the ster-
ility in a species hybrid of Digitalis (D. purpurea and D. lutea).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
[Paris] 169: 481-483. 1919.— Reciprocal crosses of Digitalis purpurea, L., and D. lutea, L.,
give sterile progeny which surpass both parental species as follows:

purpurea hybrid lutea

Height 50-150 cm. 150-185 40-80

Dry weight 150 g. 200-275 50

Duration of life biennial many years triennial

First generation plants are very uniform. Reciprocal crosses do not differ in vegetative fea-
tures but flowers differ in size, shape and color. — D. F. Jones.

1460. Bliss, A. J. Hybridizing bearded Iris. Gard. Chron. 67: 225. May 8, 1920.—
Attempts to coordinate the results obtained by Bliss and by Sturtevant as to genetic compo-
sition of certain plicalas, basing an explanation on the results of Bateson and Punnett's
experiment with Emily Henderson sweet pea, [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entries 331, 1669.] —
./. Marion Shull.

192 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1461. Bonne vie, Kristine. Polydaktyli i norske bygdeslegter. [Polydactyly in Nor-
wegian peasantry.] Norsk. Mag. f. Lagev. 6: 1-32. 1919. — In several families from different
parts of Norway one and the same type of hereditary Polydactyly occurs — a postaxial, asym-
metrical Polydactyly, mostly developed on the right side of the body. The extra finger (or
toe) was always fixed at the base of the fifth finger, the metacarpalia showing no abnormalities.
In all families the character in its occurrence follows the dominant type of inheritance, occur-
ring in each of a series (2-5) of generations and in a relatively large number of individuals.
The degree of development of the sixth finger (or toe) and its occurrence on one or both hands
or feet, however, show considerable variation within each generation, from a well developed
finger with three normal phalanges, down to a small soft knob at the side of the hand. — A
genealogical investigation proved all the families in question to descend from one and the same
parish of Norway and also to have at least one ancestor in common. — Kristine Bonnevie.

1462. Bonnevie, Kristine. Om tvillingsfodslers arvelighet. Undersokelse over en norsk
bygdeslegt. [On the inheritance of twin births. Investigations on Norwegian peasantry.]
Norsk. Mag. f. Lagev. 8: 1-22. 1919. — Hereditary disposition of twin births is stated within
certain branches of a large country family (counting about 5000 individuals), the multiple
births making in these branches no less than 7.7 per cent of all births, while the percentage of
twin births within the whole country makes only 1.3-1.4 per cent. Through the "difference
method" of Weinberg (subtraction of all twin "pairs" from the number of one-sexed twins)
it is proved that about 80 per cent of all multiple births investigated should be considered as
two-egged twin births, while probably only 20 per cent of multiple births have been from
one egg. Younger mothers (below 30 years old) seem to give rise to one-egg and two-egg
twin births in about equal number, while the number of one-egg twin births rapidly decreases
among older mothers. The inheritance of two-egg twin births which must depend upon some
hereditary character of the ovary is investigated through a genealogical study of the an-
cestry of twin mothers. Among 88 twin mothers 73 are shown to belong to twin-producing
branches of the families investigated, while the ascendence of 15 twin-producing mothers
is unknown. 67 twinning mothers whose ascendence is known through several generations on
one (30 cases) or on both sides (37 cases) are without exception shown to descend from twin-
producing families through both parents, or through the one of them whose ascendence is
known. The type of inheritance seems, therefore, to be that of a recessive character demand-
ing for its manifestation that the twinning mother should receive her disposition in a double
dose, through both her parents. The investigations are being continued on other families
and all results should as yet be considered as preliminary. — Kristine Bonnevie.

1463. Boulenger, G. A. Un cas interessant de dimorphisme sexuel chez un serpent
africain (Bothrolycus ater Giinther). [An interesting case of sexual dimorphism in an African
snake.) Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 666-669. 1919. — -Sexes are distinguished by
number of rows of scales, 19 in female, 17 in male. Variations in other species mentioned in
literature are not related or are only indefinitely related to sex. — A. Franklin Shull.

1464. Burch, D. S. Heredity and economical production of food. Jour. Heredity 11:
7-11. 2 fig. Jan., 1920.

1465. Burt, B. C, and N. Haider. Cawnpore-American cotton: An account of experi-
ments in its improvement by pure line selection and of field trials. 1913-1917. Agric. Res. Inst.
Pusa Bull. 88. 32 p., 10 pi., 1 fig. 1919. — Describes effort to isolate pure lines adapted to
Indian conditions from a badly mixed stock of an American upland variety. — T. H. Kearney.

1466. Call, L. E. Director's report. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917-18. 63 p. 1918.—
Author states breeding parthenogenetic Appotettix indicates certain characters may be af-
fected by temperature and moisture. Of several thousand parthenogenetic offspring, all
were females except four. Parthenogenesis occurs among homozygotes and heterozygotes.
"Crossing over" and "linkage" also occur. — Corn leaf aphis: Aphis maidis, reared at tempera-,
ture of 84° to 90°F. produced no winged forms; reared at 72°F. one winged form appeared

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 193

among many hundred wingless ones; reined at temperature of 60" to 70°F. large numbers of
winged forms appeared. "In entire 55 generations no males appeared." — Cereal crops:
Author states Kanred winter wheat is markedly resistant to cold and certain strains of stem
rust. Kansas Nos. 2414 and 2415 exhibit similar resistance. — Hessian fly seldom lays eggs
on "oats, barley, einkorn, spring emmer, and durum wheat, and less abundantly on soft than
on hard winter wheats." Very few "flax seeds" were developed on wheat varieties, lllini
Chief, Dawson Golden Chaff, Beechwood Hybrid, and Currell Selection, although eggs were
laid on them "in abundance." — Swine: Following tendencies have been noted: (1) Wide
Berkshire forehead is dominant over medium forehead of Duroc Jersey and narrow forehead
of Tamworth and wild hog, (2) Berkshire dish of face is recessive to straight face of Tarn-
worth and wild hog, (3) Berkshire short face is completely recessive to Tamworth long face,
(4) Erect ear of Berkshire is dominant over drooping ear of Duroc Jersey. — Apparently there
are distinct hereditary differences between Berkshire and Duroc Jersey with respect to size,
rate of growth and early maturity." — Fred Griffee.

1467. Card, W. H. Originating and standardizing a new variety of Cornish. Reliable
Poultry Jour. 26: 647, 672, 725, 748, 749, 817, 857, 858, 927, 975, 976. 8 fig. 1919.— An account
of the origin of the White Laced Cornish fowl, by its originator, a practical breeder. — H. D.
Good ale.

1468. Carle, E. Selection pedigree appliquee a la variete de riz "Nang Meo." [Pedigreed
selection applied to the variety of rice known as "Nang Meo."] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon.
2 : 73-78. 1920.

1469 Cohen-Stuart, C. P. A basis for tea selection. Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg. Ill,
1: 193-320. 1919. — A comprehensive study of the origin, distribution and cultivation of tea.
The systematic treatment of the genus Camellia is thoroughly discussed and a synoptic key
is given for the determination of the various species. There is appended also a list of the
specimens contained in the herbaria of KewT, Buitenzorg, Singapore and Berlin. This article
comprises the first of three sections of a paper on selection of tea. — J. H. Kempton.

1470. Cole, Leon J., and Heman L. Ibsen. Inheritance of congenital palsy in guinea-
pigs. Amer. Nat. 54: 130-151. Mar-Apr., 1920.— A definite neurosis (congenital palsy),
characterized by clonic spasms, particularly of the legs, appeared in stock of normal guinea-
pigs. All affected animals die at or before two weeks after birth. Defect is due to Mendelian
recessive. DR X DR gave 183 normal, 63 palsied. Tested normals from this mating gave
7 DD and 15 DR. Variations of symptoms are noted and discussed. Defect is due to a factor
mutation, cause unknown. Comparison is made with certain hereditary motor disturbances
in pigeons, mice, rats, rabbits, goats, sheep, man and progeny of alcoholized guinea-pigs,
none of which cases are considered identical with congenital palsy observed by the writers. —
C. C. Little.

1471. Cole, Leon J. An early family history of color blindness. Jour. Heredity 10:
372-374. / fig. Nov., 1919.

1472. Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Heritable characters of maize. I. Lineate
leaves. Description and classification of lineate plants — value of maize as material for investi-
gation, and economic importance of discovering latent variations. Jour. Heredity 11: 3-6.
Jan., 1920.

1473. Cook, O. F., and Robert Carter Cook. Biology and government. Further dis-
cussion of Alleyne Ireland's article on democracy and the accepted facts of heredity. Jour.
Heredity 10: 250-253. June, 1919.

1474. Cook, O. F. A disorder of cotton plants in China: Clubleaf or cyrtosis. Jour.
Heredity 11: 99-110. 9 fig. Mar., 1920.

194 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1475. Cooley, Charles H. A discussion of Popenoe and Johnson's "Applied eugenics"
and the question of heredity vs. environment. Jour. Heredity 11: 80-81. Feb., 1920.

1476. Correns, C. Fortsetzung der Versuche zur experimentellen Verschiebung des
Geschlechtsverbaltnisses. [Continuation of experiments on artificial shifting of sex relations.]
Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1918: 1175-1180. 3 fig. 1918.

1477. Coulter, Merle C. Inheritance of aleurone color in maze. Bot. Gaz. 69: 407-^425.
May, 1920. — An attempt was made to test the certainty with which predicted aleurone ratios
would be fulfilled in complicated crosses. Crosses were made involving the Rr Cc and Pp
factors in such a way as to require eight different ratios. The general conclusion is reached
that the expectation in these cases is reasonably fulfilled. Seeds of different shades of color
were separated and planted to determine whether it was possible to recognize genotypes by
the intensity of the color. The author concludes that with experience genotypes may be
separated by this method, particularly among red seeds. The inheritance of faintly colored
or parti-colored seeds was studied. It is assumed that such seeds lack the aleurone factor C
but have some partial substitute which is very erratic in its effect on the expression of color.
An unusual case is reported where a plant known to have the factorial composition Pp rr Cc
gave, when selfed, an ear with a perfect ratio of 9 colored to 7 white seeds. It is believed in
this case that some unusual condition is present which produces purple aleurone when com-
bined with the factors PC but colorless aleurone in combination with C only. Practically all
the grains on this ear had irregularly split pericarps and when planted germinated slowly or
not at all with a subsequent slow and stunted growth, suggesting that the aleurone ratio may
be due to pathological causes. Crosses in which Emerson's i2-tester was used as the male
parent and C-tester as the female parent {PPRRcc X PPrrCC) were found to have only self
purple seeds but when the parentage was reversed (PPrrCC X PPRRcc) all the seeds were
mottled. This confirms the results of Emerson from whom the material was received. In
various crosses of Emerson's C and R testers with material obtained from East, the author
concludes that these investigators have given similar symbols to the same set of factors. A
study of mottling led to the conclusion that it can appear only when the R aleurone factor
enters the seed from the male parent and then only when some other condition is present.
This other condition was found in Emerson's C-tester. A very small percentage of mottled
seeds is obtained where no mottling is to be expected, in some crosses involving .ft-tester.
Such mottled seeds are believed to differ genetically from the mottling in the crosses involving
C-tester. — It was found that there were no differences in the inheritance of aleurone color
between inflorescences on the main stalk and suckers, but there was evidence, not given, that
differences might be expected in the inheritance of plant colors, particularly chlorophyll,
between the main culm and lateral branches. — A further test of the variability in inheritance
which may occur between different parts of the same plant was obtained by self-pollinating
both ears of two-eared plants. In most cases the two ears were reasonably alike but in some
instances significant differences were found. The agreement between the two ears of the
same plant is especially poor where faint aleurone color is involved. — The chance distribution
of the different-colored seeds on the ear was tested and found to hold for starchy-sweet and
colored-colorless but on ears where less than 10 per cent of the grains were particolored the
majority of spotted grains were found in groups of 4 or 5, indicating the influence of local con-
ditions. With respect to this phenonemon the author believes that local conditions on the
ear do not determine but merely limit the appearance of particolored aleurone.— J. H .
Kempton.

1478. Cowgill, H. B. Cross-pollination of sugar cane. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico
3: 1-5. Jan., 1919. — Method used at Insular Experiment Station of Porto Rico is satisfactory
and many seedlings are produced. Bags are made of cheese cloth 48 inches long and 18 wide,
held extended by heavy wire rings sewed into them. Rings placed one at top and other 16
inches from bottom so that a skirt of 16 inches is left to be drawn in and tied about stems
of panicles. Bags are supported over panicles by means of bamboo poles set in ground with
cross-bar at top. Poles are set to windward side of stools just before panicles "shoot;"

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS L95

when panicles shoot, the bag is immediately suspended over each panicle and tied around its
stem so that it is protected from undesirable pollen before any florets open. Cane blossom
is hermaphrodite but some varieties are almost completely self-sterile, making it possible to
cross-pollinate with another variety with assurance that nearly all offspring will be hybrids
of the two chosen varieties. Pollinating is done by placing panicles of desired variety in bag,
in Buch position that pollen will be shed or carried by wind or insects to florets of other variety
as they open. One or two panicles are used at a time, allowed to remain in bag two or three
days, being renewed as often as necessary. It is found advantageous to cut stems 4 to 6
feet long and put cut end in joint of bamboo filled with water, thus keeping fresh 2 or 3 days.
— Results: 1915-1910. Ten crosses attempted, eight produced seedlings, majority of which
showed characteristics of both parents. About 1500 seedlings produced, one panicle yielding
over 1000.— 1916-1917. Thirty crosses made comprising nine different combinations, of which
nineteen were successful. From one combination 1309 seedlings were obtained and in all
2589 were produced. — 1917-1918. Thirty crosses were attempted, comprising nine combina-
tions. Fifteen were successful and 1794 seedlings were produced, 157 from one combination,
735 from another. — Effect of crossing: In 1915-1916 and 1916 1917 pollinator was dark-colored
cane while seed-parent was medium light, and dark color of pollen parent was seen in many
of offspring. — At least two of old standard varieties are nearly pollen-sterile here (Crystalline
and Rayada).— #. E. Barker.

1479. Cunningham, J. T. Results of a Mendelian experiment on fowls, including the pro-
duction of a pile breed. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1919: 173-202. 1 pi. Sept., 1919.— A male
black-red Gallus bankiva was crossed to a silky hen. Data on inheritance of plumage, skin
pigmentation, comb, booting and crest are given. The production of a pile race from the
cross, which bred true, is described. "The simplest explanation" of its origin "is that seg-
regation is not complete or perfect . . . ." Attempts to increase amount of pigmenta-
tion in the piles by repeated back-mating to normals did not result in any consistent increase.
— H. D. Goodale.

1480. Danforth, C. H. Resemblance and difference in twins. Jour. Heredity 10: 399-
409. Frontispiece, fig. 1-14, 20, 22-30. Dec, 1919.

1481. Daniel, L., and H. Tetjlie. Extension des limites de culture de la vigne au moyen
de certains hybrids. [Extension of the limits of culture of the grape by means of certain
hybrids.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 166: 297-299. 191S.

1482. Davenport, C. B. A strain producing multiple births. Jour. Heredity 10: 382-
384. Nov., 1919.

1483. Delage, Y., and M. Goldsmith. Le Mendelisme et le mecanisme cytologique de
l'heredite. [Mendelism and the cytological mechanism of heredity.] Rev. Sci. Paris 57:
97-109, 130-135. 1919.— Part I is a brief summary of Mendelism, "Neo-Mendelism" and the
chromosome theory of heredity, including the factorial hypothesis, the phenomena of linkage,
crossing over and non-disjunction and the chromosomal mechanism of sex determination.
Mendelism is compared withWeismannism. Credit Natjdin with many discoveries attributed
to Mendel. Mention influence of environment and cytoplasmic inheritance. Part II is a
critique of Mendelism (or Neo-Mendelism). Acknowledge great advances and brilliant
achievements in this field but think Mendelians are blinded to the uncertainties, defects,
lacunae and improbabilities of the theory and the fragility of the objective bases upon which
it rests. Illustrate (1) by questioning continuity of chromosomes because these are not
visible in resting stage, (2) by questioning linear arrangement of genes because chemical
differentiation of chromatin within individual chromosomes has not been demonstrated, (3)
by contending that a force which will bring homologous chromosomes into such intimate and
accurate alignment as necessitated by crossover hypothesis will not permit them to lie X-wise
and give crossovers, and (4) by maintaining that Mendelian conception gives no explanation
of successive appearance of characters in ontogeny or, (5) of the origin of new character-
during evolution. Predict downfall of Mendelism from weight of accessory hypotheses neede> I
to explain special cases. — C. 11'. Metz.

196 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1484. Demoll, R. Zur Frage nach der Vererbung vom Soma erworbener Eigenschaften.
[On the question of the inheritance of acquired characters.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ.
46:4-11. 3 fig. 1920.

1485. Detjen, L. R. A mutating blackberry — dewberry hybrid. Jour. Heredity 11: 92-
94. 4 fig. Feb., 1920.

1486. Detlefsen, J. A., and W. W. Yapp. The inheritance of congenital cataract in cat-
tle. Amer. Nat. 54: 277-280. May- June, 1920.— On mating the Fx son of Holstein-Friesian
bull 62924 to the Fi daughters of this bull 8 F2 offspring (2 9 and 6c?) with well-defined con-
genital cataracts of the stellate type to 55 F2 normal offspring were produced. Ninety-three
normal F! offspring of 62924 were produced. Pedigree studies of bull 62924 reveal no ances-
tors which had cataracts. Assuming the bull 62924 heterozygous the F2 expectation is 55.125
normal + 7.875 cataractous. 62924 mated to his own daughters produced 7 offspring, 3 (lc?
4- 2 9 ) of which were cataractous. It is concluded that congenital cataract in cattle is a
simple recessive Mendelian character. — John W. Goxcen.

1487. De Vries, Hugo. Oenothera Lamarckiana erythrina, eine neue Halbmutante.
[Oenothera Lamarckiana erythrina, a new half-mutant.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
21:91-118. 1919.

1488. Don caster, L. The tortoiseshell tomcat. A suggestion. Jour. Genetics 9: 335-
338. Mar., 1920. — Author criticizes Little's hypothesis of mosaic character of tortoiseshell
tomcat and on basis of work of Chapin, Lillie, and Magnusson on free-martin and of Cut-
ler and Doncaster on histology of testis of sterile tortoiseshell tomcat, suggests that latter
be a masculized female. — P. W. Whiting.

1489. Doncaster, L., and H. G. Cannon. On the spermatogenesis of the louse (Pedicu-
lus corporis and P. capitis), with some observations on the maturation of the egg. Quart. Jour.
Microsc. Sci. 64: 303-328. 1 pi., 1 fig. Mar., 1920. — P. corporis has 12 chromosomes in somatic
cells of both sexes. In the testis certain large cells, supposed to be follicular, also have 12.
Other cells of testis, believed to be spermatogonia, have 6, apparently double, chromosomes.
Spermatocytes, also with 6 chromosomes, pass through growth period followed by a very asym-
metrical division, giving one large cell which develops into a spermatid and one small "polar
cell" which degenerates. A conspicuous mitochondrial body remains in the large cell. No
second spermatocyte division occurs. Centrosomes of spermatids are double and there are
two axial filaments. No oogonial or oocyte divisions were found. Author did not observe
unisexual broods or sex-ratio disturbances described by Hindle. Spermatogenesis of P.
capitis apparently agrees with that of P. corporis. — C. W. Metz.

1490. Duerden, J. E. Methods of degeneration in the ostrich. Jour. Genetics 9: 131-193.
PL 5-6, 8 fig. Jan., 1920. — Author describes type of degenerative changes observed in coverts,
wing quills, down feathering, wing digits and toes, and regards these as suggestive of the man-
ner in which degeneration proceeds, and as favorable data for throwing light on the nature
of variation and method of evolution generally. — -In his discussion of relation of the degenera-
tive changes to adaptation, author concludes that, compared with other factors, such losses
have little or no bearing upon the welfare of the ostrich; and hence, that natural selection has
been inoperative in directing their course. "Natural selection may wipe out the race, but
cannot guide its evolution." — Referring to ontogenetic and phylogenetic degeneration,
author believes process of degeneration is in no way affected during the life of the individual,
but only with the formation of the zygote; in plumes, scales and claws of embryos and chicks
the degenerative changes are found expressed just as in the adult. "Degeneration may be
defined as the somatic expression of a phylogenetic degradation and loss of genetic factors."
— As to cause of degeneration, author acknowledges our ignorance on this point but believes
they are certainly intrinsic as opposed to environmental. "The influence is so slowly acting
. . . as to call for an aloofness, an independence, of external vicissitudes. Only something

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 197

in the organism itself, and beyond all varying somatic responses, could meet demands so con-
tinuous and so consistent." According to the author the agency at work possesses a strong
determinate influence; and the evidence is of such a nature as to remind one of Nageli's con-
ception of a mystical, internal, vitalistic force. In the ostrich, it is suggested that the changes
may be interpreted in terms of "a germinal senescence, perhaps expressing itself in factorial
fractionation and loss." The author believes that the ostrich race may present us with an
example of "mass mutation." — In conclusion, author discusses the possibility of factorial
changes, but this point, with reference to the bearing of the ostrich data, is left inconclusive.
— P. B. Hadley.

1491. Elderton, Ethel M. [Rev. of: Whipple, George Chandler. Vital statistics:
An introduction to the science of demography. 12 x 18 cm., v + 517 p., 63 fig. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc.: New York, 1919.] Science Progress 14: C96-697. April, 1920.— See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2212.

1492. Ellinger, Tage. [German rev. of: Punnett, R. C., and the late Major
P. G. Bailey. Genetic studies in poultry. I. Inheritance of leg feathering. Jour. Genetics
7:203-213. May, 191S. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 492.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
22: 28S. May, 1920.

1493. Ellinger, Tage. [German rev. of: Rasmuson, Hans. Uber eine Petunia-Kreuz-
ung. (On a petunia cross.) Bot. Notiser 1918: 287-294. 1918. (See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry
2181.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 289. May, 1920.

1491. Ellinger, Tage. [German rev. of: Rasmuson, Hans. Zur Genetik der Bliiten-
farben von Tropaeolum majus. (On the genetics of the flower colors of Tropaeolum majus.)
Bot. Notiser 1918: 253-259. Nov., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2180.)] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 288-289. May, 1920.

1495. Ellinger, Tage. [German rev. of: Ratjnkiaer, C. Om L0vsspringstiden hos
Afkommet af B0ge med forskellig L0vspringstid. (On leaftime in the descendants of beeches
with different leaf times.) Bot. Tidsskr. 36: 197-203. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 42.)]
Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22 : 289. May, 1920.

1496. Emerson, R. A. Heritable characters of maize. II. Pistillate flowered maize plants.
Jour. Heredity 11: 65-76. 8 fig. Feb., 1920.

1497. Emoto, Y. Uber die relative Wirksamkeit von Kreuz- und Selbstbefiuchtung bei
einigen Pnanzen. [On the relative effectiveness of cross- and self-fertilization in several
plants.] Jour. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 43: 1-31. 2 pi., 6 fig. Mar. 15, 1920.

1 !'JS. Erdmann, Rhoda. Endomixis and size variations in pure bred lines of Paramae-
cium aurelia. Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ. 46: 85-148. 12 fig. 1920.

1499. Erikson, J. Platanthera bitolia X montana i Blekinge. [Platanthera bifolia X mon-
tana in Blekinge.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 59-62. 1918.

1500. Euler, K. Ein bemerkenswertei- Fall von Knollen-Farbabanderung der Kartoffel.
[A remarkable case of change of color in potato tubers.] Deutsch. Landwirtsch. Presse 1919:
161-162. 1919.

1501. Fairchild, David. Twins. Jour. Heredity 10: 387-396. Frontispiece, fig. 1-14,
MO, 22-30. Dec, 1919.

1502. Fleischmann, R. Die Auslese bei der Maisziichtung. [Selection in maize breed-
ing.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzticht, 6: 69-96. 1918. — Selection has been practiced since 1909 on
the yellow horse-tooth variety of maize. The characters used were yield of grain, length and

198 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

number of rows on the ear, per cent of grain to cob, weight of 100 seeds, and time of maturity.
— It was found that in selecting for yield of grain the best results were obtained when the prog-
eny row was taken as the unit of selection rather than the individual plant, although positive
results w-ere obtained in either case. — Selection for number of rows was ineffective since the
progenies regressed to a f ourteen-rowed type regardless of whether the selection was made for
a greater or less number of rows. — The per cent of grain to cob was found to be readily changed
by selection but it was found also that the size of the cob was directly associated with the
yield of grain. Care, therefore, must be exercised in selecting for an increased ratio of grain
to cob, not to reduce the absolute size of the cob. — The author questions the value of many-
eared strains and restricted selection to single-eared plants. — J. H. Kempton.

1503. Florin, Rudolf. Zur Kenntnis der Fertilitat und partiellen Sterilitat des Pollens
bei Apfel- und Birnensorten. [On the fertility and partial sterility of the pollen of different
varieties of apple and pear.] Acta Horti Bergiani 7: 1-39. 1920. — If there is self -sterility or
insufficient power of germination of the pollen of a variety of fruit trees it is not advisable to
grow the variety in question alone in great closed groups, but other sorts should be grown
among them which produce plenty of pollen with great efficiency. Author has examined the
power of germination of the pollen (in solutions of sugar of variable concentration) of 102
apple and 14 pear varieties, which are cultivated in Sweden. He gives a tabulated summary
of 405 experiments, wherein he states date, time of examination, temperature, per cent of
germination and maximum and minimum length of the measured pollen tubes. — Of the apples
24 sorts showed 0-30 per cent of germination; 13 showed 31-70 per cent; and 65 showed 71-100
per cent. The last group is of course the most preferable for use as pollenizers. A list of
literature is given containing 27 citations. — K. V. 0$sia?i Dahlgren.

1504. Foot, Katharine. Determination of the sex of the offspring fiom a single pair of
Pediculus vestimenti. Biol. Bull. 37: 385-387. Dec, 1919. — A pair of fleas produced 143 fer-
tilized eggs. Of these 125 hatched and the sex was determined for 115 of the young or 92 per
cent of the total. There were 62 males and 53 females. The earlier-produced eggs yielded
a higher percentage of females than males. Later the proportion of the sexes became equal
and then, as the last eggs were produced, the earlier sex ratio was reversed — more eggs
developing into males than females. — D. D. Whitney.

1405. Fraser, Allan Cameron. The inheritance of the weak awn in certain Avena crosses
and its relation to other characters of the oat grain. Cornell Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. Mem.
23 : 635-676. June, 1919. — A study is made of the inheritance of the weak awn in Avena crosses.
Burt oats were used as parent for the weak awn and Sixty Day for awnless. The reciprocal
crosses indicated an approach to dominance of awnlessness. In F2 generations, two distinct
classes of the weak awn and awnless appeared with a variation between the two types of about
all the possible differences between the parent sorts. These intermediate forms could not be
separated into classes on a multiple factor basis. If all these intermediate forms were thrown
into one class, there would be a close approximation to the 1:2:1 ratio. The fully awned type
is evidently pure recessive. Data in F2 or F3 generations did not include the entire plant,
the center spikelet only being used. This method was based upon results of Love and MoRos-
tie on the tendencies of the plant to agree in its characteristics with the terminal spikelet.
The data seemed to show that both parents contain a factor for awning, but that the Sixty
Day parent possesses an inhibitor linked with yellow color. The inhibitor seems to be
affected in its power of inhibition by environmental factors. The partly awned plants in F2
generations are shown to be heterozygous in successive progeny types. Spikelets with two
awns on a kernel are found only on completely awned spikelets. Increase in soil moisture and
nitrogen seems to decrease number of awns. — The appearance of strong and intermediate
awns in F2 and F.? progenies is considered to be a reversion. There is strong linkage shown
between medium long basal hairs and the awned condition. Short basal hairs or no hairs are
dominant over long basal hairs. — With respect to color, the Fi plants are intermediate. On
account of the difficulty of determining color under weather conditions, the F2 is not consid-

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 190

ered well classified. The Burt oat possesses a red factor and a yellow factor, which are quite
distinct from the Sixty Day factor. The Sixty Day yellow factor inhibits awning. The Burt
yellow carries no such inhibitor. The F3 generation bears out most of the conclusions reached
in F>. The appearance of brown berries is attributed to mutation or reversion. — Alvin Kezer.

1506. Frateur, J. L. La robe sauvage du lapin. [The wild coat of the rabbit. 1 Reunion
Soc. Beige Biol. 1919: 941-943. 1919.

1507. Frets, G. P. De polymerietheorie getoetst aan de erfelijkheid van den hoofdvorm.
[Theory of polymery tested in the inheritance of head-form.] Genetica 2 : 115-136. Mar., 1920.

1508. Fruwirth, C. Neunzehn Jahre Geschichte einer reinen Linie der Futtererbse.
[Nineteen-year history of a pure line of field peas.] Fiihlings landw. Zeitg. 69: 1-28. 1920. —
Study of variations in a pure line, in sense of Johannsen, of field peas breeding absolutely
true for three years to pink flowers and yellowish-green seed-coats. In succeeding years,
"spontaneous variations" occurred from time to time such as plants with red-purple flowers
and maple seed-coats, purple specked and purple-striped seed-coats, albino foliage, varie-
gated yellow and green or more rarely green and white foliage, and plants that either died
prematurely or set no pods or set pods, but matured no seeds. Detailed data given including
tables, of selection and crossing experiments with some of the variants of this pure line.
Only negative results obtained with selection lines. Variants may be regarded as phases
of eversporting races, the variations arising either in vegetative cells or in sexual cells. In
latter case parents of variants are hybrids, giving segregation ratios of a Mendelian type
although these may be irregular. Some spontaneous variations such as red-purple flowers and
maple seed-coats are dominants, while others such as albinism and other foliage-chlorophyll
defects are recessive. Albino foliage variations appear first in a ratio of 3 green: 1 white,
but the variation must have arisen in the sex cells two generations back, but since green fol-
iage is dominant, did not appear except as members of an F2 generation. Albinism and other
chlorophyll defects appeared only in F2 and later generations of cross of the "pure line"
with a white-flowered green-foliage variety. Literature of chlorophyll defects is reviewed.
"Disassociation" and "association" concept of Tschermak is discussed; also" pluripotency"
concept of Haecker. Variations occurring in sex cells uniting with the unvarying sex cells
appear as hybrids. Variations taking place in vegetative cells later give rise to sex-cells
which unite and produce pure races of hereditary variations at once. Eversporting proclivity
may express itself rarely in some races and as regards some characters. — Orland E. White.

1509. Gaines, E. F. The inheritance of resistance to bunt or stinking smut of wheat.
Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12 : 124-132. 1920. — Bunt resistance to wheat is not a simple Men-
delian unit character, but resistance, if Mendelian, is composed of multiple factors, for a
continuous series ranging from complete immunity to complete susceptibility has been ob-
tained. Different wheat varieties possess different kinds of resistance. Linkage between
resistance and morphological characteristics is not sufficient to prevent the selection of a
resistant strain of any morphological type desired. — F. M. Schertz.

1510. Galloway, Beverly T. Some promising new pear stocks. Jour. Heredity 11:
25-32. 8 fig. Jan., 1920.

1511. G auger, Martix. Die Mendelschen Zahlenreihen bei Monohybriden im Llchte
der Dispersionstheorie. [The Mendelian ratios in monohybrids in the light of the dispersion
theory.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 145-198. Mar., 1920.

1512. Goldschmidt, Richard. Intersexualitat und Geschlechtsbestimmung. [Inter-
sexuality and sex determination.] Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 498-512. Nov., 1919.

1513. Gowen, J. W. Appliances and methods for pedigree poultry breeding at the Maine
Station. Maine Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 280: 65-88. IS fig. 1919.— This is a revision of an

earlier bulletin on the same subject. — H. D. Goodale.

BOTANICAL ABSTHAITS, VOL. V, NO. 2

200 GENETICS [Bor. Absts., Vol. V,

1514. Grantham, J., and M. D. Knapp. Field experiments with Hevea. Agric. Bull.
Federated Malay States 6: 595-597. 1918.

1515. Grantham, J., and M. D. Knapp. Field experiments with Hevea. Arch. Rubber-
cultuur 2 : 614-630. 1918.

1516. Green, Heber. The application of statistical methods to the selection of wheat for
prolificacy. Agricultural research in Australia. Advisory Council Sci. and Ind. Common-
wealth of Australia Bull. 7: 49-56. 1918. — Author discusses application of familiar biometric
methods and points out their limitations in wheat breeding. Experiments have been con-
ducted for seven generations in selecting the heavy-, medium-, and light-yielding plants of
wheat. Progress in both directions resulted, though apparently mucii more rapid, m the
direction of high yield. — In an attempt to develop a wheat suitable for semi-arid climates an
unusually severe season destroyed all but three plants in a plot. One of these three was a
giant, the progeny of which has given rise to a valuable strain. — J. H. Kevipton.

1517. Haecker, V. Eine medizinische Formulierung der entwicklungsgeschichtlichen
Vererbungsregel. [A medical formulation of the developmental law of heredity.] Deutsch.
Med. Wochenschr. 44: 124-126. 1919.— The author's "developmental law of heredity" [See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 588] is briefly explained and illustrated. In general the clearness with
which a trait segregates in heredity is a function of the autonomy of that trait in development.
Hereditary defects occurring in organs with a higti degree of developmental autonomy tend
to follow simple Mendelian rules in heredity while those dependent for their manifestation
on disharmonies in several organs or systems (e.g., diabetes) do not do so. Cases in which the
same organ shows different defects in various members of the same family are interpreted as
indicating an early autonomy of the organ in question with a more or less generalized weak-
ness of that organ in the particular family concerned. — C. H. Danforth.

1518. Harlow, H. V., and H. K. Hates. Breeding small grains in Minnesota, n.
Investigations in barley breeding. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 182: 45-56. 4 fig. Mar.,
1919. — Two lines of investigation (pure-line and hybridization) are discussed as methods of
barley improvement. From selections of domestic and foreign sorts it was found that almost
as wide variations in yield were found within a variety as in different varieties. By means of
several crosses between Lion, a smooth-awned black barley, and Manchuria, a smooth-awned
barley of high yielding ability has been produced. Other promising crosses have also been
obtained. Sixty-eight selections, crosses and new introductions are compared on the basis
of the yearly production. A method for discarding in elimination tests based on the probable
error is presented. — W. E. Bryan.

1519. Harper, R. A. Inheritance of sugar and starch characters in corn. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 137-186. 3 pi. April, 1920.— Work of Correns and of East and others on
the inheritance of sugar and starch characters in corn endosperm (Zea) is reviewed to show that
intermediate sweet-starchy types result from crossing these two forms. Original experiments
with crosses of different sweet and starchy endosperm varieties carried to the fourth filial
generation are described and illustrated. Dominance of starchiness is shown in first cross
but in segregating generations intermediate kernels ranging from practically pure sweet to
pure starchy in appearance were obtained in varying proportions and degree along with
other cases in which more definite segregation occurred. The different grades of kernels
are classified and tabulated. Marked tendency shown for intermediate types to breed true
but with more of an inclination to revert to sweet type than to starchy type. Practically
pure starchy ears, in appearance, were obtained from a cross of two sweet varieties. Con-
tinuity of variation in both sexually and asexually reproduced types is taken as an indication
of mutual modification of germplasm where contrasting characters are brought together.
The main features of chromosome individuality and of reduction phenomena are considered
as established but the physiological nature of the chromatin is thought to permit mixing of
hereditary materials resulting in intergradations between parental forms. — D. E. Jones.

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 201

1520. HBNDRICKSON, A. H. Plum pollination. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 310. 28
p., -5 fig. July, 1919.— Experiments show 13 varieties self-sterile, 3 Belf-feri Lie and 1 doubtful.
Early-blooming Japanese varieties produce little pollen and are not efficient pollenizers.

Late-blooming varieties produce abundant pollen. Excepl for the self-fertile Freneh and
sugar prunes interplanting of varieties is recommended to increase yields. No evidence of
Lntersterility among plum or prune varieties was found. Experiments show that bees are
efficient agents of cross-pollinat ion. Set of fruit is also influenced by climatic factors. — J. L.
Col!

1521. HERREj Albert C. Hints for lichen studies. Bryologist 23: 26-27. 1920. —
See Hot. Al.sts. 5, Entry 1919.

1522. Hertwig, P. [German rev. of: Boveiu, Tiikodor. Zwei Fehlerquellen bei Mero-
gonieversuchen und die Entwicklungsfahigkeit msrogonischer und partiellmerogonischer Seeig-
elbastarde. (Two sources of error in investigations of merogony and the ability of merogonic
and partially merogonic sea-urchin hybrids to develop.) Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ. 44:
117 471. S pi. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 216-218. Mar., 1920.— See
also Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 600.

1523. Hertwic, P. [German rev. of: Hertwig, G '/nther. Kreuzungsversuche an Am-
phibien. (Hybridization studies on amphibians.) Arch. Mikrosk. Anat. 91:203-271. 8 fig.
Aug. 20, 191S. See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1005. Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:
219 221. Mar., 1920.

1524. Hilgexdorf, F. W. Methods of plant breeding. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19:
351 358. 1919.— Popular. [See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1153.]

1525. Hollander, Eugen. Familiare Fingermissbildung (Brachydaktylie und Hyper-
phalangie). [Familial abnormalities of the fingers (brachydactyly and hyperphalangy).] Berlin
Klin. Wochenschr. 55: 472^474. 1918. — A man and his son, and probably also his sister, are
characterized by a shortening of the fingers accompanied by an extra bony element in the basal
phalanx of digits two and three. Evidence is brought forth to show that the extra element
is an ununited epiphysis, the inhibition of normal union being in these cases apparently an
hereditary trait. — C. H. Danforlh.

1526. Holmberg, O. R. Carex dioicaXpaniculata, en for Skandinavien ny hybrid. (Carex
dioicaXpaniculata, a hybrid new for Scandinavia.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 249-252. 8 fig. 1918.

1527. Honing, J. A. Selectie-proeven med Deli-tabak. II. [Selection experiments with
Deli-tobacco. II.] Meded. Deli-Proefstation, Medan, Sumatra, 2: 84. 1 pi. 1918. — Gives
results of selection experiments at Deli Proefstation for 1917. The tobacco was harvested
separately, tied in bundles with specially colored twine, fermented in bulk with the other
tobacco, and finally separated for testing. In general the results of 1917 were inferior to those
of 1916 due to less favorable weather. Both large- and small-scale trials were made. In
the small-scale trials there were 467 lots, most of these containing 800-1200 plants. These
repres ented 150 seed-numbers belonging to 81 lines. Of the large-scale trials, with from
90,000' to 560,000 plants per lot, there were 34. These trials were distributed over 17 estates
and were supervised by 5 assistants. Figures for production, percentages of various qualities,
estates' grading and manufacturers' grading, leaf measurements, numbers ot leaves per plant,
burning tests, etc., are given for most of these lines. The writer does not agree with Koch
(Koen, L. Algem. 1528 Landbouwincekblad voor Med. India, Dec. 7, 1917) that mixed seed
is to be preferred to that from pure lines, so far as tobacco culture is concerned. [See also
next following Entry, 1528.] — Carl D. La Rue.

1528. Hoxixg, J. A. Selection experiments with Deli tobacco. III. Meded. Deli-Proef-
stat. Medan 2: 25. 1919. — See also next preceding Entry, 1527.

202 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1529. Hottes, Alfred C. Our American originators. Florists' Exchange 48: 933. S fig.
Dec. 27, 1919. — The work of the A. W. Livingston Seed Co., of Columbus, Ohio, is discussed
somewhat flatteringly and information is given as to the source or point of origin of nineteen
commercial varieties of potatoes. — H. F. Roberts.

1530. Hottwink, R. Hzn. Erfelijkheid. Populaire beschouwingen omtrent net tegen-
woordige standpunt der erfelijkheid, versameld uit theorie en practijk. [Heredity. Popular
presentation of the present status of heredity compiled from theory and practice.] Assen.
Stoomdrukkerij Floralia 1919: 1-62. 5 pi. 1919.

1531. Howe, Ltjcien. The relation of hereditary eye defects to genetics and eugenics.
Jour. Heredity 10: 379-382. Nov., 1919.

1532. Hume, A. N. Corn families of South Dakota. South Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
186: 114-134. Aug., 1919. — A plan of corn breeding is described in which a 96-ear-row breeding
plot is employed. The plot is divided into four independent quarters of twenty-four rows
each and alternate rows are detasseled in order to insure against the most extreme forms of
inbreeding. Thus far the system follows that devised by the Illinois Agricultural Experiment
Station. An important modification, however, lies in the fact that instead of planting the
tasseled or "sire" rows from different individual ears, all of the twelve "sire" rows of each
quarter are planted from kernels of a single ear. This not only permits a more intense selec-
tion for high yield but also makes possible the establishment of a definite ear pedigree along
both lines of parentage. Data are given to show the tendency of yielding capacity of seed
ears to follow lines of ancestry. — L. H. Smith.

1533. Hume, A. N. Yields from two systems of corn breeding. South Dakota Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 184: 70-86. Jan., 1919. — Two systems of corn breeding are compared, both
of which are based upon the ear-row plan of continuous selection. The essential difference
between the two systems is that in the one, alternate rows of the breeding plot are detasseled
and seed is taken only from detasseled plants thereby insuring a certain degree of crossing
while in the other system this precaution is omitted. The results based upon several seasons'
data indicate no significant difference in effectiveness in increasing yield. The working details
of a plan of corn improvement intended to meet the demand for simplicity and practicability
are appended. — L. H. Smith.

1534. Ikeno, S. Etudes d'heredite sur la reversion d'une race de Plantago major. [He-
reditary studies on reversion in a race of Plantago major.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32 : 49-56. 1920.

1535. Ireland, Alletne. Democracy and heredity — A reply. Jour. Heredity 10: 360-
367. Nov., 1919.

1536. Janssens, F. A. A propos de la chiasmatype et de la theorie de Morgan. [Concern-
ing the chiasmatype and Morgan's theory.] Reunion Soc. Beige Biol. 1919: 917-920. 1919.

1537. Janssens, F. A. Une formule simple exprimant de qui se passe en realite lors de la
"chiasmatypie" dans les deux cineses de maturation. [A simple formula expressing what really
takes place in chiasmatypy in the two maturation divisions.] R6union Soc. Beige Biol. 1919:
930-934. 1919.

1538. Johannsen, W. Weismanns Keimplasma-Lehre. [Weismann's germplasm theory.]
Die Naturwiss. 6: 121-126. 1918.

1539. Johannsen, W. Om Weismanns Kimplasma-Laere. [Weismann's germplasm the-
ory.] Vidensk. Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhist. Foren i KJ0benhavn. 69: 153-164. 1918.

1540. Johnson, Charles W. Variation of the palm weevil. Jour. Heredity 11: 84. Feb.,
1920.

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 203

1541. JOHNSON, James. An improved strain of Wisconsin tobacco. Connecticut Havana
No. 38. Jour. Heredity 10: 2,81-288. Fig. 8-10. June, 1919.

154'2. Jones, D. F., andW. O. FlLLEY. Teas' hybrid catalpa. An illustration of the greater
vigor of hybrids; increased growth and hardiness as a result of crossing; illustrating definite
principles of heredity. Jour. Heredity 11: 16-24. 6 fig. Jan., 1920.

1543. Jones, D. F. Selection in self-fertilized lines as the basis for corn improvement.
Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 77-100. 1920. — Selection in self fertilized lines makes possible
a reliable estimation of hereditary values of both sexes and is suggested for corn improvement.
— F. M. Schertz.

154*1. Kappert, H. Uber das Vorkommen volkommener Dominanz bei einem quantitativen
Merkmal. [The occurrence of complete dominance in a quantitative character.] Zeitschr.
indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 199-209. 1 fig. Mar., 1920.

1545. Kempton, J. H. Heritable characters of maize. III. Brachytic culms. Jour. He-
redity 11 : 111-115. 4 fig. Mar., 1920.

1546. Klatt, B. Experimentelle Untersuchungen iiber die Beeinflussbarkeit der Erban-
lagen durch den Korper. [Experimental investigations on the modifiability of the hereditary fac-
tors through the soma.] Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf. Freunde. 1919: 39-45. 1919. — Writer experi-
mented with three races of gypsy moth (Lymantria dispar). The caterpillars of one of these
had an unusuall}' broad yellow stripe along the back, dominant on the whole over the narrow
yellow stripe of the normal race. The third race had a black longitudinal stripe, dominant
over yellow and normal and clearly differing by a unit factor. He extirpated the ovaries of
individuals dominant in one or both factors (yellow or black) and transplanted in their place
ovane? from recessive individuals. These females were mated with recessive males. The
caterpillars appeared to be pure recessives, showing no trace of the dominant characters of
the foster mothers. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1579.]— Sewall Wright.

1547. Klatt, Berthold. [German rev. of: Durken, Bernhard. Einfiihrung in die
Experimentalzoologie. (Introduction to experimental zoology.) 16 x 23 cm., x + 446 p., 224 fig-
Julius Springer: Berlin, 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 275-276. May,
1920.

154S. Klatt, B. [German rev. of: (1) Palmgren, Rolf. Till Kannedomen om Abnormi-
teters Nedarfning hos en del Husdjur. (Inheritance of abnormalities in certain domestic
animals.) Acta Soc. pro fauna et flora fennica 44: 1-22. 1918. (2) Palmgren, Rolf. Tvenne
bastardei mellan getbock och fartacka, fodda i Hogholmes zoologiska tradgard. (Two hybrids
between sheep and goats produced in Hogholm zoological gardens.) Med. pro fauna et flora
fennica 44: 124-125. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:283-284. May, 1920.

1549. Klatt, B. [German rev. of: Pezard, M. A. Transformation experimental des
caracteres sexuels secondaires chez les Gallinaces. (Experimental transformation of secondary
sexual characters in Gallinaceae.) Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 160: 260-263. 1915.] Zeit-
schr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 284. May, 1920.

1550. Koch, L. Verdere Onderzoekingen betreffende de praktijkwaarde van de lijnen-
selectiemethode, mede in verband met het gemengd planten van varieteiten. [Further obser-
vations on the practical value of the line-selection method and a comparison of it with the mixed
planting of varieties.] Teysmannia 29: 389-123. 1918. — Author has made comparative tests
of planting in (a) pure lines, (b) mixed populations and (c) populations made up of definite
mixtures of pure lines of the following crops: rice, katjang tanah, kedelee, corn, potatoes, and
cassave, and finds that in rice and katjang, line selection gives no satisfactory results. Vari-
eties of rice when in mixed plantings influence each other greatly. The results of such

204 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

influences depend upon the kind and proportion of the varieties in the mixture, it is possible
to get mixtures that produce a higher average yield than any of the varieties of which the
mixture is composed. [See also next following Entry 1551.] — W. H. Eyster.

1551. Koch, L. Onderzoekingen betreffende de praktijkwaarde van de iijnenselectie-
methode voor verschillende eenjarige landbouwgewassen. [Researches concerning the prac-
tical value of the line selection method for various annual tropical crops.] Teysmannia 29:
1-36, 96-127, 156-191, 389-423. 1918.— The line-breeding method was first practised in 1907
by van der Stok, then assistant at the botanical section of the Experiment Station for Rice
and other Annual Crops at Buitenzorg, Java. A great deal of line breeding had been per-
formed before 1915, the selected crops being specially rice, ground-nuts and soy beans. Dur-
ing the years when most breeding took place (1911-1915) some peculiarities were noticed, which
gave birth to the idea that line breeding was by no means a method for securing high-pro-
ducing rice strains, etc. In the trials (almost all of them with 8 or more control plots) it was
observed that the population (mixture of all strains, high- and low-producing) gave in most
cases an unexpectedly high yield, higher than most selected pure strains. Breeding did meet
with success where immunity for certain diseases or qualitative peculiarities were aimed at.
As most breeding was for increasing the yield, a series of trials was undertaken to determine
whether line breeding should be continued or not, and to investigate the reason why there
was so little success. — In the years 1914-1916 selection took place for 6 rice varieties. In only
2 of 16 trials did the selected rice strains give a fairly good yield in comparison to the unse-
lected mixture. As a rule, a strain that gave one year the highest yield, failed to do so in the
next. More than once such a strain yielded much less than some others had that been much
inferior the previous year. — As the climate at Buitenzorg is somewhat peculiar, and results
might perhaps be influenced by the great rainfall or the moist atmosphere, trials were made
at the same time at the experimental farms at Ngandjoek and at Sidoardjo, these places being
situated respectively in the central and the eastern part of Java. Out of six trials at Ngand-
joek, the pure strains and the unselected mixture were alike; at Sidoardjo, in 2 out of 3 cases,
the strains failed to give a higher yield than the population. — The supposition arose that the
high yield of the population might be caused by the fact that the mixture is, generally speak-
ing, more suited for uneven circumstances than is a pure variety. — In order to investigate
this matter author began, in 1915, a series of trials wherein mixed-up pure strains were com-
pared with the same races unmixed. The same was done by mixing up pure varieties. In
most trials the varieties or strains were compared in this way: (1) variety A, 100 per cent;
(2) variety B, 100 per cent; (3) A, 75 per cent + B 25 per cent; (4) A 50 per cent + B 50 per
cent; (5) A 25 per cent«+ B 75 per cent. — Not only the yielding but also the stooling power
was examined. When the paddy was ripe the ears were cut by hand and afterwards all the
product in the trials where pure varieties had been mixed up was separated by hand so that
one could know exactly which part of the yield had been provided by variety A, and what
part by B. All heads were counted, so that the average weight was determined. The result
of 4 trials with 8 controls showed that the pure strains and varieties did, on the whole, not
so well as the mixtures. The stooling power shown by weekly counts, was in most cases
higher than the pure strains; in one of the four cases, however, all the counts were remarkably
lower with the mixtures than with the pure strains. Of two varieties, the highest producer
(singly planted) did not always give the greatest proportion of the product of the mixture.
1 n most cases the heads of the varieties that suppressed the other one became heavier and the
heads of the suppressed one became lighter.— Trials .of the same order wrere made with maize,
soy beans and peanuts. With maize, yellow Menado corn and Saipan corn, singly planted,
were compared with mixtures of these varieties. The mixtures yielded as much as 12 per
cent more than the highest-producing variety separately planted. With soy beans the same
was to be observed: 70 per cent of black mixed with 30 per cent of white soy beans yielded 12
per cent more than black alone, and 28 per cent more than white alone. With peanuts, 9
out of 10 mixtures gave a higher yield than might have been expected from the yield for the
pure strains. — In the year 1916-1917, out of 4 trials comparing pure strains with mixtures of
the same strains, no conclusions could be reached as to which should be preferred, strains or

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 2(V)

mixtures.— Out of 5 other such trials made a1 Sidoardjo, only in one case did the strains yield
more than the mixtures. — The same was done for peanuts, the Strains producing a little more
than the mixtures.— The conclusion could be reached that: (1) Mixed planting of rice or pi
nuts does not necessarily raise the production. (2) Line Belectii 0 with paddy gives wholl
unsatisfactory results.— In 15 other trials, made in 1916-1917, where mixed-up pure varies
of paddy had been compared (8 controls) with the same varieties unmixed, the following
conclusions were reached: (1) The yield of a mixture of pure varieties is, on the whole, higher
than the calculated yield based on the production of the varieties planted singly. (2) The
stooling power in a mixture is generally higher than the calculated. — (3) The percentage of
stalks bearing heads is somewhat less in mixtures than in pure varict tee. (4) The mean head-
weight of different varieties in a mixture exhibits greater variation, and may differ greatly
from the weight of the same variety not mixed. (5) In a mixture one variety may suppress
another. (6) The suppressing variety is not necessarily the highest yielding when planted
singly. (7) The suppressing variety is generally the race that stools most, when other char-
acters are the same. (8) As a rule, the mean weight of the head increases with the suppress-
ing variety and decreases with the suppressed one. (9) Perhaps it may be possible to find
empirically mixtures that are well suited to certain circumstances. — Mixing trials have also
been made with sweet potatoes (14 trials) and cassava varieties (1 trial). With sweet pota-
toes no conclusions could be made as to the yielding power; with cassava the mixture proved
to be better than the best pure race. [See also next preceding Entry. 1550., — L. Koch.

1552. Kohlbrugge, J. H. F. De erfelijkheid van verkregen eigensh2ppen. [Inheritance
of acquired characters.] Genetica 1 : 347-386. 1919.

1553. Krafka, Joseph, Jr. The effect of ternperatuie upon facet number in the bar-eyed
mutant of Drosophila. Parti. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2 : 409-432. 10 fig. Mar. 20, 1920. Part II.
Ibid., 433-444. 4 fig. May 20, 1920. Part III. Ibid., 445-464. May20,1920 — Breeding experi-
ments with the bar-eyed mutant of Drosophila melanogaster at constant temperatures between
15°-3l°C. have shown that the mean facet number varies inversely with the temperature at
which the larvae develop, though no such variation occurs in the normal wrild stock. The tem-
perature coefficient for the variation in facet number of bar eye is of the same order as that for
chemical reactions, and the variation may be plotted as an exponential curve. The greatest-
percentages of increase per degree centigrade come at the upper and lower temperatures.
The temperature curve for rate of development of the immature stages of the fly corresponds
with the facet curve from 15°-27°C., but drops above that point. The rate of development
may be interpreted as the resultant of a number of different processes having different tempera-
ture coefficients. Temperature is effective in determining facet number during a relatively
short period in larval development only, i.e., at a stage when about 36 per cent of immature
development is completed. This period is about 18 hours long, and the temperature either
before or after that time has no effect on facet number. The time at which this period is
reached is dependent on the rate of development, but the facet number is not influenced by the
length of the immature stage. The correlation between the two curves is therefore only
apparent. It is suggested that the decrease in facet number in the bar-eyed flies may be
accounted for by the presence of an inhibitor in the mutant stock, the temperature coefficient
of which differs from that of the normal facet-producing reaction. — It is shown also that the
coefficient of variability of the facet number in bar-eyed flies increases with temperature,
while the standard deviation apparently decreases. The effect of temperature on facet num-
ber in bar-eyed stock is not inherited. — H. H. Plough.

1554. Kuiper, K. Ondeizoekingen over kleur en teekening bij runderen. Naar experi-
menten van R. Houwink Hzn. [Studies on color and color pattern in cattle. Based on experi-
ments of R. Houwink Hzn.] Genetica 2: 137-161. 5 pi. Mar., 1920.

1555. Kuster, E. Uber mosaikpanaschierung und vergleichbare Erscheinungen. [Mosaic
variegation and comparable phenomena.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36: 54-61. 1918.

206 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1556. Kuster, E. Uber sektoriale Panaschierung und andere Formen der sektorialen
Differenzierung. [On sectorial variegation and other forms of sectorial differentiation.] Mo-
natshefte f. d. natw. Unterr. 12: 84-87. 1919.

1557. Lebedinsky, N. G. Darwins geschlechtliche Zuchtwahl und ihre arterhaltende
Bedeulung. [Darwin's sexual selection and its significance for the maintenance of species.]
Habilitationsvortrag. 31 p. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1423.

1558. Lehmann, Ernst. Zur Terminologie und Begriffsbildung in der Vererbungslehre.
[Terminology and formation of genetical concepts.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22.
236-260. May, 1920.

1559. Lehmann, E. [German rev. of : (1) Sperlich, Adolf. Die Fahigkeit der Liniener-
haltung (phyletische Potenz), ein auf die Nachkommenschaft von Saisonpsflanzen mit festen
Rhythmus ungleichmassig iibergehender Faktor. (Capacity to maintain lines (phyletic potency)
a factor distributed irregularly to the offspring of plants with fixed seasonal rhythm.) Sitzungs-
ber. Akad.Wiss.Wien 128:379. 1919. (2) Sperlich, Adolf. Uber den Einfluss des Quellungs-
zeitpunktes von Treibmitteln und des Lichtes auf die Samenkeimung von Alectorolophus hir-
sutus All. Charakterisierung der Samenruhe. (On the influence of the time of application of
forcing -agents and of light on the germination of seeds of Alectorolophus hirsutus. Charac-
terization of seed rest.) Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien 128: 477. 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 299-301. May, 1920.

1560. Leighty, Clyde E. Natural wheat-rye hybrids of 1918. Jour. Heredity 11: 129-
136. 4 fig. Mar., 1920.

1561. Levine, C. O. The water buffalo — A tropical source of butter fat. Jour. Heredity
11:51-64. 9 fig. Feb., 1920.

1562. Levine, C. O. Swine, sheep, and goats in the orient. Jour. Heredity 11: 117-124.
6 fig. Mar., 1920.

1563. Lewis, A. C. Annual report of the State Entomologist for 1918. Georgia State
Bd. Ent. Bull. 55: 1-31. Fig. 2. 1919. — The cotton breeding work is along three main lines;
to improve the wilt resistant varieties which have already been developed, breeding for
earliness in Sea Island cotton, and to improve the varieties of cotton which are especially
adapted to central and north Georgia. Breeding for wilt resistance is being done with three
varieties, Lewis 63, Council Toole and DeSoto, all of which now give satisfactory results
under wilt conditions. Efforts are being made to stabilize the length of lint in the hybrid
Dix-Afifi, a long staple upland wilt-resistant variety. Selections are being made to improve
ten varieties of cotton adapted to north and central Georgia. A strain of Sea Island cotton
known as No. 33 has been developed which is much earlier than the ordinary varieties. This
strain is also very prolific and produces a small stalk. — D. C. Warren.

1564. Lienhart. De la possibility pour les eleveurs d'obtenir a volonte des males ou des
femelles dans les races gallines. [On the possibility for the raiser to obtain males or females
at will in the races of poultry.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 102-104. 1919.

1565. Lindhard, E., and Karsten Iversen. Vererbung von roten und gelben Farben-
merkmalen bei Beta-Ruben. [Inheritance of red and yellow color character in beets.] Zeit-
schr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 1-18. June, 1919. — Crosses were made between red, yellow and white
types of beets (Beta) and carried through the F4 generation in some cases. A provisional
factorial hypothesis is presented in which R G denotes red; r G, yellow; and R g and r g white.
This presupposes a 9:3:4 ratio when a plant RrGg is self-pollinated. A large F2 generation
approximates such a ratio rather poorly and the author suggests a linkage between R and G
with a gametic ratio of 1.8: 1 which fits the F2 results closely. This linkage relation, however,

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 207

does not apparently hold in the only two back-crosses listed, although the total number of
individuals is slightly less than 100. The author then suggests the presence of a lethal factor
(T) but does not develop this idea. — E. W. Lrindstrom.

1566. Lipschutz, A. Bemerkung zur Arbeit von Knud Sand uber experimentellen Her-
maphroditismus. [Comments on the work of Knud Sand on experimental hermaphroditism.]
Pfliiger's Arch. 176: 112. 1919.

1567. Little, C. C. A note on the origin of piebald spotting in dogs. Jour. Heredity 11:
12-15. 1 fig. Jan., 1920.

1568. Little, C. C. Is there linkage between the genes for yellow and for black in mice.
Amer. Nat. 54: 267-270. May-June, 1920. — Discussion of recent paper of Dunn's referring to
a deficiency of black young in a family of yellow mice. Because of small number of offspring
involved, it is pointed out that the deviation from normal expectation may be entirely a
matter of chance. Dunn states that yellow and black may possibly be linked. Author calls
attention to the fact that yellow and agouti are allelomorphic and that agouti has been shown
not to be linked to black. Author gives alternative explanation for observed facts, viz., as-
sumption is made that a lethal factor is linked to black in the family above noted, and that
this lethal is effective in a heterozygous condition in non-yellow mice but not in yellow mice.
— H. L. Ibsen.

1569. Little, C. C. The heredity of susceptibility to a transplantable sarcoma (J. W. B.)
of the Japanese waltzing mouse. Science 51: 467-468. May 7, 1920. — In a cross between a
Japanese waltzing mouse one hundred per cent susceptible to a transplantable sarcoma
(J. W. B.) and the common non-waltzing mouse not susceptible to the sarcoma, the Fi gener-
ation hybrids were all susceptible to the sarcoma, but the F2 hybrids gave a total of twenty-
three susceptible to sixty-six non-susceptible animals thus supporting the expectations on
the three-, four-, five-, and seven-factor hypotheses. — To determine more closely the number
of factors involved Fi hybrid mice, — themselves susceptible, — were crossed back with the
non-susceptible parent race. The numbers obtained were twenty-one susceptible to 208
non-susceptible which indicates that from three to five factors— probably four — are involved
in determining susceptibility to the mouse sarcoma (J. W. B.). — Simultaneous presence of
these factors is considered necessary for susceptibility. None of these factors is carried in
the sex (X) chromosome since all the "X" chromosomes in the resulting animals, of the
back-cross, if the original mating is a non-susceptible female with a susceptible male, will
be derived from the common non-susceptible mice. — Mary B. Stark.

1570. Lo Priore, G. Sulla ereditarieta. della fasciazione nelle spighe del mais. [On the in-
heritance of a fasciation in the maize ear.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 51 : 415-430. 1918. — Four fasci-
ated ears of maize were found in 1902. A progeny of these, grown from open-pollinated seed,
produced fasciated ears on one-third of the plants. The second year 40 per cent of the plants
bore fasciated ears, while in the third year the progeny of a better-fasciated ear produced
such ears on 60 per cent of the plants. The plants with fasciated ears showed no other abnor-
malities and yielded exceptionally well. The author concludes that a fasciated race of maize
can be developed b}- selection although the abnormal form is transmitted to only a part of
the offspring and according to laws of heredity not yet formulated. — The relation of traumatic
and chemical treatment to the development of fasciations and other abnormalities as well as
the relation of fasciation to the origin of the normal maize ear is discussed. — J. II. Kcmpton.

1571. Losch, Hermann. Ascidienbildung an Staubfaden vergriinter Bliiten von Tropae-
olum majus. [Ascidia formation on stamens of virescent flowers of Tropaeolum majus.l Ber.
Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 37: 369-372. Dec, 1919. — Describes on virescent stamens of Tropae-
olum majus ascidia in various stages of development. Inner side of ascidium is foliar under
side. — James P. Kelly.

208 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1572. Lotst, J. P. Heribert Nilsson's onderzoekingen over soortsvorming bij Salix met
opmerkingen mijnerzijds omtrent de daarin en in publicaties vanandeienuitgeoeiende kiitiek
aan mijn soorts-definitie. [Heribert- Nilsson's investigation on species formation in Salix with
remarks of my own on the author's critique, and that of others on my taxonomic definitions.]
Genetica 2: 162-188. Mar., 1920.

1573. Lotsy, J. P. Cucurbita-Strijdpagen. De soort-quaestie.— Het gedrag na kruis-
ing.— Parthenogenese? II. Eigen onderzoekingen. [Cucurbita problems. The species ques-
tion. The result of crossing. Parthenogenesis? II. Investigations by the author.] Genetica
2: 1-21. 1 8-colored plate, 9 fig. Jan., 1920.

1574. Luhning. Die erbliche Geschlechtsverkniipfung. [Hereditary sex linkage.]
Deutsch. Landw. Tierzucht, 22: 77-78. 1918.

1575. Malinowski, Edmund. Die Sterilitiit der Bastarde im Lichte des Mendelismus.
[The sterility of hybrids in the light of Mendelism.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:
225-235. May, 1920.

1576. Mass, J. G. J. A. Field experiments with Hevea. Agric. Bull. Federated Malay
States 6: 561-613. 596-597. 1918.

1577. Masui, Kiyoshi. The spermatogenesis of domestic mammals. I. The spermato-
genesis of the horse (Equus caballus). Jour. Coll. Agric. Imperial Univ. Tokyo 3: 357-376.
S pi, 2 fig. 1919.

1578. Masui, Kiyoshi. The spermatogenesis of domestic mammals. II. The spermato-
genesis of cattle (Bos taurus). Jour. Coll. Agric. Imperial Univ. Tokyo 3: 377—103. 3 pi.,
1 fig. 1919.

1579. Matthael, R. [German rev. of: Klatt, B. Experimentelle Untersuchungen iiber
die Beeinfiussbarkeit der Erbanlagen durch den Korper. (Experimental investigations on
the modifiabiiity of the hereditary factors through the soma.) Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf.
Freunde 1919: 39-45. 1919. See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1546.] Zeitschr. Allg. Physiol. 18:
46-47. 1920.

1580. McAlpine, D. Immunity and inheritance in plants. Advisory Council Sci. Indust.
Australia Bull. 7: 76-86. 1918. — A general discussion of the inheritance of disease resistance
in wheat. Author recommends crossing susceptible varieties with resistant ones as means
of developing rust immunity. — J. H. Kempton.

1581. Mendel, Kurt. Familiare peripherische Radialislahmung. [Familial peripheral
paralysis of the radial nerve.] Neurol. Cent ralbl. 39: 58-59. 1920. — It is recognized that hered-
ity often plays a role in cases of facial paralysis, but it has not been determined whether
the manifestation in these cases is due to the indirect effect of some hereditary anatomical
anomaly, such for example as an unusually acute bend in the facial canal, or to a heightened
susceptibility inherent in the nerve itself. The author now reports a family in which the
father and two sons suffered from paralysis of the hand following very trivial injuries to the
radial nerve at the elbow or near the shoulder. From these cases the author is led to believe
that in hereditary paralysis involving the radial, probably the facial, and possibly other pe-
ripheral nerves, the underlying factor is to be sought not in any gross anatomical variation of
the related parts, but in an hereditary condition of increased vulnerability of the particular
nerve involved in the paralysis. — C. H. Danforlh.

1582. Metz, Chas. W. Correspondence between chromosome number and linkage groups
in Drosophila virilis. Science 51 : 417-418. April 23, 1920.— Whereas in Drosophila mclano-
gaster there are three large pairs and one very small pair of chromosomes, and three large
groups and one very small group of linked genes, there are in D. virilis five large pairs, and one

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 209

very small pair of chromosomes, and five known groups of linked genes. Author points out
that only twenty-seven mutant characters, of which fourteen are sex-linked, have thus far
been investigated in this species, and thai the failure to delect the sixth (and presumably
small) group, is not surprising in view of the small number of characters investigated. He
promises full data on this case in a future publication.— Jo An S. Dexter.

1683. MiTsciiKiu.H n, EiLH, Alfred, tiber kiinstliche Wunderiihrenbildung. [The arti-
ficial production of abnormal heads of cereals.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 101-109. 8 fin.
Dec, 1910.

1584. Moiih, Otto L., and Chr. Wriedt. A new type of hereditary biachyphalangy in
man. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. No. 295. 64 p., 7 pi., 4 fig- 1919. — A careful study
based on personal examinations, authentic records, photographs and X-ray plates has been
made of the hands of nearly 100 members of a Norwegian family in which an unusually clear-
cut type of brachyphalangy occurs in at least six generations. The trait behaves as a sirn
dominant and is not sex-linked. In heterozygous individuals the manifestation is confined
exclusively, so far as can be determined, to the middle phalanx of the index finger (and the com-
parable phalanx of the corresponding toe). The affected phalanx may be shortened to a
moderate degree or reduced almost to the point of elimination in which case it is sometimes
subluxated toward the ulnar side causing the terminal phalanx to bend radial-ward giving a
"crooked" finger which is not (in this family) genetically different from a "short" finger. Of
especial interest is the fact that the manifestations of the trait do not fluctuate around a
single mode but arrange themselves in two distinct groups without any overlapping. The
authors, therefore, postulate a second, modif3ring, gene which intensifies the effect of the main
gene. This modifier is one of presumably manj' such genes which may be widely distributed
in the human germ plasm without often having an opportunity to manifest themselves.
Certain individuals who have married into the family have been heterozygous for the modi-
fier, others have lacked it altogether. Failure to recognize the existence of this gene might
easily have led to erroneous conclusion as to "dilution" of the main gene. In reality no dilution
has taken place in the course of six generations. Of possibly great importance is the result of the
marriage of two affected individuals. A single marriage of this sort yielded three children,
one of whom lacked all fingers and toes and died at the age of a year. The authors are inclined
to regard this case as the one instance of an individual homozygous for brachyphalangy

to look upon the gene as one which, when heterozygous, produces relatively inconsequential
effects, but which when homozygous produces very serious, perhaps lethal, results. — C. II .
Danforth.

1585. Mohr, Otto L. Mikroskopische Untersuchungen zu Experimenten iiber den Ein-
fluss der Radiumstrahlen und der Kaltewirkung auf die Chromatinreifung und das Hetero-
chromosom bei Decticus verruccivorus (o71). [Microscopic studies in experiments on the
influence of radium rays and effect of cold on the maturation and the heterochromosome of
Decticus verruccivorus (&).] Arch, mikrosk. Anat. 92: 300-388. 6 pi. 1919.

1580. Morgan, T. H. Variations in the secondary sexual characters of the fiddler crab.
Amer. Nat. 54 : 220 2 !0. 6 fig. May-June, 1920. — Two variations are described that are shown
not to be due to regeneration. Whether due to genetic change, to infection, or to some em-
bryonic "slip" could not be determined. Literature relating to sex-intergrades in Crustacea
is reviewed.— 7'. //. Morgan.

1587. Mottet, S. Digitalie hybride de Lutz. [The Lutz Digitalis hybrid.) Rev. Hortic
91: 390-397. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1827.

1588. Mumford, H. W\ Famous Angus cows of Scotland. Breeder's Gaz. 76: 462-463.
1919. — Author discusses briefly the records of the foundation cows of certain famous families
of the Aberdeen Angus breed. — Sewall Wright.

210 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1589. Mttnns, E. N. Effect of fertilization on the seed of Jeffrey Pine. Plant World 22:
138-144. 1919. — Author reports on results of various cross- and self- pollinations among 8
trees of Pinus Jeffreyi, three of which were thrifty, two mistletoe-infected, one insect infected,
and two "suppressed trees." On basis of observations author recommends that seed should
be collected from localities with strong winds at time of flowering so that cross-pollinated
seeds may be secured; and that for heavy seeds and consequent stronger seedlings collections
should be from thrifty parents ; poor trees gave largest number of seeds to pound but produced
smallest nursery trees ; and that in timber-sale practice only thrifty trees should be left. [See
also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1375.] — James P. Kelly.

1590. Myers, C. H. The use of a selection coefficient. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:

,™> nr> ,mn Number of ripe ears , „, . , ,

106-112. 1920. — - - ; — = percentage of maturity. Ihe average yield per

Total number of ears

stalk of maize was determined in pounds. It was desirable to combine the yield and the maturity

into a single expression which would serve as a basis for selection. The average yield per

stalk times the percentage of maturity gives the ''selection coefficient."— F. M. Schertz.

1591. Nachtsheim, Hans. Crossing-over-Theorie oder Reduplikationshypothese? [The
crossover theory or the reduplication hypothesis?] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:
127-141. 4 fig. Jan., 1920.

1592. Nachtsheim, Hans. Zytologische und experimentelle Untersuchungen iiber die
Geschlechtsbestimmung bei Dinophilus apatris Korsch. [Cytological and experimental studies
on the sex determination of Dinophilus apatris Korsch.] Arch. Mikrosk. Anat. 93: 17-140.
4 pi., 5 fig. Nov., 1919.

1593. Naef, A. Idealistische Morphologie und Phylogenetik. (Zur Methodik der sys-
tematischen Morphologie.) [Idealistic morphology and phylogeny. (On the method of system-
atic morphology.) ] 77 p., 4 fig- Jena, 1919.

1594. Noack, Konrad. [German rev. of: Stomps, Theo. J. Gigas -mutation mit und
ohne Verdoppelung der Chromosomenzahl. [Gigas-mutation with and without doubling of
the chromosome number. Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 65-90. 3 pi., 4 fig- July,
1919. (See Bot, Absts. 4, Entry 778.) ] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 36-39. 1920.

1595. Noyes, Hilda H. The development of useful citizenship. Jour. Heredity 11: 88-
91. Feb., 1920.

1596. Nuttall, G. H. F. The biology of Pediculus humanus. Parasitology 2 : 201-220.
1 pi., 1 fig. 1919. — Lice reared on white backgrounds developed very little pigment and ap-
peared whitish or translucent but those reared on black backgrounds became very darkly
pigmented thus showing that pigmentation is not inherited. In some lots taken from their
host as high as 9 per cent of the adult individuals were hermaphrodites. — D. D. Whitney.

1597. O., A. Zonal Pelargoniums. Gard. Chron. 66: 157. Sept. 20, 1919.— Maxime Kav-
olsky, a comparatively new variety is briefly described. — A. C. Hildreth.

1598. Palmgren. Rolf. Till Kannedomen om Abnormiteters Nedarfning hos en del
Husdjur. [Inheritance of abnormalities in certain domestic animals.] Acta Soc. pro fauna
et flora fennica 44: 1-22. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1548.

1599. Palmgren, Rolf. Tvenne bastarder mellan getbock och fartacka, fodda i Hog-
holmes zoologiska tradgard. [Two hybrids between sheep and goats produced in Hogholm zoolo-
gical gardens.] Med. pro fauna et flora fennica 44: 124-125. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 1548.

1600. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. An annual white sweet clover. Proc. Iowa Acad.
Sci. 25: 249-251. PI. 4-6. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1191.

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 211

1601. Pammkl, L. H., andC. M. King. A variation in the black walnut. Proc. Iowa Acad.
Sci. 25: 241-248. PI. 3, fig. 43-44. 1920.

1602. Patterson, J. T. Polyembryony and sex. Jour. Heredity 10: 344-352. 2 fig.
Nov., 1919.

1603. Pellew, Caroline. The genetics of Campanula carpatica. Card. Chron. 66:
23S. S fig. Nov. S, 1919. — A brief consideration of investigations of the author more com-
pletely discussed in "Types of segregation," Jour. Genetics 6: 1917. — In Campanula carpatica
hermaphrodites occur with male and female organs fully developed. In other plants the an-
thers fail to develop beyond a rudimentary stage while in others, still, development of the
anthers is partial. Self-sterility is general in this species. In certain strains of C. carpatica
pelviformis crosses between hermaphrodites or between females and hermaphrodites inva-
riably gave mixed families consisting both of females and hermaphrodites, often with a pre-
ponderance of females. The hermaphrodites appear to produce more gametes carrying the
female character than gametes carrying the hermaphrodite character. There is no consistent
difference in this respect between the ovules and pollen of a single plant. In other strains
the pollen and ovules differ. Two hermaphrodites were found, pollen of which, when used
on females, gave rise exclusively to females, whereas ovules of the same plant fertilized by
other hermaphrodites gave rise exclusively to hermaphrodites. A flower-color factor pair
in this species also follows this unusual type of segregation by which the ovules and pollen
are differentiated. Normal segregation of the color factor occurs on the female side result-
ing in equal numbers of ovules bearing blue or white allelomorphs. Ninety-seven per cent
of the pollen grains, however, carry the white allelomorph and three per cent only the blue
allelomorph.— Power of transmitting this unusual mode of segregation from parent to off-
spring is apparently limited to the ovules, for no plant similar to C. carpatica pelviformis
has been derived from its male side. This type of segregation may be compared with the
double-throwing variety of stock. — C. B. Hutchison.

1604. Pezard, A. Castration alimentaire chez les coqs soumis au regime came exclusif.
[Alimentary castration in a cock subjected to an exclusive meat diet.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 169: 1177-1179. 1919.

1605. Pitt, Frances. Notes on the inheritance of color and markings in pedigree Here-
ford cattle. Jour. Genetics 9: 281-302. 4 pi- Feb., 1920. — Notes and photographs on which
this paper is based come chiefly from the breeding of pure bred Herefords owned by W. J.
Pitt. — Excessive white on the sides of the belly and down the spine behaved to well marked
animals as a recessive factor. The ratios were: heterozygote to heterozygote, 25 well marked:
10 excessive white; heterozygote to pure dominant well marked, 52 well marked; heterozygote
to recessive excessive white, 7 well marked to 9 excessive white. — Dark neck or extension of
the pigment area to include the neck, the crest, and to encroach on the white area on the tail
behaved nearly as a dominant to the desired white markings. In the presence of the factor
for excessive white the "dark-necked" factor apparently may be inhibited in its action. — A
ring of red around the eyes is dependent on a single dominant factor. The ratios for hetero-
zygote X heterozygote were 42 red-eyed to 12 white-eyed. The mating of the heterozygote X
the recessive white-eyed gave 12 heterozygote to 15 complete recessive. It appears that the
factor for red pigment around the eyes is independent of the other factors.— Pigment on the
nose behaves as a dominant to clean nose, pigmented X non-pigmented giving 4 pigmented in
Fi; pigmented heterozgyous X non-pigmented, giving 3 pigmented to 3 not pigmented in the
Fi. — Two pigment factors control coat color. Pale brown coat is dominant over the deep
rich purple or claret coat. The factors for coat color apparently behave independently of
the rest save with the possible exception of the pigmented nose.— The observation is made
that the "claref'-coated animals may not feed as rapidly as the pale brown. — The history of
the breed is cited to show that the factors discussed were present in early times. — John W.
Go wen.

212 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. V,

1606. Pleijel, C Valeriana excelsa Poir X officinalis L. nova hybrida. [Valeriana ex-
celsa Poir X officinalis L. a new hybrid.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 29.5-296. 1918.

1607. Popenoe, Paul. Inbreeding and outbreeding. [Rev. of: East, E. M., and D. F.
Jones. Inbreeding and outbreeding. 14 x 21 cm., 285 p., 46 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadel-
phia, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571; 5, Entries 437, 1695.)] Jour. Heredity 11:
125-128. Mar., 1920.

1608. Popenoe, Paul. World-power and evolution. Jour. Heredity 11: 137-144. Mar.,
1920.

1609. P[openoe], P. Lock's last work. [Rev. of: Lock, R. II. Recent progress in the,
study of variation, heredity, and evolution. Ath ed., 336 p. E. P. Dutton & Co.: New York,
1916.] Jour. Heredity 11: 110. Mar., 1920.

1610. P[openoe], Paul. Morgan on heredity. [Rev. of : Morgan, Thomas Hunt. The
physical basis of heredity. 14x21 cm., 300 p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia,
1919.] Jour. Heredity 11: 144. Mar., 1920.

1611. P[openoe], P. [Rev. of: Punnett, Reginald Crundall. Mendelism. 5th ed.,
13x19 cm., 219 p., 7 pi, 52 fig. Macmillan & Co.: London. 1919.] Jour. Heredity 11: 115.
Mar., 1920.

1612. Pridham, J. T. Oat and barley breeding, agricultural research in Australia. Ad-
visory Council Sci. and Ind. Commonwealth of Australia, Bull. 7: 22-3S. 191S. — Cross was
made between the Algerian variety of oats and Carter's Royal Cluster. The F2 consisted of
1,092 plants. There was great diversity among the young plants, some having coarse, broad
leaves, while others had leaves almost like rye-grass in their fineness. There was also great
diversity in character of stooling, foliage color, and habit of growth (erect or prostrate).
On approaching maturity some plants showed pink or reddish color at base of stalk, a charac-
teristic of the Algerian parent. 32.48 per cent of the plants exhibited the reddish straw, a
percentage considered by the author to conform with a Mendelian ratio. The grain was
of varying shades of brown, except in a few plants which produced yellow seeds, but no plants
were found with white seeds like those of the male parent. — Four crosses were made between
varieties of the Algerian type and those of the tree "class" and one cross was made between
Algerian and a "side" oat. The Fi plants were intermediate in character and of pronounced
vigor. In subsequent generations from oat crossbreds of the "tree" or branching type, no
individuals of the "side" type were found. — Attempts were made to cross Avena fatua with
the Algerian variety and also with Chinese skinless, but without success. — A cross was ef-
fected between a "false wild oat" resembling A. fatua and white Bonanza. The progeny
had slender straw, pale foliage and the open thin head with drooping branches of the wild
oat. The line was not pursued further as no individuals of promise were found. — The most
successful cross from the standpoint of the production of new varieties is white Ligowo X
Algerian. From this cross sprang "Guyra," "Lachlan," and other strains of merit which have
not yet been named. It is stated that the most productive varieties are those with stout awns
and the value of skinless varieties is deprecated. — Seeds of various oat varieties and cross-
breds were taken from Cowra and planted at Longerenong College, Victoria. In selections
of these grown again at Longerenong striking variations were found in the Algerian oats.
Among these were several plants with very coarse awns, very tall straw, white, large grain,
and a limited number of stalks. These plants ripened unusually early. The possibility of
the seed having been mixed was considered but no plants resembling these were found in
other plots. This variation with a few individual exceptions bred true in succeeding years
and was named "Sunrise" on account of its earliness. — A remarkable plant was found in Chi-
nese skinless oats at Cowra in 1913. In addition to being much earlier than the other plants
the early stools bore heads on which the upper flowers were like the skinless oat (three to
five flowers to a spikelet) while the lower flowers resembled Algerian (two flowers to a spikelet

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 213

with stiff glumes). The early stools had a darker foliage than the late ones, which latter
bore flowers typical of the skinless oat. The straw, when mature, was reddish like that of
Algerian. Some of the seeds were naked and sonic were black or dark brown hulled. Prog-
enies of individual plants have been grown for several seasons and continue to be quite vari-
able, some having wholly naked, some half and half and some yielding only hulled seed. The
hulled seed germinated best and also yielded best. Crosses between this oat and Dun and
Ruakura have given no promising material. — An oat resembling A. fatua was found in a
progeny of the natural crossbred of the Sunrise varial ion. In this progeny most of the plants
resembled Sunrise and seed from such plants bred true, but the wild oat type split up remark-
ably. The plants varied in seed color, degree of awn, stoutness of straw and hairiness of
grain, some being thickly felted while others were smooth. Since none of these types were of
economic importance they were not persevered with. — Author states that well-marked varia-
tions which bred true have been found in the Kelsall's, Black Bell, Ruakura, and Winter Turf
variet ies. The characteristics of several varieties are given and the technique of oat crossing
described. — Under the heading of Barley Breeding the author records having found a few
plants of wild barley Hordeum spontaneum in a sample of wild wheat Triticum dicoccum
dicoccoides. The wild barley was crossed with the Standwell and Kinver varieties. The Fi
crossbreds were more vigorous than the cultivated parents. They were uniformly of the
Chevalier type and scattered easily. Plants in which the grain adhered more or less firmly
to the rachis and resembled malting barley were selected. In the F.t these selections compared
favorably in productiveness with Kinver, Standwell and a two-row selection from Chilian.
The straw is stronger, the awns stouter, the grain larger and the plants more drought-resistant
than the ordinary malting barleys. — Author's assistant crossed a two-row naked-awned bar-
ley with ordinary skinless, also Kinver malting barley with the two-row and naked type.
Among other variations the latter cross gave rise to a six-rowed bearded type. — Author states
that a Mr. Pe uock of the Bathhurst Experiment Farm found a natural crossbred in the
Standwell barley which gave rise to a two-rowed awnless, six-rowed awnless and a six-rowed
awned, all of which bred true. — J. H. Kempton.

1613. Przibram, Hans. Ursachen tierischer Farbkleidung. [Causes of animal coat
colors.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Organ. 45: 199-259. 1919.

1614. Punnett, R. C. The genetics of the Dutch rabbit. — A criticism. Jour. Genetics
9: 303-317. 1 pi., 2 fig. Mar., 1920. — -Author recognizes three true-breeding grades with
reduced pigmentation and frequent heterochromia iridis, viz., White Dutch, Spotted Dutch,
and Typical Dutch. Self-color is PPTTSS and White Dutch is ppttzs. S raises White
Dutch to Spotted Dutch and if T is also added pigmentation is increased to Typical Dutch.
P produces darker types and eliminates heterochromia. The various combinations of these
factors are fitted to Castle's data and this multiple factor theory is considered to agree better
than Castle's hypothesis of multiple allelomorphism of the four types, Self -color, Dark Dutch,
"Tan" Dutch, and White Dutch, and to make unnecessary his conception of "mutual modi-
fication."—P. W. Whiting.

1615. Pye, H. Wheat breeding in its incidence to production. Agricultural research in
Australia. Advis. Council. Sci. and Ind. Commonwealth of Australia Bull. 7: 10-22. 1918.
— General discussion of the application of breeding to improvement of wheat. Author
records having noticed in the past few years many more natural crosses in wheat than hereto-
fore. This increase in crossing is attributed to lack of pollen, some varieties having been
lost through a failure to fertilize the ovules. An emasculated bearded wheat left to wind or
insect pollination produced nine seeds, eight of which germinated, six producing bald ears
and two bearded. Author lists four features which influence prolificacy and thirteen quali-
ties which are associated with prolificacy in its relation to inherency and economical harvest-
ing.— J. H. Kempton.

1616. R. [German rev. of: Trow, A. H. On "albinism" in Senecio vulgaris L. Jour.
Genetics 6: 65-74. 1916. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 947.) ] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 141.
Dec, 1919.

214 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1617. Reighard, Jacob. The breeding behavior of the suckers and minnows. I. The
suckers. Biol. Bull. 38: 1-32. Jan., 1920. — The white sucker (Catostomus commersionii) ,
the red-horse (Moxostoma aureolum) , and the hogsucker (Catostomus nigricans) breed in the
swift water of small streams on gravel bottom. In all, the breeding males bear pearl organs,
and in the hogsucker the female also bears them. In spawning, those surfaces of the male
that are rendered rough by the pearl organs are brought into contact with the female, and
aid the fish in maintaining their relative positions. In the white sucker and the red-horse,
two males pair with the female at one time, one on either side of her. In the hogsucker,
six or eight males may pair with the female at one time. In each species, the female repeats
the spawning act in many places and with different groups of males. The male does not enter
into combat with other males, but cooperates with them. The relation of the sexes is thus
promiscuity, not polyandry or polygamy; this promiscuity is not found in fishes in which
combat takes place between the males. — Bertram G. Smith.

1618. Renner, O. Zur Biologie und Morphologie der mannlichen Haplonten einiger Ono-
theren. [Biology and morphology of the male haplonts of some Oenotheras.] Zeitschr. Bot.
11:305-380. 39 fig. 1919.

1619. Renner, O. Bemerkungen zu der Abhandlung von Hugo de Vries: Kreuzungen
von Oenothera Lamarckiana mut. velutina. [Comments on the paper by Hugo de Vries : Crosses
of Oenothera Lamarckiana mut. velutina.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36: 446-456. 1918.

1620. Richardson, A. E. V. Production of cereals for arid districts. Agricultural
research in Australia. Advisory Council Sci. and Ind. Commonwealth of Australia Bull. 7:
57-77. 1918. — Following a general discussion of location of arid regions, progress of cultural
methods, differences between species and their ability to withstand drought, and relation of
the migration ratio (i.e., ratio of grain to stalk) to drought-resistance, author describes the
Hays centgener-plot system of wheat breeding. Cross-breeding as a method of producing
new types is considered with brief summary of Mendel's principles. In this connection a
list of dominant and recessive characters in wheat and barley is given. — Attempt was made to
determine whether high and low yielding power are Mendelian characters. A high-yielding
variety of wheat such as Federation or Yandilla King was crossed with one of low yield such
as Huguenot. In the F2 the plants were grown in centgener plots and each plant harvested
separately. While the parental varieties give normal frequency curves the F2 appears to show
segregation into two distinct groups, one consisting of high yielding plants (several of
which outyield the best parent) and one of low yielding plants. Progenies of both groups
were grown and the results indicate that the observed differences were inherited. — By propa-
gating the extreme plants found in F2 of a cross between a two-rowed bearded and a six-rowed
skinless variety of barley a new race has been obtained which is six-rowed and bearded and
exceeds the parents in migration-ratio as well as in yield. — J. H. Kempton.

1621. Roberts, Herbert F. The founders of the art of breeding. Jour. Heredity 10:
99-106. 4 fig. Mar., 1919. Ibid. 10: 147-152. 1 fig. Apr., 1919. Ibid. 10: 229-239. 1 fig.
May, 1919. Ibid. 10: 257-270. June, 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 90.

1622. Rolfe, R. A. The pre-Mendelian age. Gard. Chron. 66: 288. Dec. 6, 1919 —
Author takes somewhat positive attitude regarding Mendel and the supposed sanctification
of his results, basing his objections upon the fact that Goss, Seton, Knight and Gartner all
experimented with peas, obtaining concurrent results as to the uniformity in the Fi, and diver-
sity in the F2 generations, the overlooking of which data by Mendel and his commentators,
seems to the author curious, and a manifest fault subject to criticism. Author thinks that
Mendel has blinded all investigators to the merits of those who preceded him. — H. F. Roberts.

1623. Romell, Lars-Gunnar. Nagot om artbildningsproblem. [On problems of the ori-
gin of species.] Skogsvardsforeningens Tidskr. 18: 92-100. 1920. — After brief description of
different theories concerning origin of species author discusses rather particularly the treatise

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 215

of van dicr Wor.K, "Onderzoek ingen obcr blijvende modification en bun betrekking tot muta-
ties" [Researches on persistent modifications and their relation 1<> mutations]. Cultura 1919.
K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1624. S., W. [Re\ . <>f : RlGNANO, Euqenio. Upon the inheritance of acquired characters:
A hypothesis of heredity, development, and assimilation. 418 p. Open Courl Publishing Co. :
Chicago, 1911.] Science Progress 14: 514-515. Jan., 1920.

1625. Salisbury, E. J. Variation in Anemone apennina, L., and Clematis vitalba, L.,
with special reference to trimery and abortion. Ann. Botany 34: 107-116. 9 fig. Jan., 1920.
— Author presents further data on his views relative to essential trimery of Ranunculaceae.
In A. apeimina perianth segments ranged from 9 to 21 with 34 per cent of the flowers departing
from trimerous condition in perianth. Distribution of variations tends to be symmetrical
about mode in contrast to condition in A. nemorosa where skewness was associated with lower
modal value. Stamen number in A. apennina ranged from 48 to 111 (multiples of 3). Curve
was multimodal with succession of trimerous modes, greatest frequency being at 72, 81 and 87;
in 55.3 per cent of flowers staminal number was multiple of three; departure from modes
explainable on basis of fission or fusion. In 57 3 per cent of flowers carpel number was multiple
of 3, largest modes being at 60, 63, 51, and 57 with limits of range 27 and 87. One instance
of a carpel with two stigmas suggested fission as cause of departure from trimery. — In Clem-
atis vitalba the gynaecium of 1202 specimens furnished again a many-peaked curve with
modes at multiples of three. There was a tendency for number of abortive carpels to increase
as total carpel number increased. Abortion seemed to depend on conditions of nutrition and
development and not on idiosyncrasies of pollinating agent. — James P. Kelly.

1626. Schaffner, John H. A remarkable bud sport of Pandanus. Jour. Heredity 10:
376-378. 1 fig. Nov., 1919.

1627. Schaffner, J. H. The expression of sexual dimorphism in heterosporous sporo-
phytes. Ohio Jour. Sci. 18: 101-125. 25 fig. 1918 — "The sexual condition is simply a state
of the living substance which may continue for a greater or less length of time before a neu-
tral state or the opposite sex condition is set up." Author maintains inadequacy of sex-
chromosome mechanism for most plants, even suggesting that Allen's work on Sphaerocarpus
is not conclusive. Body of paper involves examples of various stages in development of dioe-
cious condition. No original monosporangiate flowers exist ; few seeming examples show di-
rect relationship to groups with opposite structures present. Usually dioecious condition
comes directly from bisporangiate ; sometimes monoecism is intermediate. Carpellate flowers
more likely to retain vestiges of stamen structures, than are staminate to retain carpel parts.
Zizania aquatica has staminate spikelets awnless, carpellate long-awned, bisporangiate
short-awned; latency of awn factor caused by presence of male condition. Cannabis sativa
normally an extreme example of dioecism, but plants grown under unusual conditions may
show reversal of certain parts to opposite sex. Discusses genera (Acer, Rumex, Fraxinus)
and larger groups which themselves show many gradations in the development of dioecism.
Suggests inadequacy of sex-chromosome idea even in animal kingdom, though in some cases
"hereditary factors may arise in a special chromosome which may assist in retaining and
intensifying a male or female state already established. " Sex-linked transmission can be read-
ily explained without sex chromosomes. With assumption of sex chromosomes greater part
of sexual phenomena becomes unexplainable and contradictory. Adds list of 41 plant species
which are promising for investigation, describing general sexual condition of each. — Merle
C. Coulter.

1628. Schaxel, Julius. Uber die Darstellung allgemeiner Biologie. [On the presenta-
tion of general biology.] Abhandl. Theoret. Biol. 62 p. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1426.

1629. Schaxel, J. Grundziige der Theorienbildung in der Biologie. [Principles of theory
formation in biology.] 221 p. G. Fischer: Jena, 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1426.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. T, NO. 2

216 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1G30. Schellenberg, G. Uber die Verteilung der Geschlechtsorgane bei den Bryophyten.
[On the distribution of sex organs in the bryophytes.] Beih. z. Bot. Zentralbl. 37: 1-39. 1919. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1639.

1631. Schermers, D. Erfelijkheid en rasverbetering. [Heredity and race-improvement.]
Schild en Pijl 10: 1-26. 1919.

1632. Schiemann, E. Zur Frage der Briichigkeit der Gerste— eine Berichtigung. [To
the question of brittleness in barley— a correction.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21:
53. May, 1919.

1633. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Baerthlein, K. Uber bakterielle Variabilitat,
insbesondere sogennannte Bakterien-mutationen. (On bacterial variation, especially the so-
called Bacteria mutations.) Centralbl. Bakt. 81 : 369-475. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 22: 303-304. May, 1920.

1634. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Bateson, W., and Ida Sutton. Double flowers
and sex linkage in Begonia. Jour. Genetics 8: 199-207. PI. 8. June, 1919. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2081.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 296-297. May, 1920.

1635. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Collins, E. J. Sex segregation in the Bryophyta.
Jour. Genetics 8: 139-146. PI. 6, 5 fig. June, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2103.)]
Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 296. May, 1920.

1636. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Fortsetzung der Versuche zur
experimentellen Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. 1918:
1175-1180. 1918.] Zeitschr. mdukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 293. May, 1920.

1637. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Kajanus, Birger. Kreuzungsstudien an Win-
terweizen. (Studies on crossing winter wheat.) Bot. Notiser 1918: 235-244. 1918. (See Bot.
Absts. 4, Entry 622.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 292. May, 1920.

1638. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: (1) Nilsson-Ehle, H. Untersuchungen fiber
Speltoidmutationen beim Weizen. (Experiments on speltoid mutations in wheat.) Bot. Notiser
1917:305-329. I fig. 1917. (2) Kalt, B., and A. Schtjlz. Uber Rfickschlagsindividuen mit
Spelzweizeneigenschaften bei Nacktweizen der Emmerreihe des Weizens. (On atavists with
spelt characters in naked wheat of the Emmer series.) Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 36: 669-671.
1918. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 624.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22:291-292.
May, 1920.

1639. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Schellenberg, G. Uber die Verteilung der
Geschlechtsorgane bei den Bryophyten. (On the distribution of sex organs in the bryophytes.)
Beih. Bot, Zentralbl. 37: 1-39. 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 298. May,
1920.

1640. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of: Thelltjng, A. Neure Wege und Ziele der botan-
ischen Systematik erlautert am Beispiele unserer Getreidearten. [New methods and purposes
of botanical taxonomy illustrated by examples of our cereal species.] Naturw. Wochenschrift
17:449-458,465^74. 3 fig. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 293-295. May,
1920.

1641. Schmidt, J. Experhnentelle Konstanz og Arvelighedsundersogelser med Lebistes
reticulatus (Peters) Regan. [Experimental studies on constancy and heredity in Lebistes
reticulatus.] Meddel. Carlsberg Lab. 14: 8. 1919.

1642. Schultz, W. Gleichlauf von Verpflanzung und Kreuzung bei Froschlarven. [Par-
allelism between transplantation and crossing in frog larvae.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech.
Organ. 43: 361-380. / pi. 1918.

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 217

1643. Seiler, J. [German rev. of : Goldschmidt, Richard. Crossing over ohne Chiasma-
typie? (Crossing over without chiasmatype?) Genetics 2: 82-95. 1917.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 215-216. Mar., 1920.

1644. Semon, Richard. Uber das Schlagwort "Lamarckismus." [On the catch-word
"Lamarcklsm."] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 51-52. Dec, 1919.

1645. Shamel, A. D. Origin of a new and improved French prune variety. Jour. Heredity
10:339-343. Frontispiece, S fig. Nov., 1919.

1646. Shamel, A. D. A bud variation of the Le Grande Manitou dahlia. Jour. Heredity
10:367-368. 1 fig. Nov., 1919.

1647. Sheppard, Hubert. Hermaphroditism in man. Anat. Rec. 18: 259-260. April
20, 1920. — Author's abstract of paper read before American Association of Anatomists April
1-3, 1920: — In 1911 Gudernatsch asserted that "hermaphroditism in the sense that separate
testicles and ovaries are found has not been demonstrated in man, nor even in other mam-
mals beyond a doubt." In so far as we are able to determine, this assertion has not been
questioned. We thought it worth while, in the light of this and other investigations, to report
a study of the anatomical structures of an extreme case of hermaphroditism which came to
the dissecting room. — The testicles in this individual were located in the scrotum and the ova-
ries in the pelvic cavity. The tissue from both organs proved to be normal in structure under
a close microscopic examination. The broad ligament was thicker and wider than is usually
found in a female subject, due to the fact that the uterus was a little lower in the pelvis than
normal. The uterus measured about 5 cm. in length, 4 cm. in width and 2 cm. in thickness.
A muscular wall, as well as a lumen which opened downward into the vagina, could be easily
seen by both microscopic and macroscopic examinations. The oviduct took a normal course
to the lateral angle of the uterus. A microscopic examination of the tube showed a lumen
with walls containing the usual tunics. The cervix of the uterus passed into the inferior
portion of the prostate about one-half inch below the urethra. The position of the organs
might be described as follows: The bladder was superior and anterior to the uterus, with the
prostate almost below the bladder, and a little anterior to the inferior portion of the uterus.
Both are connected to the prostate, the urethra entering the prostatic substance near its
superior anterior surface, the cervix of the uterus occupying the lower two-thirds. The cervix
of the uterus held almost the exact position of the utriculus prostaticus of the male. —
Externally the genitalia featured decidedly as a male. However, upon a closer examination of
the region, and palpation of the organs, certain irregularities could be observed. The penis
was small with a urethral orifice three-fourths as large as the organ itself. The opening grad-
ually increased in size until it terminated at the cervix of the uterus. This portion of the
urethra was in all respects a vagina attached to the inferior surface of the penis. Both the
lumen of the uterus and the urethra opened directly into the vaginal opening. — It has been
found in all true cases of hermaphroditism that there is always a sharp distinction between
the male and female genital tissue and never an indefined mixing of the two elements (true
ovitestis). In this unusual case we found the same phenomenon with a wuder separation of
the two kinds of tissue, the testes and ovaries in the exact position of a normal individual. —
Hubert Sheppard.

1648. Shull, George H. A third duplication of genetic factors in shepherd's-purse.
Science 51 : 590. June 11, 1920. — -Author's abstract of paper read before American Philosophi-
cal Society, April 23, 1920. — In the third generation of a cross between a wild biotype of the
common shepherd's-purse (Bursa btirsa-pastoris) from Wales and Heeger's shepherd's-purse
(B. Heegeri) there appeared a small number of plants of unique type, having a more coriaceous
texture than in the plants of either of the two original strains involved in the cross. This new
type has been designated coriacea. It differs from the common form, not only in texture,
but the lobing of the leaf is reduced and simplified and the angles of the lobes are almost
spinescent. The proportion of coriacea to the typical sibs in this F3 family was 12:187 or

218 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

almost exactly a 1 : 15 ratio. This suggested at once the presence of two independently
inherited factors for the normal texture, the coriacea type being produced only when these
two factors K and L were absent. Subsequent breeding has shown that coriacea breeds true
when selfed, and has also confirmed the interpretation of this as a third case of duplication of
factors in this species. The two characters previously shown to be thus constituted are the
triangular form of capsule, and the division of the leaf to the midrib which brings to light
the characteristic lobing found in the form designated rhomboidea. The duplication of the
capsule determiners is practically universal while that of the leaf-lobe factor is less frequently
found. Studies on the coriacea character are still too limited in extent to justify a statement
as to the prevalence of duplication of the factor for the usual texture of the leaves. — George
H. Shull.

1649. Siemens, H. W. Rashygienens biologiska grundvalar. [Biological foundations of
race hygiene.] 98 p. Gleerup: Lund, 1918.

1650. Siemens. [German rev. of: Haecker, V. Die Erblichkeit im Mannesstamm und
der vaterrechtliche Familienbegriff. (Inheritance in man and the male-line concept of the
family.) 32 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1917.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 213.
Mar., 1920.

1651. Sirks, M. J. Verwantschap als biologisch vraagstuk. [Relationship as a biological
problem.] Genetica 2: 27-50. Jan., 1920.

1652. Sirks, M. J. De analyse van een spontane boonenhybride. [Analysis of a spontane-
ous bean hybrid.] Genetica 2: 97-114. Mar., 1920.

1653. Sirks, M. J. Uit het Instituut voor Veredeling van Landbouwgewassen. Vergelijk-
ing van gerst en tarwerassen, van het Instituut afkomstig met andere voortrefflelijke rassen
van deze gewassen 1915-1917. [From the Institute for the Improvement of Agricultural Plants.
Comparison of barley and wheat varieties originating from the Institute with other superior
races of these plants 1915-1917.] Med. Landb.-Hoogeschool Wageningen 14: 1-34, 210-232.
1918.

1654. Sirks, M. J., and J. Bijhotjwer. Onderzoekingen over de eenheid der linne-
aansche soort Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L. [Investigation of the homogeneity of the Lin-
nean species Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L.] Genetica 1: 401-442. Sept., 1919.

1655. Soler, Rafael Angel. Cultivo del tomate. [Tomato culture.] Revist. Agric.
Com. y Trab. 2: 479-483. 8 fig. 1919.

1656. Sperlich, Adolf. Die Fahigkeit der Linienerhaltung (phyletische Potenz), ein auf
die Nachkommenschaft von Saisonpfianzen mit festem Rhythmus ungleichmassig iibergehender
Faktor. [Capacity to maintain lines (phyletic potency), a factor distributed irregularly to the
offspring of plants with fixed seasonal rhythm.] Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien 128: 379. 1919.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1559.

1657. Sperlich, Adolf. Uber den Einfluss des Quellungszeitpunktes, von Treibmitteln
und des Lichtes auf die Samenkeimung von Alectorolophus hirsutus All.: Charakterisierung
der Samenruhe. [On the influence of the time of application of forcing -agents and of light on the
germination of seeds of Alectorolophus hirsutus. Characterization of seed rest.] Sitzungsber.
Akad. Wiss. Wien 128: 477. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1559.

1658. Spragg, Frank A. The spread of Rosen rye. Jour. Heredity 11: 42-44. 1 fig.
Jan., 1920.

1659. Stein, E. [German rev. of: Klebahn, H. Impfversuche mit Pfropfbastarden.
(Infection experiments with graft hybrids.) Flora 11-12: 418-430. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 22 : 304. May, 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2124.

No. 2, September, 1920) GENETICS 219

1660. Stein, E. [German rev. of: van Hkkui.km:-., M. A. De invloed van radium-
stralen op de ontwikkeling der eieren van Daphnia pulex. (Effects of the rays of radium on the
oogenesis of Daphnia pulex.) Genetics 1: 305-320. July, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
1044.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 286-287. May, 1920.

1661. Steinach, E. Histologische Beschaffenheit der Keimdruse bei homosexuellen
Mannern. [Histological condition of the gonads in homosexual men.] Arch. Entwicklungs-
mcch. Organ. 46: ::!) :;?. PI. 3-5. 1920.— Interstitial cells characteristic of the ovary were
found in the testes of several homosexual men, associated with degeneration of male inter-
stitial cells, and of the seminal tubules. As reported elsewhere (Steinach und Lichten-
stebn, Munch, med. Wochensch. Nr. 6, 1918), these testes were removed and cryptorchid
testes with normal puberty gland implanted, restoring normal sexual instincts to the homo-
sexuals.— H. D. Goodale.

1662. Steinach, E. Kiinstliche und natiirliche Zwitterdriisen und ihre analogen Wirk-
ungen. [Artificial and natural hermaphroditic glands and their analogous functioning.] Arch.
Entwicklungsmech. Organ. 46 : 12-28. 1920. — A discussion of castration, feminization, mascu-
linization, and hermaphroditization, some of it based on work previously unpublished, with
particular reference to the similarity between homosexuals and certain artificial hermaphro-
dites. Two instances of homosexual goats are described. — H. D. Goodale.

1663. Stockard, Charles R., and G. N. Papanicolaou. Variations of structural
expression in the inheritance of Polydactyly. Anat. Rec. 18 : 262-263. April 20, 1920. — Author's
abstract of paper read before American Association of Anatomists, April 1-3, 1920. — The
inheritance of Polydactyly in a strain of guinea-pigs has been studied for the past several years.
This character when it appears in the race is inherited as a Mendelian dominant. — The expres-
sion of the character in a series of individuals presents a most striking condition. The extra
toe on the hind foot may be a perfectly developed functional toe in one animal, while in others
the toe presents varying degrees of imperfect development and structure until in some it is
represented by only a minute toe-nail attached to the foot by a thread-like filament. This
poorly formed toe is frequently broken off or lost shortly after birth, and would often escape
notice if not carefully looked for. Other animals inherit the extra toe, but fail to develop
it sufficiently to show any evidence of its existence at birth. The fact that these have the
character for extra toes is demonstrated by their offspring which may exhibit the toe as
frequently as do offspring from parents with well-expressed Polydactyly. — These normal
variations in the expression of this dominant character renders it a most uncertain quantity
for judging the influences of experimental treatments on its inheritable behavior in different
groups of animals. — Charles R. Stockard and G. N. Papanicolaou.

1664. Stomps, Theo. J. Uber zwei Typen von Weissrandbunt bei Oenothera biennis L.
[On two types of white margins in Oenothera biennis L.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
22:261-274. May, 1920.

1665. Stout, A. B. The aims and methods of plant breeding. Jour. New York Bot. Gard.
21: 1-16. Jan., 1920. — Author notes rise of subject during past three decades which has cul-
minated in the present day development of genetics. Broadly considered, plant breeding,
through selection of seed parents, is older than written history, but modern methods of plant
breeding are based on a knowledge of sexuality in plants. Notes work of early investigators
in study of sexuality, hybridization and selection including the early pedigree methods of
Le Cotjteur and Shirreff, also the early work on sugar beets. — Importance of hybridization
as a means of inducing variation is noted. Also development and importance of chromosome
theory of inheritance and Mendel's Law. The rise of the mutation theory, linkage, multiple
and modifying factors is also noted. Author notes "the germ plasm is the seat in which most
of the hereditary changes occur." Cites the case of the 6,500 varieties of Dahlia in cultiva-
tion in the United States, all of which have descended from a single American species during
the past 130 years. Similarly with Phlox, 200 varieties of which have descended from a single

220 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

wild Texan species which was introduced into cultivation in 1835. — Importance of bud sports
is noted in the case of the Sword fern and variegated Coleus and also with the citrus fruits. —
Discusses modern method of plant breeding with respect to pedigree culture, and summarizes:
"In practical application, the methods of plant breeding are (1) to maintain in a highly-
productive condition races whose qualities make their cultivation desirable, (2) to recognize
and preserve new characteristics which may lead to further improvement, (3) to combine
qualities of different strains into one strain through crossing, and (4) to induce hereditary
variation through hybridization. Plant breeding aims to regulate, to control, to direct,
and to utilize the processes of heredity and variation." — C. E. Myers.

1666. Streeter, Geo. L. Formation of single-ovum twins. Bull. Johns Hopkins Hos-
pital 30: 235-238. 4 fig- 1919. — The mature ovum here referred to is the one previously
described by the same author (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub!., 272.) The ovum, which
is about 17 days old, contains two embryos. One of these is considerably more advanced
than the other. The primary embryo is in the primitive-groove stage, and has an embry-
onic plate 0.92 mm. long by 0.78 mm. wide. Two small vesicles slightly separated from each
other are found in the loose mesenchyme in the posterior region of the body-stalk. These
two vesicles represent the Amniotic vesicle and the yolk-vesicle, respectively, of the smaller
twin. This small embryo is undoubtedly abnormal. By comparing this ovum with the
Miller specimen and the Bryce-Teacher specimen, the author is able to indicate how in all
probability monozygotic, or identical twins are formed. The ovum is one of unusual interest,
in that it shows the youngest stage of twinning so far recorded for the human species. — /. T.
Patterson.

1667. Strong, Leonell C. Roughoid, a mutant located to the left of sepia in the third
chromosome of Drosophila melanogaster. Biol. Bull. 38: 33-37. Jan., 1920. — New mutant,
characterized by roughened eyes, found to lie to the left of sepia, which had been furthest to
the left of known third-chromosome loci. Roughoid sepia crossover value of 24.9 was obtained.
— A. H. Sturtevant.

1668. Stuckey, H. P. Work with Vitis rotundifolia, a species of Muscadine grapes. Geor-
gia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 133 : 60-74. 4 pi- (colored) , 8 fig . Dec, 1919. — Work with rotundifolia
was started at the Experiment Station in 1909. A history of workers with this species of
grape is given. The work at the Station bears out the fact that Vitis rotundifolia is self-
sterile, though the fruiting vines produce pollen. This pollen is infertile due to a degenera-
tion of the generative nuclei. Work with more than two thousand seedlings which have been
brought into bearing shows that approximately one-half are males and one-half are females.
The male vines are more vigorous in growth and a larger percentage of these produce flower
before the female vines. In more than one thousand bearing vines, it was found that the
color of the tendrils and new growth correspond to the color of the fruit; vines having red or
reddish green tendrils bear black or reddish black grapes, while those with green tendrils,
internodes and new growth, produce light or amber-colored fruit, as the Scuppernong. Male
vines fall into these two groups just as the females except they bear no fruit. Black is domi-
nant over white and latter color is pure recessive. A formula showing crosses between plants
heterozygous for black, red and white is given. Thomas X dark male produced only plants
with dark fruit, but seedlings from Scuppernong X dark male produced plants of different colors
of fruits. Certain male vines were prepotent for quality. In Flowers X light male no. 1, out
of 41 seedlings, only one produced fruit inferior in flavor to the Flowers; the others were supe-
rior. From nine vines of Flowers X Black No. 1 , only one produced fruit equal in flavor to the
Flowers. New varieties described are Hunt, Irene, November, Qualitas, Spalding and
Stuckey. It is further stated that pruned vines growing by the trellis system, when in good
bearing should produce 50 to 60 pounds or about a bushel of fruit per year. Test of various
strains of Scuppernongs, which is the most common variety of Vitis rotundifolia, demon-
strated that nurserymen have made some effort to eliminate poor-bearing types and those
untrue to name. Last page of the bulletin details methods of planting and pruning, and uses
of the fruit.— T. H. McIIatton.

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 221

1669. Sturtevant, Robert S. Hybridizing bearded irises. Clard. Chron. 67: 184.
April 10, 1920. — Refers to a number of crosses of horticultural varieties and presents evidence
to show that plicala characters are not due to a recessive factor as proposed by Bliss [see
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1460]; also indicates thai in I he Iris, venation acts as a simple Mendelian
dominant but that in regard to color and its disposition in other ways a more complex expla-
nation is needed. — J. Marion Shull.

1670. Sumner, Francis B. Geographic variation and Mendelian inheritance. Jour. Exp.
Zool. 30: 369-402. 7 fig. April 5, 1920.— Paper is continuation of earlier biometric and genetic
work on geographic races of deer-mouse (Peromyscus maniculatus) found in California.
Characters chosen for study were length of tail, foot, ear, pelvis, femur and skull, width of
dorsal tail stripe, color of pelage, pigmentation of foot and number of caudal vertebrae. Fewer
grades for any one character have been found than number of localities from which material
was collected. Members of same subspecies collected from different localities often differ
widely. To a certain extent and for certain characters gradations considered follow geograph-
ic and climatic sequence. Degrees of difference in characters are, however, not propor-
tional to geographic intervals between races and there are other incongruities which greatly
complicate the situation. Characters which vary together, when geographic sequence is
considered, may or may not vary together within any single local collection and vice versa.
It seems that special factors, operating locally, must be responsible for modification of parts
which do not ordinarily vary together. Animals from coastal stations, which probably pre-
sent graded series in respect to both temperature and humidity, show similar gradation in
respect to mean width of tail stripe and mean length of tail, foot and ear. Suggestion is made
that environment in course of time has modified characters of animals dwelling at various
points. Variations within each race are partly hereditary and partly 'somatic' in origin.
Differences between local races do not act, in crossing, as simple Mendelian factors although
theory of multiple factors would undoubtedly be invoked by many geneticists. Author pre-
fers theory of contamination of genes. Deviations from type of various characters in Ft
and F2 generations have been compared. Conclusion is made that variation is slightly greater
in Fs. Incidentally differences have been observed between sexes, viz., smaller feet and larger
pelvis in females. These are attributed to presence of at least two hormones varying inde-
pendently.—P. W. Whiting.

1671. Sutton, Arthur W. Brassica crosses. Card. Chron. 67: 20. Jan. 10, 1920.—
Issue is taken with the statements of a writer in a recent issue of the journal in regard to crosses
between cauliflower and kohl-rabi. Cauliflower crosses readily with any other type of Bras-
sica but the resulting forms are worthless. — C. B. Hutchison.

1672. Tammes, T. De leer der erffactoren en hare toepassing op den mensch. Rede, uit-
gesproken bij het aanvaarden van het ambt van buitengewoon hoogleeraar aan de Rijks-Univ. te
Groningen. [The theory of hereditary factors and its applicability to man. Address, delivered
on assumption of the office of Professor Extraordinarius in the State University at Groningen.]
H/f. p. Wolters: Groningen., 1919.

1673. Th., G. Systematic breeding. Florists' Exchange 49: 882. April 10, 1920.— Popu-
lar account of the value of systematic breeding based on a knowledge of the laws of heredity,
especially as applied to carnation breeding. Lack of such knowledge may result in an occa-
sional striking prize in commercial breeding, but no continuous series of successes. Describes
some work of carnation breeders. — Dorner & Sons, Ward, and Fisher. Systematic breed-
ing in the hands of these men brought the five-inch carnation and many other improve-
ments. Dorner & Sons' promising new carnation productions are tested out by Samuel
Goddard, Framingham, Mass. Carnation breeding is toward better keeping qualities, better
form and color, larger number of blooms per plant without decrease in flower size and produc-
tion of a good yellow type. — Orland E. White.

1674. Th., G. Systematic breeding organization proposed. Florists' Exchange 49: 1089.
May 8, 1920.— Discussion of the advantages of systematic breeding and of the formation of a

222 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

society of growers interested in applying theoretical knowledge to their own problems. Rec-
ords of practical breeders' work should be kept by a central body. Work is often repeated
through lack of an organization through which knowledge can be distributed. Many a valu-
able discovery has probably been made by individual workers and then lost to the world
because the records have not been passed on. Author says "Darwin's theories today are
repudiated to a large extent, while Mendel's law is recognized." — Orland E. White.

1675. Thomson*, J. Arthur. [French rev. of: Macleod, J. The quantitative method in
biology. 15x23 cm.,v+228 p., 27 fig. Longmans, Green & Co.: New York, 1919. (See also
Bot. Absts. 4. Entry 758.)] Scientia 27: 244-246. 1920.

1676. Tischler, G. [German rev. of : (l) Renner, O. Ueber Sichtbarwerden der Mendel-
schen Spaltung im Pollen von Oenotherabastarden. (On the visibility of Mendelian segrega-
tion in hybrids of Oenothera.) Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 37: 129-135. 1919. (2) Idem. ZurBiol-
ogie und Morphologie der mannlichen Haplonten einiger Onotheren. (Biology and morphology
of the male haplonts of some Oenotheras.) Zeitschr. Bot. 11: 305-380. 39 fig. 1919.] Zeit-
schr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 221-223. Mar., 1920.

1677. Tornau, Dr. Einige Mitteilungen uber variabilitatsverhaltnisse in einem kon-
stanten Weizenstamm. [Some communications concerning variability relations in a constant
wheat strain.] Jour. Landw. 67: 111-149. 1919. — A biometrical study of variability and cor-
relation in a pure line of wheat, the constants for different years being compared. — C. E.
Lcighty.

1678. Van Fleet, W. Rose-breeding notes for 1918. Amer. Rose Ann. 1919 : 29-35. 1919.
— Description of results from crossing numerous species and types of roses. Considerable
improvement is seen in newer hybrids of Rosa rugosa, R. Hugonis, R. Soulieanea, R. Moyesii.
Color range in R. rugosa hybrids covers single and double, constant-blooming forms in clear
whites to glowing crimsons. No pure yellows. Creams, common and bright yellows may be
expected in time. Main ideal for R. rugosa hybrids is high class blooms of Hybrid Perpetual
and Hybrid Tea types combined with vigorous, hardy, disease-resistant plants. Premier
English rose of 1918 is Mermaid, said to be result of R. bracleata crossed with a tea-scented
variety. Efforts are being made to secure hybrids of R. bracteata able to endure climate of
northern plains region, hybrids of R. bracteata X R. Carolina giving promising results, and
enduring zero weather. They have beautifully-formed pink buds. No success has been
attained in attempts to cross Harison's Yellow for over 20 years. More success with seedlings
of this variety, especially one similar to one of reputed parents of Harison's Yellow. Out of
many thousand seeds of Harison's Yellow sown, only three grew so far. There is possibility
of fragrance of the sweetbrier being intensified through breeding work. — Orland E. White.

1679. van Wisselingh, C. Uber Variabilitat und Erblichkeit. [Concerning variability
and heredity.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22 : 65-126. 10 fig. Jan., 1920. — Empha-
sizes importance of a study of the lower and simpler plants in the attempt to get at
fundamentals of heredity and variation. Many illustrations are cited from author's and
Gerassimoff's extensive studies of S-pirogyra. Variations in the form and size of the cell,
thickness and markings of cell walls, number and form of chromatophores, presence or absence
of pyrenoids and method of starch-formation, number of nuclei, abnormalities in nuclear and
cell-division, number of chromosomes, and nature and development of nucleoli are described
in detail, and the causes giving rise to them are discussed. Variations in cell length, rate of
starch formation and cell division may be induced through alterations in amount of light, but
are not heritable. Thickness and markings on cell walls are heritable even in cells without
nuclei. Chromatophores without pyrenoids form starch in a diffuse manner and are passed
on through innumerable cell generations regardless of environmental conditions. Binucleate
cells may be produced through anaesthesia, low temperatures, or centrifuging. This condi-
tion is perpetuated by cell division and so is heritable. Instead of two nuclei there may be
one giant nucleus. In either case the cells assume a much larger diameter which is inherited

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 223

both through cell division and conjugal ion. Author concludes that the nucleus is not the
sole bearer of hereditary factors but that on the contrary heritable variations may arise in
and be transmitted by the chromatophores and the cytoplasm. — Lcunas L. Burlingame.

1680. Vestergaard, II. A. B. Observations on inheritance in lupines, wheat, and barley.
Tidsskr. Planteavl. 26: 491-510. 7 fig. 1919.

1681. Vigiani, D. Sulla selezione del frumento "Gentil Rosso." [Upon the selection of
the wheat "Gentil Rosso."] Staz. Sper. Agr. Italiane 52: 5-13. 1919.

1682. Vogt, A. Der Altersstar, seine Hereditat und seine Stellung nach exogener Krank-
heit und Senium. [Senile cataract, its heredity and its place in exogenous disease and senile
degeneration.] Zeitschr. Augenheilkunde 40: 123. 1918.

1683. von Graevenitz. [German rev. of: Crane, M. B. Heredity of types of inflores-
cence and fruits in tomato. Jour. Genetics 5: 1-10. 1915.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 22:223-224. Mar., 1920. •

1684. von Ubisch, G. II. Beitrag zu einer Faktorenanalyse von Gerste. [Contribution
to a factorial analysis of barley.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 20: 65-117. 7 fig., 11
diagrams. Jan., 1919.

1685. von Wettstein, Fritz. Vererbungserscheinungen und Systematik bei Haplonten
und Diplohaplonten im Pflanzenreich. [Genetical phenomena and taxonomy in haplonts and
diplonts in the vegetable kingdom.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 233-246. Nov.,
1919.

1686. W., B. C. A. [Rev. of: Punnett, R. C. Mendelism. 5th ed., Macmillan & Co.:
London, 1919.] Jour. Botany 57: 357-358. 1919.

1687. W., F. A. The meaning of continuous variation in color. Jour. Heredity 11: 84-86.
1 fig. Feb., 1920.

16S8. Waldron, L. R., and J. A. Clark. Kota, a rust resisting variety of common spring
wheat. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 11: 187-195. 1 pi. 1919.- — A variety of bearded hard red
spring wheat, named Kota, has been found to possess resistance to the form or forms of stem
rust of wheat present at Fargo, North Dakota, Brookings, South Dakota, and St. Paul, Minne-
sota, in 1918. Preliminary tests with Kota show it to have yielding ability. In baking tests
it ranked high when compared with other bread wheats.— H. K. Hayes.

1689. Waldron, L. R. First generation crosses between two alfalfa species. Jour. Amer.
Soc. Agron. 12: 133-143. 1920. — A report on the weight of plants of the first generation
hybrids, secured by crossing Medicago sativa (common alfalfa) with Medicago falcata (yellow-
flowered). The hybrids showed 47.5 per cent more weight than the parents. No significant
differences were observed in the heights of the hybrid and the non-hybrid plants. Increased
weight was then probably due to an increased number of stems per plant. Plants of M. falcata
showed less winter-killing than the other groups. — F. M. Schertz.

1690. Wangerin, W. Der Generationswechsel im Tier- und Pflanzenreich. [The alter-
nation of generations in the animal and plant kingdoms.] Schrift. Naturf. Ges. Danzig 15: 1-13.
1918.

1691. Warren, Don C. Spotting inheritance in Drosophila busckii Coq. Genetics 5:
60-110. 1 pi., 4 fig- Jan., 1920. — Variation was noted among males of D. busckii in number of
spots on tergum of fifth abdominal segment. Selection isolated two types, the two-spot and
the six-spot, although the germinal behavior of the three separate strains was distinct.
Crosses indicate that (1) the same high factor has been isolated in all three strains; (2) the

224 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

high or low is neither completely dominant to the other; (3) the female may transmit the
factor for specific configuration although she is always of the six-spot type.- — Stock 501 gave
a mutant with an exceptionally large outer spot. Tests with two-spot line indicate that the
factor for the middle spots may be sex-linked in this particular strain. — Temperature has a
differential effect on spotting. Low temperatures (11-15°C.) emphasize outer spots and
reduce the middle ones, even in the two-spot selected lines. — Six females appeared simultane-
ously in one stock, lacking the middle spots. When mated to brothers, these gave rise to a
variable abnormal strain. Selection purified the stock. Crosses show that male can trans-
mit the factor, although not showing the character himself. — To conclude, inheritance of
spotting in D. busckii is complicated. The same spot in the female and in different strains
of males are due to different factors. Environment, particularly temperature, has a differen-
tial effect on the development of the various spots, and is important in the interpretation
of selection. — Joseph Krafka, Jr.

1692. Weatherwax, Paul. The origin of the intolerance of inbreeding in maize. Amer.
Nat. 54: 184-187. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — In regard to androgyny and to protogyny of individual
inflorescences maize presents no fundamental difference from other American representatives
of Maydeae. This fact together with reduction in number of inflorescences due to the mode
of long continued cultivation and hence widespread cross-pollination make it unnecessary to
assume the introduction of intolerance of self-pollination from another group. — D. F. Jones.

1693. Weimer, J. L. Variations in Pleurage curvicolla (Wint.) Kuntze. Amer. Jour. Bot.
6: 406-^09. 1919. — Data on the extent of variation in certain characters due to differences
in substratum upon which a pure strain of Pleurage curvicolla was grown, indicates unreli-
ability of taxonomic criteria for species formation in fungi. Spore size was found to be rela-
tively constant but size of perithecia showed greater variation and secondary spore appen-
dages, a recognized character for this species, were not seen. Observations of author and
others indicate that this species may have 128, 256, or 512 spores in ascus as a result of 7, 8 or
9 mitoses. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 694.] — T. H. Goodspeed.

1694. Wenholz, H. Maize breeding. Agricultural research in Australia. Advisory
Council Sci. and Ind. Commonwealth of Australia Bull. 7: 39-48. 1918. — Author believes that
improvement of maize can be accomplished largely by selection within a variety and therefore
the experiment farms of New South Wales have been restricted to the use of one variety which
previous experience has shown to be the best for the district. — Study of ear characters had
led to the conclusion that some of them are associated with yield. These characters are
length and shape of ear, weight and percentage of shelled grain, space between the rows, fill-
ing and character of the butts and tips, depth of grain and size of core. The ideal ear with
many of these desirable characters highly developed has not been found by experiment to
be positively correlated with yielding capacity under all conditions. — Data are being col-
lected to discover what visible characters in the ear are associated with yielding capacity.
Thus far it is found that although depth of grain is correlated with yield in a late-maturing
variety on the coast, this correlation does not exist with the early variations of the table-
lands. In regions of good rainfall, moderate-sized core is correlated with yielding capacity
while in regions of scanty rainfall smallness of core is a character somewhat related to drought
resistance but not to very high yields. — Another measurable ear character found to be related
to yield is the weight. Author states that uniformity in the appearance, size, shape of ear,
and character of the indentation of the grain gives a greater uniformity in the maturing of the
crop and in consequence a greater uniformity in flowering which latter has been found to be
directly associated with a smaller percentage of barren stalks.— Ear-to-row breeding is highly
recommended and in ear-to-row tests author notes having made some very careful observa-
tions which have thrown considerable light on maize breeding and selection. It has been
found, for instance, that some rows from individual ears contain a high percentage of barren
stalks while other rows have practically none. It has also been found that many of the
highest-yielding rows in the tests have been most uniform in the type of ears produced.
Author considers that this observation supports the practice of breeding for uniformity in

No. 2, September, 1920] GENETICS 225

ear type. — In breeding for early maturity aut hor recommends select bag early-maturing plants
in the field instead of the longer process of elimination of the late-maturing types in the
variety by gradual acclimatization. — In breeding for drought -resist ance 1 he greatest difficulty
to be overcome is the "blasting" effect of hot, dry winds on pollen viability, although in BOme
districts this is obviated by planting at the proper time. It is stated that while breeding
may produce a drought-resistant pollen it must be borne in mind that the limitation of mois-
ture in the soil is also a contributing factor in low yields. — J. H. Kcmpton.

1695. White, Orland E. [Rev. of: East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. Inbreed-
ing and outbreeding. U x 21 cm., 285 p., 46 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919.)
Torreya 20: 32-34. Mar.-Apr., 1920.^See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571 ; 5, Entries 437, 1607.

1696. Wiogans, C. C. Some factors favoring or opposing fruitfulness in apples. Missouri
Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 32: 1-60. 6 fig. 1918. — Studied individual fruit spurs of six com-
mercial varieties of apples. Three varieties were known as annual bearers and these developed
fairly high percentage of blossoms each year while three were classed as alternate bearers.
Two of the annual bearers were able to develop blossoms in successive seasons on the same
spur in much greater proportion than other varieties observed. Bearing spurs ranged from 2
to 8 years in age, 3 to 6 or 7 years being most effective fruiting age. — Found slightly higher con-
centration of sap (freezing point method) in bearing than in non-bearing spurs and not-d
marked decrease in sap concentration in late June or early July. Sugar and starch were shown
by chemical methods to be present in slightly greater quantities in bearing than in non-bearing
spurs. Determined effect of girdling, fertilizers, cultural treatments, and etherization on
concentration of cell sap. — H. K. Hayes.

1697. Wilder, Harris Hawthorne. Physical correspondence in two sets of duplicate
twins. Jour. Heredity 10: 410-420. Fig. 15-19. Dec, 1919.

1698. Winters, A. Y. Eugenics, the war instinct and democracy. Jour. Heredity 10:
254-256. June, 1919.

1699. Woods, Frederick Adams. Twins prove the importance of chromosomes. Jour.
Heredity 10: 423-425. Dec., 1919.

1700. Woods, Frederick Adams. A definition of heredity— " Nature vs. nurture" not a
good expression. Jour. Heredity 10: 426-427. Dec, 1919.

1701. Wriedt, Chr. The brindle colour in cattle in relation to red. Jour. Genetics 9: 83.
Dec, 1919. — Author concludes from records on Telemark breed in Norway that brindle is
dominant to red (and not a heterozygote between red and black as J. Carlson had concluded),
on the basis of the following: Brindle X brindle or brindle X red gives both brindle and red,
but red X red gives only red. Black is said to be very rare in this breed, the characteristic
colors being brindle and red. — J. A. Dctlefsen.

1702. Zeleny, Charles. A change in the bar gene of Drosophila melanogaster involving
further decrease in facet number and increase in dominance. Jour. Exp. Zool. 30: 293-324.
9 fig. April 5, 1920. — Author, who has for some time been studying the effect of selection upon
the physical appearance and hereditary determiners ("bar gene") of the barred eye of Droso-
phila melanogaster, reports several mutants that have arisen in respect to this character.
Bar gene, which is sex-linked, is concerned with the production of an eye with a greatly re-
duced number of facets (an average of about seventy-five, instead of the usual eight hundred
of normal "full-eye" flies). The Ft generation of bar by full-eye is nearly intermediate
between the parents. To avoid the effects of varying temperature, the flies of these data were
reared at uniform temperature. Though considerable variability occurs in facet number,
one male appeared, having only nineteen facets, a number markedly lower than the lowest
otherwise known for bar eye. This fly produced a race with average of twenty-two or twenty-

226 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

three facets. The gene concerned is named ultra-bar, and shows a marked dominance over
both bar and full-eye, so that the Fi generation has eyes almost as small as those of ultra-bar.
Crossing-over tests seem to show that ultra-bar is an allelomorph of bar. Author calls atten-
tion to this evidence of mutation in a gene during selection, but thinks the direction of muta-
tion probably not significant inasmuch as mutations toward full-eye have also occurred. —
John S. Dexter.

HORTICULTURE

C. H. Gotjrley, Editor
FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

1703. Allen, W. J. Orchard notes. February. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 142-
143. 1920.

1704. Allen, W. J. Apricot growing in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:201-207. 1 fig. 1920.

1705. Allen, W. J. Peach growing in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:127-133. 2 fig. 1920.

1706. Allen, W. J., and W. C. G. Brereton. Orchard notes. January. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 65-67. 1920.

1707. Allen, W. J., and W. le Gay Brereton. Orchard notes. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31: 294-295. 1920.

1708. Allen, W. J., and S. A. Hogg. Cherry growing in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 277-279. 1920.

1709. Allen, W. J., and S. A. Hogg. Orchard notes. March. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31: 221-222. 1920.

1710. Andre, G. Sur l'inversion du sucre de canne pendant la conservation des oranges.
[The inversion of sucrose in oranges during storage.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 126-
128. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2193.

1711. Anonymous. The cocoanut raft. Sci. Amer. 122:339. 1 fig. 1920.

1712. Anonymous. Lime sulphur spray following Bordeaux. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19:
371-374. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2001.

1713. Anonymous. The most valuable crop. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 316. 1920. — A note
concerning the value of the cocoanut palm. — Chas. H. Otis.

1714. Anonymous. Liming fruit trees. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 17: 699. 1919. —
The following formula is given for washing tree trunks: 10 pounds of fresh quicklime in 50
gallons of water, enough water being added at first to cover the lime, add 8 pounds of flowers
of sulphur, allow to boil for 20 minutes, and add the remaining quantity of water. — J. J.
Skinner.

1715. Anonymous. Conference on fruit growing. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 60-80.
1919. — This is a report of a discussion of the distribution, varieties, disease control, and
grading of deciduous fruits. —J. K. Shaw.

1716. Anonymous. Revival of indigo. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 271, 279. 1919. [Ab-
stract.]

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE 227

1717. Anonymous. Spraying programs for the orchard and fruit, garden. Monthly Bull.
Ohio Agric. Exp. St a. 5: 67 -78. 1920.

1718. Baker, C. F. Cooperative seed exchange. Philippine Agric. 8: 19-21. 1919. —
This paper gives a list of tropical plants, seeds of which are desired by the College of Agricul-
ture (Philippine Islands) in exchange for seeds of the College stock. — S. F. T release.

1719. Ballou, F. H., and I. P. Lewis. Horticultural notes from the county experiment
farms of Ohio. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 52-57. 3 -pi. 1920.— Plans for prun-
ing, fertilizing, landscaping and management are given. — R. C. Thomas.

1720. Ballou, F. H., and I. P. Lewis. Culture and feeding of the apple orchard.
Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 43-48. 2 pi. 1920. — The article includes a comparison
of the value of fertilizers used respectively with the grass mulch and tillage systems of culture.
— R. C. Thomas.

1721. Ballou, F. H., and I. P. Lewis. Pruning tests in young apple orchards. Monthly
Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 85-90. 5 pi. 1920. — This is a report of tests made in orchards
of County Experiment Farms in Ohio. Seven methods are discussed briefly, viz., (1) Light
dormant pruning. (2) Heavy dormant pruning. (3) Light summer pruning. (4) Heavy
summer pruning. (5) Light dormant pruning with summer clipping of new shoots. (6)
Heavy dormant pruning with summer clipping of new shoots, and (7) No pruning. — R. C.
Thomas.

1722. Balme, Juan. El olivo y su porvenir en Mexico. [The olive and its future in Mexico.]
Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 3 : 379-383. 2 fig. 1919. — History of olive culture in California and other
parts of the new world, and the possibilities of growing the tree in Mexico. — John A. Stevenson.

1723. Beckwith, Charles C. The effect of certain nitrogenous and phosphatic fertilizers
on the yield of cranberries. Soil Sci. 8: 483-490. 1919. —As a result of one year's studies on
the effect of fertilizers on the yield of cranberries, the optimum amount of a mixed fertilizer
consisting of sodium nitrate, 75 pounds; dried blood, 75 pounds; rock phosphate, 300 pounds;
potassium sulfate, 50 pounds, was found to be 800 pounds. A mixture of mineral and organic
nitrogen did not prove superior to sodium nitrate alone. Calcium cyanamid and barium
phosphate proved unsatisfactory sources of nitrogen and phosphorus respectively. — W.J.
Robbins.

1724. Bernard, Charles. La culture du the aux Indes neerlandaises. [Tea-culture in
the Dutch East Indies.] Rev. G6n. Sci. Pures et Appliquees 30: 17-18. 1919. — This paper,
by the Director of the Tea-Experiment Station in Buitenzorg, Java, covering the industry
indicated by the title, is of such conciseness as not to lend itself to further condensation
into an abstract. — G. J. Peirce.

1725. Blair, W. S. Orchard cultivation. Fruit Growers' Assoc. Nova Scotia Ann. Rept.
55: 18-27. 1919. — Early plowed land contained 5.6 per cent more moisture in August than
land plowed two weeks later. In another experiment sod land contained 5.9 per cent moisture
in August while land cultivated six times and seeded to a cover crop on July 20 contained 14.1
per cent. Of the cover crops used crimson clover depleted the soil moisture least and millet
most. — Paul A. Murphy.

1726. Boulger, G. S. [Rev. of: Bedford, Duke of, and Spencer Pickering. Science
and fruit growing : Being an account of the results obtained at the Woburn Experimental Fruit
Farm since its foundation in 1894. zxii-\-351 p. Macmillan & Co. : New York, 1919.] Jour.
Botany 58:28-29. 1920.

1727. Boyer, G. Etudes sur la biologie et la culture des champignons superieurs. [Biol-
ogy and culture of mushrooms.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2: 233-344. 4 V^-r
20 fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1931.

228 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1728. Cabrera, Teodoro. La utilidad de los guayabos. [Uses of the guava-trees.]
[Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 628. 1919.

1729. Call, L. E. Director's report. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 1917-18. 68 p.
1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1466, 2024.

1730. Calvino, Mario. ReseSo general sobre la arboricultura frutal de Mexico. [Fruit
trees of Mexico.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 34-42. 6 fig. 1919. — Lists the fruits of Mexico both
for the tropical and the temperate belts, giving uses and possibilities of development of each.
Fruits belonging to the following genera are discussed: Crataegus, Carasus, Persea, Juglans,
Casimiroa, Diospyros, Lucuma, Citrus, Musa, Theobroma, Annona, Spondias, Carica, Achras,
Psidium, Chrysophyllum, Mangifera, Cocos, Cudonia, Phoenix, Vitis, and Olea. — John A.
Stevenson.

1731. Condit, 1. J. Caprifigs and caprification. Univ. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
319: 341-375. 1920. — Figs which drop may be of the Smyrna class, the fruits of which require
caprification in order to set and remain on the tree; they may be of the caprifig class, the
fruits of which drop unless inhabited by the fig insect; or they may be common figs which
drop because of unsuitable climatic conditions. Varieties of caprifigs which consistently
bear quantities of polleniferous figs year after year, should be discarded, as they are of no
value in caprification. A list of commercially grown varieties is given. — A. R. C. Haas.

1732. Ducomet, M. V. Par quel moyen peut-on assurer a 1'obtenir la propriety des vari-
etes nouvelles de plants cultivees. [How can the ownership of new varieties of cultivated plants
be assured to the owner.] Jour. Soc. Nation. Hortic. France 20: 120-121, 139-144, 173-177.
June, July and August, 1919. — -The writer calls attention to the fact that the originator of a
new and worthy plant is not protected in his rights in the same way that an inventor or writer
is. He thinks that a man who has spent years in developing a worthy plant should be pro-
tected by law so that no one else would be allowed to propagate and disseminate it without
paying a royalty to the originator. The writer recommends for France: — (1) That an asso-
ciation of French plant breeders be formed. — (2) That one or more government establish-
ments, open to the public, be instituted for the acceptance and preservation of new
varieties. — (3) That committees of acceptance and control be appointed. — (4) That every
request for entry be accompanied by a detailed description of the new variety; a supply of
seeds, bulbs, roots, buds or grafts; as exact an account as possible of the parentage of the
new form; and a promise to send periodically fresh supplies of seeds, roots, etc., and to
permit visits to the plantations in the event of controversy. — (5) That the request for
registration of the new variety be publicly announced.— (6) That in the case of annuals a
provisional certificate be given after one year and a final certificate after not less than two
years and that certificate in the case of perennials be granted in as short a time as the
nature of each permits. — (7) That the certificate guarantee only the authenticity of the
plants not their productivity or any other quality. — (8) That the certificate be revoked if the
variety prove unstable or is shown not to be a novelty.— (9) That during the period of
certification no sale of the variety be allowed without the authorization of the originator.' —
No recommendation is made as to the length of the period of protection for the originator.
— H. C. Thompson.

1733. Ellenwood, C. W. Bearing habits of the Delicious apple. Monthly Bull. Ohio
Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 27-28. 2 tables. 1920.

1734. Enfer, V. L'ensachage des fruits. [Bagging fruits.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 294-295.
June, 1919. — The enclosing of fruits in sacks has long been practiced as a protection against
various insects and hail, and because fruits thus protected are improved in texture and size.
Sacks of a size appropriate to the fruit to be enclosed are chosen, the deformed and excess
fruits removed, and those remaining enclosed when they are the size of a small nut, or at least
by June 15 before the egg-laying period of the codling moth. Small holes are cut near the bot-

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE JJ'.I

toms of the sacks in order that air may be admitted and excess moisture drained out. The
fruit may remain covered until harvested, but the more highly colored varieties should be
gradually uncovered by cutting out parts of the sack about September 10. It may be removed
entirely several days later, after the skin has hardened somewhat. Bits of paper should be
left attached to the peduncles of the fruits, in order to prevent attacks by birds. — E. J.
Kraus.

1735. Enter, V. Selection des jeunes fruits. [The selection of young fruits.] Rev.
Hortie. 91 : 333-331. August, 1919. — In spite of the fact that many fruit buds are removed
by pruning or are destroyed by cold or unfavorable weather, still, more generally remain than
can be matured into good fruits. It is advisable, therefore, to remove all deformed and small
fruits as early in the season and as rapidly as possible. When the fruit spurs are close together
the fruits from half of them should be removed entirely in order that there may be a crop the
following year. Later, selection is to be made of those which are to be sacked. The number
of fruits to be preserved on each tree will vary with the vigor of the tree and the final volume
of the fruit when mature. If a variety is the more valuable because of its extraordinary size,
very few fruits should be allowed to remain even on vigorous trees. — E. J. Kraus.

173b. Fenzi, E. O. Le culture ortive in Tripolitania. [Vegetable culture in Tripoli tania.]
Bull. R. Soc. Toscana Orticult. 44: 105-109. 1919. — A discussion of the crops cultivated in
this Italian colony. — W. II. Chandler.

1737. Ginarte, Benjamin Munoz. Algo mas sobre el cultivo de la pifia. [More about
pineapple culture. 1 Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 592-593. Fig. 1-2. 1919. — The opinion of
Rossi that the pineapple is a native of Brazil is recorded. The qualities of the fruits of dif-
ferent varieties of pineapple and closely related plants are described. A classification by
Rossi is given. — F. M. Blodgett.

173S. Gladwin, F. E. A test of methods of pruning the Concord grape in the Chautauqua
grape belt. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 464: 189-213. 10 pi. 1919.— Experi-
ments covering a period of eight years were conducted at Fredonia, N. Y. Seven methods of
training were tested and early winter pruning compared with late winter pruning. So far as
yield is concerned, the single-stem Kniffin, theMunson, and the Chautauqua methods of train-
ing proved about equal; while fruit from the high-renewal and two-stem Kniffin methods was
smaller in quantity and poorer in quality. Considering all of the advantages and disadvan-
tages of the several methods, the single-stem Kniffin outranked all other methods of training.
On the whole, late winter pruning made a slightly better showing than early winter pruning;
but the difference in yield, wood growth, and maturity of fruit was too slight to warrant the
definite conclusion that either method of pruning is to be preferred to the other. — F. C.
Stewart.

1739. Green, W. J. Smudging to prevent frost. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta.
5:63. 1920.

1740. Grueber, Charles. Annual report of the senior fruit inspector. Tasmania Agric.
and Stock Dept. Rept. 1918-19: 10-11. 1919. — Administrative report on enforcement of vari-
ous regulations at the port of entry and departure. The "apples and pears standaridization
act" was not complied with satisfactorily. Many growers preferred to ship ungraded stock
and some such shipments sold as well as stock marked "Fancy." — Shipments from Hobart
for the year were over one million cases of fresh fruit. — D. Reddick.

1741. Hatton, Ronald G. Paradise apple stocks; their fruit and blossom described.
Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 89-94. Fig. 26-38. 1919.— The author lists nine types of dwarf
apple stocks grown at the Wye College Fruit Experiment Station, England. These have been
compared with a series of "free" or standard stocks and there appears to be no strict
dividing line between the two series. Eight of the dwarf types have fruited and tabular
description of the flowers and fruit are given. — J. K. Shair.

230 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1742. Haywood, A. H. The rice bean (Phaseolus calcaratus) or so-called Jerusalem pea
(P. trinervis). Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 2S9-290. 1 fig. 1920.— Notes are given on
the plant as a cover crop for bananas. Its use is recommended. — L. R. Waldron.

1743. Hodgson, R. W. Pruning the navel oranges. California Citrograph 5: 138, 169.
1920.

1744. Honnet, G. Les hybrides en 1919. [The hybrids in 1919.] Rev. Vitic. 52: 53-59.
1920. — The oldest hybrids most resistant to drought are: Oberlins, Gaillard Number 2, Con-
derc 202 X 75, 146 X 51, Seibel 1000, 2859, Bertille-Serve 450; those less resistant are: S. 2003,
2006, G. 194, 157, S. 2734, 880, C. 272 X 60. Two black grapes, B-S, 413 and C. 106 X 46, have
grown and produced well. The new black direct producers are: Baco Number 1, B-S 872,
893, 1129, Malegue 829 X 6, M. 2049 X 3, S. 4121, 4643, 4636 and 5212. Among the white varieties
are: C. 162 X 5, S. 2638, 4681, 4955, 4986, 5279, M. 1647 X 8, 1157 X 1, Baco 22A, B. 43 X 23. A
certain number of these new varieties appear to be very promising. They are more resistant
to fungous diseases than Vinifera varieties. — L. Bonnet.

1745. Houser, J. S. Recent tests of materials to control San Jose scale. Monthly Bull.
Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 49-51. 1920.

1746. Howard, A., and G. L. C. Report of the Imperial Economic Botanists. Sci. Rept.
Agric. Res. Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 46-67. PI. 5 and 6. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1159.

1747. Hyde,W. C. Orchard cover-crop experiments on the Mountere Hills. New Zealand
Jour. Agric. 19: 364-365. Fig. 1. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1262.

1748. Jones, J. Plant importations. Report on the Agricultural Department, Dominica,
1918-19: 2-3. [Imp. Dept. Agric. Barbados, 1919.] — Notes are given on the following plants:
Mexican apple (Casimiroa edulis), Rambutam (Nephelium lappaceum), Poularia suavis,
Jaboticaba (Myrciaria cauliflora), Brazil nut (Bertholetia excelsa), Sapucaia nut (Lecythis
Zabucajo), Suwarri nut (Caryocar nuciform) and Chicle gum tree. Other plants under trial
are Sarawak bean (Dolichos Hosei), from St. Lucia, and Cytisus Palmensis, C. stenopetalus
and C. pallidus, plants used in the Canary Islands for forage purposes. Mention is also
made of Momordica cochin-chinensis , the seeds of which contain an oil of remarkable drying
properties. — J. S. Dash.

1749. Jones, J. Plot experiments with orchard cultivation. Report on the Agricultural
Department, Dominica, 1918-19: 18-23. [Imperial Department of Agriculture, Barbados.
1919.]— The author treats in a full and interesting manner the difficulties encountered while
carrying on manurial and other experiments with such permanent crops as cacao and limes.
Many useful suggestions are given.— J. S. Dash.

1750. Kirby, R. S., and J. S. Martin. A study of the formation and development of the
flower beds of Jonathan and Grimes Golden in relation to different types (clover sod, blue grass
sod, cover crop, and clean tillage) of soil management. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 265-290.
PL 7. 1920. — Experiments made at Council Bluffs, Iowa, indicate that flower buds of apple
form earlier and in greater numbers where soil moisture is less, and that nitrogen added by
clover sod induces earlier formation of flower buds. The flowers are differentiated during a
period of about four weeks on each tree, at some time between July 1 and September 15,
according to variety and location. — H. S. Conard.

1751. Kelley, W. P., and E. E. Thomas. The effects of alkali on citrus trees. Cali-
fornia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 318: 305-337. 1920. — The bulletin aims to enable citrus growers
to recognize the effects of alkali, to appreciate the seriousness of alkali in citrus culture, to
apprehend the relationships between irrigation and the accumulation of alkali, and to see
that the application of certain fertilizers, especially nitrate of soda, may bear an important
relation to the accumulation of alkali. The discussion is confined mainly to the effects of

No. 2, September, 1020] HORTICULTURE 231

excessive salt concentration. Alkali content of the soil may ultimately reach a harmful con-
centration where irrigation water is applied that contains only a relatively low concentration
of alkali salts. The rate of salt accumulation varies in different soils, depending on (1) the
composition of the water, (2) the amounts applied, and (3) the freedom with which it pene-
trates into the subsoil. There exists a close relationship between the composition of irri-
gation water and the accumulation of alkali salts, and the condition of the citrus trees. — A.
R. C. Haas.

L752. Laffeb, II. E. The pruning of the vine. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 47-55,
121-126. Fig. 5-13. 1920. (Continued from: Ibid. 30: 808. 1919.]

1753. Larue, P. Taille du Pineau a Chablis. [Pruning the Chablis Pineau grape.]
Rev. Vitic. 52:7-11. 2 fig. 1920.

1754. Lewis, C. I., A. E. Murneek, and C. C. Cate. Pear harvesting and storage investi-
gations in Rogue River Valley. (Second report.) Orgeon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 162: 1-39.
Fig. 1- IB. 1919. Fruits of Bartlett pears increase gradually in size, but at an accelerated
rate in volume, throughout the growing season, apparently independently of climatic or
cultural conditions. A distinct correlation appears to exist between the degree of maturity
of Bartlett pears and the resistance offered by the cortical and epidermal tissues to pressure
as measured by the amount of pressure required to force into them a ^5 inch steel ball up to
one half its diameter. There is no direct relationship between such resistance to pressure and
the diameter of the fruit. Storage investigations showed that, in the case of Bartlett pears,
the size of the fruit was not a factor in time of ripening or decay. Fruits picked during the
middle or latter part of the season of development kept longer than those picked early, and
were superior in quality, and those picked exceptionally late were superior both in keeping
and eating qualities. No difference in rate of maturity in storage was noted when a change
in temperature of 10° to 15°F. was registered, provided the same approximate percentage of
humidity was maintained. In the case of Bosc pears it was determined that both relatively
high temperature with low humidity and low temperature with high humidity were harmful
to proper ripening, that fruit picked very early in the season must be allowed to ripen partially
before being placed at low temperatures, and that at least two weeks should elapse before
putting the fruit into cold storage, though this time may be decreased under conditions of
higher humidity. — E. J. Kraus.

1755. Lodian, L. Strange things to eat. Sci. Amer. 122: 302, 312, 314. 9 fig. 1920 —
A popular enumeration of seeds, bulbs and flowers used by cosmopolitan New York City for
food, which are out of the ordinary for that region. — Chas. H. Otis.

1756. Macottn, W. T. The commercial varieties of apples of Canada and the United States.
Fruit Growers' Assoc. Nova Scotia Ann. Rept. 55: 119-137. 1919.

1757. Manaresi, A. Sulla biologia fiorale del pesco. 2a nota. [On the floral biology of
the peach. 2nd note.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 42-67. 1919.— A study of the
structure of the flower, its various parts and functions in a large number of varieties. Sta-
tistical study of the size of the various types of buds in different varieties, of the shape of the
flower as connected with the character and adherence of the stone; the classification of the
varieties into two groups characterized by a campanulaceous perianth in one case and a
rosaceous perianth in the other case. A study of the flowering period and its daily perio-
dicity; the action of meteorological conditions upon the functions and longevity of the various
floral parts; form and dimension of pollen, and its relation to varietal classification. Study
of the germination of the pollen of seventy varieties, of the size of the pollen tube, its morpho-
logical characteristics and speed of germination when tested in solutions of the following
sugars: lactose, saccharose, maltose, glucose, laevulose, and galactose in solutions ranging in
concentrations from 5 to 30 per cent. Distinct differences were obtained with the different
sugars, saccharose being the most generally useful in concentrations ranging from 10 to 20 per

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

232 HORTICULTURE jBot. Absts., Vol. V,

cent ; maltose in a concentration of 10 to 15 per cent may give results that approach and some
times surpass those obtained with saccharose; lactose and glucose gave relatively good results
only in concentrations varying from 5 to 15 per cent while galactose gave passable results at
this concentration the optimum being between 5 and 10 per cent. Laevulose gave very poor
results. Distinct differences were to be observed in the pollen tubes germinated in the dif-
ferent sugars, and in the different concentrations. Accidental differences were observed in
some varieties in the position of the style with respect to the position of the anthers, and
differences in the number of styles and ovules in the pistils. Anthesis was found to take place
exclusively in day time, and mostly in the forenoon, the petals first expanding being the ones
first touched by the sun. Cleistoganry was often observed in good seasons, and dehiscence
took place mostly in the early forenoon under the direct guidance of the sun. Anthesis
appears to follow a centrifugal path along the branch. The influence of the position and alti-
tude of the tree and of grafting upon the time of flowering are also touched upon. A bibliog-
raphy is appended. — A. Bonazzi.

1758. Marshall, Roy E. Pruning fruit trees. Virginia Polytech. Inst. Ext. Bull. 38.
37 p., 29 fig. 1919. — A popular discussion of the training and pruning of apple, peach, pear,
cherry, and plum trees with special emphasis on those phases of the subject of most practical
importance in eastern United States. — F. D. Fromme.

1759. Maktix, J. N., and L. E. Yocum. A study of the pollen and pistils of apples in rela-
tion to the germination of the pollen. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 391-410. Fig. 163-166. 1920.
— The pollen of the five varieties of apples studied contains proteins or amino-acids, some pec-
tin, and occasionally small amounts of sugars at the time of pollination. Pollen grains ger-
minate in sugar solutions from pure water to 70 per cent, but most successfully at 2| per cent.
A temperature of 22°-25°C. was best. The stigma is papillate; pollen germinates when caught
between the papillae. The styles contain much cane sugar at some distance below the stigma.
No secretion was found on the stigma at the time favorable for pollination. — H. S. Conard.

1760. Matsushima, T. Untersuchungen fiber die Wasseraufnahme bei abgeschnittenen
Zweigen. [Investigation of the water-absorption of amputated branches.] Jour. Coll. Sci.
Imp. Univ. Tokyo 432: 1-27. 1919. — After an abstract of the literature of the subject, Matsu-
shima considers the relations of water-absorption to the Japanese art of arranging bouquets,
and reports the methods and results of his experiments. In these he used water, both tap
and distilled, and dilute acid and alkaline solutions, branches or sprays cut in the air and others
under water, and still others the cut ends of which were deliberately burned. His results,
as summarized at the end of the paper, are that in twigs cut off in air the decrease in water-
absorption is insignificant if the twigs have abundant wood, but that in plants with much
slime, milk or gum it is considerable: that burning the cut ends is especially favorable in
the slime, milk and gum carrying plants as thereby the stopping of the water-carrying vessels
is prevented: and that acids, especially the organic acids, increase the water-absorption
while alkalies decrease it in ordinary plants, whereas in milk, slime and gum containing
twigs the reverse is true. — G. J. Peirce.

1761. Munn, M. T. Spraying lawns with iron sulfate to eradicate dandelions. New York
Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 466: 21-59. PL 1-6. 1919. — Experiments made at Geneva,
New York, demonstrate that dandelions (Taraxacum officinale and T. erythrospermum) may
be eradicated from lawns at small expense and without material injury to the grass by spray-
ing four or five times during the season with a solution prepared by dissolving 1.5 to 2 pounds
of iron sulfate in one gallon of water. Spraying should be supplemented by the use of fertil-
izers and the application of grass seed in the spring and fall of each year. With proper man-
agement a lawn may be kept practically free from dandelions by spraying every third year.
The cutting-out method of fighting dandelions is laborious and ineffective unless the greater
part of the root is removed. A study of seed production in Taraxacum officinale shows it to
be parthenogenetic. — F. C. Stewart.

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE 233

1762. Pellett, Frank C. American honey plants, together with those which are of spe-
cial value to the beekeeper as sources of pollen. 15 x 23 cm. 297 p., 155 Must. American Bee
Journal: Hamilton, Illinois, 1920. — The book is primarily an annotated and illustrated list
of a very large number of plants that are of more or less interest to beekeepers. Each plant is
listed in alphabetical order by some "common" name, but the Latin name is added in each case
and a cross-referenced index makes it possible to find a given entry by either name. Names of
states in the United States and of provinces in Canada are inserted in the alphabetical arrange-
ment, each with a brief consideration of the honey-plants of that area. Many other names
besides those of plants and regions find place in the list; under P is found a discussion of about
seven pages on "Physiology of nectar secretion." The annotations are mainly with reference
to the production of honey or pollen, but many facts of plant distribution are stated. Numer-
ous quotations, with their sources are given. The geographical region considered is prac-
tically the United States, Alaska and Canada, rather than the whole of even North America.
The illustrations are mostly reproductions of photographs. The book contains much to
interest gardeners and plant-lovers generally, as well as beekeepers. — B. E. Livingston.

1763. Pi ckford, Verne C. Control of air conditions in lemon storage rooms. California
Citrograph 5: 139, 164. 1920.

1764. Quisumbing y Arguelles, E. Studies of Philippine bananas. Philippine Agric.
Rev. 123: 1-73. SO pi. 1919.

1765. Ravaz, L. Obtention des greffes-soudes. [Method of handling callused grape
grafts.] Prog. Agric. et Vitic. 74: 173-182. 1920.

1766. Ravaz, L. Plantation des bouturos soins speciano. [Planting of cuttings — special
precautions.] Prog. Agric. et Vitic. 74: 21-32. 1920. — In planting grape cuttings "in situ" it is
recommended that only the cuttings from the base of canes be planted ; to mound them to avoid
injury by frost, or to stratify them in a reverse position and plant after roots have appeared.
The vineyard should be carefully cultivated. — L. Bonnet.

1767. Rawes, A. N., and F. J. Chittenden. Effect of grass on apple trees. Jour. Roy.
Hortic. Soc. 45: 116-119. 1919. — Twenty-five trees of five varieties on crab and Paradise
stocks were grown at Wisley, England under continuous cultivation, under grass with a
space around the tree 2 to 3 feet in diameter kept bare and stirred at intervals, and under
a grass mulch. Growth and yield were largest where the trees were cultivated. — J. K.
Shaw.

1768. Rives, Louis. Affinite des hybrides pour les porte-greffes. [Affinity of hybrids
for resistant stocks.] Prog. Agric. et Vitic. 74: 13-14. 1920. — The direct producers are
generally very exigent in water and give good results on vigorous resistant stocks. The Vin-
ifera Americans, 1202, the Aramon X Rupestris, the 93-5, show a sufficient affinity for them.
The Rupestris St. George gives varying results. The author concludes that affinities must
be studied experimentally in various soils and localities. — L. Bonnet.

1769. Riviere, C. Le Jardin d'Essai d'Alger. [The Experimental Garden at Algiers.]
Rev. Hortic. 91: 340-342. Sept., 1919.

1770. Riviere, G. De la progression de la maturation dans les poires a couteau. [Pro-
gression of ripening in table pears.] Jour. Soc. Nation. Hortic. France 20: 306-307. Dec, 1919.
— The author states that ripening of pears begins at the stem end and proceeds toward the
calyx end. Analyses were made to determine the sugar content of different parts of the pear
as it begins to ripen and it was found that the stem end section contained a larger percentage
of sugar than the middle section and the latter more than the calyx end section. From this the
author concludes that ripening progresses from the stem end toward the calyx end. — A table
showing the percentage of sugar in three cross sections of three varieties of pears is given. —
H. C. Thompson.

234 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1771. Sanders, J. G., and L. H. Wible. List of owners of commercial orchards and
licensed nurserymen in Pennsylvania, including list of registered dealers in nursery stock.
Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. I10: 1-56. 1918.

1772. Shamel, A. D. Control of humidity conditions in lemon storage rooms. California
Citrograph 5: 137, 170. 3 fig. 1920.

1773. Shamel, A. D. Results of individual tree performance record studies with pruned
and unpruned Marsh grapefruit trees. California Citrograph 5: 248, 268. 4 fid- 1920. —
Experiments showed that heavy pruning of middle-aged vigorous grapefruit trees reduced
the crop with no compensating benefits. The author recommends the training of young
trees to proper form; the renewal by heavy pruning of old worn out trees; and the pruning
out of dead brush and conflicting branches at any time. Aside from this he would not prune
Marsh grapefruit trees. — J. E. Coit.

1774. Stuckey, H. P. Work with Vitis rotundifolia, a species of muscadine grapes.
Georgia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 133: 60-74. 4 pi. (colored), 8 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 1668.

1775. Thayer, Paul. Selecting nursery stock. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta.
5: 58-62. 4 pi- 1920.— Particular attention is called to the supreme merit of standard
varieties and the importance of selecting clean, disease-free stock. — R. C. Thomas.

1776. Thayer, Paul. The Bartlett plum. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 26.
1 pi. 1920. — This variety combines beauty and utility and is recommended for semi-formal
plantings. — R. C. Thomas.

1777. Thomas, P. H. Annual report of the Assistant Fruit and Forestry Expert. Tasmania
Agric. and Stock Dept. Rept. 1918-19: 19-20. 1919. — Brief notes on the following: a fruit
tree disease, caused by Armillaria mellea, can be prevented in early stages by cutting away
all diseased tissue and painting over the wound with Bordeaux paste; a treatment of apples
with nitrate-caustic soda spray did not have appreciable effect on fruit production or growth.
Experiments are in progress with stocks for fruit trees, cold storage of fruit, etc. — D. Reddick.

1778. Tribolet, I. Olives. I. South African Jour. Indust. 2: 1160-1167. 1919.

1779. Tribolet, I. Olives. II. South African Jour. Indust. 3 : 42-19. 1920.

1780. Truelle, A. La vente des pommes de calville blanc, de Meran (Tyrol). [Marketing
white Calville apples from Meran (Tyrol).] Rev. Hortic. 91: 378-380. Nov., 1919.— Special
methods of grading and packing are followed in marketing the fruit in order to utilize it to
the best advantage and to derive the largest profits from its sale. The fruits are first graded
into three classes. Class A contains perfect fruits only; Class B those which have slight de-
fects; and Class C those which have more pronounced imperfections. These groups are
again divided according to the form, beauty, and particularly the weight of the fruits. After
grading the finest fruits are wrapped first in a white and then in a colored paper, and packed
into boxes whose gross weight does not exceed 5 kilos. Usually such boxes contain from 12
to 20 fruits, though there may be as few as 9 or as many as 32. The less choice fruits are
packed into cases which contain from 400 to 500 fruits arranged in 6 layers, with a gross
weight of 55 to 60 kilos, and into half-cases which contain from 180 to 200 fruits arranged in
5 layers, with a gross weight of 25 to 30 kilos. There are also special cases for special purposes.
The price received for the fruit varies with the quality and quantity available. Over a ten-
year period, for the best fruits this has ranged from 10, to more than 50 cents a pound; very
large individual specimens selling readily for 80 cents each. The inferior grades sell for less.
— E. J. Kraus.

1781. Turney, A. G. Report of the Horticulturist. Province of New Brunswick Rept.
on Agric. 1918: 86-109. 1919.

No. 2, September, 1920 1 HORTICULTURE 235

1782. Tyson, Chesteb J. Report of the Pomologist. Bull. Pennslyvania Dept. Agric.
I1: 27-29. 1918. — Includes general remarks upon exporting, market conditions, prices, pack-
ing and marking; bill, now plantings, and the future of apple-growing industry in Pennsyl-
vania.— C. R. Orton.

1783. Verdie, H. Enquele sur les producteurs directs dans le Gers. [Inquiry on direct
producers in the Gers.] Rev. Vitic. 52: 78-19. 1920. — The direct producers giving the best
results in that region are: Seibel 128, 138, 880, 1000, 1020, 2859, Conderc 235-120, 272-GO, 71-20,
Mategue 829-6, 1100-2, 1157-1, Gaillard-Girerd 157, 194, Castel 1028, Bertille-Seyve 450, Baco
22A. These hybrids vary in regard to their adaptation to soils and their resistance to fungous
diseases. — L. O. Bonnet.

1784. Ward, J. M. Annual report of the fruit and forestry expert. Tasmania Agric. and
Stock Dept. Rept. 1918-19: 16-19. 1919. — Administrative report of work among fruit growers
in connection with enforcement of grading and packing laws and the like. — Apple trees are
found to do very much better when worked on seedling stock than when on root-graft stock.
Jonathan, Fameuse, Dunn's, King David and Alfriston seem to do well on root-graft stock. —
D. Reddick.

1785. Webber, Herbert John. Selection of stocks in citrus propagation. California
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 317: 269-301. 1920.— The influence of the character of the stock on the
variation in yield of trees, forms the basis of the bulletin, although other important factors
are considered. Differences in size of nursery trees of transplanting age is largely due to
the fact that the seedling root-stocks on which the trees are budded are of different types,
possessing inherent characters that react differently on the growing buds. Recommends that
all small seedlings in the seed bed and nursery, regardless of what has caused their dwarfness,
be discarded. — A. R. C. Haas.

1786. Weidner, A. I. Report of committee on fruit and fruit culture. Bull. Pennsyl-
vania Dept. Agric. I1: 22-24. 1918. — Some general remarks upon the condition of orchard
fruits in Pennsylvania during the year 1917. Includes brief notes on San Jose scale, dusting,
cultivation and fertilization, pruning, borers and spraying. — C. R. Orton.

1787. Whitehouse, W. E. Cold storage for Iowa apples. (Third progress report.) Iowa
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192. 181-216. U fig. 1919.— Methods of control of disease of cold
stored apples are set forth. A study was also made of the factors relating to the control of
common diseases of the apple in cold storage, such as temperature, humidity, maturity of
fruit, size of apples, wrapping paper used in packing and rate of cooling. — Florence Willey.

1788. Woglum, R. S. Is it safe to fumigate while trees are in bloom? California Citro-
graph 5: 190. Fig. 1. 1920.— Experiments show that citrus blossoms and blossom buds are
more resistant to hydrocyanic acid gas than tender leaves and shoots. It is suggested that
this may be due to higher concentration of reducing sugars in the former. Ordinary fumiga-
tion if carefully done will not injure the bloom. — J. E. Coil.

1789. Young, Floyd D. Rate of increase in temperature with altitude during frosty Dights
In orange groves in southern California. California Citrograph 5: 136, 160. 8 fig. 1920.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

1790. Anonymous. Spring-flowering stocks tried at Wisley, 1916-17. Jour. Roy. Hortic.
Soc. 44: 117-122. 1919. — -This is a report of trial of 180 varieties of spring flowering stocks
at Wisley, England. A classification with brief descriptive notes is given. — J. K. Shaw.

1791. Anonymous. Oriental poppies at Wisley, 1917. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 120-
125. 1919. — Report is made of the trials of 80 stocks of oriental poppies at Wisley, Eng-
land, together with a classification and brief description and the awards of the Floral
Committee. — J. K. Shaiv.

236 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1792. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Farrer, Reginald. The English rock-garden. 2 vol.,
4<o, Ixiv, 504+viii, 524, 102 pi. T. C. & E. C. Jack: LondoD and Edinburgh.] Jour. Botany
57: 354-357. 1919. — The plants concerned are treated at considerable length in part from a
botanist's standpoint, and the nomenclature is discussed. — K. M. Wiegand.

1793. B, D. Fougeres utiles. [Useful ferns.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 330-331. Aug., 1919 —
In addition to the specific mention of certain ferns enumerated by Prince Bonaparte (in: Notes
Pteridologiques, Fasc. VII, p. 19, October, 1918), several others of medicinal or decorative
value are listed. — E. J. Kraus.

1794. Bellair, G. Comment economiser. Note sur le Verbena venosa. [Economic com-
ment. Note on Verbena venosa.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 387-388. Fig. 119. December, 1919.—
Although this plant was introduced from La Plata in 1830, it is still grown but little as an orna-
mental because of the uncertainty connected with the germination of the seeds. In order to
obviate this difficulty various methods of seed treatment were tested. Good results were
secured from the following methods: (1) Immersion in water at 100°C. for 60 seconds; (2)
immersion in water at 55°C. for 5 minutes; (3) immersion in a 2/1000 solution of nitrate of soda
for 48 hours; (4) immersion in a 2 1000 solution of sulfate of ammonia for 48 hours; (5)
stratification for 5 months. Poor results followed the following methods: (1) immersion in
water at 70°C. for 4 minutes ; (2) immersion in a 5 ' 1000 solution of sodium nitrate for 48 hours ;
(3) immersion in a 5/1000 dilution of wood ashes, (4) immersion for 48 hours in pure water,
though this latter result was fairly good. With the exception of the hot water treatments, the
seeds were bathed in the solution indicated, rather than immersed in them. The stratified
seeds, sown in March, germinated rapidly and completely. Seedlings may be carried over
winter or grown in the spring and planted out of doors from the middle to the end of May. —
E. J. Kraus.

1795. Berthault, P. La reorganisation du Jardin d'Essais du Hamma. [The reorgani-
zation of the Experimental Garden at Hamma.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 292-294. Fig. 92-93. June,
1919. — The experimental garden established in 1832, was later (1867) taken over by the Algerian
Company with the three-fold view of making it a public park, a garden for scientific investi-
gations, and a center for the introduction of exotics as well as for the propagation and distri-
bution of indigenous plants. In 1913 the government again took possession of it and has
declared its intention of maintaining it for these same purposes. Much has already been
done in the way of removing the Garden from the state of neglect into which it had fallen, and
it is confidently expected that it will soon assume high rank as a laboratory for various phyto-
logical investigations. — E. J. Kraus.

1796. Blot, F. Corbeilles de chrysan themes. [Beds of chrysanthemums.] Rev. Hortic.
91 : 355-356. Fig. 109. Oct. , 1919. — The chrysanthemum is preeminent among autumn flowers.
Many types, forms and colors are available. Cutting prepared during the early part of March
or the early part of April, or even the end of April for the varieties to be used as borders, should
be cut back several times during the summer in order to secure stocky, bushy plants. Some
of the single flowered varieties are especially desirable as budding plants. A classified list
of more than forty varieties is given. — E. J. Kraus.

1797. Bois, D. La rose "Los Angeles." [The rose, "Los Angeles."] Rev. Hortic. 91:
296. 1 pi. (colored). June, 1919. — This rose, exhibited by Howard and Smith of Los Angeles,
California, at Bagatelle, where it received a gold medal, is the result of a cross between Lyon
Rose (Pernetiana) and Madame Segond-Weber (hybrid tea). It much resembles the former
in bud, flower, and color, and is said to be more hardy, more floriferous and less subject to
fungous diseases. — E. J. Kraus.

1798. Bontrager, W. E. What shade and ornamental trees shall we plant? Monthly
Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5 : 35-41. 5 pi. 1920. — A discussion is given of the relative merits
of types most suitable for lawn and shade planting, including those which will survive unfav-

No. 2, September, 1920J HORTICULTURE 237

orable conditions occasioned by gas, smoke and restricted areas, also with reference to dis-
tinctly ormancntal species. Directions for the care and planting of young trees are outlined.
—R. C. Thomas.

1709. Brodie, Ian. Seedling daffodils selected to grow on at Brodie Castle. Jour. Roy.
Hortic. Soc. 45: 113 155. 1919.

1500. Brooks, A. J. Work in the gardens and observations on plants. Report on the
Agricultural Department, St. Lucia, 1917-18: 1-5. [Imp. Dcpt. Agric, Barbados.] 191S. —
Contains a list of economic and ornamental plants introduced. Notes are also given on
several plants which are under trial. These include: hybrid hibisci, dracaenas, ixoras,
bougainvilleas, Swicteniamahogani, S. macrophylla, Carum Coptic urn and Hyuscyamus mutiens.
—J. S. Dash.

1501. Burnham, Stewart II. Commercial fern gathering. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 88-93.
1919.— The author gives accounts of the commercial gathering of ferns, especially the shield
fern, in Vermont. It seems that the ferns are bearing up under the strain of annual pickings,
but it is hoped that some one with the opportunity will make accurate observations of the
real effect of commercial picking. — F. C. Anderson.

1802. Clute, Willard N. An unknown honeysuckle. Amer. Bot. 26: 17. Fig. 1. 1920.
— The plant sent out by the Foreign Seed and Plant Introduction Division of the U. S. Bureau
of Plant Industry as No. 39697 from Nanking, China, collected by Joseph Baillie has flow-
ered at Joliet, but the Division was unable to supply the name. [This plant has since been
named Lonicera Maackii var. podocarpa by Dr. C. S. Sargent.]— JF. N. Clute.

1803. Clute, Willard N. [Editorial.] Amer. Bot. 26: 34. 1920.— Attention called to
variations of commercial importance or of unusual interest in the writer's grounds. Red-
leaved peaches, red forms of Rubdeckia hirta, a Podophyllum with multiple fruits, single-leaved
locust, and various giant races mentioned. — W. N. Clute.

180-1. Const antin, L. L'Epiphora de Pobeguin de Finet (Epiphora Pobeguini). Rev.
Hortic. 91: 398-399. 1 pi. (colored). Dec, 1919.— This species is an introduction from the
Nenkan plateau, French Guinea. The plants are small, entirely epiphytic, and should be
kept at a temperature of 18° to 22°C. throughout the year. In its native habitat it blooms in
February or March, but certain plants which were brought into the greenhouses showed a pro-
gressive modification of the time of flowering as follows: June 14, 1910; September 31, 1912,
and October 15, 1913. — E. J. Kraus.

1505. Crawford, Mrs. Wm, My experience with the peony. Flower Grower 7: 24-25.
1920. — Observations on the cultivation and propagation of the peony. — W. N. Clute.

1506. Cummings, Alex., Jr. Hardy roses for the garden. Gard. Chron. Amer. 24: 135.
1920. — Methods of cultivating and pruning described. [See also next following Entry, 1807.)
— W. N. Clute.

1807. Cummings, Alex., Jr. Hardy roses for the garden. Gard. Chron. Amer. 24: 94-
96. 1920. — Garden roses considered as tea roses, hybrid teas, dwarf polyantha or baby ram-
blers, and pernetiana. A list of 14 new or comparatively new roses is given. [See also next
preceding Entry, 1806.]— W. N. Clute.

1808. Cushman, L. B. Aegopodia podagraria variegata. Amer. Bot. 26: 13-14. 1920. —
This plant identified as a familiar form with variegated leaves in old gardens. — W. N. Clute.

1809. Daveau, J. Ficus Saussureana et F. eriobotryoides Kunthet Bouche. Rev. Hortic.
91: 389. Dec, 1919. — In 1840 A. P. de Candolle described Ficus Saussureana, basing his
description upon a specimen then known as a Galactodendron, growing in the greenhouses of

238 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

Th. de Satjsstjre, at Geneva. Later, in 1846, Kunth and Bouche described Ficus eriobotry-
oides. The descriptions of these two species are almost identical except that in the former
species the petiole is said to be hirsute, in the latter, glabrous. In the Botanic Garden at
Montpellier is a tree, also listed under the name of Galaclodendron, but in reality it is a Ficus
and corresponds to the descriptions of both of the foregoing species, since the petioles are
at first hirsute, but gradually become more nearly glabrous, and finally completely so the
second year. It is practically certain that the two species are synonymous and therefore the
name assigned by de Candolle should be retained. The tree is a beautiful one and should
find a place among collections of exotics. — E. J. Kraus.

1810. Denis, F. Quelques iris nouveaux. [Some new irises.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 362.
Oct., 1919. — A number of new varieties have been obtained during the past several years by
hybridizing various species or by crossing forms which in themselves are hybrids. The va-
riety John Wister is a valuable hybrid between I. aurea and /. fulvala. The latter, itself a
hybrid between I. fulva and I. hexagona Lamancci, is intermediate in flower color and is self
fertile. Hybrids somewhat lacking in vigor have been obtained between I. Ciengialti and
I. tectorum, and between I. Edina and I. tectorum. The floral characters of the seedlings are
intermediate for the most part. It is possible, also, to secure plants by hybridizing 1. tec-
torum and I. pallida dalmatica, but no seeds are secured when the former is crossed with
any variety from the groups gcrmanica neglecta, amoena. The name Iris filifolia is applied
to two distinct forms. The one commonly listed in floral catalogues is really an early flower-
ing vigorous form of Xiphium. The other is the true /. filifolia Boissier, and it is found but
rarely in various collections. The two species I. Xiphium and /. filifolia have been success-
fully hybridized — the resultant seedlings are intermediate in the color of the flower and the
length of the tube. — E. J. Kraus.

1811. Hirscht, Karl. Epiphytische Kakteen im Zimmergarten [Epiphytic cacti in win-
dow gardens.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 74-80. 1919. — A popular account is given of
species suitable for window gardens and hints as to successful culture. — A. S. Hitchcock.

1812. Jackson, T. P. Plant importations. Report on the Agricultural Department,
Antigua, 1917-18, 4-5. [Imp. Dept. Agric, Barbados, 1919.]— Interesting notes are given on
trials with certain new plants at the Botanic Station, Antigua, notably the "Guada" bean
(gourd), Trichosanthes anguina, useful as a vegetable, and several grasses. — J. S. Dash.

1813. Jacob, J. Freesias and Lachenakias. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 29-38. 1919. —
These two plants were introduced into England from South Africa more than a hundred
years ago and have recently been the object of renewed interest. Discussions of cultural
methods are given and a list of varieties to which awards have been given by the Royal Hor-
ticultural Society. — /. K. Shaiv.

1814. Jarmillo, P. J., and F. J. Chittenden. On double stocks. Jour. Roy. Hortic.
Soc. 44: 74-82. Fig. 22, 23. 1919. — Selecting the most vigorous seedlings gave a higher per-
centage of double stocks than were secured from selection of medium and weak seedlings.
Such selection appears to have practical value in securing a high percentage of double flower-
ing plants. — J. K. Sharv.

1815. Jahandiez, E. Mesembryanthemum a formes etranges. [Mesembryanthemums of
unusual form.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 372-374. Fig. 112-118. Nov., 1919.— Many species of this
genus are especially unsuitable for growing in the open air in the more southern regions,
where they are able to accommodate themselves to conditions of dryness, poor soil and salt
air. It is possible to make excellent borders by using several species of varying height and
flower color which ranges from violet to red, orange-red, and yellow. M. acinaciforme L. ,
having broad violet flowers and M. edule L. which has large white or yellow flowers have be-
come naturalized in southern France. M. Bolusii Hook. fil. from South Africa is one of the
more striking species because of the close resemblance of its leaves to pebbles. Two related

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE 239

species M. simuland Marloth and M. tcsticulalum Jacq. which has white, glaucous leaves, are
equally remarkable. .1/. p*< lulnlruncatdliun Bcrgcr, has its leaves reduced to flattened balls,
while those of M. continuum N. E. Brown, from Damaraland, are covered with small, white
tubercles. The leaves of M. tigrinum are marked with white and are bordered with long
hairs, whereas those of M . felinum Haw arc denticulate. M . digitatum Ait. resembles a very
large ringer, and M. Barklyi N. E. Brown is eaten by animals because of the large leaves
which are filled with a watery sap. There are three native European species, M. angulatum
Thunb., M. cordi folium L. and M. cryslallinam, the leaves from all of which may be used in
the same way as is spinach. — E. J. Kraus.

1S16. Lantes, Adelaide. El alamo. [The pipal tree.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2:
612-613. 8 fig. 1919. — It is pointed out that the pipal tree (Ficus religiosa) is undesirable for
common planting in parks and along roads. Its roots injure cement work, the leaves
fall continuously, the fruits fall in quantities, and the trees are favorite retreats of birds.
Other trees are mentioned which are preferred. — F. M. Blodgctt.

1817. Manrin, G. Support rotatif pour plantes d'appartement. [A rotary support for
house plants.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 331. Fig. 102-103. August, 1919. — A brief description and
working drawings are given. — E. J. Kraus.

1818. Marie-Victorix, Fr. des E. C. Le "Micrampelis lobata." "Une Plante lance-
torpilles." [Micrampelis lobata (Michx.) Greene.] Naturaliste Canadien 46 : 172-174. Feb.,
1920. — A graphic popular sketch of an interesting cucurbitaceous plant used for veranda
decoration, found growing native in fertile soil along water courses in southern Canada. —
A. H. Mac Kay.

1S19. Meyer, Rtjd. Kulturregeln aus alter Zeit. [Culture rules of ancient times.] Mon-
atsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 37-41. 1919. — In this chapter, which is a continuation from the
volume for 1917, page 120, are discussed the choice, packing, and shipping of cactus speci-
mens.— A. S. Hitchcock.

1820. Millard, Albert. Natural effects in landscape work. Gard. Chron. Amer. 24:
103. 1920. — Numerous plants named for use in the natural style of planting. — W. N. Clute.

1821. Morel, F. Le clematis montana et ses derives. [Clematis montana and its deriva-
tives.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 358-360. Fig. 110. 1919.— The hybrid offspring of C. montana
grandiflora and C. montana rubens were intermediate in color of flower, and generally more
vigorous than the red form. When the former species was crossed with C. repens, individuals
were secured which both preceded and followed the parent varieties in period of flowering,
and possessed flowers which were larger than those of repens and of greater consistency than
those of grandiflora. By careful selection, it was possible to interhybridize some of the
latest appearing flowers of C. repens with some of the earliest flowers produced during the
second period of bloom of C. montana rubens. From these crosses plants of unusual vigor and
substance, bearing flowers of large size, good form and of various shades of rose or with red
pencilings, were secured. A succession of blossoms may be secured by growing the following
varieties: April— C. montana rubens; May — C. montana grandiflora, then C. repentc-montana
rubens with variously colored flowers, and finally C. repente-montana grandiflora with white
flowers; June— C. repens; July and August — C. ynontana rubens and C. repentc-montana rubens
commence at this time a second period of flowering which may be prolonged into September
and October. It may be possible to select a free-flowering, everblooming race from among
the individuals disposed to flower more than a single time during the year. — E. J. Kraus.

1822. Mottet, S. Les leucanthemes. [The leucanthemums.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 312-313.
1 pi. July, 1919. — It seems most probable that L. lacustre Brot. and L. maximum D. C. have
contributed principally in the development of the large-flowered marguerites or Shasta

240 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

daisies, though it is probable that several other species have been concerned also. Although
these large flowered forms were first introduced into Europe from America in 1902 or 1903,
little is known definitely concerning their origin. The "Shasta Daisy" of Luther Burbank
is thought to have been derived by a vigorous selection from the seedlings of Chrysanthemum
leucavJhemum crossed with an American species; this progeny in turn having been crossed
with C. nipponicum, a Japanese species. Whatever may have been the origin of the various
large flowered forms, it is certain that great variation now eixsts, and they are among the most
generally useful decorative plants. — E. J. Kraus.

1823. Mottet, S. Paederia tomentosa. Rev. Hortic. 91 : 298-300. Fig. 95. June, 1919.
— This species was first introduced into Europe from China in 1806, and again in 1907, through
seeds collected by E. H. Wilson for the Arnold Arboretum. It is recommended as a suitable
covering for walls and trellises. A description and synonymy are given. — . E. K. Kraus.

1824. Mottet, S. Un rhododendron a fleurs jaunes. (R. campylocarpum.) [A yellow
flowered rhododendron.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 328-329. 1 pi. August, 1919. — This species was
collected by Hooker in Himalaya and introduced into England in 1856. Though it has been
overlooked for a long time, there is little doubt that it is really a desirable, hardy form with
persistent foliage and clear yellow flowers. It should serve, also, as valuable material for
crossing with other forms. A detailed description of the species is given. Another yellow
flowered species Rhododendron lutescens Franch, is mentioned as having been recently intro-
duced from China by Wilson. — E. J. Kraus.

1825. Mottet, S. Nouveaux oeillets remontants grandiflores. [New large flowers, ever-
blooming carnations.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 360-361. 1 pi. (colored). Oct., 1919. — Attention is
directed to seven varieties of carnations which represent the progress made in the last several
years in breeding for flowers of large size and special colors. Although perpetual blooming
carnations have been known since about 1845, it was not until near the end of the last century
that the large flowered forms appeared, several varieties having been exhibited in 1900. New
varieties have been introduced with considerable rapidity since that time. Most of these
varieties may be placed in one of five or six type classes, each of which possesses distinctive
characters of stem, foliage and flower. Intercrossing between the classes has been frequent,
however, so that as a result several of the various types may be represented among any par-
ticular lot of seedlings. — E. J. Kraus.

1826. Mottet, S. Un nouveau chamaecyparis (Ch. formosensis). [A new chamaecyparis.]
Rev. Hortic. 91: 342-344. Fig. 105. Sept., 1919. — The two Japanese species, Ch. obtusa
Sieb. and Zucc. and Ch. pisifera Sieb. and Zucc, together with Ch. sphaeroidea Spach have
produced many varieties commonly known under the name Retinospora. Two other forms
are known from North America, namely Ch. nutkaensis Spach. and Ch. Lawsonia, Parlat.
Each of these has given rise to several varieties. To this list of species should be added Ch.
formosensis Matsum. which, on the island of Formosa, is said to attain a great size, one speci-
men having measured 22 meters in circumference at the base. The species was described by
Matsumura in the Botanical Magazine for 1901. Seeds were introduced into England in 1911.
It is highly recommended as a decorative tree, since the branches are as light and graceful
as certain ferns, and they assume an attractive, bronze tint at the beginning of winter. Young
trees are not entirely hardy in the vicinity of Verrieres, though this defect may be overcome
when the trees have grown older. The species may be propagated by grafting or from seeds.
— E. J. Kraus.

1827. Mottet, S. Digitale hybride de Lutz. [The Lutz digitalis hybrid.] Rev. Hortic.
91 : 396-397. Dec, 1919. — From seeds of an apparently spontaneous hybrid between Digitalis
purpurea and D. lutea, the following types of plants were obtained: (1) Flowers clear chamois,
spotted, foliage very downy. (2) Flowers purple, stems brown, and foliage smooth. (3)
Flowers yellow-white, spotted. — Seeds were secured from plants of the first two types. From
the first, five plants were obtained, three of which produced purple flowers and two chamois

No. 2, September, 1920) HORTICULTURE 241

flowers. From the second, 37 plants were obtained, but only five of them were sufficiently
Sturdy to bloom; all bore chamois, spotted flowers. One of the plants of the latter type was
then chosen for seed production, but was not isolated, though the plants winch produced
purple flowers were destroyed. From this plant 300 individuals were secured. Of these, 13
produced purple flowers, the remainder yellow flowers. A few of the plants were weak. The
variety probably will prove to be of value as an ornamental. Another hybrid between Digi-
talis purpurea and D. ambigua is more or less sterile and can not be propagated with sufficient
ease to make it of horticultural importance. — E. J. Kraus.

182S. Perez, G. V. Vitalite des racines de Bougainvillea. [Vitality of the roots of Bou-
gainvilleas.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 380. Nov., 1919. — Cuttings of this plant, put out in 1916,
although they have not produced roots, are still alive and have not decayed. Small pieces
of roots which were split lengthwise are also well preserved. Ordinary cuttings of conifers
are preserved an equally long time in the open air, those of Junipcrus Cedrus may not start
roots for more than a year after they are planted out. — E. J. Kraus.

1829. Pinelle, A. Robinia Kelseyi Hort. Rev. Hortic. 91: 339. Fig. 104. Sept., 1919.
— It is still uncertain whether this form is a true species of a hybrid between R. hispida and
R. pseudoacacia. It is a shrub or small tree and bears a superficial resemblance to both forms.
The flowers are pink and appear earlier in the season than those of either of the species men-
tioned. It is said to have arisen spontaneously in the nursery of a Mr. Kelsey, of Boston,
from seeds secured in the southern Alleghany Mountains. It is readily propagated by grafting
on R. pseudoacacia, but it is unknown whether it will reproduce true to type from seed. —
E. J. Kraus.

1830. Pole-Evans, I. B. Our aloes. Their history, distribution and cultivation. Jour.
Bot. Soc. South Africa 5: 11-16. PL 2-3. 1919. — Aloe rockeries and gardens are becoming
fashionable in South Africa as they did in Holland and Britain at the beginning and in the
middle of the eighteenth century. There are many aloes of reputed South African origin
which have been under cultivation in Holland and England for at least one or two centuries,
but which today are unknown in South Africa. The first to be cultivated in European gar-
dens was A. succotrina Lam. — E. P. Phillips.

1831. Quehl, L. Auswahl der Arten zu einer Kleinen Kakteensammlung. [Choice of
species for a small cactus collection.] Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 54-55. 1919.

1832. Ragionieri, Attilio. Un bel problema per i biologi: Sulla comparsa dell'odore
nel fiore delle "Rosseline di Firenze" (Ranunculus asiaticus var.). [A good problem for biolo-
gists : on the appearance of odor in the flowers of the Florentine "rosseline" (Ranunculus asi-
aticus).] Bull. R. Soc. Toscana Orticult. 44: 87-94. 1919.— He reports an experience with
Ranunculus asiaticus, that had a marked rose odor not characteristic of the variety. Seed-
lings resulting from selfing the flowers of this plant showed this odor to a reduced extent.
The strain had been grown on the same land since 1844 producing both vegetatively and as
seedlings. He thinks that there was no chance for the odor to have been introduced by
crossing with another variety, and that it is the reappearance of an ancestral character.—
W. H. Chandler.

1833. Riccoboxo, Vincenzo. La prima fioritura in Europa del Pilocereus Dautwitzii Fr.
A. Haage. [The first flowering in Europe of Pilocereus dautwitzii Fr. A. Haage.] Bull. R.
Soc. Toscana Orticultura 44: 94-96. 1919. — Description of Pilocereus dautwitzii, introduced
into Italy from northern Peru. Observations on its behavior. — W. H. Chandler.

1834. Ringelmann, M. Murs garnis de Lierre. [Ivy-covered walls.] Rev. Hortic. 91:
363. Fig. 111. Oct., 1919. — It is believed by many that climbing plants, especially English
ivy, are destructive to the walls upon which they grow. As a matter of fact, if young plants
of English ivy are originally planted about If or 2 feet from the base of the wall, when they

242 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

have grown and covered it the overlapping leaves will tend to shed water and also aid in keep-
ing out the cold. The clinging rootlets, stem and branches of this vine aid in holding together
the pieces of which the wall is constructed, rather than forcing them apart. Many other vines,
however, which lose their leaves in winter, actually do tend to hold moisture against the wall
that supports them. — E. J. Kraus.

1835. Sheward, T. The dracenas. Gard. Chron. Amer. 23: 61. 1 fig. 1920.

1836. Smith, Arthur. Twelve most desirable shrubs for gardens. Gard. Chron. Amer.
24: 141. 1920.

1837. Smith, Arthur. A lesson on seed sowing and germination. Gard. Chron. Amer.
24: 108-110. 1920.

1838. Sturtevant, Robert Swan. The garden plus irises. Gard. Chron. Amer. 24:
97-98. Fig. 2. 1920.- — Mention of various named varieties for garden planting. — W. N. Clute.

1839. Van den Heede, A. Une superbe plante annuelle. [A superb annual plant.] Rev.
Hortic. 91: 393. Dec, 1919. — Salpiglossis sinuata Ruiz and Pavon, also known as S. stra-
minea Hooker, S. atropurpurae Graham, S. picta Sweet, S. Barclayana Sweet, S. hybrida Hort.
and S. variabilis Hort., is a native of Chili and was introduced into Europe about 1830. Sev-
eral other Chilian species, S. fulva, S. integrifolis, S. intermedia, and S. linearis were also
introduced at about the same period, but these, together with S. sinuata coccinea and S. stra-
minea picta have disappeared from cultivation, so that at the present time <S. sinuata and its
dwarf variety alone persist. The plants are readily grown out of doors and the flowers possess
a wide range of harmonious colors. — E. J. Kraus.

1840. Von Oven, F. W. Perpetuating our native flora. Amer: Bot. 26: 24-27. 1910 —
The great individual differences that exist in the botanical species are pointed out and the
proposal made that the best of these should be selected and propagated. The writer is a nur-
seryman and will undertake to grow variations that may be called to his attention. — W. N.

('lute.

1841. Vorwerk, W. Beitrag zur Kultur der Asclepiadaceae-Gattungen Trichocaulon und
Hoodia. [Contribution to the culture of the asclepiad genera Trichocaulon and Hoodia.] Mon-
atsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 41. 1919. — This includes remarks upon the cultivation of T.
keetmanshopense and H. Currori. — A. S. Hitchcock.

1842. Weingart, W. Aussaat von Cereus formosus S.-D. [Seed of Cereus formosus.]
Monatsschr. Kakteenkunde 29: 105. 1919. — Seed of C. formosus obtained by Haage and
Schmidt from Los Angeles gave four forms: C. formosus monstruosus, C. variabilis Pf. (C.
Pitahaya DC), C. formosus, C. obtusus. — A. S. Hitchcock.

1843. Whitten, James. The public parks of Glasgow. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45:
39-55. 1919.

1844. Williams, W. L. The beet sugar industry. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 17: 722-
730. 1919. Ibid. 17: 15-24, 65-74. 1920.— Sugar beet growing in Victoria is discussed —
J. J. Skinner.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

1845. Anonymous. Runner beans at Wisley, 1918. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 95-100.
1919. — Report is made on sixty varieties of Phaseolus multiflorus, giving recommendations
of the judging committee and a classification and description of the varieties. — J. K. Shaw.

1846. Anonymous. Climbing French beans, 1918. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 101-110.
1919. — A report on seventy-nine climbing varieties of Phaseolus vulgaris with recommendations
of the Vegetable Committee concerning their value. A classification with description of
varieties is given. — J. K. Shaw.

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE 243

1847. Anonymous. Vegetable marrows at Wisley, 1918. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 114-
116. 1919. — Tests of fifty-seven stocks of vegetable marrows, at Wisley, England, are re-
ported, with the awards of the judges and brief discriptions of the different varieties.—
J. K. Shaw.

184S. Anonymous. Leeks tried at Wisley, 1917-18. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 111-113.
1919. — Brief description of 31 varieties of leeks are given with brief notes on cultural method
and the awards of the judging committee. — J. K. Shaw.

18-19. Anonymous. Brussels sprouts at Wisley, 1918. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 125-
127. 1919. — Brief descriptions of 64 stocks of Brussels sprouts and the awards of the Fruit
and Vegetable Committee are given. — J. K. Shaw.

1850. Anonymous. Carrots at Wisley, 1918. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 128-130. 1919.
— Report is made of the trial of 61 stocks of carrots together with a classification, brief de-
scription and the awards of the Vegetable Committee. — J. K. Shaw.

1851. Blin, H. L'exploitation rationelle des cressonnieres. [The rational utilization of
cress-beds. 1 Rev. Hortic. 91: 313-316. Fig. 99. July, 1919. — The growing of cress is a
profitable industry in the vicinity of large cities. The number of beds which may be formed
is directly dependent upon the flow of water available; 70 to 75 litres a minute will supply
240 square meters as a maximum. Each bed should not exceed 80 meters in length and should
be so arranged that there is a slow but continuous flow of water through it, the amount of
such flow being regulated by an adjustable dam. New plantings are established either by
sowing the seeds or transplanting cuttings, which may be put out at any season, though if
this is done in August or September a good stand for the more valuable winter harvest will
be secured. Successive plantings will furnish a supply throughout the year. Decomposed
stable manure is an excellent fertilizer. It should be carefully applied when new beds are
established and further application should be made after each cutting. In winter it is advis-
able completely to submerge the plants to protect them from cold. Such inundation or
spraying will aid in the controlling of insect pests. It is possible to harvest a crop from the
beds within 3 months following the sowing of the seed, or within one month after transplanting
the cuttings. During the rapid growing season the beds may be cut over every 15 to 20 days,
and during the winter every six or seven weeks. The shoots should be from 15 to 20 cm. in
length before being cut, and care should be used to avoid disturbing the roots. Though the
beds would last for many seasons, better results are secured by renewing them each year. The
shoots, after being cut, are tied into bunches weighing at least 275 grams each, and these
are then packed into oval baskets holding from 15 to 20 dozen bunches. In order to prevent
yellowing a space is left in the center of the basket. From an area of 100 square meters about
300 dozen bunches may be harvested, which would yield a gross return of 200 to 280 francs. —
E. J. Kraus.

1852. Fishlock, W. C. Sweet potatoes. Report on the Agricultural Department, British
Virgin Islands, 1918-19: 3-5. [Imp. Dept. Agric, Barbados. 1919.] — Results of experiments
with 31 varieties are recorded, with descriptions of each variety. Bourbon heads the list over
a period of 8 years, with a yield of 7600 pounds per acre. — /. S. Dash.

1853. Levy, E. Bruce. Swede variety types and their perpetuations by pure seed. Xew
Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 284-287. 1919. — A rough classification of Swede types (of turnips)
has been drawn up. Three varieties, as listed by seedsmen, were tested and great variation
was found. It is urged that more effort be exercised to select and breed pure strains. — N. J.
Giddings.

1854. Livventaal, A. The crop factory. Sci. Amer. 122: 563, 582. / fig. 1920.— An
attempt to solve the problem — can gardening be made a standardized industry, independent
of the elements? By the novel equipment pictured, heat, moisture, light and other condi-
tions are made constant and labor is reduced to a minimum. — Chas. H. Oil*.

244 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1855. Metjnissier, A. De quelques idees sur la selection des legumes. [Some ideas on
the selection of vegetables.] Rev. Hortic. 91: 300-303. June, 1919. — This is a discussion
of the ideas of variation in general with specific emphasis on the necessity for recognizing
pure lines, as defined by Johannsen, as the real basis for selection in crop improvement. —
E. J. Kraus.

1856. Rogers, Stanley S. Methods for marketing vegetables in California. California
Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 217: 1-19. 1920. — A survey of the probable causes for success or failure
in the production and marketing of vegetables in California. — A. R. C. Haas.

1857. Stokes, Fred. The food value of vegetables. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 21-30.

1919. — The author has devised a formula for calculating the "economic value" of a crop.

This formula applies, however, only when the produce is not sold for profit. —

Caloric value X yield in pounds per rod

^ r • — r^TT ,, * . : : : — — = Economic value

Cost of crop in shillings X Number of weeks the ground is occupied

According to the formula the economic value of potatoes is 69.5, carrots 31.6, kidne}r beans
(dry) 28, peas (shelled) 18, parsnips 15.5, onions 4.3, and cabbage 3.— The various vegetables
may not only be valuable because of the amount of proteid, carbohydrate, fat and salts they
contain, but also because they yield bulk and furnish the indispensable vitamines. Especially
valuable are the green vegetables like spinach, cabbage, celery, etc., which give the body the
necessary salts and vitamines and also add the necessary bulk to the diet. The bulbs, espe-
cially the onion and leek "are remarkable for their beneficial action upon inflamed mucus
membrane and for their germicidal powers." The onion is valuable for its salts and essential
oil and no doubt contains "a potent vitamine as well." Roots are of value chiefly because
of their salts and carbohydrates and the legumes because of their richness in protein and
carbohydrates. — H. A. Jones.

1858. Sutton, Arthur W. How amateurs may secure three successive crops of vegetables
in twelve months without the aid of glass houses or of heat. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44:
13-20. 1919.

1859. Woolsey, C. Sweet potato culture in Arkansas. Arkansas Agric. Ext. Circ. 90.
20 p., 10 fig. 1920. — A popular discussion on bedding, cultivating, digging, grading, storing
and marketing the sweet potato. Directions are given for seed selection and the common
varieties are briefly described. — John A. Elliott.

1860. Woolsey, C. The home vegetable garden in Arkansas. Arkansas Agric. Ext. Circ.
89. 32 p., 9 fig. 1920. — A popular presentation of gardening methods suited to the con-
ditions of the state, giving dates of planting, culture and rotation of garden crops. — John A.
Elliott.

1861. Zimmerley, H. H. Greenhouse tomato growing in Virginia. Virginia Truck Ex-
periment Station Bull. 26. 28 p., 2 fig. 1919. — Methods of growing tomatoes in the green-
houses under Virginia conditions are given. The seed for the winter crop is sown in August
and the plants shifted to the beds in September. The seed for the spring crop is sown in
November and the plants shifted in December. Discussions of varieties, soil treatment and
the control of diseases are given. — T. C. Johnson.

HORTICULTURE PRODUCTS

1862. Aguila, Isidoro. Notas sobre la elaboraclon de aceite de oliva. [Notes on the prep-
aration of olive oil.] La Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 9: 318-322. 1919. — Lists defects occur-
ring in olive oil and gives the causes and approved manner of avoiding them. Proper methods
of obtaining high grade oils are discussed. — John A. Stevenson.

1863. Anonymous. A new vegetable ivory. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 346. 1920. — Descrip-
tive of a substance produced from the kernel of an edible fruit growing upon the palm, Bor-
assus elhiapicum. — Chas. H. Otis.

No. 2, September, 1920] HORTICULTURE 245

1864. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Peters, Charles A. The preparation of sub-
stances important in agriculture. 3rd ed. 19x14 cm. vii + 81p. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. :
New York, 1919. S.SO.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 444. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1100.

1865. Bredemann, G., and Chr. Schatzlein. Uber Herstellung und Zusammensetzung
kleinasiatischer Traubensaftkonserven. [Preparation and composition of grape-juice preserves
from Asia Minor. Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 38: 16-24. 1919.

1866. Carles, P. La prune d'ente et les pruneaux d'Agen: Explication scientifique de leur
preparation et des moyens de les conserver temporairement pour l'Europe et de facon indefinite
pour l'exportation mondiale. [A scientific account of methods used in preparing "prunes of
Agen" for foreign and domestic consumption.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2:
219-232. 1918. — The preparation of the fruit consists of two phases, (1) a chemical phase
during which it is subjected to temperatures of from 40°~50°C. to facilitate the action of a
soluble ferment (oxydase) and (2) a physical phase during which the temperatures are in-
creased to 75°-80°C. to produce desiccation. The author discusses various methods of pack-
ing and sterilization. — I. W. Bailey.

1867. Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Plantes etproduits filamenteux et textiles de l'ln-
dochine. [Fiber- and textile-producing plants of Indo-China.] Bull. Econ. Indochine 22:
813-837. PI. 2. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1122.

1868. Davis, R. A. Fruit and fruit products in South Africa. III. The canning, drying
and preserving business. South African Jour. Indust. 2: 1138-1148. 1919.

1869. Fernandez, O., F. Bust amenta. Estudio analitico de los aceites de oliva aspan-
oles. [Analytical study of the Spanish olive oils.] Rev. R. Acad. Cienc. Exactas, Fisecas y
Nat. [Madrid] 17: 281-286. 1919.

1870. Hartmann, Wilhelm. Uber Garversuche mit Zuckerriiben. [Fermentation ex-
periments with sugar beets, 1 Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 28: 287-290.
1919.

1871. Laborde, J. Recherches sur le vieillissement du vin. [Aging of wine.] Mem. Soc.
Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2: 37-75. Tables 1-15. 1918.

1872. Mach, F., and M. Fischker. Die Zusammensetzung der Moste des Jahres 1918
in Baden. [Musts of 1918 in Baden.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 38: 93
99. 1919.

1873. Maxwell, Harold L., and Nicholas Knight. The oil in cherry pits. Proc.
Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 451-455. 1920. — Oil was extracted from seeds of "the common cherry
Prunus erratus" [doubtless P. cerasus]. It was found to be essentially the same as almond
oil, having a saponification equivalent of 276.8. — H. S. Conard.

1874. Roettgen, Theodore. Zur Bestimmung der Milchsaure im Weine. [Determina-
tion of lactic acid in wines.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 38: 99-100. 1919.

1875. Rothea, and De Bon, F. Essay industriel de fabrication d'huile d'amandes d'ab-
ricots. Resultats analytiques des matieres premieres et des products obtenus. [An industrial
experiment in regard to the manufacture of oil from apricot seeds. Analytical results of the
original material and of the products obtained.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 26: 505-514. 1 fig. 1919.
— As the title indicates, a description of apricot kernels, of the process of obtaining the
oil by expression together with the chemical and physical constants of the oil are given. —
H. Engelhardt.

246 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1S76. Stern, J. Moste des Jahres 1918 aus den Weinbeugebeiten der Nahe, des Glans,
des Rheintales unterhalb des Rheingaues, des Rheingaues, des Rheins, Mains und der Lahn.]
[Musts of 1918 of the Rhine Valley, etc.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 38 :
91-93. 1919.

1877. Tbvis, May. Cutting the cocoanut cake. Soi. Amer. Monthly 1: 404-407. 4 fig.
and frontispiece. 1920. — Concerns the cocoanut tree, Cocos nucifera, its growth, products
and their preparation. — Chas. H. Otis.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

1878. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Jaeger, F. M. Lectures on the principles of
symmetry. 27x16 cm., jcu-(-333 p. Elzevir Publishing Co.: Amsterdam, 1917.] Jour.
Phys. Chem. 23: 516. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1451.

1879. Betts, M. Winifred. Notes on the autoecology of certain plants of the Peridotit
Belt, Nelson: Part I. Structure of some plants (No. 2). Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst
51:136-156. 27 fig. 1919.

1880. Brewster, A. A. Aerating roots or pneumatophores of mangroves (Avicennia).
Australian Nat. 4: 136. 1920. — These plants have an aerating system strongly suggesting that
of the cypress of the southern United States.— T. G. Frye.

1881. Brewster, A. A. Germination of choko seed. Australian Nat. 4: 121. 1920.

1882. Brewster, A. A. Leaf of the grasstree (Xanthorrhoea) . Australian Nat. 4: 135.
1920. — Paper deals with the leaf structure of this xerophyte. The most striking features
are the abundance of sclerenchyma, and the occurrence of numerous crystals in the cells of
the epidermis. — T. C. Frye.

1883. Buchholz, John T. Embryo development and polyembryony in relation to the phy-
logeny of conifers. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 125-145. 89 fig. 1920. — The author has here sum-
marized all published work on the proembryo and early embryo of conifers, in an endeavor to
throw light on the phylogeny of this group by a comparative study of their embryogeny and
in particular of the manner in which polyembryony occurs within them. Cleavage polyembry-
ony— the separation of the zygote into a number of smaller units which compete with each
other — is distinguished from simple polyembryony, which results from the fertilization of
several eggs. The phylogenetic values of these two types of polyembryony and of various
other embryological characters are discussed, and the affinities suggested by embryogeny among
the 22 genera of conifers studied are represented by a diagram. The occurrence of cleavage
polyembryony, together with the presence of an apical cell, of rosette embryos and rosette
cells, and the direct organization of embryo initials from the free nuclei of the proembryo are
regarded as primitive features. On the other hand, a return to simple polyembryony, the
presence of a proembryo that fills the entire egg with cells, an archegonial complex and an
embryo cap, together with the organization of embryo initials after walls form in the embryo,
are regarded as specialized features characteristic of more recent types. — E. W. Sinnott.

1884. Buscalioni, L., and G. Muscatkllo. Studio anatomo-biologico sul Gen. Sau-
rauia Willd. I Anatomical-biological studies on the genus Saurauia.] Malpighia 28: 331-370.
PI. 5-10. 1918. — This is the concluding part of a detailed anatomical study, the publication
of which was begun in earlier numbers of the journal cited. — L. W. Riddle.

No. 2, September, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 247

1885. Chamberlain, Charles J. The living cycads and the phylogeny of seed plants.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 1 16 153. PI. 6. 1920. — The posit ion of i he living cycads in t lie evolution
of the seed plants is considered. A general resemblance is noted between the living cycads
and the Bennettitales and Cycadofilicales. The last named group is undoubtedly the most
primitive. The living cycads are so different from the Bennettitales that there is little like-
lihood that the former have been derived from the latter. The origin of the living cycads
is quite unknown. — Living cycads are also evidently not ancestral to any of the other great
groups of seed plants, since they differ so radically from Cordaitales, Ginkgoales, Coniferales,
Gnetales and Angiosperms. They are evidently a terminal group on the road to extinction.
The author brings forward evidence that it isthe Coniferales and the Gnetales, rather than the
cycad-like plants, to which we should look for ancestors of the Angiosperms. — E. W. Sinnotl.

1886. Collins, Marjorie I. On the leaf-anatomy of Scaevola crassifolia, with special
reference to the epidermal secretion. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 247-259. PL
27-58, 6 fig. 1918. — This plant, one of the Goodeniaceae, a xerophyte, with special adaption
for sand dune existence (where it will survive burial by elongation and the production of ad-
ventitious roots) was found to be characterized by the development of peltate glandular hairs
which secrete yellow resin in great quantity. This activity was at a maximum in buds and
young leaves and decreased in older leaves, where the resin dried, producing a lacquered ap-
pearance on the leaf surface. Mature leaves appeared succulent, the glands shrunken, but
active in the region of the leaf base; the resin serving there to protect axillary buds. Other
xerophilous adaptations noted were the secondary increase in the size of epidermal cells,
massive development of palisade tissue and production of special water storage cells. — Eloise
Gerry.

1887. Feucht, Otto. Zur Entstehung des Harfenwuchses der Nadelholzer. [On the for-
mation of "harp-growth" in conifers.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst. u. Landw. 17: 137-139. 1919.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1326.

1888. Fletcher, J. J., and C. T. Musson. On certain shoot-bearing tumors of Eucalypts
and Angophoras, and their modifying influence on the growth habit of the plants. Proc. Linn-
ean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 191-233. PI. 4~26. 1918.— The nodules and tumors produced in
the axils of the cotyledons and early leaves of Eucalypts and Angophoras are illustrated and
discussed with reference to their occurrence, external characteristics and development.
These growths are also noted in ten species of other genera. The fully developed tumors,
though subject to much variation, are said to be generally characterized by the following
stages: (1) Axillary shoot-bearing stem nodules; (2) Composite shoot bearing, stem-encirc-
ling tumors; (3) Composite, stem-encircling, shoot-bearing, root-incorporating (but not
root-emitting) tumors. Seedlings of the non-Mallee or tree forms of Eucalypts, where tumors
usually persist for a limited period only, and do not seriously interfere with growth were espe-
cially studied. Six species, apparently exempt from tumors, were found. The Mallee or
shrubby forms of Eucalypts (where the tumors incorporate the water-storing roots, persist
throughout the life of the plant and appear to cause stunting) and the Angophoras, were also
examined. The tumors are considered attributable to parasitic soil organisms, which produce
proliferation of the cambium, and not to insects. Related work in Australia and the United
States is discussed. — Eloise Gerry.

1889. Fyson, P. F. Note on the oecology of Spinifex squanosus L. Jour. Indian Bot. 1 :
19-24. 3 fig. 1919. — This plant and other strand-formation species are not halophytes, but
rather xerophytic psammophytes; they depend for their water supply on rain water and dew
retained by the sand. Further, the air blown over these plants from the sea is always damp.
— A. J. Eamcs.

1890. Griffin, Gertrude J. Bordered pits in Douglas fir: a study of the position of the
torus in mountain and lowland specimens In relation to creosote penetration. Jour. Forestry
17: 813-822. 1 fig. 1919— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1334.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

248 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1891. Hamilton, A. A. Root fasciation in cycads. Australian Nat. 4: 134. 1920. — All
cycadean genera produce root nodules primarily caused by infection with Bacillus radici-
cola.—T. C. Frye.

1892. Hollow ay, J. E. Studies in the New Zealand species of the genus Lycopodium:
Part III. The plasticity of the species. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 161-261.
PL 9-14, 16 fig. 1919. — Eleven species of Lycopodium occur in New Zealand. A compara-
tive study of these, character by character, shows that there is a great range of variability
in the plants, but at the same time a distinct interdependence of characters. The author
concludes with a discussion of the relationships and phylogeny of the species of Lycopodium
in the light of his observations. — L. W. Riddle.

1893. Jivanna Rao, P. S. The formation of leaf-bladders in Eichornia speciosa Kunth
(water hyacinth). Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 219-225. 5 fig. 1920. — Bladder formation near the
base of the petiole is the result of high water content in the plant. All gradations are found
from well developed bladders on plants growing in an abundant supply of fresh water, to blad-
derless leaves on plants growing in pools that are drying up or in mud. An account of the
structure of the bladder is given. — Winfield Dudgeon.

1894. Kashyap, S. R. Abnormal number of needles in the spuis of Pinus longifolia. Jour.
Indian Bot. 1: 115-119. 1919. — The number of leaves on spur shoots of mature trees is quite
constantly 3, but an examination of 100 4-year-old nursery seedlings revealed 57 bearing spurs
with from 2 to 5 leaves. The number of leaves was 4 in 83.8 per cent of the abnormal shoots,
from wrhich the author concludes that "a 3-leaved spur has been derived from a spur with more
leaves, and that pines with a small number of needles in their spurs are more specialized than
species with a larger number of needles." — Winfield Dudgeon.

1895. Kenoyer, L. A. Dimorphic carpellate flower of Acalypha indica L. Jour. Indian
Bot. 1 : 3-7. 21 fig. 1919. — The carpellate flowers on the lower branches of the inflorescence
are trilocular; those at the tips of the staminate cymes are unilocular. In the latter there
are no traces of other carpels. — A. J . Eames.

1896. Kirby, R. S., and J. S. Martin. A study of the formation and development of
the flower buds of Jonathan and Giimes Golden in relation to different types (clover sod, blue
grass sod, cover crop, and clean tillage) of soil management. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 265-
290. PI. 7. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1750.

1897. Manaresi, A. Sulla biologia fiorale del pesco. 2 nota. [On the floral biology of
the peach. 2nd note.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52:42-67. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 1757.

1898. Mascre.M. Sur le role de 1'assise nourriciere du pollen. [The role of the tapetum. ]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1120-1122. 4 fig. 1919. — An account of the changes taking
place in the cytoplasm of the tapetal cells during maturation and spore formation of Datura
arborea L. At tetrad formation the cytoplasm contains numerous mitochondrial threads
and granules, together with tannin corpuscules. The cells are usually multinucleate. In
older stages the nuclei disappear, after fusing in pairs; the mitochondria also disappear. As
the cytoplasm becomes vacuolate numerous deutoplasmic vesicles appear, as well as some
starch. — F . B. Wann.

1899. Metcalp, Woodbridge. A precocious youngster. Amer. Forestry 26: 15. 1 fig.
1920. — A demonstration of the fact that coniferous cones are simply modified branches, the
leaves of which are changed in shape to form the cone scales. — Chas. H. Otis.

1900. Miller, Robert B. The wood of Machaerium Whitfordii. Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club 47: 73-79. 8 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 218.

No. 2, September, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 249

1901. PAMMEL, L. II., amd C. M. KlNQ. The germination of some trees and shrubs and
their juvenile forms. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:292-340. Fig. 45-120. 1920.— See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 1380.

1902. Pole-Evans, I. B., and K. Lansdell. The weeds of South Africa. Notes on the
Canada thistle (Cnicus arvensls). Jour. Dept. Agric. Union South Africa 1: 73-75. / fig.
1920.

1903. Roncagliolo, M. Descrizione anatomica e comparata degll organ! epigel di cinque
specie di mimosa. [Comparative anatomy of the aerial organs of five species of Mimosa.] Mal-
pighia 28: 435-457. 191!).

1904. Sabnis, T. A. The physiological anatomy of the plants of the Indian desert. Jour.
Indian Bot. 1 : 33-43. 16 fig. 1919. — The author has studied the structure of the leaf and stem
of 165 species, 125 genera, and 50 orders of xerophytic plants of the Indian desert. This is
the introductory section of his paper and contains chiefly a discussion of the physical aspects
of the desert, including tables of meteorological data. The anatomy of a few forms in the
Menispermaceae and Capparidaceae is described and illustrated. Herbarium specimens were
used, and were sectioned unembedded. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 771.] — A. J. Fames.

1905. Schaffner, John H. The dioecious nature of buffalo-grass. Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club. 47: 119-124. 1920.— The buffalo-grass, Bulbilis dactyloides (Nutt.) Raf., has been
variously considered, and even in our present manuals inconsistent statements are made as
to its dioecism. Field observations in Kansas and experimental results indicate that the dioe-
cious condition is the normal one, it being the only one found in the course of this investi-
gation.— P. A. Mum.

1906. Shirley, John, and C. A. Lambert. The stems of climbing plants. Proc. Lin-
nean Soc. New South Wales 43: 600-609. PI. 60-66. 1918.— The results of the examination
of 53 climbing plant stems are given. A grouping of the structures according to natural orders
was found impossible, for similar characteristics were common to plants of many different
families, especially among dicotyledons. Therefore, classes were created and are discussed
in some detail, illustrated, and type species indicated. Under Subclass I: Dicotyledones, are
seven classes; (1) Normales, single cambium, wood and bast of each bundle lying along the
same radius; (2) Chiastoxylon, single cambium, in young stems four rays of alternate wood
and bast; (3) Aslroxylon, single cambium, bundles separated by stellate arrangement of
pluriseriate rays; (4) Endophloia, second bast occurring at inner margin of wood ring (bi-
collateral) ; (5) Exocycla, besides normal cambium, new cambium; — zones appear succes-
sively centrifugally; (6) Phloiocycla, new bast zones are produced in centripetal order; (7)
Polycycla, oldest bundles in pith, then a normal zone of wood and bast, or alternating rings
may be formed. Under Subclass II: Monocotyledones, are two classes; (1) Vulgares, usual
rind and scattered closed bundles; (2) Abnormales, differing from subclass (1) in one or other
of the above characters. The authors conclude that these abnormal stem structures in climb-
ers assist the free flow of elaborated sap in the bast. — Eloise Gerry.

1907. Shreve, Forrest. Proliferation in cacti. [Rev. of: Johnson, Duncan S. The
fiuit of Opuntia fulgida; a study of perennation and proliferation in the fruits of certain Cacta-
ceae. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ. 269. PI. 12. 1918.]— Plant World 2: 1S2-183. 1919.

1908. Steil, W. N. The distiibution of the archegonia and the antheiidia on the prothallia
of some homosporous leptosporangiate ferns. Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc. 38:271-273. 2 fig.
1919. — In ordinary Poly podiaccac , the archegonia are formed on the so-called cushion directly
back of the apical notch, and the antheridia on the posterior portion of the prothallium; but
in some species the antheridia are produced on the lobes and margins. Under favorable
conditions of nutrition male prothallia became monoecious. In Osmundaceae the archegonia
are produced on the sides of the midrib from the notch to the posterior end where the anther-

250 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

idia are borne. A peculiar arrangement of the sex organs was found on the prothallia of
Pteris ensiformis Burn. var. Victoria. On the prominent and highly developed cushion the
archegonia occupy only the highest portions while the antheridia are found on the lower parts
from the notch to the posterior end. In some cultures a large number of prothallia produced
antheridia only, on both surfaces, especially when the prothallia were equally illuminated
on both surfaces. In other cultures when the dishes were about half filled with sphagnum
and nutrient solution, several species were grown which produced both archegonia and an-
theridia on both surfaces. It was observed that prothallia may be grown in weak light indef-
initely, but under such conditions antheridia only are produced. When the light is sufficiently
strong, archegonia will form with the continued growth of the prothallium, provided fertili-
zation is prevented. — S. H. Essary.

1909. Vielhauer, [ — ] Vierblatteriger Klee. [Four-leaved clover.] Illustrierte Landw.
Zeitg. 39: 373-374. 1919. — The formation of four or more leaflets is encouraged by
conditions favoring luxuriant growth. It is to be regarded as a condition of robustness or
hypertrophy, or as a certain form of fasciation; and it diminishes the fruitfulness of the plant.
Whether the property of forming four leaflets is hereditary or not is not known. — John W.
Roberts.

1910. Vochting, Hermann. Untersuchungen zur experimentellen Anatomie und Path-
ologic des Pfianzenkorpers. II. Die Polaritat der Gewachse. [Experimental anatomy and
pathology of the plant body. II. Polarity.] i;i+333 p., 12 pi., 113 fig. Tubingen, 1918.— Re-
view by O. von K[irchner] in: Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 242-249. 1919 (1920).

1911. von K[irchner], O.. [Rev. of: Vochting, Hermann. Untersuchungen zur ex-
perimentellen Anatomie und Pathologie des Pfianzenkorpers. II. Die Polaritat der Gewachse.
(Experimental anatomy and pathology of the plant body. II. Polarity.) vi-\-333 p., 12 pi., 113
fig. Tubingen, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 242-249. 1919 (1920).— See also next
preceding Entry, 1910.

1912. Weatherwax, Paul. The ancestry of maize — a reply to ciiticism. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club. 46: 275-278. 1919. — H. J. Kempton's criticism of author's paper of September,
1918, on the evolution of maize make necessary a brief presentation of the present status of
the question. Errors were made in the paper in question in confusing "bracts" with "pro-
phylla" and in substituting "one-rowed" for "single-rowed"; these are to be corrected. The
theories of the origin of maize by hybridization and of the ear by fasciation are discussed,
and the importance of the use of comparative morphology in explaining the origin of Zea,
Euchlaena and Tripsacum from common ancestry is re-emphasized. — P. A. Mum.

1913. Wieland, G. R. Distribution and relationships of the cycadeoids. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7: 154-171. PI. 7, 3 fig. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 5, Enry 1999.

1914. Willey, Florence. The vegetative organs of some perennial glasses. Proc. Iowa
Acad. Sci. 25: 341-367. Fig. 121-1U- 1920.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

1915. Allen, C. E. Sex inheritance in Sphaerocarpos. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 58:
289-316. 27 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 486.

1916. Andrews, A. Le Roy. Dicranoweisia crispula in the White Mountains. Rhodora
21 : 207-208. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 313.

1917. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Hymenostomum in North America. I. Delimitation of the
genus. Bryologist 23 : 28-31. 1920. — The author maintains that the mosses usually classified

No. 2, September, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 251

under Astomum, Hymenostomum, and Weisia are so closely related that generic separation is
unwarranted; that the revival of Kleiowi isia is wholly needless; and I hat Tetraplerum should
not be included in Astomum. The understanding of the genus has been further obscured by
the inclusion of many unrelated tropienl :md south-temperate forms, as well as by careless
identifications. The genus, as here delimited, corresponds with Lindberg's Moliia, subgenus
Hymenostomum; it may be naturally divided into the three subgenera Astomum, Euhymeno-
stomum and Weisia. — E. B. Chamberlain.

1918. Armitage, Eleanora. On the habitats and frequencies of some Madeira bryo-
phytes. Jour. Ecol. 6: 220-225. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 274.

1919. Douix, Cn. Le capitule du Marchantia polymorpha expliqu pare Leitgeb et ses dis-
ciples. [The receptacle of Marchantia polymorpha explained by Leitgeb and his disciples.]
Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 57-71. 1920. — A criticism and refutation of the interpretation of Leitgeb
who held that growing points in the angles between the original 8 fused thalli (rays) grew into
additional archegonium-bearing thalli, which folded underneath and fused with the lower
surface of the receptacle. — L. W. Sharp.

1920. Evans, Alexander W. The North American species of Asterella. Contrib. U. S.
Nation. Herb. 20: 247-312. 1920.— In this revision of the North American species of the liver-
wort genus Asterella Beauv. (including the Mexican and West Indian representatives) 15
species are recognized and very fully described, and the following new species and names occur:
Asterella saccata (Wahl.) Evans, A. venosa (Lehm. & Lind.) Evans, A. rugosa, A. reticulata,
and A. versicolor. Five species described by Stephani from Mexico are referred to a list of
doubtful species. The systematic treatment is preceded by a discussion of the nomenclature
of the genus, which is generally known in Europe under the name Fimbriaria, and by notes
on its morphological characters. — S. F. Blake.

1921. Holzinger, John M. Dr. Correns's investigations and sterile mosses. Bryolo-
gist 23 : 27-28. 1920. — Few bryologists, when determining sterile material, seem to use the
keys given in the chapter upon Systematic Determinations in Correns's "Vermehrung der
Laubmoose durch Brutorgane und Stecklinge." Two examples of the usefulness of these
keys are given. — E. B. Chamberlain.

1922. Ingham, W. Mosses and hepatics of the magnesium limestone of West Yorkshire
(continued). Rev. Bryologique 41 : 77-82. 1914. [Issued in 1919.]— See Bot, Absts. 4, Entry
340.

1923. Schacke, Martha A. A chromosome difference between the sexes of Sphaerocarpos
texanus. Science 49: 218-219. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1034.

1924. Watson, W. The bryophytes and lichens of fresh water. Jour. Ecol. 7: 71-83.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 310.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS,
BACTERIA AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatrick, Editor

1925. Anonymous. Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12: 112-114.
1920.

1926. Bal, S. N., and H. P. Chaudhury. Commentationes Mycologicae. 7. A short
study of Plicaria repanda (Wahl.) Rehm on Borassus flabellifer Linn. Jour. Dept. Sci. Cal-
cutta Univ. 2 : 35-36. 1 pi. 1920. — The authors record the occurrence of the fungus at Cal-
cutta, and give a short description. — Winfield Dudgeon.

252 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V.

1927. Bal, S. N. Commentationes Mycologicae. 5. Vermicularia Jatropha Speg., on
Jatropha integerrima. Jour. Dept. Sci. Calcutta Univ. 2: 31-32. 1 pi. 1920. — This is a rec-
ord of the occurrence of the fungus at Calcutta. A short description is given. — Winfield
Dudgeon.

1928. Beardslee, H. C. A new species of Amanita. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 34:
198-199. PI. 30-31. 1919. — Amanita mutabilis is described, growing on white sand along
the coast (Davis Island, North Carolina). In a note by W. C. Coker the same species is
also reported in similar soil from Charleston, South Carolina. — W. C. Coker.

1929. Borgesen, F., and Ratjnkiaer, C. Mosses and lichens collected in the former
Danish West Indies. Dansk Bot. Ark. 29: 18 pi. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 151.

1930. Bose, S. R. Descriptions of fungi in Bengal. (Agaricaceae and Polyporaceae.)
Proc. Indian Assoc. Cultivation Sci. 4: 109-114. PL 1-11. 1918. — The following species,
collected near Calcutta, Hooghly, and neighboring places, are described, and with the ex-
ception of the first are figured: Schizophyllum commune, Lentinus praerigidus, L. caespitosus ,
L. irregularis, Lepiota erminetis, Collybia mimicus, C. ambustus, Daedalea quercina, Favolus
scaber, Polystictus sanguinus, and Hexagonia sub-tenuis. The author states that he expects
to publish similar descriptions of the Polyporaceae in Bengal at frequent intervals, and will
cover the group in two or three years. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

1931. Boyer, M. G. Etudes sur la biologie et la culture des champignons superieurs.
[Biology and culture of mushrooms.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2: 233-344.
4 pi., 20 fig. 1918. — The work is divided into two parts : 1. Experiments on the germination of
spores and culture of mycelia of edible Basidio- and Ascomycetes. 2. Special researches on
Morchella esculenta and Psalliola campestris. — The author attempted to obtain the germination
of many kinds of spores but had only a few positive results. He was thus unsuccessful with
Boletus, Russttla and Amanita. Contrary to the findings of Matruchot, de Lesparre, and
others, the author has never observed the germination of Tuber spores. He attempted
without success also the germination of spores which had gone through the digestive tract,
of animals. In contact with oak leaves or rootlets, spores remain equally inert. The author
studied in particular a group of fungi neither saprophytic nor apparently parasitic, found in
the vicinity of trees. He believes them to be always symbiotic with trees through mycor-
rhiza. This fact has been satisfactorily proved for several Agaricineae and for Tuber. The
direct connection between fungus and mycorrhiza is difficult to establish in the species that
do not form rhizoids. Symbiotic forms are apparently capable of adopting parasitic habits
and vice versa. The author found Hypholoma fasciculare and Trametes pini growing on earth
in contact with their host through mycorrhiza only, and a normally mycorrhizal form {Bo-
letus) growing parasitically on tree trunks.— Aseptic Mycelia: Constantin and Matruchot
saved the industry of mushroom culture in France, attacked by Mycogona perniciosa, when
they introduced in the market aseptic mycelia, raised from spores. The author does not ob-
tain satisfactory results with this method. He recommends another which he believes to be
new. It consists simply in growing mycelia not from the spores but from fragments of pseudo-
tissue taken from the pileus or stipe. Most of these cuttings grow vigorously. Those of
Boletus are of weak growth, and those of Morchella, Amanita, and Tuber, do not grow at all.
This fact the author considers as further proof of the semi-parasitic nature of these latter
fungi. The saprophytic mycelia of Morchella can easily be obtained from the spores, but it
remains permanently sterile. The author believes that in order to produce carpophores
Morchella must become parasitic or symbiotic. All attempts to bring about this condition
have, however, failed. The mycelium remains sterile in field, garden, or orchard. When
inoculated on live tubers or rootlets of Jerusalem artichoke, it does not penetrate the living
tissue. His special studies on Psalliota campestris seemed to prove that cultural characters
are preserved by the mycelia arising from cuttings. — Maihilde Bcnsaude.

No. 2, Septbmbeb, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 253

1932. BBONFBNBBBKNBB, J., AND M. J. ScHLESINGBB. Carbohydrate fermentation by
bacteria as influenced by the composition of the medium. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: S.
1919.

1933. Ciiaudiiury, H. P. Commentationes Mycologicae. 6. Phyllosticta glycosmidis Sy-
dow and Butler, on Glycosmis pentaphylla Corr. Jour. Dept. Sci. Calcutta Univ. 2: 33-34.
/ pi. 1920. — This is a record of the occurrence of the fungus at Calcutta. A short descrip-
tion is given. — W infield Dudgeon.

1934. Clark, Paul F. Morphological changes during the growth of bacteria. [Abstract.)
Absts. Bact. 3: 2. 1919. — "In some instances as early as two hours after transplanting, and
in practically all cases by the fourth or sixth hour of growth, the majority of the organisms
in any given smear were approximately twice as large as the organism we have considered the
average, namely, the organisms from a twenty-four-hour culture." Members of the diph-
theria group are a marked exception. In cultures 4 to 6 hours old the individuals are smaller,
less variable and stain more readily than those from cultures 24 hours old. [From author's
abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

1935. Coker, W. C. The Hydnums of North Carolina. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc.
34: 163-197. PI. 1-29. 1919. — Twenty-eight species of the larger Hydnums, including Hyd-
num, Manina, Steccherinum, Hydnellum, Phellodon and Hydnochaele are reported. Of these,
Hydnellum carolinianum Coker and Phellodon Cokeri Banker are reported as new. Resupin-
ate species are not treated. Of the plates two are in color, three are high power drawings
of the spores, the remainder are photographs. — W. C. Coker.

1936. Coker, W. C. Craterellus, Cantharellus, and related genera in North Carolina
with a key to the genera of gill fungi. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 35: 24-48. PI. 1-17 (in
color). 1919. — Twenty-six species are reported, belonging to the following genera: Eomyce
nella, Trogia, Nyctalis, Craterellus, Cantharellus and Plicaturella. Plate 17 gives the spore
characters. — W. C. Coker.

1937. Darnell-Smith, G. P. The occurrence of an inverted hymenium in Agaricus cam-
pestris. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 883-8S7. PI. 91-93. 1918.— The article
records teratological observations on Agaricus campestris derived from a particular sample of
spawn imported from France. The under surface was normal but the upper surface was
broken by one or more black protuberances composed of irregular, sinuous, labyrinthiform
lamellae having the appearance of small inverted caps without stipe. These were quite
separate from the normal hymenium. Spores were borne upon enlarged cells provided with
1-4 sterigmata. These abnormal mushrooms are considered as a partial reversion to an
ancestral, cj'lindric, dome-shaped form having semi-alveolar or labyrinthiform gill formation
over the exposed upper surface. In the evolution of the normal cap the hymenium is consid-
ered as having been relegated to the lower surface, the gills having developed from the origi-
nal pore or alveolar structure. — C. J. Humphrey.

1938. De Mello, Froilano. Contribution to the study of the Indian Aspergilli. Jour.
Indian Bot. 1: 158-161. 1920. — The author describes Aspergillus (Slerigmatocystis) poly-
chromus as a new species, and records its behavior on a number of different culture media. —
Winjicld Dudgeon.

1939. Donk, P. J. Some organisms causing spoilage in canned foods, with special reference
to fiat sours. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 4. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2164.

1910. Eberson, Frederick. A yeast-agar medium for the meningococcus. [Abstract.]
Absts. Bact. 3: 10. 1919. — "The primary objects of these experiments have been attained,
namely to find a cheap and simple medium which would enable us to maintain cultures of a
delicate organism such as the meningococcus so that shipment over long distances might be
practiced without danger of losing valuable strains." — Preparation of medium: Macerate 10

254 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts.. Vol. V,

grams of bakers' or brewers' jreast in 100 cc. of water for 20 minutes; steam for 2 hours at 100°;
filter twice through filter paper, or perhaps preferably, clarify by use of glass wool; prepare a
2.5 per cent agar with or without peptone and salt; to each 60 cc. of agar, add 40 cc. of yeast
decoction; sterilize in autoclave for 20 to 30 minutes. A semisolid yeast agar (0.5 per cent1*
"will prolong the viability for beyond the periods observed for the solid medium." — [From
abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

1941. Ferdinandsen, C, and 0. Winge. A Phyllachora parasitic on Sargassum. Myco-
logia 12: 102-103. 2 fig. 1920. — Phyllachora oceanica is described as a new species. It pro-
duces swellings on Sargassum. — H. R. Rosen.

1912. Gilbert, E. M. A peculiar entomophthorous fungus. Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc.
38: 263-269. PI. 27, 28, fig. 1-23. 1919.— Among the fungi found on fern prothallia grown in
water cultures or on moist sphagnum, one appeared from time to time which seemed to be a
vigorous parasite. It was isolated and pure cultures were obtained on Thaxter's potato hard-
agar plus Loffltjnd's malt extract. An effort was made to find an insect upon which it would
grow; but no infections were secured upon any of the insects of the greenhouse, nor upon vig-
orous fern prothallia, although it would grow on dying fern prothallia. The fungus seems
to be of a decided saprophytic nature. Other investigators have observed a saprophytic
condition in certain members of the Entomophthorales. The fungus grows rapidly. No
haustoria or rhizoidal growths are found. The hyphae branch and become septate; the cells
compare favorably with those of Empusa, but differ in many particulars. The shape and size
of cells vary greatly. Conidiophores arise usually from terminal cells. No sclerotia are
found. Conidiophores, usually simple, are sometimes compound, each branch producing a
single conidium. By a process not fully understood, the basidium ruptures and projects the
ripened conidium often to a distance of 65 mm. Upon a substratum containing moisture the
conidia germinate in from 6 to 12 hours and put forth from one to four germ tubes which de-
velop a typical mycelium. Upon a dry surface the conidia germinate and produce secondary
conidia which are discharged like the primary ones, and these may germinate and produce
tertiary spores. Primary conidia have diameters of 48 to 60 n, secondary, 35 to 40/t, and the
tertiary 20 n. Some conidia do not germinate upon an unfavorable substance; but form a
thick wall and appear to be resting spores, although germination has not been observed. —
S. H. Essary.

1913. Gilkey, Helen M. Two new truffles. Mycologia 12: 99-101. Fig. 1. 1920.—
Tuber canaliculatum and T. unicolor are described as new species. — //. R. Rosen.

1944. Hammer, B. W. Bacteriological results obtained in practice with vat pasteurization
and with one of the final package methods. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 190: 151-158. 1919.

1945. Hammer, B. W. Studies on formation of gas in sweetened condensed milk. Iowa
Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 54: 211-220. 2 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2199.

1946. Hammer, B. W., and D. E. Bailey. The volatile acid production of starters and of
organisms isolated from them. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 55: 223-246. 1919. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 2172.

1917. Hemmi, Takewo. Vorlaufige Mitteilung ueber eine Anthracnose von Carthamus
tinctorius. [Preliminary report of an anthracnose of Carthamus tinctorius.] Ann. Phytopath.
Soc. Japan l2. 11 p., fig. 1-2. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2659.

1948. Herre, Albert C. Notes on Mexican lichens. Bryologist 23 : 3-4. 1920.

1919. Herre, Albert C. Hints for lichen studies. Bryologist 23 : 26-27. 1920. — Much
valuable work could be done upon the physiology of the growth and luxuriance of lichens,
especially in the case of rock- or bark-inhabiting species, without taxonomic knowledge.
There are great possibilities in the study of the inheritance of lichen species. — E. B.
Chamberlain.

No. 2, September, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI. 255

1950. Keene, M. Lucille. Studies of zygospore formation in Phycomyces nitens Kunze.
Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 19: 1196-1219. PL i 17 fig. i'.HO.— Cytological studies of
the plus and minus strains of Phycomyces nitens were made but no constant morphological or
cytological differences could be determined at any phase of the life cycle. The internal and
external changes occurring before and after conjugation are described and illustrated. Fol-
lowing a characteristic grouping of the nuclei, there appears to take place a fusion of nuclei
in pairs. The disorganization of part of the nuclei, probably the unfused ones, is followed by
the appearance of reserve substances: a large amount of oil and a nucleo-protoin-like sub-
stance.— L. K. Bartholomew.

1951. Klebahn, H. Haupt- und Nebenfruchtformen der Askomyzeten. Erster Teil:
Eigene Untersuchungen. [Perfect and imperfect stages of ascomycetes.] 395 p., 275 fig.
Gebr. Borntniger: Leipzig, 1918.

1952. Latham, Roy. Musci hosts of Cyphella muscigena Fr. Bryologist 23 : 7. 1920. —
The author notes that in Southold, New York, the fungus seems to prefer Thuidium paludosum
as host to the exclusion of other, intimately associated species. — E. B. Chamberlain.

1953. Leidy, Joseph. Modification of Gram's stain for bacteria. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 3: 7. 1919. — "In the course of some experiments in staining bacteria according to
Gram's method it was found that any of the metallic iodides soluble in water may be substi-
tuted for the potassium iodide in Gram's (Lugol's) solution." [From author's abstract of
paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

1954. L'Estrange, W. W., and R. Greio-Smith. The "springing" of tins of preserved
fruit. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43: 409-414. 1918.— Cans of pears and plums, as
compared with apricots and peaches, were found to be especially susceptible to "springing."
Yeasts chiefly, certain moulds and bacteria sometimes, apparently in an inactive condition,
were found. Suggestions for better operating methods are given. — Eloise Gerry.

1955. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. No. 57. P. 830-844, fig. 1388-1412. Cincinnati,
Ohio, April, 1919. — A photograph of J. Ramsbottom is accompanied by a brief personal
appreciation. The status of the genus Laschia is discussed, and about twenty species are
cited with annotations. Under the heading "rare or interesting fungi received from corre-
spondents" the following are discussed and in most cases figured: Clathrus cancellatus, Len-
tinus rivulosus, Hydnum pule her rimum, Dacryomiira depallens, Polystictus pinsilus, Dacry-
opsis nuda, Polystictus felipponei, Polyporus greenii, Polystictus scopulosus, Podocrea xylari-
oides. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

1956. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. No. 58. P. 814-828, fig. 1358-1887. Cincin-
nati, Ohio, March, 1919. — A short account of Arthur Lister's life and work is accompanied
by a photograph of this well known student of the myxomycetes. The following "rare or
interesting fungi received from correspondents" are discussed and in most cases figured:
Campanella cucullata, Durogaster brunnea, Rimbachia pezizoidea, Geaster tomentosus, Trem-
ella mellea, Polyporus smaragdinus, Porodiscus rickii, Polystictus hexagonoides , Favolus
caespitosus, Pterula fruticum, Daldinia albozonata, Polyporus setiger, Polyporus alrohispidus,
Lentinus chordalis, Guepinia elegans, Dacryomyces pallidus, Tremella compacta, Dacryomitra
dubia, Stereum corruge, Polyporus pertusus, Lachnocladium braziliense, Dacryomyces hyalinus.
— H. M. Fitzpatrick.

1957. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. No. 59. P. 846-860, fig. 1413-1448. Cincinnati,
Ohio, June, 1919. — A good likeness of George F. Atkinson appears on the cover of the pam-
phlet. A short personal appreciation accompanies it. The genus Trichoscypha is discussed
and three species are described. These are T. insititia, T. hindsii, and T. Tricholoma.
The following fungi are discussed and in many cas'es figured: Trametes heteromorpha, Tra-
metes sepium, Trametes serpens, Tremella Candida, Irpex caespitosus, Lenzites betulina, Cata-

256 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

stoma levispora, Trametes truncatospora, Isaria mokanshawii, Polyporus rugosissimus, Isaria
ritchiei, Polystictus crocatiformis , Trametes epitephra, Cyphella fuscodisca, Cordyceps lloydii,
Polyporus murrillii, Helerochaete gelatinosa, Pseudohydnum guepinoides, Fomes gibbosus,
Polyporus suaderis, Lenzites stryacina. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

1958. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. No. 60. P. 862-876, fig. 1463-1496. Cincinnati,
Ohio, August, 1919. — The cover of this pamphlet bears a good likeness of Charles E. Fair-
man. A brief statement calls attention to Doctor Fairman's mycological activities. A short
review of Katjffman's "Agaricaceae of Michigan" is given. The genus Pterula is discussed and
notes and figures are given for twenty-four species. A short note on the genus Dcndrocladium
is appended. Under the heading "tremellaceous plants," notes are given on the following
species: Tremella vesicaria, T. hispanica, T. glaira, T. samoensis, T. sarcoides, Auricularia
ornata, A. mesenterica, Exidia janus, Dacryopsis brasiliensis. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

1959. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. No. 61. P. 877-903, pi. 124-139. Cincinnati, Ohio,
1919. — Attention is called to the fact that phalloids and other fleshy forms, when packed in cot-
ton saturated with formalin, can be shipped long distances in good condition. Notes are given
on many species of fungi received from correspondents, especially those sent from various
countries of the southern hemisphere. These include species of many genera of the higher
fungi. New species are described in Polyporus, Polystictus, Ptychogaster, Hexagona, Ster-
eum, Mitrula, Isaria, Septobasidium, Calocera, Rhizopogon, Catostoma, Lachnocladium,
Xerotus, Exidia, Daldinia, Xylaria, and Auricularia. Critical notes are given on many
species of Xylaria. A discussion is given of the probable identity of Ceracea and Arrhytidia,
and their separation from Dacryomyces is questioned. A new genus of the Lycoperdales,
Bovistoidea, is founded on the species, B. simplex n. sp. from South Africa. The genus is
characterized by the presence of simple capillitial threads with pointed ends. Attention is
directed to several misdeterminations in Baker's "Fungi Malayana." In a discussion of the
genus Septobasidium it is pointed out that three pileate species are known, and a genus Rudetum
McGinty is facetiously proposed for these. In the same vein Pseudothelephora gelatinosa
McGinty is proposed for a gelatinous Thelephora received from India. A report of the col-
lection of a species of Cauloglossum in the Philippines, C. saccatum, is shown to be incorrect,
the genus being regarded as still monotypic. Photographs are given for the fungi discussed.
Due to the high cost of printing, this number of Mycological Notes is distributed in mimeo-
graphed form, and the announcement is made that this policy will be continued. — H. M.
Fitzpatrick.

1960. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu-
facturing processes: the application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 255-264. 9 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2254.

1961. Merrill, E. D., and H. W. Wade. The validity of the name Discomyces for the
genus of fungi variously called Actinomyces, Streptothrix and Nocardia. Philippine Jour. Sci.
14: 55-69. 1919. — This is an effort to determine the accurate designation for a group of fungi
whose pathogenic members produce various actinomycoses. By the accepted principles of
botanical nomenclature, Streptothrix Cohn (1875) is invalidated by Streptothrix Corda (1839),
and Actinomyces Harz (1871) by Actinomyce Meyen (1827). Discomyces Rivolta (1878) would
accordingly be valid, Actinocladothrix Affanassiew and Schultz (1889) and Nocardia Trevisan
(1889) are to be regarded as synonyms of Discomyces. Discomyces as a generic name is not
invalidated by Discomycetes as a group name. — Bibliography. — Albert R. Sweetser.

1962. Moesz, G. Mykologiai Kozlemenyek. III. Kozlemeny. [Mycological investiga-
tions. III.] Bot. Kozl. 17:60-78. 11 fig. 1918. [Summary in German.]— Taxonomic and
life history studies of the following. (1) Hcrpotrichia nigra and Neopeckia coulteri found on
Pinus pumilio, Juniperus and Picea excelsa; Ozonium plica is connected with latter. Loca-
tion of these species in herbaria is indicated. (2) Lizonia emperigonia (Auersw.) de Not. f.
Baldinii (Pir.) Moesz on Polytrichum commune. (3) Pachybasidiella microstromoidea (prior

No. 2, September. 1020] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 25*3

to 1900 as Gloeosporium) a saprophyte on eapsules of Calalpa bignonioides. (4) P. poli/H]><>ra
Bub. et Syd. parasitic on leaves of Acer daaycarpum. (5) Leptosphaeria crepini (Westd.) do
Not. on sporophylls of Lycopodium annolinum turning them black. (G) Pyrenochaeta clith-
ridis n. sp. described from an old fruit body of Clithris quercina, Phoma salsolcn n. sp. from
Salsola kali and Aecidium sp.? from Rhamnus fallax. (7) New species of saprophytic fungi
described and the host range for old ones extended. [Through abst. by Matouschek in
Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 252-253. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

19G3. Murrill, W. A. A correction. Mycologia 12: 108-109. 1920.— An error in citation
is noted in 25 species of polypores which are found to have been transferred to the genus
Poria by Cooke two years in advance of Saccardo's transfers. — H. R. Rosen.

1964. Murrill, W. A. Daedalea extensa rediscovered. Mycologia 12: 110-111. 1920. —
Specimens collected in Indiana are referred to D. extensa; Peck's original description of this
species is given. — H. R. Rosen.

1965. Murrill, W. A. Polyporus excurrens Berk. & Curt. Mycologia 12: 107-108.
1920. — This species is considered as synonymous with Trametes rigida Berk. & Mont., Poly-
stictus extensus Cooke, P. rigens Sacc. & Cub., Coriolopsis rigida (Berk. & Mont.) Murr.
Since American specimens referred to Trametes serpens are considered distinct from the
European material T. subserpens is suggested as a new name for American material. — H. R.
Rosen.

1966. Murrill, W. A. Light-colored resupinate polypores— I. Mycologia 12: 77-92.
1920. — Twenty-seven species of Poria are presented including P. incerla (Pers.) comb. nov.
and the following new species. P. umbrinescens, P. lacticolor, P. niveicolor, P. cr emei color ,
P. adpressa, P. tenuipora, P. Earlei, P. corioliformis, P. regularis, P. polyporicola, P. cin-
ereicolor, P. subavellanea, P. snbcorticola, P. Amesii, P. subcollapsa, P. rnonticola, P. lac-
lerata, P. rimosa, and P. heteromorpha. "The descriptions included are mainly from dried
specimens. Before the hundreds of such specimens in the herbarium here can be intelli-
gently discussed, referred to, or classified, they must be named and more complete descriptions
can be prepared later." — H. R. Rosen.

1967. Murrill, W. A. Illustrations of fungi— XXXII, Mycologia 12: 59-61. PI. 2 (col-
ored). 1920. — Boletus luteus, Tylopilus alboater (Boletus nigrellus), and Armillaria nardos-
mia are described and illustrated. — H. R. Rosen.

1968. Northrup, Zae. A new method of preparing cellulose for cellulose agar. [Abstract.)
Absts. Bact. 3 : 7. 1919. — "The method is as follows: Melt over a free flame at a low heat 200
grams of ferric chlorid in a porcelain casserole. Add to this completely melted salt a known
weight of absorbent cotton, a little at a time (stir with a glass rod), as much as the melted
salt will dissolve without making the mixture too thick to be handled readily. When com-
pletely dissolved, pour into a large volume of distilled water; a heavy precipitate of finely
divided hydrocellulose occurs. Filter by using a Buchner or similar funnel plus suction and
wash the precipitate thoroughly on the filter with distilled water. After the thorough wash-
ing with distilled water, if any trace of iron chlorid remains, it may be considered as negligible
as it is harmless, and may be actually beneficial to the medium. Weigh the moist precipitate
to determine the proportion necessary to use per unit weight of original cellulose in making
cellulose agar. The weight of hydrocellulose corresponding to 2 grams of absorbent cotton
has been found sufficient in Omeliansky's and other cellulose agar media. Pure absorbent
cotton dissolves much more satisfactorily than filter paper and gives a more finely divided
precipitate, consequently this is the form now employed as a standard in our laboratory."
[From author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

1969. Northrup, Zae. Agar-liquefying bac+eiia. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 7. 1919.
— Found in anaerobic culture from soil. Pure cultures are to be isolated and studied. — D.
Reddick.

258 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1970. Pammel, L. H. Perennial mycelium of parasitic fungi. Proe. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:
259-263. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2082.

1971. Peyronel, B. Sul nerume o marciume nero dalle castagne. [On the blackening
or black rot of chestnuts.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52:21-41. PI. 1-4. 1919. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 2083.

1972. Reinking, Otto A. Phytophthora Faberi Maubl. : The cause of coconut bud rot in
the Philippines. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 131-151. 3 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
2087.

1973. Rettger, Leo F., and C. C. Chen. Correlation within the Colon-Aerogenes group.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3 : 1. 1919. — 467 cultures isolated from soil, 20 of which were of colon
type, and 173 from animals all of which were colon type. Media used were (1) Clark and Lubs
medium with Witte's peptone, (2) the same with "Difco" peptone, (3) their synthetic
medium. "A total of 3725 individual hydrogen ion concentration determinations and 4632
Voges-Proskauer reactions were made. The PH was determined by the colorimetric method
of Clark and Lubs; the dyes used being brom-thymol blue for the aerogenes group and methyl
red for the colon type. Brom-cresol purple was used to check the PH values of the other
two dyes, especially in the range 5.6 to 6.4. The result showed that a three days incubation
period was not sufficient for the methyl red test in these media; but an almost perfect corre-
lation between the two types was observed in the synthetic as well as in the Witte's peptone
medium (not in the Difco) when the incubation period was prolonged to 5 days. — The results
of the Voges-Proskauer tests showed that this test can be made in either of the three media,
and that the usual incubation period can be shortened from 5 days to 24 hours (even to ten to
fourteen hours). A positive reaction may be obtained by the simple and rapid "shake"
method in which the eosin-coloration can be observed for 1 to 3 hours, and its maximum color
production from 2 to 8 hours. The method of Levine in which an oxidizing agent is used,
and that of Bunker, Tucker and Green in which they expose a thin layer of culture fluid in
a Syracuse watch glass both proved either uncertain or too laborious. — With the few excep-
tions which occurred among the colon strains from soil, the uric acid test of Koser gave very
satisfactory correlation with the other reactions when the necessary precautions were taken.
— The effect of a mixture of colon-aerogenes types of organisms upon the PH and upon the
Voges-Proskauer test was determined. It was found that the PH concentration was disturbed
between types when such a mixed culture was used, while the Voges-Proskauer reaction proved
to be relatively permanent. — The limiting PH concentration of the colon-aerogenes types of
organisms was determined daily in the synthetic medium of Clark and Lubs for a period of
3 weeks. The result showed that the PH concentration ranged from 4.7 to 7.4 within that
period." [From authors' abst. of paper read at scientific section, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D.
Rcddick.

1974. Rettger, Leo F., and Margaret M. Scoville. Bacterium anatis, Nov. Spec,
an organism of economic importance and a member of the paratyphoid group. [Abstract.]
Absts. Bact. 3: 8. 1919. — An organism resembling very closely B. paratyphosus B. was iso-
lated from the internal organs of ducklings which had succumbed. "Indeed so similar were
the morphology, cultural characters, etc., of the new organism and different strains of B.
paratyphosus' B. that it has as yet been impossible to differentiate them, although agglutina-
tion tests still remain to be made." [From abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer.
Bact.] — D. Reddick.

1975. Rippel, August. Die chemische Zusammensetzung von Lactaria piperita (Scop.)
und Lacteria vellerea (Fries). [The chemical composition of Lactaria piperita (Scop.) and
Lactaria vellerea (Fries.).] Naturw. Zeitschr. f. Forst- u. Landw. 17: 142-146. 1919.— A
chemical analysis of the two varieties, which are difficult of distinction to the beginner, is
given in two tables. A comparison shows a similar content of phosphoric acid and potassium.
Crude fats are slightly more abundant in vellerea, and greater in both than in other fungi.

No. 2, September, 1920] PALEOBOTANY 259

Vcllerea also has a higher percentage of crude fiber. The soluble portion of the fiber is Q01
cellulose, but, more than likely, hemicellulose. The chief difference consists in the greater
resistance of the cell walls of vcllerea, which makes it more difficult for digestive juices to at'
the nitrogenous constituents and albumen bodies (which are more abundanl in velh rea I
in piperita) in I his variety. It has not been definitely determined whal causes this difficult
permeability; it may be chitin. In general, the differences may be traced back with .sonic de-
gree of probability to the tomentose elements of the cap and to the large number of fertile
elements resulting from dense-growing lamellae. — ./. Roeser.

197G. Sch0yen, T. II. Betydningsfulde nyere unders0kelser over furuens blaererust.
[Important new investigations on Peridermium pini.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 28-29. 1920.

1977. Seaver, F. J. Notes on North American Hypocreales — IV. Aschersonia and Hypo-
crella. Mycologia 12 : 93-98. PI. 6. 1920. — Aschersonia is considered as the imperfect stage
of Hypocrella. On this basis a new combination, Hypocrella turbinata (Berk.), is made. H.
disjxmcta sp. nov. said to occur on white fly is briefly described and the belief expressed that
species of Hypocrella may prove to be of economic importance in combating harmful insects.
— 77. R. Rosen.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

1978. Baccarint, P. Intorno all'ologenesi. [Concerning ologenesis.] Nuovo Gior. Bot.
Ital. 26: 115-128. 1919. — Daniele Rosa in his recent book "New theory of evolution and the
geographic distribution of life," makes an attempt to give on the basis of ologenesis a better
explanation of evolution and the distribution of plants and animals than could be had from the
theories of Darwin, Lamarck and de Vries. In brief, these are the writer's contentions: (1)
The evolution of the specific idioplasm, which is bound up with the phylogeny of the organisms,
is predetermined, continuous and independent of external factors. (2) The evolution of the
idioplasm is rectilinear up to a certain point when due to increasing complexity the idioplasm
divides dichotomously which results in the complete elimination of the mother form and the
establishment of two new "species" which in turn develop and then divide. (3) The evolution
is not reversible because the products of a dichotomous division have a different constitution
since, as was stated above, a certain part of the characters of the mother form have become

completely eliminated A = — . (4) Each new "phyletic species" (the complex of individuals

lying between two dichotomous divisions) stands at the end of the genealogical tree and con-
sequently its phylogenetic prospects are much reduced. Furthermore, there is a tendency, as
evolution proceeds, for the new forms to become stabilized so that new dichotomous divisions
occur only at great intervals. Phyletic and systematic species are not identical. The former
has but a limited duration, although throughout its existence it may pass through a number
of different stages which would be considered distinct species, or even genera, by the sys-
tematist. (5) The large branches of the evolutionary tree are to be sought in the early geo-
logical ages when the phylogenetic prospect of the idioplasm was at its prime. The creation
of new forms, due to the dichotomous divisions of the idioplasm, does not alwa3rs find immedi-
ate expression because of external conditions. A "mollusk," for example, may have been
potentially a mollusk long before climatic and environmental conditions permitted of the
existence of mollusks. This indicates why there is such a lack of connections in the evolu-
tionary line, and why there is such an apparent polymorphism. (6) Since the division of the
idioplasm of a given form took place simultaneously in all individuals and throughout the
entire area occupied bjr them, it becomes an easy matter to account for the geographic distri-
bution of species and to explain geographic anomalies without having to resort to the migra-
tion hypothesis. (7) In the development of the two species of a dichotomous division one
form may advance more rapidly and soon reach the apex of its development, while the other,

260 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

proceeding slower, gives rise to a greater variety of forms. — -When contrasted with the theory
of Darwin or de Vries, ologenesis offers a better explanation for the origin of the large evolu-
tionary lines, for the richness of the flora and fauna as far back as the Cretaceous and also for
the geographic distribution of species. The chances for the new forms to arise and exist are
greater because new forms do not arise as single mutations but simultaneously throughout the
entire area occupied by a species which is undergoing division. Of course the explanation of
the theory of ologenesis is a teleological one, but it is a teleology which rests on a firm
physical and mechanical basis. The author realizes that the hypothetical element in the
theory is still large and that it will be necessary to accumulate more evidence before it is
accepted altogether. — E. Artschwager.

1979. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Jaeger, F. M. Lectures on the principles of
symmetry, xii -\- 333 p. Elzevier Publishing Co. : Amsterdam, 1917. ] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23 :
516. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1451.

1980. Baker, Frank C. The life of the Pleistocene or glacial period. Univ. Illinois Bull.
17. vi 4- 476 p. 57 pi. 1920. — Essentially geological and zoological, but useful to the botanist
in that it contains lists of species of plants and bibliography covering the glaciated and nearby
areas of North America. — E. W. Berry.

1981. Berry, E. W. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil plants. Vol. 4. Cambridge Univ.
Press: Cambridge, England, 1919.] Plant World 22: 341-342. (Nov., 1919) March, 1920.

1982. Brown-Blanqtjet, Josias. Sur la decouverte du Laurus canariensis Webb et
Berth., dans les tufs de Montpellier. [Discovery of Laurus canariensis in the tuffs of Mont-
pellier.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 951-952. 1919. — Description of fragments of
leaves determined as Laurus canariensis Webb and Berth. The presence of this species in
these deposits confirms the oceanic and relatively alpine character of the flora at the time of
their formation. — F. B. Wann.

1983. Buchholz, John T. Embryo development and polyembryony in relation to the phy-
logeny of conifers. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 125-145. 89 fig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
1883.

1984. Caullery, Maurice. Parasitism and symbiosis in relation to evolution. Sci.
Amer. Monthly 1: 399-403. 4 fig. 1920. [Presidential address delivered before the British
Association for the Advancement of Science (the Australian meeting, 1914).] — A criticism of
Professor Portier's theory of universal symbiosis. — Chas. H. Otis.

1985. Chamberlain, Charles J. The living cycads and the phylogeny of seed plants.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 146^153. PI. 6. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1885.

1986. Conklin, E. J. The mechanism of evolution. Sci. Monthly 10:392-403. 1920 —
As the chromosomes contain the genes or factors of Mendelian inheritance, many investigators
have assumed that the cytoplasm serves only as environment or food for the chromosomes
and has nothing to do with heredity. It is true that the spermatozoon is highly differentiated.
But the tail of the spermatozoon is either left outside of the egg or its differentiation disappears
within the egg. And the yolk of the egg is used up as food. — But there is positive evidence
that all cytoplasmic differentiations are not wiped out at this time. Certain cytoplasmic
differentiations found in the egg persist in the embryo and adult. Polarity, symmetry, asym-
metry, and types of egg organization are of this character. — This egg cytoplasm inheritance
is non-Mendelian. Consequently the egg contributes more than the spermatozoon to each
generation. This may be somewhat complicated by the fact that the egg has its characters
determined by the chromosomes of the cells from which it developed. This would be Men-
delian inheritance with its beginnings in the preceding generation. If they are not determined
in this way, but are carried from generation to generation in the cytoplasm the inheritance
is non-Mendelian. [See also next following Entry, 1987.] — L. Pace.

No. 2, September, 1920] PALEOBOTANY 261

1987. Conklin. E. G. The mechanism of evolution. Sci. Monthly 10:496-515. 1920.—
At present there is not sufficient evidence to conclude that modifications of the cytoplasm of
the germ cells are ever really inherited or that they are the initial stages in evolution. — Almost
all the experimentally produced changes in chromosomes which are known to persist occur
during mitoses. — Variations in the volume of chromosomes are dependent upon the volume of
the resting nucleus and cytoplasm. These variations have no hereditary or evolutionary
value, as is evident from a comparison of the nuclei and chromosomes of the spermatozoa and
ova which differ in volume but not in value. — -Abnormalities in synapsis, separation :tnd equa-
torial division of chromosomes are much more important. The two former occur only in the
formation of germcells, the latter may occur in any cell. — Changes in the number of chromo-
somes are known in Oenothera, Ascaris, and Drosophila. — Changes in the constitution of
chromosomes by "crossing-over" of sections of homologous chromosomes or by fragmentations
or fusions so that a chromosome is not invariably composed of the same chromomeres has
been reported. — Experimental modification of chromosomes has produced monstrosities which
have not been carried to the next generation. But heat has been shown to increase the num-
ber of "cross-overs" in the oocyte of Drosophila. These are transmitted. Probably other
changes in the constitution of chromosomes may be traced to environmental influences. If
so initial stages in evolution may find their causes in such influences. — Genes seem to be sub-
ject to all the possibilities just discussed for chromosomes. — In conclusion, it is held that the
initial stages in evolution are caused by new combinations of chromosomes, chromomeres,
genes, subgenes, and that these new combinations take place in response to stimuli from the
external or internal environment. — Germ cells are so complex and so delicately adjusted
that they can not usually be greatly changed without rendering them incapable of continued
life. The future may show us methods of modifying germ plasm more delicate than those now
known. This would make a real experimental evolution possible. — The mystery of mysteries
in evolution is how germ plasm ever became so complex. The greatest problem which con-
fronts us is no longer the mechanism of evolution, but the evolution of this mechanism.
[See also next preceding Entry, 1986.]— L. Pace.

1988. G., A. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thallassiophyta and the subaerial transmigration.
Botanical Memoirs, No. 3. Oxford University Press, 95 p. 1919.] Jour. Botany 58: 59-61.
1920.

1989. Gothan*, W., and Nagel, K. Eine Zechsteinflora (Kupferschieferflora) aus dem
untern Zechstein des Niederrheins. [A flora from the copper shales of the lower Zechstein
in the lower Rhine region.] Gliickauf 566: 105-107. 1 pi. Feb., 1920. — Discusses the occur-
rence of Ullmannia Bronni Goeppert, Ulhnannia frumentaria Goeppert, Voltzia Liebeana
Goeppert, Baiera digltata Heer, Callipteris Martinsii, and Sphenopteris sp., from the Permian
in the vicinity of Wehofen in Western Germany. — E. W. Berry.

1990. Groves, J. A curious fossil Charaphyte fruit. Geol. Mag. 57: 126-127. 1 fig.
1920. — Describes specimens of what is probably Char a mcrianii Braun from the Miocene of
Locle, Switzerland, showing uniform tubular calcareous hollows on the inner side of the
spiral cells that form the oogonium sac. — E. W. Berry.

1991. Guppy, H. B. Fossil botany in the Western World: an appreciation. Amer. Jour.
Sci. 49: 372-374. May, 1920.

1992. Knowltox, F. H. Evolution of geologic climates. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 30:
499-566. 1920. — Discusses the factors that might explain the prevailing uniformity of geo
logic climates, gives an extended summary of the bearing of fossil plants on past climatic
conditions, and concludes that the most probable explanation is earth control, the result of
internal heat, and not solar control which dominates existing climtitic distribution. — E. W.
Berry.

262 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

1993. Newton, B. R. On some freshwater fossils from Central South Africa. Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist. 5: 241-249. PI. 8. 1920. — The author describes three specimens of chalce-
donized rock found at the base of Kalahari Sand in Matabeleland in Central South Africa.
These rocks, representing the first fossils found in this region, contain oogonia and stems
of Chara and some remains of Gastropods. A more technical description of the Char a,
including dimensions, is given by Mr. James Groves; but no specific names are mentioned ex-
cept one oogonium is said to resemble Chara hipida. Although the collection is small, the
author thinks the combination of Chara and Gastropods indicates a correlation between these
rocks and the Intertrappean beds of India, and that therefore they belong to the Upper
Cretaceous period. — Harold H. Clum.

1991. Picqtje.vard, Ch. Sur la flore fossile des bassins houlllers de Quimper et de Ker-
gogne. [The fossil flora of the coal beds of Quimper and Kergogne.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 170: 55-57. 1920. — A list of fossil plants from each of the coal beds named in the title,
based on material collected by the author and by others. From the Quimper beds sixteen
species are given which in general agree with the flora at the base of the Stephanian stage.
Twenty-four species are given from the coal beds of Kergogne, many of which had been pre-
viously reported from Blanzy and Commentry. Not any new species are described. — C. H.
and W. K. Farr.

1995. Principi, P. Filliti wealdiane della Tripolitania. [Wealden fossils from Tripoli.]
R. Ufficio Geol. Mem. descritt. Carta Geol. d'ltalia 18: 71. 2 pi. 1919. — The engineer Zac-
cagna in a study of the hydrology of western Tripoli in 1914 collected fossil plants in the
vicinity of Seck-Scink and Fessato from clay shales of Wealden age including specimens of
Cladophlebis Albertsii (Dunker) Brongniart, Dioonites Buchianus (Ettings.) Bornm., Sphen-
olepidium Kurrianum (Dunker) Heer, somewhat uncertain remains of Becklesia anomale
Seward, Cladophlebis zaccagnai Principi, and Yuccites sp. ind. resembling Yuccites schimp-
erianus Zigno of the Jurassic of Verona. — R. Pampanini.

1996. Sernander, R. Subfossile Flechten. [Subfossil lichens.] Flora 112: 703-724. 7
fig. 1918. — -The absence of fossil lichens in strata earlier than the Tertiary has been attributed
to the rapidity of their decomposition. Observations on Alectoria jubata (L.) Ach. in Lapland
show that all traces of the plant disappear within a year after it falls on the forest floor. Re-
mains of lichens do not occur in ordinary humus, except as fragments. But a study of post-
glacial peat-beds shows recognizable remains of such species as Cladonia rangiferina (L.)
Web-, Cetraria islandica (L.) Ach., and Peltigera canina (L.) Willd. On partially fossilized
tree-trunks, Opegrapha atra Pers. is present. Calcareous tufa shows such pitting as is char-
acteristic of Lccidea immersa (Web.) Ach. The author believes that these observations prove
the possibility of lichens becoming fossilized. — L. W. Riddle.

1997. Walcott, Charles D. Cambrian geology and paleontology. IV. No. 5. Middle
Cambrian algae. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 675: 217-260. PI. 43-59. 1919.— S. F. Blake.

199S. Wieland, G. R. The Tetracentron-Drimys question. Amer. Jour. Sci. 49: 382-383.
May, 1920. — Comments on the question of whether these genera are primitive or reduced,
upholding the former view and considering it as conforming to the hypothesis that the Angio-
sperms are descended from the Cj-cadeoids through the Ranalian plexus. — E. W. Berry.

1999. Wieland, G. R. Distribution and relationships of the cycadeoids. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7: 154-171. PI. 7, 5 fig. 1920. — Author believes that forests of microphyllous and small-
stemmed cycadeoids were very numerous in Triassic and Jurassic times. Williamsoniella
and Wielandiella are examples of such plants. They probably shed their leaves with the
seasons and were able to thrive in temperate climates. Apparently the climates of the
Mesozoic were by no means uniformly tropical. The distribution of cycadophytes in the
Mesozoic is briefly considered. Author discusses the relationships which the cycadeoids
bear to the cycads, the seed ferns, the cordaites and Dolerophyllum, the ginkgos, Araucaria,

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOfiV 263

the abietineans, and the Dieotyls and Gnetalcs. !!'■ believes that th< leoids gave rise

to the angiosperms, and combats the theory of a gentalean origin for the latter group. He
suggests that the main plant groups go very far back geologically and have evolved side by
side. — E. W. Sinnott.

2000. Wieland, G. R. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. A text-book for students of botany and
geology. Vol. 4. Price l£/ls. University Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Amer. Jour. Sci. 49:
223-224. Mar., 1920.

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

2001. Anonymous. Lime sulphur spray following Bordeaux. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
19: 371-374. 1919. — It has been reported that lime-sulphur spray following Bordeaux caused
russeting of the fruit. Experiments conducted in two orchards indicated that most of the
russeting was due to Bordeaux. — N. J. Giddings.

2002. Anonymous. Compatibility of spray mixtures. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 19: 244-
245. 1919.

2003. Anonymous. Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12: 112-114.
1920.

2004. Anonymous. Treatment of Armillaria with iron sulphate. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31 : 60. 1920.

2005. Anonymous. Shothole fungi which affect cherry trees. Jour. Dept. Agric. South
Australia 23: 31. 1919.— A brief summary of the results of spray tests with Bordeaux, Bur-
gundy and lime-sulphur mixture for the control of the shothole fungus (Coccomyces hiemalis).
Bordeaux mixture gave good control, Burgundy mixture fair, while lime-sulphur mixture
gave no control. — Anthony Berg.

2006. Anonymous. The skin spot disease of potato tubers (Oosporapustulans). [Abridged
and slightly modified account of: Owen, Miss M. N. Skin spot disease of potato tubers. Kew
Bull. Misc. Inf. (London) 19198. 1919.] Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 26: 1245-1250.
1920.

2007. Anonymous. The Christmas tree. (Nuytsia floribunda.) Australian Forest. Jour.
3 : 10-13. 1920. — This paper discusses the parasitism and root system of Nuytsia floribunda
which is found always close to banksia or eucalypts, mostly jarrah. The parasite, through
the parenchymatous haustoria which develop on the haustoriogen (a continuous fleshy ring
encircling the root of the host), obtains an additional supply of organic materials. — C. F.
Knrstian.

2008. Anonymous. Our botanical immigrants. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 317-319. 5 fig.
1920. — A popular article on the quarantine regulations of California. — Chas. H. Otis.

2009. Anonymous. Effect of decay on wood pulp. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 247. 1920.

2010. Arnaud, G. Sur un mode de traitement de la chlorose. [A method for treatment of
chlorosis.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 136-146. 2 fig. 1919.— Treatment of chlorosis
of pears, poplars, roses, etc., due to an excess of lime, by the injection of sulphate of iron in
the trunks and large branches is described. A branch of a chlorotic pear, as a result of this
treatment, became green in eight days and is still normal after four years. In some cases

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

264 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

slight injury was caused by an excessive dose or the treatment of too small branches. The
following formula was used: powdered iron sulphate 35 to 40 grams used with 20 grams olive
oil. — C. L. Shear.

2011. Averna-Sacca, R. Molestias da macieria. [Diseases of apple.] Bol. Agric. [Sao
Paulo] 19: 430-433. 1 fig. 1918. — Diseases caused by Ascochyta sp., Pleospora herbarum, and
Sphacrella pomicola. — D. Reddick.

2012. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Peters, Charles A. The preparation of sub-
stances important in agriculture. 3rd ed. 19X14 cm-, vii+81 p. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. :
New York, 1919. $0.80.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23 : 444. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1100.

2013. Barker, B. T. P. Diseases of plants and their treatment. Jour. Bath and West
and South Counties Soc. V, 12 : 189-193. 1917-18. — Record of the occurrence of tomato collar
rot, a root disease of Belladonna (Phytophthora), a bacterial disease of plum trees (hitherto
undescribed), a disease of alder (Fomes igniarius and Polyporus sulphurcus) , and potato "rust"
disease. The following diseases are being investigated: Rhizoctonia of asparagus, apple
leaf scorch, apple fruit spot disease and tomato collar rot.—/. I. Lauritzen.

2014. Barker, B. T. P., and C. T. Gimingham. Further experiments on the Rhizoctonia
disease of asparagus. Jour. Bath and West and South Counties Soc. V, 12 : 130-134. 1 fig.
1917-1918. — This is an account of a second series of experiments with soil treatments for
Rhizoctonia violacea, var. asparagi (R. medicaginis) . For convenience carrots were used in
this test also in place of asparagus. The results obtained fully corroborate those of the pre-
vious season. The disease was reduced to a mere trace on the plot where bleaching powder
was applied (2 ounces per square yard) towards the end of the second week in April, i.e., a
few weeks before the test crop was sown. On the check plot the disease was very severe. A
considerable importance is attached to the time of application of soil fungicides, that is in
the case of Rhizoctonia not until the soil temperature begins to rise and the young growth
of mycelium makes a good start. — M. Shapovalov.

2015. Bastin, S. L. Some serious potato diseases. Jour. Bath and West and South
Counties Soc. V, 12 : 88-106. 2 pi. 1917-18. — The following diseases of potato are described
and control measures suggested: late blight, scab (common), powdery scab, wart disease,
Rhizoctonia scab, stalk disease {Sclerotinia sclerotiorum) , Botrytis disease and black leg. —
J. I. Lauritzen.

2016. Biers, P. Le parasitisme probable des Coprins. [The probable parasitism of
Coprinus.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 159-160. 1919. — Coprinus domesticus a close
relative of C. radians was found associated with a disease of Broussonetia papyrifera and is
regarded as a probable parasite. — C. L. Shear.

2017. Boeker, [ — ]. Der Kleekrebs. [Clover stem-rot (Sclerotinia trifoliorum).] II-
lustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 402. Fig. 310. 1919.

2018. Boyer, G. Etudes sur la biologie et la culture des champignons superieurs. [Biology
and culture of higher fungi.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII, 2 : 233-344. PI. I-IV,
20 fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1931.

2019. Brittlebank, C. C. The Iceland poppy disease. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 17:
700-701. 1919. — A brief note discussing the occurrence of a species of Phytophthora on lee-
land poppy (Papaver alpinum). — J. J. Skinner.

2020. Bronfion'iskexxer, J., W. T. Bovie, and Estelle M. Wolff. A simple arrange-
ment for measuring the rate of heat penetration during sterilization. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
3: 6. 1919. — "A detailed description of the apparatus, with drawings, will appear in the
Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry." — Author.

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 265

2021. Brunei*, Esteban. La pudricion negra del cacao. [Black rot of the cacao.] Re-
vist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2 : 630. / Jig. 1919. — The black rot of the cacao (Theobroma cacao)
caused by the fungus (Phytophthora faberi Maublanc) is reported for the first time from
Cuba. The disease is described and methods of control are recommended. — F. M. Blodgett.

2022. Bunting, R. H. Report of the Mycologist. Rept . Agric. Dept. Gold Coast 1917 : 19-
21. 1918. — Progress report of work on diseases of cocoa, coffee, para rubber. — J. I. Lauritzen.

2023. Butler, E. J. Report of the Imperial Mycologist. Sci. Rept. Agric. Res. Inst.,
Pusa 1918-19: GS-S5. 1919. — The report records progress made during the year under report
in the study in India of: black band of jute (Corchorus) caused by Diplodia corchori; diseases
of rosaceous plants in the outer Himalayas; various diseases of chili {Capsicum spp.); Pyth-
ium disease of ginger, tobacco {Nicotiana spp.), and Carica papaya; wilt of Cajanus indicus;
smut of sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum) ; and wheat rust. Methods of treatment and pre-
vention are recommended. — Winfield Dudgeon.

2024. Call, L. E. Director's Report. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917-18. 6S p. 1918*.—
Physiological investigations with sorghum (Andropogon sorghum) and corn varieties, showing
their comparative drought resistance and water requirements is discussed. Kanred wheat,
P1066 and P1068, three hard winter wheats, products of the Kansas Station, have been shown
to be very resistant to stem rust, Puccinia graminis tritici. The effect of stem rust on the
grain of other varieties grown in the same plots with above wheats, is shown in contrast. A
new form of stem rust Puccinia graminis tritici-inficiens is described. Under corn smut
(Ustilago zcae) investigations it has been shown that although the smut can be reduced by
fungicides, it likewise proportionately reduces the yield. Ecological studies show that
infection is local through leaf axils and not systemic. A varietal test of sorghums shows that
all are susceptible but milo and feterita. The last named are being studied with a view of
discovering what constitutes their resistance. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1466.] — L. E.
Melchers.

2025. Chassignol, F. La rouille grillagee du poirier (Roestelia cancellata Rebent.) et
le Juniperus sabina L. [The pear rust (Roestelia cancellata Reb.) and Juniperus sabina L.]
Bull Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 133. 1919. — To show the difference in susceptibility of varie-
ties the following case is given. Duchess of Angouleme pear 25 meters from a Juniper had
about one-third of its leaves attacked by the Roestelia, while an unknown variety only 20
meters from the tree had only four or five leaves affected. — C. L. Shear.

2026. Coker, W. C. A parasitic blue-green alga. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 35: 9.
1919. — Given at the Eighteenth Meeting of the North Carolina Academy of Science, and
abstracted in its Proceedings. Oogonia of Saprolegnia anisospora were found to be infected
by a species of blue-green alga which destroyed the eggs within. — W. C. Coker.

2027. Cotton, A. D. Clover stem-rot (Sclerotinia trifoliorum) . [Rev. of: Amos, A.
Clover stem-rot. Jour. Roy. Agric. Soc. England 79: 68-88.] Jour. Ministry Agric. Great
Britain 26: 1241-1244. 1920.

2028. Cotton, A. D., and M. N. Owen. The white rot disease of onion bulbs. Jour.
Ministry Agric. Great Britain 26: 1093-1099. 1920. — The white rot disease of onions, very
widespread in England and known to occur in Scotland and Ireland, causes considerable dam-
age to the onion crop, especially in market gardens and allotments, and is caused by Sclero-
tium cepivorum. It attacks both spring and autumn sown onions and is most in evidence
from the beginning of June to early August. Few infections appear to take place after that
date. In attacked plants the leaves turn yellow, wilt, fall over, and finally the entire plant
collapses and is easily pulled from the ground. Under warm, moist conditions a fluffy, white
mycelium develops round the base of the bulb which is very characteristic of the White Rot
disease and distinguishes it at once from all other diseases of the onion. A little later the

266 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts.. Vol. V,

surface of the bulb shows the presence of numerous black spherical sclerotia about the size
of small poppy seed (0.5 mm. in diameter). The sclerotia appear to persist in the soil at least
three or four years and may survive considerably longer. The disease is introduced into new
localities by contaminated soil and manure, diseased seedlings and "sets." All common vari-
eties are susceptible. Shallots are usually very resistant as is also true of leeks. The only
present known means of control is to keep the infected ground free from onions and allied crops
for a number of years. Soil fungicides have not proved effective. — M. B. McKay.

2029. Culham, A. B. Report on the agricultural station, Aburi. Rept. Agric. Dept. Gold
Coast 1917: 24-29. 1918. — Includes a note, with table, on distribution of cocoa diseases. —
.7. 7. Lauritzen.

2030. Darnell-Smith, G. P. An account of some observations upon the life-history of
Phoma citricarpa McAlp. The cause of the "Black Spot" disease in Citrus fruit in New South
Wales. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 868-882. PI. 84-90. 1918.— The paper first
presents a brief historical review of the fungus and the disease. This is followed by a state-
ment of the general symptoms. The disease is serious in New South Wales, producing
minute black spots on the foliage throughout the year. On the fruits the spots are rarely seen
before the first of August, and vary from | to \ inch or more in diameter. The disease appears
almost invariably on the sunny side of the tree and on the side of the fruit exposed to the
sun. This has been checked up experimentally and is explained as being due to the lowering
of vitality by action of the sun. — Culture data are given and the structure of the mycelium,
spores and pycnidia discussed. Two types of spores were found, large viable ones and smaller
ones, termed "X" spores, which do not germinate. — The disease can be controlled with
Bordeaux. — C. J. Humphrey.

2031. Doidge, Ethel M. The role of bacteria in plant diseases. [Presidential Address,
South African Assoc. Adv. Sci., Kingwilliamstown, July, 1919.] South African Jour. Sci. 16:
65-92. 1919. — This is a review of the history of plant bacteriology and a summary of
present knoweldge of the role of bacteria in plant diseases with special reference to South
African conditions and to diseases of plants occurring in South Africa. — E. M. Doidge.

2032. Duysen, F. Wurzelbrand im Weizenschlage. [Root-scald in wheat-fields.] Illus-
trierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 372-373. 1919. — The diseases caused by the fungus, Leptosphae-
ria culmifraga, is described and indirect control through increasing the resistance of the host
plant by proper fertilization is recommended. Badly diseased fields should be plowed up and
replanted with crops other than wheat or rye. Such fields should not be planted with wheat
or rye for a term of years. — John W. Roberts.

2033. Eberson, Frederick. A yeast-agar medium for the Meningococcus. [Abstract.]
Absts. Bact, 3: 10. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1940.

2034. Ekambaram, T. Suspected parasitism in a moss. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 206-211. 6
fig. 1920. — During the monsoon season a common unidentified moss in Madras is found with
its rhizoids and protonemata penetrating colonies of Cyanophyceae. Because the penetrating
rhizoids and protonemata are colorless, and become filled with starch coincidentally with the
decay of the alga colonies, the author suggests that the moss is parasitic on the algae. Haus-
torial connections were not observed. — Winfield Dudgeon.

2035. Eriksson, Jakob. Sur l'heteroecie et la specialisation du Puccinia caricis, Reb.
[On heteroecism and specialization in Puccinia caricis Reb.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32 : 15-18. 1920.
— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 645.

2036. Erwix, A. T. Hot formaldehyde treatment for potato scab. Potato Mag. 2l0:r14.
1 fig. 1920.

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 267

2037. Era, A. A. The true nature of plant diseases. Amer. Bot. 26: 20-23. 1920.— The
author contends that in favorable situations plants produce substances thai render them
resistant to disease ami thai if horticulture is properly conducted the plants will ward off
disease by becoming immune. — W. N. CI

2038. Felt, E. P. New Philippine gall midges. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 287-294. 1919.
—This paper is supplemental to one published in the Philippine Journal of Science for 1918.
It describes the gall midges and their food habits, but the appearance of the galls is left for
a subsequent paper.- -.Mix rt R. Si

2039. Ferdinandsen, C, and O. Winge. A Phyllachora parasitic on Sargassum. Myco-
Logia 12: 102-103. 9 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1941.

2040. Fletcher, J. J., and C. T. Musson. On certain shoot-bearing tumors of Euca-
lypts and Angophoras, and their modifying influence on the growth habit of the plants. Proc.
Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 191 233. PI. 4~26. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1888.

2041. Foex, Et. Note sur une maladie du poirier. [Note on a pear disease.] Bull. Soc.
Path. Veg. France 6: 102-104. Sept. -Oct., 1919. — A canker on pear branches in France is
described and regarded as identical with the disease described by Griffon and Maublanc.
Diplodia griffoni Sacc. or Sphaeropsis pseudo-diplodia Fckl., the pyenidial form of Physalo-
spora cydoniac, was found on the cankers and is regarded as the cause. Cutting out of cankers
and spraying with Bordeaux are recommended. — C. L. Shear.

2042. Foex, Et. Au sujet dun epi de ble partiellement charbonne. [Regarding a partially
smutted head of wheat.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 105-106. 1919. — A case is reported
in which a head of wheat showed the lower spikelets smutted by Ustilago tritici and the upper
apparently healthy. Three of the unsmutted grains were grown and produced plants free
from smut. It is suggested in explanation that the apparently sound spikelets escaped infec-
tion or the infection remained dormant. Peglion is cited as having examined similar cases
partially smutted by Tillet%a caries without finding traces of mycelium in the unsmutted
spikelets. A thorough microscopic examination of such cases is necessary in order to deter-
mine with certainty whether a partial or undeveloped infection has taken place. — C. L. Shear.

2043. Foex, Et. Note sur une maladie de l'orge et de l'avoine. [Note on a disease of rye
and oats.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 118-124. Nov. -Dec, 1919. — A disease of oats and
rye somewhat resembling foot rot is described. A species of Fusarium was found on the dis-
eased stems. This was compared with F. rubuginosum and other species reported on grain
but no positive identification made. Soil sterilization and burning of all diseased plants
are suggested as control measures. — C. L. Shear.

2044. Foex, Et. Quelques remarques au sujet de la presence de peritheces de Phyllac-
tinia corylea sur des feuilles de Chene atteintes de "Blanc." [ Note on the presence of peri-
thecia of Phyllactinia corylea on oak leaves affected with powdery mildew.] Bull. Soc. Path.
Veg. France 6: 161-166. 1919.— Oak leaves having all the appearance of the mildew attributed
to Microsphaeria quercina were found to bear perithecia of Phyllactinia. Certain peculiari-
ties of the walls of the hyphae of the mildew on the leaves known to occur in Microsphaeria
but not in Phyllactinia lead the author to believe that the perithecia found were not pro-
duced on the oak leaves but blown there from some other host. — C. L. Shear.

2045. Greene, Latjrenz, and I. E. Melhus. The effect of crown gall upon a young apple
orchard. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta, Res. Bull. 59: 147-176. 8 pi, 3 fig. 1919.— This bulletin
deals with the effect of crown gall on a young orchard up until the bearing age. Infected
trees were selected and planted on a modified Missouri loess type of soil. The observations
extended over a five years period. Crown gall effects were determined by measurements of
the trunk diameter, and by consideration of the twigs, their number, length, thickness and
weight. The large galls were more injurious than the small ones and those on the stock and
union were more harmful than those on the secondary growth. — /. E. Melhus.

268 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2046. Grove, O. Notes on the fruit blossom bacillus. Investigations on diseases of plants
and their treatment. Jour. Path and West and South Counties Soc. 5, 12: 124-128. 1917-18.
— The bacillus (specific name not mentioned) which causes disease of pear blossoms was iso-
lated from several samples of soil and is supposed to be common there in April, but not earlier
in the year. Cultures made from the roots of various plants yielded apparently the same or-
ganism. An experiment was carried on with plants grown in sterilized soil in pots, one set
of which was inoculated with cultures of the bacillus. It was found that the latter had a
decided beneficial effect upon the growth of the plants. A description is given of morphologi-
cal, cultural and some biochemical characters of the bacillus. — M . Shapovalov.

2047. Hendrick, J. The use of lime in controlling finger-and-toe in turnips. Trans.
Highl. and Agric. Soc. Scotland V, 30: 137-145. 1918. —The author presents data to show that
the application of sufficient lime to neutralize the sourness and leave an excess carbonate of
lime in the soil will check or prevent finger-and-toe (Plasmodiophora brassicae) in turnips. —
J. I. Lauritzen.

2048. Hess, E. Die Mistel auf dem schwarzen Walnussbaum (Juglans nigra). [Mistle-
toe on the black-walnut (Juglans nigra).] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 1-2. 1 fig. 1920.
— This is the first occurrence of mistletoe on black walnut recorded. It occurred in a park in
the village of Champagne, Waadtlander Zura. A possible explanation for its occurrence on
this species is the less astringent sap as compared to other nut trees. The mistletoe is sup-
posed to have been disseminated from nearby fruit trees. — J. V. Hofmann.

2049. Honnet, G. Les hybrides en 1919. [1919 hybrids.] Rev. Vitic. 22:53-59. 1920 —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1744.

2050. Howard, Albert. Spike disease of peach trees: an example of unbalanced sap-
circulation. Indian Forester 45: 611-617. 1919. — The characteristics of the spike disease of
sandalwood are similar to those of the peach. When the peach is budded on the almond,
unless there is close junction between bud-ring and seedling, there is a delayed union and a
callus tissue forms until the stock and scion are united. In the former case when the union
is perfect, the treegrows normally and vigorously; in the latter case development is slow and
the tree becomes "spiked," with the characteristics of form and of mineral and starch content
very similar to the sandal. It is suggested that the spike of sandal may be due to the
imperfect union of the root haustoria with the host. — E. N. Munns.

2051. Hubert, Ernest E. Disposal of infected slash on timber-scale areas in the north-
west. Jour. Forestry 18: 34-56. 1920. — Factors of available water and food supply, resist-
ance of the host to sporophore production, temperature, humidity and light are most important
in the production of sporophores of wood-destroying fungi. These may be present in the
slash of cut-over areas and all the destructive wood-rotting fungi can develop on infected
slash. These are sources of infection to the remaining trees of the stand. Slash should be
burned or charred as far as possible or otherwise dragged into openings where the soil and air
is drier and warmer. This is not so important with the yellow pines as with the firs and cedars
because of the moister sites occupied by the latter. — E. N. Munns.

2052. Kern, Frank D. Report of the botanist. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. ll:
24-26. 1918. — Attention is called to the greater need for practicing the methods which have
already been worked out for the control of crop diseases. Statistics are given on the losses
to the oat, potato and apple crop occasioned by plant disease during the season 1917. — C. R.
Orton.

2053. Klebahn, H. Haupt- und Nebenfruchtformen der Askomyzeten. Erster Teil:
Eigene Untersuchungen. [Perfect and imperfect stages of ascomycetes.] 395 p., 275 fig.
Gebr. Borntniger: Leipzig, 1918.

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 269

20,54. Koerner, W. F. Auf welche Krankheitsformen ist beim "Durchsehen" und "Aus-
hauen" der zur Saatgewinnung bestimmten Kartoffelfelder besonders zu achten. [What dis-
eases are to be considered especially in going through and thinning out potato fields from which
seed potatoes are to be selected.) Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39:323-324. Fig. 258-859. 1919.

2055. Kornautii, K. Bericht der K. K. landwirtschaftlich-bakteriologischen und Pflanz-
enschutzstation in Wien fur das Jahr 1917. [Report for 1917, of the Vienna institute for agri-
culture, bacteriology and plant piotection.) Zeitschr. landw. Versuchsw. O.-tcrr. 21: 377-393.
1918. — Occurrence of potato black leg and an early severe outbreak of blight (I'hytophthora
infcstaris) , tomato rot caused by Phytobacter lycopersicum, core rot of apple caused by Fusa-
rium pulrcfaciens and a disease of Picea pugcns caused by Cucurbitaria piceae. — Seeds of cu-
cumber, onion and bean were tested for tolerance to a variety of proprietary disinfectants. —
"Bosnapasta is a satisfactory preventive of cucumber mildew (P. cubensis) and scab (Clado-
sporJu?7i). [Through abst. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 241-242. 1919
(1920).] — £>. Reddick.

20.56. Lee, H. Atherton, and Harry S. Yates. Pink disease of citrus. Philippine
Jour. Sci. 14: 657-671. 7 pi., 2 fig. 1919. — -The disease is caused by Corticium salmonicolor
B. & Br. At present localized in a small area, hence the importance of a description of the
disease and the method of eradication to prevent further spread. The method of dissemination
is studied and recommendations are made for its treatment with lime sulphur spray. — Albert
R. Sivcetser.

2057. Lees, A. H. "Reversion" of black currants. Jour. Bath and West and South
Counties Soc. 5, 12 : 134-135. 1917-1918.— An explanation is given as to the probable causes
of an abnormal lateral growth in currants, known as big bud or reversion. It is said to be
due to a check in terminal growth of which two cases were observed: the mite-checked ter-
minal and the formation of a terminal flower. The latter was found to occur on shoots that
were making a comparatively weak growth. — M. Shapovalov .

2058. Lees, A. H. Further experiments on big bud mite. Jour. Bath and West and South
Counties Soc. 5, 12 : 137-139. 1917-1918.— Experiments were conducted to determine the num-
ber of sprays necessary for the control of the big bud mite, and the best time for their appli-
cation. It was found that 2 applications give better results than one and possibly 3 are
necessary. The following months were selected: (a) beginning of December, (b) beginning
of January and (c) end of February. A satisfactory control was obtained with a mixture
containing 10 per cent of soap and 5 per cent of crude carbolic acid. — M. Shapovalov.

2059. Lees, A. H. Copper stearate. Jour. Bath and West and South Counties Soc. 5,
12: 139-142. 1917-1918. — A proper combination of soap and copper sulphate, called for con-
venience copper stearate, possesses high wetting and spreading properties. Ordinarily both
Burgundy and Bordeaux mixtures alone are deficient in these qualities. The wetting powers
of the copper soap mixture may be greatly increased by combining it with a 2 per cent par-
affin emulsion [kerosene]. — M. Shapovalov.

2060. Levy, E. Bruce. Investigation of dry-rot in swedes. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
19: 223-228. 1919. — A dry rot disease of swede turnips (Brassica campestris) is serious in
certain sections and is frequently followed by soft rot. The article deals only with direct
control measures. The effects of various fertilizer combinations were tried and a super-
phosphate-guano mixture seemed to give a slight improvement. Seed from different sources
gave little variation in the amount of disease. A large number of varieties were tested and
some were found to be slightly resistant. Selection of resistant plants for seed is to be
practiced. — N. J. Giddings.

2061. Lewis, A. C. Annual Report of the State Entomologist for 1919. Georgia State
Bd. Entomol. Bull. 55. 31 p. Fig. 2. 1920. — Contains a statement of the work conducted
by the Georgia State Board of Entomology, one of the main lines having been the dusting of

270 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

peaches {Amygdalus persica) against diseases and insects. In the garden and truck work,
spraying against the Mosaic disease of peppers {Capsicum annuum) was undertaken. Black
Leaf 40 was used against the plant lice in an effort to prevent spread of the trouble. Experi-
ments appeared successful, but it was found hard to control the lice. This work will be con-
tinued.— The breeding of cotton (Gossypium hirsutum), the testing of varieties and the
growing of wilt resistant strains were part of the activities of the Board during 1918. — Two new
insects were reported in Georgia, one being a species of Margarodes and the other the Chrys-
anthemum Midge (Diarthronomyia hypogaea) . The latter part of the report contains a list
of the Georgia nurseries inspected for 1918-1919. — T. H. McHatton.

2062. Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes, No. 61. P. 877-993, pi. 124-139. Cincinnati,
Ohio, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1959.

2033. Matz, Julius. Algunas enfermedades del follaje en las plantas. [Foliage diseases.]
Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 624-625. 1919. — Reprinted from Revist. Agric. Puerto Rico.

2064. McKay, M. B. Verticillium wilt of potatoes in Oregon. Potato Mag. 26: 10-11, 38,
42. 5 fig. 1919. — V. albuatrum may be present in apparently healthy tubers and absent in
tubers with discolored strands. It may survive a winter in either end of a tuber from a dis-
eased hill, or in trash from diseased plants in the soil. The fungus first attacks the small
roots. It spreads through the soil along the row. Infection in 90 per cent of the hills reduced
the yield by 32.5 per cent. — Donald Folsom.

2065. McRae, W. Administration report of the Government Mycologist for the year 1917-
18. Rept. Dept, Agric. Madras 1917-18: 77-80. 1918.— A progress report of the work being
done on miscellaneous diseases is given. — J. I. Lauritzen.

2066. Melhus, I. E., and L. W. Durrell. Cereal rusts of small grains. Iowa Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 62. 15 p., 11 fig. 1919. — The five different rusts commonly attacking the small
grains are described in a popular manner. The time of appearance of stem rust (Puccinia
graminis) in the spring and its spread from the common barberry (Berberis vulgaris) is shown
in tabular and graphic form. During the past two years (1917 and 1918) a great many bar-
berry bushes have been found in the state growing as hedges in the country and town or as
clump plantings on public and private grounds in the cities. Previous to 1917, all of the nurs-
eries in the state carried extensive plantings for distribution. In some cases these plant-
ings covered five acres. In addition to being domesticated, this shrub is at present tending
to run wild in some localities, 20 such places having been found. Data at hand show that in
1917 before the barberry eradication movement was begun, there were in Iowa at least a
million bushes. Their distribution was general over the state, and they were found in every
county, although the largest numbers were found in the larger cities. The relation of crown
rust to the various species of buckthorn (Rhamnus) in the state is explained. There are three
species of buckthorn in Iowa. Two of them have been introduced from Europe and are sold
by nurserymen for ornamental and hedge purposes. These are Rhamnus cathartica and R.
frangula. The latter species is very resistant to the alternate stage of crown rust. — I. E.
Melhus.

2007. Melhus, I. E., and L. W. Durrell. Studies on the crown rust of oats. IowaAgric.
Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 49: 115-144. 6 fig. 1919. — -A progress report dealing largely with factors
influencing the growth and reaction of crown rust on oats and different species of Rhamnus.
The minimum, optimum and maximum temperatures for urediniospore germination are given.
The per cent of germination of urediniospores produced in the greenhouse is variable. Ure-
diniospores must be in direct contact with water in order to germinate. Vaseline and paraf-
fine oil in contact with water acted as stimulants. The special form of crown rust on oats
uses Rhamnus cathartica and R. lanceolala as alternate hosts. R. frangula, R. caroliniana
and R. alnifolia, according to the data presented, do not harbor the aecial stage of crown rust
of oats. — I. E. Melhus.

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 271

2068. Miovi6 and Anderlic\ Uber Tomatener krankungen. [Tomato diseases.] Zeit-
schr. landw. Versuchsw. Osterr. 21:407-415. 191S. — Phytophthora infestans and Gloeosporium
phomoides attacked tomatoes in Dalmatia. The latter fungus attacked only the variety
Ficarazzi causing wrinkled, unmarketable fruit. The diseases were controlled by 4 applica-
tions of 1 per cent Bordeaux mixture the first applical ion being made in the hot-bed. [Through
abst. by M atousciikk in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 253-254. 1919 (1920).]— J). Reddick.

2069. Mihande, Robert. Sur une maladie de la Coque de Noix. [A disease of the shell
of walnut (Juglans regia).] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 6: 134-136. PL 1, 6 fig. Nov.-
Dec, 1919. — Nuts of Juglans (cultivated) from certain trees show thin places or irregular
lesions penetrating the shell. No insect or fungus was associated with the trouble and it is
regarded as a physiological disorder or degeneration. It is confined to certain trees which
show the disease each year. — C. L. Shear.

2070. Moesz, G. Mykologiai Kozlemenyek. III. Kozlemeny. [Mycological investiga-
tions. III.] Bot. Kozl. 17: 60-78. 11 fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1962.

2071. Moesz, G. Megjegyzes Schilbersky K. — nak a fekete a gabonarozsda targyaban
tett javaslatahoz. [Remarks on Schilbersky 's lecture on black rust of cereals.] Bot. Kozl.
17: 49-51. 1918. — Review of facts concerning overwintering of Puccinia graminis and role of
barberry in its perpetuation and dissemination. Suggests that critical study be made before
restrictive measures of the more northerly countries are adopted in Hungary. [Through abst.
by Matotjschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 255-256. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2072. Mtjnn, M. T. The seed analyst's responsibility with reference to seed-borne plant
diseases. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts of North America 1919: 31-35. 1919.

2073. Nicholls, H. M. Annual report of the Government Microbiologist. Tasmania Agric.
and Stock Dept. Rept, 1916-17: 20-23. 1917. [Appeared, 1918.]— "Owing to the phenome-
nally wet season, fungous diseases of all kinds were very common in fruit and other crops."
Apple scab, "powdery mildew or fire blight," black rot (Sphaeropsis malorum) abundant and
destructive on apples. Puccinia pruni injured stone fruits, generally, including apricots;
Coryncutn beyt rincki also was injurious to stone fruits causing shot-hole. Potato blight
[ Phytophthora] was widespread and losses ranged up to 100 per cent. Experiments for the con-
trol of a pea disease, caused by Rhizoctonia, are reported but were practically without result
owing to wet weather. Peronospora viciae does some damage to peas. — Iron sulfid spray gave
satisfactory control of apple mildew. [See also next following Entries, 2074, 2075.] — D.
Reddick.

2074. Nicholls, H.M. Annual report of the Government Microbiologist. Tasmania Agric.
and Stock Dept. Rept. 1917-18: 13-16. 1918. — Diseases much less prevalent than previous
year on account of dry season. In addition to notes on apple diseases and potato blight,
Fusarium solani is reported as the cause of a destructive potato wilt. [See also next preced-
ing and next following Entries 2073, 2075.] — D. Reddick.

2075. Nicholls, H. M. Annual report of the Government Microbiologist. Tasmania
Agric. and Stock Dept. Rept. 1918-19: 20-23. 1919. — Oidium lactis has been found to cause
rancidity in butter. Slow pasteurization of cream is effective in prevention. — Potato tubers
were subjected to a temperature of 125°F. for 4 hours to kill Phytophthora. When planted,
they sprouted sooner and more evenly than untreated tubers and made a better crop. Owing
to the dry season late blight did not develop in the field. Early blight (Macrosporium) , wilt
(Fusarium), scab (Rhizoctonia), scurf (Spondylocladium) , potato moth, and eel-worm were
prevalent on potato. Rhizoctonia of potato also injures field pea. Fruit diseases occurred
as in 1916-17 (see second preceding entry) but were not so serious owing to dry season. — Young
apple trees which suddenly wilt and die were found affected with a fungus "identical in every
respect with Fusarium vasinjectum." Action of fungus seems to he purely mechanic:! 1 (throm-

272 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

botic). Cold wet springs are favorable to the disease. Trees are very susceptible up to the
eighth year. Indications are that fungus gains entrance at time of budding or grafting. —
Somewhat similar disease of apricots is said to be caused by Nectria cinnabarina. — Differen-
tial stain for mycelium of these two organisms in wood is: very weak solution Delafield's
haematoxylin, 24 hours, differentiated in ammoniated distilled water. [See also next preced-
ing Entries, 2073, 2074.]— D. Reddick.

2076. Nicholson, C.G. Some vegetable parasites. Sci. Amer. 122 : 87-97. 4 fig. 1920.—
A popular article on flowering plants and fungi that derive nourishment from other plants.—
Chas. H. Otis.

2077. Osborne, T. G. B. Black leg disease of cabbages. Jour. Dept. Agric. South
Australia 23 : 107-110. 1 fig. 1919. — The article contains a brief summary of the history of
the disease in South Australia. A detailed description of the symptoms, and remedial meas-
ures based upon K. P. Henderson's work (Phytopathology 7: 379-431. 1918) is given.—
Anthony Berg.

2078. Osborne, T. G. B. Two serious new wilt diseases. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Aus-
tralia 23 : 437. 1919. — Two serious wilt diseases hitherto unrecorded in the state have come
to the attention of the author. The one a spotted wilt of tomato which develops on the young
leaves, leaf stalk and stems in irregular, brown spots and within a few days the whole plant
wilts from above downward. The other is a strawberry wilt. Apparently healthy plants wilt
within a few hours in hot weather; though seldom killed outright the first season the plants
fail to make thrifty growth or to bear fruit. The disease can be spread by planting offshoots
from diseased plants. Healthy plants set out in beds that had a diseased crop the previous
season become affected. — Anthony Berg.

2079. Osmaston, A. E. Observations on some effects of fires and on lightning-struck
trees in the chir forests of the North Garhwall Division. Indian Forester 46: 125-131. 1920.
— Chir forests were badly burned in 1916 and the trees apparently have not been killed by heat
directly but through the subsequent action of insects, especially bark beetles, and fungi.
Similar action is seen in trees struck by lightning, the infection spreading to surrounding trees
in the group. This may be due to electrical disturbances and action on the cambium as well
as to external agencies. — E. N. Munns.

2080. Osterwalder. Vom Apfelmehltau. [Apple mildew.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Obst. u.
Weinbau 1918: 161. 1918. — Sulfur and lime-sulfur solution are worthless for control. Best
control is early careful cutting and burning of infected twigs. The following varieties are
very susceptible: Parkers Pepping, Orleans- and Landsberger-Reinette, Goldreinette von
Blenheim, Boiken. [Through abst. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 261-262.
1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2081. Paine, S. G., and C. M. Haenseler. Decay in potato clamps due to "black-leg."
Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27: 78-80, 1920. — Cultural studies indicate that some of
the trouble from the rotting of potatoes in out-door storage in Britain during the winter of
1918-19 was due to the "black-leg" organism (Bacillus atroseplicus) . It is not certain whether
it was responsible for the initial injury or whether its presence was general in rotting potatoes
throughout the country. — M. B. McKay.

2082. Pammel, L. H. Perennial mycelium of parasitic fungi. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:
259-263. 1920. — The author enumerates many species of fungus with perennial mycelium.
Of Ustilago striaeformis he states "The purpose of this note is to call attention to the fact that
the same stool of timothy will produce the smut for years." — H. S. Conard.

2083. Peyronel, B. Sul nerume o marciume nero delle castagne. [On the blackening or
black rot of chestnuts.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 21-41. 4 pi- 1919. — A study of
the black rot of chestnuts, a condition distinctly recognizable in the ripe fruit but which,

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 273

according to the author, is conveyed to the flower at the time of flowering. The causal organ-
ism is carefully described and studied in its natural and cultural environments. Il is found
that the optimum temperature lies between 14°C. and 16°C, while a temperature of 10°C.
below 0°C. is not injurious to the organism, although growth is checked during the time of
exposure. Higher temperatures than t lie opl inium bring about a luxuriant growth which does
not last more than a very few days. On relat ively dry media there is the formation of sclerotio
tissues that are considered by the author as the adaptations for the t iding over of dry periods
rather than cold periods. Microscopically the fungus causing the rot resembles closely the
one described by Peglion and by Bainier and with a few differences of a minor importance the
incomplete descriptions of the above authors are suited for the description of the present form.
Systematically the causal organism has been placed in a newly formed genus under the name
Rhacodiclla castaneae (Banier) Peyronel. Asphyxiation of the fungus which is an obligate
aerobe, by means of CCVor simple soaking in water for a few days, may prove beneficial if
care is then taken to spread the chestnuts to dry in a thin layer in a cool and dry place. Sul-
phur fumigation was of no avail in the treatment of the fruit. Infected chestnuts being of
less specific gravity allows separation from sound nuts by flotation methods. — A. Bonazzi.

2054. Pridham, J. T. An obscure disease in wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
229-231. 2 fig. 1920. — A non-technical description of a wheat trouble is given. Abnormal
conditions appear at heading time. Heads have a faded dull appearance, are constricted, and
contain shrunken grain. The characters of the disease do not indicate take-all, Ophiobob/s
graminis. Disease not amenable to seed treatments used. Disease has been noticed at points
in New South Wales since 1911 but nearly absent several years. — L. R. Waldron.

2055. Rambousek. Uber die praktische Anwendung des Sulfins gegen Schimrnelpilze
und Schadlinge. [On the applicability of Sulfin for fungous diseases and insect pests.] Zeit-
schr. Zuckerind. Bohmen 42 : 649. 191S. — Sulfin is a new proprietary powder containing sodium
bisulfate and gypsum. Results secured thus far are satisfactory and the material is worthy
of further test. [Through abstract by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29:2S0. 1919
(1920).]— D. Reddick.

2086. Ravaz, L. Traitement de l'Anthracnose. [Control of the anthracnose.] Prog.
Agric. et Vitic. 74: 103-104. 1920.

2087. Reinking, Otto A. Phytophthora Faberi Maubl.: The cause of coconut bud rot in
the Philippines. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 131-151. 3 pi. 1919. — The history, distribution,
and nature of the disease are outlined, followed by detailed description of field and laboratory
studies of the disease. The indications pointed to bacterial agency and an organism resem-
bling Bacillus coli was isolated. Inoculations with pure cultures of Bacillus coli produced
many symptoms of the disease. Bacterial causation, however, was deemed insufficient to
account for the rapid dissemination. Trees inoculated with Phytophthera isolated from
Cacao proved positive in a large percentage of cases. Later the same f ir.^us was isolated
from the woody tissue of the coconut and reinfections proved it to be the cause of bud rot.
A taxonomic study revealed the presence of several species of the fungus. Methods of treat-
ment recommended and a bibliography is appended. — Albert R. Swcctser.

2088. Rosen, H. R. The mosaic disease of sweet potatoes. Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 167. 16 p., 5 pi. 1920. — The mosaic disease of sweet potatoes was first identified by the
author in 1918 and has since been the subject of study. Isolation and infectivity studies have
been carried on, so far with negative results. The disease is classified as a non-infectious,
heritable chlorosis. The appearance of the disease is described and illustrated. Roguing
diseased plants is recommended as a control for the disease. — John A. Elliott.

2089. Salmon, S. C. Establishing kanred wheat in Kansas. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta.
Circ. 74. 16 p. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1205.

274 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2090. Sanders, J. G. A handbook of common garden pests. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept.
Agric. I2: 1-24. 20 fig. 1918.

2091. Sanders, J. G., and L. H. Wible. List of owners of commercial orchards and
licensed nurserymen in Pennsylvania including list of registered dealers in nursery stock.
Bull. Pennsylvania Dept. Agric. I10: 1-56. 1918.— C. R. Orton.

2092. Schellenberg. Versuche zur Bekampfung der Peronospora. [Investigations of
control of grape downy mildew.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Obst- u. Gartenbau 1918: 81. 1918. —
Best mixture is 1 per cent copper sulfate, 1 per cent iron sulfate and 1 per cent hydrated
lime. Of proprietary mixtures, Martini mixture is preferable to Bordola paste. [Through
abst. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 251-255. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2093. Sciiilberszky, K. Hipertrofos paraszemolesok almagyiimolcsokon. [Hypertro-
phied lenticels on fruit of apple.] Bot. Kozlemenyek 17: 93. 1918. — The condition is thought
to be caused by excessive amount of water in soil. Tissue underlying hypertrophied area
appears water soaked. [Through abst. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 249.
1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2094. Schilberszky, K. Javaslat a fekete gabonarozsda targvaban. [A lecture on black
rust of cereals.] Bot. Kozleinenyek 17: 43-48. 1918. — Summary in German.

2095. Schonfeld, Leo. Beizendes Hirsesaatgutes. [Disinfecting millet seeds.] Wiener
landw. Zeitg. 68: 257. 191S. — In Hungary, millet seed is poured through the flame of burning
straw to free it from smut. Five per cent copper sulfate is effective but a solution of this
strength injures those seeds which are broken in threshing. [Through abst. by Matouschek
in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 255. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2096. Sch0yen, T. H. Betydningsfulde nyere unders0kelser over furuens blaererust.
[Important new investigations on Peridermium pini.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 28-29. 1920.

2097. Skola, Vlad. Uber die Zusammensetzung der durch Rhizoctonia zersetzten Rube.
Composition of sugar beets destroyed by R.] Zeitschr. Zuckerind. Bohmen 42: 135-138. 1918.

— Affected tissue contains invert sugar but no saccharose. [Through abst. by Matouschek
in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 263. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2098. Spiekermann. Der falsche Kartoffelkrebs. [False potato wart.] Illustr. landw.
Zeitg. 1918: 153. 1918.— Lesions have the appearance of true wart. Microscopic examina-
tion necessary for diagnosis. Cause of false wart not stated. [Through abst. by Matou-
chek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 252. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

2099. Spines, G. T. Damping-off and collar rot of tomatoes. Jour. Bath and West and
South Counties Soc. 5, 12 : 128-130. 1917-1918. — Both damping-off and collar rot of tomatoes
are ascribed to a fungus placed in the genus Phytophthora, but the actual species has not been
yet identified. From the results of certain studies it is concluded that the fungus is most
active and causes most damage in the first 3 or 4 months of the year and that the infection
may be carried on from year to year in the soil. — M. Shapovalov.

2100. Stevens, F. L. Foot-rot diseases of wheat — historical and bibliographic. Bull.
Illinois Nat. Hist. Surv. 13 : 259-286. 1919.— The recent discovery of a foot-rot disease of
wheat in southwestern Illinois (Madison County) and the lack of agreement among American
and European pathologists as to the cause of this and similar diseases are the reasons given
by the author for presenting this preliminary statement. A brief historical review is given in
which attention is called to a wide variance among investigators as to symptoms and causes
of foot-rot. These points of disagreement are summarized. The body of the publication

•onsists of a bibliography of 188 titles. In some cases brief abstracts are given. — H. IT.
Anderson.

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 275

2101. Stuart, G. A. D. Mycology and operations against disease. Rept. Dcpt. Agric.
Madras 1917-18: 17-20. 1918. An account of the progress in the study and control of: sec-
ondary leaf fall of Hcvea; a disease of paddy, variety korangu samba (caused by Piricularia
oryzac); bleeding; disease of coconuts; rot of stored potatoes; Palmyra disease; and Mahali
disease on Arecapalm nuts. — The cause of secondary Leaf fall in II < vt a is Phytophthora meadii .
which differs from a somewhat similar fungus reported brom Ceylon. — ./. I. Lauritzen.

2102. Stuckey, H. P., and B. B. Higgins. Spraying peaches. Georgia Agric. Exp. Sta.

Bull. 135: 91-101. 1920. — The bulletin discusses briefly peach diseases and peach insects and
recommends formulae for controlling sprays. The effects of commercial lime-sulphur upon
peach foliage is discussed, the results being obtained from experiments with six plats of Klberta
peaches. Solutions of the following; densities were used: 1.003, 1.004, 1.005, 1.006, 1.007,
1.008 specific gravity. Five days after application, the following conditions were found:
(I) sprayed with lime sulphur of specific gravities 1.003 to 1.004, not injured ; (2) 1.005 burned
about 5 per cent of the leaves and these fell from the trees; (3) 1.006 approximately 10 per
cent of the leaves injured and fallen; (4) 1.007 and 1.008 did not cause the leaves to fall but
burned holes where the droplets of spray collected. — T. H. McHatton.

2103. Thomas, P. H. Annual report of the Assistant Fruit and Forestry Expert. Tasmania
Agric. and Stock Dept. Rept, 1918-19: 19-20. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1777.

2104. Thow \s, Roy C. A new lettuce disease. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5:
24-25. 1920. — A brief note is given of the discovery of a disease of lettuce new to Ohio
observed in lettuce grown under glass. The causal organism is a bacterium which attacks the
roots of the plants gaining entrance when they are young seedlings, or when unfavorable cul-
tural conditions result in a checking of growth. Preliminary investigations indicate that the
disease is similar to one previously reported from South Carolina, — R. C. Thomas.

2105. Uichanco, Leopold B. A biological and systematic study of Philippine plant gall.
Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 527-554. 15 pi. 1919.— In the present paper only the galls caused
by the action of animals, and known as zoocecidia are taken into consideration, which may
be caused by insects and arachnida, as practically no work has been done on the galls in the
Philippines. This was a virgin field. Fifty-seven species of galls were described and drawn or
photographed and the insects were reared from them. — Albert R. Sweetser.

2106. Vochting, Hermann. Untersuchungen zur experimentellen Anatomie und Path-
ologiedesPflanzenkorpers. II. DiePolaritatderGewacb.se. [Experimental anatomy and path-
ology of the plant body. II. Polarity.] vi + 838 p., 12 pi., 118 fig. Tubingen, 1918.— Review by
O. Von K[irchner] in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 242-249. 1919 (1920).

2107. Von K[irchner], O. [Rev. of : Vochting, Hermann. Untersuchungen zur experi-
mentellen Anatomie und Pathologie des Pflanzenkorpers. II. Die Polaritat der Gewachse.
(Experimental anatomy and pathology of the plant body. II. Polarity.) vi -f- 338 p., 12 pi.,
118 fig. Tubingen, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 242-249. 1919(1920).

2108. Waterhouse, W. L. A note on the over-summering of wheat rust in Australia.
Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 165-166. 1920. — Observations indicated that volunteer
wheat plants probably serve as an important medium in carrying over the rust Puccinia
graminis. Uredinia were formed at intervals during the summer months. — L. R. Waldron.

2109. Weck, R. Saatgutbehandlung der Wintergerste. [Seed treatment of winter barley.]
Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 315. 1919.

2110. Whitehotjse, W. E. Cold storage for Iowa apples. (Third progress report.) Iowa
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192: 181-216. 14 fig. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1787.

276 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2111. Wilcox, E. Mead. The nature and classification of plant diseases. Publ. Nebraska
Acad. Sci. 10: 5-14. 1920. — We may recognize four great bases for the classification of plant
diseases: taxonomy, etiology, morphology, physiology. The paper closes with a two page
classification of plant diseases, with examples, under the captions Ontopathology and Phyto-
pathology, relating respectively to functions having to do with the maintenance of life and
those concerned with the perpetuation of the species. — H. S. Conard.

SUGAR CANE DISEASES

2112. Ashby, S. F. Mottling or yellow-stripe disease of sugar cane. Jour. Jamaica Agric.
Soc. 23: 344-347. 1919. — A compiled account covering damage caused, distribution, symp-
toms, varieties attacked, and control measures of the mottling or yellow-stripe disease of sugar
cane, now prevalent in Porto Rico and the southern United States. The disease has not been
found to date in Jamaica. — John A. Stevenson.

2113. Cross, W. E. The Kavangire cane. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 63:
397-399. 1 fig. 1919. — A discussion of the desirable and undesirable qualities of the Kavan-
gire cane, the variety that has been proved to be immune to the mosaic disease, is given. It
is a cane very susceptible to frost and drought injury and its small size also makes it expensive
to handle. — C. W. Edgerton.

2114. Earle, F. S. The mosaic or new sugar cane disease. Louisiana Planter and Sugar
Manufacturer 63 : 167. 1919. — In a criticism of the article of R. M. Grey (Louisiana Planter
and Sugar Manuf. 63: 90. 1919), the behavior of the mosaic disease is stated as being often
contradictory yet in the main it is capable of causing an immense loss. A cane stalk once
affected with the disease never recovers. It is probable that Grey confused the mosaic with

•;her sugar-cane troubles. — C. W. Edgerton.

21 15. Edgerton, C. W. Mosaic or mottling disease of sugar cane. Louisiana State Univ.
Div. Agric. Ext. Circ. 32: 1-6. 1 fig. 1919. — A popular discussion of the mosaic disease of
sugar cane, including a description of the disease, varietal susceptibility, distribution and
methods ol control. — C. W. Edgerton.

2116. Edgerton, C.W., andC. C. Moreland. Effect of fungi on the germination of sugar
cane. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 169. 40 p., 9 pi., 2 fig. 1920. — The average germina-
tion of the buds of sugar cane in Louisiana is around 20 per cent. Among the many factors
instrumental in causing this low germination is that of the action of several fungi. The
common or serious fungi found on deteriorating seed cane in Louisiana, include Colletotrichum
falcatum, Melanconium sacchari, Gnomonia iliau, Marasmius plicatus, Thiclaviopsis paradoxa
and species of Fusarium and Scopularia. Of these, C. falcatum seems to cause the most loss
in Louisiana. Stalks of seed cane inoculated with this fungus at planting time show an aver-
age deterioration of about 50 per cent. Stalks that have a heavy infection of the red rot
disease, caused by C. falcatum, before cutting, do not deteriorate so rapidly when used for
seed as stalks that are inoculated after cutting. The other fungi, with the possible exception
of a Fusarium, are of little economic importance in Louisiana as far as the germination of the
buds is concerned. Preliminary tests in "seed" treatment using corrosive sublimate and for-
maldehyde have given encouraging results. — C. W. Edgerton.

2117. Edgerton, C.W., and others. The mosaic disease. Louisiana Planter and Sugar
Manufacturer 63: 253-255, 350. 1919. — A stenographic report of a discussion at a meeting
of the Louisiana Sugar Planters' Association on the mosaic disease of sugar cane. — C. W.
Edgerton.

2118. Fawcett, G. L. The yellow-stripe or mosaic disease in the Argentine. Louisiana
Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 64: 41. 1920.— The mosaic disease has been in Argentina for
at least fifteen years. In all the sugar provinces except one, it is impossible to find a plant

No. 2, September, 1920] PATHOLOGY 277

of a susceptible variety that is free from the disease. The bad effects of this disease seem to
be comparatively small as these susceptible varieties have been grown successfully for years.
The mosaic disease is not curable and it does not seem to be influenced by the root disease
or by fertilization and cultivation. — C. \V . Edgertun.

2119. Grey, Robert M. The mosaic or mottling disease. Louisiana Planter and Sugar
Manufacturer 63: 199. 1919.— An answer to the communication of F. S. Earle (Louisiana
Planter and Sugar Manuf. 63: 167. 1919). Sugar cane plants affected with the mosaic, and
so identified by authorities of the United States Department of Agriculture, recovered from
the trouble in 116 days. — C. W. Edgerton.

2120. Grey, R. M. The new cane disease in Cuba. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manu-
facturer 63 : 90. 1919. — The mosaic or mottling disease has been in Cuba for a number of
years. From observations made at the Harvard Experiment Station, Central Soledad, Cien-
fuegos, Cuba, the claim is made that the disease causes little or no loss and that stalks will
frequently ougtrow the trouble. It is believed that the prevalency of the disease is influenced
by such weather conditions as rainfall. — C. W. Edgerton.

2121. Johxston, John R. The new cane disease in Cuba. Louisiana Planter and Sugar
Manufacturer 63: 43. 1919. — The mosaic, yellow-stripe, or mottling disease of sugar cane
exists in at least three provinces of Cuba. The disease tends to stunt the growth of the cane,
causing a decrease in tonnage. The history of the disease in other countries is discussed
and the author considers that cane should be prohibited from entering Cuba from the other
countries. — C. W. Edgerton.

2122. Zeno, Rafael del Valle. "Mottling" or "Yellow Stripe" disease of sugar cane.
(Some facts relative to the importance of the discovery of the "morbid" cause.) Published
privately with two colored plates by author. New York, 1919. — Symptoms of the disease are
given as a general yellowing of the leaves, which by close inspection is seen to be caused by
interrupted streaks, elongated more or less in the direction of the midrib, of a pale green
color. Growth of the plants is slow and "closing" of the rows retarded. Development of
the canes is more puny than in the healthy plants; the internodes are spindle shaped. Ter-
minal roots are destroyed and the plant can not obtain sufficient nutritive elements from the
soil. Good cultivation has no effect on the course of the disease. — "Not because of greater
merit than that of my predecessors, but by the chance of having been guided to the right
road I can offer today to my country and to all those who have cane plantations the solution
of this vital problem, having discovered the cause of 'mottling' and practical methods for
raising plantations completely free from this disease and saving the sugar world millions of
dollars." — "Cost of the treatment will vary with the class of labor in each locality, method
of application (manual or mechanical), number of cuttings per acre, etc., but it is an insignifi-
cant sum, possible to be reckoned always as an ordinary expense in raising plantations of cane.
Before any sugar planter need pay for the revelation of the secret of this discovery, a series
of experiments demonstrating the truth and efficacy of the treatment will be made before a
committee composed of competent agronomists and interested planters." — "The committee,
composed of Srs. Georgetty, Benitez, D. E. Colon, Wale & Veve, has stipulated certain con-
ditions to be fulfilled." — The writer makes some general remarks on other diseases, states that
the pulling out of diseased stools has no scientific basis and proposes to reveal his secret for
a prize. Appended to the paper are credentials consisting of letters of introduction from
the governor of Porto Rico, other officials and prominent sugar planters and extracts from
statistical reports of the Insular Department of Agriculture, showing decreases in production
of sugar from 1916 to 1919.— E. D. Brandes.

278 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V.

PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY

Heber W. Youngken, Editor
E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor

2123. Albes, E. Scented soap from Paraguay oranges. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 88: 382-383.
o fig. 1919. [From the Pan American Ujiion.} — Concerns the distillation of oil of petit grain,
used for scenting toilet soaps, from the leaves of the bitter orange or bigarrade (Citrus bigar-
adia). There are between 30 and 40 factories operating in Paraguay, employing rather primi-
tive stills. From 500 to 600 pounds of leaves are required to produce about a quart of the
ordinary oil of petit grain. The average still will produce about 4 quarts per day. In 1913,
the amount of oil exported was 71,322 pounds. — Chas. H. Otis.

2124. Anonymous. A new source of vegetable oil. Sci. Amer. 122 : 399. 1920. [Extract
from the Bull. Imp. Inst. United Kingdom Great Britain.] — Note on a semi-siccative oil from
the seeds of Lactuca scariola, var. oleifera. — -Chas. H. Otis.

2125. Bargellini, G. Sul 1-2-3-triossiflavone. Contributo alia conoscenza della costi-
tuzione della Scutellareina. [On the 1-2-3-trioxy-flavone. Contribution to the knowledge of
the constitution of Scutellarein.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 47-63. 1919.

2126. Bargellini, G., and E. Peratoner. Sul 1-3-2' triossi-flavonolo. Ricerche per
la sintesi della Datiscetina. [On 1-3-2' trioxy-fiavonol. Researches on the synthesis of Datis-
cetin.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 64-69. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2160.

2127. Cauda, A. Contenuto in essenza dei semi di senape. [Essence content of mustard
seeds.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 122. 1919. — A short note on the total content of
essence in seeds of different species and of the same species cultivated in different regions.
Brassica alba, B. nigra and B. carinata were studied and the determination made by bromine
oxydation in a paraffin bath and subsequent weighing as sulphate. B. nigra seeds were found
to contain a higher percentage of essence than B. alba and B. carinata while seeds from plants
grown in northern localities contained greater percentagesthan the seeds from plants grown in
southern regions. Size of seed seems also to have an influence, the smaller having a higher
percentage than the larger. — A. Bonazzi.

2128. Cohn, Edwin J., Joseph Gross, and Omer C. Johnson. The isolectric points of
the proteins in certain vegetable juices. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 145-160. 5 tables, 8 fig. 1919.

2129. Cusmano, G. Sui principi ipotensivi del Viscum album. [Hypotensive compounds
of Viscum album.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 225-228. 1919. — The author prepares a solution
of the substances found in Viscum by dialyzing a decoction of fresh leaves with water. The
hypotensive components pass through the membrane, and their solution thus obtained is con-
centrated on a water bath and extracted with alcohol (96 per cent). At first there is the
formation of a homogeneous mixture, but on standing two strata are separated and the lower
one is discarded. The supernatant liquid is again concentrated and again extracted with
alcohol. As a guide for the separation of the hypotensive compounds the author used the
method of injection in the blood stream of the dog. — A. Bonazzi.

2130. Dodd, Sydney. St. John's wort and its effects on live stock. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 21: 265-272. 1920. — Deals with the effect of a plant, probably Hypericum 'per-
foratum, upon the different classes of live stock. Sensitized areas appear upon the body, espe-
cially where pigment is deficient. Develops mainly under conditions of insolation. Feeding
experiments are described. — L. R. Waldron.

2131. McAtee, W. L. Notes on the flora of Church's Island, North Carolina. Jour.
Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 35: 61-75. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2419.

No. 2, Sbp-TBMBEB, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 279

2132. Moffat, C. B. Some notes on Oenanthe crocata: its character as a poisonous plant.
Irish Nat. 29: 13-18. Feb., 1920.— The "Water hemlock-Dropwort" is notoriously deadly.
Many fatal cases are known from eating the plant. Db. Chbistison, lm\\ ever, made the dis-
covery that in the vicinity of Edinburgh this species is, for some unknown reason, devoid of
toxic properties. In County Wexford the author observed three herds of cows feeding on the
plant by preference with no injurious effects. Cases are on record of cattle in other parts
of Ireland killed by this poison. Some suggestions are made but no explanation offered. —
W. E. Praeger.

2133. Saleeby, N. M. The treatment of human beriberi with autolyzed yeast extract.
Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 11-14. 1919. — The extract was prepared by the Bureau of Science,
from brewers yeast obtained in Manila, by incubating at 35°C. for 48 hours, then filtering and
concentrating to one third the volume in partial vacuum below 60°C. About forty acute cases
were treated. The dose for adults was 15-40 cc. and children 2-4 cc. Marked results were
noted in less than three days and full relief in a week. This extract seemed to behave much
the same as hydrolyzed extract of rice polishings, only w-eaker. — -Albert R. Sweetser.

2134. Schuler, D. B. Vergiftungen durch Herbstzeitlose und deren Bekampfung. [Poi-
soning by meadow saffron (Colchicum autumnale) and its control.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg.
39:457. Fig. 361-86S. 1919.

2135. Wells, A. H. The physiological active constituents of certain Philippine medicinal
plants. III. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 1-7. I pi. 1919. — As a result of chemical analyses, made
in the chemical laboratory of the Bureau of Science, Manila, Arcangelica flava (Linn.) Merr.
gave 4.8 per cent berberine; Cassia siarnca Lam., an undetermined alkaloid; and the rhizome
of Geodorum nutans Ames., 14 per cent of a water soluble adhesive; and Coriaria intermedia
Mats., a poisonous glucoside, in its leaves and fruit. A bibliography is appended. — Albert
R. Sweetser.

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. Dtjggar, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

2136. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Haldane, J. S. The new physiology. 22x14
cm., viii+156 p. J. B. Lippincott Company: Philadelphia, 1919.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23:
586-587. 1919.

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

2137. Buscalioni, L. Nuove osservazione sulle cellule artificiali. [Further observations
on artificial cells.] Malpighia 28: 403-434. PI. 11-12. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1267.

2138. Coupin, H. Sur le lieu d'absorption de 1'eau par la racine. [Absorption of water
by roots.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1005-100S. 1919. — The roots of pea, bean, sun-
flower, pumpkin, pine, corn, and rice grew more rapidly and produced more laterals when
merely the tip was suspended in water than when the whole root was immersed. Growth was
extremely slow when corn roots were moistened in the region of the root hairs only. The
author concludes that roots absorb water exclusively by the tip and not by the root hairs;
the latter protect the root against too rapid drying out and attach the root firmly to soil
particles. — F. B. Wann.

2139. Curtis, Otis F. The upward translocation of foods in woody plants. I. Tissues
concerned in translocation. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 101-124. 4 fig. 1920. — Attention is called by
the author to the general belief that in woody plants food stored in the lower part of the trunk

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. V, NO. 2

280 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

and in the roots passes upward in the spring through the xylem. He brings forward evidence,
derived from ringed stems, that this is not the case but that the food travels upward chiefly
in the phloem. — If a ring of tissues extending to the cambium is removed at the base of a grow-
ing twig, growth above the ring is reduced even if the leaves remain, and practically ceases
if the leaves are removed. This check to growth is probably due primarily to a lack of food
necessary for energy or for building material. If the leaves are left above the ring, enough
food is ordinarily manufactured by them to allow of considerable growth. The author sug-
gests that in some cases, especially where tissues above the ring tend to wilt, the check
caused by ringing may be due to an inability of the stem to carry up above the ring such
osmotically active substances as carbohydrates, and to a consequent inability to draw up
water osmotically. He finds that the osmotic concentration of the sap of a twig above a ring
is reduced, and is very markedly so if the twig is also defoliated. He suggests the importance
of the distribution of osmotically active substances as a factor in causing polarity. — Ringing
of the stem below a fruit was found to check the growth of the fruit. — Ringing of dormant
twigs was found to decrease greatly the growth of shoots coming from buds above the ring.
Such growth as took place was evidently at the expense of starch stored above the ring and
proportional to its amount, for at the cessation of growth this starch had quite disappeared.
In several species two rings, separated by from 15 to 107 cm., were cut out from dormant
twigs in early April, and the twigs examined for starch and sugar about a month later. In
all cases starch was found to be practically absent above the upper ring, very abundant
between the rings, and considerably less abundant below the lower ring and throughout a
similar twig which was unringed. Tests for sugar above, between, and below the rings gave
essentially similar results, sugar being much more abundant between the rings than else-
where.—From these facts the author concludes that although large amounts of carbohydrates
are stored in the xylem, there is no appreciable longitudinal transfer of sugars through this
tissue, but that to be translocated the stored food must pass radially into the phloem, where
it may readily be carried upward or downward. The author also suggests that at least some
of the mineral nutrients from the soil may move primarily through the phloem. — E. W.
Sinnott.

2140. Kofler, Johanna. Der Dipmorhismus der Spaltoffnungen bei Pandanus. [Di-
morphism of the stoma ta in Pandanus.] Oesterreich. Bot. Zeitschr. 67: 186-196. S fig. 191S.

2141. LeFevre, Edwin. Brine tolerance in certain rot organisms. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 3 : 3^. 1919. — Softening of cucumbers in brine is caused by a wide range of bacteria,
among them being organisms causing soft rots, those destroying cellulose, and spore-bearing
aerobes. Bacillus vulgatus is probably the cause of much of the spoilage, since it has the high-
est sodium chlorid tolerance and fourth highest acid tolerance of 50 organisms tested. The
concentration of salt for preserving cucumbers is between 7 and 8 per cent. [From author's
abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Roddick.

2142. Loeb, Jacques. Influence of the concentration of electrolytes on the electrification
and the rate of diffusion of water through collodion membranes. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2 : 173-
200. 16 fig. 1919. — Solutions of electrolytes when separated from pure water by a collodion
membrane affect the diffusion through the membrane in a way different from that of non-
electrolytes. The latter influence the initial rate of diffusion of water approximately in direct
proportion to their concentration, which the writer calls the gas effect, as it follows the laws
of gas pressure. This effect of the diffusion of water under the conditions of the experiments
was noticeable at concentrations above M/64 or M/32. Solutions of electrolytes may also
show this gas pressure effect upon the initial rate of water diffusion, but it commences only at
higher concentrations, usually at M/16 or higher. With weaker solutions of electrolytes, the
gas effect is not evident, but the rate and direction of diffusion of water is determined more
by the electrical charge of water, by the nature of the ions and the charges borne by them.
Two rules for the sign of the charge of the water were previously given (Bot. Abst., vol. 3,
Entry 1203). With an increase in concentrations of electrolytes up to about M/256 or above,

No. 2, September, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 281

the rate of diffusion of water towards the solution is rapidly increased, which is apparently
due to increased attraction for the water by the ions hearing a charge opposite to that borne
by water. With a further increase in concentration from M/250 to about M/16. depending
somewhat upon the nature of the electrolyte, the rate of the diffusion of water towards the
solution is less than that at weaker concentrations, which is apparently due to a more rapid
increase in the repelling action of that ion bearing the same charge as the water particles.
In fact, this repelling action may become so dominant as to develop negative osmosis when
diffusion takes place from the solution toward the pure water decreasing the volume of the
solution. Therefore, within the range above stated, the reverse of what would be expected
from van't Hoff's law is observed; that is, with an increase in concentration of the electro-
lyte, the attraction for water diminishes. This was demonstrated with a number of solutions,
in some cases when water behaved as if positively charged and repelled by the cations, and
in others when it behaved as if negatively charged and repelled by anions, especially those
with higher valences. When experimenting to determine the effects of solutions on the
diffusion of negatively charged water, it was necessary to use membranes previously treated
with gelatin. — Otis F. Curtis.

2143. MacDougal, D. T., and H. A. Spoehr. The solution and fixation accompanying
swelling and drying of biocolloids and plant tissues. Plant World 22 : 129-137. 1919. — Desic-
cated slices of Opnntia discata showed vigorous swelling in water, dilute acids, alkalies, and
salt solutions; but on being dried after the first swelling, they exhibited a greatly reduced
power of swelling. Substances giving the sections their high imbibition capacity are believed
to be extracted during the first swelling. The loss during the first swelling was about 7 per
cent of the total solids, and mainly amino-acids, hexoses, malates, and salts. Biocolloids
like agar and gelatine-agar show similar losses during swelling, about 15 per cent being
extracted. Reduced swelling after extraction and drying may also be related to changes
in the colloidal mesh, aggregations, or coagulations which cannot be reversed by simple
hydration. — Charles A. Shull.

2144. Paterno, E. Origini e sviluppo della crioscopa. [Origin and development of cryos-
copy.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 381-411. 1919. — A historical study and digest of the litera-
ture on the subject of cryoscopic methods, and measurements, chiefly considered from the
standpoint of pure chemistry. — A. Bonazzi.

WATER RELATIONS

2145. Harding, S. T. Relation of the moisture equivalent of soils to the moisture proper-
ties under field conditions of irrigation. Soil Sci. 8:303-312. 6 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 2320.

2146. Hill, Leonard, and Hargood-Ash, D. On the cooling and evaporative powers of
the atmosphere, as determined by the Kata-thermometer. Proc. Roy. Soc. London 90B:
438-147. 1919. — Data are presented endorsing the efficiency and applicability of the Kata-
thermometer as an instrument for determining the cooling and evaporative powers of the
atmosphere. — R. W. Webb.

2147. Middleton, Howard E. The moisture equivalent in relation to the mechanical
analysis of soils. Soil Sci. 9: 159-167. / fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2331.

■>i

!148. Satre, J. D. The relation of hairy leaf coverings to the resistance of leaves to trans-
piration. Ohio Jour. Sci. 20: 55-75. 7 fig. 1920. — Mullein (Verbascum lhapsus) leaves offer
greater resistance to water loss in darkness than in light and less in wind than in still air,
when compared to tobacco {Nicotiana sp.) leaves, and they respond as much or more to en-
vironmental changes. Removal of hairs does not alter resistance of mullein leaves in still
air and light; but slightly decreases resistance in wind and light, and greatly decreases re-
sistance in still air and darkness, because the cuticular surface is more exposed. In darkness

282 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V

stomata are closed and water loss is cuticular. Removal of hairs increases cuticular water
loss only. As water loss from surface of mesophyll cells is 20 to 40 times cuticular water loss,
leaf hairs maybe disregarded as protection against ordinary wind and light. — H. D. Hooker, Jr.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

2149. Ames, J. W., and C. J. Schollenberger. Calcium and magnesium content of vir-
gin and cultivated soils. Soil Sci. 8: 323-335. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2293.

2150. De Turk, Ernest. Potassium-bearing minerals as a source of potassium for plant
growth. Soil Sci. 8: 269-301. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2290.

2151. Howard, L. P. The relation of certain acidic to basic constituents of the soil
affected by ammonium sulfate and nitrate of soda. Soil Sci. 8:313-321. 1919. — See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 2261.

2152. Lamprov, E. Les engrais radioactifs. [Radioactive fertilizers.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 91: 393-394. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 123.

2153. Rudolfs, W. Influence of sodium chloride upon the physiological changes of living
trees. Soil Sci. 8: 397-425. 7 pi. 1919. — The application of 1 to 10 pounds of sodium chlo-
ride to oak, birch, and maple trees shows a favorable effect in the smaller amounts and a toxic
action in the larger. Maple is most easily affected, followed by birch and oaks. The higher
trees are more resistant than the lower ones of the same species. — W. J. Robbins.

2154. Shive, John W. The influence of sand upon the concentration and reaction of a
nutrient solution for plants. Soil Sci. 9: 169-179. 1920. — A nutrient solution, consisting of
potassium dihydrogen phosphate, calcium nitrate, and magnesium sulphate was added to
washed or unwashed sea sand #nd after longer or shorter intervals of contact, the solution was
drawn off and the freezing point and hydrogen-ion concentration determined. With washed
sand no adsorptive effect was noted. The unwashed sand during the first 24 hour period
reduced the freezing point of the solution 8.5 per cent but did not affect the reaction. By
renewing the solution, the adsorptive effect of the washed sand was eliminated. — W. J. Robbins.

2155. Winterstein, E. Uber das Vorkommen von Jod in Pflanzen. [The occurrence of
iodine in plants.] Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem., 104: 54-58. 1919.

PHOTOSYNTHESIS

2156. Anonymous. Starch formation in leaves, and photographic prints. Sci. Amer.
Monthly 1:416. 1920.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

2157. Allen, Paul W. "Rope" producing organisms in the manufacture of bread. [Ab-
stract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 4. 1919. — Bacillus subtilis and 14 other very similar spore-bearing
organisms produced "rope" in bread during the first 30 hours when bread was stored at 25°.
Bacillus bulgaricus, B. aerogenes viscosus, and Bact. lactis viscosus failed to produce "rope"
under similar conditions. — In a commercial bread oven the internal temperature of a loaf
did not reach 100° although the oven was held uniformly at 204°. [From author's abstract
of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Roddick.

2158. Allen, Paul W. The manufacture of starch and other corn products as affected
by "rope" producing organisms. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 4. 1919. — "In a wet process
of the manufacture of products from corn, 'rope' production often develops during hot weather,
causing serious difficulties in the operation of the reels and cutting down the yield of starch
per bushel of corn. — B. bulgaricus was repeatedly isolated from viscous starch and gluten

No. 2, September, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 283

liquors. This organism was also isolated from the corn as it arrived in the cars. Normal
starch and gluten liquors became exceedingly viscous when inoculated with it and held at
37°C. for twenty-four hours." — [Author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc.
Amer. Bact.]

2159. Bargellini, (!. Sul 1-2-3-trlossiflavone. Contributo alia conoscenza della costi-
tuzione della Scutellareina. [On 1-2-3-trioxy-flavone. Contribution to the knowledge of the
constitution of scutellarein.] Gaz. Chim. ltaliana 49: 47-63. 1919.

2160. Bargellini, G., and E. Peratoner. Sul 1-3-2. triossi-fiavonolo. Ricerche per la
sintesi della Datiscetina. [On 1-3-2. trixoy-flavonol. Researches on the synthesis of Datis-
cetin.] Gaz. Chim. ltaliana 49: 61-69. 1919. — A theoretical study of the chemical constitu-
tion of the derivatives of the glucoside of Datisca cannabina and of the synthetic preparation
of the following compounds: 2'oxy-4'-6'-2-trimethoxy-calcone, 1-3-2' tri-methoxy-flavonone,
1-3-2' trimethoxy-isonitrous-flavonone and of 1-3-2* trimethoxy-flavonol. — A. Bonazzi.

2161. Bunker, John W. M. Some factors influencing diphtheria toxin production. [Ab-
stract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 8-9. 1919. — "Toxin production depends upon growth, but growth
alone does not assure toxin. By controlling conditions which affect growth, toxin production
can in turn be influenced." The initial hydrogen-ion concentration of the medium (optimum
PH 7 to 7.5), the final hydrogen-ion concentration (range bounded by PH 7.8 to 8.25), and the
presence of suitable polypetids in the medium are among the controllable factors which
influence toxin production by Bacterium diphtheriae. [From author's abst. of paper read at
scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

2162. Cohn, Edwin J., Joseph Gross, and Omer C. Johnson. The isoelectric points
of the proteins in certain vegetable juices. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 145-160. S fig. 1919.

2163. De Besteiro, D. C., and M. Michel-Durand. Influence de la lumiere sur l'ab-
sorption des matieres organique du sol par les plantes. [The influence of light on the absorp-
tion by plants of the organic materials of the soil.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 467-
470. 1919. — The pea, a heliophile plant which cannot adapt its assimilation of CO2 by the
green leaves to a condition of feeble light, is likewise incapable of increasing the absorptive
power of the roots whereby it might draw upon the soil for a larger quantity of organic carbon.
There is for this plant no parallelism or compensation between the absorption of COi by the
leaves and the absorption of organic carbon by the roots. — G. M. Armstrong.

2164. Donk, P. J. Some organisms causing spoilage in canned foods, with special reference
to flat sours. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 4. 1919. — "A thermophilic organism was isolated
from cans of 'flat sour' corn. This is a large aerobic, facultative anaerobic bacterium, Gram
negative, spore-bearing and non-motile, with minimum, optimum and maximum temperatures
of 45°, 60° and 76°C. respectively. It grows well on all ordinary culture media and does not
produce gas when grown in any of the standard sugar-broths. Pure culture introduced
into sterile cans of a variety of canned foods (corn, peas, string beans, pumpkins, and toma-
toes) produced the same characteristic 'flat sour.'" — Twenty other organisms were identified
from various sources. Critical conditions are being determined especially with reference to
temperature and acidity, for both vegetative and spore forms. [From author's abst. of paper
read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

2165. Drummond, Jack Cecil. Researches on the fat-soluble accessory substance. I.
Observations upon its nature and properties. Biochem. Jour. 131 : 81-94. 1919. — Temperature,
rather than oxidation or hydrolysis, appears to be the chief agent in the inactivation of fat-
soluble A of natural animal fats. Destruction occurs at temperatures ranging from 100°
to 37°, the severity varying with the temperature. Destruction at relatively low tempera-
tures suggests that the fat-soluble A may be an ill-defined and labile substance. The sub-
stance may be extracted with alcohol, but not with acid or water, and it has not been identi-
fied with any of the recognized components of fat. — R. W. Webb.

284 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2166. Drummond, Jack Cecil. Researches on the fat-soluble accessory substance. II.
Observations on its role in nutrition and influence on fat metabolism. Biochem. Jour. 13l:
95-102. 1919. — The presence of fat soluble A in the diet of adult rats is essential to their
health, while the absence of this substance increases their susceptibility to bacterial diseases.
A deficiency of fat-soluble A causes no characteristic pathological lesion in adult rats; does
not directly influence the absorption of fats, and appears to play no important part in the
absorption of fatty acids nor in their synthesis into fats. — R. W. Webb.

2167. Durbin, H. E., and M. J. Lewi. The preparation of a stable vitamine product and
its value in nutrition. Amer. Jour. Med. Sci. 159: 264-286. 1920. — Following a review of the
literature on the relation of vitamines to growth in animals the authors describe a method
of preparing a stable vitamine from corn, autolyzed yeast, and orange juice, the final product
being a grayish, non-hygroscopic powder which retains its effectiveness for 5 months or
longer. Experiments showing the efficiency of this vitamine in treating malnutrition in
children, pigeons, and guinea pigs are described. — Harris M. Benedict.

2168. Eddy, Walter H. The vitamine. Absts. Bact, 3: 313-330. 1919.— This is a bib-
liographic review dealing with the following: historical, methods of preparation, sources,
structure, function, and organisms requiring vitamines for development. The bibliography
contains 236 titles. — D. Reddick.

2169. Gillespie, L. J. Colorimetric determination of hydrogen-ion concentration without
buffer mixtures, with especial reference to soils. Soil Sci. 9: 115-136. lfig. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 1324.

2170. Grace, L. G., and F. Highberger. Variations in the hydrogen ion concentration
in uninoculated culture medium. Jour. Infect. Diseases 26: 457—462. 1920. — A medium con-
sisting of Liebig's Beef Extract 0.3 per cent, Difco Peptone 1 per cent, NaCl 0.5 per cent, glu-
cose 1 per cent, and adjusted to a reaction of PH 6.4, 6.8, 7.2, 7.6, and 8.0, was found to change
in reaction not only on autoclaving, but also on allowing the control medium to incubate.
Plain broth, free from glucose, did not give as great variations in reaction as the glucose broth.
It is suggested that the acid is formed in the medium by the breaking up of the glucose and
perhaps also by the formation of amino acids from the peptone. — Selman A. Waksman.

2171. Hagglund, Erik. Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Lignins. [Lignin.] Arkiv. Kemi,
Min., Geol. 78: 1-20. 1918-19.

2172. Hammer, B. W., and D. E. Bailey. The volatile acid production of starters and of
organisms isolated from them. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 55: 223-246. 1919. — A study
of a number of "starters" of good quality showed that more than one organism was present.
Experimental data showed that the high volatile acid content of starters is not altogether due
to the action of Bacterium lactis acidi. — Florence Willey.

2173. Harrington, Geo. T. Comparative chemical analyses of Johnson grass seeds and
Sudan grass seeds. Proc. Assoc. Official Seed Analysts of North America 1919: 58-64. 1919.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1148.

2174. Hess, Alfred F., and Lesser J. Unger. The effect of heat, age, and reaction on
the antiscorbutic potency of vegetables. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol, and Med. 16: 52-53. 1919. —
Results obtained from experiments with guinea pigs show that the antiscorbutic value of
vegetables decreases with increase in age of the vegetables and also with their subjection to
high temperature. Their efficacy remains the same for both acid and alkaline reactions.
However, the effect of alkalinization or of heat is greatly influenced by the time-factor. —
R. W. Webb.

2175. Lucius, Franz. Uber die Trennung von Glykose und Fructose. [Separation of
glucose and fructose.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 38: 177-185. 1919.

No. 2, September, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 285

2176. Mellanby, John. The composition of starch. I. Precipitation by colloidal iron.
II. Precipitation by iodine and electrolytes. Biochem. Jour. 132: 28-36. 1919. — A detailed
account is given of the effects produced by colloidal iron and by iodine, in the presence and
absence of electrolytes, on a solution of potato starch in water. The results indicate that,
while starch grains are composed chiefly of amylogranulose, they contain various polymers
ranging in complexity from amylodext rin to amylocellulose ; however, the r< lative quant it i( -s
of the dextrin and the cellulose compounds arc small. — It. II'. Webb.

2177. Molliard, Mabin. Influence de certaines conditions sur la consommation com-
pared du glucose et du levulose par le Sterigmatocystis nigra a partir du saccharose. [The in-
fluence of certain conditions on the comparative consumption of glucose and levulose (derived
from inversion of saccharose) by Sterigmatocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
167: 1043-1046. 1918. — The ratio of consumption of glucose and levulose in a modified Rau-
lins' solution varies upon the addition of different quantities of HC1 and with changes in the
nitrogen ratio, the glucose being used more rapidly. The utilization of the two sugars appears
to depend on a function of the mycelium and not on the differential diffusion of the sugars.
— G. M. Armstrong.

2178. Northrup, Zae. Agar-liquefying bacteria. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 7. 1919.
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1969.

2179. Osborne, Thomas B., and Lafayette B. Mendel. The extraction of "fat-soluble
vitamine" from green foods. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol, and Med. 16: 9S-99. 1919. — Contrary to
the statements of several investigators, the writers experimentally demonstrate that it is
both possible and practicable to obtain "fat-soluble" vitamine from green foods by mcanB
of ether extraction. — R. W. Webb.

2180. Riviere, G. De la progression de la maturation dans les poires a couteau. [Pro-
gression of ripening in table pears.] Jour. Soc. Nation. Hortic. France 20: 306-307. 1919. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1770.

2181. Schowalter, E. Zur Titration von Zuckerarten. [Titration of sugars.] Zeitschr.
Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 38: 221-227. 1919.

2182. Tasaki, Buhachir6, and Ushio Tanaka. On the toxic constituents in the bark
of Robinia pseudacacia L. Jour. Coll. Agric. Tokyo Imp. Univ. 3: 337-356. 2 fig. 1918. —
The toxic constituent proved to be a glucoside and has been named "Robitin." It amounts
to about 1 per cent of the fresh bark. The symptoms of intoxication in animals are dis-
cussed.— B. M. Duggar.

2183. Waksman, Selman A. On the metabolism of actinomycetes. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 3:2-3. 1919.

2184. Waksman, Selman A., and Jacob S. Joffe. Studies in the metabolism of actino-
mycetes. IV. Changes in reaction as a result of the growth of actinomycetes upon culture media.
Jour. Bact. S: 31-48. 1920. — The hydrogen-ion concentration of various media was tested
before and after the growth of various forms of Actinomyces with a view to determine the
changes in the media due to the different substances added as sources of carbon and nitrogen.
It was found that no appreciable amount of acid was formed from the carbohydrates studied
which included glucose, lactose, sucrose, maltose, mannitol, glycerol, starch, inulin, and so-
dium acetate. When sodium nitrate was added to the medium with the different carbohy-
drates, an alkaline reaction resulted; if sodium nitrite was added instead of the nitrate an acid
was produced. When ammonium salts of strong acids are present as the only source of nitro-
gen, the medium tends to become distinctly acid; with proteins and amino acids the reaction
may be unchanged or may become either acid or alkaline depending on the species, source of
carbon, and the hydrogen-ion concentration of the medium. — Chester A. Darling.

286 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2185. Zellner, J. Uber die chemische Zusammensetzung der Agave americana L. nebst
Bemerkungen uber die Chemie der Succulenten im allgemeinen. [Chemical composition of
Agave americana and the chemistry of succulents in general.] Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem. 104:
2-10. 1919.

METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS)

2186. Bokorny, T. Notizen uber Harnstoff und einige andere N-Quellen der griinen
Pflanzen. [Urea and a few other sources of nitrogen for green plants.] Pfliiger's Arch. Phys-
iol. 172:466-496. 1918.

2187. Conn, H. J., and R. S. Breed. The use of the nitrate-reduction test in character-
izing bacteria. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Tech. Bull. 73. 21 p. 1919.— This is a
reprint of an article in: Jour. Bact. 4: 267-290. 1919. — Abstractor.

2188. Gibbs, W. M. The isolation and study of nitrifying bacteria. Soil Sci. 8: 427-481.
4 pi., 1 fig. 1919. — Pure cultures of Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter isolated from the soil were
grown on washed agar or silicic acid gel containing suitable nutrient salts. On plates the
colonies were extremely small and required a microscope for their study. Pure cultures of
Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter did not produce visible growth when inoculated into bouillon.
Pure cultures of these organisms were maintained in a liquid medium indefinitely. Sodium
chloride at a concentration of 1 per cent was very toxic for Nitrosomonas . The soil extract
used to prepare nutrient solutions for these organisms did not prove toxic. The thermal
death point for Nitrobacter was 56-58°C. and for Nitrosomonas, 53-55°. At 28°C. Nitrobacter
in pure culture produced a maximum of 527 mgm. of nitrogen as nitrates per 100 cc. of solution.
Nitroso7nonas at 28°C. in pure culture produced a maximum of 218.9 mgm. of nitrogen as
nitrites per 100 cc. of solution. — W. J. Robbins.

2189. Mayer, A., and G. Schaeffer. Extension aux cas des microbes de la notion
d'acides amines indispensables. Role de l'arginine et de l'histidine dans la culture du bacille
de Koch sur milieux chimiquement definis. [The indispensable amino acids for micrcfirgan-
isms. The role of arginine and of histidine in the culture of Koch's bacillus on synthetic
media.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: 113-115. 1919.

2190. Meisenheimer, Jakob. Die stickstoffhaltigen Bestandteile der Hefe. [The nitro-
gen constituents of yeast.] Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem. 104: 229-283. 1919.

2191. Saillard, Emile. Balance de 1'azote pendant la fabrication du sucre. Precipita-
tion des matieres albuminoides de la betterave par l'acide sulfureux, les bisulfites et les hydro-
sulfites. [The balance of nitrogen during the refining of sugar. Precipitation of the albumi-
noids of the beet by sulphurous acid, bisulphites and hydrosulphites.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 170: 129-130. 1920.— The determination of the relative amounts of nitrogenous
compounds present in the sugary extract of the beet at the various steps in the commercial
refining of sugar is given. There is also included the effect of various reagents used in the proc-
esses in precipitating these nitrogenous compounds. — C. II. and W. K. Farr.

2192. Waksman, Selman A. Studies in the metabolism of actinomycetes. III. Nitrogen
metabolism. Jour. Bact. 5: 1-30. 1920.— The utilization of different nitrogenous compounds
by several different species of Actinomycetes and the transformation of these substances due to
the action of the organisms are considered. Various nitrogenous compounds were tested, and
glycerol or glucose was used principally as the source of carbon. The conclusions reached
are : the Actinomycetes do not utilize atmospheric nitrogen ; proteins and amino acids furnish
the best sources of nitrogen, amides being utilized to a limited extent; nitrates and nitrites
are utilized fairly well; ammonium salts are poor sources of nitrogen if glycerol is used as a
source of carbon, but if glucose is used these salts are readily utilized; the production of
ammonia from proteins and amino acids is not characteristic of the group, although some
may be produced on continued incubation. Pigments are produced by many species when
grown in media containing proteins and amino acids. [See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries 2860,
2883.}— Chester A. Darling.

No. 2, September, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 287

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

2193. Andre, G. Sur l'inversion du sucre de canne pendant la conservation des oranges.
[The inversion of sucrose in oranges during storage.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 126-
128. 1920. —Oranges were cut in two, one-half being analyzed at once for the amounts of citric
acid, sucrose, and invert sugar present. The other half was deposited in a container in which
was also placed a small vessel of toluene, and an analysis was made of this portion after an
interval of 4 or 5 months. From 11.65 to 57.33 per cent of the sucrose originally present is
changed during this period to invert sugar. The amount of citric acid remains about the same
during the interval, although specimens differ in the original amount. The rate of inversion
is more rapid at certain times during this period than at others. The rate of inversion of
sucrose by citric acid was also determined in vitro at the concentrations obtaining in the ex-
pressed orange juice. 94.08 per cent of the sucrose is inverted in 78 days. The rate is thus
faster in vitro than in the orange tissue. The variations in the rate of inversion within the
tissue are explicable on the basis of lack of homogeneity. It does not appear that the rate
of inversion is affected by the amount of acid present. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

2191. Anonymous. Fresh information concerning yeast. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 417-420.
1920. — Certain investigations on yeast in progress at the Berlin Institute of Fermentation
and at the Mellon Institute at Pittsburgh are described. — Chas. 11. Otis.

2195. Euler, H. v., and E. Moberg. Invertase und Garungsenzyme in einer Oberhefe.
(Invertase and ferment enzymes in surface yeast.] ArkivKemi, Min., Geol. 712: 1-17. 1918-19.

2196. Euler, Hans v., and Olof Svanberg. Enzymchemische Studien. [Enzyme
chemistry.] Arkiv Kemi, Min., Geol. 711: 1918-19.

2197. Giaja, J. La levure vivante provoque-t-elle la fermentation du sucre uniquement
par sa zymase? [Does the living yeast cell induce fermentation merely by zymase?] Compt.
Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: S04-S06. 1919.

2198. Grigaut, A., F. Guerin, and Mme. Pomm ay-Mi chaux. Sur le mesure de la
protSolyse microbienne. [Estimation of microbic proteolysis.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82:
66-70. 1919.

2199. Hammer, B. W. Studies on formation of gas in sweetened condensed milk. Iowa
Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 54: 211-220. 2 fig. 1919. — Gas formation in sweetened condensed
milk was found to be due to a budding organism Torula lactis-condensi . There was a variation
in different brands of condensed milk in their susceptibility to fermentation with the yeast
studied. The milk solids may retard the growth, since the yeast may grow in a saturated
sucrose solution. — Florence Willey.

2200. Harvey, R. B. Apparatus for measurement of oxidase and catalase activity. Jour.
Gen. Physiol. 2: 253-254. 1920.

2201. Herissey, H. Sur la conservation du ferment oxydant des champignons. Pres-
ervation of the oxidizing ferment of fungi.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: 798-800. 1919.

2202. Kopeloff, Nicholas, S. Byall, and Lillian Kopeloff. The effect of concen-
tration on the deteriorative activity of mold spores in sugar. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Man-
ufacturer 64: 270-271. 1920. — Spores of Aspergillus sydowi, Aspergillus niger, and Penicil-
lium expansion are responsible for some of the deterioration of sugar and sugar products.
This deterioration increases with a decreased concentration of the molasses or of the films
around the sugar crystals. — C. W. Edgcrton.

2203. Kopeloff, Nicholas, and Lillian Kopeloff. The deterioration of manufac-
tured sugar by molds. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 63: 202-206. 1919. — The

288 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

data given in this article have been abstracted from another source (Kopeloff, Nicholas,
and Lillian Kopeloff. The deterioration of cane sugar by fungi. Louisiana Agric. Exp.
Sta. Bull. 166. 72 p. PI. 1-2, fig. 1. 1919.)— C. W. Edgerton.

2204. Lemoigne. Fermentation butyleneglycolique du saccharose par les bacteries du
groupe du Bacillus prodigiosus. [Butyleneglycolic fermentation of saccharose by bacteria of
the group Bacillus prodigiosus.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 82: 234-236. 1919.

2205. Lemoigne. Reaction specifique du 2-3-butyleneglycol et de l'acetylmethylcarbinol,
produits de la fermentation butyleneglycolique. [The specific reaction of 2-3-butyleneglycol
and of acetylmethylcarbinol as products of butyleneglycolic fermentation.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 170: 131-132. 1920. — The group of bacteria including Bacillus lactis aerogenes and
B. coli which accomplish the fermentation of butyleneglycol is found capable of very accu-
rate detection by oxidizing the products of this fermentation with ferric chlorid and the treat-
ment of the compound thus formed with a nickel salt. The reaction is highly sensitive and
specific. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

2206. McGtjire, Grace, and K. George Falk. Studies on enzyme action. XVIII. The
saccharogenic actions of potato juice. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 215-227. 1920. — A study was
made to determine the effect of saccharogenic enzymes of potato juice on carbohydrates added
as well as those contained in the juice. Amylase was present and was most active both upon
the starch of the juice and upon added starch at a hydrogen ion concentration of PH 6 to 7,
which corresponded to that of the normal juice. Sucrase was present and was most active
upon the sucrose (or raffinose) present in the juice, as well as upon added sucrose at a hydrogen
ion concentration of PH 4 to 5. No maltase was detected. — Otis F. Curtis.

2207. Oelsner, Alice, and A. Koch. Uber den abweichenden Verlauf der Alkohol-
garung in alkalischen Medien. [Irregular course of alcoholic fermentation in alkaline media.]
Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem. 104: 175-181. 1919.

2208. Prinsen Geerligs, H. C. Manufacture of glycerin from molasses. Louisiana
Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 63: 268-269. 1919. [Translated from: De Suikerindustrie
19: 195-202, by F. W. Zerban.] — An account of the fermentation process involved in the
manufacture of glycerin. — C. W. Edgerton.

2209. Went, F. A. F. C. On the course of the formation of diastase by Aspergillus niger.
Proc. K. Akad. van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam 21: 479-493. S fig. 1919. — The fungus
was grown on a liquid medium using glucose and NH4NO3 as sources of C and N. The fungus
mats were ground with kieselguhr and extracted with the culture fluid. The quantity of
diastase was determined by following the time interval required for the disappearance of
starch from a starch solution of known strength, using a dilute iodine solution as indicator.
Destruction of the enzyme in the mycelium takes place from the beginning, but this is negli-
gible at first in comparison with the production of the enzyme, A maximum of production
is reached in about 5 days from the commencement of germination, after which the total
quantity declines rapidly. The nutrient fluid never shows more than a small part of the total
enzyme, and this perhaps from dead cells. — C. R. Hursh.

METABOLISM (RESPIRATION)

2210. Anonymous. How age affects the respiration of leaf cells. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 :
310. 1920. — A brief report of several investigations of respiratory phenomena, and especially
those of M. Nicholas in: Revue Generate de Botanique 30, No. 335, 1918. — Chas. H. Otis.

2211. Linhart, George A. The free energy of biological processes. Preliminary paper.
Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 247-251. 1920. — This is a brief statement of a problem which is being
started to determine by thermodynamic calculations the efficiency in the use of energy from
the carbohydrate of a culture solution during the process of nitrogen fixation by Azotobacter.
— Otis F. Curtis.

No. 2, September, 1920] PHYSIOLOCIV 28'.)

2212. Nicolas, G. Contribution a l'etude des relations qui existent dans les feuilles,
entre la respiration et la presence de l'anthocyane. [Relations which exist in the leaves between
respiration and the presence of anthocyanin.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 31: 161-178. 1919. — Compara-
tive studies of the respiration of red and green leaves of the same species were made. It was
found that leaves which become red as a result of some external influence (for example, light
intensity, low temperature, or attacks of parasites) and those leaves which are red when
young, becoming green later in their development, show an intensity of respiration greater
than the green leaves of the same species. This is especially true with regard to the amount
of oxygen absorbed. The leaves which are normally red, that is, turn red in old age, have a
much lower respiratory intensity than the green leaves of the same species. The influence
of old age furnishes sufficient explanation for this lower value. The respiratory quotient
(CO2/O2) is, with one exception, always lower in the cases of the red leaves. These results
indicate a greater fixation of oxygen in the red leaves than in the green leaves. Analyses
for acidity showed in every case a greater acidity in the red leaves. The author states that
in the leaves accidentally reddened there is a greater accumulation of soluble carbohydrates.
He thinks that the greater acidity of the red leaves is due to the presence of these compounds,
resulting in a greater fixation of oxygen and a consequent lowering of the respiratory quotient.
—R. S. Nanz.

2213. Peirce, G. J. Testing seeds with a thermometer. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 259.
1920. — The vitality, germinating and growing power, cleanness and soundness of seeds can be
determined, according to the kind of seed, by their temperature behavior when placed in ster-
ile water in Dewar flasks or thermos bottles for 2 days. — Chas. H. Otis.

ORGANISM AS A WHOLE

2214. Boyer, G. Etudes sur la biologie et la culture des champignons superieurs. [Biol-
ogy and culture of higher fungi.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeau xVII. 2 : 233-344. IV pi. ,
SO fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1931.

2215. Brenchly, Winifred E. Some factors in plant competition. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6:
142-170. PI. 5, 10 fig. 1919.

2216. C. A. H. [Rev. of: Lumiere, Anguste. Le mythe des symbiotes. (The myth of
symbiosis.) xi+205 p. 8°. Masson: Paris, 1919.] Jour. Botany 58: 26. 1920.

2217. Jivanna Rao, P. S. The formation of leaf-bladders in Eichornia speciosa, Kunth
(Water hyacinth). Jour. Indian Bot, 1:219-225. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1893.

2218. M anaresi, A. Sulla biologia fiorale del pesco. 2 nota. [Floral biology of the peach.
2nd note.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 42-67. 1919. — See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1757.

2219. Shreve, Forrest. Physiology of the mangrove. [Rev. of: Bowman, H. H. M.
Ecology and physiology of the red mangrove. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 56: 589-672. PI. $-9.
1917.] Plant World 22 : 146-147. 1919.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION

2220. Calkins, Gary N. The effect of conjugation. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol, and Med. 16:
57-60. 1919. — From a study of Uroleptus mobilis, the writer presents data showing that the
absence of conjugation promotes a noticeable physiological weakness ultimately ending in
natural death, while the presence of conjugation promotes a rejuvenescence of the protoplasm.
— R. W. Webb.

2221. Chambers, Mary H. The effect of some food hormones and glandular products on
the rate of growth of Paramecium caudatum. Biol. Bull. [Woods Hole] 36: S2-91. 1919. —
As a food hormone potato extract has little effect on the division rate. The influence of yeast

290 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

is evident in the resulting increase of the division rate. Contrasting results were obtained
with pituitary solution added to the basis fluid. Suprarenal extract caused an increase in
the rate of division. — C. R. Hursh.

2222. Linossier, G. Sur le developpment de l'Oidium lactis en milieux artificiels. In-
fluence de la quantite de semence sur le poids de la recolte. [The development of Oidium lactis
in artificial media. Influence of the quantity of inoculum on the weight of the fungous product
resulting.] Compt, Rend. Soc. Biol. 82 : 240-242. 1919.

2223. M acDougal, D. T. Hydration and growth. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ. 297. 17 x
25 cm. V+176p., 52 fig. 1920. — The author prepared biocolloids by mixing proteins, usually
of plant origin, such as bean or oat protein, with agar, gum arabic, prosopis gum, tragacanth,
or opuntia mucilage. The colloidal suspension of these mixtures in water was partially dried
in thin plates and the hydration (that is, the amount of water taken up when sections of these
plates were immersed in solutions) was measured by means of an auxograph developed espe-
cially for this purpose. Solutions of acids, alkalis, and salts were employed and a rather close
parallelism was shown between the swelling of these biocolloids and cell masses, such as sec-
tions of joints of opuntia, cotyledons of beans, and leaves of various plants. In this connec-
tion the point is brought out that vegetative cell masses, such as are responsible for growth,
are composed of colloids predominantly of a carbohydrate character, frequently of pentosan
nature. These pentosans do not dissociate and their swelling capacity is less in electrolytes
than in pure water. The hydration of carbohydrates is retarded by hydrogen ions. — Bio-
colloids behave in much the same way as do cell massses, in nutrient solutions and in bog and
swamp waters. Under fluctuating or alternating hydration effects, the basis of xerophily
and succulence, the writer details experiments in which biocolloids were subjected to alter-
nate treatments of acids and alkalis in solution. As a result of this treatment, an alternate
sxvelling and shrinking of the biocolloid was brought about. He considers these phenomena
as related to the structural variation of leaves of Castilleia latifolia; these leaves being thin
and highly acid when growing under mesophytic conditions while succulent and less acid
leaves in arid locations. Temperature effects and water deficit, or unsatisfied hydration
capacity, both in biocolloids and cell masses, are discussed. — Growth of tissues consists of two
fundamental features, hydration of the colloidal material of the plasma and the arrangement
of additional colloidal material in colloidal structures with entailed additional capacity for
absorbing water. The character of the hydration depends upon the character of the cell
colloids, proteinaceous colloids showing increases of hydration capacity with acidity, while
when the colloidal material is more largely carbohydrate — such as pentosans — the reverse
is apparently the case. Nutrient salts always modify hydration capacity. The author is di-
recting his studies toward an analysis of the phenomena of plant growth based on the physico-
chemical properties of colloid gels, especially with reference to imbibition and swelling. — Lon
A. Hawkins.

2224. Seifriz, William. The length of the life cycle of a climbing bamboo. A striking
case of sexual periodicity in Chusquea abietifolia Griseb. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 83-94. 5 fig.
1920. — The author notes the fact that several species of bamboo display sexual periodicity,
flowering at intervals of a definite number of years. Chusquea abietifolia, of the Blue Moun-
tains of Jamaica, went through such a flowering period in 1918, during which practically
all individuals blossomed, produced seed and died. The next year the species was represented
only by seedlings, except for one small area discovered by the author in an unusually arid
situation where the plants were still thriving and flowerless. The only previous flowering
period recorded for this species was in 1885, thus establishing a cycle of 33 years, very similar
to that of the Indian Bambusa arundinacea, which is 32 years. — The author discusses possible
factors which may cause such a periodicity and shows that seasonal differences, particularly
in moisture, are probably insufficientto explain them, and suggests that the problem may be
of the same nature as that of puberty and senility in organisms. No sufficient explanation is
as yet forthcoming for the remarkable fact that fully 98 per cent of the individuals of the
species come into flower simultaneously over a great stretch of country. — E. W. Sinnott.

No. 2, September, 19201 PHYSlOLOcv 291

222"). SlBGidNGER, John B. Temporary roots of the sorghums. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron.
12: 143-145. 1920.— Under greenhouse conditions the radicle is (lie only temporary root de-
veloped in sorghums. Shortly after germination the first node develops below the surface
and from this node the first permanent roots develop. — F. M. Schertz.

MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES

2226. Bbemekamp, C. E. B. Theorie des Phototropismus. [The theory of phototropism.)
Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland. 15: 123-184. Fig. 1 U. 1918.

2227. Jiv anna Rao, P. S. Noteon the geotropic curvature of the inflorescence in Eichornia
speciosa Kunth (water hyacinth). Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 217-218. / fig. 1920. — Bending of
the floral axis begins immediately after the flowers close, and results in complete submergence
of the inflorescence. The reaction is geotropic rather than hydrotropic. — Winfield Dudgeon.

GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY

2228. Bastin, S. L. Colored glass for seed germination. Sci. Amer. 122: 165. 1 fig.
1920.

2229. Duysen, F. Ueber die Keimkraftdauer einiger landwirtschaf tlich Wichtiger Samen.
[The vitality of certain agriculturally important seeds.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 282-283.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1132.

2230. Martin, J. N., and L. E. Yocum. A study of the pollen and pistils of apples in re-
lation to the germination of the pollen. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:391-410. Fig. 163-166. 1920.
—See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1759.

TEMPERATURE RELATIONS

2231. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Griffeths, Ezer. Methods of measuring tem-
perature. 22x17 cm., xi + 174 p. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company, 1918.] Jour.
Phys. Chem. 23 : 2S6-288. 1919. — The review is chiefly concerned with methods for measuring
temperatures above the boiling point of water. — H. E. Pulling.

2232. Bronfenbrenner, J., W. T. Bovie, and Estelle M. Wolff. A simple arrange-
ment for measuring the rate of heat penetration during sterilization. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
3: 6. 1919. — A detailed description of the apparatus, with drawings, will appear in the
Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry. — Authors.

2233. Crocker, William. Optimum temperatures for the after-ripening of seeds. Proc.
Assoc. Official Seed Analysts of North America 1919: 46-4S. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
1123.

2234. Shre ve, Edith Bellamy. The role of temperature in the determination of the trans-
piring power of leaves by hygrometric paper. Plant World 22 : 172-180. 1 fig. 1919. — Thermo-
electric measurement of the temperature of the cobalt chloride slip used in determining the
index of transpiring power in plants shows that the temperature of the slip varies so little
from that of the air temperature that the latter may be used in calculating the indices. Simi-
larly, in standardizing the cobalt slips over a porous evaporating surface in a small closed
room, the air temperature may be used instead of the temperature of the slip without sig-
nificant error. — Charles A. Shull.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

2235. Dubois, Raphael. Luminous living creatures. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 9 -12. 7
fig. 1920. [Translated from Science et la Vie (Paris).] — Devoted mainly to a discussion of
luminous animal life; but briefly considers luminous fungi and certain photobacteria. — Chas.
H. Otis.

292 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2236. Pulling, Howard E. Sunlight and its measurement. Plant World 22: 151-171,
187-209. 5 fig. 1919. — The author presents a general discussion of the nature, distribution,
and variability in amount of solar radiation reaching the earth, as modified by extra-terrestrial
influences, and by atmospheric conditions. Three general methods of measuring radiation
are discussed: radiometry, photometry, and actinometry. The difficulties involved in each
method, their limitations, the precautions to be observed in manipulating the instruments,
and the interpretations of measurements are considered. An extensive bibliography accom-
panies the text. — Charles A. Shull.

2237. Raunkiaer, C. Uber das biologische Normalspektrum. [The biological "normal
spectrum."] Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selskab. Biol. Meddel. I4: 1-18. 1918.

2238. Schanz, Fritz. The effects of light on plants. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 12-16. 1920.
[Translated from the Biologisches Cenlralblall (Berlin).]— Some of the topics considered are:
how light affects the albumens of plants; substances which act as catalyzers; the meaning of
colors in flowers; and effect on plants of varying intensity of light. — Chas. H. Otis.

TOXIC AGENTS

2239. Breasola, M. Le devitalizzazione dei semi di Cuscuta. [The killing of Cuscuta
seeds.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 193-207. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1112.

2240. Ciamician, G., and C. Ravenna. Sul contegno di alcune sostanze organishe nei
vegetali. Nota XI. [On the behavior of certain organic substances in plants. Xlth contribu-
tion.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 83-126. PI. 1-2, fig. 1-20. 1919.— The present contribution
is divided in two parts. Part I. The authors study the effect on the growth of beans (germin-
ated in cotton and distilled water) of repeated doses of one per thousand solutions of the
substances investigated. In nearly every case when galvanized iron containers were used
instead of glass, there was a distinct reduction in toxicity of the compounds studied. The re-
sults may be summarized as follows: Mono-methyl-amine was slightly toxic while di-methyl-
amine and tri-methyl-amine were more toxic in the order named. Ammoniacal salts, urea,
pyridine and uric acid show no toxic action in the conditions studied while tetra-methyl-
ammonium tartrate and tetra-ethyl-ammonium tartrate, piperidine, nicotine, and theobro-
mine are very slightly, if at all, toxic. The function of the methyl group in toxicity is brought
out very plainly by the fact that potassium salicylate is very slightly toxic while methyl
salicylate is distinctly toxic. A list is given of the substances found to be toxic under the
conditions mentioned. Part II. This section is given to the study of the oxidative changes
undergone by some organic compounds when incubated with spinach pulp in the presence
of adequate oxygen and of small amounts of toluol as an antiseptic. Attention is also given
to the inoculation of some compounds into living maize and to the changes undergone by these
in the living organism. Two examples will indicate the direction of the results. Succinic
acid, which by the action of light is transformed to acetic aldehyde, acetic and propionic
acids, also glyoxal, is changed by plant enzymes into acetic aldehyde and a compound de-
composed by emulsion. Lactic acid in the light yields acetic acid and acetic aldehyde, while
only the latter compound results when acted upon by enzymes. In respect to the above the
general conclusions is that the enzymes of spinach leaves have a selective oxidizing function
which in some cases does not equal the action of light, though surpassing it in other cases.
With respect to the behavior of organic compounds inoculated into maize and tobacco the
results obtained point to the fact that compounds very resistant to oxidation, such as pyri-
dine and benzoic acid, are only found in very small amounts in the extract of the plats after
inoculation. The strong oxidizing power of plants and especially of living plants may not be
due to the ordinary oxydases, but more probably to protoplasmic enzymes insoluble in water
and apparently also in glycerin.— A. Bonazzi.

2241. Malisoff, William, and Gustav Egloff. Ethylene. Jour. Phys. Chem. 23:
65-138. 1919. — This is a collection ' 'on a logically convenient basis' ' of the physical and chem-
ical data on ethylene, including references to its effects on plants. A bibliography of 324
citations is appended. — //. E. Pulling.

No. 2, September 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 293

2242. Maqubnnb, L., and E. Demoussy. Sur la distribution et la migration du cuivre
dans les tissus des plantes vertes. [The occurrence and translocation of copper in the tissues
of green plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Pun's 170:87-93. 1920. — Chemical analyses were
made of various parts of 27 types of cultivated herbaceous and woody plants and in some
cases of the expressed sap of such parts with a, view to determining the amount of copper
present. The cupro-zinc-ferrocyanid method was employed, 3 grams of dry vegel able matter
being used for each test. Copper is found to be present in all plants tested and in all the parts
which were analyzed. The amount varies from 0.25 mgm. per liter of centrifuged expressed
sap of potato to 40 mgm. per kilogram of dry leaf substance of lettuce. Copper is found in
greatest abundance in cells which are active in growth or metabolism, hence the authors con-
clude that its translocation is controlled by nutritive processes or processes accompanying
metabolism. — C.H. andW. K. Farr.

2213. Winslow, C.-E. A., and Dorothy F. Holland. The disinfectant action of glycerol
in varying concentrations. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol, and Med. 16: 90-92. 1919. — Glycerol in 9
per cent solution exerts no appreciable effect upon the viability of Bacillus culi, but in
strengths of 2S-100 per cent there is a progressively increasing "disinfecting" action, nine-
tenths of the bacteria being killed in 3 hours at 100 per cent. — R. W. Webb.

2244. Wogltjm, R. S. Is it safe to fumigate while trees are in bloom? California Citro-
graph 5 : 190. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1788.

MISCELLANEOUS

2245. Bancroft, Wilder D. The colors of colloids. II. Reflection and refraction. Jour.
Phys. Chem. 23: 1-35. 1919. III. Reflection and visibility. Ibid. 23: 154-185. 1919. IV. In-
terference and diffraction. Ibid. 23: 253-282. 1919. V. Metallic and vitreous lustre. Ibid.
23: 289-347. 1919. VI. Blue eyes. Ibid. 23: 356-361. 1919. VII. Bluefeathers. Ibid. 23:
365-414. 1919. VIII. Metallic colors. Ibid. 23: 445-468. 1919. IX. Colloidal metals. Ibid.
23:554-571. 1919. X. Glasses and glazes, /bid. 23 : 603-633. 1919. XI. Gems. Ibid. 23: M0-
644. 1919. — This is a collection of excerpts and abstracts, which includes numerous examples,
some biological, chiefly from standard works, on the physical optics of the phenomena incom-
pletely indicated by the sub-titles. — H. E. Pulling.

2246. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Alexander, Jerome. Colloid chemistry. An
introduction with some practical applications. 17 x 12 cm., vi+90 p. D. Van Nostrand Co.:
New York, 1919.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 441-442. 1919.

2247. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of : Bechhold, H. Colloids in biology and medicine.
Translated by J. G. M. Bullowa. 24 x 16 cm., xiv+464 p. D. Van Nostrand Co. : New York,
1919.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 513-515. 1919.— "It is a great pleasure to welcome an English
translation of this excellent book." — Reviewer's summary.

2248. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Ostwald, Wolfgang. A handbook of colloid
chemistry. (Translated by M. H. Fischer with notes added by Emil Hatschek.) 2nd ed.,
14x17 cm., xvi+284 p. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1919.] Jour. Phys. Chem.
23 : 364. 1919. — With a few exceptions, chiefly notes on the viscosity of colloids, the volume is
the same as the first edition and does not represent the present knowledge of the subject.—
//. E. Pulling.

2249. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Prideaox, E. B. R. The theory and use of
indicators. 22 x 15 cm.,ix+375 p. D. Van Nostrand & Co. : New York, 1918.] Jour. Phys.
Chem. 23: 203-204. 1919.

2250. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Willows, R. S., and E. Hatchek. Surface
tensionand surface energy. 2nded., 19 x lScm.,viii+114p. P. Blakiston's Son & Co. :Phila-

294 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

delphia, 1919.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 443. 1919.— "Books like these are interesting and
worth while, but condensation seems to lead more often than necessary to inaccuracy of state-
ment."— Reviewer's summary.

2251. Carles, P. La prune d'ente et les pruneaux d'Agen : Explication scientifique de leur
preparation et des moyen de les conserver temporairement pour l'Europe et de facon indefinie
pour 1'exportation mondiale. [A scientific account of methods used in preparing "prunes of
Agen" for foreign and domestic consumption.] Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII.
2: 219-232. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1866.

2252. Kopeloff, Nicholas. Micro-organisms in the sugar factory. Louisiana Planter
and Sugar Manufacturer 64: 14-15. 1920. — This is in continuation of the experiments pub-
lished in Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 166. 1919. The results obtained in 1919 agree with
those of the previous year. In the sugar factory, the greatest number of molds and bacteria
is found in the raw juice. The clarification process reduces the number in the other sugar
products. — C. W. Edgerton.

2253. Laborde, J. Recherches sur le vieillissement du vin. [Aging of wine.] Mem. Soc.
Sci. Phys. Nat. Bordeaux VII. 2: 37-75. 1918.

2254. MacInnes, L. T., andH. H. Randell. Diary produce, factory premises and manu-
facturing processes: The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 255-264. 9 fig. 1920.— The authors give the results of an investigation
relative to the bacterial flora of dairy products at various stages of manufacture and of the
various substances with which the products come in contact, including the air of the butter
factory. Not only are plat counts given of the bacteria, yeasts, and molds, but a classifica-
tion is made relative to the physiological action of the various organisms. Suggestions are
also presented in regard to creamery methods. — L. R. Waldron.

2255. Murray, Benjamin L. Standards and tests for reagent chemicals. 400 p. Van
Nostrand Co. : New York, 1920.

2256. Seidell, Atherton. Solubilities of inorganic and organic compounds. 2nd ed.t
867 p. Van Nostrand Co. : New York, 1920.

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. Skinner, Editor
F. M. Schertz, Assistant Editor

ACIDITY AND LIMING

2257. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of : Brideaux, E. B. R. The theory and use of indi-
cators. 22x13 cm. ix + 875p. D. Van Nostrand & Co. : New York, 1917. $5.00.] Jour.
Phys. Chem. 23: 203-204. 1919.

2258. Corson, Geo. E. The use of lime on Iowa soils. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 58.
7 p. 1919.

2259. Fippin, Elmer O. The status of lime in soil improvement. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron.
12: 117-124. 1920.— A general discussion of liming of soils.— F. M. Schertz.

2260. Howard, L. P. The reaction of soil as influenced by the decomposition of green
manure. Soil Sci. 9: 27-39. 1920.— The lime requirements of land on which corn has grown
since 1894 but a part of which has for about 25 years grown rye or legumes shows that no
acidity has developed from the use of rye as a cover crop. The legumes, however, have during

No. 2, September 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 295

the same time considerably increased the lime requirement. In plot experiments, with the
same soil, green rye increased the lime requirement twice as much as an equal weigb.1 of green
clover. — W. ./. Rabbins.

2261. Howard, L. P. The relation of certain acidic to basic constituents of the soil affected
by ammonium sulfate and nitrate of soda. Soil Sci. 8 : 313-321 . 1919. — Studies made on limed
and unlimed plots which have been treated with ammonium sulfate or sodium nitrate showthat
the hydrogen ion concentration in the unlimed ammonium sulfate treated plot is very similar
(about P„ 4) to that produced by even quite large additions of aluminium salts to buffer solu-
tions. Extractions with potassium chloride solution and 0.2 normal hydrochloric acid solu-
tion remove relatively large amounts of aluminum and iron from the soil of the unlimed
ammonium sulfate treated plot. — W. J . Bobbins.

2262. Lipman, J. G., and A. W. Bi.air. The lime factor in permanant soil improvement.
1. Rotation without legumes. Soil Sci. 9: 83-90. 1920. 2. Rotation with legumes. Ibid. 9:
91-114. 1920. A 5-year rotation of corn, oats, wheat and 2 years of timothy was grown on
plots which were unlimed or which received 1 ton of lime as carbonate per acre for the first
5 years and 2 tons of lime per acre for the second 5 years. The total yields of dry matter and
of nitrogen for the 10-year period for the limed and unlimed plots were essentially the same.
Analyses of the soil at the beginning of the experiment and after each 5-year period showed
a loss of nitrogen from both limed and unlimed plots but a greater loss from the limed plots.
Four 5-year rotations each containing a leguminous crop were carried out on plots which were
unlimed or which received 1000, 2000 or 4000 pounds per acre of calcium or magnesium lime-
stone. During a 10-year period, the limed plots yielded distinctly larger crops and more total
nitrogen than the unlimed. Analyses of the soil show in most cases an amount of nitrogen
in the limed plots equal to or greater than that in the unlimed. The magnesium limestone
was slightly superior to the calcium limestone. — W. J . Rabbins.

2263. MacIntire, W. H. The liberation of native soil potassium induced by different
calcic and magnesic materials. Soil Sci. 8 : 337-395. PL 1 . 19 fig. 1919.— The results of five
years experiments show that practical or economical applications of burnt calcareous lime-
stone, burnt dolomitic limestone, ground calcareous limestone or ground dolomitic limestone
will not effect a direct chemical liberation of native 6oil potassium. — W. J. Robbins.

2264. Stutzer, A. Beitrage zur Dungekalkfrage. [A contribution to the calcium fertilizer
problem.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 333-334. 1919.

2265. [Tansley, A. G.] Investigations on soil. [Rev. of: Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pem-
ber and L. P. Howard. Lime requirement as determined by the plant and the chemist.
Soil Sci. 279-282. 1919.] Jour. Ecol. 7: 214. 1919.

2266. Walker, Seth S. The effect of aeration and other factors on the lime requirement
of a muck soil. Soil Sci. 9: 77-81. 1920. — Air-drying a black muck soil increases the lime
requirements. The increase in lime requirements was less in a stirred moist portion than
in a water covered undisturbed portion. The lime requirement of stored moist samples
increased but that of stored dry samples decreased. Soil neutralized with calcium carbonate
and stored moist showed a greater increase in lime requirement than unneutralized soil. —
W. J. Robbing.

FERTILIZATION

2267. Beckwith, Charles C. The effect of certain nitrogenous and phosphatic fertilizers
on the yield of cranberries. Soil Sci. 8: 483-490. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1723.

2268. Blair, A. W. Barium phosphate experiments. Amer. Fert, 52: 142-144. 1920.—
Experiment was made comparing barium phosphate and other phosphate materials. Beans
and corn were grown. Practically no increased crop production was secured from the use
of barium phosphate. — J. J. Skinner.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, TOL. V, NO. 2

296 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2269. Forman, L. W. Reclaiming Iowa's "push" soils. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 191 :
162-176. 5 fig. 1919.

2270. Frear, William. Some notes of fertilizers and the war. Bull. Pennsylvania Dept.
Agric. I1: 29-33. 1918. — A brief summation of the past and present sources of supply of pot-
ash, nitrogen and phosphoric acid with remarks concerning the difficulties which are being
encountered among the domestic manufactures of fertilizers.— C. R. Orton.

2271. Harrison, W. H. Report of the Imperial Agricultural Chemist. Sci. Rept. Agric.
Res. Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 35^45. 1919. — A summary of the work carried on during the year at
the Agricultural Research Institute, Pusa, India, and a program for 1919-20. From studies
in the method of retention of superphosphate in soil, it is concluded that the phosphate is
held in non-calcareous soils by absorption, and in calcareous soils by chemical combination,
and therefore the range of application and method of employment of superphosphate as fer-
tilizer must be different in the two types of soil. — Sugar cane (Saccharum officinarxim) stored
in windrows in the North-West Frontier Province shows increasing content of both glucose
and sucrose, but other changes render the final sucrose jaeld nearly constant with continued
storage. Immediately following heavy rainfall there is rapid deterioration of the cane. —
In fertilizer experiments with rice (Oryza sativa), green manure combined with ammonium
sulphate gave an increase in yield almost exactly proportional to that given by sulphate alone.
— Winfield Dudgeon.

2272. Jacob, A. Beeintrachtigung der Bodenstruktur durch Kochsalz-Diingung. [In-
jury of the soil structure through applications of sodium chloride.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg.
39:420-421. 1919.

2273. Jordan, W. H., and G. W. Churchill. An experience in crop production. New
York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 465. 20 p. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1164.

2274. Mitscherlich, Eilh. Alfred. Zum Gehalt der Haferpflanze an PhosphorsSure
und seinen Beziehungen zu der durch eine Nahrstoffzufuhr bedingten Ertragserhohung. [On
the phosphoric acid content of the oat plant and its relation to the increased yield resulting
from the addition of nutrients.] Jour. Landw. 67: 171-176. 1 fig. 1919.

2275. Munter. Pflanzenanalyse und Dungerbediirfnls des Bodens. [Plant analysis
and fertilizer requirement of the soil.] Jour. Landw. 67: 229-266. 1919. — The following re-
sults reported were obtained on the Lauchstedt loessal loam soil with winter wheat when fer-
tilized with different materials: Fertilizing with potassium and phosphoric acid increased
the silicic acid content of the straw, fertilizing with nitrogen decreased it, — Fertilizing with
potassium and phosphoric acid decreased the nitrogen, calcium and magnesium content of
the straw; nitrogen increased it. — The nitrogen content in the grain was decreased by potas-
sium and increased by phosphoric acid. — The chemical analysis of the wheat plants of a fer-
tilized plat gave no sure indication of the fertilizer need of the soil. — The better the growing
season, the more does nitrogen control the formation of organic substance, especially in the
grain, therewith the total calcium, magnesium, potassium and phosphoric acid taken up.
In poorer growing seasons potassium influences more the plant production. Phosphoric acid
is apparently indifferent. — Nitrogen, potassium or phosphoric acid used alone first influences
the straw. — The weather condition of any year exerts a strong influence upon the taking up
of nitrogenous matter, sometimes even more than the fertilizer applied, thereby rendering
the percentages of nitrogen resulting from incomplete fertilizer applications unreliable in
indicating fertilizer needs of the soil. — The nitrogen requirement of the Lauchstedt soil may
be determined by the quantities of N, CaO, and MgO in the wheat plant. When the sum of
N, CaO and MgO ingrain and straw fori hectar amounts to more than 90 kgm., or in grain more
than 60 kgm., or in straw more than 30 kgm., then there is sufficient nitrogen present in the
soil. — If after subtracting the sum of the N-f- CaO+MgO percentages from the potassium per-
centage the result is positive, the potassium content of the soil is sufficient for plant produe-

No. 2, September, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 297

tion, if it is negative, potassium is lacking. — The plants ^rom the plats without fertilizer
and with full fertilizer usually contain the same percentages of N and PjOj. Only the potas-
sium content of the straw is higher in the fully fertilized plot than in the unfertilized plot.
A comparison of the plant analysis of unfertilized and fully fertilized plots gives no informa-
tion as to the plant food in a soil. The fertilizer requirement of a soil becomes evident if the
plants of two incompletely fertilized plots arc investigated, e.g., plots receiving (1) N, and
(2) PjOs-f-KvO applications of fertilizer. If thereupon the ratio of N:K20 is less than 100:200
potassium is lacking; if it is wider, then sufficient potassium is present. If the ratio N : P20&
from the nitrogen plot is wider than 100:3.5 it lacks in phosphoric acid; if less, then no lack
exists. If from the P206+K20-plot the ratio of N : P206 is less than 100:60 it lacks in nitrogen.
If the ratio of Si02 : N is wider than 100 : 6 there is not sufficient N present ; if less, the N content
is sufficient for wheat growth. If the N percentage in the wheat straw found for the N-plot
is considered as 100, then enough N is present in the soil of the P306-r-K.20-plot when the ratio
of the 2 percentages is less than 100:60. — C. E. Leighty.

2276. Reimer, F. C, and H. V. Tartar. Sulfur as a fertilizer for alfalfa in Southern
Oregon. Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 163. 40 p. 9 fig. 1919. — Various fertilizers contain-
ing sulfur, such as flowers of sulfur, superphosphate, gypsum, iron sulfate, ammonium sulfate,
potassium sulfate, magnesium sulfate and sodium sulfate, on various types of soil generally
increased the yields of clover and alfalfa very greatly. Most of the soils experimented with
were well supplied with potassium, calcium, magnesium, and iron but contained only limited
amoimts of sulfur. None of them were acid, and none contained noticeable amounts of alkali.
Analyses of the alfalfa plants which had received applications of sulfate fertilizers showed
that they had larger root systems with more nodules on them and that they contained much
more sulfur, more protein, and more nitrogen. In the hay from the sulfur fertilized plats
from 71 to 79 per cent of the sulfur was in the organic form, the remainder in the sulfate form,
while from the unfertilized plats it was all in the organic form. Up to the present time the
returns from the use of superphosphate have not been greater than those from calcium sulfate
alone. Flowers of sulfur produce as marked results as does calcium sulfate but a somewhat
longer period is required since it must first be changed to the sulfate form before it can be
utilized by the plants. On soils deficient in lime, flowers of sulfur should be used only in con-
junction with liberal quantities of lime or rock phosphate to avoid conditions of acidity. —
E. J. Kraus.

SOIL BIOLOGY

2277. Bornebusch, C. H. Bed0mmelse om Skovjordens Godhed ved Hjaelp af Bund-
floraen. [Judging the quality of soil by the flora.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 37-50.
1920.

2278. Fellers, C. R., and F. E. Allison. The protozoan fauna of the soils of New Jersey.
Soil Sci. 9: 1-25. PI. 1~4- 1920. — Protozoa were found in all soils examined, the number of
species ranging from 2 to 28. About 5000 per gram of soil were found. It is believed that in
normal New Jersey soils, the protozoa exist mainly in a nontrophic state. — W. J. Robbins.

2279. Geilmann, [— ]. Untersuchung des Bakteriennahrpraparates der Superphosphat-
fabrik Nordenham. [Investigation of the bacterial food preparation of the Nordenham super-
phosphate factory.] Jour. Landw. 67: 209-227. 1919. — The superphosphate factory at Nor-
denham has introduced a peat preparation which is designed to furnish food material to soil
bacteria and to stimulate them to greater activity. The preparation itself is not supposed
to act as a fertilizer, but only to bring about nitrogenous fertilization through increased bac-
terial activity. Better physical condition and higher productive power of the soil and pre-
vention of lodging of grain crops should then result. These investigations have shown: (1)
the absolute ineffectiveness of the preparation; (2) that an increase in nitrogen content of
the soil does not result from use of the preparation; (3) that it does not act in the least as
uitrogenous fertilizer; and (4) that it does not result in increased bacterial activity either in
the soil or in nutrient solutions, but that any good results are due to the CaCOj content. —
C. E. Leighty.

298 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2280. Gibbs, W. M. The isolation and study of nitrifying bacteria. Soil Sci. 8: 412-481.
4 pi, 1 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2188.

2281. Greig-Smith, R. Contributions to our knowledge of soil-fertility. No. XVI. The
search for toxin-producers. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 34: 142-190. 1918. — This
paper is one of a series on the subject of soil toxins. In the earlier papers it was shown that
soil extracts sometimes contain bacterio-toxic substances. Investigations on the possibility
that these toxic substances are formed by bacteria, moulds and amoebae are reported.
These organisms were grown in various media and under varying conditions; and in all cases,
the signs of toxicity to the test organism Bacillus prodigiosus which became manifest could
be attributed to an alteration in the reaction of the media. This toxic effect was found to
be of a different order from that previously noted with soil extracts. — E. Truog.

2282. Hutchinson, C. M. Report of the Imperial Agricultural Bacteriologist. Sci. Rept.
Agric. Res. Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 106-114. 1919. — The report summarizes investigations in
progress during the year under report in nitrification; nitrogen fixation; green manuring;
biological analyses of soils; indigo manufacture; pebrine disease of the silkworm; and sterili-
zation of water. — Winfield Dudgeon.

2283. Lyon, T. L., J. A. Bizzell, and B. D. Wilson. The formation of nitrates in a soil
following the growth of red clover and timothy. Soil Sci. 9: 53-64. 1920. — Cylinders of soil
treated with dried blood, acid phosphate, potassium chloride, and ground limestone and
planted to timothy or clover were leached with distilled water during the period of the growth
of the crops and a 7 months fallow period thereafter. Twice as much nitrogen was present in
the drainage water from the clover pots as the timothy pots. There was little difference in
the quantities of nitrogen leached from the timothy and clover soils during the growth of those
■crops but during the first two months of fallowing, ten times as much nitrogen was leached
from the clover soil as from the timothy soil. Corn and oats planted after one month fallowing
yielded twice as much in the clover soil as in the timothy soil. The total nitrogen in the
drainage water and in the corn and oats was over twice as much in the case of the clover
soil as in the timothy soil. — W. J. Robbins.

2284. Miege, E. La desinfection du sol. [The disinfection of the soil.] Prog. Agric.
et Vitic. 74: 133-140. 1920.— A discussion of results obtained by the use of a number of anti-
septic substances on the yields of various plants. Generally, most of these substances have
increased very markedly the yields of these plants. Sulfur and copper sulfate have been
very efficacious on potatoes; lysol and formaldehyde were very favorable on carrots. Toluol,
charcoal, potassium permanganate and calcium hypochlorite have also given good results on
truck crops. — L. Bonnet.

2285. Smith, T. A. J. Manures and fertilizers for tobacco. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria
17: 674-675. 1919. — The need of phosphoric acid for Victorian soils is shown. The soils are
naturally rich in potash, and nitrogen is secured by growing leguminous crops. Acid phos-
phate is recommended, applying at the rate of 100 to 200 pounds per acre. A crop of tobacco
yielding 1875 pounds per acre removes 65 pounds of nitrogen, 89 pounds potash and 8 pounds
of phosphoric acid. — J. J. Skinner.

2286. Waksman, Selman A. Microbiological studies on the cranberry bog soils. I. The
effect of liming upon the microbial population of the cranberry soil. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
3 : 2. 1919. — "The addition of ground limestone, at the rate of 8000 pounds per acre, to a Sa-
vannah bottom cranberry bog resulted in a distinct change in soil reaction and microbial
flora, accompanied by a twofold increase in the crop for the four years after the lime had been
applied. This study was made on the fourth year after the application of lime. — The hydrogen
ion concentration of the unlimed soil was PH=5.2 to 5.4; the PH of the limed soil was equal
to 6.2 to 6.4. Ammonia was found in traces in both soils. The limed soil contained nitrites
and a trace of nitrates, while the unlimed soil had no nitrates and practically no nitrites, indi-

No. 2. September, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 299

eating a more active nitrification result in^ from the change of reaction. On adding the two
soils to nitrifying solutions, nit rifieat ion was found to be more acl ive in the limed I h:m in the
unlimed soil. The aerobic nitrogen-fixing organisms, Azotobacter, were found in the limed
soil, but not in the unlimed soil. The unlimed soil contains 0000 bacteria and 5000 molds
(spores and pieces of mycelium) per gram, while the limed soil contained 20,000 bacteria and
1500 molds per gram, showing the decrease in acidity resulted in an increase in the bacterial
and a decrease in the mold flora." [Author's abstract of paper read at scientific session,
Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Rcddick.

2287. Whiting, Albert L., and Warren R. Schoonoyku. The comparative rate of de-
composition of green and cured clover tops in soil. Soil Sci. 9: 137-149. 1920. — Green clover
at the rate of 50 tons per acre or cured clover in equivalent amounts was mixed with a brown
silt and incubated in tumblers or 1 gallon pots. Under aerobic conditions the green and cured
clover underwent the same type of decomposition but the curing retarded the decomposition
as measured by ammonification, nitrification and loss of carbon. Under anaerobic condi-
tions, the types of decomposition of green and cured clover were very different. — W. J. Robbins.

FERTILIZER RESOURCES

2288. Anonymous. German potash production. Amer. Fertilizer 52 : 70. 1920. — During
January, 1920, the potash production in Germany was 550,000 tons. — J. J. Skinner.

2289. Bancroft, Wilder D. [Rev. of: Lloyd, Strauss L. Mining and manufacture of
fertilizing materials and their relation to soils. 19 x 14 cm., vi+158 p. D. Van Nostrand Co. :
New York, 1918. $2.00.] Jour. Phys. Chem. 23: 442. 1919.

2290. De Turk, Ernest. Potassium-bearing minerals as a source of potassium for plant
growth. Soil Sci. 8: 269-301. 1919. — Applications of 2 tons per acre of orthoclase, microline,
leucite and alunite to limed peat soil increased the yield of buckwheat from 20 to 35 per cent.
Lepidolide was detrimental probably due to an excess of soluble lithium. The potassium in
dune sand crushed to pass a 100 mesh sieve (100 meshes to an inch) will produce 0.114 pound
of soluble potassium. — W. J. Robbins.

2291. Frost, A. C. The phosphate production in Algeria. Amer. Fertilizer 52 : 70. 1920.
— There were 201 ,013 tons of phosphate produced in Algeria for the first three quarters of 1919.
— /. J. Skinner.

2292. Smith, T. A. J. The importance of lime in agriculture. Jour. Dept. Agric. 17:
682-683. 1919. — The forms of lime are described. Large deposits of limestone are found in
Northern, Northeastern, Western and Gippsland Districts of Victoria. — J. /. Skinner.

SOIL ANALYSIS

2293. Ames, J. W., and C. J. Schollenberger. Calcium and magnesium content of
virgin and cultivated soils. Soil Sci. 8: 323-335. 1919. — Determinations of the total calcium
and magnesium, the calcium and magnesium soluble in 0.2 normal nitric acid, the carbonates
and the reaction of virgin and cultivated soils from 23 locations in Ohio show that there is a
concentration of readily soluble calcium and magnesium at the surface in most virgin soils.
When the proportion of the total bases which is soluble is high the soil is likely to contain more
carbonate and to be more basic to tests. — W. J. Robbins.

2294. [Tansley, A. G.] Investigations on soil. [Rev. of: Hibbard, P. L. Changes In
composition of the soil and of the water extract of the soil following the addition of manure.
Soil Sci. 7: 259-272. 1919.1 Jour. Ecol. 7: 214-215. 1919.

300 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

SOIL CLASSIFICATION

2295. Beck, M. W., M. Y. Longacke, and others. Soil survey of Howard County,
Arkansas. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-57. 1
fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2296. Carter, W. T., J. M. Snyder, and O. C. Bruce. Soil survey of Baltimore County,
Maryland. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-40. 1 fig.,
1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2298.

2297. Cobb, W. B., E. S. Vanatta, L. L. Brinkley, S. F. Davidson, and F. N. McDow-
ell. Soil survey of Beaufort County, North Carolina. Advance sheets. Field Operations Bur.
Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 7-39. 1 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919.— For character of report
see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2298. Davis, L. Vincent, and H. W. Warner. Soil survey of Buena Vista County, Iowa.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-36. Fig. 1, 1 map
(colored) . 1919. — -Buena Vista County is situated in the northwestern part of Iowa in a prairie
region. The topography is flat to gently rolling. Morainic deposits contributed to the more
rolling topography. The ruling elevation of the county is 1537 feet above sea level. — The
Missouri-Mississippi river drainage divide passes through the county in a general north and
south direction. The incipient drainage systems arise in poorly drained areas. Artificial
drainage is generally necessary for satisfactory cropping. — Transportation facilities are fur-
nished by five railroads.— The mean annual precipitation is 29.80 inches, and is distributed
favorably for crops. The mean annual temperature is 46.30°F. The average growing season
is 151 days. Numerous low-lying areas are particularly subject to early frost in fall. — Agri-
culture which is the principal industry in Buena Vista County consists mainly in the produc-
tion of corn, oats and hay and the raising and feeding of hogs, cattle, horses and sheep.
Corn is the principal crop. — The soils of the county are mainly of glacial origin. The soils
are predominantly dark-colored. In the poorly drained areas the lime content is often high.
Alluvial soils are found on the terraces along the Little Sioux River and on the first bottoms
of those natural drainage ways of sufficient size to have developed flood plains. Several areas
of Muck and Peat are found in the county. — Steep slopes of the glacial soils frequently are for-
ested, principally with bur oak, soft maple, elm, basswood and red oak. In the muck and
peat areas water loving flora are still to be found in various stages of decomposition. — Eighty-
five per cent of the population is rural. Artificial drainage has permitted the extension of
the limits of arable land. — F. B. Howe.

2299. Deeter, E. B., and F. H. Cohn. Soil survey of Faulkner County, Arkansas.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917:5-33. 1 fig., 1 map
(colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2300. Eckmann, E. C, and A. T. Strahorn. Soil survey of Anaheim Area, California.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1916: 5-77. 1 fig., 1 map (col-
ored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2301. Goodman, A. L., A. H. Meyer, R. W. McClure, and B. H. Hendrickson. Soil
survey of Amite County, Mississippi. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S.
Dept. Agric. 1917:5-37. 1 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 2316.

2302. Hall, E. C, and E. I. Angell. Soil survey of Wapello County, Iowa. Advance
sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-42. .' fig., 1 map (colored).
1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

No. 2, September, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 301

2303. Jones, E. M., and A. T. Sweet. Soil survey of Covington County, Mississippi.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917:5-39. 1 fig., 1 map {col-
ored). 1919. — For character of report see Hot. Absts. .">, Entry 2310.

2304. Kru.sekopf, II. II., J. H. Aoee, and R. II. Hall. Soil survey of Callaway County,
Missouri. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, V. S. Dept. Agric. 1916:5-37. 1 fig.,
1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2305. Maxson, E. T., C. E. Deardorff, \\ . A. RocKIE and J. M. S.vyder. Soil survey
of Burke County, Georgia. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric.
1917:.r> 29. 1 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919.— For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
2316\

2306. Mei i.hs, A. II., and T. H. Benton. Soil survey of Henry County, Iowa. Advance
sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-31. / fig., 1 map (colored).
1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2307. Meyer, A. H., and B. H. Hendrickson. Soil survey of St. Martin Parish, Louisi-
ana. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-31. 1 fig., 1
map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2308. Nelson, J. W., C. J. Zinn, and others. Soil survey of the Los Angeles Area, Cali-
fornia. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1916: 5-76. S pi., 1
fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2309. Rogehs, R. F., and W. G. Smith. Soil survey of Calhoun County, Michigan.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, TJ. S. Dept. Agric. 1916 : 5-52. 1 fig. , 2 maps (col-
ored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2310. Rogers, R. F., and L. A. Wolfanger. Soil survey of Chase County, Nebraska.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-64. / fig., 1 map
(colored). 1919.— For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2311. Smiks, E. H. Soil survey of Canadian County, Oklahoma. Advance sheets, Field
Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-58. 1 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — Canadian
County, Oklahoma, is situated in the Great Plains region and consists of undulating to rolling
uplands with a ruling elevation of 1375 feet above sea level. The area is thoroughly drained
by four of the parallel streams that cross western Oklahoma in a southeastward direction. —
Grain farming is the important industry of the county with the raising and fattening of live-
stock as the coordinate industry. The principal farm crops are corn, oats, wheat, grain sor-
ghums, alfalfa, hay and cotton. Fruit growing is developed to some extent in part of the
county. Railroad facilities are good. — The mean annual rainfall is about 32 inches. The
highest rainfall occurs during the growing season while the winter months are comparatively
dry. The lowest annual rainfall recorded is 17.27 inches. The mean annual temperature is
58.6°F. Hot,, dry winds from the south sometimes cause considerable damage to crops. —
The upland soils of the county are classed into two general divisions, residual prairie soils
and soils largely of wind blown origin. The residual prairie soils are derived from the under-
lying red sandstones and shales, which form a part of the Permian Red Beds. They are
usually calcareous. The wind blown soils are composed for the most part of material blown
up over the uplands from the near-by alluvial flood plains. The alluvial bottom-land soils
are divided into two general divisions, terrace or second-bottom soils, and the more recent
alluvial or first-bottom soils. — The principal nat ive grasses of the upland soils consisted chiefly
of blue stem, buffalo grass, grama, mesquite and a variety of bunch grasses. Blue stem dis-
appears after being pastured for a few years and the principal growth is mesquite. Timber
belts lie along most of the drainage ways in the more rolling sections. The trees are chiefly
elm, hackberry, black walnut, cottonwood and oak. Red cedar was once abundant. — The
farms in the vicinity of the larger streams and on the prairie soils are fairly well improved. —
F. B. Howe.

302 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2312. Tartar, H. V., and F. C. Reimer. The soils of Jackson County. Oregon Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 164. 62 p. 1 map. 1920.— An area of approximately 544 square miles of valley
and adjacent hill and mountain land in the central part of Jackson County were studied.
The soil types are numerous and fall principally into two classes, residual and alluvial, rang-
ing from fine sandy loam to clay adobe. Results of chemical analyses of the most important
soil types showed, that there is an abundant supply of potassium, calcium and magnesium,
that none are acid, that the phosphorus supply is only fair to low, that the nitrogen content
(also organic matter) is prevailingly low, and that sulfur is present in most of the soils in
quantities so small that it is one of the limiting factors in the growth of crops making large
demands for that plant food. Irrigation and drainage are needed in some places. — E. J.
Kraus.

2313. Thorp, W. E., and H. J. Harper. Soil survey of Blackhawk County, Iowa.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 7-43. 1 fig., 2 pi., 1
map {colored). 1919. — For character report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2314. Tillman, B. W., F. A. Hayes, and F. Z. Htjtton. Soil survey of Drew County,
Arkansas. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917 : 5-46. 1 fig. ,
1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2315. Tillman, B. W., and B. F. Hensel. Soil survey of Phelps County, Nebraska.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-40. 1 fig., 1 map (col-
ored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

2316. Tillman, B. W., and B. F. Hensel. Soil survey of Wayne County, Nebraska.
Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-47. 1 fig., 1 map
(colored). 1919. — Situated in northeastern Nebraska, Wayne County covers about 450 square
miles. The topography is uneven, ranging from hills to level areas. Three-fourths of the
county is upland, one-eighth bottom land and the remainder terrace. The bottom areas lie
at about 1500 feet above sea level, while the hills are 160 feet higher. — The climate is suited
to general farming, with an annual precipitation of 28 inches and a mean annual temperature
of 48°F. The growing season of 144 days receives about one-half of the annual rainfall. —
The upland soils, comprising 76 per cent of the county, are loess of the Marshall and Knox
series. The former is a black soil while the latter is light brown. Both are silt loams, and
quite productive. The sedimentary soils, covering 17.5 per cent of the county are the most
productive although the terrace areas, ranking with the loess in fertility, are excellent. —
The main industry of the county is agriculture. The principal crops are corn, oats, alfalfa,
clover, timothy, wheat and hay. Wheat is about the only cash crop. Over one-third of the
crop acreage every year is corn. Stock raising is constantly receiving greater attention. —
Progressive farmers follow systematic crop rotation. Drainage, especially on the bottom
lands, is being rapidly developed. Good crops are obtained in all parts of the county although
the production is below what it should be for soils of such high natural fertility. The crop-
ping systems in vogue are not keeping up the productiveness of the land. More attention
should be paid to green manures and legumes. — H. 0. Buekman.

2317. Van Duyne, C, L. R. Schoenmann, and S. D. Averitt. Soil survey of Shelby
County, Kentucky. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils, U. S. Dept. Agric. 1916:
5-64. / fig., 1 pi., 1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
2316.

2318. Van Duyne, C, W. E. McLendon, W. J. Latimer, and I. M. Morrison. Soil
survey of Marlboro County, South Carolina. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils,
U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-72. 2 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — Marlboro County occupies a
belt in northeastern South Carolina extending from the crest of the Sandhill region down into
the lower Coastal Plain. The elevations range from 140 to 300 feet. The area is in part undu-
lating and in part flat and poorly drained. Drainage is into the Pee Dee River. — The winders

No. 2, September, 1920) SOIL SCIENCE 303

are short and mild while the summers are long and hot. Two-thirds of the 17 inches of rain
fall during the summer months. The growing season is aboul 216 days. A great variety of
cnips may be grown. Marlboro ( lounty is one of the best developed count ies agriculturally

of the state. Many different soil types occur, (hose of the coastal plain being extensively
farmed and mostly to cotton. While the terrace soils along the Pee Dee River are cropped,
the bottom lands yet remain to be developed. Corn, cowpeas, wheat and oats do well. Pea-
nuts yield splendidly on all soils. The first bottoms are fine grass lands and offer splendid
opportunities for cattle raising. — Crops are not very often grown in rotation and the land
is running down. Const ant ly increasing amounts of fertilizer are necessary. Complete mixed
fertilizers are most generally purchased. Some nitrate of soda is used as a top dressing. Lime
although needed has not come into general use. — H. O. Buckman.

2319. W atkins, W. I., E. D. Fowler, H. I. Cohn, J. A. Macklis, and H. H. Krube-
kopf. Soil survey of Texas County, Missouri. Advance sheets, Field Operations Bur. Soils,
U. S. Dept. Agric. 1917: 5-36. 1 fig., 1 map (colored). 1919. — For character of report see Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 2316.

MOISTURE RELATIONS

2320. Harding, S. T. Relation of the moisture equivalent of soils to the moisture proper-
ties under field conditions of irrigation. Soil Sci. 8: 303-312. 6 fig. 1919. — A comparison was
made of the moisture equivalent with the critical moisture points of soils under actual field
conditions of irrigation practice. The results include over 9000 individual moisture deter-
minations and 136 determinations of moisture equivalent varying from 4.1 to 37.6. The max-
imum field capacity, the normal field capacity, soil moisture before irrigation, and soil mois-
ture at permanent wilting of the crop were studied. Expressed as per cent of the moisture
equivalent the moisture at the time of permanent wilting alone shows a linear relationship
with the moisture equivalent. This for the surface foot is about 15 per cent less than that
given by the formula of Briggs and Shantz. — W. J. Robbins.

2321. Knapp, George S. Winter irrigation for western Kansas. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta.
Cire. 72. 8 p. Jan., 1919.

METHODS

2322. Bear, Firman E., and George M. McClure. Sampling soil plots. Soil Sci. 9:
65-75. 4 fi-9- 1920. — -The composite from a one-twentieth acre plot should be made up of 20
samples, each 12 inches in depth and uniformly distributed over the plot. — W. J. Robbins.

2323. Gardner, Willard. A new soil elutriator. Soil Sci. 9: 191-197. 2 fig. PI. 1.
1920. — An elutriator for the mechanical analysis of soil is described and figured. — W. J.
Robbins.

2324. Gillespie, L. J. Colorimetric determination of hydrogen-ion concentration without
buffer mixtures, with especial reference to soils. Soil Sci. 9: 115-136. 1 fig. 1920. — A simple
method is described for the colorimetric determination of the hydrogen-ion exponent with-
out the use of buffer mixtures. The method also provides for the elimination of errors due to
the turbidity of the solution in which the determination is made. Each color standard con-
sists of two test tubes, one tube containing 5 cc. of dilute acid, the other 5 cc. of dilute alkali.
The tubes together contain 10 drops of indicator solution, the 10 being divided between the
alkaline and acid tubes in various "drop ratios." To 10 cc. of the unknown solution, 10 drops
of the indicator solution are added and compared with the two color standards by means of
a simple comparator. A table is given of the pH for each drop ratio of the indicators used
which cover a range of PH 3.1 to PH 9.75. Soil extracts, water clear, were prepared by the
use of colloidal iron solution as a precipitant and pH measurements of the water extracts of
nine soils prepared by this method gave the same results as were obtained by the usual
methods. — W. J. Robbins.

304 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2325. Hurst, C. T., and J. E. Greaves. Some factors influencing the quantitative deter-
mination of chlorides in soil. Soil Sci. 9: 41-51. 1920. — A soil extract is obtained by filtering
through a Pasteur-Chamberland filter or by the use of alum and the chlorides determined by
the method given in detail. — W. J. Robbins.

2326. Robinson, R. H. Concerning the effect of heat on the reaction between lime-water
and acid soils. Soil Sci. 9 : 151-157. 1920.— The length of time of heating and the temperature
used during the process of evaporation affects the lime requirement of acid soils as determined
by the Veitch method. Variations in the lime requirement of a soil from 1300 pounds per
acre when evaporation occurred in 2.5 hours at 70° to 4600 pounds per acre where evaporation
occurred at 110° in 8 hours were found. — W. J. Robbins.

MISCELLANEOUS

2327. Call, L. E. Director's report. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917-1S. 63 p. 1918 —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entries 1466, 2024.

2328. Jovino, S. Osservazioni suH'aridocoltura italiana. [Observations upon dry farm-
ing in Italy.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Italiane 52: 69-121. 125-192. 1919.— A lengthy study of
the subject divided in the following way: (1) the climate of the arid regions of Italy, (2)
the soil of the arid regions of Italy, (3) biological characteristics of Italian dry farming, (4)
the function of fallowing in Italy, (5) the critical period in the spring, (6) the summer crit-
ical period, (7) means of favoring the evolution of the present cultural conditions. In this
paper are studied the adaptations of plants to the conditions of the arid regions: low soil-
water content, high temperature and strong illumination. A lengthy abstract of this paper
with special emphasis on the technical side is to be found in Monthly Bull. Internation. Instit.
Agric. Rome 105: 522-526. 1919. (English edition.)— A. Bonazzi.

2329. Hodsoll, H. E. P. The care of the soil. Jour. Roy. Hortic Soc. 45: 22-28. 1919.
— /. K. Shaiv.

2330. Howard, A., and G. L. C. Report of the Imperial Economic Botanists. Sci. Rept.
Agric. Res. Inst. Pusa 1918-19: 46-67. PI. 5 and 6. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1159.

2331. Middleton, Howard E. The moisture equivalent in relation to the mechanical
analysis of soils. Soil Sci. 9 : 159-167. 1 fig. 1920. — The maximum percentage of water which
a soil can retain in opposition to a force equal to 1000 times that of gravity (the moisture equiv-
alent) was compared with the mechanical analyses. The relation between the percentage of
sand, silt and clay and the moisture equivalent was found to be 0.063 sand-f 0.291 ailt+0.426
clay = moisture equivalent. The presence of considerable organic matter increases the mois-
ture equivalent and disturbs the above relation. — W. J. Robbins.

2332. Powers, W. L. Duty of water in irrigation. Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 161.
20 p., 1 fig. 1920. — Proper economical irrigation is necessary to permanent irrigative agricul-
ture. By saving 50 per cent of the water now used in many places, it will be possible to double
the crop producing area. The economical use and duty of irrigation water depend upon a wide
variety of conditions of culture, method of distributing and handling of the water, types of
crops produced, and environment. Soil fertility is one of the most important factors af-
fecting irrigation requirements, for it is frequently possible to double the returns from each
unit of water supplied by applying needed simple fertilizers. At times one ton of manure
may equal 100 tons of water in securing returns. Irrigation farming reaches its highest
development in connection with intensive farming. In general it is better economy to pro-
vide only a moderate allowance of water with reasonably priced structures than to provide
a liberal supply at a great expense and invite additional drainage assessments later. — E. J.
Kraus.

No. 2, September, 1920] TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS 305

2333. Powers, W. L., a\d\V. \V. Johnston. The improvement and irrigation requirement
of wild meadow and tule land. Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 167. 44 P-, %& fi(f- 1920.— See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1198.

2334. Wherry, Edgar T. Soil tests of Ericaceae and other reaction-sensitive families
in northern Vermont and New Hampshire. Rhodora 22: 33-49. 1920.

2335. Wittmack, L. Die Bonitierung des Bodens nach der Unkrautpflanzen. [The rating
of soils according to the weeds growing on them.] lllustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39:391-392. 1919.

TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS

J. M. Greenman, Editor
E. B. Payson, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

2336. Anonymous. [Rev. of: William Mansfield. Squibb's atlas of the official drugs.
686 p., illustrated. 1919.] Druggists Circ. 63 : 243. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1691.

2337. B. D. Quelques plantes nouvelles. [Some new plants.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 91:
260-262. Fig. 84-85. Apr., 1919.

2338. Bolus, Harriet M. L. Elementary lessons in systematic botany. Based on famil-
iar species of the South African Flora, with an introduction and eight summaries. Illus-
trated by Mary M. Page. 96 p., H fig. 1919.

2339. Brown, William H., and Arthur F. Fischer. Philippine mangrove swamps.
Bur. Forestry Dept. Agric. and Nat. Resources [Manila] Bull. 17. 132 p. PI. 1, 47. 1918.—
About 30 species are listed as mangrove-swamp plants in the Philippine Islands; these belong
to 17 families. A key to the genera is given, the species are described and their local names
recorded. The paper is copiously illustrated by reproductions from photographs. — J. M.
Greenman.

2340. Buswell, W. M. Familiar wildflowers of Florida. Amer. Bot. 25: 90-93. 1919.

2341. CnEVALiER, Aug. Catalogue des plantes du jardin botanique de Saigon. [Cata-
logue of plants in the Botanical Garden of Saigon.] 68 p. 1919. — The introductory matter
includes an interesting historical sketch of the Botanical Garden. In appendix II is included
a number of changes in nomenclature, the new binomials proposed being necessitated by the
determination of the exact status of some of Loureiro's hitherto imperfectly known species.
— E. D. Merrill.

2342. Cremata, Merlino. Cercas, alambradas y setos en Cuba. [Fences and hedges
in Cuba.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 259-272. 29 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
527.

2343. Ewart, A. J. Contributions to the flora of Australia. No. 26. Proc. Roy. Soc.
Victoria (N. S.) 30: 173-177. 1918.

2344. Gertz, Otto. Christopher Rostii herbarium vivum. Ein deutsches herbar vom
jahre 1610. [The herbarium of Christopher Rostius. A German herbarium of the year 1610.]
Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 67: 369-382. 1918.— This collection consists of 363 specimens of plants,
chiefly of central Europe and the Mediterranean region, mounted in a bound volume 20x16.5
cm. in size. The original author is unknown , but a history of the herbarium is in part recorded.
A list of the original names accompanying the specimens is given with their present binomial
equivalents. — J. M. Greenman.

306 TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

2345. Hallier, Hans. Ueber Gaertner'sche Gattungen und Arten unsicherer Stellung,
einige Rubiaceen, Sapotaceen, Cornaceen und iiber versunkene Querverbindungen der Tropen-
lander. [Horticultural genera and species of uncertain position, some Rubiaceae, Sapotaceae,
Cornaceae; submerged land-connections in the tropics.] Recueil Trav. Bot. N6erlandais 15:
27-122. 1918.

2346. Hemsley, W. B. , and others. Flora of Aldabra : with notes on the flora of the neigh-
boring islands. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 108-153. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 4,
Entry 339.

2347. Kops, Jan, F. W. van Eeden, and L. Vuyck. Flora Batava. Afbeelding en
Beschrijving der Nederlandische Gewassen. [Flora of Batavia. Illustrations and descriptions
of plants of Holland.] Aflevering 396e-399c. PI. 1977-1992. Martinus Nijhoff's, Graven-
hage. 1919. — The present parts contain descriptions and colored illustrations of the follow-
ing vascular plants: Carex Kneuckeriana Zahn, Cyperus vegetus Willd., Glyceria plicata Fr.,
Veronica praecox, All., Solarium nitidibaccatum Bitter, Rubus hwnifusus Weihe & Ness, R.
pyramidalis Kaltenb., R. caesius var. aquaticus Weihe & Ness, Rumex odontocarpus Sandor,
and Lathyrus deer a L. The non-vascular plants included are: Hydnum violaceum Thore,
H. nigrum Fr. , Psathyrella disseminata P. , Peziza hemisphaerica Hoff. , Clavaria aurea Schaeff . ,
Mycena epi pterygia Scop., Amanita porphyria Fr., and Hygrophorus pratensis Fr. — J. M.
Greenman.

2348. Lane-Poole, C. E. Report of the Woods and Forests Department for the half-year
ended 30th of June, 1918. Semi-Ann. Progress Rept. Woods and Forests Dept. Western Aus-
tralia. 17 p. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 443.

2319. Mola, Pasquale. Flora delle acque Sarde. Contributo delle Piante Idrofite ed
igrofite della Sardegna. [Flora of the Sardinian waters. Hydrophytes and hygrophytes of
Sardinia.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 54: 478-502. 1918-1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1025.

2350. Nelson, James C. A comparison of the flora of southern British Columbia with
that of the State of Washington, as illustrated by the floras of Henry and Piper. [Rev. of:
Henry, Joseph Kate. Flora of Southern British Columbia and Vancouver Island. S6S p.
W. J. Gage & Co.: Toronto, 1915.] Torreya 19: 174-184. 1919.— Henry's Flora, although
covering a territory at least twice as large as the State of Washington, and extending to the
eastv/ard so as to include the Rocky Mountain flora, mentions only 2359 named forms as com-
pared with 2511 in Piper's Flora of Washington. Of these 1517, or about 60 per cent, are com-
mon to both manuals. Assuming equal thoroughness on the part of both authors, two con-
clusions seem to be justified. (1) That Washington is a region of more marked endemism than
British Columbia. (2) That the 49th parallel seems to come very near to a line marking the
extreme northward dominance of the Californian flora on the one hand, and the extreme
southern extension of the Alaskan flora on the other. In Henry's Flora there are 764 forms
not mentioned by Piper ; in Piper's 928 not mentioned by Henry. These species are arranged
by groups to show distribution and degree of endemism. A table of discrepancies in the case
of 18 of the larger genera is presented. Prof. Henry displays a commendable conservatism
in his conception of taxonomic relations. The book is marred by many inaccuracies in capi-
talization, grammatical agreement, orthography, abbreviation, citation and etymology, but
on the whole is a valuable effort to contribute to the fuller knowledge of the Northwest Flora.
— J. C. Nelson.

2351. Phillips, Edwin Percy. Some notes on a collecting trip to French Hoek. South
African Jour. Sci. 15: 450-478. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 298.

2352. Quer, P. Font. Plantas de Tetuan. [Plants of Tetuan.] Bol. R. Soc. Espafiola
Hist. Nat. 19: 93-95. 1919. — List of eighty-four species of plants collected in the vicinity of
Tetuan, northern Morocco, by Manual Pando in April, 1916. Proposed as new are Cistvs

No. 2, September, 1920] TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS 307

salviifolius var. Pandoanus, Linum slrictum a cymosum f. scaberrimum, Trij'olium campestre
var. Pandoi, Cerinthc oranensis f. parviflora. New combinations appear to he Lathyrus
Clymenium race articulatus (L.)j •md Convolvulus tricolor race /< eudotricolor (Bert.). — 0. E.
Jennings.

2353. Quer, P. Font. Adiciones a la flora de Menorca. [Additions to the flora of Minorca.)
Bol. R. Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19: 268-273. 1919. — This is an annotated list with localities
and other information relating to G9 species, varieties, or forms. Former workers on this
flora are referred to and the following new species or varieties are published : Fumaria muralis
Sond. var. longipes Pau, Calycotome spinosa Link race villosa Link var. Fontqueri Pau, Lotus
Jallax Quer, Cotyledon umbilicus L. var. minoricensis Pau, and Avellinia Michelii Pari. var.
longiaristata Quer. Nine of these plants are new to the flora of the Balearic Islands.— O. E.
Jennings.

2354. Salisbury, F. S. Naturalized plants of Albany and Bathurst. Rec. Albany Mus.
[Grahamstown, South Africa] 3: 161-177. 1919.

2355. Stone, Herbert. Les bois utiles de la Guyane Francaise. [The useful woods of
French Guiana.] Ann. Mus. Colonial, Marseille III, 6 : 1-68. 1918. — The present article con-
tinues the author's enumeration of the useful woods of French Guiana and includes well known
species of the following families: Combretaceae, Myrtaceae, Melastomaceae, Samydaceae,
Passifloraceae, Araliaceae, Rubiaceae, Sapotaceae, Ebenaceae, Styricaceae, Oleaceae, Apo-
cynaceae, Borraginaceae, Bignoniaceae, Myoporaceae, Verbenaceae, and Polygonaceae. —
./. M. Greenman.

2356. Tdrrill, W. B. Contributions to the flora of Macedonia. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 105- 108. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 368.

2357. Vuijk, L. Verslag der excursie gehouden te 's-Hertogenbosch 26 Juli 1918 en vol-
gende dagen. [Report of the excursion held in Hertogenbosch, Holland, etc.] Nederland.Kruid-
kundig Arch. 1918: 19-30. May, 1919. — A rather complete enumeration of the plants found
by the members of the society on the trip. A six page list with additions to the flora is given.
— J. A. Nieuwland.

2358. Waby, J. F. Notes on a collection of preserved fruits and seeds (Part 1). Jour. Bd.
Agric. British Guiana 12 : 2-6. 1919. — Descriptions of a very large collection of tropical fruits
and seeds preserved in glass jars in the Herbarium of the Botanic Garden of Georgetown.
In this part are given descriptions of plants, flowers, fruits and seeds of Entada scandens,
E. polystachya, Poinciana regia, Cassia grandis, C. fistula, C. javanica, Pterocarpus guian-
ensis, and Platymiscium polystachyum. — /. B. Rarer.

2359. Waby, J. F. Notes on a collection of dried fruit and seeds (continued). Jour. Bd.
Agric. British Guiana 12: 102-111. 1919. — Descriptions of seeds and fruits, together with
common names, many interesting notes and superstitions, of the following plants: Eperua
falcata, E. Schomburghii, E. Jenmani, Bauhinia Vahlii, Enterolobiuiti cyclocarpum, L .

Timbouva, Caesalpinia Bonducclla, Macrolobium acaciacfoliwn, M. hymaenoides , Caesalpinia
Sappan, Peltophoroum jcrrugineum, Caesalpinia bijuga, C. feriea, C. coriaria, Piscidiu
Erythrina, Acacia arabica, Delarium senegalense, Flemingia strobilijera, Drepanocarpus luna-
tus, Ormosia dasycarpa, O.jamaicensis, Copaifera officinalis, Myrospermum Pereirae^ Mucunv
urens, M. pruriens, M. Fawcettii. Stizolobium altissimum, Adcnanthera Pavonina, Ery-
thrina corallo dendron. E. indica, Psophocarpus tetraagonolabus. and Trachylobium Harm -
mannianum. — J. B. Rorer.

2360. Williams, Frederic N. Pulteney's references to the Flora Londinensis. Jour.
Botany 57: 100. 1919.— Notes on the so-called "MS. of Pulteney," and on the confusion of
plates, and chronological puzzles in the above flora. — K. M . Wiegand.

308 TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

PTERIDOPHYTES

2361. Barnola, Joaquin Ma. de. Las Licopodiales de la peninsula Iberica, citas y notas
criticas. [Catalogue of Iberian Lycopodiales.] Broteria Ser. Bot. 17: 17-27. 1919. — The
author lists the species and varieties of Lycopodium, Selaginella, and Isoetes which grow in
Spain or Portugal, with keys, detailed citation of localities, some critical notes on distribution,
and a bibliography of 22 titles; no new forms are described. — Edward B. Chamberlain.

2362. Beck, G. Einige Bemerkungen iiber heimische Fame. [Some observations on
native ferns.] Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 67: 52-63, 113-123. 1918.— The author gives an
annotated list of ferns of south-central Europe and records particularly the spore characters
of several species and forms. — J. M. Greenman.

2363. Benedict, R. C. The simplest fern in existence. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 48-50.
PI. 8,7 fig. 1919.

2364. Graves, E. W. The Botrychiums of Mobile County, Alabama. Amer. Fern Jour.
9: 56-58. 1919. — Botrychium obliquum, B. biternatum (Lam.) Underw. and B. alabamense
Maxon are found growing together in this county. B. alabamense may be distinguished from
B. biternatum by the manner in which it holds its sterile fronds and also by the time of fruit-
ing. The former holds its sterile fronds three to ten inches above the ground and completes
fruiting by October 15, while the latter holds its sterile fronds not more than an inch above
the ground and matures its fruit about March 1. — F. C. Anderson.

2365. Maxon, William R. Ferns of the District of Columbia. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 38-
48. 1919. — After briefly describing the area adopted for the "District flora," the author lists
56 species, distributed among 25 genera. The occurrence and habitat of each species is dis-
cussed.— F. C. Anderson.

2366. Palmer, Ernest J. Texas Pteridophyta — II. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 50-56. 1919. —
The author continues the enumeration of the Pteridophytes of Texas, listing 17 species with
habitat and localities. A reduced form of Botrychium obliquum Muhl. may represent a dis-
tinct and undescribed variety.— F. C. Anderson.

2367. Weatherby, C. A. Changes in the nomenclature of the Gray's Manual ferns.
Rhodora 21: 173-179. 1919. — A discussion of the changes which have been accepted in the
nomenclature of the Polypodiaceae and the Osmundaceae of Gray's Manual since the publica-
tion of the seventh edition and an explanation of these changes. The summary gives a list
of thirty changes, in each case giving the Manual name, the later name and authority, and the
synonyms. — James P. Poole.

2368. Woynar, H. Betrachtungen iiber Polypodiumaustriacum Jacquin. [Considerations
on Polypodium austriacum Jacquin.] Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 67: 267-275. 1918. — The author
presents a discussion of this fern particularly with reference to the nomenclatorial status of
the specific name. — J. M. Greenman.

SPERMATOPHYTES

2369. Beringer, G. M. [Rev. of: Maiden, J. H. A critical revision of the genus Euca-
lyptus. Vol. IV, Part 6. Published by the Government of the State of New South Wales.]
Amer. Jour. Pharm. 91: 328-329. 1919.— Anton Hogstad, Jr.

2370. Blake. S. F. The genus Homalium in America. Gontrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 20:
221-235. 1919. — Nineteen species are recognized, in addition to one doubtful one (H. sen-
arium Moc. & Sess6). The following are new: //. nicaraguense , H. mollicellum, H. pleian-
drum. H. leiogynum, II. hcmisystylum, II. racemosum subsp. barbellatum, H. Pitticri, H.
trichocladum , //. eleutherostylum, H. colvmbianum, H. slenosepalum, H. eurypetalum. — S. F.
Blake.

No. 2, September, 1920] TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS 309

2371. Blakk, S. F. New South American spermatophytes collected by H. M. Curran.
Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 20: 237-245. 1919. — The following new species and new dame
occur: Dorstenia anthurii folia, Coussdjion Curranii} Coccoloba cyclophylla, Ruprechtia o

phylla, R. coriacca (Karst.) Blake, Triplaris euryplnjlla, T. laxa, Scliizolohivm parahybutn
(Veil.) Blake, G uarca racemiformis , Trichilin alia, T. Ciirranii, T. microdonta, T. triphylla,
Fischeria blcpharopelala, Macroscepis barbala. — S. F. Blake.

2372. Blom, Caul. Lepidium bonariense L., Lepidium neglectum Thell., samt Rumex
salicifolius L. funna i Sverge. Bot. Notiser 1919: 181. 1919.— The first and the last of these
are recorded from ballast at Malmo, and the second one from Boras and Stockholm. — P. A .
Rydbcrg.

2373. Chevalier, A. Quelqueslegumineuses d'Extreme-Orient utiles a repandre. [Some
legumes of Indo-China worthy of wider use.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 87-92. 1919.—
Contains the new combination Mucuna cochinchincnsis (Lour.) A. Chev. based on Mar-
canlhus cochinchinensis Lour., the oldest valid name for Mucuna nivea W. & A. — E. D. Merrill.

2374. Chevalier, A. Le pommier a cidre des hauts plateaux de l'lndochine. [The cider
apple of the high plateaus of Indo-China.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 142-150. 1919.—
The utilization of the fruits of Pyrus Doumeri Bois is discussed and the species redescrib<jd.
— E. D. Merrill.

2375. Chevalier, A. Une nouvelle variete de palmier Elaeis. [A new variety of the
Elaels palm.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 154, 155. 1919. — Reduces Elaeis Poissmn
Annet to E. guineensis Aubl. as var. Poissoni (Annet) A. Chev. — E. D. Merrill.

2376. Clute.WillardN. Phlox nomenclature. Amer. Bot. 25: 100, 101. Fig. 1. 1919.
— Eastern and western forms of Phlox divaricala appear to differ in the shape and size of the
flowers. The differences were noted long ago by Alphonso Wood who called the western var-
iety, Laphamii. The differences in the two forms have been ignored by systematists but it
is suggested that the western form be called Phlox Laphamii (Wood). — W. N. Clute.

2377. Cremata, Merlino. Plantas meliferas. [Melliferous plants.) Revist. Agric.
Com. y Trab. 2: 140-152. 10 jig. 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 4, Entry 215.

2378. De Candolle, Casimir. Begonlaceae Centrali-Americanae et Ecuadorenses. [Be-
goniaceae of Central America and Ecuador.] Smithsonian Misc. Collections 6812: 1-10. 1919.
— The following new species and new names appear, with Latin descriptions : Begonia Keller-
manii (Guatemala), B . fissurarum (B. leptophylla CDC. 190S, not Taub. 1896), B. stenoptera
(Costa Rica), B. garagara?ia, B. brevicyma, B. mucronistipula, B. uvana, B. mameiana, B.
villipeliola, B. cilibracteola, B. leptopoda, B. pubipedicella, B. serratifolia, B. chiriquina,
B. chepoensis , B. caudilimba, B. udisilvestris, B. parcifolia (Ecudaor). With the exceptions
noted, all these are described from Panama. — S. F. Blake.

2379. Fernald, M. L. I. The unity of the genus Arenaria. II. The type of the genus
Alsine. III. The earlier names for Alsinopsis. IV. The American representatives of Arenaria
sajanensis. V. The specific identity of Arenaria groenlandica and A. glabra. VI. The Ameri-
can variations of Arenaria verna [Contrib. Gray Herb. Harvard Univ. New Series. — No. LVII].
Rhodora 21: 1-22. 1919. — The subject-matter under the six separate titles deals with the
genus Arenaria which the author maintains in its broad sense. The following new combina-
tions, new names, and new species are published: Arenaria arenarioides (Cerastium arcnari-
oides Crantz), A. bryophylla (Ar. mxisciformis Edgew. & Hook, f., not Triana & Planch.), A.
Funkii (Alsine Funkii Jord.), A. cymifera (Alsine cymifera Rouy & Fouc.), A. iberica (Miv-
uartia dicholoma L., not ^4r. dichotoma Krock), A. caucasica (Alsine caucasica Boiss.), A. ana-
tolica (Alsine anatolica Boiss.), .4. Thcvenaei (Alsine Thevenaei Reut.), .4. attica (Alsine
attica Boiss.), A.sphagnoides (Sabulina sphagnoides Froel.), A.aizoides (Alsine aizoidcsBoisa.) ,

310 TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

A. decipiens (Alsine decipiens Fenzl), A. dianthifolia (Alsine dianthifolia Boiss.), A. interme-
dia (Alsine intermedia Boiss.), A. leucocephala (Alsine leucocephala Boiss.), A. pulvinaris
(Alsine pulvinaris Boiss.), A. makmelensis (Alsine libanotica Boiss., not Ar. libanotica Kot-
schy), A. rimarum (Alsine rimarum Boiss. & Balansa), A. Schimperii (Alsine Schimperii
Hochst.), A. stellata (Cherleria stellata Clarke), A. diver sifolia (Moehringia diver sifolia Dol-
liner), A. Grisebachii (Moehringia Grisebachii Janka), A. Jankae (Moehringia Jankae Griseb.),
A. dasyphylla (Moehringia dasyphylla Bruno), A. dasyphylla var. sedoides (Moehringia mucosa
/8 sedoides Cumino), A. Tommasinii (Moehringia Tommasinii Marches), A. glaucovirens
(Moehringia glaxicovirens Bertol.), A. polygonoides Wulf. var. obtusa (A. obtusa All.), A.
papulosa (Moehringia papulosa Bertol.), A. platysperma (Moehringia platysperma Maxim.),
A. Cossoniana (Moehringia stellarioides Coss., not Ar. stellarioides Willd.), A. octandra
(Cherleria octandra Sieb.), A. obtusiloba (Alsinopsis obtusiloba Rydb.), A. marcescens, A.
groenlandica (Retz.) Spreng. var. glabra (A. glabra Michx.),^4. verna L. var. pubescens (A.
hirta £ pubescens Cham. & Schlecht.), and A. verna var. pubescens forma epilis (A. verna
var. propinqua forma epila Fernald). — James P. Poole.

2380. Girola, Carlos D. Maices argentinos y aclimatodos: Variedades de Maiz culti-
vadis en Argentina. 169 p. 35 pi. Buenos Aires. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 71.

2381. Gleason, Henry Allan. Taxonomic studies in Vernonia and related genera.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 46: 235-252. 1919. — The following species and varieties of Vernonia
are discussed: V. borinquensis Urban, V. borinquensis var. Stahlii Urban, V. sericea L. C.
Rich., V. gnaphaliifolia Rich. , V. icosantha DC, V. racemosa Delp., V. rigidaSv?., V. mollis
HBK., V. missurica Raf., V. altissima var. pxibescens (Morris) Daniels. Descriptions of new
species appear as follows: V .Shaferi, V, morelana, V. salamana, V. ctenophora, V. aborigina,
V. jucunda. The following new varieties are given: V. borinquensis var. resinosa, V. borin-
quensis var. hirsuta, V. gnaphaliifolia var. platyphylla, V. Sagraeana var. angusticcps (Ek-
man), V. missurica var. austroriparia, V. fasciculata var. nebraskensis , V. altissima var.
brevipappa, V. altissima var. laxa, V. flaccidifolia var. angustifolia, and V. ovalifolia var.
purpurea. A new genus Ekmania is created for E. lepidota (Griseb.) ; Vernonia Milleri Johns-
ton is referred to the genus Oliganthes; and Piptocoma rufescens var. latifolia and Elephanto-
pus elatus var. intermedins are described as new varieties. — P. A. Munz.

2382. Gourlay, W. Balfour, and G. M. Vevers. Vaccinium intermedium Ruthe.
Jour. Botany 57: 259-260. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2128.

2383. Lorenz, Annie. Nardus stricta in the White Mountains. Rhodora 21: 22-23.
1919. — Reporting new station for Nardus stricta at Waterville, New Hampshire. Descrip-
tion of habitat and list of stations in U. S. A. previously reported. — James P. Poole.

2384. Matouschek. [Rev. of: Holmberg, O. Orohanche caryophyllacea Sm. tagen i
Sverige. (Orobanche caryophyllacea in Schweden entdeckt.) (Orobanche caryophyllacea dis-
covered in Sweden.)] Bot. Notiser 1917: 193-195. 1 fig. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh.
29: 59. 1919.

2385. Miller, W. DeW. A distinction between two Carices. Rhodora 21 : 23-24. 1919.
— An additional character distinguishing Carex laxiculmnis Schweinitz and C. digitalis Willd.
( >ne to three staminate flowers at the base in most of the pistillate spikes of the former, but
in the latter all staminate flowers are at the tip of the spike. — James P. Poole.

2386. Nakai, Takenoshin. Genus novum Oleacearum in Corea media inventum. [New
genus of the Oleaceae found in central Corea.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 153-154. 1919. — Latin
diagnoses of the new genus Abeliophyllum Nakai and the new species Abeliophyllum distichum
Nakai. — L. L. Burlingame.

2387. Nelson, James C. The grasses of Salem, Oregon, and vicinity. Torreya 19: 216-
227. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 357.

No. 2, September. 1920] TAXONOMY. VASC. PLANTS 311

2388. [Nordstedt, C. F. O.] [Swedish rev. of: ALMQUIST. Sveriges Rosae. (Swedish
roses.) 50 p., 1919.1 Bot, Notiser 1919: 168. 1919.— P. A. Rydberg.

2389. [Nordstedt, C. F. <>.] [Swedish rev. of: J6rgensi ■., E. Die Eyphrasia-Arten
Norwegens. (The species of Euphrasia of Norway.) Bergens Mus. Aarsbok, 1916 1917. 337 p.,
11 maps, 14 pi, 54 Jig.} Bot, Notiser 1919: 182. 1919.— P. A. Rydberg.

2390. Pennell, Francis W. A brief conspectus of the species of Kneiffia with the char-
acterization of a new allied genus. Bull. Torrey Bot, Club 46: 363-373. 1919.— A key is pre-
sented for the species of Kneiffia with descriptions of the following new species: A. sessilis,

A. brevistipata, A. semiglandulosa, and K. velutina. The following new combinations are
made: A', fruticosa humifusa (Allen), A*, tetragona (Roth), K. tetragona hybrida (Michx.),
and K. perennis (L.); while A. tetragona var. longistipata is offered as i new variety. A new
allied genus Peniophyllum is made for P. lini folium (Nutt.) Pennell, comb. nov. — P. A.

Vnnz.

2391. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the local flora. I. Torreya 19: 107-119.
1919. — The area concerned is that included within the local flora range of the Torrey Botanical
Club and the Philadelphia Botanical Club. The author has personally collected material
of each species and made descriptions of fresh corollas. The object of the study is (1) to
present detailed keys to the genera and species included in our flora, (2) to confirm the nom-
enclature, by stating the type-species and tracing the later history, (3) to give preliminary
observations on distribution. Detailed keys for the entire family are presented, representing
8 tribes and 21 genera, The genera and species are then taken up in det ail ; the present install-
ment discusses the tribes Verbasceae and Cheloneae, including the genera Verbascum (4
species), Pentstemon (5 species), Chelonc (1 species), and Scrophularia (2 species). One new
combination is proposed, Chelone glabra L. forma tomentosa (Raf.) Pennell. The study will
be continued.—./. C. Nelson.

2392. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the local flora, III. Torreya 19: 161-
171. 1919. — This installment takes up the tribe Digitaleae, containing the genera Veroni-
castrum (1 species) and Veronica (15 species, 1 variety). A detailed key to the species of
Veronica is presented. Two new species are described: Veronica Brittonii Porter, Columbia
University, the type from Marble Hill, Phillipsburg, New Jersey; and V. glandifera Pennell,
from Suffolk, Nansemond County, Virginia. One new combination is made: Veronica xala-
pensis IIBK. is reduced to a variety of V. peregrina L. V. humifusa Dickson of Gray's
Manual, Ed. 7, is identified with V. ruderalis Vahl. — J . C. Nelson.

2393. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the local flora. IV. Torreya 19: 205-
216. 1919. — This installment takes up the tribe Buchnereae, containing the genera Aureolaria
(4 species, 2 varieties), Agalinis (8 species) and Otophylla (1 species). One new variety is
described, namely, Aureolaria pedicularia (L.) Raf. var. intercedens, collected at Mt. Arling-
ton, Morris Co. , New^ Jersey by K. K. Mackenzie, Aug. 26, 1906. Detailed notes on synonymy
and distribution are continued. • — ./. C. Nelson.

2394. Rogers, R.S. Chiloglottis Pescottiana sp.nov. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (N. S.)302:
139-141. PI. 25. 1918. [Contains papers read Sept. to Dec. 1917.] A description of this
new species from specimens from Tallangatta, Victoria, is given. This is accompanied by
an analytical table presenting data which differentiate this species from the six other
Australian members of the genus. — Eloisc Gerry.

2395. Rolfe, R. A. The true mahogonies. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 201-207.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2050.

2396. Salmon, C. E. A hybrid Stachys. Jour. Linnean Soc. Bot, London 44: 357-362.
1 jig. 1919. — An account of the natural origin in a garden of a hybrid between Stachys ger-
manica and S. alpina. The mistaken identity of this plant with Aiton's S. intermedia of North

312 TAXONOMY, VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

America is discussed. This hybrid apparently arises frequently in European gardens, occur-
ring in somewhat varying forms. The puzzling synonymy of this plant is worked out, and
the characteristics of the hybrid and its parents tabulated in detail. [See Bot. Absts. 3, En-
trv 2188.]— A. J. Eames.

2397. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. New Phytol. 18:
65-89. Fig. 41-55. 1919.

2398. Standley, Paul C. Studies of tropical American phanerogams. — No. 3. Contrib.
U. S. Nat. Herb. 20. : 173-220. 1919. — This paper contains revisions of the Mexican species
of Ateleia, the Mexican and Central American species of Erythrina, and the Panamanian spe-
cies of Leiphaimos , together with descriptions of many new species of woody plants, chiefly
Leguminosae and Rubiaceae. The following new names appear: Ateleia Arsenii, A.insularis,
Erythrina cochleata, E. montana Rose & Standi., E. occidentalis , E. Goldmanii, Capparis
discolor, Forchammeria macrocarpa, F. lanceolata, Steriphoma macrantha, Acacia polypodi-
oides, A. leucothrix, A. laevis, A. penicillata, A. Conzattii, A. sororia, A. Rosei, A. vernicosa,
Calliandra Conzattii, Leucaena cuspidata, L. plurijuga, Pithecolobiumlciocalyx, P . calostachys ,
P. macrosiphon, P. confine, Calophylhim Rekoi, C. chiapense, Maba nicaraguensis, M. Rekoi,
Diospyros oaxacana, Leiphaimos truncatus, L. stcllatus, L. Pittieri, L. albus, L. thalesioides ,
L. pulcherrimus, L. simplex (Griseb.) Standi., Randia cincrca (Fernald) Standi., R. lasiantha
{Basanacantha lasianlha Standi.). R. Pittieri (B. Pittieri Standi.), R. portoricensis (Urban)
Standi., R. spinijex (Roem. & Schult.) Standi., R. subcordata (Basanucantha subcordato
Standi.), R. calycosa, R. laevigata, R. pleiomeris , R. guatamalensis , R. malacocarpa, R. Rosei,
Hoffmanniarotundala, 11. uniflora, II. panamensis, H. Tonduzii, H. orizabensis, H . decurrens ,
H. confcrtiflora , H.angustifolia, H. chiapensis , Hamelia costaricensis, H. panamensis, Cas-
asia jacquinioides (Griseb.) Standi., Duroia costaricensis, Phialanthxis macrostemon, Macha-
oiria Coulteri (Hook, f.) Standi., Chiococca pubescens, Guettarda Deamii, G.filipes, Brosimuni
Conzattii, Coussapoa Rekoi , Struthanthus densiflorus (Benth.) Standi., S. diversifolius (Benth.)
Standi., S. Grahami (Benth.) Standi., S. Haenkeanus (Presl) Standi., S. Hartwegi (Benth.)
Standi., S. inconspicuus (Benth.) Standi., S. inornus (Robins. & Greenm.) Standi., Phrygi-
lanthm sonorae (S. Wats.) Standi., Ximenia pubescens, Platanus chiapensis, P. oaxacana,
Prunus prionophylla , Caesalpinia acapulcensis , C. caladenia, C. sclerocarpa, Cassia chia-
pensis, C. Tonduzii, Indigofera sphinctosperma, Cracca Brandcgei, C. tepicana, Andira Gale-
'jttiana, Picramnia pistaciaefolia Blake & Standi., Rhus Barclayi (Hemsl.) Standi., R. jalis-
cana, Marcgravia gnatemalensis. — S. F. Blake.

2399. Taylor, Norman. Rock's Lobelioideae of Hawaii. [Rev. of: Rock, J. F. A
monographic study of the Hawaiian species of the tribe Lobelioideae, family Campanulaceae.
394 V- 217 pi.. Honolulu, Feb. 20, 1919.] Torreya 19: 228-230. 1919.— The flora of the
Hawaiian Islands has been long noted for its extreme endemism. The tribe Lobelioideae, syn-
onymous with the family Lobeliaceae, is discussed with reference to its affinities with its near-
est relatives. The genus Cyanea is regarded as still in process of evolution. Seven genera,
containing 149 species and varieties, are included. Four of the endemic genera are related
to American genera. The species are fully described and illustrated. The book is truly a
monograph in the best sense of the word. — J. C. Nelson.

2400. Waby, J. F. Some interesting species of palms. Jour. Bd. Agric. British Guiana
12: 49-55. 1919. — Descriptions of Oreodoxa regia, O. regia var. Jenmanii, O. oleracea, Euterpe

dulis, E. slenophylla, E. ventricosa, E. acuminata, E. Jenmanii, and E. utilis. — /. B.Rorer.

2401. Waby, J. F. Some interesting species of palms. Jour. Bd. Agric. British Guiana
12: 112-115. 1919.— Gives descriptions, common names and interesting facts about the fol-
lowing palms— Mauritia flexuosa, Chrysalidocarpus lutescens, Cystostachys renda, Desmoncus
sp., Nipa fruticans, and Hyphaene thebaica. — «/. B. Rorer.

2402. Ward, Martha E. Galax aphylla introduced in Massachusetts. Rhodora 21: 24.
1919. — Few plants of Galax aphylla found in the woods in Swampscott, Mass., where pre-
viously reported by Fernald. — James P. Poole.

No. 2, September, 1920] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 313

MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

B. E. Livingston, Editor

2403. Anonymous. Sea-grass fibre as a packing material. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 96.
1920. [Abstract from La Nature, Oct. 11, 1919, in Technical Rev.]

2404. Anonymous. Substitutes for pollen and nectar. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 :
116. 1920. — Discusses rye flour as a substitute for pollen and nectar as food for bees. — L. R.
Waldron.

2405. Anonymous. Putting flax on a modern basis. Sci. Amer. 122: 166, 175-176. 4flQ-
1920. — Pertains to manufacturing processes. — Chas. H. Otis.

2406. Boykr, G. Sur l'inclusion de brins d'herbes par les champignons. [Concerning
the inclusion of bits of plants by certain fungi.] ActesSoc. Linn. Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux)
69: -19-50. 1915-16. — Stems and leaves of grasses remain living after their inclusion by growth
of polyporous fungi. — W. H. Emig.

2407. Cakdot, J. A letter from M. Cardot to the Sullivant Moss Society. Bryologist 23 :
7. 1920.

2408. Chalmers, Albert J. Sadd dermatitis. Jour. Tropical Med. and Hygiene 23:
57-59. 7 fig. 1920. — The stiff hairs of Panicum pyramidalc Lam., one of the chief grasses
forming the floating and rooted masses of vegetation which sometimes block the White Nile,
are shown to cause a dermatitis in human beings, by their mechanical action. — E. A. Bessey.

2409. Cheel, E., and Duckworth, A. C. The cultivation of native plants. Australian
Nat. 4: 131-133. 1920.

2410. Claudy, C. H. The fruits of scientific farming. Sci. Amer. 122: 216. 1920.— A
popular article on some of the activities of the United States Department of Agriculture. —
Chas. H. Otis.

2411. DeBord, Geo. G. Comments on the examination of canned salmon. [Abstract.]
Absts. Bact. 4: 11. 1920. — Twelve hundred and eighty-three cans were examined bacterio-
logically of which 34 per cent were not sterile. The organisms found were aerobic, sporulating
bacteria. There was no correlation between the sterility and the odor of the can. [From
author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Roddick.

2412. Dodd, Sydney. Infestation of the skin, etc., of sheep by grass seeds. Jour. Com-
parative Path, and Therap. 22 : 90-95. 1919. — In many parts of Australia much injury, some-
times death, results in sheep from the penetration of the skin or eyes by seeds of various
grasses, chiefly of the genera Stipa and Aristida and also Hordeum murinum, Festvca brom-
oides and possibly species of Andropogon. — E. A. Bessey.

2413. Dunham, Elizabeth M. Mounting mosses for exhibition purposes. Bryologist 23 :
6. 1920. — The author describes how specimens may be mounted on cardboard and protected
against dust and breakage by sheets of celluloid. —E. B. Chamberlain.

2414. Edmondson, Ruth B., Geo. G. DeBord, and Charles Thom. Botulism from
canned ripe olives. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 10. 1920. — All cans which were swelled or
' 'off" in odor .showed living organisms. Twenty-seven cans from a "batch" which had caused
poisoning cases were tested for B. botulinus and the organism was isolated from 7 cans. [From
author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

2415. Esty, J. R., and C. C. Williams. Resistant bacteria causing spoilage in canned
foods. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 11. 1920. — The organisms causing this spoilage were
facultative and obligate anaerobes and were classified according to the range in temperature

314 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [Bot. Absts., Vol. V,

where growth occurred. The facultative anaerobes fell between (1) 42° and 80°C. ; (2) 22°
and 80°C. ; (3) 37° and 80°C. ; (4) 22° and 55°C. ; (5) 37° and 55°C. ; (6) 37° and 65°C. ; (7)
22° and 45°C. All the five obligate anaerobes isolated were vigorous gas formers and fell into
four groups according to the above classification. (1) 45° and S0°C. ; (2) 30° and 65°C. ; (3)
42° and 65°C. ; (4) 22° and 45°C. [From author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc.
Amer. Bact.]— D. Rcddick.

2416. Hammer, B. W. , and L. R. Sanders. A bacteriological study of the method of pas-
teurizing and homogenizing the ice cream mix. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 186: 19-26. 1919.

2417. King, Albert E. W. The mechanical properties of Philippine bast-fiber ropes.
Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 561-655. 5 pi., 2 fig. 1919. — These investigations were undertaken
to secure quantitative results on the mechanical properties of Philippine bast-fiber ropes.
Thirty-two kinds of fibrous material were obtained from bast-plant species, and seven from
those that gave no bast-fibers. These were compared with abaca and maguey. The plain
stripping process of obtaining fiber was compared with the water-retting process, to the ad-
vantage of the latter. The circumference and cross sectional area were calculated and the
tensile strength was determined, the results being collected in a series of tables. The indi-
vidual species of the fiber plants are described. — Albert R. Swectser.

2418. Magoiora, A., and Carbone, D. Sull'impiego del Bacillus felsineus per la macer-
azione industriale della canapa. [The utilization of B. felsineus in the retting of hemp on an
industrial scale.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 52: 449-462. 1919. — The present investigation
aims at the study of the commercial application of a biological method for retting hemp (Can-
nabis). The material is introduced into masonry tanks containing water sufficient to cover
it and maintained at 37°C. by means of steam pipes. Inoculation of the mass with cultures
of B. felsineus and Saccharomyces ellipsoideus in relatively moderate amounts brings about
retting of the fiber in 60-90 hours. The quality of the product is "perfect" in terms of com-
mercial standards. The quantity retted varied in the experiments from 100 kgm. to 492 kgm.
and this is considered by the authors as an indication that the method is applicable to larger
lots on a commercial scale. Slight variations in the technic may be introduced in the proced-
ure as a result of scientific investigations. — A. Bonazzi.

2419. McAtee, W. L. Some local names of plants, III. Torreya 20: 17-27. 1920.— A
list of 150 local names, applied to 104 species of American plants belonging to 59 families, is
presented. The locality is cited wherever possible, and the source from which the name
was obtained is indicted. [Previous installments appeared in: Torreya 13:225-236. 1913.
Ibid. 16: 235-242. 1916.]— J. C. Nelson.

2420. Murrill, W. A. Plant growths that shed light. Sci. Amer. 122: 427, 440. 4 fig.
1920. — Popular description of certain luminous fungi. — Chas. II. Otis.

2421. Mutch, Nathan. The isolation of a single bacterial cell. Jour. Roy. Microsc.
Soc. London 1919: 221-225. / fig. 1919. — The organism to be studied is grown upon a solid
medium for six or eight hours, and the resulting growth emulsified in sterile broth or nor-
mal saline solution. One or two narrow rings of filter paper are then placed in the hanging
drop cell and moistened with saline solution. The rim of the cell is prepared with vaseline.
A clean cover slip is flamed and when cooled a micro-drop of emulsion of bacterium is placed
in its center by means of a very small loop of platinum wire. The slip is immediately placed in
position over the moist chamber. A series of such drops can be prepared and examined rap-
idly and the dilution of the original emulsion adjusted until a drop containing a solitary or-
ganism is found. The cover slip is raised from the cell, a large drop of suitable medium is
placed close to the micro-drop and the slip is tilted until the two coalesce. The slip is then
placed on another moist cell, incubated for 24 hours, and again examined. When a solid me-
dium is employed, if original observation was correct, one colony only will have developed.
In working with delicate organisms the process must be carried out at body temperature on

No. 2. September, 19201 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 315

a warm stage, and the filter paper ring must be replaced by a small drop of saline solution,
only two or three times as large as the micro-drop. When the observation is complete, the
large drop of medium is added, the slip is transferred to a moist cell containing paper ring,
and the preparation is incubated as before. — The advantages of this method are that no spe-
cial skill or practice is called for, no special preparation is needed, and the work can be per-
formed with the ordinary apparatus found on a bacteriological bench; the time required is
only one or two hours. — Julia Moesel Haber.

2422. RunoLFS, W. Experiments on the value of common rock salt and sulfur for killing
stumps. Soil Sci. 9: 181- 189. PL 1-2. 1920. — Sulphur applied to high or low brush stimu-
lated the growth of the live tree stumps. Rock salt up to 2.5 tons per acre did little harm
while 0.5 to 1 ton per acre acted as a fertilizer. Applications of 2 to 3 tons per acre of sodium
chloride to stumps cut in the winter killed or severely injured them. The salt should be
applied in the spring just before the leaves appear. — W. J. Robbins.

2423. Sagaspe, M. J. Sur la Digltale (Digitalis purpurea). [A note concerning Digitalis
purpurea.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux. Proces-verbaux. 68: 64-65. 1914. — Three mon-
strosities of Digitalis purpurea are briefly described. — W. H. Emig.

2424. Trowbridge, P. F. Report of the director, July 1, 1917, to June 30, 1919. North
Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 136. 23 p., 3 fig. 1920. — This embraces the annual report of
the station for two years. A brief summary is given of the experimental work including a
limited amount of data. — L. R. Waldron.

2425. Waksman, Selman A. The industrial application of enzymes of Aspergillus oryzae.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 7. 1920. — The enzymes of A. oryzae hydrolyze starch completely
whereas malt diastase does not; and the quantity of starch hydrolyzed is 4 to 6 times greater.
The enzymes are useful in the textile industry for removing "size," in clearing fruit extracts
which contain some starch, and in the manufacture of various starch derivatives. [From
author's abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

2426. Wyant, Zae Northrup. Experiments in silage inoculation. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 4: 6. 1920. — Various strains of lactic acid producing bacteria were used to inoculate
ensilage. After fermentation for 5 weeks the ensilage proved very palatable to calves. —
Platings were made from the interior to determine whether the types introduced predominated
or not. From the first pair of inoculations with Bact. lactis acidi and Bact. bulgaricum the
first organism was recovered without difficulty, the latter not at all. The organisms which
predominated in each silo were short rods in pairs which resemble Bact. lactis acidi in mor-
phology, spore-forming rods, and a few yeasts. [From author's abst. of paper read at scien-
tific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES IN VOLUME V

(inferences are to Entry numbers; an asterisk before a number signifies that the entry referred

to is by citation alone — no abstract.)

A., D. Doubling of flowers in stocks. 1419.

Abidin,J. Horse breeding in Osmania. *253.

Abl. Sterile twins in cattle. 1420.

Aboville, see D'Aboville.

Acosta, Celsa. The cajuput. 516.

Adams, J. F. Alternate stage of Puccinias-
trum Hydrangeae. 630.

Adamson, R. S. Rev. of Weaver, J. E.
Quadrat method. *97.

Adler, F. v. d. Virgin forest Bohemia. 1270.

Aellen, Paul. New hybrids in Chenopodium.
1008.

Agan, J. E. Fibers, Brazilian. 128.

Agee, J. H. (Krustkoff, H. H., J. H. Agee,
and R. H. Hall) 2304.

Aguila, Isidoro. Olive oil. 1862.

Aguilar, R. H. Oil, Lumbang (Aleurites
Moluccana and trisperma). 1271.

Akerman, A. Winter-killing and frost resist-
ance. 254.

Albertus, Halvar. Hesperidin-like bodies in
the Labiatae. 775.

Albes, E. Petit grain oil as a perfume for
soap. 2123

Allard, H. A. (Garner, W. W., and Allard)
22, 935

Allen, C. E. Sex inheritance in Sphaerocar-
pos. 1915.

Allen, Ezra. Spermatogenesis in albino rat.
1421.

Allen, Paul W. "Rope" in bread. 2157 —
Rope in corn products. 2158. .

Allen, W. J. Orchard notes from New South
Wales. *1703. — Apricots in New South
Wales. *1704. — Peaches in New South
Wales. *1705.

Allen, W. J., and S. A. Hogg. Cherries in
New South Wales. *1708 — Orchard notes
from New South Wales. *1709.

Allen, W. J., and W. le Gay Brereton. Or-
chard notes from New South Wales.
*1706, *1707.

Allendorf and Ehrenberg. Sugar-beet breed-
ing. *255.

Allendorff and Ehrenberg. Sugar-beet breed-
ing. (Anon. rev. 259.

Allison, F. E. (Fellers, C. R., and Allison) 2278.

Almquist. Swedish rose. (Rev. by Nor-
stedt) 2388.

Alstein, see Van Alstein.

Alverdes, F. Rev. of Boas, J. *1422— Rev.
of Lebcdinsky, N. G. *1423— Rev. of
Naef, A. *1424.— Rev. of Plate, L. *1425.
—Rev. of Schaxel, J. *1426.

Alway, F. J. A phosphate-hungry peat soil.
1086.

Amann, Jules. Mosses of Switzerland. 614.

Amann, J. Flora of the mosses of Switzer-
land. (Rev. by Chamberlain) 618.

Amend, F. Improvement of Flemish rye.
*256. (Anon, rev.) 260.

Ames, J. W., and C. J. Schollenberger. Cal-
cium and magnesium in soils. *2149,
2293.

Ammon, W. Subsidized forestry, Switzer-
land. 1272.

Amos, A. Clover stem-rot. (Rev. by Cot-
ton) 2027.

Anderlie (Miovic and Anderlic) 2068.

Anders, J. N. Growing plants as health-
giving agents. 972.

Anderson, J. Balsa wood (Ochroma lago-
pus), Ecuador. 1273.

Andre, G. Storage of oranges. *1710. —
Inversion of sugar in stored oranges.
2193.

Andrews, A. Le Roy. Dicranoweisia crispula
in the White Mountains. *1916— Hy-
menostomum in North America. 1917.

Andrews, E. F. Trees, odd shapes. *129.

Andronescu, D. I. Growth of maize em-
bryos without endosperm. 948.

Angell, E. I. (Hall, E. C, and Angell) 2302.

Anonymous. Electricity and agriculture. 1

Anonymous. Lupins and poor soil. 2.

Anonymous. Types of oat panicles. 3.

Anonymous. Potato growing experiments,
Switzerland. 4.

Anonymous. Seed importation act defined.
*5.

Anonymous. Bibliographical sketch of
Ethel Sargant. 72.

Anonymous. Sugar-cane in the West Indies.
73.

317

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 3

318

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Anonymous. Rev. of Bower, F. O. Botany

of the living plant. *98.
Anonymous. Rev. of Cook, M. T. 99.
Anonymous. Rev. of Ellis, G. S. M. 100.
Anonymous. "Black bean" (Castanosper-

mum australe). 130.
Anonymous. "Blackboy" (Xanthorrhoe

preissii), commercial uses, West Aus-
tralia. 131.
Anonymous. Movable wood-preservation

plants. *132.
Anonymous. Collecting chicle gum (Achras

sapota), central and tropical South

America. *133.
Anonymous. Fibre, grass tree, Australia.

134.
Anonymous. Wood preservation. *135.
Anonymous. Kiln drying oak vehicle stock.

*136.
Anonymous. Timber testing, built-up wood.

*137.
Anonymous. Willow, Napoleon. *138.
Anonymous. Balsa, new uses. *139.
Anonymous. Cork shipping methods. *140.
Anonymous. Kiln drying vehicle stock.

*141.
Anonymous. Eucalyptus, Australian "wan-

doo." 142.
Anonymous. Eucalyptus, West Australia.

143.
Anonymous. Naval stores. *144.
Anonymous. Wood-drying in cold air. 145.
Anonymous. Forest law, trespass, France.

146.
Anonymous. Stumpage values, oak, eastern

France. 147.
Anonymous. Haguenau Forest, description,

France. 148.
Anonymous. Conversion of coppice forest,

Vosges, France. 149.
Anonymous. War damage to French for-
ests. 150.
Anonymous. Wattle growing and distilla-
tion, Australia. 151.
Anonymous. Improvement of agricultural

crops. 257.
Anonymous. Plant breeding in Ireland.

*258.
Anonymous. Rev. of Allendorf and Ehren-

berg. Sugar-beet breeding. *259.
Anonymous. Rev. of Amend, F. *260.
Anonymous. Rev. of Barker, E. *261.
Anonymous. Rev. of Baur, E. *262.
Anonymous. Rev. of Becking, L. G. M.

Baas. *263.

Anonymous. Rev. of Emerson, R. A. *264.
Anonymous. Rev. of Fraser, A. C. *265.
Anonymous. Rev. of Freeman, G. F. *266.
Anonymous. Rev. of Frolich, G. *267, *268.
Anonymous. Rev. of Fruwirth, C. *269,*270.
Anonymous. Rev. of Gassner, S. *271.
Anonymous. Rev. of Hansen, W. *272.
Anonymous. Rev. of Jones, D. F. *273,

*274, *275, *276, *277.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kajanus, B. *278,

*279, *280.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kajanus, B., and S. O.

Berg. *281.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kalt, B., and A.

Schulz. *282.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kiessling, L. *283.
Anonymous. Rev. of Killer, J. *284.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kuster, E. *285.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kuwada, Y. *286.
Anonymous. Rev. of Lehmann, Ernst. *287.
Anonymous. Rev. of Lindstrom, E. *288.
Anonymous. Rev. of Lindstrom, E. W.

*289.
Anonymous. Rev. of Love, H. H., and W.

T. Craig. *290, *291.
Anonymous. Rev. of Love, H. H., and A. C.

Fraser. *292.
Anonymous. Rev. of Love, H. H., and G.

P. McRostie. *293.
Anonymous. Rev. of Meunissier, A. *294.
Anonymous. Rev. of Nilsson-Ehle, H. *295.
Anonymous. Rev. of Oberstein, O. *296.
Anonymous. Rev. of Rasmuson, Hans.

*297, *298.
Anonymous. Rev. of Roemer, Th. *299.
Anonymous. Rev. of Schmidt, J. *300,

*301, *302, *303.
Anonymous. Rev. of Siegel, W. *304.
Anonymous. Rev. of Sirks, M. J. *305.
Anonymous. Rev. of Snell, K. *306.
Anonymous. Rev. of Sommer, K. *307.
Anonymous. Rev. of Stahel, G. *398.
Anonymous [R]. Rev. of Stout, A. B. *309.
Anonyous. Rev. of Tammes, T. *310.
Anonymous. Rev. of Tjebbes, K., and H.

N. Koiman. *311.
Anonymous. Rev. of Urban, J. *312.
Anonymous. Rev. of Volkart, A. *313.
Anonymous. Rev. of Von Caron-Eldingen.

*314.
Anonymous. Rev. of von Ubisch, G. *315.
Anonymous. Hungarian Soc. for race hy-
giene. *316.
Anonymous. Celery leaf-spot. *725.
Anonymous. New disease of pears. 726.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

319

Anonymous. Japanese pyrethrum flowers.

776.
Anonymous. Palma Christi. *777.
Anonymous. Glycerin by fermentation. 909.
Anonymous. Rev. of Biedermann, W. 910.
Anonymous. Rev. of Lakon, G. 895.
Anonymous. Rev. of Biedermann, W. 911.
Anonymous. Rev. of Jacoby, M. 912.
Anonymous. Rev. of Lombbroso, U. 913.
Anonymous. Rev. of Schweizer, K. 914.
Anonymous. Rev. of Cambage, R. H. *940.
Anonymous. Disease resistance. 969.
Anonymous. Lupins on poor land. 9S0.
Anonymous. Palat ability of New Zealand

plants for sheep. *1066.
Anonynous. Lac cultivation in India. *1067.
Anonymous. Utilization of marine plants.

*1068.
Anonymous. Heat fuel for locomotives.

*1C69.
Anonymous. Elephant grass. 1087, 1088.
Anonymous. Coffee in New South Wales.

1089.
Anonymous. Liming, cultivation and man-

urial experiments at Margam, Australia.

*1090.
Anonymous. Rust on Elephant grass. *1091.
Anonymous. Rice culture in New South

Wales. 1092.
Anonymous. Weed seeds. *1093.
Anonynous. Paper from bagasse. 1094.
Anonymous. Home-made syrup from sugar

beets. 1095.
Anonymous. Paper from Zacaton. 1096.
Anonymous. Peanut studies. 1097.
Anonymous. Biographical sketch of R. P.

Gregory. *1234.
Anonymous. Biographical notice of C. S.

Harrison. *1235.
Anonymous. Biographical notice of W. J.

Stewart. *1236.
Anonymous. Biographical sketch of L. S.

Ware. 1237.
Anonymous. Annual return of statistics re-
lating to forest administration for the

year 1917-18, British India. 1274.
Anonymous. Humidity, automatic control

in factories, U. S. A. 1275.
Anonymous. Wood-pulp decay, U. S. A.

*1276, 2009.
Anonymous. Airplanes in forestry, Switzer-
land. 1277.
Anonymous. Japan's forests. *1278.
Anonymous. Prices and business conditions.

*1279.

Anonymous. Fuel wood value. *1280.

Anonymous. Wood versus coal in gas pro-
duction, Austria. *1281.

Anonymous. Forests and game, Denmark.
*1282.

Anonymous. Kiln drying hardwoods. *1283.

Anonymous. Pencil material, U. S. A.
*1284.

Anonymous. Wood waste, France. *1285.

Anonymous. Wooden articles, U. S. A. 1286.

Anonymous. Paper supply and forestry, U.
S. A. *1287.

Anonymous. Wood preservative, sodium
fluoride, U. S. A. *1288.

Anonymous. Forest conference, New Or-
leans, Louisiana, U. S. A. 1289.

Anonymous. Nationalization of forests,
Austria. 1290.

Anonymous. Portable houses for foresters,
Switzerland. *1291.

Anonymous. Cereal and flax breeding. 1427.

Anonymous. Daffodil breeding. 1428.

Anonymous. A new dahlia. *1429.

Anonymous. Heredity of a great botanist.
*1430.

Anonymous. Photograph of twin calves.
*1431.

Anonymous. Italian Genetic Association.
*1432.

Anonymous. Eugenics Society in Hungary.
*1433.

Anonymous. Birth rate in mixed marriages.
*1434.

Anonymous. Eugenics in Germany. *1435.

Anonymous. Eugenics in Scandinavia.
*1436.

Anonymous. Eugenics and other sciences.
*1437.

Anonymous. Misconception concerning hu-
man heredity. *1438.

Anonymous. Factor influencing the sex
ratio. *1439.

Anonymous. Measuring intelligence. *1440.

Anonymous. Intellect correlation with num-
ber of brain cells. *1441.

Anonymous. Sheep-goat hybrid. *1442.

Anonymous. Carriers of the germ plasm.
*1443.

Anonymous. To increase the birthrate.
*1444.

Anonymous. Honor to Walter Van Fleet.
*1445.

Anonymous. Death of Richard Semon.
*1446.

Anonymous. Sj-stematic breeding. 1447.

320

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Anonymous. History of methods of selec-
tion. *1448.

Anonymous. Coconut. *1711, *1713.

Anonymous. Liming fruit trees. 1714.

Anonymous. Fruit growing conference.
1715.

Anonymous. Indigo culture. *1716.

Anonymous. Spraying orchard and garden.
*1717.

Anonymous. Stocks. 1790.

Anonymous. Poppies at Wisley. 1791.

Anonymous. Rev. of Farrer, R. 1792.

Anonymous. Runner beans. 1845.

Anonymous. Climbing beans. 1846.

Anonymous. Vegetable marrows. 1847.

Anonymous. Leeks at Wisley, 1917-18. 1848.

Anonymous. Brussels sprouts at Wisley.
1849.

Anonymous. Carrots at Wisley. 1850.

Anonymous. Ivory from Borassus ethiapi-
cum. 1863.

Anonymous. Index to American mycologi-
cal literature. *1925.

Anonymous. Spraying with bordeaux mix-
ture and lime-sulphur. *1712, 2001.

Anonymous. Compatibility of spray mix-
tures. *2002.

Anonymous. Index to American mycologi-
cal literature. *2003.

Anonymous. Treatment of Armillaria.
*2004.

Anonymous. Cherry shot-hole disease.
2005.

Anonymous. Oospora pustulans. *2006.

Anonymous. The Christmas tree. 2007.

Anonymous. Our botanical immigrants.
2008.

Anonymous. Oil of Lactuca scariola olei-
fera. 2124.

Anonymous. Starch formation. *2156.

Anonymous. Yeast investigation. 2194.

Anonymous. Respiration of leaf cells. 2210.

Anonymous. German potash production in
January, 1920. *2288.

Anonymous. William Mansfield. *2336.

Anonymous. Sea-grass fibre as a packing
material. *2403.

Anonymous. Rye flour as food for bees.
*2404.

Anonymous. Flax manufacturing. *2405.

Anstead, R. D. Improvement of coffee. 317.

Anthony, S., and H. V. Harlan. Barley pol-
len germination. *6, 949, 1449.

Appel, O., and J. Westerdijk. Classifica-
tion of fungous diseases of plants. 727.

Appleman, C. O. Preparation of seed pota-
toes. (Rev. by Hibbard) 977.

Arango, R. The royal palm. *517.

Arbor, Agnes. (Beer, Rudolph, and Arbor)
1266.

Arber, E. A. N. Cones of Williamsonia.
(Rev. by Coulter, J. M.) 713.

Arias, B. A cork substitute. 152.

Armitage, Eleonora. Habitats of Madeira
bryophytes. *1918.

Armstrong, E. F. Simple carbohydrates and
glucosides. 866.

Arnaud, G. The Asterinees. 631. — Chlorosis
treatment. 2010.

Arthur, J. C. Errors in double nomencla-
ture. 632. — New names of Phanerogams.
1009.

Arthur, J. M. Rev. of Folsom, D. *318.

Ashby, S. F. Sugar-cane mosaic disease.
2112.

Ashe, L. H. (Northrup, J. H., L. H. Ashe,
and R. R. Morgan) 670.

Ashe, W. W. Notes on trees and shrubs in
the vicinity of Washington. *1292.

Atkins, W. R. G. (Dixon, H. H., and Atkins)
848.

Atkinson, Esmond. Weeds and their iden-
tification in New Zealand. 1098.

Aumuller, F. Nutation and the degree of
fineness of glume in two-rowed barley.
1099.

Averitt, S. D. (Van Duyne, C, L. R. Schoen-
mann, and S. D. Averitt) 2317.

Averna-Sacca, R. Diseases of apples. 2011.

Ayers, S. H., and P. Rupp. Simultaneous
acid and alkaline bacterial fermenta-
tions. 867.

B., D. Fougeres utiles. Ferns. 1793.— New

plants in horticulture. *2337.
Bactock, E. B. Crepis for genetical study.

1450.
Babe, E., and T. Cabrera. A new chemical

indicator. 778.
Baccarini, P. Teratological notes. Italy.

543. — New theory of evolution. 1978.
Bach, S. Anthocyan in Pisum. 320.— Pisum

X Faba. 319.
Bachmann, E. New lichen structures. 633.
Badoux, H. National forests in Switzer-
land. 153.
Baerthlein, K. Bacterial mutations. (Rev.

by Schiemann) 1633.
Bailey, D. E. (Hammer, B. W., and Bailey)
1946, 2172.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

321

Bailey, L. H. (Farlow, W. G., Roland Thax-
ter, and L. H. Bailey) 77.

Bailey, P. G. Inheritance in leg feathering.
(Rev. by Ellinger) 1492.

Bailey, W. A. Artificial regeneration in sal
forests, India. 154.

Baines, A. E. Electrical conditions and
plant growth. 968.

Baker, C. F. Work fundamental to plant
pathology and economic entomology.
*728.— Bibliography of plant pathology
in the Philippines and Malaysia. 1238.
— Seed exchange. 1718.

Baker, Frank C. Pleistocene life. 1980.

Baker, Hugh P., and Edward F. McCarthy.
Silviculture and lumbering. 1293.

Bal, S. N. Vermicularia Jatropha. 1927.

Bal, S. N., and H. P. Chaudhury. Plicaria
repanda. 1926.

Baldwin, J. F. Germination of grains. 1070.

Balfour, B. Late flowering gentians. 1010.
Nomocharis of China. 1011.

Ballard, C. W. Gum identification. 779.

Ballou, F. H., and I. P. Lewis. Horticul-
tural notes. 1719. — Orchard culture.
1720.— Pruning the apple. 1721.

Balls, W. Lawrence. Daily growth-rings in
cotton hairs. 1265.

Balme, Juan. Olives in Mexico. 1722.

Bancroft, W. D. Rev. of Buisson, F., and
F. E. Farrington. 101. — Rev. of Peters,
C. A. *1100— Rev. of Jaeger, F. M.
1451— Rev. of Peters, C. A. *1864 —
Rev. of Jaeger, F. M. *1878— Rev. of
Peters, C. A. 2012.— Rev. of Haldane,
J. S. *2136— Rev. of Griffiths, E. 2231 —
The colors of colloids. 2245. — Rev. of
Alexander, Jerome. 2246. — Rev. of Bech-
hold, H. 2247— Rev. of Ostwald, Wolf-
gang. 2248.— Rev. of Prideaux, E. B.
R. *2249, *2257— Rev. of Willows, R.
S., and I. Hatchek. 2250.— Rev. of Lloyd,
Strauss L. *2289.

Bang, J. P. F. Mountain-fir management,
Denmark. 1294.

Bano, Jose de. Oat culture. 1101.

Banta, Arthur M. Sex in Cladocera. 1452.

Barber, C. A. Salinity and sugar-cane
growth. 7. — Sugar-cane work in India.
74. — The growth of sugar cane. 1102,
1103. — Sugar-cane industry in India.
1104.

Barbey, A. Swiss forest administration in
war time. 155.

Barett, A. Fossil verticillate Siphoneae of
Villanova, Piedmont, Italy. 706.

Bargellini,G. Scutellarein. *2125. — The con-
stituents of scutellarein. *2159.

Bargellini, G., and Peratoner, E. Dati-
scetin. *2126. — Synthesis of datiscetin.
2160.

Barker, B. T. P. Diseases of plants and their
treatment. 2013.

Barker, B. T. P., and C. T. Gimingham.
Rhizoctonia disease of asparagus. 2014.

Barker, E. Heredity in Ipomoea. (Rev. by
Anon.) 261.

Barnils, Pere. Hereditary elements in lan-
guage. *1453.

Barnola, Joaquin Ma. de. Lycopdiales of
the Iberica Peninsula. 2361.

Barre, H. W. Rept. division of Botany,
South Carolina. 729.

Barthel, C, and N. Bengtsson. Nitrifica-
tion of barn-yard manure. 995.

Bartlett, J. T. Breeding fruits for canning
and evaporating. 1454.

Barton, A. W. Lipolytic activity of castor
bean and soy bean. 915.

Bassler, H. Lepidophyte from carbonifer-
ous. *544.

Bastin, S. L. Potato diseases. 2015. — Col-
ored glass for seed germination. *2228.

Bates, C. G. A new evaporimeter for use in
forest studies. *1295.

Bateson, W. Inheritance of acquired char-
acters. 321.

Bateson, W. Double flowers and sex-linkage
in Begonia. (Rev. by Schiemann) 1634.

Baudouin, M. Sex differences in the human
axis. *322.

Baughman, W. F., and G. S. Jamieson.
Squash-seed oil. *540.

Baughman, W. F. (Jamieson, G. S., and
Baughman) 542.

Bauin, P. Dimegaly of sperms. *1455.

Baumann, E. Breeding for immunity in
potatoes. *323. — Breeding of rape. *324. —
Selection for immunity in potatoes. 1456.

Baur, E. Self sterility and self fertility in
Antirrhinum. (Rev. by Anon.) 262.

Baver, F. O. Botany and living plants.
(Rev. by Anon.) 98.

Baxter, S. N. Growing of Christmas trees.
518.

Beal, G. D., and T. S. Hamilton. "Shaking-
out" method of alkaloid determination.
780.

322

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Bear, Firman E., and George M. McClure.
Sampling soil plots. 2322.

Bear, Firman E., and J. R. Royston. Ni-
trogen losses in urine. 981.

Beardslee, H. C. A new Amanita. 1928.

Beath, O. A. Chemical examination of three
Larkspur species. 781.

Bechhold, H. Colloids in biology. (Rev. by
Bancroft) 2247. — Colloids in biology and
medicine. 842.

Beck, G. Observations on ferns. 2362.

Beck, M. W., and M. Y. Longacre. Soil sur-
vey of Howard Co., Ark. 2295.

Becker, J. Serium reaction and agricultural
seeds. 8. — Floral characters in Papaver
Rhoeas. *325. — Breeding Brassicas. *326.

Becking, L. G. M. Baas. Limiting propor-
tions in Mendelian populations. (Rev.
by Anon.) 263.

Beckwith, Charles C. Cranberry fertilizer.
1723. — Nitrogen and phosphates in Cran-
berries. *2267.

Bedford, Duke of. Science and fruit grow-
ing. (Rev. by Boulger) 1726.

Beer, Rudolph, and Agnes Arber. Multi-
nucleate cells in vegetable tissues. 1266.

Beeson, C. F. C. Food of Indian forest in-
sects. 156.

Behrend, R., and G. Heyer. Synthesis of
muconic acid. 868.

Benedict, R. C. The simplest fern in exist-

ence.

"2363.

Bengtsson, N. (Barthel, C, and Bengtsson)
995.

Bensaude, M. Life history of basidiomy-
cetes. (Rev. by Levine) 122.

Benson, M. Cantheliophorus, a Sigillario-
strobus. 707.

Bentley, Jr., J. B. Municipal forest-plant-
ing, Chenango Co., N. Y. 1296.— Forest
management. (Rev. by Fernow) 1325.
(Rev. by Moore) 1373.

Benton, T. D. (Meyer, A. H., and Benton)
2306.

Berg, S. O. Pea crosses. (Rev. by Anon.) 281.

Berger, M. G. Turneraceae. (Rev. by
Guerin) 805.

Bergh, E. Deaf-dumbness in Malmohus,
Sweden. 327.

Beringer, G. M. Rev. of Maiden, J. H.
Revision of Eucalyptus. *2369.

Berman, N., and L. F. Rettger. Nitrogen
nutrition of bacteria. 896.

Bernard, Charles. Tea in Dutch East In-
dies. 1724.

Berry, E. W. Phanerogamus and warm-
blooded animals. 708. — Fossil plants.
*1981.

Berry, J. B. Forest depletion, Georgia. 155.

Berthault, P. Garden experiments at
Hamma. 1795.

Bertrand, G. Preservation of fruits in cold
water. 929.

Bertrand, P. Plant zones in coal region,
Northern France. 709.

Besson, A., A. Ranque, and C. Senez. Me-
tabolism of bacteria. 869. — Bacillus coli
in glucose-containing media. 870. — Bac-
terial action in sugar-containing media.
871. — Glucose fermentation by Bacillus
coli. 872.

Besson, M. A., and Adrian Doane. Darso,
a new sorghum. 1105.

Besterio, see De Besteiro.

Betts, M. Winifred. Structure of peridotit
plants of New Zealand. *1879.

Beverley, J. Maize notes. *1106.

Bewley, W. F. (Paine, S. G., and Bewley)
672/755, 756.

Bexon, Dorothy. Abnormal seedlings of
Centranthus. 545.

Beythien, A. Spices and spice substitutes in
war. 782.

Biedermann, W. Salivary ferments. (Anon.
rev.) 910. — Autolysis of starch. (Anon,
rev.) 911.

Biers, P. Parasitism of Coprinus. 2016.

Biggar, H. H. Yield in maize. 328. — His-
tory of corn culture. *1239.

Biilmann, H. H. Forest growth, Meilgaard
district, Denmark. *1297.

Bijhouiver, J. (Sirks, M. J., and Bijhouiwer)
1654.

Binnewies, E. R. (Dunbar, B. A., and Binne-
wies) *18.

Biolley, H. Improved forest management,
Switzerland. 158.

Bishop, O. F., J. Grantham, and M. J.
Knapp. Probable error in Hevea ex-
periments. *1457.

Bitter, G. South American Solanaceae. 1012.

Bixby, W. G. Butternut and Japan walnut.
329.

Bizzell, J. A. (Lyon, T. L., J. A. Bizzell, and
B. D. Wilson) 2283.

Black, J. M. Additions to South Australia
flora. 1013.

Blair, W. S. Orchard cultivation. 1725 —

Barium phosphate experiments. 2368.

(Lipman, J. G., and Blair) 2262.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Blake, S. F. The genus Ilomaluim. 2370.—
New South American spermatophytes.
2371.

Blakeslee, A. F. Sexuality in mucors. 330.

Blanford, H. R. Financial even-aged for-
ests, Burma, British India. 1298.

Blaringhcm, L. Polymorphism and fecun-
dity in Flax. *1458. — Hybrid vigor in
Digitalis. 1459.

Blin, H. Asparagus root-rot. 730. — Cress.
1851.

Bliss, A. J. Bearded Irises. 331. — Hybrid-
izing Bearded Iris. 1460.

Blom, Carl. Lepidium and Rumex in Lur-
gen. 2372.

Blot, F. Chrysanthemums. 1796.

Boas, F. Physiological studies, sound and
diseased potatoes. 731.

Boas, J. Polydactyly in the horse. (Rev. by
Alverdes) 1422.

Boas, J. E. V. Game laws and forestry,
Denmark. *1299.

Bobilioff , W. Bark structure in Hevea. *116,
546, *973.

Boeker. Clover stem-rot. (Sclerotinia tri-
foliorum). *2017.

Bohn-Jespersen, J. F. W. Sitka spruce,
Klitten, Denmark. *1300.

Bois, D. Nothopanax Davadii. *1014. —
Roses. 1797.

Bokorny, T. Urea and other nitrogenous
compounds for green plants. *2186.

Bokura, U. A bacterial disease of lily.
*634.

Bolley, H. L. Official field crop inspection.
1107.

Bolus, Harriet M. L. Lessons in systematic
botany. 2338.

Bon, see De Bon.

Bonazzi, A. The nitrite ferment. 897.

Bonnevie, Kristine. Polydactyly in Nor-
way. 1461. — Inheritance of twin births.
1462.

Bonnier, G. Biographical notice of Viviand-
Morel. 75.

Bontrager, W. E. Ornamental tree planting,
Ohio. *159, 1798.

Boutwell, P. W. (Steenbock, H., and Bout-
well) 889.

Bord, see De Bord.

Borgesen, F. Marine algae of Danish West
Indies (1). 591. — Marine algae of Dan-
ish West Indies (2). 592. — Marine algae
of Danish West Indies (3). 593.

Borgesen, F., and Raunkiacr, C. Mosses
and lichens from former Danish West
Indies. *1929.

Bornebusch, C. H. Soil character as judged
by flora. *2277.

Bornmuller, J. Hybrids and a new form of
Polystichum in Unterfranker. *332.

Bowman, H. H. M. Forest ecology and
physiology of mangrove. (Rev. by
Shreve) 2219.

Bose, S. R. Descriptions of fungi in Bengal.
1930.

Boulenger, G. A. Sexual dimorphism in an
African snake. *333, 1463.

Boulger, G. S. Rev. of Martin, J. N.
Botany for agricultural students. 102. —
Rev. of Bedford and Pickering. Science
and fruit growing. *1726.

Bourquelot, E., and Bridel. A new glucoside
"loroglossine." 873.

Bouvet, Schaeffer, and others. French for-
estry, Strassburg meeting, 1919. 160.

Boveri, Theoder. Sea-urchin hybrids.
(Rev. by Hertwig) 1522.

Bovie, W. T. (Bronfenbrenner, J., W. T.
Bovie, and Estelle M. Wolff) 2020, 2232.

Bowles, J. Hooper. Forest-rodent damage,
Oregon, U. S. A. 1301.

Boyer, C. S. Rare species of diatom. 594.

Boyer, G. Biology and culture of mush-
rooms. *1727. — Biology and culture of
higher fungi. *2018. — Culture of higher
fungi. *2214. — Concerning the inclusion
of bits of plants by certain fungi. 2406.

Boyer, M. G. Mushroom culture. 1931.

Brackett, R. N., and H. F. Haskins. Ni-
trogen determination methods, U. S. A.
*898, 1003.

Brandl, J. Adaptation and heredity in
plants. *334.

Breakwell, E. Danthonia sp. 1108. — Sher-
man's clover (Trifolium fragiferum
var.). 1109. — Wimmers rye-grass (Lolium
subulatum). 1110. — Bokhara clover.
1111.

Breasola, M. Killing Dodder seeds. 1112. —
Killing seeds of Cuscuta. 2239.

Breazeale, J. F. (LeClerc, J. A., and Breaze-
ale) 860.

Bredemann, G., and Chr. Schatzlein. Grape
juice. *1865.

Breed, R. S., and H. J. Conn. Nomencla-
ture of the Actinomycetaceae. 635.

Breer, R. S. (Conn, H. J., and Breer) 2187.

324

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Brehm, V. Sex-limited species-characters

in fresh-water organisms. *335.
Bremekamp, C. E. B. Phototropism. *2226.
Brenchley, Winifred E. Plant competition.

*2215.
Brereton, W. C. G. (Allen, W. J., and

Brereton) 1706, 1707.
Brewster, A. A. Pneumatophores of Avi-

cennia. 1880. — Germination of choko

seed. *1881. — Leaf structure of Xanthor-

rhoea. 1882.
Bridel, M. Marc. Biochemical method to

various species of Populus. *1302.
Bridel (Borquelot and Bridel) 873.
Bridges, C. B. (Morgan, T. H., and C. B.

Bridges) 424.
Bridges, C. B., and T. H. Morgan. Second-
chromosome characters in Drosophila.

336.
Bright, J. W. (Conn, H. J., and Bright) 899.
Brinkley, L. L. (Cobb, W. B., E. S. Vanatla,

L. L. Brinkley, S. F. Davidson, and F.

N. McDowell) 2297.
Bristol, B. M. English soil algae. 595. —

Gemmae of Tortula mutica (a moss).

615.
Britten, James. Notice of Burgess's "eido-

dendron." 1240. — John Ellis's directions

for collectors. 1241.
Brittlebank, C. C. The Iceland-poppy dis-
ease. 2019.
Britton, E. G. Mosses of Bermuda. 616.
Brodie, Ian. Daffodils. *1799.
Bronfenbrenner, J., W. T. Bovie, and Estelle

M. Wolff. Heat penetration during ster-
ilization. 2020, 2232.
Bronfenbrenner, J., and M. J. Schlesinger.

Carbohydrate fermentation by bacteria.

*1932.
Brooks, A. J. Gardening. 1800.
Brooks, M. M. Studies in respiration, 8.

930.
Brotherus, V. F., and W. W. Watts. The

mosses of North Queensland. 617.
Brown, Edgar. Seed-labeling by seedsmen.

1113.
Brown, Nelson Courtlandt. Italian forestry

college. *1260. — Forest-education, Italy.

1303.
Brown, W. H. Philippine fiber plants. *1114,

1304.
Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fischer. Paper

pulp, Philippine. *9, 161. — Mangrove,

Philippine. 162. — Philippine bamboos.

*163, 1015. — Philippine mangrove

swamps. 2339.

Brown-Blanquet, Josias. Laurel in French
Pleistocene. 1982.

Bruce, Donald. Forest mensuration

methods, U. S. A. 1305.- (Sparhawk,

William N., Donald Bruce, and Burt P.
Kirkland) 1407.

Bruce, O. C. (Carter, W. T., J. M. Snyder,
and Bruce) 2296.

Bruner, Esteban. Cacao black rot. 2021.

Brunnhofer, A.v Forestry, technical and
commercial phases, Switzerland. 164.

Brunol, Gil Morica. Outlines the different
types of pasture grasses in Mexico. 1115.

Bubnoff, see Von Bubnoff.

Buc, H. E. Strychnine test. 783.

Buchanan, R. E. Life phases of bacteria.
941.

Buchholz, John T. Embryology of conifers
in relation to phylogeny. 1883. — Phylo-
geny of conifers. *1983.

Buckman, H. O. Teaching soil science. 103.

Budington, R. A. Ductless gland substances
and plant growth. 942.

Bullock-Webster, G. R. A new Nitella. 596.

Bunker, J. W. M. Hydrogen-ion determina-
tion. 874. — Diphtheria toxin produc-
tion. 2161.

Bunting, R. H. Ann. Rept. Mycologist, Gold
Coast. 2022.

Burch, D. S. Heredity and food production.
*1464.

Burger, O. F. Sexuality in Cunningham-
ella. *636.

Burgerstein, A. Natural history of Dal-
matian Islands. *547.

Burgess, J. L. Relation of varying degrees
of heat to the viability of seeds. 1116.

Burkill, I. H. Composition of a piece of well-
drained Singapore secondary jungle
thirty years old. *165.

Burnham, Stewart H. Ferns. 1801.

Burque, L'Abbe" F.-X. Poglus of the
Hurons. 784.

Burrow, G. Cypress pine reproduction,
Australia. 166.

Burt, B. C, and N. Haider. Improvement
of Cawnpore-American cotton. *337,
1465.

Buscalioni, L. Artificial cells. 1267, *2137.

Buscalioni, L., and G. Muscatello. Anatomy
and biology of Saurauia. 1884.

Bussy, P. Soils of Cochinchine. *10. —
Bourbon palm of Annam. 1071.

Buswell, W. M. Florida wild flowers. *2340.

Butler, E. J. Report of the Imperial Mycol-
ogist. 2023.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

325

Butler, O. M. Value of forest-products re-
search in silviculture. 1306.

Byall, S. (Kopeloff, Nicholas, S. Byall,
and Lillian Kopeloff) 2202.— (Kopeloff,
N., and Byall). 920.

C, A. H. Rev. of Lumiere, Auguste. *2216.

Cabellero, A. Chara foetida and mosquito
larvae. 1072.

Cabrera, Teodoro. Guava-tree uses, Cuba.

*1307. — Guava trees. *1728. (Babe,

E., and Cabrera) 778.

CaJkins, Gary N. The effect of conjuga-
tion. 2220.

Call, L. E. Director's report, Kansas. *1117.
1466, *1729, 2024, *2327.

Calvino, M. Organic fertilizers. 999. — Fer-
tilizers and soil fertility. *1000. — Fruit
trees of Mexico. 1730.

Cambage, R. H. Vertical growth of trees. 943.

Candolle, see De Candolle.

Cannon, H. G. (Doncaster, L., and Cannon)
1489.

Carbone, D. (Maggiora, A., and Carbone)
2418.

Card, W. H. Origin of white-faced Cornish
fowl. 1467.

Cardot, H. (Richet and Cardot) 446.

Cardot, J. Quince of Delavay. 1016. — Let-
ter from M. Cardot. *2407.

Carle, E. Pedigree selection in rice. *338,
*1468.

Carles, P. Prunes of Agen. 1866.— Preser-
vation of prunes as food. *2251.

Carnot, P., and P. Gerard. Toxic action of
urease. 916.

Caron-Eldingen, see Von Caron-Eldingen.

Carter, H. Report on forest administration
in Burma, 1918. 1308.

Carter, Nellie. Cytology of Cladophoraceae.
117.— Cytology of Characiopsis. 118, *597.

Carter, W. T., J. M. Snyder, and O. C.
Bruce. Soil survey at Baltimore Co.,
Maryland. *2296.

Cary, A. Forest and cattle ticks, Gulf
States, U. S. A. 1309.

Cate, C. C. (Lewis, C. I., A. E. Murneek,
and C. C. Cate) 1754.

Cauda, A. Essence content of mustard seeds.
2127.

Caullcry, Maurice. Parasitism and symbio-
sis in relation to evolution. 1984.

Challinor, R. W., E. Cheel, and A. R. Pen-
fold. Leptospermum and its essential
oil. 1017.

Chalmers, Albert J. Sadd dermatitis, caused
by hairs <>f Panicum. 2408.

Chalmers, D. F. Rept. on Agric. Dept. op-
eration, 1919, Burma. 11. *785.

Chamberlain, Charles J. The living cycads
and phylogeny. 1885, *1985 (Rev. by
Seward) 578.

Chamberlain, E. B. Rev. of Amann, J., and
C. Maylan. Flora of the mosses of
Switzerland. 618.

Chambers, M. H. Food hormones and the
growth of Paramecium caudata. 2221.

Chambers, R. Protoplasmic consistency and
cell division. 119, *846.

Chambliss, Charles E. Rice in the U. S. A.
*1118.

Champion, H. G. Fires in the chir (Pinus
longifolia), India. 167.

Chandler, B. A. Forest devastation and its
evils. 1310.

Chandun, A. (Colin, H., and Chandun) 917.

Chapman, H. H. Private forestry. *168.

Chassignol, F. Pear rust. 2025.

Chaudhury, H. P. Phyllosticta Glycos-
mides. 1933. (Ball, S. N., and Chaud-
hury) Plicana repanda. 1926.

Cheel, E., and Duckworth, A. C. Cultiva-
tion of native plants. 2409.

Cheel, E. (Challinor, R. W., E. Cheel, and
A. R. Penfold) 1017.

Chen, C. C. (Rettger, Leo F., and Chen)
1973.

Chevalier, A. Tropical legume culture. 12.

Chevalier, Aug. Saigon Botanical Gardens.
2341.— Legumes of Indo-China. 2373 —
Cider apple of Indo-China. 2374.— The
Elaeis palm. 2375.

Child, C. M. Permeability of Puget Sound
algae. 933.

Chirtoiii, Marie. Symplocos Klotzschii and
affinities of the Symplocaceae. 548. —
Lacistema and the systematic position of
this genus. *549.

Chittenden, E. J. "Place" and yield of
crops. 13. (Jamillo, P. J., and Chit-
tenden) 1814.— (Raives, A. N., and Chit-
tenden) 1767. — (Wilson, J., and Chitten-
den) 71.

Chodat, R. Biographical sketch of Casimir
De Candolle. 76.

Chou, Chung Ling. P'ungous diseases in
China. *637, 732.

Christianson, C. Peat problem. 14.

Christie, A. W. (Martin, J. C, and Christie)
989.

326

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Church, A. H. History of Floridae. II.
598. — Ionic phase of sea. 875.

Churchill, G. W. (Jordan, W. H., and
Churchill) 1164.

Churchill, Howard L. Cost of private for-
estry, Adirondacks, N. Y. 1311.

Ciamician, G., and C. Ravenna. Toxicity
of certain organic substances. 2240.

Clair, H. W. Scottish Chamomiles, An-
themis. 786.

Clark, J. A. (Waldron, L. R., and Clark)
1688.

Clark, Paul F. Bacteria growth. 1934.

Clark, P. F., and W. H. Ruehl. Bacterial
growth. 638.

Clarkson, E. H. Ferns. *1073.

Claudy, C. H. Forest depletion, United
States. *169— Scientific farming. 2410.

Clayton, W. F. Tea industry in South
Africa. 1119.

Clerc, see Le Clerc.

Clevenger, J. F., and C. O. Ewing. Crude-
drug analysis. 787, 788.

Clevenger, C. B. Determination of H-ion-
concentration of plant juices. 876, 877,
*982, *983.

Clouston, D. Rice selection. *15.

Clute, W. N. Plant names. 104.— Peloria.
*550. — Plant names. 1261. — Lonicera
Maackii var. podocarpa. 1802. — Editor-
ial. 1803. — Phlox nomenclature. 3376.

Cobb, W. B., E. S. Vanatta, L. L. Brinkley,
S. F. Davidson, and F. N. McDowell.
Soil survey of Beaufort Co., N. C. *2297.

Cockayne, L. Grasslands of New Zealand.
1120. — Presidential Address before the
New Zealand Institute. 1242.

Cockerell, T. D. A. Carpolithes macro-
phyllus. 710.

Cocks, E. Unusual geotropic response. 947.

Cohen-Stuart, C. P. Genetics and animal
food products. *339.

Cohen-Stuart, C. P. Basis for tea selection.
1469.

Cohn, E. J., J. Gross, and O. C. Johnson.
Isoelectric points of protein. *2128,
♦2162.

Cohn, F. H. (Deeter, E. B., and Cohn) 2299.

Cohn, H. I. (Watkins, W. I., E. D. Fowler,
H. I. Cohn, J. A. Macklis, and H. H.
Krusekopf) 2319.

Coker, W. C. The Hydnums of North Caro-
lina. 1935/ — Craterellus and Cantharel-
lus. 1936. — A parasitic blue-green alga.
2026.

Cole, L. H., and H. L. Ibsen. Congenital
palsy in guinea-pigs. 1470.

Cole, Leon J. Color blindness, *1471.

Colin, H. Glucose and levulose utilization
in higher plants. 878.

Colin, H., and A. Chaudun. Viscosity and
sucrase hydrolysis. 917.

Collens, A. E., and others. Sugar-cane
experiments in Leeward Islands. 16.

Collins, E. J. Sex segregation in Bryophyta.
(Rev. by Schiemann) 1635.

Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Lineate
leaves of maize. *1472.

Collins, M. I. Leaf anatomy of Scaevola
crassifolia. 1886.

Colosi, G. Lichens of Sardinia. 639.

Conard, H. S. Classification of higher
plants. *1262.

Condit, I. J. The oriental persimmon, Cali-
fornia. 506.

Condit, I. J. Caprifigs, California. 1731.

Conklin, E. G. Mechanism of evolution.
711, 712, 1986, 1987.

Conn, H. J. (Breed, R. S., and Conn) 635.

Conn, H. J., and J. W. Bright. Ammonifi-
cation of manure in soils. 899.

Conn, H. J , and R. S. Breed. Nitrate-
reduction test in characterizing bacteria.
2187.

Conner, S. D. Indiana peat land. 17. —
Zinc in soil tests. 984.

Constantin, L. Epiphora Pobeguini. 1804.

Cook, M. T. Rev. of Reinking, O. A. Phil-
ippine economic plant disease. *733. —
Rept. of Dept. of Plant Pathology, New
Jersey Agric. Exp. Sta. 1918. *734— Po-
tato diseases in New Jersey. 735. — Seed
and soil treatment. *736. (Rev. by
Stevens) 113. (Rev. by Anon.) 99.

Cook, M. T., and J. P. Helyar. Diseases of
grain and forage crops, New Jersey. *737.

Cook, O. F. Olneya beans. *170.— Club-leaf ,
or cyrtosis, in cotton. *1474.

Cook, O. F., and R. C. Cook. Biology and
government. *1473.

Cook, R. C. (Cook, O. F., and Cook) 1473.

Cooley, C. H. Heredity versus environment.
♦1475.

Coppola, A. Acrocephalosyndactylism. *340.

Corbiere, L. Two French and African
mosses. 619.

Correns, C. Experimental shifting of the
sex ratio. *341, *1476. (Rev. by Schie-
mann) 1636.

indp:x to authors names

327

Correvon, H. Wild Cyclamens. 1018.
Corson, G. E. Use of lime in Iowa. 2258.
Cotton, A. D. Rev. of Amos, A. 2027.
Cotton, A. D., and M. N. Owen. White rot

disease of onion bulbs. 2028.
Coulter, J. M. Rev. of Johnson, D. S. *551

—Rev. of Sprapp, Ethel R. *552 — Rev.

of Tison, A. *553— Rev. of Yendo, K.

*599 — Rev. of Arber, E. A. N. *713.
Coulter, M. C. Rev. of Jones, W. N. *120.

— Inheritance of aleurone color in maize.

1477.
Coupin, H. Water absorption by roots.

2138.
Cowgill, H. B. Crosspollination in sugar

cane. *1121, 1478.
Craig, W. T. Cereal investigations at Cor-
nell. (Rev. by Anon.) 290.— Color in

Avena crosses. (Rev. by Anon.) 291.
Crain, C. C. Treatment of wheat for smut.

*738.
Crane, M. B. Heredity in tomato. (Rev.

by Von Graevenitz) 1683.
Crawford, Mrs. Wm. Peonies. 1805.
Cremata, M. Cuban forestry. 171. — Branch-
ing in Royal palm. 554. — Fences and

hedges in Cuba. *2342.— Melliferous

plants. *2377.
Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Fiber plants,

Indo-China. *172, 1122, *1867.
Cribbs, J. E. Foliar transpiring power in

Tilia americana. *853.
Crocker, Wm. Temperature for after ripen-
ing. 1123, *2233. (Harrington, G. T.}

and W. Crocker) 926.
Cross, W. E. Kavangire cane. 2113, *1124.
Crozier, W. J. Sex-correlated colors in

Chiton. 342.
Culham, A. B. Ann. Rept. Agric. Sta.

Aburi, Gold Coast. 2029.
Cummings, Alex, Jr. Roses. 1806, 1807.
Cunningham, J. T. Mendelian experiment

on fowls. 1479.
Curtis, O. F. Food translocation in woody

plants. 2139.
Curtiss, C. F. Forest parks, Iowa. *1312.
Cushman, L. B. Aegopodia podagraria

variegata. 1808.
Cushny, A. R. Asymmetric compounds and

plants. 879, *789.
Cusmano, G. Hypotensive compounds of

Viscum album. 2129.
Cwach, J. (Stoklasa, J. J., S. W. Zdobnicky,
• F. Tymick, O. Horak, A. Nemec, and J.

Cwach) 966.

D'Aboville, P. Forest-mensuration, U. S.
A. 1313.

Dahlgren, K. V. O. Heterostyly in Plum-
bago. 343.

Dakin, II. D. Amino acids. 900.

Dalbey, Nora. (Stevens, F. L., and Dalbey)
686.

Dalgas, J. M. Decadent oak forests, West-
phalia, Germany. *1314. — Economics,
lumber production. *1315. — Forest con-
ditions, North Schleswig, Denmark.
*1316.

Dammer, U. New Solanaceae from Peru.
1019. — A new Lilaceous plant from
Japan. 1020 — Lacchemilla from Central
and South America. 1021.

Dana, S. T. Forest protection and water.
*173.

Danforth, C. H. Brachydactyly, syndactyly,
and ptilopody in fowl. 344. — Twins.
*1480.

Daniel, L. Illumination and lettuce growth.
954.

Daniel, L., and H. Teulie. Extension of
grape culture by hybrids. 1481.

Danielsson, Uno. Protection of natural
scenery, Sweden. *174.

Darnell-Smith, G. P. Wood preservation,
Australia. 175, *739. — Inverted hyme-
nium in Agaricus. 1937. — Phoma citri-
carpa. 2030.

Darvey, Mason. Forest planting, New Zea-
land. 176.

Daudt, H. W. (Phelps, I. K., and Daudt)
1006.

Daveau, J. Ficus Saussureana and F.
Eriobotryoides. 1809.

Davenport, C. B. Influence of male in
production of human twins. 345. — Strain
producing multiple births. *1482.

Davidson, S. F. (Cobb, W. B., E. S. Va-
natta, L. L. Brinkley, S. F. Davidson,
and F. N. McDowell) 2297.

Davis, B. M. Introductory course in bot-
any. 105, 106.

Davis, L. V., and H. W. Warner. Soil sur-
vey, Buena Vista Co., Iowa. 2298.

Davis, R. A. Preserving fruits. *1868.

Davis, R. N. Trees in winter, U. S. A. 1317.

Dawkins, C. G. E. Yemane, India. 177.

Dawson, A. I. Bacterial variations in dif-
ferent culture media. 346.

Dawson, J. A. Amicronucleate Oxytricha
and cannibalism. 347. — Amicronucleate
Oxytricha double animals or twins. 348.

328

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Day, J. W. Conditions effecting errors in
field experimentation. 1125.

Deardorff, C. E. (Maxson, E. T., C. E.
Deardorff, W. A Rockie, and J. M.
Snyder) 2305.

De Besteiro, D. C, and M. Michel-Durand.
Light and the absorption of organic ma-
terials. 2163.

De Bon, F. (Rothea and De Bon) 1875.

De Bord, G. G. Organisms in canned

salmon. 2411. (Edmondson, R. B., G.

G. DeBord, and C. Thorn) 2414.

De Candolle, C. Smithsonian Misc. Collec-
tions. 2378.

Deem, J. W. Pasture experiments in New
Zealand. 1126.

Deeter, E. B., and F. H. Cohn. Soil survey
of Faulkner Co., Arkansas. 2299.

De Jong, A. W. K. Tapping rubber trees.
178.

Delage, Y., and M. Goldsmith. Mendelism
and mechanism of heredity. 1483.

De Mello, F. On Indian Aspergilli. 1938.

Demoll, R. Inheritance of acquired char-
acters. *1484.

Demorlaine, J. Forestry and the army,
France, 179.

Demoussy, E. (Maquenne, L., and De-
moussy) 2242.

Dennis, F. Irises. 1810.

Descombes, P. Reforestation and economic
development in France. 181, *1127.
— Experiments upon stream-flow. 180,
*1128.

Detjen, L. R. Limits of hybridization in
Vitis. *507. — Mutating blackberry-dew-
berry hybrid. *1485.

Detlefsen, J. A., and W. W. Yapp. Con-
genital cataract in cattle. 1486.

De Turk, E. Potassium bearing minerals as
fertilizers. 2290, *2150.

De Vries, H. Species formation. 349. —
Oenothera Lamarckiana erythrina.
*1487.

De Vries, O. Determining rubber content
of latex. 182. — Specific gravity of latex
and rubber content. 183, *847.

De Vries, O., and W. Spoon. Variability in
plantation rubber. 184.

De Wilde, P. A. Deaf and dumbness and
retinitis pigmentosa. 350.

De Winiwarter, H. Mitoses of seminal epi-
thelium in the cat. 351.

Dickie, F. Sugar found in Douglas fir,
British Columbia. 1318, 1319.

Dinter, K. Plants of Southwest Africa.
1022.

Dittrich, G. Mushroom poisoning. 640.

Dixon, H. H. Microscopic characters of
mahogany. *555.

Dixon, H. H., and W. R. G. Atkins. Os-
motic pressure in plants, VI. 848.

Dixon, H. N. Rhaphidostegium caespito-
sum and its affinities. 620.

Doane, A. (Besson, M. A., and Doane) 1105.

Doblas, J. H. Seed selection. *352— Three
months wheat. 1129. — Lathyrus sativus
studies. 1130.

Dodd, S. St. John's wort and its effects on
live stock. 2130. — Infestation of the skin,
etc., of sheep by grass seeds. 2412.

Dodge, B. O. Anonymous. Index to Ameri-
can mycological literature. *641.

Dodge, R. Hybrid Aspidiums. 353.

Doidge, E. M. Leaf fungi, South Africa.
642. — Bacterial plant diseases. 2031.

Doncaster, L. Tortoise-shell tomcat. 1488.

Doncaster, L., and H. G. Cannon. Sperma-
togenesis in louse (Pediculus). 1489.

Donk, P. J. Spoilage in canned foods.
2164, *1939.

Dorsey, M. J. Weather and fruitfulness in
plums. (Rev. by Eaton) 358.

Dosdall, Louise. Water requirement and
adaptation in Equisetum. *854.

Douin, Ch. Receptacle of Marchantia poly-
morpha. 1919.

Douin, C, and L. Trabut. Two little-known
hepatics, Algeria. 621.

Dowell, C. T. (Menual, P., and Dowell) 40.

Dresel, K. Mendelian laws and human pa-
thology. 354.

Dreyer, T. F. Inheritance of acquired
characters. *355.

Drolet, G. Turpentine damage to long-leaf
pine, Alabama, U. S. A. 1320.

Drude, C. Crosses in Cucurbita Pepo. *356.

Drummond, J. C. Fat-soluble accessory
substance. 2165. — Role of fat-soluble ac-
cessory substance. 2166.

Dubois, R. Luminous living creatures.
2235.

Ducellier, F. Some Desmoid flora of Swit-
zerland. 600. — Euastrum ansatum. 601. —
Three new Cosmariums. 602.

Duckworth, A. C. (Cheel, E., and Duck-
worth) 2409.

Ducomet, M. V. Ownership of plant crea-
tions. 1732.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

329

Duerden, J. E. Degeneration in the ostrich.

1490.
Dufrenoy, Jean. Diseases of insects. 643.
Duggar, B. M. Colorimeter and indicator

method. (Rev. by Willaman) 891.
Dunbar, B. A., andE. R. Binnewies. Proso

millet investigations. *18.
Dunbar, J. Forty-two distinct forms of

hickories. *1321.
Duncan, J. Noxious weeds. 1131.
Dunham, E. M. Mounting mosses. 2413.
Dunn, L. C. Sable varieties in mice. *357.
Durbin, H. E., and M. J. Lewi. A stable

vitamine. 2167.
Durken, B. Introduction to experimental

zoology. (Rev. by Klatt) 1547.
Durrell, L. W. (Melhus, I. E., and Durrell)

2066, 2067.
Dussel, G. B. Aloe cultivation in Curacao

and Bonaire. 790.
Duyne, see Van Duyne.
Duysen, F. Vitality of certain agricultural

seeds. 1132— Root-scald of wheat. 2032.

— Vitality of agriculturally important

seed. *2229.

Earle, F. S. Sugar cane in Porto Rico. 1133.

— The mosaic, or new sugar-cane disease.

2114.
East, E. M. Inbreeding and outbreeding.

(Rev. by White, Orland, and East) 1685.

(Rev. by Pearl) 437.
Eaton, S. V. Weather and fruitfulness in

plums. (Rev. of Dorsey, M. J.) *358.
Eberson, Frederick. Yeast agar medium.

1940, *2033.
Eberstaller, R. Comparative anatomy of

narcissus. *556.
Ebstein, A. Cretius and albinos in Ler-

bach. *359.
Eckmann, E. C, and A. T. Strahorn. Soil

survey of Anaheim Area, California.

2300.
Eddy, Walter H. The vitamine. 2168.
Edgerton, C. W. Sugar-cane mosaic. 2115.
Edgerton, C. W., and C. C. Moreland.

Fungi and the germination of sugar

cane. 2116.
Edgerton, C. W., and others. Sugar-cane

mosaic. 2117.
Edmiston, H. D. (Frear, W., W. Thomas and

Edmiston) 901, 1005.
Edmondson, Ruth B., Geo. G. DeBrod and

Charles Thom. Botulism from canned

ripe olives. 2414.

Edson, II. A., and M. Shapovalov. Tem-
perature and certain potato-rot and
wilt-producing fungi. 740, *957.

Eeden, see Van Eeden.

Eglofif, Gustav (MolisofT, William, and Eg-
lolT) 2241.

Ehrenberg (Allendorf and Ehrenberg) 255,
259.

Eisenberg, P. Variations in bacteria. *360.

Ekambaram, T. Suspected parasitism in a
moss. 2034.

Elayda, I. Acclimatization of alfalfa, Phil-
ippines. *19.

Elderton, Ethel M. Rev. of Whipple. *1491.

Eldredge, I. F. Management of hardwood,
southern Appalachians, U. S. A. 1322.

Ellenwood, C. W. Delicious apple. *1733.

Ellinger, Tage. Rev. of Punnett and Bailey.
1492. Rev. of Rasmuson, Hans. *1493,
*1494 — Rev. of Raunkiaer. H495.

Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany. (Rev. by
Anon.) 100.

Ellis, J. H. Black stem rust and wheat
cutting. 20, *741.

Emerson, R. A. Pistillate-flowered maize.
*496.

Emerson, R. A. Aleurone color in maize.
(Anon, rev.) 264.

Emile-Weil, P., and L. Gaudin. Mycosis of
the nails. 644.

Emoto, Y. Cross and self-fertilization in
plants. *1497.

Enfer, F. Bagging fruits. 1734.— Fruit thin-
ning. 1735.

Engelhardt, F. (Pfeiler, W., and Engel-
hardt) 675.

Engler, A. New genus of Saxifragaceae.
1023.

Erdmann, Rhoda. Endomixis and size in
Paramaecium. *1498.

Erikson, Johan. A hybrid Platanthera in
Sweden. *1024— Platanthera bifolia X
montana. *1499.

Eriksson, Jakob. Heteroecism in Puccinia
caricis. 645. — Puccinia caricis. *2035.

Erwin, A. T. Potato-scab treatment. *2036.

Erz, A. A. The true nature of plant diseases.
2037.

Escobar, R. Water hemlock. 791.

Esler, J. G. Rhododendron-growing for
market, North Carolina. 519.

Esmarch. Periderm formation in wounded
potato tubers. 557.

Espino, R. B. Rev. of Schreiner, O., and
J. J. Skinner. *857.

330

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Essig, E. O. Oak root fungus in California.
*185.

Estrange, see L'Estrange.

Esty, J. R., and C. C. Williams. Bacterial
spoilage in canned foods. 2415.

Etienne, P. Morphology of the Epacrideae.
(Rev. by GuSrin) 804.

Euler, H., and E. Moberg. Ferment en-
zymes in surface yeast. *2195.

Euler, Hans V., and Olov Svanberg. En-
zyme chemistry. *2196.

Euler, K. Color in potato tubers. *1500.

Evans, L. W. New England Hepaticae,
XV. 622. — North American species of
Asterella — a genus of Hepaticae. 1920.

Evans, L. A. Annual Rept., Tasmania.
1134.

Everitt, P. F. Quadrature coefficients for
Sheppard's formula. 361.

Ewart, A. J. Flora of Australia. *2343.

Ewe, G. E. Chinese fly. 792.— Assay of
calabar beans and its preparations. 793.
(Pittenger, P. S., and Ewe) 818.

Ewing, C. O. White pine bark adulterated

with elm bark. 794. (Clevenger, J. F.,

and Ewing) 787, 788.— (Stanford, E. E.,
and Ewing) 827.

Ewing, C. O., C. Olin, and A. Viehoever.
Acid-insoluble ash standards for crude
drugs. 795.

Eysselt, Joh. Alpine forest-grazing and
watershed protection, Austria. 1323.

Fabricius, O. Red spruce, Denmark. *1324.

Fairchild, David. Twins. *1501.

Falk, K. George (McGuire, Grace, and Falk)

2206.
Fallada, O. Sulphuric acid treatment of

beet seed. (Rev. by Richter) 962.
Fankhauser, see Von Fankhauser.
Farlow, W. G., R. Thaxter, and L. H. Bailey.

Biographical notice of G. F. Atkinson.

77.
Farr, Bertrand H. History of the Peony.

1243.
Farrer, Reginald. Rock garden. (Rev. by

Anon.) 1792.
Farrington, F. E. French educational ideals.

(Rev. by Bancroft) 101.
Farwell, O. A. Cramp bark. 796.
Fawcett, G. L. Sugar canes in Argentina.

1135. — Sugar-cane mosaic in Argentine.

2118.
Fellers, C. R., and F. E. Allison. Protozoa

in New Jersey soils. 2278.

Felt, E. P. New Philippine gall midges.
2038.

Fenzi, E. O. Agriculture in Tripolitania.
1736.

Ferdinandsen, C, and O. Winge. A Phylla-
chora parasitic on Sargassum. 1941,
*2039.

Fernald, M. L. On Arenaria. 2379.

Fernandez, O., and F. Bustamante. Olive
oils. *1869.

Fernow, B. E. Rev. of Becknazel, A. B.,
and John Bently. *1325.

Feucht, Otto. Distorted tree growth
("Harp-growth"), Germany. 1326, *1887.

Fevre, see Le Fevre.

Filley, W. D. (Jones, D. F., and Filley) 1542.

Findlay, W. M. Size of seed, North Scot-
land Coll. *362.

Fippin, E. O. Truefast test for sour soil.
1004— Liming of soils. *2259.

Fischer, A. F. (Brown, W. H., and Fischer)
*9, 161, 162, 163, 1015, 2339.

Fischer, E. Sexuality and reproduction in
plants. *363.

Fischker, M. (Mach, F., and Fischker) 1872.

Fishlock, W. C. Bay leaves. 797.

Fishlock, W. C. Sweet potatoes in British
Virgin Islands. 1852.

Fitzpatrick, H. M. Biographical notice of
G. F. Atkinson. 78, 79.

Fleet, see Van Fleet.

Fleischmann, R. Maize breeding. 1502.

Fletcher, J. J., and C. T. Musson. Tumors
of Eucalypts. 1888, *2040.

Flint, Howard R. New method of stump-
age apprisals, U. S. A. 1327.

Flood, M. G. Exudation of water by Colo-
casia antiquorum. 855.

Florin, Rudolf. Pollen sterility in pears
and apples, Sweden. 1503.

Foex, Et. Pear diseases, 2041 — Partially-
smutted wheat. 2042. — Rye and oat
Fusarium. 2043. — Oak powdery mildew.
2044.

Folsom, D. Form and structure in Ranun-
culus. (Rev. by Arthur) 318.

Foot, Katharine. Sex of offspring of Pedi-
culus. 1504.

Forman, L. W. Iowa "push soils." *2269.

Foster, J. H. Rev. of Rankin, W. H. *186.

Fowler, E. C. (Watkins, W. I., E. D. Fow-
ler, H. I. Cohn, J. A. Macklis, and H. H.
Krusekopf) 2319.

Fragoso, R. G. Fungi of Spain. 646, *742.—
Almond diseases. 743.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

331

Francis, T. C. Tobacco-growing in Cuba.
*21.

Fraser, A. C. Weak awn, inheritance in
Avena. 1505. (Rev. by Anon.) 265, 292.

Fraser, Jas. A new Koeleria. 1025.

Frateur, J. L. Wild coat of rabbit. *1506.

Frear, William. Effect of war time condi-
tions on fertilizers. 2270.

Frear, Wm., W. Thomas, and H. D. Edmis-
ton. Potassium permanganate in nitro-
ten determination. 1005, *901.

Frear, Win., and C. L. Goodling. Burning
lime in Pennsylvania. *9S5.

Freeman, G. F. Linked quantitative char-
acters in wheat. (Rev. by Anon.) 266.

French, G. T. Organization, development,
and activities of the Association of Official
Seed Analysts of North America. *1136.

French, H. B. Review of the drug market.
798.

Frets, G. P. Polymery tested in head-form.
*1507.

Freund, Hans. Cork substitutes, Germany.
1074.

Friedal, J. Biographical notice of Charles-
Louis Gatin. 80.

Fries, R. E. Observations on gymnosperms
in Bergian Garden. 364.

Fries, T. C. E. Onygena equina, Holland.
*647.

Fritsch, K. Triple hybrids in Rumex. *365.

Frohlich, G. Pedigree and inbreeding ex-
periments in improved German swine.
*366. — Improved German swine. *367. —
Selection for seed weights in field beans.
*368. — Breeding winter cereals into
spring cereals. *369. — Grain weight in-
fluences by selections. (Rev. by Anon.)
268. — Breeding winter cereals. (Rev. by
Anon.) 267.

Frost, A. C. Phosphate production in Al-
geria, in 1919. 2291.

Frost, H. B. Mutation in Matthiola. 370.

Fruwirth, C. Hybridization of spontaneous
variation with the parent type. 371. —
Breeding maize, rootcrops, oilplants and
grasses. *372. — Plant breeding in Ger-
many and Austro-Hungary. *373. — Re-
quirements of lupine grown for seed.
1137— Alfalfa transplanting. 1138.— A
pure line of field peas. 150S. — Breeding
of cereals and sugar beets. (Rev. by
Anon.) 270. — Plant breeding in Ger-
many and Austria. (Rev. by Anon.)
269.

Fruwirth, C, Th.Roemer, E. vonTschcrmak.

Breeding cereals and sugar beets. *374.
Fuehner, II. Cytisus Laburnum, a tobacco

substitute. 1075.
Fuller, II. C. Alkaloid determinations. 799.
Fyson, P. F. Ecology of Spinifex squarro-

sus. 1889.

G., A. Rev. of Church, A. II. *1988.
Gagnespain, F. Over-feeding plants. 974. —

Biographical sketch of E. Bureau. 1244.
Gail, F. W. Influence of H-ion concentra-
tion on Fucus. 934.
Gaines. E. F. Resistance to bunt in wheat.

1509.
Gajon, Carlos. Cowpea studies. 1139.
Galloway, Beverly T. New pear stocks.

*1510.
Gamble, J. S. Flora of Madras, Part III.

1026.
Gammie, G. A. Cotton investigations, Pusa,

India. 1140.
Garcia, A. V. (Perez, P. F., M. A. Suarez,

M. F. Grau, and A. V. Garcia) 49.
Gardner, H. A. Soy-bean oil for paints.

1141.
Gardner, V. R. Apple pruning, Missouri.

*508.
Gardner, Willard. Elutriator for mechani-
cal analysis of soils. 2323.
Garner, W. W., and H. A. Allard. Light

requirements of plants. 22, *935.
Garver, S. (Westover, H. I., and Garver)

70.
Gassner, S. Characteristics of summer and

winter annuals. *375. (Rev. by Anon.)

271.
Gassul, R. Symmetrical contraction of the

fingers. *376, 377.
Gatenby, J. B. Intracellular structures.

121. — Germ cell determinants of Apan-

teles. 37S. — Rev. of Thomson, J. A.

Heredity. *379.
Gathercoal, E. N. Permanency and de-
terioration of some vegetable drugs 25

years of age. 800.
Gauba, Th. Hop aphis in central Europe,

1918. 744.
Gaudin, L. (Emile-Weil, P., and Gaudin)

644.
Gauger, Martin. Mendelian ratios and the

dispersion theory. *1511.
Geete, Erik. Timber "Grab hook." *187.
Geilmann, Dr. Bacterized superphosphate

of the Nordenham factory. 2279.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 3

332

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Geisenheyner, L. Variegations. *380.
Gellatly, F. M. Forest-products research,

Australia. 188.
Gerard, P. (Carnot, P., and Gerard) 916.
Gertz, Otto. Proliferated catkins in Alnus.
Sweden. 558. — Rostius Herbarium. 2344.
— Pre-Linnean herbarium. (Rev. by
Xordstet) 87.
Geschwind, A. Insects and diseases of Picea

omarica. 745.
Ghose, S. L. New species of Uronema.

603.
Giaja, J. Living yeast cell and zymase fer-
mentation. *2197.
Gibbs, W. M. Nitrifying bacteria. 2188 —
The isolation and study of nitrifying
bacteria. 2280.
Gibson, A. H. The Poinsettia. *520.
Gibson, H. Hardy shrub-forcing. *521. —
Forcing herbaceous plants and bulbs.
*522.
Gilbert, E. M. A peculiar entomophthorous

fungus. 1942.
Giles, J. K. Corn club lessons. 107.
Gilkey, Helen M. Two new truffles. 1943.
Gillespie, L. J. Hydrogen-ion determination
without buffer mixtures. 2324. — Deter-
mination of hydrogen-ion concentration.
*2169.
Gillette, L. S., A. C. McCandlish, and H. H.
Kildee. Soiling crops for milk produc-
tion. 1142.
Gimingham, C. T. (Barker, B. T. P., and

Gimingham) 2014.
Oinarte, B. M. Pineapple. 1737.
Girard, James W., and U. S. Swartz. Volume

tables, hewed railroad ties. 1328.
Girard, Pierre. Physical method of dem-
onstrating semi-permeability. 858.
Girola, Carlos D. Maize in Argentina.

*2380.
Gladwin, F. E. Pruning grapes. 1738.
Gleason, Henry Allan. On Vernonia. 2381.
Glover, G. H., T. E. Newson, and W. W.
Robbins. Asclepias verticillata, a new
poisonous plant. 975.
Goebel, K. Dwarf ferns. 381.
Goldschmidt, Richard. Intersexuality and
sex determination. *1512. — Crossing over
without chiasmatype. (Rev. by Seiler)
1643.
Goldsmith, M. (Delage, Y., and Goldsmith)

1483.
Goldsmith, W. M. Chromosomes of Cicin-
delidae. 382.

Goodling, C. L. (Frear, W., and Goodling)

985.

Goodman, A. L., A. H. Meyer, R, W. Mc-

Clure, and B. H. Hendrickson. Soil

survey of Amite County, Mississippi.

*2301.

Goss, W. L. Crimson clover seed tests. 1143.

Gothan, W., and Nagel, K. Permian flora,

Germany. 1989.
Gourlay, W. Baufour, and G. M. Vevers.

Vaccinium intermedium Ruthe. *2382.
Gowen, J. W. Methods of poultry breeding.

1513.
Grace, L. C, and F. Highberger. Hydro-
gen-ion concentration of culture medium.
2170.
Graevenitz, see Von Graevenitz.
Grandori, Luigia. Mesozoic pteridosperm
seed. *714. — Affinities of fossil Pterop-
sida. *715.
Grantham, I. (Bishop, O. F., J. Grantham,

and M. J. Knapp) 1457.
Grantham, J., and M. D. Knapp. Experi-
ments with Hevea. *1514, *1515.
Grau, M. F. (Perez, P. F., M. A. Suarez,

M. F. Grau, and A. G. Villa) 49.
Graves, E. W. The Botrychiums of Mobile

County, Alabama. 2364.
Graves, H. S. Forest extension, U. S. A.
*1329— National forest policy, U. S. A.
1330.
Greaves, J. E. (Hurst, C. T., and Greaves).

2325.
Greeley, W. B. Protection from sand dunes
and floods by forestry, France. 1331. —
Private forestry, France. *1332. — Na-
tional forest policy, U. S. A. 1333.
Green, Heber. Biometry and wheat breed-
ing. 1516.
Green, W. J. Forestry protection. *1739.
Greene, Laurenz, and I. E. Melhus. Effects

of crown gall on apple. 2045.
Greig-Smith, R. Germicidal activity of
Eucalyptus oils. Part I. 801. — Toxic

effects produced by bacteria. 2281.

(L'Estrange, W. W., and Greig-Smith)
1954.
Greisenegger, I. K. Influence of manganese
sulphate in seed beets. (Rev. by
Richter) 963.
Grey, Robert M. The mosaic, or mottling,
disease. 2119. — Sugar-cane mosaic. 2120.
Griebel. C. Microscopic demonstration of
vegetable substitutes in foods. 1076.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

:;:;::

Griebel, C, and A.. Schafer. Substitute for

marjoram. 802.
Crier, X. M. Proliferative power of Pinus.

*559.
Griffeths, Ezer. Temperature measure-
ment. (Rev. by Bancroft) 2231.
Griffin, Gertrude .1. Wood structure of

Douglas fir in relation to creosoting, I .

S. A. L334. Structure of bordered pits

in Douglas fir. *1890.
Griffiths, D. Producing domestic Easter

lilies. 523.— Prickly pear as stock food.

*11H.
gaut, A., !•'. Guerin and Mme. Pommay-

Michaux. Estimation of microbic pro-
teolysis. 2198.
Grimme, C. Shepherd's purse. *803.
Grinndal, Th. Early or late forest sowing?

*1S9.
Gross, Joseph (Cohn, Edwin J., Joseph

Gross, and Omer C. Johnson) 2162,

2128.
Grove, O. Fruit blossom blights. 2046.
Groves. James. Terminology of sex in

plants. 560, *604 — Miocene Chara. 1990.
Grueber, Charles. Fruit inspector's report,

1918-19 (Tasmania). 1740.
Gruenert, O. (Sprinkmeyer, H., and Grue-

nert) 826.
Guerin, P. Morphology of the epacrideae.

804.— Rev. of Berger, M. G. 805.
Guerin, F. (Grigaut, A., F. Guerin, and

Mme. Pommay-Michaux) 2198.
Guinet, A. Auguste Schmidely. Biographi-
cal sketch of A. Schmidely. 1245.
Gujer, A. Terminology of forest positions,

Switzerland. 1335.
Gunn, W. F. Irish slime molds. 64S.
Guppy, H. B. Fossil botanjr in the Western

World. *1991.
Gupta, B. L. New species Indian forest

trees. 190.
Gustafson, F. G. Studies on respiration,

Aspergillus. 931.
Guthrie, F. B., and G. W. Xorris, Wheat

variety classification. 1145.
Guthrie, John D. Women as forest officers,

U. S. A. *1336.
Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Smith. Prenatal

effects of lens antibodies. 383.

Haas, A. R. C. Electrometric titration of

plant juices. 880.
Haberlandt, G. Alfafa as a vegetable.

*1077.

Sadden, X. G. Rusts of England. 649.

Hadlington, .lames. Alfalfa growing. 1146.

Eaecker, V. Inheritance of extreme char-
acter-grades. 384. — Hereditary transmis-
sion of war injuries. *385. — Regularity
of inheritance in man. *386. — Develop-
mental law of heredity. 1517. — The male-
line concept of family. (Rev. by Sie-
mens) 1650.

Baenseler, C. M. (Paine, S. G., and Haense-
ler). Blackleg of potatoes 2081.

ll.i-ijund, Hrick. Lignin. *2171.

Haiden, N. (Bunt, B. C., and Haiden) 1466.

Haider, N. (Burt, B. C., and Haider) 337.

Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa.
*191.

Haldane, J. S. The new physiology. 843.
(Rev. by Bancroft) 2136.

Hall, C. New Eucalyptus, New South
Wales. *192.

Hall, E. C., and E. I. Angell. Soil survey
of Walpello County, Texas. *2302.

Hall, J. A. (Kremers, R. E., and Hall) 884.

Hall, R. H. (Krisekopf, H. H., J. H. Agee,
and R. H. Hall) 2304.

Hall, S. J. Age of trees, Sequoias, Califor-
nia, U. S. A. 1337.

Hallier, Hans. Horticultural genera and
species of uncertain position. *2345.

Hamilton, A. A. Root fasciation in cycads.
1891.

Hamilton, A. G. Bibliography of pollina-
tion of Australian plants. *81.

Hamilton, T. S. (Beal, G. D., and Hamilton)
780.

Hammer, B. W. Pasteurization. *1944. —
Gas in condensed milk. *1945. — Volatile
acid production of starters. *1946,
2172. — Gas formation in condensed milk.
2199. — Bacteriology of ice cream. *2416.

Hammerlund, H. G. Plant improvement at
Weibullsholm. 387.

Hammond, Bertha B. Forcing hyacinths.
*524.

Hansen, W. Beet breeding. *388. — Degen-
eration and seed variation. 1147.- — Beet
breeding. (Rev. by Anon.) 272.

Harding, S. T. Moisture equivalent of soils.
*2145, 2320.

Hargood-Ash, D. (Hill, Leonard and Har-
good-Ash) 2146.

Harlan, H. V. (Anthony, Stephen, and Har-
lan) 949, 1449.

H(arland), S. C. Rogues in Sea Island cot-
ton. 389.

334

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Harlow, H. V. Barley breeding. 1518.
Harms, H. Araliaceae of the Andes. 1027. —

Sex ratios in Drya. (Rev. by Nor-

stedt) 432.
Harper, H. J. (Thorp, W. E., and Harper)

2313.
Harper, R. A. Inheritance of sugar and

starch endosperm in maize. 1519.
Harris, G. T. Schistostega osmundacea

(a moss). 623.
Harris, J. E. G. Comparative metabolism

of pathogenic anaerobes. 936, *650.
Harrington, Geo. T. Comparative chemical

analyses of Johnson-grass seeds and

sudan-grass seeds. 1148,*2173. (Crock-
er, W., and Harrington) 926.
Harrison, W. H. Chemists Report Pusa, In-
dia. *1149. — Phosphate absorption by

India soils. 2271.
Hart, Fanchon. Quantitative determination

of vegetable adulterants microscopically.

806.
Hartmann, Wilhelm. Sugar beets. *1870.
Hartwell, B. L. Lime requirements of

Rhode Island soils. (Rev. by Tansley)

2265.
Harvey, LeRoy H. A coniferous sand dune

in Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia.

*1338.
Harvey, R. B. New thermo-regulator. *976.

— Measurement of oxidase and catalase

activity. *2200 (Hawkins, L. A., and

Harvey) 937.
Haskins, H. F. (Brackett, R. N., and Has-

kins) 898, 1003.
Hassler, E. Solanaceae of Paraguay. 1028,

1029.
Hatchek, E. Surface tension and surface

energy. (Rev. by Bancroft) 2250.
Hatschek, E. (Willows, R. S., and Hatschek)

845.
Hatcher, R. A. Digitalis standardization.

807.
Hatton, Ronald, G. Paradise apple stocks.

1741.
Haugh, L. A. Growth of beech and climate,

Denmark. *1339.
Hawes, A. F. Paper raw material, U. S. A.

1340.
Hawkins, L. A., and R. B. Harvey. Para-
sitism of Pythium. *937.
Hawley, R. C. Forestry in southern New

England, U. S. A. 1341.
Hawtrey, S. H. C. Paraguay plants. *23,

*561.

Hay, R. Dalrymple. Forest Administration,
New South Wales. 1342.

Hayes, F. A. (Tillman, B. W., F. A. Hayes,
and F. Z. Hutton) 2314.

Hayes, H. K. (Harlaw, H. V., and Hayes)
1518.

Haynes, Dorothy, and Hilda M. Judd. Com-
position of apple juice. 541, *8S1.

Haywood, A. H. Elephant, Para, and
Guinea grasses at Wollongbar. 1150. —
Rice bean. 1742.

Heck, G. E. Airplane-wood defects. *193.

Hecke, Ludwig. Cereal-rust control. 746.

Heede, see Van den Heede.

Heiduschka, A., and S. Felser. Fatty acids
of peanut oil. 1151.

Heim, A. L. Airplane-propeller manufac-
ture. 194.

Helms, Johs. Forest planting (Prinus mon-
ticola), Silkeborg District, Denmark.
*1343.

Helweg, L. Danish seed guarantees. 1152.

Helyar, J. P. Rept. Dept. seed analysis.
24. (Cook, M. T., and Helyar) 737.

Hemml, Takewo. Anthracnose of Cartha-
mus. 1947.

Hemseley, W. B. Flora of Aldabra. *2346.

Hendrick, E. Nitrogen fixation. 902.

Hendrick, J. Lime for Plasmodiophora.
2047.

Hendrickson, A. H. Plum pollination, Cali-
fornia. 509, 1520.

Hendrickson, B. H. (Goodman, A. L., A. H.
Meyer, R. W. McClure and Hendrick-
son). 2301. (Meyer, A. H., and Hen-
drickson) 2307.

Hendry, G. W. Mariout barley. 25.

Henkel, J. S. Exotic forest planting, Zulu-
land, Africa. 1344.

Henrioi, Margarite. Problems of photosyn-
thesis. (Rev. by Pulling) 865.

Henry, Helen M. (Hillman, F. H., and H.
M. Henry) 27.

Hensel, B. F. (Tillman, B. W., and Hensel)
2315, 2316.

Hepner, F. E. Wyoming forage plants. 26,
*986.

Heribert-Nilsson, H. N. Selection among
pedigreed varieties of Avena. 390. — Ge-
netics of genus Salix. (Rev. by Nord-
stet) 221.

Herissey, M. H. Preserving the oxidase of
fungi. 918, *2201.

Herre, A. C. On Mexican lichens. *1948. —
Hints for lichen studies. 1949, *1521.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

:\:\:>

Herre, A. W. C. T. Lichens of Alaska. 651.

Herrmann, E. Mushrooms. 652.

Herter, \V. Journeys of Herter. 1030. —
Quantitative micro-analysis of food.
1078.

Hertwig, G. Hybridization in amphibians.
(Rev, by Hertwig) 1523.

Hertwig, P. Rev. of Boveri, T. *1522 —
Rev. of Hertwig, G. *1523.

Herwerden, M. A. Radium rays on oogene-
sis in Daphnia. (Rev. by Stein) 1660.

Hess, A. F., and L. J. Unger. Antiscorbutic
potency of vegetables. 2174.

Hess, E. Mistletoe on black walnut. 2048.

Hesselman, H. Dissemination of pollen
from forest trees. *1345.

Heyer, George (Behrend, R., and Heyer)
868.

Hibbard, P. L. Soil changes caused by ma-
nure. (Rev. by Tansley) 2294.

Hibbard, R. P. — Rev. of Kraus, E. J., and
H. R. Kraybill. *944.— Rev. of Apple-
man, C. O. *977.

Higgins, B. B. (Stuckey, H. P., and Higgins)
2102.

Highberger, F. (Grace, L. G., and High-
berger) 2170.

Hilgendorf, F. W. Plant breeding in New
Zealand. 1153, *1524.

Hill, J. B. Anatomy of Lycopodium re-
flexum, U. S. A. 562.

Hill, L., and Hargood-Ash, D. Evaporative
powers of the atmosphere. 2146.

Hillman, F. H. Rhode Island bent seed.
1154.

Hillman, F. H., and Helen M. Henry. Ital-
ian alfalfa and red clover seed identifi-
cation. 27.

Hills, T. J. Influence of nitrates on bacteria.
996.

Hiltner, Lorenz. Forage production from
native flora, Germany. 28.

Himber, F. C. Flour prices in North Dakota.
29.

Hirsch, Paul. Micro-organism and proteins.
903.

Hirscht, Karl. Cleistogamous flowers of
Anacampseros. 563. Cacti for window
garden. 1811.

Hite, B. C. Germination of bluegrass. 1155.

Hoagland, D. R. Influence of nutrient salts
on cell sap of Hordeum. 859, *987.

Hodal. Mountain pine (Pinus montanagal-
lica) in France. *1346.

Hodgetts, W. J. Roya anglica. 605.

Hodgson, It. W. Orange pruning. *1743.
Hodsoll, H. E. P. Care of soils. *2329.
Hodson, E. A. Cotton in Arkansas. 1156. —

Cotton club manual. 1157. — Lint fre-
quency in cotton with a method for de-
termination. 1158. (Nelson, M., and

Hodson) 1187.
Hoffman. Socialization of forest industry.

195.
Hoffmann, H. Sex-linked inheritance and

manic depressive insanity. 391.
Hogg, S. A. (Allen, W. J., and Hogg)

1707, 1708.
Hole, R. S. New species of Ixora. *1347.
Holland, Dorothy. (Winslow, C. E. A., and

Holland) 2243.
Hollander, E. Brachydactyly and hyper-

plalangy. 1525.
Hollande, A. Ch. Pathogenic yeast forms.

653.
Holloway, .J E. Plasticity of Lycopodium

species. 1892.
Holm, G. E. Determination of arginine.

*904.
Holm, Theo. History of the name "Fleur

de Lis." 1246.
Holmberg, O. Orobanche caryophyllacea in

Sweden. (Rev. by Matouschek) 2384.
Holmberg, O. R. Hybrid carex. *1525.
Holmes, Smith E. Flax cultivation, South

Africa. *30.
Holten, Just. Old oak forest, Denmark.

*1348.
Holzhausen, Axel. Laeliocattleya suecica.

*525.
Holzinger, J. M. Corren's investigations

and sterile mosses. 1921.
Honing, J. A. Selection in tobacco. 1527,

*1528.
Honnet, G. Hybrid grapes. 1744, *2049.
Hopkins, L. S. Crested form of Lady fern.

*392.
Horak, O. (Stoklasa, J., J. Sebor, W. Zdo-

boricky, F. Tynich, O. Harak, A. Nemec,

and J. Cwach) 966.
Home, W. T. Root-rot fungi. *196.
Hosmer, R. S. Cost of private forestry, U.

S. A. 1349.— Rev. of Judd, C. S. *1350.
Hottes, A. C. Originators of potato varie-
ties. 1529.
Houser, J. S. San Jose scale. *1745.
Houwink, R. Han. Heredity. *1530.
Howard, A. Spike disease of peach trees.

2050.

336

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Howard, A., and G. L. C. Botanists' Re-
port, Pusa, India. 1159, *2330, *1746.

Howard, L. P. Acidity of soils as produced
by ammonium sulphate and aluminum
salts. 2261, *2151 — Soil acidity and
green manures. 2260.

Howe, H. E. Research and cotton. 1079.—
Using vegetable seeds. *10S0'. — Develop-
ment of cotton industry. *1160.

Howe, Lucien. Heredity eye-defects and
eugenics. *1531.

Howe, M. A. Monosporangial discs of
Liagora. 606.

Hubault, E. British emergency forest
policy. 197. — Present British forestry.
*1351.

Hubert, E. E. Disposals of timber slash-
ings. 2051.

Hubert, E. E. (Weir, J. E., and Hubert)
*249.

Hume, A. N. South Dakota maize, South
Dakota. 1532. — Maize breeding in South
Dakota. 1533.

Hurst, C. T., and J. E. Graves. Determi-
nation of chlorides in soils. 2325.

Hutchinson, C. M. Soil biological studies.
2282, *1161.

Hutton, F. Z. (Tillman, B. W., F. A. Hayes,
and F. Z. Hutton). Soil survey of
Drew Co., Arkansas. 2314.

Hyde, W. C. Cover-crops in New Zealand.
1162, *1747.

Ibsen, H. L. (Cole, L. J., and Ibsen) 1470.

Ikeno, S. Reversionary race of Plantago
major. *1534.

Illick, J. S. Tree growth period, Pennsyl-
vania. 198.

Ingham, W. Mosses and hepatics of York-
shire, England. *1922.

Ireland, A. Democracy and heredity. *1535.

Iversen, K. (Lindhard, E., and Iversen)
1565.

Iwaki, T. Microscopy of some Japanese
woods. *199.

Jabs, A. Peat bog notes. 31.

Jackson, T. P. Plant importations. 1812.

Jacob, A. Soil structure injury by sodium
chloride. *2272.

Jacob, J. Freesias and Lachenakias. 1813.

Jacob}', M. Alleged formaldehyde decom-
position of starch. 919.

Jacoby, Martin. Enzyme formation.
(Anon, rev.) 912.

Jaeger, F. M. Principles of symmetry.
(Rev. by Bancroft) 1451, 1979.

Jamieson, G. S. (Baughman, W. F., and
Jamieson) 540.

Jamieson, G. S., and W. F. Baughman.
Okra-seed oil. *542.

Janssens, F. A. Chiasmatype and Morgan's
theory. *1536. — Chiasmatype in the mat-
uration divisions. 1537.

Janvrin, C. E. Scientific writings of T. J.
Burrill. 82.

Jarmillo, P. J., and F. J. Chittenden.
Double stocks. 1814.

Jauch, Berthe. Anatomy and biology of
Polygalaceae. *564.

JaufTret, Aime. Identification of Dalbergia
wood, Madagascar. 565, *200.

Javorka, S. Notes on plants of Hungary.
1031.

Jehle, R. A., and others. Cotton disease
control in U. S. A. 747, *393.

Jelinek, Dr. Plant breeding and variety
testing. *394.

Jerome, A. Colloid chemistry. (Rev. by
Bancroft) 2246.

Jessen, P. P. "Teakin" method of staining
wood, Denmark. 1352.

Jivanna, Rao P. S. Leaf bladders in water
hyacinth. 1893, 2217.— Geotropic re-
sponse of Eichornia speciosa. 2227.

Joffe, J. S. (VVaksman, S. A., and Joffe) 2184.

Johandiez, E. Mesembryanthemums. 1815.

Johansson, K. Teratology in Geranium
pyrenaicum. 566.

Johannsen, W. Weismann's germ-plasm the-
ory. 1538, *1539.

Johnson, D. S. Proliferation in cacti. (Rev.
by Shreve) 1907. (Rev. by Coulter, J.
M.) 551.

Johnson, J. Improved Wisconsin tobacco.
*1541.

Johnson, C. W. Variation of the palm
weevil. *1540.

Johnson, O. C. (Cohn, E. J., J. Gross, and
O. C. Johnson) 2128.

Johnston, J. R. Sugar-cane mosaic in Cuba.
2121.

Johnston, W. W. (Powers, W. L., and John-
ston) 1198, *2333.

Jolly, N. W. Pulpwood industry, Australia.
201.

Jolly, R. (Puyhaubert, A., and Jolly) 677.

Jones, D. F. Self-fertilization and maize
improvement . 1543.

INDEX TO AUTHORS XAMKS

337

Jones, D. F. Cross pollination in bomato.
(Rev. by Anon.) 273. Linkage in Lyco-
persicuiu. (Rev. by Anon.) 274. —
Linked factors and heterosis, (Rev. by

Anon.) 275. 1 n-!>rreding and cross-
breeding. (Rev. by Anon.) 276, (Rev.
by Pearl) 437. (Rev. by White) 1695.—
Heterosis and double fertilization.
(Rev. by Anon.) 277.

Jones, D. F., and W. O. Filley. Hybrid
vigor in Catalpa. *1542.

Jones, D. II., and F. G. Murdock. Bacterial
analysis of soils. 997.

Jones, E. Potato tests in Massachusetts.
*1163.

Jones, E. M., and A. T. Sweet. Soil survey
of Covington Co., Mississippi. *2303.

Jones, II. Bacterial cultures and hydrogen-
ion concentration. 882.

Jones, J. Vegetable oils, shea tree, West
Indies. 202— Oil of Bay. 808— Cam-
phor. 809. — Fertilizer experiments with
cacao in West Indies. 1001. — Plant im-
portations. 1748. — Orchard experiments
with fertilizers. 1749.

Jones, J. W. By-products of sugar beet.
*32.

Jong, see De Jong.

Jordan, W. II., and G. W. Churchill. Crop
production. 1164, *2273.

Jorgensen, E. A hybrid Ajuga. 1032.—
Euphrasia in Norway. (Rev. by Nord-
stet) 2389.

Jovino, S. Dry farming in Italy. 2328,
*1165.

Judd, C. S. Mesquite tree in Hawaii. 1353.
— Forestry in Hawaii. (Rev. by Hos-
mer) 1350.

Judd, H. M. (Haynes, Dorothy, and Judd)
541.

Kaiser, Paul. Prickly broom. *33.

Kajanus, B. Genetical studies on Papaver
flowers. (Rev. by Anon.) 278, 279 —
Yellow variegated Pisum. (Rev. by
Anon.) 280. — Pea crosses. (Rev. by
Anon.) 281. — Crossing winter wheat.
(Rev. by Schiemann) 1637.

Kajanus, H. B. New varieties of Pisum,
Vicia, Dactylis. 395.

Kalt, B. Reversion in Emmcr. (Rev. by
Anon.) 282.

Kammerer. Sex determination and sex
modification. *396.

Kammerer, K. Hybrids. *397.

Kammerer, I'. Repetition in life and world

phenomena. '•
Kappert, II. Dominance in a quantitative

character. 1644.

Kashyap, S. R. The androecium in cerl
Plagiochasmas. 624- -Abnormal needle-
number in Pinus. 1891.

Keenan, G. L. Mowrah meal in insectici

810.

Keene, M. L, Zygospore formation in I
comyces. 1950.

Keissler, K. V. Fungi of Dalmatia. 654.

Kellcy, W. P., and E. E. Thomas. Effects of
alkali on citrus trees. *988, 1751.

Kellogg, J. W. Seed Report, 1918, Pennsyl-
vania. 1166. — Seed Report, Pennsylvania,
1919. 1167.

Kellogg, R. S. News-print paper supply, U.
S. A. *1354.

Kempton, F. E. Pycnidium development.
655.

Kempton, J. H. Brachytic culms of maize.

*1545. (Collins, G. N., and Kempton)

1472.

Kenoyer, L. A. Dimorphic flower of Acaly-
pha indica. 1895.

Kerle, W. D., and R. N. Makin. Farmers'
experiments with winter fodder, New
South Wales. 1168.

Kern, F. D. Rept. of the Botanist, Penn-
sylvania Dept. Agric. 2052.

Khan, A. H. Red wood of Himalayan
spruce. 203.

Kidd, Franklin. Potato sprouting in gas mix-
tures. 960, *34. (Stiles, W., and Kidd)

851, 864.

Kiessling, L. Breeding winter barley. *399.

— (Rev. by Anon.) 283. (Kraus and

L. Kiessling) 404.

Kildee, H. H. (Gillette, L. S., A. C. Mc-
Candlish and Kildee) 1142.

Killer, J. Centaurea solstitialis, an indica-
tor of the origin of clover seed. 1169. —
Winter wheat changed to spring wheat.
(Rev. by Anon.) 284.

King, A. E. W. Philippine bast-fiber ropes.
2417.

King, C. M.( Pammel, L. II., and King)
*1192, 1193, 13S0, *1381, *1600, *1601,
*1901.

King, H. E. Community tree planting,
South Africa. *1355.

Kinzel, W. A new freezing method in seed
germination, Germany. 135G.

338

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Kirby, R. S., and J. S. Martin. Fruit bud
formation. 1750, *1S96.

Kirchner, see Von Kirchner.

Kirkland, B. P. Cooperative forestry, pri-
vate and government, U. S. A. 1357. —
Private forestry economics, U. S. A.

1358. (Sparhawk, W. N., D. Bruce,

and B. P. Kirkland) 1407.

Kitchin, P. C. Chemical methods of weed
eradication in forest nurseries, U. S. A.
1359.

Klatt, B. Cerebrum of wild and domesti-
cated dogs. *400.— Modifiability of he-
reditary factor through the soma. *401.
1546. — Introduction to experimental zo-
ology. *1547. — Rev. of Palmgren, R.
*1548.— Rev. of Pezard. *1549— Modifia-
bility of heredity factors. (Rev. by
Matthael) 1579.

Klebahn, H. Perfect and imperfect stages
of Ascomycetes. *1951, *2053. — Infection
experiments with graft hybrids. (Rev.
by Stein) 1659.

Kligler, J. J. (Winslow, C. E. A., J. J. Klig-
ler, and W. Rothberg) 699.

Kling, Max. War live stock forage, Ger-
many. 35.

Knapp, Geo. S. Crop irrigation in Kansas.
*2321.

Knapp, M. D. (Grantham, J., and Knapp)
1514, 1515.

Knapp, M. J. (Bishop, O. F., J. Grantham,
and M. J. Knapp) 1457.

Knibbs, G. N. Population, food-supply,
and migration. 402.

Knight, Nicholas. (Maxwell, Harold L., and
Knight) 1873.

Knowlton, F. H. A Dicotyledonous flora of
Morrison formation. 716. — Evolution of
geologic climates. 1992.

Knuchel, Hermann von. Training foresters,
Switzerland. 1360.

Knudson, L., and E. W. Lindstrom. Sugars
and growth of albino plants. 883.

Knuth, R. New African Geraniaceae. 1033.

Koch, A. (Oelsner, Alice, and Koch) 2207.

Koch, L. Line selection. 1550., *1551.

Koehler, A. Suitable wood for airplanes,
U. S. A. *204.

Koehler, Arthur. Mahogany identification,
America. *1361.

Koerner, W. F. Disease affecting seed pota-
toes. *1170.

Koerner, W. F. Seed certification. *2054.

Kofler, Johanna. Dimorphism of the sto-
mata in Pandanus. *2140.

Kohlbrugge, J. H. F. Inheritance of ac-
quired characters. *1552.

Kondo, M. After-ripening of rice seeds.

36, *950.— Japanese agricultural seeds.

37, *567.

Kooiman, H. N. Genetical experiments with
beans. (Rev. by Anon.) 311.

Koorders, W. H., and Th. Valeton. Illus-
trations of the trees of Java. 1034.

Kopeloff, Lillian. (Kopeloff, Nicholas, S.
Byall, and Lillian Kopeloff) 2202, 2203.

Kopeloff, Nicholas. Mold spores in sugar.
2202. — Micro-organisms in the sugar fac-
tory. 2252.

Kopeloff, N., and S. Byall. Invertase activ-
ity of mold spores. 920.

Kopeloff, Nicholas, and Lillian Kopeloff.
Deterioration of sugar by molds. 2203.

Kops, Jan, F. W. Van Eeden, and L. Vuyck.
Flora of Batavia. 2347.

Kornauth, K. Annual report. 2055.

Kornerup, A., and H. Mundt. Ash lumber,
Denmark. *1362.

Kottur, G. L. Improved cotton for Bombay
Presidency, India. 403.

Krafft, K. Investigation of food substitutes.
1081.

Krafka, Joseph, Jr. Temperature and factor
number in bar-eyed flies. 1553.

Kraus, E. J. Vegetation and reproduction in
tomato. (Rev. by Hibbard) 944.

Kraus, and L. Kiessling. Plant breeding in
Bavaria. *404.

Kraybill, H. R. Vegetation and reproduc-
tion in tomato. (Rev. by Hibbard) 944.

Kremers, R. E., and J. A. Hall. Citric acid
in tomato. 884.

Kroemer, K. Grape improvement in Prus-
sia. *405.

Krok, T. O. B. A rare publication [by Till-
ands]. 83.

Kronacher, C. Swine breeding after the
war. *406. — Hereditary defects in ani-
mal breeding. *407. — Animal breeding.
*408.

Krout, VV. S. Diseases of celery, U. S. A.
*748.

Krusekopf, H. H., J. H. Agee, and R. H.
Hall. Soil survey of Callaway County,
Missouri. *2304.

Krusekopf, H. H. (Watkins, W. I., E. D.
Fowler, H. I. Cohn, J. A. Macklis, and
H. H. Krusekopf) 2319.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

339

Kryz, Ferdinand. Effect of ultramarine on

plants. 9G1.
Kuhl. Wood chemistry, Denmark. *13G3.
Kuiper, K. Color and color-pattern in

cattle. *1554.
Kulkarni, M. L. Sugar-cane culture in

India. 38.
Kunz, see Von Kunz.

Kiister, E. Mosaic variegation. *1555. — Sec-
torial variegation and differentiation.

*1556.
Kiister, E. Mosaic variegation. (Rev. by

Anon.) 2S5.
Kuwada, Y. Individuality of chromosomes

in maize. (Rev. by Anon.) 286.

Labordo, J. Wine. *1871, *2253.

Laffer, H. E. Grape pruning. *1752.

Lafferty, H. A. (Pethybridge, G. H., and H.
A. Lafferty) 674.

Lagerberg, T. Onygena equina. *656.

Lakon, G. Protein content of mottled
leaves. (Rev. by Anon.) 895.

Lambert, C. A. (Shirley, John, and Lam-
bert) 1906.

Lamprov, E. Radioactive fertilizers. *2152.

Lane-Poole, C. E. Woods and forests of
Western Australia. *2348.

Lansdell, K. (Pole-Evans, I. B., and Lans-
dell) 1902.

Lansdell, K. A. Adulterants in agricultural
seeds. *1171.

Lantes, Adelaide. The pipal tree. 205, 1816.

Larue, P. Pruning the grape. *1753.

Latham, Roy. Musci hosts of Cyphella.
1952.

Latimer, W. J. (Van Duyne, C., W. E. Mc-
Lendon, W. J. Latimer, and I. M. Morri-
son) 2318.

La Touche, T. H. D. Submerged forest at
Bombay. 206.

Lauritzen, J. T. Humidity and tempera-
ture in infection. (Rev. by Rose) 971.

Lebedinsky, N. G. Darwin's sexual selec-
tion. *1557, (Rev. by Alverdes) 1423.

Le Clerc, J. A., and J. F. Breazeale. Lime
and sodium chloride tolerance of wheat.
860.

Lee, H. Atherton. Plant pathology in Japan.
1247.

Lee, H. Atherton, and Harry S. Yates. Ci-
trus pink disease. 2056.

Lee, Laurence. Parana pine supply, south-
ern Brazil. 1364.

Lees, A. II. "Reversion" of black currant1-.

2057.— Big-bud-mit«> control. 2058.—

Copper stearate. 2059.
LeFevre, Edwin. Brine tolerance in rot i r-

ganisms. 2141.
Legrand, L. Biological conception of the

cell. 1268.
Lehmann, Ernst. Terminology and geneti-

cal concepts. *1558.
Lehmann, E. Rev. of Sporlich. *1559. — Sell

sterility in Veronica. (Rev. by Anon.)

287.
Leidy, Joseph. Gram's stain. 1953.
Leighty, Clyde E. Wheat-rye hybrids.

*1560.
Lemoigne. Saccharose fermentation by Ba-
cillus prodigiosus. *2204. — Butylene gly-

colic fermentation. 2205.
Lemarie, C. (Crevost, C, and Lemarie)

1867.
Lendner, A. Some Switzerland soil mucors.

657.
Lenz, Fritz. Sex limited inheritance and

the Basedow disease. 409.
Leopold, Aldo. Game. Black-tail deer, "kill

factor," U. S. A. 1365.
L'Estrange, W. W., and R. Greig Smith.

"Springing" of cans of fruit. 1954.
Lettau, G. Lichens of Switzerland. 658.
Leveille, H., and A. Thellung. Oenothera

argentinae, 1035.
Levene, P. A. Yeast nucleic acid, V. 905.
Levine, C. O. The water buffalo. *1561.—

Swine, sheep, and goats in the orient.

*1562.
Levine, M. Rev. of Bensaude. *122.
Levy, E. Bruce. Swede turnip varieties.

New Zealand. 1853. — Dry rot of Swedes.

2060.
Lewi, M. J. (Durbin, H. E., and Lewi, M.

J.) 2167.
Lewis, A. C. Wilt resistance in cotton. 1563.

— Georgia Entomologist's Rept., 1919.

2061.
Lewis, A. C, and C. A. McLendon. Cotton

variety tests. 1172.
Lewis, C. I., A. E. Murneek, and C. C. Cato.

Pear harvesting and storing. 1754.
Lewis, I. P. (Ballon, F. H., and Lewis)

1719, 1720, 1721.
Licent, Eug. Amphisphaeriafungorum n. sp.,

or ascogenous form of Clasterosporium.

659.
Lienhart. Sex control in poultry. *1564.

340

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Lillie, F. R. Problems in fertilization. 410.

Lindberg, P'erd. Snowed-in forest. *207.

Lindhard, E., and Karsten Ivensen. Red
and yellow colors in beets. 1565.

Lindstrom, E. Linkage in maize. (Rev. by
Anon.) 288.

Lindstrom, E. W. (Knudson, L., and Lind-
strom) 883. — Chlorophyll inheritance in
maize. (Rev. by Anon.) 289.

Linhart, George A. Free energy of biological
processes. 2211.

Linossier, G. Inoculum quantity and growth
weight in Oidium lactis. *2222.

Lipman, J. G., and A. W. Blair. Lime and
soil improvement, New Jersey. *2262.

Lipschutz, A. Experimental hermaphrodi-
tism. *1566.

Little, C. C. Piebald spotting in dogs. 1567.
— Linkage in mice. *1568. — Heredity sus-
ceptibility to sarcoma in mice. 1569.

Livingston, B. E. Temperature and nutrient
solution, as related to wheat germination.
861.

Livventaal, A. Gardening as an industry.
1854.

Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes. 1955, 1956,
1957, 1958, 1959, *2062.

Lloyd, Strauss L. Fertilizer materials.
(Rev. by Bancroft) 2289.

Lock, R. H. On variation, heredity, and
evolution. (Rev. by Popenoe) 1609.

Lodian, L. Strange things to eat. 1755.

Loeb, Jacques. Electrification of water and
osmotic pressure. 849. — Influences af-
fecting diffusion of water through col-
lodion membranes. 2142.

Lombbroso, Ugo. Fat decomposition and
splitting by lipase. (Rev. by Anon.)
913.

Long, E. R. Nitrogen metabolism of the
tubercle bacillus. 906.

Longacre, M. Y. (Beck, M. W., Longacre,
and others) 2295.

Lo Priore, G. Fasciation in maize. 1570.

Lorenz, Annie. Nardus stricta in the White
Mountains. 2383.

Losch, Hermann. Ascidia formation on
Tropaeolum flower. 1571.

Lotsy, J. P. Species formation in Salix.
1572. — Genetic questions in Cucurbita.
1573.

Love, H. H. Cereal investigations at Cor-
nell. (Rev. by Anon.) 290. — Color and
other characters in Avena. (Rev. by
Anon.) 291. — Inheritance of weak awn in

Avena. (Rev. by Anon.) 292.— Hull-
lessness in Avena hybrids. (Rev. by
Anon.) 293.

Lucas, A. H. S. Australian marine algae.
607.

Lucius, Franz. Separation of glucose and
fructose. *2175.

Luhning. Hereditary sex-linkage. *1574.

Luisier, A. Mosses of Madeira. 625.

Lundborg, H. Population in Norrbotten
and Lapland. 411. — Peoples and cul-
tures in light of racial biology. 412. —
Heredity and mankind. 413. — Eugenical
study of a Swedish peasant family. 414.

Lynch, C. J. Intra-specific sterility in Dro-
sophila. 415.

Lyon, T. L., J. A. Bizzell, and B. D. Wilson.
Clover and timothy in soil nitrates.
2283.

Maas, J. G. J. A. Field experimentation
with Hevea. 208, *1576. — Germination
trials with Hevea seed. 209.

MacDougal, D. T. Hydration and growth.
2223.

MacDougal, D. T., and H. A. Spoehr.
Swelling of bicolloids and plant tissues.
2143.

Maceda, F. N. Selection in soy beans,
Philippines. *39.

Mach, F., and M. Fischker. Wines. *1872.

Maclnnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Scien-
tific methods and dairy products. *1960.
— Examination of dairy products by sci-
entific methods. 2254.

Maclntire, W. H. Potash liberation and
liming. 2263.

Mackay, H. Conifers in Victoria, Australia.
210. — Eucalypt management, Australia.
211.

Macklis, J. A. (Watkins, W. I., E. D. Fowler,
H. I. Cohn, J. A. Macklis, and H. H.
Krusekopf) 2319.

Macleod, J. Quantitative method in biol-
ogy. (Rev. by Thomson) 1675.

Macoun, W. T. Blight resistant potatoes.
*416. — Apple varieties, Canada and U.
S. A. *1756.

MacPherson, A. Lucerne, in New Zealand.
1173, 1174.

Maddox, R. S. Reclamation and forestry,
Tennessee, U. S. A. 1366.

Madelin, J. Cedar of Lebanon. 212.

Maggiora, A., and Carbone, D. Retting of
hemp. 2418.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

341

Magnusson, A. H. Some Swedish lichens.
660.

Maiden, J. H. Acacias of Queensland. 1036.
— Prickly pear. 117"), 1176.— A critical
revision of the genus Eucalyptus. 1367.
(Rev. by Beringer) 2369.

Main, J. M. Kucalypts, South Australia.
213.

Makon, R. N. (Kerle, W. D., and Makin)
1168.

Malinowski, Edmund. Sterility and Men-
delism. *1575.

Malisoff, William, and Gustav Egloff. Ethyl-
ene. 2241.

Malme, G. O. A. New Swedish lichens.
661.

Manaresi, A. Floral biology of peach. 1757.
*1897, 2218.

Mandt, H. (Korneup, A., and Mundt) 1362.

Mangenot, M. G. Chondriosomes in the
Fucaceae. 1269.

Mangin, L. Biographical sketch of Paul
Hariot. 84, *85.

Manrin, G. House-plant supports. 1817.

Mansfield, Win. Squibb's atlas of the official
drugs. (Rev. by Anon.) 2336.

Maquemne, L., and E. Demoussy. Copper
in green plants. 2242.

Marie-Victorin, Fr. des E. C. "Poglus" of
the Hurons. 811. — Micrampelis lobata.
1818.

Marshall, Roy E. Pruning fruit trees. 1758.

Martin, J. C, and A. W. Christie. Moisture
content and soil extract. 989.

Martin, J. N. Botany for agricultural stu-
dents. (Rev. by Boulger) 102. (Rev.
by Stevens) 113, *2230.

Martin, J. N., and L. E. Yocum. Pollen
and pistils of apple. 1759.

Martin. J. S. (Kirby, R. S., and Martin)
1750, 1896.

Martin, P. F. Forest resources, South
America. 214.

Mascre, M. Role of tapetum. 1898.

Massias, J. Forests and forestry in Greece.
215.

Masui, Kiyoshi. Spermatogenesis of horse.
*1577. — Spermatogenesis of cattle. *1578.

Matouschek. Orobanche caryophyllacea dis-
covered in Sweden. *2384.

Matsushima, T. Water absorption of ampu-
tated branches. 1760.

Matthael, R. Rev. of Klatt, B. 1579.

Matthews, E. Transplanting a large yew,
New Jersey. 526.

Mattoon, W. \i. Foresl management, south-
ern U. S. A. "216. Wood preservation,
fence posts, Louisiana. 217.

Matz, Julius. Foliage diseases. *2063.

Maxon, William R. Ferns of the District of
Columbia. 2365.

Maxson, E. T., C. E. Deardorff, W. A.
Rockie, and J. M. Snyder. Soil survey
of Burke County, Georgia. 2305.

.Maxwell, Harold L., and Nicholas Knight.
Oil from cherry pits. 1873.

Maxwell, Hu. Wood uses, agricultural im-
plements, U. S. A. *1368.

Mayer, A., and G. Schaeffer. Indispensable
amino acids for micro-organisms. *2189.

Maylan, C. Flora of mosses of Switzerland.
(Rev. by Chamberlain) 618.

McAlpino. D. Immunity and inheritance in
plants. 1580.

McAtee, W. L Flora of Church's Island.
*2131. — Local names of plants. 2419.

McBride, E. W. Inheritance of acquired
characters. 417.

McCandlish, A. C. (Gillette, L. S., A. C.
McCandlish, and H. H. Kildee) 1142.

McCarthy, Edward F. (Baker, Hugh P.,
and McCarthy) 1293.

McClure, George M. (Bear, Firman E., and
McClure) 2322.

McCulloch, Lucia. Wheat glume rot. *662,
749.

McDiarmid, R. S., and G. S. Sparks. Farm-
er's Experiments: Potatoes. 1177.

McDiarmid, R. W. Grain sorghums. 1178.

(Pitt, J. M., and McDiarmid) 1197 —

(Sparks, G. C, B. C. Meek, and R. W.
McDiarmid) 1211.

McDowell, F. M. (Cobb, W. B., E. S. Va-
natta, L. L. Brinkley, S. F. Davidson,
and F. N. McDowell) 2297.

McGuire, Grace, and K. George Falk. Sac-
chrogenic action of potato juice. 2206.

McHargue, J. S. Peroxidases and the via-
bility of seeds. 921.

McKay, J. W. Field crops in Assam. 1179.

McKay, M. B. Verticillium wilt of potatoes
in Oregon. 2064.

McLean, F. T. Plant physiology in the
Philippines. 844.

McLean, R. C. Studies in the ecology of
tropical-rain forest, with special refer-
ence to the forests of southern Brazil.
*1369.

McLendon, C. A. (Lewis, A. C. and Mc-
Lendon) 1172.

342

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

McLendon, W. E. (Van Duyne, C, W. E.
McLendon, W. J. Latimer, and I. M.
Morrison) 2318.
McMurray, Nell. Commelina communis

flower. 568.
McRae, W. Annual Report, Dept. Agric,

Madras, 2065.
McRostie, G. P. Hull-lessness in Avena

hybrids. (Rev. by Anon.) 293.
Me'ader, P. D. Variation in diphtheria ba-
cilli. 418.
Meek, B. C. (Sparks, G. C., B. C. Meek,

and R. W. McDiarmid) 1211.
Meinicke, E. Lipoid fixation reaction. 885.
Meisenheimer, Jakob. The nitrogen con-
stituents of yeast. *2190.
Meister, Fr. Geography of Swiss diatoms.

608.
Melhus, I. E. (Greene, Laurenz, and Mel-

hus) 2045.
Melhus, I. E., and L. W. Durrel. Cereal

rust of small grains. 2066.- — Crown rust

of oats. 2067.
Melin, Elias. Sphagnum angermanicum n.

sp. 626.
Mell, C. D. Mangroves in tropical America.

1370.
Mellanby, John. Precipitation of starch.

2176.
Mello, see De Mello.
Mendel, Kurt. Familial paralysis of the

radial nerve. 1581.
Mendel, L. B. (Osborne, T. B., and Mendel)

2179.
Menges, Franklin. Report on soils and

crops. 1180.
Menual, Paul, and C. T. Dowell. Cyano-

genesis in sudan grass. 40.
Merewschkowsky, C. New form of Par-

melia. 663.
Merino, G. Coconut-palm bud-rot. 750.
Merrill, E. C. Physical and chemical con-
stants of balsam Peru. 812.
Merrill, E. D., and H. W. Wade. The name

"Discomyces." 1961.
Metcalf, C. D. Tractor logging, U. S. A.

1371.
Metcalf, Woodbridge. Morphology of cone.

1899.
Metz, Chas. W. Chromosomes and linkage

groups in Drosophila. 1582.
Meunissier', A. Selection of vegetables.

*419, 1855. — Genetical experiments at

Verriere. (Rev. by Anon.) 294.

Meves, G. Plastosome theory of heredity.

*420.
Meyer, A. H. (Goodman, A. L., A. H. Meyer,

R. W. McClure,and B. H. Hendrickson)

2301.
Meyer, A. H., and B. H. Hendrickson. Soil

survey of St. Martin Parish, Louisiana.

*2307.
Meyer, Rud. Biographical sketch of H.

Poselger. 1248.— Cacti, shipping. 1819.
Meyers, A. H., and T. H. Benton. Soil sur-
vey of Henry County, Iowa. *2306.
Mez, Carl. New species of Sacciolepis,

Mesosetum, Thrasya, and Ichnanthus.

1037.
Michel, Durand M. (De Besteiro, D. C, and

Michel-Durand). 2163.
Middleton, Howard E. Moisture equiva-
lent. *2147. — Physical character of soils

and water-holding capacity. 2331.
Miege, E. The disinfection of the soil.

*1181, 2284.
Mieville, R. Wheat culture experiments in

Tran-ninh. *41. — Note on the wild tea of

Phou-Sang. *1182.
Millard, Albert. Landscape work. 1820.
Miller, E. C. Embryo sac and fertilization

in Zea. 569.
Miller, R. B. Wood technology (Machae-

rium Whitfordii), Columbia. 218.
Miller, Robert B. Wood technology. *1900.
Miller, W. Dow. A distinction between

two Carices. 2385.
Miller, W. L. Polyxylic stem of Cycas

media. 570.
Minchin, A. F. Annual growth rings in sal

(Shorea robusta), British India. 1372.
Miovic and Anderlic. Tomato diseases.

2068.
Mirande, M. Starch and oil in Chara egg.

123.
Mirande, Robert. Walnut shell disease.

2069.
Mitra, S. C. Use of Swallow-worts (Calo-

tropis spp.) by the Hindus. 86.
Mitsherlich, Eilh. Alfred. Phosphorus con-
tent of oats and its relation to nutrients.
1183. — Abnormal heads in cereals. *1583.
— Phosphoric-acid content of oat plants.

*2274.
Moberg, E. (Euler, H. V., and Moberg) 2195.
Moesz, G. Mycological investigations. 1962.

*2070— Cereal black rust. 2071.
Moffat, C. B. Oenanthe crocata as a poison-
ous plant. 2132.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

343

Mohr, Otto L., and Chr. Wricdt. Heredi-
tary brachyphalangy in man. 15S4.

Mohr, Otto L. Radium rays and cold on
maturation in Decticus. *1585.

Mola, Pasquale. Aquatic flora of Sardinian
waters. *2349.

Molegode, W. Transplanting of rice. 42.

Molisch, Hans. Plasma mosaic in raphid
cells, orchids. *124.

Molliard, Marin. Glucose and levulose con-
sumption by Sterigmatocystis nigra.
2177.

Molz, C. Selection of resistant varieties.
*421.

Mooers, C. A. Maize growing, southern U.
S. A. 43.

Moore, Barrington. Rev. of Rocknagel, A.
B., and J. Bentley, Jr. 1373.

Moore, H. I. Hardy and semi-hardy prim-
ulas. *527. — City rose garden. *528.

Moore, J. C. Cacao thrips and parasitic
fungus. 751.

Morel, F. Clematis montana. 182.

Moreland, C. C. (Edgerton, C. W., and
Moreland) 2116.

Morgenthaler; Otto. Micro-flora of grain.
752.

Morgan, R. R. (Northrup, J. H., L. H. Ashe,
and Morgan) 670.

Morgan, T. H. Physical basis of heredity.
422. — Modifiers of the character, notch
in Drosophila. 423. — Secondary sexual

characters of fiddler crab. 1586.

(Bridges, C. B., and Morgan) 336. —
Physical basis of heredity. (Rev. by
Popenoe) 1610.

Morgan, T. H., and C. B. Bridges. Origin of
gynandromorphs. 424.

Morishima, Kan-ichiro. An indicator for
bacterial fermentation. 886.

Morrison, I. M. (Van Duyne, C, W. E.
McLendon, W. J. Latimer, and I. M.
Morrison) 2318.

Morrison, W. G. Natural forest regenera-
tion, New Zealand. 219, 220.

Morvillez, F. Leaf traces in legumes. 571.

Moss6ri, V. M. Deterioration and ameliora-
tion of Egyptian cottons. 425.

Mottet, S. New Trollius from China. 1038.
—A new Columnea hybrid. 1039.— Neil-
lia, Physocarpus et Stephanandra. *1040.
—Viburnums of China. *1041. — Digi-
talis hybrid. *1587. — Leucanthemes.
1822.— Paederia tormentosa. 1823.— Rho-
dodendrons. 1824. — Carnations. 1825. —

Chamaecyparis. 1826. — Lutz Digitalis
hybrid. 1827.
Moulton, R. II. Kudzu. 44.

Midler, K. A control of downy mildew of
grape. 753.

Mulloy, G. A., and W. M. Robertson. Log-
ging costs, Ontario, Canada. 1374.

Mumford, H. W. Angus cows of Scotland.
1588.

Mundy, H. G., and J. A. T. Walters. Rota-
tion experiments, 1913-19, Rhodesia. *45.

Munn, M. T. Spraying with iron sulphate to
eradicate dandelions. 1761. — Seed-borne
plant diseases. *2072.

Munns, E. N. Seed tree selection (cross-
fertilization) Jeffrey Pine, western U.
S. A. 1375.— Fertilization and seed of
Jeffrey Pine. 1589.

Munter. Plant analysis and fertilizer re-
quirement. *1184, 2275.

Murdoch, F. G. (Jones, D. H., and Mur-
dock) 997.

Murneek, A. E. (Lewis, C. I., A. E. Murneek,
and C. O. Cate) 1754.

Murray, Benjamin L. Tests for reagent
chemicals. *2255.

Murrill, W. A. On North American Poly-
pores. 664. — Polypores collected by
Hedgcock. 665. — Fungi at Yama farms,
New York. 666. — Trametes serpens.
667.— The genus Poria. 668.— Fungi col-
lected near Washington, D. C. 669. — A
correction. 1963. — Daedalea extensa.
1964. — Polyporus excurrens. 1965. —
Light-colored resupinate polypores.
1966.— Illustrations of fungi. 1967.— Lu-
minous fungi. 2420.

Muscatello, G. (Buscalioni, L., and Musca-
tello) 1884.

Musson, C. T. (Fletcher, J. J., and Musson)
1888, 2040.

Muth, Nathan. The isolation of a single
bacterial cell. 2421.

Myers, C. H. The use of a selection coeffi-
cient. *1185, 1590.

Myers, R. C, and L. C. Scott. Stability of
salivary amylase. 922.

Myerson, A. Mental disease in families.
426.

Nachtsheim, H. Mechanism of heredity.
*427. — A correction. *428. — Cross-over
theory of reduplication. *1591. — Sex de-
termination in Dinophilus. *1592.

344

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Naef, A. Idealistic morphology and phylog-
eny. *1593. — Biogenetic law. (Rev. by
Alverdes) 1424.

Nagel. Potato storage experiments. 46, *978.

Nagel, K. (Gothan, W., and Nagel) Peru-
vian flora, Germany. 1989.

Nakahara, Waro. Chromosomes of the stone
fly. 429.

Nakai, T. New genus of Oleaceae. 2386.

Nellemann, L. P. Labor hours and condi-
tions, Denmark. *1376.

Nelson, E. K. Chemistry of capsaicin. *813.

Nelson, J. C. Monomorphism in Equisetum.
*572, *430. — Abnormality in Equisetum.
573. — Biographical sketch of J. Loureire.
1249. — Floras of British Columbia and
Washington. (Rev. of J. K. Henry)
2350.— Grasses of Salem, Oregon. *2387.

Nelson, J. W., C. J. Zinn, and others. Soil
survey of Los Angeles area. 2308.

Nelson, M., and E. A. Hodson. Cotton
varieties, 1919, Arkansas. 1187.

Nelson, M., and L. W. Osborn. Report of
oats experiments 1908-1919, Arkansas.
1186.

N£mec, A. (Stoklasa, J., J. Sebor, W. Zdob-
nicky, F. Tymich, O. Horak, A. Nemec,
J. Cwach) 966.

Newson, T. E. (Glover, G. H., T. E. Newson,
and W. W. Robbins) 975.

Newton, B. R. Chara from South Africa.
1993.

Nicolas, G. Variations in Stellaria media.
*431. — Respiration and presence of an-
thocyanin. 2212.

Nicholls, H. M. Annual report of the Gov-
ernment Microbiologist, Tasmania. 2073,
2074, 2075.

Nicholson, C. G. Plant disease. 2076.

Nicholson, W. E. Reminiscences of E. Le-
vier. 1250.

Nilsson-Ehle, H. Speltoid mutations in
wheat. (Rev. by Anon.) 295. — Atavism
in wheat. (Rev. by Schiemann) 1638.

Noack, K. Rev. of Stomps, T. J. 1594.

Nordstet, C. T. O. Rev. of Gertz, O. 87 —
Rev. of Heribert-Nilsson, N. *221 —
Rev. of Harms, U. *432— Rev. of Osten-
feld, C. H. *1377— Rev. of Jorgensen, E.
*2389— Swedish roses. *2388.

Norris, G. W. (Guthrie, F. B., and Norris)
1145.

Northrop, J. H. Hereditary adaptation to
higher temperature. 433.

Northrup, J. H. Enzyme and substrate
combination. 923.

Northrup, J. H., L. H. Ashe, and R. R.
Morgan. Fermentation for alcohol and
acetone. 670.

Northrup, Z. Preparing cellulose. 1968. —
Agar-liquefying bacteria. 1969, *2178.

Nowell, W. Bracket fungi of lime trees. 754.

Noyes, H. H. Development of useful citi-
zenship. *1595.

Nuttall, G. H. F. Biology of Pediculus.
1596.

O., A. Zonal Pelargonium. 1597.

Oberstein, O. Bud variation in potatoes.
*434. (Rev. by Anon.) 296.

O'Brien, J. F., and J. P. Snyder. Washing-
ton grown Digitalis. 814.

Oelsner, A., and A. Koch. Alcoholic fer-
mentation in alkaline media. *2207.

Oettingen, see von Oettingen.

Ohly. Breeding Merino sheep. *435.

Oldershaw, A. W. Lupins and poor soil,
Great Britain. 47.

Olivares, Daniel. Cultivation of hops. 1188.

Olivier, H. Pyrenocarpic lichens of Europe.
671.

Olmstead, W. H. Availability of carbohy-
drates in certain vegetables. 536.

Oppermann, A. Law, its history and devel-
opment, Denmark. *1378. — Forestry in
1900, Denmark. *1379.

Ortiz, Ruben. Rotation studies in Mexico.
1189.

Osborn, L. W. (Nelson, Martin, and Osborn)
1186.

Osborne, T. B., and Lafayette B. Mendel.
The extraction of "fat-soluble vita-

mine.

2179.

Osborne, T. G. B. Cabbage black leg. 2077.

—Tomato and strawberry wilts. 2078.
Osmaston, A. E. Secondary effects follow-
ing lightning and fire. 2079.
Ostenfeld, C. H. Commemoration address

on John Lange. 88.
Osterhout, W. J. V. Studies on respiration.

932.
Osterwalder. Apple mildew. 2080.
Ostwald, Wolfgang. Colloid chemistry.

(Rev. by Bancroft) 2248.
Oswald, W. L. Cooperation between the

seed analysts and the seed trade. *1190.
Oven, see Von Oven.
Owen, M. N., Cotton, A. D., and Owen.

Onion white rot. 2028.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

345

Paine, S. G., and \Y. F. Bewley. "Stripe"
disease of tomatoes. 755. — Studies in
bacteriosis. 75G, *672.

Paine, S. G., and C. M. Baenseler. Black
leg of potatoes. 2081.

Paine, S. G., and IT. Stansfield. Bacterial
leaf-spot of Protea cynaro ides. 757, *G73,
*970.

Palmer, Ernest J. Ferns of Texas. 2366.

Palmgren, Rolf. Inheritance of abnormali-
ties in domestic animals. *159S. — Sheep-
goat hybrids. *1599. — Inheritance in do-
mestic animals. (Rev. by Klatt) 1548.

Pammel, L. H. Recent literature on fungous
diseases, U. S. A. 89. — State parks in
Iowa. 1263. — Perennial mycelium of
parasitic fungi. *1970, 2082.

Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. Annual
white sweet clover. 1191. — Test your
clover and timothy seed. *1192. — John-
son grass in Iowa. 1193. — Juvenile forms
of trees and shrubs. 1380, 1901.— Black
walnut variations, Iowa. *1381, 1601.

Papanicolaou, G. N. (Stockard, Charles R.,
and Papanicolaou) 1663.

Parnell, F. R. Experimental errors in field
work. 48.

Parnell, Ralph. Forest administration,
North-west Province, British India.
1382.

Parst, August. Pine-oils production, Po-
land. 1383.

Pascher, A. Oedogonium. 436.

Paschal, G. W. Poplar trees, sizes, U. S. A.
1384.

Passerini, N. Florence-grown Pyrethrum
cinerariaefolium vs. other Asteraceae as
insecticides. 815.

Passler, Johannes. Bark peeling of oak,
artificial methods .Switzerland. 1385.

Paterno, E. Cryoscopy. 2144.

Patterson, J. T. Polyembryony and sex.
*1602.

Paul, H. New Bavarian forest plants. 627.

Pavoni, P. A. Castor-bean cultivation.
1194.

Peacock, Josiah C. Biographical sketch of
F. M. Apple. *1251.

Pearl, Raymond. Rev. of East, E. M., and
D. F. Jones. *437.

Pearson, Karl. Quadrature coefficients. 438.

Pearson, R. S. Timber testing, "Sal"
(Shorea robusta), British India. 222.

Peirce, G. J. Testing seeds with a thermom-
eter. 2213.

Pellett, Frank C. Honey plants of America.

1702.
Pellew, Caroline. Genetics of Campanula.

1603.
IV., fold, A. R. (Challinn, R. \V., E. Cheel,

and A. K. Penfold) 1017.
Pennell, Francis VV. On Kneiffia. 2390.—

Scrophulariaceae, eastern I . 8. A. 2391.
2392, 23!):',.

Peratoner, E. (Bargellini, G., and Peratoner)
2160.

Perez, G. V. Vitality of Bougainvillea
roots. 1828.

P6rez, P. F., M. A. Suarez, M. F. Grau, and
A. V. Garcia Villa. Tobacco culture ex-
periments. 49.

Perkins, G. W. Forestry and recreation, U.
S. A. *1386.

Perrie, W. F. Forest research, British India.
1387.

Pescott, E. E. Excursion to Nobelius's nur-
sery. 50.

Petch, T. Rubber tapping, frequency, Cey-
lon. *223. — Rubber diseases. 758. —
Plants used as antidotes. 1252.

Peters, C. A. Agricultural preparation.
(Rev. by Bancroft) 1100— Peter's text-
book. (Rev. by Bancroft) 2012.

Pethybridge, G. H., and H. A. Lafferty.
Disease of tomato and other plants
caused by Phytophthora. *674.

Petren, A., and others. A Swedish institute
for race biology. 439.

Petrie, J. M. Mythol laevo-inositol in
Heterodendron. 816.

Pettis, C. R. Private forestry by legisla-
tive enactments, New York, U. S. A.
1388.

Peyronel, B. Black rot of chestnuts. *1971.
2083.

Pezard, A. Castration of cock subjected to
a meat diet. *1604.

Pezaro, M. A. Transformation of second-
ary sex characters in fowl. (Rev. by
Piatt) 1549.

Pfeiler, W., and F. Engelhardt. Paratyphoid
bacteria. 675.

Phelps, I. K., and H. W. Daudt. Kjeldahl
method for nitrogen. 1006, *907.

Phillips, Edwin Percy. Collecting trip to
French Hoek, South Africa. *2351.

Pickering, Spencer. Fruit growing. (Rev.
by Boulger) 1726.

Pickford, Verne C. Lemon storage. *1763.

346

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Picquenard, Ch. Fossils of Quimper and
Kergogne coal. 1994.

Pieper, H. Methods of differentiation be-
tween stock and sugar-beet seed. 1195.

Pierre, L. Gutta-percha production, Cochin-
chine and Cambodge. 224.

Pilger, R. Corallines of Annobon. 609.

Piltz, J. Heredity and hallucination. *440.

Pinchot, Gifford. Government control of
forest devastation, U. S. A. 1389.

Pinella, A. Robinia Kelseyi. 1829.

Pitt, Francis. Inheritance in pedigreed
cattle. 1605.

Pitt, J. M. Winter green-fodder experi-
ments, 1919. 1196.

Pitt, J. M., and R. W. McDiarmid. Farmers'
experiments. 1197.

Pittenger, P. S. A new pharmacodynamic
assay method. 817.

Pittenger, P. S., and G. E. Ewe. Standardi-
zation of Jamaica dogwood. 818.

Plate, L. Inheritance in mice. (Rev. by
Alverdes) 1425.

Pleas, S. A. Seedling peonies. *529.

Pleijel, C. Valeriana excelsa X officinalis.
*1606.

Plitt, C. C. Lichenology. *676.

Plunkett, C. R. Genetics and evolution in
Leptinotarsa. 441.

Plymen, F. J. Sodium nitrate as cotton
fertilizer. 51.

Pole Evans, I. B. Aloes. 1830.

Pole Evans, I. B., and K. Lansdell. Canada
thistle in South Africa. *1902.

Pommay-Michaux, Mme. (Grigant, A., F.
Guerin, and Mme. Pommay-Michaux)
2199.

Ponsdomenech, J. Fertilizers for sugar
cane. *52.

Pool, Raymond, J. Wood production and
fuel, Nebraska, U. S. A. 1390.

Poole, see Lane-Poole.

Popenoe, Paul. Inbreeding and outbreed-
ing. 1607.— Rev. of Lock, R. H. *1609 —
Rev. of Morgan, F. H. *1610— Rev. of
Punnett, R. C. *1611— World power
and evolution. *1608.

Porto, R. C. Paivaea landsdorffii. 1042.

Posternak, M. S. Phospho-organic prin-
ciple in green plants. 887.

Potier de la Varde, R. Species of Fissidens,
with special reference to dioecism. 628.

Potter, G. F. Temperature control appa-
ratus. 958.

Potts, H. W. Composition of honey locust
tree seed, New South Wales, Australia.
1391.

Powers, W. L. Wild meadow and tule land
improvement, Oregon. 53. — Irrigation in
Oregon. 2332.

Powers, W. L., and W. W. Johnston. Im-
provement of wild meadow and tule
land. 1198. — Improvement of meadow
land. *2333.

Prain, David. The identity of John Rox-
burgh. *1253.

Prain, D., and others. Rept. of Committee
on Roy.-Bot. Soc, England. 108.

Pratt, Geog. D. Forestry in New York,
1920. 1392.

Prideaux, E. B. R. Theory and use of indi-
cators. (Rev. by Bancroft) 2249.

Pridham, J. T. Oat and barley breeding,
Australia. 1612. — An obscure disease in
wheat. 2084.

Principi, Paolo. Dicotyledons of Oligo-
cene of Liguria, Italy. 717. — Lower Cre-
taceous flora, Tripoli. 1995.

Prinsen, Geerligs, H. C. Manufacture of
glycerin from molasses. 2208.

Pritzel, E. Basedowia, new genus of Com-
positae. 1043. — New species of Austral-
ian plants. 1044.

Przibram, Hans. Causes of animal coat
colors. *1613.

Pulling, Howard E. Sunlight and its meas-
urement. 2236.

Pulling, H. E. Rev. of Henrioi, M. *865.

Punnett, R. C. Inheritance of leg feather-
ing. (Rev. by Ellinger) 1492.— Men-
delism. (Rev. by Popenoe) 1611. — Ge-
netics of Dutch rabbit. 1614.

Putterill, V. A. Life history of Uromyces
Aloes-Oke. *125.

Puyhaubert, A., and R. Jolly. Mycetoma
caused by a Madurella, Africa. 677.

Pye, H. Wheat breeding. 1615.

Quehl, L. Cacti. *1831.

Quer, P. Font. Plants of Tetuan. 2352.—

Flora of Minorca. 2353.
Quisumbing y Arguelles, E. Bananas in the

Philippines. *1764.

R. Rev. of Trow, A. H. *1616.

Rafn, Johannes. Seed analysis, forest-trees,

Denmark. *1393. — Nests of tree seed,

oak, Denmark. *1394.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

347

Ragioni6ri, Attilio. — Odor in flowers of Ra-
nunculus. *-J 12. Fragrance of Damask
rose. 1832.

Rambousek. Sulfin (sodium bisulpliatc and
gypsum) dust. 2085.

Ramsay, J. T. Seed potato studies. 1199.

Ramsbottom, J. K. Control of Narcissus
eelworm. 759.

Randall, J. L. Gardening in city education.
109.

Randell, II. II. (Maclnnes, L. T., and Ran-
dell) I960, 2254.

Rankin, \V. H. Manual of tree diseases.
(Rev. by Foster, J. H.) 186.

Ranque, A. (Beeson, A. A. Ranque, and C.
Senez) 869, 870, 871, 872.

Rao, B. Inamati Sham. Artificial produc-
tion of sandal wood, Central Provinces,
British India. 1395.

Rasmuson, Hans. Genetical studies on
Godetia. 443. — Genetics of flower color
in Tropaeolum. (Rev. by Anon.) 297. —
A petunia cross. (Rev. by Anon.) 298.
(Rev. by Ellinger) 1493. — Flower colors
in Tropaeolum. (Rev. by Ellinger)
1494.

Raum, J. Inheritance of seed color in red
clover. *444.

Raunkiaer, C. The biological normal spec-
trum. *2237. — Inheritance of leafing time

in Fagus. (Rev. by Ellinger) 1495.

(Bovgesen, F., and Raunkiaer) 1929.

Raux, Marcel. Forest policy, France. 225.

Ravaz, L. Ammonium nitrate. *1200. —
Handling grape grafts. 1765. — Planting
grape cuttings. 1766. — Control of the
Anthracnose. *2086.

Ravenna, C. (Ciamician, G., and Ravenna)
2240.

Rawes, A. N., and F. J. Chittenden. Effect
of grass on apple trees. 1767.

Rebel, H. Butterfly hybrid. *445.

Recknagel, A. B. Private forestry, costs,
and administration, U. S. A. 1396. —
Forest management. (Rev. by Fernow)
1325. (Rev. by Moore) 1373.

Record, S. J. Possum wood (Hura crepi-
tans), America. 1397.

Reens, Emma. Javanese coca. 819.

Reighard, Jacob. Breeding-behavior in fish.
1617.

Reimer, F. C, and H. V. Tartar. Sulphur in
Oregon soils. 2276.

Reimer, F. C. (Tartar, H. V., and Reimer)
2276.

Reinking, O. A. Philippine host index.
760— Coconut bud rot. *1972, 2087.

Renner, O. Male haplonts of Oenothera.
*1618. — Crosses of Oenothera Lamarcki-
ana mut. vclutina. *1619. — Genetics of
some Oenotheras. (Rev. by Tischler)
1676.

Rettger, Leo F., and C. C. Chen. Colon-
aerogenes group. 1973.

Rettger, Leo F., and Margaret M. Scoville.
Bacterium anatis. 1974.

Rettger, L. F. (Berman, N., and Rettger) 896.

Reverdin, L. Revision of genus Stephano-
discus. 610.

Reynard, J. Tree planting, memorial,
France. 226.

Riccobono, Vincenzo. Pilocereus dautwitzii.
1833.

Richardson, A. E. V. Wheat and barley
breeding. 1620.

Richet, C, and H. Cardot. Mutation in
microbes. *446.

Richey, F. D. Seed-corn treatment. 54.

Richter. Rev. of Fallada, O. 962.— Rev. of
Greisenegger, I. K. 963.

Rick, J. Brazilian agarics. 678.

Ridsdale, P. S. Progress in government for-
estry, U. S. A. 1398. — Forest research
needs, U. S. A. 1399.— Light burning in
forestry, U. S. A. 1400.— National forest
policy, U. S. A. *1401.

Rindl, M. Vegetable fats and oils. *55,
*1201.

Ringelmann, M. Ivy-covered walls. 1834.

Rippel, August. Chemical study of two Lac-
tarias. 1975.

Rives, Louis. Affinity of hybrids for re-
sistant stocks. 1768.

Riviere, C. Experimental gardens in Al-
geria. *1769. — Ripening of pears. 1770,
*2180.

Robbins, W. W. The organization of the
Colorado seed laboratory. *1202. — Re-
search and seed testing. 1203.

(Glover, G. H., T. E. Newson, and \Y.
W. Robbins) 975.

Roberts, H. F. Founders of the art of breed-
ing. 90, 91, *1621.— Teaching error of
mean square. 447.

Robertson, W. F. Starch-splitting bacter-
ium. 679.

Robertson1, VV. M. (Mulloy, G. A., and Rob-
ertson) 1374.

Robin, J. Varieties of rice in Cochin China.
1204.

348

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Robinson, R. H. Effect of heat on lime re-
quirement determination. 2326.

Robson, R. Cotton culture experiments,
. Montserrat, 1917-18, Barbados. 56. —
Root-knot of tomatoes. 761. — Bay trees.
820. — Ajowan. 821. — American horse-
mint. 822.

Rockie, W. A. (Maxson, E. T., C. E. Dear-
dorff, W. A. Rockie, and J. M. Snyder)
2305

Roemer, Th. Technique of variety testing.
57. — Lupine breeding. *448. — (Rev. by
Anon.) 299. (Fruwirth, C, Th. Roe-
mer, and E. von Tschermak) 374.

Roettgen, Theodor. Wines. *1874.

Rogers, R. F., and W. G. Smith. Soil sur-
vey of Calhoun County, Michigan. *2309.

Rogers, R. F., and L. A. Wolfanger. Soil
survey of Chase County, Nebraska.
*2310.

Rogers, R. S. Australian orchids. 1045. —
Chiloglottis Pescottiana. 2394.

Rogers, Stanley S. Vegetable marketing
California. 1856.

Rolfe, R. A. Pre-Mendelian age. 1622.—
The true mahoganies. *2395.

Romell, Lars-Gunnar. Natural grafting.
*227.- — Some European mycological lit-
erature. 680, *92. — Problems of the ori-
gin of species. 1623.

Roncagliolo, M. Stem structure of Mimosa.
*1903.

Rose, D. H. Rev. of Lauritzen, J. F. *971.

Rosen, H. R. Ergot on Paspalum. 681. —
Sweet-potato mosaic. 2088.

Rosenbaum, J., and C. E. Sando. Resist-
ance of tomato skin to puncture. 762.

Rosenfeld, A. H. Mosaic-resisting sugar
cane. 58.

Rosenheim, O. Flavone development. 938.

Rosenvinge, L. K. Biographical sketch of
Jacob Branth. 93.

Rothe, R. Brooks and landscape possibili-
ties. *530.

Roth6a, and De Bon, F. Oil from apricot
seeds. 1875.

Rother, W. Phyllocactus crosses. 449.

Rothberg, W. (Winslow, C. E.-A., I. J.
Kliger, and W. Rothberg) 699.

Rowe, L. W. Maintaining frogs for test
purposes. 823. — Digitalis standardiza-
tion. 824.

Royston, J. R. (Baer, F. E., and J. R. Roy-
ston) 981.

Rubner, K. A new Epilobium from western
Russia. 1046.

Rudolfs, W. Effects of sodium chloride on

trees. 2153. — Salting stumps. 2422.
Ruehl, W. H. (Clark, P. F., and W. H.

Ruehl) 638.
Rumbold, Carolina. Injection of chestnut

trees. 965, *764, 964, *763, *228.
Rupp, Philip. (Ayers, S. H., and Rupp) 867.
Russell, E. J. Electrolytic treatment of

seeds. 59, *951. — Soil improvement at

Rothamsted. 990.
Ruzicka, V. Restitution and heredity. *450.
Ryx, see Von Ryx.

S., E. J. Review of Church, A. H. *1264.

S., W. Rev. of Rignano, Eugenio. 1624.

Sabatier, P. Ferments and catalyzers. *924.

Sabnis, T. A. Anatomy of Indian desert
plants. 1904.

Sagaspe, M. J. A note concerning Digitalis
purpurea. 2423.

Sahni, B. Origin of seed structures in Taxus.
574, *718.

Saillard, Emile. Nitrogen balance in sugar
refining. 2191.

Sakamoto, K. Construction of Japanese
garden. 531.

Saleeby, N. M. Autolyzed yeast extract.
2133.

Salisbury, E. J. Floral variation in Anemone
and Clematis. 576. — Trimery and abor-
tion in Anemone and Clematis. 1625.

Salisbury, F. S. Plants of Albany and Bat-
hurst. *2354.

Sallinger, H. Diastatic properties of for-
maldehyde. 925.

Salmon, C. E. A hybrid Stachys. 2396 —
Kanred wheat. 1205, *2089.

Salomon, X. (Venet, G., and Salomon) 1220.

Sampson, H. C. Errors in rice fertilizer ex-
periments, India. 1002.

Sanders, J. G. Pest handbook. *2090.

Sanders, J. G., and L. N. Wible. List of
nurserymen and orchardists in Pennsyl-
sylvania. *1771, 2091.

Sanders, L. R. (Hammer, B. W., and San-
ders) 2416.

Sanderson, T. Value of Red Durum, or D 5
wheat. 1206.

Sando, C. E. (Rosenbaum, J., and Sando)
762.

Saunders, A. P. American Iris Society. 532.

Sayer, Wynne. Agriculturist report, Pusa,
India. 1207.

Sayre, L. E., and G. N. Watson. Gelsemium
alkaloids. 825.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

349

Sayre, J. D. Hairy leaf-coverings and trans-
piration. 2148.

Schacke, Martha A. Sphacrooarpos lezanus.
*1923.

Schaeffer, G. (Mayer, A., and Schaeffer) 2189.

Schafer, A. (Griebel, C. and Schafer) 802.

Schaffner, J. H. Determination of diecious-
ness in Thalictrum. 577.- — Budsport of
Pandanus. *1626.- — Sexual dimorphism in
plants. 1627. — Dioecious nature of Buf-
falo grass. 1905.

Schander, R. Potato diseases, 1917. 60.

Schander, and Fritz Krause. Diseases and
insect pests of peas. *765.

Schanz, F. Light and living organisms.
*955, 2238.

Schaxel, Julius. General biology. *1628. —
Theory formation in biology. 1629. —
(Rev. by Alverdes) 1426.

Scheidter, Franz. Dying of firs in Franken-
walde, middle Europe. 229.

Schellenberg, G. Sex organs in bryophytes.
*1630. (Rev. by Schiemann) 1639 —
Grape downy mildew. 2092.

Schemers, D. Heredity and race improve-
ment. 1631.

Schiemann, E. Brittleness in barley. *1632.

Schindler, F. Significance of unimproved
stocks of cultivated plants. 452.

Schlagintweit, O. Weichsellia mantelli in
Venezuela. 719.

Schlechter, R. The genus Aganisia. 1047. —
The genus Restrepia. 1048. — The genus
Sigmatostalix. 1049. — European and

Mediterranean orchids. 1050. — A new
bigeneric orchid-hybrid. 1051. — New and
critical orchids. 1052, 1053, 1054.— New
cymbidien. 1055. — Vanda X Herziana.
1056. — Two new hybrid orchids. 1057.

Schmidt, J. Individual potency tested by
diallel crossing. *453. — Aroma in hops
increased by crossing. (Rev. by Anon.)
300. — Marginal teeth as clonal charac-
ters in hops. (Rev. by Anon.) 301. —
Individual potency tested by diallel
crossing. (Rev. by Anon.) 302, 303.

Schneider, Camillo. Berberis in China.
1058.

Schotte, Gunnar. Proceedings annual meet-
ing Swedish Forestry Assoc. *230.

Schreiner, O., and Skinner, J. H. Methods
in nutrition experiments. (Rev. by R.
B. Espino) 857.

Schroder, P. A flat witches' broom. 766.

Schroeder. Inheritance of hypodactyly.
*454.

Schulz, A. Reversion in Emmer. (Rev. by
Anon.) 282.

Schulz, O. E. Sisymbrium septulatum. 1059.

Schweizer, Karl. Deamination. (Rev. by
Anon.) 914.

Scott, L. C. (Myers, R. C., and Scott) 922.

Scoville, M. M. (Rettger, L. F., and Sco-
ville) 1974.

Seaver, F. J. Cup fungi, VIII. 682.

Sebor, J. (Stoklasa, J., S. J. Sebor, W.
Zdobricky, F. Tymich, O. Horak, A.
Nemec, and J. Cwach) 966.

Secrest, E. Forest policy, Ohio. 231.

Seelen, see Von Seelen.

Seifriz, W. Life cycle of a climbing bamboo.
2224.

Seiler, J. Rev. of Goldschmidt, R. *1643.

Semon, R. Lamarckism. *1644.

Senez, C. (Besson, A., A. Ranque, and
Senez, C.) 869, 870, 871, 872.

Sernander, R. Fossil lichens. *683. — Sub-
fossil lichens. 1996.

Seward, A. C. Rev. of Chamberlain, C. J.
*578— Fossil plants. (Rev. by Berry)
1981. — Textbook of botany and geology.
(Rev. by Wieland) 2000.

Sewell, M. C. Bibliography of tillage. *1254.

Seymour, M. E. Mosses of Washington. 629.

Shamel, A. D. Performance records of avo-
cados. 455. — Improved French prune.
*1645. — Bud variation in dahlia. *1646. —
Lemon storage. *1772. — Individuality of
pruned and unpruned grapefruit trees.
1773.

Shapovalov, M. (Edson, H. A., and Shapo-
valov) 740.

Shaw, E. E. Aids to garden work. 110.

Shaw, P. J. Ann. Rept. of prof, of Hortic,
Nova Scotia, 1918. *510.

Shear, C. L., and N. E. Stevens. Historical
sketch of M. A. Curtis's work. 94.

Shedd, O. M. Oxidation and rock-phosphate
solubility and nitrification. 991.

Shepherd, F. R. Cotton culture experi-
ments, Barbados. 61.

Sheppard, H. Hermaphroditism in man.
1647.

Sherman, H. C. Bread protein. 888.

Sheward, T. Winter forcing of fruit trees.
*511— Dracenas. *1835.

Shirley, J., and C. A. Lambert. Stems of
climbing plants. 1906.

Shive, J. W. Influence of moisture in solid
substrata in modifying favorable salt
proportions. 862. — Effects of sand on a
nutrient salt solution. 2154.

350

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Show, S. B. Climate and forest fires in Cali-
fornia. 232.

Shreve, E. B. Leaf temperature by a
thermo-electrical method. 959. — Tem-
perature and the determination of trans-
piring power. 2234.

Shreve, F. Rev. of Johnson, D. S. Pro-
liferation in cacti. *1907. — Rev. of
Bowman, H. H. M. Physiology of
mangrove. *2219.

Shull, C. A. Rev. of Stone, H. 233, *856 —
Rev. of Williams, Maud. *850— Rev. of
Crocker, W., and G. T. Harrington.
926— Rev. of Van Alstine, E. *992.

Shull, G. H. Duplication of factors in
Bursa. 1648.

Siegel, W. Rights of vegetable breeder.
*456. (Rev. by Anon.) 304.

Sieglinger, J. B. Temporary roots of the
sorghum. 2225.

Siemens. Rev. of Haecker, B. *1650.

Siemens, H. W. Hereditary and non-heredi-
tary dispositions. *457. — Concepts of
modern genetics. *458. — What is race
hygiene? *459, *1649.

Sim, T. R. Rubber, South Africa. *234,
*235.

Sirks, M. J. Relationship as a biological
problem. *1651. — A spontaneous bean
hybrid. *1652. — Comparison of barley
and wheat varieties. *1653.

Sirks, M. J. Sterility and self-incompati-
bility. (Rev. by Anon.) 305.

Sirks, M. J., and J. Bijhouwer. Homo-
geneity of Chrysanthemum leucanthe-
mum. *1654.

Skarman, J. A. O. Temperature and geran-
ium-seed viability. 952.

Skerrett, R. G. Timber waste, methods of
reducing, U. S. A. 1402.

Skinner, J. J. (Schreiner, O., and Skinner)
857.

Skoien, O. Forest taxation, Norway. *1403.

Skola, Vlad. Composition of diseased sugar
beets. 2097.

Small, Jas. Origin and development of
compositae. 720, *126, *579, *580, *721,
*1060, 2397.

Smies, E. H. Soil survey of Canadian Co.,
Oklahoma. 2311.

Smith, Arthur. Soil formation and bacteria.
*111. — Fall preparation for spring plant-
ing. *512. — Winter care of garden. *534.
— House-plant culture. *533. — Shrubs for
gardens. *1836. — Seed sowing and germi-
nation. *1837.

Smith, A. L. Hyphomycetes and the rotting
of timber. *1404.

Smith, C. W. Variation in Costaria costata.
611.

Smith, E. A. (Guyer, M. F., and E. A.
Smith) 383.

Smith, E. P. Pollinosis. 10S2.

Smith, F. H. Lumber production, U. S. A.
*1405. — Forests and general economics,
U. S. A. 1406.

Smith, L. H. Biology of aphids. 460.

Smith, R. S. Introductory course in soils.
112.

Smith, T. A. J. Fertilization of tobacco in
Victoria. 2285. — Limestone deposits in
Victoria. 2292.

Smith, W. G. (Rogers, R. F., and Smith)
2309.

Snell, K. Color changes in potato blossoms.
*461. (Rev. by Anon.) 306.

Snyder, J. M. (Carter, W. F., Snyder, and
O. C. Bruce) 2296— (Maxson, E. T., C.
E. Deardorff, W. A. Rockie, and J. M.
Snyder) 2305— (O'Brien, J. F., and
Snyder) 814.

Society of American Foresters. Forest de-
vastation, U. S. A. 236.

Soler, R. A. Tomato culture. *1655.

Sommer, K. Potato breeding on the Ellis-
chau estate. *462 — Potato breeding on
Ellischau estate. (Rev. by Anon.) 307.

Soueges, R. Embryo of polygonum persi-
caria. 581.

Sparhawk, W. N., D. Bruce, and B. P. Kirk-
land. Forest leases, loans, and insur-
ance, U. S. A. 1407.

Sparks, G. C. Farmers' experiments; pota-
toes. 1210. (McDiarmid, R. S., and

Sparks) 1177.

Sparks, G. C, B. C. Meek, and R. W. Mc-
Diarmid. Farmers' experiments with
wheats and oats. 1211.

Speare, A. T. Sorosporella, a fungus para-
site of noctuid larvae. 684, *767.

Sperlich, A. Hereditary distribution of
phyletic potency. *1656. — Seed rust in
Alectorolophus. *1657. — Phyletic po-
tency and seed rust. (Rev. by Leh-
mann) 1559.

Spieckermann . Injury from high soil acid-
ity. 768.— False potato wart. 2098.

Spinks, G. T. Tomato Phytophthora. 2099.

Spoehr, H. A. (MacDougal, D. T., and
Spoehr) 2143.

Spoon, W. (DeVries, and W. Spoon) 184.

Spragg, F. A. Spread of rosen rye. *1658.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

351

Spratt, Amy V. Anatomical anomalies in

monocotyledonous roots. 582.
Spratt, Ethel R. Hoot nodules of Legu-

minosoe. (Rev. by Coulter) 552.
Sprecher, A. Structure and germination of

seed of Garcinia. 5S3.
Sprinkineyer, II., and O. Grucnert. De-
terioration of vanilla and related sub-
stances in mixtures. 826.
Stahel, G. Selection in coffee and cacao.

*463. (Rev. by Anon.) 308.
Stalfelt, M. G. Cell division in Pisum roots.

945, *127.
Standley, P. C. Tropical American Phan-
erogams. 2398.
Stanford, E. E., and C. O. Ewing. Man-
root resin. 827.
Stansfield, H. (Paine, S. G., and H. Stands-
field) 757, 673.
Starte, H. W. Standards in forestry cutting,

India. 237.
Steel, I. Plantago. 828.
Steenbock, H., and P. W. Boutwell. Fat

soluble vitamine, III. 889.
Steil, W. N. Distribution of sexual organs

in fern antheridia. 1908.
Stein, E. Rev. of Van Henverden, M. A.

*1660— Rev. of Klebahn, H. *1659.
Steinach, E. Hermaphroditic glands. 1662.

— Gonads of homosexual men. 1661.
Steinkoenig, L. A. Fluorine in soils, plants,

and animals. S63.
Stern, J. Wines. *1876.
Stevens, C. M. Rating of foresters, TJ. S. A.

*1408.
Stevens, F. L. Rev. of (1) Cook, M. T., (2)
Martin, J. N. 113.— Three new Porto-
rican fungi. 685. — Foot-rot of wheat. 2100.
Stevens, F. L., and Nora Dalbey. A tree-
fern parasite. 686.
Stevens, H. E. Citrus scab. *769.
Stevens, J. L. Wood uses, Australian

"blackboy." 238.
Stevens, N. E. Letters of M. A. Curtis, and

H. W. Ravenel. 95. (Shear, C. L., and

Stevens) 94.
Stieve, H. Experimental ovarial degenera-
tion in domestic fowl. 464.
Stiles, W., and F. Kidd. Absorption rate of
salts by plant tissues. 851. — Concentra-
tion and equilibrium in the intake of
salts. 864.
St. John, H. Color forms of Lobelia car-

dinalis. 451, *575.
Stockard, C. R., and G. N. Papanicolaou.
Inheritance of Polydactyly. 1663.

Stockberger, W. W. Commercial drug grow-
ing in U. S. A., 1918. 829.
Stokes, Fred. Food value of vegetables.

*62, 1857.
Stoklasa, J. in collaboration with J. Scl><,r,
W. Zdobnicky, F. Tymich, O. Borak, A.
Nemec and J. Cwach. Aluminum ions
and seed germination. 966.
Stomps, T. J. Two types of white margins
in Oenothera. *1664. — Chromosomes of
gigas mutations. (Rev. by Noack)
1594.
Stone, H. Economic woods of French
Guiana. 2355. — Tree movement and sea-
soning. (Rev. by Shull) 233.
Stopes, Marie C. New Bennettitean cones
from British Cretaceous. 722. — Composi-
tion of coal. 723.
Stormer. Arrested germination in lupines.
63, *953. — Fertilizer for winter rye. *64.
Stout, A. B. Self-incompatibility in her-
maphrodite plants. 465. — Intersexes in
Plantago lanceolata. *584, *946. — Plant
breeding. 1665.— Self-fertility and self-
incompatibility in Cichorium. (Rev. by
Anon.) 309.
Strahorn, A. F. (Eckmann, E. C, and Stra-

horn) 2300.
Strasser, P. B. Fungus flora of Sontagberg.

687.
Streeter, G. L. Single-ovum twins. 1666.
Stringer, H. B. Biographical notice of G.

Arnold. *1255.
Strong, L. C. Roughoid mutant in Droso-

phila. 1667.
Stroup, F. P. Caffeine and theobromine.

830.
Stuart, G. A. D. Rept. of Director, Pusa
(India) Institute. 1083. — Mycology and
operations against disease. 2101.
Stuckey, H. P. Sweet potato studies. 1212.
— Breeding vitis rotundifolia grapes.
1668, *1774.
Stuckey, H. P., and B. B. Higgins. Spraying

peaches. 2102.
Sturtevant, A. H. Inherited linkage varia-
tions in Drosophila. 466. — Drosophila
simulans, a new species. 467.
Sturtivant, Grace. Registration of new vari-
eties. 468.
Sturtevant, R. S. Breeding bearded Iris.

1669— Irises. 1838.
Stutzer, A. Calcium fertilizer problems.

*2264.
Styger, Jos. Anatomy of umbelliferous
fruits. 831, *585, 832.

352

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Suarez, M. A. (Perez, P. F., M. A. Suarez,
M. F. Grau, and A. Garcia Villa) 49.

Sumner, F. B. Continuous and discontinu-
ous variations in Peromyscus. 469. —
Geographic variation and Mendelian in-
heritance. 1670.

Sutton, A. W. Brassica crosses. 1671. —
Vegetable gardening for amateurs. *1858.

Sutton, Ida (Schiemann, E.) 1634.

Sutton, R. L. Ragweed dermatitis. 833.

Svanberg, O. (Euler, H. V., and Svanberg)
2196.

Swartz, U. S. (Girard, J. W., and Swartz)
1328.

Sweet, A. T. (Jones, E. M., and Sweet) 2303.

Syme, J. E. Wheat, New South Wales.
*1213. — Farmers' experiments, wheat
and oats. 1214.

Tabor, P. Georgi pastures. 1215.

Takahashi, R. Soil fungi, Japan. 688, *993.

Tammes, T. The flower of flax. *470 — He-
reditary factors applied to man. *1672.
— Flowers of flax. (Rev. by Anon.) 310.

Tanaka, T. Japanese fungi, VIII. 689.

Tanaka, U. (Tasaki, B., and Tanaka) 2182.

Tansley, A. G. Rev. of Hartwell, B. L.
*2265— Rev. of Hibbard, P. L. *2294.

Tartar, H. V. (Reimer, F. C., and Tartar)
2276.

Tartar, H. V., and F. C. Reimer. Soils of
Jackson Co., Oregon. 2312.

Tasaki, B., and U. Tanaka. Toxic constitu-
ents of Robinia pseudacacia. 2182.

Taylor, A. A. Redwood, California Parks.
*239.

Taylor, H. V. Deterioration of potatoes.
471.

Taylor, H. W. Tobacco culture, Africa. *65.
— Tobacco culture. *1216.

Taylor, Norman. Lobelioideae, of Hawaii.
2399.

Terrey, E.I. Estimating timber by formula,
U. S. A. *1409.

Teulie, H. (Daniel, L., and Teulie) 1481.

Tevis, May. Benevolent microbes. 939. —
Coconut tree. 1877.

Th., G. Systematic breeding. 1673. — Syste-
matic Breeders' Organization. 1674.

Thaxter, R. (Farlow, W. G., R. Thaxter,
and L. H. Bailey) 77.

Thayer, Paul. Nursery stock. 1775.— Bart-
lett plum. 1776.

Thellung, A. New methods and purposes of
botanical taxonomy. *472. (Rev. by
Schiemann) 1640. — Sex-limited species

characters. *473. (L6veill6, H., and

Thellung) 1035.

Thoday, D. The "osmotic hypothesis."
852.

Thorn, C. (Edmondson, Ruth B., G. M. G.
De Bon, and Thorn) 2414.

Thomas, E. E. (Kelley, W. P., and Thomas)
1751.

Thomas, P. H. Report of fruit and forestry
expert, Tasmania. 1777, 2103.

Thomas, R. Improvement of cotton. *474.

Thomas, Roy C. A new lettuce disease.
2104.

Thomas, W. (Frear, W., Thomas, W., and
H. L. Edmiston) 1005.

Thomson, J. Arthur. Rev. of MacLeod, J.
*1675.

Thomson, J. A. Bronte heredity. (Rev. by
Gatenby) 379.

Thorp, W. E., and H. J. Harper. Soil sur-
vey of Blackhawk County, Iowa. *2313.

Thurston, A. Sandalwood-oil adulteration.
834.

Thysell, J. C. (Waldron, L. R., and Thysell)
69.

Tiemann, H. D. Kiln-drying airplane lum-
ber, U. S. A. *240.

Tillman, B. W., F. A. Hayes, and F. Z. Hut-
ton. Soil survey of Drew County, Ar-
kansas. 2314.

Tillman, B. W., and B. F. Hensel. Soil sur-
vey of Phelps County, Nebraska. *2315.
— Soil survey of Wayne County, Ne-
braska. 2316.

Tischler, G. Rev. of Renner, O. *1676.

Tison, A. Suspensor of Trapa. (Rev. by
Coulter) 553.

Tjebbes, K. Genetioal experiments with
beans. (Rev. by Anon.) 311.

Tornau, Dr. Variation in wheat. 1677.

Trabut, L. (Douin, Ch., and Trabut) 621.

Tracy, W. W. Growing tomato seed. *537.

Tragardh, Ivar. Bark beetles. 241.

Tran-van-Huu. Variety of rice known as
"Hueky." 1217— Floating rice in Co-
chin-china. 1218.

Trelease, Sam F. Laboratory exercises in
agricultural botany (textbook). 114.

Tribolet, I. Olives. *1778, *1779.

Trow, A. H. Albinism in Senecio. (Anon,
rev.) 1616.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

:-;.">:',

Trowbridge, P. F. Nitrogen determination

symposium. 1007, *908. — Report of the

director. 2424.
Truelle, A. Soil exposure and sugar content

in apples. 513.— Marketing apples. 1780.
Trueman, J. M. Rept. Professor of Agric.

and Farm Superintendent, Nova Scotia,

1918. *66.
Tschermak, see Von Tschermak.
Tsuji, R. Cercosporella persica Clastero-

sporium degenerans, Japan. 690.
Tsuji, T. Ultra violet light and certain

plants, Hawaii. 956.
Tufts, \V. P. Bartlett pear pollination, Cal.

514. — Almond pollination, Cal. 515.
Turesson, Gote. Plagiotropy in maritime

shore plants. 475.
Turk, see De Turk.
Turney, A. G. Province of New Brunswick

Rept. on Agric, 1918. 1781.
Turrill, W. B. Perianth in Ranunculus. 586.

—Flora of Macedonia. *2356.
Tymich, F. (Stoklasa, J., J. Sebor, W. Zdob-

osicky, F. Tymich, O. Horak, A. Nemec,

and J. Cwach) 966.
Tyson, Chester J. Report of Pomologist,

Pennsylvania 1782.

Ubisch, see Von Ubisch.

Uichanco, Leopold B. Philippine insect

galls. 2105.
Unger, Lester J. (Hess, Alfred F., and

Unger) 2174.
Urban, J. High polarizing beets and their

progeny. *476. (Rev. by Anon.) 312.
Uzel, H. Red rot of sugar beet. 770.

Vaerting, M. Pathological inheritance and

war degenerations. *477.
Vageler, H. Size of plants, and errors in

field experimentation. 1219.
Valeton, Th. (Koorders, S. H., and Valeton)

1034.
Van Alstine, E. Movement of plant food

in soils. (Rev. by Shull) 992.
Vanatta, E. S. (Cobb, W. B., E. S. Vanatta,

S. F. Davidson, and F. N. McDowell)

2297.
Van den Heede A. Salpiglossis sp. 1839.
Van der Wolk, P. C. Permanent modifica-
tions and mutations. *478.

Van Duyne, C, L. R. Schoenmann, and S.

D. Averitt. Soil survey of Shelby Co.,

Kentucky. *2317.
Van Duyne, C, \V. W. \hLendon, W. J.

Latimer, and E. M. Morrison. Soil

survey of Marlboro Co., S. C. 2318.
Van Eeden, F. W. (Kops, Jan., F. VV. Van

Eeden, and L. Vuyek) 2347.
Van Fleet, W. Rose breeding notes, 1918.

1678.
Van Wisselingh, C. Variation and heredity.

1679.
Vaupel, F. Some old cactus literature.

1256.
Vendrell, E. Green manures in rotation.

*67.
Verdie, H. Grape varieties. 1783.
Vernet, G. Rubber treatment, "smoking,"

*242. — Biometry and homogeneity. *479.

— Coagulation of Hevea latex. *1084.
Vernet, G., and X. Salomon. Notes on

Fourcroya gigantea Vent. *1220.
Vestby, P. Forest of Chili. *1410.
Vestergaard, H. A. B. Inheritance in

lupines, wheat and barley. *1680.
Vevers, G. M. (Gourlay, W. Balfour, and

Vevers) 2382.
Viehoever, A. The Pharmacognosy Lab.

835. (Ewing, Clare O., and Viehoever)

795.
Vieillard, P. Agricultural research in Java.

*68. — Pure lines and hybridization in

rice. *480.
Vielhauer. Four-leaved clover. 1909.
Vierhapper, F. Trifolium Pilczii. 1061.
Vierhout, P. Curacao aloe production.

836.
Vigiani, D. Selection in wheat. *1681.
Viguier, R. Cultivated Araliaceae. *1062,

*1063.
Vikhammer, P. Norway spruce in Northern

regions, Norway. *1411.
Vincens, F. Hevea diseases due to Diplodia.

771.
Vochting, Hermann. Polarity. *1910. *2106.
Vogt, A. Heredity and ophthalmology.

*481— Senile cataract. *1682.
Volkart, A. Seed control and Experiment

Station at Oerikon-Ziirich, Switzerland.

*482. — Seed control and experiment sta-
tion, Oelikon-Zurich. (Rev. by Anon.)

313.
Von Bubnoff, Serge. Principle of paleonto-

logical taxonomy. 483.

354

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Von Caron-Eldingen. Physiological segre-
gation without Mendelism. *484. — Mu-
tations and double grains. *485. —
Physiological segregation or vegetative
mutations. *486. — Physiological segrega-
tion without Mendelism. (Rev. by
Anon.) *314.

Von Fankhauser, E. Larch distribution fac-
tors, Swiss forestry. 243.

Von Graevenitz. Rev. of Crane, M. B. 1683.

Von Graevenitz, Luise. Remarkable in-
breeding experiment. 487.

Von Kirchner, O. Polarity. *1911. Rev.
of Vochting, H. 2107.

Von Kunz, I. Swiss forest-planting ex-
perience. 244.

Von Oettingen. Acquired characters in
horses. *488.

Von Oven, F. W. Native flora, U. S. A.
1840.

Von Ryx, G. Bud mutation in potatoes.
*489.

Von Seelen, D. The forest and the farm.
245.

Von Tschermak, A. Weakening of genes
through hybridization. *490. — Hybridi-
zation of Cheorier beans. *491. — Breed-
ing legumes. *492. — Hybridizations of
wild and cultivated oats. *493. — Appar-
ent vegetative splitting in hybrids. *494.

(Fruwirth, C., Th. Roemer, and E.

von Tschermak) 374.

Von Ubisch, G. Barley crosses. *495. —
Barley crosses. (Rev. by Anon.) 315. —
Factorial analyses of barley. 1684.

Von Wettstein, F. Genetics and taxonomy
of haplonts and diplonts. 1685.

Von Wettstein, R. The genus Moltkea.
1064.

Vorwerk, W. Trichocaulon and Hoodia.
1841.

Vries, see De Vries.

Vuijk, L. Report of the excursion held in

Hertogenbosch, Holland. 2357. (Kofs,

Jan., F. W. Van Eeden, and L. Vuijk)
2347.

Vuillemin, P. Remarks on mycetomas. 691.

W., B. C. A. Rev. of Punnett, R. C. Men-
delism. *1686.

W., F. A. Continuous variation in color.
*1637.

Waby, J. F., Preserved fruits and seeds.
2358, 2359— On palms. 2400, 2401.

Wade, H. W. (Merrill, E. D., and Wade)
1961.

Wagner, R. Plunder's illustration of Anech-
ites lappulacea. *1065.

Wahlgren, A. Forest and prehistoric man.
*246.

Waksman, S. A. Diastatic action of Asper-
gillus. 927.— Actinomyces. 998, *692.
2192.— Metabolism of actinomycetes.
*2183. — Biology of cranberry bog soils.
2286. — Aspergillus-oryzae enzymes in
industry. 2425.

Waksman, Selman A., and Jacob S. Joffe.
Metabolism of actinomycetes. 2184.

Walcott, Charles D. Algae of Cambrian.
1997.

Waldron, L. R. Alfalfa crosses. *1221, 1689.
— Rust resistance in wheat. 1688.

Waldron, L. R., and J. A. Clark. 1688.

Waldron, L. R., and J. C. Thysell. Rept.
Dickinson, North Dakota, sub-station,
1914-19. 69.

Walker, R. S. Paulownia tomentosa, U. S.
A. *247.

Walker, Seth S. Soil aeration and lime re-
quirement. 2266.

Wall, A. Pronunciation of scientific terms
in New Zealand. *1085.

Waller, A. E. Xenia. 115, 496.

Walster, H. L. Marquis versus durum
wheats. 1222.

Walter, F. K. Familial idiocy. *497.

Walters, J. A. F. (Mundy, H. G., and Wal-
ters) 45.

Wangerin, W. Alternation of generations.
*1690.

Ward, J. M. Annual report of fruit and
forestry expert, Tasmania. 1784.

Ward, Martha E. Galax aphylla in Massa-
chusetts. 2402.

Warner, H. W. (Davis, Vincent L., and
Warner). 2298.

Warren, Don C. Spotting inheritance in
Drosophila busckii. 1691.

Waterhouse, W. L. Over-summering of wheat
rust in Australia. 2108.

Watkins, W. I., E. D. Fowler, H. I. Cohn,
J. A. Macklis, and H. H. Krusekopf.
Soil survey of Texas County, Missouri.
*2319.

Watson, G. N. (Sayre, L. E., and Watson)
825.

Watson, W. Bryophytes and lichens of cal-
careous soil. 693. — The bryophytes and
lichens of fresh water. *1924.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

:>:>:>

Watt, A. S. Natural forest regeneration
difficulties, oak, Great Britain. *248.

Watts, Francis. Liming of soils. *994.

Watts, W. W. (Brotherus, V. F., and Watts)
617.

Weatherby, C. A. Nomenclature change of
Gray's Manual ferns. 2367.

Weatherwax, P. Technique of paraffin em-
bedding. 587. — Inbreeding in maize.
1692. — Ancestr}' of maize. 1912.

Weaver, J. E. Quadrat method. (Rev. by
Adamson) 97.

Webber, H. J. Selection of stocks in Citrus
propagation. 498, 1785.

Week, R. Barley seed. *2109.

Weeks, Charles R. Alfalfa in Kansas. 1223.

Weibull, C. G. History and methods of
Weibullsholm. 499.

Weidner, A. I. Report of fruit committee
(Pennsylvania) 1786.

Weimer, J. L. Variations in Pleurage curvi-
colla. 694, 1693. — Spore discharge of
Pleurage. 695, *979.

Weingart, W. Cross and self-pollination in
cactuses. 500. — Composition of bloom of
Cereus. 588. — Sphere crystals in Cereus.
589. — Cereus formosus seed. 1842.

Weir, J. E., and E. E. Hubert. Thinning in-
fected fir and hemlock. *249.

Wells, A. H. Physiological active constitu-
ents of certain Philippine medicinal
plants, III. 2135.

Welo, L. A. Rapid seasoning of Sitka spruce,
U. S. A. *250.

Welton, F. A. Experiments with oats. 1224.

Wenholz, H. Field-pea fodder. 1225.— Maize
culture. *1226. — Fertilizers for green
winter-fodders. *1227. — Maize breeding.
1694.

Went, F. A. F. C. Formation of diastase by
Aspergillus niger. 2209.

West, Erdman. An undescribed timber de-
cay of hemlock. *1412.

.Westbrook, E. C. Tobacco varieties. 1228.

Westerdijk, Johanna (Appel, O., and Wes-
terdijk) 727.

Weston, W. H. Zoospore emergence in Dic-
tyuchus. 696.

Westover, H. I., and S. Garver. Oil barrels
as experimental silos. 70.

Wettstein, see Von Wettstein.

Wheldon, J. A. Lichens of Llanberis. 697.

Whelpley, Henry M. Biographical sketch of
J. M. Good. 1257.

Wherry, Edgar T. Soil tests of Ericaceae in
New Hampshire. *2334.

Whetzel, 11.11. Biographical notice of G. P.
Atkinson. *96.

Whipple, George Chandler. Ethel M. Whip-
pies vital statistics. (Rev. by Elderton)
1491.

White, E. A. Tea rose "Columbia." 535.

White, Orland E. Rev. of East, E. M., and
Donald F. Jones. Inbreeding. *1695.

Whitehouse, W. E. Cold storage for Iowa
apples. 1787, *2110.

Whiting, Albert L., and Warren R. Schoon-
over. Decomposition of green and cured
clover in soils. 2287.

Whitten, James. Public parks. *1843.

Wible, L. H. (Sanders, J. G., and Wible)
1771, 2091.

Wieland, G. R. Distribution and relation-
ships of cycadeoids. 1913. — Tetracen-
tron- Drimys question. 1998, 1999. — Rev.
of Seward, A. C. Botany and geology.
*2000.

Wiggans, C. C. Fruitfulness in apples. 1696.

Wilcox, E. Mead. Classification of plant
diseases. 2111.

Wilde, see De Wilde.

Wilder, Harris Hawthorne. Duplicate twins.
*1697.

Willaman, J. J. Influence of vitamine on
Sclerotinia cinerea. 890. — Rev. of Dug-
gar, B. M. *891.

Willey, Florence. Perennial grasses. *1229.
*1914.

Williams, C. C. (Esty, J. R., and Williams)
2415. — Clipping tests of oats and wheat.
*1230.

Williams, Emile F. George Golding Ken-
nedy. 1258.

Williams, Frederic N. Notes on the Flora
Londinensis. 2360.

Williams, I. C. Forest administration,
Pennsylvania. 1413.

Williams, Maud. Electrolytes and permea-
bility. (Rev. by Shull) 850.

Williams, W. L. Beet-sugar industry, Vic-
toria. 184-1.

Willows, R. S. Surface tension and surface
energy. (Rev. by Bancroft) 2250.

Willows, R. S., and E. Hatschek. Surface
tension and chemical phenomena. 845.

Wilson, B. D. (Lyon, F. L., J. A. Bizzell,
and B. D. Wilson) 2283.

Wilson, Ellwood. Forest mapping by sea-
planes, Canada. 1414.

356

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Wilson, G. H. Gram-positive and gram-
negative organisms. *698.
Wilson, J., and F. J. Chittenden. Experi-
ment in potato culture. 71.
Wilson, W. J. Fossil plants from New-
Brunswick. 724

Winge, 0\ (Ferdinandsen, C., and Winge)
1941, 2039.

Winiwarter, see De Winiwater.

Winslow, C.-E. A., I. J. Kligler, and W.
Rothberg. Colon typhoid bacteria. 699.

Winslow, C.-E. A., and Dorothy F. Holland.
Disinfectant action of glycerol. 2243.

Winslow, E. J. History of the American
Fern Society. *1259.

Winston, J. R., and W. W. Yothers. Bor-
deaux oil emulsion. 772.

Winters, A. Y. Eugenics, war and democ-
racy. *1698.

Winters, S. R. Paper from cottonseed waste.
1231.

Winterstein, E. Iodine in plants. *2155.

Wirth, E. H. Chenopodium. 837.

Wisselingh, see Van Wisselingh.

Wittmack, L. Judging soils by weed grow-
ing. *2335.

Woglum, R. S. Fumigating trees in bloom.
1788, *2244.

Wolfanger, L. A. (Rogers, R. F., and Wolf-
anger) 2310.

Wolff, Estelle M. (Bronfenbrenner, J. W. F.
Bovie, and Estelle M. Wolff) 2020, 2232.

Wolff, F. A case of dominant syndactyly.
501.

Wolk, see Van der Wolk.

Wong, Y. C. Chinese opium. 838.

Wood, B. R. Regeneration of sal forests,
India. 251.

Wood, Jos. T. Purification of trypsin. 928.

Woods, Frederick Adams. Twins and the
chromosomes. *1699. — A definition of
heredity. *1700.

Woodruff, George W. Constitutionality of
restrictive forest legislation, U. S. A.
1415.

Woodward, R. W. Morphology of Philotria.
590.

Woolsey, C. Sweet potatoes. 1859.— Vege-
table gardens. 1860.

Woolsey, Theodoro S., Jr. Pioneer forestry,
Arizona, U. S. A. *1416— Natural forest
regeneration methods, France. 1417.

Work, P. Muck-soil gardening. 538.

Wormald, H. Phytophthora rot of pears
and apples. 773.

Woj-nar, H. Notes on Polypodium austria-

oum. 2368.
Wriedt, Chr. Brindle colour in cattle. 1701.

(Mohr, Otto, and Wriedt) 1584.

Wright, I. A. Cane-sugar history in the

West Indies. 1232.
Wunschendorff. Atractylis root. 839.
Wyant, Zae Northrup. Silage inoculation.

2426.
Wyeth, F. J. S. H-ion concentration and

Bacillus c'oli. 967.

Yamamoto, R. Chrysanthemum cinerarii-

folium. 840.
Yampolsky, Cecil. Sex integration in plants.

502.
Yapp, U. W. (Detlefsen, J. A., and Yapp)

1486.
Yasuda, A. Notes on fungi of Japan. 700,

701, 702, 703.
Yates, Harry S. Tree growth, rubber (Hevea

brasiliensis), Philippines. 1418. (Lee,

H. Atherton, and Yates) 2056.
Yendo, K. The genus Alaria. 612. (Rev.

by Coulter) 599.
Ylppo. Icterus neonatorum gravis. *503.
Yocum, L„ E. (Martin, J. N., and Yocum)

1759, 2230.
Yothers, W. W. (Winston, J. R., and Yoth-
ers) 772.
Young, Floyd D. Temperature changes

and altitude in orange grooves. *1789.
Young, J. P. Report of Committee on the

Cereal Crops, Pennsylvania. 1233.
Youngken, H. W. Digitalis Sibirica. 841.

Zahlbruckner, A. Lichens of Dalmatia. 704.

Zander, L. Hybridization and honey for-
mation. *504.

Zdobnicky, W. (Stoklasa, J., J. Sebor, W.
Zdobnicky, F. Tymich, O. Horak, A.
Nemec, and H. Cwach) 966.

Zeleny, Charles. On genetics of Drosophila.
1702.

Zellner, J. Chemistry of Scleroderma vul-
gare and Polysaccum crassipes. 892. —
Composition of Agave Americana and
other succulents. *2185.

Zeno, Rapael del Valle. Sugar-cane mosaic.
2122.

Ziegler, H. E. Selection in rats. *505.

Zimmer, W. J. Coppice eucalpytus, Aus-
tralia. 252.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAM]

Zimmerley, H. II. Tomatoes in the green- Zoller, JI. F. Indole in culture □ >93.

house. 1861. — Hydrogen ion concentration upon the

Zimmermann, Ch. New or peculiar diatoms. volatility of indole from aqueoi

613. tion. 894.

Zimmerman, II. E. Tomato grafted on po- Zschacke, H. Lichens of central Europe.

tato. *539. 70."..

Zinn, C. J. (Nelson, J. W., C. J. Zinn, et al.) Zweigelt, Fritz. Biological studies of

2308. aphids. 774.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical
abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as
possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations
with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919.
As an adequate index of progress, Botanical, Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower,
field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international
scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili-
ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those
having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to
every one interested in plants.

The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown
on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of
Control. The Bibliograp! y Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the
prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the
Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

Botanical Abstracts is published monthly, two, three, or four volumes being issued
each year at present. Each volume contains about 300 pages. The current (1920) volumes
are III, IV, V and VI. Subscriptions are accepted for Vols. Ill and IV, (January- July,
inch), and V and VI, (August-December, inch). Volumes I and II can no longer be fur-
nished by the publishers. The price for two volumes is $6.00, for the United States and its
dependencies, Mexico and Cuba; $6.25, for Canada; $6.50, for other countries. Prices are net
postpaid. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received
within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of
issue.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: RAiiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense.

VOLUME VI
OCTOBER, 1920-JANUARY, 1921

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

1921

Williams & Wilkins Company

Baltimore, U. S. A.

THE S0< lKTII.S NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 1920 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.

*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experi-
mental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor,
Long Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.

B. M. Davis, University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Michigan.

*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.

B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

\Y. J. V. Osterhotjt, Harvard Univer-
sity, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic
Section.

J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical
Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.

A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.

J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.

Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
*Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. II. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.

C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCtje, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the
Board), Cornell University, Ithaca,
New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum

of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rudd, Medical College,
Richmond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.

No elections.

At large.

W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

BOARD OF EDITORS AND ASSISTANT EDITORS

FOR VOLUME VI

Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of
Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D. C.

Bibliography, Biography, and History.
Lincoln W. Riddle, Harvard Univer-
sity, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager,
Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn,
New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred
Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University
of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.—
Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni-
versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C.
Cowles, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo.
D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael
Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Washington,
D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V. Hofmann,
U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi-
ment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton
University, Princeton, New Jersey.—
Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl-
vania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, WTest Virginia
University, Morgantown, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications.
Burton E. Livingston, The Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary-
land.

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of
Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con-
necticut Agricultural College, Storrs,
Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N.
Transeau, Ohio State University,
Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes.

Alexander W. Evans, Yale University,
New Haven, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi,
Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes.
H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History.
Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins
University, Baltimore, Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri-
cultural College, East Lansing, Michi-
gan.— Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett,
Michigan Agricultural College, East
Lansing, Michigan.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri
Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge,
Brown University, Providence, Rhode
Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau
of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,

D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M.
Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor,

E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Gar-
den, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR VOLUME VI

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O. Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A. J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand

R . Hosmer

CONTENTS

The Societies Represented and the Members of the Board of Control Page iii

The Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for volume VI Page iv

Sections:

Agronomy Entries 1-42, 474-193, 879-9^3, 139S-1436

Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 43-66, 904-964, 1437-1473

Botanical Education Entries 67-72, 494-510, 965-975, 1474-1477

Cytology Entries 976-1010, 1478-1496

Ecology and Plant Geography:

General, Factors, Measurements Entries 1497-1501

Structure, Behavior Entries 1502-15*4

Vegetation Entries 1505-1513

Flonstlcs Entries 1514-1529

Forest Botany and Forestry Entries 73-112, 511-644, 1011-1048, 1530-1562

Genetics Entries 645-751, 1049-1145, 1563-1793

Horticulture:

Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 113-140, 1146-1164, 1794-1837

Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture Entries 141-143, 1165-1173, 1838-1878

Vegetable Culture Entries 144-145, 1174^ 1879-1889

Horticulture Products Entries 146-148, 1175-1179, 1890-1893

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants . . . Entries 752-772 1180-
1188, 1894-1905

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae Entries 1189-1204

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 149-162, 1205-1212, 1906-19^9

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes:

Myxomycetes Entries 163, 791

Bactena Entries 164-184, 789-790, 1232, 1924

Llchens Entries 185-186, 786-788, 1230-1231

Fun§1 Entries 187-212, 773-785, 1213-1229, 1910-1923

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 792-802, 1233-1255, 1925-1931

Pathology . . Entries 213-263, 1256-1295, 1932-1972

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy Entries 264-276, 803-827, 1973-1993

Physiology:

General Entry 1306

Protoplasm, Motility Entries 1307-1308

Diffusion, Permeability Entries 828-830, 1309-1312, 1994-1995

Mineral Nutrients Entries S31-833, 1313-1314, 1996-1998

Photosynthesis Entries 1315-1316, 1999-2001

Metabolism (General) Entries 834-844, 1317-1327, 2002-2004

Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 845-849, 1328-1331

Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 850-856, 1332-1342, 2005

Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 857, 1343

Organism as a Whole Entries S58-860

Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 861-866, 1344-1349, 2006-20(9

Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 1350-1351

Germination, Renewal of Activity Entries 1352, 2010

Regeneration Entries 867-868, 1353-1355

Temperature Relations Entries 869-870, 1356-1357

Radiant Energy Relations Entries 871-872, 1358-1359, 2011-2012

Toxic Agents Entries 1360-1362, 2013-2017

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS. VOL. VII. NO. 3

• CONTENTS

Physiology— Continued Entry 1363

Electricity and Mechanical Agents '.'.Entries 873-878, 1364, 2018

Miscellaneous

Soil Science : Entries 1365-1372, 2019-2024

General Entries 277-281 1373

Acidity and Hydrogen-Ion Concentration -^ ^^ ^^

Influence of Biological Agents • ■ ^^ 286_289) 138()_i383

Fertilization " ' Entries 290-294, 1384-1392

Fertilizer Resources Entries 295-297

Influence of Salts on Solubility ■ ' Entrieg 2025-2028

Soil Classification Methods '.""'.".'.'.. .Entries 298-300

Miscellaneous

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants: Entries 301-320

General "' .Entries 321-332

Pteridophytes ' * ' Entries 333^67

Spermatophytes • ^ ' +^'oc 4A«Jm 1393-1397. 2029-2032

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications . . Entries 468-473, 139d , ^

Index to Authors' Names appearing in volume VI

Vol. VI

OCTOBER, 1920

No. 1

ENTRIES 1-473

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 1920 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.
*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.
A.F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann

Arbor, Michigan.
*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology

Section.
B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhotjt, Harvard University,

Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.
J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
•Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus
try, Washington, D. C.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kratjs, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick {Chairman of the Board) ,
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.
Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Wortley F. Rtjdd, Medical College, Rich-
' mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

FETTER LANE, LONDON, E. C.

Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

C $6.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba
Price, net postpaid for two volumes: < $6.25 Canada

l $6.50 Other countries

1919 Volumes: I and II
1920 Volumes: III, IV, V and VI

CONTENTS

Agronomy 1-42

Bibliography, Biography and History 43- 66

Botanical Education 67- 72

Forest Botany and Forestry 73-112

Horticulture 113-148

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 149-162

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 163-212

Pathology 213-263

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 264-276

Soil Science 277-300

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 301-467

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 46S-473

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burto.v E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S.Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, Mary R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D.C.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York.— Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Transeau.
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander
W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science, Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M.Schertz, U.S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxoaomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Pa yson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

H. O. Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A. J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wieqand
R. Hosmer

LIBRARY

NEW VlM<K

BOTANICAL

UAKUfam

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense.

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. VI OCTOBER, 1920 No. 1

ENTRIES 1-473

AGRONOMY

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

1. Akerman, A. Nagot om resultaten av de senare arens lokala sortforsok. [Concerning
the results of local variety tests in recent years.] Sver. Utsiidesf. Tidskr. 29: 157-162. 1919.

2. Altmannsberger, [— — ]. Qualitativ und quantitativ Steigerung der Ertrage im
Zuckerrubenbau durch Kalidiingung. [Qualitative and quantitative increase in the yield of
sugar beets by applying potash to the soil.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 463. 1919. — A brief, pop-
ular, article recommending potash as a fertilizer for sugar-beets. — John W . Roberts.

3. Anonymous. Protection of potatoes from cold in transit — lining and loading cars.
U. S. Dept, Agric. Farmers' Bull. 1091. 27 p., 22 fig. 1920.

4. Azzi, G. Der agrikultur-meterologiska problemet. [The agricultural-meteorological
problem.] Sver. Utsadesf. Tidskr. 29: 207-220. 1919.— Review of the problems confronting
agricultural meteorology, methods of attack, and the value of meteorology to agriculturists
and plant breeders. — E. G. Anderson.

5. Bolin, Pehr. Pa resultat av lokala faltforsok grundade jamforelser mellan nagra sades-
sorter av storre betydelse. [On the result of local field test comparisons between some of the
more important varieties of grain.] K. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. och Tidskr. 58: 253-281. 1919.
— Compiled results of comparative yield tests of the more prominent varieties of rye, wheat,
oats, and peas. These tests were made under field conditions in various parts of Sweden, a
number of the tests extending over the period of years from 1912 to 1918. Summary tables
only are included. — E. G. Anderson.

6. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. The Chloris grasses. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 309-314. Fig. 1-4. 1920.— Chloris truncata, C. acicularis and C. ven-
tricosa, native species, are described and illustrated. — L. R. Waldron.

7. Briggs, Glen. Guam corn. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 149-157. 1920.— An his-
torical record and a general discussion of corn in the island of Guam. Introduction was made
from Mexico about 250 years ago. — F. M. Schertz.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS. VOL. VI. NO. 1

2 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

8. Carrier, Lyman. The history of the silo. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 175-182.
1920. — -Silos or hermetically sealed grain pits were first used in the dry Mediterranean coun-
tries before the Christian era. Egyptian, Spanish, American Indian, Roman, German, French
and American types of silos are discussed. The silo in America is especially emphasized. —
F. M. Schertz.

9. Chodat, R. Etudes faites au jardin alpin de la "Linnaea." 1. Sur quelques faits de
botanique et de geographie economique a Bourg-Saint-Pierre. [Observations made at the
"Linnaea" alpine garden. 1. Concerning certain things of economic value related to botany and
geography at St. Pierre.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 30-41. 1919. — A general description of
the mountainous country at St. Pierre (France) is accompanied by a list of wild and cultivated
plants that are used for food or medicine. — W. H. Emig.

10. Coombs, G. E. Notes on economic botany during 1918. Agric. Bull. Federated Malay
States 7:86-88. 1919. — Brief notes on rice culture, green manures, rubber, and coconuts. —
E. D. Merrill.

11. Damon, S. C. A five-year rotation of potatoes, rye straw and squashes, onions, oats
and rowen, and hay. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 178. 15 p. 1919. — The results of
the first 24 years are recorded. Every crop in the rotation was grown each year. Stable ma-
nure was used only on the squashes ; fertilizer on the other crops. There is a comparison of the
fertilizer ingredients added, with those removed in the crop; and a discussion of the financial
returns. — B. L. Hartwell.

12. Derlitzki, [ ]. Zur Sorten und Saatgutfrage der Wintergerste. [Concerning

winter-barley varieties and seed.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 312-313. Fig. U5-247. 1919.—
A short, popular discussion of winter-barley varieties from the growers point of view. — John
W. Roberts.

13. Greve, W. Ratschlage zur Bekampfung der Ackerunkrauter. [Advice as to the
control of farm weeds.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 200-202. Fig. 149-161. 1919.— A popular
discussion of the subject. Cultivation, selection of pure seed, drainage, applications of iron
sulphate, kainit, and calcium nitrate are the prinicpal measures advocated for the control
of various weeds. — John W. Roberts.

14. Harris, F. S., and Butt, N. I. The unreliability of short time experiments. Jour.
Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 158-167. 1920. — Data from experiments with potatoes, sugar beets,
alfalfa, corn, oats, and wheat show that short-time experiments are subject to error where
a complete cycle of seasonal fluctuations is not included. Experiments conducted at Logan,
Utah, show that the divergence varies in different years. Manuring experiments have wider
variations from the average than irrigation experiments. Under dry farming conditions vari-
ations are wider than under irrigation conditions and small irrigations vary more than where
the optimum amount of water is supplied. Potatoes varied most in yield and were followed
by sugar beets, alfalfa, corn, oats, and wheat, in order. Experiments requiring personal
judgment vary more than those requiring only mechanical measurements. — F. M. Schertz.

15. Hartwell, Burt L. Thirty-first annual report of the Director of the Rhode Island
Agricultural Experiment Station. Rhode Island State Coll. Bull. 14: 57-65. 1919.— The
report is for 1918 and gives brief statements of the results of the experiments, grouped in part
under the following headings: organic matter for the soil; efficiency of fertilizers and other
manures; specific plant differences and needs; effect of crops on each other; inheritance
studies with poultry and rabbits. — B. L. Hartwell.

16. Hartwell, Burt L., and S. C. Damon. A field comparison of hydrated lime with
limestone of different degrees of fineness. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 180. 18 p.
1919. — During the year of application, 80-mesh limestone had the same effect as an equivalent

No. 1, October, 1920] AGRONOMY 3

amount of hydrated lime; and the percentage of this grade in the 10-mcsh limestone repre-
sented approximately t lie first season's efficiency of the calcium oxi<le equivalent in the lime-
stone as compared with that in hydrated lime. During the 5 years following the single appli-
cation, the average results were slightly in favor of the hydrated lime — Four crops were grown
in each of 5 years on the same plat sections to ascertain their cumulative effect on a single
crop of barley grown ovor the entire area in the field, and on lettuce grown in pots. Arranged
in a decreasing series, the order of the crops was the same in accordance with their need for
lime, and also their cumulative effect in enhancing acid-soil conditions. The order is as
follows: Mangels, carrots, alfalfa, and barley. Where the acidity was reduced by liming,
the four crops affected a succeeding crop about uniformly. — B. L. Hartwell.

17. Hartwell, Burt L., and S. C. Damon. The value of sodium when potassium is
insufficient. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 177. 29 p. 1919. — Field results are reported
for 1905 to 1918, of an experiment which was begun in 1S94 to ascertain the value of sodium
as a partial substitute for potassium. Both elements have been applied in carbonates and
in chlorids in connection with two different rates of liming. Nitrogen and phosphorus were
added liberally and alike to all plats. Sodium was generally useful where there was an
insufficiency of potassium. — Some of the benefits arising from the use of sodium in the field
are attributable to indirect action; but solution culture indicates that direct beneficial effects
were probably obtained also in the field. — B. L. Hartwell.

18. Hartwell, Burt L. , F. R. Pember, and G. E. Merkle. The influence of crop plants
on those which follow. II. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 176. 47 p. 1919.— Five
different crop plants were grown for two or three successive years in pots containing the same
soil and then followed by a single crop plant. In case of each crop, uniform fertilizer series
were maintained with super-optimum nutrients, with optimum nutrients, and with the latter
from which potassium, nitrogen and phosphorus were individually omitted. — When onions
constituted the single crop, the yields of onions increased after the crops in about the follow-
ing order: Buckwheat, mangels, rye, onions, and redtop. Subsequently, when buckwheat
was the single crop, its yield increased after the crops arranged about as follows: Redtop,
buckwheat, mangels, rye, and onions. The relative effect of the different crops varied some-
what, depending upon the fertilizer treatment, but not as much as would be expected gener-
ally.— The divergent effect of crops on those which follow seems not to be attributable, at least
principally, to differences in the amount of nutrients removed by the crops grown previously;
that is, the smallest yield may not occur after the crop which removes the largest amount
of even the most-needed nutrients. — The change which a given application of a nutrient causes
in its percentage in the crop depends not only upon its own effect on the rate of growth, but
also upon the abundance of the other nutrients in relation to the needs of the crop. — So-called
soil acidity was affected differently by the several crops, and their influence on succeeding
crops was much less pronounced after thorough liming.— B. L. Hartwell.

19. Hibbard, R. P. Seed potato preparation. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Quart. Bull. 2:
176-178. Fig. 5. 1920.— Reports a small experiment on sprouting of seed pieces of various
sizes and effect in yield of size of seed pieces. Pieces with but one eye gave 61 per cent
sprouting, with 2 or more eyes 100 per cent sprouting. Whole tubers averaging 4.6 ounces
gave a yield of 9 per cent more than the yield from seed pieces averaging 1.4 ounces. — E. A.
Bessey.

20. Hodson, Edgar A. Correlations of certain characters in cotton. Arkansas Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 169. 16 p. June, 1920.— Correlation coefficients have been worked out for a
large number of physical characters of cotton and are reported in this publication. The co-
efficients do not indicate as high a correlation in many cases as has popularly been supposed
to exist. There is, however, a very consistent negative correlation between per cent of lint
and length of lint, a high positive correlation between weight of seed and size of boll, etc. —
Edgar A. Hodson.

4 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

21. Jenkins, E. H., andG. P. Clinton. Fertilizer experiments with potatoes. Connecti-
cut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214: 421-422. 1917 and 1918.— This is a series of ob-
servations on the yields of potatoes as affected by different fertilizers, especially potash. A
4-8-4 and a 2-9-4 each on duplicate plots gave rather uniform yields in 1917. The addition of
1000 pounds wood ashes to the Essex 4-10-0 fertilizer increased the yield somewhat in one
case, but was without effect in another. The addition of 2000 pounds wood ashes to the
same fertilizer increased the yield somewhat in the first case and in a more pronounced degree
in the second. The ashes induced scab. The 4-10-0 fertilizer in 1917 gave as good yields as
4-8-4 when each was applied at the rate of 1000 pounds per acre. In 1918 on other land a
3-8-3 formula in comparison with a 4-10-0 formula each applied at the rate of 1800 pounds —
800 pounds before the first harrowing, 400 pounds in the planter and 600 pounds at the second
cultivation — gave 50 bushels the greater yield for the potash. — Henry Dorsey.

22. Juhlin-Dannfelt, H. Oversikt av ograslagstiftningen i utlandet. [Review of weed
legislation in foreign countries.] K. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. och Tidskr. 58: 166-174. 1919. —
Summary of laws affecting weeds and weed control in European countries, United States,
Canada, and Australia. — E. G. Anderson.

23. Kiessling, L. Die Leistungen der Wintergerste und deren Zuchterische Beeinflussung.
[The yields of winter barley and their significance in breeding experiments.] Illustr. Landw.
Zeitg. 39 : 310-311 . 1919. — A popular discussion, the importance of the subject being empha-
sized. The writer's own experiments, carried on since 1911, gave no positive results. — John
W. Roberts.

24. Kleberger, [ ]. Die wissenschaftliche und praktische Bedeutung der Priifung

des Anbauwertes unserer Oelpfianzen. [The scientific and practical significance of the testing
of the agricultural value of our oil-producing plants.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 249-250. 1919.
— The writer discusses chiefly the possible financial returns which may be obtained from the
culture of oil-producing plants. — John W. Roberts.

25. Kling, M. Die Diingung des Tabaks. [The fertilization of tobacco.] Illustr. Landw.
Zeitg. 39: 473-474. 1919. — The tobacco plant needs a rather large amount of potash, but
should receive as little chlorine as possible. It is well, therefore, to grow tobacco after
beets. Crude potash salts should not be used. Stable manure comes first as a fertilizer for
tobacco and should be used at the rate of 600 Dz. per hectare. Usually it should be applied
in the autumn, but on light soils half should be applied in the spring and half in the autumn.
Potassium sulphate at the rate of 4 Dz. per hectare should be applied in the spring. Usually
70 kgm. of ammonium sulphate or better, 35-10 kgm. of urea per hectare are needed. When
stable manure is used, phosphoric acid is not necessary. Too much phosphoric acid causes
early maturity and poor quality. Calcium should be applied to soils in which it is lacking. —
John W. Roberts.

26. Lenart, G. H. Neue Verarbeitungsweise der Zichorie. [New manufactured prod-
ucts from chicory.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 479-480. 1919. — The new products are: (1)
inulin, from which levulose and a liquid sugar-dye are obtained; (2) chicory sirup, from which
may be obtained a coffee substitute, a sugar-dye in dry form, and alcohol; (3) dry shreds,
which may be used as feed for animals. — John W. Roberts.

27. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 325-
332. 4 fig- 1920. Discusses the use of Opuntia spp. as a feed for stock. — L. R. Waldron,

28. Mundy, H. G. Improvement of Rhodesian pastures. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17: 113-
117. 4 pl- 1920.— Encouraging results have been obtained with grasses indigenous to Africa,
which have in general proved more successful than exotic species. — E. M. Doidge.

No. 1, October, 1920) AGRONOMY 5

29. Neumeister, [ J. Die Verwendung des Ammoniak - Superphosphats als Kopf-

diinger zu Winterroggen. [The use of ammonium superphosphate as the chief fertilizer for
winter rye.] Illustr. Landw. Zeilg. 39: 145-146. 1919. — As t lie result of three experiments in
the use of fertilizers for winter rye, the author considers ammonium superphosphate to be
promising as chief fertilizer. Additional experiments are being carried on. — John W. Roberts.

30. Pantanelli, E. Utilizzazione della cannarecchia o sorgagna. [Utilization of Johnson
grass.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 105-415. PI. IX. 1919.— A short note designed to draw-
attention to the possibility of utilizing Sorghum halepenee (L.) Pers. in the agricultural
explorations of dry countries. The plant is stated to be indigenous in Italy, but it has not been
considered as an agricultural crop up to the present time. Its utilization in America, how-
ever, shows its great possibilities for this purpose. — A. Bonazzi.

31. Piper, C. V., and Lyman Carrier. Carpet grass. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers Bull.
1130. 12 p. 5 fig. 1920. — Carpet grass (Axonopus compressus (Swartz) Schlecht.) the most
important grass for permanent pasture in the Coastal Plain area of the South. Is not a native,
but was accidentally introduced from tropical America before 1830 and has spread gener-
ally over the Southern States. The plant requires a moist or at least not droughty soil and
succeeds better in such soils if sandy than any other pasture grass. The minimum tempera-
ture it will survive is about 10°F. Carpet-grass pastures are readily established in tilled
land by seeding at any time from early spring to late summer on a well-firmed seed bed, when
moisture conditions are favorable. On unbroken or stump land good results can be secured
by burning or mowing the tall native grasses, seeding at a favorable time, and then pasturing
to keep the native bunch grasses constantly short. Under this treatment the native grasses
are eradicated in one or two years and replaced by a pure stand of carpet grass. The carrying
capacity of good carpet-grass pasture is one cow to the acre for the five best months and one
cow to 2 acres for 3 to 5 months longer. Dallis grass, lespedeza, white clover, bur clover,
black medic, and Augusta vetch are desirable in mixture with carpet grass. Italian rye may
be used as a winter mixture, but needs to be sown each fall. Under some conditions redtop
should be used to precede carpet grass. Carpet-grass pastures should be grazed to their capac-
ity, as under heavy grazing the best condition is maintained. Bitterweed and dog fennel
are the only two wreeds that seriously invade carpet-grass pastures. During the first two sea-
sons these weeds should be mowed before they ripen seeds. Thereafter they will cause but
little trouble, but mowing should be resorted to when necessary. Seed of carpet grass is
easily harvested by mowing and thrashing. Large areas of pure or nearly pure carpet grass
occur in several regions in the South. Up to the present the quantity of seed produced has
been only a fraction of that required. A comprehensive plan has been devised to increase
greatly the harvesting of seed, as the outstanding need to stimulate a much greater use of car-
pet grass for pasture is an ample seed supply. — Authors' summary.

32. Roberts, Herbert F. Yellow-berry in hard winter wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18:
155-169. 1919. — Opaque, starchy spots in wheat kernels, which give rise to the name "yellow-
berry," almost invariably appear near the embryo, the proximal end of the kernel, and spread
from there upward. Seventy-seven pure lines of wheat were grown in comparison with 87
lots of a standard variety, Kharkov, to determine the relation of yellow-berry to field condi-
tions, especially with reference to the period between first heading and ripening. — The opera-
tion of common causes for the production of yellow-berry overshadows any differences that
may be due to hereditary tendencies and preclude a definite statement regarding the relation
of hereditary tendencies in hard winter wheat towrard the production of yellow-berry. "That
some isolated pure strains of wheat are freer from yellow-berry than others growing in the
same field and apparently under identical conditions of soil and climate is, however, possible."
The percentage of yellow-berry is higher with the later dates of ripening. Starch grains in
the yellow-berry portion of a kernel are smaller than those in the flinty part. Yellow-berry
kernels average 0.4 mgm. heavier than flinty kernels; their specific gravity is 0.023 greater;
they contain a greater percentage of moisture and of starch, and a lesser percentage of protein
and ash than flinty kernels. — D. Reddick.

6 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

33. Schleh, [ ]. Einfluss der Aufbewahrung der Kartoffeln auf den Ertrag. [Influ-
ence of the storage of potatoes upon the yield.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 429-430. 1919. — A
popular discussion of the proper storage of potatoes in relation to their use as seed. Accord-
ing to the writer, too high temperatures during storage are the chief causes of seed degenera-
tion.— John W. Roberts.

34. Simpson, S. Annual Report of the Department of Agriculture, Uganda Protectorate,
for the year ending 31st March, 1918. 69 p. Uganda Protectorate Dept. Agric. 1918.

35. Spkagg, Frank A. The coefficient of yield. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 168-174.
1920. — The coefficient of yield is the quotient obtained by dividing the yield of a variety by
the calculated yield of the standard or check variety, growing on the same plot the same
year. The coefficient of yield method of interpreting results have been used for 6 years and
has proven superior to any of the old methods. A compound coefficient of various factors
affecting yield, is illustrated showing how it is possible to find superior varieties of field crops.
— F. M. Schertz.

36. Spring, F. G., and J. N. Milstjm. Notes on the cultivation of ragi (Eleusine cora-
cans). Bull. Dept. Agric. Federated Malay States 7: 154-161. 1919. — Results are given of
the introductory tests of this grain into Malaya, also a consideration of it as a commercial
crop. — T. F. Chipp.

37. Sylven, Nils. Ar det mojligt att inom landet aterupptaga en mera omfattande odling
av oljevaxter for industriens behov av feta oljor? [Is it possible to again take up a more com-
prehensive domestic production of oil plants to supply the demands of industry for fatty oils?]
Sver. Utsadesf. Tidskr. 29: 173-205. 1919. — Summary of oil production in Sweden in previous
years; effect of the war; factors affecting present demands for oils and present production;
market conditions and future prospects. — E. G. Anderson.

38. Tedin, Hans. Tre ars forsok med olika havresorter vid Hallands Frokontor i Getinge.
[Three years tests of different varieties of oats at the Halland seed office at Getinge.] Sver. Ut-
sadesf. Tidskr. 29: 224-230. 1919.

39. Voss, C. Zur Bekampfung von Ackersenf und Hederich. [On the control of field-mus-
tard (Sinapis arvensis L.) and hedge-mustard (Raphanus raphanistrum L.).] Illustr. Landw.
Zeitg. 39: 324-325. 1919. — Excellent results were obtained by dusting the weeds with a finely
ground mixture of kainit (2.5 Ztr.) and calcium nitrate (17.5 kgm.), especially when applied
while the weeds were covered with dew. A solution of ammonium sulphate, applied as a
spray, proved superior to a solution of iron sulphate similarly applied. The former proved
to be the better weed-killer and was less injurious to cultivated plants. — John W. Roberts.

40. Wadsack, A. Anbau der wichtigsten Oelfruchte. [The culture of the more important
oil-producing plants.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 39: 275-280. 1919. — A short, popular, discussion
advocating greater production of oil-producing plants to meet the shortage of animal fats. —
John W. Roberts.

41. Weibull, M. Om fetthalten i skanska rapsfron ar 1918. [On the oil-content of Skane
rape-seed in 1918.] K. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. och Tidskr. 58: 236-240. 1919.— Results of
determinations of oil content of rape seed grown in 1918 in different parts of Sk&ne and under
varying conditions. — E. G. Anderson.

42. Witte, Hernfrid. Omfattning of Danmarks nuvarande frb'odling. [Summary of
present seed production in Denmark.] Sven. Utsadesf. Tidskr. 29: 163-164. 1919.

No. 1, October, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 7

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Lincoln- \V. Riddle, Editor

43. Anonymous. Early collections in the garden herbarium. Missouri Bot. Gard. Bull.
7: 29-35. PI. 8-11. 1919.— A discussion of the Bernhardi, Hae.vke, Rottler, and other
important collections. — 0. T. Wilson.

44. Anonymous. Claude Keith Bancroft. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 86. 1919.
— C. K. Bancroft, who died in 1919, began his botanical career as a research student in
mycology and plant pathology at the Jodrell Laboratory, Kew, England. Later he was Assist-
ant Mycologist in the Malay States. At the time of his death he was Government Botanist
of British Guiana. — L. W. Riddle.

45. Anonymous. Sir Edward Fry. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 84-85. 1919 —
The subject of this notice died October 18, 1918. He was a lawyer by profession; but was a
lifelong amateur student of the British flora, cryptogamic as well as phanerogamic. — L. W.
Riddle.

46. Anonymous. Hector Leveille. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 85. 1919 —
Leveille (1863-191S) was the founder of the Academie Internationale de Geographie Botan-
ique; editor of the Bulletin de Geographie Botanique; author of monographic studies of the
Onagraceae; and of papers on the flora of China. — L. W. Riddle.

47. Barker, B. T. P., and G. Neville. Arthur Eckley Lechmere. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 164-168. 1919. — This is an account of a promising young English mycologist
who died in 1919 at the age of thirty-four. After studying mycology and plant pathology in
England, he became a research student, first in the laboratory of Prof. L. Mangin, in Paris,
and then in that of Prof. Tubeuf, in Munich. There he was working at the time of the
outbreak of the war. He failed to leave Germany in time, and was interned for four years.
During this period he taught in the prison camps whenever possible, but the hardships which
he suffered led to his death within a year of his return to England. — L. W. Riddle.

48. Burnham, Stewart H. Charles Horton Peck. Mycologia 11: 33-39. Portrait.
1919. — Peck was born March 30, 1833, in Sand Lake, Rensselaer County, New York. After
passing through the State Normal School, he spent four years at Union College, graduating
with honors in 1859. ' While at Union, he received his botanical instruction from Prof.
Jonathan Pearson; and in place of athletics, he made botanical excursions." "While teach-
ing at Albany, he presented to the State a collection of mosses, which was seen by Judge G.
W. Clinton; and it was through Clinton that he was appointed to the State Cabinet of Nat-
ural History in 1867. At that time there were about 1S00 specimens in the herbarium. "The
Rev. Moses A. Curtis, of North Carolina, first gave Peck a start in the study of fungi
. . . ." In 1883 he was appointed to the newly-created office of State Botanist, which he
held up to 1915. In 1908 Union College conferred upon him the degree of Doctor of Science.
— "Dr. Peck was the author of many botanical articles and reports, pre-eminent among which
is the long series of annual reports of the State Botanist from 1867 to 1912." He died at Men-
ards, July 11, 1917.— H. R. Rosen.

49. [Dodge, B. 0.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 11: 47-50.
1919. — A list, covering portions of the years 1917 and 1918, of mycological and pathological
articles appearing in American publications, is presented. — H. R. Rosen.

50. [Dodge, B. O.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 11: 227-230.
1919. — Fifty-four articles are listed, some of which appeared in 1918 and others in 1919. —
H. R. Rosen.

8 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

51. [Dodge, B. O.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 11: 284r-287.
1919.

52. [Dodge, B. O.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 11: 323-326.
1919.

53. [Dodge, B. O.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12: 55-58.
1920.

54. Gertz, Otto. Caroli Linnaei Flora Kofsoensis 1731. [Swedish.] Bot. Notiser 1919:
85-93. 1919. — The author publishes and discusses a manuscript of Linnaeus, the original
of which is found in the library of the Linnean Society in London, and a somewhat varying
copy in the University Library at Upsala. On a journey, Linnaeus stopped for half an hour
on a little island (180 steps in circumference), in Lake Malar, Sweden, and made there a
record of 81 phanerogams. The names used in this list were mostly those used by Caspar
Bauhin and Tournefort. In footnotes are given the names used by Linnaeus for the same
plants in the second edition of his Flora Suecica, 1755. — P. A. Rydberg.

55. Goff, E. S. A sketch of the history of horticulture. (Lecture notes prepared in 1889.)
Wisconsin Hortic. 9: 50-51. 1919. — The origin of the art of horticulture among the peoples
of the Orient, the Greeks and the Romans is briefly outlined. — G. F. Potter.

56. [Grove, W. B.] George Stephen West, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S. (1876-1919). Jour. Bot-
any 57: 283-284. 1919. — West was born at Bradford, April 20, 1876. His father was inter-
ested in plants. The son began early to specialize in algae, especially in desmids. He passed
through Bradford Technical College, the Royal College of Science, London, and St. John's
College, Cambridge. There he was Hutchinson Research student, and demonstrator in biol-
ogy to the University. Later he was lecturer in natural history at the Royal Agricultural
College, Cirencester, and lecturer in botany at the University of Birmingham. At the retire-
ment there of Hillhouse in 1909 he succeeded to his chair, and in 1916 became Mason Professor.
He was an excellent teacher and lecturer, greatly enlarged and improved his department,
and created a large herbarium. West was the leading British expert on Freshwater Algae,
and on the desmids in particular. His principal works are listed, and comment is made on
two projected works, one on British Freshwater Algae and the other on the algal flora of the
Midlands. His drawings of algae were all bequeathed to the British Museum, but his algo-
logical library and specimens went to the University of Birmingham. — K. M. Wiegand.

57. Longo, B. La "Viola di S. Fina" di S. Gimignano. ["St. Fina violet."] Ann. Botan-
ica [Roma] 14: 179-180. 1917. — Historical discussion of the plant referred to by the above
mentioned common name. The author identifies it as Cheiranthus Cheiri Linn. A record is
also made of the natural growing together by spontaneous grafting of two oaks of different
species. — J. A. Nieuwland.

58. Naumann, Einar. Vegetations fargningar i aldre tider. Biologiskt-Historiska Not-
iser III. En Plane tonfargning i sjon Barken, Dalarne, ar 1697. [Vegetable colorations in olden
times. Biologic historical notices, III. A Plankton-coloration in Lake Barken, Dalecarlia
(Sweden), in 1697.] (Swedish, with German resume.) Bot. Notiser 1919: 65-82. 1919. —
The author gives the history of the phenomenon as recorded by Urban Hjarne, Jesper Sved-
berg, and Johan Groot, in 1702-1710. He arrives at the conclusion that it was due to plank-
ton coloration, and suggests as the cause an unusually abundant development of Botryococcus
Braunii, Oscillatoria Agardhii or species of Glenodinium, most likely the last-mentioned. —
P. A. Rydberg.

59. Nordstedt, C. T. O. [Swedish rev. of: Brtk, F. Linne's Minnesbok (a facsimile
reprintof the diary of Linnaeus, 1734-1737). Stockholm, 1919.] Bot. Notiser 1919: 136. 1919.

No. 1, October, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 9

60. Reed, Howard S. Volney Morgan Spalding. Plant World 22: 14 -IS. Portrait.
1919. — This is a sympathetic appreciation of the life and work of Yoi.m.v M. Spalding,
from 1876 to 190-4 connected with the botanical department of the University of Michigan. In
the latter year, he resigned because of ill-health. After a year spent in California, he took
up his residence at (lie Desert Laboratory at Tucson, Arizona, where he carried on investiga-
tions for the next four years. Alter 1909, lie was obliged to give up active work, on account
of declining health, which finally resulted in his death on November 12, 1918. — L. W. Riddle.

61. Sciiw ii\i i i; in, ( ;. Pflanzenbilder im Tempel von Karnak (Theben). [Plant pictures
in the Karnak temple (Thebes).] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 464-480. 1919. — This is an attempt to iden-
tify the 275 representations of plants in the 27 photographs taken by II. S chafer in the "botan-
ical room" of the Ammon Temple, Karnak. Most of these are small figures interspersed
in vacant places among branches and large plants. Only six or seven plants could be identi-
fied with reasonable surety as follows: Nymphaea coerulea, Punica granatum, Arum italicum,
Dracunculis vulgaris, Calenchoe deficiens (?), Iris sp. and Vitis vinifera. The artist seems to
have delineated many species not native of Egypt, sometimes from memory. The sparing
use of trees is astonishing as they were much used by Egyptians in decorative work. They
are here mostly in winter condition, and represent such genera as Morus, Pyrus, Prunus, and
some other genera found in Egypt. Many pictures combine different plants as the centaurs
did different animals. Some are diagrammatic and represent no particular plant. Nymphaea
occurs at least 45 times, and Punica 20 times. This is the earliest illustration of Punica
granatum in Egypt, where it was probably introduced about 1475 B. C. The form illustrated
was fastigiate, and is now rare in those countries. Allium is represented by a leaf and several
fruits in a row. It is probably A. italicum. Dracunculus is represented seven times. The
Calenchoe is most closely related to a species of Abyssinia. The three Iris flowers in the room
may represent three different species as they are all different. In most Egyptian bas-reliefs
only /. pallida was represented, a plant not now found in Egypt. The figure may possibly
have been made from Iris germanica, the "orris root" which was an old Egyptian plant later
introduced into other countries because of its fragrant root-stock. — K. M. Wiegand.

62. Smith, Annie Lorrain. Worthington G. Smith as mycologist. Trans. British Mycol.
Soc. 6: 65-67. 1918. — A short appreciation including mention of his more important myco-
logical papers. His ability as a botanical artist is emphasized and some of his better known
sets of illustrations are cited. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

63. Spoehr, H. A. The development of conceptions of photosynthesis since Ingen-Houss.
Sci. Monthly 9: 32-46. 1919.

64. Viardin, L. L 'organisation forestiere, avant 1789, dans la Lorraine reconquise.
[Forest organization in reconquered Lorraine prior to 1789.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 57: 80-85.
1919.

65. Wakefield, E. M. Charles Ogilvie Farquarson. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6:
236-237. 1919.— An obituary notice and expression of appreciation of this British mycologist
who was lost at sea in October, 1918. For six years preceding his death, he was Mycologist
in South Nigeria, West Africa. He published in conjunction with Miss Lister an account
of the South Nigerian Mycetozoa, and collected a number of interesting fungi which were
later listed in Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

66. Woodruff, L. L. Hooke's Micrographia. Amer. Nat. 53: 247-264. 1919. — Quota-
tions from Waller's biography of Robert Hooke; summary of objects microscopically sur-
veyed in Micrographia; facsimile reproduction of portions of text referring to "little boxes
or cells" in cork. — J. P. Kelly.

10 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gager, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

67. Berget, D. H. The teaching of elementary systematic bacteriology. [Author's
abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] Absts. Bact. 4: L 1920. — The student is given
a list of simple and expressive terms to be used in the description of cultures. All the observa-
tions and descriptions of cultures are entered in unruled note books about 8 by 10 inches.
Simple methods of staining are practiced on different morphologic types of non-pathogenic
bacteria. Drawings are made of each organism studied. The student is taught how to trans-
plant cultures from one medium to another and to isolate bacteria in pure culture from mixed
cultures by the plate method. The pure cultures are planted on all the usual laboratory media
for a systematic study. The observations and descriptions in the systematic study are
entered in the student's note book in a definite order. The descriptions are made according
to the terminology given. The character and the progressive development in the cultures
are illustrated by drawings.

68. Campbell, Douglas Houghton. The springtime garden in California. Nat. Study
Rev. 16: 1S1-18S. 1920. — Describes California garden conditions, with mention of man-
zanita, almond, toyon, eucalyptus, daphne, narcissus, iris and other plants. — A. Gundersen.

69. Kirkhuff, Pauline. The flower land— California. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 228-230.
1920.

70. Palmer, Clayton F. Agriculture in the elementary schools of Los Angeles City.
Nat. Study Rev. 16: 217-220. 1920.

71. Riley, Dolores. California's tree islands. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 223-224. 1920.—
Monterey pine, Monterey cypress, Torrey pine.

72. Rogers, Julia Ellen. At Palm Springs with the Sierra Club. Nat. Study Rev. 16:
195-197. 1920.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor

73. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 122: 301. 1920.

74. Afzal, Muhammed, and others. Progress report of forest administration in Baluchi-
stan for 1918-19. 24 p. Calcutta, 1920. — An area of 313 square miles of reserved forests is
reported and 472 square miles of unclassed forests with no changes in the last 5 years. The
chief object of forest policy aimed at in this Province is to preserve the few existing forests
and thereby prevent denudation. The forests are administered for the public benefit. The
reservation of the forests does not aim at any profit to the Government but at checking de-
struction by regulating the rights and restricting the privileges of users. The financial state-
ment shows these averages, for the last 5 years: Revenue, 20,539 Rs, Expenditure 28,130 Rs,
giving a deficit of 7591 Rs. During the past year the deficit sank to 2403 Rs against a 13,607
Rs deficit the previous year. The area open to grazing was 45.3 per cent of the total area of
the State forests. In experimental planting deodar and blue pine failed to germinate but
chil was satisfactory. There was heavy winter loss of chil seedlings but those surviving give
good promise. Natural reproduction of the hill species is scarce in all forests as there was a
bad seed year. Babool and Jhand seedlings started in the Sibi forests but were killed by fail-
ure of the summer monsoon. Coppice reproduction of tamarisk and willow has, as usual,

No. 1, October, 1920] FORESTRY 1 1

been successful in all localities. Out of a number of exotics, Turkey oak, American maple
and alder are growing well, catalpa and osier have given the best results and can safely be
regarded as successful, saffron plants have completely disappeared and Eucalyptus rudis
has not proven a success. European olive plants and cuttings have given fair success. The
usual formal tabulated statements are appended. — E. R. Hodson.

75. Anonymous. Future organization of the forest department of India. Indian Forester
45: 234-239. 1919.

76. Anonymous. List of seeds of hardy herbaceous plants and of trees and shrubs. Kew
Bull. .Misc. Inf. [London! 1919: Appendix 1-23. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 844.

77. Anonymous. Nogel Undersp'gelser og Fors0g Med Musegift. [Some investigations
on poison for mice.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 4: 396-401. 1919.

78. Anonymous. Sugar and alcohol from the nipa palm. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 310.
1920. — Extract of an article in Bull. Manila Bur. Sci.

79. Bailey, I. \V. Depressed segments of oak stems. Bot. Gaz. 67: 438-441. 4 fig.
1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 994.

80. Bardie, A. Excursion mycologique de la Societe Linneenne a Leognan le 12 Novembre,
1916, nos bieilles forets; necessite de leur conservation. [Mycological excursion of the Linnean
Society to Leognan, Nov. 12, 1916.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux) 69: 105-113.
1915-16. — The author emphasizes the value of the forests as a national asset. A list of the
fungi collected is included. — W. H. Emig.

81. Baxter, Samuel Newman. How nurserymen may best compete for the Christmas
tree market. Florists' Exchange 49: 133. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 518.

82. Beck v. Mannagetta, and G. Lerchenau. Wacholderbeeren mit entbloszten
Samen. [Juniper berries with exposed seeds.] Sitsungsber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien (Matht.
Nat. Kl.) 126: 403-419. Fig. 1-31. 1917— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 983.

S3. Beekman, H. 78 Preanger-houtsoorten, beschrijving, afbeelding en determinatie-
tabel. [78 Preanger timber species described, illustrated, and determination table.] Mede-
deel. Boschproefsta. Dept. Landb., Nijverheid en Handel Nederlandsch-Indie 5: 1-1S6.
60 pi. (photomicrographs). 1920. — In the lumber market of western Java, especially the Pre-
anger residencies, teak is scarce and does not occupy a predominant place. On this account
maDy other kinds of woods which occur in the mountain forests are used. The market dis-
tinguishes only three quality classes. Owing to the lack of knowledge concerning the char-
acteristics of these woods this practical guide for their determination is published. Following
a popular description of the elements of wood structure, each of the 78 kinds is described
under the headings, general impression, appearance, detailed characteristics by use of hand
lens, nature of extract, and burning. Of the 28 families represented the following contain the
most important species: Dipterocarpaceae, Fagaceae, Hamamelidaceae, Lauraceae, Legumi-
nosae, Magnoliaceae, Malvaceae, Meliaceae, Myrtaceae, Rubiaceae, Taxaceae, Theaceae,
Verbenaceae. — F. Kramer.

84. Beeson, C. F. C. Food plants of Indian forest insects. Indian Forester 45: 312-323.
1919. — Continuing work previously noted, S3 species belonging to three families are listed
with the plants upon wdiich they feed. — E. N. Munns.

85. Berry, E. W. The history of the linden and ash. Plant World 21: 163-175. S fig.
July, 1918. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1202.

12 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

86. Beumee, J. G. B. Over Bastverwondingen aan den djati. [Bark wounds of teak.]
Mededeel. Proefsta. Boschw. Dept. Landb. Nijverheid en Handel Nederlandsch-Indie 4:
31-54. PI. 12-17. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 218.

87. Bixby, W. G. The butternut and the Japan walnut. Amer. Nut Jour. 10: 76-79,
82, S3, 11 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 329.

88. Cooper, G. M. Growth of sal from broadcast sowings. Indian Forester 45: 310-312.
1919. — An average girth of 5.17 inches and an average height of 12 feet 2 inches was made
by a sal plantation from broadcast seed in 5 years from sowing. — E. N. Munns.

89. Dixon*, H. H., and W. R. G. Atkixs. Osmotic pressures in plants. VI. On the
composition of the sap in the conducting tracts of trees at different levels and at different seasons
of the year. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 51-62. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 848.

90. Eaton, B. J. Commercial possibilities of Para rubber seed oil. Agric. Bull. Feder-
ated Malay States 7: 73-78. 1919.— Gives the results, yield, and sale price, of an experimental
shipment of 25 f tons of seeds to England. — E. D. Merrill.

91. Ferreri, E. Dati dendrometrici sul faggio della foresta inalienabile di Camaldoli.
[Dendrometric data on Fagus in the inalienable forest of Camaldoli.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital.
52:542-543. 1919.— A. Bonazzi.

92. Ferreri, E. Applicazione di dieci metodi di cubatura per la determinazione della massa
legnosa di 42 piante di abete bianco in piedi della foresta inalienabile di Camaldoli. [The appli-
cability of ten methods for determining the total quantity of lumber in 42 standing plants of
white pine in the forest of Camaldoli.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 587-598. 1919. — A compara-
tive study of the different methods. — A. Bonazzi.

93. Glover, H. M. Spruce red wood. Indian Forester 45 : 243-245. 1919.— A red "heart-
wood" is often formed in the Himalayan spruce, which is moister than sapwood and cannot
be floated. This dries out readily but after being placed in water regains its original specific
gravity. — E. N. Munns.

94. Harper, Roland M. The supposed southern limit of the eastern hemlock. Torreya
19: 19S-199. Oct., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 337.

95. Hartley, Carl, T. C. Merrill, and Arthur S. Rhodes. Seedling diseases of
conifers. Jour. Agric. Res. 15: 521-558. PL B. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1296.

96. Hawes, A. F. Cooperative marketing of woodland products. U. S. Dept. Agric.
Farmers' Bull. 1100. 15 p., 6 fig. 1920.

97. Heimlich, Louis F. The trees of White County, Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci.
1917: 387-471. 34 pi. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 338.

98. Henkel, J. S. Why grow trees? Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17: 137-141. 1920.

99. Hollick, A. The story of the Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 121 : 422, 429-430, 432. 6 fig.
1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 615.

100. Kotze, J. J., and E. P. Phillips. A note on the genus Faurea Harv. South African
Jour. Sci. 16: 232-238. PI. 13-18, 2 fig. 1919. — Faurea nalalensis is evidently confined to the
eastern coastal forest belts. Faurea Mcnaughtonii is only known from Knysna, where it is
confined to the Lily Vlei Forest. Faurea saligna is used for fence posts, as a wagon wood and
for furniture, etc. It is said to be fairly ant resistant. Faurea Mcnaughtonii is remarkable
for the durability of its timber, which compares favorably with that of the sneezewood. —
E. P. Phillips.

No. 1, October, 1 920 1 FORESTRY L3

101. Marshall, Roy E., and F. D. Fromme. Red cedar trees and cedar rust: a report
of a cedar rust survey of Augusta county, Virginia. Virginia Polytechnic Inst. Ext. Bull. 39.
8 p. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1317.

102. Mork-IIaxskn, K. C. H. Schroders udhugning i bog. [C. H. Schroder's thinning
system in beech forest.] Forst. Forsogsvasen Danmark 5: 150-178. PI. 1-2. 1920. — The
tables and discussion cover growth and recovery in three-storied beech forest in Denmark
after the Schroder method of thinning, which aims at producing straight, clear-holes trunks
from previously suppressed trees. The principle guiding the cutting may be summed up in
saying "Cut what is harmful and useless." The forester must know, however, how the trees
are going to respond, what space they need for best development, etc. After thinning, the
trees in the second story will help prune the upper, and those in the third story will help prune
those in the second story. — J. A. Larsen.

103. Opperman, A. Sommerfalding i Bogeskov. [Summer-cutting in beech forest.]
Forst. Forsogsvasen Danmark 5: 180-192. 1920. — Beech cut in summer to be used for fuel
during the following winter showed insufficient drying. — J. A. Larsen.

104. Robson, W. Bay trees (Pimenta acris). Rep. Agric. Dept. Montserrat 1917-18:
17. Imp. Dept. Agric. Barbados, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 820.

105. Rose, R. C. After-ripening and germination of seeds of Tilia, Sambucus and Rubus.
Bot. Gaz. 67: 281-309. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1574.

100. Rumbold, Caroline. The injection of chemicals into chestnut trees. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7: 1-20. 7 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 964.

107. Sabroe, Axel S. Skovtraer i det nordlige Japan. [Forest trees of northern Japan.]
Forst. Forsogsvasen Danmark 5: 105-155. PI. 2-28, 1 fig. 1920. — A report setting forth what
Japanese forest trees may be suitable for culture in Denmark. The forests of Japan have
been classified altitudinally into four zones: torrid, sub-tropical, temperate and frigid. Since
the climate in the temperate zone is more nearly like that of Denmark, only the trees in this
zone are considered. Much space is given to comparative data on temperature and precipi-
tation for different stations, and there are many excellent views and valuable information
concerning the trees; however, since the climate of Denmark is essentially continental and
that of Japan insular, little hope is expressed for the success of experimental introduction.
Cryptomeria japonica appears only where there is protection to the roots by deep snow; Pinus
thunbergii, which grows along the coast, may prove a better species in Denmark than Pinus
montana; Abies sachaliensis , Quercus dentata and Larix kurilensis should be tried on the Dan-
ish downs. Larix leptolepis is more immune from Sasyscypha willkommii than L. europaea.
The Japanese beech is not more promising than the European. Several smaller broadleaves,
among which are Acanthopanax ricinifolius , Cercidiphyllum japonicum, Quercus grosserata,
Fraxinus manshurica and Betula maximowiczii , are recommended for trial. — J. A. Larsen.

108. Sargent, C. S. Notes on North American trees. V. Jour. Arnold Arboretum. 1:
61-65. July, 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1766.

109. Sim, T. R. Soil erosion and conservation. South African Jour. Indust. 2: 1034-
1042. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1635.

110. Smythies, E. A. Geology and forest distribution. Indian Forester 45: 239-243.
1919. — There is a relation between geology and forest types which apparently so far has been
neglected in type studies. A plea is made for a closer study of geological formations in
connection with such work. — E. N. Munns.

111. Troup, R. S. Experiments in the pollarding of Butea frondosa for lac cultivation.
Indian Forester 45: 223-233. PI. 14, 15. 1919. — Pollarding of Butea frondosa is possible
without seriously affecting the vitality of the trees, and the best results are obtained by pol-

14 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

larding on an annual rotation, half being cut for the summer crop, and half for winter. Iso-
lated trees produce more lac than those in dense stands, and thinning is necessary in con-
gested stands. Predacious insects should be killed by prompt treatment after harvest by
burning litter and by fumigation. — E. N. Munns.

112. Weir, James R., and Ernest' E. Hubert. A study of the rots of western white
pine. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 799. ftf p. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1379.

HORTICULTURE

J. H. Gourley, Editor
FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

113. Anonymous. The dwarf cocoanut in Malaya. Tropical Life 16: 54-55. 1920. —
Review of an article by W. P. Handover in a recent issue of Agric. Bull. Federated Malay
States, describing the dwarf coconut known in Malaya as Nyor Gading or ivory coconut.
The dwarf variety is hardy, begins bearing in its fourth year, often at a height of only 10 feet,
and bears nuts of especially good quality. — H. N. Vinall.

114. Conners, C. H. Some notes on the inheritance of unit characters in the peach.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 24-36. (1919) 1920. — This paper presents the data secured
from the first crop picked from the first generation seedlings from crosses among commercial
varieties of peaches. The parents used in one series of crosses were Elberta, Belle, Greens-
boro and Early Crawford. Although most of the seedlings bloomed at the normal period of
bloom for the varieties used, still several of them bloomed from 4 to 8 days later. This would
be desirable from the standpoint of irritability or tendency to start into growth during the
warm spells in the winter. Blossoms of the peach may be arranged into three groups as re-
gards size: large, medium, small. — Early Crawford, a small-blossom variety, when self-
pollinated gave seedlings, the blossoms of which were nearly all small. — When small-blossom
varieties were crossed with large-blossom varieties, the seedlings had medium sized blos-
soms.— The results seemed to indicate that the medium-size bloss-om was an intermediate,
for when crossed among themselves or selfed the seedlings split into approximately the
Mendelian rate for hybrids, large blossoms being dominant. Indications seem to point to
two pure types of bloom, the large and the small, with the medium-sized blossom as an inter-
mediate.— In addition to the correlation between the color of the inside of the calyx cup and
the flesh of the fruit as described by Hedrick, a correlation between the color of the leaves,
midrib and veins and the color of the fruit is given. — Ripening dates of the crosses did not
vary much from those of the parents, although there were certain exceptions. It would
seem that a cross between a pure white and a pure yellow would give all white flesh in the Fi.
— Wherever a white-fleshed variety is crossed upon a yellow-fleshed variety, the seedlings show
a marked increase in vigor over that of the yellow parents. This is especially true where
Greensboro is used. — Freestone X freestone gave about two-thirds freestone seedlings and
one-third semi-cling or cling. FreestoneX clingstone gave a large proportion of clingstone
seedlings, varying with the degree of clingineSs of the parents and with the power of the
freestone parent to product freestone seedlings. — From an economic aspect a number of the
seedlings are outstanding and have been propagated for further trial. Among these are:
(1) Several seedlings of Belle X Greensboro, freestones, oval in shape, of very bright color,
resistant to brown rot, vigorous and productive, ripening at the season of Carman. — (2) A
seedling of Belle X Early Crawford, ripening at the time of Champion, round in shape, free-
stone, a vigorous grower, having the flavor of Champion, but resistant to brown rot. — (3)
Several seedlings of Belle X Early Crawford that resemble Belle in shape but have the color
of Early Crawford, of good quality and ripening about the season of Belle. — (4) A seedling of
Early Crawford X Elberta, resembling Elberta in shape and color but of superior quality,
ripening about one week before Elberta. — The author lists the following general results:
Elberta carries white flesh as a recessive character to the extent of about one-third. It seems

No. 1, October, 1920] HORTICULTURE 15

prepotent with respect to ripening period. Its character for quality is only mediocre. — Belle
is strongly white, but seems to carry a 25-per cent character for yellow. It is prepotent with
respect to vigor and quality and carries a character factor for clinginess of about 25 per cent.
— Early Crawford is almost pure yellow. Its character for quality seems dominant as does
its character for freestone. — Greensboro seems to be pure white, is clingstone, but carries
small factor for freestone. — -White on yellow gives increased vigor. — White seems to be domi-
nant over pure yellow in the Fl generation. — E. C. Auchter.

115. Crow, J. W. Breeding methods with horticultural plants. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic.
Sci. 16: 19-24. (1919) 1920. — A plant-breeders' classification of plants is given. Attention
is called to the fact that it is important to know whether a given plant produces seed by
cross-pollination or self-pollination, and whether the reverse process is possible. The main
principles of biological evolution as given are isolation of strains of heredity and recombina-
tion of characters by crossing. A discussion of each of these principles, with individual cases
and examples, is given. A distinction between the words "selection" and "isolation" is
discussed. Isolation consists in the segregation of a type or a line of heredity, which was
there all the time and which is only brought to light through being segregated. "Selection,"
as used by Darwin, implies a gradual change of a cumulative nature in each successive gener-
ation. Although it is stated that in some cases it is impossible to say where isolation ceases
and selection begins, still the author states, "It appears that isolation expresses the funda-
mental idea of most .improvement work much better than does the word selection. — E. C.
Auchter.

116. Dorset, M. J. Some characteristics of open-pollinated seedlings of the Malinda
apple. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 36-42. (1919) 1920.— In the fall of 1907 a quantity
of Malinda apples was obtained from an orchard in which were growing several other common
varieties. The apples were open-pollinated. Seeds from these apples were removed and
planted, and a total of 3879 seedlings were grown. — Up to the present report 49.1 per cent of
this number (1903) had been removed as wild types or as stunted, and 20.8 per cent (808)
had been discarded because of inferior fruit, while 30.1 per cent had been saved for further
study. — Many of the seedlings came into fruit during the sixth year, although there was a
variation in the time of first fruit production. About 300 seedlings have been selected on
account of their promising fruit and now present a difficult task in the final weeding out. No
two seedlings have borne fruit exactly alike, some are sweet, some are sour, some are large,
some are small, some are quite hardy, while others are tender, and there is great variation
in the markings of the different fruits. — In observing how hardy the 1168 seedlings were during
the winter of 1917-1918, the following three things were outstanding: (1) 195 trees escaped all
injury, (2) there was a greater injury generally to the trunk than to the main branches, (3)
the extent of the injury to the trees in each row was fairly consistent. In comparing these
results to Hibernal and Oldenburg, two of the hardy winter varieties in Minnesota, it was
found that these varieties were generally hardy in the top, but the wood was often slightly
brown in the trunk. Pyrus baccata was not injured, but such varieties as Grimes Golden,
Delicious, Hubbardston, Winter Banana, etc., were all brown or dark brown in the wood, even
in the smaller limbs. — E. C. Auchter.

117. Eaton, B. J. Investigations in agricultural chemistry, 1918. Agric. Bull. Federated
Malay States 7 : 224-227. 1919. — Results on the chemical examination of rubber samples, soils,
and other special investigations in Malaya are given.

118. Galloway, B. T. Tests of new pear stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 285: 109-111.
May, 1920. — Discusses the value of the following pear stocks for American use: Pijrue Cal-
leryana, P. tisurie7isis , P. serrulatas, and P. betualaefolia. — /. H. Gourley.

119. Handover, W. P. The dwarf coconut. Agric. Bull. Federated Malay States 7:
295-297. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 113.

16 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

120. Hendrickson, A. H. Inter-species pollination of plums. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic.
Sci. 16: 50-52. (1919) 1920. — Studies were made regarding the self fertility of the following
varieties: Burbank (P. triflora), Reine Claude (P. domestica) , German Prune (P. domestica) ,
and Shropshire (P. insititia). The varieties were likewise inter-crossed with the following
results as given in the author's summary. — (1) Burbank and German gave evidence of being
self-sterile. — (2) Reine Claude and Shropshire gave evidence of being self-fertile. — (3) Bur-
bank and Reine Claude are apparently inter-fertile. — (4) Reine Claude, German Prune and
Shropshire are inter-fertile. — (5) From these data it is evident that, as far as the varieties
tested are concerned there is no sterility existing between P. triflora and P. domestica or
between P. domestica and P. insititia. — E. C. Auchter.

121. Jack, H. W. Preliminary report on experiments with wet rice in Krian. Agric. Bull.
Federated Malay States 7: 298-319. 4 fig. 1919. — Krian is the largest padi-growing district
in Federated Malay States, about 50,000 acres being planted annually with wet rice. The
experiments were made with a view to the improvement of yield of grain. Nearly 200 vari-
eties were found but only six are used for the main crop. Introduced varieties, 8 Siamese, 9
Javanese, 14 Indian, were tried but did not equal the local strains. The cultivation of padi,
hybridization, diseases, and pests, are treated at some length. — T. F. Chipp.

122. Kruckeberg, Henry W. California Bud Selection Association standardizing
nursery products. Amer. Nurseryman 31: 100-101. May, 1920. — A general discussion is
given of the individuality of fruit trees and the value of propagating from recorded trees.
This movement is receiving considerable attention in California, by the prune growers and
in the citrus-fruit regions.— J. H. Gourley.

123. Lamproy, E. Les engrais radioactifs. [Radioactive fertilizers.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 91: 393-394. Dec, 1919. — Experiments with this type of fertilizer were conducted on
beans, wheat, spring vetch, white pea, flax, potato, beet, Jerusalem artichoke and sun-flower.
The effects of the radioactive substances upon the cereals were more pronounced when they
were combined with superphosphates, and the larger returns were generally obtained when
they were used in connection with complete fertilizers. Approximately 50-60 kilos were
applied to each hectare. The influence of the radioactive materials was especially noticeable
upon plants producing tubers or thick roots, particularly regarding sugar content. These
fertilizers are worthy of trial for use with specific horticultural crops. — E. J. Kraus.

124. Lewis, C. I., F. C. Reimer, and G. G. Brown. Fertilizers for Oregon orchards.
Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 166. 48 p. Fig. 1-3. 1920. — Fertilizer experiments on apple
pear, and peach trees in southern Oregon indicated that the chief element needed is nitrogen,
which, if immediate results are sought, may be applied in the form of nitrate of soda, nitrate
of lime, or sulfate of ammonia at the rate of 6-10 pounds to each old apple or pear tree, and
3 pounds to each large peach tree. On some of the very heavy soils, which show a fair amount
of nitrogen, it is not profitable to use mineral fertilizers at present. In the Hood River Valley
it was shown, through a period of 5 years experimentation, that Newtown and Spitzenberg
apple trees with low vigor due to depleted nitrogen supply failed to set fruit well and that
there was a marked tendency toward alternate bearing. When available nitrogen was in-
creased, however, through the use of either leguminous shade-crops, commercial fertilizers,
or both in combination and generally supplemented by irrigation, the fruit set was increased,
and in some cases the tendency toward alternate bearing was retarded. Because all orchard
practices were not within control each year, conclusive evidence on the latter point was not
obtainable. In the case of Spitzenberg apples, increased sizes and yields of fruit were offset
at times by decreased quality and color, when very large amounts of nitrate of soda or sulfate
of ammonia were used, especially in conjunction with leguminous shade-crops and irrigation.
Applications of nitrate of soda to separate plots at intervals of two weeks, from March 6 to
May 7, showed that "the early-fertilized Newtowns yielded 7.9, and the Spitzenbergs 10.83
loose boxes per tree, as compared to only 2.28 and 1.20 boxes for the latest application. With
orchards on heavier soils, particularly, a system of management in which clover only is used

No 1, October, 1920] HORTICULTURE 17

may be expected to keep up soil fertility without the use of nitrate fertilizers. There is
need for correlating all orchard practices, such as tillage, irrigation, pruning and cover-
cropping. — E. J. Kraus.

125. Lind, Gustaf. Om forekomsten av vara viktigare skogsbar. [On the occurrence
and distribution of our more important bush fruits.) K. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. och Tidskr.
58: 175-177. 1919.

126. Lindley, Paul C. Report of the Southern Nurserymen's Association. Jour. Econ.
Entomol. 13: 194-198. 1920. — A report presented to the Section of Horticultural Inspection
at the thirty-second annual meeting of the Amer. Assoc. Econ. Entomol., January, 1920. —
A. B. Massey.

127. Macoun, W. T., and M. B. Davis. Progress in apple breeding for the Canadian
prairies. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 13-18. (1919) 1920. — In 1887 seed of Pyrus baccala
was obtained from the Imperial Botanic Gardens, Petrograd, Russia, and sown in Ottawa,
Canada. In 1890 young trees from these seeds were sent to different Canadian experimental
farms. These trees proved hardy, and, in 1894, 21 varieties of apples used as male parents
were crossed on to these crab trees. The resulting fruit in the Fi generation, while not much
larger than that of the female parent, was of better quality. At the lower elevations, most
of the crosses were quite hardy. Two of the crosses, named Columbia and Osman, were quite
hardy in exposed and trying places. — In 1904 the best of the Fi crosses were crossed with 18
different varieties of apples. This second infusion of apple "blood" increased the resulting
size greatly, but still the fruit was not above the smallest marketable size for apples. Indi-
vidual records and dimensions of fruit are given. When Pioneer, a seedling from the cross
P. baccata X Tefofsky, was crossed with Mcintosh, Northern Spy, Cranberry Pippin and
Ontario, the male parents, especially Mcintosh, exerted a marked influence on quality. —
Breeding work will be continued, using P. baccata as the male parent and the Russian varie-
ties as female parents, in the hope of getting hardier varieties that will withstand the severest
tests on the Canadian prairies. — E. C. Auchter.

128. Marlatt, C. L. Federal plant quarantine work and co-operation with state officials
Jour. Econ. Entomol. 13: 179-181. 1920. — Report presented to the Section of Horticultural
Inspection at the thirty-second annual meeting of the Amer. Assoc. Econ. Entomol., January,
1920.— A. B. Massey.

129. Marshall, Roy E. Report of three years' results in plum pollination in Oregon.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 42-49. (1919) 1920. — Several varieties of plums of different
species were tested as to whether they were self-fruitful, self-fertile, self-sterile, or self-
barren. Varieties of Primus domestica were tested to see if these were inter-fruitful. Studies
were also made to see whether varieties of P. domestica and P. triflora were inter-fruitful.
The author's summary is as follows: (1) Pollen of the varieties of Prunus domestica and P.
triflora seem to germinate best in a solution of 5 per cent cane sugar and 2 per cent gelatin. —
(2) If there is a normal bloom and 1 flower in 20 matures into a fruit, the result may be a
full crop in some cases, while in some others 1 in every 2 or 3 flowers should set to mature a
full cro". Generally, 1 flower in 5 should set. — (3) Thirteen of the 23 varieties tested are
evidently self-barren. Blue Damson is decidedly self-fruitful. Italian and Petite are par-
tially self-fruitful. The other varieties should be considered virtually (commercially) self-
barren. — (4) The varieties of P. domestica may be considered as inter-fruitful. — (5) Italian
and Petite are each good pollenizers for practically all varieties of P. d-omcslica tested. —
(6) It is not necessary that one be particular as to which of the varieties of P. domestica com-
monly grown in the Pacific Northwest are planted together, provided they bloom at approx-
imately the same time. Some varieties are commercially profitable where no pollenizers
are used. — (7) In such varieties as Italian, Petite, Sugar and Golden Drop, the pericarp
ceases development soon after the seed dies and the fruit soon falls. — (8) In such varieties as
Bavay, Blue Damson, Giant, Green Gage, Pond, Quackenbos, Red Magnum Bonum, Tennant

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 1

18 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

and Tragedy, the fruit may mature regardless of complete seed development. — (9) For the
varieties tested, there is no direct relation between the variety of pollen used and the ratio
which exists between plump or well developed seeds and matured fruits. The ratio is fairly
constant for the variety, regardless of the kind of pollen applied. — (10) There is evidently no
relation existing between the degree of fruitfulness of reciprocal crosses. — (11) The results
obtained indicate that the results are the same whether the varieties of a given species are
closely related or non-related. — (12) The species of P. domestica and P. triflora may be con-
sidered inter-sterile for all practical purposes. — E. C. Auchter.

130. Mathieu, E. The oil palm in the East. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2: 217-
230. 2 jig. 1920. — A discussion on the cultivation of Elaeis guineensis in the East. — T. F.

Chipp.

131. Milsum, J. N. Fruit culture in Malaya. Dept. Agric. Federated Malay States Bull.
29. 108 p., 33 pi. 1919. — Describes what fruits can be grown and their treatment. — T. F.
Chipp.

132. Newell, Wilmon, and Frank Stirling. Statistics on citrus plantings in Florida.
Florida State Plant Bd. Quart. Bull. 3: 113-116. 1919. — The data were accumulated in con-
nection with the work of eradicating citrus canker and represent complete and up-to-date
information on the subject. The data show that the total acreage devoted to the citrus groves
in the state is 160,397, of which 115,324 acres are of bearing age and 45,073 are non-bearing. A
comparison is made with the acreage in California which shows that the latter state has only
a little over 12,000 acres more of orange and grapefruit groves; to this should be added 48,000
acres of lemon plantings in California while the acreage devoted to lemons 'n Florida is neg-
ligible— C. D. Sherbakoff.

133. Pirotta, R. Osservazioni sul flore dell'olivo. [Olive flowers.] Atti R. Accad.
Lincei [Roma] Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 282: 1-9. 1919. — Examinations were made
of flowers of the common olive (Olea europaea L.), which showed that the flowers might be
divided into three classes: monoclinous, clearly staminiferous, and physiologically stami-
niferous. They may be on the same or different individuals. In this respect the olive behaves
like the wild, closely related Phillyrea. The aspect of the trees with these different types of
flowers is described. — F. M. Blodgett.

134. Sasscer, E. R. Important foreign pests collected on imported nursery stock in 1919.
Jour. Econ. Entomol. 13: 181-184. 1920. — Paper presented to the Section of Horticultural
Inspection at the thirty-second annual meeting of the Amer. Assoc. Econ. Entomol., January,
1920.— A. B. Massey.

135. Spring, F. G., and J. N. Milsum. Food production in Malaya. Dept. Agric. Fed-
erated Malay States Bull. 30. 112 p., 12 pi. 1919. — The principles of cultivation of the
different food crops of Malaya are considered from the point of view of increasing the food
supply of the country. — T. F. Chipp.

136. Stark, Major Lloyd C. French orchards and nurseries after the war. Nation.
Nurseryman 281: 6-8. Jan., 1920. — There are no large commercial orchards in France com-
parable to those in America, but a large amount of fruit is produced from the smaller orchards
and fruit gardens. Grapes, on the other hand, are grown on a gigantic scale, being supported
by the wine industry. — Apples and pears are usually dwarfs and they are pruned in cordons,
espaliers, and in every conceivable design and fashion. In Normandy the best orchards are
grown, and the land is best adapted to the apple. — Most orchards are grown in sod and the
trees are pruned to a flat, umbrella-shaped head in most instances. No variety of apple
seems to be generally grown in France, but each locality has its own favorite. — The pear
industry is much more important there than in America and the blight gives little or no
trouble. The Bartlett, grown under the name of "English William" is the most popular

No. 1, October, 1920] HORTICULTURE 19

variety. — The sections which produced the stocks on which American fruits were worked have
been practically destroyed and it has resulted in a tremendous increase in cost of stocks in
U. S. A., as great as from 85 or SO to .?50 and SGO per thousand for apple seedlings. The
bearing orchards are also destroyed in many sections which were occupied by the enemy. —
J. H. Gourlcy.

137. Whitten, J. C. An investigation in transplanting. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res.
Bull. 33. 73 p. [1919.] 1920. — Invest igal inns covering a period of 10 years show that under
Missouri conditions fall transplanting is to be preferred to spring transplanting in the case
of many deciduous fruit trees and shrubs. This is due mainly to the fact that the fall trans-
planted trees generally form some new roots during the winter and consequently are in a posi-
tion to begin growth in early spring; while spring transplanted trees must wait until the soil
warms up sufficiently for root growth before they can become established. If the top starts
to vegetate much before roots are formed the new shoots dry out and die. It is for this reason
that there is frequently a comparatively heavy mortality on the part of spring-set trees. Late
spring transplanting gives as good results as early spring transplanting, if the trees are dor-
mant at the time of setting. Similarly, late fall transplanting gives results as good or better
than those attending early fall transplanting. The formation of new roots by transplanted
trees is dependent to a great extent upon proper soil temperature. In the case of the fall
set trees new roots are formed first from the lowest roots of the transplanted tree because
temperature is apt to be more favorable at those depths; in the case of spring-transplanted
trees root formation first takes place nearer the surface. This suggests one danger from too
deep setting in the spring. Some root formation takes place below the frost line throughout
the winter. Trees that are "heeled in" during the winter may be held dormant for late trans-
planting by lifting from the ground and "heeling in" again, whenever their buds show signs
of starting. The roots of deciduous fruit trees and shrubs are very tender to frost while they
are out of the ground and great care should be exercised to prevent their freezing. The
small, fibrous roots of ordinary deciduous fruit trees usually die when they are transplanted
and it is better to prune them away than to attempt to save them. — V. R. Gardner.

138. Wiggans, C. C. Some factors favoring or opposing fruitfulness in apples. Missouri
Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 32. 60 p. [1918.] 1920.— A study was made of the performance
of individual spurs of a number of apple varieties to determine, if possible, the factors asso-
ciated with productiveness and unproductiveness. The conclusion is reached that individual
spur performance is not dependent mainly upon such external factors as soil or seasonal vari-
ation in moisture, but rather to conditions within the tree or even the spur itself. Some
apple varieties form a group in which the individual spurs are capable of fruiting every year;
other varieties form a group in which the individual spurs seem to lack this ability. The
habit of alternate bearing possessed by certain varieties seems closely associated with this
performance characteristic of the individual spur. The sap concentration of bearing spurs
averaged somewhat higher than that of non-bearing spurs. Non-bearing spurs have more,
but not larger, leaves than bearing spurs. Girdling increased sap density above, and de-
creased it below, the point of girdling, the greatest influence being found comparatively close
to the point of injury. In pot cultures with soil and sand and using several varieties, nitrogen
influenced wood growth and fruit bud formation, while no influence of either potash or phos-
phorus could be detected. Differences in the sap concentration of leaf and twig sap of trees
growing under different tillage methods were comparatively small. Training trees to an
extremely high head removes an unnecessary amount of vegetative growth, reduces the num-
ber of fruit spurs during the early life of the tree, and consequently delays the time when
the tree comes into bearing. — V. R. Gardner.

139. Wolff, W. H. Influence of the prevention of leaf blights on the growth of nursery
cherries and pears. Amer. Nurseryman 315: 110. May, 1920.— Data are given showing that
57.3 per cent of cherry trees sprayed in the nursery with Bordeaux mixture were over 3 feet
in height, while only 23.5 per cent of the unsprayed trees, used as check, attained a height of 3
feet. Similar results were secured with Bartlett pear trees.— .7. H. Gourley.

20 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

140. Young, Floyd D. Frost and the prevention of damage by it. U. S. Dept. Agric.
Farmers' Bull. 1096. 48 p., 24 fig. 1920.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

141. Anonymous. Cotoneaster acutifolia. Amer. Nurseryman 3 12: 35. February, 1920.

142. Anonymous. Cotoneaster acutifolia. Nation. Nurseryman 283: 53. March, 1920.

143. Anonymous. Severe winter effect. Amer. Nurseryman 316: 138. June, 1920. — It is
stated that very great losses to ornamental plants of all kinds were experienced following the
winter of 1919-20 in the environment of Philadelphia. It is estimated that the loss in that sec-
tion alone is more than $1,000,000. — J. H. Gourley.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

144. Lundberg, Joh. Fr. Svalofs Koloni-Stensart. [Svalofs "Koloni-Stens" pea.]
Sver. Utsadesf. Tidskr. 30: 30-31. 1920. — Origin and description of a new variety of marrow
pea of very high quality. It is a selection from the Stens pea, a high-quality but rather
unproductive variety. — E. G. Anderson.

145. Mathieu, E. Tuba root (Derris elliptica) as an insecticide. Gardens' Bull. Straits
Settlements 2 : 192-197. 1920. — Results are recorded for employing a decoction or powder of
tuba root as an insecticide in vegetable cultivation. — T. F. Chipp.

HORTICULTURE PRODUCTS

146. Dunbar, P. B., and H. A. Lepper. Report on fruit products. Jour. Assoc. Official
Agric. Chem. 3: 402-409. 1920. — Malic and citric acid determinations. — F. M. Schertz.

147. Eaton, B. J. Tung oil or Chinese wood oil and candlenut oil from Aleurites spp.
Agric. Bull. Federated Malay States 7: 162-165. 1919.— The chemical characteristics, extrac-
tion of oil, and prospects of cultivation of this crop in Malaya are considered. — T. F. Chipp.

148. Ravaz, L. Le defoxage des producteurs directs. [Removal of the objectionable
taste of imported wines.] Ann. Ecole Nation. Agric. Montpellier 17: 71-80. (July, 191S.)
July, 1919. — Several methods are given by which imported wines, especially those^from
America, are rendered more palatable. — F. F. Halma.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

149. Beals, A. T. Tortula pagorum (Milde) DeNot., near Harper's Ferry, West Virginia.
Bryologist 23 : 33-35. PI. l,fig.l. 1920. — The article reports the second collection in America
of a rare European moss, as well as the occurrence of Fabronia octoblepharis (Schleich.)
Schwaegr. The plate and figure are from photomicrographs. — E. B. Chamberlain.

150. Borgesen, F., and C. Raunkiaer. Mosses and lichens collected in the former
Danish West Indies. Dansk Bot. Ark. 2°: IS p. 1918. — The mosses were determined by
V. F. Brotherus and number 24 species, Trichostomum perviride Broth, being described as
new. These added to the species listed by Mrs. Britton give a total of 38 species now known
from the islands, 4 of which are endemic. The lichens were determined by E. Wainio and
number 156 species, 59 of which were described as new in Wainio's "Addidamente ad Licheoo-
graphiam Antillarum illustrandam" (Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn. 6. Helsingfors, 1915). —
A. Gundersen.

No. 1, October, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES 21

151. Collins, E. J. Sex segregation in the Bryophyta. Jour. Genetics 8: 130-146. PL
6, 5 fig. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2103.

152. Corbiere, L. Deux mousses africaines egalement francaises. [Two African mosses
occurring likewise in France.] Rev. Bryologique 41: 99. 1911. [Issued in 1920.] — This ia
the conclusion of a paper already abstracted in part. (See Bot. Absts 5, Entry 619.) The
discovery of Fissidens Moureti Corb. in the department of Var in southern France is an-
nounced. This species was discovered by Mouret in Morocco and has since been reported
from both Madeira and Spain. It is interesting to note that Mouret was also the collector
of the French specimens. As a probable ally of F. Moureti, the author mentions F. Warn-
storjii Fleisch., a species based on specimens from the vicinity of Naples but since recorded
from Portugal. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 158.] — A. W. Evans.

153. Familler, I. Bemerkungen uber bayerische Moose. [Notes on Bavarian mosses.]
Krypt. Forsch. Bayerische Bot. Ges. 3: 166-167. 1 fig. 1918. — The author notes the occur-
rence, in the vicinity of Regensburg, of Orthotrichum diaphanum, forma aqualicum (Davies)
Venturi, a moss new to German}-. The variable leaf-apices of this form are figured and com-
mented upon, and three other mosses accompanying the Orthotrichum are listed. The paper
gives also new Bavarian stations for Tortula obtusifolia Schleich. and Plagiothecium Ruthei
Limpr. and corrects two previously published records, one for a moss and the other for a
liverwort. — A. W. Evans.

154. Groves, James. Sex-terms for plants. Jour. Botany 58: 55-56. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 560.

155. Holzinger, John M. Bartramiopsis Lescurii. Bryologist 23 : 35-36. 1920. — Kind-
berg, in founding the genus Bartramiopsis for Atrichum Lescurii James, misquoted James
and apparently made the description from other than typical material. The genus should
be maintained, but the authority for the combination given above is Cardot & Theriot. B.
sitkana Kindb. is only a synonym. — E. B. Chamberlain.

156. Luisier, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria, Ser. Bot.
18: 5-22. 1920. — This is the seventh of a series of articles containing a complete discussion
of the moss flora of Madeira, and includes the genera Thamnium to Plagiothecium (in part).
No new forms are described, but extended discussion and critical notes are given upon Tham-
nium canariense R. & C., Lepidopilum fontanum Mitt., L. virens Card., Amblystegiummadeir-
ense Mitt., Campylium serratum Card. & Wint., Gollania Berthelotiana (Mont.) Broth., and
Stereodon canariensis Mitt. In most of these cases there are copious quotations from original
or out-of-the-way sources. [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 757; 3, Entries 2477 and 2478; and 5,
Entry 625.]— E. B. Chamberlain.

157. Mola, Pasquale. Flora delle acque Sarde. Contributo delle piante idrofite ed igrofite
della Sardegna. [Flora of the Sardinian waters. Hydrophytes and Hygrophytes of Sardinia.]
Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 54: 478-502. 1918-1919— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1025.

158. Potier de la Varde, R. Observations sur quelques especes du genre Fissidens.
[Observations on certain species of the genus Fissidens.] Rev. Bryologique 41: 94-98. PL
2. 1914. [Issued in 1920.] — The first part of this paper has already been abstracted. (See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 628.) In this second and concluding part, the discussion of F. tama-
rindifolius is continued, certain specimens from Brittany being especially considered. These
are referred to F. impar, as var. Camusi var. nov., and several distinct forms of this variety
are described and figured. According to the author's summary F. tamarindifolius , as under-
stood by writers, is not a definite species but includes forms and varieties of F. incurvus
Starke, F. inconstans Schimp. and F. impar Mitt. At the close of the paper the status of F.
gracilis (La Pyl). Brid. is discussed, and the conclusion is reached that it represents a slender
and delicate variety of F. incurvus. It was discovered in 1814 by La Pylie at Fougeres,
France, and has not been collected since. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 152.] — A. W. Evans.

22 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

159. Taylor, A. Mosses as formers of tufa and floating islands. Bryologist 22: 38-39.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 306.

160. Theriot, I. Notes bryologiques. I. Syrrhopodon Taylori Schwaegr. Bull. Soc.
Bot. Geneve 11: 24-28. 1919. — The original description of Syrrhopodon Taylori Schwaegr.
is erroneous as to the peristome. An examination of the type specimen leaves no doubt con-
cerning the identity of the plant, which is a species of Leucoloma, according to the description
of this genus by Mitten, and the species in question is properly named Leucoloma Taylori
(Schwaegr.) Mitt. Leucoloma sarcotrichum C. Mull, is synonymous. — W. H. Emig.

161. Theriot, I. Notes bryologiques. II. Fabronia longidens Duby. Bull. Soc. Bot.
Geneve 11: 28-29. 1919. — The moss described by Dtjby, in 1867, as Fabronia longidens is
Dimerodontium pellucidum (Hook.) Mitt. The specific name pellucidum is misleading, for
the color of the moss is dull green like that of the species of Leskea. — W. H. Emig.

162. Twiss. W. C. A study of the plastids and mitochondria in Preissia and corn. Amer.
Jour. Bot. 6: 217-234. PL 83-34. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1942.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA

AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatrick, Editor
MYXOMYCETES

163. Lister, G. The Mycetozoa, a short history of their study in Britain, an account of
their habitats generally, and a list of species recorded from Essex. 4 + 54 V- The Essex Field
Club, Stratford; Simpkin, Marshall & Co., Ltd.: London, 1918. [Essex Field Club Special
Memoirs, Vol. 6.]

BACTERIA

164. Atkins, Kenneth N. A modification of the Gram stain. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
4: 4. 1920. — "A stable staining solution consists of a 1 per cent aqueous solution aniline
sulphate, 3 parts; saturated alcoholic solution Gentian violet, 1 part. The iodine solution
contains 2 grams iodine, 10 cc. normal sodium hydroxide solution, water 90 cc. Time for
staining and treatment with modified iodine solution, 1 minute each." [Author's abst. of
paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

165. Bronfenbrenner, J. Some improvements in the methods for the identification of
bacteria. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 6. 1919. — Endo agar as a stock medium is unsatis-
factory because of instability of color. By substituting a "proper mixture" of rosolic acid
and China blue for the sodium sulphite-fuchsin mixture, as an indicator in lactose agar, a
better medium is secured. The agar is practically colorless. Organisms which ferment lac-
tose are promptly indicated by intense blue color of the colony, those which do not, remain
colorless or pink. For isolation, buffer is adjusted to permit earliest possible detection. —
Identification by means of carbohydrate fermentation tests is hastened by use of "micro-
plates." Single drops of the media to be tested are placed in a single Petri dish at points
previously touched with a needle bearing the organism to be tested. The method is also
useful in testing for gelatin liquefaction, starch hydrolysis, hydrogen-sulfid formation,
reduction of nitrates, etc. [From author's absts. of paper read at scientific session, Soc.
Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

166. Bronfenbrenner, J., M. J. Schlesinger; and D. Soletsky. Study in China-
blue-rosolic-acid indicator. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 12. 1920.

No. 1, October, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 23

1G7. Browne, Willi \m W. The isolation of bacteria from salt and salted foods. [Ab-
stract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 11-12. 1920. — Reddening of Baited fish is due to growth of 2 organ-
isms, a spirochete producing an opaque pink coloral ion and a bacillus producing a transparent
red coloration. They are intimately associated and arc difficult to separate in pure culture.
No growth occurs on media containing less than 16 per cent sea salt ; optimum concentration
seems to be saturation; optimum temperature, 50° to 55°C. Both are strictly aerobic, both
difficult to stain, and neither affected by sunlight (8 hours). Morphology of both organisms
depends on concent rat ion of salt, the largest forms (Mm) appearing on saturated solutions and
the shortest (2/j) on media of lS-per-cent concentration. — [From author's abst. of paper read
at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

168. Conn, H. J. Report of Committee on Descriptive Chart. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
4:1. 1920. — The report is to be published in full in Jour. Bact.

169. Davison, Wilburt C. The aerobic flora of dysentery stools in adults and children.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 15. 1920.

170. Downs, Cornelia Mitchell. Typing of Bacillus typhosus. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 4: 19. 1920. — "In the course of routine diagnostic work it was observed that some of
the sera used for identifying typhoid failed to agglutinate certain strains. This fact seemed
to indicate that there might be types of typhoid bacilli. The strains used were from as widely
separates sources as possible; 5 were isolated in Kansas, 4 from Europe, 1 from California,
the others from various parts of the East and middle West. Culturally they were identical,
with the exception of 3 strains, which gave a deep blue color to litmus milk after a slight
initial acidity lasting 4 days; the others remained pink. — Representative strains were selected
and rabbits immunized. Cross agglutinations were made using all the organisms against
each serum. It was found that they readily fell into 4 groups. Groups I, II, and III are quite
distinct, while group IV is agglutinated by both type I and II sera." — [Author's abst. of paper
read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

171. Eaton, Paul. A device for the rapid measurement of bacteria. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 4: 4. 1920. — A mechanical stage the movement of which is brought about by the use
of a screw and nut, the screw being actuated by a rather large worm-wheel. The mechanical
motions which bring about movement of stage are recorded by a counter of the "mile-register"
type. [From author's absts. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

172. Elliott, Charlotte. Halo-blight of oats. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 139-172. PL C
(col.) and 26-35. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 230.

173. Hall, Ivan C. Methylene blue as a criterion of anaerobiosis. [Abstract.] Absts.
Bact. 4: 4. 1920.

174. Jones, D. H. Continued studies of some azotobacters. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
4: 6. 1920. — Four varieties of Azotobacter isolated from soil have been studied and are found
to have a very complex life cycle with extreme polymorphism. The various forms encountered
are briefly enumerated. [From author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D.
Reddick.

175. Levine, Max. Some differential characters of the group of dysentery bacilli.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 15. 1920. — Six species are recognized: Bact. dysenteriae (Shiga-
Kruse), Bact. ambiguum, Bact. flexneri, Bact. sonnei, Bact. dispar, and Bact. alkalescens.
The interrelationships and cultural differential characters are indicated in a table. [From
author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

176. MacInnes, L. R., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu-
facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 333-337. 8 fig. 1920.

24 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

177. Monfort, W. F., and M. C. Perry. Some atypical colon-aerogenes forms isolated
from natural waters. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 8. 1920. — "The purpose of sanitary bac-
teriology of water supplies is distinct from that of systematic bacteriology. Variations
from types now accepted as indicative of fecal pollution are so manifold that further study
of these variants prior to complete rejuvenation is essential to their correlation with known
pollution.— The attempt to reduce the members of the colon-aerogenes group to 4 types (non-
fecal and fecal aerogenes, cloacae, and fecal B. coli) is futile so far as practical application
in judging water supplies is concerned. — There are intermediate forms, of varying methyl-
red reaction, furnishing transitions from one to the other type, which may correlate with
their late environment." — Some of the variations are stated and experimental data on tech-
nique are summarized. [From author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] —
D. Reddick.

178. Neill, James, and Arao Itaxo. A microscopical method for anaerobic cultivation.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 4. 1920. — An hermetic cell, similar to the Van Tieghem cell,
is used, oxygen being removed by use of alkaline pyrogallic acid. [From authors' abst. of
paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

179. Normington, Ruth. Studies in the heat resistant organisms of cold packed canned
peas. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 47: 1-33. 1919. — Discusses the bacteria found
in canned peas, describing the cultural characters of nine or more species isolated and studied.
These are spore producers and capable of withstanding high temperatures. — E. A. Bessey.

180. Orr, Paul F. Some observations on the biological characteristics of Bacillus botu-
linus and its toxins. Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 10. 1920.— Many of the characteristics
exhibited by 16 strains of B. botulinus that have been studied differ materially from the ac-
cepted description of this organism. — The optimum temperature for growth of all of the strains
has invariably been found to be about 37°C. At this temperature an abundant growth takes
place within 16 hours and spore formation usually begins within 36 hours; however, the spore
formation varies with different strains. When grown in the ordinary dextrose media, such as
agar, gelatin and bouillon, B. botulinus produces acid, spores are not formed and consequently
the cultures soon lose their vitality. In the sugar free media, spores are readily formed and
the cultures have remained viable at 37°C. for a period of 2 years. — Of the 16 strains studied
originally 11 produced toxin. During the course of a year of cultivation one has entirely lost
its ability to produce toxin. Toxin is readily formed at 37°C. by all of the toxic strains, and
can be demonstrated after 20 hours of growth. — This toxin is destroyed at 80°C. within 2 min-
utes. The temperature coefficient of the destruction of the toxin by heat was found to lie
between 6 and 8.5 for a rise of 10°C. — [From author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer.
Bact.] — D. Reddick.

181. Rivers, T. M. What is an influenza bacillus? [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 14.
1920. — "The question asked in the title can be answered in one sentence. There is only one
true B. influenzae, existing in name only, and that is the first one grown and described by
Pfeiffer, as neither he nor any one else has ever shown any of the subsequent strains to be
the same as the first. He did, however, draw the attention of bacteriologists to a group of
hemoglobinophilic bacilli, which has caused many contentions and hard feelings and about
which no more is known now than nearly thirty years ago." — "The Gram-negative, non-
smotile hemoglobinophilic bacilli can be classified biologically by reactions which admit of
subdivisions of the group." — [From author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.] —
D. Reddick.

182. Treece, E. L. A substitute for adonite in the determination of fecal and non-fecal
•strains of the colon-aerogenes group. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 9. 1920. — "A peptone gel-
atine as follows: 12 per cent gelatine, 2 per cent peptone, 0.5 per cent meat extract, tubed
and sterilized as for ordinary gelatine was found to correlate the fermentation of adonite in
idetermining fecal and non-fecal strains of the colon-aerogenes group; positive results being

No. 1, October, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 25

indicated by a line of from 4 to 8 bubbles extending down the line of inoculation within 48
hours at 20°C— Of 60 food strains studied 32 were of the aerogenes type and 20 of these (or
62.5 per cent) were positive in adonite and the same number, 62.5 per cent, produced gas in
peptone gelatine. Of the 17 strains of aerogenes that were Voges-Proskauer positive, 82.3
per cent were adonite fermenters and S8.2 per cent gave gas in peptone gelatine. Of 37 known
fecal strains studied 36 were negative in adonite and 36 did not produce gas on peptone
gelatine." — [Author's abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

183. W[inslow], C.-E. A. The lactic acid bacteria. [Rev. of: Orla-Jensen, S. The
lactic acid bacteria. Mem. Acad. R. Sci. et Let. Danemark (Sect. Sci.) VIII, 5: 81-196. 51
pi. 1919.] Absts. Bact. 4: 102. 1920.— "The bio-chemical portion of this monograph repre-
sents a contribution of the highest value to our knowledge of the physiology of a puzzling
bacterial complex. From a systematic standpoint it is less illuminating. The evidence for
combining the streptococci and the Bulgarian bacillus group in one family is suggestive, but
hardly conclusive; while as in previous communications Jensen appears entirely innocent of
any knowledge of the principles of biological nomenclature or of any respect for the work of
previous investigators. His genus Betacoccus is apparently Leuconostoc of van Tieghem,
and his Thermobacterium is certainly Lactobacillus Beijerinck; while many of his specifio
names are merely confusing synonyms of perfectly valid names given by previous investi-
gators."— D. Reddick.

184. Winslow, C.-E. A., Chairman, Jean Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, Charles
Krumwiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G. H. Smith. Abstract of final report of the committee
on characterization and classification of bacterial types. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 1. 1920.
— "As a result of criticisms of the preliminary report of the committee (Jour. Bact. 2: 505)
made at, and subsequent to, the 1917 meeting of the Society, the committee presented a
revised classification of the families and genera of the Actinomycetales and Eubacteriales,
38 genera being finally included, with type species for each. In addition to the classification
itself the committee presented an artificial key to the families and genera recognized, and a
generic index of the commoner species of bacteria with the names ordinarily used referred to
their proper genera under the proposed classification. The committee recommended that
the following names be adopted by the Society as approved genera:

Acetobacter Fuhrmann Leuconostoc Van Tieghan

Actinomyces Harz Micrococcus Cohn

Bacillus Cohn Rhizobium Frank

Bacterium Ehrenberg Sarcina Goodsir

Chromobacterium Bergonzini Spirillum Ehrenberg

Clostridium Prazmowski Staphylococcus Rosenbach

Erythrobacillus Fortineau Streptococcus Rosenbach

Leptoteichia Trevisan Vibrio Mueller

and that The Committee on Characterization and Classification of Bacterial Types be dis-
charged and that a new committee on Bacterial Taxonomy be appointed (1) to study and report
to the Society from time to time in regard to problems of nomenclature, including such revi-
sions of the nomenclature in the present report as may seem necessary; and (2) to take the
proper steps to secure action at the next International Botanical Congress leading to the gen-
eral ends contemplated in the 1916 recommendations of the Society. — (a) That French, Eng-
lish and German may be substituted for Latin in the diagnosis of bacterial species, (b) That
the date of publication of the third edition of Zoph's Spaltpilze (1883) be considered the
beginning of bacterial nomenclature for the purpose of determining priority, with the excep-
tion of a definite list of genera conservanda. (c) That such of the approved generic names
specified above as may be found to require such action be recognized as genera conservanda
in bacterial taxonomy. — Both the recommendations of the Committee were adopted by the
Society." — [Abst. by C.-E. A. Winslow of report made to Soc. Amer. Bact.]

26 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF. FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

LICHENS

185. Herre, Albert C. Alaskan notes. Bryologist 23 : 37-3S. 1920. — A list of twenty-
eight species of lichens from Alaska, with localities. — E. B. Chamberlain.

186. Steiner, J. Flechten aus Transkaukasien. [Lichens from Transcaucasia.] Ann.
Mycol. 17 : 1- 32. 1919. — The author gives a list of some two hundred lichens which he received
from G. Woronoff for identification. The following new species and varieties are listed:
Dermatocarpon (Endopyrenium rufescens (Ach.) Th. Fr. var. pruinatum Stnr. ; Leptorhaphis
Buxi Stnr.; Lithographa deplanata Stnr.; Lecidea (Evlecidea) goniophiliza Stnr.; Lecidea
(Eulecidea) phaea (Flot. apud Krb.) Nyl. f. interrupta Stnr. nov. f. ; Lecanora (Aspicilia)
sphaerolhallina Stnr. var. plicatula Stnr.; Lecanora (Aspicilia) esculenta (Pall.) Eversm. var.
Erivanensis Sntr. ; Lecanora (Aspicilia) subdepressa Nyl. var. adgrediens Stnr.; Lecanora
(Aspicilia) squamulosa Stnr.; Lecanora (Aspicilia) epiglypta Nyl. var. rupta Stnr.; Lecanora
solorinoides Stnr.; Parmetia (Cyclocheilae) glabra (Schaer.) Nyl. var. epilosa Stnr.; Caloplaca
irrubescens (Nyl.) A. Zahlbr. var. disjecta Stnr.; Physcia caucasica Stnr.; Buellia Zahlbruck-
neri Stnr. var. microspora Stnr. — Fred C. Werkenlhin.

FUNGI

187. Arnatjd, G. La famille des Parodiellinacees (Pyrenomycetes). [The family Paro-
diellinaceae of the Pyrenomycetes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 202-204. 1920. — In
harmony with his previous study the author seeks to establish the family Parodiellinaceae,
in the order Hypocreales. This family is to consist of four tribes organized about the genera
Bagnisiopsis, Parodiellina, Parodiopsis, and Erysiphe, the last named to constitute the
nucleus of the tribe, which is equivalent to the well established group, the Erysiphaceae.
The family is held to possess unity due to the parasitic habit of its members upon vascular
plants, especially their leaves. There are present internal haustoria, and a pigment occurs
at least in the conceptacles. Conidiophores are common in the family. Two tribes have
external mycelia, its presence seeming to have no definite relation to development in a rainy
region as is the case in the Microthyriaceae. The Erysipheae represent the climax of evo-
lution in this group, the simplicity of their conceptacles being apparently the result of reduc-
tion on the part of the stroma. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

188. Bardie, A. Excursion mycologique de la Societe Linneenne e Leognan le 12 Novembre
1916, nos vieilles forets; necessite de leur conservation. [The mycological excursion of the
Linnean Society to Leognan, November 12, 1916.] Actes Soc. Linneenne Bordeaux (Proces-
verbaux) 69: 105-113. 1915-16. [Received May, 1920.]— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 80.

189. Bose, S. R. Fungi of Bengal. III. Polyporaceae of Bengal. Carmichael Med. Coll.
Belgachia Bull. 1. 5 p., 12 pi. 1920. — Twelve species of polypores are described and each is
illustrated with 3 or more halftones. The 12 illustrations are arranged on 7 special insert
sheets. The specimens have been compared with authentic material in the herbarium of the
Peradenya Bot. Gard., Ceylon. The species are: Fomes applanatus, F. pallidus, Lenzites
repanda, Polyporus licnoides, P. emerici, P. secernibilis , P. zonalis, Poria diversiporus, Tra-
metes lactinea, T. versatilis, T. occidentalis , T. persooni. [Part I was published in: Proc. Indian
Assoc. Cultiv. Sci. 4: part 4, 1918. Part II appeared in the Proceedings of the Science Con-
vention, 1918, of the same Association.] — D. Reddick.

190. Boyer, G. Sur l'existence et les principaux caracteres du mycelium des champignons
qui paraissent en etre depourvus et en particulier de celui des tuberacees. [Concerning the
ex'stence and the principal characters of the mycelium of fungi which appear to be sterile and
in particular those of the Tuberaceae.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux) 69: 94-
97. 1915-16. — The delicate mycelium of many species of Amanita and Boletus, if followed
for a distance of one to several decimeters, leads to mycorhiza of tree roots. Many of the
truffles and similar fungi with mycelium that is scarcely apparent possess mycelium which
extends into the earth and in many cases probably connect with the mycorhiza of the neigh-
boring trees. — W. H. Etnig.

No. 1, October, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 27

191. Burt, E. A. The Thelephoraceae of North America. XI. Tulasnella, Veluticeps,
Mycobonia, Epithele, and Lachnocladium. Ann. Missouri Hot. (lard. 6: 253 2S0. /'/. 5, Jig.
1-15. 1919. — In the monograph of these 5 genera tun specii , / Iphurea and Lach-
nocladium crcctuin arc described as new. Aleurodiscus tabacinus Cooke is newly combined as
Veluticeps tabacina (Cooke) Burt and Clavaria bicolor Peck as Lachnocladium bicolor (Peck)
Burt, Pterula setosa Peck is excluded from Lachnocladium to which it had been transferred
by Saccardo. — S. M. Zeller.

192. Chaborski, Gabriela. Recherches sur les levures thermophile et cryophiles.
[Studies on thermophile and cryophile yeasts.] Hull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 70-116. / pi., 32
fig. 1919. — Yeasts were obtained from fig ami banana fruits and from palm and lurch sap.
From the fig two new species of yeasts were isolated : Zygosaccharomyces ficicola Chaborsky
n. sp. and Torulu botryoidea Chaborski n. sp. From the banana a species representing a new
genus of fungi was obtained: Asporomyces asporus Chaborski n. sp. From the sugar of Arenga
saccharifera and the birch tree many cultures of undetermined Mycoderma were isolated. —
W. H. Emig.

193. Chipp, T. F. Echinodia theobromae Pat. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2:
199. 1920. — More mature specimens of this new species confirm the opinion that it is a stil-
boid form of a polypore. — T. F. Chipp.

194. Dietel, P. Uber Puccinia obscura Schrot. und einige verwandte Puccinien auf
Luzula. [Puccinia obscura Schrot. and related Pucciniae on Luzula.] Ann. Mycol. 17: 4S-58.
1919. — According to an investigation made by the author the urediniospores found on Luzula
maxima and those of Puccinia obscura Schrot. differ considerably in size. Based on measure-
ments of 200 spores each, it was found that the urediniospores of Puccinia obscura are 22-25
xl8-20/x, while those found on Luzula maxima measure 23-40x17-29^. The author regards
the fungus on this host as distinct, names it Puccinia Luzulae maximae Diet., and gives a
detailed description. The teliospores are capable of germinating the year in which they are
formed. The author also gives a description of a rust found on Luzula Alopecurus by A.
Philippi, and names it Puccinia luzulina Syd. n. sp. — Fred C. Werkenlhin.

195. Doidge, Ethel M. South African Perisporiaceae. III. Notes on four species of
Meliola hitherto unrecorded from South Africa. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Africa 8: 107-110.
PI. 4- 1920. — Four species of Meliola hitherto unrecorded from South Africa, namely Meliola
malacolricha Speg., M. palmicolaVi int., M. bicornis Wint., and a variety of M. geniculata Syd.
& Butl., have been identified in collections made in Natal and in the eastern part of the Cape
Province, and are here described. [See also next following Entries, 196 and 197.] — E. M.
Doidge.

196. Doidge, Ethel M. South African Perisporiaceae. IV. New species from the Coast
Districts. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Africa 8: 111-115. PI. 5-6. 1920.— This paper consists
of descriptions and illustrations of 9 new species, 6 of which belong to the genus Meliola.
[See also next preceding and next following Entries, 195 and 197.] — E. M. Doidge.

197. Doidge, Ethel M. South African Perisporaceae. V. Notes on an interesting col-
lection from Natal. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Africa 8: 137-143. PI. 7-8. 1920.— Eight new
6pecies are described and a number of species previously described are recorded on hitherto
unreported hosts. [See also next preceding Entries, 195 and 196.] — E. M. Doidge.

19S. Doidge, Ethel M. Mycological notes I. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Africa 8: 117-119.
1920. — The distribution of Asterodothis Solaris and its occurrence on a number of different
hosts are recorded. Spegazzinia Meliolae Zimm., Phaeosphaerelle senniana Sacc. and Isari-
opsis griseola Sacc. are recorded as occurring in South Africa and two new species, Dothi-
dasteromella contorla and Gloniella mulliseptata are described. — E. M. Doidge.

28 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

199. Doidge, Ethel M. Meliolaster, a new genus of the Microthyriaceae. Trans. Roy.
Soc. South Africa 8: 121-123. 1920. — This is a genus resembling Meliola in its mycelium and
spores, and Asterina in the form of its thyriothecium. — E. M. Doidge.

■ 200. Matstjmoto, T. Culture experiments with Melampsora in Japan. Ann. Missouri
Bot. Gard. 6: 309-316. Fig. 1-3. 1919. — Cross inoculations of teliospores of a Melampsora
from Salix Urbaniana on Larix decidua and caeomaspores from L. decidua on S. Urbaniana
were successful. Melampsora Larici- Urbaniana is described as new. M. Larici-populina
Kleb. is found in Japan on Populus balsamifera. A species on Salix babylonica, having a
caeoma stage on the leaves of Chelidonium majus, has not been definitely placed taxonomic-
ally, while a Melampsora on Salix Capraea seems to have a caeoma stage on the leaves of
neither Larix nor Abies. — S. M. Zeller.

201. Mattirolo, O. La Daldinia concentrica nella Torbiera di Montorfano. [Daldinia
concentrica in a peat bog at Montorfano.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 142-146. 1919. — The
fruit body of this fungus was found in the bog of Montorfano and was first taken for a fruit
of the horse-chestnut. The walls of the hyphal strands had become impregnated with graphic
acid and were in a perfect state of preservation. — E. Artschwager.

202. Peglion, Vittorio. La forma ascofora (Microsphaera quercina) dell'oidio della
quercia nel Bolognese. [Perithecial form of the oak mildew.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei [Roma]
Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 282: 197-19S. 1919.— The perithecial stage of Oidium quer-
cinum Thiim., on oak and cerris was collected near Bologna and found to be Microsphaera
quercina (Schw.) Burr. — F. M. Blodgett.

203. Ptjtterill, V. A. A new apple tree canker. South African Jour. Sci. 16: 256-271.
PI. 21-30, 6 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 251.

204. Rick, J. Contributio ad monographiam agaricacearum brasiliensium. [Contribu-
tion towards a monograph of Brazilian agarics.] Broteria (Ser. Bot.) 18: 48. 1920. — This is
the first page only of an article to be continued in the next issue. Lepiota albo-squamosa and
L. Hypholoma are described as new. — E. B. Chamberlain.

205. Rodway, L. Notes and additions to the fungus flora of Tasmania. Papers Proc.
Roy. Soc. Tasmania 1919: 110-116. 1920. — The following new species are described: Hyd-
nangium microsporium, H. densum, Hysterangium atratum, H. obtusum, Secotium ochraceum,
Orbilia crystalina, Spragueola mucida, Paurocotylis niveus, Sphaerosoma tasmanica, Dendro-
dochium molle. — /. H. Faull.

206. Sydow, H., and P. Sydow. Mykologische Mitteilungen. [Mycological announce-
ments.] Ann. Mycol. 17:33-47. 2 fig. 1919. — The following new species and new genera of
fungi are listed: Septobasidium sulphurellum Syd. ; Puccinia Tetranthi Syd. ; Puccinia Halosci-
adis Syd. ; Puccinia Paulsenii Syd. ; Peridermium praelongum Syd. ; Peridermium japonicum
Syd. ; Phaeodimeriella curviseta Syd. ; Asterina diaphorella Syd. ; Titanella Syd. ; Titanella
luzonensis (P. Henn.) Syd.; previously described as Julella luzonensis P. Henn. ; Titanella
illicina (Syd. et Butl.) Syd. previously described as Pleomassaria ilicina Syd. et Butl. ;
Titanella grandis Syd. previously named Pleomassaria grandis Syd.; and Titanella intermedia
Syd. previously called Julella intermedia Syd. ; Starbaeckiella Syd. ; Starbaeckiella massario-
spora (Starb.) Syd. = (Clypeosphaeria? massariospora Starb.); Starbaeckiella Mangiferae Syd.
= (Resellinia Mangiferae Syd.); Starbaeckiella Elmeri Syd. = (Anthostomella Elmeri Syd.);
Starbaeckiella Bakeriana (Rehm) Syd. = (Clypeosphaeria Bakeriana Rehm); Starbaeckiella
Palaquii (Ricker) Syd. = (Trematosphaeria Palaquii Ricker); Microscypha Syd.; Microscypha
grisella (Rehm) Syd. (Helotium grisellum Rehm); Xenopeltis Syd.; Xenopeltis philippinensis
Syd. illustrated with two figures in the text. — The author adds to this list the names of seven
genera which had to be renamed as follows: Linostoma v. Hoehn to Ophiostoma Syd.; Apio-

No. 1, October, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 29

sporclla Speg. to Apiocarpclla Syd. ; Kricgeria Bres. to Xenogloea Syd. ; Willia E. Chr. Hansen
to Hansenula Syd.; Venturiella Speg. to Ncoventuria Syd.; Chaclopellis Sacc. to Tassia Syd. ;
and Arthrobolryum Rostr. to Gonyclla Syd. — fred C. WerfccnJAin.

207. Thom, Charles, and Margaret B. Church. The identity of Aspergillus oryzae.
[Abstract. ] Abets. Bact. 4 : 3. 1920. — Aspergillus oryzae Ahlburg was described as the yellow-
green mold used in the sake industry of the Orient. As identified by the description of Weh-
mer, it is a species with fairly sharp limits. The Japanese, however, use the same name for
the organism or organisms concerned in the fermentation of soy sauce or shoyu and related
industries. Our collection includes many hundreds of yellow-green strains belonging to this
group, ranging from the culture of A. oryzae distributed by Weiimer to authentic cultures used
in the shoyu fermentation and cultures representing A. Jlavus as interpreted by Brefeld.
The Japanese workers have clearly used the name A . oryzae in their factories and in their experi-
mental work as covering this entire group, although they recognize that the various members
of the group are very different in their appearance and physiological activity. Certain com-
mon characters link this series into a natural group. All show the same markings of stalk
wall and conidial wall. All show the same general arrangement of fruiting parts. All show
a particular yellow coloring matter which is more or less supplemented throughout the group
with a true green. Pronounced differences are found in colony appearance, in shades of color,
in measurements of stalk, vesicle and conidia. Among these the sake organism represents
one extreme, with its long stalks, heads with principally simple sterigmata and large conidia;
Aspergillus parasiticus of Speare is at the other extreme with short stalks and intense green
color. Each strain should be carefully identified either by varietal name or by adequate
description before experimental results using it can be properly valued. The name Asper-
gillus oryzae unmodified should be reserved for the organism of the sake fermentation. —
Members of this group are universally distributed. A. flavus and its allies are consistently
found in the soil and widely distributed in foodstuffs, as shown by our collections from Europe,
Asia and many places in America. A. oryzae in the strict sense is more limited since we have,
only occasionally obtained it from sources other than the Oriental fermentation industries.
— [Authors' abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

208. Torrend, C. Les polyporacees du Bresil. [The Polyporaceae of Brazil.] Broteria
(Ser. Bot.) 18: 23-43. 4 pi. 1920.— A discussion of the Brazilian species of the genus Gando-
derma Karst., as limited by C. G. Lloyd, with a key to the species and notes on 17 species and
many extra-limital forms. The plates are from photographs, illustrating gross characters
only. The forms hemisphaericum, annulatum, and rubellum of G. lucidum are apparently
proposed as new. The series is apparently to be continued. — E. B. Chamberlain.

209. Van der Bijl, P. A. The systematic position of the fungus causing root disease of
sugar cane in Natal and Zululand. South African Jour. Sci. 16: 204-206. 1919.— The fungus
causing root disease of sugar cane in Natal and Zululand is now definitely referred to John-
ston's Himantia stellifera, "the stellate crystal fungus." This fungus also probably occurs
on indigenous grasses in South Africa. Whether the true Marasmius sacchari occurs in South
Africa must remain undecided until the fructifications are collected. — E. M. Doidge.

210. Weston, William H., Jr. Philippine downy mildew of maize. Jour. Agric. Res.
19: 97-122. PI. A and B (col.) and 16-25. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 260.

211. De Wildeman, E. A propos du genre Tetracladium. [The genus Tetracladium.]
Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83: 192-194. 1920— The author insists that this is a true
mycelial fungus and that the name should not be suppressed and put among the synonyms
of Asterothrix. The fungus is widely distributed in northern Europe and is pathogenic,
apparently to hyacinth, and other plants. — E. A. Bessey.

212. Yastjda, Atsushi. Eine neue Art von Pterula. [A new species of Pterula.] Bot.
Mag. Tokyo 34: 15-16. 1920.— Describes as new, Pterula fusispora, from Fukoji mountain,
Kasei-gori, Prov. Harima, Japan. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris.

30 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

213. Anonymous. Disposiciones vigentes sobre el servicio de sanidad vegetal. [Regula-
tions in force relating to the plant sanitation service.] Ofic. Sanidad Veg. Sec. Agric. Com. y
Trab. [Cuba] 32 p. 1919. — This publication contains all quarantine and other regulations
in force in Cuba for the control of injurious insects and plant diseases. An appendix gives a
number of regulations enacted by other countries, which are applicable to plant products of
Cuban origin. — S. C. Bruner.

214. Arango, Rodolfo. Algunas plagas de nuestros cultivos. [Some pests of our culti-
vated crops. Ofic. Sanidad Veg. Sec. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] Bol. 2. 94 p., 23 pi., 20 fig.,
1 map. 1919. — A popular treatise on some of the more common plant diseases and insect pests
occurring in Cuba. The diseases considered are the bud-rot of the coconut (attributed to
Bacillus coli communis) , the Panama disease of bananas (due to Fusarium cubense), and gum-
mosis of the orange (the more common form of which is caused by a species of Phytophthora).
The closing chapters are devoted to spraying operations and notes on tree surgery. — S. C.
Bruner.

215. Ball, E. D., and F. A. Fenton. What per cent of tipburn is caused by the potato
leafhopper? Jour. Econ. Entomol. 13: 218-221. PI. 2. 1920. — Continuation of hopperburn
studies (Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 387). A number of fields of potatoes about Ames, Iowa, were
kept under continuous observation during the entire season. No evidence of "tipburn"
was found in the field until after the nymph generation developed from the over-wintering
leaf-hopper. The amount of burning was found to be proportional to the number of leaf-
hoppers on the particular leaves. In fields where there were no leaf -hoppers "tipburn" did
not appear. — The author gives results of studies with the use of cages to exclude and to include
leaf -hoppers. — A. B. Massey.

216. Belgrave, W. N. C. A wet rot of Para rubber roots. Dept. Agric. Federated Malay
States Bull. 28. 21 p. 9 pi. 1919. — Symptoms of this disease are a wet rotting of diseased
wood, the fungus rapidly entering the heartwood and advancing fastest there; collapse and
decay of the inner bark; the frequent presence of a tough skin-like dark, brownish red myce-
lium mass intimately bound up with the outer bark layers; the absence of obvious mycelial
strands, the presence of small, powdery-looking, yellow pustules; the presence of brown lines
in the wood; the presence of discoloured, light brown areas in the wood. The spread of the
fungus is by contact of roots with diseased material. Fructifications are rare. Originally
determined as Poria hypolateritia (Berk), since found to be Poria pseudoferreus Wak. As
the fungus so rarely fruits, "clean-clearing" an estate is a practical preventative. — T. F.
Chipp.

217. Belgrave, W. N. C. Notes on mycology during 1918. Agric. Bull. Federated Malay
States 7: 141-143. 1919. — The diseases of Para rubber examined in Malaya during 1918 are
discussed.

218. Beumee, C. G. B. Over Bastverwondigen aan den djati. [Bark wounds of teak.]
Mededeel. Proefsta. Boschw. Dept. Landb. Nijverheid en Handel Nederlandsch-Indie' 4:
31-54. PI. 12-17. 1919. — An introductory discussion is given of the tissues which take part
in wound healing. Among the causes of injuries which are not followed by regeneration of
the affected tissues are: (1) Fires in teak woods, — these are usually ground fires rather than
crown fires. (2) Theft of bark, — buffalo herders take strips of bark to use for cord or rope.
An illustration is given of a tree from both sides of which strips of bark had been taken, with
the result that the intervening wood had entirely rotted away. (3) Felling wounds produced
by felled trees falling against those which remain standing. Injuries are also described due

No. 1, October, 1920] PATHOLOGY 31

to bending by strong wind, quickly followed by the regeneration of the injured tissue. Ten-
sion on the windward side of the trunk results in square breaks in the bark, accompanied by
vertical slits and the separation of a strip of bark from I lie wood. The cambium produces new
bark under this old loose layer, which later falls off. In one case new tissue was also formed
on the inner surface of the loosened bark. False annual rings ascribed to wind bending are
illustrated by photographs. — F. Cramer.

219. Bioelow, W. D. Heat penetration in canned foods. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4:
11. 1920. — A pyrometer was described adapted to use in commercial canning plants in deter-
mining the temperature of the center of sealed cans. Heating curves were shown giving the
relative heat penetration of typical foods and illustrating the influence of consistency of the
product, initial temperature, and size of cans, on heat penetration. The use of rotating ster-
ilizing machines was also discussed and the influence of different speeds of rotation of the can
on the heat penetration was shown by means of appropriate curves. [Author's abst. of paper
read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

220. Brandes, E. W. Artificial and insect transmission of sugar-cane mosaic. Jour.
Agric. Res. 19: 131-138. 1920.— Mosaic disease of sugar-cane was communicated to healthy
plants in greenhouses near Washington by hypodermic injections, at growing points, of
expressed juice from diseased plants. — A-phis maidis also proved to be a carrier of the virus.
Seed transmission is not definitely established. — D. Reddick.

221. Chipp, T. F. A host index of fungi of the Malay Peninsula. Gardens' Bull. Straits
Settlements 2 : 231-23S. 1920.— An alphabetical index of hosts, with all fungi hitherto recorded
for them in Malaya. — T. F. Chipp.

222. Chipp, T. F. The fungus flora of Hevea brasiliensis. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settle-
ments 2 : 186-192. 1920.— An enumeration of all fungi recorded in Malaya for the Para rubber
tree; 67 species are mentioned. — T. F. Chipp.

223. Clinton, G. P. Inspection of phaenogamic herbaria for rusts on Ribes sp. Connecti-
cut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214: 423^27. 1916-1917.— Specimens of Ribes, includ-
ing Grossularia, from 8 eastern and 3 western herbaria were examined. No light wras thrown
on the early occurrence of Cronortium ribicola, but information was obtained on distribution
of three other rusts in U. S. A. These are Aecidium Grossulariae, Coleosporium ribicola and
Puccinia Ribes. The distribution of each is given. — Henry Dorsey.

224. Clinton, G. P., and L. F. Harvey. Co-operative potato spraying in 1917. Con-
necticut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214: 411-420. 1917.— These were potato-spraying
experiments in which 4-4-50 Bordeaux mixture was applied. Hot weather on three days
the last of July and the first of August prematurely killed the vines in August in two fields
and injured them in two more fields. Trampling the vines in one field caused positive
injury before there was time for effect of spraying to show. — Two fields were benefited about
enough to pay expenses. In a fourth field there was an increase of 18 bushels. In the fifth
field the increase due to spraying was 95 bushels, which was very much in excess of cost. —
Henry Dorsey.

225. Clinton, G. P., and Florence A. McCormick. Infection experiments of Pinus
strobus with Cronartium ribicola. Connecticut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214:
428-459. PL 37-43. 1916-1918.— The history of the introduction of the disease into the
state is given. Various' attempts to infect stems, buds and leaves are described, the inocula-
tions being made with plants in Petri dishes, in greenhouses, under tents and in the open.
One-, two-, and three-year seedlings were tested. — The results of the inoculations indicate that
infection occurs from late summer to late fall through the leaves only. Inconspicuous, yellow-
ish spots are produced at the point of infection. These become apparent in the following
early summer. Later there is invasion of the stem causing slight swelling and discoloration.

32 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

Pycnia may develop. Swelling of the stem proceeds in the third year, with pycnial develop-
ment during the summer. If pycnia were formed the previous year, aecial formation occurs
in the spring. — Henry Dorsey.

226. Coons, G. H. Botanical Department notes. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Quart. Bull.
2 : 70-75. Fig. 3-6. 1919. — Brief popular notes on winter handling of potatoes, Jonathan fruit
spot and bitter pit of apple. Progress of barberry campaign is shown by tables. — E. A.
Bessey.

227. De Wildeman, E. A propos du genre Tetracladium. [The genus Tetracladium.]
Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83: 192-194. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 211.

228. Dickson, James G., and Helen Johann. Production of conidia in Gibberella sau-
binetii. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 235-237. 1 fig. 1920. — Repeated and abundant crops of
conidia may be produced in short periods of time from ascospores, sporodochia conidia,
vegetative conidia, or mycelium, when favorable moisture and temperature conditions obtain.
This ability of the wheat-scab organism, to produce an abundance of virulent spores in
short periods of time, has an important bearing on epiphytotics. — D. Reddick.

229. Doidge, Ethel M. The eradication of citrus canker. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of
South Africa 1 : 124-134. 1920. — This is a tabular statement of the progress of the campaign
for the eradication of citrus canker. There are now only three farms in the Rustenburg and
Pretoria districts on which it is expected that canker may recur. — E. M. Doidge.

230. Elliott, Charlotte. Halo-blight of oats. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 139-172. PI. C

(col.) and 26-35. 1920. — Disease is practically confined to oats (Avena) but has been found on
rye (Secale) and was produced artificially on wheat (Triticum) and barley (Hordeum). Dis-
ease appears under conditions unfavorable for growth of host. "Only under particularly
favorable weather conditions does the blight develop sufficiently to attract attention or to do
serious damage." — Typical lesions are 0.5 to 2 cm. in diameter and are characterized by halo-
like margins of chlorotic tissue about a center of dead tissue. A white organism Bad. corona-
faciens, n. sp., is responsible for the disease. The organism is described and cultural charac-
ters presented in detail. Group number, 221.2323023. — A variant strain is described briefly.
A yellow motile rod, found commonly on oats, is described, without name, and its cultural
characters presented; group number, 221.3333533; non-pathogenic to oats. — Bact. corona-
faciens persists on seed. Formaldehyde treatment (1:320) "as for smut" does not entirely
control the disease and hot-air treatment for 30 hours at 100° is not effective. — The organism
is practically confined to the center of the lesion and the halo is probably caused by a diffusible
substance, perhaps ammonia. — An extended discussion of and comparison with other bac-
terial diseases of cereals is included. [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 610.] — D. Reddick.

231. Elliott, John A. Field diseases of sweet potatoes in Arkansas. Arkansas Agric.
Exp. Sta. Ext. Circ. 90: 20-28. PI. 1-2. 1920.

232. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. Quarantine on account of
the European corn borer and other dangerous insects and plant diseases. Notice of quarantine
No. 41, with regulations. Serv. and Reg. Announcem. 67. P. 27-28. 1920. [Also issued as
unnumbered pamphlet from Office of Secretary of Agriculture.] — Of the following plants no
stalks or other parts, whether used for packing or for other purposes, in the raw or unmanu-
factured state are permitted entry into U. S. A. : maize (Zea mays), broom corn (Andropogon
sorghum var. technicus) , sweet sorghums and grain sorghums (A. sorghum), sudan grass (A.
sorghum sudanensis), Johnson grass (A. halepensis), sugar jcane (Saccharum officinarum),
pearl millet (Pennisetum glaucum), napier grass (P. purpureum) , teosinte {Euchlaena tuxur-
ians), and Job's tears (Coix lachryma-jobi). Exceptions are sorghum hay from Canada and
clean shelled or threshed grain. Permission may be secured to import broom corn but disin-
fection is a condition of entry. — D. Reddick.

No. 1, October, 1920] PATHOLOGY 33

233. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agbic. Quarantine against corn or
maize from Mexico. Notice of quarantine, No. 42, with regulations. Serv. and Reg.
Announcem. 67. P. 15-17. 1920. [Also issued as unnumbered pamphlet, from Office of the
Secretary of Agriculture.] — Maize (grain) from Mexico is prohibited entry into U. S. A. except
under regulations, which are stated, and which are designed to prevent introduction of pink
bollworm of cotton with it. — D. Reddick.

234. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. Stocks, cuttings, scions
and buds of fruits quarantine. Notice of quarantine No. 44. Serv. and Reg. Announcem. 67.
P. 83-34- 1920. [Also issued as unnumbered pamphlet from Office of Secretary of Agricul-
ture.]— Vegetative parts of fruits generally are prohibited entry into the United States
from Asia, Japan, Philippine Islands, and Oceania, including Australia and New Zealand.
The following diseases are mentioned specifically: Japanese apple cankers (Valsa mali and
Diaporthe mali), blister blight (Taphrina piri), and rusts {Gymnosporangium koreaense and
G. photiniae). — D. Reddick.

235. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. Sterile packing material for
packing of bulbs authorized. Serv. and Reg. Announcem. 67. P. 34-35. 1920. — Plant quar-
antine 37, making "freedom from soil, etc." a condition of entry into the United States, is
amended to allow the use of subsoil from Japan, dune sand from Holland, coral sand from
Bermuda, and ground peat. Official certificates must be used. Such materials are deemed
sterile so far as diseases and insects are concerned. — D. Reddick.

236. Fulton, H. R. Decline of Pseudomonas citri in the soil. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:
207-234. 1920. — Tests on many types of soil, including representative ones from the citrus
regions, show a very rapid decline of P. citri in all, reaching the vanishing point in 14 days.
This decline is retarded slightly by rendering the soil slightly alkaline with lime water, by
lowering its temperature, and more decidedly by withholding water or by previous sterilization
with steam. The organism persists in limited numbers for over a year in air dry soil but dis-
appears promptly on the addition of water. The decline, on the other hand, is hastened by
the addition of dilute sulfuric acid or by a moderate increase in temperature. It is more rapid
in water than in soil but is prolonged decidedly in sterilized water. The organism easily
penetrates the soil to depths of ordinary cultivation but the normal decline seems to occur
at such depths. — Certain bacteria found commonly in soils have a marked inhibiting effect
on P. citri in culture and probably are concerned with its decline in soil. — Young roots of grape-
fruit seedlings are not readily infected except through wounds. — Rigid experimental methods
for making the determinations were developed and tested. They are described in detail. —
D. Reddick.

237. Gochenour, W. S., and Hubert Bunyea. The filtration of colloidal substances
through bacteria-retaining filters. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 2. 1920. — "The technic in-
volved in the filtration of raw meat juice is: The meat juice is first cleared of coarser particles
by centrifugalization, and is then mixed with a small amount of kieselguhr and again centrif-
ugalized. The supernatant fluid is drawn off, mixed with a sufficient amount of kieselguhr
to make a paste approximating the consistency of a thin gruel, and poured directly over the
filter candle. Best results are obtained by using a minimum amount of vacuum. It is there-
fore helpful to place the filter candle upright in a mantle, allowing gravitation to minimize
the amount of vacuum necessary to draw the material through the filter candle into the vacuum
flask. The filtration process should immediately follow centrifugalization. The finally
filtered product is capable of complete coagulation. Milk, hemolized erythrocytes and other
colloids can be rapidly filtered by this process." [From authors' absts. of paper read before
Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick.

238. Hartwell, Burt L. Thirty-first annual report of the Director of the Rhode Island
Agricultural Experiment Station. Bull. Rhode Island State Coll. 14: 57-65. 1919.— See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 15.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 1

34 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

239. Hartwell, Burt L., and S. C. Damon. A field comparison of hydrated lime with
limestone of different degrees of fineness. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 180. 18 p.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 16.

240. Hartwell, Burt L., F. R. Pember, and G. E. Merkle. The influence of crop plants
on those which follow. II. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 176. 47 p. 1919.— See Bot.
Absts 6, Entry 18.

241. Johnston, J. R. La enfermedad "mosaico" de la cafia de azucar. [The mosaic dis-
ease of sugar cane.] Ofic. Sanidad Veg. Sec. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] Circ. 6. 11 p., 3 pi.
(colored), 2 jig. 1919. — The author gives a description of the disease together with a brief
discussion of its cause, the damage occasioned, varieties of cane attacked, control, and known
distribution in Cuba and other countries. The following recommendations are made: (1)
That only carefully selected healthy seed be used. (2) On buying seed cane from a distant
locality, obtain a certificate from the Office of Plant Sanitation, which guarantees the said
cane to be free from infection. (3) Any person desiring to obtain cane for seed from a foreign
country for experimental purposes, should request this through mediation of the Department
of Agriculture, Commerce and Labor, in accordance with the decree of the Secretary of Agri-
culture dated July 16, 1919. This decree prohibits the importation of sugar cane from all
countries, except that consigned to the Department of Agriculture and intended for experi-
mental purposes, as well as the transportation within the national territory of cane from
infected zones to other localities. — S. C. Bruner.

242. Koch, L. Uitkomsten van een proef met het gebruik van "gedegenereerde" cassave-
bibit. [Results of a trial with the use of degenerated cassava cuttings.] Korte Ber. Selectie-
en Zaadtuinen voor Rijst en andere eenjarige Inlandsche Landbouwgew., Dept. Landb. Nij-
verheid en Handel [Buitenzorg] 12: 1-5. Feb., 1919. — Varieties of cassava imported into East
Java from West Java (with moist climate) were reported to degenerate and a trial was made
at the Plant Breeding Station for Annual Crops at Buitenzorg to compare the value for propa-
gation of these totally degenerated cuttings with cuttings of the same variety that had been
grown for more than ten years at Buitenzorg. Although the cuttings were made from a degen-
erated crop no difference at all was found between the yields of the degenerated and the nor-
mal cassava. The degeneration may result in very low yields. The following percentages
indicate the approximate yield of cuttings of several "generations:" — Import, 100; 1st gener-
ation, 80; 2nd gen., 65; 3rd gen., 50; 4th gen., 37; 5th gen., 35. In some cases the percentage
for the 5th generation was only 20-30. — L. Koch.

243. Kornauth K., and A. Wober. Versuche zur Bekampfung des roten Brenners
und des echten Mehltaues der Reben im Jahre 1917. [Investigations on control of grape diseases
caused by Pseudopeziza tracheiphila and Oidium.] Zeitschr. landw. Versuchsw. Osterr. 21:
295-312. 1918. — (1) Red leafburn. Treatments made in the spring and at "regular intervals."
Bordeaux mixture (1.5 per cent) gave best results. "Bosnapasta" (1.5 per cent) gave nearly
as good results. Peroxide (3 per cent) was not so good and lime-sulfur solution (2 per cent
by volume) was worthless. Sulfur combined with Bordeaux mixture added nothing. (2)
Downy mildew. Soda solution and "antifungin" injured the foliage. Gray sulfur (trade
name, "Kreide") gave the most slight odor and taste of tar oil but this disappeared in fer-
mentation ; in this respect "melior" and calcium sulfid were worse. Potassium-permanganate-
lime mixture gave satisfactory control but sodium thiosulfate proved worthless, as did
limesulfur solution, "antifungin" and soda solution. [Through abst. by Matouschek in:
Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 29: 262. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

244. Labrie, L'abbe. Curueux cas d'implantation de cuscute au sommet d'un arbre.
[Curious case of implantation of Cuscuta to the top of a tree.] Actes. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux
(Proces-verbaux) 69: 57-60. 1915-16. —Cuscula minor D.C., which is usually parasitic on
clover, sedges, and grasses, was in one instance found in the top of Viburnum tinus L., three
meters from the ground. — W. H. Emig.

No. 1, October, 1920] PATHOLOGY 35

245. Lee, H. Atherton. Behavior of the citrus-canker organism in the soil. Jour. Agric.
Res. 19: 189-205. PL 36-37. I920.—Paeudomonaa citri multiplies in sterilized .soil Imt in
competition with the usual soil organisms in tubes or boxes commonly <loes not persist for
more than 6 days. Its survival is even shorter in the soil of the orchard. — Cankers were pro-
duced in mature wood and in roots of citrus. The organism may persisl for a long time in
cankers on roots, buried wood and leaves. — D. Reddick.

246. Mitchell, D. T. Poisoning of cattle by feeding on old mealie lands. Jour. Dept.
Agric. Union of South Africa 1: 138-143. 1920. — The feeding of oxen with cobs infected with
Diplodia zeae produced in experimental animals a condil inn which was indistinguishable from
that occurring in animals which gained access to old mealie lands, and a similar condition could
be set up by feeding on a culture of Diplodia zeae grown on sterile maize. The intensity of
the symptoms and the mortality depend upon the quantity fed and on the percentage of infec-
tion present in the grain. Cultures of allied species of fungi grown on maize are incapable
of setting up similar clinical symptoms. The causal factor is not the fungus itself, but must
be looked for in the material which is formed as a result of the interaction of Diplodia zeae,
during its development, with the starchy content of the maize grains. — E. M. Doidge.

247. Newell, Wilmon. Citrus canker eradication. Report of the Plant Commissioner
for the biennium ending April 30, 1918. Florida State Plant Bd. Quart, Bull. 3 : 36-44. 1919.
— An account is given of citrus-canker (Pseudomonas citri) eradication work during 1917
and 1918, with tables and charts showing the scope, progress and expenditures of the work. —
C. D. Sherbakoff.

248. Newell, Wilmon. Report of the Plant Commissioner for the biennium ending
April 30, 1918. Florida State Plant Bd. Quart. Bull. 3 : 82-85. 1919.— A brief report on the
work of R. A. Jehle with citrus canker (Pseudomonas citri) at Redland, Dade County, Florida.
In this work, by inoculation experiment, it was found that of many hosts tried only "wild
lime" (Zanthoxylwn fagara) is susceptible to the disease. The work showed also that of the
many methods suggested by various parties for citrus-canker control none but prompt and
complete destruction of the infected trees, coupled with rigid disinfecting measures, is of any
value. — C. D. Sherbakoff.

249. Peglion, Vittorio. Intorno al comportamento di alcune varieta di frumento rispetto
alia carie. [Behavior of wheat varieties with respect to bunt.] Atti. R. Accad. Lincei [Roma]
Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 282 : 398-400. 1919.— Fields of wheat in some localities were
found affected with Tilletia caries (D.C.) Tul., others with T. laevis Kiihn and others with
both. In infection tests with different wheat varieties, the percentage of spikes affected
varied from 33.6 per cent (Cologna variety) to 74.1 per cent (Romanello variety). — F. M.
Blodgett.

250. Pole-Evans, I. B. Report on cold storage conditions for export fruit at Capetown.
Union of South Africa Dept. Agric. Ann. Rept. 1918: 1-8. 8 fig. 1919.— This is a report on
the occurrence of Penicillium expansum, P. digitatum, and P. italicum in cold storage cham-
bers at Capetown and on steam-boats. — E. M. Doidge.

251. Potterill, V. A. A new apple tree canker. South African Jour. Sci. 16: 256-271.
PI. 21-30. 6 fig. 1919. — A fungus belonging to the genus Botryosphaeria has been found to
be the cause of a rather serious canker of apple trees at the Vereeniging Estates. An account
is given of its morphology and its salient cultural characters, and of a number of inoculation
experiments which were carried out. The characters of the fungus are compared with those
of Physalospora cydoniae, the cause of the New York apple-tree canker from which it is con-
sidered to be distinct. The fungus is described as a new species, Botryosphaeria mali
Putterill— E. M. Doidge.

252. Roberts, Herbert F. Yellow-berry in hard winter wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18:
155-169. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 32.

36 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. IV,

253. Sanders, J. G., and D. M. DeLong. Dust versus spray for control of some cherry
pests in Pennsylvania. Jour. Econ. Entomol. 13: 208-210. 1920. — Pests under consideration
were curculio, slug and leaf spot. Materials used were sulphur-arsenate-of-lead dust (90-10),
lime-sulphur spray (1-40), lime-sulphur-arsenate-of-lead dust (50-45-5), Bordeaux spray
(3-3-50 to 1 pound arsenate of lead). Short discussions with results are given. — A. B. Massey.

254. Spragg, F. A., and E. E. Down. Rust resisting sunflowers. Michigan Agric. Exp.
Sta. Quart. Bull. 2: 128-129. 1 fig. 1920. — Of four varieties of sunflower (Helianthus annuus)
cultivated in 1918 for a variety test, a South American variety, Kaeurpher, was nearly rust-
resistant, the other three being killed before the close of the season. — E. A. Bessey.

255. Stevens, H. E. The potato wart disease. Florida State Plant Bd. Quart. Bull. 3:
116-120. 1919.

256. Stirling, Frank. Citrus canker eradication. Florida State Plant Bd. Quart Bull.
3:122-123,134-135. 1919. Ibid. 4: 14-15, 35-36. 1920.— Tabular statement of progress of
the work of eradicating citrus canker (Pseudomonas citri). — C. D. Sherbakoff.

257. Strampelli, Nazareno. Esperienze intorno alia carie (Tilletia Caries) del fru-
mento. [Experiments with stinking smut in wheat.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei [Roma) Rend.
(CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 282: 151-153. 1919. — Having noticed that different varieties of
wheat were differently affected by stinking smut, the author tested the susceptibility of a
number of varieties by planting the seed in furrows thoroughly sprinkled with smut spores.
The percentage of healthy plants in the different varieties ranged from 0 to 45. The influence
of the position of the spores in the soil with relation to the wheat seed was also tested. Only
when the spores were in the same soil layer with the wheat did any considerable infection
occur. — F. M. Blodgett.

258. Traverso, G. B. Gelate tardive ed infezione di rogna degli olivi nel 1919. [Late
frosts and infection of olives by scab in 1919.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 463^184. Fig. 1-7.
1919. — The author describes the condition of olive plantings of various ages and in various
localities in Italy, after a season characterized by late frosts. The organism responsible for
the diseased condition is the well-known Bacillus oleae (B. savastanoi), but the extremely
severe attacks of the season must be ascribed to the effects of freezing in affording avenues
of entrance. The author recommends heavy pruning and treatment with Lotrionte's ferro-
calcic mixture (ferrous sulphate 5 kgm., hydrated lime 10 kgm., water 100 1.). Bordeaux mix-
ture with the addition of some disinfecting substance such as lysoform, phenol or formalin
(1.5-2 per cent) is also recommended. — A. Bonazzi.

259. Van der Bijl, Paul A. Preliminary studies on some fungi and bacteria responsible
for the deterioration of South African sugars. Union of South Africa Dept. Agric. Sci. Bull.
12: 1-32. Fig. 1-14. 1920. — A brief characterization is given of fungi isolated from sugar
samples; all are able to invert sucrose to some extent, and with one exception grew in solu-
tions of 63 Brix concentrations. The resistance of the fungi to disinfectants was also tested.
A similar series of experiments was also carried out with a number of bacteria isolated from
sugar samples. The ability of these organisms to grow on sugar is largely dependent on the
moisture content and temperature of the store-houses and mills. Formalin, chloride of lime
and milk of lime appear to be the most suitable disinfectants. — E. M. Doidge.

260. Weston, William H., Jr. Philippine downy mildew of maize. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:
97-122. PI. A and B (col.) and 16-25. 1920. — Disease is prevalent and often very destructive
throughout Philippine Islands. Teosinte (Euchlaena luxurians) and sorghum (Andropogon)
as well as maize (Zea) are affected, but sorghum is highly resistant. Native, wild grasses
have not been found affected — "Symptoms of the disease may appear from the time the plants
are seedlings with three or four leaves to the time the tassels and silk are developed. In gen-
eral, infected plants show a yellowing of the leaves in more or less restricted striped areas, a

No. 1, October, 1920] PATHOLOGY 37

whitish down of conidiophores, principally on the leaves, abnormalities in growth of the vege-
tative parts, and abortive development of the ear, resulting in partial or complete sterility.
These effects of the disease are described and illustrated." — The disease is caused by Sclero-
spora philippincnsis n. sp. which is fully described and illustrated. 8. maydis of Reinking
is a synonym. Oospores have not been observed. The fungus is compared critically with
other oriental Sclerosporae. — Conidia are produced abundantly at night; they germinate
promptly by production of a tube and at temperatures between 6.5° and 25°. Desiccated
conidia lose their vitality. — An undescribed species of Sclcrospora, producing only oospores,
has been found on Saccharum spontaneum, a common wild grass. — D. Reddick.

2G1. Winslow, C.-E. A., and I. S. Falk. A contribution to the mechanism of disinfection.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 2. 1920. — "The view of Chick and other earlier workers that the
rate of dying of bacteria follows the orderly course of a monomolecular reaction has recently
been challenged by Brooks, who shows that in the case of hemolysis of blood cells and infer-
entially in the case of bacterial death, the logarithmic values corresponding to the number
of surviving cells do not lie on a straight line. He concludes that the shape of the curve is
dependent essentially upon two independent variables; (1) the velocity at which the physico-
chemical changes are going on in the protoplasm of the cells; and (2) the variations in resist-
ance of the individual cells to the toxic substances present. — From somewhat exhaustive stud-
ies of the rate of mortality of colon bacilli in water and salt solutions we are able to confirm
Brooks' conclusion as to the shape of the curve, since we find the rate of reduction is suf-
ficiently slow to permit of careful observation we do obtain an inflected curve rather than a
straight line. — We believe, however, that these results can be explained more simply without
Brooks' postulate of a specific factor, by the following assumptions: — That the death of a
cell is due to a reaction A — >M and a reaction M — >B. Each of these reactions is of a mono-
molecular order (and there are probably many more than two; but two will serve for our argu-
ment). The velocity of the second reaction at any time is dependent upon the concentration
of M, and hence, is dependent upon the velocity of the first reaction. Disinfectants and toxic
substances accelerate one or the other of these reactions, and hence lead more rapidly to death.
Differences in the ages of the individual cells, we may consider, are accompanied by differ-
ences in the concentration of one or the other substance, — and these differences determine
the velocity of the toxic reaction. Since the velocity of a reaction is always dependent upon
the concentration of reacting substances, such variations from monomolecular reaction
curves as have been observed in studies of disinfection, hemolysis, and other processes are
easily explained quantitatively by the assumption of two, dependent, monomolecular reac-
tions; of different rate; and exactly such curves are figured by Mellor in his 'Chemical
Dynamics and Statics.'" — [Authors' abst. of paper read before Soc. Amer. Bact.]

262. Wober, A. Versuche zur Bekampfung des roten Brenners der Reben im Jahre 1918.
[Investigations in the control of red leaf burn of grape in 1918.] Allgem. Weinzeitg. 36: 9-10.
1918. — Reports use of a number of proprietary compounds for control of leaf burn, caused by
Pseudopeziza tracheiphila, in Austria Winter treatment with 40 per cent ferrous sulfate gives
better results than the use of 10 per cent sulfuric acid, but winter treatment must be supple-
mented with summer spraying. — Of the various standard and proprietary mixtures tested
Bordeaux mixture and "Bosna" were best. [Through abst. by Matouschek in: Zeitschr.
Pflanzenkr. 29: 263. 1919 (1920).]— D. Reddick.

263. Wolff, W. H. Influence of the prevention of leaf blight on the growth of nursery
cherries and pears. Amer. Nurseryman 316: 110. 1920.

38 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. IV,

PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY

Heber W. Youngken, Editor
E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor

264. Bardie, A. Quelques notes sur la Physalis Alkekengi dans la Gironde. [Notes
concerning Physalis Alkekengi L.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux) 69: 39-47.
1915-16. (Received May, 1920.)

265. Cauda, A. L'essenza di senape nei vegetali. [The mustard-oil content of plants.]
Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52 : 544-548. 1919. — The physiological function of allylisothiocyanate
is not as yet known, but indications are that the content of a plant in this compound is not
only characteristic of the species but much dependent on the environment. The close relation
of the mustard oil and the cyanic acid group is indicative of the great importance these com-
pounds play in the physiology of plants. According to Gola the more sterile the environment,
the greater the content of cyanic acid, and to this may be added that the more sterile the envir-
onment the greater the content of mustard oil. If to all the plants known to contain cyanic
acid were to be added all those known to contain mustard oil, the following list would be
compiled: the Si?iapis, Cheiranthus Cheirei L., Lepidium Draba L., Brassica napus L., Rapha-
nus sativus L., Raphanus raphanistrum L., Sisymbrium alliaria, Nasturtium officinale L,,
Lepidium sativum, Cochlearia armoracia, Reseda lutea L., Reseda luteola L., Capparis spinosa,
various species of Acacia, Thlaspi arvense, Asparagus officinale and various species of Ery-
simum. Analysis of seeds of several among these genera led the author to conclude that the
plants grown in southern climates gave seeds having a smaller percentage of oil than seeds
from plants grown in more northern localities. This, he assumes, indicates incomplete trans-
formation of albuminoids which are then not assimilated completely in those places where
the vegetation of the plant is not fully accomplished. Seeds from plants growing wild in the
north of Italy had a higher mustard-oil content than seeds from plants cultivated in Sicily;
cultivation seems therefore to diminish the mustard-oil content of the plants, although the
seeds from these same southern plants under cultivation have a greater fat content. In seeds
and sections of plants the author could find specialized cells (such as were pointed out by
Guignard) within which there was a localization of myrosin which acts on potassium myro-
sinate with the formation of the isothiocyanate of allyl according to the following equation:
Cu&eNKSjO.+ HsO-CeHiiOB + CsHsNCS + HKSO*. The number and size of these cells
tends to diminish in etiolated leaves. Seeds of Sinapis nigra contained 0.294 per cent of
mustard oil, while green seedlings (air dry) contained 0.280 per cent, and air dry etiolated
seedlings contained 0.170 per cent. A method is described for the determination of the
mustard-oil content by oxydation with bromine water and the weighing of the sulphate
radical as barium sulphate. The apparatus used is also described. — A. Bonazzi.

266. Chodat, R. Etudes faites au jardin alpin de la "Linnaea." I. Sur quelques faits
de botanique et de geographie economique a Bourg-Saint Pierre. [Observations made at the
alpine garden of Linnaeus. I. Concerning certain things of economic value related to botany
and geography at Bourg-Saint Pierre.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11 : 30-11. 1919.— See Bot. Absts.
6, Entry 9.

267. Fuller, H. C. Report on alkaloids. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 379.
1920. — Report of progress on atropin and strychnin determination. — F. M. Schertz.

268. Haslett, J. P. Plants used as ingredients in the manufacture of country spirits in
Southal Pargavas. Indian Forester 45: 530-531. 1919. — Twenty-five species of native Indian
plants are given from which spirits are made from the roots and two in which the bark is used.
— E. N. Munns.

269. Jamieson, George S., and Walter F. Baughman. The chemical composition of
cottonseed oil. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1197-1204. 1920.

No. 1, Octobek, 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY 39

270. LlNSBAUBR, L. ZurBekampfung der Kohlweisslinge. [Combating the white cabbage-
butterfly.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 17: 117 119. 1919. French war-prisoners in
Germany, and gardeners in various localities, have been in t lie habit of sticking branches of
the common black older (Sambucus ran »m :«) in the ground between cabbage rows to protect
them against the white cabbage-butterfly. The author successfully tried the same experi-
ment. It has also boon occasionally found that hemp planted with cabbage acts as a protec-
tion against the same butterfly. The effect of hemp is ascribed to odors emitted by the plant
glands; but how elder acts is not known. An effort by the author to spray the cabbage with
a solution obtained by boiling green leaves of black elder proved unsuccessful. — J. Rocser.

271. May, W. L. Whorled milkweed, the worst stock-poisoning plant in Colorado. Colo-
rado Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 255. 39 p., 28 fig. 1920. — Whorled milkweed (Asclepias galioides)
has been shown to be responsible for heavy losses of sheep, cattle, and horses in western and
southwestern Colorado. A detailed description of the plant is given, whereby it may be dis-
tinguished from two very closely related species, Asclepias verticillala and Asclepias pumila.
The geographical distribution of the weed in Colorado, its habitat, and methods of distribu-
tion are discussed, also methods of eradication. — W. G. Sackett.

272. Nelson, E. K. The composition of oil of chenopodium from various sources. Jour.
Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1204-1208. 1920.

273. Nord, F. F. Der Acetaldehyd in der Natur, Ergebnisse des Abfangverfahren. [Acet-
aldehyde in nature. Methods of isolation.] Naturwiss. 7: 685-687. 1919.

274. Sctjrti, F., and C. E. Zay. Distillazione della lolla di riso con acidi condensati per
la preparazione dei solventi dell'acetilcellulosa. [The distillation of rice chaff with concentrated
acids for the preparation of acetylcellulose solvents.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 278-290. 1919.
— In view of the facts that furol, one of the most appropriate solvents of acetylcelluloses, is
not easily obtained, and that pentosans yield it under treatment with concentrated acids,
according to the formula C5Hi0O5 = 3H20 4- C4H3O.COH, the authors utilized the large
amounts of pentoses in rice chaff. The production and distillation of furol is done in a con-
stant level still in which the ratio chaff : acid: distillate is 1:10:10, when the acid used is 30
per cent H2SOi at the start. When three parts of distillate have passed over, the constant
level apparatus is stopped and the acid allowed to concentrate to 50 per cent when the distilla-
tion is continued. When four more parts of distillate are collected furol formation has ceased
but there is an increase in acidity due to the formation of acetic acid, which can be recovered
by additional distillation and concentration. Distillation of the dilution thus obtained, in
presence of NaOH, with formation of NaC2Hs02, and additional distillation of the distillate
obtained in presence of NaCl gave the furol in a concentrated solution. The yields obtained
were 40 grams furol, 110 grams NaC2H302 and 650 grams of carbonaceous material, from 1
Kg. of chaff. The H2S04, recovered in a concentration of 50 per cent, is well suited to the
manufacture of perphosphates. The carbonaceous matter obtained has a calorific value of
3300 (Mahler).— A. Bonazzi.

275. Smith, F., and C. T. White. An interim census of cyanophoric plants in the Queens-
land flora. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 30: 84-90. 1918. — Of the plants listed in this paper
13 are grasses, 10 are native ferns and 9 belong to the natural order Proleaceae. Passiflor-
aceae and Droseraceae are also prominently cyanogenetic families. The order Chenopodiales
has not been previously recorded as containing any cyanophoric plant. Twenty-two plants
are recorded for the first time as yielding hydrocyanic acid. Several of the plants recorded
are of economic importance in relation to the poisoning of stock. — J. H. Faull.

276. Wilson, E. H. Camphor, Cinnamomum Camphora Nees & Ebermaier. Jour. Arnold
Arboretum 1 : 239-242. 1920. — An account of the camphor industry of eastern Asia and par-
ticularly that of Formosa is given. — Alfred Rehder.

40 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. Skinner, Editor
F. M. Schertz, Assistant Editor

ACIDITY AND HYDROGEN- ION CONCENTRATION

277. Blair, A. W., and A. L. Prince. The lime requirement of soils according to the
Veitch method compared with the hydrogen-ion concentration of the soil extract. Soil Sci. 9:
253-259. 2 fig. 1920. — Determinations were made of the lime requirement by the Veitch
method and of the hydrogen-ion concentration of the soil extract by a colorimetric method,
on plots of Sassafras loam to which varying quantities of limestone had been added. The
hydrogen-ion concentration of the soil extract decreased with increasing applications of lime-
stone, but not necessarily in proportion to the amount of limestone added. A fairly close
correlation exists between the hydrogen-ion concentration of the soil extract and the lime
requirement as determined by the Veitch method. Soils having a PH of 6.7 are alkaline by
the Veitch method. — W. J. Robbins.

278. Demonlon, A. The reaction of soils, its determination and practical significance.
Rev. Sci. 58: 173-177. 1920. — Discussion and general review of work on soil acidity. — R. B.
Deemer.

279. Joffe, Jacob S. Hydrogen-ion concentration measurements of soils in connection
with their "lime-requirements." Soil Sci. 9: 261-266. 2 fig. 1920.— The lime requirement of
soils showing about the same PH values is considerably higher for soils high in organic matter
than for sandy soils. In using the Veitch method a PH value of 6.6-6.8 of the solution before
evaporation indicates that the end point of the lime requirement by the Veitch method has
been reached. — W. J. Robbins.

280. Wherry, Edgar T. The soil reactions of certain rock ferns. I. Amer. Fern Jour.
10: 15-22. 1920.

281. Veitch, F. P. Report on the lime requirement of soils. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric.
Chem. 3: 371-374. 1920.— Report of progress.— F. M. Schertz.

INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

282. Brown, P. E., and W. V. Halversen. Effect of seasonal conditions and soil treat-
ment on bacteria and molds in soil. Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 56: 251-278. 1919. —
This study of the numbers of bacteria and molds in the soils of six differently-treated plots at
the Iowa Agric. Exp. Sta. throughout one full year showed that the bacteria decreased in the
late fall with lowering temperature, until the soil became frozen, when the number rose and
fell with the temperature regardless of the moisture. Upon thawing of the soil, the number
decreased but this was followed by an increase with increasing temperature and a maximum
number was reached on June 19 for all the cultivated plots and on April 12 for the continuous
timothy plot. The maximum counts were obtained on February 12 and June 19 with inter-
vening minimum counts. During the summer and early fall, the bacteria did not develop
parallel with either moisture or temperature. Applications of peat depressed the bacteria,
manure and clover increased the number, while the continuous timothy plot showed the high-
est number, which may have been due to the topography of the plot. — The number of molds
in the soils varied from one sampling to another, but there was no apparent effect of tempera-
ture, moisture, or soil treatment. The actual number of molds ranged from 42,000 to 131,000
per gram of soil, on the average. The number generally amounted to one-fortieth to one-
fiftieth of the bacteria present. There was no apparent relation between the bacteria and
•molds. Three media were used in the work. Albumen agar gave the highest count of bacteria
with modified synthetic agar second and Cook's No. 11 third. In the case of the molds, albu-

No. 1, October, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 41

men agar gave the lowest counts while the other two media gave about the same results. —
Active mold growth was shown in normally cultivated soils by the development of mycelia
from small portions of soil when inoculated into agar plates. The presence of mold spores
in the soil is believed to be important, as it indicates the previous and future development of
active mycelia. There is nothing yet to disprove the idea that molds go through a regular
life cycle in the soil. — P. E. Brown.

283. Gillespie, Louis J. Reduction potentials of bacterial cultures and of water-logged
soils. Soil Sci. 9: 199-216. 4 fig- 1920. — A discussion is given of the quantity factor and
the intensity factor of oxidation and reduction. Oxidation and reduction potentials are
taken as measurements of the intensity factor and the methods used to measure these poten-
tials in bacterial cultures and soils are described. Constant reduction potentials, in value
close to the hydrogen-electrode potentials, were secured for the facultative anaerobe B. coli,
and also for mixed cultures of soil organisms when grown in a deep layer. Measurements of
cultures of aerobes showed progressively increasing reduction potentials with lapse of time,
but in no case did the reduction potential approach the hydrogen-ion potential as closely as
0.3 volt. This may indicate a general difference between anaerobes and aerobes. Soils
treated with excess of water became highly reducing as evidenced by their reduction poten-
tials. At the same time their hydrogen-electrode potentials changed, the soils becoming
less acid. The speed with which the soils became highly reducing varied with the soil, but
the addition of 0.1 per cent of dextrose favored the development of reducing conditions.
"Sourness" of soils includes more than acidity and this residual unfavorable quality may be
a high intensity of reduction. — W. J. Robbins.

284. Keitt, T. E., and A. W. Murray. A new method for rendering insoluble phosphates
available. Georgia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 132 : 47-58. (1919) 1920.— The work was undertaken
to determine the influence of composting commercial organic ammoniates, ground rock phos-
phate and rich soil, on availability of phosphorus content of ground-rock phosphate and on
loss of ammonia from organic ammoniate due to composting. Seven compost heaps were
made, cottonseed meal being the source of ammonia. An attempt was made to maintain these
heaps at 60 per cent of their maximum water-holding capacity. Heaps were covered to cut
down oxygen supply and to reduce the temperature. The tables presented show that part of
the phosphoric acid of raw rock-phosphate may be made available by composting with cotton-
seed meal, some being changed to a water soluble form. — T. H. McHatton.

285. Moore, G. T., and J. L. Karrer. A subterranean algal flora. Ann. Missouri Bot.
Gard. 6:281-307. 1919.

FERTILIZATION

286. Bear, F. E. Adapting fertilizers to soils, farms, crops and climate. Amer. Fertilizer
5213:72h. 1920.

287. Conret, G. W. Soils, soil characteristics and their relation to fertilizer require-
ments. Amer. Fertilizer 52: 106-114. 1920.

288. Wenholz, H. Soil improvement for maize. 1. Manures and fertilizers. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 318-324. 1920.— Discusses potash and lime and residual effect of
fertilizers. — L. R. Waldron.

289. Lewis, C. I., F. C. Reimer, and G. G. Brown. Fertilizers for Oregon orchards.
Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 166. 48 p. 3 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 124.

FERTILIZER RESOURCES

290. Bongiovanni, C. Utilizzazione delle acque ammoniacali del gas come concime.
[The utilization of ammoniacal waters, from the manufacture of gas, as fertilizer.] Staz. Sper.
Agr. Ital. 52: 521-523. 1919. — The description of a method for the preparation of a new fer-

42 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

tilizer by intimate contact of mineral superphosphates with ammoniacal waters in flat pans,
followed by evaporation. On mixing the two substances elimination of C02 occurs, interac-
tion of ammonium carbonate and acid phosphate. The acidity of the perphosphate eliminates
hydrocyanic acid and cyanides, which are generally contained in the ammoniacal waters.
The resulting compound may have, according to the author, the following formula:
Ca(NH4HP04)2 + Ca((NH4)2P04)2. After drying the material is crushed and finally has the
following characters: odorless, non hygroscopic and unalterable, containing 12.58 per cent
P2O5 soluble in citrated water, 3 per cent nitrogen and 12.48 per cent moisture. — A. Bonazzi.

291. Dustman, R. B. Solubility and availability. Amer. Fertilizer 5213: 70-72. 1920.

292. Jenkins, E. H., and E. Monroe Bailey. Fertilizer report for 1919. Connecticut
[New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217: 53-106. 1919.— Analyses of 339 brands of fertilizers
offered for sale in the state are given. — Henry Dorsey.

293. Proulx, E. G. Interpretation of guarantees and analysis. Amer. Fertilizer 5213:
72d-72g. 1920.

294. Waguet, P. A few notes upon chemical fertilizers. Rev. Prod. Chim. 23 : 207-210.
1920. — The world's production of phosphates is shown with a detailed account of the French
phosphate resources and methods of preparing ammonium and tetra phosphate. Sources
and composition of the world's potash deposits are also given. — R. B. Deemer.

INFLUENCE OF SALTS ON SOLUBILITY

295. McCool, M. M., and Millar, C. E. Effect of calcium sulphate on the solubility of
soils. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 47-54. 1920. — Six different soils were treated with a saturated
solution of calcium sulfate. The rate of formation of soluble substances was determined by
means of the freezing-point method. Whether the soil was used as it occurred in nature or
whether soluble substances were first reduced to a minimum by washing with distilled water,
the calcium sulfate treatment resulted in an increase in the rate of formation of soluble sub-
stances. "It seems that it is possible to alter the composition of the soil solution and that
whether such changes will have any effect on plant growth or not or whether the effect will be
favorable or unfavorable will depend upon the nature of the soil and of the substances added."
— Tenth-normal calcium phosphate used in the same way decreased the rate of formation of
soluble substances. When the two are used together the effects of calcium sulfate are counter-
acted to some extent. — From carbon dioxide determinations, it is concluded that the increase
in the rate of formation of soluble substances brought about by treatment with calcium sulfate
is due to something other than increased biological activity. — D. Reddick.

296. Kearney, Thomas H. The relative absorption by the soil of sodium carbonate and
sodium chloride. Soil Sci. 9: 267-273. 1 fig. 1920. — When equal volumes of equal concen-
trations of sodium carbonate and sodium chloride have been allowed to remain in contact
with sand for several hours, the electrical resistance of the same indicates that more sodium
carbonate than sodium chloride has been removed from solution. Conclusions that sodium
carbonate is less toxic to plants than sodium chloride are due to failure to consider this fact. —
W. J. Robbins.

297. Sfttrway, C. H. The effect of fertilizer salts treatments on the composition of soil
extracts. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 45. 18 p. 1919.

MISCELLANEOUS

298. Bauer, F. C. The effect of leaching on the availability of rock phosphate to corn.
Soil Sci. 9: 235-251. 2 pi., 2 fig. 1920. — Corn was grown in quartz sand in pots to which rock
phosphate or acid phosphate and a nutrient solution lacking phosphate were added. Some
of the pots were frequently leached with the nutrient solution. Leaching increased the yield

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 43

of corn with rock phosphate but decreased it with acid phosphate. Leaching with a nutrient
solution containing ammonium nitrate as the source of nitrogen increased the availability of
the rock phosphate as measured by the phosphorus content of the plants. With sodium
nitrate, this was not noted. The solution containing ammonium nit rale also removed more
calcium in the drainage water t ban did t lie sodium nit rate. The effect of leaching in increas-
ing the availability of rock phosphate is explained on the basis of the mass law. — 11'. ./. Robbil

299. Gain, Edmond, and Andhk Gain. Conditions thermiques du sol sous l'influence
de la vegetation locale. [Thermal conditions of the soil under the influence of local vegetation.]
Rev. Gen. Bot. [Paris] 32: 161-164. 1920. A series of measurements showing the degree to
which vegetation of various kinds lowers the temperature of the soil at and below the surface.
The cooling effect, brought about by the evaporation of water and shading from direct sun-
light, varies, in meadows and cultivated fields, from less than 1° to more than 5°. — L. W. Sharp.

300. Mosseri, Victor M. Note sur les depots Nilotiques des gazayers et saouahel
d'Egypte. [Note upon the river deposits upon the islands and the flooded lands along the banks
of the Nile in Egypt.] Bull. Inst. d'Egypte 1 : 151-180. 1919. — In accordance with the propor-
tion of sand and clay which they contain, the deposits are classified as ramleh (sandy), safra
(silico-argilaceous) and soda (argilaceous). On the first only water melons and other cucur-
bitous crops and barley are grown; the second produces barley and wheat; while the third for
the first year, is either left fallow or is planted to berseem (Trifolium alexandrinum) , which
is sown in the mud without preparation; afterwards, it may produce any kind of crop. The
ramleh and safra soils, being very permeable, give up their water very readily as the level of
water recedes from the surface at the time of the low Nile. The soda (or clay) soils, on the
other hand, hold the water much longer. However, when freshly deposited in thick layers
it is almost impossible to prepare or cultivate them. In drying they crack enormously.
Hence only plants with long tap roots (like berseem) are able to survive injuries caused by
cracking and produce profitable crops. At the end of one year, after the fall of the succeed-
ing flood, these soils have largely lost their objectionable features. Their fertility however,
increases for several years, provided no new deposits of great thickness are made upon them.
The defects of these soils are attributed to the large amount of colloidal clay which they con-
tain. Among the causes for their gradual improvement, the author considers most important,
the appearance in the soils of more concentrated solutions of electrolytes capable of coagu-
lating the colloidal clay and thus permitting the loosening of the soil. This concentration of
the soil solutions is due to the capillary rise of the subterranean water and its ultimate evapor-
ation at the surface. The soluble salts of calcium, chiefly chloride, oppose the formation of
carbonate of soda and prevent, by the aeration wdiich they permit, the transformation into
this carbonate of alkaline bicarbonates found so abundant in Egyptian soils, wrhich trans-
formation renders the soil more or less unproductive. — Geo. F. Freeman.

TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS

J. M. Greenman, Editor
E. B. Payson, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

301. Anonymous. [Abstract of: The Thirty-fourth Annual Report of the Watson Botanical
Exchange Club for 1917-1918.] Jour. Botany 57: 314-318. 1919.

302. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Farrer, Reginald. The English rock garden. 2 vol., J+to.
Ixiv -f- 504 and viii + 524 P-, 102 pi. T. C. & E. C. Jack: London and Edinburgh.] Jour.
Botany 57: 354-357. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1792.

303. B., E. G. [Rev. of: Gamble, J. S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras, Part III.
P. 391-575. Adlard & Son.] Jour. Botany 58: 27-28. 1920.

44 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

304. Britton, N. L. Flora of the District of Columbia. [Rev. of: Hitchcock, A. S.,
and P. C. Standley, with the assistance of the botanists of Washington. Flora of the District
of Columbia and vicinity. Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 21: 1-329. 42 pi. 1919.] Torreya
19: 244-246. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1731.

305. Cheesem an, T. F. Contributions to a fuller knowledge of the flora of New Zealand,
No. 6. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 85-92. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
367.

306. Chiovenda, L. Plantae e Catanga a CI. Dr. H. Bovone lectae. [Plants from Catanga
collected by Dr. H. Bovone.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 58-85. 1919. — This paper contains
a detailed Latin description of a number of plants and a list of others collected by Dr. H.
Bovone at Catanga. — Ernst Artschwager.

307. Conard, Henry S. The classification of vascular plants: a review. Plant World
22: 59-71. 1919. — Certain discrepancies between the standard systematic and morphological
texts are discussed, and a classification of the plant kingdom is proposed, which attempts to
bring systematic botany into harmony with the most recent morphological discoveries that
throw light on the relationships of the larger groups to one another. — Charles A. Shull.

308. Conard, H. S. The general classification of higher plants. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci.
25: 237-240. 1920. — The author proposes to divide the plant kingdom into Thallophyta and
Embryophyta, the latter group into Atracheata (Bryophyta) and Tracheata (Vasculares) , the
latter into Lycopsida and Pteropsida, and the last into Aspermae (Filices), Gymnospermae
and Angiospermae. — 77. S. Conard.

309. Coulter, J. M. Flora of the Congo. [Rev. of: Wildeman, E. de. Florae Congo-
lensis. Bull. Jard. Bot. Bruxelles 4: 361-429. 1914. Ibid. 5: 1-108. 1915. Ibid. 5: 109-268.
1916. Ibid. 6:1-129. 35 pi. 1919. Bot. Gaz. 68: 232. 1919.

310. Engler, A. Kurzer Bericht fiber in den letzten zehn Jahren von deutschen Botanik-
ern unternommenen Forschungsexpeditionen nach Afrika und Papuasien. [Short report on
the exploring expeditions in Africa and Papuasia undertaken by German botanists during the
last ten years.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft): 5-32. 1919. — A report read at the twelfth meeting
of the "Freien Vereinigung der Systematischen Botaniker und Pflanzengeographen zu Wiirz-
burg," Aug., 1917. — (7) Botanical exploring expeditions to West Africa, (a) The expedition
of C. Ledermann to North Kamerun and Adamaua. This expedition was absent about one
year in 1908 and 1909. The number of collections reached 6492, and the geographical data
obtained were extensive; the expedition therefore was very important for the region covered,
which had been little visited before. In many cases collections made at the same place both
in the wet and the dry season gave data not before at hand, (b) Expeditions of Dr. Mild-
braed. Three trips were made; the first, from May, 1907, to September, 1908, was through
Central Africa and the Congo Basin. The second, from June, 1910, to March, 1912, extended
through the primitive forest from the mouth of the Congo to Kimuensa, Stanley Pool, Bolobo,
Bongo and Sanaga, to Molundu and to the grasslands of the French border. Mildbraed
finally visited the Island of Annobon where a fine collection of Algae was made. The third
expedition, leaving October, 1913, was to New Kamerun. Many specimens were sent to Ger-
many, and many others were prepared, but failed to reach that country on account of the war.
— (77) Explorations in East Africa, (a) Explorations of Hans Meyer in Urundi and Ruanda.
This expedition started May, 1911. It furnished little new material, as most of the region had
been worked before. A report on this trip has already been made by Meyer, (b) A. Stolz
in north Nyassaland, 1900-1912. His collections contain 2760 species and are on the market.
He was not primarily a traveller but collected mostly in a few localities, (c) Brehmers'
trip in Uluguru, 1913. This expedition was through a rain forest of dense vegetation. The
region is described and it is stated that 1038 specimens were collected. — (777) Explorations
in Southwest Africa. Trip of A. Engler, March-May, 1913. Accompanied by Dinter and

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 45

Runge, Engler travelled through the sandy deserts, rocky steppes, and bush growth of that
region. Vivid descriptions of the vegetation are given. — (IV) Explorations in Papuasia.
Dr. Lauterbach had collected there in 1890-91, 18%, 1899, and 1900. In 1907-09 came the
Guttapercha-Caoutchouc Expedition of the Colonial Committee under B< HLBCHTEB. From
this trip Schlechter reported 11G genera and 1 150 species of orchids, 348 of the latter being
new. To be mentioned also is the Dutch expedition of LoBENTZ and Newbury in 1901, of
which Versteeg was botanist; also the later German expedition of Leonhard Schultze
Jena and Dr. Moskowski. A list is given of the collaborators who have worked on the
Lauterbach and Schlechter material. — A'. .1/. Wiegand.

311. Jeanpert, Ed. Enumeration des plantes recueillies par M. R. Chudeau dans le Sou-
dan. [List of plants collected by M. R. Chudeau in the Soudan.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat.
[Paris] 25: 64-GS. 1919.

312. Jeaxpert, Ed. Enumeration de plantes de Macedoine. [Enumeration of plants of
Macedonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 391-397, 517-523. 1919.— In these, the first
and second papers of a series, the author gives a list of species collected in Macedonia by
several collectors with localities of each species when they are known. — E. B. Payson.

313. Knowlton, C. H., and Walter Deane. Reports on the flora of the Boston District.
— XXXII. Rhodora 22 : 72-75. 1920. — A continuation of the report of the Committee on Local
Flora of the New England Botanical Club. Reported species and their distribution in the
district about Boston, Massachusetts. — James P. Poole.

314. Pampanini, R. L'Erbario di Paolo Boccone conservato a Lione. [The herbarium of
Paolo Boccone at Lyon.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 1-20. 1919.

315. Pampanini, R., and V. Zanon. Nuovo contributi alia conoscenza della Flora della
Cirenaica. [New contribution to the knowledge of the flora of Cirenaica.] Nuovo Gior. Bot.
Ital. 26: 205-221. 1919. — A list of vascular plants, fungi and lichens collected in Bengasi
during 1917 and 1918, reported for the first time were the following: Ephedra campylopoda
C. A. Mey., Roemeria lenuifolia Pamp., sp. n., Ranunculus bullatus L. var. cyrenaicus Pamp.,
var. n. Linaria Haelava Chav. var. cyrenaica Pamp., var. n. — Ernst Artschwager.

316. Pellegrin, Francois. Les collections botaniques recoltees par la Mission de delim-
itation Congo Francais-Cameroun. [The botanical collections made by the Congo French-
Cameroun Mission of delimitation.] Bull. Mus. Hist, Nat. [Paris] 25: 381-386, 506-511. 1919.
— In continuation of a similar list previously published, the author gives a list of plants
collected by the Mission wdth various notes concerning the species. Mostuea Periquetii is
described as a species new to science. — E. B. Payson.

317. Schaffner, John H. Additions to the catalog of Ohio vascular plants for 1919.
Ohio Jour. Sci. 20: 131-136. 1920. — A check list of 72 additions to the State Herbarium gives
their local distribution, various changes in nomenclature and other corrections. — H. D.
Hooker, Jr.

318. Schoolbred, W. A. The flora of Chepstow. 8vo. X + 140 p., 1 map. Taylor and
Francis: London, 1920. — The region covered by this flora is that of the lower part of the Val-
ley of the Wye in South Wales and comprises approximately an area of 100 square miles.
About 1000 species of flowering plants, ferns, and fern-allies are enumerated and 179 species
of mosses supplement this list. The habitat of each species is carefully recorded, but there
are no descriptions nor keys. — J. M. Greenman.

319. Sedgwick, L. J. On the use of the term "variety" in systematics. Jour. Indian
Bot, 1: 120-124. 1919. — The author discusses the problem of "whether the term variety as
used in our floras is applied to one natural phenomenon only," and if not, "whether there is
any way of separating out the various phenomena hitherto confused under the one term,

46 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

and assigning to each a separate term." He points out the following different kinds of varie-
ties, and suggests a nomenclature for each: freaks, to be described separately; geographical
forms, the trinomial system; edaphic forms, "the term varietas followed by the ordinary
ecological term such as xerophytica, halophytica, etc.;" forms of varying life duration, "varie-
tas annua, biennia, etc.;" seasonal forms, "varietas hyemalis, aestivalis, etc.;" pure lines and
elementary species, "varietas Mendeliana, followed by the letters of the Greek alphabet;"
forms of inconstant species and "DeVriesian mutants," "forma is the ultimate unit;" and
hybrids, "the usual multiplication sign." — W infield Dudgeon.

320. Wilson, E. H. The Liukiu Islands and their ligneous vegetation. Jour. Arnold
Arboretum 1 : 171-186. 1920.

PTERIDOPHYTES

321. Bonaparte, R. Les pteridophytes de l'lndo-Chine. Premiere partie. [The Pteri-
dophytes of Indo-China. Parti.] Notes Pteridologiques 7: 1-190. 1919. — This work contains
an analytical key to the families of ferns and fern-allies, and a consideration of the Indo-
Chinese representatives of the families Hymenophyllaceae, Gleicheniaceae, Schizaeaceae,
and Cyatheaceae, with descriptions of the genera and species, keys, and an extended citation
of synonyms and specimens under each species. To the work is appended a list of the ferns
cultivated in the botanical garden at Saigon. No new forms are described. — E. D. Merrill:

322. Copeland, E. B. A few new ferns from Mt. Bulusan. Lead. Philippine Bot. 9:
3107-3111. 1920. — The following ferns from Luzon are described as new: Davallia Elmeri,
Dennstaedtia philippinensis, Cyathea bicolana, C. bulusanensis, and Athyrium ebenirachis.
The genus Haplodictyon as proposed by Presl, long placed as a synonym of Dryopteris, is rein-
stated, and H. majus is described as new. — E. D. Merrill.

323. Dodge, Raynal. Aspidium cristatum X marginale and A. simulatum. Amer.
Fern Jour. 9: 73-80. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 353.

324. Fitzpatrick, T. J. The fern flora of Nebraska. I. Amer. Fern Jour. 10: 5-15.
1920.

325. Holloway, J. E. Studies in the New Zealand species of the genus Lycopodium:
Part III. The plasticity of the species. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51 : 161-261. PL
9-14, 16 fig. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1892.

326. Hopkins, L. S. A crested form of the Lady fern. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 86-88. PI.
4. 1919. — In the summer of 1916 the author found near Windham, Ohio, a crested form of
the Lady fern. He lifted the plant and has it growing at his home in Kent, Ohio. He sug-
gests the name Athyrium angustum var. cristatum var. nov. for this form. — F. C. Anderson.

327. Leonard, Elizabeth J. The genus Taenitis, with some notes on the remaining
Taenitidenae. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 254-273. 1 pi. 1918.— This genus comprises,
at present, but one species, Taenitis blechnoides, Willd. Related genera include Eschato-
gramme, Drymoglossum, Paltonium and Hymenolepsis. The author concludes that all, except
possibly Paltonium, are blechnoid derivatives. — A. E. Waller.

328. Lewis, Charles Smith. The Woodsias of Quechee. Amer. Fern Jour. 10: 23-25.
1920.

329. Maxon, William R. Notes on American ferns. XIV. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 67-73.
1919.— Dicranopteris flexuosa (Schrad.) Underw., the only known representative of the family
Gleicheniaceae in the United States, found in 1914 growing near Delschamps Station in the
Mobile Bay region of Alabama, is probably wiped out of existence by the railroad company
removing the clay bank on which the fern grew. The locality data for Athyrium americanum

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 47

(Butters) Maxon is corrected. Woodwardia Chamissoi Brack and W. spinulosa Mart & Gal.
are compared and the six main points of distinction are listed. Notholaena limitanea Maxon,
sp. nov. and N. limitanea mexicana Maxon, subsp. nov. are described and localities listed.
Distinctive characters of N. dealbata (Pursh) Kunze and N. nivea are also given. — /''. C.
Anderson.

330. Maxox, William R. Notes on American ferns. XV. Amer. Fern Jour. 10: 1-4.
1920. — Of the five species discussed, the range for four of them is extended. One species,
Lycopodium alpinum L., is new for the United States. On examining specimens from Glacier
National Park it seems necessary to regard Polystichum Jenningsi Hopkins as a synonym of
P. Andersoni Hopkins. — F. C. Anderson.

331. Praeger, R. Ll. Asplenium adiantum-nigrum var. acutum. Irish Nat. 28: 13-19.
PI. 2. 1919. — A review of the literature shows that several forms have been confused. Two
main types are here recognized and these are related to certain areas in Ireland and elsewhere.
— W. E. Praeger.

332. Ridley, H. N. The fern-allies and Characeae of the Malay Peninsula. Jour. Roy.
Asiatic Soc. Straits Branch 80: 139-164. 1919. — A descriptive consideration of the groups
indicated, Lycopodium with 13 species, Psilolum with 2, Selaginella with 37; Azolla with 1;
Marsilea with 1; Nitella with 3, and Chara with 1. The following species of Selaginella are
described as new: S. Curtisii, S. selangorensis Bedd., S. calcarea, S. strigosa Bedd., S. pensile,
S. microdendron, S. lankawiensis, S. cuprea, S. illuslris, S. reptans, S. scabrida, and S. montana.
—E. D. Merrill.

SPERMATOPHYTES

333. Baker, E. G. The African species of Allophylus. Jour. Botany 57: 154-160. 1919.
— The genus Allophylus was founded by Linnaeus in 1747 in the Flora Zeylanica. Linnaeus
also described Schmidelia in the Mantissa. These are now considered synonyms. In 1859-60
Sander gave under Schmidelia five species, and in 1868 the author's father described twelve
species. In 1895 Radlkofer, in Engler and Prantl's Nat. Pflanzenf., mentions eighteen
species in Africa and Madagascar. The present author criticises Radlkofer's primary
division into unifoliate and trifoliate leaves, and his subsequent divisions on the basis of
simple or branched thyrse. Gilg also has made important contributions to our knowledge of
the genus. The author gives in this installment a key to the African species, following closely
Radlkofer's sequence, with the recently described novelties interpolated. Notes on
synonymy and distribution are given on 14 of the 73 species treated in the key. The follow-
ing species are described as new: Allophylus nigricans from Nigeria, and A. lasiopus from
Cameroons. — K. M. Wiegand.

334. Beccari, O. The palms of the Philippine Islands. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 295-
362. 3 pi. 1919.

335. Beck v. Mannagetta, and G. Lerchenau. Wacholderbeeren mit entbloszten
Samen. [Juniper berries with exposed seeds.] Sitzungsber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien (Math.-
Nat. Kl.) 126: 403-419. 31 fig. 1917— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 9S3.

336. Bennett, Arthur. X Potamogeton dualus Hagstrom (P. panormitanus Biv. X
pusillus L.). Jour. Botany 57: 2S5. 1919. — A note on the occurrence of the hybrid in York
and Shropshire; also the record of P. panormitanus from Ireland, as P. pusillus L. var. tenuis-
simus Koch. — K. M. Wiegand.

337. Benoist, R. Description d'especes nouvelles de Phanerogames de la Guyane Fran-
caise. [Descriptions of new species of Phanerogams from French Guiana.] Bull. Mus. Hist.
Nat. [Paris] 25: 296-299. 1919. — The following new species are described: Capparis maron-
iensis, Andira Wachenheimi, Swartzia si?nilis, and Hclicostylis pcdunculata. — E. B. PaysoJi.

48 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

338. Benoist, R. Guenetia, genre nouveau de la famille de Tiliacees. [Guenetia, a new-
genus of the family Tiliaceae.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 387-389. 1919.— The author
publishes the genus Guenetia Sagot, with the single species, G. macrosperma Sagot, as new to-
science from French Guiana. — E. B. Pay son.

339. Benoist, R. Les Licania (Chrysobalanacees) de la Guyane francaise. [The Licanias
(Chrysobalanaceae) of French Guiana.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 512 516. 1919.—
The author presents a resume of all the species of Licania known to occur in French Guiana.
The following new species and varieties are characterized : Licania heteromorpha Benth. var.
grandifolia, L. davillaefolia, L. cyathodes, L. canescens, L. leptostachya Benth. var. crassi-
folia (L. crassifolia Benth.), L. galibica, and L. pruinosa. — E. B. Pay son.

340. Blake, S. F. A preliminary revision of the North American and West Indian avocados
(Persea spp.). Jour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 9-21. 2 fig. 1920. — A list of five spe-
cies is given, of which two, Persea cinerascens and P. leiogyna, are described as new. — Helen
M. Gilkey.

341. Blatter, E. Flora Arabica, Part 1. Ranunculaceae-Moringaceae. Rec. Bot. Surv.
India 8: 1-123. 1919.— A systematic and bibliographic enumeration of all known Arabian
plants of the families indicated following the Bentham and Hooker system. Specimens are
cited and the distribution of each species is indicated. There are no keys or descriptions. —
E. D. Merrill.

342. Blatter, E., P. F. Hallberg, and C. McCann. Contributions toward a flora of
Baluchistan. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 54-59. 1919. [To be continued.] — Notes on structure,
synonymy and distribution are given of species in the following genera: Clematis, Adonis,
Ranunculus, Cocculus, Berberis, Hypecoum, Fumaria, Arabis, Barbarea, Farsetia, Malcolmia,
Goldbachia, Sisymbrium, Brassica, Eruca, Capsella, Lepidium,Isatis, Physorhynchus, Cleome,
Maerua, Capparis and Ochradenus. The following species are described as new: Ranunculus
pseudomuricatus Blatt. & Hall., Goldbachia hispida Blatt. & Hall., and Cleome Hotsonii
Blatt. & Hall. Four species of Farsetia are listed without names. [See also next following
Entry, 343.]— A". M. Wiegand.

343. Blatter, E., P. F. Hallberg, and C. McCann. Contributions towards a flora of
Baluchistan. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 84-91, 128-138, 169-178, 226-236, 263-270. 1919-1920.—
A continuation of the flora, arranged according to Bentham and Hooker's system of classi-
fication, extending from Resedaceae to Euphorbiaceae. Tamarix longe-pedunculata and
Reaumuria panjgurica (Tamaricaceae), Fagonia spinosissima and Zygophyllum trialatum
(Zygophyllaceae), Dorycnium villosum, Indigofera paucifolioides, and Calophaca lomentosa
(Leguminosae), and Gaillonia macrantha (Rubiaceae) are described as new species. [See also
next preceding Entry, 342.] — Winfield Dudgeon.

344. Boulenger, G. A. Some roses from Dorsetshire. Jour. Botany 58: 16-21. 1920. —
The paper contains notes made while spending a fortnight at Studland in 1919. Some forms
could not be placed exactly in Major Wollet-Dod's summary of the knowledge of British
roses. Extended notes are given on R. ptychophylla, R. arvensis var. major Coste, R. arvensis
X micrantha f, R. canina var. oblonga (two other varieties of R. canina are noted and keyed),
and R. micrantha var. Lusseri (related to R. rubiginosa). Of these R. ptychophylla, a relative
of R. stylosa, is described as new, and R. canina var. oblonga (Desc'gl. & Rip.) as a new combi-
nation.— K. M. Wiegand.

345. Breakwell, E. A remarkable fodder plant. Shearman's clover (Trifolium fragi-
ferumvar.). Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 245-250. 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
1109.

346. Breakwell, E. Popular descriptions of grasses. The Chloris grasses. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 309-314. Fig. 1-4. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 6.

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 49

347. Britten, James. Salsola caffra Sparrman. Jour. Botany 58: 24. 1920. — This name,
published in Sparrman's Voyage to the Cape of Good Hope in 17S5, has not subsequently
been recognized. It is synonymous with S. aphylla L. f. 1781. — A'. M. Wiegand.

348. Britten, James. Schrankia microphylla. Jour. Botany 58: 89-90. 1920.— The
author calls attention to the fact that J. F. Macbride has shown that Schrankia microphylla
(Dryand.) Macbride must replace S. angustata Torr. & Gray. He notes that in 1898 he him-
self called attention to this but did not make the combination. Circumstances connected
with the original publication of the specific name microphylla are somewhat confusing. The
history of the name is outlined in detail, and it is shown that Solander, not Dryand., was
the original author, though not the first to publish the name. S. microphylla (Dryand.) Mac-
bride is Mimosa uncinata Dryand, M. IntsiaWa.lt., and S. angustata T. & G. — K. M. Wiegand.

349. Bruhl, P. On the systematic position of Lindenbergia, Lehmann. 6 p. Printed
privately: Calcutta, 1919. — The author has made a study of the aestivation of the corolla,
the stamens, the fruit, and other characters of a number of Indian species of Lindenbergia
and related genera of Scrophulariaceae. He concludes that IAndenbergia should be assigned
to a position in the series Rhinantheae, either near the genus Euphrasia, or at the head of the
series since it appears to be a connecting link with the tribe Gratioileae of the series Antir-
rhinideae. Pertinent literature is summarized. — Winfield Dudgeon.

350. Bruhl, P. Note on Lindenbergia urticifolia, Lehm. and Lindenbergia polyantha,
Royle. 20 p. Printed privately: Calcutta, 1919. — The author concludes that L. urticifolia
Lehm. and L. polyantha Royle are not reducible to a single species, but that on the basis of
differences in aestivation, hairiness of the ovary and style base, and shape of the upper lip
of the corolla, they constitute two well defined form groups, for which he proposes the old
combinations L. muraria Roxb. and L. indica Linn, respectively. The former is essentially
Himalayan while the latter belongs to the Indo-Gangetic Plain. A summary of the literature
on the two species is given. — Winfield Dudgeon.

351. Burkill, I. H. The Gardens' Hevea tree No. 1844.— H. confusa, Hemsl. Gardens'
Bull. Straits Settlements 2: 113-115. 1919.

352. Burkill, I. H. Dioscorea kegeliana, Griseb., the "Yam poule" of the West Indies.
Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2 : 158. 1919.

353. Burns, W. Variations in Bombay Strigas. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 212-216. 4 fig.
1920. — The author records variations in the number of ribs of the calyx, flower color, and other
characters in Striga lutea, S. densiflora, S. euphrasioides, and S. orobanchoides found in the
Bombay Presidency. — Winfield Dudgeon.

354. Buscalioni, L., and G.Muscatello. Studio monografico sulle Specie americane del
Gen. Saurauia Willd. [Monograph of the American species of Saurauia.l Malpighia 28: 371-
402. 1919. [Continued from earlier numbers, and to be continued.] — This is a detailed study
especially of the Mexican species of Saurauia, a genus of the Dilleniaceae. Tables are given
comparing closely related species character by character. Saurauia pseudopringlei and <S.
pseudopedunculata are described in detail.— L. W. Riddle.

355. Calder, C. C. The species of Oxalis now wild in India. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 6:
325-341. 9 pi. 1919. — Nine species are recognized, described, and figured. Synonyms are
given and the distribution of each species indicated. — E. D. Merrill.

356. Calder, C. C. A new Indian Vernonia. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 6: 343-345. PI. 10.
1919. — Vernonia Fysoni is described and figured. — E. D. Merrill.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 1

50 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

357. Camus, Aimee. Note sur le genre Mnesithea Kunth (Graminees). [Note on the
genus Mnesithea Kunth (Gramineae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 56-59. 1919.— The
genus Mnesithea is confirmed and to it are transferred several species from southern Asia pre-
viously attached to the genera Rottboellia and Ophiurus. The three genera are contrasted
and a key is provided for the species assigned to Mnesithea. The following new combinations
result: Mnesithea geminata {Rottboellia geminata Hackel), M. mollicoma (Rottboellia molli-
coma Hance), M. merguensis (Rottboellia merguensis Hook. f.). — E. B. Payson.

358. Camus, Aimee. Note sur deux especes nouvelles d'Andropogonees (Graminees).
[Note on two new species of Andropogoneae (Gramineae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:
133-136. 1919. — Cymbopogon Eberhardtii and C. Chevalieri, native to Annam, are described
as new to science. — E. B. Payson.

359. Camus, Aimee. Graminees nouvelles de l'Asie orientale. [New Gramineae from
eastern Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 202-204. 1919.— The following species are
described as new to science: Tricholaena Chevalieri, Ischaemum Eberhardtii, Andropogon
quinhonensis . — E. B. Payson.

360. Camus, Aimee. Quelques especes nouvelles de Graminees d'Asie. [Several new
species of Gramineae from Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 284-287. 1919.— The fol-
lowing species are described as new to science: Ischaemum tenuifolium, Lophopogon inter-
medins, Apocopis cochinchinensis and Germainia Thorelii. — E. B. Payson.

361. Camus, Aimee. Especes et varietes nouvelles de Graminees asiatiques. [New spe-
cies and varieties of Asiatic Gramineae.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 367-371. 1919.—
The following species and varieties are described as new to science: Isachne Chevalieri, Arun-
dinella rupestris, A. setosa Trin. var. latifolia, Rottboellia tonkinensis, Andropogon pertusus
Willd. var. barbatus, and Aristida Boisii. — E. B. Payson.

362. Camus, Aimee. Note sur le Lophatherum gracile Brongn. (Graminees.) [Note on
Lophatherum gracile Brongn. (Gramineae.)] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 494-496.
1919. — A group of closely related forms are here regarded as varieties of one polymorphic
species. The following new varieties are characterized and new varietal combinations made:
Lophatherum gracile Brongn. var. genuinum (L. gracile Brongn.), L. gracile Brongn. var.
multiflorum (L. multijlorum Steudel.), L. gracile Brongn. var. pilosum, L. gracile Brongn. var.
hispidum, L. gracile Brongn. var. elatum (L. elatum Zoll.), L. gracile Brongn. var. intermedium,
L. gracile Brongn. var. zeylanicum (L. zeylanicum Hook, f.), L. gracile Brongn. var. cochin-
chinense. — E. B. Payson.

363. Camus, Aimee. Varietes nouvelles de Graminees de l'Asie Orientale. [New varie-
ties of grasses from eaatern Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 497-498. 1919.— The fol-
lowing varieties are described as new to science: Sorghum halepense Pers. var. mekongense,
Erianthus fastigiatus Nees var. tonkinensis, Ischaemum aristatum L. var. lanuginosum, I.
rugosum Salisb. var. nanum, Eragrostis nigra Nees var. cochinchinensis , E. amabilis Wight
& Arn. var. ongiemensis. — E. B. Payson.

364. Cardot, J. Sur les characteres distinctifs des Eriobotrya (Rosacees) et genres voisins,
et observations sur quelques especes asiatiques d'Eriobotrya. [On the distinctive characters
of Eriobotrya (Rosaceae) and related genera, and observations on a few Asiatic species of Erio-
botrya.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 205-207. 1919.

365. Cardot, J. Notes sur des especes asiatiques du genre Photinia, section Euphotinia.
[Notes on the Asiatic species of the genus Photinia, section Euphotinia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat.
[Paris] 25: 398-404. 1919. — Detailed notes are given concerning 13 species of Photinia. The
following new combinations are made: Photinia Davidiana (Stranvaesia Davidiana Dene.)
and P. undulata (Stranvaesia undulata Dene.). — E. B. Payson.

No. 1, Octobeu, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 51

366. Cause, H. A new variety of Pteris macilenta. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst.
51: 95. 1919.— Pteria macilenta A. Rich. var. saxoAilis is described from Coromandel Penin-
sula, New Zealand. — L. II'. Riddle.

367. Cheeseman, T. F. Some additions to the New Zealand flora. Trans, and Proc.
New Zealand Inst. 51: 92-95. 1919.— Describes four new species of flowering plants; Ligus-
ticum pelraeum, Veronica Birleyi, Earina aestivalis, Thelymitra aemula. — L. W. Riddle.

368. Chermezox, H. Un genre nouveau de Cyperacees. [A new genus of the Cyperaceae.]
Bull. Mus. Hist Nat. [Parisl 25: 60-63. 1919.— Mariscopsis is described as a genus new to
science and to it is referred one species, .1/. suavcolcns (Cyperus suaveolens Boiv.n mss.),
from Madagascar and Zanzibar. The relation of the new genus to allied genera in this family
is indicated by a dichotomous key. — E. B. Par/son.

369. Chermezon, H. Pycreus (Cyperacees) nouveaux de Madagascar. [New species of
Pycreus (Cyperaceae) from Madagascar.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 137-140. 1919.—
The following species are described as new to science: Pycreus squarrosulus , P. antsirabensis .
P. vavavalensis , P. simulans, P. Alleizettei. — E. B. Payson.

370. Chermezon, H. Kyllingia (Cyperacees) nouveaux de Madagascar. [New Kyllingias
(Cyperaceae) from Madagascar.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 208-212. 1919.— The fol-
lowing new species are described: Kyllingia coriacea, K. planiculmis C. B. Clarke, K. pluri-
foliata, K. imerinensis, K. Perrieri, and K. intricata. — E. B. Payson.

371. Chermezon, H. Mariscus (Cyperacees) nouveaux de Madagascar. [New species of
Mariscus (Cyperaceae) from Madagascar.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 300-304, 405-410
1919.— The following new species are described: Mariscus detersus C. B. Clarke, M. Perrieri,
M. goniobolbus, M. Aster C. B. Clarke, M. Humberti, M. Viguieri, M. fallax, M. splendens,
M. manongarivensis, M. longibracteatus, M. rubrotinctus, M. varicus C. B. Clarke, and M.
arcuato-reflexus. — E. B. Payson.

372. Chiovenda, E. L'Androsace Vandellii (Turra) Chiov. Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26:
21-29. 1919.— Historical sketch of the treatment of the genus by Haller, Scleicher,
Lam ark and others. New classification with subdivision into three groups: a. multiflora,
j8. tomentosa, and y. argentea. — Ernst Artschwager.

373. Chirtoiu, Marie. Observations sur les Lacisteme et la situation systematique de
ce genre. [Observations on the species of Lacistema and the systematic position of this genus.]
Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 317-349. 18 fig. 1918.— Lacistema, the only genus of the family
Lacistemaceae, is placed by Engler — "Die natiirliche Pflanzenfamilien" — between the fam-
ilies Piperaceae and Salicaceae. Miss Chirtoiu places the genus Lacistema in a separate
family between Violaceae and Flacourtiaceae. This change of classification was the result
of a series of anatomical and morphological studies on various species of Lacistema. The
glandular pubescence of Piperus, the multiple epidermis of Piper are not found in Lacistema.
Calcium oxalate is abundant in the cortex of Lacistema but varies in the Piperaceae. The
distribution of the vascular bundles in Peperomia and in Piper are monocotyledonous but in
Lacistema dicotyledonous in distribution. In Piperaceae placentation is parietal but only
apparently so in Lacistema. In Lacistema the flowers are hermaphrodite and the albumen
is zygomorphic. — W. H. Emig.

374. Chirtoiu, Marie. Remarques sur le Symplocos Klotzschii et les affinites des Sym-
plocacees. [Remarks on Symplocos Klotzschii and the affinities of Symplocaceae.] Bull. Soc.
Bot. Geneve 10: 350-361. 5 fig. 191S.— The ovules of Symplocos have large integuments and
a small nucellus. The integument develops with the appearance of the mother cell sporangia.
The fruit is a kind of drupe at the beginning and the walls formed by thehypanthium become
sclerified and surround one or two seeds with reduced albumen. The ovule possesses the

52 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

characteristic epithelium of most of the Gamopetalae. The Symplocaceae as related to the
gamopetalous plants with the parietal type of placentation as found in the Cucurbitaceae. —
W. H. Emig.

375. Cohen Stuart, C. P. Le nom scientifique de la plante de the. [The scientific name
of the tea plant.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1: 350-361. 1919. — The author prefers the use
of the binomial Camellia theifera (Griff.) Dyer, claiming that the binomial Thea sinensis
Linn, is inexact. — E. D. Merrill.

376. Coker, W. C. The distribution of Rhododendron catawbiense, with remarks on a
new form. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 35: 76-82. PI. 19-22. 1919.— A map is given (PL
22) showing a much more extended range for catawbiense than heretofore supposed. A form
of the species growing in central North Carolina at low elevations is described as forma insu-
laris. The distribution of other species is also indicated in part. — W. C. Coker.

377. Conard, H. S. The white water-lily of McGregor, Iowa. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:
235-236. 6 fig. 1920. — Description of a water-lily found also in Clear Lake, Iowa, combin-
ing characteristics of Nymphaea odorata and AT. tuberosa, and variable in respect to certain of
these characteristics. — H. S. Conard.

378. Const antin, J. Note sur le Lang-rhoa (Orchidee). [Note concerning the Lang-
rhoa (Orchidaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 218-221. 1919.— The author is unable
to identify a certain perfume plant from China with any species of Cypripedium known from
that country and proposes the provisional name Cypripedium lang-rhoa for it. The specific
name is taken from the Chinese name of the plant. No material has been seen and the
provisional description is drawn from a photograph. — E. B. Payson.

379. Coulter, J. M. North American flora. [Rev. of: (1) Rydberg, P. A. Psoraleae.
(2) Pennell, F. W. Eysenhardtia. North American Flora 24: Part 1. Apr., 1919.] Bot.
Gaz. 68: 65. 1919.

380. Coulter, J. M. Opuntia. [Rev. of: Griffiths, David. New and old species of
Opuntia. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club. 46: 195-206. 2 pi. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1826.)]
Bot. Gaz. 68: 312. 1919.

381. Coulter, J. M. [Rev. of: Valeton, Th. New notes on the Zingiberaceae of Java
and Malaya. Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg. 27. 168 p., 30 pi. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
1322.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 152. 1919.

382. Danguy, Paul. Descriptions de quatre Meliacees de Madagascar. [Descriptions of
four species of Meliaceae from Madagascar.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 364-366. 1919.
— The following new species are described: Turraea Geayi, T. Decaryana, T. Humberti, and
T. macrantha. — E. B. Payson.

383. Daveau, J. Ficus Saussreana et F. eriobotryoides Kunth et Bouche. Rev. Hortic.
Paris] 91: 389. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1809.

384. De Candolle, Casimir. New species of Piper from Panama. Smithsonian Misc.
Coll. 716: 1-17. 1920. — In this paper, based upon the collections of H. Pittier and W. R.
Maxon, the following new species and varieties are described: Piper minutispicum, P. sper-
dinum, P. chiriquinum, P. hirtellipetiolum, P. palmasanum, P. taboganum. P. persubulatum,
P. latibracteum, P. pubistipulum, P. portobellense, P. obaldianum, P. dumeticola var. pana-
mense, P. fatoanum, P. pallidibracteum, P. aduncum L. var. laevifolium, P. per acuminatum,
P. davidianum, P. lucigaudens, P. erectamentum, P. colonense, P. villiramulum, P. hispidum
Sw. var. gamboanum, P. tenuimucronatum, P. Chamissonis Steud. var. rubellibracteum, P.
sambuanum, P. callibracteum, P. subnudibracteum, P. nitidifolium, P. garagaranum, P.
Maxonii, P. magnantherum. — S. F. Blake.

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 53

385. Dixon, Henry H. Mahogany and the recognition of some of the different kinds by
their microscopic characters. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 431-486. 22 pi. 1918.

386. Doyle, Joseph. Observations on the morphology of Larix leptolepsis. Sci. Proc.
Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 310-327. 2 pi. 1918. — There is a distinct natural affinity between Larix
and Pscudotsuga, not recognized in current systematic classifications. — A. E. Waller.

387. Drummond, J. R. Miliusa and Saccopetalum. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 162-168. 1920.
— The history of the genera Miliusa and Saccopetalum (Anonaceae) is reviewed and the char-
acters of the genera and certain species are discussed. The author reduces Saccopetalum to
Miliusa, which he then redefines. — Winfield Dudgeon.

388. Dyer, William T. Thiselton. Flora Capensis: being a systematic description of
the plants of the Cape Colony, Caffraria, and Port Natal (and neighbouring territories). 8vo,
Vol. V, Sect II, Part III, p. 385-528. L. Reeve & Co. : London, 1920.— The present part
concludes the elaboration of the Euphorbiaceae by J. Hutchinson and D. Prain and con-
tinues with the Ulmaceae by N. E. Brown and the Moraceae by N. E. Brown and J. Hutch-
inson. The following new species and new combinations are included: Drypetes natalensis
(Cyclostemon natalenseH&rv.) , D. arguta (Cyclostemon argutusMull. Arg.),D. Gerrardii Hutch-
inson (Cyclostemon argutus Sim., not Mull. Arg.), Celtis FranksiaeN . E. Brown (Celtis Soyauxii
Wood, not Engl.). — J. M. Greenman.

389. Eames, Edwin H. Another exceptional specimen of Daucus Carota. Rhodora 21:
147-148. 1919.— An account of another specimen of a dark-flowered Daucus Carota L. (see
Rhodora 21: 70. 1919) collected at Bridgeport, Connecticut, Sept. 11, 1918, and now in the
Gray Herbarium. In this plant the petals throughout all of the umbels were wholly dark
purple. The plant bore several similar compound umbels and was normal in all respects except
petal color. The article is concluded with a short discussion relative to abnormal flower-
color in this species. — James P. Poole.

390. Earle, F. S. Varieties of sugar cane in Porto Rico. Jour. Dept. Agric. and Labor
Porto Rico 3: 15-55. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1133.

391. Elmer, A. D. E. New woody plants from Mount Maquiling. Leafl. Philippine Bot.
8: 3069-3105. 1919. — This is article 121 of this publication and consists of the descriptions
of new species of flowering plants as follows: Papualthia Bakeri, Desmos elegans, Ilex apo-
ensis Elm. var. punctata, Parsonsia magnifolia, Rhaphidophora lagunensis, R. stenophylla,
R. trinervia, Heterostemma Herbertii, Toxocarpus rubricaulis, Capparis viridis, Vernonia
acuminatissima, Erycibe Copelandii, Weinmannia luzonensis Vid. var. puberula, Dillenia
reifferschiedia F.-Vill. var. rosea, Elaeocarpus maquilingensis , Antidesma fusicarpum, Glo-
chidion canescens, Casearia Zschokkei, Cyrtandra maquilingensis, Cratoxylon arboreum,
Gomphostemma cinereum, Derris canescens, Spatholobus sanguineus, Viscum loranthi, Mela-
stoma Holmani, Astronia Merrillii, A. Foxworthyi, A. maquilingensis , Dysoxylum testaceum,
Ficus maquilingensis, Eugenia Silvestrei, E. subsulcata, E. maquilingensis, Freycinetia
robusla, F. subflagellata, Plectronia Mabesae, Neonauclea Kobbei, Pegia philippinensis , Lepi-
santhes perviridis, Palaquium montanum, Leea pauciflora, and Leea luzonensis. — E. D. Merrill.

392. Evrard, F. Un Alangium (Cornacees) nouveau dTndo-chine. [A new Alangium
(Cornaceae) from Indo-China.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 524-525. 1 fig. 1919 —
Alangium decipiens, a species new to science, is described and illustrated. — E. B. Payson.

393. Farwell, Oliver A. Tsuga americana (Mill.) Farwell, a final word. Rhodora 21:
108-109. 1919.— In a previous paper (Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 41 : 621-629. 1914.), the present
writer published the name of our common northern hemlock as Tsuga americana (Mill.)
Farwell. In a later paper (Rhodora 20: 185-188. 1918), Ivar Tidestrom criticised this new
combination, arguing for the retention of the name Tsuga canadensis (L.) Carr., and giving

54 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

the evidence which he claimed supported his contention. This paper is in answer to the
latter and attempts to show wherein Mr. Tidestrom's arguments are not convincing. — James
P. Poulc.

394. Farwell, Oliver Atkins. Necessary changes in botanical nomenclature. Rhodora
21 : 101-103. 1919. — The Index Kewensis refers Populus balsamifera Miller to P. deltoides and
P. heterophylla, but the writer finds that a careful comparison of Miller's description with
Linnaetjs's description of P. balsamifera shows the two to be identical and therefore P.
balsamifera Miller should be referred to P balsamifera L., and that this binomial belongs to
the Carolina Poplar, as usually understood, since in the last analysis the Linnaean species
is founded on that of Catesby who described this Carolina species. The writer also main-
tains that the common Balm of Gilead should be P. tacamahacca Miller instead of Aiton
since it was first published by the former author. A form of the latter with scanty pubescence
he published as var. Michauxii (Henry) n. comb., and another form generally without cordate
leaves and pubescence, as var. lanceolata (Marsh) n. comb. This last is the northern Balsam
Poplar that has so generally been known as P. balsamifera. The new combination is in
accordance with priority. Veronica persica Poir. is taken up instead of V. Tournefortii for
the species long known as V. Buxbaumii. The reasons for the change are given with the bib-
liography involved. Viburnum Opulus Linn., var. americanum (Mill.) Ait. In Rhodora 20:
14-15. 1918, S. F. Blake gives his reasons for dropping the "(Mill.)" from the authority
for this variety and retaining only "Ait." The writer maintains that Blake's argument was
erroneously drawn and gives his reason for retaining Miller as an authority. — James P.
Poole.

395. Fawcett, William, and A. B. Rendle. Notes on Jamaica plants. (Continued.)
Jour. Botany 57: 312-314. 1919. — Euphorbiaceae. II. Notes are presented on the genera
Mettenia, Dendrocousinsia and Acalypha. The following species and varieties are described
as new: Chaetocarpus cubensis, Dendrocousinsia alpina and Acalypha virgata L. var. pubes-
cens. Chaetocarpus globosus (Mettenia globosus Griseb.) is a new combination proposed. —
K. M. Wiegand.

396. Fernald, M. L. Panicum § Capillaria in New England. Rhodora 21: 110-114.
1919. — Not being able to reconcile the New England plants of the section Capillaria with the
treatment published by Hitchcock and Chase in their "North American Species of Pani-
cum," the writer found it desirable to study these plants from a new standpoint. The authors
mentioned thrust all the eastern P. barbipulvinatum Nash into P. capillar e and forced much
of the northwestern P. capillare into P. barbipulvinatum. The writer points out that the
characters relied upon by Hitchcock and Chase for the separation of these two species do
not hold up under the critical examination of the series of specimens in the Gray Herbarium
and the herbarium of the New England Botanical Club. He points out other characters of
the panicle and of the general habit which serve as a better basis of distinction, but even these
are not constant, and the writer, in common with Rydberg, considers that P. barbipulvinatum
is much better treated as a variety of P. capillare than as a distinct species. As a variety it
should be called P. capillare var. occidentale Rydberg. In this study it was also found that
the common indigenous species of the river- and lake-shores of most of New England had been
merged with the strikingly dissimilar P. philadelphicum Bernh., whereas this plant is dis-
tinguished at once from P. capillare (including P. barbipulvinatum) and P. philadelphicum
by having strictly glabrous pulvini while the latter species have the pulvini obviously hispid.
The type sheet of this indigenous New England species was collected by Ttjckerman and indi-
cated by him on his herbarium label as a new species, P. soboliferum. This name has twice
been published in synonymy but was never published by Tuckerman himself. The writer
considers it better to allow Tuckerman's name to lapse and to use a name which will be
open to no question, and therefore proposes for this species P. Tuckermani n. sp. A key is
given for the species under consideration. The bibliography and distribution of the estab-
lished species are given, and for the new species the description, list of characteristic
specimens, and the distribution. — James P. Poole.

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 55

397. Fernald, M. L. Rubus idaeus and some of its variations in North America. Rho-
dora 21: 89-9S. 1919. — A discussion presenting new evidence as to the status of R. idaeus
and its varieties, especially those in North America. Descriptions of the varieties are given
in considerable detail, their synonyms as given by various authors are discussed, the varieties
are contrasted with each other and with the typical B. idaeus, and their distribution is given.
By neither Focke nor Rydhkkh was A. idat us (typical) admit 1 eel as more than an in1 roduced
plant in North America, but the writer presents evidence of it being indigenous on the Magda-
len Islands, in Minnesota, North and South Dakota, and presumably elsewhere. A key to
the variations of this species in eastern America is given with the bibliography and distribu-
tion of each. A bibliography of the species confined to western America is also given. — James
P. Poole.

39S. Fernald, M. L. Bidens connata Muhl., var. gracillipes, n. var. Rhodora 21: 103-
104. 1919. — The writer gives a description of this new variety, also a list of characteristic
specimens and the stations where they were collected, the latter all located on Cape Cod. A
comparison of this variety with the somewhat similar B. connata var. petiolala (Nutt.) Far-
well, and with the typical B. connata, is also given. — James P. Poole.

399. Fernald, M. L. Two new Myriophyllums and a species new to the United States.
Rhodora 21: 120-124. 1919. — Description, distribution, and bibliography of Myriophyllum
exalbescens n. sp. This species has heretofore passed as M. spicalum L. in America. The
writer points out, however, several differences between the latter species, which is of Eurasia,
and the American plant. Description, distribution, and bibliography of .1/. magdalense n. sp.
This species which occurs in the Magdalen Islands is like M. exalbescens in foliage and in the
whitening of the stem upon drying, but is proposed as a new species because the fruit is so
unlike that in the latter species. Other points of difference are noted. In the Gray Her-
barium among the various species which have been erroneously called by their collectors
Myriophyllum verticillatum , the writer found a sheet from Farewell Bend, Crook Co., Oregon,
collected in July, 1894, by J. B. Leiberg (no. 465) which proved to be a well known species
of the southern hemisphere, M. elatinoides Gaudichaud., one of a group of species confined
to southern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand, and America, but not known in Africa
or Eurasia. It has never before been reported north of Mexico, but a foot-note to the writer's
article states that since this article went into type a sheet has been received from Prof.
Morton E. Peck, collected in Des Chutes River, Oregon, July 27, 1914 (Peck no. 571S).—
James P. Poole.

400. Fernald, M. L. A new Polygonum from southeastern Massachusetts. Rhodora 21 :
140-142. 1919. — While exploring the ponds of Plymouth, Massachusetts, in 1913, the author
noted a strictly indigenous annual Polygonum of the sandy pond-margins which was obviously
related to P. Persicaria L. but which had more slender and more richly colored spikes. In
explorations made in 191S the plant was found to be universally distributed on Cape Cod,
and everywhere a plant strictly of the pond margins, while P. Persicaria was naturally abun-
dant near houses and about the farms. The indigenous species held its own peculiar differ-
ences with constancy, and more detailed study in the herbarium brought out other points of
difference which justify the description of this plant as Polygonum purilanorum n. sp. The
description and the distribution of the species are given, with comments on the relationship
with, and the distinguishing differences between this and allied species. — James P. Poole.

401. Fernald, M. L. The identity of Angelica lucida. Rhodora 21: 144-147. 1919.—
Angelica lucida was described by Cornut in his "History of Canadian Plants" in 1635. It
was soon cultivated in various gardens of Europe, described in numerous works of the ISth
century, and was taken up by Linneus in the "Species Plantarum" (1753) as a valid species
under Cornut's original name. The species was accepted by post-Linnean authors but after
1840, when Torrey and Gray cast a doubt upon it, the plant was omitted from most subse-
quent treatments of the American flora. Subsequently to the publication of the statement
by Torrey and Gray, however, Dr. Gray had for a time surmised that the seashore Angelica

56 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

.of northeastern America now passing as Coelopleurum actaeifolium, was Angelica lucida, and
ln the 2nd edition of the Manual, at the end of the account of Archangelica peregrina, is the
note: "Perhaps it is the Angelica lucida L." In the 5th edition (1867), however, the plant
was formally taken up as Archangelica Gmelini DC, while in Watson and Coulter's revi-
sion (ed. 6) it became Coelopleurum Gmelini Lebed. The writer finds from familiarity with
the plant in the field, and from a comparison of sheets collected in eastern Canada, with Cor-
ntjt's plate, that the latter author's Angelica lucida, published in 1635, actually was of Canad-
ian origin, and that he illustrated a very characteristic small specimen of the species which
has recently passed as Coelopluerum actaeifolium (Michx.) Coulter & Rose. The plant is,
then, reinstated and should hereafter be called Coelopleurum lucidum (L.) n. comb. The
synonymy and the distribution of the plant are given. A plant differing, in the characters of
the involucels, from the typical species is also described as C. lucidum, forma frondosum, n. f.,
and the stations where it is known to occur are given. — James P. Poole.

402. Fernald, M. L. The variations of Ranunculus repens. Rhodora 21: 169. 1919. —
The writer gives a brief key to the more pronounced varieties of Ranunculus repens L. — James
P. Poole.

403. Fernald, M. L. Coreopsis rosea Nutt., forma leucantha, n. f. Rhodora 21: 171.
1919. — At Buck Pond, Harwich, Mass., in August, 1918, where the ordinary pink form of
Coreopsis rosea makes a border of color at the margin of the pond, the writer found a milk-
white form also abundant, for which he proposes the above name. — James P. Poole.

404. Fernald, M. L. The white-flowered bird's eye primrose. Rhodora 21: 148. 1919.
— The white-flowered form of Primula mistassinica Michx. which is occasionally seen, is very
abundant in Newfoundland, often being the only color seen. Because of its strong contrast
with the typical form of the species, the author designates it: Primula mistassinica Michx.,
forma leucantha, n. f. The type specimen was collected on the borders of ponds on the lime-
stone tableland, alt. 200-300 m., Table Mountain, Port a Port Bay. — James P. Poole.

405. Ftson, P. F. The Indian species of Eriocaulon. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 49-53. IS
fig. 1919. — The author presents a synopsis of the groups of Eriocaulon occurring in India
preliminary to a full revision of the genus soon to be published. He finds that previous au-
thors have failed to note the natural groups; and that Ruhland's treatment in "Das Pflanzen-
reich" is especially artificial. The characters heretofore used have been largely ecological
or otherwise unessential. Eight groups are given, as follows: (I) Simplicis, 19 sp., (II)
Setaceum, 2 sp., (Ill) Hirsutae, 6 sp., (IV) Anisopetalae , 6 sp., (V) Scariosae, 3 sp., (VI)
Cristato-sepalae, 8 sp., (VII) Connato-sepalae (not in India), (VIII) Leucantherae , 6 sp.
The species in each group are listed by name but not described; thus eleven new species are
named without descriptions. These are as follows: E. Geoffreyi, E. barba-caprae, E. roseum,
E. Dianae, E. Sedgurickii, E. Rhodae, E. Edwardii, E. Margaretae, E. Eleanorae, E. Thomasi,
E. horsley-kundae. Much confusion as to the range of species has arisen through faulty under-
standing of the characters and specific limits. An interesting parallel evolutionary develop-
ment in several groups is noted and discussed. — K. M. Wiegand.

406. Fyson, P. F. Short notes on distribution, etc. Jour. Indian Bot. 1 : 125-127. 1 fig.
1919. — A new locality is recorded in India for Jmpatiens tangachee Bedd. The collection is
recorded of two blue-flowered plants, identical in other characters with Heterocarpus glaber
Wight and H. hirsutus Wight, species described as having yellow flowers. Apparently H.
glaber and H. hirsutus have yellow flowers at lower altitudes, and blue flowers at higher alti-
tudes, and represent a glabrous and a hairy variety of a single species. It is suggested that
in these four plants there are "two pairs of Mendelian allelomorphs segregating." The author
found a staminate flower on a carpellate tree of Hydnocarpus alpinus Wtk., and calls brief
attention to its possible bearing on the problem of sex in flowering plants. — Winfield Dudgeon.

No. 1, Octobeb, 1920) TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 57

407. Gagnepain, F. Vernonia nouveaux d'Indo-Chine. [New Vernonias from Indo-
China.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 487-193. 1919. Tin following species are charac-
terized as new to science: Vernonia Balansae, V. Bonapartei, V. Chevalieri, V. Eberhardtii ,
V. macrachaenia, V. Pierrei, V. Principis, V. saigonensis, V. subacualis, V. Thorelii, V.
tonkinensis, and V. virgata. — E. B. Payson.

408. Gagnepain, F. Nouveaux Begonia d'Asie; quelques synonymes. [New Begonias
from Asia; a few synonyms.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 194-201, 276-283. 19 fig. 1919.
— The following new species, new names and new specific combinations are proposed: Begonia
Balansaeana, B. baviensis, B. Boisiana, B. Bonii, B. Delavayi, B. Duclouxii, B. Eberhardtii ,
B. Gcoffrayi, B. Harmandii, B. hymenophylla, B. Lecomtei, B. Pierrei, B. siamensis, B. tali-
etisis, B. tonkinensis, B. Wilsonii, B. salziensis (Meziera salaziensis Gaud.), B. Decaisneana
(B. aptera Decne.) and B. Hayatae {B. aptera Hayata). — E. B. Payson.

409. Gagnepain, F. Acareosperma, un genre nouveau d'Ampelidacees. [Acareosperma,
a new genus of the Ampelidaceae.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 131-132. 1919.— Acareo-
sperma Spireanum from southern Asia is described as a new species and the type of a new
genus. — E. B. Payson.

410. Gagnepain, F. Quelques Passifloracees nouvelles ou critiques des genres Adenia
et Passiflora. [Some new or critical species of the Passifloraceous genera Adenia and Passi-
flora.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 126-130. 1919. — The following species and varieties
from southern Asia are characterized as new to science: Adenia Chevalieri, A. Harmandii,
A. parvifolia, A. Pierrei, Passiflora octandra, P. octandra var. cochinchinensis, P. octandra
var. attopensis, P. octandra var. glaberrima. — E. B. Payson.

411. Godfery, M. J. The problem of the British marsh orchids. Jour. Botany 57:
137-142. 1919. — Are there two or three species of British bog orchids, and are all other forms
hybrids of these three? Is O. praetermissa Druce a valid species or a hybrid? Is O. latifolia
a good species or is it mainly O. praetermissa? The paper deals with these questions, but with-
out finding their solution. The author considers in detail the value of characters, especially
the spotting of the leaves. Mr. Rolfe's contention that O. praetermissa is true O. latifolia
is discussed at length. The author has seen O. latifolia in many parts of Europe where O.
praetermissa is not found. He concludes that while there is no doubt that O. praetermissa is
the O. latifolia of English authors, it is open to question whether it is O. latifolia L. as under-
stood on the Continent. Most of the spotted European orchids are sometimes found without
spots. Mr. McKechnie has suggested that ring-spotted latifolia was originally a hybrid
between maculata and praetermissa. The behavior of other orchid hybrids is compared with
this case. All evidence goes to show that when spotted maculata is crossed with an unspotted
species, the offspring is not spotted. The problems arising here are classified by the author.
Two main problems, and seven special points should receive investigation. Hope is expressed
that botanists will make some artificial crosses with these parents. It is suggested that soil
be used in which the parent grew, as an organism (Rhizoctonia) is necessary in order that the
seeds may germinate. (See F. E. Weiss, on Seeds and Seedlings of Orchids, Proc. Manchester
Microsc. Soc. 1917). — K. M. Wiegand.

412. Gtjerin, P. [Rev. of: Berger, Marie-Gaston. Etude organ ographique, anatom-
ique et pharmacologique de la famille des Turneracees. (Organographic, anatomic and pharma-
cologic study of the family Turneraceae.) 270 p. 53 pi. Vigot Freres: Paris, 1919.] Bull.
Sci. Pharm. 26: 533. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 805.

413. Guillaumin, A. Contribution a la flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonia. [Contribution to
the flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 213-217, 28S-295. 372-378, 499-
505. 1919. — In continuation of previous similar articles, the author publishes in these several
napers lists of species collected in New Caledonia by various collectors. Critical notes are
included and some citation of synonymy. The following new specific diagnoses and new

58 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

combinations occur: Pittosporum dzumacense, Psychotria microglossa Baill. (Uragoga micro-
glossa Baill.), Chrysophyllum Francii Guillaum. & Dubard, and Calycorectes ovigerus (Euge-
nia ovigera Brong. & Gris.). — E. B. Payson.

414. Heribert-Nilsson, Nils. Experimentelle Studien uber Variabilitat, Spaltung, Art-
bildung und Evolution in der Gattung Salix. [Experimental studies on variability, division,
species-formation and evolution in the genus Salix.] Acta Univ. Lund [Acta Reg. Soc. Physiog.
Lund N. S. 29". No. 28.] N. S. 14 (Avd. 228) : 1-145. 1918.— This is an extensive account
of experimental studies in Salix. Many hybrids are designated, described and illustrated.
No new species are described. — E. B. Payson.

415. Hitchcock, A. S. History of the Mexican grass, Ixophorus unisetus. Jour. Wash-
ington [D. C.] Acad. Sci. 9: 546-551. 1919. — The nomenclatorial history of this species, which
has previously been described under five different specific names and referred to four genera,
is reviewed and its synonymy cited. — Helen M. Gilkey.

416. Hole, R. S. A new species of Tamarix. Indian Forester 45: 247-249. 1919. —
Tamarix Troupii is the name given to a new species found in the United Provinces, briefly
described here. — E. N. Manns.

417. Hopkins, L. S. The occurrence and distribution of Vasey's pondweed in North-
eastern Ohio. Torreya 19: 243-244. 1919. — Potamotgeton Vaseyi Robbins was first collected
in Ohio by the writer at Brady's Lake, Portage County, June 22, 1912. It has since been
found in Ashtabula County in 1918, and at Sandy Lake, Portage County in 1919. It is
not included in Schaffner's "Ohio Catalogue of Vascular Plants." The descriptions in
the current manuals are corrected as follows: (1) Fruiting stems are not rare, (2) the larger
leaves do not always float, (3) fruiting stems are not limited to shallow water. — J. C. Nelson,

418. Jackson, A. B., and A. J. Wilmott. Barbarea rivularis in Britain. Jour. Botany
57: 304-306. 1919.— This paper is a reply to one by Marshall (Jour. Botany 57: 211. 1919).
Marshall was in error in recording B. rivularis as new to Britain. It was shown (Jour. Bot-
any 54: 202. 1916) that B. rivularis is B. vulgaris var. silvestris Fr., a form not uncommon in
Britain. The length of the silique in these various forms, and in a specimen sent to the
authors by Marshall, is discussed. The strict-fruited form of B. vulgaris has frequently been
confused with B. stricta, but they can scarcely be confused by one who knows them in the
field. Marshall has overlooked the important contribution by Spragtje and Hutchinson
(Jour. Botany 46: 106. 1908) where the two forms are clearly differentiated. The shape
and size of the lateral lobe of the leaf is of minor importance. Stme may have confused
B. stricta and B. rivularis, as Marshall says, but this is uncertain. — K. M. Wiegand.

419. Jauch, Berthe. Quelques points de l'anatomie et de la biologie des Polygalacees.
[Certain details of the anatomy and biology of Polygalaceae.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10: 47-84.
15 fig. 1918. — A study of Polygala Chamaebuxus and closely related species leads the author
to consider the family Xanthophyllaceae of Gagnepain as untenable. Xanthophyllum is
retained, as indicated by Chodat, in the family Polygalaceae because of the structure of the
flower and the characteristic pollen. The stamens of Polygalaceae are four-celled, but by
reduction of the inferior cells a type with two or three cells may be obtained. The four-celled
type is the more primitive. The ovules of Polygalaceae receive parietal vascular bundles.
The ovary is divided into two cells by a wall and the placentation is parietal although appar-
ently axillary. — W. H. Emig.

420. Lam, H. J. The Verbenaceae of the Malayan Archipelago, together with those from
the Malayan Peninsula, the Philippines, the Bismark- Archipelago, and the Palau- and Caroline
Islands. 371 p., 3 pi. Groningen, March 31, 1919. [Doctorate Dissertation.]— This work
represents a critical revision of the family based on a study of collections in the herbaria of
Leiden, Utrecht, and Berlin. Keys for determination and descriptions are given for 28 genera

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 59

and 305 species. Two genera and 31 species are described as new to science. The new genera
are Xerocarpa, monotypic from New Guinea, and Viticipremna from the Philippines, New
Guinea, and other islands, both of the tribe Viticoidi ae, the first of the subtribe Teysmannio-
dendruK , the second of the subtribe Viticeae. New species are: Callicarpa glabra, C. lacini-
ala, Clerodendron albiflos, C. coccineum, C. kalaoloensc, C. macrocalyx, C. membranifolium,
Faradaya nervosa, F. squamata, (!> unsia Pullei, Gmelina Ledermanni , G. palawensis, G.
Schlechteri, Premna alba, P. angustifiora, P. angusti folia, P. borneeusis, P. Curranii, P.
Ledermanni, P. macrophylla, P. paulobarbata, P. Peekelii, P. rcgularis, P. Ruttenii, P.
sessilifulia. Vitex Curranii, V . glandulosa, V. luteoglandulosa, V. macrophylla, V. Merrillii,
Xerocarpa aviccnniacfoliola. A supplement from the Buitenzorg herbarium will soon follow.
[See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1S30.]— //. ./. Lam.

421. Lecomte, Henri. Sapotacees recueillies a Madagascar par M. Perrier de la Bathie.
[Sapotaceous plants collected in Madagascar by M. Perrier de la Bathie.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat.
[Paris] 25: 269-275. 3 fig. 1919. — In addition to several species previously known the follow-
ing species and varieties new to science were collected: Sideroxylon Perrieri, S. Perrieri var.
oblongifolium, S. saxorum, S. collinum, and S. madagascariense . — E. B. Payson.

422. Lecomte, Henri. Quelques Sapotacees Africaines. [Several African Sapotaceae.]
Bull. Mus. Hist, Nat, [Paris] 25: 189-193. 7 fig. 1919.— The genus Pachyslela is believed to
contain two sections, Eupachystela and Zeyherella, which are here defined. The following
new combination is made and new species described: Pachystela Antunesii (Engl.) H. Lee.
(Chrysophyllum Antunesii Engl.) and P. Pobeguiniana Pierre. — E. B. Payson.

423. Lecomte, Henri. A propos du genre Planchonella Pierre de la famille des Sapota-
cees. [In regard to the genus Planchonella Pierre of the family Sapotaceae.] Bull. Mus. Hist.
Nat. [Paris] 25 : 123-125. 1919. — Planchonella is considered to be worthy only of sectional rank
under the genus Sideroxylon but Sersalisia which is similar in fruit characters is held to be
distinct from Sideroxylon for other reasons. The following new combination is suggested:
Sideroxylon racemosum (Planchonella racemosa Pierre). — E. B. Payson.

424. Lecomte, Henri. Un Labourdonnaisia nouveau (Sapotacees) de Madagascar. [A
new Labourdonnaisia (Sapotaceae) from Madagascar.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 53-
55. 1919. — Labourdonnaisia hexandra is described as new to science and there is given a brief
characterization of the other known species of this genus. — E. B. Payson.

425. Leveille, H. Souvenir de guerre. [War recollection.] Bull. Geog. Bot. 1918:
143-145. 191S. — Fumaria graminifolia, Anacyclus Duguei, Artemisia Duguei, Convolvulus
Duguei, and OrnUhogalum Duguei are described as new species. Ononis Natrix L. var. integ-
rifolia is described as a new variety. The forms new to science are described from southeast-
ern Europe. The paper also includes a list of recognized phanerogamic species from the same
region. — J. R. Schramm.

426. Long, Bayard. Notes on the American occurrence of Crepis biennis. Rhodora21:
209-214. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 347.

427. Long, Bayard. The specific characters of Eragrostis peregrina and its two allies.
Rhodora 21: 133-140. 1919. — Hackel based his Eragrostis pilosa var. condensa upon a weed
occurring in the Grand-Ducal Palace Garden at Karlsruhe. When K. M. Wiegand renamed
this plant E. peregrina in 1917 he had material from eight stations. The writer has recently
had a favorable opportunity to make a study of the characters of this same plant from several
hundreds of specimens from more than fifty stations, which have accumulated at Philadelphia,
having been collected in the surrounding country. He compares in considerable detail the
characters of this species with those of its two closest allies, E. pilosa and E. Purshii, ampli-
fying and reconsidering the characters advanced by above mentioned authors, and weighing
their critical comments. The article is concluded by a summary of the distinguishing char-

60 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

acters of the three species. From his investigation the author states his belief that, while
E. peregrina and E. Purshii are very definite species units, the material grouped under E.
pilosa shows such an amount of variation as to give the strong suspicion that this is by no
means a homogeneous series. — James P. Poole.

428. Marshall, E. S. Notes on Somerset plants for 1918. Jour. Botany 57: 147-154.
1919. [To be continued.] — This is a report of field work done in 1918 by the author and sev-
eral other contributors. A long list of species and varieties is given, with new localities,
and notes on interesting points. — K. M. Wiegand.

429. Meyer, Rud. Echinopsis gigantea R. Mey. spec. nov. Monatsschr. fur Kakteen-
kunde 29: 58-59. 1919. — This was found in cultivation at Charlottenburg, the original coun-
try being unknown though probably Argentina. The species is compared with E. valida
Monv. — A. S. Hitchcock.

430. Moore, Spencer Le M. Alabastra diversa. Part XXX. [Plantae Rogersianae.
iv.] Jour. Botany 57: 160. 1919. — This instalment contains only a description of Phyllan-
thus Rogersii Hutchinson sp. nov., which was omitted from the treatment of Phyllanthus,
where it should have appeared. It is a native of the Transvaal. — K. M. Wiegand.

431. Nakai, Takenoshin. Notulae ad plantas Japoniae et Koreae XXI. [Notes on the
plants of Japan and Korea, XXI.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33 : 193-216. 1919.— This article contains
notes and descriptions of new species, varieties and forms in the following genera: Cephalo-
taxus, Torreya, Picea. Pinus, Populus, Cercidiphyllum., Pyrus, Viola, Eleagnus, Rhododen-
dron, Sideroxylon, Viburnum, Patrinia and Mimulus. New combinations and names are given
for many plants. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris.

432. Nelson, James C. The new genus Bromelica (Thurb.) Farwell. Rhodora 21:
215-216. 1919. — The writer questions whether the characters taken by Farwell in estab-
lishing the genus Bromelica (Rhodora 21: 76-78) are correct. He agrees that Farwell's
arguments in support of the new genus are convincing as long as the delimitation of the genus
Melica is based on the characters taken by most American authors as distinctive, but believes
that the problem of distinguishing Melica might be better solved, not by a separation of the
genus, but by an attempt to find a different set of characters on which to base the delimitation.
He points out that Hackel, in his key to the Festuceae (in Engler and Prantl, Nat. Pflanz-
enfam. ii. Abt. 2, p. 61-64), takes as the basis of his dichotomy (1) the presence of imperfect
flowers on the upper part of the spikelet; (2) the number of such flowers, not their texture
or arrangement. Using these as the distinguishing characters, Bromelica might still remain
as a subgenus of Melica, but the nearest ally of Melica among American grasses would then be
Diarrhena and not Bromus or Festuca. The delimiting characters of the American authors,
namely, the texture and the arrangement of the upper lemmas, would then become characters
of subgeneric rank. — James P. Poole.

433. Ostenfeld, C. H. Contributions to West Australian botany, Part II. Dansk Bot.
Ark. 28: 1-66. 26 fig., 6 pi. 1918.— The first part, Stray notes from the Tropical West Australia,
contains general remarks on the vegetation of Northwestern Australia with list of species col-
lected during short visits. New species: Abutilon flavum and Frankenia ambita. The second
part, A Revision of the West Australian species of Triglochin, Crassula CTillaea) and Frankenia.
describes three additional new species of Frankenia: F. Maidenii, F. interioris and F. com-
pacta. The third part, Chenopodiaceae from West Australia, by Ove Paulsen, lists 30 species,
of which Kochia Ostenfeldii, Arthrocnemum Benthami, A. (?) pruinosum and A. brachysta-
chyum, are new. — A. Gundersen.

434. Pellegrin, Francois. Un curieux Kapokier a fruits en sablier, Bombax buono-
pozense P. Beauv. var. Vuilletii Pellegrin. [A curious silk-cotton tree with fruits in the form
of an hour-glass, Bombax buonopozense P. Beauv. var. Vuilletii Pellegrin.] Bull. Mus. Hist.

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS

Nat, [Paris] 25: 379-380. 1 fig. 1919.— The author describes and illustrates a new variety of
Bombax baonopozense P. Beauv. under the varietal name Vuilletii. Due to the strangling
effect of the coriaceous, deciduous calyx, the fruits assume a form suggestive of an hour-glass.
— E. B. Payson.

435. Pellagrin, Francois. Polymorphisme des feuilles du Lierre commun au Portugal.
[The polymorphism of the leaves of the common ivy of Portugal.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 10:
380-382. 1 pi. 1918.— The leaves of the ivy collected in various parts of Portugal present a
remarkable polymorphism. In spite of this variation, only one species, Hedera Helix L., is
present, — W. H. Emig.

436. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the local flora. V. Torreya 19 : 235-242.
1919. — This final installment concludes the tribe Buchnereae with Buchnera (1 species), and
adds the last tribe Rhinantheae, containing Schivalbea (1 species), Castilleja (1 species), Rhi-
nanthus (1 species), Pedicularis (2 species) and Melampyrum (1 species, 1 variety). The
notes on synonymy and distribution are continued. A list of local specimens of the author's
collecting is appended, including 52 named forms. The name of the Vlth tribe is corrected to
read Veroniceae. [Previous installments have appeared in: Torreya 19: 107-119. Ibid.
142-152. Ibid. 161-171. Ibid. 205-216.]—/. C. Nelson.

437. Petch, T. A new variety of Exacum zeylanicum Roxb. Ann. Roy. Bot. Gard. Pera-
deniya 7: 43, 44. PI. 1. 1919. — Exacum zeylanicum Roxb. var. Lewisii Petch is described,
and the anthers of it and allied forms are figured. — E. D. Merrill.

438. Petch, T. Alocasia indica Schott. Ann. Roy. Bot. Gard. Peradeniya 7: 53-55.
1919. — The author shows that the Ceylon form recorded as Alocasia indica is really A. macror-
rhiza Schott. — E. D. Merrill.

439. Petrie, D. Descriptions of new native flowering plants. Trans, and Proc. New Zea-
land Inst. 51: 106-107. 1919. — Describes Lagenophora cuneata, Urtica aspera, Thelymitra
caesia, Brachycome linearis, new species. — L. W. Riddle.

440. Pttrpus, J. A. Pachyphytum oviferum J. A. Purpus nov. spec. Monatsschr. fur
Kakteenkunde 29: 100-103. 1 fig. 1919. — The type was collected at Barranca Bagre near the
San Rafael mines, San Luis Potosi, Mexico, by J. A. Purptjs in 1911. — A. S. Hitchcock.

441. Quisxjmbing y Arguelles, E. Studies of Philippine bananas. Philippine Agric.
Rev. 123: 1-73. 30 pi. 1919. — Most of the varieties described originated outside of the Phil-
ippines, having been introduced within the past few years from tropical Asia, America,
Malaya, and Polynesia. About 40 new varieties are described and figured, mostly referred to
Musa sapientum, but one to M. errans and two to M. paradisiaca. Drawings of flowers and
fruits, totaling 217 individual figures. — E. D. Merrill.

442. Rangachariar, K., and C. Tadulingham. A note on certain species of Polygala.
Jour. Indian Bot. 1 : 44-48. 4 fig- 1919. — Four species of Polygala are considered, all obtained
on the estate of the Agricultural College, Coimbatore, India, as follows: Polygala sp., P.
Vahliana DC, P. bolbothrix Dunn, and P. chinensis L. Of these P. chinensis is the only
one included in Hooker's "Flora of British India," and in Gamble's "Madras Flora" only
P. chinensis and P. bolbothrix are listed. The other two species are merged under P. eriop-
tera DC. and P. chinensis L. Wight and Arnott, however, treated P. Vahliana DC. as a
distinct species. Characterizations are given of the four species, and notes on the synonymy
and relationships. P. Vahliana differs from its closest relative, P. erioptera DC, in its pros-
trate habit, oblong hairy leaves, villous sepal-wings, and pinkish petals. The second species
will be given a name in a subsequent paper. It is closely related to P. chinensis L. and is the
P. arvensis Willd. var. y of Wight and Arnott. P. bolbothrix is the P. ciliata (L.) of Wight
and Arnott. The name P. ciliata had been used before by Linnaeus for a species of Salo-
monia. — K. M. Wiegand.

62 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

443. Rtdberg, Per Axel. Rosales, Family 24. Fabaceae, Tribe 6. Psoraleae. North
Amer. Flora 24: 1-64. 1919. — The tribe Psoraleae, as given, contains 19 genera, and 16 of these
are covered in this part; the remainder will be discussed in a subsequent part. The genus
Eysenhardtia is treated by Francis W. Pennell. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

444. Schodde, Dorothy E. Polemoniaceae of Ohio. Ohio Jour. Sci. 20: 43-47. 1919.
— A key to the Polemoniaceae of Ohio is given and the following species are described: Phlox
maculata, P. paniculata, P. ovata, P. glaberrima, P. pilosa, P. divaricata, P. stolonifera, P.
subulata, Gilia rubra., P olemonium caerulium, P.reptans, Cobaea scandens. — H.D. Hooker, Jr.

445. Schwantes, G. Mesembrianthemum Margaretae Schwantes spec. nov. Monats-
schr. fur Kakteenkunde 29: 55-57. 1 fig. 1919.— The species is formally described and notes
are added as to its relationship. It belongs to the section Cymbiformia and is allied to M.
deserticolum. The type was collected in German Southwest Africa by Margarethe Fried-
rich. — A. S. Hitchcock.

446. Schwantes, G. Mesembrianthemum prismaticum Marloth und Mesembrianthemum
lapidiforme Mario th. Monatsschr. fur. Kakteenkunde 29: 42-45. 2 fig. 1919. — This includes
remarks and informal descriptions of the two species. — A. S. Hitchcock.

447. Sedgwick, L. J. On Trichodesma indicum R. Br. and Trichodesma amplexicaule
Auctt. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 6: 347-350. PI. 11. 1919.— The two species are contrasted and
the differential characters clearly indicated. — E. D. Merrills.

448. Sedgwick, L. J. A new Indian Impatiens. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 6: 351. 1919. —
Impatiens kleiniformis is described. — E. D. Merril.

449. Sedgwick, L. J. A new Indian Habenaria. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 6: 352. 1919.

— Habenaria {%Ate) multicaudata is described. — E. D. Merrill.

450. Sedgwick, L. J. On Alysicarpus rugosus DC. and its allied species. Jour. Indian
Bot. 1: 14-18. 1919. — Various authors have treated the species of this genus of the Legumi-
nosae with deeply and closely transversely rugose joints of the loment as one or several species.
De Candolle gave two species; Wight and Arnott, three species; while Baker reduced them
all to a single variable type. Later floras have mostly followed Baker. The author is con-
vinced that at least four species exist, namely: A. styricifolius DC., A. Heyneamis Wt. &
Arn., A. rugosus DC., and A. ludens Wall, (probably sp.). This has been learned through field
work in western India, where these plants are very abundant. In this region there were two
types differing in at least six characters and they did not intergrade. If this was one species
the contrasting characters must be allelomorphs. The method of fertilization was not
observed, but is probably cross fertilization; two separate types are assumed, each with all
the contrasting characters but without a single heterozygote plant even in one class of char-
acters should be impossible. Even if self-fertilized the constancy of characters would con-
vince one that two species were concerned. Much of the difficulty with the taxonomy of Alysi-
carpus lies in the extreme plasticity of the species in their reactions toward environment.
Descriptions of the species are given, also list of specimens examined. The material is all
from western India collected by Father Blatter, Messrs. Hallberg and Bell, and the
author. The treatment is tentative awaiting more complete study, especially of the intricate
synonymy. — K. M. Wiegand.

451. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. New Phytol. 18:
129-176. Fig. 64-78. 1919— [See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 720; also next following Entry, 452.]

452. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. New Phytol. 18:
201-234. Fig. 79. 1919. — "The results of the present investigation of the Compositae are
chiefly of two kinds; the phylesis of the family and of its chief groups has been elucidated,
and various theories have been given to account for the origin and development of the struc-

No. 1, October, 1920] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 63

tures and physiological and cytological phenomena which occur in the family." The gen-
eral conclusions reached in previous chapters are here summarized in convenient form. The
phyletic results are next brought together. The family history is «iven, tribe by tribe, in
complete and positive fashion. The conclusions are based in part on paleontology and
geographical distribution, but more largely on comparative anatomy. In the concluding
chapter an attempt is made to give, on the basis of an elaborate family tree, a ''coherent
account of the evolution of the family" based on "modern theories of heredity, evolution and
geographical distribution." Step by step, from the Cretaceous to the Pliocene, the origin
and differentiation of the tribes and genera in time and space are given in an "attempt to
bring a real, living picture of the origin and development of the Compositae before the mind
of the ordinary student." [See next preceding Entry, 451.] — I. F. Lewis.

453. Smith, Charles Piper. Studies in the genus Lupinus— IV. The Pusilli. Bull.
Torrey Bot. Club. 46: 389-410 Fig. 43-52. 1919.— The following published names are con-
sidered in this paper: L. pusillus Pursh, L. brevicaulis Wats., L. Kingii W&ts. , L. Sileri Wats.,
L. S hoc kleyi Wats., L. capilalus Greene, L. odoratus Heller, L. scaposus Rydberg, L. rubens
Rydberg, L. dispersus Heller, L. flavoculatus Heller, L. intermontanus Heller, and L. argil-
laceus Woot. & Standi. The following new combinations are made: L. Kingii argillaceus
(Woot. & Standi.), L. rubens flavoculatus (Heller), L. pusillus intermontanus (Heller).
L. odoratus Heller var. pilosellus is described as a new variety. — P. A. Munz.

454. Smith, J. J. Index Orchidacearum quae anno 1919 in Horto Botanico Bogoriensi
coluntur. [Index of the orchids grown during the year 1919 in the Buitenzorg Botanical Gar-
den.] Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg III, 1: 91-126. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 875.

455. Standley, P. C. Two new species of plants from Cuba. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washing-
ton [D. C] 32 : 241-242. 1919. — Achyranthes crassifolia Standi., and Torrubia insularis Standi,
are described as new species from Cuba. — J. C. Gilman.

456. St. John, Harold. Two color forms of Lobelia cardinalis L. Rhodora 21: 217-218.
1919.— A brief account of some of the recorded occurrences of the rose-colored form of Lobelia
cardinalis L. For this form the writer proposes the name L. cardinalis L., f. rosea n. f. The
albino form of the same species is designated as L. cardinalis L., f. alba (A. Eaton) n. comb.,
and the synonyms are given. — James P. Poole.

457. Thompson, H. S. Carex montana L. Jour. Botany 57: 274-275. 1919.— Notes are
given on the discovery and occurrence of this rare sedge on the Mendip plateau in England.
The peculiar yellow-green foliage is mentioned as a means of quick identification in the field.
It flowers early and the fruits are soon shed. This, together with the fact that many plants
do not flower, is the whole cause of its tardy discovery in Mendip, where it was not found
until 1890.— A". M. Wiegand.

458. Thompson, H. Stuart. The genus Euphrasia and E. minima. Jour. Botany 57:
335-337. 1919.— Attention is called to a paper by John Ball (Jour. Botany 11: 272. 1873),
which seems to have been overlooked by recent writers on Euphrasia. Ball, like Town-
send formerly, expressed his doubt of there being many species of Euphrasia rather than one
polymorphic species. Conditions in the British Isles are not opposed to this interpretation,
but on the continent the forms are more diverse. Ball noted that one form, E. minima, is
more distinct than others, and is probably ancient, as it occurs on widely separated mountain
tops. The author finds E. minima one of seventy plants having the greatest vertical range in
the western Alps. He is still skeptical of the occurrence of E. minima in Britain. Euphrasia
is an interesting genus in which to study the course of evolution and distribution, and much
can be learned from it. We should not forget the suggestion of Ball that insect visitors play
an important part in the polymorphism of the genus. No seeds of Euphrasia have been found
in glacial beds, though those of the allied Bartsia have been so found. The distinguishing
features of Euphrasia and related genera have been recently ably stated and illustrated by
Beattverd (Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 3. 1911).— A'. M. Wiegand.

64 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

459. Van den Heede, A. Une superbe plante annuelle. [A superb annual plant.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 91: 393. 1919— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1839.

460. Vatjpel, F. Echinocactus Mihanovichii Fr. et G. Monatsschr. fur Kakteenkunde
29: 66. 1 fig. 1919.

461. Weatherby, C. A. Further notes on Impatiens biflora. Rhodora 21: 98-100. 6 fig.
1919. — The writer published the name Impatiens biflora forma Peasei (Rhodora 19: 116. 1917)
without having seen the living material, drawing up the description from the reports of the
collectors and from statements on herbarium labels. All agreed in describing the flowers
as "pink" or "roseate," while the flowers on certain herbarium specimens showed traces of
pink coloration. On later examination of the living plants from the type station and two
other localities in the White Mountains, he found that the ground color of the flowers of this
form is cream, the impression of a pink blossom being due to very numerous pink spots coales-
cent into solid patches of pink, confined to the inner surface of the spreading perianth parts.
This form is then, essentially, only a phase of /. albiflora but is allowed to stand, pending
further investigation, in view of its undoubtedly striking appearance and its segregation into
pure colonies. Its description should, however, be amended to read: "Perianth cream
colored, the pink spots numerous and coalescent, on the inner surfaces of the spreading peri-
anth parts, into patches of solid pink. Impatiens biflora, forma platymeris, f. nov. In the
typical /. biflora the petals are unequally two lobed on the outer edge, the basal lobe being
small, about one half the size of the dilated apical lobe. In the new form the basal lobe is as
large as the apical, or even slightly larger, and often slightly overlaps it, giving the flower
the appearance of being partially doubled. The difference is illustrated by sketches. The
type station is at Southbury, Connecticut, where eight plants were found intermingled with
the typical form. — James P. Poole.

462. Weingart, W. Cereus Langlassei Web. Monatsschr. fur Kakteenkunde 29: 105-
106.1 919. — The author gives notes on the species at the Dahlem Bot. Gard. — A. S. Hitchcock.

463. Weingart, Wilh. Cereus ruber Weing. Monatsschr. fur Kakteenkunde 29: 57-
58. 1919. — The author shows this to be the same as C. Schrankii Zucc. — A. S. Hitchcock.

464. Weingart, W. Cereus Jusbertii Reb. Monatsschr. fur Kakteenkunde 29: 72.
1919. — This is thought to be a hybrid between Echinopsis and Cereus. — A. S. Hitchcock.

465. Wernham, H. F. Rubiaceae Batesianae — I. Jour. Botany 57: 275-283. 1919 —
This paper is based on a collection of about 250 specimens made by G. L. Bates in the Yaunde
district of Southern Cameroons, and sent to the British National Herbarium. Of them over
sixteen per cent were Rubiaceae. A lengthy quotation from Bates' notes is included pictur-
ing the ecological conditions in certain portions of the region. Nearly all plants are woody
and fully half have weak climbing stems. The partial clearings of the natives revert gradu-
ally to forest. There is no winter and no regular time of flowering of each species, still Bates
thinks some regularity might be made out with study. Twenty-six species and varieties are
listed in this installment. References to published accounts, notes on standard character-
istics, on distribution, and on habit and classification are given. The following new species
are described: Mussaenda bityensis, Mussaenda leptantha, Sabicca Amomi, Bertiera (§ Cap-
itatae) bityensis, Randia (§ Euclinia) megalostigma, Amaralia palustris, A. ekotokicola, and
Morinda Batesii. The following new combination is made: Cephaelis hexamera (K. Schum)
Wernham (Uragoga hexamera K. Schum). — K. M. Wiegand.

466. Wernham, H. F. Rubiaceae Batesianae— II. Jour. Botany 57: 342-347. 1919.
[Continued from Jour. Botany 57: 275-283.] — The paper contains the descriptions of eight new
species and notes on Tarenna eketensis Wernh. The new species are as follows: Gardenia
nigrificans, Oxyanthus heptactina, Atractogyne Batesii, Pavetta antennifera, Rutidea Batesii,
R. pavelloides, R. tarennoides, and R. Dorothea. — K. M. Wiegand.

467. Woodward, R. W. Further notes on Philotria. Rhodora 21: 218-219. 1919.—
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 590.

No. l. October, 1920] unclassified publications 65

MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

B. E. Livingston, Editor

468. A., B. C. [Rev. of: Wintbbbottom, D. C. Potash — an investigation into its eco-
nomic sources in South Australia, etc. Dept. Chem. South Australia Bull. 2. 84 p- 1916.]
New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Tech. 1: 124 126. March, 1918.— Under "Potash from plants^"
author gives analysis of a number of Bubsl ances examined in laboratory of his department,
from which it appears that the woods of various species of Eucalyptus yield an ash which may
contain from 1.25 to 5.20 per cent of potash Me concludes from his analysis of various garden
plants, bracken fern, etc., that the plant life of Australia has generally a lower potash content
than that, of European countries. The following Australian seaweeds were examined and
found to have percentage of potash contents as indicated: — Posidonia australis, 0.6; Macro-
cystis (Keep), 6.0; EchUmia radiata, 10.0; Scriococeus axillaris, 10.2. — The last two samples
contained an appreciable quantity of iodine. Macrocystis pyrifera is abundant along rocky-
coasts of New Zealand. Ecklonia radiata is common along shores of Nortli and South islands
of New Zealand. Reports also on derivation of potash from wool, and the recovery and
purification of wool-fat from the wool-scouring process. — S. S. Gager.

•109. B., L. [Rev. of: Smart, B. J., and P. Pecover. Investigations regarding heat-
insulating materials. Commonwealth Engineer 5: 127-132. Dec., 1917.] New Zealand
Jour. Sci. and Tech. 1: 186-187. May, 1918. Gives quantitative data concerning marine
fiber (Posidonia australis) and other plant and mineral products and substances. [See also
Bot. Absts. G, Entry 472.]— C. S. Gager.

170. Hickey, J. P. The diagnosis of the more common helminthic diseases of man. Pub-
lic Health Reports [U. S. A.] 35: 1383-1-400. 1920.— Refers to the necessity of distinguishing
spores of cryptogams from eggs of helminths in the examination of stools and gives some spe-
cific details. — C. E. F airman.

471. Holste, G. [Rev. of: Bucher, H. Die Heuschreckenplage und ihre Bekampfung.
Combating the locust plague.) Zeitschr. angew. Entomol. (Supplem. 3). 1918.] Forstwiss.

Centralbl. 41 : 336-338. 1919. — Plagues of the native locust (Stauronotus maroccanus) in west-
ern Anatolia, and of the African locust (Schizocerca peregrina) in Palestine and Syria seriously
threatened the crops of those regions during the war. German scientists were called in to
assist in checking the damage, and finally succeeded by trapping the locusts in ditches dug
along a wall of zinc plates 30 cm. high. — W. N. Sparhawk.

472. J., S. H. [Rev. of: Winterbottom, D. C. Marine fibre. Dept. Chem. South
Australia Bull. 4. SG p. 1917.] New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Tech. 1 : 127. March, 191S.—
Author records beds of Posidonia australis (a marine spermatophyte) averaging about 10 ft.
deep. There are in sight nearly 5,000,000 tons that can be sold profitably at £25 per ton.
Reviewer states that he has used Posidonia very successfully as a heat-insulating material
in refrigeration, with better results than with slag wool, pumice, hairfelt, boiled paper, and
various sawdusts. The material is recommended also for boiler and pipe covering. [See also
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 469.]— C. S. Gager.

473. Sanderson, T. The bread value of wheat. North Dakota Agric Exp. Sta. Bull.
137. 45 p. 1920. — The author presents certain baking coefficients devised by him to be
applied to the value of the milled flour. These are concerned with water absorption of flour
and volume, color and texture of loaf. The value of the flour being fixed by these various
factors, the market value of the wheat becomes fixed in turn. Using the standards given,
the author finds that the wheat values thus secured are not correlated at all with the com-
mercial values which the trade assigns to the federal grades. In fact, the author states that
some of the lowest commercial grades of wheat really had as high milling and baking values
as the higher grades of wheat, in certain seasons. The author states that if the proposed
coefficients are fair, it follows that the money loss to the farmers through the present system
of wheat marketing is very great. — L. R. U'uhlron.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical
abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon aa
possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations
with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919.
As an adequate index of progress, Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower,
field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international
scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili-
ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those
having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to
every one interested in plants.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of
serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record,
through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract-
ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct
delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of
assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab-
stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly
requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi-
cations that are npt being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of
the Committee for 1920 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

Canada : Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland : Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea : Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

Vol. VI

XOYKMBER, 1920

No. 2

ENTRIES 474-S78

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 19t0 are indicated by asterisks)

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.
*B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.
A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann

Arbor, Michigan.
*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
B. M. Dtjggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhout, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.
J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
•Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus
try, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the Board) ,
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rtjdd, Medical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

FETTER LANE, LONDON, E. C

Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

I S6.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba
Price, net postpaid for two volumes: < $6.25 Canada

I $6.50 Other countries

1919 Volumes: I and II
1920 Volumes: III, IV, V and VI

CONTENTS

Agronomy 474-493

Botanical Education 494-510

Forest Botany and Forestry 511-644

Genetics 645-751

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 752-772

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 773-791

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 792-802

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 803-827

Physiology 828-878

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920
AND ASSISTANT EDITORS

Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D.C.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest
Sendee, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Tban3ead,
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander
W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York.^

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berrt, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science, Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A.J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M.Wiegand
R. Hosmer

SOIL SCIENCE

ESTABLISHED BT

RUTGERS COLLEGE
JACOB G. LXPMAN, Editor-in-Chief CARL R. WOODWARD, Assistant Editor

IN consultation with

DR. F. J. ALWAY DR. II. J. CONN DB. 0. II. I.1PMAN PROF. O. ROSSI

DR. C. BARTIIEL DB H. VON EEILlTZi.N ""• ''■ LUIINJS DB. B. J- I'.' "-III.

DR. M. W. HEIJERINCK DR E B FRED DR- T- L' LYON DBl 0l 8cllllf

PROF. A. W. BL.UK ' ," ' .„ HMITR DR. E. A. M1TSCHERLICH DR. A. A. V. DB BIOMOND

DR. P. E. BROWN U1W.1U OMllll |I(OF. C. A. MOOER3 PROF. CIIAS. E.TIIORNB

DIRECTOR H. R. CHRISTENSEN DR- B" h- HARTWELL VH tuko. ],EMV DR. N. Tl LAIKOFF

Soil Science is devoted to the l> mailer outlook of the eni ire field of soil fertility.

Articles dealing with the more important farts, observations, deductions and problems of
soil biology, soil chemistry, and Boil physics arc published.

Papers devoted to plant physiology, agronomy, bacteriology, or geology, are accepted for
publication if they contribute directly to the knowledge of soil fertility.

The study of the mineral and organic constituents of soils, soil gases, soil water as a sol-
vent of Boil material, soil colloids, the transformation of commercial plant foods in soils,
questions thai ileal with the fundamental facts of soil fertility and productivity, are given
due consideration.

The phenomena concerning soil micro-organisms, such as bacteria, molds, protozoa, and
algae, receive careful attention.

SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR SOIL SCIENCE

Issued Monthly. Two Volumes (500 pages to a volume) a Year.

Current Volumes, Volumes IX and X: $6.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $6.25, Canada; $6.50, other countriee.

Back Volumes, I to VIII, inclusive: $24.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $25.00, Canada; $26.00, other countries.

Prices are net, postpaid.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY,
Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues,
Baltimore, Md., U. S. A.

Please enter a subscription for Soil Science. Kindly begin subscription with the current volume, and forward
numbers as issued. Remittance for $6.00 ($6.25, Canada; $6.50, other countries) is enclosed to cover two volumes.

Name...
Address.

1920 Abstracts of Bacteriology Volume IV

Comprising complete reviews and abstracts of American and foreign work in Bacteriology,
Mycology and Protozoology in their relation to the arts and sciences

Under the editorial direction of the
Society of American Bacteriologists

Editor
A. PARKER HITCHENS

Published bi-monthly. One volume a year at present. About 500 pages to a volume

Price, net postpaid: $5.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba;
$5.25, Canada; $5.50, other countries

Subscriptions are received for the volume only. Single copies are not sold

Back Volumes, Vols. I, II, and III. Price, net postpaid: $18.00,
United States, Mexico, Cuba; $18.75, Canada; $19.50, other countries

Subscription Order for the Abstracts of Bacteriology

Williams & Wilkinb Compant

Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, _.„.„... — 19.

Baltimore, Md., U. S. A.

We J enclose j j|j j?{j (foreign) U } for subscription to the present volume of Abstracts of Bacteriology.

Name -

(Please state whether Dr., Prof., etc.)

Address .

BETTER SERVICE TO SUBSCRIBERS

The subscribers to Botanical Abstracts generally approve of the new plan
of publication, by which all material is published just as soon as it is ready, with-
out reference to the number of pages required per year. Promptness of publica-
tion is one of the prime features of an abstract journal and the new plan definitely
assures this feature for Botanical Abstracts.

Since the number of pages to be published in any year cannot be predicted,
depending, as it does, on the number and length of the various entries in the
journal, and since the annual cost of publication depends on the number of pages
published, it clearly follows that the cost of publication for any year cannot be
predicted. Realization of this point led to the adoption of the new plan.

The price of Botanical Abstracts is to remain the same during 1921 as it
has been from the beginning: namely, $3.00 per volume of from 300 to 325 pages.
Botanical Abstracts is, therefore, not sold by the year, but by the volume,
and the subscription price per year cannot be stated, because it cannot be known
in advance just how many volumes will be issued in any year.

In changing from the usual journal plan of annual subscriptions to the new
plan of volume subscriptions, and to bring Botanical Abstracts up to date
after overcoming the difficulties following the war, it was necessary to issue more
volumes in 1920 than were originally planned, but it is improbable that any year
in the near future will call for as many pages (i.e., as many volumes) as did 1920-

PRICES FOR 1921

Although Botanical Abstracts is not as yet self-supporting, the total
receipts from subscriptions not yet covering the cost of its production, yet we
have decided not to increase the subscription price per volume for 1921. Before
raising the price, it has seemed desirable to test the matter out for another year,
to determine if there may not be enough of those who will subscribe, but have
not yet done so, to make the publication self-sustaining.

All readers of Botanical Abstracts are urgently requested to cooperate with
the Board of Control and with the publishers, by aiding in every possible way to
increase the subscription list. The journal was inaugurated to advance the
science of plants and to aid those interested in plants. These aims are surely
worthy ones and should appeal to all readers. If all persons interested in the
scientific aspect of plant life will help the enterprise, there is no doubt that the
publication of Botanical Abstracts will become self-supporting and that the
subscription price per volume may eventually be reduced rather than increased.

THE PUBLISHERS.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense.

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. VI NOVEMBER, 1920 No. 2

ENTRIES 474-878

LIBRARY

AGRONOMY NEW yorit

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

BOTaiv:

GARlu

474. Anonymous. Betaenkning fra det Kgl. Danske Landhusholdningssilskab. [Thoughts
from the Royal Danish Agricultural Society.] Tidsskr. Landokonomi (Kjobenhavn) 19202:
49-SO. 1920. — This discussion deals in part with irrigation problems in Denmark, where irri-
gation has rarely been attempted. A few farmers have recently constructed tanks into
which water is pumped for use in irrigating small areas. Thus far these attempts are merely
experimental. — Albert A. Hansen.

475. Beath, O. A. Poisonous plants. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 39-47. 1919.
— Poisonous plants are responsible for the loss of considerable numbers of live stock. In
Wyoming the loss of sheep from this cause is estimated at 14 per cent. The principal poison-
ous plants may be placed in two groups: those that occur rather generally distributed and
in large numbers in several states, as the locos (Oxyiropis and Astragalus) , larkspurs (Del-
phinium), death-camus (Zigadcnus), water hemlock (Cicuta), vetches (Astragalus), lupines
(Lupinus), and aconites (Ac.onitum) . In the other group are those that occur only in
restricted areas and often only as single plants, as laurels, ferns, milkweeds (Asclepias
verticillata) , Woody aster (Xylorrhiza parryi), western sneeze weed (Dugaldia hoopesii), wild
cherry and oaks. The author suggests as methods of control: (1) education of stockmen to
recognize poisonous plants, (2) a complete poisonous plant survey for each western state,
(3) discontinuance of practice of trailing sheep long distances to bedding pens, (4) ample
supplies of salt for the stock, (5) the commercial exploitation of poisonous plants for medic-
inal purposes, thus reducing their number. — H. N. Vinall.

476. Cockayne, L. The importance of plant ecology with regard to agriculture. New
Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1: 70-74. 1918.

477. Duddleston, B. H. The modified rag doll and germinator box. Purdue Univ. Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 236. 12 p. 7 fig. 1920. — The modified rag doll for testing seed corn recom-
mended in this bulletin is very simple in construction. It consists of a sheet of cloth of
suitable size placed upon a sheet of heavy paper slightly longer. The heavy paper serves as
an insulator to prevent molds from permeating the cloth and thereby rotting many of the
seedlings. The seeds from each ear are separated and when they carry rot-producing organ-
isms they can be easily noted and the seed ears represented by them can be discarded. The

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 2'

68 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VI.

germinator box serves to keep the dolls in proper position and thoroughly moist. This method
of testing seed corn is well suited for community testing. Results of a test on a large scale
at Shelby ville, Indiana, in 1920 show an average of 35 per cent of infected seed ears. — G. N .
H offer.

478. Espino, Rafael B. A review of the maize investigations at the College of Agriculture.
Philippine Agric. 8: 191-197. 1919. — An epitome of the maize investigation completed by the
Philippine College of Agriculture and a bibliography of the same. — C. V. Piper.

479. Fisher M. L. More study of pastures and pasturing needed. Proc. Soc. Promotion
Agric. Sci. 39: 19-21. 1919. — "Inasmuch as pasturage is so important in live stock farming it
is rather strange that so little has been done in an experimental way with pastures and pas-
turing." To remedy this situation, experiments covering the adaptation of plants to soils,
seed bed preparation, single or mixed seedlings, fertilization, carrying capacity of pastures,
continuous or alternate grazing, improvement of grass seeds and breeding of better plants are
suggested. — Lyman Carrier.

480. Harris, J. Arthur. Practical universality of field heterogeneity as a factor influenc-
ing plot yields. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 279-314. 1920. — Heterogeneity is the difference in capa-
city for crop production, throughout a field of such magnitude as to influence in like manner,
but not necessarily in like degree, the yield of adjacent small plots. Experimental data from
many published sources are analyzed statistically to determine the extent to which hetero-
geneity of experimental fields may influence plot yields. The results of the analysis show
that in every field the irregularities of the substratum have been sufficient to influence, often
profoundly, the experimental results. — Analysis of data on physical and chemical requisites
for plant growth show that the coefficients for water content and for chemical composition of
soil are of about the same order as those found for crop yields and "while these results do not
prove that the heterogeneity of experimental fields in their capacity for crop production is
directly due to these and other physical and chemical factors, there can be little doubt that
this is actually the case." Greater care in technic and more extensive use of the statistical
method in analysis of plot experimentation are recommended. — D. Reddick.

481. Hertel, H. Landbruget i 1919. [Agriculture in 1919.] Tidsskr. Landokonomi
(Kjobenhavn) 19201: 1-36. 1920. — During the month of May, 1919, various species of insects
attacked the small grains. Sandfleas were particularly bad on barley, but since the infesta-
tion did not last long the damage was not severe. The green fly larvae did considerable dam-
age to oats in late sown fields. Grain lice attacked barley and oats, but rain and cool weather
seemed to stop damage from this source. During the year 1919 the fields seemed unusually
free of weeds. During August and September cabbage worms and cabbage lice caused con-
siderable damage to cabbages and turnips. — Albert A. Hansen.

482. Hoffer, G. N. Disease-free sweet corn seed. Purdue Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
233. 12 p., fig. 1-8. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1271.

483. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 4. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31 : 407-412. 1920. — Presents a resume of results in the feeding of Opuntia spp. in Aus-
tralia, in the United States and in India. — L. R. Waldron.

484. McGovern, J. A. Wheat grading for schools. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Ext.
Div. Circ. 36. 8 p. 5 fig. 1920. — An illustrated description of wheat grading for instruction
in the public schools, as required by the state law. — C. V. Piper.

485. McKenzie, R. T. Agriculture in Denmark. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 18: 140-
149. 1920. — General conditions described. — J. J. Skinner.

No. 2, November. 1920] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 69

456. Mendiola, Nemesio B. A review of the rice investigations at the College of Agri-
culture. Philippine Agric. 8 : I !."> Hi i. 1919. A n sumo and bibliography of the rice investi-
gations by the Philippine College of Agriculture. C. V. Pip

457. Osisouv, 1 1 KitBERT. The problem of permanent pasture, with special reference to
the biological factors. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 7-18. 1919. Emphasis is placed

on the importance of pastures and statistics are given showing the comparative areas of pas-
tures and meadows. Attention is also directed to the extremely meager experimental data
on pasture management and t he desirability of comprehensive experiments to guide the stock-
man in the proper utilization of his grazing lands. The complex nature of the pasture prob-
lem involving the various branches of biological science leads the writer to suggest that it
"merits the attention of some broad organization and that it should be so organized as to
secure the cooperation of technically trained men in the various scientific branches con-
cerned." Such an organization it is stated "would certainly secure more important results
and in much less time and with far less expense than can ever be hoped for in disjointed and
fragmentary studies in different phases of the problem, even if taken up by many different
workers and in many different states." — Lyman Carrier.

488. Roxas, Manuel L. Sugar cane investigations at the College of Agriculture. Phil-
ippine Agric. 8: 179-189. 1919. — A digest of sugar cane studies at the Philippine College of
Agriculture, together with a bibliography. — C. V. Piper.

489. Ruffeb, Siu Aunold. Food in Egypte. Mem. Inst. Egypte 1. 86 p. 1919.

490. Temple, A. J. Canadian wonder beans. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 18: 175-177.
1920. — Conditions suitable for growing beans in Victoria are described and cultural methods
given. — J. J. Skinner.

491. Walduon, L. R. Annual hay and forage crops. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta.
Ext. Div. Circ. 37. 8 p., 1 fig. 1920. — Discusses briefly culture and utilization of foxtail
millets, proso {Panicum miliaceum) , Sudan grass, maize, oats, barley, field peas, sunflowers,
Russian thistle, rape, sweet clover, rye and sorghums. — C. V. Piper.

492. Wenholz, H. The utilization of reclaimed swamp land. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31: 401-405. 1920. — Deals in part with suitable pasture plants and with crops and
fertilizers. — L. R. Waldron.

493. Wiancko, A. T., and C. O. Chomer. Soybeans in Indiana. Purdue Univ. Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 238. 16 p., 8 fig. 1920. — Because of their high feeding quality and beneficial
effect on succeeding crops, the growing of soybeans is highly recommended to Indiana farmers.
Soybeans may be used as a substitute for clover, in case of failure of this crop. As a regular
rotation crop soybeans should follow corn. Where wheat followed soybeans, yields were
increased 6| bushels per acre. Directions are given for soil preparation, fertilization, seed
inoculation, cultivation, harvesting and threshing. Results of tests on method and rate of
planting and on variety yields are presented. — Max W. Gardner.

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gageu, Editor
Alfhed Gundehsen, Assistant Editor

494. A., J. C. [Rev. of: Cockayne, L. New Zealand plants and their story. New Zea-
land Board of Science and Art, Manual No. 1. xvi + 248 p. Wellington, New Zealand, 1919.]
New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 407-409. 1919.

495. Anonymous. The New Zealand Institute Science Congress, Christ Church, 1919.
New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2 : 220-230. 1919.

70 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

496. Briquet, J. Rapport sur Tactivite au Conservatoire et au Jardin Botanique de Geneve
pendant les annees 1916, 1917, et 1918. [Report on the Conservatory and Botanical Garden of
Geneva for 1916, 1917 and 1918.] Ann. Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 479-509. 1919.
— The report gives a classified account of the collections received at the Delessert Herbarium
and a list of the publications based on the collections at the Herbarium. There are also
notes on the "Iconothc'que" or collection of portraits, the botanical museum, and the botani-
cal garden. — A. S. Hitchcock.

497. Brown, J. G. A new text book of botany. [Rev. of : Martin, J. N. Botany for agri-
cultural students. John Wiley and Sons: New York, 1919.] Plant World 22: 217. 1919.

498. C., C. A. [Rev. of: anonymous. Plan of Tongariro National Park, [2 miles = 1 in.]
Lands and Survey Dept., Wellington, New Zealand, 1917.] New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1:
191. May, 1918.

499. Checkley, George. The formation of a students' botanical garden. Pharm. Jour.
104: 44. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1298.

500. Densmore, Hiram D. General botany for universities and colleges, xii -j- 469 p.,
289 fig. Ginn & Co. : Boston, 1920. — Part I, Biology of the higher seed plants, contains eleven
chapters, arranged in four sections as follows: (1) Plants and the environment, (2) Cell
structure and anatomy, (3) Physiology, (4) Reproduction. Chapters X and XI are entitled,
"Plant breeding and evolution,"- and "Historical development of botany and the biological
sciences." Part II comprises six chapters on the great groups of plants, and Part III five
chapters on "Representative families and species of the spring flora." — C. S. Gager.

501. Forbes, R. D. Specialization vs. generalization in forestry education. Jour. For-
estry 18: 383-390. 1920. — Training in forestry has gone too far in specialization, the great
need being for men with training along broad lines. Economics, public speaking, psychology
and other cultural courses are recommended. — E. N. Munns.

502. Gager, C. Stuart. Ninth annual report of the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1919.
Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Record 9: 29-89. Apr., 1920. — Contains also the annual reports of the
heads of departments of the Garden.

503. Grier, N. M. The range of information in biology. Ill Botany. Jour. Educat.
Psychol. 10: 509-16. 1919. — Nature study tends to include more botany. A hundred words
relating to plants were given to high school pupils, who were asked to define or explain them,
or state if familiar or new. It appears that botany has better basis on which to build than
physiology or zoology, and should not be excluded from curriculum. — A. Gundersen.

504. Michael, Ellis L. Marine ecology and the coefficient of association. A plea in be-
half of quantitative biology. Jour. Ecol. 8 : 54-59. 1920.

505. Petrie, D. The need of a comprehensive Dominion herbarium. New Zealand
Jour. Sci. Tech. 2 : 260-262. July, 1919. — Recommends that the Dominion government "should
without delay set about creating a comprehensive Domionon Herbarium, and appoint for its
management an expert director of Plant Research .... A good garden, not so much
for the display of floral richness as for practical economic purposes, will be an indispensable
appendage to any worthy herbarium today." Besides the more conmmonly recognized func-
tions of a national herbarium, author adds, "inquiries into the uses and the diseases of plants
of economic importance, and the investigation of other questions of biological significance."
Urges also the founding of a comprehensive plant museum for the Dominion.— C. S. Gager.

506. Thomson, J. A. Proposals for a Dominion scheme of libraries of science and tech-
nology. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 353-365. 1919.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 71

507. T[homson], J. A. [Rev. of: Fleming, A. 1'. M. Industrial research in the United
States of America. No. 1. 60 p., <SV7 pi. London, 1017.] New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1:
122-124. March, 1918.

508. T| iiiimshn |, .1. A. [Rev. of.'HooBBN, G., i.ND J, A. Thomson. Report on the organi-
zation of scientific and industrial research. New Zealand Pari. Paper II. 17. '.) />. 1917.]
New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1: 120-122. March, 1918.

509. W., L. J. [Rev. of: Agricultural research in Australia. Commonwealth of Australia
Advisory Council of Science and Industry. Hull. 7. Melbourne, 1918.] New Zealand Jour.
Sci. Tech. 2: 155-157. March, 1919. — Official report of the proceedings at a conference of
agricultural scientists held in Melbourne in November, 1918, under auspices of Advisory
Council.

510. Wells, Morris M. The relation of ecology to high school biology. School Sci. Math.
18: 439-446. May, 191S— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 384.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor

511. Anonymous. Der Haushalt der preussischen Forst- und Landwirtschaftlichen Ver-
waltung fur das Rechnungsjahr 1919. [Financial statement of the Prussian Department of
Forests and Agriculture, fiscal year 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 327-332. 1919.— Total
income of the forest administration was 263,301,000 marks, or 68,440,000 marks more than
in 1918. 240,000,000 marks was received for timber, an increase of 65,000,000 over 1918, due
to increased quantities sold. Other income was from by-products (resin, etc.), 15,000,000,
hunting, 1,250,000, and miscellaneous 7,051,000 marks. Total expenses were 87,916,000 marks,
or 11,085,000 more than in 1918. These included salaries, 17,816,400 marks, costs of cutting
and transporting timber, 35,000,000 marks, and various other costs of administration, improve-
ments, pensions, and the like. The total area of State forests was 3,052,092 hectares, 13
hectares more than in 1918. Of this, 2,728,868 hectares are productive forest. Total yield
of wood is estimated at 11,351,749 cubic meters. The personnel numbers 6509, including 744
Oberforster ("Supervisors") in charge of forests and 3965 Revierforster and Forster ("Rang-
ers") in charge of districts. — W. N. Sparhaivk.

512. Anonymous. Die Brautigamspflanzung auf Alsen. [The bridegrooms' plantation on
Alsen.] Des Forsters Feierabende [Supplement to Deutsch. Forst zeitg. 35] no. 35. 1920. —
An old custom required every man on Alsen Island, before his marriage, to plant ten young
oaks or fifteen beeches, or pay a fine. Hence the name for the oak and beech woods. — W. N.
Sparhaivk.

513. Anonymous. Die Forderung des Anbaus von Korbweiden. [Encouraging the pro-
duction of basket willows.] Deutsch. Forst zeitg. 35: 175. 1920. — With the shortage of for-
eign raw material the basket industry is in sore straits. The chief sufferers are the war-
injured and other economic weaklings. It is necessary to utilize all existing willow holts and
to develop new ones in every suitable place. — W. N. Sparhaivk.

514. Anonymous. Die neue Dienstanweisung fur die preussischen Staatsforster. [New
service instructions for Prussian state foresters.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 464-473. 1919.
— Gives in detail the duties of local forest field officers, effective October 1, 1919. — W. N.
Sparhaivk.

72 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

515. Anonymous. Eine Verordnung iiber die Einschrankung der Kahlschlage in den nicht-
staatlichen Waldungen. [Ordinance concerning restriction of clearing in forest not belonging
to the state.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 193-194. 1920. — Before the war Germany was a
heavy importer of wood, but now most imports have been cut off, due to the worldwide short-
age of wood and to the high prices and unfavorable rate of exchange. Moreover, large areas
of forests have been lost to Germany as a result of the war. The scarcity of fuel has resulted
in enormous demand for firewood, which further reduces the production of building material
in German forests. The same conditions that hinder imports favor exporting of wood, and
a considerable illicit trade is carried on across the border. The net result of these factors is a
tendency to destroy large areas of private forests for immediate profit. The central government
has proposed a decree forbidding clear cutting, or cutting which leaves less than one-fourth
of the normal stand, on any area of more than 0.5 hectare in other than state forests, except
with permit from designated authorities. Such permission may be withheld in case the pro-
posed cutting endangers the given stand or neighboring ones, through formation of torrents,
shifting sands, or exposure to wind, or if the stand to be cut is at a period in its growth where
considerable loss in volume production would result from it cutting, or if a continuous sup-
ply of wood for the local population and industries would be threatened, or if reforestation
would be made difficult. A sufficient sum to carry out reforestation measures must be depos-
ited with proper authorities. Penalties for violation are set at from 1000 to 10,000 marks
per hectare, unless local laws prescribe higher ones. — W. N. Sparhaivk.

516. Anonymous. Erganzende Anweisung zur "Anweisung zur Ausfiihrung der Betriebs-
regelungen in den Preussischen Staatsforsten vom 17 Marz, 1912," bis 12 Marz, 1919. [Supple-
mentary instructions for management of Prussian state forests.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41:
310-317. 1919. — Due to heavy cutting in the state forests, and especially in young stands,
during the war, certain changes in management are necessary. Most important is to shorten
the rotation period. An average rotation of 100 years is set for pine and, in general, also
for spruce. Since it will be necessary to produce high grade large timber, common timber,
and mine timber and pulpwood, the stands will be managed on three different rotations,
depending on the particular stands in each case, of 120 years, 100 years, and 60 years, in about
the proportion 2:3:1 (making the average 100). For hardwoods the former rotations will
generally be used. In case of the younger stands, decision as to the rotation to be used can
be deferred until they are older. As a basis for planning the regulation, an age-class survey
and map must be made. For this purpose the forests are to be classified in four main types,
according to the predominating species: oak; beech-ash-maple; birch-alder; and fir-spruce-
pine. Other instructions relate to changes in the working plan and cutting budget. — W. N.
Sparhaivk.

517. Anonymous. Gegen die Zwangsbewirtschaftung des Eichengerbholzes. [Against
compulsory utilization of oak tanning-extract wood.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 194. 1920. —
The wood committee of the imperial forestry council has decided against compulsory utili-
zation of oak extract-wood and tanbark, but urges all forest owners to keep in mind the
need of the German leather industry for such material. — W. N. Sparhawk.

518. Anonymous. Milderung der Brennholznot im nachsten Winter. [Relief of fuel
shortage for next winter.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 194. 1920. — Fuel shortage will probably
be as acute next winter as in the one just past, especially since much wood as would ordinarily
be available for fuel will be taken for mine timbers, paper pulp, and ties. Coal production
must be increased and stumps and peat must be utilized as far as possible. — W. N. Sparhawk.

519. Anonymous. Neuregelung der Jagdnutzung in den preussischen Staatsforsten.
[New regulations governing hunting in Prussian state forests.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 449-
464. 1919. — Gives in considerable detail the new regulations effective October 1, 1919. The
policy has been adopted of keeping the hunt under control of the forest administration, except
in exceptional cases where it may be leased. — W. N. Sparhawk.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 73

520. Anonymous. Note on sal sowings in the western Dooars. Indian Forester 46:
297-303. 1 fig. 1920. — Results of experimental seed sowing of sal in India show that the
work must be done in the open and that the competition of the native grasses must be kept
down. Planting with Tephrosia is advocated as a measure of insuring slight competition,
green manuring and protection. Grass fires set the plantations back about three years and
animals do considerable damage. — E. N. Manns.

521. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Hargreayks, W. A. An investigation into the prospects
of establishing a paper making industry in South Australia. Dept. Chem. South Australia
Bull. 1. 56 p. Adelaide 1916.1 New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1: 60. 1918.— Australia is
said to be the largest consumer of paper in the world, per capita of population, and South
Australia is entirely dependent upon outside sources for supplies of both paper and mill-
board. There are four mills in Victoria. Besides the manufacture of paper from straw,
the article also deals fully with the manufacture of straw boards, and in both cases the esti-
mated costs of manufacture are detailed in full. — C. S. Gager.

522. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Pool, Raymond J. Handbook of Nebraska trees. Nebraska
Conserv. and Soil Surv. Bull. 7. Lincoln, Nebraska, 1919.] Jour. Forestry 18: 424-426.
1920.

523. Anonymous. Waldverwiistung in der Umgebung von Wien. [Forest devastation
around Vienna.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 42. 1920. — Although cutting of marked trees is
permitted on a strip 3 kilometers deep and 50 kilometers long in the Wienerwald, no one takes
the trouble to locate the marks, and all the trees are being cut. Trees planted along the
banks of the Danube to prevent flood and washing have also been cut. The famous Wald-
gurtel (forest belt) has almost been entirely destroyed. Many people make a regular busi-
ness of stealing wood and selling it; school-boys make 100 kroner a day, and many coachmen
have become very wealthy. In the Hiitteldorf forest there are, on the average, 10,000 wood-
thieves at work on weekdays and 100,000 on Sundays. — W. N. Sparhawk.

524. Anonymous. Washington's sick sycamores. Amer. Forestry 26: 267. 1 fig. 1920.
— Concerns treatment of sycamores for the sycamore louse and oyster-shell scale. — Chas. H.
Otis.

525. Archibald, Jno. C. Points to remember. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13: 165-185. 1919.
— Twenty points which the author believes are especially important for forestry students to
memorize are listed. They deal with a variety of subjects from silviculture to personal man-
ners. These "points" are followed by a short discussion of nursery practice, planting, thin-
ning, pruning, ditching, fencing, hedging, and walling. The silvical characteristics of a few
common forest trees are also taken up briefly. — C. R. Tillotson.

526. Augur. Aus dem deutschen Forstjahr 1919. [Developments in German forestry in
1919.] Deutsch Forstzeitg. 35: 185-18S. 1920. — Notes various developments affecting the
personnel, as a result of the loss of large forest areas by the treaty of peace and as a result of
the Revolution. — W. N. Sparhawk.

527. B., C. U. The importance of vertical stacking in the seasoning of converted material.
Indian Forester 46: 238-239. 1 pi. 1920. — In the manufacture of boxes for special purposes,
water seasoning in the log form is necessary. After cutting, the material should be stacked
on end for 15 days and then piled horizontally for 3-6 months, to secure the best material.
The difference in red and white Bombax is due to a difference in the grain of the wood. — E. N.
Munns.

528. Bailey, W. A. Length of time taken by sal seedlings to establish themselves. Indian
Forester 46: 307-309. 1920. — Fenced and cultivated plots show a much more fully stocked
stand of sal seedlings than plots not so cared for. So far, it has taken ten years for natural-
sown seedlings to develop into a full crop of fully established young plants. [See also next
following Entry, 529.]— E. N. Munns.

74 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

529. Bailey, W. A. Season of growth of sal, Shorea robusta. Indian Forester 46: 317.
1920. — Measurement of sal sample plots showed a growth of but 0.2 inch in circumference in
the June-to- January period, while a normal increment for a full year is 1.0 inch. It may be
that maximum growth takes place before the monsoon. [See also next preceding Entry, 528.]
— E. N. Munns.

530. Baltz. Die Weymouthskiefer (Pinus strobus.) [The Weymouth pine.] Forstwiss.
Centralbl. 41: 302-307. 1919.— Suggests caution in planting white pine on a large scale in
Germany, because it is susceptible to blister rust (Peridermium strobi), it has a decided ten-
dency to develop many branches which hang on even after they die, and so yields inferior
lumber; and it is attacked by the pine bark-louse (Chermes strobi), which retards growth
and even kills the trees or so weakens them that they are attacked by the fungus Agaricus
mellsus. Neither does this tree, as has been supposed by some, thrive on all kinds of sites,
but requires a fair amount of moisture and prefers good soil, upon which native species will
generally yield better returns. Some of the failures of white pine plantations are due to
carelessness in selecting the sites. The wood is not of particularly high quality; even attempts
of the Diamond Match Company in Germany to use it for match manufacture failed, because
it did not split well and was too brittle. Planting in pure stands is not recommended, but
on account of its good silvical qualities it is a good species to plant in mixed stands with
spruce, beech, and Scotch pine, especially to fill openings which may develop in such stands
after they are established. The name "silk fir" (Seidenfohre) has been used in Baden and
the Palatinate to avoid the English "Weymouth pine." "White pine" conflicts with Pinus
silvestris, called white pine in Austria to distinguish it from the black pine. Baltz suggests
"Strobe."— IF. N. Sparhawk.

531. Bandekow. Die Anwendung der Photogrammetrie in der Forsteinrichtung. [Use
of photographic surveying in forest management.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 60-61. 1920. —
Suggests that aerial photography will be very useful in mapping forest areas. — W. N. Spar-
hawk.

532. Beevor, Sir Hugh R. Young woods in Belgium. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13 : 272-275.
1919. — This is a brief discussion of the methods followed and the species used in recent forest
planting operations in Belgium. — C. R. Tillotson.

533. Brown, William H., and Elmer D. Merrill. Philippine palms and palm products.
Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. IS. 129 p., 44 pi- 1919. — A general consideration of
the economic uses of all known Philippine palms, comprising 123 species in 24 genera. Keys
are given to the genera and species and brief descriptive notes, all local names, distribution,
and occurrence are noted for each species. The group is one of very great economic impor-
tance, yielding a multitude of materials entering the internal and external commerce of the
Philippines.— #. D. Merrill.

534. Bruce, Donald. The height and diameter basis for volume tables. Jour. Forestry
18: 549-557. 1920. — Volume tables are based upon diameter and height, the measurement of
the former "breast high" being generally accepted. While more variable than diameters
taken at some other heights, it is precise enough for forest practice. In height measurements,
there is little conformity. Total height is correct for sample plot work and cubic foot volume
tables. For general practice, total height is not always possible and there is a wide diver-
gence between the fixed top diameter and the merchantable height. In the latter case, the
divergence varies with the intensity of the utilization and the practice of the region. With
tables prepared to a fixed top, a corrective factor may be applied in accordance with the
practice of the logger and region. The use of form factors only serves to complicate the
matter. — E. N. Munns.

535. Bruce, Donald. A proposed standardization of the checking of volume tables.
Jour. Forestry 18 : 544-548. 1 fig. 1920. — Volume tables need better and more uniform check-

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 75

ing. By lax met hods checks arc made w liicli do not show t he i rue state of affairs. Of I hree
methods possible, thai of the average deviation appears to offer the greatesl possibiliti
Two tests should be made of every volume (able, a comparison of the true volume against
the table volume, and a computation <>f the average deviation of the individual volume-' from
it. With these tests prepared for each table it should be possible to determine the aecuracy
of the table for use in any region or for any set of trees by the degree to which I hey fit. —
E. N. Maims.

536. Buy ant, H. B. A suggested general forest organization for the Madras Presidency.
Indian Forester 46: 205-212. 1 fig. 1920. — It is proposed to organize the work under the
four branches: Working Plans, Exploitation, Clerical and Educational. The functions of
each branch and its organization are depicted. — E. N. Manns.

537. Cape, John. The measurement of timber. Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor. Soc. 33: 127-
138. 1919.— The author points out the inaccuracy of the "quarter girth system" of measuring
timber, which has become so universally used in the British Isles, discusses other systems of
measurement and finally proposes for use the formula 1/2 (D2) L. The amount of manu-
factured material produced from a log is taken as equal to a square log, having as its section
an area equal to the square inscribed in the mean sectional area of the log. — C. R. Tillotson.

538. Carhart, A. H. Recreation in the forests. Amer. Forestry 26: 268-272. 10 fig.
1920.

539. Gary, Austin. Reflections. Jour. Forestry 18: 472-476. 1920.— The professional
forester has laid himself open to criticism because he has not purchased and put into operation
on his own lands what he has been preaching as good for the lumberman. — E. N. Munns.

540. Claughton-Wallin, H., and F. McVicker. The Jonson "absolute form quotient"
as an expression of taper. Jour. Forestry 18: 346-357. 1920. — Investigations to determine
the extent to which the Jonson "absolute form quotient" agrees with American timber shows
that it is of great value in reducing the number of field measurements necessary to prepare
an ordinary volume table. Tried out on small eastern pines and spruce the results were
surprisingly good and even in the large timber of the American northwest, the theory is of
great value. For large timbers the root swelling interfered to a considerable extent, but
below 12 inches breast high root swelling is a negligible factor. Form class is hard to deter-
mine, but density appears to be an excellent criterion of the average form of trees in even-aged
stands, and a relation between density and form class can be established.- — E. N. Munns.

541. Dallimore, W. Elms and elm timber. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 109-118. 1920. —
This article discusses the difficulties attending the sale of elm timber by owners in the Brit-
ish Isles, attributes it to the failure of both grower and timber merchant to recognize and keep
separate the several different kinds of elm. Discusses the characteristics of the elms of
Britain. — C. R. Tillotson.

542. Deb, Sasi Mohan. Tea box industry in Upper Assam. Indian Forester 46: 304-307.
1920. — A list of the woods in order of their value for tea boxes is given and their method of
manufacture is described. — E. N. Munns.

543. Eberhard. Was will der Abriicksaumschlag (Keilsaumbetrieb)? [Wedge strip
cuttings.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 441-448. 1919. — With most silvicultural systems that
depend upon natural reproduction, considerable damage is done to young growth by the
removal of the older trees. This is particularly true where, as in most cases, successive cut-
tings proceed away from roads and upward on slopes. Under the system here proposed cutting
begins half way between main roads, in level country, and proceeds toward the roads, so that
logs are not dragged over young growth. On slopes, cutting strips lie up and down the slope.
The system involves a preparatory stage, with frequent light thinnings in the upper crown

76 • FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

class over the whole area until reproduction is established and two or three years old. This
preliminary stage is practically the same in all methods relying on natural reproduction. The
method described differs from the strip selection system (Blendersaumschlag) in that the
resulting new stand in each compartment is even-aged or at most divided into a few even-aged
groups. It differs from the shelterwood system in that the removal of the old stand is not
carried on uniformly over the whole area but is done unevenly in strips or wedge-shaped
patches. It is claimed that damage both from windfall and from logging is very small, while
logging costs are kept down to a minimum. — W. N. Sparhawk.

544. Eckstein. Wieder die Buchen-Wollschildlaus, Cryptococcus fagi. [The beech
wooly-scale-louse.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 194-195. 1923. — -Notes on the life history of the
beech louse. Its attacks are frequently followed by beetles such as Tomicus domesticus, and
Lymexylon dermestoides, and by the fungus Nectria ditissima, which kills the tree. The
louse alone does not kill the tree. Means of control are suggested. — W. N. Sparhmvk.

545. Eckstein. Zuckererzeugung in den Larchenwaldungen des Wallis. [Sugar produc
tion in the larch forests of Canton Wallis.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 195-196. 1920. — During
the abnormally hot summer of 1919 the foliage of the larch stands in Canton Wallis, Switzer-
land, was covered with a white substance containing a large percentage of sugar. This was
in the form of little balls 1-2 cm. in diameter and hundreds of pounds could be collected in
a short time. It is supposed to have been due to the crystallization of "honey dew" secreted
by the leaf louse Laclmus laricis. Somewhat similar is the "manna" produced by Coccus
manniparus on Tamarix mannifera on the Sinai Peninsula, also a manna on oaks in Mesopo-
tamia, one in Australia on eucalypts, one on Cedrus libani, and a similar product of unknown
origin, in the vicinity of Briancon, France. — W. N. Sparhaivk.

546. Elliott, F. A. Airplane patrol of the forests. Amer. Forestry 26: 206-20S. 4 fig.
1920.

547. Eulefeld. Auffallende Erscheinung im Laubholzwald. [Peculiar phenomenon in
deciduous forest.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: S-9. 1920. — In 1919 beech foliage in Germany
turned brown much earlier and was darker colored than usual. Yet the leaves did not fall,
even after considerable cold weather and snow. Possibly the abnormally dry summer did
not permit free development of the winter buds, with consequent lack of enough pressure to
push the leaves off. Due to the early drying of the foliage, many of the twigs are poorly
lignified and will probably be winter-killed in case of very cold weather. Although the beech
mast was very abundant in the fall of 1918, there was comparatively little germination, nor
did the horns of deer develop as well as usual. This is thought to be because the abnormal
1918 season prevented the beechnuts from filling out. — W. N. Sparhawk.

548. Eulefeld. Kurze Mitteilung von der Harznutzung im Jahre 1920. [Turpentining in
1920. (Should be 1919.)] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 60. 1920.— Gives yields and net income
from turpentining Scotch pine stands in Hesse, during 1919. — W. N. Sparhawk.

549. Fabricius. Griindung einer Bayerischen Rinden-Verwertungs-Aktien-Gesellschaft.
[Bavarian Tan-bark Exploitation Company.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 474-475. 1919. — Ger-
many consumed, in the year before the war, 80,009,000 kgm. of tannin, of which only 14,000,000
kgm. was produced from domestic materials (90,000,000 kgm. of oak and 45,000,000 kgm. of
spruce bark). From Austria was imported from 25,000,000 to 36,000,000 kgm. of spruce bark.
The spruce yields more tannin (11.5 per cent vs. 10 per cent for oak), but does not make as good
leather as the oak. Germany could produce perpetually at least 220,000,000 kgm. of spruce
bark per annum. Bavaria can produce 62,500,000 kgm., but thus far the bark has had to be
shipped to extract plants in North Germany. The new corporation plans to build a plant in
Bavaria. After the tannin has been extracted the bark will be made into briquettes for fuel
in the plant and for sale. Its heat value is about equal to that of wood, peat, or Saxon lig-
nite, about half that of good coal. — W. N. Sparhawk.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 77

550. Fernow, B. E. [Rev. of: New Jersey Department Conservation and Development,
Annual Report, 1919. Tr.Mil on, New Jersey, 1919.] Jour. Forestry 18: 165-166. 1920

551. Fisher, 11. T., and E. I. Terry. Management of second growth white pine in cen-
tral New England. Jour. Forestry 18: .V>s 366. L920. -Studies show that the shelterwood
system is host adapted for white pine second growth in pun; stands, using a combination of
thinning with clear cutting. Reproduction is thus assured though there has been much
trouble with snout beetles in seedlings and the pine weevil in saplings. Slash may be left on
the ground in the mixed hardwood and pine stands 1 ml must be removed in pure pine stands
as it wastes much space and precludes reproduction. — E. N. Munns.

552. FlTZWATBB, J. A. Discussion of the Pinchot Committee report. Jour. Forestry 18:
KV1 -lf>i). 1920. — -Forest devastation in the Inland Empire (Northwest U. S. A.) has not been
as severe as it has been depicted but there is need for a forest program handled by the Federal
government rather than by the individual states. Acquisition of cut-over lands by the
government is favored and the cost of conservative logging and mature timber should be
borne by the public. — E. N. Munns.

553. Forbes, R. D. Specialization vs. generalization in forestry education. Jour. Forestry
18: 383- 390. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 501.

554. Green, Frederick J. Germinative capacity of pine seed. Quart. Jour. Forest 14:
140-141. 1920. — Scotch pine seed collected from trees of several ages was left exposed to the
heat of an unused hothouse for one summer. It was sown the following spring and gave the
following germination results: Seed from 15-year old trees, 87 per cent; from 30-year old trees,
50 per cent ; from 45-year old trees, 30 per cent; from 60-year old trees, 15 per cent; from 110-
year old trees, failure. These results agree with those discussed in another article, Ibid.,
January, 1910. — C. R. Tillotson.

555. Greenfield, W. P. The beech in Lincolnshire. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13: 269-271.
1919. — -This is a short discussion dealing with the lack of beech reproduction on the chalk
Wolds of Lincolnshire, where there are many good beech woods but no natural beech regen-
eration. The author raises the question as to reasons for this, but does not answer it. — C. R.
Tillotson.

556. Grieve, J. W. A. The self-contained forest estate in the Himalayas. Indian Forester
46: 273-279. 1920. — Each forest unit should become as self sustaining as possible, the unit
to be the forest community. Forest and field crops may be grown simultaneously, and a
group of skilled forest workmen evolved. — E. N. Munns.

557. Guthrie, John D. Early English forest regulations. Jour. Forestry 18: 530-541.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 932.

558. Hagem, Oscar. Svensk froundersogelser. [Seed-testing in Sweden.) Tidsskr.
Skogbruk 28: 72-80. 1920. [A review of the report published by Edward Wiebeck .] — Both
Wiebeck and the author found appreciable differences in the quality of Scotch pine and Nor-
way spruce seed, the better seed coming from the warmer parts of these two countries.
Wiebeck's investigations show that, for northern Sweden, 50 per cent or higher germination
was obtained from seed collected where the isotherm for June to August was between 13 and
14°C.; the medium quality of seed, which germinated from 41 to 50 per cent, was collected
where the isotherm for the same months was from 12 to 13°C. ; and the poorer kind, which ger-
minated only 40 per cent or less, was collected where the isotherm showed below 12°C. Hag-
em's results correspond quite generally with these, there being a discrepancy of only 0.5°C.
— J. A. Larsen.

78 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

559. Hall, R. C. The forest situation in France. Jour. Forestry 18: 522-529. 1920.—
The French forest policy of keeping 18 per cent of her land area in permanent forests was
justified by the results in the Great War, for through her forests France was self sustaining
and furnished the American and British armies with their wood supplies as well. With the
coal supply virtually shut off, wood formed an important fuel. During the war the bulk of
the cut came from the private forests, the government being reluctant to permit over-cutting
in the state forests. The present problem in France is the restoration of the invaded region,
the extent to which present needs can be met from the public forests, and the recuperation of
private woodlands. Much of the invaded area will have to be replanted, which will be a long-
time project, because of the great acreage, the high cost and the problem of ownership.
For present needs over-cutting will be necessary, as the unfavorable financial exchange pre-
vents importation. Private woodlands should be purchased now, but this is financially out
of the question. The management of private lands has long been unsatisfactory and some
further measures of state control are being advocated. — E. N. Munns.

569. Haslund, Ole. Granens Stammeform. [Form factor and form-class of Norway
spruce.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 44-53. Fig. 4- 1920. — By making use of the fact that the
form factor varies according to the form-point, which is a relation between form of crown and
form of stem, certain characteristic relations of crown, form, diameter and height are expressed
and the variations of these according to the site and density of the stands. The form classes
are expressed as 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70 and 0.75, the last being the best form. A tree of 40 cm.
diameter breast high in the 0.55-class has a crown diameter of 5.5 m., and a tree of the same
diameter of stem but in the 0.70-form class has a crown diameter of only 4.3 m. Trees of the
first kind need an area of 30.25 sq. m., while those of the latter require only 18.49 sq. m. In
the first class there would be 33 trees per dekar (0.1 hectar) and those of the 0.70 class would
stand 54 per dekar. From this study it is concluded, among other things, that it is very
poor policy to cut in such a manner as to open the stand sufficiently to lower the form class.
— J. A. Larsen. *

561. Havelock, W. B. Common and Japanese larch at Brocklesby Park. Quart. Jour.
Forest. 14: 59-61. 1920.— Comparisons of the growth at Brocklesby Park, England, of
Japanese and European larch, which was set out in 1903-04, spaced 4 by 4 feet and mixed with
hardwoods in the proportion of two softwoods to one hardwood. Measurements, presumably
in the winter of 1919-20, show the following average girths of trees on an area which has been
thinned three times: Japanese larch, 14 inches; sycamore, 11.2 inches; ash, 9.7 inches; elm,
etc., 9.4 inches. On another area, twice thinned, European larch has an average girth of 13.1
inches; sycamore, 11 inches, ash, 9.6 inches, beech, 5.4 inches; and other hardwoods, S.l inches.
[See also following Entries, 562, 563.]— C. R. Tillotson.

562. Havelock, W. B. European and Japanese larch at Brocklesby Park. Quart. Jour.
Forest. 14: 101-103. 1920. — The growth of both European and Japanese larches in mixture with
various hardwoods is discussed briefly. The larches in every instance have exceeded the
other species in rate of growth. [See also next preceding and next following Entries, 561,
563.]— C. R. Tillotson.

563. Havelock, W. B. The western larch (Larix occidentalis) on the Brocklesby Park
estate, Lincolnshire. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 96-100. 1920. — Larix occidentalis on this
estate is longer in establishing itself than either the European or Japanese species but in the
power of resistance to frost and drought, there does not appear to be much difference between
them. It does not appear to thrive where there is thick grass in the plantation at first. Its
height growth in the young stage is inferior to the European and Japanese larches. Shelter
appears to be desirable for it in its early years. [See also preceding entries, 561, 562.] — C. R.
Tillotson.

564. Hiley, W. E. The mean annual forest per cent. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13: 156-165.
1919. — By the use of the soil expectation value formula and a money yield table for Scots pine,

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 79

the writer has constructed a graph from which lie can read 1 he mean annual forest per cent for
that species when the soil value and rotation arc known or assumed. From this graph the
optimum financial rotation, the loss due to cutting woods before the financial rotation is
reached, and the price which may he paid for land for afforestation (assuming a certain
interest rate and rotation) can also be readily determined. — C. R. Tillotson.

565. Hofmann, J. V. How fires destroy our forests. Amer. Forestry 26: 329-336. 17
fig. 192(i.

566. Hopkinson, A. D. A note on the financial results of pine and beech forests in Nor-
mandy. Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor. Soc. 34: 82-87. 1920. — With Scotch pine grown in an 80-
year and beech in a 190-year rotation, the pine is nearly five times as advantageous as the beech
from a purely financial point of view. This is partly accounted for by the fact that this
rotation for beech is not its financial rotation while 80 years is perhaps the financial rotation
for pine. From the silvicultural point of view, the advantage is certainly with the beech,
which as a pure crop has many advantages which can not be assigned to extensive areas of
pure pine. — C. R. Tillotson.

567. Hutchins, D. E. The forests of New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor. Soc. 33:
119-123. 1919. — The forests of New Zealand are the best softwood forests in the southern
hemisphere. They have never been surveyed and only vague estimates have been made of
their area and stand of timber. The output of sawn timber indicates that over the area
milled the stand has been 2| times that of the average of the virgin forests of America. Over
small areas some timber stands of 200,000 superficial feet per acre have been recorded. New
Zealand timbers excel those of Europe in quality, but are less desirable than those of America.
The value of kauri timber is well known, but it is not generally known that it is the largest
timber-producing tree in the world, on account of the small taper of its trunk. There was
3,000,000 acres of kauri forest in New Zealand; very little is now left but there are about
500,000 acres that are restorable. Totara, the next most valuable New Zealand timber, is
the best of all the world's Podocarpus timbers. The most valuable forests now left in New
Zealand are of totara. Rimu, the common housebuilding timber, is beautiful, fine figured
and surpasses oak in color and grain. — In 1909 the forest area of New Zealand was estimated
at 17,000,000 acres. The New Zealand forests are worth more than all the known mineral
wealth of the Dominion and they offer more employment than any other industry. Forest
plantations are about 30,000 acres in extent and have cost about 13 pounds per acre. — C. R.
Tillotson.

568. Hutchins, D. E. Rate of growth of trees in relation to forestry. A criticism of Mr.
E. Maxwell's paper. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 3: 1-7. 1920. — To consider growth of indi-
vidual trees instead of forests is misleading. The five chief native timber trees of New Zea-
land in their forests grow faster than the five chief timber trees of Europe in theirs. While
introduced trees should be planted, native ones should also be conserved. [See also Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 588.] — A. Gundersen.

569. Hutchins, D. E. Waipona kauri forest. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 412.
1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 624.

570. Illick, J. S. Management of the state forests of Pennsylvania. Amer. Forestry 26:
389-342. 8 fig. 1920.

571. Illick, J. S. Some silvicultural problems in Pennsylvania. Jour. Forestry 18:
502-511. 1920. — Forest planting includes some of the main problems of forestry. Planting
of over 33,000,000 trees by the State with from 33 to 79 per cent of the various species living,
shows that planting can be successfully done here. Most of the planting has been in the
spring but successes of from 72 to 92 per cent for fall planting show this season is also suitable.
The cost of planting ranges from $4.20 to $10.77 per thousand, 1919 costs being only $8.64 a

80 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

thousand as against an average of $6.05. Fire loss, in spite of local high hazards, amounts to
only 0.03 per cent. In the past ten years over 9,000,000 trees have been distributed to private
individuals, water companies planting 1,750,000 trees. Other planters include farmers, min-
ing companies, municipalities, lumbermen, hunting and recreation clubs, and educational
institutions. — E. N. Munns.

572. Ivy, T. P. Forestry, livestock and cut-over lands of the south. Amer. Forestry 26:
299-302. 6 fig. 1920.

573. Jardine, J. T. Efficient regulation of grazing in relation to timber production.
Jour. Forestry 18: 367-382. 1920. — Investigations have shown that there is a grave danger
from sheep grazing to reproduction of the valuable timber species of the western United States
through overgrazing, trampling and browsing, though under certain circumstances sheep
may be of value in getting it established. Sheep may be an aid in the reduction of the forest-
fire hazard through destruction of the fuel on the ground and the cutting up of litter and duff.
The present needs in National Forest administration are for a policy to govern grazing, to
either recognize grazing as having a place in forest management or to limit its growing
use, and to provide for investigations to enable proper grazing regulation and inspection. —
E. N. Munns.

574. Johannes, Gunnar. Et lidet inleg for anvendelsen af 2 /0 furu of nogle bemerkninger
om planteskole og plantearbeide. [Notes on the use of 2-0 (Scotch) pine and remarks on nursery
and labor conditions.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 54-60. 1 pi. 1920.— In view of the greatly
increased cost of raising nursery stock and of establishing plantations, and the \rausual suc-
cess attending the planting of 2-0 nursery stock in the littoral belt of Sweden, the author urges
greater use of this stock and the employment of school children wherever possible. — J. A.
Larsen.

575. Kay, James. Red pine or Norway pine (Pinus resinosa). Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor.
Soc. 33: 157-161. 1919. — This is a discussion of the commercial importance, silvical charac-
teristics and quality of wood of the red or Norway pine and in tabular form presents a compari-
son of the form factors, form quotients, and volumes of red and white pine for trees up to 9
inches in diameter. — C. R. Tillotson.

576. Kirkland, Burt P. The democracy of national control. Jour. Forestry 18: 448-
450. 1920. — -A comparison of state action in legislature with that of the federal government
does not show to the advantage of the former. If the forest policy is left to state control, the
nation will be no better off than at present and it is inconceivable, in the light of past expe-
rience, that adjoining states would treat the same subject in the same way. — E. N. Munns.

577. Kirkland, Burt P. Effects of destructive lumbering on labor. Jour. Forestry 18:
318-320. 1920. — The policy of unrestricted destructive lumbering leads to a disorganization
of labor resulting in a denial of normal family life and the right of suffrage, and leading to
irregularity of employment. Labor has no interest in the industry and holds a feeling of
injustice which is largely responsible for ultra-radical doctrines. — E. N. Munns.

578. Kittredge, Joseph, Jr. Silvicultural practice in coppice-under-standard forests of
eastern France. Jour. Forestry 18: 512-521. 1920.— The mixed hardwood forests of France
are managed to furnish a sustained annual yield with an area regulation. Coppice is used
chiefly as cordwood and is ready for cutting at an average age of 30 j'ears; the standards are
in multiples of the age of the coppice stands. Marking is done by a technical forester upon
all lands, regardless of ownership, and, while concerned with reserving the best trees, the
uniformity of the stand is excellent. The regulations governing the sales are printed in pam-
phlet form for all France and a number of the clauses are given in full. The average yield is
from 500 to 1000 board-feet per acre, in logs, with an average of ten cords of wood per acre,
of which about one-half is from 3 to 6 inches in diameter. — E. N. Munns.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 81

579. Koch, Elers. Discussion of the Pinchot Committee report. Jour. Forestry 18:
I. ">s -Kin. hl'ii. The plan nf the Pinchol Committee ie believed idealistic, and not Feasible.
The time is not ripe for such a program of foresl policy, but niicnl ion should be concent rated
on the fire problem, and forest-fire control by the states will go farther than national control
of lumbering. — E. N. Munns.

580. Kobhler, A. [Rev. of: Wilson, T. R. C. Effect of kiln drying on the strength of
airplane parts. Rept. No. 68, Nation. Advisory Committee for Aeronautics. Washington,
D. C, 1920.1 Jour. Forestry 18: 421-423. 1920.

5S1. Leopold, Aldo. Forestry of the prophets. Jour. Forestry 18: 412-419. 1920.- See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 940.

5. Lowinger, Extgen. Polens Fortswirtschaft und Deutschland. [Poland's forestry
and Germany.) Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 195. 1920. — In order to import needed materials
Poland musl export raw material, particularly forest products. The Polish government is
encouraging cutting of timber for this purpose as well as to supply home needs, and is backing
a large private sawmill company which is to saw lumber for home and foreign trade. A 15,000
hectare tract of virgin forest in the province of Grodno has been made available for exploita-
tion.— W. -N. Sparhawk.

583. Ludwig. Gewinnung von Gerbrinden mittels Dampfschalung. [Use of steam in
harvesting tan-bark. | Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41 : 401 404. 1919. — Scarcity of tanning material
during the war led to the discovery that not only oak bark, but even that of spruce, is of
great value for tanning. The use of domestic products will continue, as far as possible,
because of high prices for quebracho, high freight rates, and unfavorable financial exchange.
Harvesting of bark has heretofore been possible only between May and July or August. Ex-
periments have shown that bark can be removed at any time by the use of steam, very much
more cheaply than in the old way and without impairing its value. Guts chow invented a
portable steaming and drying apparatus that could be taken into the woods. Oak bark,
usually directly used, must be thoroughly dried; spruce bark is more often extracted 'and only
a little drying is required. Less steaming is required if the bolts are steamed while green, and
there is also less loss of tannin due to weathering. The use of spruce bark for tanning has
special significance for the paper and pulp industry, since the bark has to be removed for
pulp making and has not hitherto been utilized. It can now be sold as tanning material, for
enough to pay the cost of removal and give a good profit besides. — W. N. Sparhawk.

584. MacLarty, Alexander S. Forest tree seed. Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor. Soc. 33:
138-146. 1919. — This paper discusses several points which should be given consideration in
the collection of forest tree seed. — C. R. Tillotson.

585. Makins, F. K. Natural reproduction of sal, Shorea robusta, in Singhbhum. Indian
Forester 46: 292-297. PI. 16-18. 1920. — Sal reproduction is satisfacl >ry where drought is not
severe, but much of the region considered has long periods of dry weather; only about 20 per
cent of the forest area has reproduction. Deposition and evaporation of dew have an impor-
tant influence on sal. Heavy shade appears to be a benefit but heavy litter prevents estab-
lishment. Young sal plants require assistance in making their way through climbing plants,
while non-climbers act as a nurse crop. A grass cover does not prevent sal establishment
though better results are obtained after burning. — E. N. Munns.

586. Mason, Fred. Discussion of the Pinchot Committee report. Jour. Forestry 18:
451-458. 1920. — Exception is taken to the Committee's attitude towards the lumbermen, who
are not to blame for the living conditions and the labor troubles within the industry. Forest
destruction by the lumber interests is not a needless act, but is forced by economic conditions.
Finances in the lumber industry have been so entangled that conservation could not be prac-
ticed, though some measures have been forced upon them. Measures which are feasible
include a yield tax, a forest loan board, and the purchase of forest-producing lands by the
public. An educational program is suggested to teach lumber conservation in all phases of
its use. — E. N. Munns.

82 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

587. Mason, W. H. Planting in pits. Quart. Jour. Forest, 14: 141-142. 1920.— The
planting of larch in pits where the turf was cast, grass down, into the bottom of the pit and
finely chopped up, resulted in complete failure of the plantation. The sod at the bottom of
the pits, it was discovered, had rotted away, leaving a cavity into which all the moisture
around the tree drained. — C. R. Tillotson.

588. Maxwell, E. Rate of growth of indigenous and exotic trees in New Zealand. Com-
parison of the rate of growth in relation to its bearing on forestry. New Zealand Jour. Sci.
Tech. 2: 371-376. 3 tables. 1919. — Waste of native forests has brought these near extinc-
tion. Introduced trees grow much more rapidly than native ones. Considers Sequoia sem-
pervircns especially destined to play a very important part in future New Zealand forestry.
[See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 568.] — A. Gundersen.

5S9. Meredith, E. T. Forests as a farm crop. Amer. Forestry 26: 337-338, 342. 1920.

590. Meredith, E. T. Need of forests for wood pulp. Amer. Forestry 26 : 362-363. 1920.
[From a letter to the American Paper and Pulp Association.]

591. Moore, Barrington. [Rev. of: Brown, Nelson C. Forest products, their manu-
facture and use. 471 p., 120 fig. John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1919.] Torreya 20: 57-59.
1920. — The book treats of the history, process of manufacture, and use of the principal forest
products. Of special interest is information on sources of supply with relation to present
and future forest resources. The book is well illustrated and provided with an index. — J. C.
Nelson.

592. Morrison, W. G. Some proposals with regard to natural afforestation in a New Zea-
land mountain area. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 339-349. 1919.

593. Munger, T. T. Forestry in the Douglas fir region. Amer. Forestry 26: 199-205.
7 fig. 1920.

594. Murray, J. M. Variation in the Scots pine (Pinus silvestris, L.). Trans. Roy. Scot.
Arbor. Soc. 34: 87-91. 1920.— C. R. Tillotson.

595. Olmsted, Frederick E. Business phases of forest devastation. Jour. Forestry 18:
311-316. 1920. — -The provisions of the Committee for Application of Forestry to correct
certain business practices of the lumber industry, are necessary to carry out the program as
a whole, since forestry would have to control prices, capitalization and other business condi-
tions. Arguments are presented showing silviculture to be a business as well as an art and
science, for problems of labor, production, distribution and costs must be met. — E. N. Munns.

596. Parkin, John. A plea for the consideration of the aesthetic side in restocking our
war-felled woods. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13: 254-265. 1919. — See also next following Entry,
597.

597. Parkin, John. A plea for the consideration of the aesthetic side in restocking our
war-felled woods. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 33-48. 1920. — See also next preceding Entry, 596.

598. Parnell, R. Hazara Forest Division, North-West Frontier Province. Indian For-
ester 46 : 224-237. 5 fig. 1920.— The business of the Hazara Forest from 1880 to 1920 is sum-
marized and analyzed as to improvements, law cases, fires, products and finances. — E. N.
Munns.

599. Pearce, W. J. Relation of insect losses to sustained forest yield. Jour. Forestry
18: 406-411. 1920. — Insects, especially the Dendroctonus beetles have an important place
in the future management of forests. It was estimated on the Dolores timber survey project
in Colorado that in the life of the stand (about 300 years) 90 per cent of the trees, by volume,

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 83

were killed by insects and 10 per cent by other causes. This amounts to a loss of \ per cent
per annum, which is less than in pine stands. Insects will be an important feature in future
timber-sale practice, through their effed upon the reserved stand and upon the black-jack
stage of the western yellow pine. — E. N. Munns.

600. Peters, J. G. Co-operation between the federal government and the states. Jour.
Forestry 18: 477-485. 1920. — The whole question of a national forest policy devolves upon
the finances. Acquisition of forests by the federal government is slow and can not keep up
with denudation. State acquisition of cut-over lands is desirable on a large scale, but the
cost is more than the states can bear. Planting of denuded lands is badly needed and the
nation, the states and private owners should each bear a part in the cost. Fire protection
through 1 he present Week's law will assure the maintenance of present areas of young stands
and will aid nature in reforesting large areas, but additional funds are necessary to make the
plan of real nation-wide benefit. Farm forestry has a real place in the forest program, supply-
ing part of the needs of the rural population. — E. N. Munns.

601. Peyton, Jeannie S. Forestry movement of the seventies, in the Interior Department,
under Schurz. Jour. Forestry 18: 391-405. 1920.— A history of the four years of the forestry
movement in the United States of America under Secretary Carl Schurz and General
James A. Williamson, Commissioner of the General Land office. The bills drafted and not
passed by Congress in that period were forerunners of the present system of forest adminis-
tration and regulation. — E. N. Munns.

602. Pinchot, Gifford. Where we stand. Jour. Forestry 18 : 441-447. 1920 — A resume"
of the principal arguments against the proposed national forest policy for the United States
shows the objection because of possible confiscation is merely an attempt to dodge the main
issue. The constitutionality of the measure must be passed upon after the laws have been
drawn up. The national government is better able to handle the administration of a forest
policy than are the individual states, while the fear of bureaucracy is not supported by past
developments. There is an awakening of the forestry profession to the realization of the
need of such a policy, and their activity in its favor. — E. N. Munns.

603. Preston, John F. Discussion of the Pinchot Committee report. Jour. Forestry 18:
460-464. 1920. — Federal action in a forest program is needed, but the proposed plan is wrong
in attempting to force the measure upon the lumber industry rather than having it come
about through education. The state is the strongest point in the unit and state legislation
should be sufficient to bring about the desired end. Cooperation with the lumbermen is
to be desired in any plan. — E. N. Munns.

604. Rane, F. W. Use of wood for fuel. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 48-53.
1919.— Attention is called to the availability and value of wood for fuel, especially in New Eng-
land. The suggestion is made that wood obtained in clearing out wood-lots and from forest
trees unsalable as lumber be cut into lengths suitable for use in stoves, furnaces, and fire-
places instead of into 4-foot or cord-wood lengths, as at present. The utilization of wood in
the production of different chemicals is pointed out as a future asset of great value to the
United States.—//. N. Vinall.

605. Ridsdale, P. S. The memorial trees of the United States. Garden Mag. 30: 177-1S0.
* fig. 1920.

606. [Ridsdale, P. S.] State forests in Massachusetts. Amer. Forestry 26: 323. 1920.

607. Riemenschneider. Die preussische Forstverwaltung und das Landwirtschafts-
ministerium. [The Prussian Forest Service and the Ministry of Agriculture.] Deutsch.
Forstzeitg. 35: 170-171. 1920.— The Forest Service was transferred from the Ministry of Fi-
nance to that of Agriculture in 1880. It is suggested that this change has not proved altogether

84 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

for the best. Even though, in its former place, financial considerations may have been given
undue weight, now agricultural interests are favored often to the detriment of the forests.
Charges for by-products of the forest — pasturage, litter, seedlings, twigs for broom-making —
have not been increased with the rise in other prices, and in many cases have been reduced
since the war started. They now bear no relation to the cost of supervision. Both the forest
and the public treasury would benefit if the Ministry of Finance were again in control. — W. N.
Sparhaivk.

608. Robinson, R. L. Forest policy. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14:82-95. 1920. — This paper
treats broadly of the pre-war development of forest policy particularly in the United King-
dom, although briefly also of that in other countries, discusses the part played by timber in
the war, and summarizes what the author believes to be the main principles that underlie the
development of forest policy. — C. R. Tillotson.

.609. Roth, Filibert. Great teacher of forestry retires. Amer. Forestry 26: 209-212.
1 -portrait. 1920.— Appreciation of B. E. Fernow. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 958.]

610. Rubner. [Rev. of : Grebe, C. Studien zur Biologie und Geographie der Laubmoose.
I. Biologie und Okologie der Laubmoose. (Studies on the biology and geography of foliaceous
mosses. I. Biology and ecology of foliaceous mosses.) Reprint from Hedwigia 59: 1917.]
Forstwiss Centralbl. 41 : 431-433. 1919. — Rubner points out the need for a thorough study of
forest mosses and their interrelation with soil conditions and with the composition of the for-
est.— W. N. Spar hawk.

611. Sampson, Arthur W. [Rev. of: Hitchcock, A. S. Genera of grasses in the United
States, with special reference to economic species. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 772. 307 p.
1920.] Jour. Forestry 18: 426-427. 1920.

612. Schlich, Sir William. Forestry in the Dominion of New Zealand. New Zealand
Jour. Sci. Tech. 1: 201-210. 1918. [Slightly abridged from Quart, Jour. Forest. 12: 1-28.
1918.]— See also Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1456.

613. Schwappach, A. Waldbauvereine. [Societies for forest culture.] Deutsch. Forst.
zeitg. 35: 37-39. 1920. — Many societies for the practice of forestry have been formed recently
in several Prussian provinces. They are voluntary associations of small owners who agree
to manage their forests in accordance with technical advice to be given them by the Agri-
cultural Council (Landwirtschaftskammer). The purpose is two-fold: first, to increase wood
production on the now poorly managed small private holdings; second, to prevent compulsory
cooperative management under strict state control. Schwappach fears that they will not be
effective, and inclines to the belief that compulsory cooperative forests, managed by respon-
sible officers and subject to state supervision, will be found necessary to increase the yield
from small holdings. — W. N. Sparhawk.

614. Seybold, Karl. Die Forstwirtschaft der Tatsachen (natiirlicher Hochwaldbetrieb).
[Forestry based on nature.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 405-426. 1919. — Advocates getting
away from theory and arbitrary rules and methods in forest management, with a closer adher-
ence to natural laws and the phenomena of forest growth. Accurate prediction of growth for
long periods is impossible, and the most carefully made theoretical working plans are always
sooner or later upset by natural influences, such as windfall, drouth, frost, insects, fires,
failure of seed years, and the like. The system proposed has been tried out since 1900 on a
5,000-hectare fir and beech forest in Alsace. An essential feature is the 5-year cutting cycle,
by which every part of the forest is gone over every 5 years. This makes possible the removal
of diseased, suppressed, and ripe trees and groups of trees at the most suitable time, and
is especially favorable to growth of the remaining trees and to natural reproduction. Another
feature is the maintenance of a continuous forest cover, unbroken by clearings except where
they result from accident. The frequent cuttings insure light and ventilation. Instead of

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY s/j

extensive, pure, even-aged stands, tin- ape classes ;ire mixed together in small groups, as
usually occurs in nature, so thai the foresl tnl-.es mi the appearance of a selection for
Because of the long periods required for trees to mature, soil exhaustion can nol be prevented

by rotation of crops as easily as with other crops. The same result can be obtained, however,
by using mixed stands, composed of species with different soil requirements. The beech is
especially valuable for improving soil fertility, as well as for favoring better development of

the associated conifers, and its proportion in the stand can he varied from time to time as
conditions require. Other species, such as oak, maple, ash, elm, birch, alder, and Scotch
pine, may also he used with beech, provided they are given several years start and are planted in
large enough groups so that they will not be shaded out. For purposes of management forests
should be divided into compartments of an average size of not more than 10 hectares. At the
5-year intervals, cutting is done, not in accordance wit h a predetermined working plan, but
according to the actual silvicultural needs of each individual compartment, and also accord-
ing to current market conditions. In some, no cutting at all may be done; others may be cut
very heavily. The usual method of determining the annual cut is very complicated, involves
much manipulation of figures, and can not be accurate. The average increment and the
allowable cut can be better and more simply determined from a series of small permanent
sample plots on the different sites, to be cut over regularly with the rest of the stand. Other
advantages of the method described are the more intensive and careful handling of the for-
est, and the great simplicity and flexibility of the working plans. — W. N. Sparhawk.

615. Siiepard, E. C. Comments on the forestry program. Jour. Forestry 18: 467-471.
1920. — The national forest policy, as prepared, is censured because it was prepared by foresters
without the cooperation of the lumbermen, and because it calls the lumber industry to task
for the lack of policy on the part of the government in the early days when timber lands were
sold for nominal prices. France required hundreds of years to formulate and put into practice
a substantial forest policy, and too quick an action in the United States, to which this paper
refers, may prove a drawback to the whole plan. — E. N. Mun?is.

616. Silcox, F. A. Forestry and labor. Jour. Forestry 18: 317. 1920— Labor is vitally
affected by the economic condition of the lumber industry and the character of exploitation
growing out of-it. If the industry does not adopt democratic industrial relation policies vol-
untarily, it probably will be forced to this. — E. N. Munns.

617. Simon. Ein Beitrag zur Erhohung der Einnahmen aus den Forsten. [Suggestions
for increasing revenue from forests.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 131-133. 1920. — The problem
of increasing net returns from forests is very important in Germany today. This may be
done by (1) reducing costs of production, (2) increasing volume production, or (3) increasing
returns from wood. Artificial regeneration should, wherever possible, give way to natural
reproduction, and where this is impossible the cheapest and most effective methods should
be used. Reproducing areas should be carefully protected, especially against grazing. Thin-
nings should be made in such ways as to promote the most rapid volume growth. Forest
officers, who will be responsible for all this work, should be thoroughly and carefully trained
for it, and should be so treated that they will do the best work. Wood should be sold for the
best prices possible, and, to this end, roads and other means of transportation should be kept
in good condition. Low wood prices will not benefit the consumers, because the dealers will
absorb all the margins. State sawmills are not favored until the point of view7 of laborers
changes; i.e., until they become free from the idea that a government job is only a sort of pen-
sion.— W. N. Sparhawk.

618. Sklavunos, Coxstantine G. Die Forstverhaltnisse im heutigen Griechenland.
[Forest conditions of modern Greece.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 81-90, 173-1S4, 249-264.
1919. — All of Greece was well forested in prehistoric times, but the forest was reduced to about
its present extent during the Homeric and post-Homeric periods. Most of the accessible
forests near the coasts have gone, but there are still dense virgin stands in the mountains of
the interior. There are three main forest zones: — (a) Evergreen hardwoods (0-800 m. eleva-

86 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

tion) with a dry subtype (0-500 m.) including such species as Pistacia lentiscus, Olea Euro-
paea, Juniperus Thoenica, Tamarix Hampeana, Quercus aegilops, Pinus pinea; and a cooler
subtype, characterized by Quercus coccifera, Q. ilex, Arbutus unedo, A. andrachne, Myrtus
communis, Laurus nobilis, Buxus sempervirens, Styrax officinalis, Celtis australis, Rhus coti-
nus, Ficus carica, Morus alba, M. nigra. Common to both subtypes are: Pinus silvestris
(in Macedonia), P. halepensis, Cupressus sempervirens, Robinia pseudacacia, Alnus glutinosa,
and others, (b) Deciduous hardwoods (800-1500 m.), characterized at lower elevations by
oaks, especially Quercus robur, Q. conferta, Q. pedunculi flora, Q. pubescens, Q. pedunculata,
Q. sessiliflora, Q. cerris; higher up chestnut (Castanea vesca) is common. Other common trees
of this zone are ashes, hornbeams, walnut, aspen, sycamore, elms, horsechestnut, maple,
lindens, dogwood, hazel, beech, (c) Conifers (1500-2000 m.) comprising Abies cephalonica,
Pinus laricio (corsicana) , P. leucodermis, P. pence, Taxus baccata, Juniperus foetidissima,
J. oxycedrus. — Conifer forests (especially fir) occupy 55 per cent of the forest area. The stands
are open, all-aged, and reproduction is seriously retarded by overgrazing. Growth is fairly
rapid because of the long growing season and high mean temperatures. The total forest
area, while not definitely known, owing to lack of surveys, is estimated at 1,800,000 hectares,
including scrub forest, or 15 per cent of the total area of the new Greece (including territory
added after Balkan wars). This is 0.38 ha. per capita. At least 6,600,000 hectares is absolute
forest soil. The forests are very unevenly distributed, increasing from the South and east
toward the north and west, and are most extensive in northern Greece and in Greek Mace-
donia. Forest destruction still continues, due to heavy overgrazing (especially by goats),
wasteful and unregulated cutting, turpentining, charcoal making and lime burning, and
insect depredations. — A large proportion of the forests belongs to the State, considerable to
communes and monasteries, and a smaller proportion to private individuals. The private
forests receive the best treatment, the communal and monastic forests the worst, and the State
forests halfway between. — The development of a forest policy began in 1836, soon after the
establishment of the monarchy. Cutting of saw timber from either State or private forests
may be done only on permit, which is issued after the payment of a felling tax. Grazing on
private forests is also subject to tax, but is free on public forests. The public forests are
guarded by 250 forest guards, with 12 technically trained foresters and 3 inspectors, under the
Forest Division of the Ministry for National Economy. This force is much too small, and is
not well trained. The first forest school was established at Vytina in 1896 to train the lower
personnel. A higher forest institute for training administrative officers is to be established
at Athens by 1920. Various measures have been taken to encourage afforestation by com-
munes and private individuals, and something has been accomplished. — The total annual
yield of the forests of old Greece (figures for recently acquired territory not available) is
estimated to be 1,720,566 cubic meters, probably in excess of the annual growth. In addition,
Greece imports 126,000 cubic meters of wood (principally softwood construction material),
making the per capita consumption 0.75 cubic meters. Imports came (1911) chiefly from Aus-
tria-Hungary, Roumania, Turkey, and Russia, and were exceeded in value only by grain and
by coal. Exports, chiefly valonia and nutgalls for tanning, and turpentine and rosin, went
mostly to Austria, Germany, Italy, and Turkey. — W. N. Sparhawk.

619. Smythies, E. A. Geology and forest distribution. Indian Forester 46: 319-320.
1920.- — Geological features determine soil types, which determine water supply, soil depth,
and soil aeration, so that geology is important in plant distribution. — E. N. Munns.

620. Speight, R. New Zealand timbers and the borer. New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1:
142-144. 1918. — List of eighty species of which some were attacked by borer (Anobium
domesticum) in Canterbury Museum. — A. Gundersen.

621. Steven, H. M. Coniferous forest trees in Great Britain. Trans. Roy. Scot. Arbor.
Soc. 34: 61-82. 1920. — This article deals with the various conifers of importance in British
forestry. Their growth under different conditions of soil, elevation, exposure, etc., is con-
sidered; their environmental requirements and the principal silvicultural problems that arise
in the growing of each conifer are discussed. — C. R. Tillotson.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 87

G22. Stevens, Carl M. Forest industries and the income tax. Jour. Forestry 18: 329-
337. 1920. — A history of the development of the present United Slates income tax is given
with its aims, organization and administration. — E. N. Munns.

623. T., E. P. [Rev. of: Surface, Henry E. Feasibility of manufacturing paper from
pulp from Tasmanian timbers. Rept. Dept. Lands and Survey of Tasmania for L914 1915.
P. 88-43. Hobart, 1915.] New Zealand Jour. Sri. Tech. 1: 379 :ivi. 191s. One of the tim-
bers the pulping qualities of which were investigated was Nothofagus Cunninghamii, known
in Tasmania as "myrtle," and closely related to a limber similar to Nothofagus Menzit
(bushman's "silver birch," or "southland beech" of timber traders). Author recommends
that, as a purely business enterprise, the utilization of Tasmanian hardwoods for pulp or
paper making should not be given further consideration. Their fibers are too short. He also
studied swamp gum {Eucalyptus rcgnaris), blue gum (E. Globulus), stringy bark (E. obliqua),
and silver wattle (Acacia dealbala), none of which is suitable for paper pulp. Tasmanian
manufacture of paper pulp for sale would not be a profitable undertaking. — C. S. Gager.

624. T., J. A. [Rev. of: Hutchins, D. E. Waipona Kauri forest, its demarcation and
management. 63 p. Illus., map. Lands and Survey Dept.: Wellington, New Zealand.
191S.] New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 223-224. 1919.— As now demarked by Hutchins, the
Waipona forest is eleven miles long from east to west, and nearly nine miles broad from north
to south, including 29,830 acres, of which 28,880 are occupied by the main block of forest.
The total timber stand of the forest is estimated at 288,020,000 superficial feet of timber. A
working plan for the forest is outlined. It is anticipated that the forest will become as well
known in Australasia as the Black Forest is in Germany. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 569.]
— C. S. Gager.

625. Terry, E. 1. Public acquisition or control. Jour. Forestry 18: 324-325. 1920 —
Differing from the plans so far proposed, it is believed the main objective of the United States
forest policy should be the public acquisition of two-thirds of the private timber lands of the
country within forty years. — E. N. Munns.

626. Tierney, D. P. The cut-over land problem. Jour. Forestry 18: 498-501. 1920 —
There are no means at present adequate to safeguard the millions of acres of restocking forest
land in the United States from indiscriminate cutting and waste. This is due to dependence
of forest management upon annual appropriations from legislative bodies. More attention
should be given to securing a known fund without having to persuade a legislative body to
make this appropriation annually. A forest program should begin with restocking lands first,
before acquiring lands on which forests will have to be established. Land purchases should
be restricted to watershed-protection areas and lands close to areas now under forest manage-
ment.— E. N. Munns.

627. Toumey, J. W. [Rev. of: Ise, John. United States forest policy. 395 p. Yale
Univ. Press: New Haven, 1920.] Jour. Forestry 18: 558-560. 1920.— The work is that of an
economist and historian, who develops the history of the present policy without reservations.
As to a future policy, too little consideration is given, especially with the present forestry-
policy movement under way. — E. N. Munns.

628. Totjmey, J. W. [Rev. of: Pulling, Howard E. Sunlight and its measurement.
Plant World 20: 151-171, 187-209. 1918.] Jour. Forestry 18: 431-433. 1920.

629. Turner, J. E. C. Lopping in the Kumaon Circle, United Provinces. Indian Forester
46: 240-247. 1920.— Nomadic native tribes still practice destructive cutting of all live
branches of oak for their flocks during heavy snowfall, when other browse is unavailable de-
spite rules that permit only the cutting of the lower two-thirds of the branches. This is result-
ing in the destruction of the oak forest and of grazing values when practiced constantly.
Recommendations are made to prevent such action. — E. N. Munns.

88 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

630. Vestby, P. Spredte trak fra en skogbefaring i Chili. [Sketches from a trip to Chilian
forests.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 17-27. PI. 1. 1920.

631. von dem Bttsche. Schutz und Anbau der Eibe. [Protection and propagation of the
yew.] Deutsch. Forstzeitg. 35: 21. 1920. — An order from the Minister of Agriculture,
Domains, and Forests, for preventing the extinction of yew in German forests. — W. N.
Sparhawk.

632. vox Mammen. Forstwirtschaft, Holzhandel und Holzindustrie in Ostpreussen.
[Forestry and wood industry in East Prussia.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41: 368-3S8. 1919. —
Wooded area in 1913 was 660,841 hectares, or 17.7 per cent of the land area. The forests were
divided into 23,120 tracts, of which 22,942 were connected with farms, 84 per cent were under
10 hectares in size, and made up but 7.9 per cent of the total area; the 111 tracts greater than
1,000 hectares comprised 68.5 per cent of the total area. Deciduous species occupied 21.7
per cent of the area, or 143,305 hectares; two-thirds of this was high forest, divided into three
types, oak, birch-alder-ash, beech and others, at about a 1-3-1 ratio. Conifers occupied
517,536 hectares (78.3 per cent) of which 96,132 ha were selection forest and the rest high
forest. Scotch pine covered 338,629 ha, spruce 168,100 ha, white fir 10,524 ha, and larch 283 ha.
Pine predominates on the sandy soils of the south, spruce on the loams in the northern and
central districts, oak on the best soils, while hornbeam, birch, aspen, and linden are common
in mixture with conifers on the better sites. Aspen and birch quickly occupy areas denuded
of conifers. The forests suffer considerable losses from late and early frosts, storms, and in-
sects,— timber cut from the State forests (386,000 ha in 1904, and 417,000 ha in 1912) increased
from 4.14 cubic meters per hectare in 19 "*4 to 11.75 cubic meters in 1910, due to ravages of the
Nun-moth. In 1912 but 5.01 cubic meters per ha was cut, nearly half of it fuelwood. Yields
of the larger private forests are about the same as those of state forests; the smaller private
holdings are not managed as well, although steps have recently been taken to promote forestry
on private holdings. — Before the war, wood exports consisted chiefly of firewood and mine
timbers, to western Germany, construction material to Berlin and vicinity, and amounted
in all to about 350,000 tons per year. More than 2,200,000 cubic meters of wood were imported
from Russia to supply the sawmills and pulpmills in the Memel region. Rapid development
of the sawmill industry in Russia has resulted in increased prices of raw material for the
Memel mills, and at the same time in lower prices for manufactured lumber. — W. N. Sparhawk.

633. von Tubeuf, C. Schilderungen und Bilder aus nord-amerikanischen Waldern.
[Descriptions and pictures of North American forests.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw.
17: 153-166. PI. 54-59. 1919. — This article is the second of a series; in it the author describes
his trip over the Moffat Road to Idle-wild in the Arapaho National Forest, with reference
chiefly to forest types encountered. He gives a brief account of the local organization of the
U. S. Forest Service and some of its work. The virgin forests of lodgepole pine, pure or in
mixture with alpine fir (Abies subalpine, he calls it) are considered in some detail. The system
of management is far from intense as compared with German methods, only tie timber is logged,
and regeneration is secured naturally, since Lodgepole is a very prolific seeder. A few at-
tempts have been made by the Forest Service to reforest burnt-over areas artificially, where
neither lodgepole nor aspen have come in. Aspen and lodgepole usually occupy the land
after a fire; the latter most frequently following Douglas fir. The seed extraction establish-
ment on the Arapaho Forest is described. The dendroctonus bark-beetles cause very much
damage in this region. Their activities, according to Hopkins, are of a primary nature;
not secondary, as the author considers the activities of German bark beetles. Although no
direct evidences of insect damage were encountered, the writer was struck with the damage
caused by the porcupine (Ercthizon dorsatum) in lodgepole forests, and gives a description of
this animal. — J. Roeser.

634. Whitford, H. N. [Rev. of: Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fisher. Philippine bam-
boos. Philippine Islands Bur. Forest. Bui. 15. 32 p., S3 pi. Manila, 1918.] Jour. Forestry
18: 167-168. 1920.

No. 2, November, 1920] FORESTRY 89

635. Whitford, H. N. [Rev. of: Brown, W. H., and A. I\ Fisher. Philippine man-
grove forest. Philippine [slands Bur. Forest. Hull. 17. i.i.i p., 47 pi. Manila, 1919.] Jour.
Forestry 18: 166-167. 1920.

636. Whitford, !I. N. [Rev. of: Skottsbbro, Carl V. Die Vegetationsverhaltnlsse
langs der Cordillera de los Andes S. von 41° S. Br. : Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Vegetation in
Chiloe, West-Patagonien, den Andinen, Patagonien und Feuerland. Botanische Ergebnisse
der Schwedischen Expedition nach Patagonien und dem Feuerlande 1907 1909. (Vegetation
of the Andean Cordillera south of 41° South Lat., Chile, Patagonia and Tierra del Fuego. Botan-
ical results of the Swedish expedition of 1907-09.) 366 p. Stockholm, 1916.] Jour. Forestry
18: 161-165. 1920.

637. Wilson, Ellwood. The use of aircraft in forestry. Amer. Forestry 26: 326-328.
4 fig. 1920.

638. Wimbush, A. Big teak in Madras. Indian Forester 46: 247-249. 1 pi. 1920 —
An average volume of 317 cubic feet per tree was obtained from 111 teak trees, the maximum
yield from one tree being 1,099 cubic feet. — E. N. Munns.

639. Wolff, M. H. Plan of relation of forest regulation to forest communities. Jour.
Forestry 18: 4S6-497. 1920.— The Coeur d'Alene National Forest (northwestern United
States) can best be handled under a system of volume regulation with a sustained annual
yield. With small working circles, the development and maintenance of local logging com-
munities is assured. Dividing the forest into six areas, it is possible to develop the plan
equally by pairing off the stands of poorer and relatively inaccessible material with the more
accessible and high quality stands. The volume cut up to the present shows an apparent over
cutting, but this is due to under-estimates of the stand, very conservative estimates of growth,
and cutting in non-marketable blocks. It is expected that the annual yield figures of from
seventeen to twenty million feet will vary greatly from year to year depending on transport,
seasonal variations, logging fluctuations, and the cut from private lands outside the Forest.
By maintaining this cut at a constant, the population depending on the industry will largely
be stabilized and the communities assured. — E. N. Munns.

640. Wood, Leslie S. The Mapledurham statistics. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 49-59.
1920. — Yearly diameter measurements of sample areas in several tracts of beech woodland
situated in South Oxfordshire, England, and actual volume measurements of trees felled in
these woods, disclose some interesting variations in volume related to the density of the
crop. In dense woods, due to increased height growth, the average cubic contents of trees
of equal diameters is higher than in woods where the trees are widely spaced. The mean
increment for a 7-year period for seven pieces of woodland varied from 1.81 per cent to 5.4
per cent and averaged 2.8 per cent. The increment of 1.81 per cent is for woodland where the
trees stood too close and that of 5.4 per cent is for one where did they not stand close enough.
The total increment per acre was not as large in either case as would have been secured through
more judicious spacing. Trees 20 inches or less in circumference show a mean annual incre-
ment of 1.5 per cent as compared to 2.44 per cent for those over 20 inches in circumference.
The smaller trees owe their slow growth partly to being suppressed and partly to being old
stock and consequently slow growers. These figures favor the compartment system in beech
woods, for under that system all the suppressed and slow-growing trees are removed and the
best-growing trees are encouraged; the removal of the small trees automatically raises the
percentage of growth of the larger trees. — C. R. Tillotson.

641. Woodbury, T. D. California forests and forestry. Amer. Forestry 26: 262-267. 8
fig. 1920.

642. Woolsey, Theodore S., Jr. Fire protection in Portugal. Jour. Forestry 18: 542-
543. 1920.— The methods employed by the government, on a forest of 2S,066 acres, are
described. — E. M. Munns.

90 GENETICS IBot. Absts., Vol. VI,

643. Woolsey, Theodore S., Jr. Prevention of forest devastation. Jour. Forestry 18:
326-328. 1920.

644. Woolsey, Theodore S., Jr. [Rev. of: Goblet d'Alviella, Felix. Elements de
sylviculture. Vol. 1, 383 p.; Vol. 2, 269 p. Marcel Reviere: Paris, 1919.] Jour. Forestry 18:
296-297. 1920.

GENETICS

G. H. Shull, Editor
J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

645. Akerman, A. Speltlike bud-sports in common wheat. Hereditas 1: 116-127 6 fig,
1920.

646. Akerman, A., Hj. Johansson, and B. Platon. Fortsatta undersokerningar rorande
suckerhalt och torrsubstanshalt hos nagra hostvetesorter. [Continued examinations on the
percentage of sugar and dry-substance in some varieties of winter wheat.] Sveriges Utsadesf.
Tidskr. 28: 216-224. 1918.— Continuation of senior author's work on winter killing and frost
resistance. [See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 254.] — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

647. Altenburg, Edgar, and Hermann J. Muller. The genetic basis of truncate wing,
— an inconstant and modifiable character in Drosophila. Genetics 5: 1-59. 1 fig. Jan., 1920.
— Truncate wing is an inconstant character varying from short truncate to normal. It is
still modifiable after 100 generations of selection, and even the best truncate lines threw 10
per cent of normals. The variation is both somatic and genetic, and there is a close resem-
blance to the cases quoted in favor of factorial inconstancy. Yet a detailed analysis shows
that the genetic variation is due to sorting out of factors, not to fluctuation of individual genes;
since when the genetic constitution was maintained constant in a new type of "pure line"
experiment carried out by means of "identifying factors," selection was without effect. —
The truncate character is due to several factors, at least one in every chromosome except the
fourth. The main factor, without which the character rarely appears, is in the second chromo-
some. This factor is lethal when homozygous, hence the impossibility of obtaining a pure
stock. The low number of normals thrown in selected stocks is due to a "balancing" lethal
in the opposite chromosome, which kills off the normals (except those that escape by crossing
over). The truncate factor in the third chromosome reduces the fertility of females homo-
zygous for it, thus also preventing the obtaining of pure stock. The first chromosome factor
is not lethal and does not reduce the fertility.— The authors point out the applicability of the
method of "identifying factors" to other complex genetic cases, as in human heredity. —
Alexander Weinstein.

648. Anderson, W. S. Bloodlines of genetic value. Science 52: 41. July 9, 1920.—
Author's abstract of paper read before seventh annual meeting of the Kentucky Academy of
Science, Lexington, May 8, 1920:— In the domestic breeds of live stock great sires seldom pro-
duce more than one or two sons that are greater progenitors than themselves. This means, in
blooded stock, that the greatness of any given blood line is handed on by one or two in any
one generation, the others of the generation merely add members. In support of the state-
ment, the great sires of nine breeds of domestic animals were cited and the few sons of each
were named who have been instrumental in handing on the breeds. — W. S. Anderson.

649. Anonymous. Death of W. Schallmayer. Jour. Heredity 11: 155. April, 1920.

650. Anonymous. Moral qualities and eugenics. Jour. Heredity 11: 189. April, 1920.

651. Anonymous. Were the black-and-white Holsteins originally red-and-white? Jour.
Heredity 11: 155. April, 1920.

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 91

662. Bateson, W., and Caroline 1'i.u.i w. The genetics of "rogues" among culinary
peas (Pisum sativum). Proc. Roy. Soc. London 91: 186 L95. May 12, 1920. — Summarizes
data on genetics of "rogues" in peas published in l'.U 1. Gives details of further experimen
Finds: (1) reciprocal crosses between type and rogue give plants which, as they develop,
turn into rogues. (2) Though characters of type are introduced and manifest their pres-
ence by affecting form of young l'i plant, they very rarely take part in germ-lineage, being
apparently left behind in the lower nodes. (;> l'i >nts really intermediate between type and
rogue exist, but never breed even approximately true. Their germ-cells may be either type,
intermediate (2 kinds at least), or rogue. Proportion of gametes carrying type-characters is
different on male and female sides, the ratio in both sexes showing gradational change. —
Egg-cells of lower flowers, up to about 10th flowering node in more than 50 per cenl of eases
carry type-characters — at least the non-pointed character — above which level, proportion
declines. Only about 20 per cent of pollen in lowest two flowers is type-bearing, and above
this level, in each successive flower, the proportion of type-bearing pollen rapidly diminishes.
Discusses somewhat comparable cases of Biff en with gray chaff character in wheat crosses;
of Ikeno with variegated Capsicum crossed with green type, with no recovery of former in
later generations; of B Aim's interpretation of data obtained from crosses between white-
skinned and green plants, and of Winge's observations on Humitlus, where slightly variegated
lower leaves, subsequently became green. Of all these, Winge's case is said to be the most
comparable. Weak growth on type plants in peas does not specially favor appearance of rogue
characters, and rogues even when most luxuriant, do not produce types. No Mendelian sys-
tem applicable in such cases, but genetic differences in germ plasm undoubtedly exist. No
clear discontinuity. Two sorts of intermediate gametes must exist — one more type-like and
one more rogue-like. Numerical chromosome differences between rogue and type do not exist,
each having seven in haploid cells. Comments on long-held belief of practical breeders
and conventional evolutionists that when selection ceases, a breed degenerates. As regards
rogue character in peas, this is true, although not true for any other known genetically stud-
ied case, so far as the writers know. — Orland E. White.

653. Bauer, J. Aufgaben und Methoden der Konstitutionsforschung. [Problems and
methods of study of the constitution.] Wiener klin. Wochenschr. 1919.

654. Baur, E. Einfiihrung in die experimentelle Vererbungslehre. [Introduction to gen-
etics.] 3rd & 4th ed., 410 p., 10 colored pi., 142 fig. Gebruder Borntn'iger: Berlin, 1919.

655. Bergman, Emanuel. A family with hereditary (genotypical) tremor. Hereditas 1:
98-106. 2 fig. 1920.

656. Camek, Josef. Investigations of the hair of different breeds of cattle. Jour. Agric.
Sci. 10: 12-21. Jan., 1920. — Investigations of hair of different European breeds of cattle
showed that in pure-bred animals maximum length of hair is found between the ages of 6
months and 2 years, and that older animals have shorter hair. The hair of bulls is always
longer than that of cows and oxen of the same age. The white hair of an animal is shorter
than the colored. The diameter of the hairs is less for cattle up to 3 months and the greatest
diameter is reached by animals between 1 and 2 years of age. Males have hair of greater
diameter than do females. The white hair of an animal is of less diameter than colored. In
general, diameter increases with length. In short hair the diameter is relatively greater than
in long ones. With bulls the ratio of diameter to length is smaller than in cows and heifers
of the same age. The ratio is greater in white hair. Food is without influence on diameter.
— Ash content of hair depends on pigmentation, age, sex, and possibly food. Colored hair
contains more ash than white and also more iron. Ash is also greater in black than in brown
or red hair. — Elmer Roberts.

657. Chodat, R. La panachure et les chimeres dans le genre Funkia. [Variegation and
chimeras in the genus Funkia.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Phys. Hist. Nat. Geneve 36: 81-84. 1919.

92 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

658. Cook, O. F. Cotton a community crop. Jour. Heredity 11: 174-177. April, 1920.

659. Correns, C. Die geschlechtliche Tendenz der Keimzellen gemischtgeschlechtiger
Pflanzen. [Sex tendency of germ-cells in plants of mixed sex.] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 49-60. 2
fig. 1920.

660. Coulter, J. M. Mutation. [Rev. of: Const antin, J. La mutation. Etat actuel
de la question. (Mutation. Present status of the question.) Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 1:
iii-xxix. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 552.)] Bot. Gaz. 69: 535. June, 1920.

661. Coulter, M. C. [Rev. of: East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. Inbreeding
and outbreeding. 14 X 21 cm. 285 p., 46 fig. J. B. Lippincott, Philadelphia, 1919. (See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571.)] Bot. Gaz. 69: 530-532. June, 1920.

662. Cowgill, H. B. Report on tomato and melon breeding. Ann. Rept. Insular Exp.
Sta. Porto Rico 1917-18: 96-98. 1919. — Tomato hybrids: Original cross was between vigor-
ous local Cherry tomato and Livingston Globe; purpose to secure disease-resistant tomato of
good quality suitable to conditions of Porto Rico. Fi plants were intermediate in many prom-
inent characters. In F2 318 plants were grown, many closely resembling one or other of par-
ents, majority more like Cherry parent. These were in general strong growers and resistant
to unfavorable conditions. Partial inverse correlation was noticed between number of fruits
in inflorescence and size of fruits; large majority of fruits were shorter in polar diameter than
equatorial, which is not true of either parent. Size is at least partially independent of num-
ber of cells. No plants had all fruits two-celled like Cherry parent, though some had majority
two-celled. Many plants were very promising as to vigor of growth, prolificacy and disease-
resistance. — Melon hybrids: Fi of crosses between local oblong melon with soft rind (pistil-
late parent) with Hybrid Casaba and Honeydew (staminate). Both of latter have hard rind
and are susceptible to downy mildew, though female parent is resistant. Hybrid offspring
appeared very resistant, and flavor of fruit was good. Hybrids were more precocious and
prolific than local melon. Where Casaba was used as male parent offspring were pyriform and
grooved and rough-skinned; when Honeydew was pollen parent hybrid fruits were smooth-
skinned, oval and faintly grooved or without grooves. — E. E. Barker.

663. Cowgill, H. B. Report of the division of agronomy and plant breeding. Ann. Rept.
Insular Exp. Sta. Porto Rico 1917-1918: 78-95, 98-104. 1918.— Work with seedling sugar canes
was continued to secure several types necessary for different ecological areas of Porto Rico.
Several promising new seedling varieties were selected after 3 or 4 years trial. Studies were
made of distinguishing botanical characters of cane varieties. 37 crosses were attempted, 15
with success, yielding 1794 seedlings. Otaheite and Crystallina were used as seed parents and
B-4596, B-347, B-3412, D-117, D-109, and P. R.-207 as pollinators. Viability of nearly all
varieties, either crossed or open-pollinated, was relatively low; 45 flats planted with open-
pollinated seeds of 6 varieties yielded 5200 seedlings. Describes 6 varieties produced by cross-
pollination in 1916. From 1917 seedlings 36 selections were made, 12 from 1914, or 35.5 per
cent of that year's seedlings and 4 or 26.6 per cent of 1913 seedlings were selected. These were
all planted in to acre plots for comparison with Crystallina. They are now ready to be tested
in other parts of Porto Rico. Descriptions of 10 are given. 1912 seedlings were nearly all
retained for trial; tables of their yield and analysis are given. Foreign varieties tested for
disease resistance on infested soils found all to be susceptible, though some showed varying
degrees of resistance. 1500 seedling canes in pots sent to Centrale Coloso and planted in dis-
ease infested field, became so badly infected with mottling disease that all were plowed up. —
E. E. Barker.

664. D arrow, Geo. M. Are our raspberries derived from American or European species?
Jour. Heredity 11: 179-184. 4 fig. April, 1920.

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 93

665. DE Vries, E. Versuche iiber die Frucht- und Samenbildung bei Artkreuzungen in
der Gattung Primula. [Study on fruit and seed formation in species crosses of the genus Prim-
ula.] Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland. 16: 63 203. L919. See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 739.

666. Dufour, L. [Rev. of : Daniel, L. Les symbiomorphoses ; nouvelles recherches sur
l'hybridation asexuelle. (The symbiomorphoses; recent investigations on asexual hybridiza-
tion.) Revue brctonne de Botanique pure et appliquee, 1917.] Rev. Gen. Bot. [Paris] 30:
367-36S. 1918. — The term "symbiomorphosis" is applied to the diverse modifications of plants
verified as the result of grafting. Two cases are distinguished according as the grafts are
between different species or upon hybrids. — (1) Grafts between different species of cacti,
vines and conifers are mentioned with the peculiar modifications produced. The cabbage
when grafted on the tomato exhibited two tomato characters viz., an internal medullary liver
and extremely thin crystals of calcium oxalate in the cells. (2) Under symbiomorphoses
among hybrids three kinds of effects are described in specific instances viz., returning to the
parental types (pears, vines); attenuation or reinforcement of characters (vines); occasional
reappearance of ancestral characters (vines). Author's conclusion: "in the same graft one
may encounter variations of diverse origin which are blended together or which encroach
upon one another. In general, symbiomorphoses are almost always a resultant complex
(globale) of numerous physical, chemical and physiological factors." — E. B. Babcock.

667. East, E. M. Hybridization and evolution. Amer. Nat. 54: 262-264. May- June,
1920. — The two species, Nicotiana ruslica and N. paniculala, fall into distinctly different
groups of the genus, yet partially fertile hybrids have been obtained by crossing them, the
Fi generation being intermediate and as uniform as either parent. Few of the gametes are
viable, yet the F2 generation is inordinately variable, which indicates that the two species
differ in an extremely large number of inherited factors. The factors for normal fertility re-
combine in the Mendelian sense just as do the factors for other characters, so that highly fer-
tile strains can be selected some of which are more unlike than the two original species. Eight
of these strains were crossed in all possible combinations and every Fi generation exhibited as high
a degree of fertility as that shown by the parents. — Lotsy's theory of evolution through hybridi-
zation, founded on the study of crosses in Nicotiana, Pisum, Petunia and Antirrhinum, which
gave results comparable with the above, was based on assumptions which are open to numerous
criticisms. Yet hybridization has played some part in evolution and it is important to
determine the limits of its role. Author's observations suggested to him that the F2 genera-
tions arising from partially sterile Fi interspecific hybrids might furnish much of the varia-
bility required for evolution under domestication, the chief cause of which is shown by both
historical and experimental evidence to be hybridization of species. But evolution under
domestication must not be confused with natural evolution. The perfect fertility within
groups of domestic animals and cultivated plants stands in contrast to the marked sterility
between the great majority of natural species. Author's evidence and observations on domes-
tic forms yield no indication of a tendency toward production of ' segregates that exhibit
either incompatibility in crosses or sterility of hybrid offspring. — E. B. Babcock.

668. Eriksson, J. Platanthera bifolia X montana i Blekinge. [Platanthera bifolia X
montana in Blekinge (Sweden).] Bot. Notiser 1918: 59-62. 1918.— At some few places in
Blekinge this hybrid has been found. Its appearance and occurrence are given. The flowers
are, as in Platanthera montana, scarcely nice smelling. The fruits nearly always fail to
develop. — K. V . Ossian Dahlgren.

669. Federley, H. Arftlighetsforskningens resultat tillampade pa manniskan. [Results
of genetical science applied to mankind.] Studentforeningens Verdandls Sm&skrifter no. 218.
47 p. , 22 fig. A. Bonnier : Stockholm, 1918. — A lecture read at a meeting of the Swedish Eugen-
ical Society. The following matters are treated : The biometrical school, Mendelism, Mendel-
ian characters of man, the cytological basis of heredity, sex and the chromosomes, the
sex-limited type of heredity, and the social importance of genetical science. — K. V. Ossian
Dahlgren.

94 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

670. Frtjwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichtung. 3. Die Zuch-
tung von Kartoffel, Erdbirne, Lein, Hanf, Tobak, Hopfen, Buchweizen, Hiilsenfruchtern und
kleeartigen Futterpflanzen. [Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. 3. The breeding of
potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, flax, hemp, tobacco, hops, buckwheat, legumes and clover-
like forage plants.] 3rd ed., 240 p., 45 fig. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919. — See also Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 725.

671. Galant, S. Uber die Entstehung von Variationen bei Anemone hepatica. [Origin
of variations in Anemone hepatica.] Biolog. Zentrabl. 39: 529-535. Dec, 1919.

672. Gillies, C. D. Variation of sepals of Bruguiera Rheedii Blume. Proc. Roy. Soc.
Queensland, 30: 95-96. 1918. [Issued Dec. 21, 1918.]

673. Goldschmidt, Ri chard. Die quantitative grundlage von Vererbung und Artbildung.
[The quantitative basis of heredity and species formation.] 163 p., 28 fig. Julius Springer:
Berlin, 1920.

674. Hadley, Philip, and Dorothy W. Caldwell. Studies on the inheritance of egg-
weight. I. Normal distribution of egg-weight. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 181. 64
p., 43 fig. Jan., 1920. — An unselected, homogeneous group of 39 White Plymouth Rock pul-
lets was the original stock, to which no new blood was added. These were subsequently
divided into a large-egg, and small-egg group. Individual hens showed a marked conserva-
tion in the weight of their eggs. The first eggs in a laying year were smaller than those which
followed, a maximum being reached in April, a minimum in July or August, a second maximum
in September and a second minimum in November or December. In and after the fourth
laying year the mean egg-weight continued to decrease during the eight years. The results
were inconclusive regarding the relation between body-weight and egg-weight. No correla-
tion was shown between body-weight and total egg-weight. There was a tendency for hens
possessing higher mean egg-weights and heavier "maximum" eggs to produce a first egg of
greater weight. — B. L. Hartwell.

675. Hagiwara, Tokio. On the coupling of two leaf characters in the Japanese morning
glory. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 17-18. 3 tables. Mar., 1920. — Describes crosses between a race
with variegated up-rolled leaves with two others with flat green leaves. Variegation and
rolling are due to recessive factors but show a certain degree of coupling. Taken separately
each gives a very close approximation to a 3: 1 ratio but considered together the numbers were
as follows: — 252 flat green : 26 rolled green : 27 flat variegated : 69 rolled variegated, where the
expectation on the basis of complete independence would have been for a 9:3:3:1 ratio. The
numbers actually found are thought by the author to accord well with the assumption of a
gametic gatio of 7:1:1:7 (after Bateson and Punnet's hypothesis), which would theoreti-
cally yield 258.4 flat green: 21.7 rolled green: 21.7 flat variegated: 70.4 rolled variegated.
Crossover percentages are not calculated or in fact considered. — Leonas L. Burlingame.

676. Harland, S. C. Studies of inheritance in cotton. I. The inheritance of corolla
colour. West Indian Bull. 18: 13-19. 1920.

677. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. Genetical studies in the moths of the geometrid genus
Oporabia (Oporinia) with a special consideration of melanism in the Lepidoptera. Jour.
Genetics 9: 195-280. 13 fig. Feb., 1920. — The heath-feeding geometrid subspecies Oporabia
filigrammaria (37 pairs of chromosomes) was derived from O. autumnata (38 pairs of chromo-
somes) of birch, alder, larch or pine. "This event was caused during the Glacial period by the
action, direct and indirect of changed climatic conditions." Eggs of the heather insect hatch
much earlier in the spring and imagines appear a month earlier; its larva) may be raised on the
food plants of the other species, but are never found upon moorland birch, alder, larch. The
preference for heather is due to "long years of compulsory oviposition on these plants" that
"have so affected the organism that the habit has been impressed germinally." Raised on

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 95

bircli and alder and inbred for 5 seasons, filigrammaria showed no characters 'if the birch-

alder-Iarch-eat ing autumnata.

A local larch-pine race of autumnata has developed in Wilton Wood, Yorkshire, since
moorland reforestation about 1X1)0; a neighboring isolated larch forest (Normanby Intake)
was destroyed in lNSf> and birches came in. Larch-feeding insect of Wilton is smaller, duller,
feebly marked, a month earlier than the more typical birch-feeding Normanby form. But
the birch inst inct lias not been lost in t lie Wilt on variety. Birch feeding restores original size,
though natural selection by bats, owls and night-jars has tended to eliminate pah;, silvery
variants in favor of darker and feebly-marked. Larlier emergence of larchwood race is due
to gradual fall of temperature under extremely cool moist conditions of the dense larch forest
in contrast with dryer, more open birch woods. In evidence, pupae exposed to a gradual fall
in low temperatures emerged earlier than others exposed to a similar fall at higher tempera-
tures. Caterpillars of larchwood stock fed on birch produced imagines indistinguishable
from their own race in color and early time of emergence (1), but of larger size.

A local brilliant silvery variety of O. dilutata is found in an isolated oak wood cut off by
a ridge 1000 feet high from the nearest oaks, f mile distant, where "the ordinary suffused
melanic form" occurs. — The increasing prevalence of melanism of moths near English indus-
trial centers is ascribed to "changed metabolism favoring resistance to, or actually induced
by, the use of food contaminated with metallic salts and other compounds. Exhaustive day-
light observations on Polia chi showed that no natural selection favorable either to dark or
light forms occurred, although natural selection is not entirely ruled out. — Melanism in Opo-
rabia is non-Mendelian. A persistent blend occurs. — A 9 mutation of autumnata, "lati-
fasciata," with barred wings, behaves as a sex-linked (partial) dominant, heterozygous for
sex. Crossed with recessive type d\ a sex criss-cross results (cf c? heterozygous, latifasciata;
9 9 recessive type). Heterozygous dominant Fi d1 (Z'Z, using Morgan's symbols, Z' being
chromosome carrying latifasciata gene) mated with the recessive type 9 (WZ), either of Fi
or of wild stock, gave heterozygotes and recessives of each sex in equal numbers (latifasciata
9 9 and dV + type 9 9 and dV, i.e., WZ' + Z'Z + WZ + ZZ). Recessive Fx type 9 mated
with type cf bred true. — Crosses between O. autumnata and dilutata are probably sex-linked,
though it is suggested that, since the latter has only 30 pairs of chromosomes instead of 38,
"mitotic anomalies" may explain the phenomena. Great disturbances in development
occurred: (1) 9 9 from autumnata 9 X dilutata d1 emerged three months before the males
and had no ovaries, (2) dilutata 9 X autumnata d1 produced few females, never more than
one per brood, but fertile and like autumnata. Lack of viability is manifest in pupa?. Though
both reciprocal Fi hybrid cfcf are fertile, back-crossing never produced adults. No synapsis,
nor reduction division, occurs. A larva with wings appeared in Fi ex autumnata 9 X dilu-
tata d1. Bacterial disease delays gametogenesis and hence emergence, but precocious ovari-
less 9 9 of 0. autumnata 9 X dilutata a" , though infected, appeared at their accustomed time.
— Hybrids between autumnata and filigrammaria are a blend, no segregation appearing in F2
nor in back-crosses, but in F3 "a delayed or pseudo-segregation is manifested in which a
portion of the brood still remains intermediate whilst the remainder appeared in a uniform
pseudo-mutational guise," recalling behavior of Oenothera Lamarckiana. No segregation of
marked size-differences of parents in support of multiple factor theory. A female with three
antennae appeared in intermediate portion of F3 lot. Back-crossing Fi (blend) with autum-
nata produced in first generation autumnata, but in back-crossing with filigrammaria two gen-
erations are necessary to bring hybrids back to pure filigrammaria facies. Reduction division
of Fi filigrammaria 9 X autumnata d1 , involving 37 X 3S chromosomes (haploid numbers)
is nearly perfect. Crosses between filigrammaria and dilutata failed, apparently through
lack of physiological affinity. Ova from Cheimatobia boreata 9XO. autumnata c? failed
to hatch. No ova from reciprocal cross, nor from C. brumata X O. autumnata. — John H.
Gerould.

678. Heal, John. Streptocarpus hybrids. Gard. Chron. 67: 293. June 12, 1920 —
Breeding of Streptocarpus is modern, but many advances have been made in late years. Green-
house races originated from Kew hybrids. First flowers were comparatively small, on short

96 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

stems with few colors and foliage long and ungainly. Continued selection and crossing
brought compact habit, shorter foliage, shades of color ranging from white through rose,
pink to salmon, red, violet and blue, also yellow, remarkable floriferousness, long succession
of bloom, lasting quality of flowers and numerous handsome habit types. Many species
have been used in hybridization work. Names given. Flowers of some varieties reach 4.5
inches and have long stems. Color races are fixed and breed true. Detailed description of
culture is given. Seedlings flower in seven months. — Orland E. White.

679. Heribert-Nilsson, N. Zuwachsgeschwindigkeit der pollenschlauche und gestorte
Mendelzahlen bei Oenothera Lamarckiana. [Decline in pollen-tube growth and deranged Men-
delian ratios in Oenothera Lamarckiana.] Hereditas 1: 41-67. 1 fig. 1920.

689. Hertwig, Paula. Haploide und diploide Parthogenese. [Haploid and diploid par-
thenogenesis.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 145-174. April-May, 1920.

681. Honing, J. A. Selection studies with Deli tobacco. Teysmannia 30: 1-11. 2 pi.
1919.

682. Hooper, J. J. A study of inheritance of coat colors in Jersey cattle. Science 52:
43. July 9, 1920. — Author's abstract of paper read before Seventh Annual Meeting, Kentucky
Academy of Science, Lexington, May 8, 1920: Studies of inheritance of Jersey cattle coat colors
by the author show that white spots are recessive to dominant solid color, and a white tongue
and tail-switch also are recessive. Colors of 1145 calves were tabulated and compared with
those of their 2290 sires and dams. Some bulls studied seemed to be pure dominants, as
their calves were all solid in color, although as many as a hundred were sired by each bull.
It was found that 66 per cent of Jersey cattle are solid in color and have black tongue and
switch, while 12 per cent are broken and have white tongue and switch; 3.6 per cent are solid
and have white tongue and black switch, etc. — J. J. Hooper.

683. Hume, A. N. A system for breeding corn or gregarious animals. Jour. Heredity 11:
191- 192. April, 1920.

684. Ikeno, S. Etudes d'heredite sur la reversion d'une race de Plantago major. [Genet-
ical studies on reversion in a race of Plantago major.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 49-56. 1920. —
Author reports on variety of P. major called contractu with leaves rounder, smaller and thicker,
and spikes much shorter than in typical P. major. Crossings of contracta and the type led
to an F2 of 2525 typical : 826 contracta. Inbred contracta gave 3 per cent of plants like typical
P. major; these reversions proved heterozygous and gave 3 typical to 1 contracta on selling.
Author discusses possible place or time at which the reversionary mutation in contracta gene
occurred. — James P. Kelly.

685. Jones, D. F. Heritable characters of maize. IV. A lethal factor— defective seeds.
Jour. Heredity 11: 161-167. 7 fig. April, 1920.

686. Jost. [German rev. of: Lehmann, Ernst. Uber die Selbststerilitat von Veronica
syriaca. (On the self sterility of Veronica syriaca.) Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21:
1-47. 1 fig. May, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2159.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: S7. 1920.—
See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 695.

687. Kappert, H. Uber das Vorkommen vollkommener Dominanz bei einem quanti-
tativen Merkmal. [The occurrence of complete dominance in a quantitative character.] Zeit-
schr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 199-209. 1 fig. Mar., 1920.— In two varietal crosses of
peas — Laxtons Vorbote X William Hurst and Mammuterbse X William Hurst — the author
found no significant difference between homozygous tall and heterozygous tall plants with
respect to the following characters: total height of plant, average length of internodes, and
number of internodes. Data are presented on a small F2 and F3 population for one cross and
on a somewhat larger F2, F3, and F4 population for the other. — R. J. Garber.

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 97

(iss. Km n, L. Uilkomsten van eenige selectienproeven met padi. [Results with some
selection experiments with rice.) Korte Ber. uitgaande van den LandbouwvoorlichtingS-
dienst van hct Departement van Landhouw, Nijverhoid en Eandel. Selectie — en Zaadtuin
te Buitenzorg. No. 21. 16 p. July, 1919. — In the last series of trials made in 1916-1919,
pure strains were in 4 cases compared with the original population and wit h mixtures of pure
strains. In 6 out of 10 trials the strains yielded more than the population. In 8 out of 1<)
trials the mixture of pure strains yielded more than the population. In 7 out of 10 trials
the mixture of pure strains yielded more than the pure strains planted singly. — All trials
combined the conclusion is reached, that pure strains may in some cases yield more than the
population but almost always in later years t lie former fails in superiority to the latter. Pure-
line breeding is unsatisfactory under such variable conditions as found in Java for the annual
crops here considered. — L. Koch.

GS9. Kooiman, II. N. Eenige opmerkingen naar aanleiding van Lotsy's artikel, "De Oeno-
theren als kernchimeren." [Remarks on the introduction of Lotsy's article "The Oenotheras
as nuclear chimeras."] Genetica 2: 235-243. May, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1092.

690. Kooiman, H. N. [Dutch rev. of: Collins, E. J. Sex segregation in the Bryophyta.
Jour. Genetics 8: 139-146. PI. 6, 5 fig. June, 1919. (See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 2103.)]
Genetica 2: 253. May, 1920.

691. Kooiman, H. N. [Dutch rev. of: Fruwirth, C. Die Umziichtung von Winterge-
treide in Sommergetreide. (The breeding of winter cereals into spring cereals.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht, 6: 1-46. Mar., 1918. (See Bot, Absts. 1, Entry 1204; 2, Entry 935.)]
Genetica 2: 255. May, 1920.

692. Kooiman, H. N. [Dutch rev. of: Harland, S. C. Inheritance of certain characters
in the cowpea (Vigna sinensis). Jour. Genetics 8: 101-132. 1 fig. April, 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 3, Entry 1003.)] Genetica 2: 259-260. May, 1920.

693. Kooiman, H. N. [Dutch rev. of: von Tschermak, E. Bastardierungsversuche mit
der griinsamigen Chevrier Bohne. (Hybridization studies with the green-seeded Chevrier
bean.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 57-61. June, 1919.] Genetica 2: 277-278. May, 1920.

694. Kratjse, K. [German rev. of: Bally, Walter. Die Godronschen Bastarde Zwi-
schen Aegilops- und Triticumarten. Vererbung und Zytologie. (The Godronian hybrids be-
tween species of Aegilops and Triticum. Heredity and cytology.) Zeitschr. indukt, Abstamm.
Vererb. 20: 177-240. 4 fig. Feb., 1919.] Bot. Jahrb. 56: 5-6. 1920.

695. Krause, K. [German rev. of: Lehmann, Ernst. Uber die Selbststerilitat von
Veronica syriaca. (On the self sterility of Veronica syriaca.) Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 21: 1-47. 1 fig. May, 1919. See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2159.] Bot. Jahrb. 56: 6.
1920. See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 686.

696. Latjghlin, Harry H. Illustrating the structure and mathematics of the human germ-
plasm. Jour. Heredity 11: 1S5-189. 1 fig. April, 1920.

697. Lehmann, Ernst. Neure Oenotherenarbeiten. (Sammelreferat II.) [New work
with Oenothera. (Composite review II.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 61-85. 14 fig. 1920.

698. Lehmann, E. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Die Absterbeordnung der beiden
Geschlechter einer getrenntgeschlechtigen Doldenpflanze. (Trinia glauca) (Order of death of
the two sexes in a dioecious umbel wort (Trinia glauca;.) Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 105-122. 3 fig.
Mar., 1919. (See Bot, Absts. 3, Entry 2105.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 86. 1920.

98 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

699. Lehmann, E. [German rev. of: von Ubisch, G. II. Beitrag zu einer Faktoren-
analyse von Gerste. (Second contribution to a factorial analysis of barley.) Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 20: 65-117. 7 fig. 11 diagrams. Jan., 1919.] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 171-172.
1920

700. Levine, C. O. Native horses and cattle in the Orient. Jour. Heredity 11: 147-155.
Frontispiece, 4 fig- April, 1920.

701. Ljung, E. W . Svalofs foradlade Vasarag. [Svalofs improved Vasa-rye.] Sveriges
Utsadesf. Tidskr. 28: 71-81. 1918. — Describes a new rye variety obtained in Sweden by selec-
tion from Common Vasa-rye. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

702. Lotsy, J. P. Oenothera-proeven in 1919. [Oenothera experiments in 1919.] Genet-
ica 2: 200-213. 5 fig. May, 1920.

703. Lotsy, J. P. Theoretische steun voor de Kruisings-theorie. [Theoretical basis for
the theory of the origin of species through hybridization.] Genetica 2: 214-234. May, 1920.

704. Lotsy, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: de Lint, G. M. Over de verspreiding van Eurytemora
affinis Poppe en Eurytemora hirundoides Nordquist in Nederland. (Distribution of Euryte-
mora affinis Poppe und Eurytemora hirundoides in Netherlands.) Mededeel. Wetenscbap.
Vergader. Nederl. Dierk. Ver. 1919.] Genetica 2: 264-266. May, 1920.

705. Lotsy, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Semon, Richard. Uber das Schlagwort "Lamarck-
ismus." (On the catch-word "Lamarckism.") Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 51-
52. Dec, 1919.] Genetica 2: 269-271. May, 1920.

706. Lotsy, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: von Tschermak, E. Beobachtungen iiber anschein-
ende vegetative Spaltungen an Bastarden und iiber anscheinende Spatspaltungen von Bastard-
nachkommen, speziell Auftreten von Pigmentierungen an sonst pigmentlosen Deszendenten.
(Observations on apparent vegetative splitting in hybrids, and on apparently belated splitting in
hybrid offspring, especially the occurrence of pigmentation on otherwise pigmentless descend-
ants.) Zeitschr. indukt, Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 216-232. 1 fig. Nov., 1920.] Genetica 2:
278-2S4. May, 1920.

707. Lundborg, H. Hereditary transmission of genotypical deaf-mutism. Hereditas 1 :
35-10. 1920.

708. MacDowell, Edwin Carleton. Bristle inheritance in Drosophila. III. Correla-
tion. Jour. Exp. Zool. 30: 419-469. 8 fig. May 20, 1920.— Author analyses the data presented
in two earlier papers by means of the correlation table. He also studied four more unselected
generations of same strain. The former data consisted of 49 generations of selection for high
bristle number in a strain of Drosophila melanogaster. His former conclusions were as fol-
lows: (1) Extra bristles behaves as a simple Mendelian character when crossed to the wild.
(2) Selection was effective for a few generations and then ceased. (3) Selection was effective
because genetic differences existed among the germ-cells of the original extra-bristled flies.
(4) Selection ceased to be effective when the strain became homozygous. (5) There was no
evidence of germinal changes during selection. (6) The character was dependent to a large
extent upon the food. — By means of the correlation table he finds that the generations can be
divided roughly into three groups: 1, generatioris 2 to 10; 2, generations 11-34; 3, generations
35 to 49. In the first group the correlation coefficients are generally significant and positive;
in the second group they fluctuate, some being negative; in the third group the only significant
coefficients are negative. The author believes the fluctuations in the second group due to
non-genetic causes. It is only in the first group that he gets unquestionable positive corre-
lation. It was during this period that the means indicated that selection was effective.
Hence by the present method of analysis the author is forced to the same conclusions as in

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 99

his earlier papers. — The analysis of the four unselcctcil gencrat ions ;i( Ihe end of tin- selected
line showed that high and low grade parents gave rise to the same grade of offspring. Hence
the strain was homozygous. — F. Payne.

709. MuLLEit, H. J., and E. A i. n:\nuHfi. The rate of change of hereditary factors in
Drosophila. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17: 10-14. 1919. — Rate of mutation in Drosophila
melanogaeter was determined by observing rate of occurrence of sex-linked lcthals, because
lethal mutations arc much more frequent than non-let hals. (In the present experiment, in
which 33 lcthals — of which -1 or 5 were scmi-lcthals — were observed, no non-lethal mutations
were noticed.) — Sex-linked lcthals were found to occur in 5 out of 445 females (1 in 90) at
66°F., and in 13 out of 517 females (1 in 40) at 80°F. The value for QJ0 for mutation is, on this
basis, between 2 and 3, as is usual for chemical reactions. The average rate of mutation was
1 in 53. This would mean that one fly in every 13 should contain a lethal mutation in some
chromosome or other. A new lethal should occur in each X chromosome once in every 100
generations (4 years), and each individual factor should mutate on the average not oftener
than once in 2000 years. — Alexander Weinslein.

710. Nienburo. [German rev. of: (1) Bensattde, Mathilde. Recherches sur le cycle
evolutif et la sexualite chez les Basidiomycetes. (Researches on the evolutive cycle and sex-
uality in the Basidiomycetes.) 156 p., pi. 1-8, 80 fig. (Dissertation.) Nemours, 1918. (2)
Kniep, Hans. Uber morphologische und physiologische Geschlechtsdifferenzierung. (Unter-
suchungen an Basidiomyzeten.) On the morphological and physiological sex differentiation.
(Studies on Basidiomycetes.) Verhandl. Physik.-med. Ges. Wiirzburg. 18 p. 1919.] Zeit-
schr. Bot. 12: 173-175. 1920.

711. Nilsson-Ehle, H. Uber resistenz gegen Heterodera Schachti bei gewissen gersten-
sorten, ihre Vererbungsweise und Bedeutung fur die Praxis. [On resistance to Heterodera
Schachti in certain varieties of barley, its method of inheritance and significance for agricul-
tural practice.] Hereditas 1: 1-34. 4 fig. 1920.

712. Pearl, Raymond. A contribution of genetics to the practical breeding of dairy cattle.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6: 225-233. 1 fig. April, 1920.— This paper presents a brief
resume of the conclusion drawn from the study of Jersey registry-of -merit sires relative to
what these sires did in transmitting milk yield, butter-fat percentage and butter-fat to their
offspring. The measure of this performance is daughter's production minus dam's production
equals the genetic worth of the sire for transmitting milk yield, etc., to his offspring. — Trans-
mitting power of 224 sires for butter-fat are presented in this paper. The reader is referred
to the complete paper from the Maine Station for the other detailed results. — Certain of the
conclusions are: (1) There are 224 Jersey registry-of-merit sires which meet the requirements
of this performance test for their transmitting qualities in milk production. One hundred
and five of these sires, or less than one-half, raise the milk production of their daughters over
that of the dams of these daughters. The largest number of daughter-dam pairs is 39 for the
sire Hood Farm Pogis 9th, 55552. Of those sires which have a large number of pairs, Hood
Farm Torono 60326 with 34 pairs stands first in his transmitting qualities raising the milk
production of his daughters on the average 2620.1 pounds. — (2) Two hundred and twenty-five
sires are included in the table giving the sires which met the requirements of the daughter-
dam performance test for transmitting qualities of butter-fat percentage. Out of this number
101 sires raised the butter-fat percentage of their daughters' milk as compared with the butter-
fat percentage of the dams of these daughters. The leading sire in this butter-fat percentage
performance test was Clear Brook Chief 746S5 raising his daughters on the average 1.338 per
cent of butter fat. This sire had two daughter-dam pairs. Hood Farm Pogis 9th leads in
number of daughter-dam pairs with 42. This bull raised the butter-fat percentage of his
daughters on the average of 0.243 per cent over the butter-fat percentage of the dams of their
daughters. — (3) The sires mentioned as superior in the milk-transmitting ability, Hood Farm
Torono and Spermfield Owl, do not check up so well in their ability to transmit high butter-
fat percentage. Hood Farm Torono caused his daughters on the average to be 0.225 per cent

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 2

100 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

of butter-fat below what the dams of these daughters produced. Spermfield Owl only raised
his daughters on the average 0.027 per cent of butter fat over what the dams of these daughters
produced. — (4) There are 224 sires of known transmitting ability for net butter fat. Of this
number only 99 sires raise the butter-fat production of their daughters over that of their
dams. The sires which raised the production of their daughters' butter fat most were Sans
Aloi 81012, Signal's Successor 72758, and Golden Glow's Chief 61460. The sires which made
the deepest impress on the breed by raising the butter fat of the largest number of daughters
over that of their dams was Hood Farm Torono with 34 pairs and an average increase for each
daughter of 121.51 pounds of butter fat. The next bull, Spermfield Owl, with 26 pairs raised
the butter-fat production 97.71 pounds on the average for each of his daughters. Some of
the bulls lowering the production of their daughters markedly were Gertie's Son of Washing-
ton 83799, Hood Farm S. Tormentor 96311, and Oxford Lad's Owl 75599.— (5) The informa-
tion summarized above was arranged to reveal the transmitting qualities for milk production,
butter-fat percentage and butter fat of Jersey sires to their sons. There were 159 sires which
had sons whose progeny performance was known. Of this number 69 or significantly less than
half had sons who raised the butter-fat production of their daughters over that of their dams.
— (6) The sires of superior merit are defined as those which raise the milk production and
butter-fat percentage of their daughters as compared with that of their dams. The inferior
sires are defined as those sires who lower the milk production and butter-fat percentage of
their daughters as compared with the same variables in their dams. The superior sires so
defined were arranged by the amount of butter fat that they increase the production of their
daughters over that of their dams. The inferior sires were classified according to the amount
of butter fat that they decrease the production of their daughters in comparison with that
of their dams. These two groups of sires are subjected to four generations of pedigree analy-
sis to determine their inbreeding and relationship, the amount of Island and American
stock, "males and females" and "on the sire's side of the pedigree and on the dam's side of
the pedigree," and the individual animals most frequently repeated into two groups of pedi-
grees.— (7) There are 28 sires in the group of sires superior in their transmitting qualities
for milk production and butter-fat percentage. In the group of sires inferior in their trans-
mitting ability for these two characters there are 47 sires, a ratio of 1 to 1.7 Such a difference
speaks for itself. It emphasizes with startling clearness the need of exact knowledge of the
transmitting qualities of bulls to be bred as sires and of the necessity for exact knowledge of
the inheritance of milk production and butter-fat percentage. — (8) The inbreeding coefficients
show that the sires of superior merit have 7.08 per cent of the greatest possible inbreeding up
to the fifth generation. The inferior sires are inbred 9.65 per cent of the greatest possible
amount (continued brother and sister mating). The group of sires poorer in their transmit-
ting qualities are consequently more inbred than the group of sires with superior transmitting
qualities. — (9) The analysis of the pedigrees for the amount of relationship that may exist
between the sire and dam of the individual bulls in the superior group and in the inferior group
shows that there is little or no difference in the amount of this relationship within the two
groups. — (10) The resolution of the four generation pedigrees into the Island-bred Jerseys
and by difference into the American-bred Jerseys showed the mean number of Island males
in the pedigrees of the superior sires' group to be 8.07 and the mean number of females 7.79.
The mean number of Island-bred males in the inferior sires' group were shown to be 6.94.
and the mean number of females 6.55. The group of sires which increased the production of
their daughters over that of their dams had, consequently, more Island-bred stock in their
pedigrees. The females in each group of the pedigrees had a smaller proportion of Island-
bred individuals than the males had in each of the groups. — (11) Study of the pedigrees of
these two groups of sires discloses the fact that all the animals which appeared in the pedi-
grees of the superior sire on the male side of the pedigrees more than four times or on the
female side of the pedigree more than three times also had appearances in the pedigrees of
the sires inferior in their transmitting qualities. This fact alone makes it clear that the
appearance of certain famous animals in the pedigree of a given bull is no guarantee of that
particular bull's worth. — John W. Gowen.

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 101

713. Pomebot, C. S. "Sports" or bud-variation in the rose. Ainer. Rose Ann. 1919:
36-37. Mar. 15, 1919. — Rose has greater number of recognized bud varieties than :my other
plant. Carriers (1865) noted 50 standard roses of "bud-sport" origin, and hie list was in-
complete. 1918 Rose Annual men! toned 90 "bud-sport" varieties, none of which were included
in Carriebe's list. Killarney, Radiance and Ophelia are in a mutating stage of development
— more or less unstable — and give rise to numbers of bud varieties. No artificial method of
inducing "bud sports" is known. "Bud sports" are generally comparat ively stable. United
States Department of Agriculture, through the writer, desires to secure a complete list of all
varieties of plants which have originated as "bud sports." Information should include
name of parent variety, description of new form, place found, and name of finder. If desired,
such information would remain confidential. — Orland E. White.

714. Punnett, R. C. Mendelism. 5th ed., 1SX 19 cm., v -{-219 p. ,7 pi. ,52 fig. Macmillan
& Co. : London, 1919. — This edition differs from the fourth in that several chapters have been
re-written, and two chapters (X and XII) have been added to present the results of the
Drosophila work, and the chromosome theory which has grown out of that work. Author does
not agree with Morgan that "as the result of these researches, the problem of heredity has
been solved," but he does concede that the work with Drosophila constitutes "the most note-
worthy contribution to genet ical studies" since the appearance of the last edition in 1912. —
G. h! Skull.

715. Rasmusox, J. Mendelnde Chlorophyll-Faktoren bei Allium cepa. [Mendelian chloro-
phyll factors in Allium Cepa.] Hereditas 1: 128-134. 1920.

716. Rasmusox, Hans. Uber einige genetische Versuche mit Papaver Rhoeas und Papaver
laevigatum. [Some genetical experiments with Papaver rhoeas and Papaver laevigatum.)
Hereditas 1: 107-114. 1920.

717. Rosendahl, H. V. Tre for norra Europa nya Asplenier. [Three new Aspleniums
for northern Europe.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 161-168. 1918.— At Taberg in Sm&land (Sweden)
Asplenium adulterinum was found, there, as in other places in Europe, growing on serpentine
ground. Also the hybrid Asplenium adulterinum X viride was there to be seen. Its spores
are entirely undeveloped. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

718. Russell, S. F. Inheritance of characters in sheep. Oklahoma Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
126. 22 p., 8 fig. 1919. — From crosses of Shropshire-Dorset, Shropshire-Rambouillet, Dorset -
Rambouillet, Dorset-Merino, Shropshire-Merino, and back crosses, author concludes that
absence of folded skin, dark markings of the Shropshire, early breeding of Dorsets, and, in
females, hornless character of Shropshires, are dominant. A dominance of mutton conforma-
tion was maintained and Merinos and Rambouillets transmitted their density of fleece. Data
on time of lambing and relative prolificacy are given. — Elmer Roberts.

719. Shamel, A. D. Origin of a grapefruit variety having pink-colored fruits. Jour.
Heredity 11: 157-160. 4 fig. April, 1920.

720. Shull, Charles A. Variation in Abutilon Theophrasti Medici. Science 52: 41.
July 9, 1920. — Author's abstract of paper read before Seventh Annual Meeting, Kentucky
Academy of Science, Lexington, May 8, 1920: — This paper is a report of progress in an investi-
gation of variability in the number of carpels in the ovaries of A. Theophrasti. The range of
variability is from ten to seventeen, with the mode usually on 14 or 15. The material shows a
skewed frequency distribution, and tendency toward half-Gait on curves. A number of plants
have been found with half curves and the mode on 15. But whenever a number of plants are
counted together, there are usually a small number falling on 16. Only 3 specimens in about
8000 had 17 carpels to the ovary. The mode falls on a lower number in material collected in
Kansas than in similar material from Kentucky. The drier climate of Kansas is probably
responsible for this difference. If plants from an unfavorable habitat are counted the mode

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 2

102 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

is found to be depressed. The modifications of the variability curves noted are probably
related rather directly to nutritional conditions. Heredity and suboptimal nutrition are
believed to be responsible for the half-curve variability. — Charles A. Shall.

721. Shull, J. Makion. Concerning Iris colouration. Gard. Chron., 67: 291. June 12,
1920. — Author presents observations on ncglccta forms of Iris, which are colored forms lack-
ing yellow plastids, and points out that it is to be expected that such will show a clear purple
or violet rather than a brownish coloration, since latter is composite effect of anthocyanin
and yellow plastids. Further observes that yellow occurs in both "standards'' and "falls"
while anthocyanin may not be so distributed. Non-hereditary freak bearing on brownish
and purple coloration is also described. — James P. Kelly.

722. Sirks, M. J. Erfelijkheids- en selectieonderzoekingen bij Vicia-soorten. I. De
Navelkleur van Vicia faba. [Inheritance and selection experiments in Vicia species. I. The
eye-color of Vicia faba.] Genetica 2: 193-199. May, 1920.

723. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Castle, W. E. Studies of heredity in rabbits, rats
and mice. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 288. 56 p., 3 pi. 1919.] Genetica 2: 248-251.
May, 1920.

724. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Dahlgren, K. V. Ossian. Erblichkeitsversuche mil
einer dekandrischen Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.). (Gentical investigations with a decandrous
Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.).) Svensk Bot. Tidsskr. 13: 48-60. 2 fig. 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 3, Entry 616.)] Genetica 2 : 254. May, 1920.

725. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Fruwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen
Prlanzenzuchtung. 3. Die Ziichtung von Kartoffel. Erdbirne, Lein, Hanf, Tabak, Hopfen,
Bucliweizen, Hulsenfruchtern und kleeartigen Futterpfianzen. (Handbook of agricultural
plant breeding. 3. The breeding of potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, flax, hemp, tobacco, hops,
buckwheat, legumes and clover-like forage plants.) 3rd ed., 240 p., 45 fig. P. Parey: Berlin,
1919.] Genetica 2: 257. May, 192').

726. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Fruwirth, C, Th. Roemer, E. von Tschermak.
Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen Prlanzenzuchtung. 4. Die Ziichtung der vier Haupt-
getreidearten und der Zuckerriibe. (Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. 4. Breeding
of the four chief cereals and sugar beets.] 3rd ed., 8vo., xv + 504 P-,4® fid- Paul Parey: Ber-
lin, 1918.] Genetica 2: 256. May, 1920.

727. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Schaxel, J. Grundziige der Theorienbildung in der
Biologic (Principles of theory formation in biology.) 221 p. G. Fischer: Jena, 1919.]
Genetica 2: 267-268. May, 1920.

728. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Schaxel, Julius, tiber die Darstellung allgemeiner
Biologic (On the presentation of general biology.) Abhandl. Theoret. Biol. 62 p. 1919.]
Genetica 2: 268-269. May, 1920.

729. Sirks, M.J. [Dutch rev. of : Tischler, G. Ueber die Sogenannten "Erbsubstanzen"
und ihre Lokalisation in der Pflanzenzelle. (On the so-called hereditary substances and their
localization in the plant cell.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 15-28. 1920.] Genetica 2: 271-273. May,
1920.

730. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: (1) Tower, W. L. The mechanism of evolution in
Leptinotarsa. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 263. viii + 284 P-, 19 pi., 161 fig. 1918.
(See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 794.) (2) Breitenbecher, J. K. The relation of water to the be-
havior of the potato beetle in a desert. Ibid. 263. 340 p., 19 pi. 1918.1 Genetica 2: 274-277.
May, 1920.

No. 2, November, 1920] GENETICS 103

731. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: VAN W issi.i.i -...ii, C. Uber Variabilitat und Erblich-
keit. (Variation and heredity.) Ziits.hr. indukt. Abstamra. Vererb. 22: 65-126. 10 fig.
Jan., 1920.] Genetica 2: 286-287. May, 1920.

732. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: ZlBOLBB, II. E. Zuchtwahlversuche an Ratten.
(Selection experiments on rats.) Fcstschr. 100-jahr. Best. Kgl. Wiirtt. Landw. Ilochschule
Hohenheim. p. S85-399. 1919.] Genetica 2: 287-288. May, 1920.

733. Smith, II. Vegetationen och dess urvecklingshistoria i det central-svenska hog-
fjallsomradet. [The vegetation of the central Swedish high-mountain region and the history
of its development.] (Inaugural dissertation.) Norrlandskt handbibliotek IX. 185 X 270

mm., 238 p., 41 fig., 2 maps. Upsala, 1920.— In the list of the vascular plants of this region
(Harjedalen and parts of Jamtland) the finding of a great number of hybrids is mentioned,
namely: Woodsia alpina X ilvensis, Equisetum trachyodon (= E. hiemale X variegatum),
Calamagrostis neglecta X purpurea, Carex brunnescens X Lachenalii, C. canescens X loliacea,
C. Goodenoughii X rufina, C. Goodenoughii juncea X rufina, C. aquatilis X Goodenoughii,
C. livida X vaginata, C. airala X Halleri, C. flava X Hornschuchiana, C. rotundata X saxa-
tilis, Juncus arcticus X filiformis, Luzula confusa X spicata, L. arcuata X spicata, L. sudet-
ica X spicata, Orchis cruenta X maculata, Salix caprea X lapponum, S. nigricans X phylici-
folia, S. arbuscula X herbacea, S. arbuscula X lapponum, S. arbuscula X reticulata, S. hastata
X herbacea, S. hastata X lanata, S. hastata X reticulata, S. glauca X myrsinites, S. glauca X
nigricans, S. glauca X phylicifolia, S. myrsinites X nigricans, S. herbacea X lanata, S. her-
bacea X lapponum, S. herbacea X reticulata, S. herbacea X polaris, Betula nana X pubescens,
Stellaria calycantha X longifolia, Cerastium alpinum X vulgare, Sagina intermedia X Lin-
naei, S. Linnaei X procumbens, Melandrium album X silvestre, Draba incana X rupestris,
Viola epipsila X palustris, Epilobium anagallidifolium X lactiflorum, E. alsinifolium X
palustre, E. Hornemanni X lactiflorum, Euphrasia minima X tenuis, Erigeron borealis X
politus. — Interesting is a newly described species Poa hcrjedalica. C. A. M. Lindman has
previously called this Poa alpina X pratensis. Most certainly it is produced by such a com-
bination. Any viviparous forms have however never been found in this territory. Whether
Poa herjedalica is a vegetatively propagated hybrid or a descendant of a hybrid it does not
produce any noteworthy capacity for variations or any resemblance to either of the presumed
parents. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

734. Sd, Masao, and Yoshitaka Imai. The types of spotting in mice and their genetic
behaviour. Jour. Genetics 9: 319-333. 1 pi. Mar., 1920. — Authors find two independent
forms of spotting in mice: (1) Ordinary piebald, s, recessive to self, S; (2) Factor D producing
dominant spotting when acting upon self -coated "Kasuri" race. Some factor acting upon
piebald spotting produces dark-eyed white "Daruma" type. All mice homozygous for D
perish probably during early ontogeny. "Kasuri" race often becomes sterile, especially upon
female side, "Daruma" less frequently so. General results confirm previous work of reviewer
and of Detlefsen. — C. C. Little.

735. Tedin, Hans. The inheritance of flower colour in Pisum. Hereditas 1: 68-97.
1 colored pi, 2 fig. 1920.

736. Thomson, J. Arthur. [French rev. of: Dendy, A. Animal life and human progress.
8vo, ix + 227 p. Constable & Co. : London, 1919.] Scientia 27: 322-324. 1920.

737. Thomson, J. Arthur. [French rev. of: Hensen, V. Tod, Zeugung und Vererbung,
unter besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Meeresbewohner. (Death, reproduction and heredity
with special reference to marine animals.) 84 P-, 20 fig. Lipsius & Tischer: Kiel & Leipzig,
1913.] Scientia 14: 487. 1920.

73S. Tischler, G. Ueber die sogenannten "Erbsubstanzen" und ihre Lokalisation in
der pflanzenzelle. [On the so-called hereditary substance and its localization in the plant
cell.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 15-28. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 729.

104 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

739. Tischler, G. [German rev. of: de Vries, Eva. Versuche iiber Frucht- und Samen-
bildung bei Artkreuzungen in der Gattung Primula. (Studies on fruit and seed formation
in species crosses in the genus Primula.) Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerlandais 16: 63-205. 1919.]
Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 169-171. 1920.

740. Tjebbes. [Dutch rev. of: von Hofsten, N. Arftlighetslara. (Genetics.) 17 X
26 cm., viii + 506 p., 191 fig., 1 colored pi. P. A. Norstedt & Soners forlag: Stockholm, 1919.
(See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2208.)] Genetica 2: 263-264. May, 1920.

741. Tjebbes. [Dutch rev. of: Winge, 0. Om Nedarvningen af Hestend L0d. (Inher-
itance of coat color in cattle.) Nordisk Jordbrugsforskning 1920: 1-30. 1920.] Genetica 2:
284-285. May, 1920.

742. Torsell, R. Iakttagelser rorande den s. k. slidsjukans upptradande a hostvete vid
Ultuna sommaren 1918. [Observation of the disease caused by Cicadula sexnotata, appearing
on wheat at Ultuna in the summer of 1918.] Sveriges Utsadesf. Tidskr. 28: 260-274. 1918.—
Between different kinds of winter wheat there are differences in their resistance against the
disease, — for each kind a particular resistance, apparently transmissible to the descendants.
The power of resistance, seems to be directly influenced by different qualities, specially con-
cerning the winter-hardiness. The most effective way to avoid the disease in question is to
grow resistant and highly hardened sorts of wheat. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 746.] —
K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

743. van der Wolk, P. C. Eine neue Phase der experimentellen Entwicklungslehre. [A
new phase of experimental evolution.] Umschau. 1920: 63-66. 1920.

744. van Herwerden, M. A. [Dutch rev. of: (1) Calkins, G. N., and L. H. Gregory.
Variations in the progeny of a single ex-conjugant of Paramaecium caudatum. Jour. Exp.
Zool. 15: 467. 1913. , (2) Stocking, R. J. Variation and inheritance in abnormalities occur-
ring after conjugation in Paramaecium caudatum. Ibid. 19: 387. 1915. (3) Middleton, A.
R. Heritable variations and the results of selection in the fission rate of Stylonychia pustulata.
Ibid. 19: 451. 1915. (4) Hegner, R. W. Variation and heredity during the vegetative repro-
duction of Arcella dentata. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. ] 4 : 283-288. Sept. , 1918. (See Bot.
Absts. 2, Entry 676.) (5) Ackert, J. E. Effect of selection of Paramaecium. Genetics 1:
407. 1916. (6) Jennings, H. S. Heredity, variation and the results of selection in Difflugia
corona. Ibid. 1 : 407-534. 1916. (7) Erdmann, R. Endomixis and size variations in pure
lines of Paramaecium aurelia. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 16: 60-65. 1919. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2123.)] Genetica 2: 244-248. May, 1920.

745. van Herwerden, M. A. [Dutch rev. of: Goldschmidt, R. Intersexualitat und
Geschlechtsbestimmung. (Intersexuality and sex determination.) Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 498-
512. Nov., 1919.] Genetica 2 : 257. May, 1920.

746. Wahlstedt, I. Iakttagelser rorande slidsjukans upptradande a hostvete i Oster-
gottland sommaren 1918. [Observations concerning the disease caused by Cicadula sexnotata
on winter wheat in OstergStland.] Sveriges Utasdesf. Tidskr. 28: 195-215. 1 fig. 1918. —
Different varieties of fall wheat show different resisting power against attacks of Cicadula
sexnotata. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 742.] — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

747. Welch, Paul S. [Rev. of : Patterson, J. T. Polyembryony and sex. Jour. Hered-
ity 10: 344-352. 2 fig. Nov., 1919.] Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc. 39: 164-165. April, 1920.

748. Winge, 0. Om Nedarvningen af Hestend L0d. [Color inheritance in cattle.] Nord-
brungsforskning 1920: 1-30. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 741.

749. Winkler, H. Verbreltung und Ursache der Parthenogenesis in Pflanzen- und Tier-
reiche. [Distribution and cause of parthenogenesis in the plant and animal kingdoms.] 8vo,
vi + 281 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920.

No. 2, November, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 105

750. Yami'olsky, Cecil. Further observations on sex in Mercurialis annua. Amer. Nat.
54: 280-284. 1 jig. May-June, 1920.— -Author grew four plants of .1/. '< annua from
seeds collected from a monoecious individual. In general habil of growth these four plants
were like typical female plants. During the earlier part of the flowering season only female
flowers were produced in each of the plants; later on male flowers and hermaphroditic flowers
appeared along with the female flowers, the latter usually being more numerous than either
of the others. Author suggests that sex is not a fixed condition in these forms of Mercurialis
annua and that a plant may change its sex during the progress of its life cycle. — Chester A.
Darling.

751. Zelexy, Charles. Germinal changes in the bar-eyed race of Drosophila during the
course of selection for facet number. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1917: 73-77. 1918. — Writer se-
lected for low facet- and high facet -number in the bar-eyed race of Drosophila. Selection
was effective in both lines. Analysis of the results brings out the following facts: (1) The
presence of germinal differences, — accessory unit factors, — at the beginning of selection.
(2) The appearance of accessory genes during the progress of selection. (3) A change in the
bar gene itself causing a return to full eye both somatically and germinally. — Another point
of interest is the return of bar eye to full eye by a second route, namely, the appearance of a
modifying factor in one of the autosomes. — F. Payne.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

752. Anonymous. Anatomical modification of roots by mechanical action. [Rev. of:
Bloch, E. Concerning the modifications produced in the structure of roots and stalks by ex-
ternal compression. (French.) Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 158: 1701. 1914.] Sci.
Amer. Monthly 1 : 262. 1920.

753. Bailey, Irving W. The formation of the cell plate in the cambium of the higher
plants. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 197-200. 8 fig. Apr., 1920.— "A remarkable
type of cytokinesis," previously reported by author for the cambium of the Coniferae, is now
shown to occur in cambial initials of various representative angiosperms. Author states
same phenomenon is found in other somatic cells "whose planes of division have one long and
one short dimension." Comparative study indicates ordinary process of cell plate formation
is simply extended in space and time where cell dimensions require it, to the limiting case
where two widely separated "kinoplasmasomes" are formed at the free ends of the advancing
cell plate. — Howard B. Frost.

754. Barratt, Kate. A contribution to our knowledge of the anatomy of the vascular sys-
tem of the genus Equisetum. Ann. Botany 34: 201-236. PI. 8-9, fig. 1-7. 1920.— A detailed
description of the vascular system of Equisetum, particularly of the developmental stages in
the sporeling, is given. The thoroughness of the work was made possible by a technique which
rendered whole sporelings and pieces of the adult transparent so that the vascular system could
be viewed as a whole. At the base of the young sporeling is a protostele which opens out into
a siphonostele at the attachment of the vascular supply of the secondary axis and then closes
again for a short distance. The basal regions of the several axes formed before a rhizome
appears show compact siphonosteles. These axes arise endogenously whereas the whorled
aerial axes develop from superficial cells. Contrary to views held by some workers the meta-
xylem of the vegetative axis all develops centrifugally; nor do any metaxylem strands cross
the outer surface of the nodal wood, for they are linked together at this point by short nodal
tracheids. There is no trace of secondary thickening at the nodes, the apparent increase in
the number of elements attributed to secondary growth being really due to the displacement
of developing tracheids. The conditions found in the cone lead the author to conclude that

106 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

the axis is not differentiated into nodes and internodes, that the gaps bear no relationship to
sporangiophoric traces, that they are not leaf-gaps but are related to mechanical efficiency,
and that the sporangiophores are not the morphological equivalent of leaves but are organs
sui generis. Throughout the plant the gaps are neither foliar nor ramular and have no mor-
phological value in questions of phylogeny. — W. P. Thompson.

755. Beekman, H. 78 Preanger-houtsoorten, beschrijving, afbeelding en determinatie-
tabel. [78 Preanger timber species described and illustrated, with determination table.]
Mededeel. Proefsta. Boschw. Dept. Landb. Nijverheid en Handel Nederlandsch-Indie 5:
1-186. 60 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 83.

756. Bergman, H. F. Internal stomata in ericaceous and other unrelated fruits. Bull.
Torrey Bot. Club 47: 213-221. 9 fig. 1920. — Numerous cases of the occurrence of internal
stomata are cited. These stomata remain mostly in an open condition and are not functional.
Their presence is explained by the fact that the fruit is a modified leaf, and their "persistence
must be regarded as an hereditary continuation of a stomata-producing tendency after the
leaf has lost its normal form and function." — P. A. Munz.

757. Brown, Forest B. H. The refraction of light in plant tissues. Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club 47 : 243-260. 4 fi-Q- 1920. — In order to get the clearest definition of tissue outlines under
the microscope, it is necessary to know the refractive properties of these tissues. Refraction
can be measured under the microscope by the use of a gradient series of media of known
refractive powers, such as castor oil, clove oil, and naphthalene a monobromated. Direc-
tions are given for preparing such a series of media and the tissues for study. Methods of
illumination and examination under the microscope are also given. It is found that in a
given tissue, refraction may vary widely with imbibition and growth. To secure clearness
of anatomical details, such as pits and middle lamellae, it is desirable to have a medium with
the index of refraction below that of the tissue substance. — P. A. Munz.

758. Browne, Isabel M. P. A third contribution to our knowledge of the anatomy of the
cone and fertile stem of Equisetum. Ann. Botany 34: 237-264. PI. 8-9, fig. 1-7, 1920.— The
vascular systems of the cones of Equisetum hyemale and E. giganteum are described and com-
pared with those of species previously studied. The cones of the different species can be ar-
ranged in a series, which is not to be considered a phylogenetic one, with respect to the degree
of reduction of the vascular system. This reduction tends more and more to obscure both the
relation of meshes (gaps) to traces and the alternation of traces in the successive whorls. The
author is of the opinion that the sporangiferous annulus is a recent development in the phy-
logeny of the genus, the sporangia having spread to regions which were not at first sporangif-
erous.— W. P. Thompson.

759. Chodat, R. Le Hugueninia tanacetifolia. Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 60-61. 1919.
— The flower and inflorescence of this species are described. — W. H. Emig.

760. Chodat, R. La floraison du Lilium Martagon [The flowering period ofLilium
Martagon.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 50-59. Fig. 1-5. 1919.— The changes that take
place in the flower from anthesis to the maturity of the fruit are described. — W. H. Emig.

761. Cockayne, L. On the seedling form of the coral-shrub (Helichrysum coralloides
(Hook, f.) Berth. & Hook. f.). New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 274-278. July, 1919.

762. Deshmukh, G. B. Polyembryony. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2: 258. 1920.
— Cases of polyembryony are recorded for Citrus decumana L. and Persea gralissima Gaertn.
— T. F. Chipp.

763. Dodge, B. O. The life history of Ascobolus magnificus — Origin of the ascocarp from
two strains. Mycologia 12: 115-134. PI. 7-8, 28 fig. 1920.— "The ascocarp of Ascobolus
magnificus originates from a pair of morphologically distinct primordia — a large ascogonium

No. 2, November, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 107

the end of which functions :is a triclionyne, and a cluh-shaped antheridium. Papulospora
imuj/i ijii-n iloison is :m asexual Btage of Ascobolus magnificus Dodge. The intrahyphal my-
celium found in old cultures is simply a case of "Durchwachsungen" or "cordon interne."
The strains here reported, winch were obtained from germinated papulospon-s or ascospores,
were self-sterile in the experiments conducted, but always produced papulospores. Sexual
reproduction occurs in cultures containing two si rains properly chosen." ■ //. /,*. Rosen.

764. II aiivkv, H. B. Relation of catalase, oxidase, and H-concentration to the formation
of overgrowths. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 211-221. 8 fig. l(.)_>n. See Bot. U>sts. 6, Entry 1353.

765. Hi mi, A. The Douglas firs, a botanical and silvicultural description of the various
species of Pseudotsuga. Pharm. Jour. 104: 128. 1920.

766. Jacobson, Mrs. R. Scutellaria alpina et sa biologie florale. [Scutellaria alpina and
its floral biology.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 62-63. 1919.— The author describes the visits
of insects and the process of pollination. — W. H. Emig.

767. Jennings, O. E. The paper mulberry and "artillery plant." Torreya 20: 52-53.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1350.

768. Loeb, J. Quantitative laws in regeneration. I. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 297-307.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 867.

769. Oschwald, Marie. Observations sur la biologie florale des campanules. [Observa-
tions on the floral biology of species of Campanula.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 64-69. 1 fig.
1919. — A description of the floral parts of several species of Campanula accompanies the
details regarding their pollination. — W. H. Emig.

770. Przibram, Karl. Form und Geschwindigkeit. Ein Beitrag zur allgemeinen Mor-
phologic [Form and rapidity of movement. A contribution to general morphology.] Natur-
wissenschaften 8: 103-107. 1920. — Dependence of form on the rapidity of growth in Poly-
podium vulgare is noted. Figures show differences in form when grown at different rates. —
Orton L. Clark.

771. Sabnis, T. A. The physiological anatomy of the plants of the Indian Desert. Jour.
Indian Bot. 1: 65-83. 97-113, 183-205, 237-251. PI. 3-14. 1919-1920.— A study of Cappari-
daceae to Lythraceae (Bentham and Hooker's system). The salient features of leaf and stem
anatomy are described and figured from herbarium material. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
1904.] — IV infield Dudgeon.

772. Sawhney, Kali Das. The vascular connections and the structure of the tendrils
in some Cucurbitaceae. Jour. Indian Bot. 1 : 254-262. 7 fig. 1920. — The author has exam-
ined the vascular anatomy of the node and the vascular connections of the nodal appendages
of 12 species of cultivated Cucurbitaceae. Tendrils, buds, and floral axes are connected with
the nodal plexus of the inner ring of 5 cauline bundles, while the leaves are connected with
the outer rings of cauline bundles. He concludes that the vascular connections and struc-
ture of the basal part of branched tendrils show that they are homologous with ordinary shoots;
that the arms of branched tendrils and the upper part of simple tendrils are homologous with
leaves; and that simple tendrils have been derived from branched tendrils. — Winfield Dudgeon.

108 MOKPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS,
BACTERIA, AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatrick, Editor

FUNGI

773. Atwood, Alice C. Errors in Lindau's "Thesaurus" and Saccardo's "Sylloge."
Mycologia 12: 169-171. 1920.

774. Bailey, M. A. Puccinia malvacearum and the mycoplasm theory. Ann. Botany 34:
173-200. 1920. — A brief summary of the essential aspects of the mycoplasm hypothesis is
followed by a detailed outline of the results obtained by Eriksson in his investigations of
the rust of hollyhock. The writer's own results in his experiments with this same organism
are then contrasted with those of Eriksson. He finds himself in marked opposition to the
observations and deductions of the latter worker. He finds that the tendency of the pro-
mycelium in this species to break up into "oidia" rather than to form normal sporidia is merely
the result of environmental conditions, and can be noted especially when the teleutospores are
completely submerged. His experiments are discussed in detail, and the results are given in
tabular form. He describes the apparatus which was used to insure freedom from outside
infection, and discusses critically every aspect of his experimental work. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

775. Jackson, H. S. New or noteworthy North American Ustilaginales. Mycologia 12:
149-156. 1920. — The bunt of rye, hitherto unreported from U. S. A., was detected in a collec-
tion made by L. M. Underwood in New York, 1892. It is determined as Tilletia Secalis and
considered distinct from T. Tritici. T. Hold is reported on species of Notholcus from Oregon.
Entyloma Collinsiae is reported from Oregon on two new hosts, Collinsia grandiflora and C.
tenella. From the same state Urocystis Trillii sp. nov. is described on Trillium chloropetalum.
Collections on Quamasia hyacinthina from Indiana and Q. quamash from Oregon are assigned
to Urocystis Omithogali. Tubercina Trientalis is reported on a new host, Trientalis latifolia
and from a new locality, Oregon. Because of morphological differences as well as different
genera of hosts attacked Cintractia axicola minor Clinton is raised to specific rank, C. minor
(Clinton) comb. nov. Cerastium oreophilum, Silene Watsoni and Stellaria Jamesiana are
reported as new hosts for Sorosporium Saponariae. Tolyposporium Iresine is described and
the new combination Thecaphora Iresine (Elliott) is made. Tolyposporium Junci is reported
for the first time from North America; two Oregon collections on Juncus bufonius are recorded.
— H. R. Rosen.

776. Killerman, S. Fund von Polyporus montanus Quelet in Bayern. [Discovery of P.
montanus in Bavaria.] Hedwigia 61 : 1-3. 1 pi. 1919. — A large (60 cm. diam.) polypore was
found at the base and on the large roots of the "big fir" at Waldhaus, in the Bavarian forest.
A description and illustrations are presented. Critical comparison with described species
leads to the conclusion that it is P. montanus. — D. Reddick.

111. Krieger, LOuis C. C. Field key to the genera of the gill mushrooms. Chart (17 X
28 in.) with 8 pages of text. The Norman Remington Co. : Baltimore, 1920. — Chart is printed
in black on white paper, and is folded into a small, pocket-size, press-board covered booklet
containing eight pages of explanatory matter. It is designed for field use, but can also be
used as a wall chart. The principal genera of the Agaricaceae are included, and an attempt
has been made to furnish an illustrated key which will enable the novice to determine the
generic position of mushrooms as they are collected in the field. Genera known to contain
poisonous species are indicated. — H. M. Fitzpatrick.

US. Murrill, W. A. Another new truffle. Mycologia 12 : 157-158. 1 fig. 1920.— Mate-
rial collected by Dr. C. L. Shear in Maryland and first studied by Dr. H. W. Harkness
is described as Tuber Shearii Harkness, sp. nov. — H. R. Rosen.

No. 2, November, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 109

779. Murrill, W. A. Oudemans' work on fungi. [Rev. of: OuDEMANS, C. A. J. A.
Enumeratio systematica fungorum. Vol. I. cxxvi + 1880 p. Martinus Nijhoff: The Hague,
1919.] Mycologia 12: 169. 1920. — "This first volume is valuahle because of its extended bib-
liography and numerous citations to the literature of the fun^i which it contains. As a host
index for the fungi, it includes all European plants [cryptogams to orchids; remainder of mono-
cotyledons and all dicotyledons to appear in subsequent volumes], many of which occur also
in the United States, and also all plants grown in conservatories in Europe, among which will
be found many species from tropical America." — //. R. Rosen.

780. Odell, W. S. A rare fungus new to Canada. Canadian Field-Nat. 34: 10-13. 6 fig.
1920. — Morchella bispora Sor. was first found in Canada at Chelsea, Quebec, and near Ottawa,
Ontario. — IJ\ H. Emig.

781. Overholts, L. O. Some mycological notes for 1919. Mycologia 12: 135-142. PI.
9-10. 1920. — Notes based on collections made in Pennsylvania, clarifying and amplifying
previous descriptions of the following fungi: Clavaria ornatipes Peck, Craterellus pistillaris
Fr., Fomes baker i (Murrill) Sacc, Merulius aureus Fr., Mucronella ulmi Peck, Paxillus corru-
galas Atk., Polyporus Schweinitzii Fr., Porta semitincta Peck., Tremella sparassoidea Lloyd,
Tremella vesicaria Fr., Tremellodon gelatinosum (Scop.) Fr., Trichoglossum hirsulum (Pers.)
Boudier. — H. R. Rosen.

782. [Pennell, Francis W.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12:
172-174. 1920.

783. Standley, Paul C. Rusts from Glacier National Park, Montana. Mycologia 12:
143-148. 1920. — A list of 61 species of rusts collected by the writer and determined by Dr.
J. C. Arthur. — H. R. Rosen.

784. Subramiam, L. S. A Pythium disease of ginger, tobacco, and papaya. Mem. Dept'
Agric. India (Bot. Ser.) 10: 181-194. PL 1-6. 1919.— The morphology of the fungus, its sys-
tematic position, and remedial measures for the disease are described. The name Pythium
Butler i is proposed. — F. M. Schertz.

785. Suematsu, N. On the artificial culture of Helminthosporium Oryzae. Bot. Mag.
Tokyo 33 : 291-297. 3 fig. 1919. — A new method of isolating the fungus is reported. A small
piece of diseased leaf is removed to a petri-dish containing rice-leaf decoction agar. After two
days plenty of spores are formed, then by transferring one of the spores a pure culture is
secured. Germination of the spores of the fungus generally takes place at both ends of the
cell. Secondary spore formation does not occur so frequently as observed by Ravn in his
Hel. gramineum. In drop culture conidiophores bear one to four spores, and frequently
fertile tips continue growth as successive conidia are formed. Spore formation takes place
in bright daylight. Cultural experiments with use of several culture media were performed,
and the results are tabulated in detail. — T. Matsumoto.

LICHENS

786. Havaas, Johan. Lichen vegetationen ved Mosterhavn. [Lichen vegetation by
Mosterhavn.] Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1917-1918: 1-53. 1918.— List, by Mos-
terhavn, of lichens from the vicinity of Bergen, including a number not before found in Nor-
way. The moist climate with little snow is favorable to lichens. — A. Gundersen.

787. Lettan, G. Beitrage zur Lichenographie von Thiiringen. [Lichenography of Thur-
ingia.] Hedwigia 61: 97-175. 1919. — Collections made in practically all parts of Thuringia,
including particularly valleys and mountains. Distribution with respect to elevation, geo-
logical formation, dominant vegetation, etc. ; 549 species are described, 70 being new to Thur-
ingia, 4 or 5 new to Germany, none new to science. — D. Reddick.

110 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

788. Watson, W. Lichens of Llanberis and district. Jour. Botany 58: 108-110. 1920.
— The list given supplements that of Wheldon (Jour. Botany 58: 11-15). About ninety
forms are considered. — K. M. Wiegand.

BACTERIA

789. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The fermentation of glucose, galactose and
mannose by Lactobacillus pentoaceticus n. sp. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 273-287. 1920. — See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1338.

790. Winslow, C.-E. A., William Rothberg, and Elizabeth I. Parsons. Notes on
the classification of the white and orange Staphylococci. Jour. Bact. 5: 145-167. 1920. — One
hundred and eighty strains of Staplujlococcus were collected from various sources, 104 of which
were from pathological conditions in man and animals. Several tests were made on each
strain, and the conclusions are reached that the generic names Aurococcus and Albococcus
used by the Winslows should not be retained for this group but, that all should be included
under the genus Staphylococcus. Of the forms studied, six species are recognized, based on
the color of pigment formed, the power of fermenting lactose, and the power of liquefying
gelatin. The species recognized are St. aureus Rosenbach, St. aurantiacus Schroter, St.
epidermidis Gordon, St. candidus Cohn, St. tetragenus Gaffky, and St. candicans Flugge. —
Chester A. Darling.

MYXOMYCETES

791. Lister, G. Mycetozoa from Cornwall. Jour. Botany 58: 127-130. 1920.— A short
account is given of the activities of Alfred Adams as a collector and student of Mycetozoa,
especially in Cornwall. A list of 82 species and 4 varieties is given as occurring in Cornwall.
This list is based on the work of Adams and on notes by. G. H. Fox and J. M. Coon. — K. M.
Wiegand.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

792. Benson, W. N. A review of recent researches on the mesozoic floras of Australasia.
New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 2: 29-32. 1919. — Views of Walkom, Arber and others are com-
pared, especially as to correlation of Australian and New Zealand strata. Australian meso-
zoic flora has four times as many species as that of New Zealand. — A. Gundersen.

793. Berry, Edward W. The ancestors of the Sequoias. Nat. Hist. 20: 152-155. Maps
and plate. 1920. — Brief account of the geological history of Sequoia, with maps showing
Mesozoic and Cenozoic occurrences. — E. W. Berry.

794. Cockerell, T. D. A. [Rev. of: Knowlton, F. H. A catalogue of the Mesozoic and
cenozoic plants of North America. U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 696. 815 p. 1919.] Torreya 20:
53-57. 1920. — Enumerates 4789 accepted forms, including the fossil plants of Alaska, but
excluding those of Greenland and Mexico. The species are listed by strata and localities.
Nearly all the genera of woody plants well represented today in North America appear also
in the Tertiary flora. The herbaceous plants are very scantily represented. — J. C. Nelson.

795. Conklin, E. J. The rate of evolution. Sci. Monthly 10 : 589-602. 1920.— The results
of evolution are diversity, adaptation and progress. Diversity appears as varieties, species
and genera, but they are usually better adapted than their ancestors. The first is the most
evident phase and the one dealt with in experimental evolution. — -Differences may be classi-
fied as (1) fluctuations, (2) new combinations, (3) mutations. Fluctuations are due to
environment and are the modification of the soma rather than of the germplasm, of the indi-
vidual development rather than heredity. They are of little evolutionary value. New com-
binations of Mendelian factors in sex reproduction give the most common inherited diversity.

No. 2, November, 1920] PALEOBOTANY 1 1 1

This is Burbank's method of producing his "new creations in plant life." 1 1 is usually |
sible after a few generations to gel homozygotes thai breed inn' and in this way a ne^ variety
is established. These may be of evolul ionary value. Genuine mutants have now been found
in so large a number of plants and animals t hat it seems probable that all inherited differences
appeared in the first instance in this way. The rate at which mutations appear seems to dif-
fer greatly in different species. But they are probably of more frequent occurrence than ia
now known. Drosophila lias furnished the largest number of mutants now known. Many
of these contain lethal factors causing the early death of the individual. — Whether mutations
are caused by environmental conditions is at present unknown, although Muller and Alten-
btjrg found them more frequent at high temperatures. — Species are presumably the result
of the heaping up of viable mutations. The approximate number of known living and extinct
species in (lie different phyla of the animal kingdom differs very greatly, e.g., Protozoa
8000, Rotifers .".'id, Arthropoda 400,000, Pisces 13,000, Amphibia 1,400, Reptilia 3,500, Aves
13,0(H), Mammalia 3,50(1 11 is apparent that the number of species in a group is not dependent
entirely upon its age. Birds, which arose in Jurassic, have three times as many species as
Mammals, which appeared in Triassic. — The number of species is not dependent on the number
of individuals produced, nor upon their rate of reproduction. Birds, which are relatively few
in number of individuals and of eggs produced, have as many species as the much older class
of fishes, which lay perhaps a thousand times as many eggs. In general it seems that evolution
has been more rapid where fewer, better cared for young are produced. — Size does not seem
to be directly related to the rate of evolution, nor does it seem to be dependent always upon
changes in environment and diversities of habitat. Many paleontologists mention that the
rate and direction of evolution are determined by environmental changes and speak of "waves
of evolution." The number of mutations that survive and give rise to species is limited by
environment, that is by natural selection. Rate of mutation seems to depend upon the par-
ticular organization of the germplasm, some types being relatively stable with few mutations,
other types relatively unstable with numerous mutations. — The fact of survival is evidence
of adaptation, and the rate of adaptation does not seem to be proportional to the rate of repro-
duction, but rather to have gone farther in organisms in which the rate of reproduction and
of elimination is relatively slow. — Thousands of species appear which do not lead to any
increase in complexity. There are probably more than a million species and yet there have
been relativeby few lines of progress. Every mutant does not represent the beginnings of a
new path of evolution. Increasing complexity must have depended upon rare and fortunate
mutations which contained the possibilities of further evolution. Certain species *are too
highly specialized to give origin to new lines of progress. — The utmost limits of progressive
organization within the limits of a single cell were probably reached before Prbterozoic time.
Since that time the paths of progress are in multicellularity, multiplicity of tissues, organs
and parts, compound organisms, social evolution and rational evolution of human society. —
In conclusion, the suggestion is made that recent theories as to causes of evolution are not
wholly satisfactory. There may be important factors in evolution not yet "dreamed of in
our philosoph}'." — L. Pace.

796. Davies, D. Distribution of the different species of flora and fauna from the West-
phalian and part of the Staffordian series of Clydach Vale and Gilfach Goch, east Glamorgan-
shire. Trans. Inst. Mining Eng. 59: 183-221. July, 1920.— A compilation of 25 years' col-
lecting from the Carboniferous of Wales, the fossil plants having been determined by R.
Kidston. These number 4000 specimens and their chief value lies in the careful stratigraphic
location of each, thus affording data for determining the range of the different species and
their value in correlation. — The forms enumerated comprise 12 species of Calamites, 1 of Equi-
setiles, 6 of Asterophyllites , 5 of Annularia, 9 of fructifications and miscellaneous calamite
remains, 5 of Sphenophyllum, S of Lepidodendron, 1 of Bothrodendron, 1 of Ulodcridron, 2 of
Lepidoploios, 4 of Lepidophyllum, 1 of Asolanus, 1 of Halonia, 4 of Lepidostrobus, 18 of Sigil-
laria, 2 of Sligmaria, 14 of Neuropteris, 1 of Zeilleria, 21 of Sphenopteris, 1 of Dolerophyllum,
1 of Alliopteris, 5 of Pecopteris, 4 of Mariopteris, 2 of Linopteris, 1 of Dactylotheca,2 of Crosso-
theca, 1 of Corynopteris, 5 of Alethopteris, 1 of Eremopteris, and a variety of seeds and miscel-
laneous remains. — E. W. Berry.

112 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

797. Dixon, H. N. Description of the mosses. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London 75: 200.
1920. — Identifies five common English lowland species of mosses from the Pleistocene of the
Durham coast. — E. W. Berry.

798. Oyen, P. A. Kalktuf i Norge. [Calcareous tufa in Norway.] Norsk Geologisk Tids-
skr. 5: 231-350. 27 fig. 1919. — Describes Pleistocene and post Glacial plants from the Cal-
careous tufa in Norway. — E. W. Berry.

799. P., E. [Rev. of: Anonymous. Report of the Advisory Committee on Brown Coal,
State of Victoria. 32 p. Mines Dept., Victoria: Melbourne, Sept., 1917.] New Zealand
Jour. Sci. Tech. 1: 127. March, 1918.

800. Rands, H., and W. O. R. Gilling. New Zealand brown coals. Dominion of New
Zealand, B. Sci. and Art, Bull. 1. 42 p. Wellington, 1918.

801. Reid, C., and J. E. Marr. Pleistocene deposits around Cambridge. Quart. Jour.
Geol. Soc. London 75: 226-227. 1920. — Lists the following representatives of an Arctic flora
found in the Pleistocene at Barnwell Station, which is correlated with the late glacial deposits
of the Lea Valley that contain strikingly similar Arctic flora: Thalictrum albinum L., Ran-
unculus hederaceus L., lingua L.f, repens L.?, bulbosus L., amplexicaulis L.?, Draba incana L.,
Viola palustris L., Silene coelata Reid, Linwn. praecursor Reid, Rubus sp., Potentilla erecta
Hampe, Anserina L., Hippurus vulgaris L., Myriophyllum spicatum L., Armeria arctica
Wallr. , Mcnyanthes trifoliata L., Betula nana L., Carpinus betulus L. , Salix lapponum L.,
cinerca L., repens L., herbacea L., reticulata D., Sparganium minimum Fr., Potamogeton het-
erophyllus Schreber, densus L., obtusifolius M. and K., Eleocharis palustris R. and S., Scir-
pus sp., Carex incurva Lightf., vulpina L., Isoetes lacustris L. — E. W. Berry.

802. Reid, E. M. Preliminary description of the plant remains. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc.
London 75: 197-200. 1920. — Gives results of preliminary study of what the authoress calls
the Castle Eden flora, found fossil on the Durham coast in fissures in the Permian Magnesian
limestone. Fifty or more species chiefly rock and bank dwelling plants are recognized of which
more than half are exotics showing resemblances to modern Asiatic forms; e.g., Rubus floscu-
losus, now Chinese, is represented. This flora is considered as older than the celebrated Cro-
mer plant bed and not younger (possibly slightly older) than the Teglian flora of the Dutch-
Prussian border. — The author calls the age Pliocene. It might be more properly considered
as early Pleistocene. — E. W. Berry.

PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY

Heber W. Youngken, Editor
E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor

803. Anonymous. Kauri-gum oil. Chem. & Druggist 92: 9. 1920. — Crude kauri-gum
distilled under commercial conditions in New Zealand yields an oil which is separated into
motor spirit, 15 per cent, a solvent oil, 15 per cent, paint oil, 30 per cent, varnish oil, 30 per
cent, and pitch the remainder. — E. N. Gathercoal.

804. Anonymous. The economic resources of Burma-camphor. Chem. & Druggist 92:
425. 1920. — Blumea grandis, DeCandolle {Conyza grandis, Wallach), a weed, 6 to 8 feet high,
growing very abundantly on cut-over forest lands in Tavoy, Burma, yields a camphor reported
to be identical with Chinese camphor. Steps are being taken by the Burma Forest Depart-
ment to determine the commercial possibility of camphor from this source. — E. N. Gathercoal.

No. 2, November, 1920]

PHARMACOGNOSY

113

805. Anonymous. Oil of pimento-leaves. (Through Rept. Imp. Inst.) Chein. & Drug-
gist 92: 390. 1920. — Leaves of Pimenta arris yield by steam distillat ion 2.9 per cent of a pale
yellowish-brown volatile oil, of pleasant, aromatic odor, with a high percentage of phenols,
almost entirely eugenol. Manufacturers to whom samples of the oil were submitted consider

it equivalent to the oil from pimento fruit. — E. N. Galhcrcoal.

806. Anonymous. Wild ginger. (Through Agric. News, Imp. Dept. Agric. West Indies.)
Chem. A: Druggist 92: 177-178. 1920.— It has been assumed that the I rue ginger plant (Zingi-
ber officinale) is not known in the wild state, though it doubtless is a native of tropical Asia,
but extensive areas of wild true ginger plant were recently found in the Republic of Colombia
along the Magdalena river in Goajira peninsula. These probably escaped from cultivation
in Brazil when the Portuguese introduced ginger in the sixteenth century. Commercially,
this wild ginger may prove a valuable source of the drug, though the rhizomes are small;
also, this region may prove desirable for the cultivation of ginger. — E. N. Gathercoal.

807. Anonymous. Poison ivy, oak and sumac. Amer. Forestry 26: 306-307. 2 fig. 1920.

SOS. Aston, B. C. Preliminary notes on the tinctorial properties of the genus Coprosma
(Family Rubiaceae). New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech. 1:3. 1918. — The three widely distributed
New Zealand shrubs Copros??ia grandifolia, C. linarifolia and C. areolala, have considerable
tinctorial power: orange-yellow, bright yellow, and deep brown respectively. With alkaloids
an intense purple was obtained. [See next following Entry, 809.] — A. Gundersen.

809. Aston, B. C. The genus Coprosma as a source of dyes. New Zealand Jour. Sci.
Tech. 1: 264-267, 346-351. 1 pi. (with specimens of dyed wool), 1 table of colors. 1918.— Color
reactions of about twenty species of Coprosma, with summary of vegetable coloring matters.
The coprosmas, with wide distribution and quick growth on waste lands, yield varied and
lasting colors and are worthy of the fullest investigation. [See next preceding Entry, 808.] —
A. Gundersen.

810. Beath, O. A. Poisonous plants.
— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 475.

Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 39-47. 1919.

811. Browne, Frank. Some constituents of opium smoke. Pharm. Jour. 104: 274.
1920. — An analysis of the smoke of dross opium extract, which is largely smoked in the East,
indicates that morphine (0.016 g. per 100 g. of extract) is less abundant than in the smoke of
chandoo opium (0.100 g. in 100 g. of the opium). As dross opium extract is admitted by smok-
ers to be stronger in effect than chandoo, this strength must be attributed to the pyridine bases,
ammonia, hydrocyanic acid and such-like substances, rather than to the morphine. — An
interesting comparison is made with the constituents of tobacco smoke as follows:

FROM 100 Q. OF

CARBON
MONOXIDE

MORPHINE

NICOTINE

AMMONIA

PYRIDINE

HYDROCYANIC ACID

Dross opium extract

Tobacco

CC.

4124

0 016

1.16

0 395
0.360

0.147
0.150

0.0103

0.004 to 0.010

— E. N. Gathercoal.

S12. Cofman-Nicoresti, Jules. The adulteration of olive oil. Pharm. Jour. 104: 139.
1920. — A number of samples of olive oil recently examined were grossly adulterated with
tea-seed oil, which has been condemned as an edible oil, on account of the presence of a poi-
sonous saponin body in the pressed oil. The various commercial tea-seed oils possess physical
constants very similar to olive oil and do not respond to Baudouin's or Halphen's tests. It
may be detected by shaking 10 cc. of the sample oil with 10 cc. of a mixture of equal parts by
weight of concentrated sulphuric acid, concentrated nitric acid and water. If tea-seed oil

114 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

exceeding 20 per cent is present, a distinct pink color will develop in the oily layer. If less
than 20 per cent is present, the pink color is hardly distinguishable. Heating on a water-
bath for 20 minutes tends to deepen the color. Some other oils, notably cotton-seed oil, also
respond to this test but no pure olive oil does so. — E. N. Gathercoal.

813. Corfield, C. E., and E. Caird. The fat of Momordica seeds. Pharm. Jour. 104:
43. 1920. — An examination of the fat contained in the seeds of Momordica cochinchinensis ,
a cucurbitaceous plant indigenous to India, Formosa and the Philippines, indicates that it
possesses certain characteristics of drying oils, without the property of producing a varnish
as does linseed oil. After heating, it behaves as a semi-drying oil, and, admixed with drying
oils, might be used in paints and varnishes. The seed kernels, by extraction with petroleum
benzine, yield 47 per cent of fat. The fat obtained from the heated seeds by expression solidi-
fied on cooling to a pale green granular mass, easily liquified. On exposure to air and day-
light it oxidized to a whitish mass easily pulverized. In a film exposed at 100°C, oxidation
was complete in three days and the fat has assumed a stiff, granular, gelatinous form, easily
disintegrated. The constants of the fat, its fatty acids and alcohols, indicate that it consists
chiefly of the glyceryl esters of saturated fatty acids. Some unsaturated fatty acids are
present but no wax-alcohols. The seeds contain no alkaloids. — E. N. Gathercoal.

814. Darbaker, Leastjre K. Vinegar bee. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 510-512.
1920. — Author reports that in practically all vinegar bees examined there were present two
main organisms: Saccharomyces tyrisormis and Bacterivm vermiformae. Other organisms con-
stantly found and isolated were Mycoderma aceti and Mycoderma vini. A discussion of these,
as well as a number of other organisms follows. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

815. Dott, D. B. Opium assay from the international standpoint. Pharm. Jour. 104:
199. 1920. — The desirability of internationally established processes of assay for potent
drugs is indicated. The various opium assays of different pharmacopoeias are discussed.
The process of the British Pharmacopoeia, with certain modifications adapted from the Jap-
anese and the French pharmacopoeias, gave more accurate results in the hands of various
workers than had hitherto been observed with any other process. Final titration rather than
the weighing of the purified morphine was preferred and the elaborate process of the United
States Pharmacopoeia was not approved. — E. N. Gathercoal.

816. Dox, Arthur W. Notes on soy bean urease. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92: 153-157.
1920. — In a study of a number of different varieties of soy beans, as to the urease activity, the
author reports that some difference exists, but that this difference appears to bear no relation-
ship to the germinating power of the seed or the protein content of the latter. It was dem-
onstrated that urease was in seeds that were practically dead. In regard to the best tempera-
ture to secure greatest activity, the author reports above 50° and probably below 60°. — Anton
Hogstad, Jr.

817. Du Bois, Louis. Cantharides assay. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92: 157-160. 1920.—
A new method is given for the assay of cantharides, which is similar to that of Baudin, modi-
fied only so to make it a complete-extraction method, instead of an aliquot one, and which
the author states is preferable to the present United States Pharmacopoeia method. The
author states that the chief objection to the U. S. P. method is that lower results for both
"combined and free" cantharidin were obtained by this than he obtained for "free canthara-
din" alone by his method. The crystals obtained by the U. S. P. method were dark and resi-
nous, while those obtained by the author's method were clean and white. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

818. Farwell, O. A. Adulteration of American centaury and maidenhair fern. Bull.
Pharm. 34: 238. 1920. — Three bales of American centaury examined by the author and weigh-
ing 472 pounds contained 113 pounds of drug true to name. The balance consisted of Rhexia
virginica and Stylosanthes biflora which were not intermixed with the century but each spe-
cies occupied a distinct layer by itself, the American centaury occupying the outermost por-

No. 2, November, 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY 115

tion. In the case of I he maidenhair fern, a layer of drug alternated with a shovelful of coarse
gravel in regular succession. Five bags were examined, the total being increased 50 pounds
by the gravel. In order to reduce the possibility of discovery to a minimum, each shovelful
of gravel was deposited as nearly as possible in the middle of each layer of drug. — H. W.
Youngken.

819. Gark, II. D., and George E. E'wk. Hemlock bark (Tsuga canadensis) for pharma-
ceutical purposes. Jour. Amer. 1'harm. Assoc. 9: 567-573. 3 fig. 1920.— Evidence is presented
to show the superiority of the rossed bark over the whole bark for pharmaceutical purposes.
By separating and weighing the two portions, it was noted that the outer bark constituted
55.34 per cent while the inner bark was 44. 6G per cent. In the percentage of extractive matter,
using 32 per cent alcohol and hot water respectively, it was noted in general that there is no
preference, quantitatively between the two barks, but qualitative preference is on the side
of the extractive matter from the inner bark, since it is higher in tannin, oleoresin and vola-
tile oil content and lower in the non-essential coloring and extractive matters. Tannin con-
tent is about 50 per cent greater in the inner bark. The outer bark contains, on the average,
twice as much hot water-soluble coloring matter as the inner bark and 3£ times as much
32 per cent alcohol-soluble coloring matter. Microscopic examination showed a tremendously
greater content of volatile oil and oleoresin content in the inner bark. Therefore the inner
bark is to be preferred for pharmaceutical purposes. The microscopic structure and pharma-
ceutical uses are then discussed. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

820. Holmes, E. M. The importance of the medicinal plant and herb growing industry
to Britain. Chem. & Druggist 92 : 421-22. 1920. — The Hungarian government has placed the
medicinal herb industry under state control. The United States have exported Cannabis
Indica of good medicinal value to England and are supplying Henbane, Belladonna and Digi-
talis to the British South African and Australian Colonies. Many American drugs can be
grown readily in Britain. Among the almost unobtainable drug products of Russia are birch-
tar oil {Oleum Rusci) which could easily and cheaply be obtained from the birch forests of
Scotland; ergot, abundant in many rye fields and easily separated from the grain at the time
of threshing; and santonin, obtainable from Artemisia Gallica var. maritima, which would
probably do well in the salt marshes of Kent, where Artemisia Gallica flourishes. Many other
drug and perfume plants and culinary herbs could be raised in Britain, in addition to those
now profitably cultivated. The necessity of purity and quality and of government inspec-
tion is indicated. — E. N. Gathercoal.

821. Holmes, E. M. The manna of the Scripture. Chem. and Druggist 92: 25-26. 1920.
—See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 933.

822. Jermstad. Vergleichende Untersuchungen und Identifizierung der vershiedenen Sor-
ten von Rauchopium. [Comparative investigation and identification of different varieties of smok-
ing opium]. [Rev. of: Simons, Fr. D. Journal of Industrial Engineering Chemistry, 1916, p.
345-351; and Pharm. Weekblad, 1919, p. 1540-1548.] Schweiz. Apotheker Zeitg. 20: 249-252.
1920. — Different methods of manufacture divide smoking opium into four classes: (1) That
prepared by extracting gum opium with water, filtering and evaporating the filtrate to a syrupy
liquid containing about 15-20 per cent of water. (2) That prepared by first, carefully heating,
kneading and roasting before extracting with water. (3) A product obtained by using the
opium obtained after processes 1 and 2, and admixing it with yen shee plus the scraped-out
residue of the opium pipes. A detailed description of the properties used in the identification
are given. The ash contents, charring temperature, and the melting points of the opium alka-
loids are the diagnostic points of consideration used in the comparison. The average and
range of alkaloids present in a good sample of opium are given in terms of percentage and also
a quantitative method for the isolation of all the alkaloids present in the crude drug. — B. H.
Hoffstein.

823. Maiden, J. H. Plants which produce inflammation or irritation of the skin. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 386. 1920.— Deals with a tree, Psexidomorus Brunoniana. Ref-
erence is given to previous articles dealing with other plants. — L. R. Waldron.

116 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

824. Smith, E. Philip. Plant dermatitis.— I. Jour. Botany 58: 130-135. 1920.— Plants
causing irritation of human skin may be divided into two groups: those having an irritating
cell-sap, and those in which the active principle is excreted. Of the former group four cases
are discussed in the present paper. Nettle-poisoning is described as caused by the penetration
of the skin by slender flask-like hairs, the tips of which break off, allowing the injection of
the cell-sap containing formic acid, albuminoids, etc. Formic acid is not a sufficient cause
of the irritation especially in extreme cases in the tropics. The symptoms are discussed.
Primula-poisoning is due to an oil secreted in the terminal glands of glandular hairs. Cases
of Primula-poisoning are sometimes severe. Rhus poisoning was found by Paff to be due to
an oil, which he extracted and purified. This is produced by all parts of the plant, even the
pollen. Thorough scrubbing with soap and water is the best remedy. In the Scilly Isles the
flower pickers are troubled by a "lily disease" which is due to the juice of various species of
Narcissus. Oil of jonquil is not the cause of this, but probably the raphides, which are
abundant. An abraded skin seems prerequisite in this case. — K. M. Wiegand.

825. Smith, W. G. Special strains of medicinal plants by selection. Pharm. Jour. 104:
116. 1920. — While agricultural plant-breeding is largely done by public bodies and the results
are published, experiments in medicinal plant-breeding are mostly by private cultivators,
who naturally keep to themselves valuable information regarding improved production or qual-
ity. Cultivation, manuring and treatment may produce larger plants, but rarely change
internal qualities such as the nature and yield of active principles. Increased yield or
improved quality of active principles is brought about by the constant selection of the best
individual plants in these respects and the production of pure lines from them. Hybridiza-
tion, yielding new combinations, extends the range of possible improvement in any required
direction. Many illustrations are cited, particularly, the great improvement made in recent
years in French lavender with the development of Lavendula vera fragrans and L. v. delphini-
ensis; and the increased yield and improved quality of Hungarian mint oils from Mentha crispa
and M. piperita; and the greatly enriched strains of American grown belladonna, stramonium
and hyoscyamus. — E. N. Gathercoal.

826. Viehoever, Arno, and Joseph F. Clevenger. Relative content of volatile oil and
ash in sage leaves and stems. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 563-567. 2 fig. 1920. — Examina-
tion of various parts of the sage plant, showed that the amount of volatile oil (volatile ether
extract) found in the leaves was about three times as much as in the stem, the ratio being,
1.63:0.60, 1.26:0.49, 1.18:0.48, 1.06:0.29, 0.92:0.24; the herbaceous parts of the axis located
close to or representing the top of the plant, yielded more volatile ether extract than the
woody basal portions of the axis, the ratio being about 0.9 per cent : 0.2 per cent. Examina-
tion of material collected in Maryland and Virginia showed it to be below 1 per cent of vola-
tile ether extract, which the authors state is quite likely explained by the fact that the mate-
rial was collected in late summer or fall. Materials from Wisconsin yielded higher amounts.
As the stems yielded considerably less of volatile ether extract than the leaves, a limitation
of their amount is justified. Microscopic examination showed that the glands and glandular
hairs containing the volatile oil are to be found only in the epidermis of leaves, petioles and
herbaceous stems. They were found to be most abundant on the leaves, either upper or
lower sides, and completely absent on woody stems. — Domestic sages indicate a tendency to
possess a high total, and especially acid-insoluble, ash content. Leaves contain more ash
than stems. A description of the glands and glandular hairs are included in the article. —
Anton Ifogstad, Jr.

827. Zakrzecki, H. L. H. Java cinchona bark sales and analysis. (Through Allgem.

. Landbouwweekblad voor Nederlandsch-Indie, Nov. 22, 1919.) Chem. & Druggist 92: 390.
1920. — Growers are required to present to the Quinine Bureau their analysis of the sample of
bark sent to the quinine manufacturer. If the manufacturer's analysis of the sample is higher
than the planter's, the latter hears nothing of it, but if the manufacturer's analysis is lower
by 0.15 per cent or more, of quinine sulphate, he has the right to reject the planter's analysis

No. 2, November, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 117

and demand a control analysis by analysts approved by the Quinine Bureau. As there are
several methods of analysis for quinine- content in vogue— the gravimetric, polarimetric,
etc., which vary somewhat in results — the Quinine Bureau is to appoinl a ( 'ommission to
study these in order to establish a uniform method with the ultimate object of creating a sin-
gle, central analytical laboratory. — E. N. Gathercoal.

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. Duggar, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

828. Loeb, J. Influence of a slight modification of the collodion membrane on the sign of
the electrification of water. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 255-271. 1920. — Continuing work pre-
viously reported, the author shows that in solutions of electrolytes which have a tendency to
induce negative electrification of water, that is, in solutions of acids, acid salts, and salts
with trivalent and tetravalent cations, the diffusion of the water depends, not only upon the
concentration and nature of the salts, but also upon the previous treatment of the membrane.
The treatment consisted in filling the collodion bags with 1 per cent gelatin solution and allow-
ing them to stand over night. This was followed by very thorough washing in water. The
differences in the osmotic behavior of the normal and treated collodion membranes seemed to
be due, not to alterations in permeability of the membrane, but to the fact that water, in
bags treated with gelatin, under the conditions named, diffuses as if positively charged. For
instance, when solutions of acid are separated from pure water by a gelatin-treated collodion
membrane, negative osmosis occurs, while, if a membrane, not so treated, is used, positive
osmosis occurs. A treatment of the collodion membrane with casein, egg albumin, blood
albumin, or edestin affects the behavior of the membrane as does treatment with gelatin.
Treatments with peptone, alanine, or starch have no such effects. — Otis F. Curtis.

829. Loeb, J. Influence of the concentration of electrolytes on some physical properties
of colloids and of crystalloids. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 273-296. 1920.— The effects of adding
an alkali or a neutral salt to a 1 per cent solution of metal gelatinate at PH = 8.4 or to neutral
solutions of salts with monovalent cations, such as Na2S04 or K4Fe(CN)6, etc., at concentra-
tions of M /256, are similar in that the initial rate of diffusion of water through untreated col-
lodion membranes towards these solutions is decreased and the permanent osmotic pressure
is also lessened. The effects of the addition of electrolytes on diffusion of water into neutral
solutions of salts with monovalent or bivalent cations can be explained on the basis that the
ions influence the electrification of water and the rate of diffusion of electrified water. The
similarity in the effects of electrolytes on initial diffusion of water through a membrane
towards either colloidal metal gelatinates or a crystalloidal salt, as well as the similarity in the
effects on osmotic pressure, suggests that the explanation of the phenomena is the same. If
this is the case, it raises the question whether the effects of ions on osmotic pressure of col-
loidal solutions, as well as on other physical properties of colloids, such as swelling, may be
due, not to their colloidal properties, but to the more general effects of ions on the electrifi-
cation of water and the diffusion of such electrified water through membranes. Not only was
there a similarity in the effects of ions on the diffusion of positively charged water particles
towards metal gelatinates and crystalloidal salts, but there was also a close similarity in the
effects of acids and neutral salts on the diffusion of negatively electrified water towards gela-
tin-acid salts and crystalloidal salts. — Otis F. Curtis.

830. McCool, M. M., and C. F. Millar. Further studies on the freezing point lowering
of soils and plants. Soil Sci. 9: 217-233. 3 pi. 1920.— The amount of water which froze at
— 1.5°C. in the leaves of crop plants was found by the use of the dilatometer to vary with the

118 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

species of plant. In general the greater the freezing-point depression of the cell sap the less
the amount of easily freezable water. The concentration of the cell sap of roots as measured
by the freezing-point method is decidedly influenced by the concentration of the soil solution
in which the plants are grown, but the concentration of the cell sap of the tops is not so mark-
edly affected. The amount of water which froze at —2.5° and — 4°C. in the tops of barley and
corn was not markedly influenced by varying the concentration of the nutrient solution added
to the soil when the water content of the soil was held constant. When grown in soil of high,
medium, and low water content the plants in the soil of high water content possessed more
easily freezable water. When the water content varied, but the concentration of the soil
was held constant, more water froze at — 2.5°C. in the leaves of plants grown in soils of low
water content. — -11'. ./. Robbins.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

831. Hartwell, Burt L., and S. C. Damon. The value of sodium when potassium is
insufficient. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 177. 29 p. 1919.

832. Winslow, C.-E. A., and I. S. Falk. The effect of mineral salts upon the viability
of bacteria in water. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 5. 1919.

833. Aronovitch, B. On the soluble toxic substances of the colon-typhoid group. [Ab-
stract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 9. 1920.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

834. Bridel, Marc. Sur la presence simultanee du gentianose et du saccharose dans les
especes du genre Gentiana. [Simultaneous occurrence of gentianose and saccharose in Gen-
tiana.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83: 24-25. 1920. — In addition to Gentiana lutea, where
these two sugars had already been reported, the author determined their presence in G.
asclepiodea, G. punctata, G. cruciata and G. purpurea. From September to November the
gentianose decreased while the saccharose increased in amount almost proportionally. It
is suggested that these are convertible one into the other under the action of the enzyme gen-
tiobiase. — E. A. Bessey.

835. Bronfenbrenner, J., and M. J. Scheesinger. Carbohydrate fermentation by bac-
teria as influenced by the composition of the medium. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 8. 1919.

836. Cooledge, L. H., and R. W. Wyant. The sanitary quality of milk as judged by the
colorimetric hydrogen ion determination. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 6. 1920.

837. De Domini cis, A. Sul significato biologico delle sostanze tanniche. Variazionl del
contenuto in tannino nella corteccia di castagno secondo i mesi e le stagioni. [The biological
significance of the tannins. Monthly and seasonal variations in the tannin content of the bark
of the chestnut.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 305-331. 1919. — In order to decide upon the ques-
tion as to whether the tannins are storage or secretory materials the author undertakes a
study of the variation in tannin content of the bark of Castanca trees aged 2-5 and 20 years.
The results are not readily summarized, but in general, the maximum content occurred at
some time between early autumn and late winter, while in July — and usually as early as May —
it was relatively low. — After a review of the chemical and physiological literature and a lengthy
discussion the following conclusions are drawn. According to their origin, constitution, and
physical and chemical properties the tannins should be considered in their main lines as
glucosidal compounds, products of the etherification of an aromatic oxyacid and a sugar, gen-
erally glucose. The acids are of the fundamental types of gallic acid (C6H2(OH)3COOH) and
protocatechuic acid (C6H3(OH)2COOH). The above-mentioned acids may be indirectly
derived from quercitol and inositol. These conclusions regarding the derivation of the tan-
nins and their glucosidal nature are upheld by their biogenetic, synthetic, and optical proper-

No. 2, November, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 119

ties. Tannin is a strong protoplasmic poison since it strongly coagulates albumin. The
author found that tannin would easily coagulate egg albumin when alone, but when acetic
and tartaric acids were added, in small amounts in addition to tannin, coagulation did not
take place. Citric acid was not quite as effective. Albumin coagulated by means of tannin
would tend to return to its original sol condition after addition of acetic and tartaric acids.
Tannin appeals, and in fact accumulates, during I lie germination of some seeds in which it
was not originally present. It can not, therefore, be considered a- a reserve substance either
for the sugar or the other substances it may contain; the latter would indeed be injurious if
allowed to accumulate in the free state. The results of the investigation seem to justify the
following interpretation as to the significance and behaviour of the tannins in the plant:
The principal reason for the formation of these compounds is the property they have of being
more easily oxidized than the phenolic acids from which they are derived, tannins being much
more easily burned than gallic acid. This constitutes for the plant, deprived as it is of an ex-
cretory apparatus, a detail of the greatest importance, since it is a means of eliminating prod-
ucts that possess a high degree of toxicity. It is by this means that the tannins disappear
by complete oxidation in fleshy fruits wdien their coagulating power is no more neutralized
by the action of the organic acids which disappear during ripening. In other organs, instead,
an equilibrium is established between the former or accumulated tannins and those which
are destroyed by combustion. In peripheral organs such as the bark, directly exposed to
the action of atmospheric oxygen and to the influence of fluctuating external factors, the equi-
librium is subject to many fluctuations, especially is oxidation intensified with increase of
temperature, reaching a maximum during the warmest summer months. Tannins as gluco-
sides are then to be considered as refuse materials which the plant easily destroys, utilizing
the process of combustion, thereby initiated, for "vital" purposes. — A. Bonazzi.

S3S. Gerhardt, Karl. Die Exkretion und ihre Bedeutung im Leben der Pfianze. [Ex-
cretion and its importance in plant life.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 7-8. 1920. — -The work of
Benecke, Amar, and especially Stahl, has shown that the oxalic acid formed in respiration
and possibly in assimilation, neutralizes the surplus (harmful) calcium in the plant. This
explanation of the role of oxalic acid has contributed much to a new understanding of the
exudation of water by the plant. This explanation of guttation, as developed mainly by
Stahl, is discussed at length. — Orton L. Clark.

S39. Gola, G. Sulla presenza, nella piante, di composti ematoidi di ferro. [The presence
of haematin in plants.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 282:
146-1.50. 1919. — From organic plant material, notably the leaves of Lemna and other water
plants, when extracted with boiling dilute HC1, a solution is obtained which shows positive
peroxidase properties. This solution was free from iron. If on the other hand you repeat
the extraction with ammonia, thereby getting the iron in solution, you obtain a residue which
reacts positively, although the iron has been extracted. This seems to indicate that in plants
Bach's theory, that the enzymatic peroxidase reaction is not dependent on iron, holds true;
and further, that the reaction is comparable to that obtained in animal chemistry, namely,
that the peroxidase property of the blood is not due to a combination of the iron with the
organic molecule. In this connection it is of interest to note that as regards distribution of
the enzyme in plants, most of it is found in the peripheral parts of the plant, in the tissues
of the phloem and the medullary rays, and that it is scarce in green tissues. — E. F . Artschu-ager.

840. Greig-Smith, R. Contributions to our knowledge of soil-fertility. XVI. The search
for toxin-producers. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43 : 142-190. 191S. — See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 2281.

841. Itano, Arao, James Neill, and Mary E. Garvey. Limiting and optimum reac-
tions for growth of B. botulinus and organisms isolated from food. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact.
4:3. 1920.

120 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

842. Masoni, G. Saggi sui succhi radicali. Prima nota. [Tests on root saps. First
contribution.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52 : 569-583. 1919.— The present investigation was under-
taken by the author in connection with the question of chlorosis of plants due to excess of cal-
cium in the soil, and it covers only one phase of the question as it relates to the behaviour of
the root sap to various solutions rather than the root excretions. Experiments were made
with Cichorium, Zea, Lupinus and Daucus by crushing the roots and extracting them with
cold water and using the filtered solution. Solutions of ferric chloride 1-2 per cent were added
in the presence or absence of an alkaline solution of ammonia, or lime water. In other cases
ferric citrate, citric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, dipotassium citrate, sodium acetate, glu-
cose, and saccharose were used together with the ferric solution. The results of the investi-
gation are thus summarized: Under equal conditions juices of various plants act differently
towards the ferric solutions, some causing a complete precipitation of the iron — although the
solution be acid — others leaving the iron in solution. The presence of ferric citrate, citric
acid, or dipotassium citrate avoids the precipitation of the iron. This action is not exerted
by equivalent amounts of acetic acid, sodium acetate, or nitric acid. Sugars have only a
negligible action in preventing the iron from becoming insoluble, and in concentrations of
as much as 40 per cent of saccharose the action was very slight. The juice of Daucus was
the most active in maintaining the iron in solution, while the juice of Lu-pinus and Zea follow
in the order given. In the latter plant the sap of the stalk at flowering time gave the same
reaction as the root sap. The author excludes the possibility that the insolubility may be
due to the action of tannic substances, and is more inclined to believe that the phenomenon
is due to the combined action of colloids, proteins, and possibly also to the phosphates to
be found in the juices. The method is, according to the author, applicable to the study of
the fate of ferric substances after their entrance into the plant rather than to their prepara-
tion for absorption by the plant. The principal consideration in these investigations is the
assumption of two sets of substances active in this connection: the one — probably made up
of proteins — capable of rendering the iron insoluble, and the other capable both of counter-
acting this first one and of dissolving the precipitate after it has been formed. Therefore the
circulation of mineral iron in the plant is dependent upon these two groups of substances,
and this condition may have an important bearing upon the adaptation of plants to various
media. — A. Bonazzi.

843. Olitsky, Peter K., and I. J. Kligler. Toxins and antitoxins of B. dysenterlae
Shiga. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 18. 1920.

844. Teodoresco, Em. C. Sur la presence d'une phycoerythrine dans le Nostoc commune.
[On the presence of a phycoerythrin in Nostoc commune. 1 Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 145-160. 2 pi.
4 fig. 1920. — Nostoc commune varies widely in color. The author found material giving red
pigment, but no blue pigment, in solution when macerated. Both pigments (phycoerythrin
and phycocyanin) are usually present in varying proportions. Solutions of many shades of
color ranging from red through blue to violet were also obtained from other material. From
all of them a red pigment was isolated by differential capillary absorption by filter paper.
The red aqueous solution obtained when red zones of filter paper were placed in water had a
yellow-orange fluorescence like that of phycoerythrin. Its spectrum showed the same 3
absorption bands with the same relative intensities as are seen in phycoerythrin from Cera-
mium rubrum and other red algae (Kylin and other authors) as well as in the red pigment from
Oscillatoria Cortiana (Bocat). Its reaction to acids, alkalies, and other reagents are essen-
tially the same as those of phycoerythrin from red algae. Solutions of the red pigment to
which antiseptics had been added, and which were kept in the dark, remained unchanged for
2 years. When such precautions were not taken decomposition occurred. During the first
stages of this decomposition the relative intensity of the 3 absorption bands is reversed, pre-
cisely as in the case of phycoerythrin from Ceramium and also the red pigment from Oscilla-
toria (Gaidukow). — The author concludes that the red pigment in Nostoc commune and other
Cyanophyceae is the same as that in the Florideae, and not merely a variety of phycocyanin
to which it is closely related, but from which it differs decidedly in its spectrum. Phycoery-

No. 2, November, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 121

thrin in Cyanophyccac probably arises by transformation of phycocyanin, since the two
pigments vary in the plant in inverse ratio. The red pigment of certain Myxophyceae (Sau-
vageau) is regarded as phycoerythrin by the author. — L. W. Sharp.

METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS)

845. Blish, M. J. Effect of premature freezing on composition of wheat. Jour. Agric.
Res. 19: 181-188. 1920. — This is an investigation of the effect of premature freezing on the
more important chemical constituents of the wheat (Triiicum) kernel, with special reference
to the nitrogen compounds, from which gluten is formed. Frozen wheat contains larger
amounts of nonprotein nitrogen, reducing sugars, and acid-reacting substances than does
sound wheat. The nonprotein nitrogen of frozen wheat carries a considerably higher per-
centage of a-amino nitrogen than that of sound wheat. — D. Reddick.

846. Cauda, A. Gruppi vegetali fissatori di azoto libero. [Plant groups that fix free nitro-
gen.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 169-178. 1919. — Bacillus Cruciferae, isolated from the roots
of various cruciferous plants (Raphanas, Sinapus, Brassica) was found to fix free nitrogen,
especially when cultivated on liquid media having an excess of calcium carbonate and a defi-
ciency of nitrogen. The amount of nitrogen fixed by the organism nearly equals that obtained
from Azotobacter and surpasses Bacillus radicicola. Bacillus Cruciferae forms round, whitish
colonies of viscid consistency. Older colonies turn yellow, rose, or red brown. The organism
is rod shaped and forms chains; it is stained yellow with potassium iodide and blue with
Loffler's stain and methylene blue. — Ernst Artschwager.

847. Davis, Lewis, and Newell S. Ferry. Studies on diphtheria toxin. II. The role
of the amino acids in the metabolism of Bacterium diphtheriae. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3:
9-10. 1919.

848. Sani, Giovanni. Intorno aH'attivita riduttrice delle radici delle graminaceae: la
riduzione del nitrato di calcio per le radici delle graminacee. [Reduction of calcium nitrate
by roots of the Graminaceae.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Fis. Mat. e Nat.)
282: 199-201. 1919. — The theories regarding the reduction of nitrates in plants are reviewed
as an introduction to a series of articles on this subject. [See also next following Entry, S49.]
— F. M. Blodgett.

849. Sani, Giovanni. Intorno alia attivita ridduttrice della radici delle graminacee: la
riduzione del nitrato di calcio per le radici graminacee. Nota II. [The reduction of calcium
nitrate by roots of the Graminaceae.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e
Nat.) 282: 244-247. 1919. — The extracts of the roots of wheat, oats, barley, and corn were
found to contain a reducing substance when tested either as an aqueous extract or after
purifying. It was also found that extracts made from the roots of maize and wheat reduced
calcium nitrate solution. This reducing action came to a stop after a certain concentration
was reached and was inhibited entirely by an alkaline solution of Rochelle salt. [See also
next preceding Entry, 848.]— /*\ M. Blodgett.

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

850. Catjda, A. Prove di fermentazione vinosa con aggiunta di lieviti purificati. [Investi-
gations upon alcholic fermentation with purified yeasts.] Staz. Sper. Agr. Ital. 52: 524-533.
1919.

851. Chesnut, V. K. Report on papain. Jour. Assoc. Official Agric. Chem. 3: 3S7- 397.
1920. — A study of Papaya latex, especially its enzyme action. — F. M. Schertz.

852. Clark, Mansfield. The production and activity of proteus gelatinase in relation to
PH. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 2. 1920.

122 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

853. Dox, Arthur W., and Lester Yoder. Influence of fermentation on the starch con-
tent of experimental silage. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 173-179. 1920. — Starch constitutes about
10 per cent of maize at the time of ensiling. Studies of silage at different stages in the fer-
mentation process show that changes in aciditj', alcohol, and sugar are entirely independent
of the starch content of the ensiled maize, and that the starch content remains constant
throughout the process. The granules remain intact, undergoing no detectable physical
change. — D. Rcddick.

854. Effront, Jean. Sur la relation entre l'acroissement des cellules et la production
des enzymes. [Relation between cell growth and enzyme production.] Compt. Rend. Soc.
Biol. Paris 83: 194-195. 1920. — Experimenting with "top-yeast" in solutions of increasing
degrees of alkalinity the author finds that fermentation of the sugar, that is, enzyme produc-
tion, occurs at a degree of alkalinity considerably beyond that at which growth or production
of new cells takes place. — E. A. Bessey.

855. Maestrini, D. Contributo alia conoscenza degli enzimi. I: Amilasi dell'orzo ger-
mogliato. [Amylase of germinating barley.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis.
Mat. e Nat.) 282: 393-394. 1919. — While amylase of germinating barley may be extracted with
distilled water it is more active when this is acidified with acetic acid, and the extraction should
have a duration of 6 hours. The soluble starch of commerce is strongly split up by this ex-
tract even in neutral solution; the other starches are not split if not first reduced to a paste
and if not in solutions of a certain acidity. The source of starch does not perceptibly affect
the amylolytic activity. Hydrochloric and acetic acid hasten the action in nearly the same
manner. Potassium hydroxide acting for ten hours paralyses the amylolytic activity. The
invert sugar produced is a maximum at about 45°C, at 50° the amount of invert sugar dimin-
ishes, and it is zero at 70°. — F. M. Blodgett.

856. Simon, Rene. Contribution a letude de la digestion des tissus vegetaux. [The di-
gestion of plant tissue.] Actes Soc. Linneenne Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux) 68: 87-98. 1914.
[Received May, 1920]. — The progress of pectose digestion was observed by appropriate means
in thin sections of roots, leaves, and germinating seeds. After the alteration of the pectose
of the middle lamella the cell walls tend to dissociate. The initial stages of digestion and the
subsequent transformations of pectose are made visible by first treating thin sections of plant
tissue in a dilute acid (1-2 per cent HC1) for 5 minutes. The acid hydrolizes the pectose in
all parts of the plant tissue, but the progress of digestion will be more advanced in those
parts in which digestion had started before the initial treatment. The plant tissue is next
immersed in a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium oxalate or an alkaline salt, and
finally, after washing in water, is stained with Ruthenium red. Pectose which remains un-
modified will be soluble in water or alkaline solutions and will not be stained. Pectose-pectin,
one of the products of digestion, will be insoluble in water and easily colored by basic dyes. —
W. H. Emig.

METABOLISM (RESPIRATION)

857. Molliard, M. Influence de la reaction du milieu sur la respiration du Sterigmato-
cystis nigra. [Influence of the reaction of the culture medium upon the respiration of Sterig-
matocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83 : 50-51. 1920.— When grown in saccharose
solution of varying degrees of acidity (H2S04) or alkalinity (Na2C03) the production of oxalic
acid does not appear at an acidity beyond N /50 and steadily increases with the alkalinity to
a maximum at 3N /50. Beyond N /12.5 no acid is formed. Allowing for the C02 disengaged
from the Na2C03 by the oxalic acid the amount of this gas set free by respiratory processes
increases rapidly as the acidity diminishes from N /10 reaching a maximum at N /50 alkalinity
and diminishing slowly to3N /50 and very rapidly thence toN /12.5. The absorption of oxygen
parallels this exactly, the respiratory quotient averaging about 0.93. — E. A. Bessey.

No. 2, November, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 123

ORGANISM AS A WHOLE

S")S. Mkadbb, 1'. I)., AND G. II. RoBINSON. Some physical and biological properties of the
streptococcus hemotoxin. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 17. L920.

859. l'mxiisiiioiM, Hans. Symbiose bei Bakteria. [Symbiosis of bacteria.] Naturwissen-
schaften 8: 101-103. 1920.

SCO. W[inslow], C.-E. A. The lactic acid bacteria. [Rev. of : Obxa-Jensen, S, The lac-
tic acid bacteria. Mem. Acad. R. Sci. et Let. Danemark (Sect. Sci.) VIII, 5: 81-196. 51 pi,
1919.] Absts. Bact. 4: 102. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 183.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION

861. CorjpiN, H. Sur les causes de lelongation de la tige des plantes etiolees. [The causes
of stem elongation in etiolated plants.] Gompt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 189-191. 1920. —
In a study of etiolation in seedlings of white lupine it is found that the rate and the total
amount of elongation of the hypocotyls and the roots of plants growing in the dark may be
prevented from materially exceeding that of seedlings grown in light, if there is added to the
media in which the seedlings are grown a quantity of the expressed sap of seedlings grown in
light. It is therefore concluded that chloroplasts in the presence of light produce a substance
which though not entirely toxic has a retarding effect upon the rate of growth. Thus the ex-
pressed sap of green seedlings reduces the rate of growth of plants growing in darkness, whereas
in plants grown in darkness in water or in a solution containing the expressed sap of etio-
lated plants the ordinary rapid elongation characteristic of etiolation takes place. — C. H. &
W. K. Fair.

862. Marshall, Max Skidmore. Association of Bacillus subtilis and Streptococcus
lacticus. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 5. 1920.

863. Mitscherlich, E. A. Das Liebigsche Gesetz vom Minimum und das Wirkungs-
gesetz der Wachstumfactoren. [Liebig's Law of the Minimum and the "effect rule" of growth
factors.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 85-88. 1920. — Mitscherlich doubts the truth of Liebig's
Law, and he asks and attempts to answer the following questions: (1) Does the amount of
plant production depend on only one vegetation factor, the so-called minimum factor? (2)
According to what proportionality may this be true? He then formulates and illustrates with
curves the law of physiological relation, or better, the effect law of growth factors, and points
out that there can be no such thing as one minimum factor alone determining the amount of
plant production, but that all growth factors together have a very definite influence on pro-
duction.— Orton L. Clark.

864. Molliard, M. Tuberisation aseptique de la carotte et du dahlia. [Tuber formation
of carrot and dahlia under aseptic conditions.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83: 138-140.
1920. — When grown free from bacteria or fungi carrots and dahlias formed their normal roots
or tubers, respectively, showing that the presence of a symbiotic fungus is not necessary
for this process. — E. A. Bcssey.

865. Popoff, Methodi. Artificial parthenogenesis and cell stimulants. Sci. Amer.
Monthly 1: 312-316. 1 fig. 1920. [Translated from Biol. Centralbl. (Leipzig), April 20,
1916.]

866. Urbain, A. Influence des matieres de reserve de l'albumen de la graine sur le devel-
oppement de l'embryon. [Influence of the reserve materials of the endosperm upon the devel-
opment of the embryo.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 125-139, 165-191. U fig. 1920.— The author re-
ports notable success in rearing embryos which have been separated from their endosperms.
Several species were used, including wheat, oats, barley, Mirabilis jalapa, Daucus carota,
Nigdla hispanica, Spinacca oleracea and Pin-as pinea. — Experiments on wheat, oats, and

124 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

barley were conducted as follows: Grains were soaked in water; after 3 hours 5 embryos were
isolated and placed on blotting paper wet with nutrient solution (lot Pi) ; one day later ,5 more
were similarly treated (lot P2) the next day 5 more were similarly treated (lot P3). In P2 the
growth of the embryo had begun; in P3 and in checks (embryos not separated from endosperm)
the plumule had become green, but the endosperm had decreased only slightly in weight. On
the third day measurements and weighings showed that the plumule and first adventitious
root were nearly twice as long in P3 and Pi, and that P2 had gained from 2\ (barley) to 6?
(wheat) times as much weight as had Pi. On the seventh and twentieth days all lots were
growing, but checks and P3 were much better developed than Pi and Pi. From this and sev-
eral other experiments it is concluded that in no case is endosperm indispensable to the devel-
opment of the plantlet; all species treated can grow in nutrient solution. The removal of
the endosperm retards the life processes of the embryo; its presence favors the development of
the plantlet during the first few days and results in marked changes later. However, since
the amount of endosperm material consumed by the third day is so slight this effect must be
due to some stimulus exciting enzymatic activity and the use of reserve materials within the
embryo itself. — Plants of all lots were raised to maturity in soil. Although plants of lot Pt
were often nearly as well developed as the checks, those of lots Pi and P2 showed more pro-
nounced modifications: roots less branched; stems simpler; leaves smaller, less numerous and
simpler in form; inflorescence precocious, less well developed and showing various abnormali-
ties; fruits often aborted; all parts dwarfed. — A comparison of sections of Pi plants and the
checks in Ricinus, Nigella, Papaver, Solanum, Torilis, and Zea, showed the internal structure
to be much simpler in the plant which had been deprived of their endosperm. In the stem
the cells are fewer and smaller; the cortex shows fewer layers; the tissues of the central cyl-
inder are less differentiated, the vascular bundles being fewer and with fewer elements; the
pith is relatively large. Similar modifications are present in root and petiole. In the leaf
the epidermis appears nearly normal, but the other tissues show reduction in the number and
size of their elements. The greater the dwarfing the more pronounced are these modifications.
— L. W. Sharp.

REGENERATION

867. Loeb, J. Quantitative laws in regeneration. I. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 297-307.
1920. — Dry weight measurements show that, when a piece of stem of Bryophyllum calycinum
inhibits the production of shoots and roots in an attached leaf, the stem gains in weight and
this gain approximately equals the mass of shoots and roots that the leaf would have produced
if it had been detached from the stem. "This suggests that the inhibitory influence of the
stem upon the formation of shoots and roots in the leaf is due to the fact that the material
available for the process naturally flows into the stem." — Otis F. Curtis.

868. Okada, Yoonosuke. Studien iiber der Proliferation der Markholenzellen im Stengel
der Vicia faba. [Studies on the proliferation of pith cells in the stem of Vicia faba.l Bot. Mag.
Tokyo 34: 19-34. 4 photog., 7 fig. 1920. — This paper gives a brief review of the literature and
describes the author's methods and results. The hollow stems were injected by means of a
glass hypodermic syringe with distilled water and various dilute salt solutions, sugar, glycer-
ine, alcohol, and ammonia in different concentrations and at different temperatures. Temper-
ature had little effect and dilute solutions differed little or not at all from water. More con-
centrated solutions failed uniformly to produce any proliferation. The author concludes that
water absorption and increased turgor are the chief causes of the hypertrophy and the division
of the pith cells. From one to seven injections were made in each stem, resulting in intumes-
cences in the majority of cases. The entire cavity was sometimes filled. Acids and a sub-
stance turning orange red with H202 accumulated in the affected cells. — Leonas L.Burlingame.

TEMPERATURE RELATIONS

869. Bigelow, W. D., and J. R. Esty. The thermal death point in relation to time of some
resistant organisms. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 10. 1920.

No. 2, November, 19201 PHYSIOLOGY 125

870. Gain, Edmosd, and Andre Gain. Conditions thermiques du sol sous l'influence
de la vegetation locale. [Thermal conditions of the soil under the influence of local vegetation.]
Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 101-164. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 299.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

871. Denis, Marcel. L'optimum lumineux pour la developpement du Stichococcus bacil-
laris Nag. [Optimum light for Stichococcus bacillaris Nag.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 72-77. 1920.
— Pure culture of Stichococcus bacillaris produced the greatest dry weight of growth in Det-
mers' nutrient solution when exposed to rather weak illumination. In direct sunlight
the cells were yellow-green and more or less spherical. In tap water initial development was
possible in all light-intensities tried, but continued growth was prevented by the inability
to fix free nitrogen. — F. B. Wann.

872. Eberson, Frederick. Ultraviolet rays and their effect on antigenic properties. I.
Ultraviolet light and meningococci. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 21-22. 1920.

MISCELLANEOUS

873. Cheplin, Harry A., and Leo F. Rettger. Studies on the transformation of the
intestinal flora. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 8. 1920.

874. Clark, Mansfield. Reduction potential in its relation to bacteriology. [Abstract.]
Absts. Bact. 4:2. 1920.

875. Koketsu, Riichiro. Time records for physiology, ecology, and climatology. Bot.
Mag. Tokyo 34: 13-14. 1920. — Since physiological processes are related to actual solar time,
the author suggests that records expressed in the ordinary standard time are not properly
comparable. He suggests their translation into solar time for publication, the more particu-
larly so that many countries have now adopted the custom of changing their clocks in conform-
ity with the so-called daylight-saving laws. — Leonas L. Burlingame.

876. Kopeloff, Nicholas, and Lillian Kopeloff. Biological factors in sugar-deteri-
oration. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 7. 1920.

877. Rogers, L. A., and C. L. McArthur. Variation in the colon count in Potomac river
water. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 1. 1919.

878. Rogers, L. A. An improved apparatus for drying cultures by the freezing method.
[Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 3: 6. 1919.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland: Scheltema& Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

Vol. VI

DE( KAIBER, 1920

No. 3

ENTRIES 879 L3G7

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

{The Execulhe Committee for 19£0 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.
•B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.
A.F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann

Arbor, Michigan.
*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhotjt, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.
J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts:

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
•Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus
try, Washington, D. C.

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the Board) ,
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rudd, Medical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, V. S. A.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

FETTER LANE, LONDON, E. C

Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

I $6.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba
Price, net postpaid for two volumes: < 16.25 Canada

\ $6.50 Other countries

1919 Volumes: I and II
1920 Volumes: III, IV, V and VI

CONTENTS

Agronomy 879- 903

Bibliography, Biography and History 904- 964

Botanical Education 965- 975

Cytology 976-1010

Forest Botany and Forestry 1011-1048

Genetics • • • • 1049-1145

Horticulture 1146-1179

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1180-1188

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae 1189-1204

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1205-1212

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes 1213-1232

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1233-1255

Pathology 1256-1295

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy ." 1296-1305

Physiology 1306-1364

Soil Science. 1365-1392

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 1393-1397

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
DC.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, "Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
ohusptts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York.— Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois. •

Forest Botanv and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U.S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey.— Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Transeac,
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. A lexandeb
W. Evans, Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York. §

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science .Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A.J. Eameb D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand
R. Hosmer

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense. t ICAI

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF CUKL

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. VI DECEMBER, 1920 No. 3

ENTRIES 879-1397

AGRONOMY

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

879. Addis, Jose M. El bledo manso. (Amaranthus blitum L.). [Pig weed.] Revist.
Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 74-75. 1 fig. 1920. — It is pointed out that this weed has been used as
a food for hogs. An analysis is published indicating that it is of considerable value. —
F. M. Blodgett.

880. Ahr, J., and Chr. Mayr. Gerstensorten und Dungung. [Barley varieties and man-
uring.] 123 p. Datterer & Cie. : Freising, Germany, 1919. M. 3.50.— Short rev. in Jour.
Landw. 67: 287. 1919.

881. Anonymous. Solanacea cubana gigantesca como planta forragera. La yerba de soler.
[A large Cuban forage plant. The soler plant.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 93-95. 4 fig.
1920. — It was discovered that horses and cattle showed a great liking for the foliage of Sol-
arium verbascifolium L. An analysis indicated considerable feed value, being high in
protein. — F. M. Blodgett.

882. Anonymous. The Uba cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 300-301. 1920.— This arti-
cle discusses various accounts given for the origin of Uba cane. Experiments with a sport
of the Uba cane are being carried out on the Natal Estates. The new variety seems to be
very hardy, a vigorous grower and more capable of withstanding drought and disease than
the older established Uba. The sport was found in a field of second ratoons and propagation
cuttings were taken from the stool. Nearly 300 acres of the sport are under cultivation. —
E. Koch.

883. Anonymous. The Uba cane. Some further data as to its origin. Internat. Sugar
Jour. 22: 326-328. 1920. — An anonymous writer in the South African Sugar Journal suggests
the derivation of the name Uba and origin of Uba cane in Natal. A box of tops had been sent
to Natal from Poona, India. Three letters were on the label from which Uba was read — it
was assumed that the last three letters of Poona read like Uba. This is somewhat like the
position taken by Harris, who supposes the name to have come from a damaged label, Uba
being part of name "Boubaya" (a Madagascar cane) which reached Natal via India whence
it was brought by Mitchell in 1885. Watts writes of the existence of Uba cane in Brazil
quite fifty years ago but he does not think it of Brazilian origin, nor that the name is derived
from "viba" (meaning reed) which Mr. Noel Deerr is inclined to believe. — E. Koch.

127

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 3

128 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

884. Barber, C. A. Sugar cane seedling work in India. Part II. Internat. Sugar Jour.
22: 307-312. 2 pi., 4 fig. 1920. — The work on the crossing of sugar cane in developing canes
suited to North Indian conditions has been successful, due to the selection of fertile-styled,
pollen-sterile mothers. Many suitable mothers without pollen and with starch-filled styles
have been found, and a large number of undoubted crosses are now being obtained every year,
with thin indigenous Indian canes and thick tropical canes of good quality, among which there
no doubt will be many suited to North India. A detailed study of seedlings shows variations
among them in small particulars — such as size and shape, width of leaf and thickness of stem,
color marks in various parts, and general habit. An attempt was made to study correlations
between the external morphology of the cane plant and the richness of its juice. There ap-
pears to be a very definite negative correlation between (1) leaf width and leaf length and (2)
richness of juice; the module of the leaf (length divided by width) gave equally definite posi-
tive correlation with sugar content as did also length of cane; thickness of cane yielded no
definite correlation to richness of juice, but there were indications that thinner varieties have
a richer juice. The cages used in crossing the canes and the methods employed are described,
and a list of publications prepared by workers on the cane-breeding station at Coimbatore is
given. — E. Koch.

885. Barber, C. A. The growth of the sugar cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 313-317.
1 fig. 1920. — The sixth article of a series. Shows how connected study of growth of stem
and leaves of cane plant has been rendered possible, and reviews Kammerling's work on the
relative growth of joint, sheath and blade, and the more recent and up-to-date work of
Knijper. — E. Koch.

8SG. Barber, C. A. The growth of the sugar cane. VII. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 371-375.
1 pi., 1 fig. 1920. — Length of cane depends on length of individual joints and their number.
Height of field cane varies according to weather, soil, cultivation and amount of manure applied
the effect being seen in the length of the joints rather than in the number produced. Length
of joint is also affected by the period in which the cane is formed, the first formed canes having
shorter joints than those arising later, but earlier canes produce so many joints that these
canes are usually longer. In each individual cane the length of the joint varies in the differ-
ent parts of the cane, joints below the ground being extremely short and disc-like, the length
rapidly increasing above ground until after the period of active growth, when joints become
shorter. When flowering occurs the joints at the top become longer, leaf sheaths are longer,
blades shorter and joints decrease in thickness. The longest joints, on an average, are the
fifth and sixth joints above ground, each increasing until the maximum is reached, after which
a regular decrease takes place. A series of measurements made at crop tune may be relied
upon to reproduce the character of the cane growth throughout the season that has passed.
The length curve of the joints taken at harvest shows the nature of the past growing season
and any abnormality will make itself clearly noticeable. From a study of the joint and other
growth curves the suitability of a tract for cane growing in general may be judged. — E. Koch.

887. Barber, C. A. Sugar cane seedling work in India. Part I. Internat. Sugar Jour.
22: 251-257. 1920. — Work in progress at Coimbatore Cane-breeding Station deals not merely
with the raising of cane from thick, tropical parents, but also aims to obtain definite crosses
between these and the many thin, indigenous Indian canes; it also aims to obtain sets of seed-
lings suited to the several different conditions of the Indian sugar tracts. Attempts were made
to raise seedlings, but these failed because arrowing is rare in North India, and it was found
that when it occurred the stamens were almost invariably completely closed and without
pollen. Arrowing in India is affected by latitude, by time of planting and by the character
of the soil and its treatment, while the usefulness of the arrows for the production of seedlings
depends, in the first instance, on their possession of abundance of open anthers. It appears
that the amount and character of the rainfall may be directly influential. Arrows vary as
much in female fertility as in the fertility of the male organs. If the stigma and style contain
starch it is probable that the flowers are capable of producing seed and seedlings. Each

No. 3. December, 1920)

AGRONOMY

129

variety has its particular time of flowering, thick canes, as a class, flowering earlier than thin
ones. In a group of thick cane seedlings a small proportion show differences from the usual
type. These produce masses of flowers that arc especially fertile, yielding great numbers of
viable seeds. They flower early and are used for crossing with thick canes. Wild canes have
been used similarly. Various devices have been used to hasten the later flowering of the
thin canes and retard the early flowering of the thick canes, with the result that some of the
former have been hastened and a number of crosses formerly unobtainable have been secured.
Different varieties and groups show great diversity in development of arrows. The fullest
development is found in various highly developed thick canes, as well as in the most primitive
class of the Indian indigenous ones. Many of the North Indian canes have been induced to
flower for the first time and with further study the tardy, and at present infertile, members
may some day produce flowers which will add to the range of possible crosses. — E. Koch.

888. Blair, T. A. A statistical study of weather factors affecting the yield of winter wheat
in Ohio. Monthly Weather Rev. 47: 841-847. 2 fig. 1919.— The statistical method is applied
to the problem of determining what are the important factors affecting the growth of winter
wheat in Ohio, and their relative importance. The results are expressed as partial correla-
tion coefficients and in linear regression equations, in which the coefficients are evaluated by
the method of least squares. Temperature and precipitation are used because of their general
nature and because observations of these features extend over the entire region. Tempera-
ture variations have more influence upon the yield than do precipitation variations, because
of the regular and frequent storms peculiar to the region. Calculated yields agreed very
closely with those given by the U. S. Bureau of Crop Estimates. The chief requisites for a
good yield are a warm March and June and a cool and dry May. The critical periods in the
growth of the plant are those connected with "jointing," "heading" and "filling." — E. N.
Munns.

889. Cross, W. E. Cane nomenclature in Argentina. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 278-279.
1920.

890. Gerlach, Prof. Dr. Kohlensauredungung. [Fertilizing with carbon dioxide.]
Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 370-371. 1920. — The experiments on the effect of increas-
ing the carbon dioxide content of the air, first reported in this journal in 1919 (no. 5), were
repeated in a light, airy greenhouse. In a small section of the house the air was made to
contain 23 times as much carbon dioxide as it had before the experiment. No beneficial re-
sults were obtained, as is evident from the following condensed summary of the harvested
dry matter from the three plants named.

TOMATO
FRUITS

In the open

In glass house without extra CO2
In glass house with extra CO2. . .

TOBACCO

MAIZE

WHITE
MUSTARD

100

105

100
98
73

— A. J. Pieters.

891. Howard, Albert, Gabriel L. C. Howard, and Abdtjr Rahman Khan. Studies in
the pollination of Indian crops. I. Mem. Dept. Agric. India. (Bot. Ser.) 10: 195-220. 1919.
— A report on the flowering, methods of pollination, fertilization, natural cross fertilization
and improvement of leguminous crops, such as Crotalaria juncea, Cajanus indicus Spreng.,
Indigofera arrecta Hochst., Indigofera sumatrana Gaertn.; oil-seed crops, such as Linum usi-
tatissirnum L., Eruca sativa Lam., Sesamum indicum L., Guizotia abyssinica Cass.; and crops
grown for fiber, such as Corchorus capsularis L., Corchorus olitorius L., and Hibiscus sab-
dariffa L.—F. M. Scherts.

130 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

892. Keitt, T. E., and A. W. Mueeay. The influence of certain factors on the time of
opening of cotton. Georgia Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 130: 17-34. 3 fig. 1919. — Information
relative to the development of the cotton plant and the early opening of the flower is impor-
tant owing to the rapid advance of the boll weevil. In the variety tests six strains of Cleve-
land Big Boll led all others. On heavy clay the largest yield was obtained with 600 pounds
3-8-2 fertilizer. This gave also the highest yield to October 1st, on this type of soil, and the
highest per cent open October 1st. The highest yield on the medium clay was obtained where
600 pounds of an 8-3-9-formula was used. On this soil the highest yield to October was with
600 pounds of an 8-3-6. This result shows that on this type of soil the farmers should con-
tinue to use potash under heavy boll weevil infestations. The highest yield on the sandy soil
was obtained where 600 pounds of an 8-3-6-formula were used, but the largest yield to October
1st, was where 600 pounds of 8-3-3-formula were used. Acid phosphate has hastened the
maturity of cotton. This is also true of Tennessee blue rock phosphate. Ground or raw rock
phosphate seemed, in the main, to hasten maturity. Where lime was used with acid phos-
phate the maturity was delayed. For the season of 1919 late topdressing with a mixture of
ammonia and nitrate of soda gave profitable increases in yield. The addition of potash to
nitrogen in topdressing did not seem to delay maturity, although the results do not indicate
a profit from this practice. — T. H. McHatton.

893. Koch, L. De waarde van stekken en van knol unitloopers als bibit voor het planten
van bataten. [Value of cuttings from mature stems of grown plants and from sprouts of sweet
potatoes, for planting purposes.] Korte Ber. Landbouwvoorlichtingsd., Dept. Landb., Nijver-
heid en Handel. (Selectie-en zaadtuin) (Buitenzorg) 19: 1-6. 1919. — Both methods of propa-
gation proved equally good, but the latter was found to be of greater practical value. — L.
Koch.

894. Piola-Caselli, (E.). Les associations agricoles pour 1' irrigation des terrains d'apres
le type italien des consorzii. [Agricultural associations for irrigation after the Italian co-opera-
tive type.] Bull. Inst. d'Egypte 1: 71-85. 1919. — A brief resume of the history of irrigation
in Italy is given. The organization of the different kinds of cooperative associations, both
public and private, is discussed, and the laws governing them are cited. Finally, the particu-
lar suitability to Egyptian conditions of cooperative associations for the development and
operation of plants for irrigation by pumping is emphasized. — Geo. F. Freeman.

S95. Russell, E. J. The Ithaca agricultural experiment station. [Rev. of reports for the
years 1914-17.] Nature 104: 482-483. 1920. — Summarizes some results of work on soy-bean
nodule organism (Mem. Cornell Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. [Ithaca] Bull. 386), direct assimilation
of certain carbohydrates by green plants (Ibid. 9), costs of production of farm crops (Ibid.
Bull. 377), and fertile and infertile soils. — O. A. Stevens.

896. Sifton, H. B. Longevity of the seeds of cereals, clovers and timothy. Amer. Jour.
Bot. 7: 243-251. 5 fig. 1920. — The longevity of seeds of wheat, oats, timothy, alsike and red
clover was studied by storing samples from crops of these plants grown in representative parts
of Canada and making a germination test on a small portion of each sample every year. From
17 to 19 such annual tests have been made on each crop. With wheat, there is no decrease in
the percentage of germination for five years, and but little for eleven years. From 11 to 15
years, however, there is a very rapid loss of germinative power and then a somewhat slower
loss, until after 18 years no seeds at all will grow. In the case of oats, there is a slight increase
in germinative power for 7 or 8 years and then a gradual decrease which is much slower than
that in wheat. 41 per cent of the seeds were still alive after 19 years. Timothy differs from
wheat and oats in that the germinative power begins to fall off at once. After 7 years it drops
rapidly and after the 12th year slows up again. Practically all seeds were dead at 17 years.
Alsike and red clover show a regular and steady decline from the very first. After 17 years,
however, a small proportion of seeds of both were still alive. — E. W. Sinnott.

No. 3, December, 1920] AGRONOMY 131

897. Smith, J. Wabebn. Effect of snow on winter wheat in Ohio. Monthly Weather Rev.
47: 701-702. 1 fig. 1919. — The relation of snow cover to the yield of wheal is not a direct
one. Snow in itself, if above the normal late in the year, may be detrimi atal, but it is of
great value during periods of unseasonable temperature by preventing frost-heaving of soil
when freezing and thawing conditions prevail. — E. N. Munns.

898. Syme, J. E. Farmers' experiment plots. Winter fodders, Western District, 1919.
Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 315-317. 1920. — Report of trials by six farmers with miscel-
laneous forage crops for pasture, with records of the carrying capacity. — C. V. Piper.

899. Vendrell. Ernesto. Estudios sobre los abonos verdes en rotacion con las demas
plantas cultivadas en Cuba. III. [Green manures in rotation with other plants in Cuba. III.]
Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 71-74, 112-115. 1920.

900. Vornemann, Prof. Dr. Die Kohlenstoffernahrung der Kulturpflanzen. [The car-
bon dioxide assimilation of cultivated plants.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 302-303.
1920. — This is a semi-popular paper setting forth especially the value of the C02 that is devel-
oped in the soil by the decay of organic matter and reaches the surface below the leaves of the
growing crop. The practical conclusion is reached, that manure or green manure should be
so applied as to produce the maximum decay during the height of the growing season. The
value of tillage consists partly in encouraging the evolution of carbon dioxide. — A. J. Pieters.

901. Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley, C. R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G. P. Wilcox,
T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee. Report of Committee in Charge of the Experiment Station.
Rept. Exp. Sta. Hawaiian Sugar Planters' Assoc, for 1919. 49 p. 1920. — Discussion of cer-
tain fungus and insect enemies of sugar cane, together with reports as to progress of investi-
gations concerning the fertilizer requirements of cane, refining qualities of commercial sugar,
utilization of molasses, sugar-cane breeding work, and methods of cultivation. — J. M.
Westgate.

902. Wenholz, H. Broom millet seed as feed for stock. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 305-307. 1920. — Broom millet seed of good quality is a comparatively cheap feed for
poultry, and, if fed judicially, for horses, sheep, cattle and pigs. The most serious drawback
is the difficulty of storage. The three essentials for safe storage are, (1) quick reduction of
moisture content, (2) good ventilation and (3) well-cleaned seed free from dirt. Grinding
of the seed before feeding is advisable, except for sheep and poultry; soaking improves the
feed for pigs. — C. V. Piper.

903. Willcox, Sir William. The Sudd Reservoir or Nature's provision of perennial
irrigation and flood protection for the whole of the Nile valley. Bull. Inst. d'Egypte 1 : 35-69.
1919. — The author treats the problem under seven headings, which are discussed in order.
The total profitably cultivable area of Egypt is given as 6,663,000 acres of which 1,312,000 acres
are uncultivated. Of the area cultivated, 4,064,000 acres are under perennial irrigation (a
continuous water supply) and 1,287,000 acres are under basin irrigation (covered with water
only once a year when the Nile is in flood). For the whole of Egypt, the water required annu-
ally for the irrigation of lands now cultivated amounts to 9,000,000,000 cubic meters. When
all of the available land is cultivated, 13,500,000,000 cu. m. will be required. To irrigate
500,000 acres in the Sudan, 3,750,000,000 cu. m. of water will be required annually. Since
only 5,500,000,000 cu. m. are naturally available, there will be a deficit of 11,500,000,000 cu. m.
The present net capacity of Aswan reservoir is 2,000,000,000 cu. m., leaving 8,500,000,000
cu. m. to be provided by additional works. To furnish additional water, the author recom-
mends that the natural storage in the Sudd region of the White Nile be drawn upon, and
describes the various projects necessary to accomplish this. Another storage reservoir could
also be formed by the construction of a barrage on the Saubat (Sabat) river at a point above
Nassar. This reservoir is designed to furnish the 3,750,000,000 cu. m. of water needed for the
Sudan. By raising the Aswan dam, its storage capacity could be increased to 4,000,000,000

132 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

cu. m. A regulating barrage on the White Nile and training works on the Rosetta and Dami-
etta branches in lower Egypt would serve to lessen floods. Eight appendices are added as
follows: (A) The actual value of the agricultural land of Egypt; (B) Utilization of the
ground water of the Nile valley; (C) Flush and lift irrigation; (D) The Aswan dam; (E)
Some aspects of the White Nile reservoir; (F) Mr. C. E. Depots on the Lake Tsana reser-
voir; (G) Sir William Garstin on the Gebel and Zeraf Rivers of the Sudd region; (II) Total
estimate of the costs of reservoirs and flood protection for Egypt and the Sudan. — Geo. F.
Freeman .

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Lincoln W. Riddle, Editor

o o

904. Akerman, A. En vaxtforadlares underbara levnadsode. Nagra ord om Aron Aron-
sohn och nans verksamhet. [A plant breeder's remarkable fate. Some words about Aron Aron-
sohn and his work.] Sver. Utsadesf. Tidskr. 294: 165-168. 1919. — A biographical sketch of
Aron Aronsohn. — See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1447.

905. Anonymous. Leonard Cockayne. [Biographical notice.] With portrait. New Zea-
land Jour. Sci. Tech. 2 : 231-234. July, 1919.

906. Anonymous. Bulletin Agricole de L'Institute Scientifique de Saigon. Brooklyn
Bot. Gard. Rec. 8: 146. Oct., 1919. — Notes the appearance of the first number of this new
publication. — C. S. Gager.

907. Anonymous. The Botanic Garden, Havana. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919:
101-102. 1919.

908. Anonymous. The dahlia. Missouri Bot. Gard. Bull. 7: 41-46. PL 12-18. 1919.

909. Anonymous. How flowers were named. Sci. Amer. Supplem. 87: 176. 1919.

910. Anonymous. Necrologia. [Necrology.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 2: 476. 1919.
— Records the death of Patricio Cardi'n, head of the department of Entomology and Vege-
table Pathology of the Agronom. Exp. Sta., Cuba. — F. M. Blodgett.

911. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Fox, R. Hingston. Dr. John Fothergill and his friends:
Chapters in eighteenth century life. 8°. xxiv + 434 p., 13 pi. Macmillan & Co. : New York.]
Jour. Botany 58: 56-59. 1920.

912. Arag6n, Francisco de las Barras de. Cartas del botanico frances Leon Dufour a
Don Mariano Lagasca, existentes en el Archivo de la Real Academia de Medicina de Sevilla,
encontradas y trascritas. [Letters of the French botanist, Leon Dufour to Mariano Lagasca, in
the Archives of the Royal Academy of Medicine of Seville, found and transcribed.] Bol. R.
Soc. Espafiola Hist. Nat. 19: 394-400. 1919. — Gives four letters written from St. Sever by
Leon Dufour, partly in French partly in Spanish, to Mariano Lagasca, Director of the
Royal Botanical Garden at Madrid, in 1817 and 1819, mainly relating to specimens being sent
to Madrid, also containing notes on interesting trips planned in the Pyrenees; requests for
specimens and notes on certain species, particularly lichens; comments on the appearance of
new botanical literature; discussion as to whether a certain epidemic in Cadiz might be yellow
fever. There is also a letter, in Spanish, from Maria Tadea Gonzalez to Lagasca relating
the forwarding to Lagasca of books and botanical and entomological specimens which had
been accumulated by Lorente. The author of the article notes that Dufour had gone to
Spain as a member of Napoleon's army, and had formed a friendship with Vicente Alfonso
Lorente at Valencia. Because of sympathy for him as a fellow botanist, Dufour had prob-
ably saved Lorente from execution for the prominent part he had played in the defense of

No. 3, December, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 133

the city. Most of the books and specimens left with LoEBNTB by Dufour were finally for-
warded to Lagasca at Madrid. — O. E. Jennings.

913. Arnaud, G. Rapport sur le fonctionnement de la societe depuis sa fondation jusqu'a
la fin de 1919. [Review of the acts of the society from its foundation to the close of 1919.] Bull.
Soc. Pathol. Veg. France [Paris] 6: 154-158. Nov.-Dec, 1919.— A brief summary of the history
of the French Plant Pathological Society, which was established February 11, 1914, through
the efforts of Professor Mangin. The work of the society was greatly interrupted by the
war. It is now renewing its activity and increasing its membership, which is 104. It is noted
that two members have been elected to the National Academy of Science and two others
elected deputies. — C. L. Shear.

914. Bardie, A. Quelques notes sur la Physalis Alkekengi dans la Gironde. | Notes
concerning Physalis Alkekengi L.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux (Proces-verbaux) 69: 39-47.
1915-16. [Received May, 1920.]— After a brief description of the habitat of this species of
Physalis, the author gives detailed information regarding the reputed pharmaceutical prop-
erties of the plant since the time of the ancient Greeks. — W. H. Emig.

915. Beringer, G. M. Frank G. Ryan, memoir with portrait. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92:
371-376. 1920.

916. Blakeslee, A. F., Roland Thaxter, and William Trelease. William Gilson
Farlow, December 17, 1844- June 3, 1919. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 173-181. 1 pi. 1920.— The
authors present a brief biographical sketch of Professor Farlow, which is followed by a
list of his publications. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 947, 956, 963, 1463, and 1470.—
E. W. Sinnott.

917. Bouchard, Georges. Le grand naturaliste Canadien. [The great Canadian natur-
alist.] Naturaliste Canadien 45: 114-115. Feb., 1919. — An appreciation of the late L'Abbe
L. Provancher, naturalist and founder of Le Naturaliste Canadien. — A. H. MacKay.

918. Briquet, J. Les collections botaniques du botaniste espagnol Jose Quer. [The col-
lections of the Spanish botanist Jose Quer.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20:
465-478. 4 fig. 1919. — Quer was born at Perpignan, Jan. 26, 1695, and died at Madrid, Mar.
19, 1764. He collected in southern Europe and northern Africa and projected a flora of Spain.
The first four volumes appeared from 1762 to 1764, but the fifth and sixth, in collaboration with
Gomez de Ortega, not until 1784. Figure 1 is a portrait of Quer. There is a description of
his^herbarium now at the Delessert Herbarium. — A. S. Hitchcock.

919. Britten, James. In memory of Edward Shearburn Marshall, 1859-1919. Jour. Bot-
any 58: 1-11. 1920.— Marshall was born March 7, 1858, and died Nov. 25, 1919. He received
his university education at Oxford, and became a clergyman by profession. — It was probably
while at Oxford that he became interested in plants. His first contribution to the Jour. Bot-
any, of which he was later a leading supporter, was in 1885. Subsequently he became a prom-
inent British botanist of keen critical judgment, more inclined perhaps to see differences than
relationship and somewhat prone to over-confidence, but sound in the end. Though having
a wide interest in flowering plants, he studied more especially Saxifraga, Hieracium, Rub us,
Euphrasia, Eriophila, Viola, Epilobium, Salicornia, and Carex. Marshall was strongly
opposed to the "lumping school" of taxonomists and resented the tossing aside by Bentham,
Hooker and others as worthless critical field observation made by careful workers. His
own work was usually based on abundant material. His name is associated with two plants,
Hieracium Marshallii Linton and Rubus Marshallii Focke & Rogers. He published a Flora
of Kent in 1889 and contributed the article on Betula to the Cambridge British Flora in 1914.
He also published a supplement to the Flora of Somerset. Marshall had a wide acquaintance-
among British botanists and was a delightful companion. In 1911 he was elected an Honorary
Fellow of the Botanical Society of Edinburgh. He was a vigorous collector, satisfied only with

134 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

the best of specimens, and using great care in their preparation. He was a careful writer,
with a clear concise style, and exceedingly methodical. — K. M. Wiegand.

920. Brittox, Elizabeth G., and others. Resolutions upon the loss of the collections
and library of M. Jules Cardot. Bryologist 22: 87-88. 1919.

921. Church, A. H. Brunfels and Fuchs. Jour. Botany 57: 233-244. 1919.— Stimu-
lated by the proposed issue of a second volume of the Cambridge British Flora, the writer
queries whether the figures in the first volume were as nearly ideal as they might be. He is
led to consider the work of Leonard Fuchs, "De Historia Stirpium," published in 1542.
He pronounces this "the original standard for all subsequent volumes of illustrations of
plants." Fuchs was a leading physician and professor, and a wealthy man. He employed
several artists of note, and perhaps the best engraver of Strasburg, Vitus Rudolph Speckle.
The volume comprises 519 folio drawings, with associated text, of plants growing in south-
ern Germany. The first plates were rather crude, and some were copied. The later ones
show a great advance both in drawing and engraving, and are elegant examples of the engrav-
er's art. They compare most favorably with the best work done in modern times. The art-
ists were probably designers, and were not botanists. They were little impressed by fine
detail of structure, and were best at the artistic arrangement of large parts. The writer
points out that Fuchs really built upon his predecessor, Otto Brunfels, whose volume
stands as the first recognized work on scientific botany of the new era. Brunfels' illustra-
tions, though not so numerous nor so elaborate as those of Fuchs were far more accurate as
to detail. Brunfels was a poor man and probably made the drawings himself. Some of
these were very poorly copied by Fuchs' illustrators in their early drawings. Brunfels
was much ahead of his time in presenting detail, which he faithfully drew but did not under-
stand. The writer cites many illustrations from both Fuchs and Brunfels to make clear the
points in his argument. "The work of Brunfels and Fuchs covers the whole province of the
fundamentals of botanical illustration." "The addition of special botanical details, as accu-
rate drawings, or neat combination in a diagram of established convention, is again exemplified
by Fuchs; while the clearness of line-reproduction expressed in the work of Speckle puts to
shame modern methods of line process-work." The illustrations in Gerard and Parkinson
are considered to have degenerated from the standards set by Brunfels and Fuchs. — K. M.
Wiegand.

922. Cook, Mel T. Byron David Halsted. Bot. Gaz. 67: 169-170. 1 fig. Feb., 1919 —
A biographical sketch with portrait.

923. Demorlaine, J. La necessite d'un service forestier d'armee sous l'ancien regime.
[The need for an army forest service.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 57 : 229-230. 1919. — See Bot. Absts.
5, Entry 179.

924. [Dodge, B. O.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12: 112-114.
1920.

925. Doidge, Ethel M. The role of bacteria in plant diseases. [Presidential address,
South African Assoc. Adv. Sci. Kingwilliamstown, July, 1919.] South African Jour. Sci. 16:
65-92. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2031.

926. Fitting, Hans. Zur Jahrhundertfeier der Bonner Universitat. Die Entwicklung
der Naturwissenschaften an der Bonner Universitat seit ihre Begrundung. Botanik. [The
development of botany during the past century at the University of Bonn.] Naturwissenschaften
7: 571-576. 1919. — This is a historical survey. Nees von Esenbeck, Sachs, Pfeffer,
Hansteen, and Strasburger are among those who contributed to the prestige of botany
at Bonn. — Orton L. Clark.

927. Francois, L. Notice sur Achille Miintz. Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 5-14. Portrait.
1920. — An account of the researches of A. Muntz (1846-1917), which included investigations

No. 3, December, 1920] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 1 ii.j

of the sugars found in fungi and theil relation to respiration; nitrification in the s<jil through
the agency of living organisms; organized and BOluble ferments; the role of ammonia in the
nutrition of higher plants; t be effect of light on assimilat ion ; I be rdat ion of t be composition
of forage plants to the Formation Of milk sugar by animals; and the chemical changes occur-
ring in the ripening <<( starchy and oleaginous seeds. -L. It'. Sharp.

928. Ftbon, P. F. Editorial, .lour. Indian Bot. 1: 1 2. Sept.. l'.il'i. THe Journal of
Indian Batumi has been started to provide a means of publishing botanical work done in
India, which would not naturally find a home in existing botanical journals of that coun-
try, especially in branches other than Qoristic and agricultural botany. To be issued monthly,
and to contain original matter and abstracts. -C. S. Gager.

929. Gershenfeld, Louis. Galen, a sketch. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. Q: 520-522.
1920.

930. Goebel, K. Ernst Stahl zum Gedachtnis. [In memory of Ernst Stahl.] Xaturwis-
senschaften 8: 141-146. 1920.

931. Groves, James. Cornelius Varley, 1781-1873. Jour. Botany 58: 50-53. 1920.
Varley's mother was probably a direct descendant from Oliver Cromwell. The imme-
diate family showed strong artistic tendencies. Cornelius, unlike his brother, developed also
a marked ability as an instrument maker, especially of optical instruments. The main reason
for considering him as a botanist lies in his remarkable paper on Chara published in 1849
("on Chara vulgaris," Trans. Microsc. Soc. 2: 93-104. 1849) before Alexander Braun's
work appeared. In this he saw clearly many of the details of cellular construction that were
later brought out by Bratjn. — K. M. Wiegand.

932. Guthrie, John D. Early English forest regulations. Jour. Forestry 18: 530-541"
1920. — -Presents English forest customs and usages dating back to the 14th centur}\ The
personnel of a forest, its administration, grazing uses and silviculture are described. — E. N.
Mtinns.

933. Holmes, E. M. The manna of scripture. Chem. and Druggist 92 : 25-26. 1920.—
The manna of Moses has been ascribed to various bushes or small trees, such as Tamarix
gallica, var. mannifera, yielding saccharine exudations, of some value as food, for sweetening
cakes, etc. It has also been supposed that it was of fungous origin, or a lichen, — perhaps Leca-
nora esculenta, var. mannifera. Swann, in his recent book "Fighting the slavedriver in central
Africa," writes as follows (p. 116): "It was whilst passing through this district (the high pla-
teau which separates Lakes Nyasa and Tanganyika), composed mostly of sandstone and gran-
ite, and occupied by the Amambwi tribe, that I was shown a very curious white substance
very similar to porridge. It was found early in the morning before the sun rose. On exami-
nation it was found to possess all the characteristics of the manna .... of the Israel-
ites. In appearance it resembled coriander seed, was white in color like hoar frost, sweet to
the taste, melted in the sun and if kept over night was full of worms in the morning. It
required to be baked if you intended to keep it for any length of time. It looked as if it were
deposited on the ground in the night. The only suggestion I could think of was that it might
be a mushroom spawn, as on the spot where it melted, tiny fungi sprung up the next night."
Dr. Woreham, a medical missionary of this African district, confirms Swann's statements
but says that this "manna" is of rare occurrence. — Because of the Great Rift valley, which
extends from the Lebanons to the Cape of Good Hope and is evidently the bed of a formerly
great river, it is fully possible for a cryptogamic plant to be found in widely separated loca-
tions in this valley where the conditions are suitable for its development. A possibility of
identifying the manna of Scripture lies here, and an effort is being made to secure preserved
specimens and samples of the soil where they are obtained. — E. Ar. Galhercoal.

934. Howard, L. 0. Recollections of the early days of the Biological Society. Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington [D. C] 32: 271-280. 1919. — Reminiscences and anecdotes of the Biological
Society of Washington are related. — J. C. Gilman.

136 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

935. Huabd, V.-A. Le Naturaliste Canadien. [The Canadian Naturalist.] Naturaliste
Canadien 45: 97-101. Jan., 1919. — An appeal to subscribers. Founded in 1868 by L'Abbe
Provancher, the only French scientific periodical published by Canadian French, or in
America, or possibly in any country outside France. — A. H. Mac Kay.

936. Huard, V.-A. L'abbe Provancher. [Continued from Naturaliste Canadien 45: 17-
18. 191S.] Naturaliste Canadien 45: 134-138. 1919. — A biographical sketch with special
reference to the history of Le Naturaliste Canadien. [To be continued.] — A. H. MacKay.

937. Jackson, B. Daydon. Pritzel's "Index." Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 45: 14-21. 1919.
— A sketch of the life of Georg August Pritzel, together with an outline of a project to pub-
lish, under the auspices of the Royal Horticultural Society, a revision of his "Iconum Botani-
carum Index Locupletissimus," completed in 1865 and now out of print. There is no printed
record of the many excellent figures published during the last 53 years. The original Pritzel
contained about 107,000 entries, and it is estimated that the new edition will include at least
125,000 additional entries. All botanical plates are to be cited under the names employed
by those responsible for the plates. The pictures printed in such horticultural journals as
Gardeners' Chronicle, the Garden, and their foreign equivalents, are to be quoted. — J. K.
Shaw.

938. Kraemer, Henry. Life and work of Charles Tanret. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 91:
265-270. 1919.— An account of the life activities of Charles Tanret, the French pharmacist,
who died July 29, 1917. The author reviews Tanret's scientific achievements, including his
studies on the active principles of ergot and pomegranate bark and the detection of albumin,
peptones and alkaloids. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

939. Kremers, Edward. Professor Alexander Tschirch. [Sketch with portrait.] Jour.
Amer. Pharm Assoc. 9: 359-360. 1920.

940. Leopold, Aldo.' Forestry of the prophets. Jour. Forestry 18: 412-419. 1920. —
Excerpts from the Old Testament showing that some of the Jewish prophets had considerable
knowledge of forests, and forest products. — E. N. Munns.

941. Lister, G. Mycetozoa from Cornwall. Jour. Botany 58: 127-130. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 791.

942. Maheux, George. La protection des plants chez les Romains. [The protection of
plants among the Romans.] Naturaliste Canadien 45: 146-157. 1919.— The author refers to
Theophrastus' "History of plants," Varro's "De re rustica," Cato the Elder's "Treatise on
agriculture," Virgil's "Georgics," Pliny the Elder's "Natural history," Columella's "Treat-
ise on agriculture," and Palladius' works on the same subject; also to the "Voyage agricole
chez les anciens," published in 1898 by l'abbe Beauredon. The subject is treated under
three general subdivisions, cereals, legumes, and fruit trees. — A. H. MacKay.

943. Marshall, T. Dabney. The work of an Alabama plant wizard. Flower Grower 6:
97. 1919. — The work of L. H. Read, of Deer Park, Alabama, is briefly described. — W. N.
Clute.

944. Martin, George W. An early American record of mushroom poisoning. Myco-
logia 12: 53-54. 1920. — Author presents a unique inscription on a tombstone dated 1695,
which tells of two boys who died as a result of eating mushrooms. — H. R. Rosen.

945. Mattirolo, Oreste. Sul pregiudizio, che i fichi secchi e le castagne secche o crude
facciano sviluppare e crescere i pidocchi sul capo di chi li mangia. [Concerning the superstitious
belief that dried figs and dried or raw chestnuts produce lice on the heads of those who eat
these fruits.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Italiano 26: 46-57. 1919. — Many people believe that the eat-
ing of figs and chestnuts causes the development of lice. This superstition is traceable to

No. 3, December, 1920] BIBLim I It M>HY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 137

the fact thai members of the Acari are both planl and animal parasites. The eating of these
minute insects together with the fruits neither affects the digestion nor does it engender lice
on the heads of those who eat them. — Ernst I It wager.

946. MONTBMARTINI, Luic.i. Rodolfo Farneti. Rcvist. Pathol. Veg. 9: 121-125. 1919.—
Ropoi.fo Farneti, "libero docente" of vegetable pathology in the Royal University of
Pavia, died Jan. IS, 1919. While his field of observation was broad, he specialized along the
lines of mycology and phytopathology. A li si of his published work in these lines is given,
with some comments. — F. M. Blodgett.

947. Murium., W. A. Dr. William Gilson Farlow. Mycologia 11; 318. 1919.— A brief
account of Dr. Farlow's life.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 95G, 903, 1463, and
1470.—//. R. Rosen.

948. Murrill, W. A. Pier Andrea Saccardo. Mycologia 12 : 164. 1920. — A brief account
of Saccardo's life. — H. R. Rosen.

949. Parish, S. B. A supplementary bibliography of the southern California flora. Bull.
Southern California Acad. Sci. 19: 24-29. 1920. — The author completes to date a bibliography
begun in the same journal (volumes 8 and 9). Southern California is understood to have as
its northern limit Santa Barbara, Ventura, Kern, and Inyo counties. — Roxana S. Ferris.

950. Paterno, E. Origini e sviluppo della crioscopia. [Origin and development of cryo-
scopy.] Gaz. Chim. Italiana 49: 381-411. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2144.

951. Paul, David. On the earlier study of fungi in Britain. Trans. British Mycol. Soc.
6: 91-103. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1142.

952. Pearson, Wm. Hy. William Hobson. Bryologist 23: 36-37. 1920.— A brief note
concerning the life and work of the brothers Edward and William Hobson with a request
for further information about the latter. — E. B. Chamberlain.

953. Plitt, Charles C. A short history of lichenology. Bryologist 22: 77-85. 1919. —
The author outlines the ideas current concerning lichens from the Greeks to the time of
Linnaeus with some mention of the ancient uses of the plants. The development of system-
atic study after Linnaeus is sketched. Attention is given to historical views of the nature
of lichens as plants, to the ideas concerning gonidia, sexuality, and to present-day views. —
Edward B. Chamberlain .

954. Praeger, R. Ll. Nathaniel Colgan. Irish Nat. 28: 121-126. 1919.— Obituary no-
tice of an amateur naturalist chiefly interested in botany. He edited the new edition of
"Cybele Hibernica" (1898) and was author of "Flora of the County of Dublin" (1904). Por-
trait and list of publications. — W. E. Praeger.

955. Prain. D. J. W. H. Trail, M.D., F.R.S. Jour. Botany 57: 318-321. 1919.— James
William Helenus Trail was born in Birsay, Scotland, March4, 1851. His love of natural
history was early apparent. Trail graduated from the University of Aberdeen in 1S70, with
honors, and then entered the faculty of medicine, not through interest in medicine but in
order to obtain a further training in science. Here his record was also brilliant, but he laid
the study of medicine quickly aside when the opportunity came to travel in the Amazon
region. Following his return his observations were written up and published; and at the same
time he completed his study in medicine. His accurate work suggested his appointment as
government botanist in British Guiana, but the retirement of Professor Dickie, of Aber-
deen, led to Trail's appointment in his place, and thus prevented the acceptance of the
position in Guiana. At the age of 26 he took up the work at Aberdeen, which he continued
until his recent death, forty-two sessions in all. Trail was not a fluent speaker, but a con-

138 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

vincing teacher. His skill in selecting matter and accuracy in presenting this to students,
made his classes models of pedagogy. As a leader of field-excursions he could have no superior.
A well-equipped laboratory has been built up through his efforts. He was elected Fellow
of the Linnaean Society in 1875, Fellow of the Royal Society in 1893, and president of the Brit-
ish Association in 1910. A capacity for business led to his being much in demand in connec-
tion with University affairs. After 1892 he was dean of the new faculty of science. Many
other activities drew upon his time. He left endowment funds for the support of various
local interests. These acts of generosity, however, represent but a small part of Trail's
thoughtful and unobtrusive benevolence. The range of his knowledge and its accuracy were
phenomenal. His sincerity and kindness, as well as his scholarship, compelled regard and
esteem. — K. M. Wiegand.

956. Riddle, L. W. William Gilson Farlow. Rhodora 22: 1-8. Portrait. 1920.— A bio-
graphic sketch of the late William Gilson Farlow, Professor of Cryptogamic Botany in Har-
vard University from 1879 to 1919. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 963, 1463, and
1470.] — James P. Poole.

957. Riviere, C. Le jardin d'essai d'Alger. [The experimental garden of Algiers.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 91: 340-342. Sept., 1919. — This historical note on the founding and establish-
ing of the experimental garden supplements, by adding numerous details, a previous discus-
sion on the same topic (Rev. Hortic, June, 1919). — E. J. Kraus.

958. Roth, Filibert. Great teacher of forestry retires. Amer. Forestry 26: 209-212.
1 -portrait. 1920. — An appreciation of Professor Emeritus B. E. Fernow, pioneer in forestry
teaching and education. — Chas. H. Otis.

959. Small, James. The application of botany in the utilization of medicinal plants.
Pharm. Jour. 103: 199-201, 213-215, 248-250, 294-296. 1919.— A review is given of the botan-
ical materia medica of Palaeolithic man, Neolithic man, the early Hindus, Chinese, Egyptians,
Persians, Druids, Greeks, Romans and aboriginal Americans. Mention is made of the Chinese
knowledge of Rhubarb as a purge in 2700 B. C, of the two kinds of Indian Hemp plants in 1200
B. C, and of the Chinese Royal Botanical Garden of 111 B. C. ; also of the outstanding fact
in all of this early materia medica of the prominent use of narcotics and stimulants with the
probability that the use of Opium was known to Paleolithic man. The adoption by Western
Europe of foreign drugs brought back by early explorers and especialty through medical and
botanical exploration is noted. — The introduction of medicinal plants into medical practice
is described under the headings: Discovery, Recommendation, Experimentation, Secret Rem-
edy Stage, Permanent exploitation. Under Permanent exploitation, reference is made to the
full botanical description of the plant, its cultivation, the determination of its active prin-
ciples and its economic production. In the chapter entitled Present applications, reference
is made to present-day medical and botanical exploration under the auspices of national gov-
ernments, scientific societies and manufacturing firms. Botanical gardens and drug farms,
investigations in microscopic pharmacognosy, phytochemistry, ecology and genetics are
discussed. — The last chapter is on Future applications, discussed under the headings: Dis-
covery, Experimentation, Suggested organization and Suggested researches. Among the
many suggestions made by the author are the following: (1) A [British] pharmaceutical re-
search committee, with 25 per cent of its membership eminent botanists, who would have the
influence necessary to secure facilities for work on medicinal plants in university and other
institutions where the experimental plant-growing and plant-breeding would be under expert
botanical control. (2) A quarterly journal or bulletin issued by this committee, to contain
not only abstracts of completed researches, but some account of the progress of unfinished
work. — Many examples and illustrations are introduced and scores of plant names are men-
tioned.— E. N. Cathercoal.

960. Smith, Annie Morrill. Obituary [of Miss Lura L. Perrine]. Bryologist 23: 3.
1920. — A notice of Miss Perrine's life and work. — E. B. Chamberlain.

No. 3, December, 1920] BOTANICAL EDUCATION L39

961. Stone, R. E. Meeting of the Canadian Branch of the American Phytopathological
Society. Mycologia 12 : 43-45. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 13Gb.

962. Swingle, Walter T. More about Loureiro. Amer. Bot. 26: 28. 1920. — Additions

and corrections for a longer article, which appeared in same journal, Nov., 1919. — W. Ar. Clute.

963. [Vines, S. H.] William Gilson Farlow. Ann. Botany 33: 15-16. 1919.— See also
Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 1403, and 1 170.

964. Wright, I. A. The history of the cane sugar industry in the West Indies. Louisiana
Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 62: 414-415. Ibid. 63: 14-15, 108-109, 222-223, 237-239, 414-
415. 1919. — The history is written from documents, mostly unpublished, that exist in the
archives of the Indies, Seville, Spain. The development of the industry is traced from the
first part of the sixteenth century. — C. W. Edgerton.

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C Stuart Gager,' Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

965. Anonymous. The annual meeting, Science Masters' Association. Biology in the
school science course. School Sci. Rev. [London] 1 : 79-84. 1919. — Brief discussions by a num-
ber of teachers.

966. Anonymous. Descriptive guide to the grounds, buildings and collections [New
York Bot. Gard.]. Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 10: 89-212. PL 199-226. 1 map. 1920.

967. Anonymous. Naturschutz. [Preservation of natural sites.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
41 : 333-336. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1015.

968. Anonymous. A great artist of nature. [Rev. of : Thorburn, Archibald. A natur-
alist's sketch book. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 432-433. 1920.
—"This century has produced two great artists of nature — namely, Joseph Wolf and Archi-
bald Thorburn." The volume contains 60 plates, chiefly of birds and other animals, but
also some of plant life. — O. A. Stevens.

969. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Duncan, F. Martin. Insect pests and plant diseases in the
vegetable and fruit garden.] Nature 104: 467. 1920.

970. Anonymous. The study of the familiar. [Rev. of: Downing, E. R. A source book
of biological nature-study.] Nature 104: 465-466. 1920.

971. Britton, N. L. Report of the Secretary and Director-in-Chief [New York Bot. Gard.]
for the year 1919. Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 10: 213-306. 1920.— Contains a general report
and special reports of assistants, curators, etc., as well as the financial reports. — E. A. Bessey.

972. Durrant, R. G. Ions in solution. School Sci. Rev. [London] 1: 7-11. 1919.—
Arrhenius recently said ionic dissociation theory holds field against all others. Its impor-
tance is such that reference to it should be made in regular elementary laboratory work.—
.4. Gundersen.

973. Evans, E. Price. Local ecology as a basis of school botany. School. Sci. Rev. [Lon-
don] 1: 113-122. June, 1919. — The physiographic ecology of a region near Durham, England,
is presented as a possible basis for the botany courses of the secondary schools. The region
affords many different types of vegetation. The presentation of the subject is somewhat
advanced. — Norman Taylor.

140 CYTOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

974. Owen, J. H. School natural history societies. I. Felsted School Scientific Society.
School Sci. Rev. [London] 1 : 42-44. 1919. — This society was founded in 1877 and has sections
in botany, geology, ornithology and other subjects. — A. Gundersen.

975. Whitney, W. Science of plant life. [Rev. of: Transeatj, E. N. Science of plant
life. 386 p., 194 fig. World Book Co.: Yonkers-on-Hudson, New York, 1919.] Plant World
22:248-249. 1919.

CYTOLOGY

Gilbert M. Smith, Editor
G. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor

976. Adams, J. F. Sexual fusions and development of the sexual organs in the Perider-
miums. Pennsylvania Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 160: 31-76. 5 pi. (1919.) 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1214.

977. Allen, Charles E. The basis of sex inheritance in Sphaerocarpos. Proc. Amer.
Phil. Soc. 58: 289-316. 28 jig. 1919. — Plants of Sphaerocarpos Donnellii were successfully
cultivated under greenhouse conditions in pots kept in a Wardian case. Although modifica-
tions in the form of the thallus occur when plants are grown under cultivation, the changes
brought about by environmental conditions do not bring about any loss of function on the part
of the sex organs or of the gametes. Fertilization was easily secured and sporophytes were
formed in abundance. Spores of S. Donnellii invariably remained united in tetrads. The
differences which distinguish female from male plants result from differences in the spores that
are to give rise to them. Of the spores formed by the division of a single mother cell, two bear
female potentialities and two male potentialities. There was found to be no marked differ-
ence between female producing and male producing spores in their capacity for germination,
but a difference in the rate of germination was noted. Cells of the female gametophyte gave
eight chromosomes, of which one is much longer and thicker than any of the others; the
remaining seven differ in length among themselves. Seven of the chromosomes of the male
also vary in length among themselves and seem to correspond to the seven smaller ones of
the female; the eighth chromosome of the male is very small. Of the four nuclei formed in
the spore mother cell, two sister nuclei and spores receive a large chromosome each. Since
the large chromosome is always present in the cells of the female and never in those of the
male, a spore receiving a large chromosome necessarily develops into a female gametophyte;
a spore receiving a small chromosome develops into a male gametophyte. The sex chromo-
somes of Sphaerocarpos are compared to the X and Y chromosomes of animals, the female
possessing in this case an X element, and the male a Y element. The size differences between
plants of opposite sex are determined by the difference in chromosome bulk which influences
the rate of cell growth and cell division. A second category of sex characters results from
other, still unknown, specific peculiarities of the sex chromosomes. [See also Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 486.] — Wanda Weniger.

978. Bezssonoff. Sur l'obtention experimentale de la sexualite chez les champignons et
orientee sur la structure typique du plasma sexuel. [On the initiation of sexual reproduction
in fungi by experimental means, and the existence of a cytoplasmic structure peculiar to the
sexual process.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 288-290. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 1344.

979. Bryan, Geo. S. The fusion of the ventral canal cell and egg in Sphagnum subse-
cundum. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 223-230. 2 pi. 1920. — Author reviews briefly the literature
dealing with the archegonium of Sphagnum, with special reference to the egg and the ventral
canal cell. The ventral canal cell regularly persists and is very variable in size. Its proto-
plast and that of the egg round off and the wall between them disintegrates, the two cells
thus lying side by side in the venter of the archegonium. In a number of cases, in material

No. 3, December, 1920] CYTOLOGY 141

collected in December, :i fusion was discovered not only between these two protoplasts but
also between their nuclei. The behavior of the chromatin could not be clearly seen, but the
chromatic material from the two nuclei seemed to be more or le - intermingled. Cases were
found where the ventral canal cell hud disintegrated; in other instances the eg^ had disinte-
grated and the ventral canal cell remained functional. — E. It'. Sinnott.

980. Carter, Nellie. Studies on the chloroplastids of Desmids III. X. The chloro-
plasts of Cosmarim. Ann. Botany 34: 265-286. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1191.

9S1. Conklix, E. G. The mechanism of evolution. Sci. Monthly 10: 496-515. 1920.—
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1987.

982. Dangeard, Pierre. Sur devolution du systeme vacuolaire chez les Gymnospermes.
[The development of the vacuoles in Gymnosperms.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
474-477. 8 fig. 1920. — Larix europca, Taxus baccata, and Gingko biloba were studied in liv-
ing condition by means of intravital stains. Vacuomes, spheromes and plastidomes may be
found in the same living cell. An especial study is made of the vacuome in which metachro-
matin exists in young cells as grains which enlarge and fuse into a network which may be
spread throughout the cytoplasm. From this network are later formed the vacuoles. — C. H.
and W. K. Farr.

983. Dangeard, P.-A. Plastidome, vacuome et spherome dans Selaginella Kraussiana.
[Plastidomes, vacuomes and spheromes of Selaginella Kraussiana.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 170: 301-306. 1 pi. 1920. — The author, as in earlier writings, distinguishes three types
of structures which are usually referred to as mitochondria or chondriosomes: namely, plas-
tidomes, vacuomes and spheromes. All are stained black by iron haematoxylin. Selaginella
affords excellent material for the study because of the few large chloroplasts. The chloro-
plast arises from a small band lying appressed to the nuclear membrane, which stains deeply
with iron haematoxylin and divides just prior to cell-division. Successive divisions of this
band, which is called the "mitoplast," give rise to several chloroplasts. Mitoplasts are
found in meristematic tissue, young leaves, cortex of the stem, vascular tissue, root tips, and
in the primordia of sporangia. — In the vacuoles are metachromatic corpuscles which com-
pose the vacuome. They react to the Regaud stain in the same way as do the mitoplasts.
As the vacuoles fuse in the maturing of the cells the vacuomes may remain single or group
themselves into chains or ribbons. They, however, always remain within the vacuole though
the vacuolar membrane may not, in some instances, be readily distinguishable. — The spher-
omes are composed of ordinary microsomes isolated or associated in pairs or even chains.
They are never enclosed within a vacuole. — The cytoplasm of old cells is differentiated into
fibrils along which the microsomes migrate. These fibrils may, therefore, appear to be of
the nature of mitochrondria and have been referred to erroneously as chondrioconts. The
author is in favor of discarding the terms mitochondria, chondriosomes, chondrioconts, and
chondriomites, and substituting the terms vacuomes (metachromes and metachromatic
corpuscles), plastidomes (mitoplasts and plastids), spheromes (microsomes) and fibrils of
the cytoplasm, which he considers have more precise significance. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

984. Emberger, L. Evolution du chrondriome chez les cryptogames vasculaires. [The
development of chondriosomes in vascular cryptogams.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
282-284. 5 fig. 1920. — Two types of mitochondria are found in the root of Athyrium Filix-
femina, which differ slightly in the intensity of their staining reaction and in their size. One
gives rise to plastids, the function of the other is unknown. The author prefers to apply the
term mitochondria to the plastid-forming bodies as well as to those structures whose func-
tion is at present unknown. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

985. Emberger, L. Evolution du chrondriome dans la formation du sporange chez les
fougeres. [The history of the chondriosome during the formation of the sporangium of the
ferns.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 469-471. 7 fig. 1920.— In young sporangia of

142 CYTOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

Scolopendrium vulgare, and Asplenium Ruta-muraria are found lenticular and rod-shaped
chloroplasts, chondriocontes and granular mitochondria. In the spore mother-cells the
chloroplasts undergo transformation into chondriocontes which stain more deeply in later
stages. Chondriomites are also present at this stage. The chondriocontes dissociate into
mitochondrial granules before the reduction division begins, which persist throughout these
divisions as granular chondriosomes. In the spore they give rise to chloroplasts and mito-
chondrial bodies of various forms. There thus occurs during spore-formation a mitochondrial
reversibility. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

986. Evans, Arthur T. Embryo sac and embryo of Pentstemon secundiflorus. Bot.
Gaz. 67: 427-437. 1 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 996.

987. Falqui, G. II processo di fecondazione nella Thelisia planifolia (Mill) Mattei. [Fer-
tilization in Thelisia planifolia (Mill) Mattei.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Italiano 26: 221-234. 1919.
— Observations show that Thelisia planifolia is malacophilous and reproduces asexually by
means of bubils, which germinate in the fall and give rise to new plants. — Ernst Artschwager.

988. Foster, Nathan. Colloids and living phenomena. Sci. Monthly 9: 465-473. 9 fig.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1396.

989. Gabd, Mederic. Division chez Euglena limosa Gard. [The cell-division of Euglena
limosa Gard.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 291-292. 1920. Cytokinesis in this spe-
cies is by internal cell-division rather than by a simple longitudinal splitting. The 4, 8, 16
or even 32 daughter cells remain as irregular masses within the membrane of the old mother
cell. They may be arranged in either one or two planes, and each contain a nucleus, a primi-
tive chloroplast, some pyrenoids, and much starch. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

990. Graham, Margaret. Centrosomes in fertilization stages of Preissia quadrata
(Scop.) Nees. Ann. Botany 32: 415-420. PI. 10. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1037.

991. Guilliermond, A. Sur les elements figures du cytoplasme. [The structural ele-
ments of the cytoplasm.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 612-615. 5 fig. 1920. Bodies
of mitochondrial form are described in the leaves of Iris germanica. These bodies swell,
anastomose and form a network which finally becomes transformed into vacuoles. The author
disagrees with Dangeard, contending that these bodies are not metachromatic in nature
and that they differ in their development and in their microchemical reactions from the chon-
driosomes of animals. However, there are two types of mitochondria in Iris germanica;
chondriocontes which assimilate starch in young leaves and later form plastids, and mitochon-
dria of a non-assimilating nature. Besides these bodies there are small globules, probably
lipoid in nature, which have nothing in common with chondriosomes. — C. H. and W. K.
Farr.

992. Guilliermond, A. Sur devolution du chondriome dans la cellule vegetale. [The
evolution of the chondriome in the vegetable cell.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 194-
197. 4 fig. 1920. — In the study of the root of pumpkin (Cucurbita pepo) it is found that the
chondriocontes produce composite grains of starch. The granular mitochondria in the same
cells do not seem to perform this function although they appear to be morphologically and
microchemically identical. A similar physiological differentiation occurs in the perianth of
the tulip. In the white variety of tulips (Tidipa sp.) the chondriocontes stain more heavily
than the granular mitochondria. In the jrellow varieties the chondriocontes produce
xanthophyll.— C. H. and W. K. Farr.

993. Hegner, Robert W. The relations between nuclear number, chromatin mass,
cytoplasmic mass and shell characteristics in four species of the genus Arcella. Jour. Exp.
Zool. 30: 1-95. 47 fig. Jan. 5, 1920— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 602.

No. 3, DaCBMBBB, 1920] CYTOLOGY 143

994. ELeqneb, Robert W. The effects of environmental factors upon the heritable char-
acteristics of Arcella dentata and A. polypora. Jour. Exp. Zool. 29: 427-441. 7 fig. Nov. 20,
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 801.

995. Jones, D. F. Selective fertilization in pollen mixtures. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci.
U. S. 6- 66-70. / tabic. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1700.

996. Kbbnh, M. Lucille. Studies of zygospore formation in Phycomyces nitens Kunze.
Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 19: 1196-1219. 3 pi. 17 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry
1950.

997. Mangenot, G. Sur revolution du chondriome et des plastes chez les Fucacees.
[The evolution of chondriomes and plastids in the Fucaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acid. Sci. Paris
170: 200-201. 1 fig. 1920. — Mitochondria and small phaeoplasts are found in all stages of
the development of the oogonium and the formation of the oosphere, and also in the fertilized
egg and the embryo. It thus appears that the phaeoplasts persist throughout the entire
life-cycle in Funis, although in young tissues and reproductive organs they are smaller and
more sensitive to reagents. Fucosane is present at all stages except, perhaps, during the early
development of the oogonium. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

99S. Mascre, M. Sur le role de l'assise nourriciere du pollen. [The role of the tapetum
in pollen.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1120-1122. 4 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 1S98.

999. Mirande, Robert. Sur le carmin alune et son emploi, combine avec celui du vert
d'iode, en histologie vegetale. [Carmine-alum and its use as a counter stain with iodine green.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 197-199. 1920. — The author finds that carmine-alum is
not a stain for cellulose but stains pectic bodies. This conclusion is based upon the failure of
carmine-alum to stain either cellulose fibers, such as those of cotton, or tissues from the cell-
walls from which pectic materials have been extracted. On the other hand it does stain macer-
ated portions of carrot or filaments of certain algae, such as Cladophora and the Siphonales.
The author also holds that the staining of delignified tissues by iodine-green is to be attrib-
uted to the presence of pectic substances. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1000. Moreau, Fernand. Notions de technique microscopique. — Application a l'etude
des champignons. [Rudiments of microscopical technique. Its application to the study of
fungi.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Mycol. France 34: 137-191. 35 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4,
Entry 1131.

1001. O'Neal, Claude E. Microsporogenesis in Datura Stramonium. Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club 47: 231-241. 2 pi. 1920. — In Datura Stramonium, a favorable plant for cytological
investigation, the bivalent chromosomes are cut from the spirem thread as loops, which may
take on twisted forms, circles, or the U-shape. The bivalents are twelve in number and retain
their individuality very strikingly until the telophase of the second division. No physical
basis was found for occurrence of mutants nor for the Mendelian characters studied by other
workers. — P. A. Mum.

1002. Parmenter, Charles L. The chromosomes of parthenogenetic frogs. Jour. Gen.
Physiol. 2: 205-206. Jan. 20, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 694.

1003. Parmenter, Charles L. Chromosome number and pairs in the somatic mitoses of
Ambystoma tigrinum. Jour. Morph. 33: 169-249. 9 pi. Dec. 20, 1919.— See Bot, Absts. 4,
Entry 093.

1004. Smith, Bertram G. The individuality of the germ-nuclei during the cleavage of
the egg of Cryptobranchus allegheniensis. Biol. Bull. 37: 246-2S6. 9 pi. Oct., 1919.— See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 771.

144 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1005. Stevens, Neil E. The development of the endosperm in Vaccinium corymbosum.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 46: 465-468. 4 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 991.

1006. Stomps, Theo. J. Gigas-mutation mit und ohne Verdoppelung der Chromosomen-
zahl. [Gigas mutation with and without doubling of the chromosome number.] Zeitschr.
indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 65-90. 3 pl., 4 fig. July, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 778.

1007. Stork, Harvey E. Studies in the genus Taraxacum. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:
199-210. 2 pl. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1770.

1008. Tischler, G. Untersuchungen uber den anatomischen Bau der Staub- und Frucht-
blatter bei Lythrum Salicaria mit Beziehung auf das Illegitimitatsproblem. [Studies of the ana-
tomical structure of the stamens and carpels in Lythrum Salicaria with reference to the problem
of illegitimacy.] Flora 11, 12 (Festschrift Stahl) : 162-192. 1918— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry
788.

1009. Tower, W. L. The mechanism of evolution in Leptinotarsa. Carnegie Inst. Wash-
ington Publ. 263. viii + 384 p., 19 pi., 161 fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 794.

1010. Woodburn, William L. Preliminary notes on the embryology of Reboulia hemi-
sphaerica. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 46: 461-464. PI. 19. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1045.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor

1011. Acosta, Celsa. Coleccion de maderas cubanas. [Collection of Cuban woods.]
Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 55. 1920. — The Agric. Exp. Sta. of Cuba is said to have a nearly
complete collection of the woods (about 500) of Cuba. Thirteen of these are described in this
article as to specific weight and common uses. — F. M. Blodgett.

1012 Algan, H. [Rev. of: Hupfel, G. Economie forestiere. [Forest economy.] Vol.
II, 2nd ed. 502 p., 131 fig. 1919.] Bull Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13:
170-176. 1920.

1013. Anonymous. Delits forestiers au XVIIF siecle. [Forest trespasses in the eighteenth
century.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 168-170. 1920.— A study
of the court records of Luxeuil between 1730 and 1760 indicates that forest trespasses in the
eighteenth century differed remarkably little from those of today. Judgments were rendered
in accordance with the celebrated ordinance of 1669, the severity of which was, however, con-
siderably tempered in actual practice. — S. T. Dana.

1014. Anonymous. La legende de Devoluy. [The legend of Devoluy.] Rev. Eaux et
Forets 58: 66-68. 1920. — The canton of Devoluy has been cited by numerous authors as a
classic example of the disastrous results of deforestation, which they assume to have taken
place toward the end of the eighteenth century, at about the time of the French Revolution.
A careful study by M. Philippe Arbos has shown that this is not the case; that the deforesta-
tion of the canton (if, indeed, it was ever wooded) dates back at least to the end of the seven-
teenth century; and that erosion was active as far back as 1458. The canton does not appear
to have suffered so severely as some of its neighbors. It has decreased less in population,
agriculture has picked up somewhat, and the number of stock in relation to the population
has increased considerably. — S. T. Dana.

1015. Anonymous. Naturschutz. [Preservation of natural sites.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
41 : 333-336. 1919. — There is danger, lest, with the extensive cultivation of moor and waste

No. 3, December, 1920] PORESTB 145

lands now under way, certain wild sites of great aesthetic and scientific value may be
destroyed. Preservation of some of the moors is of especial importance for research in zool-
ogy, botany, and geology. Steps have already been taken to reserve cull ivation or affor-
estation some areas of particular scientific interest, such as two moors containing the dwarf
birch (a relic of the ice-age), and various other small moors. Some other waste lands should
also be preserved in their wild state — notably the "pontine hills," which have a steppe flora
left from the ice-age, composed of such species as Stipa pennata, S. capillata, Adonis vernalis,
Pruuits friiticosa, Coronilla varia and Astragalus. These areas are so small in relation to the
total area of moor and waste land that no economic loss will result from their reservation. —
W. N. Sparhawk.

101G. Anonymous. Production de bois apres guerre. [Wood production after the war.]
Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 162-165. 1920. — A recent report
(reprinted in full) by M. Dabat, Director-General of Waters and Forests, emphasizes the
urgent need for the increased production of saw timber. In order to relieve the present situa-
tion as quickly as possible he suggests the development of transportation facilities in the less
accessible forests and the utilization of the enormous forest resources of the French colonies.
The latter involves the education of consumers in regard to the technical qualities of colonial
woods, standardization of nomenclature, and revision of the tariff so that the more common
colonial woods will not be taxed at the same rate as the more precious ones. Measures which
will not yield tangible results for some time include lengthening the rotation of coppice stands;
maintaining a larger number of reserves in coppice under standards; converting coppice
under standards into high forest; converting hardwood coppice of poor yield into coniferous
stands, particularly in mountainous regions and on poor soils; reforestation of unproductive
lands; and the purchase of forests by the State, communities, and public service corporations
with a view to managing them for the production of saw timber. M. Dabat also urges that
the State assist private owners in the handling of their forests; that a service be created for
the study of forest statistics and forest economics, as well as of the technical qualities and
uses of native, colonial, and foreign woods; and that forest experiment stations be organized
under the direction of the National School of Waters and Forests. — Nothing but commenda-
tion can be given to the program proposed by M. Dabat. But to carry out such a program
and to practice the intensive silviculture which it contemplates, requires men as well as
good intentions. It will therefore remain merely a dead letter if the administration persists
in its present tendency to decrease, rather than to increase, the forest personnel. — S. T.
Dana.

1017. Anonymous. Skovenes Udbytte 1918-1919. [Total receipts and amount cut in the
forests, 1918-19, Denmark.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 135-138. 1920.— The total cut
from the Danish State forests during the fiscal year 1918-19 is given as 268,948 cubic meters
of material; about 20 per cent above the average cut. The total net receipts amounted to
4,318,341 crowns. The total forest area is 57,118 hectares and of this the non-producing area
17,439 hectares. The net receipts for the total forest area is given as 72.45 crowns per hec-
tare; in some cases this was as high as 329.27 crowns. On the basis of the valuation four
working circles yielded above 15 per cent interest, three above 10 per cent and eight above
6 per cent; there being in all twenty circles in the producing forest area. (One hectare is 2.47
acres and one crown usually 28 cents.) — J. A. Larsen.

1018. Boas, L. H. The possibilities of paper making in Australia. Australian Forest.
Jour. 3: 106-107. 1920. — A plea for a careful study of the pulp and paper industry and its
establishment in Australia. — C. F. Korstian.

1019. Boas, L. H. Some lines of forest product research in Australia. Australian Forest.
Jour. 3: 75-77. 1920. — The author believes that the most fundamental line of forest research
needed in Australia today is a complete investigation of the mechanical properties of all
timbers likely to be of commercial value. — C. F. Korstian.

146 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VI,

1020. Buffault, PiebBe. L'evolution forestiere, a propos de la reorganization interieure
du service des eaux et forets. [The evolution of the forester.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 57-60.
1920. — Forest officers should not confine themselves to the management of the public forests
and the supervision of fishing. It is of constantly increasing importance that they should
also assist private owners and communities in the handling of their forest lands; secure at
least approximate information regarding the resources of those forests not submitted to the
forest regime; keep more closely in touch with market conditions and the wood-using indus-
tries; and encourage the development of fish culture. These functions are already being exer-
cised by a number of foresters on their own initiative with excellent results, and should be
taken into consideration in connection with the proposed reorganization of the forest service.
—S. T. Dana.

1021. Cannon, D. Le Douglas. [Douglas fir.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 80. 1920.—
Douglas fir is not particularly exacting in its demands on soil fertility and prefers siliceous to
clayey, and especially to calcareous, soils. As a general rule exotics should be planted on
the best available sites and given considerable attention, particularly when young. — 5. T.
Dana.

1022. Cabdot, E. La reconstitution forestiere. [Forest reconstruction.] Rev. Eaux et
Forets 58: 89-92. 1920. — Extracts are given from the preface to "Etudes sur l'Amenagement
des Forets," by L. Tassy, written shortly after the Franco-Prussian war. The principal
conclusions to be drawn from these extracts are that the national forests should be improved
(notably by the conversion of coppice into high forest) and enlarged, and that adequate
appropriation for the work should be made. These conclusions are equally applicable today
in considering the problem of repairing the damages to French forests caused by the recent
war. — S. T. Dana.

1023. Cubtis, Otis F. The upward translocation of food in woody plants. II. Is there
normally an upward transfer of storage foods from the roots of trunk to the growing shoots?
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 286-293. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1310.

1024. de la Hamelinaye, H. Valeur d'avenir des baliveaux. [Future value of reserves.]
Rev. Eaux et Forets 58 : 37-39. 1920.— The future value of reserves in coppice under standards
is of great importance in evaluating the damages in areas devastated by the war. The value
of trees of the same age in stands handled under the same rotation varies considerabby accord-
ing to the fertility of the site and the vigor of the trees. A detailed example is given of the
method of calculation used by the author. — S. T. Dana.

1025. Gill, Walteb. Annual progress report upon state forest administration in South
Australia for the year ended June 30, 1919. 12 p., 6 pi., 2 maps. Woods and Forests Dept.
South Australia, 1919.— This is the regular administrative report of the Department for the
period mentioned. It is reported that, of 392,860 trees planted, an average of 90.25 per cent
were alive at the close of the year, the greater part being eucalypts and pines. Pinus pon-
derosa was planted in the Second Valley Forest, with a notable survival. The year showed
an excess of receipts over expenditures.— C. F. Korstian,

1026. Gtjyot, Ch. Deux devises de politique forestiere. [Two schools of forest policy.]
Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 25-28. 1920.— In a recent article in the same serial, M. Raux advo-
cated the public control of private cuttings. Under pretext of conserving the public interest
he would destroy, without compensation and at the expense of the owner, the very essence
of private property, namely, the right of the owner to dispose of his forest as he sees fit. The
days when kings exercised complete control over the property of their subjects are past.
Today the citizen in France is regarded as capable of managing his own affairs. Whenever
the public interest demands the placing of certain restrictions on the right of property, these
restrictions must be accompanied by just compensation. Such control as M. Raux suggests
would be vigorously opposed by private owners. Many of these already manage their forest

No. 3, December, 1920] FORESTRY 147

lands as well as the State, and the greal majority arc ready to follow voluntarily the example
set by the public forests. Private owners are not responsible for their failure so far to take
advantage of the law of July 2, 1913, permitting them to place their land- under the tech-
nical direction of the State. The regulations recently issued providing for the execution of
this law will make it possible for all who care to do so to take advantage of it. — The Unfor-
tunate lowering in 1900 of the penalties for forest trespasses was primarily the work of a
politician of the "authoritative" school, and cannot be charged to the advocates of a "lib-
eral" forest policy. To withdraw the control over fishing bestowed upon the Administration
of Waters and Forests in 1890, as proposed by M. Raux in order to make available a larger
personnel for the carrying into effect of State control of private lands, would be a step in the
wrong direction. — S. T. Dana.

1027. Guyot, Ch. Jurisprudence. [Legal matters.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 9-14.
1920. — Discusses the application of certain provisions of the Code Forestier and of the law
of April 7, 1851, to the clearing of land in which both the Forest Service and the Engineer
Corps are interested. [See also next following Entry, 1028.] — S. T. Dana.

1028. Guyot, Ch. Jurisprudence. [Legal matters.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 40-41.
1920. — A forest owner is responsible for damage done by rabbits to neighboring property when
he has not taken sufficient measures to restrict the rabbits in his forest to a normal number.
[See also next preceding Entry, 1027.] — S. T. Dana.

1029. Haugh, L. A. Barkens likenbevoksning som udtryk for bogens vaekst. [Develop-
ment of lichens on the bark of beech — an index to growth.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5:
86-91. 1 -pi. 1920. — The author quotes O. Galloe in saying that the development of lichens
in beech forests depends largely upon the amount of available light in late winter and spring,
that growth of lichens is largely absent from young beeches which hold their dead leaves over
winter, and that soil rich in organic mould and earthworms does not favor the growth of
lichens on the ground because of the constant turning over of the leaves, etc. The author
states his own conclusions in saying that the optimum sites for the growth of beech are poor
in lichen growth because the trees grow rapidly thereby shedding the outer layers of bark
often, and because the denser stands allow insufficient light. In an ordinary forest the
slower growing trees carry more lichens.— J. A. Larsen.

1030. Hickel. Le douglas en France. [Douglas fir in France.] Rev. Eaux et Forets
58: 5-8. 1920. — Douglas fir (the "green" variety) is less exacting in its soil requirements
than indicated by Hubault in a previous issue of the same serial. It has no aversion to
calcareous soils, does not suffer from late spring frosts, but will stand neither overhead shade
nor the competition of herbaceos vegetation. It does best in western France, but thrives
in many other parts of the country. Few species, and certainly no native one, can rival it
in rate of growth. It is reproduced more easily than Scotch pine, forms denser stands, and
produces a superior wood. It should be tried out in the reforestation of devastated areas. —
S. T. Dana.

1031. Jagerschmidt, J. L'exploitation des coupes en regie en Alsace et en Lorraine.
[Logging by the forest administration in Alsace and Lorraine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 29-36.
1920. — Logging by the forest adminstration has been the rule for many years in Alsace and
Lorraine, in forests submitted to the forest regime. It has given excellent results from a
financial point of view, by doing away with middlemen, and has reduced trespasses by mak-
ing it possible for local residents to obtain small quantities of sawtirnber and fuel at reason-
able prices. A somewhat detailed account is given of the handling of woods labor, the keep-
ing of accounts, and the making of sales. — S. T. Dana.

1032. Jones, Owen. Soil fertility: Can it be preserved in Australian forests? Australian
Forest. Jour. 3: 71-72. 1920. — The author offers three proposals: (1) Prevent of forest fires.
(2) Underplant eucalypts with some shade-enduring species to act as a soil cover, and inci-

148 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

dentally to clean and force them up. (3) Confine eucalypts to areas where soil and climatic
conditions are most favorable utilizing poor areas for species better calculated to preserve
or improve soil fertility. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1044.] — C. F. Korstian.

1033. Kashyap, S. R. Abnormal number of needles in the spurs of Pinus longifolia.
Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 115-119. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1894.

1034. Kreitmann, L. La conversion de la foret domaniale de Montiers-sur-Saulx. [The
conversion of the national forest of Montiers-sur-Saulx.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 93-99. 1920.
— Prior to 1868 the national forest of Montiers-sur-Saulx was handled as coppice under stan-
dards, with a rotation of 25 to 30 years. In that year plans were made to improve the quality
and yield of the stand by converting it into high forest. These plans were not carried out,
however, and the forest is now in a deplorable condition, with few trees suitable for the pro-
duction of satisfactory standards. If the forest is not to be completely ruined it is necessary
that steps be taken at once to convert it into high forest, for which it is preeminenlty suited
both by the quality of the soil and by the value of the products that it can produce. A rota-
tion of 112 years should be used and preference should be given to beech, which does remark-
ably well here. In some cases artificial reforestation will be necessary for the establishment
of a satisfactory stand. — S. T. Dana.

1035. Lecomte, Henri. Atlas des bois de l'Indo-Chine. [Atlas of Indo-Chinese woods.]
[Author's Abstract.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 162-263. 1920.

1036. Lescuyer, Pierre. Quelques reflexions sur le calcul des pertes d'avenir. [The

calculation of future losses.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13: 166-

168. 1920. — In calculating the damage to stands or to individual trees resulting from their

1 . opm - 1

premature exploitation, some foresters use the formula x = R , others the formula

R l.op"-l

x = -, ^^- The second formula alwavs g'.ves a larger result, since, as is demonstrated

1 . opa m

mathematically, it includes not only the future value of the tree or stand but also the expense
of management. The first formula is generally to be preferred, both because it confines it-
self simply to determining the future value of the prematurely exploited stand or tree without
attempting to determine what will succeed it, and because it is doubtful whether there really
is any expense of management in the case of one or a few isolated trees. — 5. T. Dana.

1037. Lorenzex, Potjl. 100-Aarig Adelgran paa Bornholm. [100-year noble fir (Abies
pectinata) on Bornholm, Denmark.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 92-101. 1 pi. 1920.
— A plantation made one hundred years ago yielded 1010 cubic meters of wood per hectare;
the average diameter was 37 cm., the average height 32 meters and the total basal area 59.8
square meters. — J. A. Larsen.

1038. Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 116-119. 1920.—
The first installment of a serial article, briefly discussing past and present forest resources of
Victoria and their economic significance. — C. F. Korstian.

1039. Mattirolo, Oreste. Considerazioni sulla convenienza dell'impiego del legno in
specie nella costruzione dei "lungheroni d'ala" degli aeroplani. [Use of wood in aeroplane-wing
frames.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei, Rend. (CI. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 281: 249-253. 1919.— Observa-
tions made on wooden parts of broken aeroplanes indicate that weakness was due to irregular
growth of the tree not made evident by the tests in use. Ash wood (Fraxinus excelsior Linn.)
adjacent to breaks was easily separable into hard granules, these granules being apparently
made up of elements characteristic of spring growth. The conclusion is reached that some
material of more uniform texture than wood must be found for this use. — F. M. Blodgett.

1040. Metcalf, Woodbridge. A precocious youngster. Amer. Forestry 26: 15. 1 fig.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1899.

No. 3, December, 1920] forestry 140

1041. PeedRizet, A. Taillis et futaie. [Coppice and high foiest.) Rev. Eaux et Forets
58:2-1. 1920. — The rotation of all coppice stands owned by the si iuld be lengthened,

or else they should be converted into high forest as rapidly as possible, in order to produce a
larger proportion of sawtimber. This will involve a certain loss in revenue, which can be
minimized, however, if the state will do its own logging. — S. T. Dana.

1042. Ross, C. R. Annual report of the Forest Department for the year ending 31st March,
1919, including report on railway sleeper plantations for the same period. 34 P- Forest Dept.
Union of South Africa, 1919. — This is the usual administrative report for the period. The
extension and constitution of state forests, management of state forests, financial results,
timber imports and exports and general administration are discussed. The protection of
forests is given considerable attention especially with respect to insects, fungous diseases,
animals and climatic causes. Silviculture is treated rather extensively under the heads of
Natural reproduction, Artificial reproduction, Drift sands operation, Cultural operations,
Sylvicultural notes and Trial of new species. Detailed information is given on the railway-
sleeper plantations. — C. F. Korstian.

1043. Schlich, Sir Wm. The Bagley Wood sample plots. Quart. Jour. Forest. 13: 266-
268. 1919. — Ten experimental plots of important economic forest trees now 10 to 12 years of
age, in Bagley Wood (Oxford, England), afford a rather interesting comparison of height and
volume growth. The trees and their total average height growth were: Douglas fir (Pacific
Coast form), 32 feet; western hemlock, 23 feet; western red cedar, 23 feet; Sitka spruce, 26
feet; Japanese larch, 22 feet; Tyrolese larch, 26 feet; Corsican pine, 21 feet; white pine, 19 feet;
Douglas fir (Colorado form), 16 feet; and Norway spruce, 15 feet. The trees were all spaced
4X4 feet with the exception of Corsican pine, wThich was spaced 3X3 feet. The annual vol-
ume production varies from 306 to 85 cubic feet and follows closely the height growth, with
the exception of Corsican and white pines. The annual volume increment of Corsican pine is
out of proportion to its height growth because of its close spacing, and white pine has devel-
oped an exceptionally large diameter considering its comparatively moderate height growth.
— C. R. fillotson.

1044. Stoate, P. N. The eucalypts in relation to soil fertility. Australian Forest. Jour.
3: 112-113. 1920. — A reply to a paper by Owen Jones (Bot. Absts.), controverting Jones'
proposals. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1032.] — C. F. Korstian.

1045. Vestergaard, N. Adelgran i Jaderborg Dyrehave. [Noble fir (Abres pectinata?)
in Jaderborg game reserve, Denmark.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 81-86. 4 pi. 1920.
— The last trees from three groups of plantations set out in 1765 have been cut. The largest
tree measured 1.27 meters in diameter, at breast height, 40.7 m. in height and contained 21.4
cubic meters of wood. — J. A. Larsen.

1046. Weis, Fr. Om Godkning i Skoven. [Fertilization of forest soils.] Dansk Skov-
forenings Tidsskr. 5: 102-131. 1920. — A discussion of the needs, means, methods and advan-
tages of fertilizing forest soils for greater production of material. — /. A. Larsen.

1047. Wild. Das iibliche Sprichwort "der erste Wald taugt nichts" trifft nicht immerzu.
[The proverb "the first forest is good for nothing" not always true.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 41:
440. 1919. — Actual yield of 80-year-old stand of spruce, which originated from broadcasting
seed on an old field (Germany), was 973.75 cu. m. per hectare, or a mean annual growth of 12.17
cu. m. per annum. Average middle diameter was 27 cm., average length of stem 26 m. —
W. N. Sparhawk.

1048. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. VII. The beeches. Garden Mag. 31:
115-119. 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 0, Entry 1471.

150 GENETICS IBot. Absts., Vol. VI,

GENETICS

George H. Shull, Editor
James P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

1049. Allendorf and Ehrenberg. Die Aufgaben des Sonderausschusses fiir Zucker-
rtibenbau. [Special problems of sugar-beet breeding.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 1919:
531-534. 1919. — Breeders are urged to produce a higher-yielding beet without raising salt-
content or lowering sugar-content; or with only a small lowering of the latter. Effects of
closest inbreeding should be tested out. For distilleries a beet high in salt and protein might
be bred. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 112. Dec, 1919.] — J. P.
Kelly.

1050. Anonymous. Polnische Getreide- und Kartoffelzuchtgesellschaft. [Polish grain
and potato breeders association.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 116-117. June, 1918.

1051. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Correns. C. Ein Fall experimenteller Verschie-
bung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. (A case of experimental shifting of the sex ratio.) Sitz-
ungsbericht. d. k. Preuss. Akad. Wissenschaft. 51:658-717. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht.
6: 98. June, 1918.

1052. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Havas, G. Rendellenessegek a kozonseges ken-
deren, Cannabis sativa L. var. monophylla. (Dwarf hemp plants due to inbreeding.) Kize>-
letiigyi Kozlemenyek Jahrb. 1916: 712-717. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 99. June,
1918.

1053. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Kraus, C. Untersuchungen iiber die Vererbungs-
verhaltnisse bei Nachkommenschaften reiner Linien. (Studies on inheritance ratios in prog-
enies of pure lines.) Fiihlings Landw. Zeitg. 66: 457-487. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht.
6: 100. June, 1918.

1054. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Lotsy, J. P. L' Oenothera de Lamarck (Oenothera
Lamarckiana de Vries) consideree comme chimere nucleaire. (Lamarck's Oenothera (Oeno-
thera Lamarckiana de Vries) considered as a nuclear chimera.) Arch. Neerland. Sci. Ser. 3:
342-350. 1917. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 439.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 103. June,
1918.

1055. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Mayer-Gmelin, H. Mededeelingen omtrent enkele
kruisings en veredelingsproefnemingen. (Reports on several experiments in crossing and selec-
tion.) Cultura30: 1-19. 4 pi. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 675.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
ziicht. 6: 103-104. June, 1918.

1056. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Terasvuori, K. Uber Finnland feldmassigen
gebaute Erbsenformen. Experimentelle Vererbungsuntersuchungen mit besonderer Beriick-
sichtigung der Anzahl der Samenanlagen und Samen in den Hulsen. (On forms of peas largely
grown in Finland. Genetical studies with special reference to number of ovules and seeds
in the pods.) Acta Soc. pro fauna et flora Fennica 40: 1915.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:
105-106. June, 1918.

1057. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Uber die Farbe des Riibenkrautes friih-
und spatreifender Ruben. (On the color of the plant of early and late-ripening beets.) Zeit-
schr. Zuckerriibenindust. Bohmen 42: 281-297. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 107.
June, 1918.

1058. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Ryx, G. Ein neues Beispiel einer Knospen-
mutation bei den Kartoffeln. (A new example of bud mutation in potatoes.) Deutsch. Land-
wirtsch. Presse 2: 1 fig. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 105. June, 1918.

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 151

105!). Anonymous. [G i rev. of : Z add, A. Der Hafer. Eine Monographic auf wis-

senschaftlicher und praktischer Grundlage. (Oats. A monograph on scientific and practical
principles.) 8vo., 355 p., 32 fin. Fischer: Jena, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 467.)] Zeit-
schr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 107. June, 191^.

1060. Arms r, Ludwio. Messbare phaenotypische und genotypische Instinktver-

anderungen. Bienen und Wespengehirne, neu verglichen und als Mass benutzt in Fragen der
Stammes- und Staatengeschichte sowie Vererbung und Genogenese. Nebst anhang uber
Nomada. [Measurable phenotypic and genorypic changes of instinct. Bee and wasp brains
compared anew and used as a measure in questions of race and state history, as well as heredity
and genogenesis, with an appendix concerning Nomada.] Arch. Bicnenkunde 1: 1—10. 5 pi.
8 fig. 1919.

10(31. Bartos, \Y. Der Einfluss der Veredlung auf den Wert der Rube. [The influence of
breeding on the value of the beet.j Zeitschr. Zuckerind. BGhmcn 42: 299-302. 191S. [Anony-
mous German rev. in: Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 98. June, 1918.

1062. Becker, J. Vererbung gewisser Bliitenmerkmale bei Papaver Rhoeas. [Inheritance
of certain floral characters in Papaver Rhoeas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 215-221. 3 fig.
1918. — Author presents observations on markings at base of petals in case of 40,000 corn pop-
pies. Best developed marking consists of two parts, an inner black fleck usually elongated
radially (designated by +s) which is capped toward outside by wide white spot (4-w). Pet-
als may occur without markings ( — s — w), with black bar only (4-s — w), with white spot
alone ( — s 4-w), or with both markings (4-s 4-w). Possible combinations total 16 since
inner pair of petals may be marked independently of outer petals but only nine of the 16
actually occur, since 4-s and +w appear in outer petals only when they are also in inner pet-
als. 4-s and 4-w may show in inner petals even though lacking in outer. To explain author
postulates two inhibiting factors, Hi, acting only on inner petals, and Hi and Hi affecting
both inner and outer petals; further, that simplex doses of genes for 4-s and 4-w dominate Hi
while duplex combinations are supposed to dominate both Hi and H*. No experimental data
bearing on this hypothesis were obtained. In unfavorable environment all markings are
reduced or absent. — James P. Kelly.

1063. Benders, A. M. Het percentage der verwantenhuwelijken. [The frequency of con-
sanguineous marriages.] Genetica 2: 51-54. Jan., 1920.— Influence of consanguinity of par-
ents upon posterity has always attracted the attention of practical eugenicists, especially in
medicine. It is especially desirable to know the true percentage of consanguineous marriages
among man. Author has made statistical studies; he classifies the patients of some Dutch
institutions of neuropathies according to their religions, into three groups: Protestants,
Catholics and Jews. He found among Protestants the percentage of 2.2, Catholics 1.1,
Dutch-Jews 8.5 and Portuguese-Jews 25.4, this last number being, because of the small total
number, not wholly exact. In the total of inhabitants (30 Protestants : 20 Catholics : 1 Jew)
the percentage of consanguineous marriages in Holland may be stated to be 1.9; probably
this number may be somewhat too high for two reasons: (1) Out of the great number of mar-
riages, the consanguinity of which was unknown and therefore the question in the author's
blanks unanswered, far the greater part will be nonconsanguineous, and (2) Between consan-
guinity of parents and nervous-diseased posterity there may perhaps be some relation, so that
the consanguinity in this material is found in more cases, than between parents of same pos-
terities.— M. J. Sirks.

1064. Blaringhem, L. Couleur et sexe des fleurs. [Color and sex of flowers.] Compt.
Rend. Soc. Biol. 83 : 892-893. June, 1920.

1065. Bolk, L. Hersenen en Cultuur. [Brains and culture.] 63 p., 1 fig. Scheltema en
Holkema's Boekhandel: Amsterdam, 1918. — Various examples are discussed by the writer, that
characteristics of human embryos and those of the chimpanzee are similar, while in later

152 GENETICS IBot. Absts., Vol. VI,

development the chimpanzee changes and gets other appearance, man being more conservative
and fixing the embryonal qualities. From these facts the following conclusion is drawn: "that
the causes of the loss of hairy skin in man, except on the skull, are already at work in the
embryonal development of the Primates. Thus it can not be caused by external influences,
nor by causes appearing for the first time at the moment of origin of man. Then it must be
an internal factor for development at work already in principle in the Primates and reach-
ing in man its maximum of force." This internal factor is cause of man's conservatism, and
this fact is a determined variation. From this, the writer gives as a most far-reaching conse-
quence the opinion, that the series of animals was fated to take its origin and its develop-
ment as it has been taken; there was determined already in the first living organism the future
of man-building. — M. J. Sirks.

1066. Breitenbecher, J. K. The relation of water to the behavior of the potato beetle in
a desert. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 263: 341-384. 5 fig. 1918. — Egg-production is
favored by high humidity. Beetles die if buried while activities are normal, but hibernate
successfully if first somewhat desiccated. Hibernation may be induced by desiccation, except
at low temperatures. Duration of hibernation depends on humidity and temperature, emer-
gence from hibernation requiring moisture and warmth. — A. Franklin Shull.

1067. Cardot, Henry, and Richet, Charles. Heredite, accountumance et variability
dans la fermentation lactique. [Heredity, adaptation and variations in lactic fermentation.]
Ann. Inst. Pasteur 33: 575. Sept., 1919.

1068. Catjli-rabi. A Brassica cross. Gard. Chron. 67: 8. Jan. 3, 1920. — One seed
was presumed to result from a cross between an Autumn Giant cauliflower and a kohlrabi.
The plant from this seed had a large swollen stem like the kohlrabi. The seeds of this
plant, apparently from open pollination, produced plants having swollen stems of different
shapes, but similarly shaped leaves. — John Belling.

1069. C[otjlter], J. M. Sex intergrades. [Rev. of : Yampolsky, Cecil. The occurrence
and inheritance of sex intergradation in plants. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 21-38. Jan., 1920. (See
Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 502.)] Bot. Gaz. 70: 88. July, 1920.

1070. Dalcq, Albert. Note sur la spermatogenese de l'orvet. Aspect nucleaires de la
lignee typique (existence d'un heterochromosome). [Note on the spermatogenesis of the orvet
(Anguis). Nuclear aspects of the typical line (existence of a heterochromosome.] Compt. ReDd.
Soc. Biol. 83: 995-997. 1920.

1071. Dammerman, K. W. On hybrids of Batocera albofasciata and gigas. Tijdschr.
voor entomologie 62: 157-160. 2 pi. 1919.— Some deviating forms of Batocera, partly caught
in the field, partly reared on Ficus-wood, and supposed to be hybrids between Batocera gigas
Drap. and B. albofasciata Degeer, led author to undertake experiments of cross-breeding
between these two species. Small individuals of B. gigas were selected for these experiments,
in order to prevent the difference in size from being a hindrance to crossing. The crosses
were successful; only their number was small, viz., 14 from albofasciata male and gigas female
and 15 from the reciprocal cross. The hybrids differed somewhat, among themselves in
regard to color and design; as regards color they were on the whole intermediate, as regards
design strongly matrocline. Offspring from these Fi-hybrids could not be obtained; they
may be considered as being sterile. However a few descendants could be bred from gigas
male and a female strongly resembling gigas, but with two white spots on the elytra, the
parents of which however were not known. Of these five hybrids thus obtained, 3 were
unspotted, while two of them showed a third spot beside the two maternal spots. — M. J. Sirks.

1072. De Wilde, P. A. Verwantschap en erfelijkheid bij doofstomheid en retinitis pig-
mentosa. [Relationship and heredity in deaf-and-dumbness and retinitis pigmentosa.] Diss.
Amsterdam. 91 p. 1919. — From an extensive investigation of the occurrence of deaf-mute-

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS L53

ness and of retinitis pigmentosa in Holland the following conclusions have been drawn by
the writer: A. Marriages of relal Lves gave three t imes as many cases of deafmuten mar-

riages between non-relatives, if the number of marriages between relatives is taken as being
2 per cent of the total number of marriages; (B) If childless main re eliminated, deaf-

muteness occurs among Protestants in 13.6 per cent, when both parents are deaf-and-dumb;
in 16.3 per cent when one of the parents is deaf-mute. For the Jews these numbers are 42.8
per cent and 33.3 per cent; for the Catholics in both cases 0 per cent; C. Deaf-muteness is
found among Jews in 5.5 times as many cases as within the Christian inhabitant-: D. The
number of childless marriages is greater when both parents are deaf-mute and the number of
children fewer in marriages between two deaf-mutes, than in marriages between deaf-mute
and normal. True congenital deaf-mutes seem to be most frequent among the Jews. — For
retinitis pigmentosa the writer gives these conclusions: A. The male sex is more susceptible
than the female (relation 3:2), a fact already found by Nettleship; B. Out of the marriages
of retinitis-pigmentosa patients 14 per cent are childless; C. The abnormality is most found
among the Jews (6 times as many as might be expected), least among Catholics; D. Of all
patients 22 per cent are born from consanguineous marriages (also found by Leber and Nettle-
ship); E. Direct heredity could be confirmed in 25 per cent of the observed cases; F. Out of
167 patients of retinitis pigmentosa, 14 were also deaf-mutes; of these 14, 6 were born from
consanguineous matings; G. Retinitis and deafness combined were found in 24 cases, of which
7 descended from consanguineous parents; retinitis with deafness as family-character was
observed in 6 cases. — M. J. Sirks.

1073. Dickel, F. Die geschlechtsbildungsweise bei der Honigbiene wie deren grund-
satzliche Bedeutung fur die Geschlechtsbildungs frage iiberhaupt. [The manner of sex deter-
mination in the honey bee and its fundamental significance for the problem of sex determination
in general.] Zeitschr. Wiss. Insektenbiol. 13: 33. 19 — .

1074. Doyer, J. J. Th. Proeve van een onderzoek omtrent het familiair en hereditair voor-
komen van tuberculose volgens de wetenschappelijk-genealogische methode. [Preliminary
researches on the familial and hereditary occurrence of tuberculosis.] Diss. 214 p., 7 genea-
logical trees, and 258 quarter tables. J. B. Wolters: Groningen, 1920. — Author's medical prac-
tice has supplied to him a very extensive material for obtaining deeper insight in the relations
of hereditary dispositions and tuberculosis. The author's studies are not yet decisive as to
the question, whether differences in disposition may be inherited, but his provisional results
show unmistakingly a certain individual disposition for tuberculosis, that may go farther by
inheritance in succeeding generations. Seven genealogical trees and 256 quarter-tables
contain a rich material for his provisional hypothesis. — M. J . Sirks.

1075. Elderton, Ethel M. Life-history albums. Biometrika 12: 373-374. Nov., 1919.

1076. Frets, G. P. De polymerietheorie getoetst aan de erfelijkheid van den hoofdvorm.
[The theory of polymeric factors, tested by heredity of head-form in man.] Genetica 2: 115-136.
Mar., 1920. — The results obtained by the writer in measuring a great number of lengths and
breadths of human skulls, may be explained by accepting, according to the polymery-hypothe-
sis of Nilsson-Ehle, a number (at most 13) of like factors, working in the same direction.
These heritable factors may be identical. The important fact, that the amplitude of varia-
bility, shown by skull-measures of children, moves with the skull-measures of the parents, is
in perfect harmony with the polymery-hypothesis, the experiments of Nilsson-Ehle giving a
solid, though still narrow, basis for this hypothesis. Another explanation could be derived
from the hypothesis of selection, as in its new form defended by Castle. In author's opinion
however, the polymery-hypothesis has a greater degree of probability. — M. J. Sirks.

1077. Frets, G. P. Over de erfelijkheid van den hoofdvorm. [Heredity of head-form in
man.] Handelingen Nederl. Natuur- en Geneeskundig Congres (1919) 17: 350-359. 1920. —
Brachycephalic as also dolichocephalic form of head are hereditary characters. Among brach-
ycephalics must be noted two classes, macrobrachycephalics and microbrachycephalics.

154 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

Macrobrachycephalic form is dominant, dolichocephalic the recessive; dolichocephalic how-
ever is dominant, while microbrachycephalic would be recessive. Perhaps this dominance
is correlated with sex; dolichocephalic form may be dominant in men, brachy cephalic in
women. Besides this sons seem to have a tendency to exhibit the headform of their fathers,
daughters those of their mothers. — M. J. Sirks.

1078. Fruwirth, C. Die gegenwartige Organisation der Pflanzenziichtung in Deutsch-
land und in Osterreich-Ungarn. [The present organization of plant breeding in Germany and
Austria-Hungary.] Nachr. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. Osterr 1919: 35-39. 1919. — After discuss-
ing actual conditions author presents view that creation of original stock of seed, following
breeding, ought not to be work of small farms nor of associations of such. Advantages of
author's methods are pointed out. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:
118. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1079. Fruwirth, C. Allgemeine Ziichtungslehre der landwirtschaftlichen Kulturpflan-
zen. (Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichtung Bd. I. Fiinfte ganzlich neube-
arbeitete Auflage. [General genetics of agricultural plants. (Handbook of agricultural plant-
breeding. Vol.1.) 5th ed., entirely revised.] 8vo, xviii -f- 44® p., 8 pi., 89 fig. Paul Parey:
Berlin, 1920.

1080. Fruwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichtung. II. Die
Ziichtung von Mais, Futterriiben und anderen Ruben, Oelpflanzen und Grasern. [Handbook
of agricultural plant-breeding. II. The breeding of maize, fodder beets and other roots, oil
plants and grasses.] 3rd. ed., 262 p., 50 fig. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918. — In third edition, lar-
ger than second by 60 pages, the sections on fodder beet, maize and other grasses especially
have been rewritten to take account of recent work. Thorough handling of literature is
emphasized. [From author's statement in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 144-145. Dec, 1919.]
—J. P. Kelly.

1081. Fruwirth, C, Th. Roemer, E. von Tschermak. Handbuch der landwirtschaft-
lichen Pflanzenziichtung. 4. Die Ziichtung der vier Hauptgetreidearten und der Zuckerrube.
[Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. Vol. 4. Breeding of the four chief cereals and the
sugar beet.] 3rd ed., 8vo, xv + 504 P-, 4^ fig- Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918. — Most parts of this
new edition of volume 4 are remodelled, especially the hybridization sections, made neces-
sary by the large amount of research of recent years. Recasting of one part has been due also
to there being a new co-author, RoE\fER, who has written section on beets. Enlargement of
present volume is kept within 40 pages by limiting general discussion and making reference
to earlier edition for certain less frequently used portions. [From anonymous statement in
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 145. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1082. Gassner, S. Beitrage zur physiologischen Characteristik sommer- und winteranu-
eller Gewachse, inbesondere der Getreidepflanzen. [Contributions on the physiological char-
acteristics of summer and winter annuals with special reference to the cereals.] Zeitschr. Bot.
10: 417-480. 7 fig., 2 pi. 1918. — Author recalls his earlier experiments showing that with
obligate winter-annual cereals shooting-up in spring requires a cold period during or subse-
quent to germination. In present paper he presents further experimental details. With
Petkus summer-rye there was no after-influence of various temperatures during germination.
Petkus winter-rye, bred from same original population as Petkus summer-rye, showed marked
effects of temperature. The cold requirements of Svalof Extra Squarehead were as great as
in Petkus winter-rye but were less pronounced for Friedrichswerther winter-rye. Cold
requirements of other varieties are also given. As distinguishing winter and summer cereals
author emphasizes cold requirements of former and sensitivity to frost of latter and not
relative length of life of the two kinds. These characteristics should be kept in mind in
genetical work on summer and winter cereals. The need for low temperature and resistance
to frost are positively correlated. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:
118-120. Dec. 1919.]—/. P. Kelly.

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 155

1083. G[atenby], J. B. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O., J. G. Kerr, and \Y. E. Agar. Lectures
on sex and heredity delivered in Glasgow, 1917-18. lCmo, vi + 119 p., Jt0 jig. Macmillan Co. :
London, 1919.] Science Progress 15: 152-153. July, 1920.

1084. Gates, R. Ruggles. Heredity and eugenics. Eugenics Rev. 11: 193-201. 12:1-13.
1920.

10S5. Grier, N. M. Variation and distribution of leaves in Sassafras. Biometrika 12:
372-373. Nov., 1919.

1086. Grosser, Otto. Die Lehre vom spezifischen Eiweiss und die Morphologie, mit
besonderer Anwendung auf Vererbungsfragen und den Bau der Plazenta. [The doctrine of
specific proteins and morphology with special application to questions of heredity and the struc-
ture of the placenta.] Anat. Anzeiger 53: 49-57. 1920.

1087. Hagedoorn-La Brand, A. C., and A. L. Hagedoorn. Inherited predisposition
for a bacterial disease. Amer. Nat. 54: 368-375. July-August, 1920. — Review of evidence for
inherited predisposition to disease. Experimental: — very minute mice related to the Japan-
ese Waltzing type obtained from Japan and China crosses with albinos. Fi and F2 hybrids
were obtained, also backcross Fi X Japanese. Epidemic of staphylococcus occurred in
mousery. Disease took rapid course and no spontaneous recovery was recorded. Proportion
of mortality in various generations at weighings of January 4 and February 14 was calculated.
All Japanese mice died. F2, 31 litters gave total of 125 on January 4, 91 on February 14. No
albinos of same age died among "very considerable number." No Ft mice died among 14
observed. On a 3:1 basis F2 expected 93.75:31.25, observed 91:34. Back-cross litters (14),
expected 1:1 ratio, observed 25:32. Excess of deaths over those expected is considered as
representing those due to all other causes. No experimental inoculation was attempted. —
C. C. Little.

1088. Hansen, W. Die sinnbildliche bewertung der Parzellen- und Zuchtpflanzen. [The
valuation of plots and breeding plants by inspection.] Illustr. Landw. Zeitg. 1918: 42. 1918.
[Anonymous German rev. in: Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 99. June, 1918.]

1089. Harder, R. [German rev. of: Kuster, Ernst. Uber weissrandige Blatter und an-
dere Formen der Buntblattrigkeit. (On white-margined leaves and other forms of variegation.)
Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 212-251. 27 fig. May, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 644.)] Zeitschr.
Bot. 12: 267-268. 1920.

1090. Harvey, Ethel Browne. A review of the chromosome numbers in the Metazoa.
II. Jour. Morph. 34: 1-67. June 20, 1920. — This contribution, supplementing the author's
previous work (Jour. Morphol., v. 28, Dec. 1916), completes list of chromosome numbers for
the metazoa. Tabulation includes complete bibliography. Short historical and critical
account is given and also a review of the occurrence of heterochromosomes. Conclusions are:
(1) the chromosome number for each species is constant with a few exceptions; (2) there is
a definite number of chromosomes characteristic of a related group of animals (the type
number) ; (3) changes of number in related forms have resulted from the splitting or fusion
of chromosomes. — Bertram G. Smith.

1091. Houwink, R. Hzn. Erfelijkheid. Populaire beschouwingen omtrent het tegen-
woordige standpunt der erfelijkheid, verzameld uit theorie en practijk. [Heredity. Popular
presentation of the present status of heredity compiled from theory and practice.] 62 p., 5 pi.
Stoomdrukkerij Floralia: Assen, 1919.. — Brief popular treatise by a well-known expert in
poultry-breeding. It contains the most important principles of heredity and propagation
and their relations to poultry-breeding. The booklet is intended for the common breeder;
without being too learned, the difficult subject is treated in easily comprehensible way. —
M. J. Sirhs.

156 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1092. Kooiman, H. N. Eenige opmerkingen naar aanleiding van Lotsy's artikel "De
Oenotheren als kernchimaeren." [Some remarks on Lotsy's paper "The Oenotheras as nuclear
chimeras."] Genetica 2: 235-243. May, 1920. — Some theoretical remarks upon Lotsy's
paper. With Lotsy, author is of opinion, that distribution of chromosomes according to the
laws of chance gives a good explanation for simple Mendelism; but he does not accept the iden-
tification of factors, working in the same direction, as founded upon the same causes. He
does not accept Lotsy's disavowal of the existence of genes, nor his hypothesis of chromosome-
linkage. The Drosophila researches are not in accordance with this hypothesis; so for Oeno-
thera it cannot be admitted without very strong arguments. For that reason the writer
supposes that the most important characters of the Oenotheras are bound to genes, that are
localized in the same chromosome. A strong linkage between these genes would then probably
be responsible for the hereditary behavior of the Oenotheras according to Renner's researches.
—M. J. Sirks.

1093. Kooiman, H. N. Overzicht over enkele Oenothera-problemen. [Review of a few
Oenothera-problems.] Genetica 1: 134-148. Mar., 1919.— Critical summary of the most
important Oenothera-papers of later years and of the problems they treat. — M. J. Sirks.

1094. Kroon, H. M. De overerving der kleuren bij onze huisdieren, in het bijzonder by
het paard. [Heredity of coat-color in domesticated animals, especially in the horse.] Tijd-
schr. voor diergeneeskunde 47: 83-95. 1920.— See next following Entry, 1095.

1095. Kroon, H. M. Nog eens. De overerving der kleuren bij onze huisdieren, in het
bijzonder bij het paard. [Color inheritance in domestic animals, especially the horse. (2).]
Tijdschr. voor diergeneeskunde. 47: 312-314. 1920.— Following abstract represents next
preceding entry (1094) as well as present one. First paper is a summary of the work done by
previous authors, Harper, Robertson, Wilson, Sturtevant, Anderson, Wentworth, Wal-
ther, Stroever, Reimers for detecting the various inheritable factors for coat-color in horses.
Author makes use of the nomenclature of Wentworth: C, chestnut, H, black, B, brown, G,
gray, D, dappling, R, roan, P, piebald, I, diluting factor, S, star, and M, mane; he indicates the
genotype combinations, corresponding with the various colors. — In the second paper a special
case, mentioned by one of his correspondents is treated along lines indicated in the first article.
A mare, White Mouse, gave by a dark chestnut stallion, The Rush, a white-born foal (White-
born is the extreme form of piebald) ; thus CCPP + CCpp = CCPp.) A second time White
Mouse was served by William IV, brown, and gave a piebald foal (CCPP + CCHHBB =
CCHhBbPp); for the third time a foal was bred from White Mouse by Le Cid, a common
gray (not white-born), the foal was at birth piebald, but became in the same summer wholly
gray (CCPP + CCHHBBGG = CCHhBbGgPp) and a fourth foal was born from White
Mouse by Cher Amour, a French chestnut (CCPP + ccpp = CcPp, a white-born foal).
The mare White Mouse seemed therefore to be homozygous for the piebald factor P.- -With
our knowledge of the various color factors in horses such seemingly difficult cases may find a
happy solution. — M. J. Sirks.

1096. Kuiper, K., Jr. Onderzoekingen over kleur en teekening bij runderen. Naar
experimenten van R. Houwink Hzn. [Researches on color and markings in cattle. Based on
experiments by R. Houwink Hzn.] Genetica 2: 137-161. Mar., 1920.— Author tries to show
how the characteristic markings of the Dutch belted cattle are inherited in breeding within
the race and in crossings with the Dutch spotted cattle. Mating two animals of Dutch belted,
or an individual of Dutch belted with spotted, may give self-colored calves. A Dutch belted
bull gave with 55 Dutch spotted cows 27 Dutch belted, 24 self-black, and 4 spotted calves.
For explanation of this result the writer accepts two pairs of allelomorphic factors: LI for
belted markings, epistatic to Ee self-colored, and a repulsion between L and E in the redupli-
cation-series 1:7:7:1. Accepting these conditions, the observed facts are explained easily.
The writer supposes Dutch belted cattle are in most cases diheterozygous, or LlEe. The indi-
viduals with faulty markings, appearing in great number in crossings with spotted cattle,

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 157

are then LLee or Live. Strong correlation exists between white feet and too large belting. —
M . J . Sirks.

1097. Larger, R. Theorie delacontre-evolution,ou degenerescence par l'heredite. [The-
ory of retrogressive evolution, or degeneration by heredity. | xw + 405 p., 21 fig. Felix Alcan :
Paris, 1919.

109S. Lawritson, M. N., J. W. Hendrickson, and W. B. Nevens. Pure-bred sires
effect herd improvement. Nebraska Sta. Circ. 8: 3-15. 7 fuj. 1919. — Semi-popular paper
giving records of the daughters of three bulls, one Jersey and two Holstein-Friesian. The
daughters' average milk and butter fat yield was increased over that of their dams by the use
of these bulls. The conclusion is drawn that even the small breeder can afford to purchase
a pure-bred bull as the increased worth of his sons and daughters will more than compensate
for the extra first cost. — John W. Gowen.

1099. Lehmann, Ernst. Bemerkungen zu dem Aufsatze von O. Renner: Mendel'sche
Spaltung und chemisches Gleichgewicht. [Comments on the article of O. Renner: Mendelian
splitting and chemical equilibrium.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 277-2S6. June, 1920.

1100. Liexhart. De la possibility pour les eleveurs d'obtenir a volonte des males ou des
femelles dans les races gallines. [On the possibility for the raiser of poultry to secure males
or females at will in the Gallinaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 102-104. 1919.
— The possibility rests, as the author states, upon the recognition of sex within the egg, before
incubation commences. The experimental evidence is small in amount, consisting of two
sets of 60 eggs each, each set being the 60 largest of several hundred. In the most favorable
experiment 77 males out of 100 were obtained. The author believes that the large eggs give
rise to males and the small ones to females. Further experiments are proposed.— H. D.
Good ale.

1101. Loewenthal, Waldemar. Ein veranderlicher, Milchzuckerspal tender Paratyphus-
bazillus. [A mutable paratyphoid bacillus fermenting lactose.] Centralbl. Bakteriol. 83:
227-321. 1919.

1102. Lotsy, J. P. Cucurbita-strijdvragen. De soort-quaestie ; Het gedrag na kruising;
Parthenogenese? I. Historisch overzicht. II. Eigen onderzoekingen. [Cucurbita-problems.
The species-question. Results of crossing. Parthenogenesis? I. Historical review. II.
New researches.] Genetica I: 496-531. Nov., 1919. Ibid. 2: 1-21. 9 fig., 1 triple col. pi.
Jan., 1920. — The first part of this paper contains a historical summary of the facts thus far
known about species-questions, hybridization and parthenogenesis in Cucurbita. It seems
to be impossible to obtain hybrids among the Linnean species distinguished by Natjdin:
C. maxima, C. pepo, C. moschata and C. melanosperma, but it is easy to make hybrids between
the different varieties within these species, at least within C. maxima and C. pepo. Previous
researches had also indicated the existence of an important segregation in the F2-generations
of these hybrids. The process of parthenogenesis occurring among Cucurbita species accord-
ing to the Hagedoorns is unproven and very doubtful. — The second part, containing an
account of author's own researches, is summarized by the writer in the following sentences:
Several, often very different, constant forms ('"Jordanons") could be distinguished within
the "Linneon" Cucurbita maxima as well as within the Linneon C. pepo in the sense of Naudin.
Jordanons belonging to the same Linneon, cross easily and give fertile segregating hybrids.
As yet, crosses between Jordanons belonging to different Linneons have had no result in the
author's experiments. Considering the very large number of unsuccessful efforts it seems
pretty safe to say that neither C. pepo nor C. maxima can be crossed with C. melanosperyna,
an equally strong opinion can not be given as to the possibility of crosses between C. pepo
and C. maxima; those tried were unsuccessful, but the number of efforts was much less than
in the case of crossings between C. pepo or C. maxima with C. melanosperma. Crosses
between C. pepo and C. aurantiaca Willd. are as fertile and segregate as fully as those between

158 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

Jordanons belonging to the same Linneon, it should however be remembered that Naudin
considers C. aurantiaca as a mere — though very definite — variety of C. pepo. Reciprocal
crosses between C. pepo and C. aurantiaca show certain differences in the length and size of
the fruits, these being in both cases matroclinous. Absolute certainty that these differences
are not due to heterozygosis of the forms crosssd was not obtainable, but this is, in view of
the matroclinous inheritance in both reciprocal crosses, highly improbable. None of the forms
of Cucurbita, cultivated by the author, was able to form seeds without having been fertilized.
Neither apogamy, nor parthenogenesis has been met with. The cases of parthenogenesis in
Cucurbita described by the Hagedoorns are most probably cases of fertilization by insects,
due to insufficient isolation. Some of the forms investigated are parthenocarpous, i.e., they
can form fruits without having been fertilized, but such fruits never contain any seeds with
embryos. — M. J. Sirks.

1103. Lotsy, J. P. De Oenotheren als kernchimeren. [The Oenotheras as nuclear chi-
meras.J Genetica 1: 7-69. 113-129. 1919. — In the author's opinion the researches of Rennek
as well as his own experiments have shown the extraordinary nature of Oenothera Lamarcki-
ana; it is a nuclear chimera, resulting from two great factor complexes, localized in the chromo-
somes. These complexes, out of which the nuclear chimera is constructed, may be wholly
independent of each other without exchange of chromosomes or of qualities and without
dragging away of chromosomes; in that case no "mutants," properly "segregonts," appear.
If a chromosome from one of the complexes is dragged out into the other, then new forms with
varying numbers of chromosomes come into existence. Exchange of chromosomes or of qual-
ities give segregonts with the same chromosome number as the original form. The percent-
age of appearance of these segregonts depends upon the more or less easy exchange of chromo-
somes or of qualities; a very easy exchange gives high numbers of segregonts or quantitative
"mass-mutations." In Oenothera no species nor hybrids exist, only nuclear chimeras, and the
different exchanges between the constituent chromosome-complexes give origin to the "mu-
tant" forms. The fact of crossing-over, resulting in dragging away a part of a chromosome
by another, causes also the possibility of crossing-over in homozygotes or in pure lines. These
"mutants" in pure lines result from intranuclear chromosome-changes, not from newly-formed
genes. — The various consequences of this opinion with respect to general problems, as the
nature of genes, mutability, and the theory of Morgan, are discussed in detail, but are of
course of a somewhat hypothetical character. — M. J. Sirks.

1104. Lotsy, J. P. Een opwekking om voort te gaan met het kruisen van individuen tot
verschillende linneonten van het geslacht Verbascum behoorend. [Encouragement to proceed
with crossings of individuals belonging to different Linneons of the genus Verbascum.] Ge-
netica 2: 22-26. Jan., 1920. — The failure of many experiments in growing posterity of Ver-
frascwm-hybrids has given us a strong impression of the absolute infertility of these hybrids.
Exceptions however were already found by Darwin (Jour. Linn. Soc. 10) and by Mendel
(fide Correns Abh. Sachs. Gesellsch. Wiss. 1905) and indicate the possibility of obtaining
fertile hybrids within this genus ; this induces the author to stimulate other geneticists to renew
these experiments. — M. J. Sirks.

1105. Lotsy, J. P. Heribert-Nilsson's onderzoekingen over soortsvorming b" Salix met
opmerkingen mijnerz'ds omtrent de daarin en in publicaties van anderen uitgeoefende kritiek
aan mijn soorts-definitie. [Heribert-Nilsson's researches about species-formation in Salix
with my remarks upon his and other writers' critique of my definition of species.] Genetica 2:
162-168. Mar., 1920.— The ninth chapter of Heribert-Nilsson's paper about his Salix-
hybrids (Lunds Univ. Aarsskr. XIV. 28. 1918) is, in the opinion of the writer, of enough
theoretical importance to give a translation of it in Dutch. This translation is accompanied
by a reply of the author to Nilsson's remarks about the nature of "species" as also to those
of other writers. — M. J. Sirks.

1106. Lotsy, J. P. Theoretische steun voor de kruisingstheorie. [Theoretical arguments
for the theory of evolution by means of hybridization.] Genetica 2: 214-234. May, 1920. —

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 159

A defense of author's well-known theory of evolution by means of hybridization against some
of the opponents: Dbndy, Jeffrey, and an exposil ion of arguments brought together by other
writers (IIicimhiort-Nilsson, Winge, Ernst, Gerould, and others) thai support the author's
views. — M . J. Sirks.

1107. MacBride, E. W. The method of evolution. Scientia 14: 2&-33. 1920.

110S. 0'D[onoghue], C. II. [Rev. of: Morgan, Thomas Hunt. The physical basis of
heredity. 14 X 21 cm., 300 p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia, 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 422.)] Science Progress 15: 150-151. July, 1920.

1109. 0'D[onoghue], C. H. [Rev. of: East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. In-
breeding and outbreeding. 14 X 11 cm., 285 p., 46 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919.
(See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571; 5, Entries 437, 1607, 1095.)] Science Progress 15: 151-152
July, 1920.

1110. 0;D[onoghue], C. H. [Rev. of: Lillie, Frank Rattray. Problems of fertili-
zation. 13 X 19 cm., vii 4- 278 p., 19 fig. Univ. Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919. (See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 410.)] Science Progress 15: 152. July, 1920.

1111. Pezard, A. Castration alimentaire chez les coqs soumis au regime came exclusif.
[Alimentary castration in cocks subjected to an exclusive meat diet.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 169: 1177-1179. 1919.— A discussion of certain experiments of F. Houssay in a
paper entitled "Variations experimentales. Etudes sur six generations de poules carnivores
(Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen., t. 6, 1907, p. 137 a 332." Author concludes that Houssay's
observation of atrophied testes and their consequences did not result directly from the flesh
diet, but because the birds did not maintain good health. — //. D. Goodale.

1112. Renner, O. [German rev. of: Ernst, A. Bastardierung als Ursache der Apogamie
im Pflanzenreich ; eine Hypothese zur experimentellen Vererbungs- und Abstammungslehre.
(Hybridization as the cause of apogamy in the plant kingdom; an hypothesis for experimental
evolution and genetics.) 8vo, xv + 655 p., 2 pi., 172 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1918. (See
also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries 2113, 2151.)] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 288. June, 1920.

1113. Richey, H. W. Factors of fruitfulness. [Rev. of: Wiggans, C. C. Some factors
favoring or opposing fruitfulness in apples. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 32: 1-60.
6 fig. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1696.)] Bot. Gaz. 70: 162-164. Aug., 1920.

1114. Roemer, Th. Uber Lupinenziichtung. [On lupine breeding.] Deutsch. Landw.
Presse 1919: 174-175. 1919. — Breeding can secure in lupines a condition of uniform ripening
which in these plants is dependent on uniform germination and uniform blooming. In both
of these respects individual selection has shown differences. Seed harvest can be increased
also by use of best plants revealed by individual selection. Average fruitfulness of pods is
hereditary. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 136. Dec, 1919.] —
J. P. Kelly.

1115. Roepke, W. Over selectie van meerderjarige cultuurgewassen in tropisch Neder-
land. [On selection of perennial cultivated plants in the Dutch tropics.] Rede Landbouw-
hoogeschool. 24 p. H. Veenman: Wageningen, 1920. — As an inaugural address at the Agri-
cultural College of Wageningen the author gives a summarizing report of the work done in
the Dutch East Indian colonies in selecting and breeding better races of rubber, tea, coffee,
cocoa and quina; he discusses the most important parts of his breeding, and amelioration of
the existing material; the vegetative propagation of worthy types on a small scale and on a
large scale, hybridization and introduction of new species. Each of these methods has given
to the Dutch East Indies valuable types of cultivated plants. — M. J. Sirks.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 3

160 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1116. Roffo, A. H. Sur le role du facteur race dans la transmission du cancer chez le rat.
Transformation progressive d'une race non receptive. [On the role of the race factor in the trans-
mission of cancer in the rat. Progressive transformation of a non-receptive race into a recep-
tive one.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 968-970. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1749.

1117. Saint-Hilaire, H. Geoffroy. L'elevage dans l'Afrique du Nord. [The breeding
industry in North Africa.] xi + 530 p., 33 pi. Augustin Challamel: Paris, 1919.

1118. Schade, H. J. M. Kunnen proefondervindelnke mutaties worden opgewekt bij
bacterien? [Can experimental mutations be obtained in bacteria?] Nederlandsch. Tijdschr.
voor Geneeskunde 63: 811-814. 1919. — The researches of Seiffert (Deutsche medizinische
Wochenschrift 1911. no. 23) and of Richet and Cardot (C. R. Acad. Sciences, Paris, 31 March,
1919) have been repeated by the author. Their conclusions accepted the possibility of obtain-
ing mutations, by means of bacterial cultures in special media. Author made his cultures, as
Seiffert had done, of B. coli in agar, to which malachite-green had been added; from the
original culture, that could be only grown in agar-nurture with 20 mg. in 10 cc. agar, a strain
was cultivated, that was resistant to 666 mg. in the same quantity of agar; after three
months this resistance was not diminished. The conclusion of Seiffert and others seemed
to be right. That this is not true, however, is shown by the author in a way, different
from his previous method. By means of emulsions of his cultures in NaCl-solution, colonies
were obtained from very diluted cultures; the strain "adapted" to 666 mg. of malachite per
10 cc. agar grew on each culture as well; this "mutated" strain, after once growing upon
pure agar, had lost its adaptation for the greater part; the longer the period of growing upon
pure agar, the less the adaptation and the number of resulting colonies. In his first men-
tioned researches, common cultures did not bring these differences to light because of the
immense number of bacteria contained in only one little globule of the culture; after diluting
the cultures by means of emulsions, the differences made themselves apparent. Thus the
conclusions of Seiffert and of Richet and Cardot are false because of their inexact
methods. — M. J. Sirks.

1119. Schermers, D. Erfelijkheid en rasverbetering. [Heredity and race-improvement.]
Schild en Pijl 10: 1-26. 1919. — From the point of view of positive Christianity the writer dis-
cusses the consequences, drawn by the modern eugenicists from the facts given by processes
of fertilization and of Mendelism. He is extraordinarily skeptical. The great and insuper-
able difficulties, encountered by the study of heredity in man, especially as related to psychi-
cal abnormalities, leads him to deny the practical significance of eugenics; medical examina-
tion before marriage can only give good results for alcoholism, syphilis and tuberculosis; in
other cases it will be wholly insufficient, while neomalthusianism is fatal. The prospects of
a possible improvement of the human race are, owing to the lack of well-established knowledge,
unfavorable. — M. J. Sirks.

1120. Siegel, W. Das Recht des Gemiiseziichters. [The right of the vegetable breeder.]
8vo. Frick : Wien, 1919. — Author takes up the well-known idea of according to breeders work-
ing with cross-pollinated vegetables protection from neighboring cultures of the same species.
[From anonymous review' in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 146. Dec, 1919.] — J. P. Kelly.

1121. Sirks, M. J. De analyse van een spontane boonenhybride. [The analysis of a spon-
taneous bean hybrid.] Genetica 2: 97-114. Mar., 1920. — Among a number of plants of the
dwarf speckled cranberry bean, gathered in 1917, one plant was found whose seeds had not a
chamois (yellowish-white) violet-striped seedcoat, but a liver-brown one with blue striping.
These seeds had thus been formed on a hybrid plant, resulting from a crossing with an unknown
pollen parent, occurring in 1916. By sowing these seeds in 1918, an F2-generation was obtained
and in 1919 an regeneration. The analysis of these F> and F3 generations with regard to their
seed colors, gave cause to accept seven hereditary factors, present in beans and responsible
for these colors. These factors were: — (1) The ground-factor, P, responsible for color in
general; its presence without others causes the chamois color, its absence gives a white seed-

No. 3, December 1920] GENETICS 161

coat, independent from the other possibly present factors; (2) G, factor for yellowish-brown
color; chamois is, if G is present, changed into yellowish-brown; (3) L, factor for liver-brown,
by which yellowish-brown is changed into liver-brown, or in bomozygotes dark-brown; (4)
V, factor that changes chamois into violet and yellowish-brown into brown-violet. The fac-
tor L is epistatic to V, the presence of V thus being indistinguishable when the formula is
LI or LL; (5) Gr, factor for gray color, changing chamois into gra3r-chamois, yellowish-
brown into gray-yellowbrown and violet into gray-violet. (6) B, factor changing violet
into blue. This factor covers all other factors and is thus epistatic to them; (8) S, striping
factor, by which blue, violet and gray in the superficial layers are restricted into stripes.
Then one sees a background of chamois, yellowish-brown, liver-brown, gray-violet or bluish-
brown. If this background is violet or gray, then S exercises also its influence upon it and
makes this violet, marbled; in consequence these beans show two types of markings, viz.,
striping and marbling. The other colors are not marbled in the background. This factor
S may be present in cryptomeric state in the chamois, yellowish-brown and liver-brown colors,
but cannot be proven here, because it does not influence these colors. — Probably there are
also linkages between some of these factors; perhaps between P, V and S on the one hand
and between G, L, B and S on the other. This is the more striking because the formulae
derived from the splitting-numbers are for the mother-plant, the dwarf speckled cranberry
bean, PPVVSS, and for the unknown father-plant, that must have had white seedcoats,
ppGGGrGrvvLLBBss.—M. J. Sirks.

1122. Sirks, M. J. De methodiek der erfelijkheidsleer. [The methodism of genetics.]
Tijdschr. voor diergeneeskunde. 47: 207-217. 1920. — Progress of genetics can only be obtained
if a critical examination of the methods in use has preceded the work itself. The critique
of the methods in use cannot be sharp enough; in modern times we are no longer contented
with the primitive and ancient method of speculation without facts. These facts may be
gained by two different ways: direct research of the genetical factors, present in a cell, by
cytological studies, and by indirect researches in judging the hereditary factors of an individ-
ual by observations or experiments thereupon. This direct method, the cytology, may give
us many results, but has thus far not solved the great problem of the localization of heritable
factors. In itself cytology is insufficient. Indirect methods of genetics there are four; we
may study the chain, that binds the heritable factors in the genotype with the observed char-
acteristics of the individual in its phenotypes in two directions: beginning with the genotype
as Schaxel does and studying the development of this genotype into the phenotype by cyto-
morphological methods or studying by going back from the phenotype-characters and trying
to find out the genotypical factors causing them (Phenogenetica Haeckers). — In the second
place indirect study of genotype may be drawn along other lines: study of ascendance (Gal-
ton) and study of descendance (Mendel). In far the most cases only the last of these methods
is sufficient; the methods of Schaxel and of Haecker however may perhaps give us still
many results in elucidating the long way between genotypic factors and phenotypic
characters. — M. J. Sirks.

1123. Sirks, M. J. Erfelijkheids- en selectieonderzoekingen bij Vicia-soorten. I. De
navelkleur van Vicia Faba. [Researches on heredity and selection in species of Vicia. I.
Navel color in Vicia Faba.] Genetica 2: 193-199. 1920.— The navel color in the English bean
(Vicia Faba) was studied as a heritable character by breeding the posterities of individual
plants; partly these plants were isolated, partly they were allowed to flower without isola-
tion. From isolated heterozygous plants splitting offspring in ratio 3 : 1 were always obtained;
black navel-color was dominant and white recessive. The heterozygotes could in some cases
be distinguished from the homozygotes because of their not black, more gray navel color.
Free-flowering plants never gave a more or less exact ratio 3:1; their offspring split in every
possible ratio; even in the offspring of white-navel recessives often a great number of black-
navel plants could be observed, the results of spontaneous hybridizations. — M. J. Sirks.

1124. Sirks, M. J., and J. Bijhouwer. Onderzoekingen over de eenheid der linneaan-
sche soort Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L. [Investigations on the homogeneity of the

102 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

Linnean species Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L.] Genetica 1: 401-442. Sept., 1919. — Bio-
metric measurements of length and breadth of ray-flowers made very probable, that the
Linnean species Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L. contains several strains of hereditarily
different character, in this sense, that this "species" is a mixture of types, differing in inherit-
able qualities, and their respective hybrids. — By systematic breeding and counting the ray-
flowers of a number of plants grown in families, it could be proven, that this supposition was
right and that this Linnean species is far from a unity, but a mixture of types and hybrids.
This makes it possible to grow out of this species a number of families, differing in hereditary
characters, among others those relating to the number of ray flowers; these families seem to
have the Fibonacci-numbers 21 and 34 as modes. — .1/. J. Sirks.

1125. Sirks, M. J. Die kritische punten van het evolutievraagstuk. [Critical points of
the evolution hypothesis.] Genetica 1: 70-91. Jan., 1919. — The problem of evolution is by
most authors taken as a whole; in reality it may be analysed and divided in four great prob-
lems, that are more or less favorable to experimental research, the only right way for finding
an answer free from speculations. These four critical points out of the mass of problems are:
— (1) The origin in nature of new forms, in hereditary factors varying from their parents;
experimental research has thus far only shown one cause of this origin: hybridization, that is,
fusion of gametes differing in hereditable properties. All other ways of origin of new forms
have been thus far unproven. — (2) The existence in nature of groups of individuals, charac-
terized by possessing a great complex of hereditary factors. Answering this problem has been
till now unexperimental; mathematical considerations may show the necessity of divergence
of a very complicated population into different strains of homozygotic individuals, but also
circumstances of life, — isolation, dying out of certain forms and perhaps influence of circum-
stances on hybrid-splitting — may cause the differentiation of a population into different
strains. In this direction a great and extensive field of experimental labor is to be done,
before a well-founded answer can be given. (3) The dying out of forms and of groups of forms
is more a historical problem; perhaps it will be possible, by means of submission of populations
of known genetic constitution to various circumstances of life. — (4) Is there in natural evolu-
tion a progression or only a succession? This is a problem of a very subjective character;
it is wholly inaccessible for experiments and will remain in the long future a point of philo-
sophical discussion. — M. J. Sirks.

1126. Sirks, M. J. Raszuiverheid en fokzuiverheid. [Purity of race and purity of breed-
ing.] Genetica 1: 539-552. Nov., 1919. — In genetics every word and every term has gone
through its own evolution; this brings in many cases great difficulties for obtaining an exact
definition of each of these terms. Every term changes its meaning with the changes of ge-
netics itself; they become more and more sharpened or they must be banished from the
geneticists terminology. A discussion of the terms purity of race and purity of breeding is
given here by the writer. In pre-Mendelian times identity of portrait (description of figure)
could be accepted as indicating purity of race: the Galtonian theory has changed this stan-
dard into identity of ancestry, and Mendelian researches have given as definition of purity of
race identity of posterity. The exact geneticist would go farther and take as definition
the identity of the gametes, formed by an individual as standard for purity of breeding. In
practice it is not yet possible to accept this sharpest definition; there are cases, that an indi-
vidual gives a posterity, seemingly identical, without forming only one sort of gametes. These
cases are treated by the writer in detail: the case of the white mice, among others, the case
of apogamy in plants without reduction-division and the case of eliminating of the homozy-
gote combinations as in yellow mice and in Oenothera-species. — A method of determining the
purity of breeding in cases where direct experiments are difficult, is indicated by Schmidt of
Copenhagen by his method of diallel (cross-wise) matings. — M. J. Sirl:.s.

1127. Sirks, M. J. Verwantschap als biologisch vraagstuk. [Relationship as a problem
of biology.] Genetica 2: 27-50. Jan., 1920. — The problem of relationship has always taken a
central position in genetics; its analyses along the lines of modern genetics is a subject of

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 1G3

great importance. In tin's paper the writer has indicated the necessity of .sharply distinguish-
ing two different views of relationship; relationship in descendance or genealogic relation-
ship and relationship in capacities, gentoypic relationship. These two sorts of relationship
may not be confounded in modern literature of genetics as has till now been done by many
writers; they are not at all identical; two mdi\ i duals may in genealogical sense be very nearly
related, though their genotypes are highly different; inversely the genotypes of two indi-
viduals can be identical, however t hey don't show any genealogical relationship. In t he great
lines of phylogeny a narrow tie will perhaps have bound these two relationships, but the pres-
ence of the one is not even an indication for the other's appearance. — Now it will be a subject
of a great many researches to find good methods for establishing these relationships: the
ancient method of portrait-building and comparing is no longer sufficient. Experimental
methods only can be accepted. But not all the researches, called experimental, are really
experimental. Really experimental methods for proving the existence of genealogical rela-
tionships may be found easily; systematic breeding and a well-developed administration is
the only means of getting an insight into genealogical relationship. Demonstration of geno-
typic relationship however is not so easy; till nowadays we have only breeding methods, and
we can state genotypic relationship only by means of systematic crossings. This method
however is in its possible usefulness very limited; in practical sense it has been thus far suffi-
cient, but the exact genetics, trying to find a more or less mathematical judgment of the geno-
type of a given individual cannot be content with this in many cases inadequate method; we
must try to find another, perhaps chemical method, to determine the genotype of an organism.
A critical and more refined judgment of methods for finding bloodrelationship, but then
applied to gametes, may in future lead to great results. — M. J. Sirks.

1128. Sirks, M. J. Uit het Instituut voor veredeling van landbouwgewassen. Vergelijking
van gerst- en tarwerassen, van het Instituut afkomstig met andere voortreffelijke rassen van deze
gewassen. 1915-1917. [From the Institute for the Improvement of Agricultural plants. Com-
parison of barley and wheat varieties originating from the Institute with other superior races of
these plants. 1915-1917.] Med. Landbouwhoogeschool Wageningen 14: 1-34, 210-232. 1918. —
Gives only some reports of comparisons of newly bred varieties of wheat (Millioen III and Im-
periaal Ila) with the well-known Wilhelmina, that show the great value of these varieties of
wheat. The results of tests with new races of barley (Pollux and Castor) were less favorable.
— M. J. Sirks.

1129. Snell, K. Farbenanderung der Kartoffelblute und Saatenanerkennung. [Color
changes of the potato blossom and the recognition of varieties.] Der Kartoffelbau 1919: 1-3.
1919. — Author calls attention to importance laid on color in recognition of varieties but a ques-
tionnaire proved that with many varieties color variations occur that are "spontaneous"
while with others they appear as non-hereditary "modifications"; these are, of course, not
distinguishable by inspection. Author thinks that all varieties possess power of pigment for-
mation and bloom white if conditions for development are absent. It is suggested that in
judging the variety, plants with deviations in flower color should be especially attended to
only when they also vary in other respects. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
ziicht. 7: 137-138. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1130. Sommer, K. tiber Kartoffelziichtung und vergleichende Anbauversuche mit Neu-
ziichtungen auf der Domane Ellischau. [Potato breeding and comparative cultural tests of new
varieties on the Ellischau estate.] Nachr. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. Osterr. 1919: 190-193. 1919.
— Calls attention to hybridization and plant-selection work undertaken, and special mention
is made of large yields of single plants. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzensiicht.
7: 138. Dec, 1919.]—/. P. Kelly.

1131. Stahel, G. Eerste verslag over de werkzaamheden ten behoeve van de selectie van
Koffie en Cacao. [First report on the effectiveness of selection in coffee and cacao.] Dept.
Landbouw. in Suriname, Paramaribo, Bull. 36. 23 -p. 1919. — Coffee and cocoa plants gener-
ally more or less heterozygous and efforts at vegetative multiplication of good plants are

164 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

described. Author records contribution of a fund by a Surinam breeding association by which
a selection inspector for the plantations is supported. Figures are given on varying produc-
tivity of coffee and cocoa trees with number of individuals selected as mother plants. Methods
of vegetative propagation are described. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
ziicht. 7: 138-139. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1132. Tammes, T. De leer der erffactoren en hare toepassing op den mensch. Rede,
uitgesproken bij het aanvaarden van het ambt van buitengewoon hoogleeraaraandeRijks-univer-
siteit te Groningen. [The theory of hereditary factors and its applicability to man. Address
delivered on assumption of the office of Professor Extraordinarius in the State University at
Groningen.] 24 P- Wolters: Groningen, 1919. — A discussion of the principles of factorial
constitution of organisms; the writer thinks them as Morgan does, localized in the chromo-
somes, according to the linkage of all Drosophila-iactors in four groups and of all Pisum-
factors in seven groups, in harmony with their haploid chromosome numbers 4 and 7. If
then these principles might be applied to improvement of the human race, the great number of
chromosomes in man (diploid 47 and 48) is a difficult hindrance for locating the various hu-
man hereditary factors in the chromosomes; the inheritance of human characters is very com-
plicated and it is therefore impossible to give certain indications for human amelioration.
But possible is the amelioration of circumstances of life for man ; it changes only the phenotype
not the genotype, but it is the only thing we can obtain in the nearest future. — M. J. Sirks.

1133. Thomson, J. Arthur. [French rev. of: Larger, R. Theorie de la contre-evolu-
tion, ou degenerescence par l'heredite. [Theory of retrogressive evolution, or degeneration by
heredity.] xiv + 405 p., 21 fig. Felix Alcan: Paris, 1919.] Scientia 14: 52-54. 1920.

1134. Thomson, J. Arthur. [French rev. of: Hegner, R. W. The germ-cell cycle in
animals, x + 346 p., 84 fig. Macmillan & Co. : New York, 1914.] Scientia 14: 51-52. 1920.

1135. Tjebbes, K., and H. N. Kooiman. Erfelijkheidsonderzoekingen by boonen. III.
Albinisme. [Hybridization experiments with beans. III. Albinism.] Genetica 1: 532-538.
1 pi., 3 fig. Nov., 1919. — The authors have made some experiments with a strain of albino-
throwing beans of the species Phaseolus vulgaris. The seeds of one plant, E. 9. 1916, sown
in 1917, gave 26 green-leaved plants and 8 ivory-white ones, indicating monohybrid segrega-
tion. 1918 the rest of the seeds from E9. 1916, produced again about three green seedlings:
1 white one. — 1918 albinotic seedlings were grafted on normal green ones. The best method
proved to be splice-grafting, the hypocotylof the albinotic seedling and a node of the green one
being cut across diagonally and united by means of a string of wet raffia. The albino then
can profit from the food present in the cotyledons and of the green leaf, left to the node. —
In this way two plants in 1918 and two descendants of one of these in 1919 were raised to
maturity and all of them produced the first, simple, leaves without the least trace of green
color, developing little patches of chlorophyll on the compound leaves and green stripes on
the pods. — As to the origin of this strain the authors venture to suggest, that it may have
arisen from the cross of a flower on an albinotic branch with a flower on a normal one, of a
sectorially chimaeric plant. Also the loss of the factor, that enables the plant to make
chlorophyll, may have taken place in one flower. The question too arises, whether the green
patches on the leaves and the stripes on the pods are caused by some chemical influence of
the normal plant or that we deal with an extreme case of variegation. To clear this and other
questions the work will be continued. — H. N. Kooiman.

1136. Urban, J. Hochpolarisierende Rube und ihre Nachkommenschaft. [High-polar-
izing beets and their progeny.] Zeitschr. Zucker-Industr. Bohmen 42: 387-391. 1919. — Three
groups of mother beets whose average sugar content were 20.28 per cent, 20.66 per cent and
21.14 per cent respectively gave progeny whose averages were 21.47 per cent, 21.29 per cent
and 21.59 per cent sugar. Three generations showed no noticeable influence of small differ-
ences in sugar percentage of mother beets upon averages of progeny. Same mother beets
seriated for weights showed a negative correlation between size and sugar percentage. [From
anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 141-142. Dec, 1919.] — J. P. Kelly.

No. 3, December, 1920] GENETICS 165

1137. Urban, J. Uber die Farbe des Riibenkrautes fruh und spatreifender Ruben. [On
the color of the plant of early and late-ripening beets.] Zeitschr. Zuckerrubenindus. Bohmen
42: 281-207. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1057.

1138. van Herwerden, M. A. Over eenige nieuwe opvattingen in de celleer. [On some
new discoveries in cytology.] Genetica 1: 130-133. Mar., 1919— A discussion of the contin-
uity of the nucleus, for Long years an axiom of the cytology, but now by the beautiful researches
of Buchner (Arch. f. microscop. Anat. 91 : 1. 191S; no longer an axiom but a subject of research
that may perhaps give us a new view upon the ontogenetic origin and perhaps the phylo-
genetic origin of this most important part of the cell. The basiphile grains in the eggs of hy-
menopteres giving rise to accessory nuclei will give still much material for research.— .1/. J.
Sirks.

1139. Volkart A. 40. und 41. Jahresbericht. Schweizerische Samenuntersuchungs-
und Versuchsanstalt in Oerlikon-Zurich. [40th and 41st Annual Reports. Swiss seed control
and experiment station in Oerlikon-Zurich.] Landw. Jahrb. Schweiz. 1919: 1-40. 1919. —
The station's breeding work on cereals, beans and beets is reviewed. The isolation of strains
by single-progeny tests and also improvement by repeated selections are mentioned. In
1913 hybridization was commenced. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht.
7: 142. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1140. von Caron-Eldingen. Physiologische Spaltungen ohne Mendelismus. [Physi-
ological segregation without Mendelism.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 515-516. 1910. —
Author discusses thick-eared wheat infested with rust spores. The grain, whether treated
or not gave rise to some long-eared plants. In plats with untreated grain only the long-eared
were rusty. Author assumes a physiological segregation, not Mendelian in character, which
conditions the long-eared character and the susceptibility. [From anonymous review in
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 114-115. Dec, 1010.1— J". P. Kelly.

1141. von Ryx, Georg. Zahlenmiissige Bestimmung der Kornschonheit bei Braugerste.
[Numerical determination of beauty of grains in brewing barley.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:
109-166. 2 fig. June, 1918.

1142. von Tschermak, E. Beobachtungen uber anscheinende vegetative Spaltungen an
Bastarden und iiber anscheinende Spatspaltungen von Bastardnachkommen speziell Auftreten
von Pigmentierungen an sonst pigmentlosen Deszendenten. [Observations on apparent vege-
tative splitting in hybrids, and on apparently belated splitting in hybrid offspring, especially
the occurrence of pigmentation on otherwise pigmentless descendants.] Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 21: 216-232. 1 fig. Nov., 1010. — Four cases of bud mutation in beans, bar-
ley, and peas, are given which occurred after a cross as follows: (1) a dark-seeded bean which
had bred true for 8 generations following a cross of dark- and light-seeded Scarlet Runner
beans gave one plant with both typical seeds and aberrant light-colored seeds with distinct
pattern; (2) a low-growing white-flowered plant resulting from a cross of Phaseolus multi-
florus X P. vulgaris again crossed by a low-growing red-flowered plant from same source
gave one plant in Fi with short stature during the summer but which late in the season began
to climb; (3) a barley variety with compact spikes crossed by a normal sort gave one plant
in Fi with two stalks, one of which had a normal spike the other compact; (4) a pea with yel-
low cotyledons crossed by another yellow-cotyledon kind gave one plant with one fully ma-
tured green seed among the usual yellow seeds. Such cases as these author considers to be
vegetative segregation and compares them with two instances of seed segregation of complex
nature in which appearance of new forms is delayed as (a) two white-flowered bean plants of
complex hybrid ancestry gave red flowers in Fi with normal segregation in F2. (b) a bean
plant with seeds having green cotyledons and green seed coats which bred true for 4 genera-
tions following a cross of a green by yellowish-brown-coated variety produced one plant with
all seeds having colored markings. Author holds that there is a relation between such delayed
segregations which at present cannot be distinguished from complex Mendelian phenomena

166 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

and the cases of vegetative segregation reported by himself and by others. He considers that
an association or disassociation during growth whereby factors may become active or inac-
tive may account for these observed facts. — D. F. Jones.

1143. von Ubisch, G. Gerstenkreuzungen. [Barley crosses.] Landw. Jahrbucher 53:
191-24-1. 3 pi., 18 fig. 1919. — Aim of present contribution is to induce breeders to pay more
attention to the laws of hybridization. Author discusses behavior in crossing of several
barley traits, such as basal bristles, dentation of lower glume, thickness of ear, number of
rows in head, and others. He also treats procedure for quantitative characters, linkage,
and abnormalities. At the close an example is taken up to show how breeder may achieve his
aim more quickly by attending to laws of heredity. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 7: 141. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1144. Webber, H. J. Necessity of selecting stocks in citrus propagation. California
Citrograph 5: 177, 198-199. 1 table, 5 fig. Apr., 1920.— A brief restatement of the main fea-
tures of the bulletin abstracted in Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 498. — H. B. Frost.

1145. Wilson, E. H. A new hybrid lily. L. imperiale. Gard. Chron. 67: 255. 1 fig.
May 22, 1920. — Many hundred plants of two [presumably hybrid] lilies, L. regale Wils., and
L. Sargentiae Wils., were grown near together in Massachusetts. Among seedlings of L.
regale there were noticed three intermediate plants. These were presumed to have been due
to pollination by L. Sargentiae. One of them is figured and described. — John Belling.

HORTICULTURE

J. H. Goueley, Editor

FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

1146. Calvino, Mario. Propagacion de las plantas por extaca. [Propagation of plants
by cuttings.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 4-9. 18 fig. 1920.

1147. Cooper, J. C. Improving the seedling walnut. Better Fruit 146: 7, 36. Dec,
1919. — Scoring cards for both the tree and the nut are given together with a brief discussion of
the value of obtaining a good seedling of English walnut for commercial propagation in the
Northwest. The author is a walnut grower of long experience. — A. E. Murneek.

1148. Crandall, C. S. The apple cross— Tolman X Malus Toringo. Proc Amer. Soc
Hortic Sci. 16: 60-66. (1919) 1920.— Tolman, a well known standard variety of apples was
crossed with a dwarf form of Malus Toringo. The seeds from the resulting fruits were planted
and hybrid trees grown. In general appearance the trees strongly resemble the male parent
except that they are not dwarf in habit and greatly exceed Malus Toringo in vigor of growth.
The fruit of the hybrids bears no resemblance to those of either parent; they are intermediate
in size, but to occupy a median position, they would have to be many times heavier and have
the diameter more than doubled. While the color was a uniform yellow, it was not the yellow
of either Tolman or Malus Toringo, but rather a dark dull orange color. The author states
that the outstandng fact regarding the group of seedlings is the extent of the domination of
the dwarf, small fruited male parent and the corresponding suppression of resemblance to
the mother plant. He states, "This dominance of Malus Toringo characters is indicative of
a degree of stability and fixity only acquired by existence through many generations and we
must assume this plant to be a true species and very near if not identical with the wild
type." [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1653.]— #. C. Auchler.

1149. Curtis, Otis F. The upward translocation of food in woody plants. II. Is there
normally an upward transfer of storage foods from the roots or trunk to the growing shoots?
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 286-293. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1310.

No. 3, December, 1920] HORTICULTURK 167

1150. Daniel, Lucien. Reactions antagonistiques et role du bourrelet chez les plantes
greffees. [Antagonistic reactions and the role of the cushion (bourrelet; in grafted plants.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 285 287. L920. -The anatomical modifications in the re-
gion of the grafl arc held fco be due primarily to the cushion (bourlrelel I develop) d at I he union
of stock and scion. This causes a diversion of conductive processes, altering the distribution
of materials. Some substances are found to pass, others will nol pass, and other substances
arc chemically changed before passage. Thus the biologic nature of the stork and scion is
considered as changed. This tissue is also concerned in the development of all excrescences
at this level, including roots of the scion, shoots of the stock and complex ti to graft
hybrids or chimeras when such occur. — C. II . and W. K. Farr.

1151. Duaktu d'Oliveira, Jose. Sur la transmission de la fasciation et de la dichotomie
a la suite de la greffe de deux vignes portugaises. [The transmission of fasciation and dichoto-
mous branching through the grafting of two Portuguese varieties of grapes.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 615, 616. 1920. — A scion of Albino de Souza, a variety of Vitis vinifera,
which is never fasciated nor branches dichotomously was grafted to a stock of Goncalo Pires,
another variety of the same species, which has fasciation and dichotomy as a permanent char-
acteristic. Shoots of the scion developed later were found to be fasciated and dichotomous
like those of the stock. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1152. Enker, V. Jardin fruitier d'amateur: Dispositions a observer pour la plantation.
JThe amateur fruit garden. Points to be observed in planting.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 16-
18. Jan., 1920. — General discussion on preparation of soil, transplanting, selection of types
of trees to be planted, and care following planting.— 2?. J. Kraus.

1153. Florin, Carl and Rudolf. "P. J. Bergius," en ny Applesort. ["P. J. Bergius,"
a new variety of apple.] [Swedish] Acta Horti Bergiani [Stockholm] 65: 1-7. Fig. 1. PI. 1.
1918. — A description and history of a new variety of apple, with beautiful crimson fruit. —
P. A. Rydberg.

1154. Fries, Rob. E. Strodda iaktagelser ofver Bergianska Tradgardens gymnospermer.
[Scattered observations concerning the gymnosperms in Hortus Bergianus.] Acta Horti Ber-
giani [Stockholm] 64: 1-19. 1 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 364.

1155. Gardner, V. R. Results of bud selection investigations at the Missouri and Oregon
experiment stations and their interpretation. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 66-70 (1919).
1920. — Scions were taken in 1895, at the Missouri station from two bearing Ben Davis trees
and from these other trees were propagated. One of the Ben Davis trees, from which the sci-
ons were taken, had been a heavy and regular producer of high grade fruit, while the other had
been a light producer of fruit inferior in size and color. The crops resulting from these two
groups of propagated trees were measured accurately. The author states, "The results of
this particular experiment may be summarized by stating that the trees propagated from the
poor parent were equal to those propagated from the good parent in productiveness, regularity
of bearing and grade of fruit." — Another bud selection experiment was made at the Missouri
station with strawberries. Runners were taken from the six most productive individuals in
the station's plot of a standard variety. Records of yields were kept, and each year for ten
years, plants from the highest yielding and low yielding plants w-ere selected and fruited.
Nothing was gained or lost by selection. — In 1913, at the Oregon station, plus and minus selec-
tions were made of four varieties of strawberries. Daughter plants wrere fruited in 1915, and
for three succeeding generations, with the same results as found at the Missouri station. The
low yielding Wilson mother plant was a poor plant maker. This characteristic was exhibited
by each group of daughter plants throughout their life. At the same time as the above study,
selections were made from productive and barren daughter plants of two station seedlings.
The resulting records showed that the high yielding selections remained at least above the
normal, while the selections from the barren plants continued to be nearly barren. In this
case, a strain of strawberries, inferior to the normal was isolated. The author states, "From

168 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

a practical viewpoint, all bud selection could accomplish would be to keep the variety up to
its own standard by the weeding out of an infertile or semi-barren strain." — The behavior of
the runner propagated daughter plants of some strawberry seedlings were studied at the
Oregon station, which gave evidence of degeneracy or "running out." Briefly, this took
three forms: (a) A more or less complete loss of ability to produce fruit though vegetative
vigor remained unimpaired, (b) A partial loss of ability to produce runners, (c) A marked
reduction in vegetative vigor, resulting in weak degenerate plants. This degeneration may
involve the entire stock of a variety, that is being grown under a given set of conditions or
only a part of that stock. — In one case studied, plants from a certain seedling, which had ap-
parently run-out at the end of the second season, were planted in a new location. Gradually
they regained their vigor and yielded well, indicating that a degenerate strain may return
to the normal, from which it sprang. The author also draws attention to the fact, that occa-
sionally bud variation may furnish the starting point for real variety improvement. [See
also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1673.]— E. C. Auchter.

1156. Lemee, E. Chardon geant de Salonique. [A giant thistle from Salonica.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 92 : 8. Jan., 1920. — This species is regarded as a promising ornamental for large
open spaces, since in the second year from seed the plants attained a height of 2.30 to 2.75
meters. Each bore approximately 40 flowerheads arising from, and symmetrically arranged
about a main central stalk in the form of a pyramid. The purple flowers began to appear in
early August, each persisted for 15 or 18 days, thus making a blooming period of about six
weeks. The plants appear to be hardy without protection. The species has been identified
as Onopordon illyricum Linne, var. Cardunculus, Boissier. — E. J. Kraus.

1157. Lesourd, F. Les plantes potageres a travers les ages. [Culinary plants grown in
various centuries.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 12-13. Jan., 1920. — A list of many species and
varieties of plants arranged according to the general time of their introduction, from the
fourteenth to the twentieth century inclusive. — E. J. Kraus.

1158. Morris, %0. M. Practical pruning as applied to apple and pear trees (Part One).
Better Fruit 146: 3-5. Dec, 1919. — Practical and definite advice is given as to methods of
procedure in pruning apple and pear trees. Both young and mature trees are considered. —
A. E. Murneek.

1159. Morris, O. M. Practical pruning as applied to apple and pear trees (Part two).
Better Fruit 147: 7-10. Jan., 1920. — The season of pruning, pruning of different varieties of
apples, treatment of pruning wounds, and repairing of injured trees are the topics considered
in this part of the article.— A. E. Murneek.

1160. Pearcy, Knight. The cultivation of filberts in the Northwest. Better Fruit 147:
3-5. Jan., 1920. — This is a complete summary of the history and present status of filbert
growing in the Northwest. Particular emphasis has been laid upon the commercial value of
the following varieties: Barcelona, Du Chilly and Davidiana. Personal opinions of success-
ful filbert growers are taken into account. The question of self-fertility and cross-pollination
of the different varieties is considered in full.— A. E. Murneek.

1161. Schimpff, Wm. E. Development of the cranberry industry in Oregon. Better Fruit
143: 7-9. Feb., 1920. — A complete and detailed account of the history and present status of
the cranberry industry in the Northwest with special reference to the Cullaby Lake district in
Oregon. — A. E. Murneek. •

1162. Shamel, A. D. Investigation with citrus fruits. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci.
16: 70-76. (1919) 1920. — This paper gives a general idea of how the investigations in Citrus
improvement have been carried on in California by members of the U. S. Dept. Agric. A
survey of the citrus orchards was first made and favorably located orchards were selected in
which to make the studies. Individual tree performance records were kept in the various

No. 3, December, 19201 HORTICULTURE 169

orchards, generally LOO trees in each orchard being used. A great many individual variations
were found, some had to do with inferior fruit, some with growth habit of the trees, some with
foliage, etc. Many strains <>f each of the citrus varieties studied were; found. By these
studies, die good and bad I r< es in differenl orchards were found. From the most productive
trees, which usually were of tin besl -train, selections of parent trees, as sources of bud wood
for propagation made. As a rule, the extent of the occurrence of trees of the off-type

strains increased with the numbers of bud generation from the original parent trees of the
variety. Under the old methods, buds were selected from vigorous growing, generally non-
fruit-bearing wood, which generally came from the most vigorous and vegetative strains of
trees, which were generally least productive and bore inferior fruit. At the present time, fruit
bearing wood from productive trees are selected to get the bud wood and by this means this
tendency toward the introduction of vegetative strains is being largely, if not wholly, over-
come. The author states that experimental propagations have been made of all of the impor-
tant bud variations studied in the course of the investigations and enough evidence has been
secured from these propagations to warrant the statement that all of the important varia-
tions have been isolated through bud selection. He states, "The deisrable variations have
been propagated and planted on an extensive commercial basis by citrus growers in Southern
California so that at the present time there are thousands of acres of these trees available for
study."— The author thinks that one of the most important results of the investigations
has been the introduction of practical methods for keeping individual tree records in orchards.
As a result of such records accurate knowledge has been obtained as to the effect of various
pruning, cultural and fertilizer practices in crop yields, in addition to the bud selection
studies. — E. C. Auchter.

1163. Tesnier, F. Culture du Loganberry aux Etats-Unis. [Loganberry culture in the
United States.] [Rev. of: Darrow, G. M. Culture of the Logan Blackberry. U. S. Dept.
Agric. Farmers Bull. 998. 1918.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 14-16. Fig. 8-4- 1920.

1164. Vincent, C. C. Results of pollination studies at Idaho University. Better Fruit
148: 11-15. Tables 1-6. Feb., 1920.— This is a summary of pollination studies with the apple
as conducted at the Idaho Agric. Exp. Sta. during the seasons of 1911, 1912 and 1914. A ma-
jority of apple varieties were found to be practically self-sterile in Idaho. Methods of deter-
mination of self sterility in apples are discussed and the results of two, the paper bag and cloth
tent methods, are compared. Self-fertilized fruits were found to contain fewer or no seeds
at all, as compared with cross fertilized fruits. Further work showed that crosses of certain
varieties gave better results than others; all varieties of apples will not cross indiscriminately
with each other. Practical application of the results obtained is suggested. — A. E. Murneek.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

1165. Acosta, Celsa. El Tararaco. [Amaryllis.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 56.
1 fig. 1920. — A description of Hippeastrum reginae Linn, as a garden plant.

1166. Anonymous. A Shakespearean garden. Nature 104: 411-442. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1440.

1167. Laumonnier, Ferard E. Plantes de rocailles et plantes de bordures herbacees.
[Plants for rockeries and herbaceous borders.] Rev. Hortic. [Parisl 92: 19-20. Jan., 1920. —
General statement urging more general planting of native and hardy species or varieties. —
E. J. Kraus.

1168. McFarland, J. Horace. Roses remade for America. Garden Mag. 31: 93-98.
April, 1920. — Mentions men who have done most to improve roses in America and discusses
their work in connection with the varieties originated or improved by each. — H. C. Thompson.

1169. Mottet, S. Les tulipes Darwin. [Darwin tulips.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 10-11.
1 pi. (colored). Jan., 1920. — This class of tulips was first exhibited in France in 1S89 by Kre-

170 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

lage and Sons, of Haarlem. Because of the large size, form, consistency, color, and keeping
qualities of the flowers, the long stems on which they are borne, and the general hardiness of
the plants, the several varieties are being widely planted by amateurs. Typically this class
of tulips should be of solid color; the variegated forms should be classed as Rembrandts.
Most of the varieties, however, are apt to become variegated in color under certain climatic
conditions or if allowed to remain for some time without transplanting to a new soil. The
more intense colors are least subject to change whereas the violets and lilacs are most likely
to become modified. — E. J. Kraus.

1170. Pinelle, J. Berberis Wilsonae Hemsley. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 8-10. 2 fig.
Jan., 1920. — This species was introduced in 1904 by E. H. Wilson, from the mountains of Se
Tchuen, western China. It is a beautiful shrub, scarcely more than a meter in height, hardy,
interesting for its almost persistent foliage, becoming yellow-red in November and December,
and its numerous coral red fruits which are conspicuous from October to severe cold weather.
— E. J. Kraus.

1171. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees VII. The Beeches. Garden Mag. 31:
115-119. 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1471.

1172. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees IX. Whence came the common fruits.
Garden Mag. 31: 259-263. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1472.

1173. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees X. The Lombardy poplar and the Babylon
willow. Garden Mag. 31: 317-320. 5 fig. 1920.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

1174. Enfer, V. Premiers semis de pois. [The first sowings of peas.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92: 20-21. Jan., 1920. — General directions are given regarding time of planting, prep-
aration of soils, selection of varieties, and harvesting. With the approach of warm weather
the vines are apt to become diseased. Copious watering and the application of copper sulfate
(2 grams per litre of water) will aid in preventing this difficulty, but after April 1 it is prefer-
able to sow varieties having wrinkled seeds since they will resist the bad effects of warm
weather to a greater degree than will the round seeded types. — E. J. Kraus.

HORTICULTURE PRODUCTS

1175. Baldasarre, Juan F. Los usos del mani. [Uses of peanuts.] Revist. Agric.
Com. y Trab. 3: 20-22. 1 fig. 1920.

1176. Cruess, W. V., A. W. Christie, and F. C. H. Flosspeder. The evaporation of
grapes. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 322: 421-471. 1920. — Plans, cost, and general speci-
fications of an evaporator of the horizontal tunnel air-blast type used successfully in the
drying of grapes and prunes are given. Dipping of grapes in dilute boiling lye solution
approximately doubled the rate of drying. No constant difference in yield could be found in
sun-drying and evaporation. Unless heavily sulfured, dried grapes of 30 per cent or more
moisture had poor keeping qualities. When dried, wine grapes could be seeded successfully
but the loss during the process was excessively large. — A. R. C. Haas.

1177. Cruess, W. V. Unfermented fruit juices. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 220.
32 p. 1920. — A full description of the methods and equipment necessary in the preparation
of unfermented fruit juices. — A. R. C. Haas.

1178. Cruess, W. V. Commercial production of grape syrup. California Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 321: 401-416. 1920. — The method and the equipment necessary for the manufacture of
grape syrup is described. The production of syrup from grapes presents a most promising
method of profitably utilizing the crop of wine grapes in California. — A. R. C. Haas.

No. 3, December, 1920] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 171

1179. Vented, Jules. Exploitation et utilization des marcs de raisins. [The utilization
of grape pomace.] Ann. Ecole Nation. Agric. Montpellier, 17 : 1-70. 5 fig. (July, 1918) July,
1919. — The utilization of grape pomace can be developed into a paying industry in the grape
producing parts of France. Methods are given for extracting alcohol, tartaric acid and oil,
and for utilizing the pomace as an animal feed and fertilizer. — /''. F. Halma.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

11S0. Aktschwager, Ernst F. On the anatomy of Chenopodium album L. Amer. J(
Bot. 7: 252-260. 2 pi., 3 fig. 1920. — Author reviews previous work on the anatomy of the
Chenopodiaceae. In the species studied he finds that in very young stems there is a ring of
collateral vascular bundles; but a periodically active extrafascicular cambium soon develops
outside of these, which lays down xylem and conjunctive tissue centripetally and, in restricted
regions, lays down phloem centrifugally. The xylem of a bundle is usually all produced before
any of its phloem develops. Where phloem arises the cambium is "used up" and disap-
pears. The continuity of the cambium .ring is maintained, however, by the progressive for-
mation of new cambium outside the phloem group. An island of intraxylary phloem is thus
produced, and as a result the vascular ring consists of successive series of xylem bundles and
islands of intraxylary phloem, the whole embedded in a mass of lignified conjunctive tissue.
That part of the conjunctive tissue which extends radially between the bundles may function
as ray tissue though it is not such morphologically. Contrary to the results of previous work-
ers, the author finds the chief element of the phloem to be the sieve tube and its companion
cell, phloem parenchmya being of only secondary importance. The ontogeny of the stem
structure of this species shows a striking similarity to the structure of the root of the sugar
beet. — E. W. Sinnott.

1181. Carano, E. Nuovo contributo alia embriologia delle Asteraceae. [Contribution to
the embryology of the Asteraceae.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.)
28l: 412-415. 1919. — A microscopical examination of the flowers of Erigeron Karvinskianus
var. mucronatus shows that the flowers have no need of pollination to mature achenes and
that this species may be apogamic. The nuclear phenomena are described. — F. M. Blodgett.

1182. Daniel, Lucien. Reactions antagonistiques et role du bourrelet chez les plantes
greffees. [Antagonistic reactions and the role of the cushion (bourrelet) in grafted plants.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 285-287. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1150.

1183. Holm, Theo. Internal glandular hairs in Dryopteris. Rhodora 22: 89-90. 2 fig.
1920. — An account of the occurrence of these structures in the intercellular spaces of the leaf
parenchyma in Dryopteris Filix mas (L.) Schott, D. marginalis (L.) Gray, D. spinulosa (O.
F. Mull.) Kuntze, and D. cristata (L.) Gray. An examination of other species of this genus
and also of other genera failed to disclose similar structures and the writer suggests that their
presence in some species and absence in others might indicate some generic distinction. —
James P. Poole.

1184. Loeb, J. The nature of the directive influence of gravity on the arrangement of
organs in regeneration. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 373-386. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1354.

1185. Soueges, R. Embryogenie des Chenopodiacees. Developpement de l'embryon chez
le Chenopodium Bonus-Henricus L. [Embryogeny of the Chenopodiaceae. Development of
the embryo of Chenopodium Bonus-Henricus L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 467-469.
1920. — The fertilized egg by two successive divisions gives rise to a row of four cells, each of
which divides to form a distinct portion of the mature embryo. This early differentiation is
unlike the condition found in the Polygonaceae, as is also the origin of the hypophysis from

172 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

the hypobasal cell of the four-celled stage. The Chenopodiaceae agree with the Polygonaceae,
however, in that the basal cell of the two-celled stage contributes to the hypocotyl, and in
that the cortex initials arise in the tissue produced from the hypobasal cell of the tetrad stage.
— C. H. and W. K. Fan:

1186. Ulehla, Vladimir. Studien zur Losung des Windesproblems. [Wind problems.]
Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920: 1-30. 1920.

1187. Wells, B. W. (Note without title.) Plant World 22: 251-252. 2 fig. 1919.— An
abnormal inflorescence of Allium mutabile is described. Certain stamen primordia had de-
veloped flowers instead of stamens. It is suggested that the peculiar development may give
a clue to the development of the compound umbel as a type of inflorescence. — Charles A. Shull.

1188. Wells, B. W. Early stages in the development of certain Pachypsylla galls on Celtis.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 275-285. 1 pi. 1920. — The galls produced on leaves of species of Celtis
by Pachypsylla mamma and P. asteriscus were studied. The life history of the insects is
briefly outlined and the histological phenomena accompanying gall formation described. The
newly hatched nymph inserts its proboscis into the upper side of the leaf and remains in this
position during gall formation. A thin sheath is laid down around the seta by the cytoplasm
of the cells which it penetrates. Through hypertrophy of the epidermis and mesophyll cells
on the opposite (lower) side of the leaf, a downward evagination is produced which lowers
the insect into the body of the leaf. A "cover-cone" now springs up on the upper surface
from tissue adjacent to the larva and rapidly grows over the insect, enclosing it in the gall.
Chloroplasts degenerate and nuclei increase in size in the zone below the larva. Multinucleate
cells appear in the tissues of the floor of the larval chamber, and the author believes their
nuclei to arise amitotically. The grand period of growth for the gall is early in its existence,
while that for the larva itself does not come until the gall is more than half grown. No clue
was obtained as to the nature of the stimulus which causes the development of these very spe-
cific gall structures. — E. W. Sinnott.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE

E. N. Transeatj, Editor

1189. Anderson, Emma N., and Edna R. Walker. An ecological study of the algae of
some sandhill lakes. Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc. 38: 51-84. PI. 3-12, 17 fig. 1920.

1190. Butterfield, W. M. A vegetable manufacturer of decorated glass. Sci. Amer.
122: 116, 122-124. 1 fig. 1920.— Description of diatoms in popular style.— Chas. H. Otis.

1191. Carter, Nellie. Studies on the chloroplastids of Desmids III. X. The chloro-
plasts of Cosmarium. Ann. Botany 34: 265-286. PI. 10-13, 88 fig. 1920.— Most of the spe-
cies of Cosmarium examined have axile chloroplasts in each semicell; in a few the chloroplasts
are parietal. The number of pyrenoids depends upon the individual, and at any time a group
of pyrenoids may be formed where originally there was only one. — E. N. Transeau.

1192. Chodat, R. Sur un Glaucocystis et sa position systematique. [Concerning Glauco-
cystis and its systematic position.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 42-49. 2 fig. 1919. — From
a careful study of the life history of a species of Glaucocystis the genus is placed in a new fam-
ily of Dinoflagellateae. The new family Glaucocystaceae has the following characteristics:
the cellulose membrane has internal polar thickenings; a large nucleus with a nucleolus, chro-
matophores strap-shaped and peripheral in distribution or arranged in two radiating groups
with a clear space on one side of the cell between the two groups of chromatophores which
makes the cells asymmetrical. Multiplication takes place as in Oocystis. The plants are
abundant on mosses and Equisetum growing in small streams. — W. H. Emig.

No. 3, December, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE 173

1193. Cokeb, W. C. A parasitic blue-green alga. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. 8oc. 35: 9.
1919.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 2026.

1194. Ducellier, F. Deux Desmidiacees nouvelles. [Two new Desmids.] Bull. Soc.
Bot. Geneve 11: 117—121. 8 fig. L919. Docidium undulatum Bail. var. b n. var.
and Cosmarium benediction n. sp. were found in Switzerland. -W. II. Emig.

1195. Du Rietz, Einak. Studier bfver de skandinaviska Laminaria-arterna. [Studies of
the Scandinavian species of Laminaria.] [Swedish.] Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920: 41-49. 1920.
— The author admits 6 species of Laminaria recorded for Scandinavia, belonging to two dis-
tinct groups. The first group contains only L. sacharina (L.) Lamour., which he dismisses
with the remark that "he has nothing of importance to communicate." Of the second group,
L. nigripes J. G. Agardh and L. gunneri Foslie have been found only on the northern coast of
Norway, the first only as thrown up on the beach and very doubtfully Scandinavian. The
second, the author had not had any chance to study. There were, therefore, only three left
to be extensively treated: 1. L. scoparia (Strom) Du Rietz, nov. comb. [L. hyperborea (Gun-
ner) Foslie; L. digitata (L.) Lamour.]; 2. L. digitata (Huds.) Edm. [L. flexicaidis LeJolis];
and 3. L. cucullata (LeJolis) Foslie. — P. A. Rydberg.

1196. F., H. [Rev. of: Gepp, A., E. S. Gepp, and Mme. Paul Lemoine. Marine algae.
(Melobesiae by Mme. Lemoine.) Botany, Part II. In British Antarctic ("Terra Nova")
Expedition, 1910. Nat. Hist. Report. P. 17-28. No date.] New Zealand Jour. Sci. Tech.
1: 251. July, 1918. — Records one new species, Melobesia Geppii Lemoine, which was collected
at Spirits Bay, North Cape. Of nine other seaweeds collected the specimens were so fragmen-
tary that they cannot be given specific rank until more and better material becomes available.
— C. S. Gager.

1197. G., A. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassiophyta and the subaerial transmigration.
Botanical Memoirs, No. 3. Oxford University Press. 95 p. 1919.] Jour. Botany 58: 59-
61. 1920.

1198. Gard, Mederic. Division chez Euglena limosa Gard. [The cell-division of Euglena
limosa Gard.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 291-292. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
989.

1199. Mangin, L. Sur les Chaetoceras du group Peruvianus Bgtw. [On the species of
Chaetoceras of the group Peruvianus Bgtw.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 25: 305-310, 411-414.
1919. — The author compares critically the various species of long-horned Diatoms of this group
previously published and recognizes 5 species and 1 form which he groups in two series desig-
nated as convexicomes and concavicornes . A new name and a new combination are proposed
as follows: C. convexicornis (C. peruvianus Gran.) and C. concavicomis Mangin forma cur-
rens (C. currens Cleve). The several species are illustrated by line drawings. — E. B. Payson.

1200. Penard. Mallomonas insignis spec, nova? Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 122-128.
1 fig. 1919. — Many specimens of Mallomonas were obtained at all seasons of the year in
swamps. The plants are considered either a new species or a European form of the American
species M. pulcherrima. — IF. H. Emig.

1201. Playfair, G. I. New ane rare freshwater algae. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South
Wales 43 : 497-543. PI. 54~5S, 11 fig. 1918. — These notes cover new and rare Australian forms,
66 of which are described and figured. — Eloise Gerry.

1202. Taylor, Fred B. Diatoms. New genera and species. Trans. Amer. Microsc.
Soc. 38: 283-290. 1919. — The catalogues of diatoms and the books and monographs which
have recently appeared on the subject are briefly discussed. The suggestions of Cleve and
others for new genera are given. A list of 42 new genera with descriptions and citations is
given. — S. H. Essary.

174 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1203. Teodoresco, Em. C. Sur la presence d'une phycoerythrine dans le Nostoc commune.
[On the presence of a phycoerythrin in Nostoc commune.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 145-160. PL
2, jig. 4. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 844.

1204. Yexdo, Kichisaburo. Novae Algae Japoniae. Decas I-III. [New Japanese
Algae. Decades I-III. ] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 1-12. 1920. — The following new species, varie-
ties and forms of marine algae are described: Cladophoropsis coriacea, Chaetomorpha Chelo-
num Collins var. Japonica, Myriocladia Kuromo, Haliseris evanescens, Spathoglosswn pacifi-
cum, Laminaria amakusaensis, Myriactis Sargassi, WUdemania Tasa, Chondrus nipponicus,
Chondrus giganteus, Gymnogongrus calenatus, Phyllophora japonica, Endocladia Yasudae,
Trematocarpus pygmaeus, Lomentaria hakodatensis, Chylocladia lubrica, Symphyocladia latis-
sima, Polysiphonia hakodatensis, Pterosiphonia pumila, Dasyphila plumarioides, Euzoniella
ocellata, Wrightiella loochooensis, Heterosiphonia japonica, Heterosiphonia coccinia Fkbg.
forms pacifica and nipponica, Ceramium Kondoi, Grateloupia catenata, G. jubata, G. kaijuen-
sis, G. ? nipponica, Nemastoma Nakamurae and var. membranacea, Hildenbrandtia yessoensis.
— Roxana Stinchjield Ferris.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

1205. Andrews, A. LeRoy. [Rev. of: Herzog, T. Die Bryophyten meiner zweiten Reise
durch Bolivia. (Bryophytes of second Bolivian trip.) Bibliotheca Botanica 87. 1916.] Bry-
ologist 23: 9-10. 1920. — The reviewer questions the author's tendency toward the multipli-
cation of new species and notes the slight value of the connection claimed to exist between
Bolivian and Mexican floras. The general phytogeographical discussions of the volume are
commended. — Edward B. Chamberlain.

1206. Bryan, Geo. S. Early stages in the development of the sporophyte of Sphagnum
subsecundum. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 296-303. 26 jig. 1920. — Author reports the results of his
study of the young sporophyte dissected out from the venter of the archegonium. The fer-
tilized egg divides by a horizontal wall into two approximately equal cells, and a filament of
from 6 to 7 cells is usually formed before any longitudinal divisions occur. The division wall
in the 2-celled stage could not be traced with certainty in the older stages. Apical growth
probably occurs in the development of the young sporophyte. If the walls appear in regular
order, a long, slender type of sporophyte is produced; if in irregular order, a shorter, bulbous
type. The number of primary segments (formed by walls transverse to the axis of the arche-
gonium) has not been found to exceed 12. In a considerable number of cases disintegration
begins at the apical portion of the very young sporophyte and proceeds for some distance basi-
petally. The early development of the sporophyte of Sphagnum shows a greater similarity
to that of the Jungermanniales than to any other group of the Bryophyta. — E. W. Sinnott.

1207. Familler, Ignaz. Die Lebermoose Bayerns. Zweiter (beschreibender) Teil.
[The Hepaticae of Bavaria. Second (descriptive) part.] Denkschr. Bayerischen Bot. Ges.
Regensburg 14: 1-167. 27 pi., 11 jig. 1920. — The first part of this comprehensive work on the
Hepaticae of Bavaria was published in 1917 (Denkschr. Bayer. Bot. Ges. Regensburg 13:
153-304. 5 jig.) and consisted of a compilation of the known stations for the various species.
The second part describes the species in considerable detail from independent observations,
giving a general idea of their habitats and of their distribution in Bavaria. Keys to the
genera and species are interpolated throughout, and every species is illustrated by one or more
photomicrographs, supplemented in a few cases by line drawings to bring out significant
features. In all 57 genera and 164 species are recognized, 22 species belonging to the Marchan-
tiales, 139 to the Jungermanniales, and 3 to the Anthocerotales. These relatively low numbers
are due to the author's broad conceptions of specific limitations. Instead of dividing a series
of closely related plants into species of subordinate rank, he defines the entire series as a

No. 3, Decbmbbb, 1920] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPUVH L75

single comprehensive species, under which he frequently distinguishes subspecies, varieties
and forms. In many cases these subspecies, varieties and even forms are recognized as
distinct species by other writers, the following subspecies for example belonging I
category: Pellia epiphylla subsp. Neesiana; Lophozia ventrico pp. guttulata (Lindb.

& \rn.i, longidens (Lindb.), confertifolia (Schiffn.), and longiflora (Nees); L. alpestris subsp.
Wenzelii (Nees); Scapania curta subsp. helvetica (Gottsche ; S. dentata subsp. undulata (L.);
S. aequiloba subsp. aspera (Bernel i; and Anthoceros punctatus subsp. Husnoti (Steph.). All
of these subspecies, an occasional variety, and the majority of the forms recognized by the
author represent new combinations (in the nomenclatorial sense), although this is not indi-
cated in any way. The work is designed primarily for beginners but will be of value to all
students of the Hepaticae. — A. W. Evans.

1208. Monckton, Horace W. The flora of the Bagshot District. Jour. Botany 57:
251-257. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1717.

1209. Pottier, Jacques. Sur la generalite de Pasymetrie foliaire chez les mousses.
The occurrence of foliar asymmetry in the mosses.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
471-474. 7 fig. 1920. — A study of sections of leaves of Leucobryum vulgare shows that the
dorsal side of the leaf develops more rapidly than the ventral, the leaves thus becoming
unsymmetrical. — C. II. and W. K. Farr.

1210. Rickett, H. W. The development of the thallus of Sphaerocarpos Donnellii Aust.
Araer. Jour. Bot. 7: 182-194. 4 pi., 1 fig. 1920. — The author discusses briefly the somewhat
conflicting views of previous students of this genus. In the species studied by him, he finds
that the spore germinates by a slender germ tube, the details as to the formation of which
are very variable. On the end of this tube and at right angles to it a germinal disc is formed
by the activity of all the terminal cells of the tube, rather than by a single apical cell. This
disc develops into the thallus of the mature plant. Apical growth of the thallus is due to a
group of four-sided cells at the apical notch, although the author suggests the possibility that
but one apical cell may sometimes be present. The dorsal ,and ventral segments of these
apical cells add to the thickness of the thallus in the median portion. The lateral segments
produce the marginal lobes. Under natural conditions, these lobes are merged into a more
or less continuous rim. Under cultural conditions, the more rapid elongation of the median
portion of the thallus results instead in the production of distinct leaf-like lobes. Branching
of the thallus is due to a division of the apical group of cells into two such groups, a lobe occu-
pying the region between. The formation of lobes is not necessarily related to branching.
A detailed account of the history of two typical plants is presented. — E. W. Sinnott.

1211. Warnstorf, C. Bemerkungen iiber einige Formen von Polytrichum und ihre Rip-
penlamellen auf der Oberflache der Blatter. [Observations on several forms of Polytrichum
and their leaf surface lamellae.] Hedwigia 61: 409-411. 1920. — Several forms of Polytrichum
attenuatum Menz. are noted, and a difference is demonstrated between the surface lamellae
of P. decipiens Limpr. and P. ohioense Ren. & Card. The author suggests a division of the
genus Polytrichum into four groups based on lamella characters. The following species
and varieties are described as new: P. attenuatum var. longifolium and P. decipiens var.
strictifolium from Germany; P. vaginatum from Greenland. — R. S. Nanz.

1212. Warnstorf, C. Uber die vegetative Vermehrung einiger Laubmoose aus Bolivia.
[The vegetative reproduction of several mosses from Bolivia.] Hedwigia 61: 412-417. 1920. —
The author describes a method of vegetative reproduction by means of leaf fragmentation in
Prionodon luteovirens (Tayl.) Mitt., Tor tula aculeata Wils., Bartramia fragilifolia C. Mull.,
and Leiomela deciduifolia Hcrzog. The last-named species also propagates itself by frag-
mentation of stems and branches. — R. S. Nanz.

176 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA,

AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatbick, Editor

FUNGI

1213. Adams, J. F. Rusts on conifers in Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 160. 30 p., 10 Jig. 1920. — A brief characterization of the coniferous rusts, an enumera-
tion of the species known to occur in the State, citations of collections with collectors names,
and an index to species and hosts. The list is composed of Peridermium Comptoniae, P.
pyriforme, P. cerebrum, P. strobi, on stems of Pinus spp.; P. acicolum, P. delicatulum,
P. carneum, P. Helianthi, P. Ipomoea, on leaves of Pinus spp. ; P. Peckii, P. Hydrangeae,
on leaves of Tsuga; P. columnare on leaves of Abies; Caeoma Abietis-canadensis on twigs and
cones of Tsuga; Gymnosporangium Juniper i-virginianae, G. globosum, G. germinate, G. effu-
sum, G. Nidus-avis, G. clavariaeforme, G. botryapites, G. trachysorum, on Juniperus spp., and
six other rusts which have been collected only in the uredinial or telial stages. — C. R. Orton.

1214. Adams, J. F. Sexual fusions and development of the sexual organs in the Peri-
dermiums. Pennsylvania Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 160: 31-76. 5 pi. 1920. — "Sexual cell
fusions and development of the aecium were studied in five species of Peridermium, P. Comp-
toniae, P. pyriforme, P. acicolum, P. Peckii and P. balsameum. In the two stem forms stud-
ied (P. Comptoniae and P. pyriforme) the pycnia have a caeomoid type of fructification,
being apparently unlimited in their development. These caeomoid pycnia originate between
the cork layer and cortical parenchyma and thus are to be considered cortical in origin and
not sub-epidermal. They are irregular in outline and the margins are not delimited, but con-
sist of a spreading plectenchyma. The pycnial layer appears as a broad, flat crust-like layer
with no definite aperture for the escape of the pycniospores which apparently depend for their
escape upon the irregular cracking of the overlying tissue. They were observed developing
in the tissue overlying the young aecia as well as in the adjacent tissue. The pycnia in the
leaf forms are early delimited. They are conoidal to hemispherical in outline and possess a
definite aperture for the escape of the pycniospores. The gametophoric hyphae form a con-
spicuous palisade layer in the aecial primordia of P. Comptoniae, P. pyriforme, and P. aci-
colum. The pseudoparenchyma of the aecial primordia is made up of the peripheral portions
(sterile cells) of the gametophoric hyphae and is sharply defined from the fertile layer. The
sterile cells of the gametophoric hyphae are homologous to the so-called "buffer cells" of the
caeoma. Sexual cell fusions occur between adjacent fertile cells of similar size and position
in two gametophoric hyphae. A dissolution of the walls occurs usually at the upper ends or
where they come in contact. This phenomenon proceeds so as to result ultimately in the com-
plete disappearance of the contact walls, thus forming a fusion cell. The development of a
peridium appears to be associated in these forms with an extensive development of pseudo-
parenchyma. The central arch of the peridium is composed of the apical metamorphosed
aeciospores of the inner spore chains. An exception is found in the aecium of P. acicolum
where the division of the peridial initial cells in the central arch cuts off an intercalary cell
above. The lateral portion of the peridium consists entirely of metamorphosed spores. In
P. Comptoniae the central arch of the peridium is two to four cells in thickness. The size of
the aecium in P. acicolum, P. Peckii and P. balsameum is early determined by the breadth
of the primordium. The aecia of P. Comptoniae and P. pyriforme resemble the caeoma in
their indeterminate growth and the aecidium cup in their deep origin and the presence of
a peridium. In P. Comptoniae and P. pyriforme the effect of the development of the pycnia
and aecia is such as to kill the immediately adjacent tissue. This tissue is sloughed off in
the late summer with the formation of a new cork layer." — C. R. Orton.

1215. Bezssonoff, [ — .] Sur l'obtention experimental de la sexualite chez les champig-
nons et orientee sur la structure typique du plasma sexuel. [On the initiation of sexual repro-

No. 3, December, 1920] MpKPHOLOG"5 AND TAXONOMY OP FUNGI, ETC. 177

duction in fungi by experimental means, and the existence of a cytoplasmic structure peculiar
to the sexual process.) Coin])!. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 288 290. L920.— See Bot. Absts.
6, Entry 1344.

1216. F airman, Charles E. The ascomycetous fungi of human excreta. // p., 3 fig.,
1 pi. Lyndonville, New York, 1920. — A privately published pamphlet prepared for the infor-
mation of the medical profession. The occurrence of a species of Fusarium is noted, and a
species of Cylindrocolla is described as new under the name C. faecalis. Brief mention is
made of the more commonly known fungous parasites of man, and a syn given of those
Ascomycetes which have been found in human tissues or excreta. A bibliography is appended.
— H. M. Fits pal rick.

1217. Fitzpatrick, Harry Morton. Monograph of the Coryneliaceae. Mycologia 12:
206-237. PI. 12-18. 1920. — Author believes it best to consider the Coryneliaceae under the
Perisporiales and close to the Perisporiaceae rather than under the Sphaeriales. Interrela-
tionships of species are discussed and a chart is presented showing author's conception of the
evolution within the family. The family is described and a key to the genera is included.
These are Caliciopsis, Sorica, Corynelia, and Tripospora. Coryneliella is excluded. Each
genus is described, its relationships are discussed, and a key is given to the species. Three
species are recognized and fully described in the genus Caliciopsis and two new combinations
are made: C. calicioides (Fries) and C. subcorticalis (Cooke and Ellis). In the genera Sorica
and Tripospora one species is recognized and described in each genus. The genus Corynelia
is to be described in the next number, but species of this genus as well as all the species in the
other general are here clearly illustrated by means of photographs and drawings. — H. R.
Rosen.

1218. Fragoso, D. Romualdo Gonzalez. Datos para la Deuteromicetologia Catalana.
[Data on the fungi imperfecti of Catalonia.] Mem. R. Acad. Cien. y Artes [Barcelona] III,
15: 429-467. Illustrated. 1920. — A large number of species of the fungi imperfecti were col-
lected in the province of Catalonia in northeastern Spain. Twenty-four species and several
varieties are described as new. — L. L. Harter.

1219. Hedgcock, George G., N. Rex Hunt, and Glenn G. Hahn. New species and re-
lationships in the genus Coleosporium. Mycologia 12: 182-198. 1920. — A Peridermium on
needles of Pinus caribaea, P. palustris and P. taeda was found in close association with plants
of Amsonia ciliata bearing uredinia of Coleosporium apocynaceum. Inoculations with aecio-
spores were successful, uredinia and telia being produced on Amsonia. A new combination
is made and described: Peridermium apocynaceum (Cooke) Hedge. & Hunt. Infection ex-
periments, using aeciospores indicates that Peridermium fragile Hedge. & Hunt is the aecial
stage of Coleosporium I aciniariae Arthur. This species ranges from New Jersey to Florida
and Arkansas. As a result of successful inoculations with aeciospores of Peridermium
minutum Hedge. & Hunt on Adelia ligustrina, with the production of uredinia and telia, the
alternate host for this Peridermium is established and the new combination Coleosporium
minutum Hedge. & Hunt is made and described. Numerous infection experiments as well as
morphological differences indicate that Coleosporium elephantopodus (Schw.) Thum. and C.
carneum (Bosc) Jackson are different species. The new combination Peridermium elephanto-
podis (Schw.) Hedge. & Hahn is made and described "to distinguish it from other species of
the form genus Peridermium." Eleven species of Pinus are listed as aecial hosts and four
species of Elephantopus as uredial and telial hosts of Coleosporium elephantopodis. Peri-
dermium carneum (Bosc) Seym. & Earle is redescribed; fourteen species of Pinus and fourteen
species of Vernonia together with localities are listed under Coleosporium carneum. A new
leaf Peridermium, P. jloridanum, Hedge. & Hahn, is described on Pinus palustris collected
near Ocala, Florida. Peridermium intermedium Am. Auct. appears to be a mixture of two
species, P. carneum and P. elephantopodis. Seven species of Peridermium are listed as occur-
ring on Pinus echinata. Notes are presented on the period of fruiting of leaf Peridermiums on
pine. Eleven new pine hosts of various species of Coleosporium are listed, and thirteen new

178 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

uredinial and telial hosts of various genera including C. ribicola on Grossularia cynosbati
from Wisconsin, and on G. innominata and G. reclinata from District of Columbia. — H. R.
Rosen.

1220. Lixgelsheim, A. Uber "steinreizker" in Schlesien. ["Steinreizker" in Silesia.]
Hedwigia 61: 380-382. 1920. — Verticillium silesiacum n. sp. is described as the conidial stage
of Hypomyces lateritius. The specimen was found on the market in Frankenstein as a para-
site of Lactaria theiogola. The name is suggested by the hardness of the hypertrophied tissue
as compared with tissue affected with Hypomyces ochraceus (V. agaricinum). Mycelium of
V. silesiacum is yellow and the conidia measure 18 X 7^. — Verticillium niveostratosum Lin-
dau on Fuligo septica and Stemonitis fusca probably is identical with the conidial stage of
Hypomyces violaceus. — D. Reddick.

1221. Loubiere, A. Sur la flore fongique du fromagede Brie. [The fungal flora of de Brie
cheese.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 336-339. 2 fig. 1920.— In addition to species
of Penicillium the fungi present in the order of their frequency are Fusarium sarochroum
Desm., Geotrichum candidum Link, Trichosporium sp., Botryotrichum piluliferum Sacc. &
March, Hormodendron cladosporioides (Fresen.) Sacc, Gymnoascus luteus Zuk., Lasiobotrys
sp. Reproduction of Trichosporium by chlamydospores and conidia is described, as is also
the formation of conidiophores and arthrospores in Hormodendron.— C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1222. Riddle, Lincoln W. Observations on the genus Acrospermum. Mycologia 12:
175-181. PL 11. 1920. — Since the fruiting body appears to be a perithecium the author fol-
lows Ellis in placing the genus under the Hypocreales rather than under the Hysteriales.
Variations of Acrospermum compressum are noted; A. graminum Libert and A. foliicolum
Berk, are considered as varieties of it, the latter as var. foliicolum (Berk.) Riddle comb. nov.
Acrospermum Maxoni Farlow is described as a new species occurring on the underside of liv-
ing fronds of Polypodium induens and P. cretatum. Acrospermum corrugatum Ellis and A.
fultum Harnkess are said to be the same species and "is identical with the long known but
comparatively rare European species: Lophium dolabriforme Wallr." — H. R. Rosen.

1223. Saccardo, P. A. Notae mycologicae, ser. XXIX — Micromycetes Dakotenses et
Utahensis a Doct. J. F. Brenckle lecti et communicati. [Fungi of Dakota and Utah collected
by J. F. Brenckle.] Mycologia 12: 199-205. 1920. — Twenty-five perfect and eight imperfect
fungi are listed, some with brief descriptive notes. One new genus and several new species
are described: Rosellinia subsimilis Sacc. sp. nov., Phaeotrype Sacc. gen. nov., P. Brencklei
Sacc. sp. nov., Diatrype paurospora Sacc. sp. nov., Chorostate utahensis Sacc. sp. nov., Dia-
porlhe (Euporthe) Brenckleana Sacc. sp. nov., Lachnum crystalligerum Sacc. sp. nov., Pati-
nella Brenckleana Sacc. sp. nov., Septoria Lunelliana Sacc. sp. nov., Melanconium botryosum
Sacc. sp. nov., Steganosporium utahense Sacc. sp. nov. — H. R. Rosen.

1224. Sartory, A. Sur un champignon nouveau du genre Aspergillus isole dans un cas
d'onychomycose. [A new fungus of the genus Aspergillus isolated from a case of onychomycosis. ]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 523, 534. 1920.— C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1225. van Overeem, C. Beitrage zur Kenntnis einiger Helotiaceen. [Contribution to a
knowledge of the Helotiaceae.] Hedwigia 61: 383-389. PI. 4, 2 fig. 1920.— Critical discus-
sions with extended descriptions from an abundance of material of the following: Gorgoniceps
aridida, Helotium sxdphurinum, H. pallescens. Rutstroemia firma has 3 types of asexual spores
Verticillium-like, Oidium-like and conidia formed at the ends of the ascospores. Ciboria
rhizophila is new to the Dutch flora. — Helotium virgultorum is exceedingly variable in form,
depending on conditions of growth, and the two varieties of Rehm, salicinum and fructigenum
are wholly unwarranted. — D. Reddick.

1226. van Overeem, C. Uber zwei wenig bekannte Schmarotzer von Discomyceten.
[Two little-known parasites of discomycetes.] Hedwigia 61: 375-379. 1 fig. 1920. — Stcpha-
noma slrigosum Wallr. and Sepedonium simplex Cda. were found on Lachnea hemisphaerica

No. 3, December, L920] MORPHOLOGY and TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 179

in Holland. The Verticillium stage of S. strigosum appears first as a covering on the
hymeninin of the host. This is replaced by a layer of chlamydospores which bas practically
the same color as the normal hymenium. The spores of the hosi remain an unrecognizable

mass. The disease was very abundant in Holland in L918. Sepedonium simplex attacks the
entire apothecium but produces its spores on the surface of the hymenium. The spores are
borne somewhat like those of Verticillium. This stage has been called Fv&v porium fungi-
colum by Corda. Chlamydospores follow and t hese are colored, first red then yellowish brown.
A new diagnosis, following suggestions of Lindau, of S< pciloniuni simplex CCorda Lindau, is
presented. — The parasite was found on Macropodium macropus and on Lachnea Ik misphaerica
and has been reported on other discomycetes. — D. Reddick.

1227. Vuillemin, P. Revue de mycologie. Premiere partie : Mycologie pure. [Review of
mycological literature. Part I: Pure mycology.] Rev. Gen. Sci. Pnres et Appliquees, 31:
14S-156. 1920. — In this review the author summarizes the work of many authors, first on the
cytology of the Basidiomycetes, in which observations on cell and nuclear fusions are reported
and from which inferences as to changes in classification are drawn: second on the relation of
nuclear evolution and behavior to sexuality: third on the anatomy of the Basidiomycetes at
various stages in growth and development : fourth similarly on the anatomy of the Ascomycetes
with the effect of these studies on classification in each group: fifth on the reports of new spe-
cies in all parts of the world. — G. J. Peirce.

1228. Vuillemin, P. Revue de mycologie. Deuxieme partie: Mycologie appliquee. [Re-
view of mycological literature. Part II : Applied mycology.] Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appliquees
31 : 177-186. 1920. — Reviews in the field of applied mycology, the more recent publications on
fungi under the headings (1) poisoning by fungi, (2) fungous parasites of man, (3) fungous
parasites of invertebrate animals, (4) fungous parasites of plants. Of these last he considers
A — Phycomycetes, B — Uredineae and Ustilagineae, C — Basidiomycetes, D — Ascomycetes
and Fungi imperfecti. One is impressed with the very considerable number of American
papers included. — G. J. Peirce.

1229. Vuillemin, Paul. Remarques sur un champignon rapporte par M. Loubiere au genre
Trichosporium. [Remarks on the fungus reported by Loubiere as belonging to the genus Tri-
chosporium.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 554, 555. 1920. — The author questions the
justification for placing the fungus described by Loubiere as occurring in deBrie cheese in
the genus Trichosporium. It resembles in many ways species of Harziella but is excluded
from that group on account of the absence of mucilage. — C. H . and W. K. Farr.

LICHENS

1230. Anders, Josef. Die Strauch- und Blattflechten Nordbohmens. 2 Nachtrag. [The
fruticose and foliose lichens of northern Bohemia. 2.] Hedwigia 61 : 351-374. 1920. — Geo-
logic formations are described in some detail. Information fromKatzer's Geology of Bohemia.
Lichen flora is very rich. Particularly interesting conditions are found in some of the rail-
road cuts. List includes Cladonia, 37 species, Stereocaulon nanum, Peltigera erumpens, Par-
melia, 7 species, Parmeliopsis, 2 species, Cetraria, 7 species, Letharia vidpina, Gyrophora
vellea and flocculosa, Physcia dubia. Cetratia bohemica is new; several new forms are de-
scribed. Many of the species are new to Bohemia. Synonomy, stations, and exsiccati are
mentioned and there are critical notes on many species. — D. Reddick.

1231. Meres chkovsky, Const. Contribution a la flore lichenologique des environs de
Kazan. [The lichen flora of Kazan.] Hedwigia 61 : 183-224. PI. 2,1 fig. 1919.— A provisional
list in which certain genera, e. g., Cladonia, have not received full attention. The flora of
Kazan is either terrestrial or forest. Species of Physcia abound. Notes on occurrence, dis-
tribution, exsiccati, etc. Practically all species noted are described in some detail and there
are critical notes on some species. There are proposed several new combinations, a number
of new varieties and many new forms. — D. Reddick.

180 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

BACTERIA

1232. Bergstrand, Hilding. On the nature of bacteria. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27:
1-22. 8 pi., IS fig. 1920. — The writer brings data and photographic evidence to prove that
"bacteria may be regarded as Fungi imperfecti developed through reduction of higher forms
and not as lowly primordial organisms to be placed at the very beginning of the organic
world." He confirms the theory of Zopf that the fission fungi, probably with some excep-
tions, are able to pass through different developmental stages. — Selman A. Waksm,an

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Beery, Editor

1233. Arttffo, Caterina Samsonoff. Sopra due alghe calcaree di specie viventi, nel
Post-pliocene inferiore di Livorno. [Two existing species of calcareous algae in the older Pleis-
tocene of Leghorn.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 281: 359-362.
1919. — The two species of algae Lithophyllum papillosum (Zan.) Foslie /. Cystosirae (Hauck)
Foslie and Lithothamnium polymorphum (L) Aresch. /. tubercolata (Foslie) are reported from
the study of fossils in the collection of the R. Institute of Geology of Florence. — F. M.
Blodgelt.

1234. Bertrand, Paul. Succession normale des flores houilleres dans le bassin houiller
du Gard. [Normal succession of the coal flora in the coal basin of Gard.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 170: 331-333. 1920. — The flora of these beds is discussed in its bearing on the stratig-
raphy of the region. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1235. Braun-Blanquet, J. Uber die eiszeitliche Vegetation des siidlichen Europa.
[Upon the glacial vegetation of southern Europe.] Viertelsjahrsschrift Naturf. Ges. Zurich.
64 Jg. 1919: xli-xliv. 1920.

1236. Braun-Blanquet, J. Die Fohrenregion der Zentralpentaler, insbesondere Grau-
biindens, in ihrer Bedeutung fur die Florengeschichte. [The Fir region of the Central Alpine
valleys, especially the Grisons, and its bearing on the floral history.] Viertelsjahrsschrift
Naturf. Ges. Zurich. 1918: 59-S6. 1920.

1237. Brochman-Jerosch, H. Weitere Geschichtspunkte zur Beurteilung der Dryasflora
[Additional viewpoints in the interpretation of the Dryas flora.] Heim Festschrift Viertel-
jahrsscher Naturf. Ges. Zurich. 1919: 35-49. 1920.

1238. Fleiszner, [ — ]. Die Bildung fossiler Kohlen im Zusammenhange mit Verwitter-
ungsvorgangen. [The formation of fossil coal in relation to processes of weathering.] Berg. u.
Hutten. Jahrb. 67: 1-13. 1919.

1239. Florin, Rudolf. Zur Kenntnis der Jungtertiaren Pflanzenwelt Japans. [On
knowledge of the later Tertiary plant world of Japan.] Kgl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 61:
1-71. 6 pi. 1920.— Fossil plants are described from Amakusa Island, Shimonoseki and Mogi
and an unknown locality, all in southern Japan. The two principal localities are those of
Amakusa and Mogi, the latter first made known by Nathorst some forty years ago, but the
age of which had never been conclusively settled beyond the fact that it was post-Miocene.
The Amakusa flora comprises representatives of the genera Taxodium, Juglans, Carpinus.
Fagus, Celtis, Magnolia, Liquidambar, Sorbus, Primus, Dictamnus, Rhus, Ilex, Acer, Aescu-
lus, Elaeocarpus, Tilia, Stuartia, Cornus, Clethra, Diospyros, Apocynum, Viburnum, Sym-
plocos?, Sophora?, Spiraea?. The Mogi flora contains the genera Taxodium, Salix, Fagus,
Ulmus, Schizandra, Liquidambar, Phellodendron, Acer, Zizyphus, Elaeocarpus, Tilia, Stu-
artia?, Cornus and Viburnum. Both are contained in a tuff and have a majority of species
in common. That from Amakusa has 35 per cent extinct forms and 48 per cent of its still
existing species are represented in the present flora of southern Japan. That from Mogi has

No. 3, December, 1920] PALEOBOTANY 181

39 per cent of extinct forms and of the remainder 1"> per cent still exist in southern Japan.
Three of the extra Japanese forms are confined to the existing flora of southeastern North
America. There is an interesting discussion of the floral facies and its eco indicati

as well as a review of the wide ranging Pliocene floras as shown by their presence throughout
the Northern Hemipshere. The two floras described are considered to be of about the same
age, that from Amakusa being, if anything, slightly younger than that from Mogi. Both are
taken to indicate slightly cooler climatic conditions than prevail at the present time in south-
ern Japan, and their age is considered to be late Pliocene. — E. W. Berry.

1240. Fubber, E. Wandlungen in der Vegetations decke der Schweiz. [Changes in the
vegetation of Switzerland.] Viertelsjahrsschrift Naturf. Ges. Zurich. 64 Jg. 1919: iii-v.
1920.

L241. Gbout, F. F., and Bbodebick, T. M. Organic structures in the Biwabik iron-
bearing formation of the Huronian in Minnesota. Amer. Jour. Sci. 48: 199-205. 1919. —
Describes organic remains from the pre-Cambrian rocks of Minnesota, including a new species
of Alga, Collcnia biwabikensis. — E. W. Berry.

1242. Hesselmax, H. Om pollenregn pa hafvet och fjarrtransport af barrtradspolier.
[The rain of pollen on the sea and the wide distribution of the pollen of trees.] Geol. Foren.
Forh. 41: 89-108. 4 fig. 1919.

1243. Iwasaki, C. A fundamental study of Japanese coal. Tech. Repts. Tohoku Imp.
Univ. Sendai 1 : 1-35. 8 pi. 1920.

1244. Joxg.maxs, W. J. Stratigraphie van het Nederlandsch Productief Carboon. [Stratig-
raphy of the coal measures of Holland.] 250 p. Charts 14-27. Amsterdam. 1918. — This final
report of the commission for the investigation of the coal measures of Holland is devoted to
a detailed account of the stratigraphy as disclosed by underground exploration. There are
some lists of fossil plants, but the work will be chiefly useful to botanists for the location of
the numerous fossil plants described by the author in other publications. Its geological
value is great. — E. W . Berry.

1245. Krausel, R. Nachtrage zur Tertiarflora Schlesiens. I. [Addendum to the Ter-
tiary flora of Silesia.] Jahrb. Preuss. Geol. Landes. fiir 1918, 39: 329-417. PI. 16-27. 1920.—
Records Macrosporium and Helicomia on Sequoia, a fern (Woodwardites), Torreya, Taxus,
Pinus, Taxodium, Sequoia, Libocedrus, Salix, Myrica, Pterodarya, Juglans, Carya, Carpinus,
Betula, Alnus, Castanopsis, Ulmus, Brasenia, Magnolia, Crataegus, Rubus, Potentilla, Acer,
Vitis, Trapa, Cornus, Nyssa, Hypericum, Hippuris, Carpolithus, and Symplocos from the
brown coal of Silesia. — E. W. Berry.

1246. Kbausel, R. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Diluvialflora von Ingramsdorf in
Schlesien. [A contribution to the knowledge of the Pleistocene flora of Ingramsdorf in Silesia.]
Neues Jahrb. 1920, 1: 104-110. PL 3. 1920. — Figures a spot fungus with teleutospores on
fragments of Phragmites, fern sporangia suggestive of Polypodium vulgare, and Salvinia
nutans from a peat and loam deposit at Ingramsdorf in Silesia. — E. W. Berry.

1247. Kbausel, R., and othebs. Die Pflanzen des schlesischen Tertiars. [The plants
of the Tertiary of Silesia.] Jahrb. Preuss. Geol. Landes. fiir 1917, 382. 338 p., 26 pi. 1919. —
Silesia is a classic region for Tertiary plants, published work going back to the days of Volk-
mann's Silesia subterranea (1720) and several of Gceppebt's early works, commencing in 1S45,
were devoted to their elucidation. The present work is a more or less critical revision of what
is known of these floras. The leaves and fruits of the Betulaceae and Ulmaceae are discussed
by Reimaxn, a beginner in paleobotany, who was killed in the war; those of the conifers and
Fagaceae are discussed by E. Reichexbach; the Salicaceae, Aceraceae and remaining fami-
lies by F. Meyer; and the woods of the browncoal by W. Prill and R. Krausel. This last
part is the most important for although the part dealing with the leaves and fruit is an exceed-

182 PALEOBOTANY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

ingly useful summary to date, the authors bring no very critical experience to their task.
They have proposed scarcely any new species, and have greatly reduced the number of recorded
species from these Miocene deposits by combining a great many of Gceppert's ill-advised spe-
cific proposals. Thus the following which stood as species in the literature, mostly names
of Gceppert disappear into the synonymy: 10 of Salix, 6 of Populus, 1 of Juglans, 1 of Myrica,
6 of Quercus, 1 of Castanea, 4 of Platanus, 4 of Acer, 1 of Rhus, 3 of Dombeyopsis, 1 of Trapa,
2 of Alnus, 7 of Betula, 3 of Carpinus and 7 of Ulmus. The woods described from the Silesia
browncoal number 18 species and are referred to the following genera: Podocarpoxylon,
Cedroxylon, Piceoxylon, Pinuxylon, Glyptodroloxylon, Taxodioxylon, Cupressinoxylon, and
Juniperoxylon. A key to the wood structure of the recent and fossil Cupressinoxyla should
prove useful to anatomists, especially those interested in fossil woods.— E. W. Berry.

124S. Kryshtofovich. A. A new fossil palm and some other plants of the Tertiary flora of
Japan. Jour. Geol. Soc. Tokyo 27: 1-20. PI. 13-15. 1920. — Describes fossil plants from Shio-
gama and Tsukinoki in the province of Rikuzen and from Akihomura near Sendai. Species
of Sabal, Juglans, Fagus, Castanea, Ficus, Liquidambar and Vitiphyllum are recorded from
the former and Taxodium, Betula and Alnus from the latter. — There is a helpful discussion
of the age of these and other Tertiary plant beds of Japan and the author concludes that the
aforementioned florules along with those previously known from Azano, Kayakusa, Ogoya,
Akiho, Shiogama, etc., are of Miocene age: those of Shiobara and Mogi are Pliocene: and
those of Ishikari and Shitakara are Eocene. — E. W. Berry.

1249. Kubart, B. Uber den Verfall palaobotanischer Forschung in den Landern deutscher
Zunge. [Upon the decline of paleobotanical researches in German speaking countries.] Osterr.
Bot. Zeitg. 1919: 233-237.

"&•

1250. Neuweiler, E. Die Pflanzenreste aus den Pfahlbauten am Alpenquai in Zurich
und von Wollishofen sowie einer interglazialen Torfprobe von Niederweningen ( Zurich). [The
plant remains of the Lake dwellings at the Alpine quay in Zurich, from Wollishofen and from
an interglacial peat boring at Niederweningen.] Viertelsjahrsschrift. Naturf. Ges. Zurich.
64 Jg. 1919: 617-648. 1920.

1251. Reid, Mrs. Eleanor M. On two preglacial floras from Castle Eden (County Dur-
ham). [Abstract.] Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 6: 247-248. 1920. — Fossil seeds were examined
from clays found in fissures of the Magnesian Limestone at Castle Eden. The clays had been
carried by the Scandinavian ice from the area now occupied by the North Sea. The study
proved the presence of two seed-bearing clays of different ages. A comparison of the Cro-
merian, Teglian, Castle-Eden, Reuverian, and Pont-de-Gail floras on the bases of the percent-
ages of all exotics, and of Chinese-North American exotics (i. e., plants now inhabiting the Far
East of Asia or North America but not Western Europe), in each flora proved the Reuverian
to be Lower Pliocene and the Castle-Eden flora to be Middle Pliocene. Therefore a study of
fossil seeds made possible the discrimination of strata intimately mixed and the determination
of their geological ages. The Castle-Eden Pliocene is characterized by the number of extinct
and exotic forms and by the absence of aquatic species. Therefore the area now forming part
of the North Sea probably was an upland valley four hundred feet above the Middle Pliocene
sea-level. [From author's abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the Geological Society.]
— H. H. Clum.

1252. Reid, Mrs. Eleanor M. A comparative review of Pliocene floras based on the
study of fossil seeds. [Abstract.] Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 6: 248. 1920. — By plotting as
a curve the percentages of the exotics and of the Chinese-North American exotics from the
Cromerian, Teglian, Castle-Eden, Reuverian, and Pont-de-Gail floras, it was found that all
lay along a smooth curve, indicating changes in the Pliocene and Miocene Ages. The posi-
tion of the floras in time, as indicated by the curve, agrees with that determined by paleon-
tology. The destruction and supplanting of the Chinese-North American exotic flora began
about the Middle Miocene when the Europea and Asiatic Alpine ranges attained their maxi-

No. 3, December, 1920] PATHOLOGY 183

mum uplift. The curve indicates an incoming flora, the present flora of Western Europe
which first appeared in the Miocene. Only part of it has survived, the destruction becoming

greater after the Middle Pliocene. [From author's abstract of a paper read at a meeting
of the Geological Society.] — H. II. Chun.

L253. ScHLAFFNEB, H. Die geographischen Bedingungen der Moorbildung in Deutsch-
land. [The geographical conditions of moor formation in Germany.] Xcue Munchener geogr.
Studicn. 1. 47 p. 1920.

1254. Stutzer, O. Uber Methoden der mikroskopischer Kohlenuntersuchung. [Upon
methods of microscopic coal investigation.] Mikrokosmos. Zeits. angewandte Mikroskopie.
1919-1920. Hft. 6: 132-134.

1255. Werth, A. J. Die wichtigsten Moor- und Torf-arten und ihre Entstehung in Ver-
gangenheit und Gegenwart. [The important moor and peat species and their origin in the past
and the present.] Mitt. Ver. Ford. Moorkultur. 38: 46-51, 59-64. 1920.

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

1256. Adams, J. F. Rusts on conifers in Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 160. 30 p., 10 fig. (1919) 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6,vEntry 1213.

1257. Anonymous. Insects and diseases which injure trees. Amer. Forestry 26: 308-309.
1920. — Contains formulae and general directions. — Chas. H. Otis.

1258. Anonymous. The menace of silver leaf. Jour. Bd. Agric. [London] 25: 870-S71.
1918. — Silver leaf is reported as becoming increasingly serious to orchard trees. Valuable
varieties of plum, like Victoria, are threatened with extinction. "By promptly cutting out
silvered branches and by rigorously removing all dead tree, or trees which have begun to die
back, it has been proved in practice that the spread of the disease is checked." — D. Reddick.

1259. Atwood, Alice C. Errors in Lindau's "Thesaurus" and Saccardo's "Sylloge."
Mycologia 12: 169-171. 1920.

1260. Bailey, M. A. Puccinia malvacearum and the mycoplasm theory. Ann. Botany
34: 173-200. April, 1920.— See Bot, Absts. 6, Entry 774.

1261. Calvino, Mario. El zacate prodigio. (Tripsacum latifolium, Hitchcock.) [A
forage plant.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 62-67. 6 fig. 1920.

1262. Campbell, C. Su di un caso di invasione di ruggine nera dei cereali "Puccinia
graminis Pers." in Terra di Lavoro. [An invasion of the black rust of cereals in Terra di Lavoro.]
Atti R. Accad. Lincei Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 281: 142-145. 1919— In 1913 in a re-
stricted area in Atina, wheat was found so severely attacked by rust as to practically a total
failure. A leaf rust classed as Puccinia rubigovera (P. triticina) is commonly present in this
region but causes little damage and does not attack the barberries. The severe attack in
question was found to have three centers lying about or on the windward side on barberry
plantings. All the barberries were removed in 1913 except one plant; in 1914 the rust appeared
only in the vicinity of this plant. With the destruction of the remaining barberry in 1914,
the rust has not reappeared from 1915 to the present date. The introduction of P. graminis
was attributed to experimental plantings of wheat in this neighborhood. — F. M. Blodgett.

1263. Carpenter, C. W. Potato diseases in Hawaii and their control. Hawaii Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 45. 42 p. 15 pi., 7 fig. 1920.— A brief description of the more important
potato diseases, including insect enemies, together with a discussion of the control measures

184 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI

found to be most practicable. The following diseases are discussed: early blight, late blight,
Fusarium wilt, Sclerotium wilt, late blight rot, storage rots, corky scab, black scurf or russet
scab, tuber moth, borers, cut worms, and mites. — /. M. Westgate.

1264. Chaine, J. L'attaque des vegetaux par les Termites. [Termite attacks on plants.]
Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appliquees 31: 250-255, 281-285. 1920.— Termes lucifugus, a white
ant of tropical origin, late in the eighteenth century invaded Rochelle, Rochefort and other
places in western France, gradually spreading from there over a wide area and causing consider-
able damage, not only to buildings, furniture, and other structures of dead wood, but to liv-
ing trees, shrubs and even herbaceous plants. A proposed method of control is outlined
which consists in irrigation of the affected trees by one or another of three solutions, trenches
holding 200 to 300 liters being used for this purpose. The essential ingredients of these solu-
tions are mercuric bichloride, potassium ferrocyanide and potassium ferricyanide respectively,
and these are used at approximately 3 per cent concentration. Irrigation with these solutions
was repeated two or three times at intervals of two days, and then the trenches were refilled
with soil. There were three such irrigations per annum, in the winter, spring and fall. Com-
parison at the end of the first year showed that the treated trees looked slightly better than
the rest. At the end of the second year, however, the trees treated with the mercuric bichlor-
ide and the potassium ferrocyanide solutions no longer gave any external evidence of ter-
mites, while those treated with the ferricyanide merely showed great improvement. Exten-
sion of this method to the protection of potatoes, oats, cabbage, etc., seemed to be entirely
successful up to 1914, and to have no ill effects upon the animals fed upon the materials thus
protected. — G. J. Peirce.

1265 Conneb, S. D., and E. N. Febgtjs. Borax in fertilizers. Purdue Univ. Agric.
Exp. Sta. 239. 15 p., fig. 1-4. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1381.

1266. Duddleston, B. H. The modified rag doll and germinator box. Purdue Univ. Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 236. 12 p., 7 fig. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 477.

1267. Gboom, Pebcy. Brown oak. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 103-109. 1920.— When
certain individual British oak trees, not differing in form in any recognizable way from the
normal, are felled, it is discovered that their heart-wood is wholly or partially represented by
a much more valuable type of wood known as "brown oak" or "red oak." This wood is firm
in texture and deeper or richer in color than the normal wood. Sometimes uniformly colored,
at other times it is traversed by bands or studded with patches of lighter and darker wood,
which may in places be nearly black. This latter variegated type is the so-called "tortoise-
shell" variety. The United Kingdom is the sole known geographical source of this product.
In the trunk, the brown wood most frequently occurs at the base, extends upwards and down-
wards into the root for a variable distance, often tapering in such a manner that its ends appar-
ently conicide with the inmost heart-wood. In the trunk, the brown wood, when traced
upward, sometimes becomes confined to one side; and when the trunk divides into two or more
leaders, the brown wood may ascend one but be lacking from the others. It may occur in
upper parts of the tree but be partially or entirely lacking in any lower part of the trunk. In
the trunk, the brown wood often stops at a large knot, and in such cases, the large limb con-
nected with the knot is devoid of brown oak. Of two oak trees growing side by side, one may
be normal and the other have the brown wood. The brown wood is often encountered in the
form of burr-wood (burl). This brown wood is firm and hard. — Under the miscroscope, mature
"brown oak" structurally agrees with ordinary oak hardwood. It differs from this only by
the presence of considerable qxiantities of solid brown substance in the cavities (especially in
the parenchyma) and the firmness with which it holds tannin. Careful microscopic investi-
gations and cultural experiments lead to the conclusion that the coloring of the wood is due to
a fungus whose identity is as yet unknown. The hyphae possess little power of attacking the
walls, but feed nearly exclusively on substances in cells and especially of the parenchyma. At
the expense of its food material, the fungus manufactures coloring materials that darken the
wood. — C. R. Tillotson.

No. 3, December, 1920] PATHOLOGY I So

1268. Hamblin, C. O. Collar rot of citrus trees. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 439-
441. 6 Jig. 1920. — Description and treatment given for this disease which is caused by
Fusarium limonis Briosi. — L. R. Waldron.

1269. Hartley, Carl. Stem lesions caused by excessive heat. Jour. Agric. Res. 14:
595-604. 1918. — "Whitespot" occurs on very young seedlings of conifers and certain other
plants and resembles closely typical "damping off." "The location of whitespot lesions on
the stems, their observed relation to insolation and to dry surface soil, and the production
of typical lesions by artificial heating, indicate excessive heat as the cause of most whitespot
trouble." Records show that surface soils may reach a temperature well over 50°C. — Lesions
on stems of similar plants ranging up to 4 years in age may be attributed to heat but further
experimental evidence is needed. — D. Reddick.

1270. Harvey, R. B. Relation of catalase, oxidase, and H-concentration to the formation
of overgrowths. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 211-221. 2 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1353.

1271. Hoffer, G. N. Disease-free sweet corn seed. Purdue Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
233. 12 p., 8 fig. 1920. — This bulletin considers the experiments wherein sweet corn seed
was tested for infection by root- and stalk-rot pathogenes and then planted. Other experi-
ments dealt with ears selected by inspection as apparently sound. The symptoms of root
and stalk rots are briefly described and the effects of the rots on production are noted. Experi-
ments during 1919 at various places show a 10 to 30 per cent increase in yield from the appar-
ently disease-free seed ears over those which germinate well but are infected. The methods
of control recommended are (1) careful field selection and curing of the seed ears and (2)
testing the ears for seed infections on germinators. — G. N. Hoffer.

1272. Htjngerford, Charles W. Rust in seed wheat and its relation to seedling infection.
Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 257-277. PI. 38~48, 1 fig. 1920. — Uredinia and telia of Puccinia gram-
inis tritici are found embedded in the pericarp on the hilar end of kernels of wheat (Triticum)
and sometimes along the ventral groove as far up as the middle of the kernel. Infected ker-
nels have black hilar ends and groups of telia appear as shining black specks under the lens.
The percentage of seed infection in the rust years, 1915 and 1916, was very low. A little over
1 per cent was the largest quantity found in any sample. Durum wheats are most commonly
affected. — The infection undoubtedly spreads to the kernel from original infection on rachis,
rachilla or glumes. — Germinating power of seed is not impaired by rust infection. Rust
infection in the field does not appear earlier on plants from infected seed than on plants from
clean seed. 2,500 plants from infected seed grown under controlled conditions developed no
rust. Mycelium was not found to spread from pericarp to young plants. Viable uredinio-
spores sown with seed failed to produce infection. — Stem rust is not transmitted from one
wheat crop to the next by means of infected seed. "In the writer's judgment, the occurrence
of stem rust sori in the pericarp of the caryopses of grains and grasses has no especial signifi-
cance; but the infection spreads to these tissues just as it does from an infection point in any
of the vegetative parts of the plant." — D. Reddick.

1273. Htjtchtns, D. E. Insignis-pine disease. Jour. Agric. New Zealand 16: 37. 1918.
— An attack at Khandallah on insignis pine began in early winter and increased through the
wet season. It was worst in the warm wet spring. The leaves turned brown and dropped.
When dry weather set in new leaves pushed forth. This disease is distinct from the South
Australian disease caused by Peridermium. Climatic conditition are thought to be respons-
ible.— D. Reddick.

1274. Jackson, A. B. A possible cause of spike in sandal. Indian Forester 45 : 635. 1919.
— A suggestion is made that spike might be caused by excessive parasitism of sandal on san-
dal.— E. N. Munns.

1275. Jackson, H. S. New or noteworthy North American Ustilaginales. Mycologia 12:
149-156. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 775.

186 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1276. Lingelsheim, A. Uber "steinreizker" in Schlesien. ["Steinreizker" in Silesia.]
Hedwigia 61 : 380-382. 1920 — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1220.

1277. Lopriore, G. Recent biological researches on the rusts affecting cereals. Inter-
nal Rev. Sci. & Practice Agric. 10: 742-746. 1919.

1278. Magrou, J. Immunite des plantes annuelles vis-a-vis des champignons symbio-
tiques. [Immunity of annual plants with respect to symbiotic fungi.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 170: 616-618. 1920. — Seeds of Orobus coccineus (Lathyrus sphaericus) were sown in
soil infested with the mycorrhiza of Orobus tuberosus. The roots were invaded by the fungus,
and after 40 days appeared the same in microscopic section as do the roots of Orobus tuberosus.
After 70 days, however, the roots had completely destroyed the fungus by "phagocytosis."
The immunity of Orobus resembles that of Mercurialis in that "phagocytosis" occurs some
time after invasion by the fungus, rather than at the time of infection as is the case in Sol-
arium.— C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1279. Murrill, W. A. Oudemann's work on fungi. Mycologia 12: 169. 1920. — See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 169.

1280. Neger, F. W. Die Krankheiten unserer Waldbaume und wichtigsten Gartengeholze.
Kurzgefasstes Lehrbuch fur Forstleute u. Studirende der Forstwissenschaft. [Diseases of
forest trees and important orchard trees.] viii + 286 p., £34 fig. Ferdinand Enke: Stuttgart,
1919. — "A compact text for foresters and students of forestry."

1281. [Pennell, Francis W.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12:
172-174. 1920.

1282. Quaintance, A. L., and E. H. Siegler. Insecticides, spraying and fruit insect
control. Better Fruit 148: 3-6, 40. Feb., 1920.— A popular summary of fruit-insect con-
trol methods. A spray-dilution table and a spray-combination diagram are given. — A. E.
Marneek.

1283. Reinking, Otto A. Diseases of economic plants in southern China. Philippine
Agric. 8: 109-134. 3 pi. 1919. — This paper presents the results of a collecting trip made dur-
ing May and June in the agricultural regions of southern China. Special attention was given
to citrus diseases. The host plants are listed alphabetically according to the common names
used in the Philippines; Latin names are also given, and in many cases the common Chinese
names. Under each host is presented a list of the diseases which attack it, together with
names of causal organisms, brief descriptions of symptoms, estimates of losses, and sugges-
tions regarding control measures. Emphasis is placed upon the necessity of disease surveys
in connection with plant quarantine. — S. F. Treleasc.

1284. Rumbold, Caroline. Giving medicine to trees. Amer. Forestry 26: 359-362. 5
fig. 1920. — An account of injection experiments, the purpose of which was to control or elimi-
nate the fungus causing chestnut blight. The experiments were performed in Pennsylvania,
the trees being for the most part Paragon scions grafted on native chestnut stock. Fifty-six
organic and inorganic substances in solution were injected. Dilute solutions of lithium car-
bonate and lithium hydroxide injected in the spring and early summer months checked the
progress of the fungus, but the results were not permanent. The work, which has been in
progress several years, should be regarded as only preliminary. — Chas. H. Otis.

1285. Schaffnit, G. Untersuchungen uber die Brennfieckenkrankheit der Bohnen
[Investigations concerning the anthracnose of beans.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 25: 299.
1920. — The author discusses the work under way at the Bonn-Poppelsdorf Experiment Station.
The perithecial form, Glomerella lindemuthiana, has not yet been found in Germany. Conidia
from pods of the crop of 1919, which were preserved in a cold but sheltered place were still
capable of germination on February 12, 1920. The author discusses the influence of air cur-

No. 3, Decbmbeb, 1920] PATHOLCH.^ 187

rents and plant foods on the disease. The question of susceptibility of varieties is treated
at some length. Forty-five varieties of bush beans were tested. It was found that in one
locality a variety might be relatively immune, while elsewhere it might be quite susceptible.
— .1. J. Fitters.

12SG. Schultz, E. S., and Donald Folsom. Transmission of the mosaic disease of Irish
potatoes. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 315-337. PL 49-56. 1920.— Tubers from mosaic hill- may be
expected to transmit the disease. Tubers from apparently healthy plants growing near dis-
eased plants also transmit the disease, at least in part. The tendency to do this is greater
when there are only 2 or 3 tubers on the plant, when the relal ive size of the tuber in the par-
ent hill is greater, and when the seed piece is near the "bud" end.— Transmission of the
disease was effected by grafting, by transfer of juice, and by means of aphids, the experiments
being carried out under various conditions, including field conditions, with test plants under
screened cages. Interparietal transfer of expressed juice from diseased plants to healthy
gave infection. "Transmission was attempted, but without success so far as could be ascer-
tained, in the same season, by means of flea beetles, Colorado potato beetle, the 'seed'-
cutting knife, and contact of seed pieces, of roots, and of vine." Infection probably does not
result from growing plants in soil on which diseased plants were produced the previous
year. "It appears impossible either for affected plants to recover or, so long as diseased stock
is not far off and insect carriers exist, to assure the maintenance of health of susceptible vari-
eties by rogueing plots or by selecting hills, tubers or seed pieces." Control of insect carriers
seems to be the important means of checking spread of potato mosaic. — D. Reddick.

1287. Subramaniam, L. S. A Pythium disease of ginger, tobacco and papaya. Mem. Dept.
Agric. India (Bot. Ser.) 10: 181-194. PL 1-6. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 784.

1288. Suematsu, N. On the artificial culture of Helminthosporium Oryzae. Bot. Mag.
Tokyo 33: 291-297. 3 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 785.

1289. Tubeuf, C. von. tiberblick fiber die Arten der Gattung Arceuthobium (Razou-
mowskia) mit besonderer Berucksuchtigung ihrer Biologie und praktischen Bedeutung. [Re-
view of the species of the genus Arceuthobium (Razoumowskia) with especial reference to their
biology and practical importance.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 17: 167-271. Fig. 1-
50. 1919.— The author calls attention to the number and size of witches'-brooms caused by
mistletoe occurring on most of North American species of conifers. It may be said that the
formation of witches'-brooms is the most extensive and apparent manifestation of disease
exhibited by North American Abieteae. Witches'-brooms on Cupresseae and Taxodium are
not caused by Arceuthobium. Witches'-broom formations resulting from Arceuthobium may
take place on all host plants. The root formation resembles that of Viscum alba, the Euro-
pean mistletoe, but that of Arceuthobium is more extensive than either Loranthus europeous
or Viscum alba. The type of growth depends on the species of Arceuthobium and the host.
The smaller species of Arceuthobium usually attack thin barked tree species; they develop
in dense clusters and form thick brooms where young shoots and buds are present. The larger
species occur chiefly on thick barked tree species; and although they do not exhibit the regular
progress of the root system of the smaller varieties, they can develop a large system, and
cause enormous thickening (hypertrophy) of infected branches. Infection by mistletoe most
commonly takes place on 2-3 year old shoots; rarely on shoots older than 5 years. It may
be supposed that the bark roots of Arceuthobium penetrate the first year growth the first fall.
A more complete study of physiological characters and extent is desired of the American
species. The various forms of Arceuthobium witches'-brooms are summarized. — The 13 well-
known species in America and in the Old World, and the characters of the three less well known
species in Mexico are tabulated, and each species is separately described with especial refer-
ence to host plants.— The biology of fruiting, seed distribution, germination, root and sucker
formation, and of the sprout are discussed at length; reference being made to investigations
of Heinricher, Peirce, MacDougal, and others. Pollination of European mistletoes is
effected by flies and by wind, the pollen grains being caught in a drop of nectar or oil (Heix-

188 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

richer) exuded by the pistil of the female flower. One embryo is usually produced, but
investigations have shown germination occasionally from two or more. The seed is "shot-out"
of the ripe fruit; the propulsive force being obtained by tensions developed in the fruit mem-
brane The seed is provided with mucilaginous threads, which balance the seed in flight,
enable it to adhere to its host, and also act as moisture absorbents. Arceuthobium differs
from other Loranthaceous parasites in its greater moisture requirement for germination.
Although a point under dispute, the author contends that shedding of old sprouts is a regular
process. The plant protects itself against excessive transpiration by the formation of an
enduring row of epidermal cells, which may become several rows thick. The fibro-vascular
bundles are either isolated or in groups separated by woody tissue. The irregularities in the
anatomy of Arceuthobium sprouts are evidently occasioned by the large percentage of non-
woody, divisible parenchyma, especially in the pith and medullary rays, and in the parenchyma
between the bundles in the wood. This parenchyma increases in different degrees. The death
of young shoots of infected trees is sometimes caused by this parasite; and whole trees may be
killed. It causes injury not only by taking water and food from the plant, but by the chemical
decomposition of cells, and by the mechanical rupturing of cell membranes. — J. Roeser.

1290. van Overeem, C. Uber zwei wenig bekannte Schmarotzer von Discomyceten.
[Two little-known parasites of discomycetes.] Hedwigia 61 : 375-379. 1 fig. 1920.

1291. Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley, C. R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G. P. Wilcox,
T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee. Report of the committee in charge of the Experiment Station.
Rept. Exp. Sta. Hawaiian Sugar Planters Assoc. 1919: 1-49. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
901.

1292. Washbtjrne. J. N. White pine "flu." Amer. Forestry 26: 343-345. 8 fig. 1920.
— Concerns the white pine blister rust and the pinon pine rust. Popular. — Chas. H. Otis.

1293. Wells, B. W. Early stages in the development of certain Pachypsylla galls on Celtis.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 275-285. / pi. 1920.

1294. Wober, A. Versuche zur Bekampfung des roten Brenners und des falschen Mehl-
taues der Reben im Jahre 1919. [Experiments in the control of red blight and downy mildew
of the vine in the year 1919.] Zeitschr. Landw. Versuchsw. Deutschosterreich 23: 1-6. 1920.
— For the prevention of red blight (Pseudopeziza tracheiphila) , painting the vines with 40
per cent iron sulphate solution during the winter followed by four applications of 1.5 per cent
Bordeaux mixture during the growing season, gave the best results. Good results also were
obtained by the use of commercial colloidal preparations of copper. Omission of the winter
treatment lessened the control somewhat. — For the prevention of doAvny mildew (Plasmopara
viticola), four spray applications were made, beginning just before the looming period. Good
results were obtained by the use of Bordeaux mixture, various commercial colloidal prepara-
tions of copper, a mixture containing copper sulphate, zinc sulphate and lime, and a colloidal
silver preparation. — John W. Roberts.

1295. Wormald, H. The "brown rot" diseases of fruit trees, with special references to
two biologic forms of Monilia cinerea Bon. II. Ann. Botany 34: 143-172. April, 1920. —
Continuing his work of comparing the organisms bringing about the different types of "Brown
Rot" on fruits in England, the author in this contribution determined that the strain of Moni-
lia cinerea infecting flowering shoots and cankers of apple trees (forma mali) differs from the
organism isolated from plum (forma pruni) in its greater capacity to secrete an enzyme which
oxidizes tannin. The oxidizing enzyme produced freely by M. cinerea forma mali was demon-
strated by use of gum guaiac emulsion as well as by pyrogallic acid. The enzyme did not show
any action upon tyrosin or hydroquinone but did produce a brownish-yellow color in solutions
of tannic, gallic and pyrogallic acids. It was produced by "forma ?nali" in liquid culture
media, infected fruits and spurs of apple and its presence is correlated by the writer with

No. 3, December, 1920] PHARMACOGNOSY IS'. I

the greater virulence toward apple shown by tliis form over thai shown l>y the form isolated
from Prunus.— On the basis of color, and size of pustules, dimension aidia, mode of

eonidial germinal ion, viability of conidia (confirming Ewert's work) growl h on culture media,
and mode of parasitism the distinctions between M.fructigena and .1/. cinerea are summa-
rized. Within the species .1/. cinerea &\ least two forms are recognizable culturally and para-
sitically distinct. "The American form of Monilia is more nearly related to M. cinerea than
to M . fructigena but in cultures can be distinguished from the European form of .1/. tint ea
by its mode of growth in cultures and by its numerous fructifications." — G. H. Coons.

PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY

Heber W. Youngken, Editor
E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor

1296. Ballard, C. W. Official standards for botanical drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc.
9: 676-678. 1920. — In the revision of the U. S. P. IX, the author suggests some changes in
the standards for botanical drugs, including definite botanical origins, with the elimination
of such phrases as "and other species," etc. Suggestions are also offered regarding the
phraseology for descriptions of plant tissues; descriptions of foreign materials; indication of
diagnostical characters; indication of possible adulterants; standard fineness for powders
used in descriptions; methods of technic used in mould examination. Author also urges
the adoption of a standard for moisture in crude drugs. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1297. Beringer, G. M. A note on the examination of a commercial sample of oil of penny-
royal. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92: 460-462. 1920. — An examination of a commercial sample
of oil of pennyroyal, showed it to contain 50 per cent of alcohol. Authors describe the vari-
ous tests applied, which includes color, odor, S. G., B. P., iodoform test for pulegone and the
reduction with nascent hydrogen to form menthol. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1298. Checkley, George. The formation of a student's botanical garden. Pharm.
Jour. 104: 44. 1920. — A botanical garden embracing all of the 46 drug plants listed in the Minor
Syllabus (Pharmacy Examination) would require about 60 square yards of good loamy soil
with plenty of sunshine. Preparation of the ground commences in the winter, the seed beds
are prepared in the spring and plant specimens from the woods and meadows transplanted
during the summer and fall. If desired, the plants may be arranged in the garden by the
natural classification beginning with Ranunculaceae, or preferably, placed in those positions
most suitable for their growth, each plant or plot being properly labeled. Plants best grown
from seed (obtainable from a good seedsman) are Avena sativa, Brassica alba, Brassica sina-
poides, Conium maculatum, Cylisus scoparius, Datura stramonium, Digitalis purpurea, Foenic-
ulum capillaceum, Hordeum dislichon, Hyoscyamus niger, Matricaria chamomilla, Papaver
rhoeas, Papaver somniferum, Ruta graveolens. From the fields, woods and hedge rows may be
collected Althaea officinalis, Atropa belladonna. Bryonia dioica, Colchicum autumnale, Daphne
la areola, Drypoleris filix-mas, Juniperus communis, Menyanthes trifoliata, (Enanthe crocata,
Pinus sylvestris, Quercus robur, Rosa canina, Salix alba, Sa7nbucus nigra, Solatium dulcamara,
Taraxacum officinale, Triticum vulgare, Ulmus campestris, Valeriana officinalis. Where trees
are mentioned, one or twro-year old specimens are understood. Specimens of the remaining
plants will needs be obtained through a florist, herb nursery or an exchange bureau. These
are Aconitum napellus, Anthcmis nobilis, Cochlearia armoracia, Colchicum autumnale, Daphne
mezereum, Juniperus sabina, Lavendulavera, Mentha piperita, M. pulegium, .1/. viridis, Prunus
laurocerasus, Rosmarinus officinalis and Taxus baccata. Suggestions for establishing a drug
plant exchange are offered. — E. N. Gathercoal.

1299. Grant, E. H. New tests for the identification of sparteine and guaiac. Jour. Amer.
Pharm. Assoc. 9: 704. 1920. — For sparteine: Extract alkaloid with chloroform from slightly
ammoniacal solution. From chloroform solution extract with dilute sulphuric acid; solution

190 PHARMACOGNOSY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

again made slightly alkaline and reextract with chloroform. Evaporate and add small amount
of bromine water. A yellow precipitate, or, in the presence of large amounts of sparteine, an
orange-colored oil forms, which dissolves on warming. Evaporate solution to dryness on water
bath, and while still hot invert over concentrated ammonia water. Beautiful pink color devel-
ops if sparteine is present. Will detect 0.0005 gram of alkaloid, providing interfering sub-
stances are absent. — For guaiac: Extract with chloroform and separate into two portions.
Evaporate one portion to dryness and treat residue with concentrated sulphuric acid.
Intense red color indicates guaiac. Shake second portion with an equal volume of bromine
water. Sometimes in the presence of guaiac, a sudden flash of purple or blue shoots through
the chloroform just as the bromine dissolves in it. Separate chloroform layer and evaporate
to dryness. Treat residue with concentrated sulphuric acid. Brilliant green indicates '
guaiac. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1300. Heyl, Frederick W., and Harris H. Hopkins. The ragweed pollen proteins.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1738-1743. 1920.

1301. Heyl, Frederick W., and Charles Barkenbus. Some constituents of Viburnum
prunifolium. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1744-1755. 1920.

1302. Rhodes, Leland B. Cockle-bur oil: a new seed oil. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42:
1502-1507. 1920.

1303. Rusby, H. H. Codes of botanical nomenclature in the United States Pharmaco-
poeia. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 670-671. 1920. — A discussion of the so-called American
and the so-called International Codes of botanical nomenclature, in which the author states
that the latter one is misnamed, because it is not a code in the proper sense of the word, but
that the former or the so-called American code is a code as it is based on a governing principle,
namely, that priority of publication determines the name for a group or species. The name,
however, is misleading as it emanated with a group of especially eminent botanists equally
representative of Great Britain, Germany and France. Author states that the U. S. P.
should not depart from the so-called American code.— Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1304. Tsakalotos, A. E. Sind die mydriatischen Alkaloide der Belladonnawurzel bei
Gegenwart von Alkohol mit Wasserdampfen fluchtig? [Are the mydriatic alkaloids of Bella-
donna root volatile by the addition of alcohol in the presence of steam?] Schweiz. Apotheker-
Zeit. 57: 291-292. 1919. — A series of experiments and investigations proving that the alka-
loids of belladonna root are not volatile when distilled with steam in the presence of alcohol.
— B. H. Hoffstein.

1305. Viehoever, Arno. Popular names of crude drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:
671-676. 1920.— Author advocates greater care in the use of common names for crude drugs,
and in so doing has shown why greater care should be exercised. Paper includes a discussion
of the derivation of a number of drug terms, namely those which are derived from the scientific
name; those which represent marked changes of the scientific name; those which have no
connection with the scientific name but which may be identical with the native name; those
which have been derived from physical characters, either of the drug itself or of conspicuous
parts of the drug plant and those which have no definite meaning to the general trade. — A
series of rules and a discussion of new terms follows. Author suggests that such plants as
Spanish Digitalis (Digitalis thapsi) might well be called Digithapsis and that again such a
plant as Mexican Scammony (Ipomoea orizabensis) might well be called Orizaba root or Ori-
zap, to avoid confusion. He concludes by emphasizing the need of an agreement upon names
which are not only simple and acceptable to the trade, but are more generally based upon
scientific classification. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

No. 3, December, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY I'll

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. Duggar, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

1306. Brierlet, W. B. Some concepts in mycology — an attempt at synthesis. Trans.
British Mycolog. Soc. 6: 204-235. 1919. — The author advocates for fungi, both parasitic and

saprophytic, the physiological species concept, rather than merely a morphological descrip-
tion— the latter assuming that form is primarily constant and hereditary. The author points
out that organisms apparently similar morphologically may possess properties wholly distinct
and individual when investigated quantitatively with respect to behavior and metabolic
activity. lie also deplores the idea so frequently advanced to the effect that physiological
or biochemical attributes are inconstant. [See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1061; also anonymous
abstract in Nature 104: 708. 1920.]—/?. M. Duggar.

PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY

1307. Galippe, V. Recherches sur revolution du protoplasma de certaines cellules vege-
tales par le procede de la culture. [A study of the transformations of the protoplasm of certain
plant cells by the culture method.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 342-345. 1920. —
Fragments of the epidermis of petals of various flowers were aseptically removed and placed
from one to seventy-two hours in distilled sterile water saturated with ether or oxygenated.
The tissue was then sectioned and stained. It was found that the protoplasm contracts and
fragments. In these fragments are to be found small bodies, called "microzymas," which
the author considers are the living parts of the protoplasm. These bodies give rise to ovoid
and rod-shaped bacilli which persist in the cells for some time. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1308. Lillie, Ralph S. The nature of protoplasmic and nervous transmission. Jour.
Phys. Chem. 24: 165-191. 1920. — Nervous transmission is only a special case of protoplasmic
transmission. The surface layer of protoplasm is exceedingly responsive to outer conditions
and local stimulation evokes prompt response by the entire surface. This is particularly
true in cited cases of blood corpuscles and fertilized eggs. These and many other, if not most
other, reactions do not depend upon transfer of materials for the propagation of stimuli. It
seems to the author unlikely that so general a phenomenon should be confined to living matter,
which leads to the question of the general type of physico-chemical process to which proto-
plasmic transmission belongs. The essential generalizations established regarding nervous
transmission are summarized as: (1) the excitation state may be initiated by a variety of
means, (2) once aroused, the excitation state is transmitted continuously with no decrease
in intensity from one region of tissue to an adjoining region, (3) local response ceases when
stimulation ceases, (4) the rate of transmission is very different in different tissues and organ-
isms, (5) velocity in any case is dependent on temperature (the 10° temperature coefficient
being between 2 and 3), (6) transmission may be influenced reversibly by chemical sub-
stances, (7) transmission is not accompanied by change in form, by evident change in tem-
perature, or by optical change, but is always accompanied by a change in electrical potential
which travels (forming an action current) at the same rate as the activation wave. These
generalizations, the general close correlation between local rate of development of action-
currents in different tissues, and the rate of propagation of the excitation wave, the prompt-
ness with which rapidly conducting tissues respond and vice versa (indicating the adjustment
of the tissue to electric currents having peculiarities of its own action-currents) and recent
evidence pointing to the great influence exerted by the conductivity of the medium surround-
ing the nerve leads the author to conclude that "transmission is essentially a case of secondary
electrical stimulation," stimulation "always being initiated at a certain linear distance in
advance of the already stimulated active area." The next question of how electric currents
stimulate protoplasm involves a consideration of the chemical changes at the surface. Any

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 3

192 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

injurious modification of the surface layer alters electrical potential. The author traces the
similarity with the "local-action" theory of corrosion (the chemical effect being due to local
electrical currents formed between adjoining areas of the metalic surface differing in compo-
sition or physical state) and considers in detail the characteristics of the propagation of
such oxidation on wires and the resemblances between this and protoplasmic transmission.
This similarity is not complete because of the structure of the protoplasm, the surface in
living matter being the surface of the protoplasmic films and lamellae and not solely that of
the cell.— H. E. Pulling.

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

1309. Collip, J. B. Maintenance of osmotic pressure within the nucleus. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 42: 227-235. 1920. — It is suggested that the concentration of amino-acid and other
nitrogenous solutes of small molecular weight in the nucleus is sufficient to maintain its
osmotic tension. — G. B. Rigg.

1310. Curtis, Otis F. The upward translocation of food in woody plants. II. Is there
normally an upward transfer of storage foods from the roots or trunk to the growing shoots?
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 286-295. 1920. — The common belief that food stored in the roots and lower
trunks of trees is carried upward in the spring and used in shoot formation is shown to rest
on evidence which is not conclusive. The author discusses and criticizes this evidence. In
his own work with ringed branches, he finds that when a ring is made on that part of a stem
which is from 5-15 or more years old or from 1-4 or more centimeters in diameter, the growth
above the ring approximates that of a normal stem. Evidently upward movement of foods
from points below the ring is not essential. In cases where growth has been somewhat less-
ened by ringing, this may be due to deficiency of water owing to the prevention of the forma-
tion of a new layer of xylem. When little stored food is available considerable shoot growth
may still take place owing to the production of food by the leaves of the young shoot itself.
Data are not sufficient to indicate how far back from the tip the food is withdrawn for use in
shoot growth. The author believes that normally there is no upward movement of foods
from the roots and perhaps little or none from the main trunk. He suggests that food stored
in roots is used solely in root growth. — E. W. Sinnott.

1311. Loeb, Jacques. On the cause of the influence of ions on the rate of diffusion of water
through collodion membranes. I. and II. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 387-408, 563-576. 1920 —
The similarity between the effects of electrolytes on free osmosis and electrical endosmose
is demonstrated, and, since the effects of electrolytes on electrical endosmose seem best to
be ascribed to their influence on the density of electrical charge on the membrane, it is con-
cluded that the effect of electrolytes on free osmosis through a collodion membrane can be
explained on the same basis. On the basis of the Helmholtz theorjr of electrical double lay-
ers, it seems that the ion having the same sign of charge as the membrane increases the dif-
fusion of water towards the solution side of the membrane, while that ion having a charge
opposite to that of the membrane decreases the charge on the latter and decreases the dif-
fusion of water. The effects on the ions vary at different concentrations. — O. F. Curtis.

1312. Paxtaxelli, E. Alterazioni del ricambio e della permeabilita cellulare a tempera-
ture prossime al congelamento. [Changes in cell permeability at temperatures very near freez-
ing.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 28l: 205-209. 1919.— It was
found that the cells of the endocarp of the mandarin orange {Citrus nobilis) when subjected
to temperatures very near to freezing suffer a progressive increase in the cell permeability.
This is made evident by a rapid emission of water from the tissue when it is kept dry, or by
an exosmosis of substances from tissue immersed in water. This is favored by such sub-
stances as penetrate rapidly into the cells (glycerin, ethyl alcohol, citric acid, and free alkali) ;
there is also a rapid destruction of sugar, limited by the supply of substances that may be
absorbed and utilized for respiration (glycerin, ethyl alcohol, citric acid) or by such substances
as curb the exosmosis of the sugars or by the intermediate products of respiration (sodium

No. 3, December, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 193

chloride, potassium phosphate, citric acid). The sugars present in the exterior liquid (sac-
charose, glucose) did not act in this way because they were not absorbed. At such tempera-
tures there is a lively autodigestion of protein, which is favored by the exosmosis of the sol-
uble products of the digestion and by the more rapid destruction of the sugars.— F. M.
Blodgett.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

1313. Anonymous. [Rev. of: (1) Burd, J. S. Rate of absorption of soil constituents at
successive stages of plant growth. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 51-72. 1919. (2) HoAGLAND, D. R.
Relation of the concentration and reaction of the nutrient medium to the growth and absorption
of the plant. Ibid. 73-117. 1919.] Nature 104: 446. 1920.

1314. Maquenne, L., and E. Demoussy. Sur l'absorption du calcium par les racines des
plantes et ses proprietes antitoxiques vis-a-vis du cuivre. [The absorption of calcium by plant
roots and its antitoxic properties with respect to copper.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
420-425. 1920. —The antagonism of calcium and copper is studied with a view to determining
whether the former interferes with the penetration of the latter or if it aids the plant in resist-
ing the poison. Experiments were performed with pea seedlings in nutrient solutions contain-
ing either calcium sulphate, copper sulphate or a mixture of the two in certain proportions.
In some cases sand cultures were used and in others quartz tubes. With the latter the solu-
tions might be periodically renewed. — It was found that calcium does not reduce the permea-
bility of the roots to copper, nor does copper affect the absorption of calcium. Hence it is
not because of a modification in permeability that calcium is protective, nor does copper seem
to be injurious because of its shutting out nutritive materials. The antitoxic action of cal-
cium appears to be rather an internal effect, giving the plant an increased vigor to withstand
toxic substances and increasing the volume of the plant through which copper may diffuse
and interfering with its accumulation locally in the plant in sufficient quantity to become
injurious. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

PHOTOSYNTHESIS

1315. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Riedel, F. Die Ausniitzung der Hochofenabgase zur Kohl-
ensaurediingung. (The utilization of blast-furnace waste gases as carbon-dioxide fertilizer.)
Stahl u. Eisen, 39 Jahrg. : 1497-1506. 1919.] Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appliqueea 31: 132.
1920. — This paper, rather surprisingly widely noticed, reports the experiments of an engineer
familiar with the problems besetting the operators of manufacturing plants discharging dele-
terious fumes into the air under the methods in common use. Without any indication of the
means employed to separate the carbon-dioxide from the other gases accompanying it in the
stack, greenhouse and open plot experiments and controls are described, details seeming
desirable and usual to horticulturists and plant physiologists are omitted, and the results
are given both in graphs and wrords. Thus the yield from tomato plants in a greenhouse into
which C02 was introduced through perforated pipes was 2f times the weight of tomatoes
from an equal number of plants in a similar greenhouse with ordinary air. Similarly cucum-
bers weighing a total of 138 kilos wyere produced in an ungassed greenhouse while the yield
in a gassed house was 235 kilos, 1.7 times greater. Field experiments gave results showing
a gain varying from lh to nearly 3 times the yield in gassed plots over those bathed in ordi-
nary air. It may be pointed out that two photographs designed to show the advantage of
adding CO2 to ordinary air, and very striking in appearance, do not seem to be taken on the
same scale. There is no evidence that botanical literature on the subject has been consulted.
— G. J. Peirre.

1316. Spoehr, H. A. The development of conceptions of photosynthesis since Ingen-
Housz. Sci. Monthly 9: 32-46. 1919. — The author presents in this paper a comprehensive
historical digest of the subject, emphasizing, in the earlier work, that of Ingen-Housz. It
is shown that step by step Ingen-Housz approached the correct interpretation in his experi-

194 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

ments which are a masterpiece in manipulation and self-criticism. A few years later, De
Sausstjre attacked the problem. The chemistry of Lavoisier had wrought a tremendous
change. De Sausstjre asked a definite question and got a definite answer and established
quantitative relations which others had described. Aside from the discovery of certain de-
tails of the process of photosynthesis, our knowledge of it is practically as De Sausstjre left
it over 100 years ago. During this time something has been done by Dutrochet, Sachs,
Pfeffer, Boehm, and Draper. Most of the work of the last 30 years has been along lines
outlined by these workers but no new vistas have been opened nor original hypotheses formu-
lated.— The most important problem of photosynthesis is probably the energy relation, and
the old question of the action of the light in the reduction of carbon dioxid and water. Recent
conceptions of the nature of light and of chemical processes ought to find application to the
processes involved in photosynthesis, as should physical conceptions and methods of experi-
mentation which as yet have not been applied to the study of photosynthesis with any degree
of success. — For fifty years the formaldehyde theory of the development of sugars, formulated
by Baeyer as a mere suggestion, has received greatest recognition. The experiments have
followed three different lines of argument. (1) The reduction of carbon dioxid to formalde-
hyde by various chemical and photochemical means. (2) The detection of formaldehyde in
illuminated green leaves. (3) The feeding of plants with formaldehyde as the only source
of carbon. All these have yielded positive results. But a critical study of all the facts leads
to the conclusion that more experimentation is needed. — The determination of the first sugar
formed requires experimental proof. The fleshy joints of some cacti offer good material for
this type of study. Tables of certain experiments with such material, including also the
results of Brown and Morris with the garden nasturtium (Tropaeohcm majus) are given. — L.
Pace.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

1317. Ciamician, G., and C. Ravenna. Sulla influenza di alcune sostanze organiche
sullo sviluppo della piante. Nota III. [The influence of some organic substances on the devel-
opment of plants.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 28l: 13-20. 1919. —
Having shown in a previous article that some of the fundamental compounds for the vegetable
alkaloids do not injure bean plants, while almost all the natural alkaloids (and particularly
caffein) are poisonous, he takes up the study of some derivatives of these fundamental com-
pounds. The bases were used as phosphates or tartrates in solution (1 to 1000) and bean plants
were sprinkled with these. He affirms that methyl groups, far from having a protective
influence on the reactive groups such as the oxyhydrate and the amino and imino groups,
increases the action of the fundamental substance that contains it. Other radicals also modify
the action of organic compounds on plants as the propyl group in conine, the acetyl group in
acetyl piperidine, diacetyl morphine, and acetanilide, and the radical of piperic acid in pip-
erine. He also found that some of the poisonous substances used on bean plants have consider-
able influence on the formation of starch and on its hydrolysis so that with the different re-
agents he obtained different results when treating the leaves with iodine, depending on
whether one or the other of these effects was produced. — F. M. Blodgett.

1318. Doff, A. W., and G. W. Roark, Jr. The utilization of a-methylglucoside by Asper-
gillus niger. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41: 475-481. 1920. — This fungus grows very poorly on media
containing the glucoside as the only source of carbon, but readily on sucrose media in the pres-
ence of the glucoside. There was a slight difference between the activity of cultures before
and after spore formation. Gradual cumulative adaptation to a substitute through several
generations could not be demonstrated with any degree of certainty. — G. B. Rigg.

1319. Grtjzewska, (Mrs.) Z. Contribution a l'etude de la laminarine du Laminaria
flexicaulis. [A contribution to the study of the laminarine of Laminaria flexicaulis.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 521-523. 1920.— A study of the properties of this polysaccharid
reveals that it is very much like dextrine except that it is laevo-rotary. The author confirms

No. 3, December, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 195

the reactions secured l>y Schmiedeberg. The fact that it precipitates spontaneously in water
after standing a long time indicates its close relationship to the krepsine "I' Krefting which
differs only in that it is insoluble in cool water. Laminarine is found to differ from alpine
in that it produces a red precipitate \\ it li alcoholic fuchsin. 1 1 is fermented by yeast and hy-
drolysed by many plant enzymes indicating that, it is probably a reserve food of marine algae.
— C. II. and 11. A'. Farr.

1320. Haas, A. R. C. Studies on the reaction of plant juices. Soil Sci. 9: 34] 369. 1 pi.,
11 fig. 1920. — The actual and total acidities and alkali reserve of a number of agricultural
plants were determined. The reaction of the juice of a plant is affected by changes in illum-
ination, soil solution, and age. Determination of the actual acidity of alfalfa, alsike clover,
barley, buckwdieat, corn, peas, beans, lupines, red clover, mustard, oats, serradella, wheat,
and timothy varied from PH 5.19 to PH 6.S0. Determinations on sweet clover showed varia-
tions in acidity of 5.S2 in the root to 8.00 in the upper part of the top. Young buckwheat seed-
lings showed less acidity than mature plants. A hydrogen-electrode vessel is described,
requiring but 3-4 drops of juice. — W . J. Rabbins.

1321. Jones, H. M. Effect of carbohydrates on amino acid utilization of certain bacteria.
Jour. Infect. Diseases 27: 169-172. 1920.— In reply to a paper by Ber.man and Rettger on
the effect of sugar upon protein metabolism, the author points out that, in the presence of
sufficient carbohydrate, B. proteus shows no evidence of amino acid utilization, even though
the reaction of the culture is maintained at neutrality. The softening of gelatin occurring in
sugar-gelatin medium, due to the action of bacteria, is an acid rather than an enzymic-
hydrolysis, and not a part of protein metabolism. — Selman A. Waksman.

1322. Myers, C. N., and C. Voegtlin. The chemical isolation of vitamines. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 42 : 199-205. 1920.

1323. Oddo, B., and G. Polacci. Influenza del nucleo pirrolico nella formazione della
clorofilla. [The influence of the pyrrole nucleus in the formation of chlorophyll.] Gaz. Chim.
Italiana 50: 54-70. Fig. 1-4. 1920. — This is in continuation of a note which appeared in 1915
(Gaz. Chim. Ital. 45: 197), and it is an extended discussion of the chemical phase of the ques-
tion. After a study of the literature on the question of the importance and function of the
pyrrole group in plant and animal (blood) pigments the preparation of a new compound is
described. The magnesium salt of pyrrole-carbonic acid is found to have the formula
HC— CH HC— CH

II II II II

HC C. COO. Mg. OOC CH. This compound was used in the preparation of nutritive solu-

NH NH

tions and plants were grown therein. The standard control solution contained the following
salts: Ca(N03)2, (NH4)2S04, KN03, KH2P04. When the newly prepared magnesium pyr-
role-carbonate wras used, the phosphate was omitted and the organic compound used in a
concentration equivalent to 0.0232 gm. of Mg. in 1000 cc. of water. Zea mays, Solarium
nigrum, Datura stramonium, Euphorbia sp. and Aster sinensis were grown in solutions that
were very often renewed. The following conclusions are appended. Plants growm in a nutrient
medium free of iron but containing an assimilable pyrrole product form chlorophyll. This is
a new phenomenon. Since iron is indispensable to the greening of the plastids, it is here sug-
gested that its relation to the process may be one of catalyzer to the formation of the pyrrole
nucleus, which in itself is the center of the chlorophyll complex. On the contrary, if this
nucleus is already formed, the presence of iron is not indispensable. These experiments con-
firm the recent work of Willstatter and that of Eva Mameli. The function of magnesium in
the greening of protoplasts is directly proportional to the presence of pyrrole. — A. Bonazzi.

1324. Okey, Ruth, and Anna W. Williams. On inulin in the globe artichoke. Jour.
Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1693-1696. 1920.

196 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1325. Power, Frederick B., and Victor K. Chesnut. The odorous constituents of
apples. Emanation of acetaldehyde from the ripe fruit. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1509-1526.
1920. — The odorous constituents of apples were found to consist of amyl esters of formic, ace-
tic, and caproic acids, with a small amount of caprylic ester. The authors found that acet-
aldehyde was exhaled. It is thought that "apple scald" may be due to this substance. Small
amounts of methyl and ethyl alcohols were obtained also. — J. M. Brannon.

1326. Taylor, T. C, and J. M. Nelson. Fat associated with starch. Jour. Amer. Chem.
Soc. 42: 1726-1738. 1920. — The authors find that the major portion of the fatty material pres-
ent in starch cannot be removed by solvents before hydrolysis. When corn starch freed of
extraneous fat is hydrolyzed fatty acids are liberated. Palmitic acid is the principal one.
The fat is liberated when hydrolysis has reached the erythrodextrin stage. The authors find
that the palmitic acid is attached indirectly to the starch, directly to some unsaturated
compound. — J. M. Brannon.

1327. Vosburgh, Warren C. The specific rotation of fructose. Jour. Amer. Chem.
Soc. 42: 1696-1704. 1920.

METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS)

1328. Albrecht, William Albert. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation as influenced by the nitro-
gen in the soil. Soil Sci. 9: 275-327. 4 pi, 3 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1374.

1329. Johns, C. O., and H. C. Waterman. Some proteins from the Georgia velvet bean,
Stizolobium deeringianum. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 59-69. 1920.

1330. Osborne, T. B., and A. J. Wakeman. The proteins of green leaves. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 42: 1-26. 1920. — There is much less protein nitrogen than non-protein nitrogen in
spinach leaves. Colloidal protein obtained from leaves is doubtless a mixture of several
individuals, which are constituents of the cytoplasm and other portions of the cell. Appar-
ently the colloidal protein occurs in the leaf in chemical combination with chlorophyll, phos-
phatides, and probably other substances. — G. B. Rigg.

1331. Perotti, R. Su la presenza di una specie batterica nelle radici della Diplo taxis
erucoides DC. [Bacteria in the roots of Diplotaxis erucoides DC] Atti R. Accad. Lincei
Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) 28l: 331-335. 1919. — Bacteria were found constantly associ-
ated with rough gall-like swellings on the roots of Diplotaxis erucoides and were isolated
therefrom. The organism proved to be a short motile rod and was easily grown on a variety
of culture media. Under the cultural conditions used it proved neither to be ammonifying,
nitrifying, denitrifying nor a fixer of nitrogen. The host is thought by agriculturists to have
a fertilizing value and some explanation was sought. He affirms that the bacteria were cer-
tainly not harmful to the hosts as the latter were vigorous, but that they may have proteolytic
properties which favor the movement of protein substances in the hosts and probably would
be able to attack insoluble carbohydrates.— F. M. Blodgett.

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

1332. Andre, G. Sur l'inversion du saccharose dans le sue d'orange. [The inversion of
cane sugar in orange juice.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 292-295. 1920. — Inversion of
cane sugar in orange juice seems to be due primarily to the citric acid, although enzymes do
play a minor part. There is less sugar inverted if the extract is boiled after neutralization
than if it is not boiled. Inversion is accelerated by rise in temperature or by lengthening the
boiling period of the unneutralized extract. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1333. Anonymous. Catalysis. [Rev. of: Rideal, Eric K., and Hugh S. Taylor.
Catalysis in theory and practise. Macmillan & Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 463. 1920.

No. 3, December, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 197

— The chapter on ferment and enzyme actios is the pari of this work which is distinctly phys-
iological. "Ultimately the term catalysis will probably vanish from chemical literature
. . . . though the term may remain for long as a convenient, though arbitrary, term of
classification." — 0. A. Stevens.

1334. Becking, L. G., M. Baas, and H. C. Hampton. Measurement of the catalytic
power of catalase. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 261-274. 6 fig. 1920. — The authors discuss and criti-
cize the three common methods of measuring the strength of catalase action. They point
out that the time in which a reaction is completed under the influence of an enzyme is the
true measure of the strength of the enzyme, and describe an autographic method of measuring
the reaction time of catalase. By the use of this method it was found that the reaction time
is inversely proportional to the amount of enzyme present. There is a distinct latent period
at the commencement of the reaction, before oxygen begins to be discharged. The enzyme is
more or less injured during the reaction. The enzyme is injured by acids, but in neutral solu-
tions retains its power for a long period. Alkali has an important effect on catalase and
may act as a "peptisator." The method described may be used to determine the strength
of a peroxide solution. — E. W. Sinnott.

1335. Burge, W. E., and E. L. Btjrge. The effects of the chlorine substitution products
of methane, acetaldehyde, and of sodium acetate on catalase production. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 :
307-314. 1920. — The more chlorine that is introduced in the methane molecules, the more effec-
tive it becomes in decreasing catalase production in the liver. The ingestion of sodium
acetate produces an increase in catalase. The first acts by destroying the enzyme and by
decreasing the output from the liver. The second acts by stimulating the liver to increased
output. — G. B. Rigg.

1336. Fred, E. B., W. H. Peterson, and A. Davenport. Fermentation characteristics
of certain pentose-destroying bacteria. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 175-189. 1920. — Although the
majority of microorganisms cannot utilize pentoses certain pentose-fermenting bacteria are
widely distributed and no doubt play an important role in the economy of nature. Arabinose
and xylose are rapidly decomposed, yielding acetic and lactic acids. Rhamnose was not
attacked by pentose-fermenters. — G. B. Rigg.

1337. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The role of pentose-fermenting bacteria in the
production of corn silage. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : 181-186. 1920. — Pentose-fermenting bacteria
develop rapidly in raw or sterilized corn tissue. In sterilized silage they produce acetic acid,
lactic acid, ethyl alcohol, and carbon dioxide. — G. B. Rigg.

1338. Peterson, W. H,, and E. B. Fred. The fermentation of glucose, galactose and
mannose by Lactobacillus pentoaceticus. n. sp. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 273-287. 1920. — The
above name has been given to a pentose-fermenting bacterium exhibiting a wide range of activ-
ity both with fespect to carbohydrates fermented and products formed. The aldo-hexoses,
glucose, galactose, and mannose are fermented by this organism with the production of lactic
acid, ethyl alcohol, c&Tbon dioxide, and small quantities of acetic acid. — G. B. Rigg.

1339. Tickler. William Eugene. Water content and temperature as factors influencing
diastase formation in the barley grain. Plant World 22: 221-238. 1919. — Some general rela-
tions of temperature to water absorption in barley seeds is discussed. Barley is semiperme-
able to LiCl solutions, and will absorb water even from the saturated solution. It is believed
therefore that barley possesses a much higher osmotic pressure than Xanthium seeds. Dia-
stase formation increases with water content of the grains at constant temperatures. Temper-
ature was found to affect diastase formation to a much less degree than water content. —
Charles A. Skull.

1340. Speakman, H. B. Biochemistry of the acetone and butyl alcohol fermentation of
siarr.h by Bacillus granulobacter pectinovorum. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41: 319-343. 1920. — This

198 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

organism, growing in a medium rich in starch changes the latter into glucose by exoenzyme
activity. Glucose passes into the cell and is oxidized into acetic and butyric acids, and these
are in part reduced to the corresponding alcohols. — G. B. Rigg.

1341. Steele, R. L., and A. C. McCakty. Further data concerning the alleged relation
of catalase to animal oxidations. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 269-272. 1920. — Variations in cata-
lase content and carbon dioxide production were not parallel in the rabbits and cats studied.
— G. B. Rigg.

1342. Takamine, Jokichi, Jr., and Kokichi Oshima. The properties of a specially pre-
pared enzymic extract, Polyzime, comparing its starch liquefying power with malt diastase.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1261-1265. 1920. — "Polyzime is an aqueous extract of diastatic
enzymes, made by a specially prepared culture of the fungus Aspergillus Oryzea on media
consisting mainly of wheat bran." The diastatic power of Polyzime is preserved provided
the preparation is kept at a temperature below 40°. It acts best in a neutral or slightly acid
reaction. The optimum temperature for starch liquefaction by Polyzime is 50° for a digestion
interval of 30 minutes to 2 hours, and 40° for a digestion interval of 24 hours. It is 3 to 4
times stronger than ordinary malt extract, according to Wohlgemuth' s method. — J. M.
Brannon.

METABOLISM (RESPIRATION)

1343. Brooks, M. M. Comparative studies on respiration. X. Toxic and antagonistic
effects of magnesium in relation to the respiration of Bacillus subtilis. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2:
331-336. 1920.— Concentrations of MgCl2 up to 0.01 M have little effect upon the rate of res-
piration of Bacillus subtilis as measured by C02 production; at 0.03 M there is an increase in
the rate, while in the higher concentrations (0.5 and 1.0 M) there is a gradual decrease. There
is marked antagonism between MgCl2 and NaCl, and a slight antagonism between MgCl2
and CaCl2 as measured by change in rate of respiration. Change in rate was not due to
changes in alkalinity of the medium. — H. E. Knowlton.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION

1344. Bezssonoff. Sur l'obtention experimental de la sexualite chez les champignons
et orientee sur la structure typique du plasma sexuel. [On the initiation of sexual repro-
duction in fungi by experimental means, and the existence of a cytoplasmic structure peculiar
to the sexual process.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 288-290. 1920.— This is a study
of the effect of high concentrations of sucrose and citric acid in the nutrient media upon the
cytoplasmic structure and the stimulation of the fungus to produce sex organs. The author
holds that the sexual development is initiated by a retardation in oxidation processes. This
is brought about by a reduction in the available water due to the high concentration of the
nutritive solution. This conclusion is substantiated by cytological evidence. Numerous
mitochondrial granules are found in the hyphae of species of Aspergillus which are beginning
to form sex organs. These granules also appear abundantly in hyphae of the cultures in
highly concentrated media. Their presence seems to indicate a retardation of oxidation. —
C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1345. MacDougal, D. T. Hydration and growth. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 58: 346-372.
Fig. 1-3. 1919. — This paper is a summary prepared by the author from a lengthy manuscript.
Conclusions are drawn from three lines of evidence, (a) "Measurements of the variations in
volume of stems, leaves and fruits," correlating the rate and course of growth with environ-
mental factors; (b) study of the composition and the arrangements of the components of
living matter including seasonal and developmental changes; and (c) "measurements of the
hydration reactions of tracts of living cell-masses" — "compared with the reactions of sections
of plates of colloids made up in simulation of the composition of plants." Living material
of plants is described as a "colloidal mixture consisting predominantly of pentosans, of a
lesser proportion of albumin, albumin derivatives and amino-compounds, and of a minor

No. 3, December, 1920J PHYSIOLOGT L99

•

proportion of li])ins, with the inevitable small amounl of salts." Growth is defined as "hy-
dration of colloidal material in a living condition" usually accompanied by increase in the
colloidal mixture. As organs mature, the relative dry weighl often increases, but in succu-
lent plants the reverse is true due to the conversion of hexoses into pentosans which have
a higher water capacity. Protoplasm may be considered as composed of two elements, the
pentosans and the albumins, the hydration of the albumins being increased by increase in the
hydrogen ion concentration and the pentosan decreased. Amino compounds increase the
hydration of the artificial colloidal mixtures as well as increase the growth of plants in cul-
tures. The mechanism of the increase of cell size is related to the assumption that the more
solid phase of the cell contents would take the position of the outer layer and tend to increase
faster than the liquid phase. The inter-relationships of the constituents of the solid and
liquid phases of the colloidal protoplasm might form a kind of mosaic membrane, but it would
be a membrane resulting from the product of the surface energy of the protoplasmic mass
and that of the medium and would have "no other permanent or morphological value."

In the study of the effects of organic acids and their amino-compounds on growth the
following colloids — agar, gelatin, agar-gelatin (8:2), and agar-oat-protein (8:2) — were tested
at 16-17°C, for the amount of expansion from a dried thickness to complete hydration. The
gelatin-asparagin test and the agar-gelatin-asparagin test are inconclusive due to the dis-
persion of the gelatin.

The various colloid combinations swelled, in general, in solutions of glycocoll at rates
equal to or greater than in water. When glycocoll was combined with acetic acid the rate was
reduced, with one exception, somewhat below that in the acid alone. It is shown by experi-
ment with plant tissues that because of their complex nature no prediction of the effect of
temperature changes upon imbibition can be made. In general "the increase in swelling in
distilled water is seen to be about twice that in the acid in the rise from 18°C. to 38°C. The
walnut fruit, as a type of a tissue which shows an increasing dry weight with age, and the
tomato, which shows an increasing relative moisture content as it matures, were studied.
Auxograph records of the course of development of the walnut shows that the increase in size
is irregular, being dependent upon the ratio between transpiration and absorption. Actual
shrinkages appeared when transpiration exceeded absorption. Similar results were recorded
in the growth of the tomato. In both, when the increased temperature caused increased trans-
piration which was not offset by other conditions, the rate of growth decreased or shrinkage
occurred. The percentage of water in the nuts was usually higher than in the twigs and stems
which bore them. In fleshy, flat joints of Opuntia decrease was demonstrated at night and
increase in growth coincident with the rise of temperature during the day. Decreased acidity
in cells showing high pentosan content during the light period is given as the reason for this
condition. — Ernest Shaw Reijnolds.

1346. MacDougal, D. T. The physical factors in the growth of the tomato. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club. 47: 261-269. 1920. — Observations on growth in the fruits of the tomato showed
that they could be used as an example of development and growth without increase of dry
weight. The rate of increase in diameter is not a measure of the actual accretion of water
and solid material; furthermore, its culmination may not be reached until the fruit approaches
maturity. The conclusion is made that in young fruits, the low salt content and acidity give
a set of conditions in which imbibition is the chief distentive force, and in older fruits the
higher acidity and salt content make osmotic action more important. — P. A. Mum.

1347. Reed, H. S., and F. F. Halm a. The evidence for a growth-inhibiting substance in
the pear tree. Plant World 22: 239-247. 3 fig. 1929.— The authors discuss the growth habits
of new pear shoots, and present evidence in favor of the hypothesis that growth-inhibiting
substances are generated in the apical portion of the shoot, which travel toward the base of
the shoot, and maintain dormancy of the lateral buds. Horizontal shoots show the inhibi-
tion chiefly along the ventral side, while dorsal buds show considerable growth. Buds between
dorsal and ventral position show intermediate growth. They take this behavior to indicate
that the growth-inhibitor accumulates along the ventral side of the shoot, and thus frees the
dorsal buds from its influence. — C. A. Shull.

200 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1348. Salter, Robert M., and T. C. McIlvaine. Effect of reaction of solution on ger-
mination of seeds and on growth of seedlings. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 73-95. PI. 15. 1920. —
Using two modifications of Shive's best solutions, the author obtains data showing the impor-
tance of active acidity in the germination of seeds and in the growth of seedlings of wheat, soy-
beans, corn, alfalfa, and red clover. Germination of the seed of the five plants as compared
with the growth of the respective seedlings is found to be less sensitive to an acid reaction.
The optimum reaction for germination lies between PH 2.96 and PH 7.71, a slightly acid
reaction proving most favorable in all cases. In general, maximum growth of the seedlings
of all the plants occurs in the culture with an exponent of PH 5.94-5.16; death occurs at PH
2.16; and growth is conspicuously depressed at PH 7.71. During the growth of wheat seedlings,
there is a general tendency for the reaction of the culture solutions to shift to a point slightly
below neutrality, the value of change in reaction depending upon the stability of the solu-
tion employed. — R. W. Webb.

1349. Vogg, L. Polygonum cuspidatum Sieboldund Zucc. Ein Studienversuch zur Pflan-
zenbiologie. [An experimental study in plant biology.] Ber. Naturw. Verein Schwaben u.
Neuberg 42: 175-183. 1919. — The author tabulates the results obtained by his study of the
growth of this Japanese Polygonum. For periods varying in successive years from about 4
weeks to 7 weeks he records the daily elongation of the stem, together with the temperature,
the barometric pressure, the moisture of the air, and the prevailing weather conditions. In
his last series of observations he records the growth of the branches, as well as that of the
stem. According to his deductions moist and warm weather are essential for rapid growth.
— A. W. Evans.

MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES

1350. Jennings, O. E. The paper mulberry an "artillery plant." Torreya 20: 52-53.
1920. — At Philadelphia on May 21, 1919, Broussonetia papyrifera Vent, was observed to be
throwing out pollen in a smoky cloud, the filament apparently straightening with sufficient
force to eject the pollen. In this respect the plant resembles the related Pilea serpyllifolia
Wedd.— J. C. Nelson.

1351. Lorch, W. Die Torsionen der Laubmoosseata. [Torsions in the setae of mosses.]
Hedwigia 61: 40-91. 1919. — One hundred and four species of mosses were examined for tor-
sions of the setae. The results obtained embody both anatomical investigations and physi-
ological experiments. For the experimental part of the problem a specially designed appar-
atus was used which permitted a rapid and accurate determination of the angle of torsion.
Water content, age, and length of seta influenced greatly the degree and rapidity of the tor-
sion movement. The results obtained from 1153 experiments seem to show that the torsion
of the seta is a good specific character and that it could be made use of in taxonomic studies.
— Ernst Artschwager.

GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY

1352. Sifton, H. B. Longevity of the seeds of cereals, clovers, and timothy. Amer.
Jour. Bot. 7: 243-251. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 896.

REGENERATION

1353. Harvey, R. B. Relation of catalase, oxidase, and H+ concentration to the formation
of overgrowths. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 211-221. 2 fig. 1920.— The author has studied the osmot-
ic concentration of normal tissues and tumor tissues (produced by Bacterium tumefaciens)
in Ricinus and beet, by determining the freezing point depression through the use of a thermo-
couple. Little difference is noted between the two types of tissue, and the author believes
that the difference in osmotic concentration between them is so slight as to be quite unrelated
to tumor production. The determination of the freezing point of expressed juices as an indi-

No. 2, December, 1920] PHYSIOLOGY 201

cation of osmotic concentration in the tissues he regards as open to serious objection.— The
hydrogen-ion concentration he finds to be consistently a little lower in tumorous tissue,
whether produced by B. tumefaciens or (in Bryophyllum leaves) by freezing, than in adjacent
healthy tissue. He suggests that in tin- frozen t issues t Ids may be due to precipitation of pro-
teins. The activity of catalase ami of oxidase is found to be considerably greater in tumorous
than in healthy tissue, due evidently to the decrease in hydrogen-ion concentration there.
The growth of intumescences in frozen spots on Bryophyllum leaves is apparently due to the
higher rate of metabolism at these points and the consequent accumulation there of substano a
from the surrounding normal tissue. The author suggests that the dominance of a growing
apex may be due not to a production within it of inhibiting substances but to the attraction
to, and accumulation therein, of growth stimulating substances from the surrounding area. —
E. W. Sinnott.

1354. Loeb, J. The nature of the directive influence of gravity on the arrangement of
organs in regeneration. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 373-386. 1920. — Continuing work previously
reported the author shows that there is a close correlation between the distribution of a red
pigment in leaves of Bryophyllum calycinum and the development of shoots and roots in the
notches of a leaf. In leaves suspended vertically and sidewise in a moist chamber, roots and
shoots develop chiefly on the lower side. It is in this region also that the red pigment col-
lects. The red pigment is merely an indicator, for, with excess of water or in the dark, it is
not evident. When shoots or roots develop on the lower side of a leaf, this half has a greater
dry weight, while, when they develop on both sides, there is no appreciable difference in dry
weights of the halves. The explanations offered are that gravity affects the distribution of
sap, tending to cause it to collect more on the lower side, and that the organs thus favored
grow a little more quickly than the others and tend to inhibit growth of similar organs in other
places. Immersion of leaves in water eliminates the influence of gravity. — Otis F. Curtis.

1355. Loeb, J. Quantitative laws in regeneration. II. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 651-657.
1920. — Continuing work previously reported the author gives data to confirm a previous state-
ment that a piece of stem inhibits the growth in notches of Bryophyllum because necessary
materials move from the leaf to the attached piece of stem. Under the conditions of the ex-
periment the gain in weight of the stem was about 14 per cent more than the weight of shoots
and roots that would have been produced from the notches if the leaf had been isolated.
The distribution of a red pigment served as an indicator of the distribution of necessary
materials. — Otis F. Curtis.

TEMPERATURE RELATIONS

1356. Northrup, John H. Concerning the hereditary adaptation of organisms to higher
temperature. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 313-318. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 433.

1357. Northrxjp, John H. A device for regulating the temperature of incubators either
above or below room temperature. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 309-311. 1920. — The temperature
is controlled by means of a relay which regulates the flow of water through the jacket of a
double-walled incubator. The relay directs the stream of water either through the incubator
or to the waste pipe as required by the temperature changes. Either hot or cold water may
be used depending on the temperature desired. — H. E. Knowlton.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

1358. de Besteiro, Dolores C, and Michel-Durand. Influence de l'eclairement
sur l'absorption du glucose par les racines des plantes superieures. [Influence of light
intensity on the absorption of glucose by the roots of higher plants.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 31 : 94-108.
1919. — The effects of four different light intensities, namely: J, f, §, and full sunlight were
determined, using Pisum sativum, grown singly in water cultures, with the roots growing under
sterile conditions. The authors found that when the tops were grown in a limited supply of

202 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

air there was practically no difference in the dry weights of the plants produced or the amounts
of glucose absorbed by the roots of the plants under the different light intensities. With the
plants whose tops were allowed to develop in the normal atmosphere, however, the amounts
of glucose absorbed per plant were in the proportions of 1-3-4-5 for the four light intensities.
The strongest light also produced the most vigorous plants, the dry weights being in the ratio
of 2-6-7-11. Although larger amounts of glucose were absorbed by the plants growing in the
brighter light, the amount of glucose absorbed per unit dry weight of the entire plant was
substantially the same in each case. — R. S. Nanz.

1359. Coupin, Henri. Sur la production de la chlorophylle par les vegetaux exposes a
une lumiere discontinue. [The formation of chlorophyll in plants exposed to a discontinuous
light.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 403-405. 1920. — Seedlings raised in darkness were
exposed to diffuse light on successive days for a given period each day. The change in color
of the leaves was noted. It is found that the time of exposure required to produce chlorophyll
differs with the species and also with the part of the plant concerned. Regions which contain
a large supply of reserve food, such as cotyledons, turn green with less exposure than those
not used for storage of nutritive materials. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

TOXIC AGENTS

1360. Clowes, G. H. A., and L. G. Keith. Correlation of certain physical and chemical
factors with toxicity to marine organisms. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41 : xxxvii. 1920. — Symmetrical
dichloracetones are more toxic to developing sea urchins and to mice than as3rmmetrical ones
are. The indications are that the symmetrical compounds diffuse more rapidly from a non-
aqueous phase to an aqueous phase and hydrolyze more rapidly in a freely alkaline aqueous
solution. Death of the cells is probably caused by the products of hydrolysis. — G. B. Rigg.

1361. Dienert, F. Retard de la floraison cause par un gaz toxique. [Delay in flowering
due to gas-poisoning.] Rev. Vitic. 51: 379. 1919. Reprinted in: Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et
Appliquees, 31: 131-132. 1920. — Under the heading "Chronique et Correspondence," is a
note on the above, reporting the accidental observation that the growth of a cherry tree in the
open was so delayed by chlorine fumes in April that the tree bloomed in September and
October and bore ripe fruit late in October. The suggestion is made that the regulated use
of poisonous gases might be employed to produce desirable fruits out of season, and at high
market price, by delaying the normal course of bloom and fruiting. — G. J. Peirce.

1362. Gtjerin, P., and Ch. Lormand. Action du chlore et de diverses vapeurs sur les
vegetaux. [The effect of chlorine and of other gases upon plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 170: 401-403. 1920. — Most plants are not killed by exposure for two hours to an atmos-
phere containing one part in 2000 by weight of chlorine, methyl monochlor chloroformiate,
bromacetone, chloropicrine, or mustard gas. The leaves usually change color and drop, but
new ones appear after a time and normal growth is resumed. Leaf-fall takes place sooner
in treatment with chlorine than with chloropicrine or mustard gas. Microscopic examina-
tion showed plasmolysis very soon after exposure to chlorine but only after a considerable
time in mustard gas. Potted plants and cuttings of many cultivated species were used. —
C. H . and W. K. Fan:

ELECTRICITY AND MECHANICAL AGENTS

1363. Darnell-Smith, G. P. The electrolytic treatment of seeds (Wolfryn process) be-
fore sowing. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 393-395. 1920. — The author reviews an article
published in Jour. Ministry for Agric. 2610. — L. R. Waldron.

MISCELLANEOUS

1364. Koehler, A. E. A new 0.1 N calomel electrode design. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41:
619-620. 1920.

No. 3, December, 1920] SOIL SCIENCE 203

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. .Skinner, Editor
F. M. Schertz, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

1365. Anonymous. Fertilizers for fruits. Amer. Fertilizer 52s: 59-64. 1920.— A discus-
sion of fertilizer experiments with fruits is given and definite fertilizer formulae for different
soil conditions are recommended. — J. J. Skinner.

1366. Anonymous. Soil fertility experiment in the Middle V/est. Amer. Fertilizer 526:
101. 1920. — The number of plots and acres in soil fertility experiments in the Middle Western
States are as follows: Ohio has 275 acres and 3,000 plots; Illinois, 1,115 acres; Indiana, 306
acres; Wisconsin, 103 acres; Iowa, 552 acres in 1,975 plots; and Kansas, 59 acres in 582 plots.
— J. J. Skinner.

1367. Fippin, Elmer O. The status of lime in soil improvement. Amer. Fertilizer 525:
118-124. 1920. — A discussion of the use of lime materials and the effect of lime on soils. —
J. J. Skinner.

1368. Jones, Owen. Soil fertility: Can it be preserved in Australian forests? Australian
Forest. Jour. 3 : 71-72. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1032.

1369. Kelley, W. P. The present status of alkali. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ.
219. 10 p. 1920. — The author discusses the methods of prevention and the treatment of
alkali lands. Saline irrigation water is to be avoided and the water table should be kept
below the capillary reach of the surface. The leaching of excess salts from the soil involves
the matter of drainage. Drainage, accompanied by flooding, is used successfully to remove
white alkali from soils. Black alkali requires neutralization before it can be leached from
soils if present in large amounts. Gypsum or some other flocculating agent should be added
before flooding soils containing small amounts of black alkali. — A. R. C. Haas.

1370. Maquenne, L., and E. Demoussy. Sur l'absorption du calcium par les racines des
plantes et ses proprietes antitoxique vis-a-vis du .cuivre. [The absorption of calcium by plant
roots and its antitoxic properties with respect to copper.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
420-425. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1314.

1371. Stoate, P. N. The Eucalypts in relation to soil fertility. Australian Forest. Jour.
3: 112-113. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1044.

1372. Worth, F. J., and Maung Po Saw. Absorption of lime by soils. Memoirs Dept.
Agric. India 5: 157-171. 1919. — The soils used in the test were Hlegu, Hmawbi, Mandalay,
Pwinbyu, Hopin and Sahmaw. The work indicates a new method for estimating the lime
requirements of soils. The method is based upon the absorption of calcium bicarbonate by
a solution of the soil sample. Lime absorption curves are graphically represented for the
above soils. — F. M. Schertz.

ACIDITY AND LIMING

1373. Lipman, J. C, and A. W. Blair. Lime as a factor in maintaining soil fertility I.
Rotation without legumes. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 124-134. 1919. — A series of
experiments covering a period of ten years and designed to show the effect of lime on the nitro-
gen content of the soil as well as the yields of non-leguminous crops, are described. The crop
rotation was at first corn, oats two years, wheat, timothy, but this was later changed so that
there was but one year of oats and two of timothy. The results indicated: 1. A greater loss
of nitrogen in the limed than in the unlimed plats. 2. The yield of dry matter on the limed

204 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

and unlimed plats was practically equal. 3. The addition of 320 pounds of nitrate of soda per
acre to the plats receiving 16 tons of manure per acre increased the crop yields indicating
that nitrogen was a limiting factor. The authors conclude "The results of these experiments
would seem to show beyond a doubt, that for the lighter coastal plain soils, lime has very
little place in rotations which entirely omit legumes."— H. N. Vinall.

INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

1374. Albrecht, William Albert. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation as influenced by the nitro-
gen in the soil. Soil Sci. 9: 275-327. 4 pi., 3 fig. 1920.— Soybeans and cowpeas were grown
in pots in a soil low in nitrogen and organic matter to which varying amounts of sodium nitrate
or clover tops were added. Nitrogen fixation was determined by analyzing for the total nitro-
gen before and after growth. Nitrates up to 1500 pounds of sodium nitrate per acre did not
prove injurious to nitrogen fixation and did not affect the nodule production appreciably.
In some cases the decaying organic matter caused heavy losses in nitrogen but after the loss
ceased, large nitrogen fixation occurred. The organic matter added increased the nitrogen
fixed by cowpeas. The maximum average fixation for duplicate pots of 5 cowpea plants was
1295 mgm.— W. J. Robbins.

1375. Headden, W. P. Some soil studies. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 22-38.
1919. — The accumulation of excess amounts of nitric nitrogen in the soil is given as the cause
of low yields and poor quality in both the sugar beet and wheat crops of Colorado. An increase
of 40 parts per million of nitric nitrogen in the surface foot of soil, depressed the sugar con-
tent of beets from 15.4 to 11.9 per cent and produced other unfavorable results. It was found
that a certain soil which had a maximum of 20.5 parts per million on March 4 showed a steady
increase of nitric nitrogen during the summer. On August 25 the minimum was 47 parts per
million and the maximum 333 parts per million of nitric nitrogen. The author believes that
certain Colorado soils have the power to fix atmospheric nitrogen converting it into protein
nitrogen through the agency of their bacterial flora, the Azotobacter. In experiments with
soil taken from the fields he found a maximum nitrogen fixation of 124 parts per million in
48 days. This rate of fixation would add 1.5 tons of protein matter to the acre foot of soil in
48 days.— H. N. Vinall.

1376. Lipman, J. C, and A. W. Blair. Field experiments on the availability of nitrogenous
fertilizers, 1908-1917. Soil Sci. 9: 371-392. 1920.— A report is made of the second 5 year per-
iod of a study of the availability and nitrogen losses of various nitrogenous materials under a
rotation of corn, oats, wheat and two years timothy on forty 1 /20 acre plots in limed and un-
limed condition. The average yields of dry matter and the percentage of nitrogen recovered
were greater with mineral than organic materials. From 1913-17, an average loss of 66 per
cent of the applied nitrogen occurred. The limed plots during 10 years lost 250 pounds more
nitrogen than the unlimed. The supply of nitrogen and carbon was best maintained on the
plots receiving farm manure. The work emphasizes the difficulty of maintaining the nitrogen
supply of the soil at a high level under continuous cropping to non-leguminous crops, even
when commercial fertilizers are supplied. — W. J. Robbins.

1377. McCall, A. C, and A. M. Smith. Effect of manure-sulphur composts upon the
availability of the potassium of green sand. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 239-256. 1 fig. 1920.— Two
green sands, one containing 5.88 per cent of potassium, the other 1.42 per cent were used to
study the effect of sulphofication upon the solubility of the potassium. In composts con-
sisting of green sand, manure and soil in different proportions, an appreciable amount of the
potassium was made water-soluble through sulphofication. The compost containing the
largest proportion of manure developed the highest degree of acidity, oxidized the greatest
amount of sulphur, and produced the largest quantity of water-soluble potassium, while the
composts in which soil was substituted for a part of the manure developed less acidity, oxi-
dized less sulphur and produced a smaller amount of soluble potassium. When all the manure
was replaced by soil the rate of sulphofication was so slow that at the end of 23 weeks only a

No. 3, December, 1920) SOIL SCIENCE 205

very small amount of acidity had developed and very little potassium had been made soluble.
\\ hen no organic matter was added 1 he amount of acidity and soluble sulphates were no greater
than misfit be accounted for by the natural oxidation of sulphur.- Addition of ferrous and
aluminum sulphates in small amounts failed to stimulate sulphofication, while calcium car-
bonate added to the sulphur-manure-soil compost stimulated action in early stages but the
end result was no greater than without it. — More water-soluble potassium was formed from
the high-potassium green sand hut a larger percentage of total potassium present was liber-
ated in the composts containing the low-potassium green sand. The total amounts of potas-
sium recovered in aqueous extracts from the composts containing manure varied from 0.1 to
41.3 per cent of the total initial amounts present. — Composting of green sand, or of soil rich
in potassium, with sulphur and manure may prove a practicable method of obtaining avail-
able potassium from comparatively insoluble materials.— D. Reddich.

1378. Neller, J. R. The potential biochemical activity of the spores of soil bacteria.
Soil Sci. 9: 329-340. 1 fig. 1920.— Infusions from five successive layers of the upper 64 cm.
of soil were heated to 85°C. for 10 minutes. This treatment destroyed 91.3-98.4 per cent of
the organisms originally present. Inoculating with heated infusions produced 39-46.6 per
cent as much ammonia in 7 days and about 77 per cent of the CO2 produced by inoculating with
unheated infusions. The bacterial spores of the soil are capable of energetic activity when
supplied with sufficient food and moisture. — W. J. Rdbbins.

1379. Plymen, F. J., and Bal. The biological aspects of wheat cultivation on embanked
soils. Agric. Jour. India 15: 289-300. 1920. — Cultivation and other means of increasing aera-
tion of the black flood soils produce a condition favorable to crop production. The soils
possess good power for ammonification and N fixation but are slow in nitrification. Nitri-
fication increases when the rainy weather cultivation is performed. Lack of available nitro-
gen or the presence of some deleterious substance formed under anaerobic conditions is
attributed to be the cause of crop failure. — /. J. Skinner.

CROP FERTILIZATION

1380. Blair, A. W. Utilizing soil potash by means of intermediary crops. Proc. Soc.
Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 69-74. 1919. — New sources of potash discovered by chemists in
the United States have made available "not over one-fourth of the pre-war consumption" of
potash fertilizer. Most of the soils in the United States are well supplied with potash in
the form of mineral materials but much of this potash is unavailable or only slowly available
to the growing crop. In a study of the problem of making this supply of potash available it
was found that the dry matter of rape and field peas contained an unusually large percentage
of K20. The growing of such crops as a preparation for corn, alfalfa, or small grain is sug-
gested as a means of suppljdng the desired potash in available form. — H. N. Vinall.

1381. Conner, S. D., and E. N. Fergus. Borax in fertilizers. Purdue Univ. Agric. Exp.
Sta. Bull. 239. 15 p., 4 fig- 1920. — Borax injury to corn resulting from the use of Searles Lake
potash in Indiana during 1917-1919 is described. Field tests conducted at two points in 1919
showed that from 0.5 up to 4 pounds of borax per acre produced injury when drilled in the row
with corn, that 16-18 pounds worked into the entire surface soil produced no injury, and that
the damage was less in clay than in sand or muck, less in neutral than in acid soils, and less
when rains accompanied the application. Borax causes injury by retarding or preventing
chlorophyll formation. Bleaching, tip burn and wilting are the symptoms. Soybeans are
more sensitive to borax than corn, while wheat, oats, rye and corn are equally susceptible.
Only the Searles Lake potash contained enough borax to cause injury. Field tests showed
that American potash fertilizer was equivalent to the German product in fertilizing val

A brief resume of the literature is presented.— Max W. Gardner.

1382. Voelcker, J. Augustus. The Woburn Experimental Station of the Royal Agricul-
tural Society of England. Field experiments, 1919. Jour. Royal Agric. Soc. England, 80:

206 SOIL SCIENCE LBot. Absts., Vol. VI,

418-430. 1919. — The 43rd report of the fertilizer experiments with the continuous growth of
wheat and barley is made. The application of ammonium sulphate year after year has pro-
duced an acid condition which prevents a good growth. Largest yield was secured with
stable manure. Manure from animals fed linseed and cotton cake was practically the same as
that from corn fed animals. Leather as a source of nitrogen was ineffective. Ground lime-
stone produced larger yields than did chalk. — J. J. Skinner.

1383. Voelcker, J. Augustus. The Woburn Experimental Station of the Royal Agricul-
tural Society of England. Pot-culture experiments, 1919. Jour. Royal Agric. Soc. England,
80: 430-438. 3 pi. 1919. — It is shown that insoluble forms of arsenic, as arsenious acid, up
to 0.1 per cent can be used without injury to wheat. The more soluble forms as arsenic acid
or the soda salts of either arsenious or arsenic acid cause a decrease when used in amounts
of 0.02 per cent and kill at 0.05 per cent. As a top dressing sodium nitrate proved more valu-
able than did ammonium sulphate, ammonium nitrate or calcium nitrate. — J. J. Skinner.

FERTILIZER RESOURCES

1384. Anonymous. Fertilizer work by the Government in 1919. Amer. Fertilizer 522:
61-63. 1920. — Details from reports of several Bureaus of the U. S. Department of Agriculture.
— J. J. Skinner.

1385. Anonymous. Potash and bromine in Texas lakes. Amer. Fertilizer 528: 72-73.
1920. — Brines that contain potash and bromine have been discovered in alkali lakes in Gaines,
Lynn and Ternr Counties, Texas, on the plain south of the Panhandle region. The lakes range
in area from 35 to 7000 acres, lie in flat valleys and have no surface outlet. Analysis of brines
from two of the lakes is given. The salts of these brines contain a smaller percentage of pot-
ash than that yielded by the potash material of Germany, Alsace, Nebraska, and Searles Lake,
but they contain a relatively high percentage of bromine. — J. J. Skinner.

1386. Anonymous. Note. Nature 104: 447. 1920. — Reference to results obtained by
Garelli reported in La Nature for Nov. 29, 1919, on extracting nitrate of ammonia from surplus
stock of explosives. — O. A. Stevens.

1387. Briggs, L. George, A survey of the weighing and handling problem of the fertilizer
industry. Amer. Fertilizer 52:2: 102c-103. 1920. — Equipment used in fertilizer manufacture
is discussed. — J. J. Skinner.

1388. Calvino, Mario. La fertilidad de le tierra y los abonos. V. Los abonos minerales.
[Chemical fertilizers.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 23-26. 2 fig. 1920.

1389. Carter, Spencer L. The manufacture and distribution of acid phosphate. Amer.
Fertilizer 524: 61-66. 1920. — An address delivered during Farmers' Week at the Ohio State
University, discussing the details of acid phosphate manufacture. — J. J. Skinner.

1390. Goldenweiser, E. A. A survey of the fertilizer industry. Amer. Fertilizer 521:
53-68a. 1920. — A general survey of the fertilizer industry is given, together with tabular
material and a discussion of the following subjects: Materials used in mixed fertilizers; mate-
rials used in the manufacture of sulphuric acid; sources of ammonia and amounts of each used
in mixed fertilizers in 1918. — J. J. Skinner.

1391. Huntington, W. D. The future of the fertilizer industry. Amer. Fertilizer 527:
61-63. 1920.

1392. Whittle, C. A. Fertilizer formula finder for southern crops. Amer. Fertilizer 526:
58-59. 1920. — The description of a fertilizer formula finder issued by J. N. Harper. The
instrument is a double disc made of card board and is unique in many particulars. With a
given crop in mind the disc is turned, one upon the other, according to directions and a desir-
able fertilizer combination is given for any soil type. — /. /. Skinner.

No. 3, December, 1920] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 207

MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

Burton E. Livingston, Editor

1393. Lantes, Adelaide. Una desecadora para ejemplares de herbario. [A desiccator
for botanical specimens.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 32. 1920. — Describes a box built
to dry botanical specimens by the use of some hygroscopic material such as quicklime. —
F. M. Blodgett.

1394. Lee, G. S. Abaca (Manila hemp): the fiber monopoly of the Philippine Islands.
Sci. Monthly 11: 159-170. 1920. — The natives of the Philippines use varieties of ferns, palms,
battams, and vines for their fibers. But Abaco and Maguey are of notable commercial
importance for rope and bag manufacture. Sissal, henequen, kapok and ramie have possi-
bilities, but have not been fully developed. — The abaco plant is closely related to the banana
and the plantain. The name Manila hemp is very misleading, suggesting as it does Cannabis
sativa, while it really comes from Musa textilis. Abaco is the term applied to the plant as well
as to the fiber. As many as fourteen varieties of this plant are cultivated. It is most suc-
cessfully cultivated in the south two-thirds of the Philippines up to 300 feet above sea-level.
— Methods of cultivation, kinds of soil, harvesting, etc., are briefly discussed. — The fiber is
extracted from the overlapping leaf-bases. It is used for ropes, hats, matting, etc., and the
waste is used in making Manila paper. — L. Pace.

1395. Smyth, E. Graywood. Cotton insects in Porto Rico. Entomol. News 31: 121-125.
1920. — Pink boll worm not reported as yet. Cotton leaf caterpillar often locally serious;
control by dusting method too expensive for average grower and destruction of wild food plants
of the insect is advised. Chief of these are Urena lobala and Malachra rotundifolia, the for-
mer attracting the fire ant Solenopsis gemihala by honey ducts on the underside of the leaf.
This weed carries the insect across the gap between cotton crops. Thrips cause scars under-
neath the calyx and seem to be concerned with a disease which causes adherence of calxy to
boll thus preventing proper bursting. Other insects mentioned, also a fungus Agrostalagmus
albus as a natural enemy of the cotton aphis. — O. A. Stevens.

1396. Weiss, Harry B. Notes on Thymalus fulgidus Er., and its fungus hosts in New
Jersey. Entomol. News 31: 1-3. 1920. — Notes on life history of a beetle which breeds in
Polyporus betulinus and Daldalea confragosa. Both larvae and adults feed on the fungus
and when numerous completely riddle it. — O. A. Stevens.

1397. Wittrock, Veit Brecher. Anteckningar om nordiska namn pa Stellaria media
(L.) Cyr. [Notes on Norse names of Stellaria media (L.) Cyr.] [Swedish.] Acta Horti Ber-
giani (Stockholm) 62: 1-40. Map. Posthumous, edited by Rob. E. Fries. 1918. — The
author gives an extensive list of names for Stellaria media, used in Sweden, Norway, Denmark,
Faeroe Islands, Iceland, Finland and Lapland, also recording the provinces or districts
where the different names are used. — P. A. Rydberg.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication.
The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies,
as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa-
tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning
January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page,
the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923; the second member in
each group is to serve till January 1, 1921. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection.
The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of
five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving
matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first
cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is Donald Reddick, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

Botanical Abstracts is published monthly, two, three, or four volumes being issued
each year at present. Each volume contains about 300 pages. The current (1920) volumes
are III, IV, V and VI. Subscriptions are accepted for Vols. Ill and IV (January-July,
inch), and V and VI (August-December, inch). Volumes I and II can no longer be fur-
nished by the publishers. The price for two volumes is $6.00, for the United States and its
dependencies, Mexico and Cuba; $6.25, for Canada; $6.50, for other countries. Prices are net
postpaid. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received
within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of
issue.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay : Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain : Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

Vol. VI

THIS NUMBER COMPLETES VOLUME VI

JANUARY, 1921
ENTRIES 1398-2032

No. 1

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBEES OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 19S0 are indicated ly asterisks)

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann

Arbor, Michigan.
*R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City. .

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. Osterhout, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.
J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
*Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A.Orton,U.S.
try, Washington

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. G. Montgomery, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Society for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCue, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*Donald Reddick (Chairman of the Board),
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum
of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Wortley F. Rudd, Medical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

Bureau of Plant Indus-
, D. C.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, V. S. A.

Entered as second-class matter, Novembers, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

(S6.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba

CONTENTS

Agronomy 1398-1436

Bibliography, Biography, and History 1437-1473

Botanical Education 1474-1477

Cytology ., 1478-1496

Ecology and Plant Geography 1497-1529

Forest Botany and Forestry 1530-1562

Genetics 1563-1793

Horticulture 1794-1893

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants 1894-1905

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1906-1909

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes 1910-1924

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1925-1931

Pathology 1932-1972

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 1973-1993

Physiology 1994-2018

Soil Science 2019-2028

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 2029-2032

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,

n c.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, Universityof Wisconsin, '
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey.— Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State • College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.
E. W Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,
Storrs, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E.N.Transeau,
Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb
W. Evans, Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York. g

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. H eber W .
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science.Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duqgar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of 'Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C — Assistant Editor,

F. M. Schertz, U.S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Paybon, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O Buckman L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A.J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M. Wiegand
R. Hosmer

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense.

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. VI JANUARY, 1921 No. 4

ENTRIES 1398-2032

AGRONOMY

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

139S. Anonymous. United States grades for milled rice recommended by the United States
Department of Agriculture. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 133. 16 p. 1920.

1399. Anonymous. Spur feterita. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 124. 4 p. 1920.— A
member of the sorghum group. General notes on culture and feeding value. — L. R. Hesler.

1400. Anonymous. Grimm alfalfa. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 123. 4 p. 1920.—
Description, seeding, and inoculation. — L. R. Hesler.

1401. Anonymous. Dry-land alfalfa. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 122. 4 p. 1920.
Description and discussion of seeding. — L. R. Hesler.

1402. Anonymous. Velvet beans. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 121. 3 p. 1920.—
Description, planting, feeding value, and notes on varieties. — L. R. Hesler.

1403. Anonymous. Alfalfa. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 115. 6 p. 1920. — A gen-
eral discussion, including description, soil requirements, preparation of land, liming, ferti-
lizing, inoculation, seeding, and treatment of the stand.— L. R. Hesler.

1404. Anonymous. Effect of frost on cane. [Rev. of: Anonymous. Letter to Nambour
Chronicle.] Australian Sugar Jour. 12: 291. 1920,. — The writer notes the effect of frost on
sugar cane during the past 18 years, and states that an early frost is most serious to cane to
be cut during the oncoming crushing season. Cane that is intended to stand over is injured
according to the forwardness of growth, for while the younger and later plants may be injured
more severely, the tops fall over and form a protection for the new growth. In 1908 the
writer had a crop, estimated to cut 18 tons per acre, injured by frost which he let stand over,
with the result of a gain the next season of over 22 tons per acre in 1910 freezing increased
the yield from a 50 ton estimate to 124 tons actually cut in 1911. — E. Koch.

1405. Barber, C. A. The growth of the sugar cane. No. VIII. Internat. Sugar Jour.
22:442-446. 3 pi., 5 fig. 1920. — Thickness of cane within certain limits is fixed for each
variety. Ordinary sugar cane in the field will have a thickness of from 1£ to 2 inches, but
there are two classes in which these limits are overstepped. "Elephant" canes, 2 to 3 inches

209

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 4

210 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

in thickness, do not grow very tall, do not fall easily, and are resistant to commoner cane
diseases. In contrast to these are the varieties indigenous in India, which are less than an inch
in thickness and have a thick tough rind and much fiber. Canes are divided into three classes :
Ukl, thin and fibrous, with sweet juice; Paunda, 1^ to 2 inches in diameter; Ganna, § to 1
inch in diameter, with less fiber and more juice than the Ukl canes, juice poor in quality,
less hardy and more liable to disease. Author gives description of the habits of growth of the
cane and points out that in some cases the shape of the joints has been useful in determining
the male parentage of unbagged seedlings. Experiments have shown a well-defined tendency
toward the more slender seedlings being slightly richer in juice than the thicker ones. —
E. Koch.

1406. Blair, R. E. The work of the Yuma reclamation project experiment farm in 1918.
U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 75. 77 p. Fig. 1-32. 1920. — A discussion of crop conditions,
cotton variety tests and ratooning, cotton thinning, time of planting, breeding; variety tests
for alfalfa, grain sorghums, flax, velvet beans, horse beans, forage sorghums, giant Bermuda
grass, deciduous and citrus fruits, vegetables, ornamental trees and shrubs. — L. R. Hesler.

1407. Blaringhem, L. Production par traumatisme d'une forme nouvelle de mais a cary-
poses multiples, Zea Mays var. polysperma. [The traumatic origin of a new form of maize
with multiple fruits, Zea Mays var. polysperma.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 677-679.
1920.

1408. Calvino, Mario. "Jack bean" y "sword bean" 0 sean los frijoles "canavali."
[Jack beans and sword beans are Canavali beans.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3 : 57-61. 5 fig.
1920. — Analyses of the "Jack bean," Canavalia ensiformis, and "sword bean," Canavalia gladi-
ta, are given, and they are recommended for trial in Cuba. — F. M. Blodgett.

1409. Calvino, Mario. El zacate prodigio (Tripsacum latifolium Hitchcock). [The
grass marvel, Tripsacum latifolium.' Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 62-67. 6 fig. 1920. —
This perennial grass had its origin in Mexico. A botanical description is given. It is propa-
gated by cuttings and produces forage having a comparatively high protein content for a
grass, according to the analysis given. It is attacked by the rust Puccinia polysora, which
causes little damage when the crop is cut at six month intervals. — F. M. Blodgett.

1410. Espino, Rafael B. A review of the coconut investigations at the College of Agri-
culture. Philippine Agric. 8: 161-178. 1919.

1411. Garnier, M. Plantes nouvelles pour 1920. [New plants for 1920.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92: 34-35. Fig. 9-10. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1849.

1412. Gautier, Armand and P. Clatjsmann. Action des fluorures sur la vegetation: B.
Cultures en champ d'experiences. [Action of fluorides on vegetation; experimental field trials.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 115-122. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1998.

1413. Hansen, Dan. The work of the Huntley reclamation project experiment farm in
1918. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 86. 32 p., 5 fig. 1920 — Experiments on crop rotation
are described. Results of variety tests for corn and barley given and notes on fruit trees
recorded. — L. R. Hesler.

1414. Hansen, Albert A. Cocklebur. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 109. 6 p., 1 fig.
1920. — Distribution, description, and uses of cocklebur (Xanthium spp.) are given. Notes
on damage and eradication measures are also presented. — L. R. Hesler.

1415. Harlan, Harry V. Daily development of kernels of Hannchen barley from flower-
ing to maturity at Aberdeen, Idaho. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:393-429. PI. 83-91, 17 fig. 1920 —
Records were taken at intervals of 12 hours. Appreciable differences occur in these intervals
except near maturity. The time from flowering to maturity for 3 successive years was 26

No. 4, January, 1921 1 AGRONOMY 211

days. Growth in length is completed by the seventh day, and as soon as the rate of growth in
length decreases, the thickness shows its most rapid increase. The dorsiventral diameter
increases almost until maturity. — Increase in dry matter and decrease in percentage of water
are very uniform throughout the period of growth. During growth the carbohydrates in-
crease most rapidly and the ash content least rapidly. — "There are several well-marked steps
in development. About the fifth or sixth day after flowering the growth in length is checked,
and a rapid gain in dry matter begins. About the ninth or tenth day a sticky substance is
secreted, which causes the glumes to adhere to the kernel. About the fifteenth or sixteenth
day the kernel toughens, the lemma begins to lose color in the dorsal surface, some of the
awns drop off, and the kernel has reached its maximum water content." — D. Reddick.

1416. Harlan, Harry V., and Stephen Anthony. Development of barley kernels in
normal and clipped spikes and the limitations of awnless and hooded varieties. Jour. Agric.
Res. 19: 431-472. IS fig. 1920.— Experiments in clipping awns of Hannchen and Manchuria
barleys showed that at maturity both lateral and dorsiventral diameters of kernels from
clipped spikes are smaller than those of normal spikes. This is not due to wound effects since
rate of growth in clipped spikes is normal until the latter half of the growth period. The
function of the awn as a transpiration organ is indicated by yields of awned and awnless
sorts in arid as contrasted with humid areas. Awnless and hooded barleys shatter more
easily than awned sorts. Clipped spikes also shatter easily. The authors find that the ash
constituents that normally go into the awn are deposited in the rachis instead. They conclude
that since the awn is removed it cannot function as a storage organ, and the consequent
deposition of ash in the rachis causes brittleness. High yielding hooded or awnless sorts can
hence be expected only by selection or hybridization in strains having low ash content in the
rachis. They suggest the substitution of smooth awned varieties as lacking the objectionable
features of the rough awned sorts. — F. P. Bussell.

1417. Headley, F. B. The work in 1918 of the Newlands (formerly the Truckee-Carson)
reclamation project experiment farm. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 80. 18 p., 1 fig. 1920. —
Discussion of variety and cultural tests of field crops, as alfalfa, barley, corn, oats, wheat
and potatoes, and reports of results of experiments in the reclamation of alkali soil. Data
are given concerning various horticultural crops, including sweet corn and string beans, and
the blossoming periods of various fruit trees. — L. R. Hesler.

1418. Henke, L. A. Corn at the College of Hawaii Farm. Hawaiian Forester and Agric.
16: 40-45. 1919. — The failure of the ordinary American varieties of corn on the lower lands
of the territory led to this attempt to find or develop a variety which would prove a sure crop
on the low lands. Cuban corn was the outstanding variety. The variety does not possess
an absolute immunity to leaf hoppers, but in only a few cases did they materially lessen the
yield. An additional advantage lay in the fact that the husks surrounded the ears so com-
pletely and so tightly that bird or weevil injury did not appear until long after maturity,
even in fields not harvested. In a country where the grain weevil is so common as in Hawaii,
this is an extremely valuable characteristic. The yields ran from 30 to 57 bushels per acre,
the larger yields appearing in the October plantings. Next in value came the Guam corn,
which has been grown successfully on the Island of Kauai for some years. As the husks of
this variety tend to open before the ears mature, it is more liable to bird and weevil injury
than is the Cuban com.— Stanley Coulter.

1419. Hibbard, R. P., and S. Gershberg. The biological method of determining the fer-
tilizer requirement of a particular soil or crop. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 223-224.
1919. — Since the fertilizer requirement of a crop can not be determined by an analysis of
either the soil or the crop, the requirement must be studied by growing the crop on the par-
ticular soil. This is called the biological method. Attention is called to the fact that the
great majority of fertilizer experiments have not been planned on a. logical, systematic method
and that the combinations of fertilizer salts have been greatly restricted, and selected at
random. The triangular system is advocated for field work. Field studies have been going

212 AGRONOMY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

on for several years. Different soils and different crops have been investigated. It is sug-
gested that plants growing for three or four weeks in pot cultures in the greenhouse could
be used, according to the plan devised, to determine the proper treatment of the soil in the
field. This work could be done in the winter months. Truck growers who use large green-
houses have an excellent chance to test out the proposed method. The article concludes
with emphasizing the necessity of improving the present practice in the utilization of fer-
tilizer in plant production. More exact knowledge is needed as to the best salts to combine
and as to the best ratios of these salts. — H. C. Young.

1420. Jenkins, E. H., W. L. Slate, D. F. Jones, and B. A. Brown. Varieties and
strains of corn for Connecticut. Connecticut (New Haven) Agric. Exp. Sta. and Storrs (Con-
necticut) Agric. Exp. Sta. Joint Bull. 3. 15 p. 1919. — A report of progress in testing the
prominent varieties and strains of corn for yields of grain and silage. — Henry Dorsey.

1421. Judd, C. S. Morning glory weed. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 4-5. 1919. —
Notes occurrence of this pest in two localities along Kahului Railway. The area involved
is very small, and efforts to bring about the complete eradication of the weed will probably
prove successful.— Stanley Coulter.

1422. Leape, H. M., and H. E. Annett. Investigations concerning the production of
Indian opium for medical purposes. Agric. Jour. India 15 : 124-134. 1920. — A study was made
of the morphine content of different varieties of opium grown under varying climatic condi-
tions. Nitrogenous substances were the only fertilizing materials which resulted in increased
production. Sodium nitrate increased the size of capsules and the amount of latex, but did
not increase the percentage of morphine in the opium. The number of capsules borne on a
plant is correlated with the morphine content of the opium produced. The terminal capsules
are richer in morphine than the lateral ones, the difference varying from 2 to 7 per cent.
About 500 varieties were examined for their morphine content and were found to vary from
6.5 to 20.5 per cent. The material produced from the first lancings of the poppy capsules
had a higher morphine content than that produced from succeeding lancings. — J. J. Skinner.

1423. Letteer, C. R. The work of the San Antonio experiment farm in 1918. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 73. 38 p., 4 fid- 1920. — The report includes discussion of topics as
follows: Crop conditions; effect of rotation and tillage on cotton root-rot; experiments with
and notes on cotton, corn, oats, Sudan grass, cowpeas, sorghums, flax, bean varieties, Rhodes
grass, fruits and ornamental plantings; experiments in cotton root-rot control, under the
headings, soil treatment, mulches, and excavations. — L. R. Hesler.

1424. Lovejoy, P. S. Farms vs. forests. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 201-212-
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1559.

1425. Nelson, J. C. [Rev. of: Hitchcock, A. S. The genera of grasses of the United
States, with special reference to the economic species. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 772. 307 p.,
20 pi., 174 fig. Government Printing Office: Washington; 1920. Price $.40.] Torreya 20:
84-88. 1920.

1426. Parmentier, Paul. Les irrigations et les arrosages en Syrie et en Palestine.
[Irrigation in Syria and Palestine. 1 Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:391-393. 1919. —
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1829.

1427. Parry and Company. The development of cane planting by the East India distil-
leries and sugar factories. Agric. Jour. India 15: 154-159. 2 pi. 1920. — The yield and
purity of sugar produced by a number of varieties of cane are given. The variety "Fiji B"
produced 48 tons per acre, which was the largest yield secured. The purity of the sugar from
this variety was also highest. — J. J. Skinner.

No. 4, January, 192 1] AGRONOMY 213

1428. Piper, C. V. Kudzu. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 89. 7 p., 2 fig. 1920 —
Description of kudzu (Pueraria thunbergiana) with a discussion of culture, grazing and
feeding value. — L. R. Hesler.

1429. Piper, C. V. The jack bean. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 92. 12 p., 1 fig. 1920.
— A general discussion of the history, appearance, botany, culture, and pests of the jack bean
(Canavalia ensiformis). — L. R. Hesler.

1430. Rindl, M. Vegetable fats and oils. III. Drying oils (continued). South African
Jour. Inst. 3 : 256-265. 1920. — Article treats of the sunflower, mainly in reference to its oil.
The culture, soil preferences, varieties, harvesting, and utilization are discussed, and anal-
yses of South African grown seeds are given. The culture of the plant in Rhodesia is also
discussed in reference to effect of fertilizers, and use as a rotation crop with maize. Some
commercial data regarding sunflower seeds are included. Brief notes are also added con-
cerning Madia sativa. — C. V. Piper.

1431. Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov. Crop
injury by borax in fertilizers. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 84:3-35. 25 fig. 1920.—
(Report on investigations (field and greenhouse) of the effects of anhydrous borax in potato
and cotton fertilizers. "Practically all the evidence collected points to the use in fertilizers
of potash salts containing borax in what proved in practice to be excessive quantities. The
higher the potash content of such mixed fertilizers the higher was also the borax content
and the greater the damage to the crop." The appearance of the injury to potatoes and
cotton is thus described: "In slight cases the foliage is lighter green than normal, while severely
affected plants show leaves slightly rimmed, like a pond-lily leaf, this rim being bleached
white or yellowish, so that the effect of borax-containing fertilizers has been rather aptly
called 'gilt-edged.' In more extreme cases the leaves may be completely bleached, but they
are rarely found in the field, as such badly affected plants die soon after emerging from the
soil. With wheat and corn this bleached leaf is the more usual characteristic. It is not
thought that permanent damage has resulted on fields subjected to this borax trouble.
"There may be a cumulative effect, but there is no evidence on this question." Should borax
continue to be used as an ingredient of fertilizer materials, even in moderate quantities, it
will become an important duty of those responsible for fertilizer experimentation to test this
possible cumulative action by a well planned long-term fertilizer experiment." Studies indi-
cate that 2-3 pounds of borax to the acre will injure wheat and 8-9 pounds affect cotton.
These quantities are small when compared to those of other poisons, as arsenic, mercury and
copper. The extremely poisonous action is not readily explained. Borax is a strong
antiseptic, and a partial explanation might be sought in the sterilizing action which it may
have on the soil, but the authors think the specific physiological reactions of the plant would
suggest a more intimate connection with the growing functions of the plant itself. Possibly
borax also interferes with the liberation of sugars, thus disturbing the processes of germina-
tion and growth. Borax may also prove to be antizymotic. Notes on general conditions of
health of potatoes in Maine are given. — L. R. Hesler.

1432. Ryan, P. Flax and its cultivation. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 18: 257-266. 1920.
— Cultural requirements, seeding, manuring, and harvesting are discussed. Up to the present
flax has been grown in Australia for fiber exclusively. — J. J. Skinner.

1433. Trtjax, Hartley E. United States grades for potatoes. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept.
Circ. 96: 2-4. 1920.

1434. Truax, Hartley E. United States grades for sweet potatoes recommended by the
United States Department of Agriculture. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 99: 2-4. 1920.

214 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1435. Venkatraman, T. S. Packing seed sugar canes for transport. Agric. Jour. India
15: 174-180. 3 pi. 1910 — Directions for packing are given, together with a general dis-
cussion.— J. J. Skinner.

1436. Westover, H. L. The development of the Peruvian alfalfa industry in the United
States. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 93. 8 p., 2 fig. 1920.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Lincoln W. Riddle, Editor

1437. Anonymous. Casimir de Candolle. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 237-
238. 1919.

1438. Anonymous. Dr. Frank Shipley Collins. Rhodora 22:96. 1920.— Notice of the
death of this former president of the New England Botanical Club and member of the Edi-
torial Staff of Rhodora, on May 25 at New Haven, Connecticut, in his seventy-third year. —
James P. Poole.

1439. Anonymous. Mrs. M. A. Sargent. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919:390.
1919.

1440. Anonymous. A Shakespearean garden. Nature 104:441-442. 1920. — Note upon
plan to restore the garden of Shakespeare's birthplace with the flowers of his period. Com-
ment upon suitable plants, and reference to some publications containing pertinent infor-
mation.— O. A. Stevens.

1441. Anonymous. Prof. J. W. H. Trail. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 32-33.
1920. — Additions to the list of publications by Trail given in Kew Bull. 1919: 381. — E. Mead
Wilcox.

1442. Anonymous. John H. Wilson. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 71. 1920.

1443. Barber, C. H. The origin of sugar cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 249-251.
1920.

1444. Bessey, E. A. Guide to the literature for the identification of fungi — a preliminary
outline for students and others. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 287-316. 1919. — See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1911.

1445. Boren, P. G. Utgifningsaren af Svensk Botanik [Dates of publication of "Svensk
Botanik."] Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920:63-64. 1920.— The year of publication is given for
each part of each volume of the illustrated work, together with the numbers of the plates
contained in each. — P. A. Rydberg.

1446. Correvon, H. L'horticulture russe sous le regime bolcheviste. [Russian hor-
ticulture under the bolshevist regime.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 18-19. 1920. — General dis-
cussion concerning the fate of individuals. Destruction and neglect of some of the more
important botanic gardens. — E. J. Kraus.

1447. Coulter, J. M. Aaron Aaronsohn. Bot. Gaz. 68: 388-389. 1 fig. 1919.— A short
biographical sketch withportrait. — See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 904.

1448. D(unn), S(tephen) T. William James Tutcher. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London]
1920: 136-138. 1920.

1449. Eberle, E. G. Henry George Greenish. Sketch with portrait. Jour. Amer.
Pharm. Assoc. 9: 665-666. 1920.

No. 4, January, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 215

1450. Freeman, W. E. British botanic gardens and stations. Nature 104: 469. 1920.—
Reference to early desire for such work in the West Indies shown in 1762 and the foundation
of the St. Vincent garden. — 0. A. Stevens.

1451. Fries, Rob. E. Nagra drag ur den Bergianska tradgardens historia 1885-1914.
[Some outlines from the history of Hortus Bergianus 1885-1914.] Acta Horti Bergiani [Stock-
holm] 61 : 5-24. 106 -pi., 2 maps. 1918.

1452. [Fries, Rob E.] Veit Brecher Wittrock. In memoriam. Acta Horti Bergiani
[Stockholm] 61: 3. 1918. Portrait.

1453. G(rove), W. B. George Stephen West. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 314-
315. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 56.

1454. Lesourd, F. Les plantes potageres a travers les ages. [Culinary plants grown in
various centuries.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 12-13. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1157.

1455. Lloyd, C. G. J. Ramsbottom. Mycological Notes 57: 830. April, 1919. [Cincin-
nati, Ohio.] — A biographical sketch with portrait.

1456. Lloyd, C. G. Arthur Lister. Mycological Notes 58:814. March, 1919. [Cin-
cinnati, Ohio.] — A biographical sketch with portrait.

1457. Lloyd, C. G. George Francis Atkinson. Mycological Notes 59: 846. June, 1919.
[Cincinnati, Ohio.] — A biographical sketch with portrait.

1458. MacCaughey, V. M. History of Botanical Exploration in Hawaii. Hawaiian
Forester and Agric. 16:25-28. 1919. Sketches of work of Asa Gray and Brackenlidge
in connection with U. S. Exploring Expedition; of Didrichsen's visit in 1845-47, his collections
in the main being now at Copenhagen; of Berthold Seemann, whose name will always be
associated with the botany of the Pacific, who visited the Islands on the voyage of the
"Herald," 1847-51; of Jules Remy who, in his two visits, 1851-63, made notable collections
of the Hawaiian flora; of Mann and Brigham in 1864-65; and finally of Wawra, the botanist
of the Austrian East Asiatic Exploring Expedition of 1869. Valuable because of bibliog-
raphy and location of collections. — Stanley Coulter.

1459. MacCaughey, V. M. History of Botanical Exploration in Hawaii. Hawaiian For-
ester and Agric. 16: 49-54. 1919. — A conclusion of the series of articles together with a
complete bibliography. Especial attention is given to the work of William Hillebrand,
"Hawaii's greatest botanist." Others included are Rev. J. M. Lydgate, Edward Bailey,
A. A. Heller, H. Schauinsland, and Miss Josephine Tilden. The fifty-two titles in the
bibliography include "A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean," Captain James Cook (1784); "Voyage
autour du monde," M. Marchand (1798); and Vancouver's "A Voyage of Discovery to the
North Pacific Ocean and around the World" (1798). — Stanley Coulter.

1460. McFarland, J. Horace. Roses remade for America. Garden Mag. 31:93-98.
1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1168.

1461.— Mackenna, J. Dr. C. A. Barber. Agric. Jour. India 15: 11-15. 1 pi. 1920. —
Life history.

1462. Mangin, Louis. Notice necrologique — Emile Boudier. [Obituary of Emile Bou-
dier.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:417-418. 1920.— Mycologist, 1828-1920; pupil of
Leveille; specialist in Discomycetes; doctor of pharmacy; residence at Montmorency. — C. H.
and W. K. Farr.

216 BOTANICAL EDUCATION Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1463. Mangin, L. Notice sur M. William Gilson Farlow. [Note concerning William Gilson
Farlow]. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 445-448. 1919. — A review of the life and works
of William Gilson Farlow. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 963, and 1470.]—
V. H. Young.

1464. [Nordstedt, O.] [Rev. of: Bryk, F. Caroli Linnaei Adonis Stenbroensis. xiii+
28 p., 2 maps. 1920.] Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920: 61. 1920.— The printing of an unpublished
manuscript of Linnaeus — a catalogue of the plants growing in his father's garden — written
in 1731 and 1732.— P. A. Rydberg.

1465. Nordstedt, O. Prima locaplantarumSuecicarum. Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920 (Bilaga) :
1-64. 1920.

1466. Phillips, E. P. A brief analysis of the work of Carl Thunberg on the Proteaceae.
South African Jour. Sci. 16: 380-382. 1920. — Thunberg collected 79 species of Proteaceae,
but recognized only the genera Protea and Brabieum. Thunberg described 84 species. —
E. P. Phillips.

1467. Ritzema Bos, J. Bij den aanvang van den 26 sten jaargang. [Beginning the
twenty-sixth year of the Tijdschrift.] Tijdschr. Plantenz. 26: 1-4. 1920. — An editorial
announcement. The Tijdschrift is to appear monthly instead of bi-monthly as in the past.
It is to be the semi-official organ of the Phytopathological Service of Holland. A complete
index of the first 25 volumes of the Tijdschrift is to be published. Authors and titles of a
number of leading articles to appear in volume 26 are given, and an appeal is made for increased
membership in the society and funds for the journal. — H. H. Whetzel.

1468. Russell, E. J. Dr. Cyril G. Hopkins. Nature 104:442-44 . 1920.— Reference
to his death and brief survey of his work. — O. A. Stevens.

1469. S(kan), S(idney) A(lfred). Sir William MacGregor. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1920: 31-32. 1920.

1470. W(akefield), E(lsie) M(aud). William Gilson Farlow. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 388-390. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 963 and 1463.

1471. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. VII. The beeches. Garden Mag. 31:
115-119. 4 fid- 1920. — Discusses history, distribution, characteristics of the different species,
mentions celebrated specimens, celebrated groves and forests of beeches. — H. C. Thompson.

1472. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. IX. Whence came the common fruits.
Garden Mag. 31:259-263. 1920. — Discusses the origin of apples, pears, peaches, plums,
cherries, and apricots. — H. C. Thompson.

1473. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. X. The Lombardy poplar and the Babylon
willow. Garden Mag. 31:317-320. 5 fig. 1920.

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gager, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

1474. Anonymous. Kursus for Skogbrukslarlinge. [Courses of study for beginners in
forestry.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 123-125. 1920. — Announcement of establishment, organi-
zation, and administration of the schools. No list of courses. — J. A. Larsen.

1475. Anonymous. Tropical agricultural college in the West Indies. Kew Bull. Misc.
Inf. [London] 1920: 81-96. 1920.

No. 4 January, 1921] CYTOLOGY '217

1476. Brown, Elizabeth Dorothy Wuist. The value of nutrient solutions as culture
media for fern prothallia. Torreya 20: 76-83. 2 fig. 1920. — The work of growing fern pro-
thallia for class use is greatly simplified by the use of nutrient solutions. The following were
found useful in the germination and development of various Polypodiaceac; Beijerinck's,
Birner and Lucanus's, Knop's, Prantl's, Sachs's. The composition of each is indicated.
It is best to make a liter of the solution, which it is not necessary to sterilize. Glass capsules
holding about 26 cc. are best suited for solution cultures. Ferns with monoecious prothallia
are best adapted for the work. After drying, the sporangia are crushed and the spores sepa-
rated with bolting-cloth. After the cultures are made, they should be exposed to direct sun-
light. The optimum temperature for prothallia is 60° F. — J. C. Nelson.

1477. Phillips, E. P. The importance of a properly equipped state herbarium to an
agricultural country. South African Jour. Nat. Hist. 2: 18-39. 1920.

CYTOLOGY

Gildert M. Smith, Editor
G. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor

1478. Allen, Ezra. Studies on cell division in the albino rat (Mus norvegicus var.
alb.). III. Spermatogenesis: the origin of the first spermatocytes and the organization of the
chromosomes, including the accessory. Jour. Morph. 31: 133-185. 58 fig. 1918. — See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 1421.

1479. Church, A. H. Historical review of the Florideae. II. Jour. Botany 57: 329-334.
1919. (Continued from Ibid. 57: 304.)— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 598.

1480. Conklin, E. J. The mechanism of evolution. Sci. Monthly 10: 392-403, 496-515.
1920— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entries 1986, 1987.

1481. Dangeard, P. A. La structure de la cellule vegetale et son metabolisme. [The
structure of the plant cell and its metabolism. | Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 709-714.
1920. — A comparison of the three categories of chondrial elements of Guilliermond with the
three categories of the author. He criticizes Guilliermond for including under the term
mitochondria all cell elements giving the mitochondrial reaction, regardless of their origin or
development. He repeats his contention that anthocyan and tannins are formed from the
metachromatic bodies of the vacuome. — C. H. and W. K. Far.

1482. Delage, Y., and M. Goldsmith. Le mendelisme et le mecanisme cytologique de
l'heredite. [Mendelism and the cytological mechanism of heredity.] Rev. Sci. Paris 57: 97-109,
130-135. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1483.

1483. De Winiwarter, H. Les mitoses de Perithelium seminal du chat. [Mitoses of the
seminal epithelium of the cat.] Arch. Biol. 30: 1-87. 1 pi., 84 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts 5,
Entry 351.

1484. Doncaster, L., and H. G. Cannon. On the spermatogenesis of the louse (Pedi-
culus corporis and P. capitis), with some observations on the maturation of the egg. Quart.
Jour. Microsc. Sci. 64: 303-328. 1 pi., 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1489.

1485. Gatenby, J. Bronte. The cytoplasmic inclusions of the germ-cells. VI. On the
origin and probable constitution of the germ-cell determinant of Apanteles glomeratus, with a
note on the secondary nuclei. Quart. Jour. Microsc. Sci. 64: 133-153. 1 pi., 10 fig. 1920. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 378.

1486. Goldsmith, William M. A comparative study of the chromosomes of tiger beetles
(Cicindelidae). Jour. Morph. 32:438-487. PL 1-10. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 3S2.

218 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1487. Guilliermond, A. Sur le chondriome et les formations ergastoplasmiques du sac
embryonnaire des Liliacees. [On the chondriosome and the ergastoplasmic formations of the
embryosac of lilies.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 300-303. 4 jig. 1919.— Author fig-
ures and describes the formation and nature of mitochondria, chondriosomes, and "ergasto-
plasmic" bodies in the embryo-sac of Lilium croceum and L. candidum. — V. H. Young.

1488. Lillie, Frank Rattray. Problems of fertilization. 13X19 cm., xii + 278 p., 19
fig. Univ. Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 410.

1489. Metz, Chas. W. Correspondence between chromosome number and Unkage groups
in Drosophila virilis. Science Si : 417-418. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1582.

1490. Miller, E. C. Development of the pistillate spikelet and fertilization in Zea mays L.
Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 255-265. PL 19-32. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 569.

1491. Morgan, T. H. The physical basis of heredity. H X 21 cm., 300 p., 117 fig. J. B.
Lippincott Co. : Philadelphia, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 422.

1492. Morgan, T. H., and C. B. Bridges. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila
melanogaster. I. The origin of gynandromorphs. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 278.

p., 4 pi., 10 fig. Washington, D. C. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 424.

1493. Nakahara, Waro. A study on the chromosomes in the spermatogenesis of the
stone-fly, Perla immarginata Say, with special reference to the question of synapsis. Jour.
Morphol. 32:509-529. 3 pi. 1919— See Bot. Absts., 5, Entry 429.

1494. Schaffner, J. H. The expression of sexual dimorphism in heterosporous sporo-
phytes. Ohio Jour. Sci. 18: 101-125. 25 fig. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1627.

1495. van Wisselingh, C. Uber Varibilitat und Erblichkeit. [Concerning variability
and heredity.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22 : 65-126. 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 5, Entry 1679.

1496. Zelent, C. The method of procedure in the analysis of heredity. Sci. Monthly
11: 263-275. 1920.

ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY

H. C. Cowles, Editor
Geo. D. Fuller, Assistant Editor

GENERAL, FACTORS, MEASUREMENTS

1497. Brenchley, Winifred E. Some factors in plant competition. Ann. Appl. Biol
6: 142-170. PI. 5, 10 fig. 1919.— The writer, at the Rothamsted Station, used barley and
mustard plants in a study of competition for food from the soil, for water, and for light.
When the food supply is limited, the amount of nitrogen was found to determine the amount of
growth, and the dry weight was found to be about the same per pot, regardless of the num-
ber of plants grown. — When there is competition for light in overcrowding, barley plants pro-
duced a smaller number of ears, an irregular number of tillers, a reduced amount of dry
matter, and a proportionately larger ratio of shoot growth as compared with root growth.
Crowded plants had a decreased power of utilizing the food supplied to the roots. Ade-
quately illuminated barley plants tended to grow toward a standard type of plant. With
crowding, this approximation to a standard disappeared. — G. R. Bisby.

1498. Cribbs, James E. Ecology of Tilia americana. I. Comparative studies of the foliar
transpiring power. Bot. Gaz. 68:262-286. 13 fig. 1919.— In the dune region of Indiana
Tilia americana is found growing in a variety of habitats ranging from mesophytism to rather

No. 4, January, 1921| ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 219

extreme xerophytism. Cribbs has measured the factors of these habitats, including tempera-
ture, evaporation, humidity, soil moisture, and soil temperature, and has presented his
results in a series of graphs exhibiting the range of mesophytism characteristic of the different
habitats. In each of these habitats he lias measured the foliar transpiring power of leaves of
the same age and similar position, using the cobalt chloride paper method. These results are
presented in graphs which express as some of the most notable of the results: (1) The foliar
transpiring power increases from that indicated by an index of 0.15 in the mesophytic forest
situation to that with an index of 0.55 in the most exposed situation on the open sand. (2)
In the forest the daily march of relative transpiration is represented by a curve with a single
mode developing about midday and coinciding with the maxima of temperature, relative
humidity, and evaporating power of the air. (3) In more exposed situations the transpira-
tion curve becomes bimodal, with the maximum appearing earlier in the day than the maxima
of temperature, relative humidity, and evaporation. (4) The second mode developing in the
afternoon is always lower than the mode preceding the depression due to saturation deficit.
(5) No evidence of visible wilting occurred in Tilia on the open sand at any time during the
summer, although the so-called "incipient drying" was a common feature of the stations
throughout this period. On the forested complex, however, visible wilting occurred during
the first week of August because the vegetation was so dense that the water content of the
soil was reduced quite early to a point below the wilting coefficient. (6) The amount of water
in the soil apparently has very little influence on the transpiration index unless it is reduced
to the wilting coefficient. The saturation deficit depression is due to the inability of the
translocating system to conduct water to the leaves with sufficient rapidity to offset the
transpiration loss — Geo. D. Fuller.

1499. Gleason, Henry Allan. Some applications of the quadrat method. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 21-33. 1920. — The quadrat method constitutes the only practical means for
quantitative study of the plant association and is of great importance in correcting the
deficiencies of written description and photography. There are quadrats of various types:
a simple list of species, the number of individuals of each species, and the map type in which
a chart is prepared on scale. A single quadrat is apt to give a one-sided picture of an asso-
ciation because of lack of homogeneity within the association; the chief value in this method,
then, lies in the use of many quadrats, the size of which must be determined by the general
character of the vegetation. The first quadrat used can be located anywhere; succeeding
ones can be at definite distances from the first to avoid personal choice. At the conclusion
of the count, the ratio between the total number of quadrats and the number in which a
given species occurs is expressed as a percentage which is known as the frequency index (FI).
Some rarer species will thus be missed entirely, but those of actual importance in the asso-
ciation will be counted. There is a definite relation between the number of individuals of a
species and its frequency index. If n plants are scattered at random over q quadrats the

probability of any one quadrat being occupied is expressed by the formula 1 — ( J .

But since plants are not distributed entirely at random, the actual number is greater than
indicated by the mathematical formula. Since the frequency index increases with the size
of a quadrat, a major quadrat may be chosen which will normally include all the more im-
portant species. The proper size of this major quadrat may be determined by reducing the
original series of quadrats to a smaller number of larger ones by substituting in the formula

FI = 1 — (1 )", for q the number of quadrats actually counted, and for FI the index of

the least common of the important species. Jaccard's community coefficient is shown to be
unsatisfactory in allowing equal weight to small slender plants and to larger ones; it might
be improved by a multiplier expressive of size. — P. A. Munz.

1500. McLean, R. C. Studies in the ecology of tropical rain forests, with special refer-
ence to the forests of South Brazil. Jour. Ecol. 7: 121-172. 10 fig. 1919.— This report con-
tinues the account of the rain forest near Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, already noted (see Bot. Absts.

220 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGEAPHY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

4, Entry 196). This forest is regarded as the climax type for a large portion of the adjacent
country. A biological spectrum of the Raunkiaer type would show an enormous preponder-
ance of woody plants arranged in three distinct strata, the ground cover being comparatively
bare of herbaceous vegetation. There is a great diversity of species, with the Leguminosae
as the most prominent family and the Rubiaceae and Piperaceae particularly abundant
among the shrubs. Ferns and lycopods are largely limited to rocky spots. Conspicuous and
highly colored flowers are abundant in the upper canopy and notably lacking below. But-
tressed tree trunks are rare in spite of the frequency of .violent winds but thorny stems are
frequent even in large trees. The floristic diversity and the contrasting uniformity of
appearance especially in leaf form are ascribed to (1) the antiquity of prevailing conditions
and (2) the peculiarity of the environment. The soil is shallow and pervious, with a water
holding capacity of about 40 per cent and an average water content of 10 per cent. It ia
deficient in mineral nutrient material, particularly in calcium carbonate. The humus con-
tent is about 3 per cent. Mycorhiza is very abundant. A very considerable amount of
rain is intercepted by foliage and evaporated into the air, thus reducing the rainfall efficiency.
Light measurements made with photographic exposure meters show the average ratio of the
light outside and that within the deep forest to be 1 : 0.06; some spectroscopic measurements,
however, tend to show that the photosynthetic efficiency of the shade illumination is rela-
tively greater than the actinic. — The leaves of the forest are in general characterized by their
large size, the small number per plant, and the frequency of nyctitropic movements and of
vertical position. The shade leaves show conspicuous water storing epidermis, reduced and
undifferentiated mesophyll and occasional epidermal papillae. The leaf area of the sun
foliage is approximately the same as that of the shade leaves, but the latter are decidedly
larger and narrower. Red coloration is common in the young shade leaves, and such leaves
are shown to have a higher rate of respiration. The percentage of carbon dioxide within the
forest is shown to be high, and here light is doubtless the limiting factor of photosynthesis.
—Geo. D. Fuller.

1501. Watt, A. S. On the causes of failure of natural regeneration in British oakwoods.
Jour. Ecol. 7: 173-203. 1919. — The investigation was conducted in the vicinity of Cambridge
England, and the report is presented in three parts, dealing respectively with the acorn,
its germination, and the seedlings. The rapid disappearance of even a large crop of acorns
from the forest floor is seen to be largely due to the action of rabbits and mice. The drying
of the acorn to an extent that results in the loss of 20 per cent of its water is found to prevent
subsequent germination. Experiments were conducted to discover the amount of imbedding
in the soil necessary for good germination, and in general it was found that at least one-half
of the nut should be below the surface; on the other hand burial to depths ranging from 3
to 9 inches in sandy or clay soil gave equally good germination. Rabbits, mice, and larger
grazing animals are shown to destroy very large percentages of the seedlings during the first
few years of their existence. One of the mildew fungi proved rather destructive, especially
on the sandy soils. Emphasis is placed on the fact that by destroying carnivorous animals
man has upset the balance of nature and favored the enemies of forest regeneration. The
chances of good regeneration decrease on passing from the "damp oak association" to the
"dry oak association," and from the latter to the "oak-birch heath." — Geo. D. Fuller.

STRUCTURE, BEHAVIOR

1502. Betts, M. Winifred. Notes on the autoecology of certain plants of the Peridotite
Belt, Nelson [New Zealand]: Part I. Structure of some of the plants (No. 2). Trans, and
Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51 : 136-156. 27 fig. 1919. — The region studied is about thirty square
miles in area, with a vegetation of xerophytic shrubs and grassland. A detailed description
is given of the growth-forms, and of the anatomy of the leaf and of the stem, of fifteen char-
acteristic plants. — L. W. Riddle.

No. 4, January, 1921) ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 221

1503. Harper, Roland M. Water and mineral content of an epiphytic fern. Amer. Fern
Jour. 9: 99-103. 1919. — Epiphytic ferns probably get some of the inorganic matter from the
bark of trees on which they grow as well as from dust. Three hundred and forty grams of
Poly podium polypodioides were collected shortly after a rain. The plants were chopped up,
and after remaining at a temperature of 46°C. for about a week were again weighed. The
dry weight was about 42 per cent of the fresh weight. When sonic of the desiccated material
was burned, it was found to contain 5 per cent ash. A partial analysis of the ash showed 27
per cent of potash and | of 1 per cent of soda. — F. C. Anderson.

1504. Haviland, F. E. The stomata of the leafless plants of the interior [Australia].
Australian Nat. 4: 107-110. 1919. — The arrangement, number, and location of the stomates
in a number of leafless plants of Australia. The stomates often appear to be unprotected
against excessive transpiration. — T. C. Frye.

VEGETATION

1505. Engler, A. Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse des Kongoa-Gebirges und der Bambuto-
Berge in Kamerun [West Africa]. [The vegetation of the Kongoa Mountains and the Bambuto
Mountain in Kamerun.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 24-32. 1919. — Ledermann's Garua expe-
dition (1808-09) had thrown much light on the relations of the alpine floras of western and
eastern Africa. Engler wished to carry this study farther into the Kongoa and Bambuto
Mountains. — Vegetation of the Kongoa Mts. : There are many plants of Pachylobus edulis
in the forests of the foot-hills, also Phoenix reclinata and tree ferns. Above 1200 m.
frequent fogs cause the trees to be covered with Pilotrichella and Usnea. The lianes are
species of Urera, Grewia, etc. A list of plants in the forest at 1500 m. is given. The following
are some of the epiphytes: Polypodium lanceolatum, Oleandra articulata, Vittaria, Bulbo-
phyllum, Viscum, and Megaclinium. The forest floor is covered with Selaginellas, Pepero-
mias, Polyspathas, Clinogynes, and other plants. On Mbo at an altitude of 1900 m. are
fine examples of the Guinean rain forests; lists of the plants are given. Above Sanschu, at
1550 m. elevation, the forest becomes transformed into a pure stand of Pennisetum purpureum
(elephant grass). On the declivities oil palms extend up to 1800 m. A list of the plants in
the elephant-grass formation is given. Tree ferns are found on the stream banks here,
according to Ledermann. This formation passes in drier situations to grass steppes with
herbaceous Melastomaceae and other plants. At 1800 m. the alpine forest begins with low
thin-stemmed gnarly trees and a few lianes, the most common of which is the araliaceous
Polyscias Preussii. The typical plants on the eastern slope are listed. Vegetation of the
Bambuto Mountains: From Djutitsa the trail leaves the culture-land and enters the grass
steppes of the mountains. A list of plants is given of the Raphia region, where at the start
this plant (Raphia) is common. The gradually rounded hills are covered with grass 1-1.5 m.
high. A list of species in this grass formation at an altitude of 1700-1800 m. is given. Many
of these plants have very beautiful flowers. At 2000 m. the steppe-flora becomes still more
diverse, Vigna Ledermannii, Polygala tenuicaule, Gmidia bambutana, and other plants
appearing. Especially rich are the mountain steppes at 2200 m. altitude. Here Ledermann
discovered willows along the borders of brooks, and though these have been noted in a few
other localities, this was an important geographical discovery. Peucedanum Winkleri, 2-3
m. high, is found here; also Vernonia senegalensis, 4-6 m. high. At 2000-3000 m. groups of
Proteaceae appear. On the northwest slope at 2100-2300 m. is a low alpine forest. Here is
found Pleridium; then Vernonia senegalensis. Labiatae, a 3 m. high Lobelia, Spiraea, Ficus,
Peperomia, Hypericum lanceolatum, Tephrosia, and other plants gradually appear. Lianes
and epiphytic orchids are rare in this region. At the edge of the forest, at an altitude of
1900-2500 m., Ericinella mannii, 5 m. high, is common and forms the Ericinella association.
Here also is Pteridium, bushes of Trifolium Goetzenii, Crotalaria oreadum, Calamintha sinen-
sis, and other species. In places very rich in humus Hypericum Conrauanum, 2-5 m. high,
is found; also Brillantaisia Schumanniana, a splendid giant herb 4-5 m. high, Impatiens
Sakeriana, and others. In dry open places the ericaceous Blaeria bambutensis appears.

222 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

In the primary forests of the gullies more lianes and more ferns are found. The most
common tree is the myrsinaceous Rapanea macrophylla; but Albizzia, Podocarpus, and Salix
are common. Marattia fraxinea was common on the damp forest floors, and also the little
Begonia bracteosa. In dry places is Cheilanthes farinosa, the 2 m. high Dryopteris Bergiana,
and the 1 m. high Adiantum Poiretii. Other plants in this region are listed. Gradually the
gully woods pass over into the alpine forests. At an altitude of 2200 m. Ficus chlamyd-
ocarpa, 15 m. high, Nuxia Ledermannii, 8-10 m. high, and the liane Gouania longispicata
are conspicuous. Asplenium furcalum is an epiphyte in this region. — K. M. Wiegand.

1506. Fleischer, M. Die Moosvegetation im Urwald von Bialowies [Lithuania]. [The
moss vegetation in the virgin forest of Bialowies.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 113-124. 1919. —
The forest is mainly undisturbed by man. Though the variations in altitude are slight,
reaching an extreme of only 170 m., the conditions are very diverse, due to changes in the
moisture and water level. Swampy forests on the lowlands give place on the sandy ridges
to dry fir woods and Calluna heath, with alternating bogs and sphagnum moors between.
The richest moss flora is in the damp upland mixed forest which is mainly composed of broad-
leaved trees and firs. All the trees are more or less covered with epiphytic mosses and lichens,
and the humus is generally covered deep with moss. There may be recognized a xerophytic
bark moss formation requiring little food, and a more pretentious terrestrial formation,
mainly mesophytic. A vivid account is given of the moss flora, bringing out the resemblances
to the flora of central Europe and some of the differences. Many species are the same in both
localities. The moss flora of the forest floor is richer than that in Germany. The bark for-
mation and the ground formation are connected by the mosses living at the base of the trees
as Eurynchium striatum, Metzgeria furcata, Ptilidium ciliare, etc. On the moors a few mosses
are found among the carices, such as Aulacomnium palustre and Calliergon stramineum, mixed
more or less with sphagnum. The relation of mosses to light is very interesting ecologically.
Most prefer diffuse light to direct sunlight (skiophile), but this diffuse light may be too weak.
Wiesner showed that below 1 /70-1 /90 the total shade begins, in which no moss can grow. The
moss habit is a direct adaptation to the struggle for sufficient light. Neckera pennata shows
this; so also does the intermittent story-like growth of the soil mosses, which are less depend-
ent on the rainfall than on light. The rainfall theory is very poorly supported by the actual
conditions. The story-like growth lets in light. Many mosses and liverworts in the tropics
show this adaptation even better. Fan-shaped plagiotropic growth and sickle-shaped leaves
are an adaptation against too strong light. Most shade mosses have a plagiotropic growth
or horizontal branching. Curved capsules are probably not a response to light. Anomodon
spp. seem to require the least light, and are found in the darkest woods, where their chlorophyll
is still protected by the papillose cells. Even the protonema may be influenced by light, as in
Tetraphis pellucida. Phototropic mosses are fewer, and are mostly wanting in the primitive
forest. Many mosses are polyclinic, growing in light or shade, as Polytrichum commune.
Sphagnum is light loving, but the chlorophyll is protected by a cell screen — a method found
also in Leucobryum, and common in the tropics. The violet or brown colored walls in Sphag-
num protect the plant against sunlight. The best examples of such protection are found
among the tropical Neckeraceae and Hookeraceae, and among foliose liverworts. The
struggle in the shade is for a light optimum; in the open it is against too much sunlight. —
K. M. Wiegand.

1507. Laing, R. M. The vegetation of Banks Peninsula [New Zealand], with a list of species
[flowering plants and ferns]. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51 : 355-408. 1919. — A gen-
eral introductory discussion of the physiography, plant distribution, and associations of the
region, is followed by an annotated list of species. — L. W. Riddle.

1508. Ledermann, C. Einiges von der Kaiserin-Augusta-Fluss-Expedition [New Guinea].
[Notes on the Empress Augusta River Expedition.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 33-44. 1919. —
The expedition landed in February, 1912, at Madang, and travelled up the Sepik river, estab-
lishing a permanent base-camp about five kilometers above the village of Malu. The sur-
rounding region included mountain slopes, alluvial woods, swamps, sage-swamps, pandanus

No. 4, Januahy, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 223

formations, and great flatlands of grass and lakes. The second-grow ( h forest near the camp
contained introduced yams, taro, tobacco, brakes, species of Jambosa, Gnetum, etc. Side
trips were made to the "Zuckerhut," Mt. "Berges," April river, Mt. Pyramid, and the "Hun-
stein Spitze" by way of the river Sepik and the "Swartz" river. The vegetation is vividly
described for each trip. I'roteaceae 20 in. high were seen, along with Ficus trees 25-30 m
high. Ferns, selaginellas, climbing frcycinetias and rhaphidophoras, epiphytic orchids, dra-
caenas, and narrow leaved pandanuses were seen in the more humid forests. Landslides and
wind-falls were often covered with Scitamineae and Araceae. In places the soil was saturated
and covered with a thick layer of moss. On the steep rocky slopes of the "Felspitze" the
substratum caused an elimination of tree species, but Ficus spp. were common, as also Maca-
ranga spp. Red seedlings of the latter were very numerous and conspicuous. The ficus
roots have great power of penetration among the rocks, or even of splitting them. On the
declivities the abundant terminalias with their phototropic tops looked, when viewed from
above like a giant stairway. Monimiaceae, Symplocaceae, and Theaceae were abundant.
The forest was so open in some places that epiphytes grew from the base to the crown of the
trees. Ledermann spent a few weeks in the Marian, West Caroline, East Caroline, and Palau
Islands before returning to Europe. — K. M. Wiegand.

1509. Newman, L. F., and G. Walworth. A preliminary note on the ecology of part of the
South Lincolnshire [England] Coast. Jour. Ecol. 7 : 204-210. 1919. — A survey of some 17 miles
of salt marsh near the mouth of the River Witham, together with the areas reclaimed by the
construction of a sea-wall some 70 years ago, is included in the report. The following asso-
ciations are recognized and lists of species for each are given. (1) Bank zone, reclaimed
land in permanent pasture grasses; (2) Bank-base zone, a narrow strip dominated by Agropy-
rum junceum and Spartina stricta; (3) Festuca rubra zone, in which there are associated with
the dominant species Spergularia salina and Glaux maritima; (4) Intermediate zone, in which
Obione portulacoides mingles with the species of the preceding association; (5) Obione zone,
with Obione portulacoides and Suaeda maritima; (6) Festuca-Salicornia zone, at about high
tide level, dominated by the genera indicated; (7) Salicornia zone, occupying the mud flats
and having both annual and perennial species of the genus; and (8) Algae-Zostera zone, a
rather narrow strip a quarter of a mile below high tide. Analyses of the various soils are
given, and some of the main problems of the area are indicated. — Geo. D. Fuller.

1510. Pritzel, E. Die Grettstadter Wiesen [Germany]. [The meadows of Grettstadt.]
Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 83-112. 1 map. 1919. — The extensive meadows about Grettstadt
are famous both for the abundance of showy flowers and richness in species. The underlying
rocks are various, but mostly calcareous. The peat is little more than 1 m. thick. "Hoch-
moors" are not found, owing to the lime which prevents the growth of sphagnum. Primula
farinosa, Gentiana verna, and other northern plants are supposed to be relics of the glacial
migration, but this is questioned. The former plant and Cirsium bulbosum are very charac-
teristic of this region. A description of the vegetation, with lists of species, is given under
the following headings: I. Vegetation of the meadows. 1. The true meadows. 2. The
depressions; (a) border ditches, (b) pockets of rushes. 3. Meadow shrubbery. Comparison
with meadows of northern Germany. II. Forest ; all deciduous, the predominating trees being
Quercus pedunculata and Fraxinus excelsior. The undergrowth is rich and interesting. III.
Water vegetation, in the "Unken" brook and water holes. IV. Vegetation on dry sandy
soil; found in a few limited localities near the meadows. The transition zone between this
vegetation and that of the meadow is interesting. V. Plants of the gypsum hills; these are
predominatingly lime-loving plants. A few true calciphiles are lacking, probably due to a
deleterious effect of the dolomite or gypsum; on the other hand a few of the plants present
such as Adonis vernalis, Astragalus danicus and Stipa capillata seem to prefer gypsum.
The scrub forests on the hillsides are interesting in their undergrowth. — K. M. Wiegand.

1511. Ramaley, Francis. Subalpine lake-shore vegetation in north-central Colorado.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 57-74. 6 fig. 1920. — The physiography, climate, and soil of a subalpine
area in north-central Colorado are recorded; and the lake-shore vegetation of a large number

224 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

of lakes, some morainal and some rock-basin in type, is described and discussed. Lists of
species are presented, with soil-moisture index of each; and the various associations, with their
successional relations and seasonal aspects, are described. Definite circum-areas are often
developed. The succession leads from aquatic plants (which are few) through a well-devel-
oped moor (chiefly Car ex), a heath association (chiefly Kahnia and Gaultheria), and a
meadow association (chiefly Erigeron, Castilleja, Ligusticum., Pedicularis and Vaccinium)
to the climax association of Engelmann spruce forest. — E. W. Sinnott.

1512. Rand, R. F. Wayfaring notes from Great Namaqualand [Southwest Africa]. Jour.
Botany 58: 53-55. 1920. — The author visited this region in October, 1919. A brief account
of the vegetation is given. It is mainly xerophytic. Patches of desolate country are occu-
pied by leafless Euphorbias, and species of Aloe are frequent. As most of the country is a
stony, sandy desert, the vegetation is mainly confined to the river beds, where trees of consid-
erable size, principally Acacias, may be found. Gomphocarpus fruticosus, an asclepiad, and
a pestiferous weed in many parts of Africa, occurs here in profusion. The nature of the
sand-rivers is described in some detail. The plants are the despair of collectors, as they are
so difficult to press. They are, however, very beautiful when living and in flower. — K. M.
Wiegand.

1513. Watson, W. Habitats of Hypericum humifusum. Jour. Botany 57: 353-354.
1919. — The author questions H. S. Thompson's statement in Jour. Botany that this plant is
calciphile. He is inclined to agree with other botanists that it is calciphobe. May not its
occurrence in limy regions be due to its shallow-rooted habit, the superficial layer of soil being
acid? In one corn field, however, the author found the plant associated with calciphiles in
such a way as to make an explanation difficult. — K. M. Wiegand.

FLORISTICS

1514. Bertsch, Karl. Warmepflanzen im oberen Donautal [Germany]. [Warm tem-
perature plants in the upper Danube Valley.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 313-349. 6 fig. 1919.
In this study the more typically alpine plants were excluded, as well as those occurring
sporadically. Rare plants in stone quarries and gravel beds have often come from a distance
and should be excluded. As a rule no isolated plants are endemic. All introduced plants
were excluded from the study as far as possible; this was difficult, as local introduction of
native plants is common. Plants of general distribution were also excluded. There was left
a small group of plants which over a circumscribed area inhabited all available places. These
island-like areas were the only infallible assurance of truly indigenous conditions. About
sixteen species were finally included. Warm temperature plants would not be expected in so
cold a climate, but is to be explained by the insolation. Heath and sand plain plants of warm
countries are here restricted to rocks which are warmed by the sun or in some cases by
chemical action. Most warm temperature plants live near the tops of the cliffs, where they
avoid the frosts of the lowlands. The true heat conditions are shown by the warm-climate
types of fruit trees that can be grown there. On the south side the warm temperature plants
extend nearly to the bottom of the valley. They cover about 1/2000 part of the Alb Moun-
tain. The comparative altitude of these plants here and in South Bavaria is studied, the
lower limit especially being of great interest. The individual stations for our plants in the
southwest, central and northeast slopes of the Alb are in the ratio of 87: 9: 1, which is remark-
able as the temperature is higher in the northeast. The hypothesis that the presence of the
warm temperature plants on the Alb is due to a post-glacial steppe period, is not supported
by the conditions on the southwest slope. These plants were there before the glacial period,
and by a study of the snow line it is shown that the southwest slope was free from ice at
that time, while the northeast slope probably was not. Warm temperature plants now
live near the glacier and obviously could have so lived during the glacial period. It is inter-
esting to note that alpine plants are frequently found in the valley, while the warm tem-
perature plants are only on the edge. — K. M. Wiegand.

No. 4, January, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 225

1515. Cambage, It. 11. Notes on the native flora of New South Wales. Part 10. The
Federal Capital Territory. Proc. Linnean Sec, New South Wales 43:073-711. PI. 71-74.
1918. — An area of about 900 square miles (latitude 35°-36° S.) is discussed. An account of
early explorations, geographical (map), climatological, and geological characteristics is given.
The absence of trees from the Camberra Plains is pointed out, and .soil analyses are given in
an attempt to explain this condition. Some peculiar insect attacks of trees were also noted.
A general discussion of the flora is given. Certain plants found nearby, but absent from this
district, largely as a result of climatic characteristics, are mentioned. A list of plants seen
(pages 701-709) is given subject to revision. This includes: Leguminosae, 43 species; Com-
positae, 42; and Myrtaceae, 34. A total of 361 native species were found, 65 per cent of which
are also indigenous to Tasmania. — Eloise Gerry.

1516. Cheeseman, T. F. Contributions to a fuller knowledge of the flora of New Zealand:
no. 6. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 85-92. 1919. — An annotated list of vascular
plants not previously recorded from or of rare occurrence in New Zealand. — L. W. Riddle.

1517. Eastwood, Alice. Early spring at the Grand Canon near El Tovar [Arizona]. Plant
World 22: 65-99. 2 fig. 1919. — A description of the spring flora of the Grand Canon is given,
with notes on the distribution and appearance of prominent species. — Charles A. Shull.

1518. Flynn, Mrs. Nellie. A correction. Rhodora 22: 16. 1920. — In the report of the
trip of the Vermont Botanical Club (Rhodora 21: 191. 1919) Littorella uniflora was re-
ported as having been collected at "The Gut," South Hero, Vermont. This was an error,
the plant in question being Myriophyllum tenellum, which occurs occasionally in the state. —
James P. Poole.

1519. Herriott, Miss E. M. A history of Hagley Park, Christchurch, with special refer-
ence to its botany. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 41 : 427-447. 1919. — A comparison of
the flora in 1864 with that of the present time. — L. W. Riddle.

1520. Jackson, A. Bruce. Bedfordshire [England] Plants. Jour. Botany 58: 91. 1920.
A record of Carex divisa var. chaetophylla Kukent. in Bedfordshire, England. — K. M.
Wiegand.

1521. Johnston I. M. The flora of the pine belt of the San Antonio Mountains of southern
California. Plant World 22: 71-90, 105-122. 2 fig. 1919.— A description of the San Antonio
Mountains and their life zones is given, with lists of plants characterizing each zone. The
flora is presented as a catalogue by families, and contains the names of over 300 vascular plants,
with notes on the occurrence and distribution. — Charles A. Shull.

1522. Long, Bayard. Jasione montana a conspicuous weed near Lakewood, New Jersey.
Rhodora 21: 105-108. 1919. — The writer gives an account of the discovery of about a dozen
distinct stations in the neighborhood of Lakewood, New Jersey, where this plant was found
growing abundantly in 1917. This species is well known about Newport, Rhode Island, espe-
cially on Connecticut Island; but elsewhere it has previously been noted as a very unusual
plant. In these newly established stations the characteristic habitats were open, sandy
areas generally associated with settlement and Cultivation. This plant has previously been
known largely as a ballast-ground waif, but in these stations seemed to be a thoroughly estab-
lished weed, and was reported by one farmer as having been frequent in the region for twenty-
five years. — James P. Poole.

1523. Palmer, Ernest J. Texas Pteridophyta. III. Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 81-85. 1919.
The author continues the enumeration of the Pteridophytes of Texas, listing 18 species dis-
tributed among 11 genera with habitat and localities. — F. C. Anderson.

226 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1524. Riddelsdell, H. J. Gloucestershire [England] Notes. Jour. Botany 57:350-353.
1919 — The paper consists of critical notes on the distribution of about 30 species in Gloucester-
shire.— K. M. Wiegand.

1525. Thompson, H. S. Euphrasia hircella Jord. Jour. Botany 58: 25. 1920.— Further
notes on the occurrence of this species in Britain. This is supplementary to the author's
paper in Jour. Botany, Dec, 1919. — K. M. Wiegand.

1526. Wallis, Anthony, edited by C. E. Salmon. Pembrokeshire and Carmarthenshire
plants [Wales]. Jour. Botany 57: 345-350. 1919. — An account is given of the life of Wallis.
The paper consists mainly of notes on the distribution of a large number of species in various
families. Those from the two counties are listed separately. — K. M. Wiegand.

1527. Weatherby, C. A. An omission in the preliminary list of New England Ranuncu-
laceae. Rhodora 21 : 104. 1919. — In the list of New England Ranunculaceae (published in
Rhodora 20: 182. 1918) the one New England record for Cimicifuga racemosa (L.) Nutt.,
var. dissecta Gray was omitted. The plant in question was collected by E. H. Eames at
Stratford, Connecticut, in 1893. — James P. Poole.

1528. Winslow, E. J. Willoughby Lake, Vt., a candidate for the title of "Richest fern
locality." Amer. Fern Jour. 9: 107-109 1919.— The Willoughby list, containing 35 species,
is compared with the lists of three other localities; 27 species are common to all four locali-
ties, and the combined lists contain only 40 species, which is only 6 less than the list for all
New England and New York, north of Connecticut. — F. C. Anderson.

1529. Woodward, R. W. Some Connecticut plants. Rhodora 21: 114-116. 1919.— The
writer reports what appears to be Philotria angustifolia (Muhl.) Britton growing in brackish
water near Old Lyme, Connecticut. He could find no printed record of its previous occurrence
in brackish water. Lophotocarpus spongiosus is also reported as growing quite abundantly at
one station in the same town. It was previously reported as of rare occurrence there. Other
plants which the author reports as having collected in various parts of the state are Panicum
virgatum cubense, Elymus riparius , Carex glaucodea, Eriocaulon Parkeri, Actaea rubra neglecta,
Aquilegia canadensis flaviflora, and Epilobium molle. — James P. Poole.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. HoFMANN,f Assistant Editor

1530. Anonymous. Brazil wood. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920:79-80. 1920 —
Notes on Haematoxylon brasiletto, the wood of which was formerly an important article of
commerce. Notes are given also on Caesalpinia bahamensis, the wood of which furnishes a
similar dyestuff. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1531. Anonymous. Helgelands Skogselskab. [Report from the Forestry Association at
Helgeland, Norway.] Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 129-130. 1920.— The writer relates the interest-
ing fact that Norway spruce, which had been planted out on the wind-swept dunes near the
sea, had developed laterally only during the first years, as if to gain protection to the roots.
After some years the trees at once began to assume their usual height growth. — J. A. Larsen.

1532. Anonymous. The new flagstaff at Kew. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 393-
399. PL 12-13. 1919.— The new flagstaff is 214 feet high and made from a 400-year-old tree
of Pseudotsuga douglasii from Canada. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1533. Anonymous. [Reports from the forest associations in different parts of the country
[Norway]. Tidsskr. Skogbruk 28: 126-132. 1920.

No. 4, January, 1921] FORESTRY 227

1534. Anonymous. Timber depletion and the answer. A summary of the report on tim-
ber depletion and related subjects prepared in response to senate resolution 311. U. S. Dept.
Agric. Dept. Circ. 112. Id p. 1920. — Discussion of forest resources of the United States,
yesterday and today, and suggestions for a national forest policy which is needed to meet the
timber depletion situation. — L. R. Healer.

1535. Bartlett, H. H. The manufacture of sugar from Arenga saccharifera in Asahan,
on the east coast of Sumatra. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Kept. 21: 155-165. PL 8-6. 1919. —
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1892.

1536. Betts, II. S. How lumber is graded. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 64. 39 p.,
9 fig. 1920. — A discussion and explanation of hardwood and softwood lumber grading,
accompanied by descriptions of typical rules. — L. R. Hesler.

1537. Carlson, K. A. The growing of mine props on the High Veld. Jour. Dept. Agric.
Union of South Africa 1: 261-270. 1920. — A low grade quality of timber can be used for mine
props, and advantage is taken of this circumstance to plant the most rapidly growing species
which supply a timber of sufficient strength. To meet these requirements the principal species
used are Eticalyphis viminalis, E. rostrala, E. Maidenii, E. globulus and E. sideroxylon ;
sylvicultural notes are given on each of these species. The cost of planting and maintenance
is discussed, and it is stated that there are undoubtedly good prospects for afforestation con-
ducted on sound lines. — E. M. Doidge.

1538. Clinton, G. P., and Florence A. McCormick. Infection experiments of Pinus
strobus with Cronartium ribicola. Connecticut (New Haven) Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214:
428-459. PI. 37-43. 1916-1918— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 225.

1539. Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Plantes et produits filamenteux et textiles de
l'Indochine. [Fiber- and textile-producing plants of Indo-China.] Bull. Econ. Indochine
22: 675-709. 19 pi. 1919. Ibid. 23: 45-71. 4 pi. 1920.— This is another contribution to
this series covering in detail chiefly the bast-fiber producing plants of the Leguminosae,
Malvaceae, Tiliaceae, Sterculiaceae, and Linaceae, as well as those fibers especially adapted
for the manufacture of cordage, and for the manufacture of paper. — E. D. Merrill.

1540. Dixon, Henry H. Mahogany and the recognition of some of the different kinds by
their microscopic characters. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. 15:431-486. 22 pi. 1918. — See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 385.

1541. Doyle, Joseph. Observations on the morphology of Larix leptolepsis. Sci. Proc.
Roy. Dublin Soc. 15: 310-327. * pi. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 386.

1542. Harvey, LeRoy H. Some phytogeographical observations in Lake County, Michigan.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 213-217. 1919.

1543. Haslund, Ove. Skogvardierne. [Forest valuation and taxation.] Tidsskr. Skog-
bruk 28: 120-123. 1920.

1544. Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas firs: a botanical and
silvicultural study of the various species of Pseudotsuga. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. B, 35: 67-90.
PI. 12-14. 1920. — The genus Pseudotsuga is divided into seven species and one variety as
follows: (1) P. douglasii (Carriere) (laxifolia Britton), Pacific coast of North Amer. ; P.
douglasii var. caesia (Schwerin), northern Rocky Mts. ; (2) P. glauca (Mayr), Rocky Mts.,
Colorado and Mexico; (3) P. macrocarpa (Mayr), southern California; (4) P. japonica
(Beissner), Japan; (5) P. sinensis (Dode),. N. E. Yunnan, China; (6) P. forrestii (Craib.),
W. Yunnan, China; (7) P. wilsoniana (Hayata), Formosa. — Botanical characteristics, range,
and size of each spec es are given, followed by detailed discussion of silvical and botanical
differences between the Oregon and Colorado species. Measurements of the two species in

228 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts!, Vol. VI,

British plantations show that while the former "when grown in dense plantations surpasses
all other species in yield of timber," the latter "is healthy enough but it is of no commercial
value for planting." — Differences in microscopical leaf structure in the various species are
indicated with the aid of typical cross section drawings. As final proof of the specific rank of
Pseudotsuga glauca, results of distillation experiments with leaves of this tree and of P.
taxifolia from British plantations are given. Oil from the Oregon species contains appreci-
able amounts of the fragrant geraniol, chief constituent of Indian palmarosa oil and present
in citronella oil, otto of roses, lemon oil, etc., hitherto reported as a constituent of the oil of
some species of Callitris, or "Cypress Pines" of Australia, but not from other conifers.
This oil, which is said to give the peculiarly pleasant odor to the leaves of Oregon Douglas
fir, is not found in the Colorado variety. Oil of the latter species contains a large percentage
of pinene, which constituent is not found in the Oregon species. An interesting analogy is
pointed out in the distribution, size of cones, and difference in oil content of the varieties of
Douglas fir and Western Yellow Pine. — Woodbridge Metcalf.

1545. Judd, C. S. The Australian red cedar. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17:57-59.
1 pi. 1920. — An account of the successful introduction of Cedrela Australis in Hawaii, with a
general description of its appearance, silvical characters, and economic uses. Because of
its ease of propagation, rapid growth, and valuable wood products, it gives great promise as
one of the future timber-producing trees of the territory. The plate shows an Australian
red cedar, measuring 30 feet in height, 4^ inches d.b.h., two years and nine months from
planting. — Stanley Coulter.

1546. Judd, C. S. Division of Forestry. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 6-9. 1919. —
In addition to the routine report for December, 1918, the establishment and location of six
new forest reserves, aggregating 41,355 acres is given. This gives a present total area of forest
reserves in the Territory of 814,926 acres, of which 554,842 acres is government land. — Stanley
Coulter.

1547. Judd, C. S. Eucalyptus plantation. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16:20-24.
1919. — "The object of the plantation was to secure data as to the habit, form, rate of growth,
and relative value under local conditions of species of Eucalyptus supposed to be of economic
importance that are as yet but little known in Hawaii." The conditions were not favorable
for best growth and development and the test was an endurance rather than a growth test.
Eighteen species were planted, measurements being made at five years growth, both of diame-
ter and height. Of the species used, the Black butt (E. pilularis) made the best showing,
producing an equivalent of 4^ cords per acre in five years. Other species making a fair show-
ing were E. gomphocephala, E. muelleriana, and E. Sieberiana, which produced an equiva-
lent yield of 3.42 to 3.62 cords per acre for five years. Measurements are to be continued at five
year intervals. — Stanley Coulter.

1548. Judd, C. S. Forestry in Hawaii. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 271-299.
1919. — A series of 3 lectures delivered at the short course for plantation men at the College
of Hawaii, Honolulu. The subjects treated are "The Beneficial Effects of Forests," "The
Native Hawaiian Forests," and "Methods of Forest Protection." Admirably adapted to
Hawaiian needs. — Stanley Coulter.

1549. Judd, C. S. The koa tree. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 30-35. PI. 3. 1920.
— The genus Acacia, to which the Koa belongs, is represented in the Hawaiian Islands by three
species, one of which, A. Koa, has two varieties. Acacia Koa is the familiar form and is
found on all of the islands. The other species and varieties are less common and of more
or less restricted distribution. General descriptions of the forms are given and the possible
origin and economic uses are discussed. At one time the Hawaiians used Koa wood for
canoes, surf boards, paddles, and spears, as well as for house timber. Very few Koa canoes
are now made since the large trees suitable for their construction have almost entirely disap-
peared. The chief present value of the Koa tree is not as a lumber producer, but as a tree
for a cover forest on mountain slopes. It is also a suitable tree for reforesting denuded areas
where good drainage and favorable soil conditions obtain. — Stanley Coulter.

No. 4, January, 1921] FORESTRY 229

1550. Judd, C. S. The kukui or candlenut tree. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 222-
223. PI. 1. 1919. — This Euphorbiaceous tree (Aleurites moluccana (L) Willd.) was prob-
ably introduced into Hawaii by the natives many years ago from Kahiki. They depended
for their illumination upon its oily nuts, and from the juice of the fleshy covering of the green
fruit secured the black dye with which they tatooed their skins. The Kukui is the distinguish-
ing tree in the forest type which is found from approximately 1000 to 2000 feet above sea
level. The tree is singularly free from serious insect pests and plant diseases although the
white, light, soft wood rots very readily and is not at all durable in contact with the soil. —
Stanley Coulter.

1551. Judd, C. S. Lands in forest reserves, Territory of Hawaii, April 1, 1919. Hawaiian
Forester and Agric. 16: 89-100. 1919. — The significance of forestry in the Territory of Hawaii
can be best appreciated by a summary of the acreage of lands in forest reserves in the dif-
ferent islands. Kauai has 148,213 acres; Oahu, 67,933; Molokaie, 44,674; Mani, 121,128; and
Hawaii, 436,791— a total of 818,739 acres.— Stanley Coulter.

1552. Judd, C. S. The Makiki nursery. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 124-126.
1920. — An interesting and compact sketch is given of the plan and output of this nursery
located in Makiki Valley, Honolulu. The annual average distribution of tree seedlings for
the past seven years has exceeded 350,000. Attention is also given to ornamental shrubs and
vines. — Stanley Coulter.

1553. Judd, C. S. Original algaroba tree gone. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 308-
310. 2 pi. 1919. — Notes the destruction, due to city improvement, on October 23, 1919, of
the algaroba tree planted by Father Bachelot in December, 1828, in the Catholic mission
grounds. "Perhaps no other tree in the world has had such a remarkable history or has been
responsible for greater benefits than this original algaroba, from which there have been
established on the shores throughout these islands forests which cover approximately 90,000
acres, now producing an annual crop of about 30,000 cores of excellent fuel, over S100,000
worth of honey, and an enormous yield of beans which furnish a valuable fattening food for
stock at a time when the long, dry summer has exhausted the grass supply. — Stanley Coulter.

1554. Judd, C. S. A volume table for algaroba. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 64-66.
1919. — The algaroba (Prosopis juli/lora D. C.) introduced into Hawaii in 1828 has since spread
over approximately 80,000 acres of what was formerly waste or poor grazing land. The wood
is used largely for fuel and has therefore a high economic value. The table, which is to be
regarded as merely preliminary, is based on the measurement of 19 trees in the Punahou
district. Whether it will apply to the scattered algaroba tracts on the Island is yet to be
determined. — Stanley Coulter.

1555. Judd, C. S. The wiliwili tree. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 95-97. 2 pi.
1920. — The wiliwili belongs to the genus Erythrina and is represented in the Hawaiian Islands
by the single species E. monosperma. It occurs in clumps or as individuals up to 1500 feet
elevation in the hottest and driest districts on the leeside of all of the islands. The tree is
probably best known because of its wood, which is the lightest of any of the Island trees.
It is also characterized by its wealth of crimson blossoms, which make it worthy of cultivation
as an ornamental. — Stanley Coulter.

1556. Kaurin, W. Skogplantningen i Frankrike. [Forest planting in France.] Tidskr.
Skogbruk 28: 97-108. 9 pi. 1920. — Plantings made in the French war zone by the Norwegian
government. — J. A. Larsen.

1557. Korstian, Clarence F. Native vegetation as a criterion of site. Plant World
22: 253-261. 1919. — The author presents a general discussion of methods of site determina-
tion, and suggests that no one criterion should be adopted to the exclusion of other criteria.
He urges that more consideration should be given to the indicator significance of native
shrubby and herbaceous vegetation in classifying forest lands, and in selecting suitable sites
for reforestation work. — Charles A. Shull.

230 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1558. Kotze, J. J. Wood-charcoal and its manufacture. South African Jour. Indust.
3 : 423-437. 1920.

1559. Lovejoy, P. S. Farms vs. forests. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21:201-212.
1919.— The writer gives in a general way the condition of the 228,509,000 acres of logged-off
land in the United States to-day. It has been the custom, especially in Michigan and other
lake states, to attempt to replace all cut-over forest lands with farms. The unscrupulous-
ness of the professional colonizer and the inability of the home seeker to foresee conditions has
caused 4,000,000 acres of land, or 100,000 farms, to be abandoned. The writer suggests that
an analysis be made of each cut-over region in order to determine whether the area should
be used for general farming, grazing, fruit growing, or reforesting. The real farm and the
real forest need not overlap. The writer further emphasizes the general forest conditions
of to-day and the urgent need for the reforesting of the logged-off, idle lands. — H. C. Young.

1560. Rock, Joseph F. One government forest. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 39-40.
PI. 3. 1919.

1561. Werner, J. Stipendieberetning. [Report from a travelling fellowship.] Tidsskr.
Skogbruk 28: 108-117. 1920.— Observations on plantations and forest conditions near
Bergen and Stavanger on the west coast of Norway. — /. A. Larsen.

1562. Young, L. J. A study in the difference in soil requirements of pine and spruce.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 219-221. 1919.— This article points out the importance
in forest plantings of a proper consideration of site condition and species to be planted.
In the Saginaw Forest there is an area where spruce has been making a poor growth for 15
years. The surface soil has been badly washed and is also very poor in the necessary ele-
ments. This is taken as the reason for the unusually poor tree growth. Pine is said to demand
less from a soil in order to make the same growth; so pine was planted some 4 years ago among
the spruce. Since pine trees grow relatively slowly during the first 5 years, there has not
been sufficient time in this experiment to show how well they can do; but the Scotch pine
averages a foot taller in 4 years than the spruce in 15 years. The Scotch pine is more adapt-
able, therefore, for this site and should have been planted originally. Other species of pine
were planted also. More complete results will be forthcoming in 4 or 5 years; more definite
conclusions can be drawn from these. — R. P. Hibbard.

GENETICS

G. H. Shull, Editor
J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

1563. Abidin, J. Pferdezucht und Pferderassen im osmanischen Reich. [Horse breed-
ing and the breeds of horses in the Turkish Empire.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. f. Zuchtungs-
kunde 42: 1-31. 47 fig. 1918.— This paper goes briefly into the history of military horse
breeding in Turkey and describes the breeds of horses found in the Old Turkish Empire.
The sub-breeds of the Arab horse, the customs connected with horse breeding, and the beliefs
held by the Arabs in regard to heredity are discussed in most detail. — Sewall Wright.

1564. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 122:301. 1920.— Confirmatory
comment on Arthur Hollick's article, "The story of the Bartram Oak," Sci. Amer. 121:
422. 1919. "From time immemorial" common comment in the South, where these hetero-
phyllous oaks are abundant, is that they are willow oak X red oak hybrids. Natural progeny
of southern heterophyllous oak shows large numbers of classes based on leaf form. [See
Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 615.]— J. Ben Hill.

1565. Akerman, A. Speltlike bud-sports in common wheat. Hereditasl: 116-127. 6
fig. 1920. — Two spikes were chimaeras, conditioned by a speltoid heterozygote and its corre-
sponding normal type, of which the latter formed the greater part of the spikes, while the

No. 4, January, 1921 1 GENETICS 231

speltoid only formed the epidermis of one side of the spikes. Consequently all the seeds gave
typical plants only. In a third chin-aera-spike the speltoid component seems to have given
rise only to part of the epidermis in the lower part of the spike, while in the development of
the upper part the typical epidermis has been entirely replaced by the speltoid. A fourth
spike had the outer glumes on the four lowest spikelets on each side of the rachis quite typical
and distended on the one side of the spikelets, while on the other side they were speltoid.
In the upper part of the spike all the outer glumes were of the speltoid type. From the seeds
situated nearest the typical outer glumes in the S lowest spikelets 5 typical plants were
obtained in all. The others gave speltoids and the normal type. The progeny of the normals
were all normals. The plants originating from the speltoids showed segregation into spel-
toid heterozygotes identical with the parent plants, and plants of the normal type n the
ratio 1: 1 (Cf. Nilsson-Ehle, Bot. Not. 1917). The plant in question may be a real chimaera
largely made up of a speltoid heterozygote together with two sectors of the normal type of
at least two cell layers in thickness. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1566. Amend, F. Untersuchungen uber flamischen Roggen unter besonderer Beriick-
sichtung des veredelten flamischen Landsroggen und seiner Ziichtung. [Investigations on Flem-
ish rye with special reference to improved varieties and their breeding.] Landw. Jahrbuch.
52:-614-669. 1919. — Original Flemish "land-rye" (Landroggen) subjected to breeding since
1903 in maritime climate of western Flanders. From 1903 to 1909 mass selection of heads was
practised, but beginning in 1909 plant selection. Work interrupted by war. The fine quali-
ties of the "land-rye" resulted. Certain correlations are pointed out. Uniform head of
medium thickness and green grains are given by author as desirable qualities to breed for.
[From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 112. Dec. 1919.] — /. P. Kelly.

1567. Anonymous. Ten week stock and doubling. Florists Exch. 50: 159. July 24,
1920. — There is little foundation for the assumption that Germans have a secret enabling
them to produce strains of stocks yielding 80 per cent or over of doubles. Because of scarcity
of seed due to the war, English and French growers started raising their own seed. French
had already proved they could produce strains yielding a high percentage of doubles. Ex-
periments carried on by staff of Royal Horticultural Society showed that higher percentage
of doubles was produced by more vigorous plants, but this met disapproval. In Scotland
the strain Midlothian yielded more doubles with age. However, it was found that a strain
bred for doubleness will through its singles continue to produce doubles in the same propor-
tion. French pot-saved seed and English open-ground seed were planted in the open, the
French strain producing a much higher percentage and superior quality of doubles. Single-
flowered plants of the white-flowered double-growing French strain varied but slightly as to
flower characters, but markedly in seed-pod characters. Some plants had long, thin, easy-
thrashing pods, others short, thick, hard-thrashing pods. Thin pods are believed to give rise
to mostly singles; thick ones to mostly doubles. Five hundred progeny from an extra long,
thin-podded plant gave only 2 doubles, while progeny from short-podded plants gave as high
proportion of doubles as best pot-saved seeds. — Francena R. Meyer.

1568. Anonymous. Biometric and eugenic laboratories at University College, London.
Science 52: 30-31. July 9, 1920. — At this institution there has been added to the Drapers'
Company Biometric Laboratory and the Galton Laboratory for National Eugenics, a third
building provided by Sir Herbert Bartlett. This last is superbly equipped with museums,
lecture theater, laboratory rooms, and apparatus. — Merle C. Coulter.

1569. Anonymous. [Rev. of Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. Germination
of barley pollen. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 525-536. 2 pi., 2 fig. Feb. 16, 1920.— [See Bot. Absts.
5, Entries 949 and 1449.] Gard. Chron. 68: 103. Aug. 28, 1920.

1570. Anonymous. [German rev. of Backhouse, W. O. The inheritance of glume length
in Triticum polonicum. A case of zygotic inhibition. Jour. Genetics 7: 125-133. Feb.,
1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 211; 3, Entry 2157.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 206. June,
1920.

232 GENETICS .Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1571. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Bartlett, H. H. The status of the mutation theory
with especial reference to Oenothera. Amer. Nat. 1916:513-529. 1916.] Zeitschr. 1 flan-
zenziicht. 7: 207-209. June, 1920.

1572. Anonymous. [German rev. of Becker. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem
Gebiete von Pflanzenbau und Pfianzenzucht. (Serological investigations in the reams of
horticulture and plant breeding.) Landwirtseh. Jahrb. 53: 245-276. 1919.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 7: 209. June, 1920.

1573. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Beijerinck, M. W. De enzymtheorie der erfelijk-
heid. (The enzyme theory of heredity.) Kon. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam 25: 1231. 1917.
See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1166. 3, Entry 433.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:186. Dec, 1918.

1574. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Brotherton, Wilber, Jr., and H. H. Bartlett.
Cell measurement as an aid in the analysis of quantitative variation. Amer. Jour. Bot. 5: 192-
206. 2 fig. April, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 865.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 209.
June, 1920.

1575. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Cohen-Stuart, C. P. A basis for tea selection.
Bull. Jarb. Bot. Buitenzorg. Ill, 1: 193-320. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1469.)] Zeit-
schr. Pfianzenzucht. 7: 209. June, 1920.

1576. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Fortsetzung der Versuche zur
experimentellen Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisse. (Continuation of the attempt
to experimentally shift the sex ratio.) Sitz.-Ber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss." Berlin 1918: 1175-
1200. 3 fig. 1918.] (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1636.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 209. June,
1920.

1577. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Zur Kenntnis einfacher mendelnder
Bastarde. I. Die Unterscheidung der pilulifera-Homozygoten und der Heterozygoten des
Bastardes Urtica pilulifera Dodartii. II. Mirabilis 'jalapa xantha und ihre Bastarde. III.
Urtica urens peraurea. (Contributions to knowledge of simple Mendelian hybrids. I. The
distinguishing of pilulifera-homozygotes and the heterozygotes of the hybrid Urtica pilulifera
Dodartii. II. Mirabilis jalapa peraurea.) Sitzungsber. k. Preuss Akad. Wiss. 1918:221-268.
1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1184.)] Zeitschr. Pfianzenzucht. 6: 186. Dec, 1918.

1578. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Vererbungsversuche mit buntblat-
trigen Sippen. I. Capsella bursa-pastoris albovariabilis und chlorina. (Genetical studies with
variegated races. I. Capsella bursa-pastoris albovariabilis and chlorina.) Sitzungsber. K.
Akad. Wiss. Wien 34: 585-610. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 551.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
ziicht. 7:210. June, 1920.

1579. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Drude, C. Erfahrungen bei Kreuzungsversuchen
mit Cucurbita Pepo. (Experiences in crossing experiments with Cucurbita Pepo.) Ber.
Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 35: 25-57. 1 pi. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pfianzenzucht. 6:-187-188. Dec,
1918.

1580. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Edler, W. Die Verzweigung der Ackerbohne.
(Branching of field beans.) Fuhlings Landwirtseh. Zeit. 1919?- 441 450. 1919.] Zeitschr.
Pfianzenzucht. 7: 210. June, 1920.

1581. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Emerson, R. A. Genetical studies of variegated
pericarp in maize. Genetics 2:1-35. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:210-212. June,
1920.

1582. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Everest, A. Recent chemical investigations of the
anthocyan pigments and their bearing upon the production of these pigments in plants. Jour.
Genetics 4: 361-367. 1915.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 188-189. Dec, 1918.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 233

1583. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fruwirth, C. Selection in pure lines. Jour.
Heredity 8:90-94. 1 fig. 1907.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 189. Dec., 1918.

15S4. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fruwirth, G. Die Saatenanerkennung. (Seed
recognition.) 131 p., 66 fig. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 198.
Dec, 1918.

1585. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fruwirtii, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaft-
lichen Pfianzenziichtungen. II. Die Zuchtung von Mais, Futterruben und anderen Ruben,
Oelpflanzen und Grasern. (Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. II. The breeding of
maize, fodder beets and other roots, oil plants and grasses.) 3rd ed., 262 p., 50 fig. P. Parey:
Berlin, 1918.1 Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 198-199. Dec, 1918.

1586. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Fruwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaft-
lichen Pflanzenzuchtung. 3. Die Zuchtung von Kartoffel, Erdbirne, Lein, Hanf, Tabak,
Hopfen, Buchweizen, Hulsenfriichtern und kleeartigen Futterpflanzen. (Handbook of agri-
cultural plant breeding. 3. The breeding of potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, flax, hemp, to-
bacco, hops, buckwheat, legumes and clover-like forage plants.) 3rd ed., 240 p., 35 fig. P.
Parey: Berlin, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pnanzenziicht. 7: 222-223. June, 1920.

1587. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Hansen, W. Gedanken uber Organisation und
Arbeitsersparnis in der Pflanzenzucht. (Thoughts on organization and labor-saving in plant
breeding.) Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1918: 261-262. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 189.
Dec, 1918.

1588. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Harris, L. The application of correlation formulae
to the problem of varietal differences in disease resistance: data from the Vermont experi-
ments with potatoes. Araer. Nat. 51:238-244. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6:189.
Dec, 1918.

1589. Anonymous. [German rev. of: HromAdko, J. Die Variability der Nachkommen-
schaft derselben Futterrubenmutter in der 1. Generation. (The variability of progenies of the
same mother beet in the first generation.) Zeitschr. Zuckerindus. Bohmen 42: 581-601.
1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht, 6: 189-190. Dec, 1918.

1590. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Johannsen, W. Arftlicheteri i historisk och ex-
perimentell belysning. (Heredity in historical and experimental light.) viii + 327 p., 52 fig.
1918.1 Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 199. Dec, 1918.

1591. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kalt, B. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine
Anwendung bei der Ziichtungsanerkennung. (The concept "Original seed" and its application
in the recognition of breeding.) Fiihlings Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1919: 460-471. 1919.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 7: 213. June, 1920.

1592. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kiessling, L. tiber eine Mutation in einer reinen
Linie von Hordeum distichum L. (On a mutation in a pure line of Hordeum dlstichum L.)
Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 19: 145-159. June, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6:
190. Dec, 1918.

1593. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kiessling, L. Einige besondere Falle von chloro-
phylldefekten Gersten. (Several special cases of barley, defective in chlorophyll.) Zeitschr.
indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 19: 160-176. June, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 263.)]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 190. Dec, 1920.

1594. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kiessling, L. 11. Bericht der Bayrischen Landes-
saatzuchtanstalt in Weihenstephan (1914-1918). (11th report of the Bavarian Seed-breeding
Institution in Weihenstephan (1914-1918) ). Landw. Jahrb. f. Bayern 1919: 1-178. 1919.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 213-214. June, 1920.

234 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1595. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and W. T. Craig. Small grain
investigations. Jour. Heredity 9:67-76. Feb., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 37.)]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 215. June, 1920.

1596. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and W. T. Craig. The synthetic
production of wild wheat forms. Jour. Heredity 10: 51-64. 1 pi., 9 fig. Feb., 1919. (See
Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1012.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 215-216. June, 1920.

1597. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and W. T. Craig. Fertile wheat-rye
hybrids. Jour. Heredity 10: 195-207. 11 fig. May, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 216.
June, 1920.

1598. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Love, H. H., and A. C. Fraser. The inheritance
of the weak awn in certain Avena crosses. Amer. Nat. 51: 481-493. 2 fig. 1917. (See Bot.
Absts. 1, Entry 1263.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 191. Dec, 1918.

o o

1599. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Lundberg, Fr., and A. Akermann. Jakttagelser
rorande frofargen hos avkommen aven spontan korsning mellan tvenne former av Phaseolus
vulgaris. (Observations on the seed color of the progeny of a spontaneous hybridization be-
tween two varieties of Phaseolus vulgaris.) Sver. Utsfidesfor. Tidskr. 27: 115-121. 1917.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 191-192. Dec, 1918.

1600. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Miles, Frank C. A genetic and cytological study of
certain types of albinism in maize. Jour. Genetics 4: 193-214. 1915. (See Bot. Absts. 1,
Entry 918.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 192. Dec, 1918.

1601. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Molz. Uber die Ziichtung widerstandsfahiger
Rebsorten. (On the breeding of resistant varieties of grapes.) Jahrb. Deutsch. Landw. Ges.
33:156-204. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 192. Dec, 1918.

1602. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Newman, L. Die Weizenerzeugung in Kanada.
(Wheat production in Canada.) Internat. Agarisch. Rundschau 8: 595-601. 1917.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 6: 192-193. Dec, 1918.

1603. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Punnett, R. C. Reduplication series in sweet peas.
II. Jour. Genetics 6: 185-193. 1917. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 1232.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
zucht. 6: 193-194. Dec, 1918.

1604. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Rasmuson, H. Zur Frage von der Entstehungs-
weise der roten Zuckerruben. (On the origin of red sugar beets.) Bot. Notiser 1919: 169-180.
2 fig. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2182.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 217-218. June,
1920.

1605. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Raum, S. Beitrage zur Praxis der Grassamenerzeu-
gung und des Grassamenbaues. (Contribution to the practice of grass-seed production and
grass-seed culture. Illus. Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1920:25-26. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
1741.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:217. June, 1920.

1606. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Raum, S. Zur Kenntnis des italienischen Ray-
grases unter besonderer Beriicksichtigung seiner Ziichtung. (Italian ray grass with special
reference to its breeding.) Fiihlings Landw. 1920: 28-37. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
1741.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 217. June, 1920.

1607. Anonymous. [German rev. of; Reuss. 37-jahrige Fichtenreinzuchtversuche in
Osterreich. (37-year experiment in pure breeding of pine trees in Austria.) Centralbl.
Gesammte Fortsw. 1916: 383 417. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 194. Dec, 1918.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 235

1608. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Richardson, C. W. A further note on the genetics
of Fragaria. Jour. Genetics 7:167-170. May, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 494.)]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 218. June, 1920.

1609. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Roberts, Herbert P. Yellow-berry in hard win-
ter wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 155-169. 2 fig. Nov. 1, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht.
7: 218-219. June, 1920.

1610. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Schellenberu, H. Die Vererbungsverhaltnisse
von Rassen mit gestreiften Bliiten und Friichten. (The inheritance ratios of races with striped
flowers and fruits.) Vierteljahrschr. Natunvissensch. Ges. Zurich 61: 1916.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 6: 195. Dec, 1918.

1611. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Tornau. Einige Mitteilungen iiber varia-
bilitatsverhaltnisse in einem konstanten Weizenstamm. (Some communications concerning
variability relations in a constant wheat strain.) Jour. Landw. 67: 111-149. 1919.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 7: 219. June, 1920. [See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1677.]

1612. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Uber die Grosse der Stecklinge. (On
the size of cuttings.) Zeitschr. Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42: 521-526. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflan-
zenziicht. 6: 195-196. Dec, 1918.

1613. Anonymous. [German rev. of: van der Wolk, P. Onderzoekingen betreffende
den Cocospalm. (Investigations concerning the cocoanut palm.) Cultura 1918: 1-34. 1918.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 196. Dec, 1918.

1614. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Rumker, K. Die Ziichtung der Olpflanzen.
(The breeding of oil plants.) Jahrb. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 33:150-158. 1918.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 6: 194. Dec, 1918.

1615. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Rumker, K. Die staatliche Organisation der
Sortenprufung. (State organization of variety testing.) 32 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 200. Dec, 1918.

1616. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Rumker, K. 42 Sortenanbauversuche im
Verwaltungsgebiete des Oberfehlshabers Ost. (Forty-two variety culture tests in Oberfehls-
habers Ost.) 72 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 201-203. Dec,
1918.

1617. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Ubisch, G. Kritische Betrachtungen zux
Hypothese der primaren und sekundaren Koppelung. (Critical consideration of the hypothesis
of primary and secondary coupling.) Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 19: 193-201. 3 fig.
June, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 298.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 195. Dec, 1918.

1618. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Wagner, M. Abbauerscheinungen am Hopfen und
Organisation in der Hopfenziichtung. (Phenomena in unimproved hops and organization in
hop-breeding.) Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919: 788. 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 220.
June, 1920.

1619. Anonymous. [German rev. of :Wheld ale, M. Our present knowledge of the chem-
istry of the Mendelian factors influencing flower colour. Jour. Genetics 2: 369-376. 1915.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 196. Dec, 1918.

1620. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, O. E. Inheritance of endosperm color in
maize. Amer. Jour. Bot. 4: 396-406. 1917. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1313.)] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenziicht. 7:220. June, 1920.

236 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1621. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, 0. E. Breeding new castor beans. Jour.
Heredity 9: 195-200. May- June, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 249.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
ziicht. 7:220. June, 1920.

1622. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, Orland E. Inheritance studies in Pisum.
III. The inheritance of height in peas. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club. 17: 316-322. June 10, 1918.
(See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 250.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 220. June, 1920.

1623. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, O. E. Inheritance studies on castor beans.
Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Mem. 1: 513-521. 6 pi. July, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 952.)]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 221-222. June. 1920.

1624. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Wohanka and Company. 28. Jahresbericht der
Riibensamenzuchtungen von Wohanka & Comp. (28th annual report of the beet breeding of
Wohanka & Co.) 95 p., 5 fig. Wohanka & Co. : Prag, 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 196.
Dec, 1918.

1625. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Zade. Die Versuche iiber Klee- und Graser-
ziichtungen des landwirtschaftlichen Institutes Jena. (Experiments in clover and grass breed-
ing of the Jena Agricultural Institute.) Jahrb. Deutsch. Landwirtsch. Ges. 1918: 139-150.
1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 197. Dec, 1918.

1626. Anonymous. [German rev. of :Zinn, J., and F. M. Surface. Studies on oat breed-
ing. V. The Fi and F2 generations of a cross between a naked and hulled oat. Jour. Agric.
Res. 10: 293-312. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 197. Dec, 1918.

1627. Aumiot, J. Rajeunissement et perfectionnement de la pomme de terre. [The
rejuvenation and improvement of potatoes.] Compt. Rend Acad. Agric France 5 : 905-910.
1919. — Several thousand potato seedlings were grown from crosses between cultivated
varieties and also hybrids with Solanum commersonii and S. maglia. The plants were
vigorous and flowered abundantly. The progenies varied in yield, and a table is appended
giving the number and weights of the tubers. The experiments comprised 24 crosses
between ten cultivated varieties and a hybrid between S. maglia X S. tuberosum var.
Enowflack. The vigor and productivity were infinitely superior to the open-pollinated
parents. The form and color of the skin and flesh were modified also. Many crosses with
"Bolivienne lObis" were free from rot and were resistant to Phytophtora infestans. The cross
between S. maglia and S. tuberosum var. Enowflack was intermediate between the parents
though tending to resemble more closely S. tuberosum. — A mutation from S. maglia to S.
tuberosum is recorded. This mutant resembled the common cultivated potato in the charac-
ters of both plant and tubers. Three mutants were found in S. commersonii which resembled
each other in tuber characteristics. It is stated that many mutants are suitable for culti-
vation, but one found in S. maglia has proved to be very susceptible to Phytophtora infestans.
He concludes that although the uncultivated species of potatoes apparently are unpromising
from the standpoint of obtaining varieties suitable for commercial cultivation, nevertheless
entirely satisfactory mutants are found, and he believes that the potato can be improved
rapidly through crossing. — /. H. Kempton.

1628. Bach, Siegfried. Zweierlei Weisslinge bei Mais. [Two kinds of albinos in maize.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:238-241. June, 1920.

1629. Baudouin, M. Decouverte d'un procede sur pour reconnaitre le sexe des axis hu-
mains a tout age. [Discovery of a process for the certain recognition of sex in the human axis
at all ages.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 167: 652-653. 1918.— The diameters of the fora-
men of the vertebral human axis from both sexes of various ages were measured. It was found
that the difference between the anterior-posterior diameters and the transverse diameters
of the foramina was very marked in the males while in the females it was always very slight. —
D. D. Whitney.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 237

1630. Bauer, J. Aufgaben und Methoden der Konstitutionsforschung. [Problems and
methods of study of the constitution.] Wiener klin. Wochenschr. 32:273-276. 191ft. — Re-
search on variations in the constitution h:is its its ultimate aim an explanation of inter- and
intra-racial differences in anatomical and functional conditions, with special reference to the
influence of these conditions on the incidence and course of disease. The various types of
habitus that have been proposed are of great importance, but need careful analysis and
revision. A thorough study of the nature of factors determining a given habitus is especially
needed. In the study of organs and organ systems care must be exercised in determining
whether any particular characteristic owes its existence to a peculiarity inherent in the
organ itself, is "autochthonous," or to influences brought about through intermediation of the
neuro-glandular system. With reference to the incidence of disease we must determine to
what extent constitutional predispositions are taxable for the incidence of different diseases,
and whether or not there are some diseases whose occurrence is wholly dependent on more or
less specific constitutional deficiency. It is also highly important to be able to recognize
anatomical or functional constitutional weakness before it has already been exposed by dis-
ease. The author makes a plea for a clinico-hereditary study of every possible case, since
only in that way may be obtained knowledge of the greatest value to practical medicine, pub-
lic health, and eugenics. — C. H. Danforth.

1631. B(ean), W. J. One-leaved ash (Fraxinus excelsior heterophylla.) Kew Bull. Misc.
Inf. [London] 1919: 390-391. 1919.— Seeds from this form gave part of the seedlings of the
same type. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1632. Becker, J. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete von Pflanzenbau und
Pflanzenzucht. [Serological investigations in the realms of plant production and plant breed-
ing.] Landwirtsch. Jahrb. 53: 245-276. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1572.

1633. Benders, A. M. Onze constitutie. [Our constitution.] Genetica 2:301-322.
July, 1920.

1634. Benders. [Dutch rey. of: Lichtenstern, R. Bisherige Erfolge der Hodentrans-
plantation beim Menschen. (Results thus far achieved by the transplantation of testes in man.)
Jahreskurse f. arztliche Fortb. April, 1920.]- Genetica 2 : 374-375. July, 1920.

1635. Bergman, Emanuel. A family with hereditary (genotypical) tremor. Hereditas
1 : 98-106. 2 fig. 1920. — In a Swedish family the author has observed hereditary tremor.
A description of the disease and descriptions of the affected persons are given. The tremor
is transmitted as a dominant in the family. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1636. Bezssonoff. Sur l'obtention experimentale de la sexualite chez les champignons
et orientee sur la structure typique du plasma sexuel. [On the experimental production of
sexuality in fungi and oriented on the typical structure of the sexual plasm.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 288-290. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1344.

1637. Blaringhem, L. Variations de la sexualite chez les Composees. [Variation of
sexuality in the Compositae.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. [Paris] 83: 1060-1062. July, 1920.

1638. Blaringhem, L. A propos de l'heredite des fascies de Capsella Viguieri. [Concern-
ing the heredity of fasciations in Capsella Viguieri.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 29S-
300. 1919.

1639. Blaringhem, L. Production par traumatisme d'une forme nouvelle de Mais a
caryopses multiples, Zea Mays var. polysperma. [The traumatic origin of a new form of maize
with multiple fruits, Zea Mays var. polysperma.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 677-679.
1920.

238 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1640. Blaringhem, L. Variations florales chez la Grande Marguerite (Leucanthemum
vulgare, Lamarck.) [Floral variation in Leucanthemum vulgare.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 169: 193-195. 1919.

1641. Boedijn, K. Die Chromosomen von Oenothera Lamarckiana, mut. simplex.
[The chromosomes of Oenothera Lamarckiana mut. simplex.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm.
Vererb. 24:71-76. Aug., 1920.

1642. Bouin, P. Sur la dimegalie des spermies dans certaines doubles spermatogeneses.
Sa signification. [On dimegaly of sperms in certain cases of double spermatogenesis. Its
significance.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 432-434. Mar., 1920. — Two sorts of spermatogonia
exist in Scolopendra, one with large, one with small chromosomes. Spermatogenesis is same
in both except that growth is much greater in those with large chromosomes. Quantity of
chromatin is held to cause larger growth. By analogy with another myriapod, large sperms
are believed to be female-determining, small ones male-determining. Facts suggest that
heterochromosome in forms that have one is merely trophic in function, that its chromatin is
not different from that of other chromosomes, and that effect of its presence is due to larger
amount of chromatin, not to different kind. — A. Franklin Shull.

1643. Bouvier, E. L., and d'Emmerez de Charmoy. Mutation d'une Caridine en Ort-
mannie et observations generates sur les mutations evolutives de Crevettes d'eau douce de la
famille de Atyides. [Mutation of a Caridine into Ortmannia, and general observations on the
evolutive mutations of freshwater crustaceans of the family Atyidae.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 169:317-321. 1919.

1644. Castle, W. E. Model of the linkage system of eleven second chromosome genes of
Drosophila. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6:73-77. 2 fig. Feb., 1920.— Bridges and
Morgan's linkage data of the second chromosome of Drosophila form the basis of another
model in three dimensions similar to those which Castle has previously published. It shows
the second chromosome genes "lying roughly in a linear chain winding cork-screw fashion
through the model." Gowen's data for the third chromosome have been subjected to similar
treatment, and although the model is not figured the genes are said to fall "into a curved
band lying nearly in one plane" in the manner pointed out by Sturtevant, Bridges, and
Morgan for the sex chromosome model. It is now admitted that according to the linear
idea, map distances in excess of 50 may occur, though double crossing over prevents them
from being recorded, and that map distances do not correspond with crossover percentages
except where the crossover values are low. The fact that one model closely approaches the
linear, and that the indefinite lengthening of all the longer distances in the other — cutting
of all wires over 40 units long— would straighten it out, so as to closely approach a linear
system, leads to the following conclusion: "that the model supports the linear hypothesis, if
it be supposed that the longer distances have been shortened by double crossing over, and
that map distances in such cases should exceed crossover percentages. — H. H. Plough.

1645. Chodat, R. La panachure et les chimeres dans le genre Funkia. [Variegation and
chimeras in the genus Funkia.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Phys. Hist. Nat. Geneve 36: 81-84.
1919. — Author studied chimera-like variegation in leaves of three species of Funkia. In
F. Sieboldiana he found two contrasting types— variegata albo-marginata with largely white-
margined leaves, and variegata medio-variegata with the white portion largely in the center
of the leaf. Baur considers several of these variegated types, such as are found in Euonymus
and Pelargonium, as periclinal chimeras. Author finds in variegated Funkias that none of
the usually colorless sub-epidermis is present above the green regions; hence he questions
considering them as periclinal chimeras, but uses this hypothesis in analyzing them. He
does not consider Funkia variegations as reversions such as the variegations described by
Bateson in Euonymus, because in Funkia the leaves are all of same type on one plant, while
both normal and variegated leaves occur on the same plant in case of Bateson's studies. —
In monocotyledons of the Funkia type the epidermis is colorless except for the green guard-

No. 4, January, 1921 1 GENETICS 239

cells of the stomata. In albo-marginata the epidermis is entirely colorless. In the medio-
variegata type the guard-cells are green over hoth the green and white regions. This was
also observed in F. ovato f. medio-variegata and /''. lancifolia medio-variegata, while in F . lanci-
folia f. albo-jnarginata the epidermis is absolutely colorless. In F. Sieboldiana Hook, medio-
variegata there is an average of 18.7 stomata over the white region, and 14.5 over the green
region, the stomata being much larger and less elongated over the green regions than over
the colorless parts. The opposite is the case in albo-marginata, which averages 12.3 stomata
over the green, and 11 over the white regions for the same surface area. — The origin of the
variegated Funkia is probably a question of hybrids, the chimeras being of a disjunctive rather
than of a periclinal type, some with white epidermis, and some with a green epidermis. —
Francena R. Meyer.

1646. Coe, H. S., and J. N. Martin. Sweet-clover seed. Parti. Pollination studies of
seed production. Part II. Structure and chemical nature of the seed coat and its relation to
impermeable seeds of sweet clover. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 844. 89 p., 6 fig., 5 pi. 1920. —
Brief descriptions are given of development of floral organs, ovules, pollen, and seed of sweet
clover, Melilotus alba, mainly, and also M. officinalis. Self-fertilization is as effective as
cross-fertilization, judging by length of time elapsing between pollination and fertilization
in the two cases and also by comparative rate of embryo development. Pollen germination
was 33 per cent in pure water, and from 22 to 64 per cent in cane sugar solutions with strengths
from 8 to 45 per cent; germination was best in 12 per cent solution. Pollen tubes made no
more growth in sugar solution than in water; so it is concluded that sugar helps in pollen
germination by reducing absorption rate of water. There would seem to be no reason per se
why pollen germination should not take place freely in the open under wet weather condi-
tions; and germination was found to take place under these conditions. — Sweet clover plants
protected to prevent access to insects had only 2.9 per cent of the flowers set seed, wrhile
unguarded plants had 66.5 per cent. The percentage of cross-pollinated flowers setting seed
was 70.1, while the percentage of self-pollinated flowers setting seed was 54.9. Night-flying
insects seemed to have but minor effects on fertilization. Many species of insects were
found to visit sweet clover. Small insects were found to be efficient pollinators. The honey
bee is evidently the most efficient pollinator of sweet clover; species of Haliclus are often
nearly as efficient. Excess moisture, in the air or soil, did not affect seed production
adversely. Dry soil conditions tended to inhibit seed production. — In histological studies of
permeable and impermeable (hard) seeds, the "light line" of Malpighian layer, the chemical
nature of which was not determined, was found to be a determining factor. In permeable
seeds minute canals were found to traverse the light line radially, allowing water to pass
through. These were not visible in impermeable seeds until treated with sulphuric acid,
and were then observed to be very small. Seed treatment with acid for one hour did not dis-
integrate light line, but rendered seeds permeable. — L. R. Waldron.

1647. Collins, G. N. Waxy maize from Upper Burma. Science 52:48-51. July 16,
1920. — Maize with waxy endosperm has been found in Upper Burma where it is cultivated by
uncivilized tribes in the inaccessible mountainous districts. It is grown chiefly for the
husks, which are used as wrappers for the enormous cheroots affected by the Burmese. —
Plants grown in the United States from the Burma waxy seed were very unlike those raised
from the original Chinese waxy seed, but the endosperm texture proved to be genetically
identical. — A survey of the region in China where the first waxy seeds were discovered has
shown that this type of corn is restricted to a region within 30 miles of Shanghai, and no
distinctive Chinese names differentiating the waxy from other types were found. Appar-
ently the waxy type has been cultivated in Burma for a longer period, since there is an exten-
sive series of named varieties and the distribution is more general. — Waxy endosperm has
been found also on the Island of Mindanao by W. H. Weston, but it can not be determined
whether the occurrence of this type in the Philippines is the result of a recent introduction
from the Chinese source or whether it represents another of the early stations comparable
with Burma and Shanghai. — The author believes the waxy endosperm to have originated in

240 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

northern Burma and to have been imported into China from this district at an early date.
This conclusion supports the contention of Dr. Laufer that maize entered China from the
West and not the East. — J. H. Kempton.

1648. Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Ateosinte maize hybrid. Jour. Agric. Res.
19: 1-38. PL 1-7. 32 fig. 1920. — A study of a hybrid between Florida teosinte and a small
variety of maize known as Tom Thumb pop. Besides possible practical agricultural applica-
tions of the product, such a cross is of especial interest genetically because of the rare oppor-
tunity of securing fertile hybrids from such widely divergent parent forms. Characters of the
Fi were mainly intermediate. Observations were taken on 33 character pairs of the Fj, being
considered in groups according to certain morphological or physiological relationship.
Results are presented graphically in form of distribution curves. There was the greatest
freedom of recombination and, barring one or two exceptions, little evidence of alternative
or Mendelian inheritance. — L. H. Smith.

1649. Conklin, Edwin Grant. The mechanism of evolution in the light of heredity and
development. V. The cellular basis of ontogeny and phylogeny. Scientific Monthly 1920:
269-291. 11 fig. Mar., 1920. — A summary and restatement of present-day conceptions of the
cell in reference to ontogeny and phylogeny. The physical basis of heredity and of evolu-
tion is contained in the germ cells, which form the only living bond between generations and
between species. There is "no fundamental distinction" between germ cells and somatic
cells. Up to an undetermined critical stage, either may under certain conditions give rise
to the other. There are, however, marked morphological and physiological differences
between the germplasm (nucleus) and somatoplasm (cytoplasm). The individuality of the
chromosomes "is no longer a mere hypothesis, but an established fact;" and every chromo-
mere will probably be found to have a distinct and continuous entity, the number remaining
constant for every species. The smaller units which enter into the organization of the cell
are alive, as is the whole cell. These divide equally, not differentially. Variations in combi-
nations of vital units are responsible for "all forms of differentiation, variation, and evolu-
tion." The problem of the mechanism of heredity must be studied both from the side of
cytology and of genetics. All the evidence at hand strengthens the assumption that genes
have a linear arrangement in the chromosomes. A statement and brief discussion of the
facts, as known today, regarding mitosis in general, meiosis, fertilization, sex determination,
sex-linked characters, linkage, "cross-overs," etc., lead clearly to the conclusion that the
inheritance units or genes or Mendelian factors are carried in the chromosomes. — Margaret
C. Ferguson.

1650. Conners, C. H. Some notes on the inheritance of unit characters in the peach.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 24-36. (1919) 1920. — Blossoms of peaches are classified as
large, medium, and small. Of 50 trees of a self-pollinated small variety, 46 bore small-sized
blossoms. Crosses between small- and large-blossom varieties gave first generation seed-
lings with medium-sized blossoms. — Varieties with medium-sized blossoms, when self-polli-
nated, gave large-, medium-, and small-blossom seedlings in percentage ratios of 18.6, 58.2,
and 23.3, respectively. — Medium crossed with small gave large-, medium-, and small-blossom
seedlings in percentage ratios of 4.5, 61.4, and 34.1, respectively. Medium crossed with large
gave large-, medium-, and small-blossom seedlings in percentage ratios of 36.5, 58.7, and 4.9,
respectively. — The breeding behavior for color of fruit, date of ripening, and freestone versus
clingstone, is given for various "selfed" varieties and crosses. — Fred Griffee.

1651. Copeman, S. Monckton. Experiments on sex determination. Proc. Zool. Soc.
London 1919:433-435. Feb., 1920. — Rabbits were semicastrated or semi-spayed either on
the left or the right side, and then bred with animals which had had a similar operation or
with entire animals of the opposite sex. This was done in an attempt to determine whether
the right or left gonads were prepotent in determining the resulting sex of the offspring.
The results were contradictory, and the general conclusion was that the reproductive cells of
a gonad may give rise to either sex. — D. D. Whitney.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 241

1652. Correns, C. Vererbungsversuche mit buntblattrigen Sippen. III. Veronica
gentianoides albocincta. IV. Die albomarmorata- und albopulverea-Sippen. V. Mercurialis
annua versicolor und xantha. [Genetical studies with variegated races. III. Veronica gen-
tianoides albocincta. IV. The albomarmorata and albopulverea races. V. Mercurialis annua
versicolor and xantha.] Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 6, 7: 212-240. Ht_'().

1653. Crandall, C. S. The apple cross Tolman X Malus Toringo. Proc. Amcr. Soc.
Hortic. Sci. 16: 60-66. (1919). 1920. — Cross between Tolman, a standard variety of apple,
and a dwarf form of Malus Toringo gave Fi seedlings intermediate for characters studied,
but more nearly approaching dwarf parent.— Sec also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1148. — Fred
Griffee.

1654. Czuber. Die Anwendung der Wahrscheiniichkeitsrechnung auf Fragen der Land-
wirtschaft. [The application of probability calculations to agricultural questions.] Zeitschr.
Landw. Versuch. Osterreich. 1918: 1-100. 1918.

1655. Danforth, C. H. Observations on brachydactylism in the fowl. Anat. Rec. 14:
33-34. 1918. — Author's abstract of paper presented at the Thirty-fourth session of the
American Association of Anatomists, Dec. 29, 1917. — A form of brachydactylism affecting
particularly the fourth digit is of common occurrence in the fowl. It is usually associated with
booting (feathered tarsi). The extent to which the fourth toe is shortened ranges from a
condition in which all five phalanges are present, but with a total length slightly less than
normal, to a condition in which the toe is greatly shortened and the number of phalanges
reduced to two. The fourth phalanx is the first to be affected, followed by the third, and
then by the fifth. The skeletal elements seem to disappear through a process of coalescence
rather than one of suppression. — Examination of developmental stages show that the brachy-
dactyl digits are already noticeably shortened at a time when the cartilaginous anlagen of the
phalanges are still in a rudimentary condition, which suggests that the brachydactylism is
due not to a defect inherent in the skeletal system, but more probably to an influence that
acts on the toe as a whole. The possibility of booting as a causative factor seems to be
definitely eliminated by the fact that brachydactylism may be clearly apparent before the first
feather germs appear on the tarsi. It seems probable that both conditions are induced by
some common cause, which is effective from the eighth to the tenth day of incubation. —
Breeding records indicate that brachydactylism is transmitted in about the same proportions
as polydactylism and booting. With the latter it shows a close correlation; with the former,
none. — C. H. Danforth.

1656. Daniel, Lucien. Sur la stabilite et l'heredite de Crataegomespilus et des Pirocy-
donia. [On the stability and heredity of Crataegomespilus and of Pirocydonia.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:513-515. 1919.

1657. Davenport, C. B. Department of Experimental Evolution. Carnegie Inst. Wash-
ington Year Book 18 (1919) : 123-152. 1920.— Director reports that during 1919 scientific
work of the Station emerged from quiescence imposed by the war. C. W. Metz, working
with Drosophila virilis, D. obscura and D. willistoni, discovered 23 new mutant characters
from March to July. E. C. MacDowell reports no new experimental facts on effects of alco-
hol on rats, but presents further surveys of data previously collected. One such survey
points to mental inferiority of rats descended from alcoholized grandparents as compared
with controls from normal ancestors. Cytological studies (by E. Allen) on testes of con-
trol and alcoholized rats revealed degeneration in both, but much more in alcoholized rats.
A biometrical treatment by MacDowell on data already reported on selection for bristle
number during 54 generations of Drosophila confirmed previous conclusions that no selection
effect was perceptible after first few generations. Compilation by A. M. Banta of data on
selection for speed of light reaction in daphnids showed no effective selection except in one
line. E. H. Behre found that stale sperm in pigeons does not affect sex-ratio. Banta con-
tinued observations on sex-intergrading daphnids along two lines: (1) detailed study of

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 4

242 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

degrees of intergrading, which revealed all conceivable intermediate stages with maleness
and femaleness blended and not in sexual mosaics as in gynandromorphs, and showed that the
degree of maleness in different parts of a single individual varied; (2) selection within inter-
grade stocks descended from one original mother toward pure femaleness, which has given
results in direction of selection. Banta has continued comparative studies on cave animals
raised in light and epigaeal animals raised under cave conditions. C. C. Little, using records
of Sloane Maternity Hospital of New York, found ratio of male to female birth from parents
of same race to be 106.27, while in "hybrid" matings this ratio was 121.56; it would seem
from this that male-producing sperms are less likely to be eliminated. Little has also reviewed
literature on cats, doves, and canaries to see how completely facts of inheritance agree with
general crossing-over and non-disjunction hypotheses. With Miss E. E. Jones he has
studied heredity of color in dogs, basing conclusions on stud books of American Kennel
Club; three double allelomorphic and one triple allelomorphic series have been found. Ge-
netical experiments have been pursued also on sheep, mice, and poultry. Oscar Riddle, with
collaborators, has completed demonstration of nitrogen reduction in eggs accompanying qui-
nine dosage, and of fact that brains of ataxic birds lack chemical differentiation. Of work
of Eugenics Record Office reference is made to H. J. Banker's studies; to C. B. Davenport's
studies of statistics on drafted men for Surgeon General's Office, Washington; to Davenport
and Scudder's contribution on naval officers, which showed that hereditary traits — i.e.,
hyperkinesis, thalassophilia, and nomadism — determined superiority; and to Miss M. M.
Sturges's investigation of isolated inbred communities. H. H. Laughlin has prepared a
work on eugenical sterilization in the United States, and has made statistical inquiries on
elimination of mongrel blood in pure-sire system of out-breeding. Much eugenical material
has been added to archives during the year. — James P. Kelly.

1658. Davenport, C. B. Hereditary tendency to form nerve tumors. Proc. Nation.
Acad. Sci. 4: 213-214. Aug., 1918. — Multiple neurofibromatosis, a condition due mostly to
the proliferation of connective tissue in nerve sheaths, shows a strongly familial tendency.
It is not limited to either sex and is generally transmitted after the fashion of a Mendelian
dominant. In a few instances a generation has been skipped, but these occurrences are
probably to be explained on the basis of an occasional failure of dominance. The symptoms
of the disease are diverse, but within a given family they are generally rather uniform. The
fact that these neurofibromata are hereditary tends to strengthen the view that cancers in
general have an hereditary basis. — C. H. Danforth.

1659. Duarte d'Oliveira, Jose. Sur la transmission de la fasciation et de la dichotomic
a la suite de la greffe de deux vignes portugaises. [The transmission of fasciation and dichoto-
mous branching through the grafting of two Portuguese varieties of grapes.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 615-616. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1151.

1660. Duerden, J. E. Inheritance of callosities in the ostrich. Amer. Nat. 54: 289-312.
7 fig. July-Aug., 1920. — Author describes several callosities appearing regularly on body of
the ostrich, distinguishing three classes: (1) those inherited (because constantly present be-
fore hatching), and functioning under certain circumstances as cushions bearing the weight of
the bird, or as friction pads; (2) those inherited, but not now functioning; and (3) those which
are direct individual responses of the skin to contact, involving pressure and friction, with
hard substances. Callosities of latter class may be developed on the skin of other parts of
body, and presumably on any part. Callosities of all three classes are similar in structure.
The author suggests that those of classes 1 and 2 originally arose as adaptive responses,
which have since become transmissible. Those of class 2 are no longer used, owing to certain
structural changes in body. Those of class 3, necessitated by same structural changes, have
:is yet not become heritable. He states that "a character may become transmissible without
necessarily being germinal, in the sense of having factorial representation in the germ plasm;"
and that "acquired characters are such somatic modifications as are produced as responses
of the organs and tissues to stimuli, and are without direct representation in the genu plasm."
— William A.I

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 243

1661. Edler, W. Die Verzweigung der Ackerbohne. [Branching of field beans.] Fiih-

linga Landwirtsch. Xeit. 101Q: 111 160. 1919. An ai unt is given of a ten years' ma

selection experiment on varieties of Vicia faba. Branched and unbranched plants started
groups within each variety. Within each group the choosing of branched and unbranched
plants, respectively, was repeated. Branched plants in mosl seasons are more common in
ictions toward branching than in those toward single-stemmed condition, but increase
in tendency toward branching 1ms not been obtained after ten years' work. Outside condi-
tions affecl branching very markedly. [From anonymous review in Zeitselir. Pflanzenzucht.
7: 210. June. 1920.]— J. P. Kelly.

L662. Ehingbr, K. Ein neuer tertiarer Deilephila-Hybride. [A new tertiary Deilephila
hybrid.] Entomol. Kundschau 37: 2-4, 7-8. 1020.

L663. Blunder, Tage. [German rev. of: Cushi.\<;, II. Hereditary anchylosis of the
proximal phalangeal joints (symphalangism). Genetics 1:90-106. 11 fig. Jan., 1916.1
Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 104. Aug., 1920.

1664. Ellinger, Tage. [German rev. of: Schmidt, J. Investigations of hops (Humulus
lupulus). XI. Can different clones be characterized by the number of marginal teeth in the
leaves? Compt. Rend. Lab. Carlsberg 14: 1-23. 8 fig. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
2192.)] Zeitschr. indukt, Abstamm. Vererb. 24:101. Aug., 1920.

1665. Fawcett, W. Cebras e hibridos como animales domesticados. (Zebras and their
hybrids as domestic animals.) La Hacienda 13:242-245. 9 fig. 191S.— Popular review of
experiments in which zebras have been crossed with horses or asses, with special regard to the
possible usefulness of the hybrids as farm animals. — Sewall Wright.

1066. Firket, Jean. Recherches sur l'organogenese des glandes sexuelles chez les
oiseaux. [Researches on the organogenesis of the sexual glands in birds. 1 Arch. Biol. 30:
' 516. 6 pi., 5 fig. 1920.

1667. Fischer, H. Pflanzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. [Plant metamor-
morphosis and evolution.] Die Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920.

166S. Frolich, G. Die Umzuchtung von Wintergetreide in Sommergetreide. [The breed-
ing of winter cereals into spring cereals.] Friedrichswerther Monatsber. 9: 27-30. 1919. —
In an experiment begun in 1906 to change by breeding the Friedrichswerther Squarehead
barley into a summer sort, no shortening of period of time from sowing of seeds to shooting
was obtained up to 1918. When considering influence of spring planting one must keep in
mind the effects of selection of those plants that send up stalks earliest. Author noted that
spring-sown barley gave a lessened crop, much stooling (Bestockung), and an absence of stalks
in some plants. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: US. Dec. 1919.] —
./. P. Kelly.

1669. Frolich, G. Die Beeinflussung der Kornschwere durch Auslese bei der Ziichtung
der Ackerbohne. [The influencing of seed weight by selection in the breeding of field beans.]
Friedrichswerther Monatsber. 9:7-8, 17-20. 1919. — Author experimented to test report
that in Thuringen, due to local external conditions, seed weight of field bean decreased. Indi-
vidual seed weight proved strongly modifiable, considering weights for separate years; but a
general decrease due to place conditions was not found. An increase in weight by selection
within limits of a particular individual was in general without success. In some cases ten-
dency was noted for branches to occur with higher separate seed weight, which author referred
to occasional cross-pollination. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 117.
Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

244 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1670. Frtjwirth, C. Handbuch der landwirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichtung. 3. Die
Ziichtung von Kartoffel, Erdbirne, Lein, Hanf, Tabak, Hopfen, Buchweizen, Hiilsenfriichtern
und kleeartigen Futterpflanzen. [Handbook of agricultural plant breeding. 3. The breeding
of potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, flax, hemp, tobacco, hops, buckwheat, legumes, and clover-
like forage plants.] 3rd ed., 21fi p., 45 fig. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919. — In present edition of
this volume section on potatoes is fundamentally revised. Considerable change is made
also in portions devoted to breeding of flax, hops, and tobacco. Presented in this edition for
first time is discussion on breeding of Soy beans (Soja). Author touches on his own researches
in potatoes, hemp, legumes, and clovers. There is an increase of 17 pages and 10 figures over
last edition. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzlicht. 7: 222-223. June, 1920.]
—J. P. Kelly.

1671. Frtjwirth, C. Die Saatenanerkennung. [Seed recognition.] Hi + 126 p., 66 fig.
Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1586.

1672. Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolution in plants. 14 X 20 cm., xi + 265 p.,
118 fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920. — Represents essentially a reprinting,
with minor modifications, of chapters 31-38 of the author's "Fundamentals of botany," to
which have been added a chapter on geographical distribution (p. 139-182) and one on the
great groups of plants (pp. 243-251). A classified bibliography of books and a brief list of
journals are also new. All but three of the books listed are in English, and the only foreign
journals cited are the "New Phytologist," London, and the "Revue general de botanique,"
Paris.— G. H. Shull.

1673. Gardner, V. R. Results of bud selection investigations at the Missouri and Oregon
experiment stations and their interpretation. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 66-70. (1919)
1920. — Scions from high- and low-yielding Ben Davis trees (Pyrus malus) proved of equal
value. Likewise, ten years selection for high and low yield in a standard strawberry variety
had no effect on productiveness. Cases of degeneration in several seedling strawberries are
given. This degeneration in one case involved the entire stock; in another case, only a
part of the plants of a variety. — Crosses of wild Fragaria chiloensis with a cultivated variety
gave mostly seedlings bearing petioles with appressed and ascending pubescence like that of
the wild form. Some seedlings had petioles with spreading pubescence like that of the
cultivated variety. One seedling bore petioles of both types. Propagations from this seed-
ling gave daughter plants, some of which were like the wild form, some like the cultivated
variety, and others with petioles of both types. — Author points out importance of eliminating
degenerates as a means of keeping a variety up to standard. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
1155.]— Fred Griff ee.

1674. Gates, R. R. A preliminary account of the meiotic phenomena in the pollen mother-
cells and tapetum of lettuce (Lactuca sativa). Proc. Roy. Soc. 91: 216-223. 2 fig. May,
1920.- — A study of the pollen development of the Dwarf Perfection lettuce and a rogue from it,
revealed no constant cytological difference between the variety and its rogue; but certain
interesting features were observed in both. The elongated tapetal cells lie parallel with the
longer axes of the loculi. In the binucleate phase of the tapetal cells the nuclei often present
in appearance various synaptic stages. Every transition occurs between microspore
mother-cells and tapetal cells. The members of a bivalent chromosome lie side by side and
chiasmatypy often occurs. The author states that this phenomenon is here described for
the first time in plants. There are 9 pairs of chromosomes, which fall into 3 groups as to size.
The 10 chromosomes sometimes found in diakinesis may have resulted from the separation
of the members of a pair or from a transverse segmentation of one of the bivalent chromo-
somes. The number of chromosomes may be reduced to 8 or 7 by a more or less complete
fusion, end to end, of two bivalent chromosomes. The manner of coalescence of these chromo-
somes furnishes a probable basis for the phenomena of coupling or repulsion. The microspore
mother-cells are divided into tetrads by cytoplasmic intrusions from the wall. These have no
connection with the spindle. The few pollen grains maturing in a loculus are surrounded
by a "cytoplasmic detritus from the tapetum." — Margaret C. Ferguson.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 245

1675. Gauger, Martin. Die Mendelschen Zahlenreihen by Monohybriden im Lichte der
Dispersionstheorie. [The Mendelian ratios in monohybrids in the light of the dispersion
theory.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 146 198. Mar., 1920. — The author exam-
ines numerical results of a number of breeding experiments and concludes that ratios actu-
ally observed agree with ratios of Mendelian theory as nearly as can be expected after taking
account of the mathematically probable deviations of the series observed. — R. B. Robhins.

1G76. Goldschmidt, IliciiARi). Untersuchungen uber Intersexualitat. [Investigations
on intersexuality.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 23: 1-199. 2 pi., 84 fig. 1920.

1677. Grafenberg, E. Die entwicklungsgeschichtliche Bedeutung der Hyperdaktylie
menschlicher Gliedmassen. [Developmental significance of hyperdactyly in human extremi-
ties.] Stud. z. Pathol, d. Entwickl. 2: 565-619. 1920.

1678. Gutherz, S. Das Heterochromosomen-Problem bei den Vertebraten. Erste
Mitteilung: Untersuchung der friihen Oogenese der Hauskatze. [The heterochromosome
problem in vertebrates. I. Study of the early oogenesis of the domestic cat.] Arch. Mikros.
Anat. 94: 338-364. 1920.

1679. Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Saiith. Transmission of eye-defects induced in rabbits
by means of lens-sensitized fowl-serum. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. (U. S.) 6: 134-136. Mar.,
1920. — A brief account of experiments in which the writers appear to have been able to induce
specific antenatal lens-defects in rabbits, transmissible to later generations even through
the male line, by treatment of pregnant females with fowl-serum previously sensitized to
rabbit-lens. Among 61 surviving young of such treated females, there were conspicuous
eye-defects in 4 cases and noticeable defects in 5 others. No such eye-defects were found in
untreated rabbits or in control treated with unsensitized fowl-serum (12 cases) or with fowl-
serum sensitized to another rabbit tissue (36 cases). Similar eye-defects were also occasion-
ally induced in mice by similar methods. The defective eyes in rabbits have been trans-
mitted for 6 generations with increasing severity. — Sewall Wright.

1680. Haecker, V. Uber Regelmassigkeiten im Auftreten erblicher Normaleigenschaften,
Anomalien und Krankheiten beim Menschen. [On regularity in the occurrence of hereditary
normal characteristics, anomalies and diseases in man.] Mediz. Klinik. 14: 977-982. 1918. —
The mode of inheritance of a trait is dependent upon the germinal complex which enters
into the zygote and also upon the developmental relations of the organ or part in which the
trait appears — the ontogenetic factor. If the part concerned has a high degree of develop-
mental autonomy — that is, if it acquires relative independence at an embryologically early
period — the trait is transmitted in ordinary Mendelian fashion. If there is a low degree of
autonomy with a consequent involvement of various developmental influences, simple Men-
delian heredity with segregation of traits does not occur, but, instead, a blending type from
which neither of the original parental forms is ever reproduced in any subsequent generation.
The blue eye color of certain Eskimos and others, shows the long-continued persistence of an
autonomous, and consequently Mendelian, character; the slightly mongoloid features of some
Hungarians and Turks represent the last vestige of blending traits. What sometimes
appears as a single trait need not necessarily be such. For example, in the case of albinism
there is an autonomous and a degenerative type. The former behaves in a clearly cut Men-
delian fashion, while the latter, which is in reality the labile expression of a generalized degen-
erative condition, behaves in an irregular manner alternating with, or being accompanied
by, various other aberrant conditions. Among digital anomalies, hypophalangy — a trait
presumed to be due to a single factor directly affecting only skeletogenous elements and
therefore displaying a high degree of autonomy — is a good Mendelian trait, while Polydactyly
— due to factors affecting several different elements and thus showing a low degree of auton-
omy— is transmitted irregularly and is often replaced by some other condition such as syn-
dactyly.— The characteristic failure of blending characters to show Mendelian heredity may
be due (1) simply to the extremely polyhybrid nature of the cross, (2) to a redistribution of the

246 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

genes between pairs of homologous chromosomes, or (3), especially in the case of disease con-
ditions, to a tendency on the part of the germplasm to return by degressive mutations to the
normal and presumably more stable condition. — C. H. Danforth.

1681. Hansen, W. Einiges u'ber Riibenzucht. [Something about beet-breeding.] Illustr.
Landw. Zeitg. 39: 154-156. 1919. — Author advocates permitting open-pollination among best
mother-beets and subsequent evaluation based on progeny performance. A single seed
obtained under a gauze bag gave a poor result as revealed by progeny test. Determination of
dry weights of beets in addition to polarization was deemed unnecessary. Suggests designat-
ing beet by letters in genetical studies. [From author's abstract in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht.
7: 120. Dec, 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1682. Hansen, W. Die Pflanzenziichterische Buchfiihrung und Bewertung der Zucht-
pfianzen. [Plant-breeding book-keeping and evaluation of the parent plants.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 6: 119-138. 2 fig. Dec, 1918.

1683. Hansen, W. Gedanken iiber Organisation und Arbeitsersparnis in der Pflanzen-
zucht. [Thoughts on organization and labor-saving in plant breeding.] Deutsch. Landw.
Presse 1918:261-262. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1587.

1684. Hansen, W. Die Ermittlung des Einzelkorngewichtes einer Pflaaze. [Determi-
nation of the weight of individual grains of a plant. Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7 : 225-227. June,
1920.

1685. Hargitt, George T. Coelenterates and the evolution of germ cells. Anat. Rec
17: 327. Jan., 1920. — Author's abstract of paper read before the American Society of Zoolo-
gists, St. Louis, December 30, 1919. — In the Hydrozoa the observations upon germ-cell origin
and segregation, budding, regeneration, and development from dissociated cells have led to
the following conclusions: All cells of the body (except possibly the nettling and nerve cells)
are capable of further differentiation in various directions; this includes the power of dedif-
ferentiation and of specialization in a new direction. There cannot be, therefore, any real
distinction between body cells and germ cells. — Specialized cells of other adult animals (in-
cluding vertebrates) show, in varying degrees, the power of dedifferentiation and new speciali-
zation. The capacity for specialization in different directions is universally present in the
cells of embryos or of larvae, and sometimes throughout the youthful stages. But there
is a time in ontogeny when further specialization of cells involves the loss of capacity for any
new differentiation; this is the period at which germ cells are usually segregated into a distinct
tissue. In the higher organisms this may occur early in ontogeny; in Hydrozoa it never
occurs. — George T. Hargitt.

1686. Harland, S. C. Studies of inheritance in cotton. I. The inheritance of corolla
colour. West Indian Bull. 18: 13-19. 1920. — "It would easily be possible to collect a hundred
or more different pure-breeding West Indian natives." Existence of so large a number of
homozygous biotypes is attributed to long-continued isolation in gardens. Present paper
deals with artificial hybrids of some of the "native" cottons with Upland and with Sea Island.
— Author distinguishes 6 grades of color from white (grade 0) to very deep yellow (grade 5),
all breeding true. Ten different combinations were made among these. "A cross between
any two of the above shades gave an intermediate Fi. In all F2 families, the parental and Fi
color types appeared, but there may have been other intermediate colour forms in addition."
In F« of the most extreme cross (0 X 5) the distribution was: very deep j^ellow. 1 ; intermediate.
72; white, 4. An F3 of this combination was not grown. The combination 0X3 gave in Fj
a ratio of 4.4 yellow : 1.0 white. In F3, 8 families from F2 yellows produced yellows only,
and 27 families from F2 j'ellows produced yellows and whites in an approximately 3 : 1 rati".
but with considerable deviation from this ratio in certain families. Of 11 families from F2
whiles, 6 produced an occasional yellow in F;, but possibility oi ' cross-pollination
as an explanation is not excluded. "If is not without hesitation that, the hypothesis that
n. ciliutn yellow and white constitute an allelomorphic pair is put forward."—?7. //. Kearrn

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 247

16S7. IIakmw, M ary T. Chromosome studies in Tettigidae. II. Chromosomes of BB,
CC, and the hybrid BC in the genus Paratettix. Anal. Etec. 17: 329. Jan., 1920.— Auth
abstract of paper read before t lit- American Society of Zoologists, St. Loui . December 30,
Pip.i. BB, C( !, and their hybrids, B< ' I N *.boi rb, I'M l and L917), are the only forms considered
in this paper. Six pairs and an unpaired chromosome are present in th rria.

In BB tip- chromosomes of the third pair, according to size, taper toward i end and are

bent so as to have almost the appearance of a hook. In CC the chi les of this pair

are nearly oval. In the li\ brid, B< 5, this pair of chromosomes is composed of an oval chromo-

e like that in CC and a bent chromosome like thai in BB. The difference in this homol-
ogous pair of chromosomes is recognized at the end of the growth period previous to the
formal ion of the chromosomes of the first maturat ion spindle.— The diploid number of chromo-
somes appears at the end of the growth period previous to the formation of the bivalent
chromosomes. The bivalent chromosomes are formed by an end-to-end union of the homol-
ogous pairs of these chromosomes before they have been completely condensed. The
chromosome may be recognized at all stages.— In the first maturation division the bivalent
chromosomes separate at the line of union, and the sex chromosome goes to one pole undivided.
The formation of the diploid number of chromosomes at the end of the growth period and the
union, end to end, of their homologous pairs may explain the absence of any crossing-over in
Paratettix— -Mary T. Harman.

1688. Haetwell, Burt L. Thirty-second annual report of the Director of the Rhode
Island Agricultural Experiment Station. Bull. Rhode Island State Coll. 15:69-84. Feb.,
1920. — Brief statement on pages 82, 83, of inheritance studies with poultry and rabbits.—
G. II. Shull.

1689. IIeribert-Nilsson, Nils. Zuwachsgeschwindigkeit der Pollenschlauche und
gestorte Mendelzahlen bei Oenothera Lamarckiana. [Decline in pollen-tube growth and
deranged Mendelian ratios in Oenothera Lamarckiana.] Hereditas 1:41-67. 1 fig. 1920. —
Author has investigated the rate of growth of pollen tubes by cutting off the base of the
style at certain intervals of time after pollination. Temperature influences considerably the
velocity of growth of the pollen-tubes. — Rr (red-nerved) X rr (white-nerved) give the typical
Mendelian segregation 1:1. The inverse cross (rr X Rr) gives too large proportion of red-
nerved plants. The R tubes grow more rapidly than the r tubes, and consequently fertilize a
number of eggs before the r tubes arrive, in 1918 segregations up to 4: 1 were obtained.
Competition between R and r is termed certation, and the cross rr X Rr a certation-cross.
The inverse cross is called an equation-cross. Difference in the influence of temperature be-
tween the R and r tubes is to be interpreted in such a way as to explain the slow growth of the
r tubes becoming relatively still more retarded when the temperature falls. — By self-fertili-
zation of Rr plants we meet besides certation other complications. All the red-nerved plants
are heterozygous, Rr. The combination RR can not be produced. Consequently a segre-
gation in the ratio 2 Rr: 1 rr is to be expected. However, the author obtained too many Rr
plants. No elimination of RR zygotes takes place, but there is a repulsion between the R
gametes, a "prohibition." All the R eggs are fertilized by r pollen. The compensation of
the R pollen with r pollen in the fertilization of the R eggs receives the name "substitution."
Thus the ratio 2 Rr -f 1 rR to 1 rr is obtained; that is, the segregation 3: 1. By cooperation
of certation the segregation is found to be 6: 1 in extreme cases. The irregular segregation
stated by de Vries can be explained by the complications characteristic of the factor R.
The more Oenothera Lamarckiana is examined, the more the variability proves itself not to
be a phenomenon sui generis. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1690. Heribert-Nilsson, N. [German rev. of: von Hofsten, N. Arftlichetslara.
[Genetics.] 17 X 26 cm., viii + 506 p., 191 fig., 1 colored pi. P. A. Norstedt & Soners forlag:
Stockholm. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2208.)] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
24:98. Aug., 1920.

248 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1691. Herlant, Maurice. L'acide carbonique comme agent de parthenogenese experi-
mentale chez l'oursin (Paracentrotus). [Carbonic acid as an agent of experimental partheno-
genesis in the sea-urchin (Paracentrotus).] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 188-190. 1920.

1692. Hertwig, Gunther. Das Schicksal des vaterlichen Chromatins im Kreuzungs-
experiment. [The fate of paternal chromatin in the crossing experiment.] Arch. Mikrosk.
Anat. 94: 28S-302. 1 fig. July 15, 1920.

1693. Hertwig, Oscar. Allgemeine Biologie. [General biology.] 5th ed., improved and
enlarged, 8vo., xvi + 800 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920.

1694. Hertwig, Paula. Abweichende Form der Parthenogenese bei einer Mutation von
Rhabditis pellio. Eine experimentell cytologische Untersuchung. [Aberrant form of partheno-
genesis in a mutation of Rhabditis pellio. An experimental cytological study.] Arch. Mikros.
Anat. 94:303-337. 1920.

1695. Hertwig, Paula. Haploide und diploide parthenogenese. [Haploid and diploid
parthenogenesis.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 145-174. April-May, 1920. — Summary of known facts
concerning maturation and development in artificial and physiological parthenogenesis.
Stimuli to artificial parthenogenesis are classed as chemical, physical, and biological. Time
at which stimulation acts determines, in different material, whether development starts with
diploid or haploid number of chromosomes. As a rule number is haploid. Later, from nat-
ural or artificial causes, it may become diploid. Specific examples are given, and literature
is cited. Development of artificially parthenogenetic eggs is mostly of short duration.
Author points out that complete development in presence of only haploid number of chromo-
somes has so far proven impossible. Defect is hardly in mere number of chromosomes, but
perhaps in interrelation of nucleus, protoplasm, and yolk. It is questionable whether nor-
mal development can occur even in physiological parthenogenesis in presence of haploid
number of chromosomes. Evidence at hand does not prove that it can. — Cases are mentioned
in which natural parthenogenesis occurs in animals in absence of reduction, and comparable
phenonena in plants are described. In no case in plants has development occurred with
haploid nuclei in a generation normally diploid. In animals of Hymenopteran type, egg
undergoes normal reduction whether it later develops parthenogenetically or is fertilized,
and sex depends on presence or absence of fertilization. In some of those developing parthe-
nogenetically with haploid nuclei, number of chromosomes is later doubled, at least in somatic
cells. Cytology of honey bee is critically considered in this connection. — A. Franklin Shull.

1696. Hoche, Leon, and Rene Morlot. Evolution parthenogenetique de l'ovule dans
l'atrophie de follicule a l'etat de maturite. [Parthenogenetic development of the egg to maturity
in a case of atrophy of the follicle.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 1152-1154. July, 1920.

1697. Hromadko, J. Variabilitat der Nachkommenschaft derselben Futterriibenmutter
in der 1. Generation. [The variability of progenies of the same mother beet in the first genera-
tion.] Zeitschr. Zuckerindus. Bohmen 42: 581-601. 1918.

1698. Jollos, Victor. Experimentelle Vererbungsstudien in Infusorien. [Experimen-
tal studies of heredity in Infusoria.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 77-79. Aug.,
1920.

1699. Jones, D. F. Selective ferti'ization in pollen mixtures. Biol. Bull. 38:251-289.
May, 1920. — By the use of the ingenious system of reciprocal crosses the author shows
decisively that in Zea mays self-fertilization, although detrimental to the development of the
progeny, is favored at the expense of cross-fertilization. Using the increase in the percentage
of the cross-pollinated seeds as an indication of the germinal differences between the parents,
the author calculated the correlation coefficient between the percentage of increase and the
percentage of deviation in favor of self-fertilization, and found it to be 0.496 ± 0.093. He
concluded from this coefficient that, "In proportion as the cross-fertilization benefits the

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 249

immediate progeny in its development the less effective is thai pollen in ilishing tlie

union." The experiments with maize involved the classifical ion of 63,1 ng from

the use of 22 pollen mixtures, obtained from twelve strains. Of the 20 m xtures which were
analyzed on seed characters alone, 17 showed selective fertilization in favor of the plant's
own pollen, while three of the mixtures showed the opposite effect. S milar results were
obtained in Lycopersicinn esculentum, but the data were not so extensive. The author attrib-
utes the differential fertilization to the more rapid growth of pollen tubes in the stigmas of
the parent plant and BUggests anaphylaxis as a possible cause of the selective action. — J //.
Ki mpton.

1700. Jones, D. F. Selective fertilization in pollen mixtures. Proc. Nat on. Aca 1.
Sci. IT. S. 6: 66-70. Feb., 1920.— Pollen of A and B types of corn was thoroughly mixed and
applied to silks of both A and B. Resulting ears showed mixtures of hybrid and self-fertilized
seed, distinguishable by endosperm characters. Ratio of sclfed to crossed seeds on A ears
should have had same value as ratio of crossed to selfed on B, provided no selective pollina-
tion occurred. In 20 extensive experiments, results of 3 showed foreign pollen favored 17
showed own pollen favored, 15 of which were unquestionably significant. Less extensive
exper ments on tomato gave similar but not conconclusive results. Results were surprising
in view of advantages of hybrid vigor. It was further shown that the wider the cross, the
more was own pollen favored; "in proportion as the cross-fertilization benefits the progeny,
the less effective are the germ cells in accomplishing fertilization." Results were the same
irrespective of vigor or heterozygosity of parents used. Idea is refuted that union of d verse
sexual elements stimulates growth through upsetting balance in protoplasm; instead, hybrid
vigor is explained on basis of pure inheritance. Other things being equal, it is homogeneity
in protoplasmic structure that favors highest developmental efficiency. — Merle C. Coulter.

1701. Jones, D. F. [Rev. of: Coulter, John M., and Merle C. Coulter. Plant
genetics. 13X19 cm., ix + 214 p., 40 fig. Univ. Ch cago Press: Chicago. July, 1918.
(See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 395.)] Science 48: 346-347. Oct. 4, 1918.

1702. Just, Gunther. Der Nachweis von Mendel-Zahlen beim Formen mit nisdriger
Nachkommenzahl. Eine empirische Priifung der Geschwister- und Probandenmethode V/eis-
bergs auf Grund von Kreuzungsversuchen mit Drosophila ampelophila Low. [The determina-
tion of Mendelian ratios in forms with low number of offspring. An empirica test of Weis-
berg's methods on the basis of crossing experiments with Drosophila ampelophila Low.' Arch.
Mikros. Anat. 94:604-652. 1920.

1703. Kalt, B. Der Begr'ff "Origina'saatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der Ziich-
tungsanerkennung. [The concept "original seed" and its application in the recognition of
breeding.' Fuhlings Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1919: 460-471. 1919.

1704. Kammerer, Paul. Dunkeltiere im Licht und Lichttiere im Dunke'.. | Darkness
animals in light and light animals in darkness.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 28-35. 1920.

1705. Kiessling, L. 11. Bericht der bayrischen Landessaatzuchtanstalt in We hen-
stephan. (1914-1918). [11th report of the Bavarian Seed-breeding Institution at Weihen-
stephan (1914-1918). Landw. Jahrb. f. Bayern 1919: 1-178. 1919.— General report for years
1914-1918 presented under seven following headings: (1) History of institution, in connection
with which is given picture of C. Kraus, founder. (2) Researches of institution: accounts
of breeding work presented here and of agreements concerning delivery of pedigreed seed-
stock for increase or further breeding. (3) Extension work and publications. (4) Bavarian
seed-breeding localities; given here are principles governing creation of increase stations.
(5) Section on promotion of seed-growing, where statistics on variety classification at cer-
tain places and where discussion of stations for culture of potato and vegetable seeds are
given. (6) Agricultural promotion work. (7) Associational work of district agricultural
societies, of Bavarian Seed-breeding Union and of Beet ("Ruben") Breeding Union. [Pre-
pared from anonymous review in Zeitsohr. Pflanzcnzacht. 7: 213-214. June 1920.]— J. P.
Kelly.

250 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1706. Kiessling, L. C. Kraus. Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6:222-225. Dec, 1918.

1707. Kiessling, L. Die Leistung der Wintergerste und deren ziichterische Beeinflus-
sung. [The yield of winter barley and its modification by breeding.] Illustr. Landw. Zeit.
1919: 310-311. 1919.— Author reviews the many varieties of two- and four- rowed barleys and
indicates aims of breeding; namely, to secure as short-lived a condition as possible without
depression of yield, to maintain high yield and power to stand up under heavy nitrogen fer-
tilization, and to produce large full grains with low albuminous content and a minimum
chaff. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 126. Dec. 1919.] — /. P.
Kelly.

1708. Killer, J. Uber die Umziichtung reiner Linien von Winterweizen in Sommer-
weizen. [Concerning the changing-over of pure lines of winter wheat into spring wheat.] Jour.
Landw. 67: 59-62. 1919. — With pure lines of winter wheat experiments were conducted to
reveal spring wheat possibilities. All Bordeaux wheats serve as either summer or winter
cereals. All tested thick-headed wheats with spring sowing send up shoots and show more or
less development of heads but decided "Landwinterweizen" do not send up shoots with such
sowing. Details of experiments are not given. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflan-
zenzucht. 7: 126. Dec. 1919.]— J. P. Kelly.

1709. Klatt, Berthold. Keimdriisentransplantationen beim Schwammspinner. Ein
experimenteller Beitrag zur Frage der Vererbbarkeit erworbener Eigenschaften. [Germ-cell
transplantation in Lymantria. An experimental contribution to the question of inheritance of
acquired characters.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 1-50. Dec, 1919. — A full
description is given of the colors and external features of the normal gypsy-moth larva, of a
yellow-spotted race supposed to be the product of a cross between L. japonica and L. dispar,
and of a dorsally black-banded strain. Yellow-spotted is probably dominant to normal,
but not discontinuous from it, and probably dependent upon multiple factors; black is domi-
nant to non-black (yellow or normal), from which it is discontinuous. Gonads of recessive
were transplanted into a dominant, which was mated later with a recessive to ascertain
whether period of 8-9 weeks in body of the dominant would affect the offspring, endowing
them with any characteristics of the dominant; e.g., ovary of normal transplanted into body of
black-banded female after removal of ovaries, mated with non-black, yellow c? gave 7c? d1,
7 9 9, "first class" yellow. In more than 400 larvae from eggs matured in the body of a foster
mother, not one showed any modification in the direction of the special characteristics of
the foster parent. However, eggs that matured in the body of a female of the black race par-
took of the superior vigor of that race, shown by rapid growth and large size. — An average
of 7-8 per cent of offspring from 9 9 subject to operation showed loss of one or several median
or lateral tubercles in one or more segments, excluding the first and last; but 3 or 4 control
broods showed no such loss. Removal of certain tubercles from various segments to see if
in the next year the offspring of this individual would lack the corresponding tubercles in
four broods gave negative results; but in a fifth, and subsequently three other broods from
mothers that had not been operated upon, a similar though less marked defect was seen.
It is suggested that a general injury to determinants for the development of tubercles may
have occurred, due to difficulties in metabolism during healing, or due, in case of defect in
normal control broods, to bacterial disease in the brood of the previous year. There was
no evidence of inheritance of mutilations. A discussion of the experiments of Harms,
Magnus, Guthrie, Kammerer, and Castle and Phillips is given. — /. H. Gerould.

1710. Kottur, G. L. An improved type of cotton for the southern Maratha country (Bom-
bay Presidency, India). Agric Jour. India 14: 155-167. 1 pi. 1919. — Gossypium herbaceum
predominates in this region. This variety shows two types — erect and bushy. Test shows
superiority in yield of erect type. By unit selection a variety is grown that bears more and
has lint of greater value. — Ganda Singh Cheema.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 251

1711. Kroon, H. M., and G. M. van der Plank. De inschrijving van paarden In de
stamboeken. [Description of horses in the pedigree books.] Genetica 2 : 347-364. July, 1920.

1712. Kuiper, K., Jr. Steriele Soortsbastaarden. [Sterile species hybrids.] Genetica
2:289-299. 6 fig. July, 1920.

1713. Lehmann, E. Reply to Renner's explanation. Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 288. June,
1920. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1112.]

1714. Lichtenstern, R. Bisherige Erfolge der Hodentransplantation beim Menschen.
[Results thus far achieved by the transplantation of testes in man.] Jahreskurse f. iirztliche
Fortb. April, 1920. [Cited from review by Benders, Genetica 2:374-375, July, 1920. See
also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1634.]

1715. Lotsy, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Bartsch, P. Experiments in the breeding of Cerions.
Dept. Marine Biology, Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 282. 55 p., 59 pi. Washington,
1920. Genetica 2 : 366-367. July, 1920.

1716. Lotsy, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: von Wettstein, Fritz. Vererbungserscheinungen
und Systematik bei Haplonten und Diplohaplonten im Pflanzenreich. (Genetical phenomena
and taxonomy in haplonts and diplohaplonts in the vegetable kingdom.) Zeitschr. indukt.
Abstamm. Vererb. 21 : 233-246. Nov., 1919.] Genetica 2 : 379-384. July, 1920.

1717. Lundborg, H. Hereditary transmission of genotypical deaf-mutism. Hereditas
1:35-40. 1920. — Acquired deaf-mutism may be both of intra- and extra-uter'ne orgin.
Consequently "congenital deafness" is not always of an inheritable nature. Acquired deaf-
mutism is far more common than inheritable deaf-mutism. The treatise of Bergh is criti-
cized. Author rejects the hypothesis of Plate that deaf-mutism is a dihybrid character.
There is every probability, as the author suggested in 1912, that deaf-mutism is transmitted
as a simple Mendelian factor. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1718. Lynch, R. Irwin. Hybrid cestrums. Gard. Chron. 67: 220. May 1, 1920.—
Relates to hybridizing of Ceslrum elegans (fem.) with C. Parqui, with view to secure bright-
ness of flower with hardiness. Male parent stated to be almost absolutely dominant. —
J. Marion Shull.

1719. Mandekic, V. Nesljectivonje nikih divjstore Koet Kukuruza. [Inheritance of
several characters in maize.1 [Tcheckish.] Gospodarska smotra 1918: 5-8. 1918. — Length
and other ear characteristics for different lines are hereditary. Correlations of ear length
with other traits were observed. Only in pure lines are traits transmitted well, and in selec-
tions from groups that are not pure lines transmission is uncertain. [From author's abstract
in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 40-42. June, 1919.]—/. P. Kelly.

1720. Mandekic, V. Prilog gojidbi Kukuruza. [Contributions to the breeding of maize.
[Tcheckish.] Gospodarska smotra 1918: 1-4. 1918. — Croatian round maize was bred at
Krizevci experimental farms following Williams's method. Experimentation on effects of
self- and cross-pollination gave results similar to those of Shull and East. Lessened vigor
on inbreeding is explained as due to increased homozygosity. [From author's abstract in
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:42-43. June, 1919.]—/. P. Kelly.

1721. Masui, Kiyoshi. The spermatogenesis of domestic mammals. I. The spermato-
genesis of the horse (Equus caballus). Jour. Coll. Agric. Tokyo Imperial Univ. 3: 357-376.
S pi., 2 fig. 1919. — Although it is impossible accurately to count the chromosomes of the
spermatogonial metaphase, many symmetrical pairs of chromosomes are distinguishable.
The resting nucleus of the primary spermatocyte contains a large chromatic nucleolus which
persists throughout the growth stages and synapsis. A conspicuous idiosome also exists
in the primary spermatocyte. At the division of the primary spermatocyte, which is reduc-

252 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

ing and heterotypic, eighteen bivalent chromosomes and one accessory are present. Conju-
gation is probably parasynaptic. The accessory chromosome passes undivided to one pole,
thus yielding two types of secondary spermatocytes. The division of the chromosomes,
including the accessor}', in secondary spermatocytes is equal and homotypic. Occasionally,
incomplete fusion of two adjacent chromosomes occurs, thus reducing the count. — The
centrosome behaves much as it does in man, as described by Meves. A chromatoid cor-
puscle appears during the growth stage, but is probably cast off from the spermatozoon in a
mass of cytoplasm. Mitochondria appear during the postsynaptic stage. Most of them
mass and give rise to a body resembling the "Nebenkern" in insects. Ultimately this mass
comes to occupy the middle part of the spermatozoon. — M. F. Guyer.

1722. Mastti, Kiyoshi. The spermatogenesis of domestic mammals. II. The spermato-
genesis of cattle (Bos taurus). Jour. Coll. Agric. Tokyo Imperial Univ. 3: 377-403. 3 pi.,
1 fig. 1919. — Amitotic nuclear divisions (not followed by division of the cell-body) occur more
frequently in the spermatogonia of embryos and of very young animals than do mitotic divi-
sions. Such amitosis is regarded as characteristic of degenerating cells which are destined to
supply nutriment to the germ cells. The resting nuclei of both penultimate and ultimate
spermatogonia are characterized by one large nucleolus and a small chromatin mass. The
spermatogonial number of chromosomes is thirty-three. Conjugation is probably telo-
synaptic. Sixteen bivalent and one univalent (the accessory) chromosomes result. The first
spermatocyte division is reducing. The accessory passes undivided to one pole. The
second division, which includes the accessory, is a simple equation-division. The chromatin
nucleolus, visible through the growth period and the reduction division, is identified as the
accessory chromosome. — Incomplete fusion of adjacent chromosomes sometimes occurs in
the secondary spermatocytes; so that only nine or ten chromosomes can be counted in such
cells. Numerous mitochondrial granules appear during the growth period and thereafter
behave similarly to those of the horse. A chromatoid corpuscle is absent or present infre-
quently. The centrosome of the spermatid divides, and one of the resulting centrosomes
comes to lie close to the nucleus — the other a short distance behind it. The axial filament
arises from the latter. The idiosome first appears during the growth stage. In the spermatid
it seems to have no connection with the centrosome. — M. F. Guyer.

1723. Meek, C. F. U. Chromosome dimensions. Proc. Roy. Soc. London 91: 157-165.
1920. — Correlation between chromosomes and somatic complexity of animals. Author
reviews his own conclusions of 1912 and those of Farmer and Digby, 1914. He also presents
additional observations, made without measurements, upon chromosome length, diameter,
and total chromatin volume in spermatogonial and spermatocyte complexes of several species
of widely separated groups. His final conclusions are that there is no correlation between
degree of somatic complexity of animals and their chromosome number, length, or diameter,
nor with the total chromatin volume of their complexes. — C. L. Parmenter.

1724. Metz, C. W. Observations on the sterility of mutant hybrids in Drosophila virilis.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6:421-423. July, 1920.— Three sex-linked and probably
allelomorphic mutants in Drosophila virilis — rugose, glazed, and wax (all affecting the eyes) —
have been shown to form a graded series in respect to their morphological characteristics
and in respect to fertility, the females of the last two being sterile. In any hybrid involving
rugose and either of the others, the first named mutant is dominant as to somatic manifes-
tations; but the females are sterile like the glazed or wax females. Thus the order of domi-
nance of somatic manifestations is the one given, but the reverse is true of fertility. Pre-
viously rugose and glazed were spoken of as incompatible, but this was before the sterility of
glazed females was noted. — H. H. Plough.

1725. Metz, Charles W. The arrangement of genes in Drosophila virilis. Proc. Nation.
Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6: 164-166. April, 1920.— In connection with Castle's three-dimensional
model of the sex-linked genes of Drosophila virilis from data of Metz, certain predictions were
made as to the probable location of the genes for frayed, hairy, rugose and glazed; and it was

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 253

suggested that these predictions be tested by actual breeding work. This is al present imp
sible since two of t be stocks — frayed and hairy have been losl , and t be bybrids of rugose and
glazed are sterile. Certain similar cases are cited which show 1 lmt ( !a i lc\- predict ions would
probably be fulfilled without prov ing the hypot.hes is, however; for the results also fit the linear
hypothesis. In the one case double cross-overs are aol counted, in the other casetheyare. —
//. //. Plough.

1720. Meves, Friedrich. Eine neue Stiitze fiir die Plastosomentheorie der Vererbung.
[A new support for the plastosome theory of heredity.] Anat. Anz. 50: 551-557. 2 fig. April.

mis.

1727. Mitscherlich, Eilh. Alfred. Uber kiinstliche Wunderahrenbildung. [The
artificial production of abnormal heads of cereals.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 101-109. 8 fig.
Dec., 1919. — All rye plants grown in water culture under greenhouse conditions produced
an abnormality in the first spike to appear. The remaining spikes were normal. One wheat
plant behaved similarly. In a favorable year on well manured soil a rye plant was observed
with condensation of spikelets on "spindle end" of all spikes. Seed from this plant gave
progeny with normal spikes. — Fred Griffee.

1728. Moore, Carl R. The production of artificial hermaphrodites in mammals. Sci-
ence 52: 179-1S2. Aug. 20, 1920. — A preliminary report of the author's successful trans-
plantation of heterologous gonads into hemicastrated rats. — H. D. Goodale.

1729. Mossman, J. P. Hybridization and raising of seedling orchids. Florists' Exch. 49:
907, 932. April 17, 1920. — In extended account of personal experience in growing seedling
orchids it is stated that Catleya gigas crossed with C. Dowiana results in yellow veins in
throat and intensified color of entire flower; with C. aurea, gives veining but not intensified
color of sepals and petals. Used with a white flower C. Dowiana always puts a trace of rose
color through the hybrid. Catleya aurea has no influence on a white flower, but does impart
its veining and some of its rich color to lip of offspring. Author uses C. Dowiana or C. aurea
as seed-parent in the belief that the character of the female always predominates. Secondary
crosses of Brasso-Catleyas onto Catleya give more color than the primary crosses. Many
plants do not survive exhaustion of seed production. — J. Marion Shull.

1730. Nakahara, Waro. Side-to-side versus end-to-end conjugation of chromosomes
in relation to crossing-over. Science 52 : 82-84. July 23, 1920. — The stone-fly, Perla immar-
ginata Say, is exceptionally fitted for chromosome studies since it has only five pairs of chromo-
somes, each pair structurally differentiated from all others. In the prophase of the first sper-
matocyte division, homologous chromosomes are connected to each other telosynaptically in
the spireme; later they bend toward each other at the synaptic point and become reunited
parasynaptically before metaphase. Contrary to the general belief, telosynapsis does offer
an opportunity for interchange between chromosomes (crossing-over) ; interchange occurs at
the late thick stage only. End-to-end conjugation simply restricts the stage in which such
an opportunity is offered. — Bertram G. Smith.

1731. Nilsson-Ehle, H. Uber Resistenz gegen Heterodera schachtii bei gewissen Ger-
sten-Sorten, ihre Vererbungsweise und Bedeutung fiir die Praxis. [On resistance to Hetero-
dera schachtii in certain varieties of barley, its method of inheritance and significance for
agricultural practice.] Hereditas 1: 1-34. 4 fig. 1920.— Unlike other kinds of cereals, there
is striking difference between different sorts of barley concerning the resistance against
attacks of Heterodera schachtii. Some sorts of barley are quite immune. By crossing between
an immune sort and a susceptible one, immunity dominates. In F2 nad F3 a segregation
takes place that at least in some cases seems to be monohybrid. For the barley itself, the
attacks of this nematode are rather unimportant. If, however, oats or wheat are cultivated
in a field which has been planted before with infested barley, these cereals suffer in a great
degree from the increased number of nematodes in the soil. For this reason it is of a great
practical importance to use minune kinds of barley, thus reducing the number of these worms.

254 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

A field with plots of immune and susceptible kinds of barley was the following year planted
with a single kind of oats. This plantation developed itself very differently at different
spots, which corresponded in a surprising degree to the barley plots of the previous year. —
K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1732. Nonidez, Jose F. The meiotic phenomena in the spermatogenesis of Blaps, with
special reference to the X-complex. Jour. Morph. 34: 69-117. 6 pi., 2 diagrams. June 20,
1920. — In the spermatogonial mitoses of B. lusitanica thirty-five chromosomes occur, three
of which are remarkably large. During synapsis the three large chromosomes and two of the
smaller unite to form the X-complex, while the other chromosomes pair to form fifteen biva-
lents. Of the large chromosomes, two that appear to be homologous are termed M-chromo-
somes, while the third corresponds to the accessory or X-chromosome of other forms. In the
first maturation mitosis the X-complex undergoes dissociation, four chromosomes — two large
and two small — passing to one cell, while the third large chromosome — an M-chromosome —
enters the other. The final result is the production of two kinds of spermatozoa; one with
nineteen chromosomes, the other with only sixteen. The X-complex seems to represent an
intermediate condition between complexes made up exclusively of sex chromosomes and
those originated by the linkage of a sex chromosome with a pair of ordinary chromosomes. —
Bertram G. Smith.

1733. Oberstein, O. Uber das Vorkommen echter Knospenvariationen bei pommerschen
und anderen Kartoffelsorten. [Occurrence of true bud-variation in Pomeranian and other
varieties of potatoes.] Kartoffelbau 1919, No. 2 and Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1919:560-561.
1 pi. 1919. — Author dissents from views that bud variations are so uncommon as to warrant
adverse judgment on a variety when the number of deviating plants per hectare reaches four.
He emphasizes frequent occurrence of bud variations, at least in some varieties. Such fre-
quency should be proven before being accepted by seed experts. A Silesian agricultural
society passes judgment against such sorts only when number of plants deviating in flower
color exceeds 5 per cent. A standard of proof for existence of this variability is described.
Illustrative cases observed by author in several varieties are cited. [From anonymous
review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 135. Dec., 1919.] — J. P. Kelly.

1734. Painter, Theophiltjs S. The spermatogenesis of Anolis carolinensis. Anat. Rec.
17: 328. Jan., 1920. — Author's abstract of paper read before the American Society of Zoolo-
gists, St. Louis, December 30, 1919.— The spermatogenesis of reptiles has not received the
attention of cytologists heretofore, although the position of the group in the Vertebrate
Series and especially the peculiar behavior of the chromosomes as reported for the birds
and mammals, make such a study very desirable. The author has been making a comparative
study of the spermatogenesis of the lizards common near Austin, Texas. Anolis carolinensis,
the 'American chameleon," has yielded preparations in which the chromosomes show with
clear-cut distinctness, and it has been possible to follow practically all of the chromosomes
from the spermatogonial divisions to the formation of the mature sperm. — Two points of
especial interest have been found. — What appears to be a typical "accessory" or sex-chromo-
some is found in the first maturation division; it is bipartite in character and goes undivided
to one pole of the spindle. In the second maturation division, the sex-chromosome, when
present, divides. The sperms are dimorphic as regards the sex-chromosome, half are with,
and half are without, this body. There is no trace of degenerating sperms. — The autosome
complex of Anolis consists of ten large chromosomes and twenty-two smaller bodies. (This
condition, a few large chromosomes and a greater number of small chromosomes, seems typi-
cal for all the lizards studied.) The autosomes behave normally during maturation. In
the first and second spermatocyte divisions, five large and eleven small chromosomes are seen
(in addition to the sex-chromosome), and these divide in the usual way. There is no sign
of a "double reduction," such as has been reported for birds and some mammals. In this
reptile, the chromosomes differ in no respect from what is found in the insects and other
invertebrates. — Theophilus S. Painter.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 255

1735. Philips, A. G. Preferential mating of fowls. Jour. Amor. Assoc. Instr. and
Invest. Poultry Husb. 5:28, 30-32. 6 fig. 1919.— Continuous observations were made on
several flocks, each consisting of one male and 10-28 females. The number of matings per
hen per day ranged from 0-5 and was controlled by her. Under some circumstances a single
male mated more than 40 times in one day. — //. D. Goodale.

17.5G. Poll, Hbinkich. Mischlingsstudien VIII. Pfaumischlinge, nebst einem Beitrag
zur Kern-Erbtrager-Lehre. [Hybridization studies VIII. Peafowl hybrids and a comment
on the theory of nuclear bearers of heredity.] Arch. Mikros. Anat. 94: 365-458. 5 fig. 1920.

1737. Quaglini, Luigi. Cruzamiento y fecundacion artificial de la cafia de aziicar.
[Cross fertilizing sugar cane.] Revist. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3: 44-46. 1 fig. 1920.

1738. Rasmuson, Hans. Uber einige genetische Versuche mit Papaver Rhoeas and
Papaver laevigatum. [Some genetical experiments with Papaver Rhoeas and Papaver laevigatum.
Hereditas 1: 107-114. 1920.— By crossing a Rhoeas-form having divergent hairs at the pe-
duncle with another one having appressed hairs, a segregation in proportion 1 : 1 takes place
in Fi. The divergent hairs might be dominant, to judge from the species hybrid Rhoeas X
dubium. Yellow latex dominates over white. The segregation in Fj ismonohybrid. Green
color of leaves dominates over yellow-green. The segregation in F2 is monohybrid. A gene,
S, produces a black base-spot on the petals; another, W, produces a white spot; S is epistatic
to W. If both genes are missing the sepals will be unspotted. W affects also the flower color,
or is linked with a gene that affects the color. — K, V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1739. Rasmusson, J. Mendelnde Chlorophyllfaktoren bei Allium cepa. [Mendelian
chlorophyll-factors in Allium cepa.] Hereditas 1: 128-134. 1920.— After self-fertilization of
a number of flowers of different commercial sorts in several pedigrees, light green, yellow, and
white plants were to be found, in relative number which rather well agreed with the Mendelian
ones. This is demonstrated by several tables. The complete production of chlorophyll
depends on a suite of factors, of which one factor will take effect only if all previous factors in
the suite are present. At two points of the suite homomeric factors are acting. — K. V. Ossian
Dahlgren.

1740. Raum, J. Ein weiterer Versuch fiber die Vererbung der Samenfarbe bei Rotklee.
[A further study concerning inheritance of seed color in red clover.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht.
7: 149-155. 1920. — Both violet and yellow are generally found on individual seeds of red
clover (Trifolium pratense), but occasionally seeds are either wholly violet or yellow. Colors
are found in various degrees of saturation. Satisfactory Mendelian explanation would
involve theory of multiple factors. Technique necessary for critical study would be very
difficult because of flower size and almost invariable and necessary habit of cross-fertilization.
Solution of problem is of less economic importance than many others not yet worked out in
red clover. Seeds of known color were selected from individual unguarded plants and planted.
Seeds from 36 daughter plants derived from 11 mother plants were compared with mother-
plant seeds. Author states that daughter seeds were similar to mother-plant seeds, but had
a tendency toward increased amount of yellow. Author does not believe, as some suppose,
that seed color is correlated with earliness. — L. R. Waldron.

1741. Raum, S. Beitrage zur Praxis der Grassamenerzeugung und des Grassamenbaues.
[Contributions to the practice of grass-seed production and grass-seed culture.] Illustr.
Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1920: 25-26. 1920. — Some results have already been secured in breeding
of grasses at Weihenstephan. Two forms of florin grass differing in times of development were
obtained. In meadow panicle, narrow- and broad-leaved forms occurred in population.
A series of types was isolated in meadow foxtail grass. In red fescue-grass a form occurred
well supplied with runners, and a similar thing was seen in meadow fescue. Golden oats of
Bohemian and Tyrolian origin revealed few differences. In French ray-grass, only minute
differences were observable, and hereditary maintenance of these was difficult. A similar

256 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

difficulty of preservation arose among forms of orchard-grass. Few differences were seen in
timothy. Several types of English ray-grass were observed, but little is known of their
genetical behavior. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 217. June,
1920.]— J. P. Kelly.

1742. Raum, S. Zur Kenntnis des italienischen Raygrases unter besonderer Beriich-
sichtigung seiner Ziichtung. [Italian ray-grass with special reference to its breeding.] Fiih-
lings Landw. 1920 : 28-37. 1920. — Great differences were present in this grass as regards
length of life. Breeding at Weihenstephan of Lolium italicum comprised originally 64 indi-
vidual selections; two lines were finally retained — namely, No. 36, bearded, and No. 2, rather
beardless. The selected lines bloomed near each other, and after three selections there was
neither pure beardedness nor pure beardlessness. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 7:217. June, 1920.]— J. P. Kelly.

1743. Renner, Otto. Mendelsche Spaltung und chemische Gleichgewicht. [Mende-
lian splitting and chemical equilibrium.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 26S-277. June, 1920.— See also
Bot Absts. 6, Entries 1099, 1713, 1744.

1744. Renner, O. Zur Richtigstellung. [By way of explanation.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40:
287. June, 1920. See preceding Entry 1743.

1745. Roberts, Herbert F. The relation of protein content to variety types in American
wheat. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 121-134. May, 1920.— General discussion of the relation of
protein content in wheat to environmental conditions and to varieties. Mostly a survey
of the data from experimenters dealing with this subject. Long period between time of
flowering and time of ripening seed favors production of soft kernels with low protein content.
Water supply influences protein content to a greater extent than any other edaphic factor.
From data submitted, it is shown that the protein content of wheat rises as we pass from
moist eastern regions to the drier portions of the western states. Varietal differences do
exist which manifest themselves in higher protein content when grown along with other
varieties. A variety may have a higher standard deviation of protein content than others,
which indicates that this variety is not pure, or that it has a wide range of physiological
adaptation. The wheat varieties most widely grown are those which have the widest varia-
bility with respect to protein content. In breeding for general purposes, wheat strains
should be sought which show the widest variability in protein content; but in breeding for a
limited locality, wheat with a maximum protein content and with the least possible variation
in protein content should be sought. A bibliography of twelve citations is attached. —
W. E. Bryan.

1746. Robertson, W. R. B. The presence of a longitudinal split in chromosomes prior to
their union in parasynapsis. Anat. Rec. 17:329. Jan., 1920.— Author's abstract of paper
read before the American Society of Zoologists, St. Louis, December 30, 1919.— It is usu-
ally stated in accounts of the synapsis stages that, following the telophases of the last sperma-
togonial division, a series of changes takes place which results eventually in the formation of
fine single threads (leptotene stage) that pair in the succeeding diplotene. The chromosomes
of Tettigidae, of which there are thirteen, exhibit a longitudinal split in each member during
the telophase and post-telophase stages previous to parasynapsis. Following the stages in
which there are thirteen split chromosomes come those in which the twelve autosomes of the
group pair side by side to form six threads, each of which is probably a four-strand structure —
a future tetrad. The plan of this presynapsis split in the members of a pair probably coincides
to a large extent with one of the planes of division in the succeeding tetrad. — The telophases
of somatic mitoses likewise show their chromosomes to be split before entering the so-
called resting condition. The split in a telophase chromosome of either a somatic or sperma-
togonia! cell-division probably dates to the resting period previous to the division just being
completed.— The presynapsis splitting of each conjugating chromosome may account for the
peculiar twisting. sometimes visible in. the two strands of one of the conjugants as compared
with those of the other in long or V-shaped tetrads. The possibility of such independent
twisting may have something to do with mechanics of "crossing-over." — W. R. B. Robertson.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 257

1747. Roffo, A. H. Sur le role du facteur race dans la transmission du cancer chez le rat.
Transformation progressive d'une race non receptive. [On the role of the race factor in the
transmission of cancer in the rat. Progressive transformation of a non-receptive race into a
receptive one.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83:968 970. 1920. Two races of while rats differ
in reaction to implants of various tumors which originated in one of them (A). Tumors
were of different histological types. Race A showed growths in 95 100 per cent implanted;
Race 15 in 5 per cent; Fi hybrids between these races, |."> per cent; third generation hybrids,
60 per cent. Tumor grown in Race B gave 30 per cent positive. After') month-; serial inocu-
lation gave 80 per cent. Cross between albino and wild (Mus decumanus) gave albinos in F|.
In next generation albinos, black and white, and black. Evidence for difference in suscepti-
bility correlated with color, was found in small numbers of animals. Tumor from hybrid gen-
eration introduced into 10 wild black rats grew slowly in one. After seven passages it grew
in 70 per cent (numbers not given). Tumor had then attained virulence and rate of growth
equal to control albinos. — C. C. Little.

1748. Rosenheim, Otto. Observations on Anthocyanins. I. The anthocyanins of the
young leaves of the grape vine. Biochem. Jour. 14: 178-188. Fig. 1. 1920.

1749. Saunders, E. R. Heredity. Sci. Monthly 1: 436^45. 1920.— Extracts from
an address at the Cardiff Meeting of the British A. A. S— History of attempts to analyze
heredity begins with Galton and Pearson. — The effect of results due to two or more
factors are suspected when ratios run high.— We can not infer from the genetic analysis of
one type that the factorial relations are the same for the corresponding character in
another. No sharp line of distinction can be drawn between the behavior of varietal and
specific features. — L. Pace.

1750. Schiemann, E. [German rev. of : White, O. E. Inheritance studies in Pisum. I.
Amer. Nat. 50:530-547. 1916. Idem. II. The present state of knowledge of heredity and
variation in peas. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 56:487-588. 1917; Idem. III. The inheritance
of height in peas. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 17: 316-322. June 10, 1918; [See Bot. Absts. 1,
Entry 250.] Idem. IV. Interrelation of the genetic factors of Pisum. Jour. Agric. Res. 11:
167-190. 1917.] Zeitschr. indukt. Asbtamm. Vererb. 24:98-101. Aug., 1920.

1751. Schleip. [German rev. of: Herbst, K. Beitrage zur Entwicklungsphysiologie der
Farbung und Zeichnung der Tiere. 1. Der Einfluss gelber, weisser und schwarzer TJmgebung
auf die Zeichnung von Salamandra maculosa. (Contribution to the physiology of development
of the color and color-pattern animals. 1. The influence of yellow and black surroundings
on the color pattern of Salamandra maculosa.) Abhandl. Heidelberger Akad. Wiss. Math.-
Naturwiss. 1919.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb; 24: 101-103. Aug., 1920.

1752. Schubart, P. Blutauffrischung in der Zuckerriibensamenzucht. [Freshening the
blood in sugar-beet breeding.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 209-215. Dec, 1918.

1753. Schultz, Walter. Bemerkung zur Arbeit von Knud Sand iiber experimentellen
Hermaphroditismus. [Comment on the work of Knud Sand on experimental hermaphroditism.]
Pfli'igers Arch. f. d. ges. Physiol. 179: 217-218. 1920.

1754. Scott, Will. A sex intergrade pig, which resembles a free-martin. Anat. Rec.
17:323. Jan., 1920.— Author's abstract of paper read before American Society of Zoolo-
gists, St. Louis, December 30, 1919.— This pig is full term and has the external genitalia of a
female. In addition, a scrotum is developed. Internally a vagina and uterus are formed, but
the gonad has migrated and degenerated. The position of the ducts has been modified correl-
ative to that of the gonad. — Will Scott.

1755. Siemens, Hermann Werner. Uber einige immer wiederkehrende Missverstand-
nisse der Entwicklungslehre. [On several always-recurring misunderstandings in genetics.]
Med. Klin. 16: 12-16. 1920.

258 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1756. Siemens. [German rev. of: Gasstjl, R. Eine durch Generationen pravalierende
symmetrische Fingerkontratur. (A symmetrical contraction of the fingers prevailing through
generations.) Deutsch. med. Wochenschr. 44:1197-1198. 2 fig. 1918. [See Bot. Absts. 5,
Entry 367.] Idem. Nachtrag zu meiner Mitteilung iiber "Eine durch Generationen prava-
lierende symmetrische Fingerkontratur." (Supplement to my contribution on a symmetrical
contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.) Deutsch. med. Wochenschr. 44:
1450. 1918.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 103-104. Aug., 1920.

1757. Siemens. [German rev. of: Zweig, Ludwig. Uber einen Fall von Epidermolysis
bullosa hereditaria. (On a case of epidermolysis bullosa .hereditaria.) Arch. Dermatologie
u. Syphilis 120: 1-6. 19.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 104. Aug., 1920.

1758. Sirks, M. J. Hereditas, genetiskt arkiv utgivet av mendelska sallskapet i Lund.
(Hereditas, genetic archive published by the Mendelian Society of Lund.) Vol. 1, Haft 1.
Berlingska Boktryckeriet: Lund, 1920.] Genetica 2:373. July, 1920. — Notice and review
of the first number of new Swedish genetical journal, Hereditas. — G. H. Shull.

1759. Sirks, M. J. Prae-Mendelistische erfelijkheidstheorieen. [Pre-Mendelian theo-
ries of heredity.] Genetica 2 : 323-346. 3 fig. July, 1920.

1760. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Akerman, A. Speltlike bud-sports in common
wheat. Hereditas 1:116-127. 6 fig. 1920.] Genetica 2:365-366. July, 1920. [See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1565.]

1761. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. In-
breeding and outbreeding. 14 X 21 cm., 285 p., J+6 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919.
(See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571; 5, Entries 337, 1495 and 1607.)] Genetica 2: 370-373. July,
1920.

1762. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Heribert-Nilsson, N. Zuwachsgeschwindigkeit der
pollenschlauche und gestorte Mendelzahlen bei Oenothera Lamarckiana. (Decline in pollen-
tube growth and deranged Mendelian ratios in Oenothera Lamarckiana.) Hereditas 1: 41-67.
1 fig. 1920.] Genetica 2:375-377. July, 1920.

1763. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Rasmtjson, Hans. Uber einige genetische versuche
mit Papaver Rhoeas und Papaver laevigatum. (Some genetical experiments with Papaver
rhoeas and Papaver laevigatum.) Hereditas 1: 107-114. 1920.] Genetics 2:377-378. July,
1920.

1764. Sirks, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Tedin, Hans. The inheritance of flower colour in
Pisum. Hereditas 1 : 68-97. 1 pi, 2 fig. 1920.] Genetica 2: 378-379. July, 1920.

1765. Smith, Bertram G. The individuality of the germ-nuclei during the cleavage of the
egg of Cryptobranchus allegheniensis. Anat. Rec. 17: 323. Jan., 1920. — Author's abstract
of paper read before American Society of Zoologists, St. Louis, December 30, 1919. — In the
fertilization of the egg of Cryptobranchus allegheniensis the germ-nuclei do not fuse, and in
the first cleavage mitosis each gives rise to a separate group of chromosomes, whose descend-
ants pass separately to the daughter-nuclei. During the ensuing resting stage each germ-
nucleus is represented by a structurally distinct vesicle. The separateness of the germ-
nuclei is thus maintained throughout the entire nuclear cycle. Throughout early cleavage
the nuclear divisions are of the same duplex type, and the resting nuclei are always dis-
tinctly double. The genetic continuity of each half of the double nucleus has been clearly
traced to an advanced cleavage stage. During late cleavage and in the early gastrula the
nuclei are still typically double; but certain irregularities which tend to disguise the double
structure occur with increasing frequency, and the segregation of the maternal and paternal
chromatin cannot always be demonstrated. The hypothesis of individuality of the germ-
nuclei as applied to those species in which there is a mingling of maternal and paternal chromo-
somes is discussed, and supported by considerations regarding the persistent individuality of
the chromosomes. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 771.] — Bertram G. Smith.

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 259

1766. Stehlik, W. Bekampfung des Wurzelbrandes bei der Zuckerrube durch ihre
Ziichtung. [Control of sugar beet rootrot by breeding.] Ost-Ung. Zeitschr. Zuckerind. u.
Landw. 47: 1-10. 1918.

1767. Steinach, Eugen, and Paul Kammerer. Klima und Mannbarkeit. [Climate and
sexual maturity.] Anz. Akad. Wiss. Wien 56: 252-257. 1919.

176S. Steinach, E., and P. Kammerer. Klima und Mannbarkeit. [Climate and sexual
maturity.] Archiv Entwicklungsmcch. 46: 391-458. 2 fig. 1920.

1769. Steinach, E. Verjungung durch experimentelle Neubelebung der alternden
pubertatsdriise. [Rejuvenation through experimental revitalization of the senile sex glands.]
Archiv Entwicklungsmcch. Org. 46:557-619. 9 pi., 7 fig. July, 1920.

1770. Stork, Harvey, E. Studies in the genus Taraxacum. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:
199-210. May, 1920. — Taraxacum confertum and T. platycarpum are sexual forms with a dip-
loid chromosome number of 16. T. vulgare, T. erythrospermum, and T. albidum are ooapoga-
mous forms with about twice as many chromosomes as the sexual forms. Considerable varia-
bility is found in the ooapogamous forms. — Karl Sax.

1771. Strasser, Hans. Fragen der Entwicklungsmechanik. Die Vererbung erworbener
Eigenschaften. [Questions of developmental mechanics. Inheritance of acquired characters.]
158 p. Ernst Bircher: Bern and Leipzig. 1920.

1772. Stuart, C. P. Cohen. Die Ziichtung der Teepflanze. [Breeding of the tea plant.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 157-204. 8 fig. June, 1920.

1773. Study, E. Eine lamarckistische Kritik des Darwinismus. [A Lamarckistic cri-
tique of Darwinism.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 33-70. Aug., 1920.

1774. Svestka, Vladislav. Eine seltene Haarbes chaff enheit (hellfarbig, stark gekrau-
selt) in Bohmen. [A rare hair character (light colored, strongly crinkled).] Ceska dermatol.
Jg. 1 : 171-174. 1920. — Describes a 12-year-old girl from region of Pilsen, studied at the clinic
for skin-diseases at the Technical University at Prag. Hair of propositus was 5-6 cm. long of
color No. 25 of E. Fischer's color table, and crinkled as in typical negro hair. No known negro
elements occur in the ancestry, and no other negroid characters are observable in the proposi-
tus. Hair is of typical oval form in cross-section and visibly deficient in pigmentation.
Eye-color is dark blue. Author raises question whether this abnormality accords with
Grimaldi's theory of the introduction of negro elements to Europe at the time of the Flood.
[From abstract by Matouschek in Bericht. u. d. gesamt. Physiol. 2: 22. Aug., 1920.] — G. H.
Shull.

1775. Tayler, Noel. A case of hermaphroditism in a lizard, Lacerta viridis. Proc.
Zool. Soc. London 1918:223-230. 8 fig. Mar., 1919.— The hermaphrodite possessed a com-
plete male reproductive system and, in addition, (1) "spherical ovarian appendages" attached
to the dorso-lateral border of the testes by well-defined stalks, and (2) oviducts "developed
for about a third of their lengths," each having a well developed funnel. Sectioned testicular
tissue was normal. Sections through the stalked outgrowths showed ovarian tissue with
many large ova and smaller ova, the youngest being in the stalks near the testes. Sections
through kidneys revealed in one kidney an embedded mass of almost fully grown ova. Author
figures general arrangement of reproductive system; a section of ovarian tissue; and a section
of kidney, showing contained mass of ova. — A. M. Banta.

1776. Tedin, Hans. The inheritance of flower colour in Pisum. Hereditas 1:68-97.
1 colored pi., 2 fig. 1920. — Purple color is conditioned by three factors. The presumptive
factor for rose adopted from previous investigations is not a simple factor, but is composed
of two factors. One of these, A, gives light purple, and this one is also the real fundamental

260 GENETICS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

factor for the flower color in Pisum arvense. A second factor, B, together with A, gives
rose. A third factor, C, acting together with A, gives violet, while all the three together
give purple. B and C in the absence of A are without effect and the flowers are white. No
difference has been observed between homozygotes and heterozygotes with respect to flower
color. The common white-flowered varieties of peas may usually if not always be aaBBCC.

The hilum of the violet-flowered individuals (A(A)bb C( J) have an abnormal structure,

and lack the tracheal tissue. The conduction of nourishment to the ovules is consequently
made more difficult, and the plants show a very poor development of the seeds. The abnor-
mal structure of the hilum is directly connected with the factor-combination, AC without
B. Tabulations of the results of the crosses occupy 19 pages. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

1777. Thomson, Arthur. The maturation of the human ovum. Jour. Anat. 53: 172-208.
3 pi., 18 fig. April, 1919.— The diameter of the human ovum, including the zona pellucida,
is about 0.11 mm. The ovum is ovoid, not spherical. The zona pellucida sometimes shows
faint concentric lamination, the characteristic radial striation probably occurring only in the
later stages of maturation. A distinct vitelline membrane seems to line its inner surface.
At the time of the extrusion of the polar bodies, both of which are apparently expelled before
the oocyte leaves the Graafian follicle, what appears to be a perivitelline space is in evidence.
— The nucleus ranged in size from 0.020 X 0.017 mm. to 0.030 X 0.024 mm. ; a membrane
may or may not be present. Within the nucleus are chromatin granules which may be single,
paired, in masses, or arranged in threads. The karyoplasm is more finely granular and paler
than the cytoplasm. The latter contains vacuoles, often with a granule within, as well as
isolated granules. There is evidence of a centrosome. — M. F. Gayer.

1778. Urban, J. Uber die Grosse der Stecklinge. [On the size of cuttings.] Zeitschr-
Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42: 521-526. 1918— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1612.

1779. van der Plank, G. M. Kruising van Yersey met Zwartbont vee. [Cross of Jersey
cattle with black spotted.] Genetica 2: 300. July, 1920.

1780. van der Wolk, P. C. Onderzoekingen betreffedne den Cocospalm. [Investigations
concerning the coconut palm.] Cultura 1918: 1-34. 1918. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1613.

1781. von Ri'MKER, K. 42 Sortenanbauversuche im Verwaltungsgebiete des Oberfehls-
habers Ost. [Forty-two variety culture tests in Oberfehlshabers Ost.] 72 p. Paul Parey:
Berlin, 1918— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1614.

1782. vox RCmker, K. Die Staatliche Organisation der Sortenpriifung. [State organi-
zation of variety testing.] 32 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1615.

1783. von Ryx, Georg. Methoden einer exakten Priifung des Fortschrittes bei der Zuc-
kerrubenzucht. Paritats- und doppelte Standard-methode. [Methods of exactly testing the
advancement in sugar beet breeding. Parity and double standard method.] Zeitschr. Pflan-
zenziicht. 7:227-237. June, 1920.

1784. vonUbisch, G. Anwendung der Vererbungsgesetze auf die Kulturpflanzen. [Appli-
cation of the laws of heredity to cultivated plants.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 293-300. 1920.

1785. von Wettstein, Fritz. [German rev. of: van Wisselingh, C. Uber Variabilitat
und Erblichkeit. (Variation and heredity.) Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 65-126.
10 fig. Jan., 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 3532.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 462-465. 1920.

1786. Wagner, M. Abbauerscheinungen am Hopfen und Organisation in der Hopfen-
ziichtung. [Phenomena in unimproved hops and organization in hop-breeding.] Deutsch.
Landw. Presse 1919: 788. 1919. — After experience in a certain hop region ("Neutomischler"
region) author urged an organization for hop-breeding, directed from a central office and

No. 4, January, 1921] GENETICS 261

working locally for production of uniform stands through selection of proper plants and
dissemination of cuttings <>f them. Author lias started such selection in above-mentioned
region before war. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pfianzenzticht. 7: 220. June, 1020.]
— /. P. Kelly.

1787. Waldron, J. W., A. Gabtlbt, C. R. Bembnwat, J. X. 8. Williams, C. P. Wilcox,
T. II. Petrie, and 11. P. Agee. Report of the committee in charge of the Experiment Station.
Rept. Exp. Sta. Hawaiian Sugar Planters Assoc. 1919. 49 p. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 901.

1788. Wince, 0. Uber die Vererbung der Haarfarbe der Pferde. [Heredity of hair color
in the horse.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 24: 1-32. Aug., 1920.

1789. Wodsedalek, J. E. Studies on the cells of cattle with special reference to sperma-
togenesis, oogonia, and sex-determination. Biol. Bull. 38: 290-316. 5 pi. May, 1920. —
Material for the study of the germ cells of males were obtained from the testes of seven adult
bulls, one five-month fetus, and six smaller fetuses; for the cells of females, from the ovaries
of four heifers and four adult cows. Somatic cells were studied in slides from various parts
of a number of embryos and small fetuses of each sex. — In the male, 37 chromosomes (36
ordinary and 1 accessory) appear in spermatogonial divisions. The accessory is heart-shaped
and therefore easily identified in this and succeeding divisions. It is identified with the
large nucleolus of resting stages. In the primary spermatocytes, 18 bivalent chromosomes
and 1 accessory appear in metaphase. The accessory passes undivided to one pole; so that
half of the secondary spermatocytes receive 19, and half, 18 single chromosomes. A second
doubling of chromosomes occurs; so that the equatorial plate of the secondary spermatocytes
reveals 9 and 10 chromosomes (9 plus the accessory), respectively. The accessory, when
present, and each of the doubled chromosomes divide. But the division is not reductional in
nature; hence half of the spermatids really receive the equivalent of 18 single chromo-
somes, and half receive 19. Occasionally the 18 (or 19) chromosomes can be distinguished
after division, but usually the chromosomes pass to the resting stage before complete sepa-
ration occurs. Measurements of six hundred heads show that there are two classes of sper-
matozoa. Those of the larger type presumably contain the sex-chromosome. — The oogonia
resemble the last spermatogonial cells closely in appearance although they are larger and
possess two distinct accessory chromosomes. It is inferred that the reduced number of
chromosomes in each mature ovum is 19, inasmuch as 38 appear in oogonial divisions. Male
somatic cells contain 37 chromosomes, and female somatic cells, 38 chromosomes. The
sex chromosomes in somatic cells — one in the male, two in the female — were as distinguishable
as in the germ cells. — M. F. Guyer.

1790. Wohanka and Company. 28. Jahresbericht der Rubensamenziichtungen von
Wohanka & Comp. [28th annual repor.t of the beet breeding of Wohanka & Co.] 95 p., 5 fig.
Wohanka & Co. : Prag, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1624.

1791. Zade. Die Versuche uber Klee- und Graserzuchtungen des landwirtschaftlichen
Instituts Jena. [Experiments in clover and grass breeding of the Jena Agricultural Institute.]

ahrb. Deutsch. Landwirtsch. Ges. 1918: 139-150. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1625.

1792. Ziegler, H. E. Zuchtwahlversuche an Ratten. [Selection experiments on rats.]
Festschr. z. Feier. 100-jahr. Best. Kgl. Wiirtt. Landw. Hochschule Hohenheim. 1918: 385-
399. 1918.— The author was able to modify the amount of white in the coat of Irish rats by
selection. He explains his results by the multiple factor hypothesis. — Seiarfl Wright.

1793. Zweig, Ltjdwig. Uber einen Fall von Epidermolysis bullosa hereditaria. [On a
case of epidermolysis bullosa hereditaria.] Arch. Dermatologie u. Syphilus 120: 1-6. 19 — .

262 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

HORTICULTURE

J. H. Gotjrley, Editor
FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

1794. Ardouin-Dttmazet. L'Horticulture des regions devastees. (Horticulture in the
devastated regions.) Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:61-63. 1920. — A brief statement is given of
the general conditions which prevailed in the vicinity of the various centers of horticultural
importance, together with an estimate of the damage done by war. The industry is recovering
rapidly, since the local demands for the foods produced is as great as formerly, and the diffi-
culty and expense of transportation does not permit of securing fruits or vegetables from the
southern districts. — E. J. Kraus.

1795. Aspinwall, B. Planting and cultivating the loganberry. Better Fruit 1410: 12.
1920. — A brief practical account of planting and cultivating the loganberry. The author is
one of the leading loganberry growers of the Northwest. — A. E. Murneek.

1796. Batchelor, L. B., and H. S. Reed. Winter injury or die-back of the walnut.
Better Fruit 14": 9-10, 32. 1920.— Reprint of California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 216.

1797. Blair, R. E. The work of the Yuma reclamation project experiment farm in 1918.
U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 75. 77 p., 32 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1406.

1798. B.rown, W. Robertson. Notes on the progress of the European olive at Peshawar.
Agric. Jour. India 15: 150-153. 2 fig. 1920.

1799. Caryl, R. E. The bearing habit of lemons. California Citrograph 5 : 294. Fig. 1-2.
1920. — A comparison of the bearing habits of the Eureka and Lisbon, the two chief commer-
cial varieties of California. Graphs show comparative pickings for each month in the year at
Santa Paula in the cool, moist coast district and at Corona in the hot, dry, interior district.
The highest percentage of the Lisbon crop in the Corona district comes in the month of Feb-
ruary, while in the Santa Paula district it is one month later. The proportion of midsummer
pickings is greater for both varieties near the coast, though there is a greater amount of
variation in the Eureka than in the Lisbon. — /. E. Coit.

1800. Ch asset, L. Determination des fruits (Poires). I. Considerations generales.
[Classification of fruits (pears). I. Generalities. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 106-107. 1920.—
Pomological keys have proven unsatisfactory. Most of them are based upon the use to
which the fruit is destined, whether for (1) the table, (2) cooking, or (3) cider. These char-
acteristics, however, represent a final estimate of the fruit as a whole, and can not be taken as
points upon which to construct keys. Nor is it sufficient to attempt classification on the
basis of group names such as Doyennes, Bergamotes, Colmars, and the like, since these may
contain varieties very different in character. The most satisfactory primary characters are
those of shape. (To be continued.) — -E. J. Kraus.

1801. Ch asset, L. Determination des fruits (Poires). II. La clef pomologique Chasset.
[Classification of fruits (pears). II. The Chasset pomological key.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris]
92: 126-128. Fig. 33-48. 1920. — A continuation of an article by the same author (Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 92: 106-107. June, 1920). — Three families are created on the basis of the
relation of the height of the fruit to its breadth. These are in turn divided into groups accord-
ing to the general form of the fruit; each of these forms is designated by a type variety.
After a fruit has been placed in its proper family, it is next classified according to its season
of maturity; then according to the color of its skin at the time of picking, not at maturity.
On the basis of the length and method of insertion of the peduncle, three classes are made.
Each of these classes is further divided; first, on the basis of the color of the flesh, and then
on its flavor. Farther differentiation of two or more varieties not separated by the above
characters is accomplished through reference to descriptive notes. — E. J. Kraus.

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 263

1802. Clauston, C. I. E. The possibilities of agriculture in India within the next twenty
years. Agric. Jour. India 15:239-247. 1920. A discussion — /. J. Skinner.

1S03. Dahl, A. L. Methods of utilizing California wine grapes. Better Fruit 14u: 11-12.
1920. — Because of national prohibition and the consequent closing of wineries, wine grapes
must be diverted into other channels of usefulness. A method has been perfected by which the
natural flavor and aroma of the fruit may be preserved in making grape syrup. Vineyardists
are working at present upon the problem of preserving the fresh juice of grapes without fer-
mentation. Details of experiments to preserve the fresh juice by means of sulphurous acid
are given. A large part of the present crop of wine grapes will be dried. Other ways of util-
izing the grapes may be found in making of vinegar and saving the pomace for stock feed or
for the manufacture of sugar, cream of tartar, and oil. — A. E. Murneek.

1804. D arrow, G. M. Raspberry culture — red, black, purple. In all phases. Better
Fruit 1411: 3-4, 35-38. 1920.— A verbatim reprint from U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmer's Bull. 887.
— A. E. Murneek.

1805. Darrow, G. M. The currant and gooseberry and how to grow them. Better Fruit
14': 8-10, 38. 1920.— A verbatim extract from U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmer's Bull. 1024.

1S06. Enfer, V. Sterilite des arbres fruitiers. [Sterility of fruit trees.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92 : 46. 1920. — Sterility may be due to an abundance of fertilizers which induce ex-
cessive vegetative growth; fungous diseases, such as Fusicladium pyrinum; insects, such as
aphids and beetles; late spring frosts; rains, which wash away the pollen and prevent the
activity of bees; heavy winds; and excessive blooming or production of fruits. All these
factors should be considered, and such measures as may seem practical utilized in combating
them. — E. J. Kraus.

1807. Enfer, V. Sur la Passe-Crassane. [Concerning the Passe-Crassane pear.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 92:88-89. 1920. — This excellent variety should be planted more widely.
Though the fruit tends to be rough on very rapidly growing trees, when the variety is grafted
on the quince the fruits are large, smooth and of good quality. It forms especially congenial
union with Beurr6 Diel, Cure, and Beurre d'Hardenpont. Special care is required in pruning.
— E. J. Kraus.

1808. Enfer, V. Treilles gelees. [Frozen grape-vines.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 67-68.
1920. — When vines are frozen, due to late frosts following a period of weather which has
advanced the season's growth, not only may the crop of that season be ruined, but that of
the following year may be endangered. The eye or bud of the grape possesses at its base
another bud, or sometimes two, which may be forced into growth if the principal one is
destroyed. The shoots arising from these second buds, when proper care is taken, will develop
into strong canes, and will frequently produce bunches of fruits. In the event of a freeze,
all of the frozen buds should be cut away immediately, both to encourage the production of
new shoots from the second buds, and to prevent the decomposition of the frozen tissues near
such buds. Later the unfruitful or weaker shoots should be removed entirely, and those
which remain should be pinched back before the end of the growing season in order to encour-
age maturation and lignification. — E. J. Kraus.

1809. Etter, Albert E. The origin of the Ettersburg strawberry. Better Fruit 145: 14.
Dec, 1919. — The "Peruvian Beach" strawberry was pollinated with a blossom from one of
the third generation Sharpless X Parry plants. Among the eleven seedlings growing from
seed of this cross was the Ettersburg. — A. E. Murneek.

1810. Flahault, C. L'Horticulture en Alsace. [Horticulture in Alsace.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92:26-28. 1920. — The alluvial soil of Alsace, and the general climatic conditions,
are well adapted to the growing of plants of many kinds, both native and jexotic. This has
resulted in the development of a large nursery industry and of a broad, general amateur and

264 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI ,

professional interest. Formerly many professional gardeners were trained here. A plea is
made for the establishment at Strasbourg of a definitely organized institution for training
native gardeners, particularly those capable of speaking French and the Alsatian dialect. —
E. J . Kraus.

1811. Flippance, F. Betel. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2:294-300. 3 pi.
1920. — A description of the Betel nut palm (Areca Catechu, Linn.) and the Betel Leaf (Piper
Betle, Linn.) with notes on their uses and extent of cultivation in Malaya. — T. F. Chipp.

1812. Garnier, M. Plantes nouvelles ou peu connues. (New or little-known plants.)
Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:55-56. Fig. 18-14. 1920.— Brief descriptions of nine varieties of
vegetables, including the bean, beet, cabbage, tomato, melon, peas and cardoon, and eight
varieties of flowers, such as Cyclamen, Myosolis, carnation, Petunia, Begonia, Verbena, and
China aster, are given. — E. J. Kraus.

1813. Gould, H. P. Some useful and timely hints on peach growing. Better Fruit 14u :
8-9. 1920. — A verbatim reprint from U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers Bull. 632.

1814. Guion, A. Chauffage de serres par l'electricite. [Heating greenhouses by elec-
tricity.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 64. 1920. — It is feasible to use electricity for this purpose
only when it can be obtained cheaply. Heating may be effected by the use of radiators, of
which there are many forms available, or by tubes beneath the benches and connected with an
electrically heated supply tank or boiler. One of these devices could be installed in each
house or group of houses. It would be possible to heat them by means of wood or charcoal-
burning stoves in case the current should fail temporarily. — E. J. Kraus.

1815. Hammond, A. A. Small fruit culture in Victoria. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria
18: 351-358. 4 pi. 1920.— A description of the cultivation of the loganberry and of condi-
tions suitable for its growth is given. — J. J. Skinner.

1816. Hansen, Dan. The work of the Huntley reclamation project experiment farm in
1918. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 86. 32 p., 5 jig. 1920— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1413.

1817. Headley, F. B. The work in 1918 of the Newlands (formerly the Truckee-Carson)
reclamation project experiment farm. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 80. IS p., 1 fig. 1920.—
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1417.

1818. Hess, N. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:
52-60. (1919) 1920. — Attention is drawn to the fact that of all the fields pertaining to evolu-
tion, the one that seems to be the least cultivated is hybridism. Few artificially produced
hybrids are referred to in citing examples, but most of them are natural hybrids. — Hybridism
has been employed more especially in floriculture, and this has been for the purpose of obtain-
ing monstrous novelties. Many of the most popular ornamental flowers are due to hybridiza-
tion.— The author has been carrying on rather extensive experiments in hybridization with
two genera; namely, Rubus and Quercus. Detailed results, obtained from crossing black-
berries and dewberries are given. Data are presented on third generation results in crossing,
in several cases. — The results of several years' work in crossing different oaks (Quercus) are
given. From the work with oaks the author states that he has learned that the various
individuals of a species vary widely in their affinity for foreign pollen. He has come to
believe that to be successful in hybridization, it is necessary to search out by trial the indi-
viduals having the proper affinity for the pollen to be applied. For this purpose, seedlings
would naturally be preferred to plants produced vegetatively. — E. C. Auchler.

1819. Howard, W. L. Fruit growing and dairying. A desirable farming combination.
Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 135-139. 1919.— Fruit growing in California has become
highly specialized. Whole districts devoted almost exclusively to the production of one
kind of fruit for 35 or 40 years are finding the soil is becoming unfertile for want of humus.

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 265

The growing of winter green manure crops has not entirely overcome this difficulty. Better
success has been achieved by growing field beans in the orchard or a strip of alfalfa between
the rows. The author proposes a combination fruit and dairy farm as the best means of
maintaining the soil fertility in California orchards. This farm should preferably be oper-
ated by two men — one a fruit grower and one a dairyman. This plan besides furnishing
manure for the orchard would better distribute the labor. — //. .V. Vinall.

1820. Howard, \V. L. The value of the different roots as stock. Better Fruit 1410: 10-20.
1920. — A brief discussion is given of the value of apricot root stock for prunes and the French
and Japanese root stocks for pears. — A. E. Murneeh.

1821. Jouin, E. L'Horticulture in Lorraine desannexee. [Horticulture in disannexed
Lorraine.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 44-45. 1920. — Previous to 1870 a broad professional and
amateur interest was manifested in horticulture. This has declined appreciably since then,
though recently there seems to be a new and awakened interest. There is but one important
public garden, located at Metz. The hills on the left shore of the Moselle, the Saar basin
and the Palatinate afford a considerable tree and small fruit industry. There are many small
greenhouses which do a local business in easily grown plants. There is an extensive vegetable
growing industry at Metz, and on both banks of the Moselle. The nursery business has always
been the most extensive branch of horticulture in Lorraine. At various places good specimens
of various exotic trees may be found. — E. J. Kraus.

1822. Judd, C. S. The Makiki Nursery. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 124-126.
1920.

1823. Kraemer, Henry. Michigan — an important source of raw vegetable products.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 167-199. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1980.

1824. Lamproy, E. Le rajeunissement des pechers en plein vent. [Rejuvenation of stand-
ard peach trees.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 32-34. Figs. 7-8. 1920 — The method of rejuvena-
tion consists in a heavy heading-back, even of the very large branches, close to a lateral; so
that the process is at the same time also one of thinning out. Larger yields of better fruit
were secured from the pruned trees than from those which were left unpruned and had been
neglected for some time. The cuts should be made with a fine-toothed saw, trimmed with a
sharp knife, and covered with mastic. Attention is directed to the fact that this same method
of pruning peach trees was advocated in the middle of the nineteenth century by Naudin et
Decaisne in their "Manuel de l'amateur des jardins" 4: 423. — E. J. Kraus.

1825. Landry, R. Le transport des primeurs par avion. [Transporting early crops by
aeroplane.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92 : 83. Fig. 20. 1920. — A shipment of forced strawberries
of the variety Doctor Morere was sent by aeroplane on March 18, 1920, by Mr. de la Celle,
from Saint-Laurent-du-Var to Paris. — E. J . Kraus.

1826. Letteer, C. R. The work of the San Antonio experiment farm in 1918. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 73. 38 p., 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1423.

1827. Lewis, C. I. Pear culture at home and abroad. Better Fruit 1410: 23-24. 1920 —
A popular article on pear growing, with particular reference to the northwestern United
States. — A. E. Murneeh.

1828. Noren, C. A. A practical demonstration of fruit thinning. Better Fruit 1412:
15-16. 1920. — Four sets of comparisons were made of well thinned and poorly thinned
orchards. In every case fruit from poorly thinned orchards was smaller in size and lacked the
necessary color to grade it as "extra fancy." The writer believes also that proper thinning
lessens the strain on fruiting spurs and diminishes the habit of alternate bearing. — A. E.
Murneek.

266 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

182'J. Parmentier, Paul. Les irrigations et les arrosages en Syrie et en Palestine.
[Irrigation in Syria and Palestine.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 391-393. 1919.—
A discussion of the climate and the methods of irrigation of various crops in Syria and Pales-
tine. The methods of irrigation employed are inefficient because of the excessive amount of
water required; the high humidity produced in groves of fruit trees, which greatly increases
the growth of parasitic fungi; and the effect of the fungi on the quality of vegetables. — V. //.
Young.

1830. Ruffer, Sir Arnold. Food in Egypt. Mem. Inst. Egypt. 1. 86 p. 1919.

1831. Russell, G. A. A machine for trimming camphor trees. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept.
Circ. 78. S p., 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1-168.

1832. Sundquist, R. Means of accomplishing orchard tillage. Better Fruit 1412: 25-26.
1920.— In respect to clean tillage of orchards in irrigated sections three essentials are empha-
sized: (1) the soil must be worked early in the spring; (2) it must be left in a pulverized con-
dition; and (3) tillage must be continued throughout the early part of summer. The value
of the tractor for tillage purposes is discussed in detail.— A. E. Murneek.

1833. Taylor, R. H. The growing and culture of almonds in California. Better Fruit
1410: 3-6, 40. 1920.— An extract from "The Almond in California." California Agric. Exp.
Sta. Bull. 297. 1918.

1834. Thor.nber, W. S. Commercial fertilizers for the orchard and the garden. Better
Fruit 149: 7, 39. 1920. — The writer discusses in a general way the necessity and value of the
use of commercial, particularly nitrogenous, fertilizers in the orchards of the northwestern
United States. The present economic necessity of increasing crops is emphasized. — A. E.

Murneek.

1835. True, Rodney H. [Rev. of: Hedrick, U. P. Manual of American grape-growing.
MacMillan Co.: New York, 1919.] Bot. Gaz. 68: 390-391. 1919.

1836. West, F. L., and N. E. Edlefsen. Temperature which will damage or kill fruit
buds. Better Fruit 1410: 13-14. 1920.— An almost verbatim extract Utah Agric. Exp. Sta.
Bull. 151. 1917.

1837. Zimmerman, G. Planting and care of prune orchard up to bearing age. Better Fruit
14n : 5, 33-34. 1920. — Based on long practical experience advice is given by a successful prune
grower as to the selection of site, planting, and cultural management of a prune orchard up to
bearing age of the trees. — A. E. Murneek.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

1838. Anonymous. Groupement des meilleures varietes de chrysanthemes. [Grouping
of the best varieties of chrysanthemums.] Jour. Soc. Nation, llortic. Franco 21 : 39-51. Jan.,
1920. — This is a grouping of varieties of chrysanthemums by a committee of French horti-
culturist-, giving lists of the host varieties of the different types for various purposes and uses.
— H. C. Thompson.

1839. Anonymous. The fruiting of the Ginkgo at Kew. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London]
1920:47-4S. 1 fig. 1920.— First record of the fruiting of Ginkgo in England. — E. Mead
Wilcox.

L840. Anonymous. Concours de roses nouvelles de Bagatelle 1920. (Concours of new
roses at Bagatelle 1920.) Rev. licit ic. [Paris] 92: 125-126. 1920.— A gold medal was awarded
to Pernet-Ducher for the new, vigorous, floriferous, pure chrome-yellow variety Souvenir de
Claudius Pernet, and to A. Dickson for the new hybrid tea, Frances Gaunt, which is free

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 267

dowering, semidouble, and of a Balmon-yellow color. Certificates wei ted Eor the fol-

lowing varieties: Benedicte Seguin (Pernet-Ducher) resembling a hybrid-tea rather than
Pernetiana, golden yellow; President Parmentier (Sauvageot) -hybrid-tea, apricol r<
seedling of Colonel Leclerc \ Le Progres; I>m France Victorieuse (Haj hybrid-1

tender rose, deeper at center; Comtesse de Cassagne (Guillot) — hybrid-tea, ivory yellow,
tinged salmon at center; Mermaid (Wm. Paul) hybrid of Rosa braceata and an unknown vari-
ety of tea, single, pale yellow, foliage brilliant and persistent in winter, valuable irce
rw varieties. Several other varieties of interest are listed. /•>'../. Kra

1841, Anonymous. List of seeds of hardy herbaceous plants and of trees and shrubs.
Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] Appendix 1920: 1-25. 1920.

1842. Anonymous. A garden flora: Nymans. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 240.

10 Jigs. 1919. — A list of plants grown in the Mbssel collection at Nymans in the south of
England with notes on the behaviour of the more remarkable species. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1S43. Bean, W. J. Garden notes on new or rare trees and shrubs. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1920: 119-124. 1920.

1844. Blin, H. Sur la resistance du vitrage des serres. [The resistance of green house
glass.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:113-114. 1920.— Brief comparative table is given on the
relative breaking strength of two types of glass, together with another table showing the
relation between weight and thickness of glasses having unit surface area. — E. J. Kraus.

1845. Bois, D. LelaeliocattleyaFirmini. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 30. 1 pi. {colored). 1920.
— This species is named for Firmin Lambeau, of Brussels, and was produced by A. A. Peeters
& Sons, from a cross made in 1904 between Laeliocattleya Ceres (Cattleya Mossiae X Laelio-
cattleya Phoeba) , a yellow variety, and Cattleya Dowiana aurea. Two forms differing in color
from the original are also known. L. Firmini ardens, shown at London in 1913, has the floral
divisions, copper red instead of apricot yellow, whereas L. Firmini Mqssange, named for
Leon Massange by Peeters in 1913, is reddish saffron. The several varieties are the same in
form of flower and in character of the lip. — E. J. Kraus.

1846. Chenault, L. Hamamelis vernalis Sargent. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 47. Fig. 11.
1920.— A brief description of this species from the viewpoint of using it as an ornamental is
given. It is recommended because of its hardiness and the abundance of fragrant blossoms
it produces very early in the spring. It might even be utilized as a pot-plant for house
decoration, provided some leafy plant were grown with it to produce the foliage effect.—
E. J. Kraus.

1847. Clarksox, Edward Hale. The story of a fern garden. I. — Amer. Fern. Jour.
10:53-57. 1920.

1848. Eldridge, A. G. Plants for gardens farthest north. Garden Mag. 31: 245-2 Is.
4 fig. 1920. — Discusses herbaceous woody and ornamental plants for various environments
in the northern United States and Canada.— H. C. Thompson.

1849. Gakmkk, M. Plantes nouvelles pour 1920. [New plants for 1920.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92: 34-35. Fig. 9-10. 1920. — Brief descriptive notes are given on thirteen herbaceous
ornamentals and pot-plants of wide variety, an early turnip, an early pea. and a hardy,
productive potato. — E. J. Kra':.--.

1850. Guillaumin, A. Le Colocasia. A propos de l'introduction recent du vrai C. indica.
[Concerning the recent introduction of the true Colocasia indica.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris]92: 104-
106. Fig. 26-27. 1920. — A short descriptive note of this species, to which many names have
been given, its means of separation from the closely allii <! f< rms a <hort key to the
several species of the genus, are given. — E. J . Kraus.

268 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1851. Krelage, E. A propos de la classification des Tulipes. [Concerning the classifi-
cation of tulips.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 30-31. 1920. — Corrections of an article by Mottet,
S. (Les tulipes Darwin. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 10-11. Jan., 1920.) Figure 4 of the colored
plate does not represent the variety Goldflake, which is red striped with yellow, but rather
some variety belonging to the class known as "bizarres." Instead of representing several
varieties of Darwin tulips, as the legend indicates, the plate actually shows clearly the dif-
ferences between the Darwins and other late tulips. The varieties Rev. Ewbank and Europe,
with flowers more or less square and enlarged at the base are typical of the Darwins, to which
Margaret also belongs, but it is not so well figured. Inglescombe Yellow, with elongated
flower, belongs to the Cottage class. The yellow color is never found among Darwin tulips.
A report based upon a study in 1914 and 1915 of varieties grown under more than 1500 names
in the gardens of the Royal Horticultural Society of London was issued in 1917. It is the work
of a joint committee from England and Holland, and contains many illustrations as well as a
system of classification of the various varieties. — E. J. Kraus.

1852. Lesotjrd, F. Campanula pyraversi Cayeux. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 124. 1 plate
(colored), fig. 32. 1920. — This form was obtained by Mr. F. Cayeux as a hybrid between
Campanula pyramidalis L. and C. versicolor Sibth and Smith, whence the name. It is self-
fertile, and likewise fertile with either of the parent species. The hybrid possesses characters
derived from both parents, but in the long petioles of the radicle leaves and the well devel-
oped pedicels of the flowers it resembles neither. Because of its desirable tints of blue color,
darker at the center, long blooming season, and adaptability for growing in beds, in masses,
or in pots, it should be generally cultivated. — E. J. Kraus.

1853. Lesotjrd, F. Contribution a l'histoire de la pyramide. [On the history of the
pyramidal tree,] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 81-82. 1920. — Though incapable of exact determi-
nation, it appears that the pyramidal type of tree originated in Lorraine, near Metz, at
an early date and spread from there eastward and westward, reaching the region of Paris
about the middle of the eighteenth century or a little later. Several direct literature citations
are given. — E. J. Kraus.

1854. Letacq, A. Notes sur la culture du Camellia dans l'ouest de la France. [On the
culture of Camellia in western France.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92 : 120-121. 1920. — It is possible
to grow Camellia japonica L. throughout an extensive territory in France. The plants must
be protected in the more northern ranges, but are perfectly hardy in the south. It is especially
to be noted that silicious soils are the most favorable to good development, whereas in cal-
careous soil the plants soon turn yellow and die. — E. J. Kraus.

1855. Lillie, R. I. Flowers. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17:6-9. 1920. — Discusses
factors involved in successful flower growing, grouping them under four heads: (1) seasons;
(2) seeds; (3) sowing; and (4) soil. Practical for amateurs. —Stanley Coulter.

1856. Loizeau, A. Jardin en campagne. [A country garden.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:
51-53. Fig. 12. 1920. — The discussion deals with the general arrangement of country gar-
dens, and the location of specimen plants, groupings, and borders. A selected list of materials
and proposed plan are submitted. — E. J. Kraus.

1857. Morel, F. Les benefices d'une calamite : Laurier de Serbie et Pyracantha pauci-
flora. [The good fortunes out of a calamity. Serbian laurel and Pyrocantha pauciflora.]
Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 80-81. 1920.— The Serbian laurel, Laurocerasus schipkaensis, proved
entirely hardy during the severe winter of 1917. A number of the hybrid seedlings of this
species and the Caucasian laurel also proved perfectly hardy. These forms were very vari-
able in character, some of them being worthy of propagation. Pyracantha pauciflora, while
entirely hardy, normally produces few flowers or fruits and is, to that extent, lacking in
decorative qualities. A number of seedlings of it, however, have not only proven perfectly
hardy, but also highly productive of both flowers and fruits. These should prove of great
value as ornamentals. — E. J. Kraus.

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 269

1858. Morel, F. Les benefices d'une calamite Buxus haleppica, Evodia, Actinidia chi-
nensis. [The good fortunes out of a calamity, Buxus haleppica, Evodia, Actinidia chinensis]
Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 100-102. 1920. — A continuation of a similar article by the same
author in Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:80-81. May, 1920. — Among a number of seedlings of a
box-plant presumed to be Buxus haleppica, all of which possessed broad leaves, larger than
those of any of the varieties of the common l>ox, one at leasl has proven entirely hardy. This
is a desirable ornamental and may furnish valuable genetic material. Specimens of Evodia,
large, rapidly growing Asiatic trees with ash-like foliage and semi-tropical appearance, and
also those of Actinidia chinensis, an ornamental vine, were uninjured by the severe cold
weather of 1917.— E. J. Kraus.

1859. Mottet, S. Cedrus libani brevifolia. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:84-86. Fig. 21.
1920. — During the past two centuries of cultivation, Cedrus libani has given rise to the follow-
ing varieties: glauca, nana, nana pyramidata, pendula, denudata, stricta, candelabrum, fusi-
formis, microcarpa, and decidua. The variety brevifolia was discovered in 1879, on the Island
of Cyprus. It is a distinct form, readily distinguished by the short, deep green leaves. It
grows more slowly and gracefully than the type species, and deserved to be widely planted,
especially in parks and gardens where space is limited. — E, J. Kraus.

1860. Mottet, S. Le lilium regale en Amerique. [Lilium regale in America.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 92: 66-67. 1 pi. 1920. — This fine representative of the longiflorum group
has proven entirely hardy in Massachusetts. It is readily propagated from seeds and adapted
to forcing as well as out-door culture. It was introduced by E. H. Wilson from the valley of
the Min, in the north-west of Setchuen, China. A hybrid between Lilium regale and Lilium
sulfureum, itself belonging to the longiflorum group and having large, long flowers of a beauti-
ful canary color, is said to be taller than the former, bulbiliferous like the latter, and produc-
tive of large, odorous flowers. — E. J. Kraus.

1861. Mottet, S. Nouveaux Narcisses grandiflores. [New large flowered Narcissi. [
Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 47-49. 1 pi. (colored). 1920. — Several of the newer varieties are con-
sidered worthy of special mention. These include the following: Narcissus Pseudo-Narcissus
— Glory of Leiden, Madame de Graaf ; N. incomparabilis — Barri Albatros, Vesuvius, Magda-
line de Graaf, Princess Mary, Beatrice Leedsi; N. poeticus, — Virgile. The colored plate
illustrates Weardale Perfection, Cleopatra, Will Scarlet, Gloria Mundi, White Lady, and
Mrs. Langtry. — E. J. Kraus.

1862. Petit, A. Arrosage par immersion des plantes en pots. [Watering pot plants by
immersion.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 68. 1920. — The watering of potted plants by immers-
ing the pots in a tank has the advantages of complete wetting without displacing any of the
soil, of conserving the soil nitrates, and of a great saving of time and hand labor. The pots
should not stand more than half their depth in water. As soon as the soil has become thor-
oughly moistened the tanks should be drained. For the greatest success, it is essential that
all such conditions as age, size and type of plant, kind and amount of soil, as well as form
and dimension of the pots should be uniform. Since this is difficult to secure, it is necessary
frequently to regroup the plants in the several tanks. — E. J. Kraus.

1863. Pinelle, J. Berberis subcaulialata C. K. Schneider. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92 :
28-30. Fig. 5-6. 1920. — This species was found by Maurice de Vilmorin arising from some
seeds coming from Thibet, in 1904. It is thoroughly hardy and adapted to a wide variety of
soils. The foliage is persistent up to December or January. The fruit is red. It is suited for
planting in large masses. Propagation may be effected either vegetatively or by sowing
stratified seeds in March or April. — E. J. Kraus.

1864. Pinelle, J. Lonicera Maacki Ruprecht. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92 : 122-123. Fig.
80-31. 1920. — This shrubby species has long been known and cultivated in the botanic garden
at Moscow. The flowers are conspicuous, produced abundantly, white changing to yelloAV,
followed by red fruits which are ornamental in the autumn. It is entirely hardy and deserv-
ing of being widely planted. — E. J. Kraus.

270 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1865. Pinelle, J. Pterocarya stenoptera. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:91-92. Fig. 22.
1920. — This thoroughly hardy species is vigorous, indifferent as to soil, and deserves to be more
generally planted. It has proven entirely satisfactory as a street tree in Paris. Propagation
is most readily effected by seeds, though shoots are produced freely fron the root; cuttings
are also employed. — E. J. Kraus.

1S66. Poupion, J. Les Catasetum, leur culture. [Growing Catasetums.] Rev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92: 98-100. Fig. 28-25. 1920. — Species and varieties of this genus are not generally
seen in the collection of either commercial or amateur orchid growers. Usually the plants
degenerate and die soon after importation or at least flower but rarely. This condition can
be corrected through cultural methods. The plants should have complete rest without water-
ing from November to March, in a cool house. They may then be completely potted anew,
brought into a temperature of about 18° to 23°C, and watered sparingly after growth begins
by dipping the pots into water the temperature of the greenhouse. When the flowers appear
in April or May, the watering must be further decreased, and special care exercised to prevent
cither the direct rays of the sun or drafts of air from striking the new growths which reach
maturity about November, at which time the rest period begins. This method of treatment
has been employed with entire success with eleven species and varieties of this genus. —
E. J. Kraus.

1867. Poupion, J. L'Inobulbon munificum Kranzlin. Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 64-66.
Fig. 15-16. 1920. — The separation of Dendrobium muricatum Finet and D. muricatum muni-
ficum Finet on the basis that the former produces a single flower cluster while the latter pro-
duces several is untenable, since both in culture and in the native state the same plant may
produce single or multiple clusters, depending upon its vigor. Kranzlin considered this form
generically distinct from Dendrobium, and made two species on the basis of the single or
multiple character of the flower cluster; the former he called Inobulbon muricatum, the latter
lnobulbon munificum. These two species are one and the same. A detailed description is
given. The species requires a warm house throughout the year, and offers interesting
material for hybridization. — E. J. Kraus.

186S. Proschowsky, A. R. L'Aralia a papier sur la Cote d'Azur. [The paper Aralia at
Cote d'Azur.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 103. 1920. — Tetrapanax papyrifer C. Koch has
proven an excellent, partially hardy ornamental. Though it flowers profusely, no fertile
seeds are produced. It propagates itself very readily, however, by means of sprouts from
the roots, to the extent that frequently a group of mass effect is produced about a single mother
plant. The pith is said to be used in China and Japan for the manufacture of a superior grade
of paper. — E. J. Kraus.

1869. Proschowsky, A. R. Les Coniferes dans les terres calcaires sur la Cote-d'Azur.
[Conifers in calcareous soils at Cote-d'Azur.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92 : 75. 1920.— In addi-
tion to the Aleppo pine, which is found abundantly as a native in the district mentioned,
the four conifers most resistant to calcareous soils are Pinus excelsa Wall; Pinus canariensis
C. Sm; Pinus Laricio Poir; and Pinus radiata D. Don. Among the other resistant conifers
the following are mentioned: Picea Morinda Link; Cedrus Deodara Loud; Cupressus semper-
virens L; Cupressus lusitanica Mill; Cupressus guadalapensis S. Wals; Cupressus macrocarpa
Hartw; Cryptomeria japonica Don.; Araucaria excelsa R. Br.; Araucaria Bidwilli Hook;
Thuyopsis dolabrata Sieb. and Zucc; species of Podocarpus, Cephalotaxus and Juniperus,
and others. — E. J. Kraus.

1870. Ridsdale, P. S. The Memorial Trees of the United States. Garden Mag. 30:
177-180. 2 fig. 1920.— A discussion of the movement on foot all over the country to plant
trees as memorials, giving methods of planting and caring for different kinds of trees. —
//. C. Thompson.

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 271

1871. Turb \t. I'.. Les belles roses nouvelles ou recentes. [Good roses, new or recent.]
Rev. Hortic. [Paris) 02: 31-32. 1920. The present article deals with variel ial
merit belonging to the class Pernetiana, created by Pernet-Dtjcher, which have been intro-
duced since 1910. Constance (Pernet-Ducher), 1915 — good for massing, but elongated, orange
yellow, striped carmine; flower cadmium yellow passing to golden yellow; more hardy than
Rayon d'Or (Pernet-Ducher) 1913. Juliet (\V. Paul) 1910, extremely vigorous; flower full,
perfumerl. rich rose red deepening OR opening, reverse of petals old gold; much in demand as
a cut flower. Louise-Catherine Breslau (Pernet-Ducher), 1912— vigorous, flower large, full,
shrimp red tinted copper red orange, reverse of petals chrome yellow; good for massing or for
cutting. Madame Edouard Herriot, (Pernet-Ducher), 1913 — very floriferous, coral red
shaded yellow and saffron red. passing to shrimp red; incomparable for massing and excellent
for cutting. Marie-Adelaide Grande Duchcsse de Luxembourg (Soupert and Netting), 1912
—flower large, full, deep orange, bud elongated, good for massing or cutting. Mistress
Wemyss Quin (A. Dickson and Sons), 1914 — flower medium, intense chrome yellow; excellent
for massing. Expression of judgment is reserved on the following varieties: President Bouche,
Raymond, Mrs. Farmer, Sevcrine (Pernet-Ducher), and Golden Emblem (MacGredy). (To
be continued.) — E. J. Kraus.

1872. Turbat, E. Les belles roses du groupe hybrides de thes distributes depuis 1910.
[Good hybrid-tea roses distributed since 1910.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:49-50. 1920.— A
continuation of a similar article (Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:31-32. 1920.).— The following
varieties are included and briefly described: Admiral Ward (Pernet-Ducher), 1915— good
grower, very floriferous, large full flower, carmine shading to flame red and velvety purple,
for massing and cutting. Andre Messimy (P. Guillot), 1914 — medium grower, floriferous,
brilliant ochreous orange, shaded carmine. Augustus Hartmann (B. R. Cant), 1914 — good
grower, floriferous, very large flowers, geranium red shaded orange. Colette Martinet

rnet-Ducher), 1915— extremely floriferous, flowers full, old gold shaded yellow orange, for
massing and cutting. Duchess of Normandy (Ph. Le Cornu), 1912 — delicate salmon red
touched with yellow, for massing. Duchess of Sutherland (A. Dickson), 1912— extremely
vigorous, half trailing, flowers the color of the sweet briar but shaded citron yellow, white
at base, good for the center of mass plantings and possibly as a cut flower. Edward Mawley
(McGredy), 1911— flowers full, very large, rich velvety crimson, for massing. General
Superior Arnold Janssen (Leenders), 1911— good grower, flowers full, large, deep carmine, for
massing and cutting. Gorgeous (Hugh Dickson), 1915— large flower, well formed, deep orange
yellow shaded copper yellow and veined with copper red, adapted to all purposes. George
Dickson (A. Dickson), 1912 — very vigorous, flowers very large, blackish velvety crimson
scarlet. Hadley (A. N. Pierson), 1914 — flowers full, deep velvety crimson, good for forcing
as a cut flower. Hoosier Beauty (Dorner), 1915— very floriferous, flowers full, sparkling
crimson, borne on erect, firm stems, excellent for forcing as cut flower or growing in the open
air in France. Lieutenant Chaure. (Pernet-Ducher), 1910— vigorous, large, full flower, red
carmine shaded garnet, for massing or cutting. Lucien Chaure (Soupert and Notting), 1913
— vigorous, flesh colored rose, for cutting or massing. Madame Caristie Martel (Pernet-
Ducher), 1916 — very vigorous, very large flowers, full, pure sulfur yellow, deeper at the center.
Madame Charles Lutaud (Pernet-Ducher), 1912 — large flower, chrome yellow lightly shaded
with rosy saffron. Madame Edmond Rostand (Pernet-Ducher), 1912— flower elongated,
full, clear rose shaded salmon and of a reddish orange yellow at center. Madame Jules Bouche"
(J. Croibier). 1910 — vigorous, flower elongated, full, salmon white, for massing and cutting.
Madame Lucien Baltet (Pernet-Ducher), 1911— flowers large, full, clear rose shaded yellow,
for massing. Mrs. Charles Russel (Waban Conservatories), 1913— vigorous, erect, flower
large, full, rose carmine, for massing, cutting, and growing in pots. Madame Marcel Delan-
ney (Leenders), 1915 — vigorous, floriferous, flowers large, full, soft, tender, shaded rose, stems
long and strong; highly commendable. Mayflower (E. G. Hill)— erect, flowers large, white,
petals margined with rose. (To be continued.) — E. J. Kraus.

1873. Tukbat, E. Les belles roses du groupe hybrides de thes distributes depuis 1910.
[Good hybrid-tea roses distributed since 1910.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 69-70. 1920.— A

272 HORTICULTURE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

continuation of similar article (Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 49-50. 1920.). The following varie-
ties are considered as most worthy: Melody (A. Dickson), 1911 — vigorous, compact, flowers
of good size, deep saffron yellow, good for massing or cutting. Mrs. Edward Powell (Ber-
naix), 1910 — large flowers, uniform velvety carmine red, very good for massing. Mrs. Moor-
field Storey (E. G. Hill), 1915 — vigorous and erect, flowers enormous, tender rose, very good
for massing and cutting. Ophelia (Wm. Paul), 1912 — flower of perfect form, full, flesh col-
ored salmon shaded with rose, widely grown in United States and England as a cut flower,
but little known in France. Primrose (Soupert and Notting), 1912 — fairly vigorous, flowers
large, melon jrellow shaded apricot, good for massing or cutting. Souvenir de E. Guillard
(Chambard), 1912 — large flowers, rosy yellow shaded coppery carmine. Souvenir de J. Pas-
singe (Chambard), 1912 — flowers large, coppery saffron lightly shaded carmine and deep
yellow. Souvenir de Gustav Prat (Perner-Ducher), 1910 — very large floAvers, sulfur yellow.
Sunburst (Pernet-Ducher), 1912 — well known variety, adapted to all uses, massing, cutting
or growing in pots. Senorita Carmen Sert (Pernet-Ducher), 1916 — very vigorous, foliage
bronze green, flower large, indian yellow shaded pale carmine rose, the edges of the petals
striped with bright carmine. Two single varieties are mentioned : Princess Mary (E. J. Hicks),
1915 — the largest single flower, crimson scarlet, anthers yellow, buds long and pointed. Red
Letter Day (A. Dickson) , 1914 — flowers large, sometimes with two rows of petals, shining crim-
son scarlet, producing a good decorative effect. Judgment is reserved on varieties introduced
since 1916. The descriptions of all the foregoing varieties are based on plants growing in
central France. — E. J. Kraus.

1874. Ttjrbat, E. Les belles Roses nouvelles distribuees depuis 1910. [Good, new roses
distributed since 1910.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:S6-88. 1920. — A continuation of the gen-
eral article on this subject (Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 31-32; 49-50; 69-70. 1920.)— Two hybrid
perpetual varieties are mentioned: Candeur Lyonnaise (Croibier, 1913) — seedlings of Reine
des Nieges, large, double flower, pure white sometimes touched with sulfur yellow; and Louise
Crette (Chambard), 1915) — very vigorous, floriferous, large flowers, white tinted cream at
center. The following varieties, all of which forms are adapted for massing in beds and for
pot culture, belong to the Polyanthus or dwarf multiflora perpetual group. Andree Lenuble
(E. Turbat and Co., 1916) — very vigorous, large clusters, double flowers, brilliant rose or
clear red, very early; Baby Lyon Rose (E. Turbat and Co., 1916) — erect growth, double
flowers, coral red; Bordure (Barbier and Co., 1911) very dwarf, flowers double, pure carmine,
good for a border; George Elger (E. Turbat and Co., 1912) — erect growth, flower coppery gold
passing to clear yellow, forces well; Ellen Poulsen (Poulsen, 1911) — vigorous, flowers in large
clusters, double, deep shining rose, the best variety for pot culture and forcing; Jeanny Sou-
pert (Soupert and Notting, 1912) — vigorous, large clusters of flowers, flesh-colored white;
one of the best; Mme. Jules Gouchault (E. Turbat and Co., 1913) — large erect panicles, buds
vermilion red shaded orange, passing to bright rose and then clear rose when open; Marie
Brissonnet (E. Turbat and Co., 1913) — dwarf, large corymbs of medium sized flowers, flesh-
colored rose bordered carmine; Mam an Turbat (E. Turbat and Co., 1911) — very vigorous and
hardy, flowers soft China rose, shaded clear peach pink and reddish yellow, the backs of the
petals saffron and tender flesh white, excellent effect; Margenta (Barbier and Co., 1916) —
dwarf, flowers semi-double, violet red passing to reddish violet; Merveille des Rouges (Du-
breuil, 1911) — dwarf, flowers full, intense crimson with a white center; Renoncule (Barbier
and Co., 1913) — dwarf, flowers shaped like a buttercup, brilliant salmon rose, very different
from any other; Triomphe Orleanais (J. Peauger, 1912) — vigorous, flower deep scarlet red not
tending to violet; Yvonne Rabier (E. Turbat and Co., 1910) — hardy, flowers white tinged
clear sulfur yellow, of its class the best white for massing. — E. J . Kraus.

1875. Van den Heede, A. Les plantes vivaces et rustiques: Les Gentianes. [Perennial,
hardy plants: the gentians.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 84. 1920. — The various species of gen-
tians, of which there are a large number, are particularly valuable when masses of blue color
are desired. The red or yellow flowered forms seem less attractive. Gentiana acaulis L. is
one of the best and most widely disseminated species. — E. J. Kraus.

No. 4, January, 1921] HORTICULTURE 273

1876. Wilson. E. H. The cedars of Lebanon. Garden Mag. 30: 178-183. 4 fig. 1919. —
An article discussing the cedar of Lebanon {Cedrus libani), giving its distribution in Asia and
Africa. Mention is made of celebrated trees of this species in England and in the United
States.—//. C. Thompson.

1877. Wilson, E. II. The romance of our trees. II, The Ginko. Garden Mag. 30:
144-148. 7 fig. 1919. — History, description, and general discussion of this tree; its introduc-
tion and planting in Europe and America. — H. C. Thompson.

1S78. Wolley-Dod, A. II. A revised arrangement of British roses. Jour. Botany
Suppl. 58:1-20. 1920.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

1879. Enfer, V. Semis de choux d'hiver. [Seeding winter cabbage.] R,ev. Hortic.
[Paris] 92: 90-91. 1920.— In addition to a list of the varieties generally grown, general direc-
tions for sowing the seed and handling the young plants are given. — E. J. Kraus.

1880. Enfer, V. Carrottes printanieres. [Spring carrots.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:
73-74. Fig. 17-19. 1920. — General directions on selection of varieties, preparation of soils,
and time and method of planting. — E. J. Kraus.

1881. Enfer, V. Le Celeri-rave. [Celeriac] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:38-39. 1920.—
General cultural directions and the most profitable varieties are noted. — E. J. Kraus.

1882. Enfer, V. Navets pour l'hiver. [Turnips for winter.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:
129-130. 1920.— General directions are given regarding preparation of soils, selection of
varieties, time of planting, harvesting, and storage. — E. J. Kraus.

1883. Lacaita, C. C. The "Jerusalem artichoke." (Helianthus tuberosus.) Kew
Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919:321-339. 1919.— An historical account of the botany, cul-
ture, and common names assigned to Helianthus tuberosus. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1S84. Lesourd, F. Sur l'histoire du Topinambour. [The history of the Jerusalem arti-
choke.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:37-38. 1920.— The opinion of Asa Gray that the native
habitat of this species ranges through Canada to Saskatchewan, south to Arkansas and
central Georgia, has been confirmed, in preference to the idea that it is a native of Peru or
Brazil. Though first mentioned in botanical literature in 1616, it was at that time well known
in the markets of France under the name "Topinambour," this term having been derived
from the name of a tribe of Brazilian natives. It was brought from Canada to France, and
thence introduced into England and Italy. Very few varieties are known. The following
have been named and introduced: yellow (1808), potato (1895), and spindle (1916), by
Vilmorin in France; white (1891), by Sutton in England. Cockerell has added nebras-
censis, alexandri, purpurellus, and purpureus. — E. J. Kraus.

1885. Meunissier, E. La Cantaloup de Vaucluse. [The Vaucluse Cantaloup.] Rev.
Hortic. [Paris] 92: 102-103. 1920.— This melon is found on the Parisian markets from mid-
summer to mid-September. Though of small size and medium quality, it is grown in great
abundance in the region of Cavaillon. The more specialized methods of growing it in that dis-
trict are detailed. Artichokes are planted in August to follow the melon crop. These are
harvested the following May and are in turn succeeded by a crop of beans. — E. J. Kraus.

1886. Meunissier, E. Choux-fleurs et Brocoli dans la Crau de Chateaurenard. [Cauli-
flower and brocoli in "la Crau de Chateaurenard."] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92: 70-71. 1920 —
In this district where irrigation is employed, these vegetables are grown in great abundance
and sent to many markets. Brocoli is a late or winter cauliflower, and the two are not pre-
cisely distinguishable except that they mature at different seasons. General directions
on the care of the young plants, transplanting, and cultivation are given. The ground is

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VI, NO. 4

274 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

occupied by the earlier varieties for 4 to 6 months, and by the later varieties for 7 or S months.
To have the ground in use throughout the year, a crop of early potatoes may alternate with
the cauliflower and a crop of beans or lettuce with the brocoli. — E. J. Kraus.

1887. Truax, Hartley E. United States grades for northern-grown onions. U. S. Dept.
Agric. Dept. Circ. 95:3-4. 1920.

1888. Truax, Hartley E. United States grades for Bermuda onions recommended by the
United States Department of Agriculture. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 97: 2-4. 1920.

1889. Wittmack, L. Gemiisesamenbau. [Vegetable seed culture.] Landw. Hefte. 41
and 43 : 7-96. 30 fig. 1919. — An extended account of the production of seeds, especially in
Germany, of each of the garden vegetables. The work is divided into two parts. The first
treats of general matters such as statistics, soils, fertilizers, seed quality, fructification, till-
age, harvesting, cleaning and seed improvement. The second part is devoted to the growing
of seed of each kind of vegetable. — C. V. Piper.

HORTICULTURE— PRODUCTS

1890. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Hargreaves, W. A. Cream of tartar manufacture in South
Australia. Bull. Dept. Chem. South Australia 3. 112 p. 1916.] New Zealand Jour. Sci.
and Tech. 1: 126. 1918. — Average wine production of the state for 5 years from 1911 was
3,000,000 gallons a year, and total possible production of cream of tartar 64 to 126 tons. —
C. S. Gager.

1891. Anonymous. The Oil Palm. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919:238. 1919. —
A brief note on Elaeis guineensis nigrescens poissonii. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1892. Bartlett, H. H. The manufacture of sugar from Arenga saccharifera in Asahan,
on the east coast of Sumatra. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 155-165. PI. 8-6. 1919. —
There is given a history of the natives, their customs, and the agricultural condition of the
land. Then follows the history of the sugar palm, Arenga pinnata (Wurmb) Merr., or "bagot"
as it is called by the natives, and the methods for its cultivation. The plant produces two
kinds of "mayams" or spadices, male and female. The female spadix yields fruit but no
juice, and the male vice versa. The saccharine juice collected from the male spadix contains
a considerable amount of protein and will ferment quickly. The juice is often sterilized with
smoke or hot water. The method of making the sugar is described in detail. — H. C. Young.

1893. Ghose, Manmathanath. A neglected source of sugar in Bikar. Agric. Jour.
India 15: 32-39. 3 pi. 1920. — A discussion of the date palms as a source of sugar. Methods
of tapping and flow and composition of the juice are discussed. From good trees 5000 to
7000 grams of juice twice daily can be secured from the middle of April to the end of May.
The percentage of sucrose in juice averages 12.5, there being no appreciable difference in
the day and night collections. The date palm in Bihar is considered an important source of
cheap white sugar. — J. J. Skinner.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY, AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

1894. Bloch, E. Modifications anatomiques des racines par action mecanique. [Ana-
tomical modifications of roots by mechanical action.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:
195-197. 1919. — Author continues previous work on the effect of compression on the structure
of various plant organs. Plants of Raphanus raphanistrum, Helianthus oleraceum. Polygo-
num tartaricum, and Soja hispida were used. It is noted that compression of the roots or
rhizomes of these plants did not affect normal development of other parts of the plant. Roots

No. 4, January, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 275

were confined in glass tubes, and their diameter much reduced. Such roots differed from those
in contact with soil in having a much reduced surface layer which was only slightly water-
proofed. The parenchyma is much reduced, and the medullary ra\ - are abundantly liqui-
fied. In roots which normally develop fibers I Solarium oleraceum) such I issues are completely
suppressed. On the other hand, the tissues of the vascular system are little modified. Au-
thor finds that there are "tissues of adaptation," winch are modified by external conditions,
and "functional tissues," which are little modified by external factors.— V. II. Young.

1895. Burkill, I. H. Notes on Dipterocarps. No. 4. Jour. Straits Branch Roy. Asiatic
Soc. 81: 49-76. 213 fig. 1920.— A continuation of notes No. 1, 2, and 3 in which the morpho-
logy of the seed and seedling of Anisoptera costata Korth, Shorea macroptera Dyer, S. parvi-
folia Dyer, S. bracteolata Dyer, S. rigida Brandis, S. gibbosa Brandis, 8. leprosula Miq. and
S. robusta Gaertn f. were given. The present note deals with the morphology of the embryo
and seedling and position of the flower of Diplerocarpus alatus of Penang (?Rob), D. fagineus
Vesque, D. cornutus Dyer, D. sp. nov., D. Scortechinii King, D. grandiflorus Blanco, D. crini-
tus Dyer, D. Kerrii King, Dyobalanops aromatica Gaertn f., Hopea micrantha Hook f., H.
mengarawan Miq., Balanocarpus Curtisii King, B. zeylanicus Trim., Vatica nitens King,
Retinodendron pallidum King, Anisoptera costata Korth., A. Curtisii Dyer, Balanocarpus
penangianus King, Shorea costata King, S. materialis Ridley, S. gratissima Dyer, S. pauci-
fl&ra Dyer, S. utilis King, S. macroptera Dyer, S. parvifolia Dyer, S. scutulata King, S. Cur-
tisii King, S. sericea Dyer, S. rigida Brandis, S. bracteolata Dyer, and Pachynocarpus
Wallichii.—T. F. Chipp.

1896. Burkill, I. II. Notes on Dipterocarps. No. 5. Jour. Straits Branch Roy. Asiatic
Soc. 81 : 3-4. 5 fig. 1920. — A description of the morphology of the embryo and seedling of
Balanocarpus maximus King.— 7\ F. Chipp.

1897. De Wildeman, Em. Sur la Macaranga saccifera Pax, Euphorbiacee mynnecophile
de l'Afrique tropicale. iOn Macaranga saccifera Pax, a myrmacophilous plant of tropical
Africa.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 394-396. 1919.— Author describes certain glands
and sacs produced by the stipules of Macaranga saccifera Pax., a member of the Euphorbiaceae
and a native of Belgian Congo and the surrounding country. Another species of Macaranga
(M. caladifolia Beccari) has inflated hollow stems inhabited by ants; by some it is considered
probable that the stipular sacs of M. saccifera are also inhabited by ants. Author finds that
in spite of evidence of the presence of ants in the stipular sacs of the latter species, there is
not enough evidence to conclude that the glandular structures found there are for the pur-
pose of attracting ants. The matter of plant and ant symbiosis is briefly discussed. — V. H.
Young.

1S98. Dupler, A. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus canadensis. Bot. Gaz. 68:345-366.
3 pi., 22 fig. 1919. — The staminate strobili occur in the leaf axils, the buds being first
distinguished from other types by the broad apex. The sporophyll primordia first appear as
slightly rounded lobes above the general surface and may arise in acropetal succession. The
archesporial initials are hypodermal cells and develop in eusporangiate fashion; they are four
to eight in number and are distributed around the margin of the primordium. The sporog-
enous tissue reaches the mother-cell stage about October 1, and forms microspores about
two weeks later; there is no abortion of sporangia, such as occurs in Torreya, the sporangia
occurring in a circle around the stalk of the sporophyll. The sporangium wall is usually two-
layered; the tapetum arises from the peripheral layer of the sporogenous tissue and persists
until after megaspore formation. The sporangium epidermis remains alive and thin-walled
at the base, dehiscence being accomplished by the rupture of these cells at maturity, by the
elongation of the stalk of the sporophyll; owing to the disintegration of the sporangium wall,
the epidermis is the functional wall in the later stages. The strobilus matures the latter
part of April; just before maturity there is an enlargement and elongation of the axis, pushing
the sporophylls beyond the scales. The strobili of Taxus canadensis are somewhat smaller
than those of T. baccata. The strobilus bundles are collateral endarch, excepting in the ter-

276 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

niinal portions of the scale bundles and the sporophyll bundles, where they may be mesarch;
and in the latter show indications of occasional exarch structure, the terminal portion of
these bundles also being concentric. — A. W. Dupler.

1899. Harlan, Harry V. Daily development of kernels of Hannchen barley from flower-
ing to maturity at Aberdeen, Idaho. Jour. Agric. Res. 19 : 393-429. PI. 83-91, 17 jig. 1920.

1900. Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas Firs: a botanical
and silvicultural study of the various species of Pseudotsuga. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. B, 35:
67-90. PL 12-14. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1544.

1901. Lecomte, Henri. Sur la "structure etagee" de certains bois. [On the "storied
structure" of certain woods.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 705-709. 1920. — The author
contends that it is preferable to restrict the term "storied wood" to cases in which the
wood rays are of about equal depth and in tangential section appear arranged in successive
layers as are the windows of most buildings. To instances where there are rays of two sizes,
only one of which is so arranged, he applies the term "semi-storied." He does not believe
the word "storied" should be used as referring to the wood elements. Nine species of legumes
and representatives of other families are listed as having storied wood-structure. — C. H. and
W. K. Farr.

1902. Morvillez, F. L'appareil conducteur foliaire des Hamamelidacees et des formes
voisines. [The foliar conductive system of the Hamamelidaceae and related forms.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 542-545. 10 fig. 1919. — Descriptions and drawings are presented
of the foliar vascular apparatus of Hamamelis virginiana L; Parrotia persica D. C. ; Folhergilla
alnifolia L., Disanthus cercidifolia Max; Bucklandia populnata D. C; Liquidambar styraci-
flua L. ; Altingia chinensis Hook; Platanus orientalis L. ; Liquidambar imberbe Ait., Eriobotrya
japonica Lindl. and Holodiscus discolor Maxim. On the basis of these studies, the author has
worked out a system of relationships among the groups of plants represented by the above
species. — V. H. Young.

1903. Morvillez, F. L'appareil liberoligneux foliaire des Betulacees, Corylacees et
Castaneacees. [The vascular anatomy of the leaves of the Betulaceae, Corylaceae, and Casta-
neaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:674-677. 12 fig. 1920. — These families are
found to differ in their foliar vascular anatomy in very much the same way as do the Chryso-
balaneae and the Leguminoseae; namely, in the number and development of the projecting
portions of the vascular ring at the distal end of the petiole. These lateral projections are
held to be of significance as a family characteristic. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1904. Schellenberg, G. Ueber einige Arten der Gattung Rourea Aubl. [Several species
of the genus Rourea Aubl.] Bot. Jahrb. 56 (Beiheft) : 21-29. 1920.

1905. Watson, E. E. On the occurrence of root-hairs on old roots of Helianthus rigidus.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 235. 1919. — Root hairs were formed on roots occurring
in the neighborhood of a bud at the end of a rhizome. These roots are one or two decimeters
long. Root hairs occur throughout the entire length. They are 0.5 mm. or more long, non-
septate, and frequently branched, always dichotomously. Each comes from a small wedge-
shaped epidermal cell. — Richard de Zeeuw.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

1006. Brotherus, V. F. Musci Weberbaueriani. Bot. Jahrb. 56 (Beibl. 123): 1-22.
1920. — Previous collections of the moss flora of Peru have not been very extensive or very
numerous. The principal ones are those of A. Mathews, R. Spruce, and E. Ule, with scat-
tered records from other collectors. The present report is based on the collection made

No. 4, January, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OP1 FUNGI, ETC. 277

by Dr. A. Weberbauer in 1901-1905, which contained 91 species, 29 of which are described
as new, and 42 of which were not previously known in Peru. The region is diverse, extending
from the tropical lowlands to the alpine summits, and with a markedly different amount of
rainfall. On the drier hills and half-deserts the mosses are mostly on the ground, stones, and
the branches of shrubs. In the more humid regions the moss covering becomes very thick.
In the tropical rain forest this massive development is not present, but the greater diver-
sity of the species makes up in importance for lack in quantity. The Sphagnum area lies on
the east side of the Andes. A list of the species collected is given, together with notes on dis-
tribution and taxonomy. The following species are described as new: Andreaea peruviana,
lUirbulasubreplicata, Barlramia anacolioides, B. perarisiala, Campylopus Weberbaueri, Crossi-
tiium peruvianum, Cyclodiotyon flexicuspes, Dicranella longifolia, D. Weberbaueri, Encalypta
peruviana, Entodon subflexipes, Fissidens ovicarpus, Funaria grossidens, Grimmia yaulensis,
Isopterygium peruvianum, Lepidopilum splendens, Leplodontium laticuspes, L. laxifolium,
Lcucodon peruvianus, Mielichhoferia ampullacea, M. aristatula, M. plagiobryoides, M. sub-
minutifolia, M . Weberbaueri, Pogonalum flaccidissimum, Prionodon fragilifolius, Ptychomi-
trium Weberbaueri, Schlotheimia calomitria, Streptopogon peruvianus, and Syrrhopodon diver-
sifolius. — K. M. Wiegand.

1907. Coulter, John M., and Merle C. Coulter. Plant Genetics, ix + 214 P-: 40
fig. Univ. Chicago Press: Chicago, 1918. — See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 395.

1908. Harshberger, J. W. Alpine fell-fields of eastern North America. Geog. Rev. 7:
233-255. 12 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1964.

1909. Land, W. J. G. Multiple eggs in bryophytes. [Rev. of: Florin, Rudolf. Das
Archegonium der Riccardia pinguis (L) B. Gr. Svensk. Bot. Tidsk. 12: 464-470. 4 fig. 1918.
(See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 1280.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 392. 1919.— The reviewer calls attention to
the frequency among the bryophytes of such so-called abnormalities as those described by
Florin, and discusses their importance from a phylogenetic standpoint. — A. W. Evans.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA,

AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. Fitzpatrick, Editor
FUNGI

1910. Barlot, J. Sur la determination d'Amanites veneneuses a l'aide de reactions
colorees. [The identification of poisonous Amanitas by color reactions.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 679-681. 1920. — Color reactions with various chemicals are found to
be of assistance in distinguishing the poisonous from non-poisonous species of Amanita.
No single reaction has been found which is absolutely diagnostic, but three deadly species
turn black when treated with a drop of fresh blood to which has been added some potassium
ferrocyanide. Other reactions are found for other species. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

1911. Bessey, E. A. Guide to the literature for the identification of fungi — A preliminary
outline for students and others. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 287-316. 1919.— A list
of the more accessible general works and special monographs on fungi has been prepared for
the service of students. "No attempt is made to cover the older literature; with few.excep-
tions, only those special studies are noticed that have appeared since the first volume of
Saccardo saw light." "Only those works are listed that bear upon groups more or less rep-
resented in the United States, particularly the eastern half." The bibliography given takes
up first the general works, hand books and host indexes, and then special works for limited
groups of fungi. The arrangement of the special articles cited follows the systematic arrange-
ment of the fungi. Approximately 700 titles are included in the list given. — G. H. Coons.

278 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1912. Bessey, E. A., and Bertha E. Thompson. An undescribed Genea from Michigan.
Mycologia 12 : 282-285. PI. 20. 1920. — A Genea with rectangular ascospores is described as
G. cubispora sp. nov. — H. R. Rosen.

1913. Chipp, T. F. A host index of fungi of the Malay Peninsula. II. Gardens' Bull.
Straits Settlements 2 : 276-282. 1920. — A conclusion of the summary of fungous diseases of
plants in Malaya as hitherto recorded. — T. F. Chipp.

1914. Dickson, B. T. Onygena equina (Willd.) Pers. Mycologia 12:289-291. 1 fig
1920. — Reports Onygena equina growing on cow's horns and hoofs at Quebec, Canada. —
H. R. Rosen.

1915. Fitzpatrick, Harry Morton. Monograph of the Coryneliaceae. Mycologia 12:
239-267. 1920. — The conclusion of work previously noted (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1217).
The genus Corynelia is described and a key to species is given, followed by a description of
each species. The following new species are included: C. bispora, C. nipponensis, C. brasili-
ensis, C. portoricensis, and C. jamaicensis. Doubtful and excluded species of the family
are discussed, and in this connection Hypsotheca thujiana E. & E. is listed as probably belong-
ing to the genus Caliciopsis. — H. R. Rosen.

1916. Fraser, W. P. Cultures of Puccinia Clematidis (DC.) Lag. and Puccinia Impa-
tientis (Schw.) Arth. Mycologia 12:292-295. 1920.— Overwintered telial material of Puc-
cinia Clematidis on Hystrix patula produced infections on Actaea rubra, with the production
of aecia. These aecia as well as others collected in the field were inoculated and produced
infections on the following grasses: Elymus canadensis, E. virginicus, Hordeum jubatum,
Hystrix patula, and Agropyron Richardsonii. According to E. B. Mains the aecial and telial
material corresponds to the European Puccinia Actaeae-elymi Mayor and P. Actaeae-agropyri
Ed. Fisch. It seems best to include these under one species, P. Clematidis (DC.) Lag.,
which is made up of several races. Inoculations with aeciospores from Thaliclrum dasy-
carpum produced infections on Bromus ciliatus, B. latiglumis, Elymus canadensis, and E.
virginicus. Since the resulting teliospores on Bromus were of the many-celled type, and on
Elymus of the two-celled type, the author believes that the Thalictrum aecia used in the inocu-
lations consisted of a mixture of aecia of two races. Using aecial material of Puccinia impa-
lientis (Schw.) Arth. on Impatiens biflora the following grasses were infected: Agropyron
tenerum, A. Richardsonii, Hystrix patula, Elymus canadensis, E. virginicus, and Hordeum
jubatum. — H. R. Rosen.

1917. Grove, W. B. Species placed by Saccardo in the genus Phoma. Part II. Kew
Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919 : 425-445. Fig. 1-6. 1919.— For part I, see Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 177-201. — Includes lists of host plants for parts I and II. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1918. Lehman, S. G. Penicillium spiculisporum, a new ascogenous fungous. Mycologia
12 : 268-274. PI. 19. 1920. — From healthy cotton rootlets a Penicillium was obtained
which produced perithecia in abundance on various culture media. It is described as P.
spiculisporum sp. nov. — H. R. Rosen.

1919. Murrill, W. A. A new Amanita. Mycologia 12:291-292. 1920.— Venenarius
Wellsii sp. nov. is described. "For the benefit of those following Saccardo .... the
combination Amanita Wellsii" is added. — H. R. Rosen.

1920. Murrill, W. A. Kauffman's Agaricaceae. [Rev. of: Kauffman, C. H. The
Agaricaceae of Michigan. Michigan Geol. and Biol. Surv. Publ. 26. Vol. 1 (text), xxvii -f-
924 P- Vol. 2 (plates), 10 p. text and 172 pi. 1918.] Mycologia 12: 166. 1920.— The reviewer
regards this as a "stupendous piece of work splendidly done." — H. R. Rosen.

No. 4, January, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 279

1921. Ritzema Bos, J. Boekaankondiging. [Book review. | [Rev. of: Oudemans, C.
A. J. A. Enumeratio systematica fungorum. Vol. I. cxxvi + 1280 p. Martinus Nijhoff:
The Hague, 1919.] Tijdschr. Plantenz. 25: 210-211. 1019.— A critical review.—//. H.
Whetzel.

1922. Vuillemin, Patjl. Fructifications de Champignons decouvertes dans l'ongle par
Louis Jannin. [The fructifications of fungi found on finger-nails by Louis Jannin.] Cornpt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 788-790. 1920.

1923. Ztjndel, George L. Some Ustilagineae of the state of Washington. Mycologia
12: 275-281. 1920. — There are recorded forty-two species of smuts, including Tilletia guyo-
tiana liar, and T. rauwenhoffii Fisch. de Wald. — two species which are said to be here recorded
for the first time from North America. — H. R. Rosen.

BACTERIA

1924. Dantsz, J. La vie d'un microbe, individu et espece. [The life of a microbe indi-
vidual and species.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris. 169: 104-106. 1919.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

1925. Berry, E. W. A fossil sea bean from Venezuela. Amer. Jour. Sci. 50:310-313.
1 fig. 1920. — Describes a fossil sea bean, Entada boweni, which is almost identical with the
existing Entada scandens, and comes from the Miocene of the foot-hills of the Sierra de Merida
in Venezuela. — E. W. Berry.

1926. Berry, E. W. Contributions to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic Coastal Plain,
XIII.— North Carolina. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:397-406. Fig. 2. 1920.— A summary
account of the Upper Cretaceous flora of North Carolina. Many well-known Upper
Cretaceous species are enumerated and fruits of Ficus and species of Aristolochites, and
Carpolithus are described as new. — E. W. Berry.

1927. Berry, Edward W. Paleobotany: A sketch of the origin and evolution of floras.
Smithsonian Report 1918:289-407. 6 -pi., 42 fig. 1920.— A general account of the science,
with an illustrated discussion of the morphology, habits, and phylogeny of plants, and a
description of the successive floras of geologic time. — E. W. Berry.

1928. Carpentier, Alfred. Sur les fructifications du Sphenopteris herbacea Boulay.
[On the fructifications of Sphenopteris herbacea Boulay.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
169:511-513. 1919.

1929. Scott, D. H. The relation of the seed plants to the higher cryptogams. (Abstract.)
Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 334. 1920.

1930. White, O. E. The ancient history of plants. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Leafl. 83-5: 1-8.
1920.

1931. Yabe, H., and Endo, S. Discovery of a stem of Calamites from the Paleozoic of
Japan. Jour. Geol. Soc. Tokyo 27: 65-69. 1 fig. 1920. — The coal measures of China, Man-
churia, and to a less extent Korea are abundantly plant bearing, but in Japan these are repre-
sented by marine limestones. No remains of terrestrial vegetation of Carboniferous age have
been known from Japan except a supposed fragment of a Sigillaria which is very doubtful
both as to age and identity. The authors record from what is probably the Chichibu forma-
tion, of Carboniferous age, a fragment of a calamite whose anatomical characters suggest the
Arthropitys type of calamite stem structure. The material which came from marine beds
in the province of Iwami, is not sufficiently well preserved to permit a more precise identifi-
cation.— E. W. Berry.

280 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI.

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

1932. Anonymous. Beschadigungen an Eichen durch Diaporta taleola Tul. [Injury to
oak by Diaporta taleola Tul.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Fortsw. 69: 62-63. Frontispiece. 191S. —
The disease described by Moreillon in Forestier Suisse, according to Dr. Schellenberg,
is caused by Diaporthe (Aglaospora) taleola. A description and illustration of the affected
tree and a short description of the organism. — D. Reddick.

1933. Anonymous. The ring or Bangadi disease of potato. Leaflet Dept. Agric. Bombay
1918: 3. 1918.— This ring disease, known to the people as bangadi or chari, is characterized
at first by partial and later by complete withering of the potato plants, which then turn
brown and dry up. Cross sections of tubers from diseased plants show a brown ring from
which a cream-yellow bacterial slime oozes under slight pressure. Both field and storage
rots result. It appears to be spread in the field by irrigation water. The disease originates
in infected seed and is therefore to be avoided by the use of healthy seed, proper disinfection
of the cutting knife after a diseased tuber is cut, and by good field sanitation and drainage
since the trouble develops most seriously in water-logged areas. The name of the causal
organism is not given. — H. A. Edson.

1934. Anonymous. Bestrijding van schurftziekte bij appelen en peren. [Control of scab
on apples and pears.] Tijdschr. Plantenz. 26: 108. 1920. Newsletter No. 13 of the Phyto-
pathological Service, March, 1920. — Outlining spraying program, and methods of making
spray mixtures. — H. H. Whetzel.

1935. Bessey, E. A. The effect of parasitism upon the parasite — A study in phylogeny.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 317-320. 1919. — In a brief account, the writer considers
various steps involved in change from the holophytic to parasitic habit in plants of various
orders of evolutionary complexity. Epiphytism is considered the first step toward parasi-
tism. "The next step seems to have been partial or total endophytism." This type of rela-
tionship shows various degrees from the simple shelter and partial feeding in Chlorochy'trium,
to the endophytism shown in certain red seaweeds which, while still possessing chloroplasts,
adopt a filamentous form of structure. Among the higher plants the mistletoes (Viscum or
Phoradendron) are comparable to this type of relationship. Following endophytism true
parasitism is found either intra- or intercellular in the host relationship. In the case of
complete parasitism, a considerable reduction of the plant body and an increase in size of re-
productive structures take place, but among the yeasts and some other forms a reduction of
the reproductive structures occurs. Clearly the simpler the structure to begin with, the
slighter the change beyond loss of chlorophyll and chloroplasts. With the plants of more
complicated vegetative structure two tendencies appear — a simplification and reduction of
all organs for photosynthesis, and an emphasizing of the reproductive portions. When,
however, the former tendency is carried too far, as in the yeasts, the reproductive portion
has to be reduced as well. — G. H. Coons.

1936. Bintner, J. Silver leaf disease. Stereum purpureum. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 241-263. PI. 8, fig. 1-8. 1919.— This disease is known to attack the following
plants: — Prunus spp., Malus sylvestris, Exochorda sp., Neviusia alabamensis, Philadelphus
sp., Spiraea japonica glabrata, Ribes cereum, Ribesspp. (currants and gooseberries), Laburnum
alpinum and vulgar a, Syringa sp., Aesculus carnea and hippocastanum, Pernettya mucronata.
The hyphae of this pathogene are always found in the stem and roots of silver-leaf trees, though
they have never been found in either the petiole nor the leaf blades of such trees. True
silver leaf caused by this pathogene is distinguished from false silver leaf not caused by any
organism. Infection occurs through wounds on stems or roots. A bibliography and his-
torical account of the disease are given. — E. Mead Wilcox.

No. 4, January, 1921] PATHOLOGY 281

1937. Chipp, T. F. A host index of fungi of the Malay Peninsula. II. Gardens' Bull.
Straits Settlements 2 : 270-282. 1920— See Bot. Absta. 6, Entry 1913.

1938. Coons, G. H. The Michigan plant disease survey for 1918. Michigan Acad. Sci.
Ann. Rept. 21:331-343. PI. 15. 1919.— Reports are Riven upon the disease occurrence in
cereals, fruits, etc., in Michigan in 1918. These are the result of observations by the author
and by other persons cooperating. A short discussion of "The went her of 1918" and "Weather
injury to plants" precedes the accounts of the different crops and their diseases. — E. A.

1939. Coons, G. H., and Genevieve Gillette. Phenol injury to apples. Michigan Acad.
Sci. Ann. Rept. 21:325-329. PI. 14- 1919.— As a result of tests in exposing apples to the
fumes of phenol in concentrations as low as 1 to 1000, blackening of the skin and flesh occurred,
the speed of reaction increasing with concentration of phenol and with temperature. The
reaction did not take place with apples which had been killed by boiling. With apple juice,
discoloration occurred with apple cells in the juice but not in the juice itself, upon the addi-
tion of phenol. "The reaction is connected with living cells and is not the mere chemical
effect of one substance upon another. The response of mature cells and the failure of the
dead cells in the mellow apples to respond point to the possibility of this substance furnishing
a criterion for active and for dead cells." It may be that the phenol reacts with some oxydiz-
ing enzyme, such as tyrosinase, producing the blackening. — G. H. Coons.

1940. Coons, G. H., and H. H. McKinney. Formaldehyde injury to wheat. Michigan
Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 321-324. 1919. —In a preliminary note authors summarize results
of experiments on formaldehyde injury to wheat. The injury is readily produced in the
laboratory, wheat being more sensitive than oats, barley, or rye. The standard wet treat-
ment (1 pint of formaldehyde to 40 gallons of water) or the new dry treatment (1 pint of formal-
dehyde atomized on 50 bushels of grain) reduces germination slightly — but not more than 10
per cent. Formaldehyde does not air readily out of grain. The action of this relict formal-
dehyde is cumulative, its toxic action being shown either by killing of embryo or by the
production of grave distortion. Under cold, wet conditions very little formaldehyde will air
from grain. Damp soil readily takes up formaldehyde from grains, preventing damage. Dry
soil does not take up formaldehyde readily. Toxicity of formaldehyde varies with the dilu-
tion. The experiments were performed with small quantities of wheat in low glass dishes, and
the amount of formaldehyde used was calculated from the delivery of an atomizer. The
treated grain was germinated in soil, blotting paper results not being found to compare with
field studies. — G. H. Coons.

1941. Dufrenoy, Jean. Sur les tumeurs bacteriennes experimentales des pins. [On
experimental bacterial tumors of pines.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 545-547. 1919. —
Pinus sylvestris and P. laricio are deformed by tumors identical with those affecting P.
maritima and capable of transmission from tree to tree. By means of needle inoculations
from tree to tree, cankers were obtained in a few months and resinous tumors in a year. The
anatomy of these tumors is briefly described. The causal organism is an unnamed Coccus of
which pure cultures were obtained by inoculating media directly from the host. The organ-
ism brings about hyperplasia in the infected regions, and finally the tissues break down leaving
a resinous mass. — V. H. Young.

1942. Ehrhorn, E. M. Notes on plant shipment. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17:
4-6. 1920. — This article emphasizes the importance and necessity for the rules issued by the
Division of Plant Inspection, and gives also directions for the safe shipment of p ants under
the rules. — Stanley Coulter.

1943. Fisher, D. F., and Newcomer, E. J. Pear scab in the Pacific Northwest. Better
Fruit 149:3-6. 1920.— A verbatim excerpt from U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers Bull. 1056.
1919.

282 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1944. Fryer, Percival J. Insect pests and fungus diseases of fruit and hops, xv + 728
p., 24 pi. University Press: Cambridge, England, 1920.

1945. Gunderson, A. J. Some facts about dry lime-sulphur. Better Fruit 1410:42.
1920. — This is a detailed account of the spraying and killing efficiency of dry lime-sulphur
as compared with ordinary boiled lime sulphur. The chemical composition of dry lime-sul-
phur is considered in detail. — A. E. Murneek.

1946. Heinsius, H. W. Kort verslag van de algemeene vergadering op vrijdag 20 juni 1919,
in den hortus botanicus te Amsterdam. [Secretary's report of the annual meeting of the Phyto-
pathological Society of Holland.'! Tijdschr. Plantenz. 25: 202-204. 1919.

1947. Hiley, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch, 8 vo., xii -f- 204 P-, 73 pi.
Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1920.

1948. Kuhr, C. A. H. von Wolzogen. Het zure bibitrot bij het suikerriet. [Sour
cutting-rot of sugar cane.] Arch. Suikerindust. in Nederlandsch-Indie' 28:703-756. 24 fig.
1920. Also, Mededeel. Proefstat. Java Suikerindust. Landb. Ser. 1920, No. 3. — The sour cut-
ting-rot retards or kills small scattered areas in the young cane fields, giving an appearance
similar to damage resulting from the "pineapple" disease. The interior of affected cuttings
shows a red to brown discoloration in more or less irregularly scattered patches and has a sour
odor. The affected cutting is found to be at first acid, but later in the course of the fermen-
tation it is alkaline, doubtless through ammonia production. The initial process is typically
an acetic acid fermentation, though in exceptional cases of poor soil aeration lactic and
butyric acid fermentations occur. A number of different bacteria were cultivated from sap
expressed from affected cuttings, and their fermenting ability was studied in vitro. Isolation
of a specific organism was not attempted, and controlled inoculation experiments were not
made. The writer believes that the fermentation of the cuttings is caused by common soil
bacteria, and that the harmful effect on the plant is due to the absorption from the cutting of
the acids produced in the fermentation occurring before the roots become well enough estab-
lished to make the plant independent of the cutting. For control the writer recommends the
improvement of all conditions which further the rapid germination and establishment of the
plantlets on their own roots. — R. D. Rands.

1949. Mann, Harold H., S. D. Nagpurkar, and G. S. Kulkorni. The "Tambera"
disease of potato. Agric. Jour. India 15: 282-288. 4 pis. 1920. — The disease which prevailed
in the Poona district of western India, known locally as "Tambera," was found to be caused
by mites. A description of the affected plants is given, and remedies are suggested. — J. J.
Sh inner.

1950. Meier, F. C. Control of watermelon anthracnose by spraying. U. S. Dept. Agric.
Dept. Circ. 90: 3-11. 8 fig. 1920. — "The most practicable method of reducing the damage
done by anthracnose is to spray the watermelon vines with 4-4-50 bordeaux mixture." This
operation will also help to control other diseases of the crop. Directions are given regarding
time and manner of spraying and for the preparation of bordeaux. The disease is described,
and the method by which the causal fungus (Colletotrichum lagenarium) is spread is discussed.
— L. R. Hesler.

1951. Nicolas, G. Sur la respiration des plantes parasitees par des champignons. [The
respiration of plants parasitized by fungi.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 750-752.
1920. — A comparison of the carbon dioxide-oxygen ratio of sound and diseased specimens
of five genera of angiosperms. Seven genera of fungi were involved as disease-producing
organisms. It is found that the respiration of organs parasitized with endophytes, such as
rusts and Cystopus, and by subcuticular fungi, such as Taphrina, is greater than that of sound
organs. The reverse is true of organs attacked by ectophytes, such as mildew. C. H. and
W. K. Farr.

No. 4, January, 1921] PATHOLOGY 283

1952. Owen, M. N. The skin spot disease of potato tubers (Oospora pustulans). Ki w
Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 289-301. PL 11, 11 fig. 1919.— Thia is a storage disease of
Irish potato tubers, caused by the fungous pathogene Oospora pustulans, here described as a
new species by Owen and Wakefield. It is shown to be distinct from Spicaria solani
Harting, which name has been assigned to it by other authors. Small dark spots occur scat-
tered over the surface of the tuber. Infection near the eyes may kill the buds. Diseased
tubers should no! be planted. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1953. Parsons, T. H. Notes on the effects of shell fire on trees in woods in France.
Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 231-233. PI. 6-7. 191').

1954. Peltier, G. L. A summary of the citrus canker investigation in south Alabama.
Proc. Gulf Coast Hortic. Soc. 4: 21-22. 1918.

1955. Peltier, George L., and William J. Frederich. Relative susceptibility to citrus-
canker of different species and hybrids of the genus Citrus, including the wild relatives. Jour.
Agric. Res. 19:339-362. PL 57-68. 1920.— Continuation of previous work. (See Bot.
Absts. 1, Entry 924.) The tests were made both in greenhouse and in field. With a single
exception the data confirm those of Lee (Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 774). Pseudomonas citri has a
wide range of hosts and is not limited to the genus Citrus. Of the rutaceous plants not closely
related to Citrus, infection was secured on Casimiroa edulis, Chalcas exotica, and Claucena
lansium. The lesions are non-typical, unruptured spots and occur at wounds or scratches
on the leaves. Xanthoxylum sp. and Glycosmis pentaphylla are immune. — In the tribe Citreae
species in sub-tribes have been tested as follows: In Angelinae, Chaetospermum glutinosum is
susceptible, with lesions somewhat like those on Citrus; Aegle marmelos is slightly suscept-
ible; Balsamocitrus dawei and Aeglopsis chevalieri are immune. In Feroninae, Feronia limonia
and Feroniella lucida were infected, and lesions developed in absence of wounds. In Lavan-
ginae, Hesperthusa crenulata was infected on twigs and leaves, although the lesions are non-
typical, while Triphasia trifolia and Severinia buxifolia are immune. In Citrinae, all plants
tested were infected, only Citropsis schweinfurthii and Fortunella margarita, japonica and
crassifolia showing any marked resistance. — Only those wild relatives which were most sus-
ceptible in the greenhouse could be infected in the field. So far as the citrus industry of U.
S. A. is concerned none of the wild relatives, native or introduced, now growing in the citrus
districts is susceptible enough to have any bearing on the national program for the eradica-
tion of citrus canker. A possible exception is Poncirus trifoliata. — The species of Citrus
show no change in relative susceptibility from previous report. Citrus nobilis and its varie-
ties are resistant. — Of the hybrids, those having Poncirus trifoliata as one parent are sus-
ceptible; citrange hybrids, particularly citrangequats, are decidedly resistant. — All false
hybrids are extremely susceptible. — D. Reddick.

1956. Putterill, V. A. Flag smut of wheat. Jour, of Dept. Agric. Union of South
Africa, 1 : 252-257. 5 fig. 1920. — Flag smut in wheat, caused by Urocystis tritici, has re-
cently been recorded from Zeerust district. An outline is given of the life history of the
fungus, and preventive measures are suggested. — E. M. Doidge.

1957. Rambousek, Fr. Riibenschadlinge und Riibenkrankheiten im Jahre 1917. [Ene-
mies and diseases of beets in 1917.] Zeitschr. Zuckerind. Bohmen 42: 527-539. 1918.

1958. Ritzema Bos, J. Boekaankondiging. [Book review.] [Rev. of : J. Kok. Vijanden
van landbouwgewassen. (Enemies of cultivated plants.) 2d. ed. 1919.] Tijdschr. Plantenz.
26: 115-116. 1920. — The contents of the work are divided into three parts, the first dealing
with injuries due to the environment; the second, injuries due to animals including insects;
and the third part dealing with diseases due to pathogenic plants, especially the fungi. A.
list of errors and misstatements found in the book is given. — H. H. Whetzel.

284 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1959. Schoevers, T. A. C. Ziekten van aardappel knollen. [Diseases of potato tubers.]
Tijdschr. Plantenz. 26: 5-20. 3 pi., 13 fig. 1920. — A brief description of twenty diseases
affecting the tubers of potato. The symptoms, especially those exhibited by the tubers, are
described, and standard methods for control are given. Among the diseases described are:
Rhizoclonia disease, Wart, Fusarium rot, scab, tuber proliferation, bacterial soft rot, red rot,
Phytophthora rot, ring necrosis, silver scurf, Verticillium disease, nematode disease, hollow-
ness, and powdery scab. Half-tone illustrations of many of the diseases and a key for deter-
mining the diseases from an examination of the tubers, accompany the text. — H. H. Whetzel.

1960. Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov. Crop in-
jury by borax in fertilizers. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 84: 35p. 25 fig. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1431.

1961. Stager, R. Beitrag zur Verbreitungsbiologie der Claviceps-Sklerotien. [Dis-
semination of Claviceps sclerotia.] Verh. Schweizer Naturw. Gesell. 99: 236-237. 1918. —
Sclerotia of Claviceps do not simply fall to the ground and lie there until the following spring.
They may be spread widely with the host (sclerotia from Brachy podium, Agropyrum, Lolium,
Arrhenatherum elatius, and Alopecurus myosuroides) ; they may be disseminated by the in-
herent condition of low specific gravity which allows them to float on water (sclerotia from
Molinia coerulea, Glycerina flxritans, Phalaris and Phragmites) ; they may be distributed by a
union of the distribution apparatus of host and parasite to mutual advantage (as in case of
species of Holcus, Poa nemoralis, P. annua and Dactylis glomerata); with sclerotia of low
specific gravity, wind transport is possible. A combination of wind and water movement
exists for sclerotia from Phragmites and Calamagrostis arundinacea. [Through abst. by
Matouschek in: Zentbl. gesamte Landw. 1, Entry 355. 1919.] — D. Reddick.

1962. Stehlik, W. Bekampfung des Wurzelbrandes bei der Zuckerriibe durch ihre Ziich-
tung. [Control of sugar beet root-rot by breeding.] Ost-Ung. Zeitschr. Zuckerind. u. Landw.
47: 1-10. 1918.— [Abst. by Molz in: Zentralbl. gesamte Landw. 1, Entry 277. 1920.]

1963. Taubenhaus, J. J. Diseases of greenhouse crops and their control. Dutton &
Co. : New York, 1920.

1964. Thornber, J. J. Plant disease inquiries. Arizona Agric. Exp. Sta. Rept. 1917:
431-432. 1918. — A short list of diseases occurring in Arizona in 1917. — D. Reddick.

1965. Valleatj, W. D. Seed corn infection with Fusarium moniliforme and its relation to
root and stalk rots. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 226: 25-51. Fig. 1. 1920. — An exami-
nation to determine the seed-borne organisms in seed of Zea Mays L. which might cause
root and stalk rots of corn resulted in finding Fusarium moniliforme Sheldon in all samples of
corn examined from the states of Kentucky, Kansas, Arkansas, Missouri, Tennessee, Georgia,
Mississippi and Minnesota. No disease-free ears were found, and practically one hundred
per cent infection of kernels on an ear was the rule. Infection on an ear was found not to be
localized. The high degree of seed infection probably explains the equally extensive root
infection under field conditions. The rag doll and other germinators in which seedlings were
grown only to a height of 3 or 4 inches were of little value in determining the extent of kernel
infection on an ear. Sand germinators in which the seedlings were grown to a height of 12 to
22 inches were used, the seedlings being removed and washed and the roots and stems exam-
ined for lesions. The development of pink, scarlet, purple, or black discolorations within
the seed coats, in any type of germinator indicated infection with F. moniliforme. Pink dis-
colorations on dry white kernels are an indication of infection. Isolations from rotting roots
and stalks in the field yielded F . moniliforme in the majority of cases. Infection with F.
moniliforme generally has little effect on the germination or early vigor of the resulting
seedling. — W. D. Valleau.

No. 4, January, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 285

1966. Van der Bijl, Paul A. A list of host-plants of some of the Loranthaceae occurring
round Durban, Natal. South African Jour. Sci. 16: ;ilo-347. 1920. — These mistletoes not
only occur on a large number of South African plants, but have also adapted themselves to a
number of introduced trees, including fruit trees. — E. P. Phillips.

1967. Verhobvbn, \V. B. L. Zaaigraanonsmetting. [Seed grain disinfection.] Tijdschr.
IMantenz. 26: 24-27. 1920. — A reprint of Vlugschrift No. 16 of the Phytopathological Service
issued December, 1919. Standard directions for seed treatment to control the following dis-
eases are given: Stinking smut of wheat and barley with copper sulphate, formalin, and Uspu-
lum; loose smut of wheat and barley with hot water; oat smut with hot water; stripe of barley
with copper sulphate; stem smut of rye with copper sulphate; seedling mold of wheat, oats,
barley, and rye with hot water or copper sulphate. — H. H. Whetzel.

196S. Vermorel and Dantony. Efficacite comparee de bouilles bordelaises ordinaires
et des bouilles bordelaises caseinees pour la preservation des grappes. [Comparative efficiency
of ordinary bordeaux mixture and bordeaux mixture with the addition of casein in the treatment
of grapes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 439-440. 1919. — Experiments were carried
out with bordeaux mixture to which was added fifty grams of casein per hectoliter. Chemical
tests of grape tissues over a period of forty-five days indicated that the mixture adheres
much better if casein is added and that it remains on the tissues in spite of rain and unfavor-
able weather conditions without loss of efficiency. — In the treatment of grapes for mildew
this promises to be a great advantage, since the spray is not easily applied to the fruits ex-
cept when the leaves are small and consequently must be of a type which adheres well and
does not lose its efficiency. — V. H. Young.

1969. Volkerz, K. lets over plaatselijk onderzoek van bloembollenziekten. [Remarks
on the locating of investigations on bulb diseases.] Tijdschr. Plantenz. 26: 61-70. 1920. — The
writer urges that scientific investigations on plant diseases be conducted in the fields or in
localities where conditions for normal crop production of the host is best. — H. H. Whetzel.

1970. Wester, P. J. The coconut, its culture and uses. Philippine Agric. Rev. 11:
5-57. 1918. — Diseases of coconut are reviewed briefly on pages 45 to 47. — D. Reddick.

1971. Woodcock, E. F. Observations on the potato disease conditions in Michigan for
the summer of 1918. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 281-285. 1919.— A summary of data
showing distribution and extent of injury by potato diseases in the summer of 1918, in Michi-
gan.— G. H. Coons.

1972. Zundel, George L. Some Ustilagineae of the state of Washington. Mycologia 12 :
275-281. 1920.

PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY

Heber W. Youngken, Editor
E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor

1973. Anonymous. Datura Stramonium, "Stinkblaar," "Stramonium" or "Thorn
Apple." South African Jour. Indust. 3:455-461. 1920.

1974. Anonymous. Momordica cochinchinensis. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920:
6-12. 1920. — The oil from the seeds may possibly be employed in the manufacture of paints
and varnishes. — E. Mead Wilcox.

1975. Anonymous. Strychnos nux-vomica in Cochin China. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919:238-239. 1919.— The plant is found to be indigenous to Cochin China.—
E. Mead Wilcox.

286 PHARMACOGNOSY IBot. Absts., Vol. VI,

1976. Bliss, A. R. Proposed vegetable drug deletions. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:
767-771. 1920. — A summarized report of answers received from 387 physicians of Atlanta,
Georgia, relative to the various vegetable drugs of the United States Pharmacopoeia, in
regard to their retention or deletion. Author gives a list of 31 drugs which more than 50
per cent of the physicians favored deleting. Another list of 30 received absolute unanimity
of opinion for retention. Comments by the author are included as to the necessity for the
deletion of such drugs as aconite on account of the dangers attending its use; squill, on ac-
count of its indesirable side actions; pepo, claimed to be absolutely worthless; and gelsemium,
which is of no great medicinal importance. Author presents a list of 22 drugs which might
well be deleted. The suggestion is offered to delete the crude drugs in case of aromatic oil
drugs and to retain their respective volatile oils. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1977. Bourqtjelot, Em., and M. Bridel. Recherche et caracterisation du glucose dans
les vegetaux, par un procede biochimique nouveau. [The detection of glucose in plants by a
new biochemical process.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:631-335. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 2002.

1978. Grant, E. H. New tests for some purgative drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc.
9 : 763-766. 1920. — A series of new color tests for a number of purgative drugs, namely,
Scammony, Jalap, Leptandra, Gamboge, Podophyllum, Senna, Rhubarb, Butternut (bark
of root), Cassia Fistula, and Chionanthus. The tests given for Gamboge, Podophyllum,
Senna, Rhubarb and Chionanthus were found to be quite characteristic; the other tests while
being far from conclusive, are of value in assisting to identify these drugs. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1979. Hoffstein, B. H. Notes on henna. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92:543-547. 1920.— A
brief review of the historical usages of henna. Analysis of one of the so-called henna hair dyes
disclosed the following combination: powdered sumac, henna, ferrous sulphate, and copper
sulphate. Another sample was found to contain pyrogallol and henna in one container, and
a mixture of ammonium chloride and copper sulphate in the other. Attention is called to the
erroneous statement that henna does not contain tannin, which has been copied and recopied
from time to time. Method for the extraction of the tannin is given as follows: Extract
chlorophyll with ether; then percolate with 90 per cent alcohol; distil off the alcohol and again
exhaust the syrupy residue with ether; dissolve residue in 95 per cent alcohol and again distil
off alcohol. This method yields a resinoid tannin, which is soluble in hot water and capable,
like other tannins, of reacting with ferric salts and gelatine. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1980. Kraemer, Henry. Michigan — An important source of raw vegetable products.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 167-199. 1919. — The author notes the influence of the
Great War on the supply of raw vegetable products, especially crude drugs in America, and
points out the desirability of cultivating many of the common medicinal plants in the United
States. A short account is given of efforts that have already been made along this line and
the obstacles to be overcome. One noteworthy success is mint oil culture in Michigan.
Michigan contains many wild medicinal plants and has a climate favorable to the cultivation
of many European drug plants. At the present time it has a greater acreage devoted to the
cultivation of medicinal plants than any other state. The author presents a summary of
recent experiments in the growing of medicinal plants at the University of Michigan botanical
gardens. About fifty different species were grown, with a total of 20,000 individual plants,
of which 15,000 were harvested, giving abundant material for tests. — H. T. Darlington.

1981. Leape, H. M., and H. E. Annett. Investigations concerning the production of
Indian opium for medicinal purposes. Agric. Jour. India 15: 124-134. 1920. — See Bot. Absts.
6, Entry 1422.

1982. Marsh, C. Dwight, and A. B. Clawson. Astragalus tetrapterus, a new poisonous
plant of Utah and Nevada. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 81 : 3-6. 2 fig. 1920.

No. 4, January, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 287

r ■

1983. Marsh, C.«Dwight. A new sheep-poisoning plant of the southern states. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 82: 1-3. 1 fig. 1920. — Daubentonia longifolia.

1984. Marsh, C. Dwight, and Glenwood, C. Roe. Sweet-clover-seed screenings not
injurious to sheep. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 87: 3-7. 1920.

1985. Marsh, C. Dwight. The whorled milkweed, a plant poisonous to livestock. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 101 : 1-2. / fig. 1920. — Asclepias galioides.

1986. Praeger, W. E. A collection of Sphagnum from the Douglas Lake region, Cheboygan
County, Michigan. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 237-238. 1919.— The collection of
Sphagna was made in order to determine the value of Sphagnum as a surgical dressing.
Twenty-six species were found, one of which was first grade dressing material; one was fair,
and two were poor but might be used. Samples may be found in the cryptogamic herbarium
of the University of Michigan for reference in any future study of the subject. — Bertha E.
Thompson.

1987. Rock, J. F. The poisonous plants of Hawaii. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17:
59-62. 1920. — Twelve species are given as being internal poisons, of which four are native
to the Territory, the remainder being introduced forms. Recognition characters are given
in each case. The native plants included are Akia (Wikstroemia spp.), Auhuhu or Hola
(Tephrosia piscaloria), Kikania (Solarium spp.), and Kukui, (Aleurites moluccana). The
first two of these are employed by the natives to stupefy fish. Both also are poisonous to
stock. The introduced plants include common Night Shade, Jimson Weed, Castor Oil
Bean, Poinsettia, and Oleander. — Stanley Coulter.

1988. Rock, J. F. The poisonous plants of Hawaii. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17:
97-100. 1920. — This concluding portion of Dr. Rock's article includes thirteen additional
plants as poisonous. Most of them are introduced, and most of them are easily recognized. —
Stanley Coulter.

1989. Russell, G. A. A machine for trimming camphor trees. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept.
Circ. 78: 3-8. 4 fig- 1920. — Discussion of mechanism for harvesting camphor material, and
description of the machine for trimming camphor trees. — L. R. Hesler.

1990. Scott, W. R. M., and E. J. Petry. Correlation of variation in resin content of
Podophylum with certain habitats. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 225-231. 1919.

1991. Tommasi, G. Ricerche sull'Henna (Lawsonia inermis L.) Sulla costituzione
chimica del Lawsone. [Researches upon Lawsonia inermis L. and upon the constitution of
Lawsone.] Gazz. Chim. Ital. 50:263-272. 1920 (Part I).— The powdered leaves of Law-
sonia inermis L. from Tripoli, Africa, were extracted with cold water, and the extract was
treated with lime water, strongly acidified with HC1, and extracted with ether. Treatment
with lime water and strong shaking over ether allow the water layer to assume a strong red-
orange coloration. Solution of the product and subsequent additional extraction with
ether in strongly acid solution further purify the substance. The compound obtained after
numerous extractions and purifications is named by the author "Lawsone." It has a M.P.
of 192-195°C, is decomposed at this temperature, and has a M.W. of 174.05, an empirical
formula of CioHA), with an elementary composition on analysis of C — 68.95; H — 3.48;
O — 27.57 per cent. The structural formula appears to be that of a 2-oxy-l-4-naphthaquinone.
It may be used as a dye for wool, silk, and leather. — A. Bonazzi.

1992. Viehoever, Arno. Commercial hydrastis (goldenseal). Jour. Amer. Pharm.
Assoc. 9: 779-784. 1 fig. 1920. — A report on the analyses of a number of samples of hydrastis
collected in various states of the U. S. A., giving moisture content, alkaloidal content, total
ash and acid insoluble ash content. From the results obtained the author suggests that the
required minimum alkaloidal content of hydrastis be raised to 2.75 per cent of ether-soluble

288 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

alkaloids, and that a maximum of 8 per cent be established for total ash and 3 per cent for
acid insoluble ash. The rhizome portions were found to have a higher alkaloidal content than
the roots, thereby confirming a previous report in literature, — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

1993. Youngken, H. W., and C. F. Slotter. Studies on commercial varieties of nux
vomica. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92: 538-540. 1920. — A discussion as to some means of distin-
guishing between a number of varieties of nux vomica; namely, Tellicherry, Madras, Cochin
and Ceylon. The descriptions include the outer morphological characteristics, specific
gravity, and measurements of the hairs and the outer endosperm cells. — Anton Hogstad, Jr.

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. Duggar, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

1994. Girard, Pierre. Relation entre l'etat electrique de la paroi de la cellule et sa per-
meabilite a un ion donne. [Relation between the electrical state of the cell membrane and its
permeability to a given ion.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 94-97. 1919.

1995. Shull, C. A. Absorption of gold. [Rev. of : Williams, Maud. Absorption of gold
from colloidal solution by fungi. Ann. Bot. 32:531-534. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry
194.)] Bot. Gaz. 68:392. 1919.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

1996. Andre, G. Repartition des elements mineraux et de l'azote chez le vegetal etiole.
[The distribution of the mineral elements and the nitrogen in etiolated plants.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 167: 1004-1006. 1918. — Kidney beans were grown for twenty-five days.
Analysis showed about two-thirds of the lime and one-third of the sulphur present in the coty-
ledons. Nearly three-fourths of the nitrogen and phosphorus were present in the roots and
stems, while the magnesium and potassium were approximately in equal proportions in coty-
ledons and roots and stems. — G. M. Armstrong.

1997. Coupin, Henri. Sur l'absorption des sels mineraux par le sommet de la racine.
[On the absorption of mineral salts by the root tip.] Compt. Rend.. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:
242-245. 1919. — The plants employed were peas, castor-oil plant, and lupine. Tips of seed-
lings were dipped in Knop's solution and in distilled water. Differences in growth indicated
that nutritive salts were absorbed through the root tip in the first case.— V. H. Young.

1998. Gautier, Armand, and P. Clausmann. Action des fluores sur la vegetation: B.
Cultures en champ d'experiences. [Action of fluorides on vegetation: experimental cultures.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 115-122. 1919. — Preliminary experiments with artificial
media containing compounds of fluorine were not entirely conclusive, but later experiments
with the somewhat soluble calcium fluoride, added to ordinary soil, gave interesting results.
In its natural state this soil contained 88 mgm. of fluorine per kgm. Calcium fluoride was
added at the rate about 56 grams per square meter on small plots, and adjacent plants
received chalk containing an equal amount of calcium. The following crop plants were used:
wheat, oats, barley, carrots, turnips, potatoes, beets, kidney-beans, peas, cabbage, pop-
pies, etc. In most cases a marked increase was to be noted, although in a few cases the results
gave an indifferent or even a lower yield. The authors believe that fluorine accompanies
phosphorus in plant tissues and seems to assist in its fixation in plant tissues. Since phos-
phorus is so important in stimulating the growth of plants, it is believed that the use of
fluorides on soils promises to be of great benefit. Fluorine from vegetable tissues does not
appear to be assimilated by animals, but is excreted directly.— V. H. Young.

No. 4, January, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 289

PHOTOSYNTHESIS

1999. Ravenna, C. Sulla formazione dell'amido nelle piante verdi. [Starch formation
in green plants.] Gazz. Chim. It.il. 50: 359-361. 11)20.— This is an answer fco some criticisms
and misunderstanding regarding previous work of the author on the subject. Pollacci (Atti
dell' I st it . Bot. Univ. Pavia Ser. 2. Vol. 17:29. 1!)17) questions the value of experiments
on the basis of lack of experimental controls, and in the present note Ravenna points to the
value of and interpretation to 1"' given to the controls which he had established in his work. —
A. Bonazzi.

2000. Saunders, J. T. A note on photosynthesis and hydrogen ion concentration. Proc.
Cambridge Phil. Soc. 19:315-310. 1920.— Slight variations in hydrogen-ion concentration
in shallow water is due to photosynthctic activity of plants present. — Michael Levine.

2001. Smith, A. Malixs. The temperature coefficient of photosynthesis: a reply to criti-
cism. Ann. Botany 33 : 517-536. 2 fig. 1919. — The author analyses the criticism in three
papers which have appeared recently discussing current conceptions respecting photosyn-
thesis and the relation of environmental factors to this process. All three criticisms appeared
in the Philippine Journal of Science, two being by Brown and Heise, and one by Brown,
— B. M. Dug gar.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

2002. Bourquelot, Em., and M. Bridel. Recherche et caracterisation du glucose dans
les vegetaux, par un procede biochimique nouveau. [The detection of glucose in plants by a
new biochemical process.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 631-635. 1920. — A new
method is described which constitutes an absolutely diagnostic test for glucose and allows
quantitative determinations to be made. The solution or extract of tissue to be tested is
mixed with methyl alcohol and emulsin. A methyl glucoside is formed which may be crystal-
lized out by evaporating the solution to dryness in vacuo and boiling the residue with acetic
ether; the glucoside crystallizes upon cooling. It is laevorotary. A study is made of known
mixtures of sugars to make sure that glucose is the only one involved in this reaction. Some
plant tissues are also studied. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

2003. Posternak, S. Sur la synthese de l'ether hexaphosphorique de l'inosite et son
identite avec la principe phospho-organique de reserve des plantes vertes. [On the synthesis
of hexa-phosphoric ether of inosite and its identity with the phospho-organic principles of green
plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 138-140. 1 fig. 1919.— Hexa-phosphoric ether
of inosite was prepared synthetically and found to be identical with the phospho-organic
reserve of green plants. — V. H. Young.

2004. Woo, M. L. Chemical constituents of Amaranthus retroflexus. Bot. Gaz. 68: 313-
344. 11 fig. 1919. — There is a large amount of nitrate in the organs of Amaranthus retroflexus,
especially in the stem and branches. The rate of nitrate absorption increases with age.
This high capacity for nitrate absorption and storage must be an important factor in com-
petition with cultivated plants, since nitrate deficiency so commonly limits crop production.
The carbohydrates and nitrogen compounds fluctuate throughout the growing period in in-
verse ratio to one another. The seeds contain much more organic than inorganic phosphorus.
The distribution of nitrogen in the seeds is in the same order as that of the phosphorus. The
predominating sugars in the seeds are the polysaccharides. The presence of nitrogen and
phosphorus in the lipin fraction indicates that the seeds contain phosphatides. — H. C. Coicles.

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

2005. Willaman, J. J. Tyrosinase of fungi. [Rev. of: Dodge, C. W. Tyrosin in the
fungi: chemistry and methods of studying the tyrosinase reaction. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard.
6:71-92. 1919. (See Bot, Absts. 4, Entry 1446.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 392. 1919.

290 PHYSIOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VI,

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, AND REPRODUCTION

2006. Besredka, A. L'oeuvre de Metchnikoff sur la senescence. [The work of Metchni-
koft" on senility.] Bull. Inst. Pasteur 17: 209-223. 1919. — This is an extract from the book by
Besredka which is published under the title: Histoire d'une idee. It covers the whole
activity of Metchnikoff in the broader zoological phase of the subject and therefore contains
material of interest to the physiologist. The great importance to be ascribed to phagocytosis
in pathological conditions and in senility is here emphasized, but the secondary nature of this
phenomenon is insisted upon. The role of intoxicating agents is treated, and the function
of the intestinal flora in intoxication is discussed in the light of the work issuing from the
laboratory of Metchnikoff on the subject of aseptic life. — A. Bonazzi.

2007. Bessey, E. A. The effect of parasitism upon the parasite — a study in phylogeny.
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 317-320. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1934.

2008. Friesner, Ray C. Periodicity of elongation and cell division. (Preliminary note.)
Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21:233-234. 1919. — Roots of Curcurbita Pepo, Lupinus
albus, Pisum sativum, Zea everta, Vicia faba, and Allium cepa were used. Elongation occurs
usually in waves three hours apart. There are also secondary waves from two to four in
number every 24 hours. Maximum elongation alternates with maximum cell division. —
Richard de Zeeuw.

2009. Harlan, Harry V., and Stephen Anthony. Development of barley kernels in
normal and clipped spikes and the limitations of awnless and hooded varieties. Jour. Agric.
Res. 19: 431-472. 13 fig. 1920.

GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY

2010. Green, Frederick J. Germinative capacity of pine seed. Quart. Jour. Forest.
14: 140-141. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 554.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

2011. Coupin, Henry. Sur le temps que la chlorophylle met a se developper a son maxi-
mum d'intensite a la lumiere. [On the time required for chlorophyll to develop to its maximum
intensity in light.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 753-754. 1920. — This is a continua-
tion of the previous studies appearing on page 403 of this volume. A determination is made
of the exposure to diffuse light required in order that etiolated seedlings may become as
green as those grown in light. It is found, for example, that the leaves of sugar corn require
only one day, whereas the hypocotyl of chicory requires fifteen days. — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

2012. Harvey, E. Newton. The nature of animal light. 182 p., 35 fig. J. B. Lippincott
Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. — While this book deals with luminescence in animal forms, it is of
general interest to physiologists and at the same time includes also a list of luminous organ-
isms including both animal and plant forms. — B. M. Duggar.

TOXIC AGENTS

2013. Coons, G. H., and Genevieve Gillette. Phenol injury to apples. Michigan
Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 325-329. PI. 14- 1919— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1938.

2014. Coons, G. H., and H. H. McKinney. Formaldehyde injury to wheat. Michigan
Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 321-324. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1939.

2015. Crocker, William. Zinc and growth of Aspergillus niger. [Rev. of: Steinberg,
R. A. A study of some factors influencing the stimulative action of zinc sulphate on the growth
of Aspergillus niger. I. The effect of the presence of zinc in the cultural flasks. Mem.
Torrey Bot. Club 17: 287-293. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 744.)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 391-392.
1919.

No. 4, January, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 291

2016. Rigg, George B., and T. G. Thompson. Colloidal properties of bog water. Hot.
Gaz. 68:307-379. 1919. — Bog water gives a precipitate on standing a few hours after sat-
uration with electrolytes, or upon standing a year or more without electrolytes. The filtrate
from the precipitation wit h (Nil il^SOj, when dialyzed until free from sulpha! es, is not toxic to
the root hairs of Tradescantia cuttings; bog water, when dialyzed for tin' same length of time
as this filtrate, is loxic to these root hairs. The distillate from hog water gives no precipi-
tate with electrolytes, is much less acid than bog water, and is not toxic to these root hairs.
The concentrate obtained when bog water is distilled to approximately one-sixth of its origi-
nal volume gives a heavier precipitate with electrolytes than does hog water; it is also more
acid and toxic to these root hairs. The residue from complete evaporation of bog water
is a brownish powder which is soluble in cold water; insoluble in alcohol and gasoline, and
practically insoluble in ether; this water solution of the residue is toxic to the root hairs of
Tradescantia. No solid matter was thrown out of bog water by centrifuging. Chemical
analyses of Puget Sound bog waters give results similar to those reported for other American
bog waters. The toxicity of bog waters to Tradescantia cuttings seems to be connected with
the matter in it that is in a colloidal state. The oxidation of this toxic matter to non-toxic
matter seems to be a basis of agricultural practice in bringing bog lands into cultivation. —
Gbcorge B. Rigg and T. G. Thompson.

2017. Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. SiiArovALOv. Crop
injury by borax in fertilizers. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 84. 35 p. Fig. 1-25. 1920. —
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1431.

MISCELLANEOUS

2018. Roberts, Herbert F. An improved colorimeter for color inheritance study. Plant
World 22: 262-269. 4 fig- 1919. — Improvements of the tintometer are described and illus-
trated. The instrument is said to be especially valuable in quantitative measurement of
color value in flowers, in a study of color inheritance, as in determining the color value of
segregates, and in quantitative color determinations generally. — C. A. Shull.

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. Skinner, Editor
F. M. Schertz, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

2019. Free, E. E. The utility of soil surveys. [Rev. of : Pendleton, Robert Larimore.
Are soils mapped under a given type name by the Bureau of Soils method closely similar to one
another? Uni. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 3: 369-498. 1919.] Plant World 22: 272-274.
1919.

2020. Gardner, Frank D., asst. by R. M. Blasingame. Soils and soil management.
6X9 inches, 223 p., 97 fig. John C. Winston Company: Chicago and Philadelphia, 1920. A
non-technical manual on the management of soil for the production and maintenance of fer-
tility, with a section on farm building and equipment. — J. J. Skinner.

2021. Grumert, Artur. Anleitung zur Dranage. [Guide to drainage.] Landw. Hefte
39 and 40: 5-66. 1 pi., 38 fig. 1919. — A comprehensive treatise on the theory and practice of
agricultural drainage. — C. V. Piper.

2022. KiiHR, C. A. H. von Wolzogen. Het zure bibitrot bij net suikerriet. [Sour
cutting-rot of sugar cane.] Arch. Suikerindust. in Nederlandsch-Indie 28:703-756. 24 fig.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1948.

2023. Stead, Arthur. The agriculture and soils of the Cape Province. Jour. Dept.
Agric. Union of South Africa. 1 : 351-358. 1920.

292 SOIL SCIENCE [Bot. Absts., Vol. VI,

2024. Weir, W. W. Productive soils. 6X9 inches, 898 p., 235 fig. J. B. Lippincott
Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1920.

METHODS

2025. Hibbard, R. P., and S. Gershberg. The biological method of determining the
fertilizer requirement of a particular soil or crop. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 223-224.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1419.

2026. Lipscomb, G. F., C. F. Inman, and J. S. Watkins. The determination of borax in
fertilizer materials and mixed fertilizers. Amer. Fertilizer 52:57-8. 1920. — The method
described is similar in its general procedure to that outlined in following Entry 2027, but differs
in the means adopted for removing ammonia, phosphates, etc. An aliquot corresponding to 1 g.
of the sample is made alkaline with sodium hydroxide and boiled down nearly to dryness, and
then diluted with water and the same operation repeated twice. The residue is taken up in
dilute hydrochloric acid, the solution made alkaline with lime water, and filtered without
boiling. The filtrate is evaporated to dryness and ignited to destroy organic matter, the
residue taken up in a little dilute hydrochloric acid, made alkaline with sodium hydroxide,
and the addition of lime repeated to insure complete removal of phosphates. The borak
remains in the filtrate and may then be determined by titration. — W. H. Ross.

2027. Pope, W. B., and William II. Ross. Qualitative method for the detection of borax
in mixed fertilizers. Amer. Fertilizer 52 : 65-66. 1920.— Directions are given for a simple
qualitative test for differentiating between fertilizers containing less than 0.1 per cent of
borax, the limit set by the Dept. of Agriculture for the maximum allowable in a fertilizer
without labeling, and those which contain in excess of this amount. The test is made on a
2 g. sample. This is digested with 50 cc. of 90 per cent alcohol; an aliquot of the clear solution
is made alkaline with sodium hydroxide and evaporated to dryness. The residue is ignited
to destroy organic matter and then taken up in dilute hydrochloric acid; 1 cc. of tincture of
curcumin added, and the mixture is again evaporated to dryness, in a porcelain dish. If borax
is present a pink coloration, varying in intensity with the amount, will be deposited on the
bottom and sides of the dish. By comparing the color given by an unknown sample with a
set of samples containing known amounts of borax, it is possible to apply the method quanti-
tatively in the analysis of samples containing in the neighborhood of 0.1 per cent of borax or
less. Nitrates interfere with the test and must be destroyed when present. This may be
done by adding sufficient sucrose to insure complete decomposition of the nitrates when the
evaporated residue is ignited. — W. H. Ross.

2028. Ross, William H., and R. B. Deemer. Methods for the determination of borax in
fertilizers and fertilizer materials. Amer. Fertilizer 52: 62-65. 1920.— The procedure recom-
mended for the determination of borax varies with the nature of the material to be analyzed.
In the case of mineral salts free from phosphates, or iron and aluminum salts, ammonia, and
organic matter, it is possible to determine borax by driving off carbon dioxide from the solu-
tion of the salt, making neutral to methyl red and then titrating after adding phenolphthalein
as indicator and 1-2 g. of mannitol, with standard sodium hydroxide solution to a permanent
pink color. Phosphates, or iron and aluminum salts and ammonia interfere with the deter-
mination and the method must therefore be modified to bring about their removal when
present. This may be done by adding to the hot solution of the material to be analyzed 15 cc.
of a 10 per cent barium chloride solution and sufficient barium hydroxide to give an alkaline
reaction. The solution is then boiled for 15 minutes, or until any ammonia present is expelled,
filtered and the borax then determined in the filtrate by titration with standard alkali. Sol-
uble organic matter when present interferes in the determination of small amounts of borax
(less than 0.5 per cent) and may be removed by evaporating the filtrate from the barium
chloride-barium hydroxide precipitate and igniting. The residue is taken up in dilute hydro-
chloric acid and the addition of barium chloride and barium hydroxide repeated to insure com-
plete removal of phosphates, etc. In the analysis of fertilizers containing in excess of 0.5
per cent of borax, the removal of organic matter may be unnecessary, and the same procedure
may then be followed as for the determination of borax in mineral salts. — W. H. Ross.

No. 4, January, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 293

MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

Burton E. Livingston, Editor

2029. Anonymous. List of staffs in botanical departments at home, and in India and the
colonies. Kcw Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] Appendix 1919:25-39. 1919.

2030. Gilmore, Mblvtn Randolph. Uses of plants by the Indians of the Missouri River
region. Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethnology [Washington, D. C] 33: 15-154. 1919.

2031. Hart, W. E. The botanic garden of Pamplemousses. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [Lon-
don] 1919: 279-286. PL 9-10. 1919.

2032. Saunders, C. F. Useful wild plants of the United States and Canada, vi -f- 275 p.
R. M. McBridc & Co.: New York, 1920.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES IN VOLUME VI

(References are to Entry numbers; an asterisk before a number signifies that the entry referred

to is by citation alone — no abstract)

A., B. C. Rev. of D. C. Wintcrbottom. 468.

A., J. C. Rev. of Cockayne, L. *494.

Abidin, I. Horse breeding in Turkey. 1563.

Ackert, J. E. Selection of Paramaecium.
(Rev. by Henverden) 744.

Acosta, C. Collection of Cuban woods.
1011.— Amaryllis. 1165.

Adams, J. F. Sexual fusion and sex organs
in Peridermiums. 1214, *976. — Rusts on
conifers in Pennsylvania. 1213, *1256.

Adamson, R. W. Bartram Oak. *73, 1564.

Addis, Jose M. Pig-weed. 879.

Afzal, Muhammed, and others. Forest ad-
ministration, Baluchistan. 74.

Agar, W. E. On sex and heredity. (Rev.
by Catenby) 1083.

Agee, H. P. (Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley, C.
R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G. P.
Wilcox, T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee.
901 , 1787.

Ahr, J., and Chr. Mayr. Barley varieties
and manuring. *880.

o o

Akerman, A. Swedish variety tests. *1.
—Speltlike budsports in wheat. *645,
1565. (Rev. by Sirks) 1760.— Aaron
Aaronsohn (biographical) 904. — Seed-
color in Phaseolus crosses. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1599.

Akerman, A., Hj. Johansson, and B. Platon.
Sugar and dry substance in wheat varie-
ties. 646.

Albrecht, W. A. Influence of soil nitrogen on
nitrogen fixation. 1374, *1328.

Algan, H. Rev. of Huffel, G. Forest econ-
omy. *1012.

Allen, C. E. Sex inheritance in Sphaerocar-
pos. 977.

Allen, E. Cell division in rats. *1048.

Allendorf and Ehrenberg. Sugar-beet breed-
ing. 1049.

Altenburg, E. (Muller, H. J., and Altenburg)
709.

Altenburg, E., and H. J. Muller. Truncate
wing in Drosophila. 647.

Altmannsberger. Potash as sugar-beet fer-
tilizer, Germany. 2.

Amend, F. Breeding of Flemish rye. 1566.
Anders, Josef. Lichens of northern Bohemia.

1230.
Anderson, Emma N., and Edna R. Walker.

Algae of the sandhill lakes. *1189.
Anderson, W. S. Blood lines in horses. 648.
Andre, G. Sugar inversion in orange juice.

1332. — Distribution of mineral elements.

1996.
Andrews, A. L. Rev. of Herzog, T. 1205.
Annett, H. E. (Leape, H. M., and Annett)

1422, 1981.
Anonymous. Protection of potatoes from

cold in transit. *3.
Anonymous. Early collections in herbarium

of Missouri. 43.
Anonymous. Biographical notice, C. K.

Bancroft. 44.
Anonymous. Biographical notice, Sir E.

Fry. 45.
Anonymous. Biographical notice, H. Le-

veille. 46.
Anonymous. Forest Administration, British

India. *75.
Anonymous. Seeds of hardy herbaceous

plants and of trees and shrubs. *76.
Anonymous. Mice poisons, Denmark. *77.
Anonymous. Nipa palm products (sugar

and alcohol), Philippines. *78.
Anonymous. Rev. of Handover. 113.
Anonymous. Cotoneaster acutifolia. *141.

*142
Anonymous. Winter injury, 1919-20, Penn-
sylvania. 143.
Anonymous. Quarantine regulations, Cuba.

213.
Anonymous. Report of Watson Botanical

Exchange Club. *301.
Anonymous. Rev. of Farrer. English rock

garden. *302.
Anonymous. Thoughts from the Royal

Danish Agric. Society. 474.
Anonymous. New Zealand Institute Con-
gress, 1919. *495.
Anonymous. Plan of Tongariro Park, New

Zealand. (Rev. by C, A. C.) 498.

295

296

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Anonymous. Income from Prussian forests.
511.

Anonymous. Bridegrooms' forest planta-
tion, Alsen Island. 512.

Anonymous. Basket-willow production,
Germany. 513.

Anonymous. Instructions to Prussian for-
ests. 514.

Anonymous. Cutting restrictions in Ger-
man forests. 515.

Anonymous. Instructions for management
of Prussian forests. 516.

Anonymous. Oak for tanning, Germany.
517.

Anonymous. Next winter's fuel shortage,
Germany. 518.

Anonymous. Hunting in Prussian state for-
ests. 519.

Anonymous. Sal sowings in western Dooars.
520.

Anonymous. Rev. of Hargreaves, W. A. 521.

Anonymous. Rev. of Pool, R. J. *522.

Anonymous. Forest devastation, Vienna.
523.

Anonymous. Insects on sycamore, Wash-
ington, D. C. 524.

Anonymous. Death of W. Schallmayer.
*649.

Anonymous. Moral qualities and eugenics.
*650.

Anonymous. Original color of Holstein
cattle. *651.

Anonymous. Rev. of Bloch, E. *752.

Anonymous. Rept. Advisory Comm. on
Brown Coal, Victoria. (Rev. by P., E.)
799.

Anonymous. Kauri-gum oil. 803.

Anonymous. Burma camphor. 804.

Anonymous. Oil of pimento-leaves. 805.

Anonymous. Wild ginger. 806.

Anonvmous. Poison ivy. oak, and sumac.
*807

Anonymous. Biology in English schools
965

Anonymous. Guide to New York Bot. Gard.
*966.

Anonymous. Preservation of natural sites,
central Europe. 1015, *967.

Anonymous. Solanum verbascifolium, a Cu-
ban forage plant. 881.

Anonymous. Uba cane. 882.

Anonymous. Origin of Uba cane. 883.
Anonymous. Leonard Cockayne. (Bio-
graphical.) *905.

Anonymous. Announcement of first appear-
ance of Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. de Saignon.
906.

Anonymous. Botanic Garden, Havana.
*907.

Anonymous. The dahlia. *908.

Anonymous. How flowers were named. *909.

Anonymous. Obituary notice, P. Cardin.
910.

Anonymous. Rev. of Downing, E. R. *970.

Anonymous. Forest trespasses in the
eighteenth century, France. 1013.

Anonymous. Deforestation legend of Devo-
luy, France. 1014.

Anonymous. Wood production after the war,
France. 1016.

Anonymous. Receipts from forests, Den-
mark, 1918-19. 1017.

Anonymous. Polish plant breeders' associa-
tion. *1050.

Anonymous. Rev. of (1) Burd, J. S., and
(2) Hoagland, D. R. *1313.

Anonymous. Rev. of Correns, C. Shifting
of sex ratio. *1051.

Anonymous. Rev. of Duncan, F. M. *969.

Anonymous. Rev. of Havas, G. *1052.

Anonymous. Rev. of Fox. *911.

Anonymous. Rev. of Kraus, C. *1053.

Anonymous. Rev of Lotsy, J. P. *1054.

Anonymous. Rev. of Mayer-Gmelin. *1055.

Anonymous. Rev. of Rideal, E. K., and H.
S. Taylor. 1333.

Anonymous. Rev. of Riedel, F. 1315.

Anonymous. Rev. of Terasvuori, K. *1056.

Anonymous. Rev. of Thorburn, Archibald.
*968.

Anonymous. Rev. of Urban, J. *1057.

Anonymous. German rev. of Von Ryx, G.
*1058.

Anonymous. Rev. of Zade, A. *1059.

Anonymous. Fruit fertilizers. 1365.

Anonymous. Fertility experiments in U. S.
A. 1366.

Anonymous. Fertilizer investigations by U.
S. government. *1384.

Anonymous. Potash and bromine in Texas,
U. S. A. 1385.

Anonymous. Fertilizers from explosives.
1386.

Anonymous. Shakespearean garden. *1166.

Anonymous. Insects and diseases which in-
jure trees. 1257.

Anonymous. Plum silver-leaf in England.
1258.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

297

Anonymous. U. S. Dcpt. Agric. grades for
milled rice. *1398.

Anonymous. Spur feterita. 1399.

Anonymous. Grimm alfalfa. I 100.

Anonymous. Dry-land alfalfa. 1401.

Anonymous. Velvet beans. 1402.

Anonymous. U. S. Dept. Agric. 1403.

Anonymous. Rev. of Anon. 1404.

Anonymous. Casimir de Candolle. *1437.

Anonymous. Dr. Frank Shipley Collins
(biographical). 1438.

Anonymous. Mrs. M. A. Sargent (bio-
graphical). *1439.

Anonymous. A Shakespearean garden, Eng-
land. 1440.

Anonymous. Prof. J. W. H. Trail. 1441.

Anonymous. John H. Wilson (biographical).
*1442.

Anonymous. Beginning courses in forestry.
1474.

Anonymous. Agricultural college, West In-
ies. *1475.

Anonymous. Brazil wood. 1530.

Anonymous. Forestry association report,
Norway. 1531.

Anonymous. Kew flagstaff, England. 1532.

Anonymous. Forest association reports,
Norway. *1533.

Anonymous. Forest resources, U. S. A.
1534.

Anonymous. Ten week stock and doubling.
1567.

Anonymous. Biometric and eugenic labora-
tories. 1568.

Anonymous. Rev. of Anthony, S., and H. V.
Harlan. *1569.

Anonymous. Rev. of Backhouse, W. O.
*1570.

Anonymous. Rev. of Bartlett, H. M. *1571.

Anonymous. Rev. of Becker. *1572.

Anonymous. Rev. of Beijerinck, M. W.
*1573.

Anonymous. Rev. of Brotherton and Bart-
lett. *1574.

Anonymous. Rev. of Cohen-Stuart, C. P.
*1575.

Anonymous. Rev. of Correns. *1576, *1577,
*1578.

Anonymous. Rev. of Drude, C. *1579.

Anonymous. Rev. of Edler, W. *1580.

Anonymous. Rev. of Emerson, R. A. *1581.

Anonymous. Rev. of Everest, A. *1582.

Anonymous. Rev. of Fruwirth, C. *1583,
*1584, *1585, *1586.

Anonymous. Rev. of Hansen, W. *1587.

Anonymous. Rev. of Harris, L. *1588.
Anonymous. Rev. of Bromaclko, J. *1589.
Anonymous. Rev. of Johannsen, ^ >'. *1590.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kalt, B. *1691.
Anonymous. Rev. of Kiessling, L. *1592,

*1593, *1594.
Anonymous. Rev. of Love, II. II., and W.

T. Craig. *1595, *1596, *1597.
Anonymous. Rev. of Love and Fraser.

*1598.
Anonymous. Rev. of Akerman, A. *1599.
Anonymous. Rev. of Miles, F. C. *1600.
Anonymous. Rev. of Molz. *1601.
Anonymous. Rev. of Newman, L. *1602.
Anonymous. Rev. of Punnett, R. C. *1603.
Anonymous. Rev. of Rasmuson, H. *1604.
Anonymous. Rev. of Raum. *1605, *1606.
Anonymous. Rev. of Reuss. *1607.
Anonymous. Rev. of Richardson, C. W.

*1608.
Anonymous. Rev. of Roberts, H. F. *1609.
Anonymous. Rev. of Schellenberg, H. *1610.
Anonymous. Rev. of Torman. *1611.
Anonymous. Rev. of Urban, J. *1612.
Anonymous. Rev. of Van der Wolk. *1613.
Anonymous. Rev. of Von Riimker, K.

*1614, *1615, *1616.
Anonymous. Rev. of Von Ubisch. *1617.
Anonymous. Rev. of Wagner, M. *1618.
Anonymous. Rev. of Wheldale, M. *1619.
Anonymous. Rev. of White, O. E. *1620,

*1621, *1622, H623.
Anonymous. Rev. of Wonanka and Com-
pany. *1624.
Anonymous. Rev. of Zade. *1625.
Anonymous. Rev. of Zinn and Surface.

*1626.
Anonymous. Chrysanthemums. 1838.
Anonymous. Fruiting of Ginkgo, Kew,

England. 1839.
Anonymous. New roses at Bagatelle. 1840.
Anonymous. List of seeds of hardy her-
baceous plants, trees, and shrubs. *1841.
Anonymous. A garden flora, Nymans, Kew,

England. 1842.
Anonymous. Rev. of Hargreaves, W. A.

1890.
Anonymous. Oil Palm. 1891.
Anonymous. Oak injury caused by Dia-

porta talcola. 1933.
Anonymous. The ring or Bangadi disease

of potato. 1933.
Anonymous. Spray calendar for apples and

pears. 1934.
Anonymous. Datura stramonium. *1973.

298

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Anonymous. Momordica cochinchinensis.
1974.

Anonymous. Strychnos nux-vomica in
Cochin China. 1975.

Anonymous. Botanists of British Isles and
colonies. *2029.

Anthony, S. Germination of barley pollen.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1569.

Anthony, S. (Harlan, H. C, and Anthony).
1416, 2009.

Aragon, Francisco de las Barras de. Letters
of Dufour to Lagasca. 912.

Arango, Rodolfo. Plant pests, Cuba. 214.

Archibald, J. C. Points for forestry stu-
dents. 525.

Ardouin-Dumazet. Horticulture in devas-
tated regions, France. 1794.

Armbruster, Ludwig. Changes of instinct in
bees, etc. *1060.

Arnaud, G. The family Parodiellinaceae of
the Hypocreales (Pyrenomycetes) 187.

Arnaud, G. Plant pathological society,
France. 913.

Aronovitch, B. Toxins of colon-typhoid
bacteria. *833.

Artschwager, E. F. Anatomy of Chenopo-
dium album. 1180.

Aruffo, C. S. Pleistocene calcareous algae
in Italy. 1233.

Aspinwall, B. Culture of loganberry,
northwestern U. S. A. 1795.

Aston, B. C. Coprosma as coloring agents.
808, 809.

Atkins, K. N. Gram-stain modified. 164.

Atwood, Alice, C. Errors in Lindau's "The-
saurus" and Saccardo's "Sylloge." *773,
*1259.

Aumiot, J. Rejuvenation of potatoes. 1627.

Augur. German forestry, 1919. 526.

Azzi, G. Agricultural meteorology. 4.

B., C. U. Stocking box material, for season-
ing, India. 527.
B., E. G. Rev. of Gamble. Flora of Mad-

ras.

•303.

B., L. Rev. of Smart and Pecover. Fibers

for heat-insulating, New Zealand. 469.
Bach, S. Two kinds of albinos in maize.

*1628.
Backhouse, W. V. Glume length in Triti-

cum. (Rev. by Anon.) 1570.
Bailey, E. M. (Jenkins, E. H. , and Bailey) 292.
Bailey, I. W. Depressed segments of oak

stems. *79. — Formation of cell plate in

cambium. 753.

Bailey, M. A. Puccinia malvacearum and
the mycoplasm theory. 774, *1260.

Bailey, W. A. Development of sal seedlings,
India. 528. — Season of growth of sal,
India. 529.

Baker, E. G. African species of Allophylus.
333.

Bal. (Plymen, F. J., and Bal) 1379.

Baldasarre, J. F. Uses of peanuts. *1175.

Ball, E. D., and Fenton, F. A. Tipburn
caused by potato leaf-hopper. 215.

Ballard, C. W. Official standards for botani-
cal drugs. 1296.

Bally, Walter. Godronian hybrids of Aegil-
ops and Triticum. (Rev. by Krause, K.)
694.

Baltz. Pinus strobus, Germany. 530.

Bandekow. Photographic surveying in for-
estry. 531.

Barber, C. A. Sugar-cane seedlings in India.
8S4, 887.— Growth of sugar-cane. 885,
886, 1405. — Origin of sugar cane. *1443.

Bardie, A. Forest-utility and pathology,
France. 80.— Physalis Alkekengi. *264,
914.

Barkenbus, Charles (Heyl, F. W., and Bark-
enbus) 1301.

Barker, B. T. P., and G. Neville. Bio-
graphical sketch, A. E. Lechmer. 47.

Barlot, J. Poisonous Amanitas identified by
color reactions. 1910.

Barratt, Kate. Vascular anatomy of Equi-
setum. 754.

Bartlett, H. H. Manufacture of sugar from
Arenga saccharifera. 1892, *1535. — Cell
measurement and quantitative charac-
ters. (Anon, rev.) 1574. — Status of the
mutation theory. (Anon, rev.) 1571.

Bartos, W. Influence of breeding on the
value of the beet. *1061.

Bartsch, P. Breeding of cerions. (Rev. by
Lotsy) 1715.

Batchelor, L. B., and H. S. Reed. Winter
injury or die-back of walnut. 1796.

Bateson, W. , and Caroline Pellew. Rogues
among peas. 652.

Baudouin, M. A decisive sexual difference
in the human axis. 1629.

Bauer, F. C. Availability of rock phos-
phate. 298.

Bauer, J. Study of the constitution. *653. —
Study of the hereditary constitution.
1630.

Baughman, W. F. (Jamieson, G. S., and
Baughman) *269.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

299

Baur, E. Introduction to genetics. *654.
Baxter, S. N. How nurserymen may best
compete for the Christmas tree market.
*81.
Beals, A. T. Tortula pagorum in America.

149.
B(ean), W. J. One-leaved ash. 1631.
Bean, W. J. Notes on new or rare trees and

shrubs. *1843.
Bear, F. E. Fertilizers and soil conditions.

♦286.
Beath, O. A. Poisonous plants, U. S. A. 475,

•810.
Beccari, O. Palms of Philippine Islands.

*334.

Beck, V. Mannagetta, and G. Lerchenau.

Juniper berries with exposed seeds. *82,

*335.

Becker. Serological investigations in plant

breeding. *1632. (Rev. by Anon.) 1572.

Becker, J. Inheritance of floral characters

in Papaver rhoeas. 1062.
Becking, L. G. M. Baas, and H. C. Hampton.

Catalytic power of catalase. 1334.
Beekman, H. Commercial forest - trees,
Dutch East Indies. 83. — East Indian
timber-trees. *755.
Beeson, C. F. C. Forest entomology, Brit-
ish India. 84.
Beevor, Sir H. R. Forest planting, Belgium.

532.
Beijerinck, M. W. Enzyme theory of he-
redity. (Rev. by Anon.) 1573.
Belgrave, W. N. C. Root-rot of Para rubber.
216.— Mycology notes, Malaya, 1918. 217.
Benders. Dutch rev. of Lichenstern, R.

*1634.
Benders, A. M. Frequency of consanguine-
ous marriages. 1063. — Our constitution.
*1633.
Bennett, Arthur. Potamogeton dualus. 336.
Benoist, R. New Phanerogams from French
Guiana. 337. — Guenetia, new genus of
Tiliaceae. 338. — Licania in French Gui-
ana. 339.
Bensaude, Mathilda. Sexuality in Basidio-

mycetes. (Rev. by Nienburg) 710.
Benson, W. N. Mesozoic plants of Australia

and New Zealand. 792.
Berger, Marie-Gaston. Study of the Tur-

neraceae. (Rev. by Guerin) 412.
Bergey, D. H. Teaching bacteriology. 67.
Bergman, Emanuel. Hereditary tremor.
*655, 1635.

Bergman, II. F. Internal Btomata in fruits.
756.

Bergstrand, Hilding. On the nature of bac-
teria. 1232.
Beringer, G. M. Oil of pennyroyal. 1297. —

Frank G. Ryan (memoir). *915.
Berry, E. W. Linden and ash. *85.— Se-
quoia ancestry. 793. — Fossil Entada,
Venezuela. 1925. — Cretaceous flora from
North Carolina. 1926.— Paleobotany, ac-
count of. 1927.
Bertrand, Paul. Carboniferous flora of

Gard, France. 1234.
Bertsch, Karl. Wann-temperaturc plants of

the upper Danube. 1514.
Besredka, A. The work of Metchnikoff on

senility. 2006.
Bessenoff. Experimental production of sex-
uality in fungi. *1636.
Bessey, E. A. Fungi identification, guide to
literature. *1444, 1911.— Effect of para-
sitism on the parasite. 1935, *2007.
Bessey, E. A., and B. E. Thompson. Genea

cubispora sp. nov. 1912.
Betts, H. S. Grading lumber. 1536.
Betts, M. W. Structure of New Zealand

plants. 1502.
Beumee, C. G. B. Bark wounds of teak.

218, *86.
Bezssonoff. Initiation of sexual reproduc-
tion in fungi. 1344, *978, *1215.
Bigelow, W. D. Heat penetration in canned

foods. 219.
Bigelow, W. D., and J. R. Esty. Thermal-
death-point. *869.
Bijl, see Van der Bijl.
Bintner, J. Silver-leaf disease of plum and

other plants. 1936.
Bixby, W. G. Butternut and Japan walnut.

*87.
Blair, A. W. Potash supplied by intermedi-
ary crops. 1380. (Lipman, J. G., and

Blair) 1373, 1376.
Blair, A. W., and A. L. Prince. Soil acidity,

and lime requirement. 277.
Blair, R. E. Yuma reclamation project,

1918, 14C6, *1797.
Blair, T. A. Weather factors and wheat

yield in Ohio. 888.
Blake, S. F. North American and West In-
dian avocados. 340.
Blakeslee, A. F., Roland Thaxter, and Wil-
liam Trelease. William Gil^on Farlow
(biographical). 916.

300

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

Blaringhem, L. Color and sex of flowers.
*1 064. — Sexuality in Compositae. *1637.
— Inherited fasciation in Capsella Vi-
guieri. *1638. — Traumatic origin of poly-
spermous maize. *1G39, *1407.— Floral
variation in Leucanthemum vulgare.
*1640.

Blasingame, R. M. (Gardner, F. D., and
Blasingame) 2020.

Blatter, E. Flora arabica. 341.

Blatter, E., P. F. Hallberg, and C. McCann.
Contributions toward a flora of Baluchi-
stan. 342, 343.

Blin, H. Resistance of greenhouse glass.
1844.

Blish, M. J. Premature freezing, and com-
position of wheat. 845.

Bliss, A. R. Proposed vegetable drug dele-
tions. 1976.

Bloch, E. Modification of roots by mechani-
cal action. 1894. — Modification of roots
by compression. (Anon, rev.) 752.

Boas, L. H. Paper making, Austra'ia. 1018.
Forest products, Australia. 1019.

Boedijn, K. Chromosomes of Oenothera
Lamarckiana mut. simplex. *1641.

Bois, see also Du Bois.

Bois, D. Laeliocattleya Firmini. 1845.

Bolin, P. Field tests of grain, Sweden. 5.

Bolk, L. Brains and culture. 1065.

Bonaparte, R. The Pteridophytes of Indo-
China. 321.

Bongiovanni, C. Preparation of fertilizer
from superphosphate and ammoniacal
waters. 290.

Boren, P. G. Dates of publication of
"Svensk Botanik." 1445.

Borgesen, F., and C. Raunkiaer. Mosses and
lichens, former Danish West Indies. 151.

Bose, S. R. Twelve Polyporaceae of Bengal.
1S9.

Bouchard, Georges. L'Abbe Provancher
(biographical). 917.

Bouin, P. Dimegaly of sperms in double
spermatogenesis. 1642.

Boulenger, G. A. Some roses from Dorset-
shire, England. 344.

Bourquelot, Em., and M. Bridel. A test for
glucose in plants. *1977. — Detection of
glucose. 2002.

Bouvier, E. L., and d'Emmerez de Charmoy.
Mutation in freshwater Crustacea. *1643.

Bower, F. O. On sex and heredity. (Rev.
by Catenby) 1083.

Boyer, G. Mycorhiza, connected with Ama-
nita, Boletus, Tuber, etc. 190.

Brandes, E. W. Transmission of sugar-cane
mosaic disease. 220.

Braun-Blanquet, J. Glacial vegetation of
southern Europe. *1235. — Central alpine
valleys and floral history. *1236.

Breakwell, E. Chloris grasses, Australia. 6.
*346. — A fodderplant, Shearman's clover,
Australia. *345.

Breitenbecher, J. K. Water and behavior of
potato beetle. 1C66. (Rev. by M. J.
Sirks) 730

Brenchley, W. E. Competition factors.
1497.

Bridel, Marc. Gentianose and saccharose in
Gentiana. 834.

Bridel, M. (Borquelot and Bridel). 1977,
2002.

Bridges, C. B. (Morgan, T. B., and Bridges)
1492.

Brierley, W. B. Physiological species con-
cept. 1306.

Briggs, Glen. Guam corn. 7.

Briggs, L. G. Problems of the fertilizer in-
dustry. 1387.

Briquet, J. Report, Geneva botanical gar-
den, 1916-18. 496. — Collections of Jose
Quer. 918.

Britten, J. Salsola caffra. 347. — Schrankia
microphylla. 348. — E. S. Marshall (bio-
graphical) 919.

Bri ton, E. G., and others. Loss of collec-
tions and library of Jules Cardot. *920.

Britton, N. L. Rev. of Hitchcock and
Standley. *304. — Director's Report, New
York Bot. Gard., 1919. 971.

Broadhurst, Jean (Winslow, C.-E. A., J.
Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, C. Krum-
wiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G. H.
Smith) 184.

Brochman-Jerosch, H. Interpretation of
Dryas flora. *1237.

Broderick, T. M. (Grout, F. F., and Broder-
ick) 1241.

Bronfenbrenner, J. Methods for identifying
bacteria. 165.

Bronfenbrenner, J., M. J. Schlesinger, and D.
Soletsky. China-blue-rosolic-acid indi-
cator for bacteria. *166.

Bronfenbrenner, J., and M. J. Schlesinger.
Carbohydrate fermentation by bacteria.
*835.

Brooks, M. M. Comparative studies in res-
piration. 1343.

Brotherton, W., Jr., and H. II. Bartlett. Cell
measurement and quantitative charac-
ters. (Anon. Rev.) 1574.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

301

Brot horns, V. F. Mosses of Peru, l'.t 16.
Brown, B. A. (Jenkins, E. II, W. L. Slate, D.

F. Jones, and B. A. Brown) 1420.
Brown, B. E. (Schreiner, Oswald, B. E.

Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapova-

lov) 1431, 2017.
Brown, E. D. W. Growing fern-prothallia.

1176.
Brown, F. 15. II. Refraction of light in plant

tissues. 757.
Brown, G. G. (Lewis, C. J., F. C. Reiiner,

and G. G. Brown) 124, 289.
Brown, J. G. Rev. of Martin, J. N. *497.
Brown, N. C. Forests products. (Rev. by

Moore, B.) 591.
Brown, P. E., and W. V. Halversen. Sea-
sonal variations in molds and bacteria in

soils. 282.
Brown, W. H., and A. F. Fischer. Philippine

bamboos. (Rev. by Whitford, H. W.)

634. — Philippine mangrove swamps.

(Rev. by Whitford, H. W.) 635.
Brown, W. H., and E. D. Merrill. Philip-
pine palms and palm products. 533.
Brown, W. R. Progress of the European

olive at Peshawar, India. *1798.
Browne, Frank. Opium smoke constituents.

811.
Browne, I. M. P. Anatomy of cone and

stem of Equisetum. 758.
Browne, W. W. Bacteria from salted foods.

167.
Bruce, D. Basis for volume tables in for-
e-try. 534. — Deviation of volume tables

in forestry. 535.
Briihl, P. Systematic position of Lindenber-

gia. 349 — Lindenbergia urticifolia and L.

polyantha. 350.
Bryan, G. S. Nuclear fusion in Sphagnum.

979. — Sporophytes of Sphagnum subse-

cundum. 12C6.
Bryant, H. B. Forest organization for

Madras Presidency. 536.
Bryk, F. Reprint of Linnaean's diary.

1734-1737. (Rev. by Nordstedt) 59.—

Caroli Linnaei adonis steubroensis.

(Rev. by Nordstedt) 1463.
Buchanan, R. E. (Winslow, C.-E. A., J.

Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, C. Krum-

•wiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G. H.

Smith) 1S4.
Buffault, P. Evolution of the forester,

France. 1020.
Bunyea, H. (Gochenour, W. S., and Bunyea)

237

Burd, J. S. Absorption of Boil constituents,

' Rev. by Anon.) 1313.
Burge, E. L. (Burge, \Y. E., and Burge)

I :;:;:,.

Burge, W. E., and E. L. Burge. Studies on
catalase. 1335.

Burkill, I. II. A Eevea tree. *351. — Diosco-
rea kegeliana, "Yam poule," West In-
dies. *352. — Seed and seedlings of Dip-
terocarps, 1895, 1896.

Burnham, S. H. Biographical sketch, C. II.
Peck. 48.

Burns, \V. Variations in Striga, Bombay.
353.

Burt, E. A. North American Thelepho-
raceae, XI. 191.

Buscalionia, L., and G. Muscatello. Mono-
graph of Saurauia. 354.

Busche, see Von dem Busche.

Butt, N. J. (Harris, F. S., and Butt) 14.

Butterfield, W. M. Popular description of
Diatoms. 1190.

C., A. C. Rev. of Anonymous. Plan of
Tongariro Park, New Zealand. *498.

Caird, E. (Carfield, C. E., and Caird) 813.

Calder, C. C. Oxalis in India. 355. — New
Indian Vernonia. 356.

Caldwell, Dorothy W. (Hadley, P., and Cald-
well) 674.

Calkins, G. N., and L. H. Gregory. Varia-
tion in Paramaecium. (Rev. by Van
Herwerden) 744.

Calvino, Mario. Propagation by cuttings.
*1146. — Tripsacum latifolium. *1261,
1409. — Jack beans and sword beans. 1408.
— Chemical fertilizers. *1388.

Cambage, R. H. Flora of New South Wales.
1515.

Camek, J. Hair of cattle. 656.

Campbell, C. Wheat black stem rust out-
break, Italy. 1262.

Campbell, D. H. California gardens. 68.

Camus, Aim6e. Note on Mnesithea. 357. —
Two new Andropogoneae. 35S. — New
grasses of eastern Asia. 359, 36", 361, 363.
— Note on Lophatherum gracile. 362.

Candolle, see De Candolle.

Cannon, D. Douglas fir. 1021.

Cannon, H. G. (Doncaster, L., and Cannon)
1484.

Cape, John. Measurement of timber, Brit-
ish Isles. 537.

Carano, E. Apogamy in Asteraceae. 1181.

Cardot, E. Forest reconstruction, France.
1022.

302

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Cardot, Henry, and Richet, Charles. He-
redity and variation in lactic fermenta-
tion. *1067.

Cardot, J. Eriobotrya, etc. *364. — Notes
on Photinia, Asia. 365.

Carhart, A. H. Recreation in the forests,
U. S. A. *538.

Carlson, K. A. Mine props on High Veld,
South Africa. 1537.

Caron-Eldingen, see Von Caron-Eldingen.

Carpentier, A. Fructifications of Sphenop-
teris herbacea Boulay. *1928.

Carpenter, C. W. Handbook Hawaiian po-
tato diseases. 1263.

Carrier, L. History of silo. 8. (Piper, C.

V., and Carrier) 31.

Carse, H. New variety of Pteris macilenta.
366.

Carter, Nellie. Chloroplasts of Cosmarium.
1191, *980.

Carter, S. L. Manufacture of acid phos-
phate. 1389.

Cary, Austin. Forestry reflections, U. S. A.
539.

Caryl, R. E. Bearing habit of lemons. 1799.

Castle, W. E. Linkage of second-chromo-
some genes in Drosophila. 1644. — He-
redity in rabbits, rats, and mice. (Rev.
by Sirks) 723.

Cauda, A. Mustard oil in plants. 265. —
Plant groups that fix nitrogen. 846. —
Alcoholic fermentation with purified
yeasts. *850.

Cauli-Rabi. Supposed Brassica cross. 1068.

Cebrain de Besteiro, Dolores, and Michel-
Durand. Light intensity and glucose
absorption by roots. 1358.

Chaborski, G. Thermophile and cryophile
yeasts. 192.

Chaine, J. Termite attacks on plants. 1264.

Chasset, L. Classification of pears, France.
1800, 1801.

Checkley, George. Students' botanical gar-
den. *499, 1298.

Cheeseman, T. F. Contributions to flora of
new Zealand. *305, 367, 1516.

Chenault, L. Hamamelis vernalis Sargent.
1846.

Cheplin, H. A., and L. F. Rettger. Trans-
formation of intestinal flora. *873.

Chermezon, H. New genus of Cyperaceae.
368. — New species of Pycerus from Mada-
gascar. 369. — New species of Kyllingia
from Madagascar. 370. — New species of
Mariscus from Madagascar. 371.

Chesnut, V. K. Papain. *851. (Power, F.

B., and Chesnut) 1325.

Chiovenda, E. Androsace Vandelli. 372.

Chiovenda, L. Plants from Catanga. 306.

Chipp, T. F. Echinodia theobromae, a stil-
boid polypore. 193. — Host index, Malayan
fungi. 221, 1913, *1937— Fungi on Hevea
in Malaya. 222.

Chirtoiti, Marie. Lacistema. 373. — Symplo-
cos Klotzschii. 374.

Chodat, R. "Linnaea" garden, St. Pierre,
France. 9, *266. — Variegation in Funkia.
*657. — Flower of Hugueninia tanaceti-
folia. 759. — Flowering period of Lilium.
760. — Glaucocystis. 1192. — Variegation
and chimeras in Funkia. 1645

Christie, A. W. (Cruess, W. V., A. W.
Christie, and F. C. H. Flossfeder) 1176.

Church, A. H. Brunfels and Fuchs. 921 —
The Florideae, II. 1479. — Thalassio-
phyta and subaerial transmigration.
(Anon, rev.) 1197.

Church, Margaret B. (Thorn, C, and Church)
207.

Ciamician, G., and C. Ravenna. Organic
substances and plant development. 1317.

Clark, N. Proteus gelatinase and H-ion
concentration. *852. — Reduction poten-
tion and bacteriology. *874.

Clarkson, E. H. Story of a fern garden.
1847.

Claughton-Wallin, H., and F. McVicker.
Jonson absolute form quotient for for-
estry, U. S. A. 540.

Clausmann, P. (Gautier, Armand, and
Clausmann) 1412, 1998.

Clauston, C. I. E. Possibilities of agricul-
ture in India. 1802.

Clawson, A. B. (Marsh, C. D., and Claw-
son) 1982.

Clevenger, J. F. (Viehoever, Arno, and
Clevenger) 826.

Clinton, G. P. Ribes rusts, U. S. A. 223.

(Jenkins, E. H., and Clinton) 21.

Clinton, G. P., and L. F. Harvey. Potato-
spraying, 1917, Connecticut. 224.

Clinton, G. P., and F. A. McCormick.
White-pine infection experiments with
Cronartium ribicola. 225, *1538.

Clowes, G. H. A., and L. G. Keith. Tox-
icity of dichloracetones to marine or-
ganisms. 1360.

Cockayne. New Zealand plants. (Rev. by
A., J. C.) 494.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

303

Cockayne, L. Ecology and agriculture,
New Zealand. *476.— Seedling of Heli-
chrysum. *761.

Cockerell, T. D. A. Rev. of Knowlton, F. II.

794.
Coc, H. S., and J. N. Martin. Sweet clover

seed. 1046.
Cofman-Nicoresti, Jules. Adulteration of

olive oil. 812.
Cohen Stuart, C. P. Scientific name of tea

plant. 375. — Tea selection. (Rev. by

Anon.) *1575.
Coker, W. C. Dist ribut ion of Rhododendron

catawbiense, 376. — Parasitic blue-green

alga. H193.
Collins, E. J. Sex segregation, Bryophyta.

*150. (Rev. by Kooiman) 690.
Collins, G. N. Waxy maize from Upper

Burma. 1647.
Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. A

teosinte maize hybrid. 1648.
Collip, J. B. Osmotic pressure in nucleus.

1309.
Conard, H. S. Classification of vascular

plants. 307, 308.— White water-lily of

McGregor, Iowa. 377.
Conklin, E. G. Mechanism of evolution.

*981.
Conklin, E. J. Cellular basis of ontogeny

and phylogeny. 1649. — Rate of evolution.

795. — Mechanism of evolution. *1480.
Conn, H. J. Report on descriptive chart for

bacteria. 168.
Conner, S. D., and E. N. Fergus. Borax in

fertilizers on crops in Indiana. 1381,

*1265.
Conners, C. H. Unit-characters in peach.

114. — Unit characters in the peach. 1650.
Conrey, G. W. Fertilizer requirements of

different soils. *287.
Constant in, J. Mutation. (Rev. by Coul-
ter) 660.
Cook, M. T. B. D. Halstead (biographical).

922.
Cook, O. F. Cotton a community crop.

*658.
Cooledge, L. H., and R. W. Wyant. Col-

orimctric H-ion determination in milk.

*836.
Coombs, G. E. Economic botany, Federated

Malay States, 1918. 10. — Botany notes,

Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. 226. — Michi-
gan plant disease survey for 1918. 1938.
Coons, G. H., and Genevieve Gillette. Phe-
nol injury to apples. 1939, *2013.

Coons, G. II., :in<l II. II. McKinney. For-
maldehydc injury to wheat. 1940, *2014.

Cooper, ( 1. M. Sal (Shorea robusl a) growth
in broadcasi stands, British India. 88.

Cooper, J. C. Improving the walnut. 1147.

Copeland, E. B. New ferns from Mt. Bulu-
san, Philippines. 322.

Copeman, S. M. Sex determination. 1651.

Corbiere, L. Mosses (Fissidcns), France and
Africa. 152.

Corfield, C. E., and Caird, E. Oil of Mo-
mordica seeds. 813.

Correns, C. Sex in plants of mixed sex. *659.
— Genetic studies on variegated races
III-V. *1652. — Order of death of sexes in
Trinia. (Rev. by Lehman) 698.— Shift-
ing of the sex ratio. (Rev. by Anon.)
1051, 1576. — Simple Mendelian hybrids.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1577. — Variegated races.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1578.

Correvon, H. Russian horticulture and
Bolshevism. 1446.

Constantin, J. Note on Lang-rhoa, a Chinese
Cypripedium. 378.

Coulter, J. M. Rev. of de Wildeman. *309.
—Rev. of (1) Rydberg, P. A. (2) Pen-
nell, F. W. *379. — New and old species
of Opuntia. *380. — Rev. of Valeton, Th.
*381. — Rev. of Costantin, J. Mutation.
*660.

Coulter, J. M. Rev. of Yampolsky. *1069.
— Aaron Aaronsohn (biographical) 1447.
— Plant genetics. (Rev. by Jones) 1701.

Coulter, J. M., and M. C. Coulter. Plant
genetics. *1907.

Coulter, M. C. Rev. of East, E. M., and D.

F. Jones. *661. (Coulter, J. M., and

Coulter, M. C.) 1895.

Coupin, Henri. Stem elongation in etio-
lated plants. 861. — Chlorophyll forma-
tion in discontinuous light. 1359. — Ab-
sorption of mineral salts by root-tips.
1997. — Chlorophyll development and
light intensity. 2011.

Cowgill, H. B. Tomato and melon breed-
ing. 662. — Breeding sugar cane. 663.

Craig, W. T. Small grain investigation.
(Anon, rev.) 1595.— Synthesis of wild
wheat forms. (Anon, rev.) 1596. — Fer-
tile rye-wheat hybrids. (Anon, rev.)
1597.

Crandall, C. S. The apple cross — Tolman
X Mains Toringo. 1148, 1853.

Crevost, C, and C. Lemarie. Fiber and tex-
tile plants, Indo China. 1539.

304

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Cribbs, J. E. Transpiration in Tilia. 1498.

Crocker, Wm. Rev. of Steinberg, R. A.
*2010.

Cromer, C. O. (Wiancko, A. F., and Cromer)
493.

Cross, W. E. Cane nomenclature in Argen-
tina. *889.

Crow, J. W. Breeding horticultural plants.
115.

Cruess, W. V., A. W. Christie, and F. C. H.
Flossfeder. Drying of grapes. 1176.

Cruess, W. V. Unfermented fruit juices.
1177.— Grape syrup. 1178.

Curtis, O. F. Upward translocation of stor-
age food. 1310, *1149, *1023.

Cushing, H. Hereditary symphalangism.
(Rev. by Ellinger) 1663.

Czuber. Probability calculations in agri-
culture. *1654.

Dahl, A. L. Utilizing wine grapes, Califor-
nia, U. S. A. 1803.

Dahlgren, K. V. O. Decandrous Capsella.
(Rev. by Sirks) 724.

Dalcq, Albert. Spermatogenesis in the
orvet. *1070.

Dallimore, W. Elm timber, British Isles.
541.

Dammerman, K. W. Batocera hybrids.
1071.

Damon, S. C. Rotations, Rhode Island. 11.

(Hartwell, B. L., and Damon) 16, 17,

238, 831.

Danforth, C. H. Brachydactylism in fowls.
1655.

Dangeard, Pierre. Vacuoles in Gymno-
sperms. 982.

Dangeard, P. A. Chondicosomes of Selagi-
nella. 983. — Structure and metabolism
of plant cell. 1481.

Danguy, Paul. Meliaceae from Madagascar.
382.

Daniel, Lucien. Antagonistic reactions in
grafted plants. 1150, *1182.— Stability
and heredity of Crataegomespilus and
Pirocydonia. *1656. — Symbiomorphoses.
(Rev. by Dufour) 666.

Dantony. (Vermorel and Dantony) 1968.

Danysz, J. The species in bacteria. 1924.

Darbakcr, L. K. Vinegar bee. 814.

Darnell-Smith, G. P. Electrolytic treat-
ment of seeds. 1363.

Darrow, G. M. Origin of cultivated rasp-
berries. *664. — Raspberry culture, U. S.
A. 1804. — Culture of currant and goose-
berry, U. S. A. 1805. — Loganberries.
(Rev. by Tesnier) 1163.

Daveau, J. Ficus Saussreana and F. Erio-

botryoides. *383.
Davenport, A. (Fred, E. B., W. H. Peterson,

and A. Davenport) 1336.
Davenport, C. B. Report of Dept. of

Experimental Evolution, Carnegie Inst.

1657. — Inheritance of nerve tumors.

1658.
Davies, D. Carboniferous plants from

Wales. 796.
Davis, M. B. (Macoun, W. F., and Davis)

127.
Davis, L., and N. S. Ferry. Diphtheria

toxin. *S47.
Davison, W. C. Aerobic dysentery organ-
isms. *169.
Deane, Walter (Knowlton, D. H., and Deane)

313.
Deb, Sasi Mohan. Tea-box industry, Upper

Assam. 542.
De Candolle, C. New species of Piper from

Panama. 384..
De Dominicis, A. Biological significance of

tannin. 837.
Deemer, R. B. (Ross, W. H., and Deemer)

2028.
Delage, Y., and M. Goldsmith. Mechanics

of heredity and mendelism. *1482.
De la Hamelinaye, H. Coppice reserves in

devastated area, France. 1024.
De Lint, G. M. Distribution of Eurytemora.

(Rev. by Lotsy) 704.
Delong, D. M. (Sanders, J. G., and Delong)

253.
Demonlon, A. Reaction of soils. 278.
Demorlaine, J. Need for army forest serv-
ice, France. *923.
Demoussey, E. (Maquenne, L., and Demous-

sey) 1314, 1370.
Dendy, A. Animal life and human prog-
ress. (Rev. by Thomson) 736.
Denis, Marcel. Light optimum for Sticho-

coccus. 871.
Densmore, H. D. Botany text-book. 500.
Derlitzki. Winter-barley varieties, Ger-
many. 12.
Deshmukh, G. B. Polyembryony in citrus

and Persea. 762.
De Vries, Eva. Fruit and seed formation in

Primula crosses. *665. (Rev. by Tisch-

ler) 739.
De Wilde, P. A. Deaf-mutism and retiniits

pigmentosa. 1^72.
De Wildeman, E. The genus Tetracladium.

211, *227. — Macaranga saccifera, an
African mvrmecophile. 1897. — Flora of
Congo. (Rev. by Coulter) 309.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

305

De Winiwarter, H. Mitoses in cat. *1483.

Dickel, F. Sex determination in the honey
bee. *1073.

Dickson, B. T. Onygena equina in Canada.
191-1.

Dickson, J. G., and Helen Johann. Conidia
in Gibberella. 228.

Didnert, F. Chlorine injury to flowering.
1361.

Dietel, P. Puccinia on Luzula. 191.

Dixon, H. H. Mahogany, microscopic char-
acters. *385, *1540.

Dixon, H. N. Pleistocene mosses from
England. 797.

Dixon, H. H., and W. R. G. Atkins. Osmotic
pressures in plants. *S9.

Dodge, B. O. Index to American mycologi-
cal literature, 1917-18. 49, 50, *51, *52,
*53, *924. — Life history of Ascobolus
magnificus. 763.

Dodge, C. W. Tyrosin in fungi. (Rev. by
Willaman) 2005.

Dodge, Raynal. Hybrid Aspidiums. *323.

Doidge, E. M. South African Perispori-
aceae, III. 195. — South African Peri-
sporiaceae, IV. 196. — South African Peri-
sporiaceae, V. 197. — Mycological notes,
I. 198. — Meliolaster, new genus of
Microthyriaceae. 199. — Citrus -canker
eradication, South Africa. 229. — Bacteria
and plant diseases. *925.

Dominicis, see De Dominicis.

Doncaster, L., and H. G. Cannon. Sperma-
togenesis of louse. *1484.

Dorsey, M. J. Characteristics of seedling
apples. 116.

Dott, D. B. Opium assay. 815.

Dover, J. J. Th. Hereditary occurrence of
tuberculosis. 1074.

Down, E. E. (Spragg, F. A., and Down)
254.

Downing, E. R. Biological nature study.
(Anon, rev.) 970.

Downs, C. M. Types of Bacillus typhosus.
170.

Dox. A. W. Soy-bean urease. 816.

Dox, A. W., and G. W. Roark, Jr. Use of a

methylglucoside by Aspergillus. 1318.
Dox, A. W., and L. Yoder. Fermentation

and starch in silage. 853.
Doyle, J. Larix leptolepsis, morphology.

386, *1541.
Drude, C. Crosses with Curcurbita pepo.

(Rev. by Anon.) 1579.
Drummond, J. R. Miliusa and Saccopeta-
lum. 387.

Duarte d'Oliveira, Jose. Transmission of
fasciation and dichotomous branching
through grafting grapes. 1151, *1659.

Du Bois, L. Canlharides assay. 817.

Ducellier, F. Two new Desmide. 1194.

Duddleston, B. H. Germinator for maize
tests. 477, *1266.

Duerden, J. E. Inheritance of callosities
in the ostrich. 1660.

Dufour, L. Rev. of Daniel, L. Symbio-
morphoses. 666.

Dufrenoy, Jean. Bacterial tumor of pine.
1941.

Dunbar, P. B., and H. A. Lepper. Fruit
products, U. S. A. 146.

Duncan, F. M. Insect pests and plant dis-
eases. (Anon, rev.) 969.

Dunn, S. T. William James Tutcher.
*1448.

Dupler, A. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus.
1898.

Du Rietz, E. Scandinavian species of La-
minaria. 1195.

Durrant, R. G. Ions in solution. 972.

Dustman, R. B. Availability of fertilizer.
291.

Dyer, W. T. T. Flora Capensis. 388.

Eames, E. H. Daucus carota, flower color.

389.
Earle, F. S. Varieties of sugar cane, Porto

Rico. *390.
East, E. M. Hybridization and evolution.

667. — Inbreeding and outbreeding.

(Rev. by O'Donoghue) 1109. (Rev. by

Sirks) 1761.
East, E. M., and Jones, D. F. Inbreeding

and outbreeding. (Rev. by Coulter)

661.
Eastwood, Alice. Arizona spring flora. 1517.
Eaton, B. J. Para-rubber-seed oil, Malaya.

90. — Agricultural-chemical work, Ma-
laya, 1918. 117. — Tung, or Chinese wood

oil, from Aleurites. 147.
Eaton, Paul. Device for measuring bacteria.

171.
Eberhard Strip-cuttings in forestry. 543.
Eberle, E. G. Henry George Greenish (bio-
graphical). *1449.
Eberson, F. Ultraviolet rays and antigenic

properties. *872.
Eckstein. The beech wooly-scale-louse

Germany. 544. — Sugar from larch trees,

Switzerland. 545.
Edlefsen, W. E. (West, F. L., and Edlefsen)

1836.

306

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

Edlcr, W. Branching of field beans. 1661. —
(Rev. by Anon.) 1580.

Effront, Jean. Cell-growth and enzyme
production in yeast. 854.

Ehinger, K. A tertiary Deilephila hybrid.
*1662.

Ehrenberg (Allendorf and Ehrenberg) 1049.

Ehrhorn, E. M. Rules for proper shipments
of plants from Hawaii. 1942.

Elderton, Ethel M. Life history albums.
*1075.

Eldridge, A. G. Plants for gardens farthest
north. 184S.

Ellinger, Tage. Rev. of Cushing, H. *1663.
—Rev. of Schmidt, J. *1664.

Elliott, Charlotte. Halo-blight of oats. 230,
*172.

Elliott, F. A. Aeroplane patrol of forests,
U. S. A. *546.

Elliott, J. A. Arkansas sweet-potato dis-
eases, *231.

Elmer, A. D. E. New woody plants from
Mount Maquiling, Philippines. 391.

Emberger, L. Chondriosomes in vascular
cryptogams. 984. — Chondriosomes in
ferns. 985.

Emerson, R. A. Variegated pericarp in
maize. (Rev. by Anon.) 1581.

Enfer, V. The amateur fruit garden. 1152.
— Peas. 1174. — Sterility of fruit trees.
1806. — The Passe-Crassane pear. 1807. —
Frozen grape vines. 1808. — Seedling win-
ter cabbage. 1879. — Spring carrots. 1880.
— Seleriac. 1881. — Turnips for winter.
1882.

Engler, A. German exploring expeditions in
Africa and Papuasia. 310. — Vegetation
of Kamerun, West Africa. 1505.

Erdmann, R. Variation in Paramoecium.
(Rev. by Van Herwerden) 744.

Eriksson, J. Planthera bifolia X Montana
in Sweden. 668.

Ernst, A. Hybridization as cause of apog-
amy. (Rev. by Renner) 1112.

Espino, R. B. Review of maize investiga-
tion, Philippines. 478. — Review of coco-
nut investigations, Philippines. *1410.

Esty, J. R. (Bigelow, W. D., and Esty) 869.

Etter, A. W. Origin of Ettersburg straw-
berry. 1809.

Eulefeld. Retention of beech foliage in 1919,
Germany. 547. — Turpentining, Hesse,
1919. 548.

Evans, A. T. Embryogeny of Pentstemon.
*986.

Evans, E. P. Local ecology and school bot-
any. 973.

Everest, A. Chemistry of anthocyanin.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1582.

Evrard, F. A new Alanguim from Indo-
China. 392.

E'we, G. E. (Garr, H. D., and E'we) 819.

F., H. Rev. of Gepp, A., E. S. Gepp, and
Mme. Paul Lemoine. Melobesia. 1196.

Fabricius. Bavarian tan-bark. 549.

Fairman, C. E. Human-excreta fungi. 1216.

Falk, I. S. (Winslow, C.-E. A., and Falk)
832, 261.

Falqui, G. Fertilization in Thelisia. 987.

Familler, I. Moss notes, Bavaria. 153, 1207.

Farrer, Reginald. English rock garden.
(Anon, rev.) 302.

Farwcll, O. A. On Tsuga americana. 393,
— Changes in botanical nomenclature.
394. — Adulteration of American centaury
and maidenhair fern. 818.

Fawcett, W. Zebra hybrids as domestic ani-
mals. 1665.

Fawcett, W., and A. B. Rendle. Notes on
Jamaica plants. 395.

Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept.
Agric, U. S. quarantine notice. 232, 233,
234, 235.

Federly, H. Results of genetical science
applied to mankind. 669.

Fenton, F. A. Tipburn caused by potato
leaf -hopper. (Ball, E. D., and Fen-
ton) 214.

Fergus, E. N. (Conner, S. D., and Fergus)
1265, 1381.

Fernald, M. L. Panicum capillaria in New
England. 396. — Rubus idaeus and its
variations. 397. — Bidus connata var. gra-
cillipes. 398. — Two new species of Myrio-
phyllums. 399. — A new Polygonum in
Massachusetts. 400.— The identity of
Angelica lucida. 401. — Variations of Ra-
nunculus repens. 402. — A new form of
Coreopsis rosea. 403. — The white-flow-
ered primrose. 404.

Fernow, B. E. Rev. of Ann. Rept., Conserva-
tion and Development Dept., New Jersey,
1919. *550.

Ferreri, E. Fagus measurements, Camal-
doli, Italy. 91. — Forest estimates, white
pine, Italy. 92.

Ferry, N. S. (Davis, Lewis, and Ferry) 847.

Fippin, E. O. Lime as soil improver. 1367.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

307

Firket, Jean. Organogenesis of sex glands

in birds. *1666.
Fischer, A. F. (Brown, W. II., and Fischer)

634, 635.
Fischer, II. Plant metamorphosis and evo-
lution. *1667.
Fisher, D. F., and Newcomer, E. J. Pear

scab in northwest U. S. A. 1943.
Fisher, M. L. Study of pastures needed. 479.
Fisher, R. T., and E. I. Terry. New England

second growth pine. 551.
Fitting, Hans. Botany at Bonn University.

926.
Fitzpatrick, H. M. Monograph of Coryneli-

aceae. 1217, 191 .
Fitzpatrick, T. J. Fern flora of Nebraska.

*324.
Fitzwater, J. A. Pinchot Committee Rept.,

forests of northwest U. S. A. 552.
Flahault, C. Horticulture in Alsace, France.

1810.
Fleischer, M. Lithuanian virgin-forest

mosses. 1506.
Fleiszner. Fossil coal and weathering.

*1238.
Fleming, A. P. M. Industrial research in U.

S. A. (Rev. by Thompson) 507.
Flippance, F. Betel-nut palm, Malaya.

1811.
Flood, M. G. (Henry, Augustine, and Flood,

M. G.) 1544, 1904.
Florin, C., and R. "P. J. Berflus," a new

variety of apple. 1153.
Florin, Rudolf. Pliocene flora of Japan.

1239. — Multiple eggs in bryophytes.

(Rev. by Land) 1897.
Flossfeder, F. C. H. (Cruess, W. V., A. W.

Christie, and F. C. H. Flossfeder) 1176.
Flynn, Mrs. Nellie F. A correction. 1518.
Folsom, Donald. (Schultz, E. S., and Folsom)

1286.
Forbes, R. D. Forestry education, U. S. A.

501, *553.
Foster, Nathan. Colloids and living phe-
nomena. *988.
Fragosa, D. R. G. Fungi Imperfecti in north-
ern Spain. 1218.
Francois, L. Achille Miintz, biographical.

927.
Fraser, A. C. Weak awn in Avena crosses.

(Anon, rev.) 1598.
Fraser, W. P. Cultures of Puccinia Clama-

tidis and P. Impatientis. 1916.
Fred, E. B. (Peterson, W. H., and Fred)

*789, 1337, 1338.

Fred, E. G.,W. 11. Peterson, and A. Daven-
port. Pentose-fermenting bacteria. 1336.

Frederick, W. J. (Peltier, G. L., and Fred-
erich) 1955.

Free, E. E. Rev. of Pendleton, R. L. *2019.

Freeman, W. E. British botanic gardens
and stations. 1450.

Frets, G. P. Polymery and head form in
man. 1076, 1077.

Fries, R. E. Notes on gymnosperms in
Hortus Bergianus. *1154. — History of
Hortus Bergianus. 1451. — Veti Brecher
Wittrock (biographical). *1452.

Friesner, R. C. Elongation and cell division.
2008.

Frolich, G. Breeding winter cereals into
spring cereals. 1668. — Selection for seed-
weight in field beans. 1669.

Fruwirth, C. Handbook of agricultural
plant breeding. 3. The breeding of to-
bacco, hops, etc. 1670. — Seed recogni-
tion. *1671. — Handbook of agricultural
plant breeding. *670. — Plant breeding in
Germany and Austria-Hungary. 1078. —
Plant breeding. *1079, 1080.— Breeding
of winter cereals into spring cereals.
(Rev. by Kooiman) 691. — Plant breeding,
vol. 3. (Rev. by Sirks) 725.— Selection
in pure lines. (Anon, rev.) 1583. — Plant
breeding. (Anon, rev.) 1584, 1585, 1586.

Fruwirth, C. , Th. Roemer, E. von Tschermak.
Plant breeding. 1081.

Fruwirth, C, and others. Plant breeding,
vol. 4. (Rev. by Sirks) 726.

Fryer, P. J. Insect pests and fungous dis-
eases. *1944.

Fuller, H. C. Methods for determining
atropin and strychnin. 267.

Fulton, H. R. Pseudomonas citri in soil.
236.

Furrer, E. Vegetation of Switzerland.
*1240.

Fyson, P. F. Indian speces of Eriocaulon.
405. — Notes on distribution. 406. —
Announcement of Indian Bot. Jour. 928.

G., A. Rev. of A. H. Church. *1197.

Gager, C. S. Annual Report Brooklyn Bot.
Gard. 502. — Heredity and evolution in
plants. 1672.

Gagnepain, F. New Vernonias from Indo-
China. 407. — New Begonias from Asia.
408. — Acareosperma, a new genus of the
Ampelidaceae. 409. — New or critical
species of Adenia and Passiflora. 410.

308

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Gain, Edrnond, and Andre Gain. Effect of

vegetation on soil temperature. 299,*870.

Galant, S. Variations in Anemone hepatica.

*671.
Galippe, V. Transformations of protoplasm.

1307.
Galloway, B. T. Tests of new pear stocks,

U. S. A. 118.
Gamble, J. S. Flora of Madras. (Rev. by

Anon.) 303.
Gard, Mederic. Cell division of Euglena.

989, *1198.
Gardner, F. D., asst. by R. M. Blasingame.

Soils and soil management. 2020.
Gardner, V. R. Bud-selection investiga-
tions. 1155, 1673.
Gamier, M. New or little known plants.
1812.— New plants for 1920, France.
1849, *1411.
Garr, H. D. , and G. E. E'we. Hemlock bark

for pharmacy. 819.
Gartley, A. (Waldron, J. W., A. Gortley., C.
R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G. P.
Wilcox, T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee)
901, 1787.
Garvey, M. E. (Itano, A., J. Neill, and

Mary E. Garvey) 841.
Gassner, S. Physiology of spring and win-
ter annuals. 1082.
Gassul, R. S. Symmetrical contraction of

fingers. (Rev. by Siemens) 1756.
Gatenby, J. B. Rev. of Bower, F. O., J. G.
Kerr, and W. E. Agar. *1083.— Cyto-
plasmic inclusions of germ cells. *1485.
Gates, R. R. Heredity and eugenics. *1084
— Meiotic phenomena in Lactuca. 1674.
Gauger, M. Mendelian ratios in monohy-

brids. 1675.
Gautier, A., and P. Clausmann. Physiologi-
cal experiments with fluorides. *1412.
Gautier, A., and P. Clausmann. Influence of

fluorides on vegetation. 1998.
Gepp, A. Melobesia. (Anon. Rev.) 1196.
Gepp, E. S. Melobesia. (Anon, rev.) 1196.
Gerhardt, K. Excretions in plants. 838.
Gerlach, Prof. Dr. Fertilizing with carbon

dioxide. 890.
Gershberg, S. (Hibbard, R. P., and Gersh-

berg) 1419, 2025.
Gershenfeld, Louis. Galen, a sketch. *929.
Gertz, Otto. "Glora Kofsoensis" of Lin-
naeus. 54.
Ghose, M. Source of sugar in Bikar. 1893.
Gill, Walter. Ann. Forestry Rept., South
Australia, 1918-1919. 1025.

Gillespie, L. J. Reduction and oxidation of

water-logged soil. 283.
Gillette, Genevieve. (Coons, G. H., and Gil-
lette) 1938, 2013.
Gillies, C. D. Variation in Bruguiera

Rheedi. *672.
Gilling, W. O. R. (Rando, H., and Gilling)

800.
Gilmore, M. R. Plants used by Missouri

River Indians. *2030.
Girarcl, P. Permeability of the cell mem-
brane. 1994.
Gleason, H. A. The quadrat method. 1499.
Glover, H. M. Spruce (red henrtwood),

British India. 93.
Goblet d'Alviella, Felix. Elements of silvi-
culture. (Rev. by Woolsey) 644.
Gochenour, W. S., and H. Bunyes. Filtra-
tion of colloids. 237.
Godfrey, M. J. British marsh orchids. 411.
Goebel, K. Ernst Stahl, appreciation. *930.
Goff , E. S. Sketch of the history of horti-
culture. 55.
Gola, G. Haematin in plants. 839.
Goldemweiser, E. A. Fertilizer industry,

U. S. A. *1390.
Goldschmidt, R. Quantitative basis of he-
redity and species formation. *673. —
Intersexuality. *1676. (Rev. by Van
Herwerden) 745.
Goldsmith, M. (Delage, Y., and Goldsmith)

1482.
Goldsmith, W. M. Chromosomes of tiger

beetles. *1486.
Gould, H. P. Peach growing, TJ. S. A. 1813.
Gragenberg, E. Hyperdactyly in human ex-
tremities. *1677.
Graham, Margaret. Centrosomes in Preis-

sia. *990.
Grant, E. H. Tests for spartein and guaiac.

1299. — Tests for purgative drugs. 1978.
Greve, C. Biology and ecology of f oliaceous

mosses. (Rev. by Rubner) 610.
Green, F. J. Germinative capacity of pine

seed. 554, *2010.
Greenfield, W. P. Beech in Lincolnshire.

555.
Gregory, L. H. (Calkins, G. N., and Gregory)

744.
Greig-Smith, R. Toxic effects produced by

bacteria. *S40.
Greve, W. Weed control, Germany. 13.
Grier, N. M. Public information regarding
biology. 503. — Variation of leaves in
Sassafras. *1085.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

309

Grieve, J. \V. A. Forestry in Himalayas. 550.
Griffiths, David. New and old species of

Opuntia. (Rev. by Coulter) 3S0.
Groom, Percy. "Brown oak" caused by
some fungous agency. 1267.

Grosser, Otto. Specific albumin in heredity,
and structure of the animal placenta.
•1086.

Grout, F. F., and Broderick, T. M. Algon-
kian algae. 1241.

Grove, W. B. Biographical sketch of G. S.
West. 56.

Grove, W. B. Geo. Stephen West. *1453. —
Species of Phoma listed by Saccardo.
1917.

Groves, J. Sex terms for plants. *154. — C.
Varley, biographical. 931.

Grumert, Artur. Agricultural drainage.
2021.

Gruzewska, Mrs. Z. Laminarine of Lami-
naria flexicaulis. 1319.

Guerin, P. Rev. of Berger, Marie-Gaston.
*412.

Guerin, P., and Ch. Lormand. Chlorine gas
injury. 1362.

Guillaumin, A. Contribution to the flora of
New Caledonia. 413. — Concerning intro-
duction of Colocasia indica, France. 1850.
— Elements of cytoplasm. 991. — Chon-
driosomes in plant cells. 992. — Chondrio-
somes of lilies. 1487.

Guion, A. Heating greenhouses by electric-
ity. 1 14.

Gunderson, A. J. Dry lime sulphur. 1945.

Gutherz, S. Heterochromosomes in domes-
tic cat. *1678.

Guthrie, J. D. Early English forest regula-
tions. *557, 932.

Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Smith. Transmis-
sion of eye defects induced by lens-sen-
sitized serum. 1679.

Guyot, Ch. Two schools of forest policy,
France. 1026. — Forest laws on clearing,
France. 1027. — Forest laws on rabbit
injury, France. 1028.

Haas, A. R. C. Reaction of plant juices.
1320.

Hadley, P., and Dorothy W. Caldwell. In-
heritance of egg-weight. 674.

Haecker, V. Hereditary characters in man.
1680.

Hagedoorn — La Brand, A. C, and A. L.
Hagedoorn. Inherited predisposition
to a bacterial disease. 1087.

Ilagcm, O. Climate and viability of pine

seed. 558.
Eagiwara, Tokio. Coupling in Japanese

morning glory. 675.
Ilahn, G. G. (Hedgcock, G. G., N. R. Hunt,

and G. G. Hahn) 1219.
Hall, I. C. Methylene blue and anaerobiosis.

*173.
Hall. R. C Forest situation in France. 559.
Hallberg, F. (Blatter, E., F. Hallberg, and

C. McCann) 342, 343.
Halversen, W. V. (Brown, P. E., and Hal-

versen) 282.
Halma, F. F. (Reed, H. S., and Halma) 1347.
Hamblin, C. O. Collar rot of citrus trees.

1268.
Hamelinaye, see De la Hamelinaye.
Hammond, A. A. Small fruit culture, Vic-
toria, Canada. 1815.
Hampton, H. C. (Becking, L. G. M. B., and

H. C. Hampton) 1334.
Handover, W. P. Dwarf coconuts, Malaya.

*119.
Hansen, A. A. Cocklebur. 1414.
Hansen, Dan. Huntley reclamation project,

1918. 1413, *1816.
Hansen, W. Classification of breeding plots
and plants. *1088— Beet breeding. 1681.
— Plantbreeders bookkeeping. *1682. —
Organization and labor-saving in plant
breeding. *1683. — Determination of seed-
weight in plants. *1684. — Organization
of plant breeding. (Rev. by Anon.)
1587.
Harder, R. German rev. of Kiister, E.

*1089.
Hargitt, G. T. Evolution of germ cells.

1685.
Hargreaves, W. A. Paper making industry
in South Australia. (Rev. by Anon.) 521.
Harlan, H. V. Daily development of barley
kernels. 1415, *1899. — Germination of
barley pollen. (Rev. by Anon.) 1569.
Harlan, H. V., and S. Anthony. Develop-
ment of barley. 1416. *2009.
Harland, S. C. Inheritance of corolla color
in cotton. *676, 1686. — Inheritance in
cowpea. (Rev. by Kooiman) 692.
Harman, M. T. Chromosome studies in

Tettigidae, II. 1687.
Harper, R. M. The supposed southern limit
of the eastern hemlock. *94. — Water and
mineral content of an epiphytic fern.
1503.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 3

310

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Harris, F. S., and Butt, N. I. Short-time
field tests, U. S. A. 14.

Harris, J. A. Field heterogeneity and plot
yields. 480.

Harris, L. Differences in disease resistance
in potatoes. (Rev. by anon.) 1588.

Harrison, J. W. H. Genetical studies in a
geometrid moth. 677.

Harshberger, J. W. Alpine fell-fields of east-
ern North America. *1908.

Hart, W. E. Pamplemousses Bot. Gard.
*2031.

Hartley, Carl. Conifer stem lesions caused
by excessive heat. 1269.

Hartley, C, T. C. Merrill, and A. S. Rhodes.
Seedling diseases of conifers. 95.

Hartwell, B. L. Annual Rept. Rhode Island
Agric. Exp. Sta. 15, *238, 1688.

Hartwell, B. L., and S. C. Damon. Hy-
drated lime and limestone, Rhode Island.
16, *239. — Sodium as substitute for po-
tassium, Rhode Island. 17, *831.

Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pember, and G. E.
Merkle. Crop plants and succeeding
crop, Rhode Island. 18, *240.

Harvey, Ethel Browne. Chromosome number
in Metazoa. 1090.

Harvey, E. N. The nature of animal light.
2012.

Harvey, L. F. (Clinton, G. P., and Harvey)
223.

Harvey, L. H. Phytogeographical observa-
tions, Michigan. *1542.

Harvey, R. B. Relation of enzymes and
acidity to overgrowths. *764, 1353, *1270.

Haslett, J. P. Spirit-yielding plants, Brit-
ish India. 268.

Haslund, Ole. Form factor of Norway
spruce. 560.

Haslund, Ove. Forest valuation. *1543.

Haugh, L. A. Lichens as index of beech
growth. 1029.

Havaas, John. Lichens of Bergen listed by
Mosterhavn. 786.

Havas, G. Dwarf hemp due to inbreeding.
(Anon, rev.) 1052.

Havelock, W. B. Larch growth at Brock-
lesby Park, England. 561, 562, 563.

Haviland, F. E. Stomata of Australia leaf-
less plants. 1504.

Hawes, A. F. Cooperative marketing, for-
est-products, U. S. A. *96.

Headden, W. P. Effect of excess nitric-ni-
trogen in soils. 1375.

Headley, F. B. Truckee-Carson reclamation
project, 1918, U. S. A. 1417, *1817.

Heal, John. Streptocarpus hybrids. 678.

Hedgcock, G. G., N. R. Hunt, and G. G.
Hahn. The genus Coleosporium. 1219.

Hedrich, U. P. Manual of American grape
growing. (Rev. by True) 1835.

Heede, see Van den Heede.

Hegner, R. W. Cytology of Arcella. *993 —
Environmental effects on Arcella. *994.
— Variation in Arcella. (Rev. by Van
Herwerden) 744.— Germ-cell cycle of
animals. (Rev. by Thomson) 1134.

Heinlich, Louis F. Trees of White Co., In-
diana. *97.

Heinsius, H. W. Report of Secretary of
Phytopathological Society of Holland.
*1946.

Hemenway, C. R. (Waldron, J. W., A. Gart-
ley, C. R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams,
G. P. Wilcox, T. H. Petrie, and H. P.
Agee) 901, 1787.

Hendrickson, A. H. Inter-species pollina-
tion of plums. 120.

Hendrickson, J. W. (Lauritson, M. N., J. W.
Hendrickson, and W. B. Nevens) 1098.

Henke, L. A. Corn in Hawaii. 1418.

Henkel, J. S. Forestry, Rhodesia. *98.

Henry, A. Species of Pseudotsuga. *765.

Henry, A., and M. G. Flood. The Douglas
fir. 1544, *1900.

Hensen, V. Death, reproduction, and he-
redity. (Rev. by Thomson) 737.

Herbst, K. Influence of background on the
color of salamanders. (Rev. by Schleif)
1751.

Heribert-Nilsson, Nils. Experimental stud-
ies on Salix. 414. — Pollen-tube and Men-
delian ratios in Oenothera. *679. (Rev.
by Sirks) 1762. — Deranged ratios in
Oenothera. 1689.— Rev. of von Hofsten.
*1690.

Herlant, Maurice. Carbonic acid and ex-
perimental parthenogenesis. *1691.

Herre, A. C. Twenty-eight Alaskan lichens.
185.

Herriott, Miss E. M. Flora of Hagley Park,
New Zealand. 1519.

Hertel, H. Agriculture in 1919. 481.

Hertwig, Giinther. Fate of paternal chroma-
tin in crosses. *1692.

Hertwig, Oscar. General biology. *1693.

Hertwig, Paula. Haploid and diploid par-
thenogenesis. *680, 1695.— Aberrant form
of parthenogenesis in Rhabditis. *1694.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

311

Ilerwerden, see Van Herwerden.

Hcrzog, T. Bryophytcs of second Bolivian
trip. (Rev. by Andrews) L205.

Hess, N. Plant hybridization. ISIS.

Hessclman, II. Distribution of tree pollen.
*1242.

Heyl, F. W., and C. Barkenbus. Viburnum
prunifolium constituents. *1301.

Heyl, F. W., and H. N. Hopkins. Proteins
of ragweed pollen. *1300.

Hibbard, R. P. Seed potato preparation.
19.

Hibbard, R. P., and S. Gershberg. Method
of determining fertilizer requirements.
1419, *2025.

Hickel. Douglas fir, France. 1030.

Hickey. J. P. Spores in human faeces. 470.

Ililey, W. E. Calculating mean annual for-
est per centage. 564.

Hiley, W. E. Larch diseases. *1947.

Hitchcock, A. S. On Isophorus unisetus.
415. — Flora of District of Columbia.
(Rev. by Britton) 304.— Genera of
grasses in U. S. A. (Rev. by Sampson)
611. (Rev. by Nelson) 1425.

Hoagland, D. R. Absorption of soil con-
stituents. (Anon, rev.) 1313.

Hoche, Leon, and Rene Morlot. Partheno-
genesis following atrophy of follicle.
*1696.

Hodson, E. A. Correlations in cotton char-
acters. 20.

Hoffer, G. N. Disease-free sweet corn seed.
*4S2, 1271.

Hoffstein, B. H. Notes on henna. 1979.

Hofmann, J. V. Forest fires, U. S. A. *565.

Hofsten, see Von Hofsten.

Hogben,G. Organization of research. (Rev.
by Thomson) 508.

Hole, R. S. A news pecies of Tamarix. 416.

Hollick, A. Bartram oak. *99.

Holloway, J. E. New Zealand species of
Lycopodium. *325.

Holm, Theo. Internal glandular hairs in
Dryopteris. 1183.

Holmes, E. M. Medicinal plant industry for
Britain. 820.— Manna of the Bible. *821,
933.

Holste, G. Rev. of Bucher, H. Locust
plague in Levant. 471.

Holzinger, J. M. Bartramiopsis Lescurii.
155.

Honing, J. A. Selection in Deli tobacco.
*681.

Hooper, J. J. ('out color in Jersey cattle.

682.
Hopkins, II. X. (Heyl, F. W., and Hopkins)

1'roteins of ragweed pollen. 1300.
Hopkins, L. S. Crested form of Lady fern.

326. — On Potamogeton Vaseyi. 417.
Hopkinson, A. D. Pine and beech forests,

Normandy. 566.
Houwing, R. II. Popular treatise on hered-
ity. 1091.
Howard, A., G. L. C. Howard, and A. R.

Khan. Crop pollination, India. 891.
Howard, L. O. Recollections of early days of

Biological Society of Washington. 934.
Howard, W. L. Fruit growing and dairying.

1819. — Value of different roots as stock.

1820.
Hormado, J. Variation in Fi progenies of a

single mother beet. *1697.
Hromadko, J. Variability in progenies of

sugar beets. (Rev. by anon.) 1589.
Huard, V.-A. The "Canadian Naturalist".

935. — Sketch of Abbe1 Provancher, bio-
graphical. 936.
Huffel, G. Forest economy. (Rev. by Al-

gan, H.) 1012.
Hume, A. N. System of breeding. *683.
Hungerford, C. W. Rust in seed wheat and

its relation to seedling infection. 1272.
Hunt, R. R. (Hedgecock, G. G., N. R. Hunt,

and G. G. Hahn) 1219.
Huntington, W. D. Fertilizer industry.

*1391.
Hutchins, D. E. Forests of New Zealand.

567. — Tree growth and forestry. 568. —

Waipona Kauri forest, New Zealand.

*569. (Anon, rev.) 624. — Insignis-pine

disease. 1273.

Ikeno, S. Reversion in Plantago major. 684.
Ulick, J. S. State forests, Pennsylvania.

*570. — Silviculture in Pennsylvania. 571.
Imai, Y. (So, M., and Imai). 734.
Inman, C. F. (Lipscomb, G. F., C. F. Inman,

and J. S. Watkins) 2026.
Ise, John. United States forest policy.

(Rev. by Tourney, J. W.) 627.
Itano, A. (Neill, Jas., and Itano) 178.
Itano, A., J. Neill, and Mary E. Garvey.

Growth reaction of bacteria in human

food. *S41.
Ivy, T. P. Cut-over lands, southern U. S. A.

*572.
Iwaski, C. Japanese coal. *1243.

312

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

J., S. H. Rev. of Winterbottom, D. C. 472.

Jack, H. W. Wet rice experiments, Malaya.
121.

Jackson, A. B. Spike disease of sandal.
1274. — Carex in Bedfordshire, England.
1520.

Jackson, A. B., and A. J. Wilmott. Barbarea
rivularis in Britain. 418.

Jackson, B. D. Pritzel's index. 937.

Jackson, H. S. North American Ustilagin-
ales. 775. — New or noteworthy North
American Ustilaginales. *1275.

Jacobson, Mrs. R. Floral biology of Scutel-
laria. 766.

Jagerschmidt, J. Logging in Alsace and Lor-
raine. 1031.

Jamieson, G. S., and W. F. Baughman. *269.

Jardine, J. T. Grazing in timber lands,
western U. S. A. 573.

Jauch, Berthe. Anatomy and biology of
Polygalaceae. 419.

Jeanport, E. Enumeration of plants of
Soudan. *311. — Plants of Macedonia.
312.

Jenkins, E. H., and G. P. Clinton. Potato
fertilizer experiments, Connecticut. 21.

Jenkins, E. H., and E. M. Bailey. Fertilizer
analyses, Connecticut. 292.

Jenkins, E. H., W. L. Slate, D. F. Jones, and
B. A. Brown. Varieties and strains of
corn for Connecticut. 1420.

Jennings, H. S. Variation in Diffiugia.
(Rev. by van Herwerden) 744.

Jennings, O. E. Paper mulberry, etc. *767.
— Ejection of pollen by paper mulberry.
1350.

Jermstad. Varieties and properties of smok-
ing opium. 822.

Joffe, J. S. Lime requirement and ion con-
centration. 279.

Johann, Helen (Dickson, J. G., and Johann)
227.

Johannes, Gunnar. Planting 2-0 nursery
pine stock, Sweden. 574.

Johannsen, W. Heredity in historical and
experimental light. (Anon, rev.) 1590.

Johansson, Hj. (Akerman, A., Hj. Johans-
son, and B. Platon) 646.

Johns, C. O., and H. C. Waterman. Proteins
from Stizolobium deeringianum. *1329.

Johnston, I. M. Flora of southern Califor-
nia. 1521.

Johnston, J. R. Sugar-cane mosaic disease.
241.

Jollos, Victor. Genetical studies in Infu-
soria. *1698.

Jones, D. F. Heritable characters of maize.
IV. A lethal factor — defective seeds.
*685. — Fertilization by pollen mixture.
*995, 1699, 1700.— Rev. of Coulter and

Coulter *1701. (East, E. M., and

Jones) 661.— (Jenkins, E. H.,W. L. Slate,
D. F. Jones, and B . A. Brown) 1420.—
Inbreeding and outbreeding. (Rev. by
O'Donoghue). 1109. (Rev. by Sirks)
1761.

Jones, D. H. Azotobacter life cycles. 174.

Jones, H. M. Amino-acid utilization in bac-
teria. 1321.

Jones, Owen. Soil fertility, Australian for-
ests. 1032. — Soil fertility preservation
by forest in Australia. *1368.

Jongmans, W. J. Coal measures of Holland.
1244.

Jost. Rev. of Lehmann, E. *686.

Jouin, E. Horticulture in Lorraine, France.
1821.

Judd, C. S. Morning glory weed. 1421.
— The Australian red cedar. 1545. —
Hawaiian forests. 1546. — Eucalyptus
plantation, Hawaii. 1547. — Forestry in
Hawaii. 1548.— The koa tree. 1549.— The
candlenut tree. 1550. — Forest reserves,
Hawaiian Islands. 1551. — The Makiki
nursery. 1552, 1822. — Original algaroba
tree. 1553. — A volume table for algaroba.
1554.— The wiliwili tree. 1555.

Juhlin-Dannfelt, H. Weed legislation. 22.

Just, Giinther. Mendelian ratios in forms
with low number of offspring. *1702.

Kalt, B. The -concept "Original seed."
*1703. (Rev. by Anon.) 1591.

Kammerer, Paul. Darkness animals in light

and the reverse. *1704. (Steinach,

Engen, and Kammerer) 1767, 1768.

Kappert, H. Complete dominance of a
quantitative character. 687.

Karver, J. L. (Moore, G. F., and Karver) 285.

Kashyap, S. R. Needle-number in Pinus
longifolia. *1033.

Kaurin, W. Forest planting in France. 1556.

Kay, James. Red and Norway pine in for-
estry. 575.

Kearney, T. H. Absorption by soil of so-
dium carbonate and sodium chloride.
296.

Keene, M. L. Zygospore formation in Phy-
comyces. *996.

Keith, L. G. (Clowes, G. H. A., and Keith)
1360.

INDKX TO AUTHORS NAMES

313

Keitt, T. E., and A. W. Murray. Making
insoluble phosphates available by com-
posting. 284. — Opening time of cotton,
Georgia. 892.

Kelley, W. P. Alkali lands in California.
1369.

Kempton, J. H. (Collins, G. N., and Kemp-
ton) 1648.

Kerr. J C On sex and heredity. (Rev. by
Oatenbv) 1083

Kiessling, L. Winter-barley breeding, Ger-
many. 23. — Report of Bavarian Seed-
breeding Institute. 1705. — Obituary, C.
K raus. *1706. — Yield of winter barley,
modified by breeding. 1707. — Mutation
in barley. (Rev. by Anon.) 1592. —
Chlorophyll-defective barley. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1593. — Seed-breeding Institution
at Weihenstephan. (Rev. by Anon.)
1594.

Killer, J. Breeding pure lines of winter
wheat into spring wheat. 1708.

Killerman, S. Polyporus montanus in Ba-
varia. 776.

Kirkhuff, Pauline. California glowers. *69.

Kirkland, B. P. State vs. federal control of
forests, U. S. A. 576. — Destructive lum-
bering and labor. 577.

Kittredte, J., Jr. Silvicultural practice,
France. 578.

Klatt, Berthold. Germ-cell transplantation
in gypsy moth. 1709.

Kleberger. Oil-producing plants, Germany.
24.

Kligler, J. J. (Olitsky, P. K, and Kligler)
843.

Kling, M. Tobacco fertilizer, Germany. 25.

Kniep, Hans. Sexuality in Basidiomycetes.
(Rev. by Nienburg) 710.

Knowlton, D. H., and W. Deane. Flora of
Boston District. 313.

Knowlton, F. H. North American mesozoic
and cenozoic plants. (Rev. by Cock-
erell) 794.

Koch, Elers. Forestry problems, Pinchot
Committee report, northwestern U. S. A.
579.

Koch, L. Degenerated cassava cuttings.
242. — Selection experiments with rice.
688.

Koehler, A. Rev. of Wilson, T. R. C. Kiln-
drying for aeroplane parts. *580.

Koehler, A. E. Calomel electrodes. *1364.

Kok, J. Enemies of cultivated plants.
(Rev. by Ritzema) 1958.

Kokctsu, It. Records fur physiology, ecol-
ogy, and climat ology. S75.

Kooiman, BE. N. Remarks on nuclear chi-
maeras in Oenothera. "689. — Rev. of
Collins, K. J. •690.— Rev. of Fruwirth,
C. *691.— Rev. of Barland, 8. C. *692.—
Rev. of von Tschermak. *693. — Com-
ments on Lotsy's Oenotheras as nuclear
chimeras. 1092. — Summary of recent

Oenothera literature. 1093. (Tjebbes,

K. , and Kooiman) 1135.

Kopeloff, Lillian. (Kopeloff, Nicholas, and
Lillian Kopeloff) 876.

Kopeloff, Nicholas, and Lillian Kopeloff.
Biological factors in sugar-deterioration.
*876.

Kornauth, K., and Wober, A. Control of
grape diseases. 243.

Korstian, C. F. Native vegetation and re-
forestation. 1557.

Kottur, G. L. Improved cotton for Maratha
Country, India. 1710.

Kotze, J. J. Wood charcoal. *1558.

Kotze, J. J., and E. P. Phillips. Forest-trees
(Faurea sp.), South Africa. 100.

Kraemer, Henry. C. Tanret, biographical.
938. — Growing drug-plants in Michigan.
1980, *1823.

Kraus, C. Inheritance ratios in pure lines.
(Anon, rev.) 1053.

Krause, K. Rev. of Bally, W. *694— Rev.
of Lehman, E. *695.

Krausel, R. Tertiary flora of Silesia. 1245.
— Pleistocene plants from Silesia. 1246.

Krausel, R., and others. The plants of the
Tertiary of Silesia. 1247.

Kreitmann, L. Forest of Montiers-sur-
Saulx. 1034.

Krelage, E. Classification of tulips. 1851.

Kremer, E. Alexander Tschirch. *939.

Krieger, Louis C. C. Field key to mush-
rooms. 777.

Kroon, H. M. Color-inheritance in horses.
*1094, 1095.

Kroon. H. M., and G. M. van der Plank.
Description of horses in the studbooks.
*1711.

Kruckeberg, H. W. Bud selection, Califor-
nia. 122.

Krumwiede, C, Jr. (Winslow, C.-E. A., Jean
Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, C. Krum-
wiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G. H.
Smith) 184.

Kryshtofovich, A. Tertiary plants from
Japan. 1248.

314

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Kubart, B. Paleobotanical researches in
German-speaking countries. *1249.

Kiihr, C. A. H. von Wolzogen. Sour cutting-
rot of sugar cane. 1948, *2022.

Kuiper, K., Jr. Color inheritance in cattle.
1096.— Sterile species hybrids. *1712.

Kulkomi, G. S. (Mann, H. H., S. D. Nag-
purkar, and G. S. Kulkomi) 1949.

Kuster, Ernst. White-margined leaves.
(Rev. by Harder) 1089.

Labrie, L'Abbe. Cuscuta on a tree top, 244.

Lacaita, C. C. Jerusalem artichoke. 1883.

Laing, R. M. Vegetation of Banis Peninsula,
N. Z. 1507.

Lam, H. J. Verbenaceae of the Malayan
Peninsula. 420.

Lamproy, E. Radio-active fertilizers. 123. —
Rejuvenation of peach trees, France. 1824.

Land, W. J. G. Rev. of Glorin, R. Multiple
eggs in bryophytes. 1909.

Landry, R. Transporting early crops by
aeroplane. 1825.

Lantes, Adelaide. A desiccator for botani-
cal specimens. 1393.

Larger, R. Retrogressive evolution. *1097.
(Rey. by Thomson) 1133.

Laughlin, H. H. Mathematics of human
germplasm. *696.

Laumonnier-Ferard, E. Plants for rock-
eries and herbaceous borders. 1167.

Lawritson, M. N., J. W. Hendrickson, and
W. B. Nevens. Pure-bred sires and
herd improvement. 1098.

Leape, H. M., and H. E. Annett. Indian
opium for medical purposes. 1422, *1981.

Lecomte, H. Sapotaceae of Madagascar.
421. — African Sapotaceae. 422. — The
genus Planchonella. 423. — A new La-
bourdonnaisia from Madagascar. 424. —
Atlas of Indo-Chinese woods. *1035. —
"Storied" structure of wood. 1901.

Ledermann, C. Vegetation notes from New
Guinea. 1508.

Lee.G.S. Manila hemp in Philippines. 1394.

Lee, H. A. Citrus-canker organism in the
soil. 245.

Lehmann, E. Rev. of von Ubisch, G. Fac-
torial analysis of barley. *699.

Lehmann, Ernst. New work with Oenothera.
*697.— Rev. of Correns, C. *698.— Com-
ments on Rcnner, O. Mendelian split-
ting and chemical equilibrium. *1099.
—Reply to Renner. *1713— Self-fertility
in Veronica. (Rev. by Jost) 686. (Rev.
by Krause) 695.

Lehmann, S. G. Penicillium spiculisporum sp.
nov. 1918.

Lemari, C. (Crevost, C, and Lemarie) 1539.

Lemee, E. A giant thistle from Salonica.
1156.

Lemoine, Mme. Paul. Melobesia. (Anon,
rev.) 1196.

Lenart, G. H. Chicory products, Germany.
26.

Leopold, Aldo. Forestry of the prophets.
*581 — Old Testament forestry. 940.

Leonard, E. J. The genus Taenitis. 327.

Lepper, H. A. (Dunbar, P. B., and Lepper)
146.

Lerchenau, G. (Beck, B., V. Mannagetta,
and Lerchenau) 335.

Lescuyer, P. Calculation of loss from prema-
ture tree cutting. 1036.

Lesourd, F. Culinary plants. 1157, *1454. —
Campanula pyraversi Cayeux. 1852. — On
the history of pyramidal tree. 1853. —
History of Jerusalem artichokes. 1884.

Letacq, A. Culture of Camellia in western
France. 1854.

Lettan, G. Lichenography of Thuringia.
787.

Letteer, C. R. San Antonio experiment
farm, 1918. 1423, *1826.

Leveille, H. List, with some new species, of
European plants. 425.

Levine, C. O. Native horses and cattle in
the Orient. *700.

Levine, M. Characters of dysentery bacilli.
175.

Lewis, C. I. Pear culture at home and
abroad, northwest U. S. A. 1827.

Lewis, C. I., F. C. Reimer, and G. G. Brown.
Fertilizers for Oregon apples. 124, *289.

Lewis, C. S. Woodsias of Quechee. *328.

Lichenstern, R. Transplantation of testes
in man. *1714. (Rev. by Benders) 1634.

Lienhart. Securing males or females at will
in poultry. 1100.

Lillie, F. R. Problems of fertilization.
*1488. (Rev. by O'Donoghue) 1110.

Lillie, R. I. Flowers, Hawaii. 1855.

Lillie, R. S. Nature of protoplasmic and
nervous transmission. 1308.

Lind, Gustaf. Bush fruits and their distri-
bution, Sweden. *125.

Lindley, P. C. Report of Southern Nursery-
men's Association, U. S. A. 126.

Lingelshein, A. "Steinreizker" in Silesia.
1220. *1276.

Linsbauer, L. Combating white cabbage-
butterfly. 270.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

315

Lint, see De Lint .

Lipman, J. G., and A.W. Blair. Useof lime
on sandy soils. 1373. — Availability of

nitrogenous fertilizers. 137G.

Lipscomb, (!. F , C. F. Inman, and J. S.
Watkins. Borax in fertilizers. 2026.

Lister, G. Mycetozoa of Britain. *163.
— Mycetozoa from Cornwall. 791, *941.

Ljung, E. W. Svalofs improved Basa-rye.
701.

Lloyd, C. G. J. Ilamsbottom (biographical)
*1455 — Arthur Lister. *1456 — George F.
Atkinson (biographical) *1457.

Loeb, J. The collodion membrane and the
electrification of water. 828. — Electro-
lytes and physical properties of colloids
and crystalloids. 829. — Quantitative laws
in regeneration. I. S67, *768. — Ions and
diffusion through membranes. 1311. — ■
Gravity and regeneration. 1354, *1184. —
Quantitative laws in regeneration. II.
1355.

Loewenthal, W. Mutable paratyphoid ba-
cillus. *1101.

Loizeau, A. A country garden. 1856.

Long, see also De Long.

Long, Bayard. Crepis biennis. *426. — Spe-
cific characters of Eragrostis peregrina.
427. — Jasione montana in New Jersey.
1522.

Longo, B. Identity of "Saint Fina violet,"
of San Gimignano, Italy. 57.

Lopriore, G. Biological investigations of
cereal rusts. *1277.

Lorch, W. Torsions in the setae of mosses.
1351.

Lorenzen, P. Noble-fir production in Den-
mark. 1037.

Lormand, Ch. (Guerin, P., and Lormand)
1362.

Lotsy, J. P. Oenothera experiments, 1919.
*702.— Origin of species through hybridi-
zation. *703 — Rev. of de Lint. *704 —
Rev. of Simon, R. *705. — Rev. of von
Tschermak, E. *706. — Species questions
in Cucurbita. 1102. — Onoetheras as nu-
clear chimeras. 1103. — Rev. of Bartsch,
P. *1715.— Rev. of Von Wettstein, F.
1716. — Rev. of von Wettstein, Fritz.
*1717. — Oenothera lamarckiana as a
nuclear chimera. (Anon, rev.) 1054. —
Oenotheras as nuclear chimeras. (Rev.
by Kooiman) 1092.

Loubiere, A. The fungal flora of de Brie
cheese. 1221.

Love, IT. II. Small <^rain investigation.
(Anon, rev.) 1595. Synthesis of wild
wheat forms. (Anon, rev.) 1596. — Fer-
tile wheat-rye hybrids. (Anon, rev.;
1597. — Weak awn in Avena crosses.
(Anon, rev.) 1598.

Lovejoy, P. S. Farms vs. forest. 1559, *1424.

Lowinger, E. Polish forestry and Germany.
582.

Ludwig. Steam-harvesting tan-bark, Ger-
many. 583.

Luisier, A. Mosses of Madeira. 156.

Lundberg, Fr. Seed color in Phascolus
crosses. (Anon, rev.) 1599.

Lundberg, Jon. Fr. Svalofs "Koloni Stens"
pea. 144.

Lundborg, H. Genotypical deaf-mutism.
*707. — Inheritance of genotypical deaf-
mutism. 1716.

Lynch, R. I. Hybrid Cestrums. 1718.

MacBride, E. W. Method of evolution.
*1107.

MacCaughey, V. M. History of botanical
exploration in Hawaii. 1458, 1459.

Macoun, W. T., and M. B. Davis. Apple
breeding, Canadian prairies. 127.

MacDougal, D. T. Hydration and growth.
1345.— Growth of tomato. 1346.

MacDowell, E. C. Bristle inheritance in
Drosophila. 708.

Maclnnes, L. R., and H. H. Randell. Bac-
terial exam nation of dairy products,
premises, etc. *176.

Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. 1038.

Mackenna, J. Dr. C. A. Barber (biographi-
cal). 1461.

MacLarty, A. S. Collecting of forest-tree
seed. 584.

Maestrini, D. Amylase of germinating
wheat. 855.

Magrou, J. Annuals and symbiotic fungi.
1278.

Maheux, G. Protection of plants among the
Romans. 942.

Maiden. J. H. Optunia as stock feed, Aus-
tralia. 27.

Maiden, J. H. Prickly pear as stock food.
483. — Pseudomorus Brunoniana, a skin-
irritant in New South Wales. 823.

Makins, F. K. Natural reproduction of sal,
Singhbhum, India. 585.

Mammen, see Von Mammen.

Mandekic, V. Inheritance in maize. 1719.
— Breeding of maize. 1720.

316

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Mangenot, G. Plastids in Fucaceae. 997.

Mangin, L. Chaetoceras. 1199.

Mangin, Louis. Obituary of Emile Boudier.
1462. — William Gilson Farlow (biographi-
cal). 1463.

Mann, H. H., S. D. Nagpurkar, and G. S.
Kulkorni. Tambera disease of potato.
India. 1949.

Maquenne, L., and E. Demoussy. Absorp-
tion of calcium by roots. 1314, *1370.

Marlatt, C. L. Federal plant-quarantine,
U. S. A. 128.

Marr, J. E. (Reid, C., and Marr) 801.

Marsh, C. D. A sheep-poisoning plant. 1983.
—The whorled milkweed. *1985.

Marsh, C. D., and A. B. Clawson. Astraga-
lus tetrapterus. *1982.

Marsh, C. D., and G. C. Roe. Sweet-clover-
seed screenings for sheep. *1984.

Marshall, E. S. Somerset plants. 428.

Marshall, Max Skidmore. Association of
Bacillus subtilis and Streptococcus lac-
ticus. *862.

Marshall, R. E. Plum pollination, Oregon.
129.

Marshall, R. E., and F. D. Fromme. Report
of a cedar rust survey of Augusta County,
Virginia. *101.

Marshall, T. D. Horticultural work of L. H.
Read. *943.

Martin, G. W. Early Amerian record of
mushroom poisoning. 944.

Martin, J. N. Botany for agricultural stu-
dents (book). (Rev. by Brown, J. G.)
497. (Coe, H. S., and Martin) 1646.

Mascre, M. Role of tapetum in pollen.
*998.

Mason, Fred. Discussion of Pinchot Com-
mittee report on forestry, northwestern
U. S. A. 586.

Mason, W. H. Planting larch in pits, U. S.
A. 587.

Masoni, G. Tests on root saps. 842.

Masui, Kiyoshi. Spermatogenesis in the
horse. 1721. — Spermatogenesis in do-
mestic cattle. 1722.

Mathieu, E. The oil palm in the East. 130.
— Tuba-root as an insecticide. 145.

Matsumoto, T. Melampsora cultures, Ja-
pan. 200.

Mattirolo, O. Daldinia concentrica in an
Italian bog. 201. — Superstition as to
production of head-lice by eating figs
and chestnuts. 945. — Use of wood in
aeroplane-wing frames. 1039.

Maung Po Saw. (Worth, F. J., andMaungPo

Saw) 1372.
Maxon, W. R. Notes on American ferns,

XIV. 329. — Notes on American ferns,

XV. 330.

Maxwell, E. Tree growth, New Zealand.

588.
May, W. L. Asclepias as stock poison, Colo-
rado. 271.
Mayer-Gmelin, H. Crossing and selection.

(Anon, rev.) 1055.
Mayr, Chr. (Ahr, J., and Mayr) 880.
McArthur, C. L. (Rogers, L. A., and Mc-

Arthur) 877.
McCall, A. G., and A. M. Smith. Compost-
ing sulphur with green sand. 1377.
McCann, C. (Blatter, E., P. F. Hallberg, and

C. McCann) 342, 343.
McCarty, A. C. (Steel, R. L., and McCarty)

1341.
McCool, M. M., and Millar, C. E. Soil

solubility affected by calcium sulphate.

295. — Freezing-point lowering of soils

and plants. 830.
McCormick, F. A. (Clinton, G. P., and Mc-

Cormick) 224.
McFarland, J. H. Roses. 1168, *1460.
McGovern, J. A. Wheat grading for schools.

484.
Mcllvaine, F. C. (Salter, R. M., and Mcll-

vaine) 1348.
McKenzie, R. T. Agriculture in Denmark.

485.
McKinney, H. H. (Coons, G. H., and Mc-

Kinney) 1939, 2014.
McLean, R. C. Ecology of Brazil rain forest.

1500.
McVicker, F. (Claughton-Wallin, H., and

McVicker) 540.
Meader, P. D., and G. H. Robinson. Strep-
tococcus hemotoxin. *858.
Meek, C. F. U. Chromosome dimensions.

1723
Meier, F. C. Control of watermelon an-

thracnose. 1950.
Mendiola, N. B. Philippine rice investiga-
tion. 486.
Meredith, E. T. Forests as a farm crop.

*589. — Need of forests for wood pulp.

590.
Mereschkovsky, Const. Lichen flora of

Kazan. 1231.
Merkle, G. E. (Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pember

and G. E. Merkle) 18, 239.
Merrill, E. D. (Brown, W. H. and Merrill) 533.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

317

Metcalf, \Y . A precocious youngster. *1040.

Metz, C. W. Chromosomes in Drosophila.
*1489. — Sterility of mutant hybrids in
Drosophila virilis. 1724. — Arrangement
of genes in Drosophila virilis. 1725.

Meunissier, E. Vaucluse cantaloup. 1885. —
Cauliflower and brocoli in "la Crau" de
Chateaurenard. 1886.

Meves, Friedrich. Plastosome theory of he-
redity. *1726.

Meyer, R. Echinopsis gigantea. 429.

Michael, E. L. Marine ecology. *504.

Michel-Durand (Cebrain de Besterio, D., and
Michel-Durand) 1358.

Middleton, A. R. Variation in Stylonychia.
(Rev. by van Herwerden) 744.

Millar, C. E. (McCool, M. M., and Millar)
295, 830.

Miller, E. C. Fertilization in Zea mays.
*1490.

Miles, F. C. Albinism in maize. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1600.

Milsum, J. N. Fruit culture, Malaya. 131.
(Spring, F. C, and Milsum) 36, 135.

Mirande, R. Carmine-alum as stain with
iodin green. 999.

Mitchell, D. T. Cattle-poisoning associ-
ated with Diplodia zeae. 246.

Mitscherlich, E. A. Liebig's Law of the
Minimum. 863. — Production of abnor-
mal heads of cereals. 1727.

Mola, Pasquale. Flora of Sardinian waters.
*157.

Molliard, M. Reaction of medium and res-
piration in Sterigmatocystis. 857. — Tu-
ber formation under aseptic conditions.
864.

Molz. Breeding resistant grapes. (Anon,
rev.) 1601.

Monckton, Horace W. Flora of Bagshot
District. *1208.

Monfort, W. F., and M. C. Perry. Atypical
conol-aerogenes from natural waters.
177.

Montemartini, L. R. Farneti, biographical.
946.

Moore, B. Rev. of Brown, N. C. Forest
products. 591.

Moore, C. R. Production of artificial her-
maphrodites in mammals. 1728.

Moore, G. T. and J. L. Karrer. A subterra-
nean algal flora. *285.

Moore, S. Le M. Phyllanthus Rogersii. 430.

Moreau, Fernand. Microscopical technique.

nooo.

Morel, F. Serbian laurel and Pyrocantha

pauciflora. 1857. — Buxus haleppica, Evo-
dia, and Actinidia. 1858.

Morgan, T. II. Physical basis of heredity.
*1491. (Rev. by O'Donoghue) 1108.

Morgan, T. II., and C. B. Bridges. Genetics
of Drosophila. *1492.

Mork-Hansen, K. Beech-thinning, Den-
mark. 102.

Morlot, Rene (Hoche, L., and Morlot) 1696.

Morris, O. M. Practical pruning of apples
and pears. I. 1158. — Practical pruning
of apples and pears. II. 1159.

Morrison, W. G. Natural afforestation, New
Zealand. *592.

Morvillez, F. Foliar vascular system of
Hamamelidaceae. 1902. — Leaf anatomy
in certain Amentyerae. 1903.

Mosseri, V. M. Overflow land in the Nile
valley, Egypt. 300.

Mossman, J. P. Hybridization of orchids.
1729.

Mottet, S. Darwin tulips. 1169. — Cedrus
libani brevifolia. 1859. — Lilium regale in
America. 1860. — New large flowered Nar-
cissi. 1861.

Muller, H. J. (Altenberg, E., and Muller)
647.

Muller, H. J. and E. Altenberg. Rate of
mutation in Drosophila. 709.

Mundy, H. G. Pasture improvement, Rho-
desia. 28.

Munger, T. T. Forestry in the Douglas fir
region. *593.

Murray, A. W. (Keitt, T. E., and Murray)
284, 892.

Murray, J. M. Variation in the Scots pine
(Pinus silvestris L). *594.

Murrill, W. A. Tuber Shearii. 778— Rev. of
Oudemans'. 779— W. G. Farlow, bio-
graphical. 947. — Pier Andrea Saccardo.
948. — Oudemann's work on Belgian fungi.
*1279— Amanita Wellsii, sp. nov. 1919.
— Rev. of Kauffman. 1920.

Muscatello, G. (Buscalioni, L., and Musca-
tello) 354.

Myers, C. N., and C. Voegtlin. Vitamines.
*1322.

Nakahara, Waro. Chromosomes ot stone
fly. *1493. — Conjugation of chromosomes
and crossing over. 1730.

Nakai, T. Plants of Japan and Korea. 431.

Nagpurkar, S. D. (Mann, H. H., S. D. Nag-
purkar, and G. S. Kulkorni) 1949.

318

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Naumann, Einar. Plankton-coloration in a
Swedish lake in 1697. 58.

Neger, F. W. Forest and orchard diseases.
*1280.

Neill, Jas. (Itano, Arao, Jas. Neill, and
Mary E. Garvey) 841.

Neill, J., and A. Itano. Microscopic-anaero-
bic cultivation. 178.

Keller, J. R. Nitrogen production by soil
bacteria. 1378.

Nelson, E. K. Chenopodium oil, chemistry.
*272.

Nelson, J. C. The new genus Bromelica.
432. — Rev. of Hitchcock, A. S. Grasses
of the United States. *1425.

Nelson, J. M. (Taylor, F. C., and Nelson)
1326.

Neumesiter. Ammonium superphosphate for
winter rye, Germany. 29.

Neuweiler, E. Plant remains of lake dwell-
ings, Switzerland. *1250.

Nevens, W. B. (Lauritzen, M. N., J. W.
Hendrickson, and W. B. Nevens) 1098.

Neville, G. (Barker, B. T. P., and Neville)
47.

Newcomer, E. H. (Fisher, D. F., and New-
comer) 1942.

Newell, W. Citrus planting, Florida. 132.—
Citrus-canker eradication, Florida. 247,
248.

Newman, L. Wheat production in Canada.
(Anon rev.) 1602.

Newman, L. F., and G. Walworth. Coastal
ecology of Lincolnshire, England. 1509.

Nicolas, G. Respiration of plants parasi-
tized by fungi. 1951.

Nienburg. Rev. of (1) Bensaude, M., (2)
Kniep, H. *710.

Nilsson-Ehle, H. Resistance of barley to
Heterodera. *711, 1731.

Nonidez, Jose F. Meiotic phenomena in
Blaps and the X complex. 1732.

Nord, F. F. Acetaldehyde in nature. *273.

Nordstedt. C. T. O. Rev. of Bryk, F. *59.

Nordstedt, O. Rev. of Bryk, F. 1464.—
Prima locaplantarumSuecicarum. *1465.

Noren, C. A. Thinning fruit. 1828.

Normington, Ruth. Heat resistant organ-
isms in cold-packed peas. 179.
Northrup, J. H. Hereditary adaptation to
high temperature. *1356. — Temperature
regulation of incubators. 1357.

Oberstein, O. Bud variations in potatoes.
1733.

Oddo, B., and G. Pollacci. On formation of

chlorophyll. 1323.
Odell, W. S. Morchella bispora in Canada.

780.
O'Donoghue, C. H. Rev. of Morgan. *1108.
— Rev. of East and Jones. *1109. — Rev.
of Lillie, F. R. *1110.

Okada, Y. Proliferation of pith cells in
Vicia. 868.

Okey, Ruth, and A. W. Williams. Inulin
in the globe artichoke. *1324.

Olitsky, P. K, and I. J. Kligler. Toxins
and antitoxins of B. dysenteriae Shiga.
*843.

Olmsted, F. E. Business phases of forest
devastation. 595.

O'Neal, C. E. Microsporogenesis in Datura
stramonium. 1001.

Opperman, A. Summer-cut beech wood,
Denmark. 103.

Orla-Jensen,S. Lactic-acid bacteria. (Rev.
by Winslow) 183, 860.

Orr, P. F. Bacillus botulinus and its toxins.
180.

Osborn, H. Pasture problems, especially
biological, U. S. A. 487.

Osborne, T. B. and A. J. Wakeman. Pro-
teins of spinach leaves. 1330.

Oschwald, Marie. Floral biology of Cam-
panula. 769.

Oshima, K. (Takameine, J., Jr.,andOshima)
1342.

Ostenfeld, C. H. Contributions to Austral-
ian botany. 433.

Oudemans, C. A. J. A. Enumeratio fun-
gorum. (Rev. by Murrill) 779.

Overeem, see Van Overeem.

Overholts, L. O. Mycologica! notes, 1919.
781.

Owen, J. H. Felsted School Scientific So-
ciety, England. 974.

Owen, M. N. Skin spot of potato. 1952.

Oyen, P. A. Norway - Pleistocene - fossil
plants. 798.

P., E. Rev. of Anonymous. *799.

Painter, T. S. Spermatogenesis in lizard,

Anolis. 1734.
Palmer, C. F. Agriculture in Los Angeles

schools. *70.
Palmer, E. J. Texas Ptridophyta, III.

1523.
Pampanini, R. Herbarium of Paolo Boc-

cone. *314.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NA.MKS

319

Pampanini, It., and V. Zanon. Flora of

Circeaica. ill",.
Pantanelli, E. Sorghum halepenBe in Italy.

30. — Changes in permeability. 1312.
Parish, S. B. Supplementary bibliography

of flora of southern California. 949.
Parkin, John. Restocking war-felled woods,
U.S.A. (1) *596 — Restocking war-felled
woods, U. S. A. (2) *597.
Parmenter, C. L. Chromosomes of parthe-
nogenetic frogs. *1002. — Chromosome
number in Ambystoma. *1003.
Parmentier, Paul. Irrigation in Syria and

Palestine. 1S29, *1426.
Parnell, R. Hazara Fores Division, India.

598.
Parry and Company. Cane development in

the East Indies. 1427.
Parsons, Elizabeth I. (Winslow, C.-E. A.,W.

Rothberg, and E. I. Parsons) 790.
Parsons, T. H. Effects of shell fire on French

forest trees. *1953.
Paterno, E. Cryoscopy. *950.
Patterson, J. T. Polyembrony and sex.

(Rev. by Welch) 747.
Paul D. Early study of fungi in Britain.

*951.
Paulsen, Ove. West Australian Chenopods.
(In Ostenfeld, C. H. Contributions to
Australian botany, Part II.) 433.
Pearce, W. J. Insect losses and forest yield,

western U. S. A. 599.
Pearcy, Knight. Filberts in the Northwest.

1160.
Pearl, R. Practical breeding of cattle. 712.
Pearson, W. H. William Hobson, biographi-
cal. 952.
Peglion, V. Perithecial stage of oak mildew,
Bologna. 202. — Wheat varieties and
bunt, Italy. 249.
Pellegrin, F. Botanical collections from the
Congo. 316. — Silk-cotton tree, Bombax
buonopozense. 434. — Polymorphism of
Hedera. 435.
Pellew, Caroline (Bateson, W., and Pellew)

652.
Peltier, G. L. Citrus canker. *1954.
Peltier, G. L., and W. J. Frederich. Rela-
tive susceptibility of citrus and related
plants to citrus canker. 1955.
Pember, F. R. (Hart well, B. L., F. R. Pem-

ber. and G. E. Merkle) 18. 239
Penard, E. Mallomonas insignis. 1200.

IYimell, I'. W. Scrophulariaceae of north-
eastern U. S. A. 436. — Index, Ameri-
can mycological literature. *782, *1281.

— North American flora. (Rev. by Coul-
ter) 379.— On Eysenhur.lt ia. See Ryd-
berg) 443.
Perdrizet, A. Coppice and high forest,

France. 1011.
Perotti, R. Bacteria in the roots of Diplo-

taxis erucoides. 1331.
Perry, M. C. (Monfort, W. F., and Perry)

177.
Petch, T. New variety of Exacum zeylani-

cum. 437 — Alocasia indica. 438.
Peters, J. G. Federal or state forest control,

U. S. A. 600.
Peterson, W. H. (Fred, E. B., W. H. Peter-
son, and A. Davenport) 1336.
Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. Fermen-
tation by Lactobacillus pentoaceticue.
*789, 1338. — Pentose-fermenting bacteria
and corn silage. 1337.
Petit, A. Wateringpot-plants by immersion.

1862.
Petrie, D. Flowering plants of New Zealand.
439. — Dominion herbarium needed, New-
Zealand. 505.
Petrie, F. H. (Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley, C.
R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G. P.
Wilcox, T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee)
901, 1787.
Petry, E. J. (Scott, W. R. M., and Petry)

1990.
Peyton, J. S. Forestry movement of the

seventies, U. S. A. 601.
Pezard, A. Castration of cocks by meat

diet. 1111.
Philips, A. G. Preferential mating in fowls.

1735.
Phillips. E. P. Carl Thunberg on Pro-
teaceae. 1466. — Importance of State

Herbarium. *1477. (Kotze, J. J., and

Phillips) 100.
Pickler, W. E. Diastase formation in the

barley grain. 1339.
Pinchot, G. Federal or state forest control,

U. S. A. 602.
Pinelle, J. Berberis Wilsonae Hemsley.
1170. — Berberis subcaulialata C. K.
Schneider. 1863 — Lonicera Maacki Ru-
precht. 1864. — Pterocarya stenoptera.
1865.
Piola-Caselli, E. Italian cooperative agri-
cultural associations. S94.

320

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Piper, C. V. Kudzu. 1428.— The jack bean.
1429.

Piper, C. V., and L. Carter. Carpet grass in
U. S. A. 31.

Pirotta, R. Olive flowers. 133.

Plank, see Van der Plank.

Platon, B. (Akerman, A., Hj. Johanson,
and B. Platon) 646.

Playfair, G. I. New and rare freshwater
algae. 1201.

Plitt, C. C. History of lichenology. 953.

Plymen, F. J., and Bal. Management of
embanked soils in India. 1379.

Pole-Evans, I. B. Fungi in cold storage,
Capetown. 250.

Poll, Heinrich. Peafowl hybrids. *1736.

Pollacci, G. (Oddo, B., and Pollacci) 1323.

Pomeroy, C. S. Bud variation in the rose.
713.

Pool, R. J. Handbook of Nebraska trees.
(Anon, rev.) 522.

Pope, W. B., and W. H. Ross. Borax in
mixed fertilizer. 2027.

Popoff, M. Artificial parthenogenesis and
cell stimulants. 865.

Posternak, S. The hexa-phoshporic ether of
inosite. 2003.

Pottier, Jacques. Foliar asymmetry in
mosses. 1209.

Potier de la Varde, R. Species of Fissidens.
158.

Poupion, J. Growing Catasetums. 1866. —
L'Inobulbon munificum Kranzlin. 1867.

Power, F. B., and V. K. Chesnut. Emana-
tion of acetaldehyde from apples. 1325.

Praeger, R. L. Asplenium adiantum-nigrum
var-acutum. 331. — N. Colgan, biograph-
ical. 954.

Praeger, W. E. Michigan sphagna for surgi-
cal dressings. 1986.

Prain, D. Biographical sketch of J. W. H.
Trail. 955.

Preston, J. F. Discussion of Pinchot Com-
mittee's report, forestry, U. S. A. 603.

Prince, A. L. (Blair, A. W., and Prince) 277.
Pringsheim, Hans. Symbiosis of bacteria.

*859.
Pritzel, E. The Grettstadt meadows, Ger-
many. 1510.
Proschowsky, A. R. The paper Aralia at
Cote d'Azur. 1868. — Conifers in calcare-
ous soils at Cote d'Agur. 1869.
Proulx, E. G. Fertilizer guarantees, U. S. A.

*293.
Przibram, Karl. Form and rapidity of
growth. 770.

Pulling, H. E. Sunlight and its measure-
ment. (Rev. by Tourney) *628.

Punnett, R. C. Mendelism, 5th ed. 714.—
Reduplication in sweet peas. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1603.

Pupus, J. A. Pachyphytum oviferum. 440.

Putterill, V. A. Botryosphaeria, apple-tree
canker. 251, *203. — Flag smut of wheat
in South Africa. 1956.

Quaglini, Luigi. Cross-fertilizing sugar

cane.

*1737.

Quaintance, A. L., and E. H. Siegler. Fruit
insect control methods. 1282.

Quisumbing y Arguelles, E. Studies of Phil-
ippine bananas. 441.

Ramaley, Francis. Colorado subalpine lake-
shore vegetation. 1511.

Rambousek, Fr. Bohemia sugar-beet dis-
eases in 1917. *1957.

Rand, R. F. Vegetation of Namaqualand, S.
W. Africa. 1512.

Randell, H. H. (Maclnnes, L. R., and Ran-
dell) 176.

Rands, H., and W. O. R. Gilling. New
Zealand brown coals. *800.

Rane, F. W. Wood for fuel, U. S. A. 604.

Rangachariar, K., and C. Tadulingham.
Species of Polygala. 442.

Rasmuson, Hans. Genetical experiments with
Papaver. *716, 1738. (Rev. by Sirks)
1763. — Origin of red sugar beets. (Rev.
by Anon.) 1604.

Rasmuson, J. Chlorophyll factors in Al-
lium. *715. — Mendelian chlorophyll-fac-
tors in Allium cepa. 1739.

Raum. Grass seed production. 1741.

Raum, J. Inheritance of seed-color in red
clover. 1740.

Raum, S. Breeding Italian raygrass (Lo-
lium). 1742. — Grass-seed breeding and
culture. *1743. — Breeding Italian ray-
grass. *1744. — Grass seed breeding and
culture. (Rev. by Anon.) 1605, 1606.

Raunkiaer, C. (Borgensen, F., and Raun-

kiaer) 151.
Ravaz, L. Removal of objectionable taste

of wines. 148.
Ravenna, C. Starch formation in green
plants. 1999. (Ciamician, G., and Ra-
venna) 1317.
Reed, H. S. Biographical sketch, V. M.

Spalding. 60.
Reed, H. S., and F. F. Halma. Growth-
inhibiting substance in the pear. 1347.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

321

Reid, C, and J. E. Marr. English Pleisto-
cene plants. 801.

Reid, ]•:. M. English Pliocene plants. 802.—
Preglacial flora, England. 1251. — Seeds
in Pliocene floras. 1252.

Reimer, F. C. (Lewis, C. I., F. C. Reimer,
and C. G. Brown) 124,289.

Reinking, O. A. Plant diseases in southern
China. 1283.

Rendle, A. B. (Fawcett, W., and Rendle)
395.

Renner, O. Rev. of Ernst, A. *1112— Men-
delian splitting and chemical equilib-
rium. *1745. — Reply to Lehman. *1746.

Rettger, L. F. (Cheplin, H., and L. F. Rett-
ger) 873.

Reuss. Breeding pine trees. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1607.

Rhodes, L. B. Oil of cockle-bur. *1302.

Richardson, C. W. Genetics of Fragaria.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1608.

Richet, C. (Cardot, H., and Richet) 1067.

Richey,H.W. Rev. of Wiggans, C. C. *1113.

Rick, J. Brazilian agarics, monographic
contribution. 204.

Rickett, H. W. Development of Sphaero-
carpos Donnellii. 1210.

Riddelsdell, H. J. Notes from Gloucester-
shire, England. 1524.

Riddle, L. W. W. G. Farlow, biographical.
956. — Observations on the genus Acro-
spermum. 1222.

Rideal, E. K. Catalysis. (Anon, rev.)
1333.

Ridley, H. N. Fern-allies and Characeae of
Malay Peninsula. 332.

Ridsdale, P. S. Memorial trees, U. S. A.
*605, 1870.— State forests in Massachu-
setts. *606.

Riedel, F. Carbon-dioxide from blast fur-
naces. (Anon, rev.) 1315.

Riemenschneider. Prussian Forest Service.
607.

Rietz, see Du Rietz.

Rigg, G. B., and T. G. Thompson. Col-
loidal properties of bog water. 2016.

Riley, Dolores. California's tree islands.
*71.

Rindl, M. Vegetable fats and oils. III.

Drying oils (continued). 1430.
Ritzema Bos, J. Twenty-sixth year of Tijd-
schrift. 1467. — Rev. of Oudeman's Enu-
merate systematica fungorum. 1921.
—Rev. of J. Kok. 1958.
Rivers, T. M. Influenza bacillus. 181.

Riviere, C. The experimental garden of

Algiers. 957.
Roark, G. W., Jr. (Dox, A. W., and Roark)

1318.
Roberts, H. F. Yellow-berry in hard winter
wheat. 32, *252. — Protein content in
American wheal varieties. 1747. — A col-
orimeter for color inheritance study.
2018. — Yellow berry in wheat. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1609.
Robertson, W. R. B. Longitudinal split in

chromosomes. 1748.
Robinson, G. H. (Meader, P. D., and Robin-
son) 858.
Robinson, R. L. Forest policy. 608.
Robson, W. Bay trees (Pimenta acris) *104.
Rock, J. F. One government forest. *1560.
— The poisonous plants of Hawaii. 1987,
1988.
Rodway, L. Fungus flora of Tasmania. 205.
Roe, Glenwood C. (Marsh, C. D., and Roe)
1984.

Roemer, Th. Lupine breeding. 1114.

(Fruwirth, C, and others) 726— (Fru-
wirth, C, Th. Roemer, and E. von
Tschermak) 1081.
Roepke, W. Selection of perennials in the

Dutch tropics. 1115.
Roffo, A. Racial factor in transmission of
cancer. *1116. — Transmission of cancer
in the rat. 1749.
Rogers, Julia E. Sierra Club at Palm

Springs, California. 72.
Rogers, L. A. Drying bacterial cultures by

freezing method. *878.
Rogers, L. A. (Winslow, C.-E. A., Jean
Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, Chas.
Krumwiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G.H.
Smith) 184.
Rogers, L. A., and C. L. McArthur. Colon-
bacteria count in Potomac river water.
*877.
Rose, R. C. After-ripening and germination
of seeds of Tilia, Sambucus, and Rubus.
*105.
Rosendahl, H. V. Three new Aspleniums.

717.
Ross, C. R. Forest report, South Africa,

1919. 1042.
Ross, W. H. (Pope, W. B., and Ross) 2027.
Ross, W. H., and R. B. Deemer. Borax in

fertilizers. 2028.
Roth, Filibert. B. E. Fernow, apprec'ation.
*609, 958.

322

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Rothberg, Wm. (Winslow, C.-E. A., Wm.
Rothberg. and E. I. Parsons) 790.

Roxas, M. L. Philippine sugar-cane investi-
gations. 488.

Rubner. Rev. of Grebe, C. 610.

Ruffer, Sir Arnold. Food in Egypt. *489,
*1830.

Rumbold, Caroline. Injection of chemicals
into chestnut trees. *106, 1284.

Riimker, see Von Riimker.

Rusby, H. H. Botanical codes in the U. S.
P. 1303.

Russell, E. J. Work at Cornell Experiment
Station. 895.— Dr. Cyril G. Hopkins
(biographical). 1468, *1831.

Russell, G. A. Camphor-tree trimmer. 1989.

Russell, S. F. Inheritance in sheep. 718.

Ryan, P. Flax cultivation in Australia.
1432.

Rydberg, P. A. Rosales of the North Ameri-
can flora. 443. — North American flora.
(Rev. by Coulter) 379.

Ryx, see Von Ryx.

Sabnis, T. A. Anatomy of Indian desert

plants. 771.
Sabroe, A. S. Japanese forest-trees for Den-
mark. 107.
Saccardo, P. A. Fungi of Dakota and Utah

collected by J. F. Brenckle. 1223.
Saint-Hilaire, H. G. Breeding industry in

North Africa. *1117.
Salter, R. M., and T. C. Mcllvaine. Effect

of reaction of solution on germination of

seeds and on growth of seedlings. 1348.
Sampson, A. W. Rev. of A. S. Hitchcock.

•611.
Sanders, J. G., and Delong, D. M. Dust

versus spray for cherries, Pennsylvania.

253.
Sanderson, T. Bread value of wheat, North

Dakota. 473.
Sani, Giovanni. Calcium nitrate reduction

by Graminaceae. 848, 849.
Sargent, C. S. Notes on North American

trees. V. 108.
Sartory, A. A new Aspergillus. *1224.
Sasscer, E. R. Foreign pests on imported

nursery stock, 1919, U. S. A. 134.
Saunders, C. F. Useful wild plants, U. S. A.

and Canada. *2032.
Saunders, J. T. Photosynthesis and hydro-
gen-ion concentration. 2000.
Sawhney, Kali Das. Tendril anatomy of

Cucurbitaceae. 772.

Schade, H. J. M. Experimental mutations
in bacteria. 1118.

Schaffner, J. H. Additions to catalog of
Ohio vascular plants. 317. — Sexual di-
morphism in heterosporous sporophytes.
*1494.

Schaffnit, G. Bean anthracnose investiga-
tions at Bonn-Poppelsdorf Exp. Sta.,
Germany. 1285.

Schaxel, Julius. General biology. (Rev. by
Sirks) 728. — Theory formation in biol-
ogy. (Rev. by Sirks) 727.

Schellenberg, G. Species of Rourea. *1904.

Schellenberg, H. Striped flowers and fruits.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1610.

Schermers, D. Heredity and race improve-
ment. 1119.

Schiemann, E. Rev. of White, O. E. *1750.

Schimpff, W. E. Cranberry industry in Ore-
gon. 1161.

Schlaffner, H. Moss formation in Germany.
*1253.

Schleh. Influence of potato storage on yield,
Germany. 33.

Schleip. Rev. of Herbst, K. *1751.

Schlesinger, M. J. (Bronfenbrenner, I., M. J.
Schlesinger, and D. Soletsky) 166. —
(Bronfenbrenner, J., and Schlesinger)
835.

Schlich, Sir William. Forestry in New
Zealand. *612. — Bagley Wood sample
plots, England. 1043.

Schmidt, J. Investigations of hops, VI.
(Rev. by Ellinger) 1664.

Schodde, D. E. Polemoniaceae of Ohio. 444.

Schoolbred, W. A. Flora of Chepstow. 318.

Schoevers, T. A. C. Diseases of potato
tubers. 1959.

Schreiner, O., B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner,
and M. Shapovalov. Crop injury by
borax in fertilizers. 1431, *1960, *2017.

Schubart, P. Freshening the blood in
sugar-beet breeding. *1752.

Schultz, E. S., and D. Folsom. Transmis-
sion of the mosaic disease of Irish pota-
toes. 1285.

Schultz, Walter. Work of Knud Sand on
experimental hybridism. *1753.

Schwantes, G. Mesembrianthemum Marga-
retae. 445. — Mesembrianthemum pris-
maticum. 446.

Schwappach, A. Prussian societies for for-
est culture. 613.

Schweinfurth, G. Plant pictures in Karnak
temple. 61.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

323

Scott, D. II. Relation of seed plants to

higher cryptogams. *1929.
Scott, Will. Sex intergrade in pig. 1754.
Scott, W. R. M., and E. J. Petry. Resin

content of Popophyllum and habitat.

*1990.
Scurti, F., and C. E. Zay. Furol, for acetyl-

cellulose solvent, from rice chaff. 274.
Sedgwick, L. J. The term "variety." 319.

— On Trichodesma. 447. — New Indian

Impatiens. 448. — New Indian Habenaria.

449. — On Alysicarpus rugosus. 450.
Semon, Richard. Catch word "Lamarck-
ism." (Rev. by Lotsy) 705.
Seybold, Karl. Forestry based on nature.

614.
Shamel, A. D. Grape-fruit with pink fruits.

*719. — Investigation of citrus fruits.

1162.
Shapovalov, M. (Schreiner, 0., B. E. Brown,

J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov) 2017,

1431.
Shepard, E. C. Forestry program, U. S. A.

615.
Shull, C. A. Variation in Abutilon. 720.—

Rev. of Williams, Maud. *1995.
Shull, J. M. Coloration in Iris flowers. 721.
Siegel, W. Right of the vegetable breeder.

1120.
Siegler, E. H. (Quaintance, A. L., and Sieg-

ler) 1282.
Siemens. Rev. of Gassul, R. *1756. — Rev.

of Zweig, L. *1757.
Siemens, H. W\ On recurring misunder-
standings in embryology. *1755.
Sifton, H. B. Longevity of the seeds of

cereals, clovers, and timothy. 896, *1352.
Silcox, F. A. Forestry and labor, U. S. A.

616.
Sim, T. R. Soil erosion and conservation.

*109
Simon. Forest revenues, Germany. 617.
Simon, Rene. Digestion of plant tissues.

856.
Simpson, S. Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric,

Uganda Protectorate, 1918. *34.
Sirks, M. J. Hilum color of Vicia faba. *722.

—Rev. of Castle, W. E. *723.— Rev. of

Dahlgren, K. V. O. *724— Rev. of Fru-

wirth, C. *725, *726.— Rev. of Schaxel,

J. *727, *728.— Rev. of G. Tischler. *729.

—Rev. of (1) Tower, W. L.; (2) Breiten-

becker, J. K. *730. — Rev. of van Wissel-

lingh, C. *731.— Rev. of Ziegler, H. E.

*732. — Seed-coat colors in beans. 1121.—

Methodism of genetics. 1122.— Inheritance
of naval color in beans. 1123. — Critical
points of evolution hypothesis. 1125. —
Racial purity and pure breeding. 1126. —
Relationship as a biological problem.
1127. — Comparative tests of new and
older wheat and barley varieties. 1128. —
Hereditas, genetic archive published by
the Mendelian Society of Lund. 1758. —
Pre-Mendelian theories of heredity.
*1759— Rev. of Akerman, A. *1760 —
Rev. of East, E. M., and D. F. Jones.
*1761.— Rev. of Heribert-Nilsson, N.
*1762— Rev. of Rasmuson. *1763— Rev.
of Tedin, H. H764.

Sirks, M. J., and J. Bijhouwer. Homoge-
neity of Chrysanthemum leucanthemum.
1124.

S(kan), S(idney) A(lfred). Sir William Mac-
Gregor (biographical). *1469.

Skinner, J. J. (Schreiner, O., B. E. Brown,
J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov) 1431,
2017.

Sklawunos, C. G. Forestry in modern
Greece. 618.

Skottsberg, C. V. Vegetation of Andes
south of 41 °S. Lat. Swedish Exped. of
1907-1909. (Rev. by Whitford) 636.

Slate, W. L. (Jenkins, E. H., W. L. Slate, D.
F. Jones, and B. A. Brown) 1420.

Slatter, C. F. (Youngken, H. W., and Slatter)
1993.

Small, James. Origin of Compositae. *451,
452. — Medicinal plants and botany. 959.

Smith, A. L. Worthington G. Smith as my-
cologist. 62.

Smith, A. M. Lura L. Perrine, obituary.
960. — Temperature coefficient of photo-
synthesis. 2001.

Smith, A. M. (McCall, A. G., and Smith)
1377.

Smith, B. G. Germ-nuclei, Cryptobranchus
egg. *1004. 1765.

Smith, C. P. Studies in Lupinus. 453.

Smith, E. A. (Guyer, M. F., and Smith) 1679.

Smith, E. P. Plant dermatitis.— I. 824.

Smith, F., and C. T. White. Cyanophoric
plants of Queensland. 275.

Smith, G. H. (Winslow, C.-E. A., Jean Broad-
hurst, R. E. Buchanan, Charles Krum-
weide, Jr., L. A. Rogers and G. H. Smith)
184.

Smith, II. Vegetation of Swedish high-
mountain region. 733.

324

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Smith, J. J. Orchids in the Buitenzorg.
*454.

Smith, J. W. Snow and winter wheat in
Ohio. S97.

Smith, W. G. Selection in medicinal plants.
825.

Smyth, E. G. Cotton insects in Porto Rico.
1395.

Smythies, E. A. Forest types and geologic
formations, British India. 110. — Geology
and forest distribution. 619.

Snell, K. Flower color in potatoes and rec-
ognition of varieties. 1129.

So, Masao, and Y. Imai. Spotting in mice.
734.

Soletsky, D. (Bronfenbrenner, J., M. J.
Schlesinger, and D. Soletsky) 166.

Sommer, K. Potato breeding on the Ellis-
chau estate. 1130.

Soueges, R. Embryogeny of Chenopo-
diaceae. 1185.

Speakman, H. B. Bacterial fermentation of
starch. 1340.

Speight, R. Borers in New Zealand timbers.
620.

Spoehr, H. A. Conceptions of photosynthe-
sis since Ingen-Houss. *63. — Photosyn-
thesis. 1316.

Spragg, F. A. The coefficient of yield. 35.

Spragg, F. A., and E. E. Down. Rust-re-
sisting sunflowers. 254.

Spring, F. G., and J. N. Milsum. Ragi
(Eleusine) in Malaya. 36. — Good pro-
duction, Malaya. 135.

Spurway, C. H. Effect of fertilizer treat-
ment on composition of soil extract.
*297.

Stager, R. Dissemination of Claviceps
sclerotia. 1961.

Stahel, G. Selection in coffee and cocoa.
1131.

Standley, P. C. New species from Cuba.
455.— Rusts from Montana. 783.— Flora
of District of Columbia. (Rev. by Brit-
ton) 304.

Stark, Major L. C. French orchards and
nurseries atfer the war. 136.

Stead, Arthur. Soils of Cape Province.
*2023.

Steele, R. L., and A. C. McCarty. Catalase
and animal oxidation. 1341.

Stenlik, W. Breeding of sugar beets resist-
ant to root-rot. *1766, *1962

Steinach, E. Revitalization of senile sex
glands. *1769.

Steinach, E., and P. Kammerer. Climate
and sexual maturity. *1767, *1768.

Steinberg, R. A. Zinc and growth of Asper-
gillus niger. (Rev. by Crocker) 2015.

Steiner, J. Transcaucasian lichens, a list
with new species. 186.

Stevens, C. M. Forest industries and income
tax, U. S A. 622.

Stevens, H. E. Potato-wart disease, Florida.
*255.

Steven, H. M. Conifers in British forestry.
621.

Stevens, N. E. Endosperm in Vaccinium.
*1005.

Stirling, Frank. Citrus-canker eradication,
Florida. 256. (Newell, W., and Stir-
ling) 132.

St. John, Harold. Color forms of Lobelia
cardinalis. 456.

Stoate, P. N. Eucalypts and soil fertility,
Australia. 1044. *1371.

Stocking, R. J. Variation in Paramoecium.
(Rev. by van Herwerden) 744.

Stomps, T. J. Gigas mutation. *1006.

Stone, R. E. Meeting of Canadian Branch
of Amer. Phytopathol. Soc. *961.

Stork, H. E. Taraxacum. *1007, 1770.

Strampelli, N. Stinking smut and wheat.
257.

Strasser, Hans. Inheritance of acquired
characters. *1771.

Stuart, C. P. Cohen. Breeding of the tea
plant. *1772.

Study, E. Lamarckistic critique of Dar-
winism. *1773.

Stutzer, O. Methods of microscopic coal in-
vestigation. *1254.

Subramian, L. S. Pythium disease of ginger,
tobacco, papaya. 784.

Subramaniam, L. S. Pythium disease of
ginger tobacco, papaya. *1287.

Suematsu, N. Culture of Helmithosporium
oryzae. 785, *1288.

Sundquist, T. Tilling orchards in irrigated
sections. 1832.

Surface, F. M. Cross of naked and hulled
oats. (Anon, rev.) 1626.

Surface, H. E. Tasmanian timbers not suit-
able for paper. (Rev. by T., E.) 623.

Svertka, V. A rare form of human hair.
1774.

Swingle, W. T. More about Loureiro. 962.

Sydow, H., and P. Sydow. Mycological an-
nouncements. 206.

Sylven, Nils. Oil plants, Sweden. 37.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

325

Syme, J. E. Pasture experiments in Aus-
tralia. 80S.

T., E. P. Rev. of Surface, II. E. 623.

T., J. A. Rev. of Hut chins, D. E. Waipona

Kauri forest, New Zealand. 624.
Tadulingham, C. (Rangcharier, K., and

Tadulingham) 442.
Takamine, J., Jr., and K. Oshima. Poly-

zime. 1342.
Tammes, T. Theory of hereditary factors,

and its application to man. 1132.
Taubenhaus, J. J. Diseases of greenhouse

crops. *1963.
Tayler, Noel. Hermaphroditism in Lacerta.

1775.
Taylor, A. Mosses forming tufa and floating

islands. *159.
Taylor, E. B. New genera of Diatoms. 1202.
Taylor, H. S. Catalysis. (Anon, rev.)

' 1333.
Taylor, R. H. Culture of almonds, Califor-
nia. 1833.
Taylor, T. C, and J. M. Nelson. Fat asso-
ciated with starch. 1326.
Tedin, Hans. Oat variety tests, Sweden.
*38.— Inheritance of flower-color in Pi-
sum. *735, 1776.— Flower color in Pisum.
(Rev. by Sirks) 1764.
Temple, A. J. Canadian beans in Victoria.

490.
Teodoresco, Em. C. A phycoerythrin in

Nostoc. 844, *1203.
Terasvirori, K. Number of ovules per pod

in peas. (Anon, ref.) 1056.
Terry, E. I. Public control of forests, U. S.

A. 625. (Fisher, R. F., and E. T.

Terry) 551.
Tesnier, F. Loganberries. Rev. of Darrow,

G. M. *1163.
Thaxter, R. (Blakeslee, A. F., R. Thaxter,

and Wm. Trelease) 916.
Theriot, I. Moss notes, Syrrhopodon. 160.

— Moss notes, Fabronia. 161.
Thorn, C, and M. B. Church. Identity of

Aspergillus oryzae. 207.
Thompson, B. E. (Bessey, E., and Thomp-
son) 1912.
Thompson, F. G. (Rigg, G. B., and Thomp-
son) 2016.
Thompson, H. S. Carex montana. 457.—

Euphrasia. 458, 1525.
Thomson, A. Maturation of the human
ovum. 1777.

Thomson, J. A. Scheme for New Zealand
science libraries. *506.— Rev. of Flem-
ing, A. I'. M. *507.— Rev. of Hogben,
C.., and J. A. Thomson. *508— Rev. of
Dendy, A. •736.— -Rev. of Hensen, V.
*737._Rev. of Larger, R. *1133— Rev.
of Hegner, It. W. *1134.

Thorburn, A. A naturalist sketch book.
(Rev. by Anon.) 968.

Thornber, J. J. Arizona plant-disease notes.

1964.

Thornber, W. S. Commercial fertilizers for

orchard and garden. 1S:W.
Tierney, D. P. Cut-over lands, U. S. A.

626.
Tischler, G. Hereditary substances and
their localization in plants. *738.— Rev.
of de Tries, Eva. Fruit and seed forma-
tion in Primula. *739.— Anatomy of
stamens and carpels of Lythrum. *1008.
— Hereditary substances and their locali-
zation in plants. (Rev. by Sirks) 729.
Tjebbes. Rev. of von Hofsten, N. *740.—

Rev. of Winge. *741.
Tjebbes, K, and Kooiman, H. N. Albinism

in beans. (1135.
Tommasi, G. Constitution of Lawsone.

1991.
Torman. Variability in a constant wheat

strain. (Rev. by Anon.) 1611.
Torrend, C. Polyporaceae of Brazil. 208.
Torsell, R. Resistance of wheat to Cicadula

in Sweden, 1918. 742.
Tourney, J. W. Rev. of Ise, J. 627— Rev.

of Pulling. *628.
Tower, W. L. Evolution in Leptinotarsa.

*1009.. (Rev. by Sirks) 730.
Transeau, E. N. Science of plant life.

(Rev. by Whitney) 975.
Traverso, G. B. Late frosts and olive scab,

Italy. 258.
Treece, E. L. Substitute for adonite in de-
termination of colon-aerogenes. 182.
Trelease, Wm. (Blakeslee, A. F., R. Thaxter,

and Wm. Trelease) 916.
Troup, R. S. Pollarding Butea frondosa for

lac, British India. 111.
Truax, H. E. United States grades for po-
tatoes. *1433— United States grades for
sweet potatoes. *1434— United States
grades for northern-grown onions. *1887.
—United States grades for onions. *1888.
True, R. H. Rev. of Hedrick, U. P. *1S35.
Tsakalotos, A. E. Belladonna root alka-
loids. 1304.

326

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Tschermak, see Von Tschermak.

Tubeuf, see Von Tubeuf.

Turbat, E. Good roses, new or recent. 1871.

— Good hybrid-tea roses since 1910.

1872, 1873, 1874.
Turner, J. E. C. Lopping of oaks, India.

629.
Twiss, W. C. Plastids and mitochondria in

Preissia and maize. *162.

Ubisch, see Von Ubisch.

Ulehla, V. Studien zur Losung des Windes-
problems. *1186.

Urbain, A. Reserve materials and embryo
development. 866.

Urban, J. High-polarizing beets and their
progeny. 1136.— Foliage in early and
late-ripening beets. *1137. — Size of
sugar-beet cuttings. *1778. — Color of
early and late beets. (Anon, rev.) 1057.
— Size of beet cuttings. (Anon, rev.)
1612.

Valeton, Th. Notes on Zingeberaceae of
Java and Malaya. (Rev. by Coulter)
381.

Valleau, W. D. Root and stalk rot of corn
caused by Fusarium moniliforme. 1965.

Van den Heede, A. Salpiglossis sp. :459. —
Gentians — perennial, hardy plants. 1875.

Van der Bijl, P. A. Systematic position of
sugar-cane-root-disease fungus, South
Africa. 209. — Sugar deterioration by
fungi and bacteria, South Africa. 259. —
Hosts of Loranthaceae in South Africa.
1966.

Van der Plank, G. M. Cross of Jersey with

black-spotted cattle. *1779. (Kroon,

H. M., and Van der Plank) 1711.

Van der Wolk, P. Coconut palms. *1780 —
(Rev. by Anon.) 1613.

Van der Wolk, P. C. New phase of experi-
mental evolution. *743.

Van Herwerden, M. A. Composite review of
(1) Calkins and Gregory, (2) Stocking,
(3) Middleton, (4) Hegner, (5) Ackert,
(6) Jennings, (7) Erdmann, — all on vari-
ation and selection in Protozoa. *744. —
Rev. of R. Goldschmidt. *745.— New dis-
coveries in cytology. 1138.

Vankatraman, T. S. Packing sugar cane.

*1435.
Van Overeem, C. Helotiaceae. 1225. — Para-
sites of Discomycetes. 1290, 1226.

Van Wisselingh, C. Variation and heredity.
*1495. (Rev. by Sirks) 731. (Rev. by
von Wettstein) 1785.

Vaupel. F. Echinocactus Mihanovichii.
*460.

Veitch, F. P. Lime requirement of soils. 281.

Vendrell, E. Green manures in Cuba, III.
899.

Ventre, Jules. Utilization of grape pomace.
1179.

Verhoever, W. B. L. Seed-grain disinfection,
Holland. 1967.

Vermorel and Dantony. Bordeaux mixture
with casein for grapes. 1968.

Vestby, P. Sketches from Chilian forests.
*630.

Vestergaard, N. Noble fir, Denmark. 1045.

Viardin, L. Forestry in Lorraine prior to
1789. *64.

Viehoever, Arno. Popular names of crude
drugs. 1305. — Commercial hydrastis
(goldenseal) 1992.

Viehoever, A., and J. F. Clevenger. Oil and
ash content of sage leaves and stems. 826.

Vincent, C. C. Pollination studies. 1164.

Vines, S. H. W. G. Farlow, biographical.
*963.

Voegtlin, C. (Myers, C. N., and Voegtlin)
1322.

Voelcker, J. A. Report of field work, Wo-
burn Exp. Sta., England. 1382. — Report
pot work, Woburn Exp. Sta., England.
1383.

Vogg, L. Experimental study in plant biol-
ogy. 1349.

Volkart, A. Report of Seed Control Station,
Oerlikon-Zurich. 1139.

Volkerz, K. Location of bulb-disease inves-
tigations. 1969.

Von Caron-Eldingen. Physiological segre-
gation without Mendelism. 1140.

Von dem Busche. Yew protection, Ger-
many. 631.

Von Hofsten, N. Genetics. (Rev. by
Tjebbes) 740. (Rev. by Heribert-Nils-
son) 1690.

Von Mammen. Forestry and wood industry
in East Prussia. 632.

Von Riimker, K. Variety tests in Ober-
fehlshabers Ost. *1781. — State organiza-
tion testing. *1782. — Breeding oil plants.
— (Anon rev.) 1614. — State organization
of variety testing. (Anon, rev.) 1615. —
Variety culture tests. (Rev. by Anon.)
1616.

INDEX TO AUTHORS' NAMES

327

Von Ryx, G. Beauty of grains in brewing
barley. *1141. — Exact testing of ad-
vancement in sugar-beet breeding. * 1 783 .
Bud mutation in potatoes. (Anon, rev.)
1058.

Von Tschcrmak, E. Vegetative splitting in
bean hybrids. 1142. — Hybridization in
Chevrier beans. (Rev. by Kooiman)
G93. — Vegetatively splitting hybrids.

(Rev. by Lotsy) 706. (Fruwirth, C,

and others) 726.— (Fruwirth, C, Th.
Roemer, and E. von Tschermak) 1081.

Von Tubeuf, C. North American forests,
Arapaho Forest, U. S. A. 633. — Species
of Arcenthobium and witches' brooms.
1289.

Von Ubisch, G. Barley crosses. 1143. — Ap-
plication of genetics to heredity of cul-
tivated plants. *1784. — Primary and sec-
ondary coupling. (Anon, rev.) 1617.

Von Ubisch, G. M. Factorial analysis of
barley. (Rev. by Lehman) 699.

Von Wettstein, F. Variation and heredity.
*1785. — Haplouts and diplouts in the
vegetable kingdom. (Rev. by Lotsy)
1717.

Vornemann, Prof. Dr. Carbon assimilation
of cultivated plants. 900.

Vosburgh, W. C. Specific rotation of fruc-
tose. *1327.

Voss, C. Weed control, Germany. 39.

Vries, see De Vries.

Vuillemin, P. Rev. of mycological litera-
ture. I. 1227. — Review of mycological
literature. II. 1228. — Trichosporium or
Harziella in de Brie cheese. 1229. —
Fungi of the finger nails. 1922.

W., L. J. Rev. of Agric. Research in Aus-
tralia. 509.

Wadsack, A. Oil-producing plants, Ger-
many. 40.

Wagner, M. Hop-breeding. 1786. (Rev. by
Anon.) 1618.

Waguet, P. World's production of fertilizer.
294.

Wahlstedt, I. Resistance of wheat to Cica-
dula in Sweden, 1918. 746.

Wakefield, E. M. Biographical sketch, C. O.
Farquarson. 65. — William Gilson Farlow
(biographical). *1470.

Wakeman, A. J. (Osborne, T. B., and Wake-
man) 1330.

Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley, C. R. Hemen-
way, J. X. S. Williams, G. P. Wilcox,
T. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee. Report on
experimentation, Hawaiian Sugar Plan-
ters' Association. 901, *1291, *1787.

Waldron, L. R. Annual forage crops, North
Dakota. 491.

Walker, Edna R. (Anderson, Emma N., and
Walker) 1189.

Wallis, A., edited by C. E. Salmon. Pem-
brokeshire and Carmarthenshire plants,
Wales. 1526.

Walworth, G. (Newman, L. F., and Wal-
worth) 1509.

Warnstorf, C. Surface lamellae of Poly-
trichum. 1211. — Vegetative reproduction
in Bolivia mosses. 1212.

Washburne, J. N. White pine blister rust
and pinon rust. 1292.

Waterman, H. C. (Johns, C. O., and Water-
man) 1329.

Watkins, J. S. (Lipscomb, G. F., C. F. Inman,
and G. S. Watkins) 2026.

Watson, E. E. Root hairs on Helianthus.
1905.

Watson, W. Lichens of Llanberis. 788. —
Habitats of Hypericum humifusum.
1513.

Watts, A. S. Failure of regeneration in
British oakwoods. 1501.

Weatherby, C. A. Impatiens biflora. 461.- —
Cimicifuga in New England. 1527.

Webber, H. J. Selecting stocks in citrus
propagation. 1144.

Weibull, M. Oil content of rape seed, 1918,
Sweden. 41.

Weingart, W. Cereus Langlassei. 462. —
Cereus ruber. 463. — Cereus Jusbertii.
464.

Weir, J. R., and E. E. Hubert. Rots of
western white pine. *112.

Weir, W. W. Productive soils. *2024.

Weis, Fr. Fertilization of forest soils, Den-
mark. 1046.

Weils, H. B. Thymalus fulgidus. 1396.

Welch, Paul S. Rev. of Patterson, J. T.
*747.

Wells, M. M. Ecology and high-school bi-
ology, U. S. A. *510.

Wells, B. W. Abnormal inflorescence of
Allium. 1187. — Gall development on Cel-
tis. 1188.— Celtis gall caused by Pach-
ypsylla. *1293.

328

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

Wenholz, H. Soil improvement, New South
Wales. 28S. — Utilization of swamp land,
New South Wales. 492.— Brown-millet
seed as stock feed. 902.

Wcrnham, H. F. Rubiaceae of Southern
Cameroons (Bates Collection) (1). 465.
— Rubiaceae of Southern Cameroons
(Bates Collection) (2). 466.

Werner, J. Forestry, west coast of Norway.
1561.

Werth, A. J. Moor and peat species. *1255.

West, F. L., and N. E. Edlefsen. Tempera-
ture injurious to fruit buds. 1836.

Wester, P. J. Culture and uses of coconut.
1970.

Weston, W. H., Jr. Philippine downy mil-
dew of maize. 260, *210.

Westover, H. L. Peruvian alfalfa industry
in United States. *1436.

Wettstein, see Von WTettstein.

Wheldale, M. Chemistry of Mendelian
flower color factors. (Rev. by Anon.)
1619.

Wherry, E. T. Soil reaction for rock ferns.
*280.

White, C. F. (Smith, F., and White) 275.

White, O. W. Ancient history of plants.
*1930. — Endosperm color in maize. (Rev.
by Anon.) 1620. — Breeding castor-beans.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1621. — Height in peas.
(Rev. by Anon.) 1622. — Inheritance
studies in castor beans. (Rev. by Anon.)
1623. — Genetical papers on Pisum.
(Rev. by Schiemann) 1750.

Whitford, H. N. Bev. of W. H. Brown, and
A. F. Fischer. *634, *635.— Rev. of Skotts-
berg, C. V. *636

Whitten, J. C. Transplanting of trees,
shrubs, Missouri. 137.

Whittle, C. A. Fertilizer formulas for
southern crops, U. S. A. 1392.

Whitney, W. Rev. of Transeau, E. N. *975.

Wiancko, A. T., and C. O. Cromer. Soy-
beans in Indiana. 493.

Wiggans, C. C. Fruitfulness in apples.
(Rev. by Richey) 1113.

Wiggans, J. C. Factors affecting fruitful-
ness of apple, Missouri. 138.

Wilcox, G. P. (Waldron, J. W., A. Gartley,
C. R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Williams, G.
P. Wilcox, F. H. Petrie, and H. P. Agee)
901, 1787.

Wild. Good yield from first forest planting,
Germany. 1047.

Wilde, see De Wilde.

Wildeman, see De Wildeman.

Willaman, J. J. Rev. of Dodge, C. W. *2005.

Willcox, Sir William. Perennial irrigation
and flood protection for Nile valley. 903.

Williams, Anna W. (Okey, Ruth, and Wil-
liams) 1324.

Williams, J. N. S. (Waldron, J. W., A.
Gartley, C. R. Hemenway, J. N. S. Wil-
liams, G. P. Wilcox, F. H. Petrie, and
H. P. Agee) 901, 1787.

Williams, Maud. Absorption of gold. (Rev.
by Shull) 1995.

Wilmott, A. J. (Jackson, A. B., and Wilmott)
418.

Wilson, Ellwood. Aircraft in forestry. *637.

Wilson, E. H. Camphor industry in eastern
Asia. 276. — Ligneous vegetation, Liukiu
Islands. *320 — A new hybrid lily. 1145.
— Romance of our trees. *1171, *1048,
*1172, *1173, 1471, 1472, *1473, 1877.—
Cedar of Lebanon. 1876.

Wilson, T. R. C. Kiln airplane ports. (Rev.
by Koehler) 580.

Wimbush, A. Big teak trees, Madras. 638.

Winge, O. Color inheritance in cattle. *748.
— Heredity of hair color in horses. *1788.
— Inheritance of coat color in cattle.
(Rev. by Tjebbes) 741.

Winiwarter, see De Winiwarter.

Winkler, H. Parthenogenesis in plants and
animals, *749

Winslow, C.-E. A. Rev. of Orla-Jensen, S.
183. — Lactic-acid bacteria. *860.

Winslow, C.-E. A., J. Broadhurst, R. E.
Buchanan, C. Krumwiede, Jr., L. A.
Rogers, and G. H. Smith. Final report,
Committee on Classification of Bacterial
Types. 184

Winslow, C.-E. A., and I. S. Falk. Mechan-
ism of disinfection. 261. — Mineral salts
and bacteria. *832.

Winslow, C.-E. A., Wm. Rothberg, and E. I.
Parsons. Classification of Staphylococ-
cus. 790.

Winslow, E. J. Ferns at Willoughby Lake,
Vermont. 1528

Wisselingh, see Van Wisselingh.

Witte, H. Seed-production, Denmark. *42.

Wittmack, L. Vegetable seed culture. 1889.

WTittrock, V. B. Norse names of Stellaria
media. 1397.

Wober, A. Red- leaf burn (Pseudopeziza) of
grape. 262.

INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES

320

Wober, A Control of grape red blight and

downy mildew. 1294. (Kornauth, K.,

and Wober) 243.

Wodsedalck, J. E. Sex cells in cattle. L789.

Wohanks and Co. Beet breeding of Wo-
bankaCo. *1790. (Rev. by Anon.) 1624.

Wolff, M. II. Forest regulation and forest
communities, U. S. A. 639.

Wolff, W. H. Spraying nursery trees, U. S.
A. 139— Effect of leaf blight on cherry
growth. *263.

Wolk, see Van der Wolk.

Wolley-Dod, A. H. British roses. *1878.

Woo, M. L. Chemical constituents of
Amaranthus rctroflexus. 2004.

Woodcock, E. F. Michigan potato diseases
for 1918. 1971

Wood, L. S. Tree-growth increment, Ox-
fordshire, England. 640.

Woodburn, W. L. Embryology of Reboulia.
*1010.

Woodbury, T. D. California forests and for-
estry. *641.

Woodruff, L. L. HookeVMicrographia," 66.

Woodward, R. W. Notes on Philotria. *467.
— Connecticut plants. 1529.

Woolsey, T. S., Jr. Forest-fire protection,
Portugal. 642. — Prevention of forest dev-
astation. *643— Rev. of Goblet d'Al-
viella, Felix. *644.

Wormald, H. Brown rot caused by Monilia
cinerea and the biological forms of M.
cinerea. 1295.

Worth, F. J., and Maung Po Saw. Absorp-
tion of lime, India. 1372.

Wright, I. A. History of cane-sugar industry
in West Indies. 964.

Wyant, R. W. (Cooledge, L. H., and Wyant)
836.

Yabe, II., and Endo, S. Carboniferous cala-

mite from Japan. 1931.
Yampolsky, Cecil. Sex in Mercurialie annua.

750. — Sex intcrgrad;il ion in pli ol R

by Coulter) 1069.
Yasuda, A. A new Peterula. 212.
Yendo, Kichisaburo. New Maine algae of

Japan. 1204.
Yoder, Lester (Dox, Arthur W., and Yoder)

853.
Young, F. D. Prevention of frost damage,

U. S. A. *140.
Young, L. J. Soil requirements of pine and

spruce. 1562.
Youngken, H. W., and C. F. Slotter. Com-
mercial varieties of Nux vomica. 1993.

Zade. Clover and grass-breeding. *1791. —

(Rev. by Anon.) 1625.
Zade, A. (Rev. by Anon.) 1059.
Zakrzecki, H. L. H. Java cinchona bark.

827.
Zanon, V. (Pampanini, R., and Zanon) 315.
Zay, C. E. (Scurti, F., and Zay) 274.
Zeleny, Charles. Germinal changes in the

bar-eyed race of Drosophila during the

course of selection for facet number. 751.

— Analysis of heredity. *1496.
Ziegler, H. E. Selection experiments on rats.

1792. (Rev. by Sirks) 732.
Zimmerman, G. Planting and care of young

prune orchards. 1837.
Zinn, J. Cross of naked and huller oats.

(Anon, rev.) 1626.
Zundel, G. L. Washington Ustilagineae.

1923, *1972.
Zweig, Ludwig. Epidermolysis bullosa he-
reditaria. *1793. (Rev. by Siemens)

*1757.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants,
through' ut the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan-
ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par-
ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all
students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical
exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar-
ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication,
yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than
the United States and Canada. Many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries,
but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it
seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without
reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary
that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest
largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are
available to all.

INFORMATION CONCERNING, BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all
parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibilit}' for securing citations
and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography
Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis
of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain
that all serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators ia
published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable
reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi-
tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited.

Botanical Abstracts is published monthly, two, three, or four volumes being issued
each year at present. Each volume contains about 300 pages. The current (1921) volumes
are VII and VIII. Subscriptions are accepted for Vols. III-VI, inclusive. Volumes I
and II can no longer be furnished by the publishers. The price for two volumes is 86.00,
for the United States and its dependencies, Mexico and Cuba; $6.25, for Canada; $6.50, for
other countries. Prices are net postpaid. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails
unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United
States and Canada) of the date of issue.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co,, 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

The British Empire, except Australia and Canada:. The Cambridge University Press,
C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make
checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London Address.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48, Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bale.

i*ww rurn ouidfHCdi uatofn Liurniy

3 5185 00259 2374

HI)!)! !1!

ww\

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Botanical abstracts"

See other formats